CR Workbook

The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales
Corporate Reporting
Workbook
For exams in 2022
icaew.com
HB2021
These materials are provided by BPP

Corporate Reporting
The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales
ISBN: 978-1-5097-4150-2
Previous ISBN: 978-1-5097-3460-3
e-ISBN: 978-1-5097-4354-4
First edition 2014
Ninth edition 2021
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, graphic, electronic or
mechanical including photocopying, recording, scanning or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher.
The content of this publication is intended to prepare students for the ICAEW
examinations, and should not be used as professional advice.
British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence
v3.0
Originally printed in the United Kingdom on paper obtained from traceable,
sustainable sources.
BPP Learning Media is grateful to the IASB for permission to reproduce extracts
from IFRS® Standards, IAS® Standards, SIC and IFRIC. This publication contains
copyright © material and trademarks of the IFRS Foundation®. All rights reserved.
Used under license from the IFRS Foundation®. Reproduction and use rights are
strictly limited. For more information about the IFRS Foundation and rights to use
its material please visit www.IFRS.org.
Disclaimer: The IASB, the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
Foundation, the authors and the publishers do not accept responsibility for any
loss caused by acting or refraining from acting in reliance on the material in this
publication, whether such loss is caused by negligence or otherwise to the
maximum extent permitted by law.
Copyright © IFRS Foundation
All rights reserved. Reproduction and use rights are strictly limited. No part of this
publication may be translated, reprinted or reproduced or utilised in any form
either in whole or in part or by any electronic, mechanical or other means, now
known or hereafter invented, including photocopying and recording, or in any
information storage and retrieval system, without prior permission in writing from
the IFRS Foundation. Contact the IFRS Foundation for further details.
The Foundation has trade marks registered around the world (Trade Marks)
including ‘IAS®’, ‘IASB®’, ‘IFRIC®’, ‘IFRS®’, the IFRS® logo, ‘IFRS for SMEs®’, IFRS for
SMEs® logo, the ‘Hexagon Device’, ‘International Financial Reporting Standards®’,
NIIF® and ‘SIC®’.
Further details of the Foundation’s Trade Marks are available from the Licensor on
request.
© ICAEW 2021
HB2021

Contents
Welcome to ICAEW iv
Corporate Reporting v
Permitted texts vii
Key resources viii
Skills within the ACA x
Data Analytics Software used in Corporate Reporting xiii
1 Introduction 1
2 Principles of corporate reporting 57
3 Ethics 113
4 Corporate governance 165
5 The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 215
6 The statutory audit: audit evidence 285
7 The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 369
8 The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 407
9 Reporting financial performance 471
10 Reporting revenue 535
11 Earnings per share 581
12 Reporting of assets 625
13 Reporting of non-financial liabilities 685
14 Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 713
15 Financial instruments: presentation and disclosure 773
16 Financial instruments: recognition and measurement 801
17 Financial instruments: hedge accounting 871
18 Employee benefits 943
19 Share-based payment 997
20 Groups: types of investment and business combination 1063
21 Foreign currency translation and hyperinflation 1191
22 Income taxes 1259
23 Financial statement analysis 1 1329
24 Financial statement analysis 2 1399
25 Assurance and related services 1475
26 Environmental and social considerations 1531
27 Internal auditing 1569
Glossary of terms 1597

Index 1615
Questions within the Workbook should be treated as preparation questions, providing you with a
firm foundation before you attempt the exam-standard questions. The exam-standard questions are
found in the Question Bank. This is not applicable to the Advanced Level Supplements and Case
Study. Case Study learning materials contain case studies from previous examinations.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 Contents iii

Welcome to ICAEW
I’d like to personally welcome you to ICAEW.
As we begin the global recovery from COVID-19, the role of the accountancy profession has never
been more important.
As an ICAEW Chartered Accountant, you will make decisions that will define the future of global
business in a fast-changing and volatile world.
By choosing our world-leading chartered accountancy qualification, the ACA, you will acquire
exceptional knowledge and skills – with technology, sustainability and ethics at the heart of your
learning. A focus on capabilities such as judgement and scepticism will enable you to make the right
decisions in diverse and often complex environments.
You will be equipped to flourish and to lead in areas that are transforming the business landscape.
This includes embracing technological change and harnessing digital disruption, to help our
profession deliver greater value. It also includes putting climate change and sustainability at the heart
of business strategy. We will equip you to be adaptable and agile in your work and all within a set of
values fundamental to trust and transparency, which will set you apart from others.
Joining over 187,800 ICAEW Chartered Accountants and students worldwide, you are now part of a
global community. This unique network of talented and diverse professionals work in the public
interest to build economies that are sustainable, accountable and fair.
You are also joining a community of 1.8m chartered accountants and students as part of Chartered
Accountants Worldwide – a family of leading institutes, of which we are a founder member.
ICAEW will support you through your studies and throughout your career: this is the start of a lifetime
relationship, and we will be with you every step of the way to ensure you are ready to face the
challenges of the global economy. Visit the Key resources section to review the resources available as
you study.
With our training, guidance and support, you will join our members in realising your career
ambitions, developing world-leading insights and maintaining a competitive edge.
We will enable a world of sustainable economies, together.
I wish you the best of luck with your studies.
Michael Izza
Chief Executive
ICAEW
HB2021
iv Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

Corporate Reporting
If you are studying this exam as part of the ACA qualification go to icaew.com/examresources or if
you are studying the ICAEW CFAB qualification go to icaew.com/cfabstudents.
Module aim
To enable students to apply technical knowledge, analytical techniques and professional skills to
resolve compliance and business issues that arise in the context of the preparation and evaluation of
corporate reports and from providing audit services.
Students will be required to use technical knowledge and professional judgement to identify, explain
and evaluate alternatives and to determine the appropriate solutions to compliance issues, giving
due consideration to the needs of clients and other stakeholders. The commercial context and
impact of recommendations and ethical issues will also need to be considered in making such
judgements.
On completion of this module, students will be able to:
• formulate, implement and evaluate corporate reporting policies for single entities and groups of
varying sizes and in a variety of industries. They will be able to discern and formulate the
appropriate financial reporting treatment for complex transactions and complex scenarios.
Students will be able to evaluate and apply technical knowledge from individual accounting
standards and apply professional skills to integrate knowledge where several accounting
standards are simultaneously applicable and interact.
• analyse, interpret, evaluate and compare financial statements of entities both over time and
across a range of industries.
• explain the processes involved in planning an audit, evaluate internal controls, appraise risk
including analysing quantitative and qualitative data, gather evidence including using data
analytics to draw conclusions in accordance with the terms of the engagement. In addition, they
will be able to perform a range of assurance engagements and related tasks.
• evaluate corporate reporting policies, estimates and disclosures in a scenario in order to be able
to assess whether they are in compliance with accounting standards and are appropriate in the
context of audit objectives.
• identify and explain ethical issues. Where ethical dilemmas arise, students will be able to
recommend and justify and determine appropriate actions and ethical safeguards to mitigate
threats.
Method of assessment
The Corporate Reporting exam is 3.5 hours long. Each exam will contain questions requiring
integration of knowledge and skills, including ethics. The exam will consist of three questions. Ethical
issues and problems could appear in any of the three questions.
One question will require students to use data analytics software to assist in preparing the answer,
and for that question Advance Information will be released before the Corporate Reporting exam.
The Advance Information will comprise two parts:
• a dataset of 11 months’ financial data for the company that students will see in the exam; and
• a document with background information and the scenario.
The exam will be open book. Students will be able to access their personal ICAEW Bookshelf, and
any ICAEW digital learning materials held there, during the exam. Students will also be permitted to
take any written or printed material into the exam, subject to practical space restrictions. To see the
recommended text(s) for this exam go to icaew.com/permittedtexts.
You will find more information on the data analytics software within the section of this introduction
that relates to key resources.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 Introduction v

Specification grid
This grid shows the relative weightings of subjects within this module and should guide the relative
study time spent on each. Over time the marks available in the assessment will be within the ranges
of weightings below, but some variations may occur in individual examinations to enable suitably
rigorous questions to be set.
Weighting (%)
1 Corporate Reporting – Compliance

55 - 65
2 Corporate Reporting – Financial statement analysis
3 Audit and assurance 30 - 40
4 Ethics 5 - 10
HB2021
vi Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

Permitted texts
At the Professional and Advanced Levels there are specific texts that you are permitted to use during
your exam. All information for these texts is available on icaew.com/permittedtexts.
Professional Level exams Permitted text
Audit and Assurance 
Financial Accounting and Reporting 
Tax Compliance 
Business Strategy and Technology 
Financial Management 
Business Planning No restrictions
Advanced Level exams Permitted text
Corporate Reporting No restrictions
Strategic Business Management No restrictions
Case Study No restrictions
The exams which have no restrictions include the following:

• Business Planning: Banking;
• Business Planning: Insurance;
• Business Planning: Taxation;
• Corporate Reporting;
• Strategic Business Management; and
• Case Study.
The Corporate Reporting exam will be open book. Students will be able to access their personal
ICAEW Bookshelf and any ICAEW digital learning materials held there, during the exam. Students
will also be permitted to take any written or printed material into the exam, subject to practical space
restrictions. To see the recommended text(s) for this exam, go to icaew.com/permittedtexts.
This information, as well as what to expect and what is and is not permitted in each exam is available
in the Instructions to Candidates. You will be sent the instructions with your exam admission details.
They can also be viewed on our website at icaew.com/exams.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 Introduction vii

Key resources
Whether you’re studying the ACA qualification with an employer, at university, independently, or as
part of an apprenticeship, we provide a wide range of resources and services to help you in your
studies.
Take a look at the online exam resources available to you on icaew.com/examresources and discover
more resources and services at icaew.com/studentbenefits.
Syllabus, skills development and technical knowledge grids

The syllabus presents the learning outcomes for each exam and should be read in conjunction with
the relevant technical knowledge grids and, where applicable, the skills development grids.
Exam support
A variety of exam resources and support have been developed on each exam to help you on your
journey to exam success. This includes exam guidance, sample exams, hints and tips from examiners
and tutors, on-demand webinars and articles.
Tuition
The ICAEW Partner in Learning scheme recognises tuition providers who comply with our core
principles of quality course delivery. If you are not receiving structured tuition and are interested in
doing so, take a look at ICAEW recognised Partner in Learning tuition providers in your area at
icaew.com/dashboard.
Past exams and mark plans

Use past exams to practise answering questions. The mark plans will help you check your answers.
The past exams and mark plans are included in your Question Bank and have been updated to
reflect the 2022 legislation and syllabus.
Errata sheets
These documents will correct any omissions within the learning materials once they have been
published. You should refer to them when studying.
Exam software
It is vital that you are familiar with the exam software before you take your exam. Access a variety of
resources, including the practice software at icaew.com/examsoftware.
Student support team

Our student support team is here to help and advise you, so do not hesitate to get in touch. Email
studentsupport@icaew.com or call +44 (0)1908 248 250. If you are browsing our website, look out
for the live help boxes. You will be able to speak directly to an adviser. Mia, our ChatBot, is also on
hand to answer your queries.
Student Insights
Access our practical and topical student content on our dedicated online student hub, Student
Insights at icaew.com/studentinsights. You’ll find interviews, guides and features giving you fresh
insights, innovative ideas and an inside look at the lives and careers of our ICAEW students and
members. No matter what stage you’re at in your journey with us, you’ll find content to suit you.
Student societies
Student societies are networks of student groups located in the UK and internationally. They are run
by a committee of ACA students who volunteer to provide local events, support, and networking
opportunities for you whilst you train. They are a fantastic opportunity for you to connect with fellow
students, develop your skills and make a difference through volunteering on the committee.
HB2021
viii Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

CABA
It can be tough juggling your studies with work, planning for the future and finding time to unwind.
CABA are an independent charity that supports the well-being of the chartered accountant
community. So, if you need support at home or at work, CABA is there for you. They provide
information, advice and lifelong support to ACA students across the world face-to-face, over the
phone and online. All their services are completely free and strictly confidential. Find out more at
caba.org.uk.
ICAEW Business and Finance Professional (BFP)

ICAEW Business and Finance Professional (BFP) is an internationally recognised designation and
professional status. It demonstrates your business knowledge, your commitment to professionalism
and that you meet the standards of a membership organisation. Once you have completed the
ICAEW CFAB qualification or the ACA Certificate Level, you are eligible to apply towards gaining BFP
status. Start your application at icaew.com/becomeabfp.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 Introduction ix

Skills within the ACA
Professional skills are essential to accountancy and your development of them is embedded
throughout the ACA qualification.
The level of competency required in each of the professional skills areas to pass each module exam
increases as ACA trainees progress upwards through each Level of the ACA qualification. The skills
progression embedded throughout the ACA qualification ensures ACA trainees develop the
knowledge and professional skills necessary to successfully operate in the modern workplace and
which are expected by today’s forward-thinking employers.
The following professional skills areas are present throughout the ACA qualification.
Skill area Overall objective
Assimilating and using Understand a business or accounting situation, prioritise by

information determining key drivers, issues and requirements and identify any
relevant information.
Structuring problems and Structure information from various sources into suitable formats for
solutions analysis and provide creative and pragmatic solutions in a business
environment.
Applying judgement Apply professional scepticism and critical thinking to identify faults,
gaps, inconsistencies and interactions from a range of relevant
information sources and relate issues to a business environment.
Concluding, Apply technical knowledge, skills and experience to support

recommending and reasoning and conclusion and formulate opinions, advice, plans,
communicating solutions, options and reservations based on valid evidence and
communicate clearly in a manner suitable for the recipient.
The following provides further detail on the professional skills that you will develop in this particular
module. To see the full skills development grids, please go to icaew.com/examresources.
Assimilating and using information
Understand the situation and the requirements
• Demonstrate understanding of the business context
• Recognise new and complex ideas within a scenario
• Identify the needs of customers and clients
• Explain different stakeholder perspectives and interests
• Identify risks within a scenario
• Identify elements of uncertainty within a scenario
• Explain ethical issues, including public interest and sustainability issues, within given scenarios
Identify and use relevant information
• Interpret information provided in various formats
• Evaluate the relevance of information provided
• Use multiple information sources
• Filter information provided to identify critical facts
Identify and prioritise key issues and stay on task
• Identify business and financial issues from a scenario
• Prioritise key issues
• Work effectively within time constraints
• Operate to a brief in a given scenario
HB2021
x Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

How skills are assessed: students may be required to:
• have a detailed knowledge and understanding of relevant regulations in financial reporting,
auditing and ethics, which will need to be related to practical business scenarios and applied to
any data provided. The data provided will focus on technical compliance and understanding;
• respond to instructions from a line manager, a client request or from other senior personnel. The
requests may be specific, or they may be more general requiring interpretation and judgement to
be applied by the student;
• evaluate the quality and relevance of information provided in the context of a particular
assignment;
• evaluate inconsistencies in information provided from multiple sources;
• use different sources and types of evidence to confirm, or question, financial statement assertions
applying professional scepticism; and
• evaluate the ethical implications of making information available including confidentiality and
transparency.
Structuring problems and solutions
Structure data
• Structure information from various sources into suitable formats for analysis
• Identify any information gaps
• Frame questions to clarify information
• Use a range of data types and sources to inform analysis and decision making
• Structure and analyse financial and non-financial data to enhance understanding of business
issues and their underlying causes
• Present analysis in accordance with instructions and criteria
Develop solutions
• Identify and apply relevant technical knowledge and skills to analyse a specific problem
• Use structured information to identify evidence-based solutions
• Identify creative and pragmatic solutions in a business environment
• Identify opportunities to add value
• Identify and anticipate problems that may result from a decision
• Identify a range of possible solutions based on analysis
• Identify ethical dimensions of possible solutions
• Select appropriate courses of action using an ethical framework
• Identify the solution which is the best fit with acceptance criteria and objectives
• Define objectives and acceptance criteria for solutions
• apply technical knowledge, analytical techniques and professional skills to resolve compliance
and business issues that arise in the context of the preparation and evaluation of corporate
reports and from providing audit services;
• structure problems and solutions in scenario based questions which may be presented in the
following forms:
– Mini case – using Data Analytics Software (DAS) in the context of auditing but with significant
corporate reporting emphasis. This may be technical, compliance or interpretive (for example
including analytical procedures)
– Financial statement analysis – including technical aspects of corporate reporting
– Technical question on aspects of audit and corporate reporting (which may include assurance,
internal audit);
• consider ethical problems in reporting, assurance and business scenarios;
• formulate, evaluate and implement accounting and reporting policies;
• measure and recognise assets and obligations on reported financial performance;
• assess the impact and interaction of applicable accounting principles, bases and standards;
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 Introduction xi

• evaluate the impact of remuneration policies on reported performance; and
• evaluate reporting issues in relation to group scenarios and overseas activities.
Applying judgement
Apply professional scepticism and critical thinking
• Recognise bias and varying quality in data and evidence
• Identify assumptions or faults in arguments
• Identify gaps in evidence
• Identify inconsistencies and contradictory information
• Assess interaction of information from different sources
• Exercise ethical judgement
Relate issues to the environment
• Appreciate when more expert help is required
• Identify related issues in scenarios
• Assess different stakeholder perspectives when evaluating options
• Retain an overview of the business issue or scenario
• Appraise corporate responsibility and sustainability issues
• Appraise the effects of alternative future scenarios
• Appraise ethical, public interest and regulatory issues
• use technical knowledge and professional judgement to identify, explain and evaluate
alternatives and to determine the appropriate solutions to compliance issues, giving due
consideration to the needs of clients and other stakeholders. The commercial context and impact
of recommendations and ethical issues will also need to be considered in making such
judgements.
• Demonstrate judgement in the following ways:
– selecting between technical choices;
– filtering data to identify critical elements;
– prioritising information, issues or tasks;
– identifying omissions in the information;
– evaluating inconsistencies in information;
– distinguishing between the various qualities of the data provided;
– evaluating the impact of economic and political factors;
– evaluating the effects of known events;
– evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policy choice and estimation selection;
– evaluating options;
– comparing the effects of a range of estimates, outcomes or financial treatments;
– assessing the materiality of errors;
– exercising ethical judgement;
– identifying key linkages; and
– drawing appropriate conclusions from data provided to satisfy specified objectives and
assessing the materiality of errors and omissions.
Concluding, recommending and communicating
Conclusions
• Apply technical knowledge to support reasoning and conclusions
• Apply professional experience and evidence to support reasoning
• Use valid and different technical skills to formulate opinions, advice, plans, solutions, options and
reservations
HB2021
xii Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

Recommendations
• Present recommendations in accordance with instructions and defined criteria
• Make recommendations in situations where risks and uncertainty exist
• Formulate opinions, advice, recommendations, plans, solutions, options and reservations based
on valid evidence
• Make evidence-based recommendations which can be justified by reference to supporting data
and other information
• Develop recommendations which combine different technical skills in a practical situation
Communication
• Present a basic or routine memorandum or briefing note in writing in a clear and concise style
• Present analysis and recommendations in accordance with instructions
• Communicate clearly to a specialist or non-specialist audience in a manner suitable for the
recipient
• Prepare the advice, report, or notes required in a clear and concise style
• draw conclusions from data, facts, calculations, judgments and own analysis;
• draw conclusions from complex assurance engagements;
• identify weaknesses in financial information systems and their potential consequences;
• distinguish between the qualities of data provided or other evidence generated;
• develop risk management solutions in an audit and corporate reporting environment;
• create report/memorandum in response to a specific technical issue and in accordance with client
requirements;
• draft reasoned, practicable advice that is clear and concise, supported by calculations or analysis
of technical/business issues identified;
• use judgement to select the most appropriate audit procedures in the context of risks identified;
• justify a specific recommended action when a variety of options are available; and
• explain the limitations of their conclusions or recommendations.
To help you develop your ability to demonstrate competency in each professional skills area, each
chapter of this Workbook includes up to four Professional Skills Guidance points.
Each Professional Skills Guidance point focuses on one of the four ACA Professional Skills areas and
explains how to demonstrate a particular aspect of that professional skill relevant to the topic being
studied. You are advised to refer back to the Professional Skills Guidance points while revisiting
specific topics and during question practice.
Data Analytics Software used in Corporate

Reporting
ICAEW Chartered Accountants are increasingly using more advanced approaches to interrogate
client data. Embedding these techniques within our exams ensures that we continue to reflect the
current and future workplace and will also help to develop your judgement, professional scepticism
and critical thinking skills.
The Data Analytics Software in the Corporate Reporting exam will form part of Question 1 only.
Advance Information about a company will be issued four weeks before the exam. On the day of the
exam, you will have access to the data in the Data Analytics Software for the same company, this time
for the full 12 months. There will be no changes to the 11 months’ dataset which you will have
already had an opportunity to examine in the Advance Information.
Typically, there will be a total of 15-20 marks in the Corporate Reporting exam for the direct use of
the Data Analytics Software.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 Introduction xiii

You will need to be familiar with how the software works and its various functions and you are
strongly advised to work through the Data Analytics Software Explanatory Guidance Notes. These
notes can be found by visiting icaew.com/corporatereportingdas.
Also, see Chapter 1, Section 8 for further explanations of using Data Analytics Software in the
Corporate Reporting exam, and a walkthrough of the Advance Information for Elephant Limited.
HB2021
xiv Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Using this Workbook
2 The importance of corporate reporting
3 The role and context of modern auditing
4 Legal responsibilities of directors and auditors
5 International standards on auditing
6 Audit quality control
7 Laws and regulations
8 Data analytics software used in Corporate Reporting
Summary
Further question practice
Technical reference
Self-test questions
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Comment on and critically appraise the nature and validity of financial and non-financial
information included in published financial statements including how these correlate with an
understanding of the entity
• Appraise and explain the role and context of auditing
• Produce appropriate audit documentation
• Explain the nature and purpose of quality assurance (both at the level of the firm and the
individual audit) and assess how it can contribute to risk management
1

Use this schedule and your study timetable to plan the dates on which you will complete your study
of this chapter.
Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive

significance questions
1 Using this Approach While the majority N/A

Workbook The key point to of the marks will
So far you will have take in is that many always be awarded
studied corporate of the financial for demonstrating
reporting and audit reporting chapters your corporate
as separate (single have a separate reporting
silo) subjects. ‘audit focus’ section, knowledge, you will
However, in real life, which deals with the still need to explain
audit and corporate auditing aspects of how the audit is
reporting are the financial conducted if
closely linked. reporting area you required.
Your Corporate have just studied. This gives guidance

Reporting exam is You will need to on how to approach
an integrated exam. access the guidance the integrated
As you learn the materials for the material. This is the
financial reporting data analytics first time you have
topics, you will also software (DAS) in tackled an
learn how to audit advance of the integrated exam.
that particular area. exam. Two out of the three
Stop and think questions in the
Remember that this exam combine
is an integrated audit and financial
subject so you reporting.
should always
consider corporate
reporting and
auditing aspects
together.
2 The importance of Approach This is unlikely to be IQ1: Management

corporate reporting This will be mainly examined in its decisions
There has never revision so only entirety but the A quick, straight
been a better time focus on the areas conceptual forward question to
to focus on the you are unfamiliar framework could get you thinking
bigger picture of with. always be tested. about the
HB2021
2 Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

reporting and this Stop and think interaction of

section reminds you Corporate reporting management
why corporate is not just a more accounting and
reporting matters. advanced form of external reporting.
This section financial reporting. This ties in with the
explains what It is broader, going importance of
corporate reporting beyond the financial reporting when
is and how it differs statements and making decisions.
from financial covering auditors’
reporting and reports and
management environmental
accounting. reports.
3 The role and Approach There may be a N/A

context of modern Check off in your need to explain why
auditing head where you audit is necessary
Clarification of what have met these and how it works in
an audit is and why points before. broad terms so
it is important. make sure you fully
Stop and think understand these
Has anything points.
changed since you
last studied
auditing?
4 Legal Approach Be prepared to N/A

responsibilities of Commit these to apply this
directors and memory. knowledge if you
auditors are required to
Stop and think communicate any
There are some
areas of legislation Can you shortcomings in the
that you just need differentiate auditor’s report.
to know! between the various
responsibilities of
directors and
auditors?
5 International Approach Due to the N/A

standards on Make sure you have significant amount
auditing a good working of change in the
Standards are there knowledge of the profession
to guide the auditor regulations behind (ironically, change is
and ensure best the audit. the only constant)
practice is you could definitely
Stop and think get a question on
maintained.
Do you know what’s the current
This section also currently happening developments in
describes how the to the regulation of the profession, so
business world is the auditing make sure you
currently in a state profession? understand the
of considerable flux, various reports and
with changes to the their implications.
regulatory regime Keep up to speed
(the FRC) and the via ongoing
audit itself mirrored research.
by the generally
volatile nature of
the current global
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 1: Introduction 3

outlook.
6 Audit quality Approach Exam questions IQ2: Addystone

control There is a lot of could get you to Fish
Auditing is always content to either appraise the What are the issues
facing a dilemma of remember – where quality displayed by here and how do
commercial versus will you be able to the auditor in a they relate to the
ethical aspects and find this content in given scenario or standards?
quality is usually the the exam if you recommend
suitable policies IQ3:
victim when corners need to know it? Documentation
are cut to keep hold and procedures.
Stop and think (Revision)
of clients. You need Quality control
to know what sound Make sure you are issues have As the title
quality is and what a familiar with the generally been suggests, this
firm needs to do to standards on audit tested in Question 3 should be revision
maintain it. quality that are in but may also arise in from your earlier
your auditing Question 1. studies so use it as a
standards open good brainstorming
book. Note that activity.
there are some IQ4: TrucksToGo
current Ltd
developments in
relation to these Spotting the issues
standards that you here will not be a
should be aware of. problem – you need
to explain WHY and
this may cause more
of an issue.
7 Laws and Approach Exam questions N/A

regulations Review the content might ask you to
Although not with the auditing consider the impact
required to be a standards open of non-compliance
legal expert, the book in front of you. on the audit but you
auditor does need also need to be
Stop and think able to explain
to understand
enough to know Can you distinguish when (and how) you
when any kind of between the can disclose any
non-compliance responsibilities of non-compliance
could have an effect the directors and without the
on the financial the auditor here? permission of the
statements being client (compare and
audited. contrast this with
the responsibilities
that are discussed in
the various ethical
standards in place).
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
HB2021

1 Using this Workbook
Section overview
• This section gives a brief outline of how this Workbook is structured and why.
• The key point is that the Corporate Reporting exam is integrated, so financial reporting and
auditing must be studied together.
1.1 The importance of integration

The aim of the Corporate Reporting module is as follows:
“To enable students to apply technical knowledge, analytical techniques and professional skills to
resolve compliance and business issues that arise in the context of the preparation and evaluation of
corporate reports and from providing audit services.
Students will be required to use technical knowledge and professional judgement to identify, explain
and evaluate alternatives and to determine the appropriate solutions to compliance issues, giving
due consideration to the needs of clients and other stakeholders. The commercial context and
impact of recommendations and ethical issues will also need to be considered in making such
judgements.”
It is clear from this that the application of technical knowledge (financial reporting, audit, assurance
and ethics) is integrated, so it is appropriate that these areas are studied together where possible.
At earlier levels you will have tended to study subjects in isolation, but this is no longer appropriate
at Advanced Level, and indeed in the real world.
Professional skills focus: Structuring problems and solutions
Although there will be a reasonably consistent structure to your exam, it is still important that you can
identify the parts that relate to auditing and those that relate to corporate reporting. Start
considering how you will address these two disciplines in the same question. Note the importance of
using the data analytics software to bridge the gap between these two aspects.
1.2 Data analytics software

One of the key aspects of the exam that you will need to be familiar with is the use of Data Analytics
Software (often referred to as DAS). You will find essential guidance on how to prepare for this within
‘Key resources’ at the start of this workbook and at the end of this chapter.
1.3 How this Workbook is structured

1.3.1 Principles and regulations in financial reporting and auditing
This chapter and Chapter 2 cover the role and context of auditing and general principles of
corporate reporting. This will largely be revision, but some of the regulations and standards will have
changed since your earlier studies. The aim is to set the more specialised topics, and the integrated
areas, in context.
1.3.2 Ethics and governance

Chapters 3 and 4 look at ethics and corporate governance. These topics underpin corporate
reporting and auditing, and ethical matters come up in all kinds of contexts, both in the exam and in
your working life as a professional. It is necessary to cover all relevant audit principles first because,
in the later chapters on reporting performance and position, the principles are applied in audit focus
sections.
HB2021

1.3.3 The modern audit process
In Chapters 5 to 8 we revise and build on the auditing material covered at the Professional Level. This
will put you in the position where you can consider the audit and assurance issues in relation to
specific financial reporting topics, the aim being to study financial reporting and auditing together.
1.3.4 Financial reporting chapters

Chapters 9 to 22 deal with the financial reporting and auditing of specific areas:
• Reporting performance
• Assets and liabilities
• Financing
• Remuneration
• Business combinations
• Reporting foreign activities
• Taxation
The financial reporting aspects are covered first, followed by an ‘audit focus’ section for each topic,
looking at the specific audit issues arising from the financial reporting of that area, generally with
examples and/or questions. For example, the chapter on share-based payment has at the end a
section on auditing share-based payment.
Audit focus sections may in turn be split into general and specific sections. For example, Chapter 9
Reporting Financial Performance covers general issues, including creative accounting, for which
auditors need to be alert. However, a more specific section will refer back to standards and the
auditing of, for example, related party disclosures, which has its own designated ISA (UK) and
particular risks. These sections allow scope for integrated examples or questions covering both
corporate reporting and auditing elements.
Finally the Self-test questions for each chapter will contain integrated questions where relevant.
1.3.5 Financial analysis chapters

Once you have a thorough understanding of the financial reporting and related auditing issues,
including analytical procedures, you will be in a position to analyse and interpret the financial
statements. You will not have studied financial analysis before, so Chapter 23 provides an
introduction, and Chapter 24 deals with more advanced topics.
1.3.6 Assurance and other related services

The Workbook concludes with coverage of assurance and related services, which can more easily be
understood in the context of the knowledge you have gained in the earlier chapters.
2 The importance of corporate reporting

Section overview
• Corporate reporting embraces financial reporting, and both are different from management
accounting.
• Financial statements are used to make economic decisions by a wide range of users.
• All users require information regarding:
– financial position
– financial performance
– changes in financial position
HB2021

2.1 What is corporate reporting?
2.1.1 Financial reporting
Financial reporting is the process of identifying, measuring and communicating economic
information to others so that they may make decisions on the basis of that information and assess the
stewardship of the entity’s management.
Financial reporting involves:
• recording transactions undertaken by a business entity;
• grouping similar transactions together which are appropriate to the business; and
• presenting periodic results.
Financial reporting focuses on the preparation of published financial information. Typically, this
information is made available annually or half-yearly (sometimes quarterly) and is presented in
formats laid down or approved by governments in each national jurisdiction.
2.1.2 Corporate reporting

Corporate reporting is a broader term than financial reporting, although the two are often used
interchangeably. As will be evident from this Workbook and the exam it prepares you for, corporate
reporting covers reports other than financial statements, in particular auditors’ reports, but also
assurance, internal audit and environmental reports. The definition of corporate reporting varies and
could include integrated reporting, corporate governance, corporate social responsibility and other
narrative reporting such as the Management Commentary.
In the context of professional accountancy examinations, a corporate reporting exam is generally
higher level than a financial reporting exam. In the context of your examination, Corporate Reporting
is a more appropriate title because the exam is not just on financial reporting.
General principles relating to corporate reporting are set out in the IASB Conceptual Framework for
Financial Reporting (Conceptual Framework), which is covered in Chapter 2, together with regulatory
matters and selected IFRS Standards that set out principles and frameworks.
2.1.3 Management accounting

By contrast, management accounting or reporting is internal reporting for the use of the
management of a business itself. Internal management information can be tailored to management’s
own needs and provided in whatever detail and at whatever frequency (eg, continuous real-time
information) management decides is best suited to the needs of their business.
The distinction is not so clear-cut, in that management decisions may be affected by external
reporting issues, for example, if a director’s bonus depends on profit. These matters are covered in
Chapter 24 on the more advanced aspects of financial analysis.
Interactive question 1: Management decisions

Can you think of another example of a way in which management decisions may be influenced by
external reporting requirements?
See Answer at the end of this chapter.
2.2 Entity
Most accounting requirements are written with a view to use by any type of accounting entity,
including companies and other forms of organisation, such as a partnership. In this Workbook, the
term ‘company’ is often used, because the main focus of the syllabus is on the accounts of
companies and groups of companies, but IFRS generally refer to entities.
2.3 Financial statements

The principal means of providing financial information to external users is the annual financial
statements. Financial statements provide a summary of the performance of an entity over a particular
period and of its position at the end of that period.
HB2021

A complete set of financial statements prepared under IFRS comprises the following:
• The statement of financial position
• The statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income or two separate statements
being the statement of profit or loss and the statement that presents the other comprehensive
income (statements of financial performance)
• The statement of changes in equity (another statement of financial performance)
• The statement of cash flows
• Notes to the financial statements
The notes to the financial statements include the following:
• Accounting policies ie, the specific principles, conventions, rules and practices applied in order to
reflect the effects of transactions and other events in the financial statements
• Detailed financial and narrative information supporting the information in the primary financial
statements
• Other information not reflected in the financial statements, but which is important to users in
making their assessments (an example of this would be the disclosures relating to contingent
assets or liabilities)
The individual elements that are included in the financial statements are covered in detail later in this
chapter.
2.4 Requirement to produce financial statements

Limited liability companies are required by law to prepare and publish financial statements annually.
The form and content may be regulated primarily by national legislation, and in most cases must also
comply with Financial Reporting Standards.
In the UK, all companies must comply with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 (CA2006). The
key impact of this is as follows:
• Every UK registered company is required to prepare financial statements for each financial year
which give a true and fair view.
• The individual (and some group) financial statements may be prepared:
– in accordance with the CA 2006 (as regards format and additional information provided by
way of notes);or
– in accordance with international accounting standards.
2.5 Financial reporting standards

Company financial statements must also comply with relevant reporting standards. In the UK these
are as follows.
• Financial reporting standards
The main financial reporting standard is FRS 102, The Financial Reporting Standard Applicable in
the UK and Republic of Ireland.
• IFRS
These are issued by the IASB. UK companies whose securities are traded in a regulated public
market eg, the London Stock Exchange, must prepare group accounts in accordance with IFRS.
Important note
These learning materials assume the preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS.
If you studied under UK GAAP for the Financial Accounting and Reporting exam, you should first
study the ICAEW Corporate Reporting: IFRS Supplement, which supports the transition from UK
GAAP to IFRS.
Unincorporated entities are exempt from the above requirements but may need to follow other
regulation eg, charities must comply with the Charities Act. Incorporated charities must prepare their
financial statements in accordance with the CA 2006 (ie, the IFRS option is not open to them).
HB2021

2.6 Fair presentation
IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements requires financial statements to ‘present fairly’ the financial
position and performance of an entity.
‘Present fairly’ is explained as representing faithfully the effects of transactions. In general terms this
will be the case if IFRS are adhered to.
IAS 1 states that departures from international standards are only allowed:
• in extremely rare cases; and
• where compliance with IFRS would be so misleading as to conflict with the objectives of financial
statements as set out in the Conceptual Framework, that is to provide information about financial
position, performance and changes in financial position that is useful to a wide range of users.
2.7 Judgements and financial statements

Although IFRS narrow down the range of acceptable alternative accounting treatments, there are still
many areas which are left to the discretion of the directors of the company. On the whole, the
concept of faithful representation should result in transactions being ‘presented fairly’. However,
commercial and financial considerations may result in pressure being brought to bear to account for
and report transactions in accordance with their strict legal form rather than their true substance. This
can raise ethical questions for a professional accountant.
Professional skills focus: Applying judgement
In the exam, as in real life, you will come across a situation where the directors have applied their
own judgement about a financial reporting treatment in a way that may be influenced by self-interest,
for example showing a higher profit in order to receive a higher bonus. You will need to challenge
this judgement by applying your own judgement and knowledge. Questions may not always have
one definitive answer. Make sure you are able to consider the best outcome for the situation as it is
presented.
2.8 Users of financial statements

The form and content of financial statements must be influenced by the use to which they are put.
Financial statements are used to make economic decisions, such as:
• to decide when to buy, hold or sell an equity investment
• to assess the stewardship or accountability of management
• to assess an entity’s ability to pay and provide other benefits to employees
• to assess security for amounts lent to the entity
• to determine taxation policies
• to determine distributable profits and dividends
• to prepare and use national income statistics
• to regulate the activities of entities
Much of the information needed for these different decisions is in fact common to them all. Financial
statements aimed at meeting these common needs of a wide range of users are known as ‘general
purpose‘ financial statements.
We can identify the following users of financial statements:
• Present and potential investors
• Employees
• Lenders
• Suppliers and other trade payables
• Customers
• Governments and their agencies
• The public
HB2021

Their specific information needs and how these needs may be addressed are covered in Chapter 23,
the first of two chapters on financial analysis. In most cases the users will need to analyse the financial
statements in order to obtain the information they need. This might include the calculation of
accounting ratios.
2.9 Objective of financial statements

The objective of financial statements is to provide information about the reporting entity’s financial
position and financial performance that is useful to a wide range of users in making economic
decisions.
This objective can usually be met by focusing exclusively on the information needs of present and
potential investors. This is because much of the financial information that is relevant to investors will
also be relevant to other users.
2.10 Accountability of management

Management also has a stewardship role, in that it is accountable for the safekeeping of the entity’s
resources and for their proper, efficient and profitable use. Providers of risk capital are interested in
information that helps them to assess how effectively management has fulfilled this role, but again
this assessment is made only as the basis for economic decisions, such as those about investments
and the reappointment/replacement of management.
It is also the case that in a smaller entity the owner and manager can be the same individual.
Financial reporting helps management to meet its need to be accountable to shareholders, and also
to other stakeholders (eg, employees or lenders), by providing information that is useful to the users
in making economic decisions.
However, financial statements cannot provide the complete set of information required for assessing
the stewardship of management.
2.11 Financial position, performance and changes in financial position

All economic decisions are based on an evaluation of an entity’s ability to generate cash and of the
timing and certainty of its generation. Information about the entity’s financial position, performance
and changes in financial position provides the foundation on which to base such decisions.
2.11.1 Financial position

An entity’s financial position covers:
• the economic resources it controls;
• its financial structure (ie, debt and share finance);
• its liquidity and solvency; and
• its capacity to adapt to changes in the environment in which it operates.
Investors require information on financial position because it helps in assessing:
• the entity’s ability to generate cash in the future;
• how future cash flows will be distributed among those with an interest in, or claims on, the entity;
• requirements for future finance and ability to raise that finance; and
• the ability to meet financial commitments as they fall due.
Information about financial position is primarily provided in a statement of financial position.
2.11.2 Financial performance

The profit and the comprehensive income earned in a period are used as the key measures of an
entity’s financial performance. Information about performance and variability of performance is
useful in:
• assessing potential changes in the entity‘s economic resources in the future;
• predicting the entity‘s capacity to generate cash from its existing resource base; and
• forming judgements about the effectiveness with which additional resources might be employed.
HB2021

Information on financial performance is provided by:
• the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
• the statement of changes in equity
2.11.3 Changes in financial position

Changes in financial position can be analysed under the headings of investing, financing and
operating activities and are presented in a statement of cash flows.
Cash flow information is largely free from the more judgemental allocation and measurement issues
(ie, in which period to include things and at what amount) that arise when items are included in the
statement of financial position or performance statements. For example, depreciation of non-current
assets involves judgement and estimation as to the period over which to charge depreciation. Cash
flow information excludes non-cash items, such as depreciation.
Cash flow information is therefore seen as being factual in nature, and hence more reliable than
other sources of information.
Information on the generation and use of cash is useful in evaluating the entity’s ability to generate
cash and its need to use what is generated.
These issues are treated more formally in the Conceptual Framework, discussed in Chapter 2.
3 The role and context of modern auditing

Section overview
• The audit provides assurance to shareholders.

• The audit enables the auditor to form an opinion as to whether the financial statements give a
true and fair view.
• An expectation gap may exist between what stakeholders expect the audit to achieve and what it
is actually designed to achieve. Despite recent efforts to narrow this gap, it remains wider than it
should be due to a number of factors.
• You should be familiar with the audit process from your earlier studies.
• All companies, except those meeting exemption criteria, must have an annual external audit.
• The Companies Act sets down the responsibilities of the directors and auditors.
3.1 Purpose of the audit

The audit provides a mechanism for shareholders to help ensure that directors are acting in the
company’s best interests and therefore plays a fundamental stewardship role.
ISA (UK) 200 (Updated January 2020) Overall Objectives of The Independent Auditor and the
Conduct of an Audit in Accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) sets out the
purpose of an audit as follows:
“The purpose of an audit is to enhance the degree of confidence of intended users in the financial
statements. This is achieved by the expression of an opinion by the auditor on whether the financial
statements are prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with an applicable financial reporting
framework. (ISA (UK) 200: para.3)”
3.2 Part of the economic infrastructure

The audit is also a vital function of economic activity. For that economic activity to continue to flourish
there has to be trust.
While the audit has a crucial role to play in providing assurance to shareholders, it cannot be seen in
isolation. For example, the directors of the company have a role to play in the preparation of financial
statements that show a true and fair view. The audit has to be seen in the context of a range of
interwoven laws, regulations and guidance, all of which promote good corporate governance. (We
will look at corporate governance in detail in Chapter 4.)
HB2021

3.3 The audit opinion and the expectation gap
The primary role of the auditor is to perform an independent examination of the financial statements
and to form an opinion. You should be very familiar with this concept from your earlier studies. The
audit opinion will provide reasonable assurance (a high but not absolute level of assurance) that the
financial statements give a true and fair view; it does not provide a certificate that they are
completely accurate and free from every error or fraud, no matter how small. ISA (UK) 200 explains
that absolute assurance is not possible due to inherent limitations of the audit, including those
resulting from the following factors:
• The nature of financial reporting; many items involve judgement and assessments of uncertainties
• The use of selective testing
• Inherent limitations of internal control
• The fact that most evidence is persuasive rather than conclusive
• The impracticability of examining all items within a class of transactions or account balance
• The possibility of collusion or misrepresentation for fraudulent purposes
• The fact that the work undertaken by the auditor is permeated by judgement
In some instances an ‘expectation gap‘ can lead to difficulties arising from the difference between
what shareholders and other stakeholders expect an audit to achieve and what it is actually designed
to achieve. The public increasingly expect the audit to address a number of issues (such as whether
that company will continue trading, or if it is a good investment) but in practical terms, the auditor
cannot always make these judgements beyond the requirements of the accounting framework.
Recent changes to the auditor’s report have attempted to make such communication more
meaningful (such as including details of key audit matters) but the continuing trend of corporate
casualties such as Carillion has only served to make the public sceptical of the auditor’s work, and the
expectation gap remains as wide as ever.
The key judgement made by the auditor is whether the financial statements give a true and fair view.
While there is no legal definition for these terms, ‘true’ and ‘fair’ are normally taken to mean the
following:
Definition
True: The information in the financial statements is not false and conforms to reality.
In practical terms this means that the information is presented in accordance with accounting
standards and law. The financial statements have been correctly extracted from the underlying
records and those records reflect the actual transactions which took place.
Definition
Fair: The financial statements reflect the commercial substance of the company’s underlying
transactions and the information is free from bias.
You will have come across examples of the application of substance over form in your financial
reporting studies.
The problem with making judgements such as these is that they can be called into question,
particularly where others have the benefit of hindsight. The major defence that the auditor has in this
situation is to show that the work was performed with due skill and care and that the judgements
made about truth and fairness were reasonable based on the evidence available at the time. We will
look at quality control in section 6 of this chapter.
3.4 The audit process

You will have covered the audit process in your earlier studies. The following diagram summarises
the key points you should be familiar with. Chapters 5 to 8 of this Workbook cover the audit in more
detail.
HB2021

Figure 1.1: The audit process
Client acceptance/ Considerations

continuance • Legal
• Ethical
• Practical
Establish re-evaluate • Letter of engagement
Plan the audit • Obtain an understanding of the entity

• Evaluate internal control
• Assess risks
• Establish materiality
Develop the audit • Audit strategy

approach • Audit planning
Audit internal • Tests of controls

control • Sampling
Audit business • Analytical procedures

processes • Tests of details
• Sampling
Evaluate results • Analytical procedures
Issue audit report • Consider other reporting requirements
Note: ISA (UK) 200 requires that the audit should be planned and performed with an attitude of
professional scepticism. Professional scepticism is covered in detail in Chapter 5.
Professional skills focus: Assimilating and using information
What stage are you at within the audit process? Remember what you have been told in the scenario
(and therefore, by definition, what you still do not know).
3.5 Statutory audit requirement

All UK companies except those meeting exemption criteria must have an audit.
The basic principle is that all companies registered in the UK should be audited. However, certain
very small UK companies are granted an exemption from being audited in the UK provided they
meet certain criteria:
• Annual turnover must be £10.2 million or less.
• The balance sheet total must be £5.1 million or less.
• The average number of employees must be 50 or fewer.
HB2021

At least two out of the three audit exemption threshold conditions must be met for two consecutive
years. However, even if the above conditions are met the exemption cannot be taken if the company
is ineligible (reasons for this include being a public company, either listed or unlisted, and operating
in the financial or insurance sector). Sections 478 to 481 of the Companies Act 2006 provide more
detail.
Note: The criteria use UK accounting terminology rather than IFRS terminology as they are required
by UK law.
The wisdom of exempting SMEs from audit has been questioned, following experiences in Sweden
and Denmark. This is discussed in Chapter 2.
4 Legal responsibilities of directors and auditors

Section overview
• The Companies Act 2006 contains many responsibilities for both directors and auditors.
• Directors must consider their role carefully, being mindful of the impact that their actions could
have on many other stakeholders.
• As well as the financial statements and trading issues, there are also strict rules governing the way
that directors interact financially with the company.
• Auditors need to form an independent opinion on the truth and fairness of the financial
statements, as well as consider their preparation including any other information that the
Companies Act requires.
4.1 Companies Act 2006

The legal responsibilities regarding directors and auditors are currently contained in the Companies
Act 2006 (CA 2006). The majority of the auditing requirements of the Act came into force for periods
on or after 6 April 2008.
4.2 Directors’ responsibilities

These duties are as follows:
(a) ‘Enlightened shareholder value‘ duty
The CA 2006 requires directors to act in a way that they consider, in good faith, would be most
likely to promote the success of the company for the benefit of its members as a whole. This will
be covered further in Chapter 4 as part of the strategic report.
(b) Duty of skill and care
Directors have the responsibility to take reasonable steps to ensure the safeguard, insurance,
etc, of the company’s assets.
(c) Conflicts of interest
Directors should not place themselves where their personal interest conflicts with their duty to
the company. Directors will be personally liable to the company for any loss suffered by the
company. (Regal (Hastings) Ltd v Gulliver 1942)
If a director has an interest in a contract to which his company is party, the company may in
certain circumstances void the contract.
(d) Fraudulent trading
Directors will be responsible should the company trade with the intent to defraud creditors if
they are knowingly party to such conduct. Responsibility will arise whether or not the company is
in the course of winding up.
HB2021

(e) Wrongful trading
Where a company is in the course of winding up, the provisions of wrongful trading may apply.
An action may be brought against the director if at some time before the commencement of the
winding up the person knew or ought to have concluded there was no reasonable prospect of
avoiding liquidation.
(f) Theft
If a company obtains property or pecuniary advantage by deception and the director has
consented, then the director will be liable as well as the company.
(g) Accounting records
A company is required to keep adequate accounting records, which are sufficient to show and
explain the company’s transactions. Failure to do so may render every officer of the company
liable to a fine or imprisonment.
In addition to the statutory requirement, the directors have an overriding responsibility to ensure
they have adequate information to enable them to fulfil their duty of managing the company’s
business.
(h) Annual accounts
Directors have a number of responsibilities with regard to the annual accounts. The directors are
required to:
– select suitable accounting policies and apply them consistently;
– make judgements and estimates that are prudent;
– state whether applicable accounting standards have been followed, subject to any material
departures disclosed and explained in the financial statements;
– prepare the financial statements on a going concern basis unless it is an inappropriate
assumption; and
– ensure the financial statements are delivered to Companies House within the specified time.
A statement of directors’ responsibilities should be included in the financial statements.
(i) Directors‘ and officers‘ insurance
Generally a company cannot indemnify a director against a liability arising from an act of
negligence, default or breach of duty. However, this statutory provision does not prevent a
company from buying and maintaining insurance against such a liability.
(j) Safeguarding the assets
Responsibility to safeguard the assets of the company includes the prevention and detection of
fraud. One of the main ways in which this duty can be carried out is to implement an effective
system of controls.
4.3 Directors’ loans and other transactions

4.3.1 Background
The CA 2006 imposes restrictions on dealings between a company and its directors in order to
prevent directors taking advantage of their position. These restrictions are probably the main legal
safeguard available against directors abusing their position in a company. The disclosures ensure
that shareholders and other stakeholders will be informed about all the significant transactions
entered into by a company with its management that might benefit those individuals.
This is an important area for the auditor because he has a specific duty to disclose details of
directors’ transactions in the auditor’s report if not disclosed elsewhere. The information is very
sensitive, and it is difficult to audit due to materiality, complexity and the potential lack of any formal
documents.
HB2021

4.3.2 Definitions
The following definitions are relevant to your understanding of this issue.
Definitions
Persons connected with a director: These include:
• directors’ spouses, minor (including step) children
• a company with which a director is associated (ie, controls > 20% voting power)
• trustee of a trust whose beneficiaries include the director or connected person
• partner of the director or connected person
Loan: A sum of money lent for a time to be returned in money or money’s worth.
Quasi-loan: The company agrees to pay a third party on behalf of the director, who later reimburses
the company (eg, personal goods bought with company credit card).
Credit transaction: A transaction where payment is deferred (eg, goods bought from company on
credit terms).
4.3.3 Members’ approval

The following rules apply to all companies:
• Loans > £10,000 must be approved by the members of the company. In order for the resolution
to be passed members must be provided with details of the nature of the transaction, the amount
of the loan and the purpose for which it is required and the extent of the company’s liability.
• Advances for legitimate business expenditure do not require approval. However, the value of any
transaction is not allowed to exceed £50,000.
The following rules apply to public companies (or companies associated with public companies).
• Loans > £10,000 made to persons connected with a director must be approved by the members
of the company.
• Quasi-loans > £10,000 made to directors or connected persons must be approved by the
members of the company.
• Credit transactions > £15,000 for the benefit of a director or a connected person must be
approved by the members of the company.
• Where transactions are entered into without the required approval the transaction is voidable at
the instance of the company.
4.3.4 Disclosure
For all loans etc, to directors, disclose:
• its amount
• an indication of the interest rate
• principal terms
• any amounts repaid
4.3.5 Other transactions and contracts

Directors‘ interests in contracts
Directors may have a personal interest in contracts planned or made by the company, eg, because
they are also directors of another company.
Directors must declare interests in contracts to the board of directors at the earliest opportunity.
Substantial property transactions between company and directors also require approval by
members. A transaction is substantial if:
• Value > £100,000; or
• Value > 10% of company’s net assets (per latest accounts).
Exception: the transaction is not substantial if < £5,000 (de minimis limit).
If not approved, the transaction is voidable by the company.
HB2021

Service contracts
Members must approve long service contracts for directors (> 2 years).
Service contracts must be open to inspection by members.
In examining directors’ service contracts, auditors should check particularly that:
• company and each director are complying wholly with terms of contract; and
• terms themselves comply with Companies Act requirements and are consistent with company’s
articles.
4.4 Auditors’ responsibilities

Under the CA 2006, it is the external auditor’s responsibility to do the following:
(a) Form an independent opinion on the truth and fairness of the financial statements
(b) Confirm that the financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with the
relevant financial reporting framework and the CA 2006
(c) State in their auditor’s report whether in their opinion the information given in the directors‘
report is consistent with the financial statements
The auditor will also report by exception on the following:
• Whether proper returns, adequate for audit purposes, have been received from branches
• Whether the accounts agree with the underlying records
• Whether adequate accounting records have been kept
• Whether all necessary information and explanations have been obtained
• In the case of a quoted company whether the auditable part of the directors’ remuneration report
has been properly prepared
If the accounts (or directors’ remuneration report) omit or incorrectly disclose information on
directors’ emoluments, loans and other transactions, the correct disclosure must be included in the
auditor’s report (due to the particularly sensitive nature of this information and its importance to
users of the accounts).
The auditor also has a duty towards other information in accordance with ISA (UK) 720 (Revised
November 2019), The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other Information (see Chapter 8).
5 International standards on auditing

Section overview
• The FRC is responsible for UK auditing standards, known as ISA (UK). It is expected to be replaced
by a new regulator known as the ARGA.
• The International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (IAASB) issues ISAs.
• The FRC regularly revises ethical guidance and auditing standards in response to current
developments (such as the implementation of the EU Audit Regulation and Directive plus
associated changes to IAASB standards in 2016 and the IESBA Code of Ethics in 2018).
HB2021

5.1 FRC Update
The FRC structure is summarised in the diagram below:
Figure 1.2: FRC structure
FRC Board
Codes & Conduct

Standards Committee
Committee
Audit & Corporate

Assurance Reporting Review
Council Committee Financial
Reporting
Corporate Audit Quality Review Panel
Reporting Review
Council Committee
Tribunal
Actuarial Case
Council Management
Committee
5.1.1 FRC Board

The role of the FRC Board is as follows:
• To set high standards of corporate governance through the UK Corporate Governance Code
• To set standards for corporate reporting and actuarial practice
• To monitor and enforce accounting and auditing standards
• To oversee regulatory activities of the actuarial profession and professional accountancy bodies
• To operate independent disciplinary arrangements for public interest cases
The FRC Board is supported by two committees, the Codes and Standards Committee and the
Conduct Committee.
5.1.2 Codes and Standards Committee

The Codes and Standards Committee is responsible for advising the FRC Board on the maintenance
of an effective framework of UK Codes and standards for Corporate Governance, Stewardship,
Accounting, Auditing and Assurance and Actuarial technical standards. The Codes and Standards
Committee also advises on influencing the wider regulatory framework and on the FRC’s research
programme. It advises the FRC Board on the Annual Plan for Codes and Standards work and for
making appointments to, and overseeing the work of, the Councils.
It comprises FRC Board members together with others with particular technical expertise, including
practising professionals. The FRC Board and the Codes and Standards Committee are advised by
three Councils covering Corporate Reporting, Audit and Assurance, and Actuarial work.
5.1.3 Conduct Committee

The Conduct Committee is responsible for overseeing the FRC’s Conduct Division. Its responsibilities
include overseeing:
• monitoring of recognised supervisory and recognised qualifying bodies
• audit Quality Reviews
• corporate reporting reviews
HB2021

• professional discipline
• oversight of the regulation of accountants and actuaries
The Conduct Committee is supported by three subcommittees: the Audit Quality Review Committee
(which helps ensure the consistency and quality of audit work), the Case Management Committee
(which advises on the handling of disciplinary cases) and the Corporate Reporting Review
Committee (similar to its Audit Quality counterpart but focusing on the quality of corporate
reporting).
The FRC’s Conduct Division encompasses the FRC’s monitoring, oversight and disciplinary functions
through a number of teams.
5.1.4 Current issues

Despite the FRC’s mandate to oversee corporate reporting and auditing in the UK, corporate
scandals have continued to occur. The most recent significant collapse relates to UK construction
company Carillion plc, which went into liquidation in January 2018. It owed over £1 billion to various
stakeholders, despite its last audited financial statements indicating no sign of its impending demise.
In response to widespread allegations that financial regulation has not improved almost 20 years on
from Enron, the UK Government decided to review the FRC and in December 2018, the Kingman
review of the FRC was published.
In his review, Sir John Kingman concluded that the FRC was no longer fit for purpose and could not
deliver the regulation required to ensure effective corporate reporting, governance and audit. He
recommended the replacement of the FRC with a new, stronger body (the Audit, Reporting and
Governance Authority or ARGA) that would deliver a service that is focused on “consumers of
financial information, not producers” (Kingman, 2018).
In conjunction with investigations by the UK Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) into the
current state of the UK audit market, the UK Government also commissioned former Chair of the
London Stock Exchange, Sir Donald Brydon, to conduct a review of the quality and effectiveness of
UK audits. On appointment, Sir Donald was quoted as saying that: “Most people will never read an
auditor’s opinion on a company’s accounts. But tens of millions of people depend on robust and
high-quality audits” (Doherty, 2019). The following table shows an overview of the recommendations
made by the Brydon Review which carried the title ‘Assess, assure and inform - improving audit
quality and effectiveness’ (Brydon, 2019).
Audit
There should be a new definition of the purpose of an audit: to provide confidence in a company,
its officers and its financial statements
Audit should be a separate profession, not seen as part of the accounting profession
Professional judgement should be redefined to include suspicion as well as scepticism
The auditor’s report
The term ‘true and fair’ should no longer be used as it ignores the reliance on estimates and the
use of materiality: the term ‘present fairly in all material respects’ should now only be used
There should be greater continuity between successive reports and greater emphasis given to
estimates, other information and any external negative signals
Directors
There should be a rolling three-year audit programme presented by directors to shareholders
A Resilience Statement should be used to report the following:

• Short term - similar to the current going concern assessment
• Medium term - similar to the existing viability statement
• Long term - strategic issues, such as climate change impacts
A Public Interest Statement should report how companies serve the public interest
HB2021

Stakeholders
Greater shareholder involvement in the audit programme
The audit should more actively consider the role of stakeholders
Greater responsibilities for directors to consult with employees when preparing the financial
statements
Auditor to be considered a suitable individual for whistle-blowers to approach
Anti-fraud measures
A directors’ statement on the work they have done to prevent and detect fraud
Assurance on this statement by the auditors, including a review of relevant internal controls
Greater use of forensic and fraud training for auditors
Auditor Fraud Panel to consider whether enough has been done to combat fraud
Other steps
Attestation by CEO and CFO on internal controls for financial reporting (similar to the US SOX
legislation)
Controls on capital maintenance and dividend levels
Greater transparency by auditors on fees, profitability of engagements, time spent and the
circumstances leading to no longer being employed as auditor
Greater use of technology within audits
More responsible use of liability limitation agreements (LLAs) when considering auditor liability
and directors’ responsibilities
Greater scrutiny of data used in executive remuneration
Reinforcement of the Kingman recommendations on ARGA (such as defining ‘high quality audit’, a
‘Plain English’ guide to auditing available online, publicising good audits as well as criticism of bad
ones and more formal mechanisms for shareholders and stakeholders to raise concerns.
(Source: Brydon, D. (2019) Assess, assure and inform: Improving audit quality and effectiveness.
[Online] Available at:
https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/
852960/brydon-review-final-report.pdf [Accessed 12 October 2021])
The UK Government is still considering how best to respond to the findings of these reviews: in
March 2021, the Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy (BEIS) issued a white paper
Restoring trust in audit and corporate governance: proposals on reforms seeking views on the CMA,
Brydon and Kingman proposals in relation to audit, financial reporting, governance and regulation
with the aim of restoring trust in how companies are run and scrutinised, improving transparency for
stakeholders and meeting international best practice. Inevitably, the structure and operation of the
audit market will also be addressed.
There is also an ongoing debate about the way that going concern is assessed with the pandemic in
mind to avoid future losses that could have been foreseen with clearer levels of disclosure about the
risk of corporate failure. This will no doubt require greater input from auditors, directors and audit
committees as well as guidance from regulators and governments to reach a solution that protects all
stakeholders.
One of the key challenges facing the FRC as the regulator of financial reporting and governance in
the UK is striking the right balance between the need to impose controls on businesses in order to
protect stakeholders and the need to support how businesses thrive and generate economic
benefits to those same stakeholders. This is illustrated by the way that going concern is currently
under scrutiny – too much scepticism of an entity’s prospects and it is destined to fail, but insufficient
scrutiny of possible red flags and we could have another Carillion on our hands. You will cover the
HB2021

way that both audits and reviews of financial information are currently being influenced by this
ongoing debate in subsequent chapters.
Given the impact of both Brexit and the COVID-19 pandemic on the UK and beyond, uncertainty for
both preparers and users of financial statements continues, although it still seems certain that the
FRC and its successor will face radical change.
5.2 Interaction between FRC and IAASB Standards

The IAASB was set up by the International Federation of Accountants (IFAC), which nominates a
majority of its members – others are nominated by the Forum of Firms – to issue professional
standards (such as those related to audits, reviews, related services and quality control). ISAs are
used for the audit of historical financial information.
In exceptional circumstances, an auditor may judge it necessary to depart from an ISA in order to
more effectively achieve the objective of an audit. When such a situation arises, the auditor should be
prepared to justify the departure.
The system for creating an ISA (UK) currently works as follows:
Figure 1.3: Interaction between FRC and IAASB auditing standards
IAASB
Issues
FRC Modifies ISA (UK) as

ISA used by
UK auditors
FRC
Adopts
5.3 IAASB Projects

The IAASB regularly makes improvements to its standards as a result of a number of ongoing
projects.
For example, in 2015, a series of new and revised standards were issued on auditor reporting. The
most notable change was the introduction of ISA 701, Communicating Key Audit Matters in the
Independent Auditor’s Report which requires auditors of listed companies to communicate Key Audit
Matters.
More recently, changes have been made in relation to the auditor’s responsibilities for other
information accompanying financial statements and the audit of accounting estimates and related
disclosures.
At the time of writing the IAASB is conducting projects that consider the identification and
assessment of risks of material misstatement, quality at firm and engagement levels, group auditing,
and audit evidence.
5.4 FRC pronouncements

The following summary diagram is provided in the FRC Scope and Authority of FRC Audit and
Assurance Pronouncements.
HB2021

Figure 1.4: Structure of FRC audit and assurance pronouncements
Quality Control
International Standards on Quality Control (UK)
and Ethical
Ethical Standard
Standards
International Standards Statements Standard for

Standards for of Standards Assurance Engagement
on Auditing Investment for Reporting on Client Standards
(UK) Reporting Accountants Assets
Practice Notes,
SORPs and Bulletins Bulletins Bulletins Guidance
Bulletins
Audits Investment Other Assurance

Circulars Engagements
The FRC makes three categories of pronouncements in relation to audit:

• Auditing standards (quality control, engagement and ethical)
• Practice notes
• Bulletins
It also issues Standards for reviews of interim financial statements performed by the auditor of the
entity and Standards providing assurance on client assets to the Financial Conduct Authority.
5.4.1 Implementation of EU Audit Regulation and Directive

The FRC has recently completed its implementation of the EU Audit Regulation and Directive. At the
same time it has taken the opportunity to revise its standards in line with the IAASB projects on
disclosures, auditor’s reports and other information accompanying financial statements. As a result,
final drafts of the revised Corporate Governance Code (most recently issued in 2018) and revised
Guidance on Audit Committees (issued in 2016) are now in the public domain. A revised Ethical
Standard and revised International Standards on Auditing (UK) were also issued in June 2016. The
revised standards apply for engagements relating to financial periods commencing on or after 17
June 2016. One of the key issues is the impact on the audit if the client is a public interest entity.
This is defined in the Companies Act 2006 (s.494A).
Definition
Public interest entity:
• An issuer whose transferable securities are admitted to trading on a regulated market (ie, all UK-
listed companies except those on the AIM and ISDX growth markets)
• A credit institution (in the UK, a bank or building society)
• An insurance undertaking
Following recent developments in ethical standards (see Chapter 3) the term other entity of public
interest (OEPI) has emerged. While still subject to interpretation, the term essentially refers to entities
which do not meet the definition of a public interest entity but which are still considered to have
public interest aspects (such as a pension fund).
HB2021

5.5 The global outlook
Every generation will feel that they are living in the most interesting of times, but as we enter the third
decade of the 21st century, the global outlook has become increasingly uncertain and volatile, not
least due to the COVID-19 pandemic. For example:
Political Economic
• The rise of populist, nationalist politics and a • A global realignment following the financial
push against the status quo (eg, the Trump crash of 2008, which has stifled growth,
administration in the US) eroded confidence and encouraged trade
• Greater calls for independence and self- wars
determination (eg, Brexit in the UK) • Stagnation on global efforts to close the gap
between rich and poor leading to social
unrest
Social Technological
• The increasing impact of climate change and • A shift towards a more digital age, with the
the need to respond effectively regardless of associated disruption to traditional
the costs industries (including accountancy)
• Shifting demographics (eg, the rise of the • The adoption of new technologies (eg, big
#MeToo movement) highlighting the data, blockchain and artificial intelligence)
importance of diversity and the opportunities they create
What does this mean for accountants? The issues presented here paint a challenging picture, but the
profession has always been able to respond to the world around it, so demonstrating skills such as
awareness and adaptability will be crucial for the survival of the profession.
Professional skills focus: Concluding, recommending and communicating
You may be asked to discuss the ongoing developments in both corporate reporting and auditing.
You should ensure you have not only studied these developments but that you can also
communicate your thoughts in an effective and efficient manner.
6 Audit quality control

Section overview
• Quality control procedures should be adopted:

– at the firm level; and
– on an individual audit.
• Professional bodies also have a responsibility to develop quality control standards and monitor
compliance.
• Audit documentation is an important part of quality control.
• It provides evidence of work done to support the audit opinion.
• Significant matters must be documented.
• Audit working papers should be reviewed.
6.1 Principles and purpose

Audit quality is not defined in law or through regulations, nor do auditing standards provide a simple
definition.
HB2021

Although each stakeholder in the audit will give a different meaning to audit quality, at its heart it is
about delivering an appropriate professional opinion supported by the necessary evidence and
objective judgements.
Many principles contribute to audit quality including good leadership, experienced judgement,
technical competence, ethical values and appropriate client relationships, proper working practices
and effective quality control and monitoring review processes.
The standards on audit quality provide guidance for firms on how to achieve these principles.
6.2 Quality control at a firm level

The fact that auditors follow ISAs provides a general quality control framework within which audits
should be conducted. There are also specific quality control standards. ISQC (UK) 1 (Revised
November 2019), Quality Control for Firms that Perform Audits and Reviews of Financial Statements
and other Assurance and Related Services Engagements deals with quality control at a firm level. You
have studied ISQC (UK) 1 in Audit and Assurance at the Professional Level.
ISQC (UK) 1 identifies the following six elements of the firm’s system of quality control.
• Leadership responsibilities for quality within the firm
The standard requires that the firm implements policies such that the internal culture of the firm is
one where quality is considered essential. Such a culture must be inspired by the leaders of the
firm, who must sell this culture in their actions and messages. In other words, the entire business
strategy of the audit firm should be driven by the need for quality in its operations.
• Ethical requirements
Policies and procedures should be designed to provide the firm with reasonable assurance that
the firm and its personnel comply with relevant ethical requirements and in particular
independence requirements.
In the UK the firm must have organisational and administrative arrangements for dealing with and
recording incidents which have, or may have, serious consequences for the integrity of the firm’s
activities.
• Acceptance and continuance of client relationships and specific engagements
A firm should only accept, or continue with, a client where it has considered the integrity of the
client, it is competent to perform the engagement and has the capabilities, including time and
resources, to do so, and it can comply with ethical requirements, including appropriate
independence from the client.
In the UK, the firm must assess its compliance with FRC’s Revised Ethical Standard regarding
independence and objectivity, whether the firm has competent personnel, time and resources
and whether the key audit partner is eligible for appointment as statutory auditor.
For the audit of a public interest entity the firm must assess whether the firm complies with the
FRC’s Revised Ethical Standards requirements on audit fees and prohibition of the provision of
non-audit services requirements.
• Human resources
The firm’s overriding desire for quality will necessitate policies and procedures on ensuring
excellence in its staff, to provide the firm with “reasonable assurance that it has sufficient
personnel with the competence, capabilities and commitment to ethical principles necessary to
perform engagements in accordance with professional standards and applicable and regulatory
requirements, and to enable the firm or engagement partners to issue reports that are
appropriate in the circumstances” (ISQC (UK) 1, para. 29).
In the UK, the firm must ensure that those directly involved in the audit have appropriate
knowledge and experience. In addition the remuneration of an individual on the audit should not
be linked to the amount of revenue that the firm receives for providing non-audit services from
that client.
• Engagement performance
The firm should take steps to ensure that engagements are performed correctly; that is, in
accordance with standards and guidance. Ensuring good engagement performance involves a
number of issues, such as direction, supervision and review, consultation and resolution of
disputes.
HB2021

The firm should have policies and procedures to determine when a quality control review will be
necessary for an engagement. This will include all audits of financial statements for listed
companies and in the UK also applies to public interest entities. When required, such a review
must be completed before the report is signed (and in the UK before the additional report to the
audit committee is issued in accordance with ISA (UK) 260 (Revised November 2019)).
In the UK for audits of financial statements of public interest entities the engagement quality
control reviewer must be an individual who is eligible for appointment as auditor but has not
been involved in the audit to which the review relates.
• Monitoring
The standard states that firms must have policies in place to ensure that their quality control
procedures are relevant, adequate, and operating effectively. In other words, they must monitor
their system of quality control. Monitoring activity should be reported on to the management of
the firm on an annual basis.
There are two types of monitoring activity, an ongoing evaluation of the system of quality control
and cyclical inspection of a selection of completed engagements. An ongoing evaluation might
include such questions as “has it kept up to date with regulatory requirements?”.
An inspection cycle would usually fall over a period such as three years, in which time at least one
engagement per engagement partner would be reviewed.
In the UK, additional guidance is given regarding external monitoring in the context of a group
audit.
6.3 Quality control on an individual audit

You will have studied this issue in the previous Audit and Assurance exam. A summary of the key
points in ISA (UK) 220 (Revised November 2019), Quality Control for an Audit of Financial Statements
is provided below.
6.3.1 Policies and procedures

ISA (UK) 220 states that the objective of the auditor is to implement quality control procedures at the
individual engagement level. The engagement partner is ultimately responsible for quality control on
an individual engagement.
The policies and procedures for quality control on individual audits parallel those for the firm
outlined above. For example, ethical requirements must be considered. In addition, however, of
particular significance for individual audits are the procedures of direction, supervision and review.
(a) Direction
At the planning stage, but also during the audit, the engagement partner ensures that the
members of the engagement team are informed of:
– their responsibilities
– the objectives of the work to be performed
– the nature of the entity’s business
– risk issues
– problems that may arise
– detailed approach to the audit engagement
(b) Supervision
Supervision includes:
– tracking the progress of the audit engagement;
– considering the capabilities of individual members of the engagement team and that they
understand their instructions;
– addressing issues that arise and modifying the audit approach if appropriate; and
– identifying matters for consultation or consideration by more experienced members of the
audit engagement.
HB2021

(c) Review
Reviewing concerns the inspection of work by engagement members by more senior members
of the same engagement. This includes ensuring that:
– the work has been carried out in accordance with professional and regulatory requirements;
– significant matters have been raised for further consideration;
– appropriate consultations have taken place and have been documented;
– where appropriate the planned audit work is revised;
– the work performed supports the conclusions;
– the evidence obtained is sufficient and appropriate to support the audit opinion; and
– the objectives of the engagement have been achieved.
The revised ISA (UK) also includes specific guidance in relation to the engagement quality
control review for audits of the financial statements of public interest entities in the UK. The
purpose of the engagement quality control review is ‘to provide an objective evaluation, on or
before the date of the auditor’s report, of the significant judgments the engagement team
made and the conclusions it reached in formulating the auditor’s report’. In particular the review
must consider the following:
– The independence of the firm from the entity
– The significant risks and measures taken to manage them
– Reasoning in relation to materiality and significant risks
– Any request for advice from external experts and the implementation of the advice
– The nature and scope of corrected and uncorrected misstatements
– The subjects discussed with the audit committee/management/supervisory bodies/competent
authorities/third parties
– Whether information on the audit file supports the opinion in the auditor’s report and
additional report to the audit committee
(d) Hot and cold reviews
Hot file reviews are carried out before the auditor’s report is issued. Their purpose is to identify
any weaknesses in the application of audit procedures or to assess if results from audit
procedures have been misinterpreted. They can be done for higher risk audits. Such reviews are
usually undertaken by an audit partner not connected with the audit.
Cold file reviews are carried out after the auditor’s report has been issued. Their primary purpose
is to determine compliance with ethical and auditing standards and relevant legislation, and to
consider whether the audit work has been carried out in accordance with the firm’s own
procedures, thereby identifying any weaknesses in the firm’s quality control procedures, and
how these can be improved upon. Cold reviews are carried out by suitably qualified individuals
who are independent of the client and have had no involvement in the audit work. Small firms
and sole practitioners may be required to arrange external reviews at least once every three
years if there is no suitable reviewer available from within the organisation. A cold file review will
result in identification of any areas of non-compliance and the formulation of a suitable action
plan with the firm.
Note: For public interest entities, the engagement quality control review documentation should
confirm that a robust appraisal of the work undertaken by the engagement team has actively
occurred, including, where appropriate, any alternative outcomes to the evidence provided by the
engagement team (ISA (UK) 220: para. A33).
6.4 Assuring the quality of professional services

In July 2019, the IAASB issued a series of exposure drafts for Quality Management at the Firm and
Engagement Level, including Engagement Quality Reviews designed to address the ongoing need
for stakeholders to feel reassured that audits are conducted with appropriate levels of quality
regardless of the size or complexity of the entity involved. Central to this is the idea that quality
control is now referred to as quality management because it highlights the approach taken by firms
when managing the risks of audit quality, not least the problems associated with poor
communication among various members of the audit team (including those conducting engagement
quality reviews, hence the proposal for these reviews to have their own standard).
HB2021

The main areas of focus for these exposure drafts were as follows:
(a) Fostering an appropriately independent and challenging sceptical mindset of the auditor
(b) Encouraging proactive quality management at the firm and engagement level
(c) Exploring transparency and its role in audit quality
(d) Focusing more on firms’ (including networks’) structures and communication processes and their
internal and external monitoring and remediation activities
(e) Reinforcing the need for robust communication and interactions during the audit engagement
The FRC subsequently issued exposure drafts in December 2020 for ISA (UK) 220 (Revised) and
ISQM (UK) 1 and 2 (the two ISQMs as replacements for ISQC (UK) 1) in order to address quality
management both within the firm and as part of audit engagements. ISQM (UK) 1 has expanded the
leadership responsibility for quality within the firm to consider both risks of delivering poor quality
practice and governance responsibilities for quality within the firm. In addition, there are expanded
responsibilities for responding to these quality risks and taking appropriate action to ensure best
practice is followed. ISQM (UK) 2 has been created specifically to provide guidance for engagement
quality reviewers to emphasise the importance of this activity. These new standards are expected to
be in operation during 2022 as the FRC has recommended early adoption if possible.
6.4.1 FRC Audit Quality Thematic Reviews

In March 2017, the FRC issued Audit Quality Thematic Review: Firms‘ audit quality control procedures
and other quality initiatives to support the continuous improvement in audit quality in the UK. Some
new areas of best practice were identified (such as adopting different ‘lines of defence’ for a firm’s
procedures to interact effectively) but also some areas for further work (such as more senior
members of the audit team reviewing audit work) arose too.
This was followed in May 2018 by another Thematic Review called Firms’ activities to establish,
promote and embed a culture that is committed to delivering consistently high quality audits. In this
publication, the FRC defined culture as “a combination of the values, attitudes and behaviours
manifested by an organisation in its operations and relations with its stakeholders”.
While many might seem sceptical about the role that the FRC in particular could play in addressing
something as complex as culture among different firms, the messages contained within these reports
have outlined the need for a greater awareness of the following cultural factors that can improve the
scope and quality of audits in the UK:
• Prioritising values such as the fundamental ethical principles
• Recognising that good audits are necessary to support society in general
• Promoting good quality work practices in auditing as much as punishing poor quality work
• Using root cause analysis to identify cultural factors that led to good and bad quality audit work
• Using independent non-executives to monitor the successful adoption of desired culture
(FRC, 2018)
The FRC continues to address quality as part of its regulatory role. In July 2020 it published its Annual
enforcement review which found that both ethical and auditing standards were not always being
followed, contributing to some instances of audit failure due to not obtaining sufficient appropriate
audit evidence and displaying inadequate levels of professional scepticism. This was echoed in
November 2020 by Developments in audit 2020 when the FRC reported inconsistent levels of audit
quality on higher risk audits, predominantly due to insufficient challenge of management in the
following areas:
• complex and forward-looking judgements (such as goodwill impairment)
• assessment of an entity’s going concern status and plans to address perceived uncertainties
In addition, the FRC raised concern over several instances when group audit teams had failed to
demonstrate how they had assessed the work undertaken by component audit teams. There were
also concerns over the approach adopted by firms when reviewing audit work as part of their own
internal quality control processes (FRC, 2020).
Interactive question 2: Addystone Fish

You are an audit senior working for the firm Addystone Fish. You are currently carrying out the audit
of Wicker Ltd, a manufacturer of waste paper bins. You are unhappy with Wicker’s inventory valuation
HB2021

policy and have raised the issue several times with the audit manager. He has dealt with the client for
a number of years and does not see what you are making a fuss about. He has refused to meet you
on site to discuss these issues.
The former engagement partner to Wicker retired two months ago. As the audit manager had dealt
with Wicker for so many years, the other partners have decided to leave the audit of Wicker largely in
his hands.
Requirement
Comment on the situation outlined above.
6.5 Audit documentation

Audit documentation is a key part of the overall quality control framework during the course of an
audit. All audit work must be documented: the working papers are the tangible evidence of all work
done in support of the audit opinion. ISA (UK) 230 (Revised June 2016), Audit Documentation
provides guidance on this issue.
In your previous studies, you have learnt the practical issues surrounding how audit working papers
should be completed. The key general rule to remember concerning what to include in a working
paper is:
“What would be sufficient to enable an experienced auditor, having no previous connection with the
audit to understand the nature, timing, and extent of the audit procedures performed to comply with
the ISAs and applicable legal and regulatory requirements and the results of the audit procedures
and the audit evidence obtained, and significant matters arising during the audit and the conclusions
reached thereon, and significant professional judgements made in reaching those conclusions.” (ISA
(UK) 230 (Revised June 2016) para.8)
Review of audit working papers is important, as it allows a more senior auditor to evaluate the
evidence obtained during the course of the audit for sufficiency and reliability, so that more
evidence can be obtained to support the audit opinion, if required. It is an important quality control
procedure. ISA (UK) 500 Audit Evidence is relevant here.
Interactive question 3: Documentation (revision)

Viewco is a manufacturer of TVs and Blu-ray players. It carries out a full physical inventory count at its
central warehouse every year on 31 December, its financial year end. Finished goods are normally of
the order of £3 million, with components and work in progress normally approximately £1 million.
You are the audit senior responsible for the audit of Viewco for the year ending 31 December 20X1.
Together with a junior member of staff, you will be attending Viewco’s physical inventory count.
Requirements
3.1 Explain why it is necessary for an auditor to prepare working papers.
3.2 State, giving reasons, what information the working papers relating to this inventory count
attendance should contain.
Interactive question 4: TrucksToGo Ltd

You are the audit senior on the audit of TrucksToGo Ltd. You are supervising the work of a relatively
inexperienced audit junior. The junior has been carrying out audit procedures on the assertions of
completeness and existence of non-current assets. According to the junior, audit procedures have
been completed and the memo below has been produced outlining some of the issues found
during the audit.
HB2021

Memo: Issues identified during audit
The directors have confirmed that there are no further non-current assets to include in the financial
statements. This representation was received in a meeting with the Finance Director and recorded on
the audit file at this time.
Part of the existence work on non-current assets included obtaining a sample of assets from the asset
register and then physically verifying those assets. Unfortunately, a significant number of assets were
not available for verification – the vehicles were in use by the company and therefore not on the
premises. As an alternative, vehicles on the premises were agreed back to the asset register.
A number of vehicles were noted on the company premises in a poor state of repair; for example,
engines missing. On inquiry, the vehicle manager confirmed that the vehicles were under repair. I am
therefore happy that the vehicles belonged to the company and no further action is necessary.
I have reached the conclusion that all non-current assets are correctly stated and valued in the
financial statements.
Requirement
Explain to the junior why the evidence collected is insufficient, and detail the action necessary to
complete the audit procedures. Refer to your objectives in reviewing audit documentation as a
format for your answer.
7 Laws and regulations

Section overview
The auditor is responsible for obtaining sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance
with laws and regulations that have a direct effect on the financial statements
7.1 Revision
The responsibilities of the auditor for laws and regulations are covered in ISA (UK) 250A (Revised
November 2019), Consideration of Laws and Regulations in an Audit of Financial Statements. You
have covered the principles contained in this standard in your earlier studies. A summary of the key
points is included below.
The objectives of the auditor are:
(a) To obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance with the provisions of
those laws and regulations generally recognised to have a direct effect on the determination of
material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements;
(b) To perform specified audit procedures to help identify instances of non-compliance with other
laws and regulations that may have a material effect on the financial statements; and
(c) To respond appropriately to non-compliance or suspected non-compliance with laws and
regulations identified during the audit.
(ISA (UK) 250A.11)
An audit cannot detect non-compliance with all laws and regulations.
Definition
Non-compliance: Refers to acts of omission or commission by the entity, either intentional or
unintentional, which are contrary to the prevailing laws or regulations. Such acts include transactions
entered into by, or in the name of, the entity, or on its behalf, by those charged with governance,
management or employees. Non-compliance does not include personal misconduct (unrelated to
the business activities of the entity) by those charged with governance, management or employees
of the entity. (ISA (UK) 250A.12)
HB2021

7.2 Responsibility of management for compliance
Management are responsible for ensuring that a client’s operations are conducted in accordance
with laws and regulations.
The following policies and procedures, among others, may assist management in discharging its
responsibilities for the prevention and detection of non-compliance.
• Monitor legal requirements and ensure that operating procedures are designed to meet these
requirements.
• Institute and operate appropriate systems of internal control, including internal audit and an
audit committee.
• Develop, publicise and follow a code of conduct.
• Ensure that employees are properly trained and understand the code of conduct.
• Monitor compliance with the code of conduct and act appropriately to discipline employees who
fail to comply with it.
• Engage legal advisers to assist in monitoring legal requirements.
• Maintain a register of significant laws with which the entity has to comply within its particular
industry and a record of complaints.
7.3 Responsibility of the auditors

The auditor’s responsibilities depend on whether or not the law or regulation has a direct effect on
the financial statements as follows:
“The auditor shall obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance with the
provisions of those laws and regulations generally recognised to have a direct effect on the
determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements.” (ISA (UK) 250A.14)
These laws and regulations may relate to:
• the form and content of financial statements;
• accounting for transactions under government contracts;
• laws determining the circumstances under which a company is prohibited from making a
distribution except out of available profits; and
• laws which require auditors expressly to report non-compliance, such as not keeping proper
records.
For other laws and regulations the auditor is required to perform audit procedures to help identify
instances of non-compliance. Procedures would include inquiring of management and those
charged with governance and inspecting correspondence with relevant licensing or regulatory
authorities.
Specific requirements also apply in the UK, such as those related to tax legislation.
(ISA (UK) 250A.A12–1)
Written representations from management are also important. The standard requires the auditor to
obtain written representations. (ISA (UK) 250A.17)
7.4 Procedures when non-compliance is discovered

The ISA requires the following approach.
If the auditor becomes aware of information concerning an instance of non-compliance or suspected
non-compliance, the auditor shall obtain:
• understanding of the nature of the act and the circumstances in which it has occurred; and
• further information to evaluate the possible effect on the financial statements. (ISA (UK) 250A.19)
When evaluating the possible effect on the financial statements, the auditor should consider:
• the potential financial consequences, such as fines, penalties, damages, threat of expropriation of
assets, enforced discontinuation of operations and litigation;
• whether the potential financial consequences require disclosure; and
• whether the potential financial consequences are so serious as to call into question the true and
fair view (fair presentation) given by the financial statements.
HB2021

If the auditors suspect there may be non-compliance they should discuss the matter with
management and those charged with governance.
Such discussions are subject to the laws concerning ‘tipping off’. If information provided by
management is not satisfactory, the auditor should consult the entity’s lawyer and, if necessary, their
own lawyer on the application of the laws and regulations to the particular circumstances.
7.5 Reporting of non-compliance

7.5.1 To management
ISA (UK) 250A requires the following:
Unless all of those charged with governance are involved in management of the entity, and therefore
are aware of matters involving suspected non-compliance already communicated by the auditor, the
auditor shall communicate with those charged with governance matters involving non-compliance
with laws and regulations that come to the auditor’s attention during the course of the audit, other
than when the matters are clearly inconsequential.
If, in the auditor’s judgement, the non-compliance is believed to be intentional and material, the
auditor shall communicate the matter to those charged with governance as soon as practicable.
If the auditor suspects that management or those charged with governance are involved in non-
compliance, the auditor shall communicate the matter to the next higher level of authority at the
entity, if it exists, such as an audit committee or supervisory board. Where no higher authority exists,
or if the auditor believes that the communication may not be acted upon or is unsure as to the
person to whom to report, the auditor shall consider the need to obtain legal advice.
(ISA (UK) 250A.23–.25)
In the UK, the auditor may report if the non-compliance is believed to be intentional or material. It
does not have to be both. Communication of matters is subject to compliance with legislation
relating to ‘tipping off’.
7.5.2 To the users of the auditor’s report

If the auditor concludes that the non-compliance has a material effect on the financial statements,
and has not been adequately reflected in the financial statements, the auditor shall, in accordance
with ISA(UK) 705, express a qualified opinion or an adverse opinion on the financial statements.
If the auditor is precluded by management or those charged with governance from obtaining
sufficient appropriate audit evidence to evaluate whether non-compliance that may be material to
the financial statements has, or is likely to have, occurred, the auditor shall express a qualified
opinion or disclaim an opinion on the financial statements on the basis of a limitation on the scope of
the audit in accordance with ISA (UK) 705.
If the auditor is unable to determine whether non-compliance has occurred because of limitations
imposed by the circumstances rather than by management or those charged with governance, the
auditor shall evaluate the effect on the auditor’s opinion in accordance with ISA (UK) 705. (ISA (UK)
250A.26–.28)
7.5.3 To regulatory and enforcement authorities

Confidentiality is an issue again here, but it may be overridden by the law, statute or the courts of law.
The auditor should obtain legal advice. If the auditor has a statutory duty to report, a report should
be made without delay.
Alternatively, it may be necessary to make disclosures in the public interest. In practice it will often be
extremely difficult for an auditor to decide whether making a disclosure in the public interest is
warranted. The auditor should obtain professional advice.
7.6 Withdrawal from the engagement

As is the case for fraud or error, withdrawal may be the only option if the entity does not take the
remedial action the auditor thinks is necessary, even for non-material matters.
7.7 Reporting to regulators

In the UK, ISA (UK) 250B (Revised November 2019) Section B, The Auditor’s Statutory Right and Duty
to Report to Regulators of Public Interest Entities and Regulators of Other Entities in the Financial
HB2021

Sector applies. This deals with circumstances where the auditor of an entity subject to statutory
regulation is required to report direct to a regulator information which comes to the auditor’s
attention in the course of the audit work.
The auditor is required to bring matters to the attention of the appropriate regulator when:
(a) the auditor concludes that it is relevant to the regulator’s functions having regard to such matters
as may be specified in statute or any related regulations; and
(b) in the auditor’s opinion there is reasonable cause to believe it is or may be of material
significance to the regulator. (ISA (UK) 250B para.8)
8 Data analytics software used in Corporate

Reporting
The data analytics software (DAS) used in the Corporate Reporting exam will allow you to manipulate
and interrogate data, demonstrating your professional skills, and will form part of Question 1 only.
Advance Information about a company will be issued four weeks before the exam. On the day of the
exam, you will have access to the data in the data analytics software for the same company, this time
for the full 12 months. There will be no changes to the 11 months’ dataset which you will have
already had an opportunity to examine in the Advance Information.
Typically, there will be a total of 15-20 marks in the Corporate Reporting exam for the direct use of
the data analytics software.
8.1 About the ICAEW data analytics software

The DAS contains a series of visualisations which you may be required to interrogate, analyse and
interpret. However, you will not be able to copy visualisations (or any other information) from the
DAS into your answer. It is therefore important that you demonstrate communication skills in your
exam answer to convey your understanding and analysis of the visualisations and data.
The application of the DAS tools to the data may require using key skills including data assimilation,
structuring of data, exercising judgement and applying professional scepticism. These skills may be
needed, for example, to identify and investigate unusual patterns and trends from visualisations
produced by the DAS. Alternatively, they might be needed to identify and investigate a notable, and
potentially high risk, significant transaction of audit interest. Once an unusual trend or notable
transaction has been identified, the nature of the investigations could be to consider the underlying
causes and any audit risks. For example, having found an issue with one transaction, it may be
appropriate to use judgement to widen the search for other similar or related transactions which may
exhibit the same risk.
It might not always be possible to clearly identify the nature and rationale of the notable transaction
or trend. However, the data may enable you to devise questions for management to obtain
information and explanations which would help you to identify key audit risks. In using real company
data and real-world commercial DAS, these skills are intended to replicate and test the knowledge
and understanding used in auditing in the workplace. Applying professional scepticism to the DAS
and to the data is important. For example, where the DAS has analysed data, it is appropriate to
apply professional scepticism to question the validity of that analysed data in the relevant context,
perhaps based on other information provided in the Corporate Reporting exam scenario.
8.2 Practice using DAS by accessing ICAEW learning resources

You will need to be familiar with how the software works and its various functions, and you are
strongly advised to work through the Data Analytics Software Explanatory Guidance Notes. These
notes can be found by visiting icaew.com/corporatereportingdas.
Once you are familiar with how the Data Analytics Software works, we recommend you attempt
Practice Questions 1 and 2. Once you have attempted these, move on to attempt Practice Questions
3 and 4.
Once these are completed, we advise you read through the next section which explains what the
Advance Information will look like and how you should use it to prepare for your exam. This also
includes an illustrative Advance Information with examiner’s commentary.
HB2021

Once you have worked through the walkthrough guide you should attempt Practice Questions 5 and
6. Each of these practice questions has its own Advance Information document which you should
analyse prior to attempting the question.
All Practice Questions are included in the Corporate Reporting Question Bank.
8.3 Advance Information in the Corporate Reporting exam

Note: We advise you attempt practice questions 1-4 before reading this section.
Advance Information for each Corporate Reporting exam session will be released four weeks prior to
the Corporate Reporting exam. The Advance Information comprises of two parts:
(a) An Advance Information document; and
(b) The nominal ledger data for a company for the first 11 months of an accounting period
contained within the DAS.
You should spend time familiarising yourself with both parts of the Advance Information prior to the
exam.
Exam questions contain requirement(s) which may be flagged by the 11 month dataset and/or the
Advance Information document.
8.3.1 DAS 11 month dataset

You should perform analytical procedures on the 11 month dataset. This is achieved by identifying
key account codes that have changed significantly in comparison with the previous year.
The CR Data Analytics Software Explanatory Guidance Notes explain how to do this using the Explore
module and other analytics tools. You can choose to download the Fieldwork Trial Balance to review
the changes in account codes from the previous year. Please note the download function should only
be used when analysing the Advance Information; you will not be able to download anything relating
to the real exam data.
When reviewing the 11 month dataset, these are the types of questions you should ask yourself:
• Has revenue increased?
• Has share capital increased?
• Has a loan been repaid?
• Have intangible assets decreased or PPE increased?
• Has the profit increased or decreased?
You should also examine changes in balances from the previous year in ‘Account View’ and
investigate by drilling down to transactions. You should identify unusual or large transactions using
the analytics tools in the DAS.
Ways you could review the 11 month dataset include:
• In the Explore Module, using the Heat Map to identify high risk transactions;
• In the Explore Module, using the Bump Chart and Tree Map to identify high risk users (eg, if there
has been a large volume of transactions, leavers and starters);
• In the Explore Module, using the Stacked Bar Chart to review the monthly pattern of transaction
values and volumes for key accounts;
• In the Detect Module, identifying large transactions (eg, in key accounts) which may represent
high audit risk;
• In the Revenue Cascade module, examining the exceptions to the normal revenue cycle which
have been highlighted; and
• In the Metrics Module examining data for unusual ratios.
In addition to the quantitative data, there might be narrative information you can gather from the
DAS for the 11 month period. This can be viewed by using the notes icon for an internal note to
another member of the audit team. Alternatively, it might include the discussion icon containing
notes to or from client staff.
HB2021

8.3.2 Advance Information document
The Advance Information document will typically be between 1,500 and 2,000 words in length and
will contain relevant information to help you understand the scenario and become familiar with the
data in the DAS.
The Advance Information will contain the following components.
Component Explanation
The Scenario This will set the scene and explain your role, who you report to and the
current stage of the audit, eg, the planning stage or interim audit.
Background The Advance Information document will explain the business model,
information on the including what the company produces and sells. There could be
company information about its markets or the industry in general if this is relevant
to the exam question. Key accounting policies may also be highlighted.
Organisation chart An organisation chart for the company may be provided to show the roles
performed by the users in the accounting software, their areas of
responsibility within the company, who has joined the company, who has
left and each person’s level of experience.
Extracts from This information could flag up transactions of significant audit interest,
meetings with the which indicate an increase in audit risk. Unlike in the Audit and Assurance
client or from the exam, where the candidate may be directed towards which transaction to
board minutes examine, it is expected that in the Corporate Reporting exam you will use
the analytic tools in the DAS to identify transactions of audit interest
which give rise to audit risk.
A schedule of audit There may be audit issues identified by a junior audit assistant at an
risks or issues interim audit, or audit risks identified during audit planning. This could
include a client’s explanation and the audit assistant’s interpretation.
Having this information in advance enables you to interrogate the data for
similar transactions and to think about the possible risks for the financial
reporting of those transactions.
An analysis of an The Advance Information document could include an analysis of an

account account code. You could use this information to help identify the key
audit risks for the company.
Extracts from the This could be financial or non-financial information to indicate, for
draft annual report example, a governance or sustainability issue.
Key transactions The Advance Information document may contain key transactions and
balances. Background research should be carried out on the financial
reporting treatment of these transactions and balances and any audit
risks typically arising from them.
Importantly, the information contained in the Advance Information
document is intended to direct you to the relevant areas in the DAS to
enable interrogation and understanding of the data and technical areas
before the exam.
8.3.3 The exam: Question 1 and the 12 months’ dataset

In the exam, you will have access to the dataset in the DAS for the same company for the full 12
months. There will be no changes to the 11 month dataset which you will have reviewed in advance
of the exam.
The exam question requirements could be linked to the Advance Information but may also relate to
new information provided in the exam. The following are some potential exam approaches:
• More information could be provided about a transaction identified in the Advance Information
document. The question could then, for example, ask for audit risks, audit procedures and/or the
financial reporting treatment.
HB2021

• A new or similar transaction could be introduced. This could either be identified in the exam
question or you could be expected to find the transaction in month 12 of the DAS. The exam
question could ask for audit implications and/or financial reporting implications.
• The exam could introduce a change in accounting policy, estimate or accounting treatment or a
change in the business model described in the Advance Information document; eg, the company
might have entered into a new sales contract under different terms requiring different recognition
criteria.
• You could be asked to carry out analytical procedures on an identified area of the financial
statements to identify audit risks about transactions from the data in the DAS. This could be from
transactions in both the first 11 months and the previously unseen month 12.
• There will usually be an unseen financial reporting issue or audit issue not highlighted specifically
either by the Advance Information document or by a transaction or balance in the 11 month
dataset within the DAS.
• There could be transactions not included in the 12 month DAS. These could include an event after
the reporting period (IAS 10), which may be adjusting or non-adjusting, relating to an impairment
or a future loan transaction. In an audit context, there could be information related to subsequent
events.
The above is not an exhaustive list but is intended to give guidance on the types of transactions,
balances and issues that may occur in the Corporate Reporting exam.
8.4 Elephant Ltd: Walkthrough of the Advance Information

The next section of this document will walk you through the structure of the Advance Information
document for Elephant Ltd. Elephant Ltd is the practice dataset that you will have used when working
through the guidance notes and practice questions.
The 11 month dataset for Elephant can be found here:
https://icaew22.inflosoftware.com/redirect/exam?code=ALCRMOCK22AI
This walkthrough will show an indicative structure of the Advance Information and how it could link
to potential exam requirements.
A version of this Advance Information will be used for the two exam standard practice questions (5
and 6) and for one of each of the Corporate Reporting mock exam questions.
8.4.1 Walkthrough of Advance Information

The following is a walkthrough of the Advance Information for Elephant Limited. Take your time to
carefully go through each part.
Assume that the current date is 15 December 2018.
Examiner comment
The DAS uses the data for Elephant Ltd for the year ended 31 December 2018 – it has therefore
been necessary to use an assumed date in the learning materials. In the mock/practice exam
question, you will be told to assume a date after the year end.
In the real Corporate Reporting exam, a different company will be used, and the data will be
available for the relevant accounting year-end. The Advance Information and/or the exam
question may also require you to assume a current date.
This Advance Information relates only to Question 1 of the Corporate Reporting exam.
The Advance Information comprises:
• This document which includes the scenario, background information (Exhibit A) and a schedule of
audit issues (Exhibit B); and
• The nominal ledger data for Elephant Ltd (Elephant) for the 11 months ended 30 November
2018, contained within the Data Analytics Software.
Exam – 12 month dataset
During the Corporate Reporting exam, you will be provided with the nominal ledger data for
Elephant for the full 12 months ended 31 December 2018 contained within the Data Analytics
HB2021

Software. You will need to address the new data for the month of December 2018 and to consider
the data, patterns and trends for the year ended 31 December 2018 as a whole.
The data for the 11 months to 30 November 2018 remains valid for the exam and will be unchanged.
However, in the exam, you will not be able to access the Data Analytics Software data for the 11
months to 30 November 2018 or any notes you have made in the Data Analytics Software for the 11
months to 30 November 2018.
Examiner comment
This introduction will be similar to the introduction for the exams in July 2022 and November
2022.
Scenario
You are an audit senior working for Lister LLP, a firm of ICAEW Chartered Accountants. You have just
been assigned to the audit of Elephant Ltd for the year ending 31 December 2018.
Elephant prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. In September 2018, an audit plan
was prepared by an audit manager who has now left the firm. The manager was assisted by Helen
Holden, an audit assistant. You have just been assigned as the audit senior on the audit of Elephant
and receive the following email from the newly appointed audit engagement manager, Jake Moore.
Examiner comment
As with all Corporate Reporting exam questions, your role in the audit team is relevant to the
scenario. There have been changes on the audit team and you should be alert to the fact that the
work of an audit assistant may have been poorly supervised. You need to recognise who they are
reporting to and that it is not the examiner talking to them, but an actor in the question.
From: Jake Moore

Date: December 2018
To: Audit Senior
The client requires an early sign-off of the audit report as Elephant will be seeking finance from the
bank. We have carried out an audit planning visit. During the visit, the client provided Lister with data
for the 11 months ended 30 November 2018 from Elephant’s nominal ledger. This has been
imported into the Data Analytics Software used by Lister.
The final audit visit is now scheduled for January 2019 and I would like you to act as audit senior.
Examiner comment
Note the pressure from the bank; potential directions for the exam question could be an audit
going concern review or financial reporting issues around a loan.
As part of the audit plan, Helen prepared some background information and system notes for
invoice financing (Exhibit A) and a matter which she has discussed with the client (Exhibit B). I have
not had chance to review this matter just yet.
Examiner comment
Helen is an audit assistant, and you need to apply professional scepticism to the information she
has produced as there has been little oversight by the audit manager.
Before the final audit commences in January 2019, I would like you to familiarise yourself with
Elephant by reviewing:
(a) The background information (Exhibit A) and matters discussed with the client prepared by Helen
(Exhibit B); and
(b) The nominal ledger data for Elephant for the 11 months ended 30 November 2018, contained
within the Data Analytics Software.
HB2021

Examiner comment
You should refer to the suggestions (section 8.3.2 above) for things to look for in the 11 month
data, eg, performing analytical procedures on the financial statements in the 11 month data,
identifying key account codes which have changed significantly in comparison with the previous
year, identifying key transactions using the methods described above.
Exhibit A: Background information – prepared by Helen Holden, September 2018

I had a meeting with Frank Wright to discuss the company and significant events during the year. I
have summarised below the key points from my meeting.
Elephant provides marketing services, mainly to digital businesses based in the UK (domestic) and
the rest of Europe (overseas). Customers sign a contract with Elephant for the provision of a specific
project. Each project is short term, up to two months.
Elephant contracts with customers to deliver short-term marketing projects. Customers are invoiced
and revenue is recognised when the customer signs to confirm their acceptance of a completed
project. International customers are sometimes invoiced in their local currency.
A typical marketing contract will comprise a contract price for design artwork and concept and brand
development. In addition, the contract will specify the selling price for promotional products such as
banners, posters and marketing gifts (eg, pens, key rings etc). The price is calculated based on the
quantity ordered by the customer.
Examiner comment
This information flags revenue recognition as an issue for this company; IFRS 15 is a pervasive
standard for nearly all audits. In the exam there could therefore be issues with revenue
recognition or a new contract/sales agreement; also note the reference to international sales and
therefore potentially IAS 21 issues.
It is common in the advertising industry to buy services from customers. For example, in 2018,
Elephant had a contract to provide art and design work for a website developer and, in turn, the
website developer provided website services to Elephant.
Examiner comment
Such a transaction is clearly of significant audit interest; it has implications for revenue recognition
and for the potential capitalisation of intangible assets.
How should you prepare?
Using the Explore Module (Stacked Bar Chart or Heat Map), Revenue Cascade Module or Detect
Module, you should identify in advance that there has been an unusual transaction posted to
Account code 13020 Office Equipment (see Transaction SRC006972) and consider the potential
implications of this transaction for audit risk and financial reporting.
£
DEBIT Account code 13020 – Office Equipment 95,000
CREDIT Account code 61060 Photography 20,000
CREDIT Receivables – Dream Digital Ltd 75,000
Costs are incurred by Elephant for each contract, including payroll and cost of sales for promotional
products. Also, a large element of cost of sales is in respect of travel, accommodation, motor vehicle
costs and consumables. Travel and accommodation mainly relate to expense claims from Elephant
staff arising from visiting clients.
Examiner comment
This section identifies the main cost drivers for this business. Payroll is clearly going to be an
important cost for an advertising agency. The internal controls over expenses are also important.
HB2021

The Elephant board is keen to expand rapidly and is under pressure to present a good result to the
bank for the year ending 31 December 2018. The company seems to be achieving this and the draft
statement of profit or loss shows that both profit and revenue have increased compared with the year
ended 31 December 2017.
Examiner comment
There is a clear incentive for creative accounting – you should interrogate the 11 month dataset to
find supporting evidence.
Use Explore module, Financial Statement View; or download Fieldwork TB for an overview and to
identity changes.
Use Explore module, Account View to drill down into the accounts and find large and/or unusual
transactions, or the Bump Chart to identify unusual postings by time of day, individual etc.
Elephant uses invoice financing for short-term finance, but this is expensive. The company intends to
obtain a bank loan in 2019 to finance expansion and to reduce the need to use invoice financing in
future. The bank will rely, in part, on the financial statements for the year ending 31 December 2018
in making its loan decision.
Examiner comment
This is a complex transaction and giving this information in advance affords the opportunity to
understand the double entry in the DAS.
Use Explore Account View to examine the transactions in Account code 20021 Invoice Finance
account to ensure that they understand the double entry – this issue is flagged again in the exhibit
below.
You are expected to identify the relevant accounts in the DAS and find out how the client records
the cash received from the finance company, ie, understand the double entry; see below.
Set out below are the members of the accounts department at Elephant (users) and their roles.
Frank Wright
Finance director
Andrea Bloggs
Financial accountant
Tanya Potts John Smith Emma Davids

Accounts assistant Accounts assistant Accounts assistant
Joined March 2018
Figure 1.5: Organisation roles for key members of accounts staff
Steve Thompson, an accounts assistant, left in January 2018 and was replaced by Emma Davids.
Examiner comment
Why is the information included?
The organisation chart is useful to give an understanding of the experience of the client’s
accounting staff (called ‘users’ in the DAS).
In a small company such as Elephant, it is not unusual that individuals will be posting entries on all
aspects of the nominal ledger.
HB2021

In a larger company, individuals may have specific roles and responsibilities.
The chart is also helpful to highlight starters and leavers, who may increase audit risk.
Exam focus
The new starter may be unfamiliar with the processes, thus records transactions incorrectly in the
final month, which increases the audit risk.
Using the DAS Detect Module, you should identify unusual transactions posted by a user outside
of their normal role.
You can confirm starters and leavers by using the Detect module in the DAS and identify unusual
or large transactions posted by them. This can also be done in the Bump Chart.
Frank Wright – Accounting department manager and finance director

Frank is an ICAEW Chartered Accountant and has worked at Elephant since 2016. As Elephant is a
small company, he is closely involved with recording all types of transactions on a day-to-day basis.
Frank prepares budgets for Elephant and negotiates loans and contracts on behalf of the Elephant
board.
Frank is the only member of the accounting department who is a qualified ICAEW Chartered
Accountant. If a member of the accounting department is unsure about how to record a transaction,
it is normally recorded in Account code 00990 Suspense account. Frank later corrects the entries by
raising a journal and clears the suspense account.
Examiner comment
This section tells you that Frank has considerable control over recording of transactions – and that
segregation of duties and management override are audit risks.
It brings your attention to the suspense account which may be missed because it is a zero balance
at the year end.
Account code 00990 – Suspense account should be examined.
Although the Suspense account is zero at the end of the period, there are some interesting
transactions which appear to debit Account code 13010 Office Equipment – see transaction
62458 and 61350 – which would lead you to review asset additions and discover the transaction
SRC006972 noted above.
Exam focus
The client is under pressure to report increased profits. Capitalising expenses incorrectly is a very
easy method of creative accounting, although possibly fraudulent, to achieve this. There are
different ways this could be developed in the exam question. For example, these could be, inter
alia:
• A transaction introduced into month 12 for further capitalised costs on a different asset
account – you could be asked to explain the incorrect treatment and recommend appropriate
adjustments.
• A transaction to test the correct capitalisation of development costs.
• Impairment indicators given in the exam question scenario.
• A barter transaction – cross selling of services and revenue recognition issue.
Andrea Bloggs – Financial accountant

Andrea has worked for Elephant for two years. She previously worked in the purchase ledger
department for a large manufacturing company. She is very competent at posting invoices for
purchases and cash entries. She has less experience in posting entries for sales invoices and credit
notes but does sometimes assist in recording these types of transactions. She reconciles the bank
statement monthly.
HB2021

Examiner comment
This highlights a potential audit risk around Andrea’s recording of sales invoices.
Tanya Potts – Accounts assistant

Tanya prepares the payroll together with John Smith. She also helps with sales ledger and purchase
ledger transactions.
John Smith – Accounts assistant
John prepares the payroll together with Tanya Potts. He also helps with sales ledger and purchase
ledger transactions.
System note for invoice financing
The carrying amount of the trade receivables includes receivables which are subject to an invoice
financing arrangement. Elephant uses an invoice finance company, Close Real Debt Ltd (CRD). Under
this arrangement, Elephant Ltd transfers the relevant receivables to the invoice finance company in
exchange for cash. Elephant Ltd transfers late payment risk and credit risk to the invoice finance
company. Trade receivables are shown net of invoice financing loans in the statement of financial
position.
Under the terms of the agreement with CRD, Elephant identifies customer invoices for finance from
CRD. Although Elephant performs credit checks on all its customers, CRD also carries out credit
checks and confirms to Elephant which invoices it is accepting for finance.
When the invoice is accepted by CRD, Elephant transfers the invoice to the invoice finance account
(Account code 20021). CRD pays Elephant the invoice amount less a fee based on the amount of the
sales invoices transferred. Elephant can draw cash down from CRD up to the amount of invoices
accepted by CRD. CRD charges interest on these advances.
CRD is responsible for collecting the amount owing from the receivable. This is a non-recourse
agreement and CRD has no right to return the receivable to Elephant. Therefore, the risk of non-
payment by the receivable is with CRD.
Elephant Ltd therefore derecognises the transferred receivable assets in their entirety in its statement
of financial position.
Examiner comment
This is complex arrangement, and the Advance Information gives you the opportunity in the 11
month dataset to familiarise yourself with the double entry and ensure that the accounting entries
support the system note prepared by the audit junior.
You should think about the financial reporting issues surrounding invoice financing. Which
accounting standards are relevant? How should the finance be presented on the statement of
financial position?
You should ensure that you understand the double entry and follow through the junior’s system
note by summarising the entries in the DAS by writing down the journal entries:
DEBIT Account code 20021 – Invoice finance account
CREDIT Account code 21010 – Receivables
Being journal to derecognise the trade receivable.

On receipt of cash from CRD, the following journal is processed:
DEBIT Account code 20010 – Bank Account
CREDIT Account code 20021 – Invoice finance account
Being cash received from the finance company.
HB2021

DEBIT Account code 76010 – Bank charges and interest
CREDIT Account code 20021 – Invoice finance account
Being finance and factoring charges.

Exam focus
There are different ways these issues could be developed in the exam question. For example:
• An error in recording the invoice finance in month 12.
• A change in the agreement with CRD from non-recourse to with recourse – leading to the need
for an increase in the trade receivables allowance – this has IFRS 9 implications.
• Frank could have arranged a loan from CRD, and this has been incorrectly recognised and/or
not authorised by the board.
• The payments could be fraudulently received – Frank may have a relative working at CRD, and
they might be operating in collusion. This is therefore a related party issue.
Exhibit B: Matter discussed with the client – prepared by Helen Holden, 16 December 2018
Account code 22200 Accrued income £170,294
This amount is a brought forward balance on Account code 22200 and it is still recognised at 30
November 2018. A file note on last year’s audit file states that there was a problem with raising
invoices for a customer. This is because Elephant carried out work under a special contract with a
European customer. At 31 December 2017, Tanya was unsure about how much to invoice the
customer and how to record the invoices.
Andrea informed me that invoices totalling £170,294 were raised in September 2018 for this
customer which related to sales and services provided in the year ended December 2017. The
invoices which are classified as Account code 54800 Other income will be recorded in the nominal
ledger with an effective date in December 2018.
During the final audit, I recommend that we confirm that there is a zero balance on the Account code
22200 at 31 December 2018. Otherwise, we may need to recommend an audit adjustment.
Examiner comment
This information informs you that Elephant has substantial contracts with some international
companies for services potentially outside of the normal business model. Also, that the client’s
staff are inexperienced at this type of transaction.
The second paragraph indicates that there is an audit risk around cut-off. Work can be performed,
and invoices raised 9 months later.
There is a further control or systems risk because invoices can be raised and not entered in the
system until a much later date.
It also flags up that the audit junior has identified that the accrual should be released but has
missed the point about there being possibly other transactions in the year for this type of issue
and that testing cut-off at the year-end will be a key audit risk.
In the 11 month data, you can check that the balance is stated as the junior suggests. You should
search for any similar transactions by examining large sales invoices.
Exam focus
There are several exam approaches around revenue recognition and cut-off which could be
introduced in the exam question:
• Another transaction in the DAS indicating cut-off.
• A transaction omitted from the DAS.
• A new contract with IFRS 15 recognition issues.
HB2021

8.5 Summary of Advance Information and dataset held in the DAS
• Use a combination of information from both sources:
– information in the Advance Information document; and
– data held in the DAS.
• Consider both ‘big picture’ (financial statement line-item level) and ‘small picture’ (transaction
level).
• Understand the double entry in the software of any transactions or balances identified to you in
the Advance Information document.
• Remember this is real data and not all transactions are immediately understandable – ‘obtain
information and explanations from management’ is often a reasonable audit procedure in this
case.
• Do not waste time down ‘rabbit warrens’ – keep perspective of what’s important and use the
scenario and background information to guide you on where to dig deeper into the data.
• Use specific references made to dates, people, customers/suppliers given in the Advance
Information document.
• Identify events that make transactions riskier (eg, system or personnel changes).
• Investigate areas that are likely to be more subjective.
• Review transactions for individuals that pose a risk due to bias, fraud, etc.
• State the obvious (eg, ‘heatmap shows a number of high-risk transactions’) but follow up on the
obvious.
Remember:
• The examiner will not mark the DAS – it is therefore important to describe transactions and
methods in your answer to the exam question.
• You cannot copy from the DAS into your exam script.
HB2021

Summary
Corporate Reporting
Financial Reporting Audit Assurance Ethics
Financial Analysis
Audit
Statutory Auditing
audit standards
Legal International standards Clarity Laws and

responsibilities on auditing Project regulations
Purpose of ISAs
Directors Auditors
Set by IAASB
and FRC
• Enhanced Opinion Apply to audit

shareholder
and assurance
value
work
• Transactions
with
Quality control
company
standards – ISQC 1
Standards are Sections of

required at: ISQC1
Firm
level • Leadership
• Ethics
Audit • Clients
level • HR
• Engagements
• Monitoring
HB2021

1 Knowledge diagnostic
Before you move on to question practice, complete the following knowledge diagnostic and check
you are able to confirm you possess the following essential learning from this chapter. If not, you are
advised to revisit the relevant learning from the topic indicated.
Confirm your learning
1. Do you understand what is meant by the term ‘corporate reporting’?
2. Can you remember the various phases of an audit and explain what each one is for?
3. Can you distinguish between the responsibilities of directors and auditors?
4. Can you discuss current issues that affect both corporate reporting and auditing right
now?
5. Can you describe and explain the various quality control mechanisms that should be
present in an audit firm?
6. Do you know how to report various instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations
and to whom this reporting should be directed?
7. Have you understood how the Data Analytics Software works by accessing all the practice
resources available online?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Question Learning benefit from attempting this question
LaFa plc This is useful practice for you in two ways: firstly, it is testing your
knowledge of the subject matter on quality control which you need to
understand, and secondly, it is presented in the form of a scenario which
you will need to apply your knowledge to. Don’t forget the auditing
standards open book.
Bee5 You can test your understanding of the audit approach by applying what
you have learned to this short scenario. What changes might cause you
concern?
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
Vacance plc Sometimes the question contains so much information it is difficult to know
where to start. Use this question to practise interrogating the exhibits for
matters that relate to the audit quality on show.
Newpenny Exhibit 1 asks for a change to the audit approach. Do you think this is a
good idea?
HB2021

Jupiter Consider the issue of non-compliance with laws and regulations from
Exhibit 3 – what are the potential implications of this for the audit?
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
BEIS (2021) Restoring trust in audit and corporate governance: proposals on reforms. [Online].
Available from: https://www.gov.uk/government/consultations/restoring-trust-in-audit-and-
corporate-governance-proposals-on-reforms [Accessed 11 June 2021].
Doherty, R. (10 April 2019) Brydon lays out scope of audit review. Economia. [Online]. Available from:
https://economia.icaew.com/news/april-2019/brydon-lays-out-scope-of-audit-review [Accessed 12
October 2021].
FRC (2018) Audit culture thematic review: Firms’ activities to establish, promote and embed a culture
that is committed to delivering consistently high quality audits. [Online]. Available from:
www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/2f8d6070-e41b-4576-9905-4aeb7df8dd7e/Audit-Culture-Thematic-
Review.pdf [Accessed 12 October 2021].
FRC (2020) Annual enforcement review 2020. [Online]. Available from:
https://www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/d299042a-f14f-40eb-8889-7b44818cf53b/Annual-
Enforcement-Review.pdf [Accessed 10 June 2021].
FRC (2020) Consultation and impact assessment: proposal to review the UK’s quality management
standards. [Online]. Available from: https://www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/12992998-ba86-4029-
90c9-df1b0495b6bc/ISQM-Impact-Assessment.pdf [Accessed 10 June 2021]
FRC (2020) Developments in audit 2020. [Online]. Available from:
https://www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/58ac503e-a547-4f9e-8e52-16c7f5355586/Developments-in-
Audit-2020.pdf [Accessed 10 June 2021]
IAASB (2019) The IAASB’s Exposure Drafts for Quality Management at the Firm and Engagement
Level, Including Engagement Quality Reviews. [Online] Available at:
https://www.ifac.org/system/files/publications/files/IAASB-Covering-Explanatory-Memorandum.pdf
[Accessed 12 October 2021]
Kingman, J. (2018) Independent Review of the Financial Reporting Council. London, The Stationery
Office.
1 What is financial reporting?

• Financial reporting is the provision of financial information about a reporting entity that is useful
to existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors in making decisions about
providing resources to the entity.
Corporate reporting is a broader concept, which covers other reports, such as audit or
environmental reports – Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting (OB2)
• Financial statements comprise statement of financial position, statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income, statement of changes in equity, statement of cash flows and notes. – IAS
1 (10)
2 Purpose and use of financial statements

• Users’ core need is for information for making economic decisions. – Concept Frame (OB2)
• Objective is to provide information on financial position (the entity’s economic resources and the
claims against it) and about transactions and other events that change those resources and
claims. – Concept Frame (OB12)
• Financial position: – Concept Frame (OB13)
– Resources and claims
– Help identify entity’s strengths and weaknesses
– Liquidity and solvency
• Changes in economic resources and claims: – Concept Frame (OB15-16)
– Help assess prospects for future cash flows
– How well have management made efficient and effective use of the resources
• Financial performance reflected by accrual accounting. – Concept Frame (OB17)
HB2021

• Financial performance reflected by past cash flows. – Concept Frame (OB20)
3 ISA 200
• Purpose of an audit – ISA 200.3
• General principles of an audit – ISA 200.14–.24
4 ISQC 1
• Objective – ISQC 1.11
• Elements of a system of quality control – ISQC 1.16–.16-2
• Importance of documenting procedures – ISQC 1.17
• Leadership – ISQC 1.18–.19
• Ethical requirements – ISQC 1.20–.20-1
• Independence – ISQC 1.21–.21-1
• Acceptance and continuance – ISQC 1.26
• Human resources – ISQC 1.29–.29-2
• Engagement performance – ISQC 1.32–.32-1
• Monitoring – ISQC 1.48–.48-3
5 ISA 230
• Purposes of audit documentation. – ISA 230.2–.3
• Should enable an experienced auditor to understand the procedures performed, the results and
evidence obtained and significant matters identified. – ISA 230.8–.8-1
• Auditors must document discussions of significant matters with management. – ISA 230.10
• Inconsistencies regarding significant matters must be documented. – ISA 230.11
• Departures from relevant requirements in ISAs must be documented. – ISA 230.12
• The identity of the preparer and reviewer must be documented. – ISA 230.9
6 ISA 250
• Categories of laws and regulations – ISA 250A.6
• Objectives – ISA 250A.11 & ISA 250B.8
• Auditor’s responsibilities – ISA 250A.13–.14
• Reporting – ISA 250A.23
HB2021

Self-test questions
Answer the following questions.
1 Performance and position

Explain the terms ‘performance’ and ‘position’, and identify which of the financial statements will
assist the user in evaluating performance and position.
2 LaFa plc
The WTR audit firm has 15 partners and 61 audit staff. The firm has offices in three cities in one
country and provides a range of audit, assurance, tax and advisory services. Clients range from sole
traders requiring assistance with financial statement production to a number of small plcs – although
none is a quoted company.
LaFa plc is one of WTR’s largest clients. Due to the retirement of the engagement partner from ill
health last year, LaFa has been appointed a new engagement partner. WTR provides audit services
as well as preparation of taxation computations and some advisory work on the maintenance of
complicated costing and inventory management systems. The audit and other services engagement
this year was agreed on the same fee as the previous year, although additional work is required on
the audit of some development expenditure which had not been included in LaFa’s financial
statements before. Information on the development expenditure will be made available a few days
before audit completion ‘due to difficulties with cost identification’ as stated by the Finance Director
of LaFa. LaFa’s management were insistent that WTR could continue to provide a similar level of
service for the same fee.
Part way through the audit of WTR, Mr W, WTR’s quality control partner, resigned to take up a
position as Finance Director in SoTee plc, LaFa’s parent company. SoTee is audited by a different firm
of auditors. Mr W has not yet been replaced, as the managing board of WTR has yet to identify a
suitable candidate. Part of the outstanding work left by Mr W was the implementation of a system of
ethical compliance for all assurance staff whereby they would confirm in writing adherence to the
ICAEW Code of Ethics and confirm lack of any ethical conflict arising from the code.
Requirement
Identify and explain the risks which will affect the quality control of the audit of LaFa. Suggest how
the risks identified can be reduced.
3 Bee5
You are the audit manager in charge of the audit of Bee5, a construction company. The client is
considered to be low risk; control systems are generally good and your assurance firm, Sheridan &
Co, has normally assisted in the production of the financial statements providing some additional
assurance of the accuracy and completeness of the statements.
During the initial planning meeting with the client you learn that a new Finance Director has been
appointed and that Bee5 will produce the financial statements this year; the services of your firm’s
accounts department will therefore not be required. However, Bee5 has requested significant
assurance work relating to a revision of its internal control systems. The current accounting software
has become less reliable (increased processing time per transaction and some minor data loss due
to inadequate field sizes). The client will replace this software with the new Leve system in the next
financial year but requires advice on amending its control systems ready for this upgrade.
Requirement
Discuss the impact on the audit approach for Bee5 from the above information. Make specific
reference to any quality control issues that will affect the audit.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
HB2021

Answer to Interactive question 1

Where IFRS allows a choice of accounting policy, directors may wish to select the policy that gives
the most favourable picture, rather than the one which is most useful to users of financial statements.
For example, they may wish to adopt the direct, rather than the indirect, method of preparing a
statement of cash flows if they believe that gives a more favourable view of the company’s liquidity
and solvency in the eyes of a lender, such as a bank. Auditors need to be on the lookout for this kind
of manipulation.

Several quality control issues are raised in the scenario.
Engagement partner
An engagement partner is usually appointed to each audit engagement undertaken by the firm, to
take responsibility for the engagement on behalf of the firm. Assigning the audit to the experienced
audit manager is not sufficient.
The lack of audit engagement partner also means that several of the requirements of ISA (UK) 220
about ensuring that arrangements in relation to independence and directing, supervising and
reviewing the audit are not in place.
Conflicting views
In this scenario the audit manager and senior have conflicting views about the valuation of inventory.
This does not appear to have been handled well, with the manager refusing to discuss the issue with
the senior.
ISA (UK) 220 requires that the audit engagement partner takes responsibility for settling disputes in
accordance with the firm’s policy in respect of resolution of disputes required by ISQC (UK) 1. In this
case, the lack of engagement partner may have contributed to this failure to resolve the disputes. In
any event, at best, the failure to resolve the dispute is a breach of the firm’s policy under ISQC (UK) 1.
At worst, it indicates that the firm does not have a suitable policy concerning such disputes as
required by ISQC (UK) 1.

3.1 Working papers are necessary for the following reasons:
• To assist the engagement team to plan and perform the audit
• To assist members of the engagement team responsible for supervision to direct and
supervise the audit procedures, and to discharge their review responsibilities in accordance
with ISA (UK) 220
• To enable the engagement team to be accountable for its work
• As a record of matters of continuing significance to future audits
• To enable the conduct of quality control reviews and inspections in accordance with ISQC
(UK) 1
• To enable the conduct of external inspections in accordance with applicable legal,
regulatory or other requirements
HB2021

3.2 Information/reasons
Information Reasons
(1) Administration
Client name Enables an organised file to be produced

Year end
Title
Date prepared Enables papers to be traced if lost
Initials of preparer Any questions can be addressed to the

appropriate person
Seniority of preparer is indicated
Initials of senior to indicate review of junior’s Evidence that guidance on planning,

work controlling and recording is being followed
Evidence of adherence to auditing standards
(2) Planning
Summary of different models of TVs and Blu- Enables auditor to familiarise himself with
ray players held and the approximate value different types of inventory lines
of each
Summary of different types of raw material

held and method of counting small
components
Summary of different stages of WIP

identified by client
Time and place of count Audit team will not miss the count
Personnel involved Auditor aware who to address questions/

problems to
Copy of client’s inventory count instructions Enables an initial assessment of the likely
and an assessment of them reliability of Viewco’s count
Assists in determining the amount of
procedures audit team need to do
Enables compliance work to be carried out;
that is, checking Viewco staff follow the
instructions
Plan of warehouse To ensure all areas covered at count

Clear where to find different
models/components
Location of any third party/moving inventory
clear
Details of any known old or slow moving Special attention can be given to these at
lines count; for example, include in test counts
Scope of test counts to be performed that is, Ensures appropriate amount of procedures
number/value of items to be counted and performed based on initial assessment
method of selection. For Viewco probably Clear plan for audit team
more counting of higher value finished
goods
HB2021

Information Reasons
(3) Objectives of attendance; that is, to Reporting partner can confirm if

ensure that the quantity and quality of appropriate/adequate procedures
inventory to be reflected in the financial performed
statements is materially accurate
(4) Details of procedures performed Provides evidence for future reference and
documents adherence to auditing standards
(a) Details of controls testing procedures Enables reporting partner to review the
performed – observing Viewco’s counters adequacy of the procedures and establish
and ensuring they are following the whether it meets the stated objective
instructions and conducting the count
effectively, for example:
• Note of whether the area was
systematically tidied
• Note of whether or how counted
goods are marked
Enable reassessment of likely reliability of

Viewco’s count
Enables assessment of chances of items
being double-counted or omitted
Note of how Viewco records and segregates

any goods still moving on count day
Note of adequacy of supervision and Enables assessment of overall standard of

general impression of counters count and hence likely accuracy
Note whether counters are in teams of two Evidence of independent checks may
and whether any check counts are enhance reliability
performed
(b) Details of substantive procedures

performed:
Details of items of raw materials or finished
goods test counted:
From physical inventory to client’s count Evidence to support the accuracy and
sheet completeness of Viewco’s count sheets
From Viewco’s count sheets to physical Evidence to support the existence of

inventory inventory recorded by Viewco
For both of the above note inventory code,

description, number of units and quality. Use
a symbol to indicate agreement with
Viewco’s records
Details of review for any old/obsolete Details can be followed up at final audit and
inventory, for example dusty/damaged the net realisable value investigated
boxes. Note code, description, number of
units and problem
Details of review of WIP
Assessment of volume of part complete Evidence in support of accuracy of quantity

items of each stage of WIP
Assessment of appropriateness of degree of Details can be followed through at final audit
completion assigned to each stage by to final inventory sheets
Viewco (could describe items at various
HB2021

Information Reasons
stages) Basis for discussion of any description
Copies of: Enables follow up at final audit to ensure cut-

• Last few despatch notes off is correct; that is, goods despatched are
reflected as sales, goods received as
• Last few goods received notes purchases and items in WIP are not also in
• Last few material requisitions raw materials and finished goods
• Last few receipts to finished goods
Copies of client’s inventory count sheets Enables follow up at final audit to ensure that
(where number makes this practical) Viewco’s final sheets are intact and no
alterations have occurred
(5) Summary of results Senior/manager can assess any

In particular: consequences for audit risk and strategy and
decide any further procedures needed
• Details of any problems
encountered Provides full documentation of issues that
could require a judgemental decision and
• Details of any test count could ultimately be the basis for a qualified
discrepancies and notes of opinion
investigation into their causes
• Details of any representations by the
management of Viewco
(6) Conclusion Indicates whether or not the initial objective

The auditor will state their overall audit has been met and whether there are any
conclusions from the procedures completed. implications for the audit opinion

Explanation as follows:
• Has the work been performed in accordance with the audit programme?
The non-current asset procedure of agreeing non-current asset details from the asset register to
the actual asset is to confirm the existence of the asset – in other words, that the asset should be
included in the register. Agreeing physical asset details back to the register tests for the assertion
of completeness, not existence; that is, all assets that should be recorded in the register are
recorded – not that assets in the register do exist. The audit procedure has therefore not been
completed in accordance with the audit programme.
I recommend that the existence test is completed as specified. However, where physical existence
of the asset cannot be determined by seeing the asset, then alternative evidence such as the log
book is obtained.
• Have the work performed and the results obtained been adequately documented?
Adequate documentation normally means that written representations by management are
recorded in writing, either in a paper document or through use of email or other electronic
communication system that can be traced back to the client. Regarding the completeness of non-
current assets, it is unclear how the representation from the director was received – although it
appears that this was only verbal. The difficulty with verbal evidence is that it can be disputed at a
later date.
I recommend that the director’s representation is obtained in writing.
• Have any significant matters been resolved or are reflected in audit conclusions?
The fact that some vehicles were found obviously not in working order is cause for concern. While
your primary task was satisfying the assertions of existence and completeness, where assets are
obviously unusable, this fact needs to be recorded. The issue is that assets may well be
overvalued in the financial statements; in practice the asset values need to be compared to the
HB2021

carrying amounts in the asset register and, where the asset will no longer be used, complete
write-off or disposal considered.
While no further action may be necessary on completeness and existence, I recommend that you
prepare a list of the assets which are in a poor state of repair so additional valuation procedures
can be performed on them.
• Have the objectives of the audit procedures been achieved?
As already noted, the objectives of audit procedures have not been achieved. There is still
insufficient evidence to confirm the existence and completeness of non-current assets.
I recommend that the procedures you were carrying out are completed as detailed in the audit
programme.
• Are the conclusions expressed consistent with the results of the work performed and do they
support the audit opinion?
The conclusion on the assertions of completeness and existence is incorrect. Your memo states
that assets were correctly stated and valued.
The point is not valid for two reasons.
First, audit procedures have not been completed correctly (see the point on completeness testing
for example) which means that the assertion of completeness cannot be confirmed.
Second, the audit procedures carried out do not relate to the valuation of those assets. Valuation
procedures include the auditing of depreciation and not simply ascertaining the condition of
those assets at the end of the reporting period.
I recommend that when audit procedures are complete that the conclusion is amended to match
the assertions being audited.
HB2021

1 Performance and position

Performance
The financial performance of a company comprises the return it obtains on the resources it controls.
Performance can be measured in terms of the profits and comprehensive income of the company
and its ability to generate cash flows.
Management will be assessed on their skill in achieving the highest level of performance, given the
resources available to them.
Information on performance can be found in:
• the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income;
• the statement of changes in equity; and
• the statement of cash flows.
Position
The financial position of the company is evaluated by reference to:
• its economic resources and claims;
• its capital structure ie, its level of debt finance and shareholders’ funds; and
• its liquidity and solvency.
The user of the financial statements can then make assessments on the level of risk, ability to
generate cash, the likely distribution of this cash and the ability of the company to adapt to changing
circumstances.
The statement of financial position is the prime source of information on a company’s position but
the statement of cash flows will also indicate a company’s cash position over a period of time.
2 LaFa plc
Culture of WTR
The quality control auditing standard, ISQC (UK) 1, requires that the firm implements policies such
that the internal culture of the firm is one where quality is considered essential. Such a culture must
be inspired by the leaders of the firm, who must sell this culture in their actions and messages. In
other words, the entire business strategy of the audit firm should be driven by the need for quality in
its operations.
In the WTR audit firm, there appears to be a lack of leadership on quality control. Two issues give rise
for concern:
(1) First, the partner in quality control resigned during the audit of LaFa plc and has not been
replaced. This means that there is no one person in charge of maintaining quality control
standards in the audit firm. There is the risk that deficiencies of quality control will go
undetected.
(2) Second, WTR is under fee pressure from LaFa plc to complete the audit and provide other
services for the same fee as last year, even though the scope of the audit has increased. There is
the risk that audit procedures will not be fully carried out to ensure that the tight budget is met.
Lack of a comprehensive quality control review (the quality control partner resigning as noted
above) increases the risk of poor quality work.
The quality control partner should be replaced as soon as possible, while the fee situation with LaFa
should be monitored – any potential cost overrun must be discussed with the client and where
necessary additional fees agreed.
Ethical requirements
Policies and procedures should be designed to provide the firm with reasonable assurance that the
firm and its personnel comply with relevant ethical requirements.
HB2021

In WTR, it is not clear that staff will comply with the code. While professional staff will be members of
ICAEW or a similar body, and therefore subject to the ethical requirements of their professional
body, precise implementation has not been confirmed within WTR. While it is unlikely that staff will
knowingly break the ethical code, there is still room for inadvertent breach. For example, partners
may not be aware of the full client list of WTR and hold shares in an audit client. Similarly, audit staff
may not be aware of WTR’s policy on entertainment and therefore accept meals, for example, over
these guidelines.
The guidelines should be circulated and confirmed by all staff as soon as possible.
Client acceptance
A firm should only accept, or continue with, a client where it:
• has considered the integrity of the client and does not have information that the client lacks
integrity;
• is competent to perform the engagement and has the necessary time and resources; and
• can comply with ethical requirements including appropriate independence from the client.
While there is little indication that LaFa lacks integrity, the client is placing fee pressure on WTR. The
client has also indicated that information regarding development expenditure may not be available
during the audit and will be subject to a separate audit check just before the signing of the financial
statements and auditor’s report. There could be an attempt to ‘force’ an unmodified auditor’s report
when WTR should take more time (and money) auditing development expenditure. There is
therefore a risk that LaFa management is losing some integrity and WTR need to view other
management evidence with increased scepticism.
The audit of LaFa plc this year includes development expenditure. As this is a new audit area, the
audit partner of LaFa should have ensured that the audit team, and WTR as a whole, had staff with the
necessary experience to audit this item. Lack of competence increases audit risk, as the area may not
be audited correctly or completely.
Mr W accepting the position of Finance Director at SoTee appears to place the independence of
WTR with LaFa in jeopardy. As Finance Director of the parent company, Mr W will be in a position to
influence the management of LaFa, and potentially the financial information being provided by that
company. While SoTee is not an audit client, the audit partner in WTR must ensure that no undue
influence is being placed on LaFa. If, however, this is the case, then WTR must consider resignation
from the audit of LaFa.
Monitoring of audit
The audit firm must have policies in place to ensure that quality control procedures are implemented
and maintained.
Regarding the audit of LaFa, there is some risk that control quality regarding audit monitoring will be
compromised because:
• the audit partner is new, and may therefore not have extensive knowledge of the audit client; and
• there appears to be a tight audit deadline for auditing development expenditure.
To decrease audit risk, it will be appropriate to maintain similar audit staff from last year (eg, retain
the audit senior and manager) and WTR could consider a second partner review to ensure WTR
quality control standards have been followed.
3 Bee5
Client acceptance
In previous years Bee5 has required a standard audit from your assurance firm. However, this year
there is a request for additional assurance regarding the internal control systems. This work will not
only raise the amount of income generated from the client but will also require the use of specialist
staff to perform the work.
Before accepting the engagement for this year Sheridan & Co must ensure the following:
(1) That income from Bee5 is not approaching 15% of the firm’s total income. If income is
approaching this level then additional independence checks may be required, such as an
independent internal quality control review.
HB2021

(2) That staff familiar with the Bee5 internal control system are available to provide the assurance
work. If these skills are not available then Sheridan & Co must either hire staff with those skills or
decline the work on internal control systems. Sheridan & Co must also ensure that they will not
be taking responsibility for designing, implementing or maintaining internal control as under the
FRC Revised Ethical Standard 2019 this would be a management decision-making activity.
Plan the audit – evaluate internal control
The current internal control system is due to be upgraded in the next financial year. There is therefore
no impact on the current year’s audit as a result of this change. However, the reason given by the
client for the upgrade relates to reliability issues with the current control systems.
The control system used by Bee5 must still be evaluated to determine the extent to which the system
is still reliable. Where deficiencies are identified then control risk will increase. There will be
consequent impact on the audit approach as noted below.
Develop the audit approach
An increase in control risk will cause detection risk to increase. The impact on the audit will be an
increased level of substantive testing to obtain sufficient confidence on assertions such as
completeness and accuracy.
There will be a further impact on the quality control of the audit. Commencing the audit with the
expectation of finding control deficiencies means that audit staff must be selected carefully. It may
not be appropriate to send junior trainees with restricted experience to the client unless their work is
closely monitored and carefully reviewed.
Audit internal control – tests of controls
As noted above, detailed tests of control on the accounting system will be limited. However, reliance
will still be obtained from the overall control environment.
Evaluate results
The higher risk associated with the audit this year means that a quality control review will be
appropriate for this client. Sheridan & Co needs to maintain the integrity of work performed as well
as ensuring that the audit opinion is correct. Part of the planning process will be to book the time of
the quality control partner.
HB2021

Chapter 2
Principles of corporate
reporting
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 The regulatory framework
2 The IASB Conceptual Framework
3 Other reporting frameworks
4 IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement
5 IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and
Errors
6 Current issues in corporate reporting
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Explain and appraise the impact of accounting principles and bases of measurement in corporate
reporting, for example fair value measurement
• Appraise corporate reporting regulations, and related legal requirements, with respect to
presentation, disclosure, recognition and measurement
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to the impact of changes in accounting
policies and estimates
• Explain and evaluate the impact of underlying assumptions on financial statements
• Identify and explain current and emerging issues in corporate reporting
• Formulate and evaluate accounting and reporting policies for single entities and groups of
varying sizes and in a variety of industries
• Explain and evaluate how different methods of recognising and measuring assets and liabilities
can affect reported financial position and explain the role of data analytics in financial asset and
liability valuation
• Explain and evaluate corporate reporting and assurance issues in respect of social responsibility,
sustainability and environmental matters for a range of stakeholders
• Evaluate accounting policies choices and estimates, identifying issues of earnings manipulation
and creative accounting
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(a)–(e), 2(c), 3(a), 18(a) and (b)
2

of this chapter.

significance Questions
1 The regulatory Approach You are unlikely to N/A

framework Read through be tested directly on
This short section quickly – this should this material – it is
revises the be familiar to you background
regulatory from your earlier knowledge.
framework and the studies.
standard-setting Stop and think
process.
The process of
setting IFRS is an
open dialogue
involving co-
operation between
national and
international
standard setters.
2 The IASB Approach You may encounter IQ1: Asset or

Conceptual Conceptual a scenario where no liability?
Framework Framework forms IFRS is directly It is essential you do
Before launching the basis of the applicable or there this short question in
into the detail of approach followed is no obvious which you must
financial reporting in developing IFRS. answer. Application apply the
of the Conceptual
HB2021

and auditing It can also be used Framework will assist Conceptual

standards, it is to establish the you in determining Framework
important to accounting the appropriate definition of asset
understand the treatment where financial reporting and liability.
principles that there is no IFRS on treatment by going
underpin them. the subject. back to first
Study in detail – this principles.
version of the
Conceptual
Framework was
revised in 2018 and
is different from the
one you studied
earlier.
Stop and think
Can you think of any
advantages and
disadvantages of a
conceptual
framework?
3 Other reporting Approach You will not get a N/A

frameworks The material on whole question on
You may be small and medium- smaller companies
required to sized companies will or on UK GAAP.
consider other be new to you. It will
reporting assist your learning
frameworks, for if you try to
example UK understand why
companies or different rules might
small companies. apply, as well as
what those rules are.
You will have come
across UK GAAP
differences in your
earlier studies so
this part will be
revision.
Stop and think
What audit issues
may arise in
connection with
smaller companies?
4 IFRS 13, Fair Value Approach If you look at the N/A

Measurement Work through this table in Section
IFRS 13, Fair Value section as if learning 4.5.2, you will see a
Measurement the IFRS from range of contexts in
(section 4) brings scratch. This is which fair value
together guidance essential, as it could come up in
on fair value and comes up regularly the exam:
requires in the manual and in • Share valuation
disclosures. It the exam. • Intangible assets
defines fair value
• Impairment
as ‘the price that
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 2: Principles of corporate reporting 59

would be received Stop and think • PPE

to sell an asset or Why is fair value not • Financial
paid to transfer a adjusted for instruments
liability in an transaction costs?
orderly transaction
between market
participants at the
measurement
date’. IFRS 13 will
crop up
throughout the
manual in all kinds
of contexts.
5 IAS 8, Accounting Approach IAS 8 could come up IQ2: Accounting

Policies, Changes Treat this as revision. in any context, errors
in Accounting The key points are particularly where Revision question on
Estimates and that changes in the directors are correction of a prior
Errors accounting policies trying to change the period error.
This material are rare, and accounting policy to
should be familiar allowed only if give a more
from your earlier required by favourable view. This
studies. statute/standard- also raises ethical
setting body/results issues.
in reliable and more
Changes in
accounting
estimates are more
common because of
the judgement
required in making
estimates.
Stop and think
Why are changes in
accounting
estimates not
accounted for by
retrospective
application?
6 Current issues in Approach While exams test N/A

corporate Current issues are IFRS that are already
reporting covered in this in force (Blue Book),
This section Workbook within the if published revised
summarises the chapters in which IFRS is not yet
key current issues the topic appears, examinable, part of
and points to so that the a question may ask
where they are changes/proposed for a brief
treated in more changes appear in explanation as to
detail. context. how the accounting
treatment may
The most Stop and think change.
important current Which recent
issue is the revised document deals
Conceptual with a concept also
Framework,
HB2021

covered in Section dealt with in the

2. revised Conceptual
Framework?
HB2021

1 The regulatory framework
Section overview
• Financial reporting is the provision of financial information to those outside the entity.
• The organisation responsible for setting IFRS comprises the International Financial Reporting
Standards Foundation (IFRS Foundation), the Monitoring Board, the International Accounting
Standards Board (IASB), the IFRS Advisory Council (Advisory Council) and the IFRS Interpretations
Committee (Interpretations Committee).
• The process of setting IFRS is an open dialogue involving co-operation between national and
international standard setters.
1.1 The IFRS Foundation

IASCF was formed in 2001 as a not-for-profit corporation and was the parent entity of the IASB. In
2010 it was renamed as the IFRS Foundation. The IFRS Foundation is an independent organisation
and its trustees exercise oversight and raise necessary funding for the IASB to carry out its role as
standard setter. It also oversees the work of the IFRS Interpretations Committee (formerly called the
International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC)) and the IFRS Advisory Council
(formerly called the Standards Advisory Council (SAC)). These are organised as follows:
Figure 2.1: IFRS Foundation
IFRS Foundation is responsible for:

• Funding
• Appointment of members of IASB, IFRS
• Advisory Council and IFRS Interpretations Committee
IASB is responsible for: IFRS Advisory Council is responsible for:

• All technical matters in general • Input on IASB's agenda
• In particular, the preparation and issue of • Input on IASB's project timetable and
International Financial Reporting Standards priorities
• Advise on standard-setting projects
• Supporting IASB in promotion/adoption
IFRS Interpretations Committee is of IFRS throughout the world
responsible for:
• Interpretation and application of
International Financial Reporting Standards
1.2 Membership
Membership of the IFRS Foundation has been designed so that it represents an international group
of preparers and users, who become IFRS Foundation trustees. The selection process of the 22
trustees takes into account geographical factors and professional background. IFRS Foundation
trustees appoint the IASB members.
The Monitoring Board ensures that the trustees carry out their duties in accordance with the IFRS
Foundation Constitution.
1.3 The IASB

The IASB is responsible for setting accounting standards. It is made up of 15 full-time members and
has no particular geographical dominance.
HB2021

Members have a variety of backgrounds and include the following:
• Auditors
• Preparers of financial statements
• Users of financial statements
• Academics
1.4 Objectives of the IASB

The Preface to IFRS Standards states that the objectives of the IASB are as follows:
(a) To develop, in the public interest, a single set of high quality, understandable, enforceable and
globally accepted financial reporting standards based on clearly articulated principles. These
standards should require high quality, transparent and comparable information in financial
statements and other financial reporting to help investors, other participants in the various
capital markets of the world and other users of the information to make economic decisions.
(b) To promote the use and rigorous application of those standards.
(c) In fulfilling the above objectives to take account of, as appropriate, the needs of a range of sizes
and types of entities in diverse economic settings.
(d) To promote and facilitate the adoption of IFRS Standards through the convergence of national
accounting standards and IFRS Standards.
1.5 The purpose of accounting standards

The overall purpose of accounting standards is to identify proper accounting practices for the
preparation of financial statements.
Accounting standards create a common understanding between users and preparers on how
particular items, for example the valuation of property, are treated. Financial statements should
therefore comply with all applicable accounting standards.
1.6 Application of IFRS

Within each individual country local regulations govern, to a greater or lesser degree, the issue of
financial statements. These local regulations include accounting standards issued by the national
regulatory bodies or professional accountancy bodies in the country concerned.
Over the last 25 years, however, the influence of IFRS on national accounting requirements and
practices has been growing. For example:
(a) Since 2005, all EU companies whose securities are traded on a regulated public market such as
the London Stock Exchange must prepare their consolidated accounts in accordance with IFRS.
(Note that although group financial statements must follow IFRS the individual financial
statements do not need to.)
(b) In the UK, unquoted companies are permitted (but not required) to adopt IFRS.
1.7 Setting of IFRS

The overall agenda of the IASB is initially set by discussion with the IFRS Advisory Council. The
process for developing an individual standard involves the following steps.
Step 1 During the early stages of a project, the IASB may establish an Advisory Committee or
working group to give advice on issues arising in the project. Consultation with the Advisory
Committee and the Advisory Council occurs throughout the project.
Step 2 The IASB may develop and publish a Discussion Paper for public comment.
Step 3 Following the receipt and review of comments, the IASB would develop and publish an
Exposure Draft for public comment.
Step 4 Following the receipt and review of comments, the IASB would issue a final International
Financial Reporting Standard.
The period of exposure for public comment is normally 120 days. However, in some
circumstances, proposals may be issued with a comment period of not less than 30 days.
Draft IFRS Interpretations are exposed for a 60-day comment period.
HB2021

1.8 Scope and authority of IFRS
The Preface to IFRS Standards makes the following points:
(a) IFRS Standards apply to all general purpose financial statements ie, those directed towards the
common information needs of a wide range of users.
(b) The IASB’s objective is to require like transactions and events to be accounted for and reported
in a like way. The IASB intends not to permit choices in accounting treatment. The IASB is
reconsidering those transactions and events for which IFRS Standards permit a choice of
accounting treatment with the objective of reducing the number of those choices.
(c) Standards include paragraphs in bold and plain type. Bold type paragraphs indicate the main
principles, but both types have equal authority.
(d) Any limitation of the applicability of a specific IFRS is made clear in that standard.
1.9 UK regulatory framework

UK companies produce their financial statements in line with the requirements of:
• the Companies Act 2006; and
• IFRS; or FRS 100 to 103.
This is covered in more detail in section 3.
2 The IASB Conceptual Framework

Section overview
The Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting determines:

• how financial statements are prepared; and
• the information they contain.
The Conceptual Framework was revised in 2018.
2.1 Conceptual Framework

A conceptual framework is a statement of generally accepted theoretical principles which form the
frame of reference for financial reporting.
These theoretical principles provide the basis for the IASB’s development of new accounting
standards and the evaluation of those already in existence. The financial reporting process is
concerned with providing information that is useful in the business and economic decision-making
process. Therefore a conceptual framework will form the theoretical basis for determining which
events should be accounted for, how they should be measured and how they should be
communicated to the user. Although it is theoretical in nature, a conceptual framework for financial
reporting has highly practical final aims.
The Conceptual Framework consists of eight chapters.
Chapter 1: The objective of general purpose financial reporting
Chapter 2: Qualitative characteristics of useful financial information
Chapter 3: Financial statements and the reporting entity
Chapter 4: The elements of financial statements
Chapter 5: Recognition and derecognition
Chapter 6: Measurement
Chapter 7: Presentation and disclosure
Chapter 8: Concepts of capital and capital maintenance
HB2021

2.2 Purpose and status
The purpose of the Conceptual Framework is to (para. SP1.1):
• Assist the IASB to develop IFRS Standards that are based on consistent concepts;
• Assist preparers of accounts to develop accounting policies in cases where there is no IFRS
applicable to a particular transaction, or where a choice of accounting policy exists; and
• Assist all parties to understand and interpret IFRS Standards.
The instances in which a preparer will use the Conceptual Framework to develop an accounting
policy are expected to be rare. Therefore the Conceptual Framework will primarily be used by the
IASB to develop IFRS Standards.
The Conceptual Framework is not a Standard. It does not override any IFRS, but instead forms the
conceptual basis for the development of IFRS Standards.
However, IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements states that in order to achieve fair presentation,
an entity must comply with both:
• IFRS; and
• The Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting.
Many of the IASB’s standards have been strongly influenced by the ideas set out in the Conceptual
Framework.
When considering the appropriate financial reporting treatment, it is important to consider all the
information in order to determine which IFRS to apply. In the absence of an applicable IFRS, the
Conceptual Framework will assist.
2.3 Chapter 1: The objective of general purpose financial reporting

The Conceptual Framework states (para. 1.2) that:
“The objective of general purpose financial reporting is to provide information about the reporting
entity that is useful to existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors in making
decisions relating to providing resources to the entity.”
• The types of economic decisions for which financial statements are likely to be used include the
following.
• Buying, selling or holding equity and debt instruments;
• Providing or settling loans and other forms of credit; or
• Exercising rights to vote on, or otherwise influence, management’s actions that affect the use of
the entity’s economic resources (Conceptual Framework, para.1.2)
Existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors are referred to as the ‘primary users‘ of
financial statements (para. 1.5). These users need information about (para 1.5):
• The economic resources of the entity;
• the claims against the entity; and
• How efficiently and effectively the entity’s management have discharged their responsibilities
relating to the entity’s resources (stewardship)
Three aspects are relevant to users of financial statements (paras. 1.17–1.21):
• Financial performance reflected by past cash flows
• Changes in economic resources and claims not resulting from financial performance, eg a share
issue
HB2021

The Conceptual Framework makes it clear that this information should be prepared on an accruals
basis.
Definition
Accrual accounting: The effects of transactions and other events and circumstances on a reporting
entity’s economic resources and claims are recognised in the periods in which they occur, even if the
resulting cash receipts and payments occur in a different period. (Conceptual Framework: para 1.17)
Financial statements prepared using accrual accounting (the accruals basis) show users’ past
transactions.
Information about a reporting entity’s cash flows during a period also helps users assess the entity’s
ability to generate future net cash inflows and gives users a better understanding of its operations.
The Conceptual Framework also mentions several other, secondary, users that are interested in the
financial information (Conceptual Framework, Chapter 1: para. 1.9, 1.10).
This includes:
• Management
• Regulators
• Members of the public
While users may gain most of their information from the financial statements, it is important that they
obtain relevant information from other sources too.
2.4 Chapter 2: Qualitative characteristics of useful financial information

2.4.1 Overview
Qualitative characteristics are the attributes that make the information provided in financial
statements useful to users.
The two fundamental qualitative characteristics are relevance and faithful representation.
There are then four enhancing qualitative characteristics which enhance the usefulness of
information that is relevant and faithfully represented. These are: comparability, verifiability,
timeliness and understandability.
The key issues can be summarised as follows.
HB2021

Fundamental qualitative characteristics
Relevance Faithful representation
Relevant financial information is capable To be useful, financial information must

of making difference in the decisions not only represent the relevant
made by users (Conceptual Framework, phenomena but must also faithfully
paras. 2.6 – 2.7), ie if it has: represent the substance of the phenomena
• Predictive value; and/or that it purports to represent (Conceptual
Framework, para. 2.12).
• Confirmatory value.
A perfect faithful representation would be:
• Complete;
• Neutral; and
• Free from error.
Materiality Prudence
Information is material if omitting, Prudence is exercising caution,

misstating or obscuring it could particularly with areas where
influence decisions that the primary judgement or estimation is required.
users of general purpose financial Supports the concept of neutrality.
statements make on the basis of
financial information (Conceptual
Framework, para. 2.11)
Enhancing qualitative characteristics
Comparability Verifiability Timeliness Understandability
Information is more Assures users that Having information Classifying,

useful if it can be information faithfully available to decision characterising and
compared with represents the makers in time to be presenting
similar information economic capable of influencing information clearly
about: phenomenon it their decisions and concisely
• Other entities; and purports to represent (Conceptual (Conceptual
(Conceptual Framework, para. Framework, para.
• Other periods.
Framework, para. 2.33) 2.34).
Consistency helps 2.30) Balance between
achieve comparability.
Verification can be timeliness and
direct or indirect. accuracy of
information.
The cost constraint on useful financial reporting
Consideration of whether the benefits of reporting particular information justify the costs
incurred to provide and use that information.
Definition
Materiality: Information is material if omitting it, or misstating or obscuring it could influence
decisions that users make on the basis of financial information about a specific reporting entity. (IAS
1, para 7)
HB2021

2.5 Chapter 3: Financial statements and the reporting entity
2.5.1 Overview
Chapter 3 of the Conceptual Framework covers the objectives and scope of the financial statements,
including the definition of the reporting period and the main perspective adopted in the financial
statements: the financial statements should provide information about transactions from the
perspective of the reporting entity, not that of the investors. This is to try to avoid investor bias when
reporting on the entity.
2.5.2 Objective and scope of financial reporting

The objective of financial statements is to provide financial information about the reporting entity’s
assets, liabilities, equity, income and expenses that is useful to users of financial statements in
assessing the prospects for future net cash inflows to the reporting entity and in assessing
management’s stewardship of the entity’s economic resources. (Conceptual Framework, Chapter 3:
para. 3.2).
2.5.3 Reporting period

Financial statements are prepared for a specific period of time (the reporting period) and provide
information about assets and liabilities, and income and expenses. Comparative information must
also be provided.
The financial statements should provide information about transactions from the perspective of the
reporting entity, not that of the investors. This is to try to avoid investor bias when reporting on the
entity.
(Conceptual Framework, Chapter 3: para. 3.4, 3.5).
2.5.4 Underlying assumption: going concern
Definition
Going concern: Financial statements are normally prepared on the assumption that the reporting
entity is a going concern, and will continue in operation for the foreseeable future. Hence, it is
assumed that the entity has neither the intention nor the necessity of liquidation nor the need to
cease trading.
(Conceptual Framework: para. 3.9)
It is assumed that the entity has no intention to liquidate or curtail major operations. If it did, then the
financial statements would be prepared on a different (disclosed) basis for example, the ‘break up’
basis.
2.5.5 The reporting entity
Definition
Reporting entity: An entity that is required, or chooses, to prepare financial statements. A reporting
entity can be a single entity or a portion of an entity or can comprise more than one entity. A
reporting entity is not necessarily a legal entity (para. 3.10).
2.5.6 Consolidated and unconsolidated financial statements

If a reporting entity comprises both the parent and its subsidiaries, the reporting entity’s financial
statements are referred to as ‘consolidated financial statements’. If a reporting entity is the parent
alone, the reporting entity’s financial statements are referred to as ‘unconsolidated financial
statements’).
(Conceptual Framework, Chapter 3: para. 3.15 – 3.17).
HB2021

2.6 Chapter 4: The elements of financial statements
2.6.1 Overview
Transactions and other events are grouped together in broad classes and in this way their financial
effects are shown in the financial statements. These broad classes are the elements of financial
statements.
The Conceptual Framework lays out these elements as follows.
Figure 2.2: Elements of financial statements
Elements of financial statements
Financial position in the Performance in the income statement and

statement of financial position statement of comprehensive income
• Assets • Income
• Liabilities • Expenses
• Equity
Contributions from equity participants and distributions to them are shown in the statement of
changes in equity.
2.6.2 Definitions of elements
Element Definition Comment
Asset A present economic resource controlled by Technically, the asset is the potential
the entity as a result of past events. An to produce economic benefits (eg,
economic resource is a right that has the cash generation), not the underlying
potential to produce economic benefits. item of property itself (eg, a machine).
Liability A present obligation of the entity to transfer An essential characteristic of a liability

an economic resource as a result of past is that the entity has an obligation. An
events, obligation is ‘a duty or responsibility
that the entity has no practical ability
to avoid’
Equity The residual amount found by deducting all Equity = ownership interest = net
the entity’s liabilities from all the entity’s assets. For a company, this usually
assets. comprises shareholders’ funds (ie,
capital and reserves).
Income Increases in assets, or decreases in liabilities, Income comprises revenue and gains,
that result in increases in equity, other than including all recognised gains on
those relating to contributions from equity non-revenue items (eg, revaluations
participants. of non-current assets).
Expenses Decreases in assets, or increases in liabilities, Expenses include losses, including all
that result in decreases in equity, other than recognised losses on non-revenue
those relating to distributions to equity items (such as write downs of non-
participants. current assets).
Note the way that the changes in economic benefits resulting from asset and liability increases and
decreases are used to define:
• Income
• Expenses
HB2021

This arises from the ‘balance sheet approach‘ adopted by the Conceptual Framework which treats
performance statements, such as the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, as
a means of reconciling changes in the financial position amounts shown in the statement of financial
position.
IFRS 16, Leases requires a lessee to recognise a right-of-use asset for each lease they enter into (with
limited exceptions). A right-of-use asset is consistent with the definition of an asset in the Conceptual
Framework: as a result of entering into the lease agreement (past event), the lessee can direct the use
of the leased asset (control) in the course of business in order to directly or indirectly generate
economic benefits.
IFRS 16 also requires the recognition of a lease liability, equivalent to the present value of future
lease payments. The lease liability meets the Conceptual Framework definition of a liability: the
lessee has a responsibility (present obligation) as a result of entering into the lease agreement (past
event) to pay the lease rentals (transfer of economic benefits) as they become due.
These key definitions of ‘asset’ and ‘liability’ will be referred to again and again in these learning
materials, because they form the foundation on which so many accounting standards are based. It is
very important that you can reproduce these definitions accurately and quickly.
2.6.3 Assets
We can look in more detail at the components of the definitions given above.
Assets must give rise to future economic benefits, either alone or in conjunction with other items.
Definition
Potential to produce economic benefit: An economic resource is a right that has the potential to
produce economic benefits. (Conceptual Framework, para.4.14)
In simple terms, an item is an asset if:

• it is cash or the right to cash in future eg, a receivable, or a right to services that may be used to
generate cash eg, a prepayment; or
• it can be used to generate cash or meet liabilities eg, a tangible or intangible non-current asset.
The existence of an asset, particularly in terms of control, is not reliant on:
• physical form (hence intangible assets such as patents and copyrights may meet the definition of
an asset and appear in the statement of financial position – even though they have no physical
substance); or
• legal ownership (hence some leased assets, even though not legally owned by the company, may
be included as assets in the statement of financial position (see Chapter 14)).
Transactions or events in the past give rise to assets. Those expected to occur in future do not in
themselves give rise to assets.
2.6.4 Liabilities
Again we look more closely at some aspects of the definition.
For a liability to exist, three criteria must all be satisfied (para. 4.27):
• The entity has an obligation
• The obligation is to transfer an economic resource
• The obligation is a present obligation that exists as a result of past events
Definition
Obligation: A duty or responsibility that the entity has no practical ability to avoid (para.4.29)
A present obligation exists as a result of past events if the entity has already obtained economic
benefits or taken an action, and as a consequence, the entity will or may have to transfer an
economic resource that it would not otherwise have had to transfer (para.4.43)
HB2021

As seen above, obligations may be:
(a) legally enforceable as a consequence of a binding contract or statutory requirement. This is
normally the case with amounts payable for goods and services received; or
(b) the result of business practice. For example, even though a company has no legal obligation to
do so, it may have a policy of rectifying faults in its products even after the warranty period has
expired.
A management decision (to acquire an asset, for example) does not in itself create an obligation,
because it can be reversed. But a management decision implemented in a way which creates
expectations in the minds of customers, suppliers or employees becomes an obligation. This is
sometimes described as a constructive obligation. This issue is covered more fully in Chapter 13 in
the context of the recognition of provisions.
Liabilities must arise from past transactions or events. For example, the sale of goods is the past
transaction which allows the recognition of repair warranty provisions.
Settlement of a present obligation will involve the entity giving up resources giving rise to economic
benefits in order to satisfy the claim of the other party. In practice, most liabilities will be met in cash
but this is not essential.
Interactive question 1: Asset or liability?
Question Answer
Oak plc has purchased a patent for £40,000.

The patent gives the company sole use of a
particular manufacturing process which will
save £6,000 a year for the next five years.
Elm plc paid John Brown £20,000 to set up a

car repair shop, on condition that priority
treatment is given to cars from the company’s
fleet.
Sycamore plc provides a warranty with every

washing machine sold.
2.6.5 Equity
Equity is the residual of assets less liabilities, so the amount at which it is shown is dependent on the
measurement of assets and liabilities. It has nothing to do with the market value of the entity’s shares.
Equity may be sub-classified in the statement of financial position providing information which is
relevant to the decision-making needs of the users. This will indicate legal or other restrictions on the
ability of the entity to distribute or otherwise apply its equity.
In practical terms, the important distinction between liabilities and equity is that creditors have the
right to insist that the transfer of economic resources is made to them regardless of the entity’s
financial position, but owners do not. All decisions about payments to owners (such as dividends or
share capital buyback) are at the discretion of management.
2.6.6 Performance
Profit is used as a measure of performance, or as a basis for other measures (eg, earnings per share
(EPS)). It depends directly on the measurement of income and expenses, which in turn depend (in
part) on the concepts of capital and capital maintenance adopted.
Income and expenses can be presented in different ways in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income, to provide information relevant for economic decision-making. For example,
a statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income could distinguish between income
and expenses which relate to continuing operations and those which do not.
Items of income and expense can be distinguished from each other or combined with each other.
HB2021

Income
Both revenue and gains are included in the definition of income. Revenue arises in the course of
ordinary activities of an entity. (We will look at revenue in more detail in Chapter 10.)
Definition
Gains: Increases in economic benefits. As such, they are no different in nature from revenue.
Gains include those arising on the disposal of non-current assets. The definition of income also
includes unrealised gains eg, on revaluation of non-current assets.
A revaluation gives rise to an increase or decrease in equity.
These increases and decreases appear in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income.
(Gains on revaluation, which are recognised in a revaluation surplus, are covered in Chapter 12.)
Expenses
As with income, the definition of expenses includes losses as well as those expenses that arise in the
course of ordinary activities of an entity.
Definition
Losses: Decreases in economic benefits. As such, they are no different in nature from other expenses.
Losses will include those arising on the disposal of non-current assets. The definition of expenses will
also include unrealised losses.
2.7 Chapter 5: Recognition and derecognition of the elements of financial statements

2.7.1 Meaning of recognised
An item is recognised when it is included in the statement of financial position or statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income.
Items which meet the definition of assets or liabilities may still not be recognised in financial
statements because they must also meet certain recognition criteria.
Definition
Recognition: The process of capturing for inclusion in the statement of financial position or
statement(s) of profit or loss and other comprehensive income an item that meets the definition of
one of the elements of financial statements – an asset, a liability, equity, income or expenses.
(Conceptual Framework: para. 5.1)
An asset or liability should be recognised if it will be both:
• Relevant; and
• Provide users of the financial statements with a faithful representation of the transactions of that
entity
The Conceptual Framework takes, therefore, these fundamental qualitative characteristics along with
the definitions of the elements of the financial statements as the key components of recognition.
Previously, recognition of elements would have been affected by the probability of whether the event
was going to happen and the reliability of the measurement. The IASB has revised this as they
believed this set too rigid a criterion as entities may not disclose relevant information which would
be necessary for the user of the financial statements because of the difficulty of estimating both the
likelihood and the amount of the element.
HB2021

Even if an item is not recognised, then the preparers of the financial statements should consider
whether, in order to meet the faithful representation requirement, there should be a description in
the notes to the financial statements.
2.7.2 Derecognition
Definition
Derecognition: The removal of all or part of a recognised asset or liability from an entity’s statement
of financial position. Derecognition normally occurs when that item no longer meets the definition of
an asset or liability. (Conceptual Framework: para. 5.26)
The Conceptual Framework considers derecognition to be a factor when the following occurs:
(a) Loss of control of or all or part of the recognised asset; or
(b) The entity no longer has an obligation for a liability
This is covered in more detail in the following chapters covering the specific elements, such as
recognition and derecognition of financial instruments (Chapter 16 of this Workbook) and non-
current tangible assets (Chapter 12). The IASB has brought these concepts of recognition and
derecognition into the Conceptual Framework so that they can be revisited when issuing new
standards or revising existing ones.
2.8 Chapter 6: Measurement of the elements of financial statements

2.8.1 Overview
A number of different measurement bases are used in financial statements. They include:
• Historical cost
• Value in use
• Fair value
• Current cost
In the Conceptual Framework, the guidelines surrounding the measurement of elements are clarified
and given more substance.
Definition
Measurement: Elements recognised in the financial statements are quantified in monetary terms.
This requires the selection of a measurement basis. (Conceptual Framework: para. 6.1)
This involves the selection of a particular basis of measurement. A number of these are used to
different degrees and in varying combinations in financial statements. They include the following.
Definitions
Historical cost: The price paid for an asset or for the event which gave rise to the liability. The price
will not change.
Current value: The price paid for an asset or the liability value will be updated to reflect any changes
since it was acquired or incurred. There are three main bases recognised by the Conceptual
Framework that make up current value:
Fair value: Price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (IFRS 13, Appendix A)
Value in use: The present value of the cash flows, or other economic benefits, that an entity expects
to derive from the use of an asset and its ultimate disposal (Conceptual Framework, para.6.17).
Current cost: Current cost, like historical cost, is an entry value: it reflects prices in the market in
which the entity would acquire assets or incur the liability.
HB2021

2.8.2 Historical cost
Historical cost is the most commonly adopted measurement basis, but this is usually combined with
other bases, eg inventory is carried at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
Recent standards use the concept of fair value, which is defined by IFRS 13 as ‘the price that would
be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market
participants at the measurement date’ (IFRS 13: para. 9).
2.8.3 Current value

Current value accounting reflects the valuation of the assets or liabilities based on conditions and
information available at the measurement date. The Conceptual Framework discusses the bases of
measurement, and the factors to be considered when choosing the appropriate measurement
method. The three bases that make up current value are fair value, value in use and current cost.
2.8.4 Fair value

The definition of fair value, as stated in IFRS 13 is ‘the price that would be received to sell an asset or
paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement
date’ (IFRS 13, Appendix A).
The specifics of fair value in relation to tangible non-current assets (Chapter 3, IAS 16), business
combinations (Chapter 8, IFRS 3), biological assets (Chapter 14, IAS 41) and non-current assets held
for sale and discontinued operations (Chapter 17, IFRS 5) are covered in the relevant chapters.
Fair value is most commonly calculated by taking the open market value. Where there is no active
market for the asset or liability, then the following should be used as a basis.
• Estimates of future cash flows
• Time value of money (discounting the future cash flows)
In each case, it will be taking into consideration the uncertainty of the market.
Fair value looks at the potential future value of the asset or liability.
2.8.5 Value in use

This is calculated by taking the present value of the cash flows or other benefits that the entity will
receive during the lifetime of the asset or liability, and deducting any disposal costs. The value of the
asset or liability considers the future cash flows (therefore, it does not include the costs of acquiring
the item in the first place).
At first glance this seems similar to the fair value basis, however, value in use considers entity specific
factors affecting it, and the fair value basis looks at the market perspective.
Value in use looks at the likely future value of the entity using the asset or liability.
2.8.6 Current cost

Current cost, like historical cost, is an entry value: it reflects prices in the market in which the entity
would acquire assets or incur the liability (Conceptual Framework, para.6.21). Essentially the
replacement cost of an asset or liability.
2.9 Chapter 7: Presentation and disclosure

2.9.1 Overview
Chapter 7 of the Conceptual Framework covers the high level principles behind the need for a
consensus on presentation and disclosure, not just between periods for the entity, but also across
different entities.
2.9.2 Principles of presentation and disclosure

Rather than relying on prescriptive rules regarding presentation and disclosure, the main principles
are established which include:
• Classification of assets and liabilities of a similar nature together (whilst keeping dissimilar ones
separated), according to their nature, function or method of measurement. This is also to avoid
the issue of ‘offsetting’ whereby items of a dissimilar nature are grouped together, for example an
asset and a liability offset to provide a much smaller number in the financial statements.
• Avoiding unnecessary detail which can obscure the important facts
HB2021

• Equally, avoiding a standardised approach (often referred to as ‘boilerplate’) but instead giving
the entity an opportunity to provide details relevant to the organisation and its business
• Specific details regarding the classification of assets, liabilities, equity, income and expenses
2.9.3 Interaction with IAS 1

Financial statements should present fairly the financial position, financial performance and cash flows
of an entity. Compliance with IFRS is presumed to result in financial statements that achieve a fair
presentation. (IAS 1: para. 15)
IAS 1 stipulates that financial statements shall present fairly the financial position, financial
performance and cash flows of an entity. Fair presentation requires the faithful representation of the
effects of transactions, other events and conditions in accordance with the definitions and
recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, equity, income and expenses set out in the Conceptual
Framework.
The following points made by IAS 1 expand on this principle.
(a) Compliance with IFRS should be disclosed
(b) All relevant IFRS must be followed if compliance with IFRS is disclosed
(c) Use of an inappropriate accounting treatment cannot be rectified either by disclosure of
accounting policies or notes/explanatory material
IAS 1 states what is required for a fair presentation.
(a) Selection and application of suitable accounting policies
(b) Presentation of information in a manner which provides relevant, reliable, comparable and
understandable information
(c) Additional disclosures where required
(IAS 1: para. 17)
Judgement is particularly important in the context of disclosure. A balance has to be struck between
providing the necessary information for a full understanding and ‘information overload’, where the
important information gets buried.
2.10 Chapter 8: Concepts of capital and capital maintenance

The final section of the Conceptual Framework is devoted to a brief discussion of the different
concepts of capital and capital maintenance, pointing out that:
• the choice between them should be made on the basis of the needs of users of financial
statements; and
• the IASB has no present intention of prescribing a particular model.
2.10.1 Financial capital and capital maintenance
Definition
Financial capital maintenance: Under a financial concept of capital maintenance, such as invested
money and invested purchasing power, capital is synonymous with the net assets or equity of the
entity.
The financial concept of capital is adopted by most entities.

This concept measures capital as the equity in the statement of financial position. Profit is only
earned in an accounting period if the equity at the end of the period is greater than it was at the
start, having excluded the effects of distributions to or contributions from the owners during the
period.
HB2021

Monetary measure of capital
Financial capital is usually measured in monetary terms eg, the pound sterling or the euro. This is the
concept applied in historical cost accounting. This measure can be quite stable over short periods of
years, but is debased by quite low rates of general inflation over longer periods, such as 20 years. So
comparisons between capital now and capital 20 years ago are invalid, because the measurement
instrument is not constant.
Constant purchasing power
A variant on the monetary measure of financial capital is the constant purchasing power measure. On
this basis, the opening capital (ie, equity) is uprated by the change in a broadly based price index,
often a retail prices index, over the year. Also, the transactions during the year are uprated by the
change in the same index. A profit is only earned if the capital at the end of the year exceeds these
uprated values. (The value of the uprating is taken to equity, but is not regarded as a profit, merely a
‘capital maintenance’ adjustment.) So this capital maintenance adjustment can be thought of as an
additional expense. Comparisons over a 20-year period will be more valid if the capital 20 years ago
is uprated for general inflation over that 20-year period.
However, there is no reason why inflation measured by a retail prices index should be at all close to
the inflation experienced by an individual company. The physical capital maintenance concept (see
below) seeks to address this.
2.10.2 Physical capital and capital maintenance
Definition
Physical capital maintenance: Under a physical concept of capital, such as operating capability,
capital is regarded as the productive capacity of the entity based on, eg, units of output per day.
This concept looks behind monetary values, to the underlying physical productive capacity of the
entity. It is based on the approach that an entity is nothing other than a means of producing saleable
outputs, so a profit is earned only after that productive capacity has been maintained by a ‘capital
maintenance’ adjustment. (Again, the capital maintenance adjustment is taken to equity and is
treated as an additional expense in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.)
Comparisons over 20 years should be more valid than under a monetary approach to capital
maintenance.
The difficulties in this approach lie in making the capital maintenance adjustment. It is basically a
current cost approach, normal practice being to use industry-specific indices of movements in non-
current assets, rather than to go to the expense of annual revaluations by professional valuers. The
difficulties lie in finding indices appropriate to the productive capacity of a particular entity.
Context example: Capital maintenance concepts

Meercat plc purchased 20,000 electrical components on 1 January 20X7 for £10 each. They were all
sold on 31 December 20X7 for £250,000. On that date the replacement cost of an electrical
component was £11.50. The general rate of inflation as measured by the general price index was
12% during the year. Profit could be calculated as follows:
Financial cap. maint’nce Financial cap. maint’nce Physical cap.

(monetary terms) (constant purchasing power) maint’nce
£ £ £
Revenue 250,000 250,000 250,000
Cost of sales
20,000 × 10 (200,000)
20,000 × 11.2 (224,000)
20,000 × 11.5 (230,000)
Profit 50,000 26,000 20,000
HB2021

3 Other reporting frameworks
Section overview
• This Workbook (and your exam) focuses on IFRS, but there are other reporting frameworks you
need to know about, particularly those that relate to smaller entities.
• The IASB’s IFRS for small and medium-sized entities (SMEs) is designed to facilitate financial
reporting by small and medium-sized entities in a number of ways.
• FRS 102 is derived from the IFRS for Small and Medium-sized Entities. It is one of the recent
financial reporting standards replacing old UK GAAP. It can be used by UK unlisted groups and by
listed and unlisted individual entities.
3.1 Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs)

3.1.1 Scope and application of IFRS
Any limitation of the applicability of a specific IFRS is made clear within that standard. IFRS are not
intended to be applied to immaterial items, nor are they retrospective. Each individual IFRS lays out
its scope at the beginning of the standard.
Within each individual country local regulations govern, to a greater or lesser degree, the issue of
financial statements. These local regulations include accounting standards issued by the national
regulatory bodies and/or professional accountancy bodies in the country concerned.
IFRS concentrates on essentials and is designed not to be too complex, otherwise the standards
would be impossible to apply on a worldwide basis.
IFRS does not override local regulations on financial statements. Entities should simply disclose
whether IFRS is complied with in all material respects. Entities in individual countries will attempt to
persuade local authorities, where current regulations deviate from IFRS, that the benefits of
harmonisation make local change worthwhile.
3.1.2 Application of IFRS to smaller entities

Big GAAP/little GAAP divide
In most countries the majority of companies or other types of entity are very small. They are generally
owned and managed by one person or a family. The owners have invested their own money in the
business and there are no outside shareholders to protect.
Large entities, by contrast, particularly companies listed on a stock exchange, may have shareholders
who have invested their money, possibly through a pension fund, with no knowledge whatsoever of
the company. These shareholders need protection and the regulations for such companies need to
be more stringent.
It could therefore be argued that company accounts should be of two types.
(a) ‘Simple’ ones for small companies with fewer regulations and disclosure requirements
(b) ‘Complicated’ ones for larger companies with extensive and detailed requirements
This is sometimes called the big GAAP/little GAAP divide.
HB2021

Possible solutions
There are two approaches to overcoming the big GAAP/little GAAP divide:
(a) Differential reporting ie, producing new reduced standards specifically for smaller companies,
such as the UK FRS 105 or the IFRS for SMEs (see below)
(b) Providing exemptions for smaller companies from some of the requirements of existing
standards
Differential reporting
Differential reporting may have drawbacks in terms of reducing comparability between small and
larger company accounts.
Furthermore, problems may arise where entities no longer meet the criteria to be classified as small.
Exemptions from IFRS
Some IFRS Standards do not have any bearing on small company accounts; for example, a company
with equity not quoted on a stock exchange has no need to comply with IAS 33, Earnings per Share.
Also, an entity with a small local market may find IFRS 8, Operating Segments to be superfluous.
Other standards always have an impact. In particular, almost all small companies will be affected by
the IFRS Standards on the following:
• Property, plant and equipment
• Inventories
• Presentation of financial statements
• Events occurring after the reporting period
• Taxes on income
• Revenue
• Provisions and contingencies
Does this mean that companies below a certain size should be exempt from other IFRS? An
alternative approach would be to reduce the exposure of small companies to IFRS on a standard by
standard basis. For those ‘core’ standards listed above, small companies would be required to follow
all or most of their provisions. For more complicated standards, small companies would face nothing
but very brief general obligations.
It is difficult to see how the IASB could impose any kind of specific size limits to define small
companies if such an approach were adopted. Instead, it might specify that size limits which are
already given in national legislation or standards could be adopted for the purpose.
Cost of compliance
If the cost of compliance exceeds the benefits to users, an entity may decide not to follow an IFRS.
This applies to all reporting entities, not just smaller ones. However, smaller entities are more likely to
make use of this exception.
For example, impairment reviews can be time consuming and a smaller entity may not have sufficient
staff to spare to carry out these reviews.
Materiality
Another point to note is that IFRS Standards apply to material items. In the case of smaller entities,
the amount that is material may be very small in monetary terms. However, the effect of not reporting
that item may be material in that it would mislead users of the financial statements. A case in point is
IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures. Smaller entities may well rely on trade with relatives of the
directors/shareholders and this needs to be disclosed.
3.1.3 International Financial Reporting Standard for Small and Medium-sized Entities
The IFRS for Small and Medium-Sized Entities (IFRS for SMEs) was published in 2009 and revised in
2015 and 2018. It is relatively short, and has simplifications that reflect the needs of users of SMEs’
financial statements and cost-benefit considerations.
It is designed to facilitate financial reporting by SMEs in a number of ways.
• It provides significantly less guidance than full IFRS.
• Many of the principles for recognising and measuring assets, liabilities, income and expenses in
full IFRS are simplified.
HB2021

• Where full IFRS allows accounting policy choices, the IFRS for SMEs allows only the easier option.
• Topics not relevant to SMEs are omitted.
• Significantly fewer disclosures are required.
• The standard has been written in clear language that can easily be translated.
3.1.4 Scope
The IFRS is suitable for all entities except those whose securities are publicly traded and financial
institutions such as banks and insurance companies. It is the first set of international accounting
requirements developed specifically for SMEs. Although it has been prepared on a similar basis to
full IFRS, it is a standalone product and will be updated on its own timescale.
There are no quantitative thresholds for qualification as an SME; instead, the scope of the IFRS is
determined by a test of public accountability. As with full IFRS, it is up to legislative and regulatory
authorities and standard setters in individual jurisdictions to decide who is permitted or required to
use the IFRS for SMEs.
3.1.5 Effective date

The IFRS for SMEs does not contain an effective date; this is determined in each jurisdiction. The IFRS
will be revised only once every three years. It is hoped that this will further reduce the reporting
burden for SMEs.
3.1.6 Accounting policies

For situations where the IFRS for SMEs does not provide specific guidance, it provides a hierarchy for
determining a suitable accounting policy. An SME must consider, in descending order:
• The guidance in the IFRS for SMEs on similar and related issues
• The definitions, recognition criteria and measurement concepts in section 2 Concepts and
Pervasive Principles of the standard
The entity also has the option of considering the requirements and guidance in full IFRS dealing with
similar topics. However, it is under no obligation to do this, or to consider the pronouncements of
other standard setters.
3.1.7 Overlap with full IFRS

In the following areas, the recognition and measurement guidance in the IFRS for SMEs is like that in
the full IFRS.
• Provisions and contingencies
• Hyperinflation accounting
• Events after the end of the reporting period
• Taxation
3.1.8 Omitted topics

The IFRS for SMEs does not address the following topics that are covered in full IFRS.
• Earnings per share
• Interim financial reporting
• Segment reporting
• Classification for non-current assets (or disposal groups) as held for sale
3.1.9 Examples of options in full IFRS not included in the IFRS for SMEs
• Revaluation model for intangible assets and property, plant and equipment
• Financial instrument options, including available-for-sale, held-to-maturity and fair value options
• Choice between cost and fair value models for investment property (measurement depends on
the circumstances)
• Options for government grants
HB2021

3.1.10 Principal recognition and measurement simplifications
(a) Financial instruments
Financial instruments meeting specified criteria are measured at cost or amortised cost. All
others are measured at fair value through profit or loss. The procedure for derecognition has
been simplified, as have hedge accounting requirements.
(b) Goodwill and other indefinite-life intangibles
These are always amortised over their estimated useful life (or 10 years if it cannot be estimated).
(c) Investments in associates and joint ventures
These can be measured at cost, but fair value must be used if there is a published price
quotation.
(d) Research and development costs and borrowing costs must be expensed.
(e) Held-for-sale assets
There is no separate held-for-sale classification; holding an asset or group of assets for sale is an
indicator of impairment.
(f) Biological assets
SMEs are to use the costless depreciation and impairment model unless the fair value is readily
determinable, in which case the fair value through profit or loss model is required.
(g) Equity-settled share-based payment
If observable market prices are not available to measure the fair value of the equity-settled
share-based payment, the directors’ best estimate is used.
3.1.11 Likely effect

Because there is no supporting guidance in the IFRS for SMEs, it is likely that differences from the full
IFRS will arise, even where the principles are the same. Most of the exemptions in the IFRS for SMEs
are on grounds of cost or undue effort. However, despite the practical advantages of a simpler
reporting framework, there will be costs involved for those moving to the IFRS – even a simplified
IFRS – for the first time.
3.1.12 Advantages and disadvantages of the IFRS for SMEs

Advantages
• It is virtually a ‘one stop shop‘.
• It is structured according to topics, which should make it practical to use.
• It is written in an accessible style.
• There is considerable reduction in disclosure requirements.
• Guidance not relevant to private entities is excluded.
Disadvantages
• It does not focus on the smallest companies.
• The scope extends to ‘non publicly accountable’ entities. Potentially, the scope is too wide.
• The standard will be onerous for small companies.
• Further simplifications could be made. These might include the following:
– Amortisation for goodwill and intangibles
– No requirement to value intangibles separately from goodwill on a business combination
– No recognition of deferred tax
– No measurement rules for equity-settled share-based payment
– No requirement for consolidated accounts (as for EU SMEs currently)
– Fair value measurement when readily determinable without undue cost or effort
HB2021

3.2 SMEs in the UK
3.2.1 UK regulatory framework
UK companies must produce their financial statements in line with the requirements of:
• The Companies Act 2006; and
• Accounting standards, whether IFRS or the UK Financial Reporting Standards.
(FRS 100–105)
Companies whose shares or debt are traded on a regulated securities exchange have been required
to prepare their consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS since 2005. (This
requirement does not apply to the separate financial statements of the parent company or the
separate financial statements of any subsidiaries, although it is permissible to use IFRS for these as
well.) From 2007 onwards this regulation also applied to companies whose share capital or debt was
traded on the London Alternative Investment Market (AIM).
All other companies can choose whether to prepare both consolidated and separate financial
statements in accordance with UK GAAP or IFRS. However, when a company chooses to change the
basis of preparation to IFRS, it cannot subsequently change back to using UK GAAP.
3.2.2 UK GAAP
The current financial reporting framework came into effect in 2015 in the UK and Ireland. The UK’s
Financial Reporting Council (FRC) has published six standards.
• FRS 100, Application of Financial Reporting Requirements which sets out the overall reporting
framework. It does not contain accounting requirements in itself but rather provides direction as
to the relevant standard(s) for an entity (whether EU-adopted IFRS Standards, FRS 101, FRS 102 or
FRS 105).
• FRS 101, Reduced Disclosure Framework which permits disclosure exemptions from the
requirements of EU-adopted IFRS Standards for certain qualifying entities.
• FRS 102, The Financial Reporting Standard Applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland which
replaced all previous FRSs, SSAPs and UITF Abstracts. The FRS was revised in 2015 and 2018.
• FRS 103, Insurance Contracts which consolidates existing financial reporting requirements for
insurance contracts.
• FRS 104, Interim Financial Reporting which specifies the requirements (adapted from IAS 34) for
interim financial reports.
• FRS 105, The Financial Reporting Standard applicable to the Micro-entities Regime which
concerns the smallest entities.
The options available for preparing financial statements are summarised below, with a tick indicating
that that type of entity is permitted to follow the stated framework.
Type FRS 105 FRS 102 FRS 102 FRS 101 EU-
Section 1A (and FRS adopted
103) IFRS
Entities eligible for micro     

entities regime
Entities eligible for small    

companies regime
Entities not micro or small   

and not required to apply
EU-adopted IFRS
The most important UK standard is FRS 102, which introduces a single standard framework on the
IFRS for SMEs (see above).
3.2.3 FRSSE
The Financial Reporting Standard for Smaller Entities (FRSSE) was withdrawn in 2016. Entities formerly
or currently applying the FRSSE will need to apply one of the regimes set out above.
HB2021

3.2.4 FRS 101, Reduced Disclosure Framework
FRS 101, Reduced Disclosure Framework – Disclosure Exemptions from EU-adopted IFRS for
Qualifying Entities, was published alongside FRS 100. It applies to the individual accounts of
qualifying entities, being entities which are included in publicly available consolidated accounts. The
recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements of EU-adopted IFRS are applied, but with a
reduction in the required level of disclosure.
3.2.5 Statements of recommended practice (SORPs)

If an entity’s financial statements are prepared in accordance with the FRSSE or FRS 102, SORPs will
apply in the circumstances set out in those standards.
3.2.6 FRS 102, The Financial Reporting Standard Applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland
FRS 102 introduces a single standard based on the IFRS for SMEs, replacing almost all extant FRSs,
SSAPs and UITF abstracts. Where an entity applies FRS 102 and also has insurance contracts, FRS 103
is also applicable.
FRS 102 was amended in 2015. The main changes are:
(a) A new Section 1ASmall Entities is included. This sets out the presentation and disclosure
requirements for a small entity that chooses to apply the small entities regime. However, these
entities must still apply the recognition and measurement requirements set out in the existing
sections of FRS 102.
(b) Qualifying entities may take advantage of certain disclosure exemptions from the standard.
(c) Where (rarely) an estimate of the useful economic life of goodwill and intangible assets cannot
be made, the maximum useful life allowed is increased from 5 to 10 years.
(d) Minimum requirements are set out for entities wishing to take advantage of the flexibility to
adapt statutory balance sheet and profit and loss formats set out in the new Accounting
Regulations.
(e) Where the entity has the choice of settling share-based payments in cash or shares, the default
accounting treatment has been reversed. Previously they were treated by default as cash-settled,
whereas now they will normally be accounted for as equity-settled.
(f) Reversal of any impairment of goodwill is now prohibited.
FRS 102 was revised again in March 2018. The changes related to:
• Basic financial instruments and hedging
• Pension obligations
• Small entities
• Fair value hierarchy disclosures
• Notification of shareholders
• Directors’ loans – optional interim relief for small entities
• Matters arising from the 2017 triennial review
While the changes have not yet taken effect and are not examinable, it is important to be aware that
regular revision to FRS 102 is to be expected, as IFRS changes, with consequent effects on the IFRS
for SMEs, and then FRS 102, which is based on the latter.
3.2.7 Statement of compliance

Where an entity prepares its financial statements in accordance with FRS 101 or FRS 102, a statement
of compliance needs to be included in the notes.
3.2.8 Interpretation of equivalence

FRS 101 and FRS 102 permit certain exemptions from disclosures subject to equivalent disclosures
being included in the consolidated financial statements of the group to which an entity belongs.
The Companies Act exempts, subject to certain conditions, an intermediate from the requirement to
prepare consolidated financial statements where its parent is not established under the law of an
EEA state. One of the conditions is that the group accounts are drawn up in a manner equivalent to
consolidated accounts so drawn up.
HB2021

The Application Guidance to FRS 100 provides guidance on interpreting the meaning of equivalence
in both of these cases.
3.2.9 Scope of FRS 102 vs scope of IFRS for SMEs

The IFRS for SMEs applies to SMEs that do not have public accountability and publish general
purpose financial statements. In contrast, the scope of FRS 102 is as set out in the table above.
FRS 102:
“[…] is a single financial reporting standard that applies to the financial statements of entities
that are not applying EU-adopted IFRS, FRS101 or the FRSSE… [It] aims to provide entities with
succinct financial reporting requirements. The requirements in the FRS are based on the IASB’s
IFRS for SMEs issued in 2009. The IFRS for SMEs is intended to apply to the general purpose
financial statements of, and other financial reporting by, entities that in many countries are
referred to by a variety of terms including ‘small and medium-sized’, ‘private’ and ‘non-publicly
accountable’.
The IFRS for SMEs is a simplification of the principles in IFRS for recognising and measuring
assets, liabilities, income and expenses; in most cases it includes only the simpler accounting
treatment where IFRS permits accounting options, it contains fewer disclosures and is drafted
more succinctly than IFRS. The ASB amended the IFRS for SMEs to include accounting options in
current FRS and permitted by IFRS, but not included in the IFRS for SMEs.”
(FRS 102 Summary)
Listed UK groups are required to prepare their consolidated financial statements in accordance with
the IFRS. FRS 102 may be applied by any other entity or group, including parent and subsidiary
companies within a listed group. A company applying FRS 102 is reporting under the Companies
Act. FRS 102 can also be used by entities that are not companies and therefore not subject to
company law.
Qualifying entities may take advantage of certain disclosure exemptions within the standard. A
qualifying entity for this purpose is a member of a group where the parent of that group prepares
publicly available consolidated financial statements intended to give a true and fair view of the
position and performance of the group and that member is included in the consolidation.
The key exemptions (not to be confused with the exemptions available under FRS 101) are:
• preparation of a statement of cash flows;
• certain financial instrument disclosures;
• certain share-based payment disclosures;
• disclosure of key management personnel compensation; and
• reconciliation of shares outstanding in the period.
Entities that are required to disclose earnings per share or segment information in their financial
statements should also apply IAS 33, Earnings per Share and/or IFRS 8,Operating Segments.
FRS 102 is effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2015. It is also applicable
to public benefit entities.
3.2.10 Statutory ‘true and fair override’

The Companies Act 2006 (CA 2006) requires that where compliance with its accounting rules would
not lead to a true and fair view, those rules should be departed from to the extent necessary to give
a true and fair view.
Where the override of the statutory accounting requirements is invoked eg, to comply with an
accounting standard, the Act requires disclosure of the particulars of the departure, the reason for it
and the financial effect.
The CA 2006 also states that where compliance with its disclosure requirements is insufficient to give
a true and fair view, additional information should be disclosed such that a true and fair view is
provided.
This statutory true and fair override replaces paragraph 3.7 of the IFRS for SMEs, which deals with:
“the extremely rare circumstances when management concludes that compliance with a requirement
in this IFRS would be so misleading that it would conflict with the objective of financial statements of
SMEs set out in section 2 of the IFRS”.
HB2021

3.2.11 FRS 104, Interim Financial Reporting
FRS 104, Interim Financial Reporting was issued in March 2015 and is effective for accounting periods
beginning on or after 1 January 2015. The Standard is based on IAS 34, Interim Financial Reporting
(see Chapter 10) with some amendments. It is intended for use in the preparation of interim financial
reports for entities applying FRS 102, but may also be used as a basis for preparing interim reports
by those entities applying FRS 101, Reduced Disclosure Framework. It replaces the existing
Accounting Standards Board (ASB) Statement Half-yearly financial reports, issued in 2007.
FRS 104 specifies the minimum components for an interim financial report. These are as follows:
(a) A condensed statement of financial position.
(b) Either a single condensed statement of comprehensive income or a separate condensed
statement of comprehensive income and a separate condensed income statement. The
selection must be consistent with the latest annual financial statements.
(c) A condensed statement of changes in equity.
(d) A condensed statement of cash flows (unless the entity will not be presenting a statement of
cash flows in its next annual financial statements).
(e) Selected explanatory notes.
If a complete set of financial statements is published in the interim report, those financial statements
should be in full compliance with FRS 102. If the condensed financial statements are published, they
should include, as a minimum, each of the headings and sub-totals included in the most recent
annual financial statements and the explanatory notes required by FRS 104.
3.2.12 FRS 105, The Financial Reporting Standard Applicable to the Micro-entities Regime
FRS 105, The Financial Reporting Standard Applicable to the Micro-entities Regime is a new
accounting standard applicable to the smallest entities. It was published in July 2015 and is effective
for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2016.
Key features of the standard are as follows:
• A single accounting standard for use by companies qualifying as micro-entities and choosing to
apply the micro-entities regime.
• Based on FRS 102 with significant simplifications to reflect the nature and size of micro-entities.
• Comprises 28 sections, each dealing with a specific area of accounting.
• Micro-entities must prepare a balance sheet and profit and loss account.
• Other primary statements are not required.
• Only limited disclosures needed.
• Accounts prepared in accordance with the regulations are presumed by law to give a true and fair
view.
• No deferred tax or equity-settled share-based payment amounts are recognised.
• Accounting choices set out in FRS 102 are removed. No capitalisation of borrowing costs or
development costs.
• All assets are measured based on historical cost, with no fair value measurement normally
allowed.
3.3 Auditing smaller entities

At this point, it is useful to look at small and medium enterprises from an audit perspective.
3.3.1 Small company audit exemption

As we have seen in Chapter 1 the audit exemption limit has been revised. The exemption limit is
based on the criteria for a small company in accordance with CA 2006. To qualify as a small company
a company must satisfy at least two of the following:
• Annual turnover must be £10.2 million or less.
• The balance sheet total must be £5.1 million or less.
• The average number of employees must be 50 or fewer.
HB2021

3.3.2 Benefits of SME audit exemptions
Exemptions for SMEs from the requirement to be audited were granted in the UK partly on the
grounds that audit is an administrative burden. This view has been challenged in an Information
Paper published by Accountancy Europe in February 2018, entitled Rediscovering the Value of SME
Audit. The Information Paper deals with recent developments in Sweden and Denmark.
Sweden abolished the audit requirement for SMEs in 2010, but the Swedish National Audit Office
questioned the value of this abolition in a 2017 report: Abolition of Audit Obligation for Small Limited
Companies – A Reform where Costs Outweigh Benefits. Contrary to expectations, the abolition of the
requirement did not enhance growth or save costs. Furthermore, the move had certain
disadvantages: transparency was reduced, the financial statements were prone to errors and the risk
of economic crime, including tax evasion, increased as did the risk of business insolvency.
Based on these findings, the Swedish National Audit Office recommended reintroducing the
requirement for SMEs to be audited. This has had implications for Denmark. While the exemption
threshold was raised in 2006, 2010 and 2013, this approach is being questioned in the light of the
Swedish findings, and the Danish Ministry of Business will now carry out a study into the
consequences.
The report concludes by acknowledging that Sweden and Denmark have taken a pragmatic, fact-
based approach to this issue, and recommending that this is rolled out at a European level.
3.3.3 International standards on auditing for small companies

Unlike the IFRS Standards, there are no separate auditing standards applying specifically to smaller
entities. This is based on the view that ‘an audit is an audit’ and that users who receive auditors’
reports need to have confidence in the auditor’s opinions, whether they are in relation to large or
small entity financial statements.
However, there is an acknowledgement that small and medium enterprises do pose specific
challenges to the auditor in certain areas. Some of the ISAs that you have already studied highlight
how their requirements should be applied to small company audits.
3.3.4 ISA (UK) 210 (Revised June 2016), Agreeing the Terms of Audit Engagements
The owner of a small company may not be aware of directors’ and auditors’ responsibilities,
particularly if the accounts preparation is outsourced. A primary purpose of the engagement letter is
to clarify these responsibilities. ISA 210.A21 states that it may be useful in this situation to remind
management that the preparation of the financial statements remains their responsibility.
3.3.5 ISA (UK) 220 (Revised June 2016), Quality Control for an Audit of Financial Statements
The audit of a smaller entity must still be compliant with ISAs. Most of these audits are conducted
using one audit partner, one manager and one audit senior so, although assignment and delegation
are taking place, it may be difficult to form an objective view on the judgements made in the audit.
The standard (ISA 220.A30) points out that firms must set their own criteria to identify which audits
require a quality review (in addition to audits of listed entities, where such reviews are mandatory). In
some cases, none of the firm’s audit engagements may meet the criteria that would subject them to
such a review.
3.3.6 ISA (UK) 230 (Revised June 2016), Audit Documentation

A small audit team may have an excellent understanding of the audit client, but it is important to
ensure that working papers meet the standard required by the ISA and to prepare audit
documentation that can be understood by an experienced auditor, as the documentation may be
subject to review by external parties for regulatory or other purposes.
The standard (ISA 230.A16–.A17) does allow for the following:
(a) The documentation being less extensive than for the audit of a larger entity
(b) Where the engagement partner performs all the audit work, matters that are normally
documented solely to instruct or inform members of the team, or to provide evidence of review,
will not be included
(c) Various aspects of the audit may be recorded together in a single document
HB2021

3.3.7 ISA (UK) 240 (Revised June 2016), The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Fraud in an Audit of
Financial Statements
Within small companies, the lack of control procedures can contribute to a higher risk of employee
fraud and error. On the other hand, a smaller entity may not have a written code of conduct but may
have developed a culture of integrity and ethical behaviour through oral communication and
management example.
The presence of a dominant owner-manager can be an important factor in the overall control
environment, with the need for management authorisation compensating for the lack of other
controls. However, this can be a potential deficiency in internal control, due to the opportunity for
management to override controls.
ISA 240 requires discussion among the audit team of the susceptibility of the entity to material
frauds or errors. This discussion is still required for a small entity but is often overlooked due to the
size of the audit team.
In addition, ISA 240 requires auditors to ask management about their assessment of risk of fraud and
error. Even if management do not have a system of assessing risk, the enquiry should still be made,
as it provides valuable information about the control environment, although in smaller entities
management’s assessment may only focus on the risks of employee fraud or misappropriation of
assets. (ISA 240.A13)
3.3.8 ISA (UK) 300 (Revised June 2016), Planning an Audit of Financial Statements
Due to the lack of complexity, audit planning documentation may be scaled back for a small entity.
With a smaller team, co-ordination and communication are easier. A planning meeting or general
conversation may be sufficient, and notes made about future issues during last year’s audit will be
particularly useful.
Standard audit programmes or checklists may be used, provided that they are tailored to the
circumstances of the engagement, including the auditor’s risk assessments.
In the smallest audits, carried out entirely by the audit partner, questions of direction, supervision and
review do not arise. Forming an objective view on the appropriateness of judgements made in the
course of the audit can present problems in this case and, if particularly complex or unusual issues
are involved, it may be desirable to consult with other suitably experienced auditors or the auditor’s
professional body.(ISA300.A11, .A17 & .A21)
3.3.9 ISA (UK) 320 (Revised June 2016), Materiality in Planning and Performing an Audit
The standard highlights that in an owner-managed business the profit before tax for the year may be
consistently nominal, as the owner may take most of the profits as remuneration, so it may be more
appropriate to use profit before remuneration as the basis for estimating materiality. (ISA 320.A9)
Another practical issue is that at the planning stage it is often difficult to calculate materiality as a
percentage of key figures eg, of assets, revenue or profit, as the draft accounts may be unavailable
for a small business. Trial balance figures may have to be used instead.
The auditor will need to use judgement in applying materiality when evaluating results.
3.3.10 ISA (UK) 550, Related Parties

In a small entity, related party transactions between the company and its directors and their families
may be significant but smaller entities may have no documented processes or controls for dealing
with related party relationships and transactions. The auditor will have to obtain an understanding of
the related party relationships and transactions through enquiry of management and observation of
management’s oversight and review activities. (ISA 550.A20)
The auditor’s in-depth knowledge of the smaller entity will assist in identification of related parties
(for example, other entities controlled by the owner management) which will also help the auditor to
assess the risk of any transactions being unrecorded or undisclosed.
HB2021

3.3.11 ISA (UK) 570 (Revised June 2016), Going Concern
The size of an entity may affect its ability to withstand adverse conditions. Small entities may be able
to respond quickly to exploit opportunities, but may lack reserves to sustain operations.
Risks of particular relevance to small entities are:
• that banks and other lenders may cease to support the entity; and
• the possible loss of a principal supplier, major customer or key employee, or of the right to
operate under a licence, franchise or other legal agreement. (ISA 570.A5–.A6)
It is unlikely that budgets and forecasts will be available for the auditor to review. In many businesses
the principal source of finance may be a loan from the owner-manager.
If an entity is in difficulty, its survival may depend on the owner-manager subordinating his loan in
favour of banks or other financial institutions. In this case, the auditor would inspect sufficient,
appropriate evidence of the subordination.
If an entity depends on funds from the owner-manager, the auditor will consider their current
financial position and may ask for a written representation to confirm the owner-manager’s
understanding. (ISA 570.A13)

Section overview
• IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement gives extensive guidance on how the fair value of assets and
liabilities should be established.
• IFRS 13 aims to:
– define fair value
– set out in a single IFRS a framework for measuring fair value
– require disclosures about fair value measurements
• IFRS 13 defines fair value as “the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer
a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date”.
• Fair value is a market-based measurement, not an entity-specific measurement. It focuses on
assets and liabilities and on exit (selling) prices. It also takes into account market conditions at the
measurement date.
• IFRS 13 states that valuation techniques must be those which are appropriate and for which
sufficient data are available. Entities should maximise the use of relevant observable inputs and
minimise the use of unobservable inputs.
4.1 Background
IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement was published in 2011.The project arose as a result of the
Memorandum of Understanding between the IASB and FASB (2006) reaffirming their commitment to
the convergence of IFRS and US GAAP. With the publication of IFRS 13, IFRS and US GAAP now have
the same definition of fair value and the measurement and disclosure requirements are now aligned.
A standard on fair value measurement is particularly important in the context of a worldwide move
towards IFRS.
4.2 Objective
IFRS 13 aims to:
• define fair value
• set out in a single IFRS a framework for measuring fair value
• require disclosures about fair value measurements
HB2021

The previous definition used in IFRS was “the amount for which an asset could be exchanged, or a
liability settled, between knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm’s length transaction”.
The price which would be received to sell the asset or paid to transfer (not settle) the liability is
described as the ‘exit price’ and this is the definition used in US GAAP. Although the concept of the
‘arm’s length transaction’ has now gone, the market-based current exit price retains the notion of an
exchange between unrelated, knowledgeable and willing parties.
4.3 Scope
IFRS 13 applies when another IFRS requires or permits fair value measurements or disclosures. The
measurement and disclosure requirements do not apply in the case of:
(a) share-based payment transactions within the scope of IFRS 2, Share-based Payment;
(b) leasing transactions within the scope of IFRS 16, Leases; and
(c) net realisable value as in IAS 2, Inventories or value in use as in IAS 36, Impairment of Assets.
Disclosures are not required for:
(a) plan assets measured at fair value in accordance with IAS 19, Employee Benefits;
(b) plan investments measured at fair value in accordance with IAS 26, Accounting and Reporting by
Retirement Benefit Plans; and
(c) assets for which the recoverable amount is fair value less disposal costs under IAS 36,
Impairment of Assets.
4.4 Measurement
Fair value is a market-based measurement, not an entity-specific measurement. It focuses on assets
and liabilities and on exit (selling) prices. It also takes into account market conditions at the
measurement date. In other words, it looks at the amount for which the holder of an asset could sell it
and the amount which the holder of a liability would have to pay to transfer it. It can also be used to
value an entity’s own equity instruments.
Because it is a market-based measurement, fair value is measured using the assumptions that market
participants would use when pricing the asset, taking into account any relevant characteristics of the
asset.
It is assumed that the transaction to sell the asset or transfer the liability takes place either:
(a) in the principal market for the asset or liability; or
(b) in the absence of a principal market, in the most advantageous market for the asset or liability.
The principal market is the market which is the most liquid (has the greatest volume and level of
activity) for that asset or liability. In most cases the principal market and the most advantageous
market will be the same.
IFRS 13 acknowledges that when market activity declines, an entity must use a valuation technique to
measure fair value. In this case the emphasis must be on whether a transaction price is based on an
orderly transaction, rather than a forced sale.
Fair value is not adjusted for transaction costs. Under IFRS 13, these are not a feature of the asset or
liability, but may be taken into account when determining the most advantageous market.
Fair value measurements are based on an asset or a liability’s unit of account, which is specified by
each IFRS where a fair value measurement is required. For most assets and liabilities, the unit of
account is the individual asset or liability, but in some instances may be a group of assets or
liabilities.
Context example: Unit of account

A premium or discount on a large holding of the same shares (because the market’s normal daily
trading volume is not sufficient to absorb the quantity held by the entity) is not considered when
measuring fair value: the quoted price per share in an active market is used.
However, a control premium is considered when measuring the fair value of a controlling interest,
because the unit of account is the controlling interest. Similarly, any non-controlling interest discount
is considered where measuring a non-controlling interest.
HB2021

Context example: Principal (or most advantageous) market
An asset is sold in two active markets, Market X and Market Y, at £58 and £57 respectively. Valor Co
does business in both markets and can access the price in those markets for the asset at the
measurement date as follows.
Market X Market Y
£ £
Price 58 57
Transaction costs (4) (3)
Transport costs (to transport the asset to that market) (4) (2)
50 52
Remember that fair value is not adjusted for transaction costs. Under IFRS 13, these are not a feature
of the asset or liability, but may be taken into account when determining the most advantageous
market.
If Market X is the principal market for the asset (ie, the market with the greatest volume and level of
activity for the asset), the fair value of the asset would be £54, measured as the price that would be
received in that market (£58) less transport costs (£4) and ignoring transaction costs.
If neither Market X nor Market Y is the principal market for the asset, Valor must measure the fair
value of the asset using the price in the most advantageous market. The most advantageous market
is the market that maximises the amount that would be received to sell the asset, after taking into
account both transaction costs and transport costs (ie, the net amount that would be received in the
respective markets).
The maximum net amount (after deducting both transaction and transport costs) is obtainable in
Market Y (£52, as opposed to £50). But this is not the fair value of the asset. The fair value of the asset
is obtained by deducting transport costs but not transaction costs from the price received for the
asset in Market Y: £57 less £2 = £55.
4.4.1 Non-financial assets

For non-financial assets the fair value measurement looks at the use to which the asset can be put. It
takes into account the ability of a market participant to generate economic benefits by using the
asset in its highest and best use.
4.5 Valuation techniques

IFRS 13 states that valuation techniques must be those which are appropriate and for which sufficient
data are available. Entities should maximise the use of relevant observable inputs and minimise the
use of unobservable inputs.
The standard establishes a three-level hierarchy for the inputs that valuation techniques use to
measure fair value:
• Level 1 Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the
reporting entity can access at the measurement date.
• Level 2 Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset
or liability, either directly or indirectly eg, quoted prices for similar assets in active markets or for
identical or similar assets in non-active markets or use of quoted interest rates for valuation
purposes.
• Level 3 Unobservable inputs for the asset or liability ie, using the entity’s own assumptions about
market exit value.
HB2021

This hierarchy is a starting place for structuring the problem of fair value. If the input is level 1, there
should not be much of a problem.
4.5.1 Valuation approaches

The IFRS identifies three valuation approaches.
(a) Income approach. Valuation techniques that convert future amounts (eg, cashflows or income
and expenses) to a single current (ie, discounted) amount. The fair value measurement is
determined on the basis of the value indicated by current market expectations about those
future amounts.
(b) Market approach. A valuation technique that uses prices and other relevant information
generated by market transactions involving identical or comparable (ie, similar) assets, liabilities
or a group of assets and liabilities, such as a business.
(c) Cost approach. A valuation technique that reflects the amount that would be required currently
to replace the service capacity of an asset (often referred to as current replacement cost).
Entities may use more than one valuation technique to measure fair value in a given situation. A
change of valuation technique is considered to be a change of accounting estimate in accordance
with IAS 8, and must be disclosed in the financial statements.
4.5.2 Examples of inputs used to measure fair value
Asset or liability Input
Level 1 Equity shares in a listed Unadjusted quoted prices in an active market

company
Level 2 Licensing arrangement arising Royalty rate in the contract with the unrelated party
from a business combination at inception of the arrangement
Cash generating unit Valuation multiple (eg, a multiple of earnings or

revenue or a similar performance measure) derived
from observable market data eg, from prices in
observed transactions involving comparable
businesses
Finished goods inventory at a Price to customers adjusted for differences

retail outlet between the condition and location of the
inventory item and the comparable (ie, similar)
inventory items
Building held and used Price per square metre derived from observable
market data eg, prices in observed transactions
involving comparable buildings in similar locations
Level 3 Cash generating unit Financial forecast (eg, of cash flows or profit or loss)
developed using the entity’s own data
Three-year option on exchange- Historical volatility ie, the volatility for the shares
traded shares derived from the shares’ historical prices
Interest rate swap Adjustment to a mid-market consensus (non-

binding) price for the swap developed using data
not directly observable or otherwise corroborated
by observable market data
4.6 Measuring liabilities

Fair value measurement of a liability assumes that the liability is transferred at the measurement date
to a market participant, who is then obliged to fulfil the obligation. The obligation is not settled or
otherwise extinguished on the measurement date.
HB2021

4.6.1 Entity’s own credit risk
The fair value of a liability reflects the effect of non-performance risk, which includes but is not
limited to the entity‘s own credit risk. This may be different for different types of liability.
Context example: Entity’s own credit risk

Black Co and Blue Co both enter into a legal obligation to pay £20,000 cash to Green Co in seven
years.
Black Co has a top credit rating and can borrow at 4%. Blue Co’s credit rating is lower and can
borrow at 8%.
Black Co will receive approximately £15,200 in exchange for its promise. This is the present value of
£20,000 in seven years at 4%.
Blue Co will receive approximately £11,700 in exchange for its promise. This is the present value of
£20,000 in seven years at 8%.
4.7 IFRS 13 and business combinations

Fair value generally applies on a business combination. This topic is covered in Chapter 20, together
with some further examples.
4.8 Disclosure
An entity must disclose information that helps users of its financial statements assess both of the
following:
(a) For assets and liabilities that are measured at fair value on a recurring or non-recurring basis, the
valuation techniques and inputs used to develop those measurements
(b) For recurring fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3), the effect
of the measurements on profit or loss or other comprehensive income for the period. Disclosure
requirements will include:
– reconciliation from opening to closing balances
– quantitative information regarding the inputs used
– valuation processes used by the entity
– sensitivity to changes in inputs
Particularly with Level 3 inputs, it is important to explain why you came to the conclusion that you did.
The disclosures above help to do this.
5 IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in

Accounting Estimates and Errors
Section overview
This is an overview of material covered in earlier studies
5.1 Fair accounting policies

(a) Accounting policies are determined by applying the relevant IFRS or IFRIC and considering any
relevant Implementation Guidance issued by the IASB for that IFRS/IFRIC.
HB2021

(b) Where there is no applicable IFRS or IFRIC management should use its judgement in developing
and applying an accounting policy that results in information that is relevant and reliable.
Management should refer to:
(1) the requirements and guidance in IFRS Standards and IFRICs dealing with similar and
related issues; and
(2) the definitions, recognition criteria and measurement concepts for assets, liabilities and
expenses in the Framework. Management may also consider the most recent
pronouncements of other standard-setting bodies that use a similar conceptual framework
to develop standards, other accounting literature and accepted industry practices if these
do not conflict with the sources above.
(3) An entity shall select and apply its accounting policies for a period consistently for similar
transactions, other events and conditions, unless an IFRS or an IFRIC specifically requires or
permits categorisation of items for which different policies may be appropriate. If an IFRS or
an IFRIC requires or permits categorisation of items, an appropriate accounting policy shall
be selected and applied consistently to each category.
5.2 Changes in accounting policies

(a) These are rare: only if required by statute/standard-setting body/results in reliable and more
(b) Adoption of new IFRS: follow transitional provisions of IFRS. If no transitional provisions:
retrospective application.
(c) Other changes in policy: retrospective application. Adjust opening balance of each affected
component of equity ie, as if new policy has always been applied.
(d) Prospective application: this is not allowed unless it is impracticable to determine the
cumulative effect of the change.
(e) Disclosure: an entity should disclose information relevant to assessing the impact of new IFRS
Standards/IFRICs on the financial statements where these have been issued but have not yet
come into force.
5.3 Changes in accounting estimates

• Estimates arise because of uncertainties inherent within them; judgement is required but this
does not undermine reliability.
• Effect of a change in accounting estimate should be included in profit or loss in:
– period of change, if change affects only current period; or
– period of change and future periods, if change affects both.
5.4 Errors
(a) Prior period errors: correct retrospectively where material.
(b) This involves:
(1) either restating the comparative amounts for the prior period(s) in which the error occurred;
or
(2) when the error occurred before the earliest prior period presented, restating the opening
balances of assets, liabilities and equity for that period so that the financial statements are
presented as if the error had never occurred.
(c) Only where it is impracticable to determine the cumulative effect of an error on prior periods
can an entity correct an error prospectively.
Interactive question 2: Accounting errors

During 20X7 Lubi Co discovered that certain items had been included in inventory at 31 December
20X6, valued at £4.2 million, which had in fact been sold before the year end. The following figures
for 20X6 (as reported) and 20X7 (draft) are available.
HB2021

20X6 20X7 (draft)
£’000 £’000
Sales 47,400 67,200
Cost of goods sold (34,570) (55,800)
Profit before taxation 12,830 11,400
Income taxes (3,880) (3,400)
Net profit 8,950 8,000
Retained earnings at 1 January 20X6 were £13 million. The cost of goods sold for 20X7 includes the
£4.2 million error in opening inventory. The income tax rate was 30% for 20X6 and 20X7.
Requirement
Show the profit or loss section of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for
20X7, with the 20X6 comparative, and retained earnings.
5.5 Recent development: definition of material

IAS 8 was amended to align the definitions of material in IAS 8 and IAS 1. This definition was
extended to the Materiality Practice Statement (see below) and to the Conceptual Framework.
Definition
Material: Information is material if omitting, misstating or obscuring it could reasonably be expected
to influence decisions that the primary users of general purpose financial statements make on the
basis of those financial statements, which provide financial information about a specific reporting
entity. In other words, materiality is an entity-specific aspect of relevance based on the nature or
magnitude, or both, of the items to which the information relates in the context of an individual
entity’s financial report.’ (IAS 1: para. 7)
6 Current issues in corporate reporting

Section overview
This section covers several areas in which the IASB is developing new accounting standards. Recent
changes are ripe for examination if they are the subject of a full IFRS. While proposed changes (EDs,
Discussion Papers) will not be examined in detail, it is important to show an awareness of them.
Important note
Current issues are covered in this Workbook within the chapters in which the topic appears, so
that the changes/proposed changes appear in context.
6.1 Better communication in financial reporting

Since 2015, a major theme of the IASB’s work has been to improve communication in financial
reporting. This is in response to feedback from users of financial statements that financial statements
can be poorly presented, making it time-consuming and difficult for users to identify useful
information. This topic is covered in more detail in Chapter 24 in the context of the Management
Commentary.
HB2021

6.2 Insurance
The IASB project to develop a comprehensive framework for insurance contracts culminated in the
publication of IFRS 17, Insurance Contracts in 2017. IFRS 17 introduces a comprehensive reporting
framework for insurance contracts that is intended to result in insurance companies producing
financial statements which are more comparable, consistent and transparent. IFRS 17 is covered as a
current issue in Chapter 12.
6.3 Revision of the Conceptual Framework

In 2018 a revised Conceptual Framework was issued. The key features are summarised in section 2 of
this chapter.
6.4 Disclosure initiative

6.4.1 Overview
The IASB’s disclosure initiative is a broad-based undertaking exploring how disclosures in IFRS
financial reporting can be improved. It is made up of a number of projects, the third of which, a
Practice Statement on materiality was completed in September 2017.
6.4.2 Current status

Three projects, the amendments to IAS 1 and IAS 7 and a Practice Statement on materiality, are
complete. The remainder are at the ED stage or the research stage.
6.5 Practice Statement on materiality

The IASB issued Practice Statement 2: Making Materiality Judgements in 2017. This is a tool to aid
management in using judgement to decide what information is material and what is not; it is a non-
mandatory document and does not have the status of an IFRS.
6.5.1 General characteristics of materiality

The Statement refers to the definition of materiality contained within the 2010 Conceptual
Framework:
“Information is material if omitting it or misstating it could influence decisions that users make on
the basis of financial information about a specific reporting entity. In other words, materiality is
an entity-specific aspect of relevance based on the nature or magnitude, or both, of the items to
which the information relates in the context of an individual entity’s financial report.”
(Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting, para QC11)
Materiality is pervasive to the preparation of financial statements and affects recognition,
measurement, presentation and disclosure.
When considering whether information is material, a company should consider its own
circumstances and the needs of primary users of its financial statements ie, investors, lenders and
other creditors.
6.5.2 Interaction with local laws and regulations

The Practice Statement clarifies that a company’s financial statements must comply with requirements
of IFRS, including those relating to materiality.
Providing additional information to meet local legal or regulatory requirements is allowed by IFRS,
even if that information is not material, provided that it does not obscure material information.
6.5.3 Making materiality judgements

The Practice Statement includes a four-step process that entities may find useful in making materiality
judgements:
Step 1 Identify information that has the potential to be material. This step requires consideration of
IFRS requirements and the common information needs of primary users.
Step 2 Assess whether the information identified is material. Both quantitative and qualitative
factors should be considered.
HB2021

Step 3 Organise the information within the draft financial statements so that it supports clear and
concise communication.
Step 4 Review the information provided as a whole, considering whether it is material individually
and in combination with other information. At this stage information may need to be added
or removed.
6.5.4 Specific topics

Specific guidance is provided on how to make materiality judgements on prior period information,
errors, covenants and in interim reporting.
6.6 Blue Book and Red Book

Your exam is based on the 2021 ‘Blue Book’, officially called 2021 IFRS Consolidated Without Early
Application. This contains all official pronouncements that are mandatory on 1 January 2021. It does
not include IFRS Standards with an effective date after 1 January 2021.
The Blue Book differs from the Red Book (officially called 2021 International Financial Reporting
Standards), which includes all pronouncements issued at the publication date, including those that
do not become mandatory until a future date. It includes standards that are effective on 1 January
2021 and in the future, but not the standards that they will replace. It is normally printed in two
volumes. (The Red Book is more appropriate for preparers of financial statements who wish to adopt
any of the standards early.)
6.7 Pointing forward to the future: approach to current issues

While the Blue Book is the basis for exam questions, an overview of current issues will be needed in
order to understand the potential problems preparers of financial statements will be facing. Current
issues, as indicated above, are dealt with within the context of the topics. For a useful overview of
what is to come, below is an extract from the IASB Work Plan, as at October 2021.
Project Next milestone Expected date
Accounting for Warrants that are Agenda Decision October 2021

Classified as Financial Liabilities on
Initial Recognition (IAS 32)
Availability of a Refund (Amendments Decide Project Direction -

to IFRIC 14)
Business Combinations under Discussion Paper Feedback December 2021

Common Control
Cash Received via Electronic Transfer Tentative Agenda Decision Q1 2022

as Settlement for a Financial Asset Feedback
(IFRS 9)
Classification of Debt with Covenants Exposure Draft November 2021

as Current or Non-current (IAS 1)
Demand Deposits with Restrictions on Tentative Agenda Decision Q1 2022

Use (IAS 7) Feedback
Disclosure Initiative—Subsidiaries Exposure Draft Feedback H1 2022

without Public Accountability:
Disclosures
Disclosure Initiative—Targeted Exposure Draft Feedback Q1, 2022

Standards-level Review of Disclosures
Dynamic Risk Management Decide Project Direction H1 2022
Economic Benefits from Use of a Tentative Agenda Decision November 2021

Windfarm (IFRS 16) Feedback
Equity Method Decide project direction -
HB2021

Project Next milestone Expected date
Extractive Activities Decide project direction -
Financial Instruments with Exposure Draft -

Characteristics of Equity
Goodwill and Impairment Decide Project Direction Q1 2022
IFRS Taxonomy Update—2021 General Proposed IFRS Taxonomy December 2021

Improvements and Common Practice Update
IFRS Taxonomy Update—Amendments IFRS Taxonomy Update November 2021

to IAS 1, IAS 8 and IFRS Practice
Statement 2
Initial Application of IFRS 17 and IFRS Exposure Draft Feedback October 2021
9―Comparative Information
(Amendment to IFRS 17)
Lack of Exchangeability (Amendments Exposure Draft Feedback Q1, 2022

to IAS 21)
Lease Liability in a Sale and Leaseback Decide Project Direction December 2021
Management Commentary Exposure Draft Feedback Q1 2022
Non-refundable Value Added Tax on Agenda Decision October 2021

Lease Payments (IFRS 16)
Pension Benefits that Depend on Review Research October 2021

Asset Returns
Post-implementation Review of IFRS Feedback Statement Q1 2022

10, IFRS 11 and IFRS 12
Post-implementation Review of IFRS Request for Information H1 2022

9—Classification and Measurement Feedback
Primary Financial Statements IFRS Standard -
Provisions—Targeted Improvements Decide Project Direction -
Rate-regulated Activities Exposure Draft Feedback October 2021
Second Comprehensive Review of the Exposure Draft -

IFRS for SMEs Standard
Supplier Finance Arrangements Exposure Draft November 2021
Sustainability-related Reporting Exposure Draft Feedback October 2021
Third Agenda Consultation Request for Information November 2021

Feedback
TLTRO III Transactions (IFRS 9 and IAS Tentative Agenda Decision November 2021
20) Feedback
(Source: www. ifrs.org/projects/work-plan/)
HB2021

Summary
Financial Accounting The process of identifying,

measuring and communicating
economic information to others
ICAEW Code IASB Conceptual

Financial statements Not-for-profit entities
of Ethics Framework
Statement of financial position Regulated by:

Statement of profit or loss and other Local Legislation
comprehensive income SORPs
Statement of changes in equity IPSAS
Statement of cash flows
Notes
Purpose Underlying Qualitative Capital maintenance

Elements
and use assumption characteristics concepts
Going concern
Financial Financial
position performance
Relevance
Asset Liability Equity Income Expense
Faithful
representation
Definitions
Enhancing
characteristics
Recognition
Comparability
Measurement
Verifiability
Timeliness
Understandability
HB2021

UK GAAP
FRS 100 – sets out the Framework
IFRS UK GAAP Framework

Framework
Apply EU – Qualifying entities – Small entities

All other entities
adopted IFRS FRS 101 – with FRS 102
FRS 102 – FRSUKI
reduced disclosures Section 1A
Smallest entities –
FRS 104, FRS 105
FRS 103, Insurance
Internal Financial
Contracts applies
Reporting – for
to entities using
use by entities
FRS 102
applying FRS 102
UK companies must produce financial statements in accordance with the Companies Act 2006
and accounting standards, whether IFRS or UK FRS 100 to 105.
IFRS for Small and

Medium-sized Entities
Considerations in developing IFRS for Small and Medium-

a set of standards for SMEs sized Entities
IFRS 13, Fair Value

Measurement
Definition of fair value: 3-level hierarchy: Valuation

• Market participants Level 1 – quoted prices in approaches
• Orderly transaction active markets
• Market-based not Level 2 – other observable
entity-based inputs
Level 3 – unobservable
inputs
Disclosures
HB2021

1. Can you list the two fundamental and four enhancing qualitative characteristics of financial
information? (Topic 1)
2. How does the Conceptual Framework define a liability? (Topic 2)
3. How should goodwill be accounted for under the IFRS for SMEs? (Topic 3)
4. Have you understood what IFRS 13 means by the principal market? (Topic 4)
5. Can you define and explain materiality? (Topic 5)
6. What is the most recent IFRS? (Topic 6)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
IASB Conceptual Framework This short, straightforward question is included because this is the
first time the revised Conceptual Framework has been tested.
IFRS 13, Fair Value Fair value comes up so often in Corporate Reporting questions that
Measurement it is important to do this comprehensive question to get a firm
grasp of it at this early stage.
Polson This is a full question covering most aspects of IAS 8 that you are
likely to encounter.
Once you have attempted the self-test questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the
next chapter. In later chapters, we will recommend questions from the Question Bank for you to
attempt.
HB2021

Technical reference
The whole of the Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting and Preface to International Financial
Reporting Standards is examinable. The paragraphs listed below are the key references you should
be familiar with.
1 What is financial reporting?

• Financial reporting is the provision of financial information about a reporting entity that is useful
to existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors in making decisions relating to
providing resources to the entity – Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting (Concept
Frame) (1.2)
• Financial statements comprise statement of financial position, statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income, statement of changes in equity, statement of cash flows and notes – IAS 1
(10)
2 Purpose and use of financial statements

• Users’ core need is for information for making economic decisions – Concept Frame (1.2)
• Objective is to provide information on financial position (the entity’s economic resources and the
claims against it) and about transactions and other events that change those resources and claims
– Concept Frame (1.4)
• Financial position: – Concept Frame (1.4)
– Resources and claims
– Help identify entity’s strengths and weaknesses
– Liquidity and solvency
• Changes in economic resources and claims: – Concept Frame (1.18)
– Help assess prospects for future cash flows
– How well have management made efficient and effective use of the resources
• Financial performance reflected by accrual accounting – Concept Frame (1.17)
• Financial performance reflected by past cash flows – Concept Frame (1.21)
3 Qualitative characteristics of useful financial information

• Two fundamental qualitative characteristics are relevance and faithful representation – Concept
Frame (2.5)
• Relevance = capable of making a difference to decisions – Concept Frame (2.6)
– Predictive and confirmatory values – Concept Frame (2.7)
– Materiality – Concept Frame (2.11)
• Faithful representation – Concept Frame (2.12)
– Complete, neutral and free from error
• Four enhancing qualitative characteristics – Concept Frame (2.25-2.34)
– Comparability, verifiability, timeliness and understandability
4 Cost constraint on useful financial reporting

• Costs (of preparing and analysing) financial information must be justified by the benefits of
reporting it – Concept Frame (2.39-2.41)
5 Reporting entity
• Underlying assumption: going concern – Concept Frame (3.9)
• Reporting period – Concept Frame (3.4 - 3.7)
• Perspective: entity as a whole, not a group of users – Concept Frame (3.4 - 3.7)
• Consolidated versus unconsolidated – Concept Frame (3.15 - 3.17)
HB2021

6 Elements of financial statements
• Asset: A present economic resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events. An
economic resource is a right that has the potential to produce economic benefits – Concept
Frame (4.3, 4.4)
• Liability: A present obligation of the entity to transfer an economic resource as a result of past
events – Concept Frame (4.26)
• Equity: The residual interest in assets less liabilities; that is, net assets – Concept Frame (4.63)
• Income (comprising revenue and gains): Increases in assets, or decreases in liabilities, that result
in increases in equity, other than those relating to contributions from holders of equity claims –
Concept Frame (4.68)
• Expenses (including losses): Decreases in assets, or increases in liabilities, that result in decreases
in equity other than those relating to distributions to holders of equity claims – Concept Frame
(4.69)
7 Recognition
• An asset or liability should be recognised if it will be both relevant and provide users of the
financial statements with a faithful representation of the transactions of that entity – Concept
Frame (4.38)
8 Derecognition
Derecognition occurs (Concept Frame (4.38)) when:
• The entity loses control of all or part of the recognised asset; or
• The entity no longer has an obligation for a liability
9 Measurement
• Historical cost – Concept Frame (6.17)
• Current value
– Fair value
– Value in use
– Current cost
10 Presentation and disclosure

• Focuses on principles not rules
• Classify by grouping similar items
• Aggregate to avoid unnecessary detail (Concept Frame (7.2)
11 Capital maintenance
• Financial capital: – Concept Frame (4.57)
– Monetary
– Constant purchasing power
• Physical capital
12 IASB
• Objectives of IASB – Preface (6)
• Scope and authority of IFRS– Preface (7–16)
• Due process re IFRS development – Preface (17)
13 Future of UK GAAP
FRS 102 is derived from the IFRS for SMEs. It is one of the new financial reporting standards replacing
old UK GAAP. It can be used by UK unlisted groups and by listed and unlisted individual entities.
HB2021

14 IFRS for SMEs
• There are many considerations as to whether the same or a different set of IFRS Standards should
apply to SMEs. The IFRS for SMEs applies to companies without public accountability (rather than
using a size test).
• The IFRS for SMEs retains the core principles of ‘full’ IFRS, but reduces choice of accounting
treatments and introduces a number of simplifications to reduce the reporting burden on SMEs.

• Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a
liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date – IFRS
13.9
• Market-based measure – IFRS 13.2
• Three-level hierarchy – IFRS 13.72
16 IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors
17 Accounting policies IAS 8.7–13
18 Change in accounting policies

• Retrospective application is applying a new accounting policy as if that policy had always been
applied
• If impracticable to determine the period-specific effects, apply prospectively
19 Changes in accounting estimates IAS 8.32–40
20 Prior period errors IAS 8.5, IAS 8.42 and IAS 8.49
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 IASB Conceptual Framework

1.1 What are the conditions which the Conceptual Framework identifies as necessary if the going
concern basis is to be used for the preparation of financial statements?
1.2 According to the Conceptual Framework, what are the characteristics of information which is
faithfully represented?
2 IFRS for Small and Medium-sized Enterprises – Smerk

Smerk is a private pharmaceuticals company that meets the definition of an SME under national
legislation and wishes to comply with the IFRS for Small and Medium-sized Entities for the year
ended 31 December 20X6 (with one year of comparative data). The directors are seeking advice on
how to address the following accounting issues. The entity currently prepares its financial statements
under full IFRS.
(1) Smerk has significant amounts of capitalised development expenditure in its financial
statements, £3.2 million at 31 December 20X5 (£2.8 million at 31 December 20X4), relating to
investigation of new pharmaceutical products. The amount has continued to rise during the
current year even after the amortisation commenced relating to some products that began
commercial production.
(2) Smerk purchased a controlling interest (60%) of the shares of a quoted company in a similar line
of business, Rock, on 1 July 20X6. Smerk paid £7.7 million to acquire the investment in Rock and
the fair value of Rock’s identifiable assets and liabilities has been calculated as £9.5 million at the
date of acquisition. The value on the stock market of the non-controlling interests that Smerk did
not purchase was £4.9 million. The directors do not feel in a position to estimate reliably the
useful life of the goodwill due to the nature of the business acquired.
(3) Smerk purchased some properties for £1.7 million on 1 January 20X6 and designated them as
investment properties under the cost model. No depreciation was charged, as a real estate
agent valued the properties at £1.9 million at the year end.
Requirement
Discuss how the above transactions should be dealt with in the financial statements of Smerk for the
year ending 31 December 20X6, with reference to the IFRS for SMEs.

Vitaleque, a public limited company, is reviewing the fair valuation of certain assets and liabilities in
light of the introduction of IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement.
It carries an asset that is traded in different markets and is uncertain as to which valuation to use. The
asset has to be valued at fair value under International Financial Reporting Standards. Vitaleque
currently only buys and sells the asset in the African market. The data relating to the asset are set out
below.
North American
Year to 30 November 20X2 market European market African market
Volume of market – units 4m 2m 1m
Price £19 £16 £22
Costs of entering the market £2 £2 £3
Transaction costs £1 £2 £2
HB2021

Additionally, Vitaleque had acquired an entity on 30 November 20X2 and is required to fair value a
decommissioning liability. The entity has to decommission a mine at the end of its useful life, which is
in three years’ time. Vitaleque has determined that it will use a valuation technique to measure the
fair value of the liability. If Vitaleque were allowed to transfer the liability to another market
participant, then the following data would be used.
Input Amount
Labour and material cost £2m
Overhead 30% of labour and material cost
Third-party mark-up – industry average 20%
Annual inflation rate 5%
Risk adjustment – uncertainty relating to cash flows 6%
Risk-free rate of government bonds 4%
Entity’s non-performance risk 2%
Vitaleque needs advice on how to fair value the liability.

Requirement
Discuss, with relevant computations, how Vitaleque should fair value the above asset and liability
under IFRS 13

Statement of financial position extracts for the Kamao Company show the following.
31 December 20X7 31 December 20X6

£’000 £’000
Development costs 812 564
Amortisation (180) (120)
632 444
The capitalised development costs related to a single project that commenced in 20X4. It has now
been discovered that one of the criteria for capitalisation has never been met.
Requirement
According to IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, by what
amount should retained earnings be adjusted to restate them as at 31 December 20X6?
5 Hookbill
The Hookbill Company was updating its inventory control system during 20X7 when it discovered
that it had, in error, included £50,000 in inventories in its statement of financial position as at year to
31 December 20X6 relating to items that had already been sold at that date. The 20X6 profit after tax
shown in Hookbill’s financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X6 was £400,000.
In the draft financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7, before any adjustment for the
above error, the profit after tax was £500,000.
Hookbill pays tax on profits at 25%.
Requirement
According to IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, what figures
should be disclosed for profit after tax in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income of Hookbill for the year ended 31 December 20X7, for both 20X7 and the comparative year
20X6?
HB2021

6 Carduus
The Carduus Company manufactures motorboats. It has invested heavily in developing a new engine
design. As a result, by 1 January 20X2 it had capitalised £72 million of development costs, which it
was amortising over 10 years on a straight-line basis from that date.
Until 1 January 20X7, Carduus’s new engine had been selling well and making substantial profits.
However, a new competitor then entered the market, such that revised estimates were that the new
engine would cease to generate any economic benefits after 31 December 20X9 and that the
remaining amortisation period should be to this date on a straight-line basis. The entry of the new
competitor led to an impairment review, but no impairment loss was identified.
Retained earnings at 31 December 20X6 were £400 million. Profit before tax and any amortisation
charges was £70 million for the year ended 31 December 20X7
Requirement
Ignoring tax, determine the retained earnings figure for Carduus at 1 January 20X7 in the financial
statements for the year to 31 December 20X7 and the profit before tax for the year then ended after
adjusting for the change in amortisation according to IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in
Accounting Estimates and Errors.
7 Aspen
The Aspen Company was drawing up its draft financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7
and was reviewing its cut-off procedures. It discovered that it had, in error, at the previous year end,
omitted from inventories in its statement of financial position a purchase of inventories amounting to
£100,000 made on the afternoon of 31 December 20X6. The related purchase transaction and the
trade payable had been correctly recorded.
The retained earnings of Aspen at 31 December 20X6 as shown in its 20X6 financial statements were
£4,000,000. In the draft financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7, before any
adjustment of the above error, the profit after tax was £800,000. Aspen pays tax on profits at 30%.
Requirement
According to IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, what figures
should be disclosed in the financial statements of Aspen for the year ended 31 December 20X7 for
profit after tax for the year and for retained earnings at 1 January 20X7?
8 Polson
The Polson Company appointed Rayner as finance director late in 20X7. One of Rayner’s initial tasks
was to ensure that a thorough review was carried out of Polson’s accounting policies and their
application in the preparation of Polson’s consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X6. This review identified the following issues in relation to the 20X6 consolidated
financial statements which were approved for publication early in 20X7.
(1) The £840,000 year-end carrying amount of a major item of plant in a wholly-owned subsidiary
comprised costs incurred up to 31 December 20X6. Depreciation was charged from 1 January
20X7 when the item was for the first time working at normal capacity. The depreciation charge
takes account of residual value of £50,000 on 30 September 20Y4, the end of the item’s useful
life. The overall construction and installation of the item was completed on 30 September 20X6,
when the item was first in full working order. Between 1 October and 31 December 20X6 the
item was running below normal capacity as employees learnt how to operate it. The year-end
carrying amount comprises: costs incurred to 30 September 20X6 of £800,000 plus costs
incurred in October to December 20X6 of £50,000 less £10,000 sales proceeds of the output
sold in October to December.
(2) On 1 January 20X6 Polson acquired a 30% interest in The Niflumic Company for £240,000, which
it classified in its consolidated financial statements as an investment in equity instruments under
IFRS 9, Financial Instruments. Polson has representation on Niflumic’s board of directors.
Niflumic’s shares are dealt in on a public market and the year-end carrying amount of £360,000
was derived using the market price quoted on that date. The fair value increase of £90,000
(£360,000 – £240,000 less 25% deferred tax) was recognised in an available-for-sale reserve in
HB2021

equity. In its year ended 31 December 20X6 Niflumic earned a post-tax profit of £80,000 and
paid no dividends.
(3) At 31 December 20X6 the total trade receivables in a 60% owned subsidiary was £360,000
according to the accounting records, while the separate list of customers’ balances totalled
£430,000. The accounting records were adjusted by adding the difference to both the carrying
amount of trade receivables and revenue. It was revealed that the difference arose from double-
counting certain customers’ balances when taking the list out.
The 20X6 consolidated financial statements showed £400,000 as the carrying amount of retained
earnings at the year end. The effect of taxation is immaterial in respect of the item of plant and the
trade receivables adjustment.
Requirement
Determine the following amounts for inclusion as comparative figures in Polson’s 20X7 consolidated
financial statements after the adjustments required by IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in
Accounting Estimates and Errors.
(1) The carrying amount of the item of plant at 31 December 20X6
(2) The increase/decrease in equity at 31 December 20X6 in respect of the investment in Niflumic
(3) The carrying amount of retained earnings at 31 December 20X6
this chapter.
HB2021

Question Answer
Oak plc has purchased a patent for £40,000. This is an asset, albeit an intangible one. There
The patent gives the company sole use of a is a past event, control and future economic
particular manufacturing process which will benefit (through cost saving).
save £6,000 a year for the next five years.
Elm plc paid John Brown £20,000 to set up a This cannot be classed as an asset. Elm plc has
car repair shop, on condition that priority no control over the car repair shop and it is
treatment is given to cars from the company’s difficult to argue that there are future economic
fleet. benefits.
Sycamore plc provides a warranty with every This is a liability. The business has an obligation
washing machine sold. to fulfil the terms of the warranty. The liability
would be recognised when the warranty is
issued rather than when a claim is made.

Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for 20X7 (extract)
20X6 20X7
£’000 £’000
Sales 47,400 67,200
Cost of goods sold (W1) (38,770) (51,600)
Profit before tax 8,630 15,600
Income tax (W2) (2,620) (4,660)
Profit for the year 6,010 10,940
Retained earnings
Opening retained earnings
As previously reported 13,000 21,950
Correction of prior period error (4,200 – 1,260) –––––– (2,940)
As restated 13,000 19,010
Closing retained earnings 19,010 29,950
HB2021

WORKINGS
(1) Cost of goods sold
20X6 20X7
£’000 £’000
As stated in question 34,570 55,800
Inventory adjustment 4,200 (4,200)
38,770 51,600
(2) Income Tax
20X6 20X7
£’000 £’000
As stated in question 3,880 3,400
Inventory adjustment (4,200 × 30%) (1,260) 1,260
2,620 4,660
HB2021

1 IASB Conceptual Framework

1.1 Neither the intention nor the need to liquidate or curtail materially the scale of its operations.
1.2 It should be complete, neutral and free from error.
2 IFRS for Small and Medium-sized Enterprises – Smerk

Discussion as follows:
(1) Development expenditure
The IFRS for SMEs requires small and medium-sized entities to expense all internal research and
development costs as incurred unless they form part of the cost of another asset that meets the
recognition criteria in the IFRS. The adjustment on transition to the IFRS for SMEs must be made at
the beginning of the comparative period (1 January 20X5) as a prior period adjustment. Thus the
expenditure of £2.8 million on research and development should all be written off directly to
retained earnings. Any amounts incurred during 20X5 and 20X6 must be expensed in those years’
financial statements and any amortisation charged to profit or loss in those years will need to be
eliminated.
(2) Acquisition of Rock
The IFRS for SMEs requires goodwill to be recognised as an asset at its cost, being the excess of the
cost of the business combination over the acquirer’s interest in the net fair value of the identifiable
assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities. Non-controlling interests at the date of acquisition must
therefore be measured at the proportionate share of the fair value of the identifiable assets and
liabilities of the subsidiary acquired (ie, the ‘partial’ goodwill method).
After initial recognition the acquirer is required to amortise goodwill over its useful life under the
IFRS for SMEs. If an entity is unable to make a reliable estimate of the useful life of goodwill, the life is
presumed to be 10 years.
Goodwill will be calculated as:
£m
Consideration transferred 7.7
Non-controlling interests (at % FVNA: 9.5 × 40%) 3.8
Fair value of identifiable net assets at acquisition (9.5)

2.0
Amortisation (2.0/10 years × 6/12) (0.1)
1.9
The amortisation of £0.1 million must be charged to profit or loss in 20X6.

(3) Investment properties
Investment properties must be held at fair value through profit or loss under the IFRS for SMEs where
their fair value can be measured without undue cost or effort, which appears to be the case here,
given that an estate agent valuation is available. Consequently a gain of £0.2 million (£1.9m – £1.7m)
will be reported in Smerk’s profit or loss for the year.
HB2021

Discussion as follows:
(1) Fair value of asset
North American
Year to 30 November 20X2 market European market African market
Volume of market – units 4m 2m 1m
£ £ £
Price 19 16 22
Costs of entering the market (2) (2) n/a
Potential fair value 17 14 22
Transaction costs (1) (2) (2)
Net profit 16 12 20
Additional information
• Because Vitaleque currently buys and sells the asset in the African market, the costs of entering
that market are not incurred and therefore not relevant.
• Fair value is not adjusted for transaction costs. Under IFRS 13, these are not a feature of the asset
or liability, but may be taken into account when determining the most advantageous market.
• The North American market is the principal market for the asset because it is the market with the
greatest volume and level of activity for the asset. If information about the North American market
is available and Vitaleque can access the market, then Vitaleque should base its fair value on this
market. Based on the North American market, the fair value of the asset would be £17, measured
as the price that would be received in that market (£19) less costs of entering the market (£2) and
ignoring transaction costs.
• If information about the North American market is not available, or if Vitaleque cannot access the
market, Vitaleque must measure the fair value of the asset using the price in the most
advantageous market. The most advantageous market is the market that maximises the amount
that would be received to sell the asset, after taking into account both transaction costs and
usually also costs of entry; that is, the net amount that would be received in the respective
markets. The most advantageous market here is therefore the African market. As explained above,
costs of entry are not relevant here, and so, based on this market, the fair value would be £22.
• It is assumed that market participants are independent of each other, knowledgeable, and able
and willing to enter into transactions.
(2) Fair value of decommissioning liability
Because this is a business combination, Vitaleque must measure the liability at fair value in
accordance with IFRS 13, rather than using the best estimate measurement required by IAS 37,
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets. In most cases there will be no observable
market to provide pricing information. If this is the case here, Vitaleque will use the expected present
value technique to measure the fair value of the decommissioning liability. If Vitaleque were
contractually committed to transfer its decommissioning liability to a market participant, it would
conclude that a market participant would use the inputs as follows, arriving at a fair value of
£3,215,000.
HB2021

Input Amount
£’000
Labour and material cost 2,000
Overhead: 30% × 2,000 600
Third-party mark-up – industry average: 2,600 × 20% 520
3,120
Inflation adjusted total (5% compounded over three years): 3,120 × 1.053 3,612
Risk adjustment – uncertainty relating to cash flows: 3,612 × 6% 217
3,829
Discount at risk-free rate plus entity’s non-performance risk:
(4% + 2% = 6%): 3,829 ÷ 1.06 3,215

£444,000
Per IAS 8.42 a correction of a material error should be applied retrospectively by restating the
opening balances of assets, liabilities and equity for the earliest prior period presented
5 Hookbill
20X7: £537,500
20X6: £362,500
20X7 20X6
£ £
Draft profit after tax 500,000 400,000
Inventory adjustment 50,000 (50,000)
Tax thereon at 25% (12,500) 12,500
Revised profit after tax 537,500 362,500
The comparative amounts for the prior period should be restated, per IAS 8.42.
Correction of opening inventory will increase profit for the current period, by the amount of the after-
tax adjustment. Conversely, the closing inventory for the previous period is reduced, thereby
reducing profit by the after-tax effect of the adjustment.
6 Carduus
Retained earnings: £400m
Profit before tax: £58.0m
The change in useful life is a change in an accounting estimate which is accounted for prospectively
(IAS 8.36). So retained earnings brought forward remain unchanged, at £400 million.
The carrying amount of development costs at 1 January 20X7 (halfway through their previously
estimated useful life) is (£72m × 5/10) £36 million. Writing this off over three years gives a charge of
£12 million per annum. So the profit before tax is £70m – £12m = £58m.
HB2021

7 Aspen
Profit after tax: £730,000
Retained earnings: £4,070,000
The comparative amounts for the prior period should be restated, per IAS 8.42.
The correction of opening inventories will decrease profit for the current period, by the after-tax
value of the adjustment. Thus current period profits are £800,000 – (£100,000 × 70%) = £730,000.
The closing inventories of the previous period are increased by the same amount. So retained
earnings are £4,000,000 + (£100,000 × 70%) = £4,070,000.
8 Polson
Figures as follows:
(1) £776,562
(2) (£66,000)
(3) £318,562
All these matters give rise to prior period errors which require retrospective restatement of financial
statements as if the prior period error had never occurred (IAS 8.5).
(1) Recognition of cost in the carrying amount of PPE should cease when it is in the condition
capable of being operated in the manner intended, so on 30 September 20X6, and depreciation
should begin on the same date (IAS 16.20 and 55). So gross cost should be adjusted to
£800,000 (£840,000 – £50,000 + £10,000) and depreciation, taking into account overall useful
life and residual value, charged for 3 months, so £23,438 ((£800,000 – £50,000) × 1/8 × 25%).
The restated carrying amount is £776,562 (£800,000 – £23,438).
(2) The investment in The Niflumic Company is an associate and should be accounted for according
to IAS 28, not IFRS 9.
The value of the investment will therefore increase by 30% of Niflumic’s post-tax profit rather
than according to fair values.
£
Amount recognised in other components of equity 90,000
30% × Niflumic’s profit after tax (retained earnings) 24,000
Adjustment to equity (66,000)
(3)
£
Draft retained earnings 400,000
Reduction in carrying value of plant (£840,000 – £776,562) (63,438)
Niflumic’s earnings (£80,000 × 30%) 24,000
Error in trade receivables (£70,000 × 60%) (42,000)
318,562
Trade receivables, revenue and therefore profit were overstated by £70,000 in respect of the trade
receivables. Polson’s share is 60%, so end-20X6 retained earnings must be reduced by £42,000.
The share of Niflumic’s profits is recognised in retained earnings, not in a separate reserve, giving rise
to an increase of £24,000.
HB2021

Chapter 3
Ethics
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 The importance of ethics
2 Ethical codes and standards
3 Ethics: financial reporting focus
4 Ethics: audit and assurance focus
5 Making ethical judgements
6 Money laundering regulations
7 Ethical guidance in more detail
8 Further ethical guidance
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Identify and explain ethical issues in reporting, assurance and business scenarios
• Explain and appraise the relevance, importance and consequences of ethical issues
• Evaluate the impact of ethics on a reporting entity, relating to the actions of stakeholders
• Recommend and justify appropriate actions where ethical and professional conduct issues arise in
a given scenario
• Design and evaluate appropriate safeguards to mitigate threats and provide resolutions to ethical
problems
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 19(a)–(e)
3

of this chapter.

1 The importance of Approach Every question you IQ1: Ethics and the
ethics This should remind attempt will need to individual
This first section you of why you consider the public Use this as an
reminds you of continue to study interest so always opportunity to
how important it is ethics – use it to consider how remind yourself of
to do the right maintain your focus. actions look through how a professional
thing in the the lens of various accountant should
Stop and think ethical codes.
workplace and behave in the face
beyond. WorldCom occurred of such adversity.
at the very start of
the 20th Century –
do you think there is
still a risk of good
companies doing
bad things?
2 Ethical codes and Approach As you found at the N/A

standards Each of these codes Professional Level,
The way that you of ethics is being able to
should act is contained within navigate around the
always under your open book open book
consideration – permitted text. permitted text under
note how these time pressure is very
Stop and think important, so learn
codes have
evolved to keep up Make sure you to do this whenever
with current understand the you attempt
developments. contents of each of questions.
these codes and
standards – are you
up to date with
recent changes?
HB2021

3 Ethics: financial Approach You should be on N/A

reporting focus The fundamental the lookout for any
This section will principles, threats clues from the
remind you how and safeguards scenario that
ethics applies to should all be suggest some
the accountant in revision for you. questionable ethical
business. behaviour is
Stop and think occurring. For
The remaining example,
sections all relate to considering the FIFA
the work of creating worked example, is
financial there any evidence
information, so while of bribery or
you study them, corruption?
consider how they
could occur in real
life.
4 Ethics: audit and Approach Responding IQ2: Ethical risks

assurance focus Having read about appropriately to Use this as a recap
This section will the current versions ethical threats is of all the ethical
remind you how of the IESBA and dependent upon threats that an
ethics applies to ICAEW Codes and being able to auditor is likely to
the accountant in the FRC Ethical identify and face.
practice. Note the Standard, you need diagnose these
threats in the first IQ3: Stewart Brice
recent to make sure that
developments to you can find place, so your Once you have
address ongoing everything you need technique should studied this section,
issues from the in the open book always start by attempt this
profession. permitted text. confirming the question to see how
problem and then well you are able to
Stop and think evaluating suitable apply this
Do you know how to alternatives in knowledge.
respond if response.
presented with a
variety of different
ethical threats?
5 Making ethical Approach As explained in IQ4: Revenue

judgements Work your way ‘Exam context’ you recognition
Not every scenario methodically should be prepared This is a brilliant way
will be through the for more complex of demonstrating
straightforward to resolution process. situations when how financial
diagnose and may attempting reporting and
Stop and think questions in the
require a auditing knowledge
systematic You may find it Corporate Reporting can be blended
approach to helpful to consider a exam. together to provide
determine the real world problem an ethical challenge.
right response. that you are familiar How will you
with when working respond to this?
through the
resolution process.
6 Money laundering Approach The biggest N/A

regulations Much of this is challenge with
The threat of revision but you money laundering is
money laundering should make sure being able to
identify it so always
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 3: Ethics 115

is going nowhere there is nothing new be on the lookout

so you must always here from the last for tell-tale signs of
keep up to date time you studied the questionable
with current subject. financial activity.
developments in Stop and think
this area.
Can you explain how
the UK government
is currently dealing
with money
laundering?
7 Integrity, Approach Use this as an N/A

objectivity and Work through this opportunity to
independence with the open book consider how the
To supplement permitted text in various threats could
your knowledge of front of you. be examined.
the open book Stop and think
permitted text,
here are some Can you find where
examples of how each of the threats is
the FRC Revised covered?
Ethical Standard
and the ICAEW
Code of Ethics can
be applied.
8 Provisions Approach Use this as an N/A

available for small Work through this opportunity to
entities with the open book consider how these
The FRC Revised permitted text in points could be
Ethical Standard front of you. examined.
covers issues Stop and think
where the
guidance is Can you find where
relaxed for smaller each of the key
entities. points is covered?
HB2021

1 The importance of ethics
Section overview
• Ethical behaviour is essential to maintain public confidence.

• Guidance is provided in professional codes of conduct and ethical standards.
1.1 Introduction
In general terms, ethics is a set of moral principles and standards of correct behaviour. Far from
being noble ideals which have little impact on real life, they are essential for any society to operate
and function effectively. Put simply, they help to differentiate between right and wrong, although
their application often involves complex issues, judgement and decisions. While ethical principles
can be incorporated into law, in many cases their application has to depend on the self-discipline of
the individual. This principle can be seen to apply to society as a whole, the business community and
the accounting profession.
1.2 Ethics in business

Business life is a fruitful source of ethical dilemmas because its whole purpose is material gain, the
making of profit. Success in business requires a constant search for potential advantage over others
and businesspeople are under pressure to do whatever yields such an advantage. As a result,
organisations have become increasingly under pressure to act, and to be seen to be acting, ethically.
In recent years, many have demonstrated this by publishing ethical codes, setting out their values
and responsibilities towards stakeholders.
In some instances, businesses may be forced to adopt a more ethical approach. In 2013, many bank
chief executives saw a pay cut for the first time in years. This was partly due to tightened regulations
which now require banks to align executive pay more closely to risks and performance. Arguably
more forceful, however, are the investor revolts arising as a result of shareholders’ anger at rising pay
in a time of falling profits and reduced dividend payouts.
1.3 Ethics and the accounting profession

The IESBA Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (IESBA Code) states:
“A distinguishing mark of the accountancy profession is its acceptance of the responsibility to act in
the public interest.” (IESBA Code para. 100.1 A1)
The public interest is considered to be the collective well-being of the community of people and
institutions the professional accountant serves. These include the following:
• Clients
• Lenders
• Governments
• Employers
• Employees
• Investors
• The business and financial community
• Others who rely on the work of the professional accountant
For the work of the accountant in practice or in business to maintain its value, the accountant must be
respected and trusted. The individual professional accountant therefore has a duty and a
responsibility to maintain the reputation of the profession and the confidence of the public.
1.4 Ethics and the individual

While legislation and professional bodies have their part to play through issuing guidance, the
importance of the integrity of the individual cannot be overestimated. Its ethical consequences are
HB2021

potentially very significant in deciding, for example, whether to whistleblow on questionable practice
at work, despite pressure from colleagues or superiors or negative consequences of doing so.
The devastating effect of the ethical choices of one individual can be seen in the following summary
of the role played by Betty Vinson, an accountant at WorldCom.
Context example: WorldCom

WorldCom, the US long-distance telephone carrier, is ‘credited’ with being responsible for a fraud
that created the largest bankruptcy in US history. This reportedly resulted in a fine of $500 million,
which at the time was the largest fine ever imposed by the Securities and Exchange Commission
(SEC).
The problems began for WorldCom in mid-2000. Its operating costs were increasing sharply due to
the fees which it had to pay to other companies for use of their telephone networks. Its chief
executive officer and chief financial officer had had to inform Wall Street of lower than expected
profits for the second half of the year and there was increasing pressure to improve results. Betty
Vinson was working for WorldCom at this time as a senior manager in the corporate accounting
division. She was asked by her boss to falsify the accounts in order to increase profits. This was
achieved primarily by capitalising line costs rather than treating them as operating expenses. While
Betty Vinson considered resignation due to the pressure she was put under to falsify the results, she
continued to work for WorldCom until early 2002 and was promoted from senior manager to
director with an increase in salary of $30,000. Over an 18-month period she had helped to falsify
records at the request of her bosses, increasing profits by $3.7 billion.
By March 2002 questions were being asked by internal audit. Vinson decided to disclose the details
of the falsified records to the FBI, the SEC and the US Attorney. She had hoped that her testimony
could be exchanged for immunity from prosecution; however, this was not the case. In October 2002
she pleaded guilty to two counts of conspiracy and securities fraud (carrying a maximum sentence of
15 years) and in October 2003 she was charged with entering false information on company
documents (carrying a maximum sentence of 10 years).
Interactive question 1: Ethics and the individual

1.1 From the Context Example above, list the factors which you think may have affected Betty
Vinson’s decision to make the fraudulent entries.
1.2 What other courses of action could she have taken?
Sometimes doing the right thing is not straightforward and you should be prepared to consider
things in a personal capacity.
One of the other courses of action that Betty Vinson could have taken would have been to blow the
whistle – expose the fraud she was asked to participate in either within or outside the organisation.
Admittedly, as the highest levels of management were involved in the WorldCom case, making an
internal disclosure would have fallen on deaf ears at best, or at worst caused Betty Vinson to lose her
job. However, Betty Vinson could have considered making an external disclosure: to the professional
regulatory body of which she was a member, to public regulators, or, perhaps as a last resort, to the
media. A timely disclosure could have brought the fraudulent activities to an end, mitigating their
disastrous consequences.
In the UK, the Public Interest Disclosure Act 1998 (PIDA 1998) aims to protect whistleblowers who
raise genuine concerns about malpractice in organisations, including the following:
• Crimes
• Civil offences (including negligence, breach of contract and breach of administrative law)
• Miscarriages of justice
HB2021

• Dangers to health and safety and/or the environment
• Attempts to cover up any of the above
The Act overrides the confidentiality clauses which may be contained in employment contracts, and
provides recourse to the employment tribunal should the whistleblower be victimised.
The text of PIDA 1998, as well as useful examples of whistleblowing cases, can be found on the
website of the charity Protect: www.pcaw.org.uk
2 Ethical codes and standards

Section overview
• The accounting profession has developed principles-based codes, including the IESBA Code and
the ICAEW Code of Ethics.
• The ICAEW Code centres around five fundamental principles and a professional accountant is
responsible for recognising and assessing potential threats to these fundamental principles.
• Where threats are identified, a professional accountant must then implement safeguards to
eliminate these threats or reduce them to an acceptable level.
2.1 IESBA and ICAEW Codes

As a key aspect of reputation and professionalism is ethical behaviour, the accounting profession has
developed ethical codes of conduct. These include:
• The IESBA Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (IESBA Code)
• The ICAEW Code of Ethics (ICAEW Code)
The IESBA Code provides ethical guidance internationally for IFAC members. The ICAEW Code has
been derived from the IESBA Code but in places contains additional guidance or requirements.
Therefore compliance with the ICAEW Code will ensure compliance with the IESBA Code.
The ICAEW has adopted the provisions of the 2019 IESBA Code by issuing an updated version of the
ICAEW Code of Ethics which took effect from 1 January 2020.
You should be familiar with the ICAEW Code of Ethics and IESBA Code from your previous studies,
although it is possible the material you covered at the Professional Level may not have been based
on the most up to date versions. This section summarises the key points.
The ICAEW Code is principles-based and members are responsible for:
• identifying threats to compliance with the fundamental principles;
• evaluating the significance of these threats; and
• implementing safeguards to eliminate them or reduce them to an acceptable level.
The guidance in the Code is given in the form of:
• fundamental principles; and
• illustrations as to how they are to be applied in specific situations.
The Code applies to all members, students, affiliates, employees of member firms and, where
applicable, member firms, in all their professional and business activities, whether remunerated or
voluntary.
It is important to note therefore that adhering to the Code is equally important for a member working
in business as it is for a member working in practice, even though the ethical codes are sometimes
perceived to be associated more with the accountant in practice.
ICAEW is committed to enforcing the Code through disciplining members who do not meet
reasonable ethical and professional expectations of the public and other members.
A copy of the ICAEW Code is included in the Member’s Handbook and is available at
www.icaew.com.
HB2021

2.2 FRC Revised Ethical Standard 2019
It is essential that an auditor’s independence is not compromised while carrying out an audit
engagement. Therefore the FRC has developed Revised Ethical Standard 2019 which was issued in
December 2019. The basic principles have been covered in detail at Professional Level in the Audit
and Assurance paper. This is covered later in this chapter.
3 Ethics: financial reporting focus

Section overview
• This section provides a summary of some key points covered in the ethics learning material in the
Financial Accounting and Reporting paper at Professional Level.
• Here we primarily consider the application of the ICAEW Code to the accountant in business
involved in a financial reporting environment (we look at the accountant in practice in section 4).
3.1 Fundamental principles

Professional accountants are expected to follow the guidance contained in the fundamental
principles in the ICAEW Code in all their professional and business activities. The professional
accountant should also follow the requirements in the illustrations. However, they should be guided
not just by the terms but also by the spirit of the Code.
The Code sets out five fundamental principles, the spirit of which must always be complied with.
(a) Integrity
A professional accountant should be straightforward and honest in all professional and business
relationships.
A professional accountant should not be associated with reports, returns, communications or other
information where they believe that the information:
• contains a materially false or misleading statement;
• contains statements or information provided recklessly; or
• omits or obscures required information where such omission or obscurity would be misleading.
(b) Objectivity
A professional accountant should not allow bias, conflict of interest or undue influence of others to
override professional or business judgements.
(c) Professional competence and due care
A professional accountant has an obligation to:
• attain and maintain professional knowledge and skill at the level required to ensure that a client or
employing organisation receives competent professional services based on current technical and
professional standards and relevant legislation; and
• act diligently and in accordance with applicable technical and professional standards.
Professional competence may be divided into two separate phases:
• Attainment of professional competence – initial professional development
• Maintenance of professional competence – continuing professional development (CPD)
Diligence encompasses the responsibility to act in accordance with the requirements of an
assignment, carefully, thoroughly and on a timely basis.
(d) Confidentiality
A professional accountant should:
• respect the confidentiality of information acquired as a result of professional and business
relationships;
• be alert to the risk that confidential information may be inadvertently disclosed;
HB2021

• not disclose any such information to third parties without proper and specific authority (unless
there is a legal or professional duty to disclose); and
• not use such information for the personal advantage of themselves or third parties.
The professional accountant must maintain confidentiality even in a social environment and even
after employment with the client/employer has ended.
A professional accountant may be required to disclose confidential information:
• where there is a professional duty or right to disclose, when not prohibited by law, for example:
– complying with the quality review of a professional body
– responding to a professional or regulatory body inquiry or investigation
– protecting a professional accountant’s professional interests in legal proceedings
– complying with technical and professional standards, including ethical requirements
• where disclosure is permitted by law and is authorised by the client or employer;
• where disclosure is required by law, for example:
– production of documents or other provision of evidence in the course of legal proceedings
– disclosure to the appropriate public authorities of infringements of the law that come to light;
and
– in cases where disclosure may be in the public interest (recent developments on non-
compliance with laws and regulations (NOCLAR) in a later section are relevant here).
(e) Professional behaviour
A professional accountant should comply with relevant laws and regulations and should avoid any
action that discredits the profession.
In marketing and promoting themselves professional accountants should not bring the profession
into disrepute. That is, they should not make:
• Exaggerated claims for the services they are able to offer, the qualifications they possess or
experience they have gained; or
• disparaging references or unsubstantiated comparisons to the work of others.
3.2 Threats
Compliance with these fundamental principles may potentially be threatened by a broad range of
circumstances. Many of these threats can be categorised as follows:
(a) Self-interest threat
The threat that a financial or other interest of a professional accountant or of an immediate or close
family member will inappropriately influence the professional accountant’s judgement or behaviour.
Examples of circumstances that may create such threats include the following:
• Financial interests, loans or guarantees
• Incentive compensation arrangements
• Inappropriate personal use of corporate assets
• Concern over employment security
• Commercial pressure from outside the employing organisation
(b) Self-review threat
The threat that a professional accountant will not appropriately evaluate the results of a previous
judgement made by the professional accountant.
(c) Advocacy threat
The threat that a professional accountant will promote a client’s or employer’s position to the point
that the professional accountant’s objectivity is compromised.
(d) Familiarity threat
The threat that due to a long or close relationship with a client or employer, a professional
accountant will be too sympathetic to their interests or too accepting of their work.
HB2021

Examples of circumstances that may create such threats include:
• a professional accountant in business, who is in a position to influence financial or non-financial
reporting or business decisions, where an immediate or close family member would benefit from
that influence;
• long association with business contacts influencing business decisions; and
• Acceptance of a gift or preferential treatment, unless the value is clearly insignificant.
(e) Intimidation threat
The threat that a professional accountant will be deterred from acting objectively by threats, either
actual or perceived.
Examples of circumstances that may create such threats include the following:
• Threat of dismissal or replacement in business, of yourself, or of a close or immediate family
member, over a disagreement about the application of an accounting principle or the way in
which financial information is to be reported
• A dominant personality attempting to influence the decision-making process, for example with
regard to the awarding of contracts or the application of an accounting principle
Having good knowledge of all the fundamental principles and threats to objectivity at your disposal
will help you to understand how best to identify a suitable response to an ethical issue once you can
suitably identify what the problem really is!
3.3 Safeguards
There are two broad categories of safeguards which may eliminate or reduce such threats to an
acceptable level:
Safeguards created by the profession, legislation or regulation
Examples are:
• Educational, training and experience requirements for entry into the profession
• CPD requirements
• Corporate governance regulations
• Professional standards
• Professional or regulatory monitoring and disciplinary procedures
• External review by a legally empowered third party of reports, returns, communication or
information produced by a professional accountant
• Effective, well-publicised complaints systems operated by the employing organisation, the
profession or a regulator, which enable colleagues, employers and members of the public to
draw attention to unprofessional or unethical behaviour
• An explicitly stated duty to report breaches of ethical requirements
Safeguards in the work environment
Examples are:
• The employing organisation’s systems of corporate oversight or other oversight structures
• The employing organisation’s ethics and conduct programmes
• Recruitment procedures in the employing organisation emphasising the importance of employing
high calibre, competent staff
• Strong internal controls
• Appropriate disciplinary processes
• Leadership that stresses the importance of ethical behaviour and the expectation that employees
will act in an ethical manner
• Policies and procedures to implement and monitor the quality of employee performance
HB2021

• Timely communication to all employees of the employing organisation’s policies and procedures,
including any changes made to them, and appropriate training and education given on such
policies and procedures
• Policies and procedures to empower and encourage employees to communicate to senior levels
within the employing organisation any ethical issues that concern them without fear of retribution
• Consultation with another appropriate professional accountant
3.4 Ethical conflict resolution

When evaluating compliance with the fundamental principles, a professional accountant may be
required to resolve a conflict in complying with the fundamental principles.
A professional accountant may face pressure to:
• act contrary to law or regulation;
• act contrary to technical or professional standards;
• facilitate unethical or illegal earnings management strategies;
• lie to, or otherwise mislead, others; in particular:
– the auditor of the employing organisation, and
– regulators; or
• issue, or otherwise be associated with, a financial or non-financial report that materially
misrepresents the facts, for example:
– financial statements,
– tax compliance,
– legal compliance, and
– reports required by securities regulators.
3.5 Preparation and reporting of information

Accountants will often be involved in the preparation and reporting of information that may be:
• made public; or
• used by others inside or outside the employing organisation.
The accountant should:
• prepare or present such information fairly, honestly and in accordance with relevant professional
standards;
• present financial statements in accordance with applicable financial reporting standards; or
• Maintain information for which they are responsible in a manner which:
– describes clearly the true nature of the business transactions, assets or liabilities;
– classifies and records information in a timely and proper manner; and
– represents the facts accurately and completely in all material respects.
3.6 Acting with sufficient expertise

An accountant should only undertake significant tasks for which they have, or can obtain, sufficient
specific training or expertise.
Circumstances that threaten the ability of the accountant to perform duties with the appropriate
degree of professional competence and due care include:
• insufficient time for properly performing or completing the relevant duties;
• incomplete, restricted or otherwise inadequate information for performing the duties properly;
• insufficient experience, training and/or education; and
• inadequate resources for the proper performance of the duties.
Safeguards that may be considered include:
• obtaining additional advice or training;
• ensuring that there is adequate time available for performing the relevant duties;
HB2021

• obtaining assistance from someone with the necessary expertise; and
• consulting where appropriate with:
– superiors within the employing organisation,
– independent experts; or
– ICAEW.
3.7 Financial interests

An accountant may have financial interests, or may know of financial interests of immediate or close
family members, that could in certain circumstances threaten compliance with the fundamental
principles.
Examples of circumstances that may create self-interest threats are if the accountant or family
member:
• Holds a direct or indirect financial interest in the employing organisation and the value of that
interest could be directly affected by decisions made by the accountant.
• Is eligible for a profit-related bonus and the value of that bonus could be directly affected by a
decision made by the accountant
• Holds, directly or indirectly, share options in the employing organisation, the value of which could
be directly affected by decisions made by the accountant
• Holds, directly or indirectly, share options in the employing organisation which are, or will soon
be, eligible for conversion
• May qualify for share options in the employing organisation or performance-related bonuses if
certain targets are achieved
Safeguards against such threats may include the following:
• Policies and procedures for a committee independent of management to determine the level or
form of remuneration of senior management
• Disclosure of all relevant interests and of any plans to trade in relevant shares to those charged
with the governance of the employing organisation, in accordance with any internal policies
• Consultation, where appropriate, with superiors within the employing organisation
• Consultation, where appropriate, with those charged with the governance of the employing
organisation or relevant professional bodies
• Internal and external audit procedures
• Up to date education on ethical issues and the legal restrictions and other regulations around
potential insider trading
3.8 Inducements
An accountant, or their immediate or close family, may be offered an inducement such as:
• gifts;
• hospitality;
• preferential treatment; or
• inappropriate appeals to friendship or loyalty.
An accountant should assess the risk associated with all such offers and consider whether the
following actions should be taken:
• Immediately inform higher levels of management or those charged with governance of the
employing organisation.
• Inform third parties of the offer, for example a professional body or the employer of the individual
who made the offer, or seek legal advice.
• Advise immediate or close family members of relevant threats and safeguards where they are
potentially in positions that might result in offers of inducements (for example as a result of their
employment situation).
• Inform higher levels of management or those charged with governance of the employing
organisation where immediate or close family members are employed by competitors or
potential suppliers of that organisation.
HB2021

In addition to the ICAEW Code, accountants operating in businesses linked to the UK should be
aware of the Bribery Act 2010. Under the Bribery Act, there are four categories of criminal bribery
offences:
(a) Offering, promising or giving a bribe to another person
(b) Requesting, agreeing to receive or accepting a bribe to another person
(c) Bribing a foreign official
(d) Failing to prevent bribery (corporate offence)
One particular point to note is that the Bribery Act has a very wide judicial reach: it applies to any
persons with a ‘close connection’ to the UK. This is defined to include the following:
• British citizens
• Individuals ordinarily resident in the UK
• Businesses incorporated in the UK
• Any business which conducts part of its business in the UK, even though it is not incorporated in
the UK
Context example: FIFA

The 2018 football World Cup in Russia was widely regarded as a success both on and off the field,
due to the engagement of fans with their Russian hosts and the quality of the football viewed by
audiences across the world. Yet only three years earlier, the organising body of the World Cup, FIFA,
was being investigated for widespread corruption among many of its most senior officials.
Like any high-profile sporting administrator, FIFA has always attracted criticism, but the decision-
making processes for awarding both the 2018 and 2022 tournaments came under intense scrutiny
following accusations of bribery and corruption among those responsible for deciding on host
countries. After an internal investigation, FIFA concluded that the bidding process was fair, although
it did not release its report to the public in full, leading to the resignation of the investigation’s
independent author in protest.
The accusations continued until 2015, when criminal investigations were launched by the US and
Swiss authorities which eventually led the leadership structure to remove a number of long-standing
‘big’ personalities including overall FIFA president Sepp Blatter and his European counterpart Michel
Platini: both men were banned from football for eight years by FIFA’s ethics committee.
Although the US investigation in 2015 centred on bribes to senior officials of around US$2 million,
sums thought to be in excess of US$150 million have also been mentioned in association with illegal
payments to secure media and marketing rights to future tournaments. FIFA made more than US$2
billion from the 2014 World Cup tournament held in Brazil.
The new leadership of FIFA faces a massive task in restoring faith in the transparency of its own
governance arrangements and the public perception of football and its engagement on the global
stage.
(Source: BBC News (21 December 2015) FIFA corruption crisis: Key questions answered. [Online].
Available from: www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-europe-32897066 [Accessed 1 October 2019])
3.9 Conflicts of interest

An accountant should take reasonable steps to identify circumstances that could pose a conflict of
interest.
Examples might be:
• an accountant in public practice, competing directly with a client, or having a joint venture or
similar arrangement with a major competitor of a client;
• an accountant performing services for clients whose interests are in conflict; or
• clients are in dispute with each other in relation to the matter or transaction in question.
Safeguards should include:
• notifying the client of the firm’s business interest or activities that may represent a conflict of
interest, and obtaining their consent to act in such circumstances;
HB2021

• notifying all known relevant parties that the professional accountant is acting for two or more
parties in respect of a matter where their respective interests are in conflict and obtaining their
consent to so act; and
• Notifying the client that the accountant does not act exclusively for any one client in the provision
of proposed services and obtaining their consent to so act.
3.10 General duty to report

Under ICAEW’s Bye-laws it is the duty of every member, where it is in the public interest to do so, to
report to the Institute any facts or matters indicating that a member and/or firm or provisional
member may have become liable to disciplinary action. In determining whether it is in the public
interest to report such facts or matters, regard shall be had to such guidance as the Council shall give
from time to time.
This general duty to report to the Institute under the Bye-laws is separate from the duty to report
money laundering to the National Crime Agency; this latter duty arises from legislation.
3.11 Practical significance

Accountants working within a financial reporting environment can come under pressure to improve
the financial performance or financial position of their employer. Finance managers who are part of
the team putting together the results for publication must be careful to withstand pressures from
their non-finance colleagues to indulge in reporting practices which dress up short-term
performance and position. Financial managers must be conscious of their professional obligations
and seek appropriate assistance from colleagues, peers or independent sources.
Visit icaew.com (https://www.icaew.com/-/media/corporate/files/technical/ethics/ethical-case-
studies/ccabeg-case-studies-accountants-public-practice.ashx?la=en) to access ‘Ethical Dilemmas
Case Studies’ covering ethical dilemmas that are relevant to accountants – including a set of case
studies specific to accountants in practice.
3.12 Promoting the role and mindset expected of professional accountants

You will no doubt have seen and heard plenty of comments about inadequate levels of professional
scepticism being displayed by audit and assurance providers when undertaking engagements.
Given the significance of this alongside the need to address the expectation gap and other
perceived ethical shortcomings across the whole of the profession, in 2019 the IESBA decided to
consider whether the use of professional scepticism should be extended to apply to all professional
accountants.
After a consultation period, IESBA concluded that while professional scepticism was fundamentally
important to preserve trust in the profession, the term felt more appropriate to the nature of audit
and assurance work, and there were other characteristics that professional accountants should
display in order to be viewed as acting with something like professional scepticism. These were
discussed in terms of the role and mindset expected of professional accountants and are
summarised below.
• The importance of the role played by professional accountants as part of society and their duty to
act in the public interest
• Enhancements to the descriptions of objectivity and professional behaviour within the IESBA
Code of Ethics
• Reinforcing the importance of acting with integrity in difficult circumstances when there are easier
options that could be taken
• Consideration of the impact of technology on the work of the professional accountant, ensuring
competence is maintained and an awareness of the threat of bias from using certain datasets (see
below)
• Keeping an open mind about anything that a professional accountant could be faced with as part
of their work (as this covers issues such as challenging the views held by others and reserving
judgement until all relevant information is available, it is perhaps the closest thing to professional
scepticism contained in these proposals)
• An awareness of how cultural factors within an organisation and certain types of bias can affect
the judgement of a professional accountant
HB2021

The IESBA code has been redrafted to contain amendments that reflect these proposals. One of the
areas that professional accountants should be aware of is the section on any bias that could create
threats to being able to apply the conceptual framework. A brief summary of examples of such bias
is shown below.
• Anchoring bias, where judgements are based on an initial piece of information that subsequently
turns out to be inaccurate or unrepresentative, leading you to draw inappropriate conclusions
• Automation bias, where machine-generated data is considered superior to human-generated
data despite evidence to the contrary
• Availability bias, where easily available information is favoured ahead of information which is less
easy to access
• Confirmation bias, where you are inclined to trust information that supports something you
already think you know, as opposed to challenging the status quo if such evidence exists
• Groupthink, which is sticking to the views of the group as opposed to considering innovative or
individual solutions
• Overconfidence bias, where you assume you possess more expertise about an issue than is
justified
• Representation bias, where conclusions about a population are drawn based on factors that may
not be representative enough
• Selective perception, where conclusions are drawn based upon what you expect to see instead of
keeping an open mind
With this last point, we are back again at professional scepticism – it is clearly a very fine line between
the expectations that relate to professional accountants and those that apply to audit and assurance
practitioners, but you should still be aware of the key points raised here when considering the
mindset expected of a professional accountant.
4 Ethics: audit and assurance focus

Section overview
• This section focuses on ethical guidance most relevant to accountants in practice providing
assurance services and builds on the material covered in the Assurance paper at Certificate Level
and the Audit and Assurance paper at Professional Level.
• It also provides detail of recent changes to the relevant ethical codes and standards:
– IESBA Code
– ICAEW Code
– Revised Ethical Standard
Interactive question 2: Ethical risks

From your knowledge brought forward from your previous studies, and any practical experience of
auditing you may have, write down as many potential ethical risk areas concerning audit as you can
in the areas below. (Some issues may be relevant in more than one column.)
Personal interests Review of your own Disputes Intimidation

work
HB2021

work
4.1 Development of the 2018 IESBA Code

4.1.1 Content changes
One of the driving forces behind the update to the IESBA Code was the conclusion of the NOCLAR
(non-compliance with laws and regulations) project.
This project addressed professional accountants’ responsibilities when they become aware of non-
compliance or suspected non-compliance with laws and regulations committed by a client or
employer. The IESBA Code states that the objectives of the professional accountant are as follows:
• To comply with the principles of integrity and professional behaviour
• By alerting management or, where appropriate, those charged with governance of the employing
organisation, to seek to:
– enable them to rectify, remediate or mitigate the consequences of the identified or suspected
non-compliance; and
– deter the commission of the non-compliance where it has not yet occurred.
• To take such further action as appropriate in the public interest (IESBA Code: para. 260.4)
Where the professional accountant becomes aware of information concerning instances of non-
compliance or suspected non-compliance the following procedures are required. The professional
accountant must:
• obtain an understanding of the matter;
• address the matter;
• determine whether further action is needed;
• consider any imminent breaches; and
• consider any additional documentation requirements.
(IESBA Code: para 260.12-23)
In January 2017, the IESBA issued a close off document: Addressing the Long Association of
Personnel with an Audit or Assurance Client. This states that for audits of Public Interest Entities an
individual cannot act as the engagement partner, the individual appointed as responsible for the
engagement quality control review or any other key audit partner role (or a combination of these
roles) for a period of more than seven cumulative years (para. R540.5). It also includes the following
‘cooling off’ periods where the individual has acted in the role for seven cumulative years (para.
R540.11–13):
• Engagement partner: five consecutive years
• Individual responsible for the engagement quality control review: three consecutive years
• Individual who has acted in any other capacity as key audit partner: two consecutive years
A previous close off document from 2016 provided guidance on two further areas which are now
included in the 2018 IESBA Code: Preparation and presentation of information (section 220) and
Pressure to breach the fundamental principles (section 270). While these are presented in the
HB2021

context of the professional accountant in business, the auditor should consider these expectations
which have now been explicitly raised as part of their audit approach.
When preparing or presenting information, a professional accountant shall:
(a) Prepare or present information in accordance with a relevant reporting framework, where
applicable;
(b) Prepare or present the information in a manner that is intended neither to mislead nor to
influence contractual or regulatory outcomes inappropriately;
(c) Exercise professional judgement to:
(1) Represent the facts accurately and completely in all material respects
(2) Describe clearly the true nature of business transactions or activities; and
(3) Classify and record information in a timely and proper manner
(d) Not omit anything with the intention of rendering the information misleading or of influencing
contractual or regulatory outcomes inappropriately.
(IESBA Code: para R220.4)
A professional accountant shall not allow pressure from others to result in a breach of compliance
with the fundamental principles or place pressure on others that the accountant knows, or has
reason to believe, would result in the other individuals breaching the fundamental principles. (IESBA
Code: para R270.3)
4.1.2 Structural changes

In addition to the content changes mentioned above, the IESBA has changed the format and
structure of the 2018 Code as follows:
• Guide to the code
• International Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (including International Independence
Standards)
• Preface
• Part 1 – Complying with the Code, fundamental principles and conceptual framework
• Part 2 – Professional accountants in business
• Part 3 – Professional accountants in public practice
• International independence standards: Part 4A Independence for audit and review engagements
and 4B Independence for assurance engagements other than audit and review engagements
• Glossary, including list of abbreviations
• Effective dates (mostly 15 June 2019)
This restructured Code is now referred to as the International Code of Ethics for Professional
Accountants (including International Independence Standards).
4.2 FRC Revised Ethical Standard 2019

In December 2019, the FRC issued Revised Ethical Standard 2019 (Ethical Standard). This one
standard covers the independence requirements for auditors, reporting accountants and for
engagements to report to the Financial Conduct Authority. The previous Ethical Standard from 2016
has been updated to address auditor independence and consequently to improve audit quality.
It is arranged in two parts. Part A sets out overarching principles and supporting ethical provisions
while Part B considers the practical application of these in a series of sections as follows:
Section 1: General requirements and guidance
Section 2: Financial, Business, Employment and Personal Relationships
Section 3: Long Association with Engagements and with Entities Relevant to Engagements
Section 4: Fees, Remuneration and Evaluation Policies, Gifts and Hospitality, Litigation
Section 5: Non-audit/Additional services
Section 6: Provisions Available for Audits of Small Entities
HB2021

An article called ‘The new FRC Ethical Standard’ was published online by ICAEW in March 2020 and
summarised the key changes made to the FRC Revised Ethical Standard 2016 as follows:
• Third party test – The definition of objective, reasonable and informed third party now focusses on
the perspective of an informed investor, shareholder or other stakeholder
• Loan staff assignments – Loan staff assignments will generally be prohibited
• Removal of contingent fees – Contingent fees will no longer be permitted for non-audit /
additional services
• Internal audit services – Firms will no longer be able to provide internal audit services to audited
entities or their significant affiliates
• Non audit services for public interest entities (PIEs) – Rather than providing a blacklist of non-
audit services which must not be provided to PIEs (their parents or worldwide controlled
undertakings), the Revised Ethical Standard 2019 now provides a whitelist of services which may
be provided. If the service is not on the list, it must not be provided
• Gifts and hospitality – The requirement to establish policies on the nature and value of gifts,
favours and hospitality that may be accepted from and offered to other entities has been
extended to apply to those entities which are likely to subsequently become audited entities
• Other entity of public interest (OEPI) – A new term, other entity of public interest (OEPI) is
introduced: it is defined as an entity which does not meet the definition of a PIE, but nevertheless
is of significant public interest to stakeholders (specific examples of these are difficult to provide
and at the time of writing, definitive guidance is being produced by ICAEW, but the FRC Glossary
(FRC, 2019b) suggests this could include larger AIM listed entities, Lloyd’s of London insurance
syndicates and large private sector pension schemes)
• SME listed entities – SME listed entities were not previously subject to many of the prohibitions
applied to listed entities more generally – this is no longer the case
Further details are provided later in this chapter.
4.3 ICAEW Code of Ethics (ICAEW Code)

The current ICAEW Code was introduced in January 2020 and was substantially revised from the
previous version to follow the IESBA Code more closely. ICAEW published a factsheet in December
2019 which explained the key areas of change in the new ICAEW Code of Ethics as follows:
• Non-compliance with laws and regulations (NOCLAR) disclosure guidance was written into the
IESBA Code in 2018 - guidance to the same effect already existed in the ICAEW Code regarding
breaching confidentiality in the public interest, so the ICAEW and IESBA Codes are now more
formally aligned.
• Conflicts of interest - the ICAEW Code is now more detailed in how it illustrates different types of
conflict, explicitly referencing the reasonable and informed third party test and providing more
detail on how to identify and respond to various types of conflict.
• There is new guidance for Professional Accountants In Business (PAIBs) designed to stop any
breaches in the fundamental ethical principles from arising, either as a result of the PAIB being
placed under pressure by others to commit a breach or the PAIB placing others under pressure to
commit such a breach.
• There is new guidance on how a professional accountant should act if a breach of the Code is
identified - this includes evaluating the significance of the breach, the impact of any resultant
inability to comply with the fundamental principles, suitable remedial action and whether or not
the breach requires any form of reporting to relevant parties.
• The Code contains a number of independence requirements that apply to professional
accountants who complete audit and assurance engagements. However, in the majority of cases,
the FRC Revised Ethical Standard 2019 should be followed.
4.4 Threats and safeguards

The IESBA Code, the ICAEW Code and the FRC Revised Ethical Standard are all based on the
principle that integrity, objectivity and independence are subject to various threats and that
safeguards must be in place to counter these.
HB2021

The majority of threats fall into the following categories:
Threat Example
Self-interest threat Undue dependence on total fees from a client
Self-review threat Reporting on the operation of financial systems after being involved in
their design or implementation
Management threat Where the audit firm has been involved in the design, selection and
implementation of financial information technology systems
(This threat is included in the FRC Ethical Standard only)
Advocacy threat Acting as an advocate on behalf of an assurance client in litigation or

disputes with third parties
Familiarity or trust threat A member of the engagement team having a close or immediate
family relationship with a director of the client
Intimidation threat Being threatened with dismissal or replacement in relation to a client

engagement
(a) The ICAEW Code defines a safeguard to be ‘…actions, individually or in combination, that the
professional accountant takes that effectively reduce threats to compliance with the fundamental
principles to an acceptable level.’ (ICAEW Code, para 120.10 A2)
(b) Safeguards in the work environment may differ according to whether a professional accountant
works in public practice, in business or in insolvency.
(c) When evaluating safeguards, the auditor should consider what a reasonable and informed third
party, having knowledge of all relevant information, including the significance of the threat and
the safeguards applied, would conclude to be unacceptable.
4.5 Professional appointment

Section 320 of the ICAEW Code sets out the following procedures for acceptance and continuance.
The prospective auditor should consider the various threats that an engagement could present - for
example:
• integrity and professional behaviour issues may arise from clients with questionable integrity
(these can be evaluated by considering the client’s integrity and the existence of any suitable
governance practices in place)
• self-interest threats could arise from undertaking work that the auditor is not competent to
complete (a thorough understanding of the nature of the work being considered is therefore
essential)
When considering a prospective engagement, the prospective auditor needs to determine if there
are any reasons for not accepting the engagement (in other words, would it lead to a threat that
could not be satisfactorily dealt with by safeguards).
A suitable response would be to undertake research of the prospective client (usually by some form
of enquiry) or to ask for information about the prospective client from the existing auditor. Both
existing and prospective auditors need formal consent from the client to be able to communicate:
the prospective auditor should keep an open mind when evaluating the threat attached to the
prospective client, even if the existing auditor does not respond (although in such cases it would be
reasonable to obtain information by other means).
In any event, both parties must be careful to avoid any risk of tipping off if there is any suspicion of
money laundering.
4.6 Access to information by successor auditors

As a result of the implementation of the Companies Act 2006 when the predecessor auditor ceases
to hold office, if requested by the successor auditor, the predecessor auditor must allow the
successor access to all relevant information in respect of its audit work. This includes access to
relevant working papers.
HB2021

The ICAEW Code states that predecessor auditors should pass their working papers on to the
successor auditor but that if there are any outstanding fees from the engagement, they can exercise
their right of lien. Any transfer of information should be based on a reasonable request and should
be undertaken promptly. Any information that assists the successor auditor with gaining an
understanding of their client can also be requested from the predecessor auditor and should be
provided free of charge unless it would require significant work to create.
Although there is a lot of content in each of the FRC Ethical Standard and the ICAEW and IESBA
Codes, you can use something as mundane as the contents pages of each document to help you
find the right path through any ethics problem.
Interactive question 3: Stewart Brice

You are the Ethics Partner at Stewart Brice, a firm of chartered accountants. The following situations
exist.
Teresa is the audit manager assigned to the audit of Recreate, a large quoted company. The audit
has been ongoing for one week. Yesterday, Teresa’s husband inherited 1,000 shares in Recreate.
Teresa’s husband wants to hold on to the shares as an investment.
The Stewart Brice pension scheme, which is administered by Friends Benevolent, an unconnected
company, owns shares in Tadpole Group, a listed company with a number of subsidiaries. Stewart
Brice has recently been invited to tender for the audit of one of the subsidiary companies, Kermit Co.
Stewart Brice has been the auditor of Kripps Bros, a limited liability company, for a number of years.
It is a requirement of Kripps Bros’ constitution that the auditor owns a token £1 share in the company.
Requirements
3.1 Comment on the ethical and other professional issues raised by the above matters.
3.2 Identify the ethical and professional issues Stewart Brice would need to consider.
5 Making ethical judgements

Section overview
• The application of ethical guidance requires skill and judgement and relies on the integrity of the
individual.
• The ICAEW provides a framework for the resolution of ethical conflicts.
• In the exam, you will be expected to identify ethical issues and evaluate alternative courses of
action.
5.1 Resolving ethical conflicts

Although there are a number of sources of ethical guidance, resolving ethical issues can be complex.
As you have seen in your earlier studies, there are some specific rules which can be applied, but
current UK ethical guidance is primarily principles-based.
The application of these principles requires a degree of skill and the onus is placed on the integrity
and judgement of the individual in weighing up the facts of the situation. In addition, it may mean
that in certain circumstances there is more than one acceptable outcome.
HB2021

The ICAEW Code recognises that conflicts in the application of fundamental principles may need to
be resolved. When providing a service the professional accountant must take into account:
• the client‘s requirements; and
• the public interest.
Where these are in conflict, the public interest should take priority.
The ICAEW has produced a help sheet (ICAEW, 2014) which sets out a framework that accountants
can follow when faced with these issues, which you may find useful when considering ethical
problems in the exam.
The help sheet suggests that the resolution process should consider the following:
Relevant facts This may involve:

Do I have all the relevant facts? • referring to the organisation’s policy,
Am I making assumptions? procedures, code of conduct and previous
history; or
Is it my problem or can anyone else help?
• discussing the matter with trusted managers
and employees.
Relevant parties These may include those directly affected eg,

Who are the individuals, organisations and shareholders, employees and employers but may
key stakeholders affected? also include the community at large.
How are they affected?

Are there conflicts between different
stakeholders?
Who are your allies?
Ethical issues involved These include:

Would these ethical issues affect the • professional ethical issues;
reputation of the accountancy profession? • organisational ethical issues; and
Would they affect the public interest? • personal ethical issues.
You could refer to the ICAEW Code of Ethics for
help.
Fundamental principles affected and any This will involve reference to the relevant ethical
associated ethical threats guidance from the ICAEW Code:
Which fundamental principles are affected? • Section 110 for the fundamental principles
Which threats to compliance exist? • Section 120.6 A3 for threats to these
Are there safeguards in place which can fundamental principles
reduce or eliminate the threats? Are any of these threats clearly insignificant?
Established internal procedures The professional accountant may find it useful to

Does your organisation have policies and discuss ethical conflict issues with:
procedures to deal with this situation? • immediate superior;
How can you escalate concerns within your • the next level of management;
organisation? • a corporate governance body; or
Is there a whistleblowing procedure? • other departments eg, legal, audit, human
resources.
Consideration should also be given to the point at
which help is sought from external sources eg,
ICAEW. Generally it would be preferable for the
conflict to be resolved without external
consultation.
HB2021

Alternative courses of action The following should be considered:
Have all the consequences been discussed • The organisation’s policies, procedures and
and evaluated? guidelines
Will the proposed course of action stand the • Applicable laws and regulations
test of time? • Universal values and principles adopted by
Would a similar course of action be society
undertaken in a similar situation? • Consequences
Would the course of action stand scrutiny Whenever considering an ethical issue, thought
from peers, family and friends? processes, discussions and decisions should all be
recorded and can be referred to if you need to
justify your actions in future.
Where the conflict is significant and cannot be resolved, the accountant would need to seek legal
advice. After exhausting all other possibilities and depending on the nature of the conflict, the
individual may conclude that withdrawal from the engagement team or resignation from the
firm/employing organisation is appropriate.
Note: Withdrawal/resignation would be seen very much as a last resort.
Scenarios in the exam may be discrete and straightforward, but what if they are not? Use this
systematic resolution process to help you work the problem logically.
5.2 Exam context

Ethical issues will have been examined in earlier papers. However, at the Advanced Level you will be
faced with more complex situations. More emphasis will be placed on your ability to use your
judgement in the light of the facts provided, rather than testing your knowledge of the ethical codes
and standards in detail. In some instances, the correct action may be uncertain and it will be your
ability to identify the range of possible outcomes which will be important rather than concluding on
a single course of action.
You should also be aware that the term ‘ethics’ will be used in a much broader sense than it has been
in the earlier Assurance and Audit and Assurance papers. It is likely to be combined with financial
reporting and business issues where you may be required to assess the ethical judgements made by
others, including management. You may also be asked to consider the issue from the point of view of
the accountant in practice and the accountant in business.
The following Interactive question demonstrates these points.
Interactive question 4: Revenue recognition

You are the auditor of Bellevue Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X8. The company provides
information to the financial services sector and is run by the Managing Director, Toby Stobbart. It has
a venture capital investment of which part is in the form of a loan. The investment agreement details
a covenant designed to protect the loan. This states an interest cover of two is required as a
minimum ie, the company must be able to cover interest and loan principal repayments with profits
at least twice.
70% of the revenue of the business is subscription based and contracts are typically three years in
duration. 30% of the revenue is for consultancy work which is billed on completion of the work.
Consultancy projects are for a maximum of two months.
During the previous year the management performed a review of the subscription revenue and
concluded that 40% of this represented consultancy work and should therefore be recognised in the
first year of the contract rather than being recognised over the duration of the contract as had
previously been the case. The audit file for 20X7 indicates that this treatment had been questioned
vigorously by the audit manager but had been agreed with the audit partner, James Cowell. James
Cowell subsequently left the firm abruptly.
HB2021

You have received a copy of the 20X8 draft accounts which show an interest cover of 2.02 for 20X7
and 2.01 for 20X8. You have also been told that a similar review of subscription income has been
made for 20X8, with 40% being reclassified as consultancy work as in the previous year.
Requirement
What are the issues that you as auditor would need to consider in this situation?
6 Money laundering regulations

Section overview
• This section provides a summary of some key points covered in the Audit and Assurance paper at
Professional Level.
• Changes to money-laundering regulations were made on 26 June 2017 and the Money
Laundering, Terrorist Financing and Transfer of Funds (Information on the Payer) Regulations 2017
are now in force. These changes were made in order to improve the 2007 regulations.
• Here, we consider an overview of the money laundering regulations in the UK, and how they
affect the work of accountants in practice.
6.1 New money laundering regulations – key changes from 2007

The EU issued its fourth anti-money laundering directive on 26 June 2015 aimed at enhancing
consistency across member states. The provisions were incorporated in national law on 26 June
2017.The main changes between the 2007 and 2017 regulations relate to amending the approach to
customer due diligence, seeking to prevent new means of terrorist financing (including through e-
money and prepaid cards), improving the transparency of beneficial ownership of companies and
trusts and effectively enforcing sanctions.
Relevant persons (ie, those covered by the money laundering regulations 2017) now include all
gambling providers, not just those who hold a casino operating licence. However the new
regulations do not apply to those engaging in financial activity on a very occasional basis, with a
turnover less than £100,000 (this is an increase of £64,000 compared to the 2007 regulations).
The new requirements are summarised below.
General risk assessment
The new regulations are more prescriptive in terms of risk assessment and due diligence procedures
and require specific procedures to be undertaken to assess the business’s potential exposure to
money laundering and terrorist financing. This includes a report by the relevant person on
customers, countries of operation, products and services, transactions, delivery channels and the size
and nature of the business. This report must also be translated into written policies and procedures.
Officer responsible for compliance
Firms must now appoint a money laundering compliance principal (MLCP)who must be on the
board of directors or a member of senior management (sole practitioners with no employees are
exempt from this requirement). Firms must also have a nominated officer (who receives internal
suspicious activity reports and assesses whether a suspicious activity report should be made to the
National Crime Agency, NCA). Under the old regulations, firms had to appoint a money laundering
reporting officer (MLRO) and this person can act as MLCP and nominated officer if sufficiently senior.
The new regulations also require firms to assess the skills, knowledge, conduct and integrity of
employees involved in identifying, mitigating and preventing or detecting money laundering and
terrorist financing.
HB2021

Internal controls
The new regulations state that firms must establish an independent audit function to assess the
adequacy and effectiveness of a firm’s anti-money laundering policies, controls and procedures.
Policies, controls and procedures
Firms must have policies, controls and procedures in place to prevent money laundering and
terrorist financing and conform with data protection requirements. Firms must maintain written
records of training. Firms with overseas branches and subsidiaries must establish group-wide
policies and controls that comply with UK regulations. Specifically, if the branch or subsidiary
operates in an EEA state, it must comply with the regulations of that state; if it operates outside of the
EEA then it must comply with the UK regulations.
Due diligence and reliance on third parties
Client due diligence must still be performed under the new regulations, both before establishing a
new business relationship and when factors have been identified that result in a change to the risk
assessment. Owners and beneficial owners must still be identified but under the new regulations,
sole reliance on Companies House cannot be placed.
Simplified due diligence is more restricted under the 2017 regulations, where automatic simplified
due diligence ceases. Instead relevant persons need to consider both customer and geographical
risk factors in deciding whether simplified due diligence is applicable. The new regulations also have
a black list of high risk jurisdictions which, if involved in a transaction, make enhanced due diligence
and additional risk assessment necessary.
The regulations define a list of situations where enhanced due diligence applies:
• where there is a high risk of money laundering or terrorist financing;
• in any business relationship with a client established in a high-risk country;
• if the client is a politically exposed person (PEP) or a family member or known close associate of a
PEP;
• in any case where the client has provided false or stolen identification documentation; and
• in cases where there are complex and unusually large transactions or an unusual pattern of
transactions and the transactions do not seem to have any apparent economic or legal purpose.
The regulations set out factors that could indicate that enhanced due diligence is necessary such as
customer risk factors, product, service, transaction or delivery channel risk factors, and geographical
risk factors.
Third parties can still be relied upon for carrying out due diligence as long as the third party is
subject to the Money Laundering 2017 regulations or a similar regime. However, the conditions for
reliance on a third party for due diligence are prescriptive in that the third party must provide the
customer due diligence information and enter into a written agreement in which is agrees to provide
copies of all customer due diligence information within two working days.
Politically exposed persons (PEPs)
The regulations require that firms have procedures in place to identify whether a client, or the
beneficial owner of a client, is a PEP or a family member (spouse, civil partner, children and parents)
or known close associate of a PEP.
PEPs are defined by the legislation as individuals entrusted with prominent public functions, other
than as a middle ranking or more junior official. PEPs include heads of state, members of parliament,
members of supreme courts and ambassadors amongst others.
Known close associates are defined as individuals known to have joint beneficial ownership of a legal
entity or a legal arrangement or any other close business relations with a PEP, or individuals who
have sole beneficial ownership of a legal entity or a legal arrangement which is known to have been
set up for the benefit of a PEP.
Where a PEP is identified, the regulations require the following as a minimum:
• Senior management approval for the relationship
• Adequate measures to establish the source of funds and wealth
• Enhanced ongoing monitoring of the relationship
HB2021

Enhanced due diligence procedures must continue for 12 months after a PEP ceases to be a client,
but this does not apply to family members or known associates of a PEP.
The new regulations now encompass both foreign PEPs and domestic PEPs. This means enhanced
due diligence requirements for a wider range of individuals who have been trusted with prominent
public functions both within the UK and overseas.
New criminal offence
Under the new regulations, any individual who recklessly makes a statement in the context of money
laundering which is false or misleading commits an offence which is punishable by a fine and/or up
to two years in prison.
6.2 The wide scope of money laundering

The definition of money laundering is covered by the Proceeds of Crime Act 2002,which defines
money laundering deliberately in very general terms. Money laundering means exchanging money
or assets that were obtained from criminal activity for money or other assets that are ‘clean’. The
‘clean’ money or assets do not then have an obvious link with any criminal activity. Money laundering
also includes money that is used to fund terrorism, however it is obtained.
In the UK, a person is deemed to commit a money laundering offence when they:
(a) conceal criminal property (for example, converting the proceeds of criminal conduct into
another currency);
(b) enter into an arrangement regarding criminal property (for example, an accountant in practice
who advises a client involved in money laundering on the acquisition of a business); or
(c) acquire, use or possess criminal property (this includes acquiring criminal property for
‘inadequate consideration’ – for example, an adviser receiving a payment of professional fees
from a client involved in money laundering offences that is significantly above the value of the
professional services performed).
Criminal property is also rather widely defined as the benefits of criminal conduct. It includes those
benefits gained indirectly, or partly, from criminal conduct. Criminal conduct includes:
• tax evasion;
• illegally saved costs (failure to comply with environmental regulations or health and safety
requirements); and
• offences committed overseas that are criminal offences under UK law (including bribery).
In addition, those working within the regulated sector – this includes auditors, insolvency advisers,
external accountants and tax advisers – need to be aware of an additional offence: failure to disclose.
We will look at this in the section below.
6.3 The professional accountant‘s responsibilities

6.3.1 The duty to report
If an accountant has knowledge or suspicion, or reasonable grounds for suspicion, that money
laundering is taking place at a client, that accountant must report it. It is important to note the words
‘grounds for suspicion’– if an accountant waits for incontrovertible evidence, it might be too late.
The money laundering regulations override the accountant’s duty of confidentiality towards the
client. Therefore, accountants have always had to tread a fine line of discretion between their duty to
their client and the public interest.
If a client is doing well and you do not understand where the money has come from, after exhausting
all reasonable lines of inquiry then you have grounds for suspicion and a duty to report without
tipping off either:
• the client; or
• anyone who could prejudice an inquiry into the matter.
ISA (UK) 250A was revised in December 2017 to include the following guidance:
“In the UK, legislation relating to money laundering, terrorist financing and proceeds of crime
imposes additional responsibilities on the auditor. The Appendix contains further guidance on these
responsibilities.” (ISA (UK) 250A: para A6-1)
HB2021

The Appendix to ISA (UK) 250A discusses the 2017 money laundering regulations in more detail – in
essence, there is now a legal obligation for UK auditors to fulfil beyond the professional
requirements of the auditing standards.
6.3.2 Report to whom?

Accountants must report to the nominated official (MLCP) in their assurance firm, which fulfils their
responsibility.
The MLCP then has to decide on whether to report the matter to the National Crime Agency and, if
appropriate, to make the report.
The legislation protects professionals from any claims for breach of confidentiality even where
suspicions are later proved to be ill-founded.
6.4 Offences and penalties

Failing to report and comply with the regulations – including the provision of suitable training – are
offences under the legislation.
Remember, ‘tipping off‘ is also an offence.
The penalties for non-compliance by accountants can be severe – for some offences a jail term of 14
years is a possibility.
6.5 Economic Crime Plan 2019 to 2022

The economic crime plan (UK Government, 2019) sets out 7 priority areas that were agreed in
January 2019 by the Economic Crime Strategic Board, the ministerial level public-private board
charged with setting the UK’s strategic priorities for combatting economic crime:
(a) develop a better understanding of the threat posed by economic crime and our performance in
combatting economic crime
(b) pursue better sharing and usage of information to combat economic crime within and between
the public and private sectors across all participants
(c) ensure the powers, procedures and tools of law enforcement, the justice system and the private
sector are as effective as possible
(d) strengthen the capabilities of law enforcement, the justice system and private sector to detect,
deter and disrupt economic crime
(e) build greater resilience to economic crime by enhancing the management of economic crime
risk in the private sector and the risk-based approach to supervision
(f) improve our systems for transparency of ownership of legal entities and legal arrangements
(g) deliver an ambitious international strategy to enhance security, prosperity and the UK’s global
influence
The plan demonstrates the UK’s commitment to making the fight against economic crime as effective
as possible by means of greater scope, transparency and action.
Context example: Greensill, Gupta, the former PM and the auditors

At the time of writing, the FRC has launched investigations into the audits conducted by two UK firms
with connections to the collapsed supply chain finance company Greensill Capital and global steel
magnate Sanjeev Gupta. Greensill made headlines in 2021 when it emerged that former UK prime
minister David Cameron had attempted to secure government loans for Greensill Capital, raising
questions over the ethics of lobbying. The finance was expected to have been used to continue
Greensill’s operations – facilitating the payment of suppliers for companies with liquidity issues – but
was declined. Greensill collapsed soon after, leaving questions for its external auditors to answer
about the unexpected nature of its swift demise.
Greensill had provided funding for the many companies operating under Sanjeev Gupta’s steel
empire, including Liberty Steel in the UK, but the withdrawal of insurance cover is considered pivotal
in its inability to continue to trade, leaving Mr Gupta’s network of companies vulnerable. In May 2021,
the UK’s Serious Fraud Office launched an investigation into alleged money laundering and fraud
relating to loans between Greensill and companies under Mr Gupta, regarding the circumstances
surrounding emergency government funding that was approved in order to support companies
HB2021

affected by the global pandemic. In June 2021, the FRC launched an investigation of its own into the
audit of Wyelands Bank, also part of Mr Gupta’s empire, which is thought to be connected to
Greensill and this funding.
These investigations are likely to take some time to complete and may end up being completed by
the FRC’s successor ARGA, but they highlight the strain being put on a regulatory regime still reeling
from the impacts of Carillion.
Sources: BBC News (2021) Greensill auditor under investigation by watchdog [Online]. Available
from: https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/business-57634849 [Accessed 29 June 2021];
Smith R., Pooler M. and Storbeck, O. (2021) The unravelling of Lex Greensill: a mix of bravado and
financial alchemy [Online]. Available from: https://www.ft.com/content/7e79117f-cbf5-4765-82ca-
7e8f1fb5915b [Accessed 29 June 2021].
7 Ethical guidance in more detail

7.1 Integrity, objectivity and independence
7.1.1 Exam focus
You will have covered the ethical guidance on integrity, objectivity and independence in your earlier
studies. At the Advanced Level, however, a greater emphasis will be placed on your ability to apply
this knowledge. Ethical dilemmas which you may be required to deal with will be less clear-cut and
the requirements of the question will not always specifically indicate that ethical issues need to be
considered. Instead information will typically be embedded within the question and you will need to
demonstrate your skill in identifying the ethical issue and its implications.
This section is based on the FRC Revised Ethical Standard 2019 and the 2020 ICAEW Code.
It provides a summary of the key points. It has been structured around the ethical issues, as this is the
way that it will be examined at the Advanced Level.
Note: Definitions have been sourced from the FRC Glossary of Terms (Auditing and Ethics)
(December 2019) unless otherwise stated.
Definitions
Integrity: Being trustworthy, straightforward, honest, fair and candid; complying with the spirit as well
as the letter of the applicable ethical principles, laws and regulations; behaving so as to maintain the
public’s trust in the auditing profession; and respecting confidentiality except where disclosure is in
the public interest or is required to adhere to legal and professional responsibilities.
Objectivity: Acting and making decisions and judgments impartially, fairly and on merit (having
regard to all considerations relevant to the task in hand but no other), without discrimination, bias, or
compromise because of commercial or personal self-interest, conflicts of interest or the undue
influence of others, and having given due consideration to the best available evidence.
Independence: Freedom from conditions and relationships which, in the context of an engagement,
would compromise the integrity or objectivity of the firm or covered persons.
Reasonable and informed third party: Consideration of whether the ethical outcomes required by
the overarching principles and supporting ethical provisions have been met should be evaluated by
reference to the perspective of an objective, reasonable and informed third party (sometimes
referred to as the ‘Third Party Test’) (FRC Ethical Standard, Introduction section I14).
Covered person: A person in a position to influence the conduct or outcome of the engagement.
Close family: A non-dependent parent, child or sibling.
Person closely associated: This is:
(a) a spouse, or partner considered to be equivalent to a spouse in accordance with national law;
(b) a dependent child;
(c) a relative who has lived in the same household as the person with whom they are associated for
at least one year;
HB2021

(d) a firm whose managerial responsibilities are discharged by, or which is directly or indirectly
controlled by, the firm/person with whom they are associated, or by any person mentioned in (a),
(b) or (c) or in which the firm or any such person has a beneficial or other substantially equivalent
economic interest; or
(e) a trust whose managerial responsibilities are discharged by, or which is directly or indirectly
controlled by, or which is set up for the benefit of, or whose economic interests are substantially
equivalent to, the firm/person with whom they are associated or any person mentioned in (a), (b)
or (c).
Other entity of public interest (OEPI): An entity which does not meet the definition of a Public
Interest Entity, but nevertheless is of significant public interest to stakeholders (these are not
straightforward to define but include insurance syndicates, pension schemes and smaller AIM listed
entities)
Entity relevant to the engagement: An entity with respect to which the firm and covered persons are
required to be independent. In the case of an audit engagement, the entity relevant to the
engagement is the audited entity.
7.1.2 Non-involvement in Management Decision-taking

This is a key principle in the Ethical Standard. It identifies the following as judgements and decisions
which should not be taken by the firm or a covered person:
• Setting policies and strategic decisions
• Directing and taking responsibility for the actions of the entity’s employees
• Authorising transactions
• Deciding which recommendations of the firm or other third parties should be implemented
• Taking responsibility for the preparation and fair presentation of the financial statements in
accordance with the applicable financial reporting framework
• Taking responsibility for the preparation and presentation of subject matter information in the
case of another public interest assurance engagement
• Taking responsibility for designing, implementing and maintaining internal control
7.1.3 Self-interest threat
Financial interests The parties listed below are not allowed to own a direct financial interest
or an indirect material financial interest in an audited entity:
• The audit firm
• Any partner in the audit firm
• Any person in a position to influence the conduct and outcome of the
engagement ie, a covered person (eg, a member of the engagement
team)
• Any person closely associated with any such partner or covered person
(Ethical Standard s.2.3)
The following safeguards will therefore be relevant:
• Disposing of the interest
• Removing the individual from the team if required
• Keeping the audited entity’s audit committee informed of the situation
• Using an independent partner to review work carried out if necessary
Business Firms, covered persons and persons closely associated with them must not
relationships (eg, enter into business relationships with any entity relevant to the
operating a joint engagement, or its management or its affiliates except where those
venture between the relationships involve the purchase of goods on normal commercial terms
firm and the client) and which are not material to either party or would be inconsequential in
the view of an objective, reasonable and informed third party. (Ethical
Standard s.2.26)
HB2021

Where a business relationship exists that is not permitted and has been
entered into by the following parties:
(a) The firm: either the relationship is terminated or the firm does not
accept/withdraws from the engagement
(b) A covered person: either the relationship is terminated or that person
is excluded from any role in which they would be a covered person
(c) A person closely associated with a covered person: either the
relationship is terminated or the covered person is excluded from any
role in which they would be a covered person. (Ethical Standard
s.2.28)
Employment with When a partner leaves the firm they may not be appointed as a director or
assurance client to a key management position/ member of the audit committee with an
audited entity, having acted as statutory auditor or key audit partner in
relation to that audit before the end of:
(a) in the case of a public interest entity, two years; and
(b) in any other case, one year. (Ethical Standard s.2.43)
Where a partner approved as statutory auditor is appointed as a director, a
member of the audit committee or to a key management position having
previously been a covered person:
(a) in the case of a partner, at any time during the two years before the
appointment; or
(b) in the case of another person, at any time during the year before the
appointment
the firm must resign from the engagement where possible under
applicable law or regulation. (Ethical Standard s.2.45)
The firm cannot accept another engagement for the entity until:
(a) in the case of a partner, a two-year period; or
(b) in the case of another person, a one year period.
Governance role The audit firm, a partner or employee of an audit firm shall not perform a
role as an officer or member of the board of an entity relevant to the
engagement. (Ethical Standard s.2.53)
Family and personal Where a covered person or any partner in the firm becomes aware that a
relationships person closely associated with them is employed by an entity and that
person is in a position to exercise influence on the accounting records and
financial statements relevant to the engagement they should be excluded
from any role in which they would be a covered person eg, they should be
removed from the audit team.
Where a covered person or any partner in the firm becomes aware that a
close family member who is not a person closely associated with them is
employed by an entity and that person is in a position to exercise influence
on the accounting records and financial statements relevant to the
engagement they should report the matter to the engagement partner to
take appropriate action. (Ethical Standard s.2.62)
If it is a close family member of the engagement partner, the matter should
be resolved in consultation with the Ethics Partner/Function. (Ethical
Standard s.2.63)
Gifts and hospitality Gifts, favours or hospitality should not be accepted unless an objective,
reasonable and informed third party would consider the value to be trivial
and inconsequential. (Ethical Standard s.4.40)
Loans and Firms, covered persons and persons closely associated with them must not
guarantees enter into any loan or guarantee arrangement with an audited entity that
HB2021

is not a bank or similar institution, and the transaction is made in the
ordinary course of business on normal business terms and is not material
to the entity. (Ethical Standard s.2.21 – 2.22)
Overdue fees Firms should guard against fees building up, as the audit firm runs the risk
of effectively making a loan. Where the amount cannot be regarded as
trivial the engagement partner and ethics partner must consider whether it
is necessary to resign. (Ethical Standard s.4.11) The ICAEW Code (s.410.7
A1) states that, generally, the payment of overdue fees should be required
before the assurance report for the following year can be issued.
Percentage or Fees for the provision of engagements, non-audit and audit-related

contingent fees services to an entity relevant to an engagement, its UK parent undertaking
and any worldwide controlled undertaking shall not be contingent fees.
The firm and any of its network firms shall not provide any non-audit
/additional services, to or in respect of an entity relevant to an
engagement, wholly or partly on a contingent fee basis (Ethical Standard
s.4.5 and 4.10)
High percentage of The Ethical Standard includes a 70% cap in respect of non-audit services
fees provided to an audit client as follows:
(a) Total fees for non-audit services provided to a public interest entity
audit client must be limited to no more than 70% of the average fees
paid in the last three consecutive financial years for the audit.
(b) Total fees for such services provided by the audit firm must be limited
to no more than 70% of the average of the fees paid to the audit firm
in the last three consecutive financial years for the audits of the entity.
(Ethical Standard s4.15)
Where total fees (audit and non-audit services) from an audited entity are
expected to regularly exceed 15% of the annual fee income of the audit
firm (10% in the case of a public interest entity or other listed entity), the
firm should resign or not stand for reappointment. Where total fees from
an audited entity are expected to regularly exceed 10% of the annual fee
income, but will not regularly exceed 15% (5% and 10% in the case of a
public interest entity or other listed entity) the audit engagement partner
should disclose that fact to the ethics partner and those charged with
governance of the audited entity and consider whether appropriate
safeguards should be applied to reduce the threat to independence. Non-
public-interest entities will also require an external independent quality
control review to be undertaken if the 10-15% category applies. (Ethical
Standard s4.23, 4.24, 4.27 and 4.31)
Lowballing Where the fee quoted is significantly lower than would have been charged
by the predecessor firm, the engagement partner must be satisfied that:
• the appropriate staff are used and time is spent on the engagement;
and
• all applicable assurance standards, guidelines and quality control
procedures have been complied with. (ICAEW Code sR330.6)
The engagement partner must be able to demonstrate that the
engagement has assigned to it sufficient partners and staff with
appropriate time and skills, irrespective of the fee charged.
Fees must not be influenced or determined by the provision of non-
audit/additional services to an entity. (Ethical Standard s4.3)
7.1.4 Self-review threat
Service with an Individuals who have been a director or officer of the client, or an
assurance client employee in a position to exert direct and significant influence over the
HB2021

financial statements on which the firm will express an opinion should not
be assigned to the audit team. (ICAEW Code s.R522.3)
The Ethical Standard states that in this situation the individual should be
excluded from any role in which they would be a covered person for a
period of two years following the date of leaving the entity. (Ethical
Standard s2.57)
Preparing The Ethical Standard (s.5.120) prohibits the provision of accounting

accounting records services where:
and financial (a) the entity is a listed entity; or
statements
(b) for any other entity if those accounting services would involve the firm
undertaking the role of management or the services are anything
other than routine and mechanical, requiring little or no professional
judgement.
Where accounting services are provided, safeguards include:
• using staff members other than engagement team members to carry
out work;
• a review of the accounting services provided by a partner or other
senior staff member with relevant expertise who is not a member of the
engagement team; and
• a review of the engagement by a partner or other senior staff member
with relevant expertise who is not a member of the engagement team.
The ICAEW Code only allows routine and mechanical bookkeeping
(s.R601.6 and R601.7) and no longer allows firms to prepare financial
statements for public interest entity audit clients, apart from those of
immaterial divisions or related entities when separate teams would be
required.
Provision of other The FRC has effectively prohibited the provision of non-audit services to
services audit clients who are public interest entities unless the services fall into
certain categories (usually these are services required by law or regulation)
and these are not subject to the 70% cap mentioned earlier. (Ethical
Standard s5.40)
For other entities, while in principle the provision of other services is
allowed, the threat of self-review must be considered particularly where
the matter in question will be material to the financial statements.
Safeguards may mitigate the threats in some circumstances although the
Ethical Standard does include a number of instances where the provision
of the service would be inappropriate irrespective of any safeguards. In
particular, the service should not be provided where the audit firm would
undertake part of the role of management.
• Valuation services
Valuation services to public interest entities are prohibited.
For other listed entities that are not SMEs valuation services cannot be
provided where the valuation would have a material effect on the entity’s
For all other companies the restriction applies where the valuation involves
a significant degree of subjective judgment and has a material effect on
the financial statements. (Ethical Standard s5.52)
• Taxation services
The firm must not provide the following tax services to a public interest
entity audit client:
– Preparation of tax form
– Tax services relating to payroll and customs duties
HB2021

– Calculation of direct tax, indirect tax and deferred tax
– Provision of tax advice
For other audit clients the basic principle is that a tax service can be
provided where the service would not involve the firm in undertaking a
management role. (Ethical Standard s.5.69)
For listed companies that are not SMEs a firm cannot provide a service to
prepare current or deferred tax calculations that are material to the
financial statements. (Ethical Standard s.5.71)
• Internal audit services
The provision of internal audit services to any audit clients is now
prohibited. (Ethical Standard s.5.44)
• Corporate finance services
Due to the broad range of services that this work could include, the
Ethical Standard requires firms to consider the precise nature of the
service provided when evaluating the threats to integrity, objectivity
and independence (Ethical Standard s.5.89) although certain activities
are prohibited (such as dealing in, underwriting or promoting shares in
Ethical Standard s.5.93).
• Information technology services
Provision of services which involve designing and implementing internal
control or risk management procedures related to the preparation and/or
control of financial information or designing and implementing financial
information technology systems is prohibited for public interest entities.
Information technology services can be provided for other audit clients
provided the system concerned is not important to a significant part of the
accounting system or to the production of the financial statements and
significant reliance would not be placed upon these systems during the
audit. (Ethical Standard s.5.50)
• Litigation support services
Valuation services including valuations performed in connection with
litigation support services are prohibited in respect of public interest
entities.
For other entities, litigation support should not be provided where it
involves the estimation by the firm of the outcome of a pending legal
matter related to amounts or disclosures that could be material to the
financial statements. (Ethical Standard s.5.81)
For other entities the restriction applies where the matter is potentially
material and there is a significant degree of subjectivity.
7.1.5 Advocacy threat
Arises where the The Ethical Standard prohibits the provision of legal services for public
assurance firm is in a interest entities with respect to:
position of taking the • the provision of legal counsel;
client’s part in a
dispute or somehow • negotiating on behalf of the audit client; and
acting as their • acting in an advocacy role in the resolution of litigation.
advocate.
For other entities legal services should not be provided where it would
Examples: involve acting as the solicitor formally nominated to represent the client in
• If the firm carried resolution of a dispute or litigation which is material to the financial
out corporate statements. (Ethical Standard s.5.83)
finance work for
the client; eg, if
the audit firm
HB2021

were involved
in advice on
debt
restructuring
and
negotiated
with the bank
on the client’s
behalf.
• If the firm offered
legal services to a
client and, say,
defended them in
a legal case.
7.1.6 Familiarity threat
Long association The Ethical Standard requires compliance with Article 17 of the EU Audit
Regulation on audit firm rotation. As previously referred to, there is a
requirement that for public interest entities an audit tender must be
carried out at least every 10 years, with mandatory rotation of an audit firm
at least every 20 years.
The Ethical Standard also requires all firms to monitor the relationship
between staff and established clients.
The general provision in the Ethical Standard is that when engagement
partners, key partners involved in the audit and partners and staff in senior
positions have a long association with the audit, the firm must assess the
threats to integrity, objectivity and independence and apply safeguards to
reduce the threats to an acceptable level. Once an audit engagement
partner has held this role for a continuous period of 10 years, careful
consideration must be given (using the ‘third party test’) as to whether the
audit firm’s integrity, objectivity and independence is impaired (Ethical
Standard s.3.6).
The standard states the following for listed companies:
• No one should act as audit engagement partner for a continuous
period longer than five years and should not subsequently participate
in the audit until a further period of five years has elapsed. (Ethical
Standard s.3.10)
• The engagement partner may continue in this position for an additional
two years where the audit committee decide that this is necessary to
safeguard the quality of the audit. Safeguards must be applied and
disclosure made to the shareholders. (Ethical Standard s.3.15 and 3.16)
• No one should act as engagement quality reviewer or key partner
involved in the audit for a continuous period of more than seven years
(and when an engagement quality control reviewer or a key partner
involved in the audit becomes the audit engagement partner the
combined service should not be more than seven years). (Ethical
Standard s.3.20)
• Anyone who has acted as engagement quality reviewer for seven years
should not return to that position for at least five years. (Ethical
Standard s.3.20)
• Anyone who has acted as key partner involved in the audit for seven
years should not return to that position for at least two years. (Ethical
Standard s.3.20)
The ICAEW Code (s. R540.11-13)) states that for the audit of listed entities,
the engagement partner, individuals responsible for engagement quality
HB2021

control review and any key audit partners should be rotated after seven
years, and should not return to the engagement until a period of five,
three and two years respectively has elapsed.
Recruitment and The firm shall not provide recruitment services to an entity relevant to an
remuneration engagement, that would involve the firm taking responsibility for, or
services advising on the appointment of any director or employee of the entity, or a
significant affiliate of such an entity, where the firm is undertaking an
engagement. (Ethical Standard s.5.85)
The firm shall not provide advice on the remuneration package or the
measurement criteria on which the remuneration is calculated, for any
director or employee of the entity, or a significant affiliate of an entity
relevant to an engagement. (Ethical Standard s.5.86)
7.1.7 Intimidation threat
Litigation Generally, where litigation threatens integrity, objectivity and

independence, the normal course of action would be for the firm to resign.
However, the firm is not required to resign immediately in circumstances
where a reasonable and informed third party would not regard it in the
interests of the shareholders for it to do so. This might be the case where:
• the litigation was started as the engagement was about to be
completed and shareholders would be adversely affected by the delay;
or
• on legal advice, the firm deems that the litigation is designed solely to
bring pressure to bear on the auditor’s opinion. (Ethical Standard s.4.47
and 4.48)
7.1.8 Management threat
Arises when the firm • If there is informed management (ie, management capable of making
undertakes non-audit independent judgements and decisions on the basis of the information
services for audit provided) safeguards may be able to mitigate the threat
clients which • If there is no informed management, it is unlikely that the threat can be
involves making avoided if the work is undertaken.
judgements and
taking decisions that
are the responsibility
of management (and
due to the alignment
of such
responsibilities could
diminish the firm’s
professional
scepticism)
Note: A given situation may give rise to more than one threat.
Questions are unlikely to simply ask you what the problem is - they will also expect some form of
recommended action for the firm or accountant to take. Each part of the various Codes and
Standards is designed to suggest responses but it is up to you to explain what you believe to be the
right one and why.
HB2021

8 Further ethical guidance
8.1 Provisions available for small entities
8.1.1 Exam focus
Section 6 of the Revised Ethical Standard (FRC, 2019) covers this issue. It relaxes the ethical rules for
smaller entities by making use of exemptions and some additional disclosures. It applies where the
client satisfies certain criteria that indicate it to be a ‘Small Entity’ (including those that qualify as a
small company under the Companies Act 2006 - see Ethical Standard s.6.4 for the full list) and covers
three issues dealt with by the Ethical Standards, as well as their disclosure. In your exam you may
need to consider ethical issues, as they affect smaller companies specifically.
8.1.2 Key points
Economic Where total fees for audit and non-audit services from a non-listed
dependence audited entity will regularly exceed 10% of the annual fee income of the
firm but will not regularly exceed 15%, no external independent quality
control review is required. Instead this must be disclosed to the ethics
partner and those charged with governance. (Ethical Standard s.6.5)
Non-audit services The restrictions on the provision of non-audit services related to self-
review threats can be waived, but:
• there needs to be ‘informed management‘; and
• the audit firm needs to extend its cycle of cold reviews
In addition, the firm is exempt from taking the specified actions in
response to management and some advocacy threats associated with
non-audit services for small entities provided there is adequate disclosure
that the firm has applied the FRC Ethical Standard’s Provisions Available
for Audits of Small Entities. (Ethical Standard s.6.11 and 6.12)
Partners joining audit The provisions concerning partners joining audit clients are waived
clients provided there is no threat to the audit team’s integrity, objectivity and
independence. (Ethical Standard s.6.13 and 6.14)
Disclosure Disclosure should be made in the auditor’s report. (Ethical Standard

s.6.15)
HB2021

Summary
Ethical conflict – Reporting

resolution procedure Ethics misconduct
• Establish relevant facts To ICAEW

• Identify relevant parties
• Issues involved
• Apply fundamental principles
• Use internal procedures Accountants in
Auditor
• Alternative courses of action business
Revised Pressures to improve

Ethical IESBA code ICAEW Code
financial
Standard performance/position
of employer
Changes:
• Content
• Structure Fundamental Threats Safeguards
principles
Part A: Overarching principles • Integrity • Self-interest • Professional,

and supporting ethical provisions • Self-review legislation/regulation
• Objectivity
• Management (professional training,
Part B • Professional CPD, regulatory
Section 1: General requirements competence and due • Advocacy
monitoring, external
and guidance care • Familiarity review
Section 2: Financial, business, • Confidentiality • Intimidation • Work environment (firm
employment and personal • Professional behaviour and engagement team
relationships level)
Section 3: Long association with
engagements and with entities
relevant to engagements
Section 4: Fees, remuneration and
evaluation policies, gifts and
hospitality, litigation
Section 5: Non-audit/additional
services
Section 6: Provisions available
for audits of small entities
HB2021

1. Can you identify behaviour in a given scenario that may be considered unethical?
2. Do you know the various ethical codes and standards that you are expected to use and
can you find them in your open book permitted text?
3. Can you differentiate between the ethical issues faced by accountants in business and by
auditors working in practice?
4. Can you identify the various threats raised by certain situations and explain the most
suitable response?
5. Are you aware of current developments in response to money laundering?
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Easter Use this as good practice of how to interrogate the open book permitted
text for responses to a series of discrete ethical scenarios.
Marden plc Having looked at some individual issues, now attempt something more
exam-standard where you have to unpick the ethical issues from a larger
and more complex scenario.
Poe, Whitman and Here, you have been asked about practical and ethical issues related to your
Co late appointment as group auditor. This requires a more methodical
approach to consider the issues when reading the whole scenario.
UHN This is a self-contained requirement to consider a one-off assignment but in

the field of cyber-security – this presents a number of threats so your answer
should adopt as broad a scope as possible.
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
FRC (2019) Revised Ethical Standard 2019. [Online] Available at:

https://www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/601c8b09-2c0a-4a6c-8080-30f63e50b4a2/Revised-Ethical-
Standards-2019-Updated-With-Covers.pdf [Accessed 6 July 2020]
FRC (2019b) Glossary of terms (Auditing and Ethics). [Online] Available at:
https://www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/d4968a74-15d1-47ce-8fc4-220ae3536b06/Glossary-of-Terms-
(Auditing-and-Ethics)-(Updated-Jan-2020).pdf [Accessed 6 July 2020]
ICAEW (2014) Ethical problems - framework for resolution. [Online] Available at:
https://www.icaew.com/technical/ethics/ethics-helpsheets/ethical-problems-framework-for-
resolution [Accessed 6 July 2020]
ICAEW (2019) Key areas of change in ICAEW Code of Ethics 2020. [Online] Available at:
https://www.icaew.com/-/media/corporate/files/members/regulations-standards-and-
guidance/ethics/key-areas-of-change-new-icaew-code-of-ethics-2020.ashx?la=en [Accessed 6 July
2020]
ICAEW (2020) ICAEW Code of Ethics. [Online] Available at: https://www.icaew.com/-
/media/corporate/files/members/regulations-standards-and-guidance/ethics/icaew-code-of-ethics-2
020.ashx?la=en [Accessed 6 July 2020]
ICAEW (2020) The new FRC Ethical Standard. [Online] Available at:
https://www.icaew.com/insights/viewpoints-on-the-news/2020/mar-2020/the-new-frc-ethical-
standard [Accessed 6 July 2020]
IESBA (2018) International code of ethics for professional accountants. [Online] Available at:
https://www.ethicsboard.org/international-code-ethics-professional-accountants [Accessed 7 July
2020]
IESBA (2019) Exposure draft: proposed revisions to the Code to promote the role and mindset
expected of professional accountants. [Online] Available at:
https://www.ethicsboard.org/publications-resources/exposure-draft-proposed-revisions-code-
promote-role-and-mindset [Accessed 10 June 2021]
UK Government (2019) Policy paper: Economic crime plan 2019 to 2022. [Online] Available at:
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/economic-crime-plan-2019-to-2022 [Accessed 6 July
2020]
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Easter
You are a partner in a firm of chartered accountants. The following issues have emerged in relation to
three of your clients:
(1) Easter is a major client. It is listed on a major exchange. The audit team consists of eight
members, of whom Paul is the most junior. Paul has just invested in a personal pension plan that
invests in all the listed companies on the exchange.
(2) While listed, Easter has subsidiaries in five different European countries. Tax regimes in those
countries vary on the absolute rate of tax charged as well as expenses allowable against taxable
income. The Finance Director of Easter has indicated that the Easter group will be applying
management charges between different subsidiaries to take advantage of favourable tax
regimes with the five countries. The FD reminds you that another firm offering assurances
services, Bunny & Co, has already approved the management charges as part of a special review
carried out on the group and the FD therefore considers the charges to be legal and
appropriate to Easter.
(3) You are at the head of a team carrying out due diligence work at Electra, a limited company
which your client, Powerful, is considering taking over. Your second in command on the team,
Peter, who is a manager, has confided in you that in the course of his work he has met the
daughter of the Managing Director of Electra, and he is keen to invite her on a date.
(4) Your longest standing audit client is Teddies, which you have been involved in for 10 years, with
four years as engagement partner. You recently went on an extended cruise with the Managing
Director on his yacht. The company is not a public interest entity or listed entity.
(5) You are also aware that the executive directors of Teddies were recently voted a significant
increase in bonus by their audit committee. The financial statements of Teddies do show a small
improvement in net profit, but this does not appear to justify the extent of bonus paid. You are
also aware that the Finance Director of Teddies is a non-executive director of Grisly, while the
Senior Independent Director of Teddies is the Finance Director of Grisly.
Requirement
Comment on the ethical and other professional issues raised by the above matters.
Note: Your answer should outline the threat arising, the significance of the threat, any factors you
have taken into account and, if relevant, any safeguards you could apply to eliminate or mitigate
against the threat.
2 Saunders plc
Bourne & Berkeley is an assurance firm with a diverse range of audit clients. One client, Saunders plc,
is listed on the stock exchange. You are the engagement partner on the audit; you have been
engagement partner for four years and have an experienced team of eight staff to carry out the
audit. The audit is made slightly more complicated because Bourne & Berkeley rent office space from
Saunders plc. The total rental cost of that space is about 10% of the total income from Saunders plc.
Office space is made available to other companies, including Walker Ltd, another of your audit
clients. You are aware from the audit of Walker Ltd that the company is close to receivership and that
the rent arrears is unlikely to be paid by Walker to Saunders.
In an interesting development at the client, the Finance Director resigned just before the audit
commencing and the board asked Bourne & Berkeley for assistance in preparing the financial
statements. Draft accounts were available, although the final statutory accounts had not been
produced.
As part of your review of the draft accounts you notice that the revenue recognition policy includes
an estimate of future revenues from the sale of deferred assets. One of the activities of Saunders plc
is the purchase of oil on the futures market for delivery and resale between 6 and 12 months into the
HB2021

future. As the price of oil rises, the increase has been taken to the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income. When queried, the directors of Saunders state that while the
accounting policy is new for the company, it is comparable with other firms in the industry and they
are adamant that no amendment will be necessary to the financial statements. They are certain that
other assurance firms will accept the policy if asked.
Requirement
Discuss the ethical and professional issues involved with the planning of the audit of Saunders plc.
3 Marden plc
At 6pm on Sunday evening a text message arrives for you from your audit manager, John Hanks,
stating:
“Please check your email urgently”
On checking your email, you find the following message.
“I hope you had a good weekend. Instead of coming into the office tomorrow morning I would like
you to go to a client called Marden plc. I know you have not worked on this client before so I am
emailing you some background information (Exhibit 1). One of our audit juniors, Henry Ying, was at
Marden’s head office last week working on the interim audit and he has come up with a schedule of
issues that are worrying me (Exhibit 2). Henry does not have the experience to deal with these, so I
would like you, as a senior, to go out there and prepare a memorandum for me which sets out the
financial reporting implications of each of these issues. I would also like you to explain in the
memorandum the ethical issues that arise from these issues and the audit procedures required for
each of the matters on Henry’s schedule. I will visit Marden on Tuesday to speak to the directors.
John”
Requirement
Prepare the memorandum requested by your audit manager.
Exhibit 1: Background information

Marden plc operates a fleet of 10 executive jets available for private hire. The jets are based in
Europe, the US and the Far East, but they operate throughout the world. The company is resident in
the UK.
The jets can be hired for specific flights, for short periods or for longer periods. For insurance
purposes, all planes must use a pilot employed by Marden. All the jets are owned by Marden.
Marden has an Alternative Investment Market listing. Ordinary share capital consists of five million £1
shares. The ownership of share capital at 1 January 20X6 was:
Directors 25%
Financial institutions 66%
Jack Airlines plc 9%
The company uses an interest rate of 10% to discount the cash flows of all projects.
The accounting year end is 31 December.
Exhibit 2: Interim audit issues

Prepared by Audit Junior: Henry Ying
In respect of the interim audit of the financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X6 the
following issues have arisen.
(1) Marden appears to have inadvertently filed an incorrect tax return for last year showing a
material understatement of its corporation tax liability for that year and has therefore paid
significantly less corporation tax than it should have. Our firm is not engaged as tax advisers. The
directors are now refusing to inform HM Revenue & Customs of the underpayment, as they say
that ‘it is in the past now’. I am not sure of our firm’s obligations in this matter.
HB2021

(2) One of the directors, Dick Tracey, owns a separate travel consultancy business. He buys unused
flying time from Marden to sell to his own clients. In the year to 31 December 20X6 to date he
has paid Marden £30,000 for 100 hours of flying time made available.
(3) On 16 September 20X6 a major customer, Stateside Leisure Inc, gave notification to Marden that
the service it had been receiving was poor and it was therefore considering terminating its long-
term contract with the company. The contract amounted to 15% of Marden’s revenue and 25% of
its profit in 20X5. The directors did not make an immediate announcement of this and so the
share price did not initially change. Four directors sold a total of 200,000 shares in Marden plc
on 2 October 20X6. Stateside Leisure Inc terminated the contract on 1 November 20X6 and the
directors disclosed this to the London Stock Exchange the same day. The price per share then
fell immediately from £7.50 to £6.
(4) Our audit fee for the year to 31 December 20X5 is still outstanding and is now overdue by five
months.
(5) I have selected a sample jet to be physically inspected. I selected this jet because it does not
appear to have flown since December 20X5. The jet in question cost £6 million on 1 January
20W8 and has a useful life of 10 years with a residual value of £1 million. Each jet is expected to
generate £2 million income per year net of expenses.
The directors say that this jet is located in the US, but they have offered to fly a member of our
audit team out there in one of their executive jets. They insist that a jet needs to go there anyway
so there would be no cost to Marden by making transport available to us.
(6) On 28 August 20X6 Jack Airlines plc – a large, listed company which operates a discount airline –
acquired 1 million shares in Marden from financial institutions. On 20 October 20X6 Jack Airlines
plc announced to the London Stock Exchange that it intends to make a bid for the entire share
capital of Marden and at the same time requested that our firm, as Marden’s auditors, should
carry out the due diligence work in respect of the bid.
this chapter.
HB2021


1.1 Factors
The request was made by her superiors.
• Financially she may have felt pressure to keep her job.
• Potential prospect of being rewarded through promotion and pay rises.
• Inability to decide how to deal with the situation.
1.2 Other courses of action
She could have:
• refused to make the adjustments;
• brought the matter to the attention of other senior members of staff eg, internal audit;
• resigned;
• sought advice from her relevant professional body;
• sought legal advice; or
• reported the matter to the relevant authorities eg, SEC at an earlier stage.

Potential ethical risk areas

work
Undue dependence Auditor prepares the Actual litigation with a Any threat of litigation
on an audit client due accounts client by the client
to fee levels
Overdue fees Auditor participates in Threatened litigation Personal relationships

becoming similar to a management with a client with the client
loan decisions
An actual loan being Provision of any other Client refuses to pay Threat of any services
made to a client services to the client fees and they become being put out to
long overdue tender
Contingency fees
being offered
Accepting
commissions from
clients
Provision of lucrative
other services to
clients
Relationships with
persons in associated
practices
Relationships with the

client
HB2021

work
Long association with

clients
Beneficial interest in
shares or other
investments
Hospitality

3.1 Issues
(1) Teresa is at present a member of the engagement team and a member of her immediate
family now owns a direct financial interest in the audit client. This is unacceptable.
If someone closely associated with a covered person holds a financial interest in the audit client,
Stewart Brice needs to apply the following safeguards:
• Ensure that this person disposes of the shares immediately
• Remove Teresa from the engagement team (FRC Ethical Standard, para 2.9)
The financial interest has arisen from an inheritance by Teresa’s husband, who has indicated that
he would like to keep hold of the investment. The FRC ES paras. 2.11-12 requires that these
shares should be disposed of as soon as possible and while this is being arranged, Teresa
should be removed from the engagement team.
The firm should appraise the audit committee of Recreate of what has happened and the
actions it has taken. The partners should consider whether it is necessary to bring in an
independent partner to review audit work. However, given that Teresa’s involvement is subject
to the review of the existing engagement partner and she was not connected with the shares
while she was carrying out the work, a second partner review is likely to be unnecessary in this
case.
(2) The audit firm has an indirect financial interest in the parent company of a company it has
been invited to tender for by virtue of its pension scheme having invested in Tadpole Group.
The FRC ES would classify this indirect financial interest as a diversified collective investment
scheme.
This is no barrier to the audit firm tendering for the audit of Kermit Co.
Should the audit firm win the tender and become the auditors of Kermit Co it should consider
whether it is necessary to apply safeguards to mitigate against the risk to independence on the
audit as a result of the indirect financial interest.
The factors that the partners will need to consider are the materiality of the interest to either
party and the degree of control that the firm actually has over the financial interest. (FRC Ethical
Standard, para. 2.13, 2.19)
In this case, the audit firm has no control over the financial interest. An independent pension
scheme administrator is in control of the financial interest. In addition, the interest is unlikely to
be substantial and is therefore immaterial to both parties. It is likely that this risk is already
sufficiently minimal as to not require safeguards. However, if the audit firm felt that it was
necessary to apply safeguards, it could consider the following:
• Notifying the audit committee of the interest
• Requiring Friends Benevolent to dispose of the shares in Tadpole Group
3.2 In this case, Stewart Brice has a direct financial interest in the audit client, which is technically
prohibited by ethical guidance. However, it is a requirement of any firm auditing the company
that the share be owned by the auditors.
The interest is not material. The audit firm should safeguard against the risk by not voting on its
own re-election as auditor. The firm should also strongly recommend to the company that it
HB2021

removes this requirement from its constitution, as it is at odds with ethical requirements for
auditors.

The issues to consider would include the following:
• Whether the management have made the decision to make the change in accounting treatment
of a proportion of the subscription income on a valid and ethical basis.
• Management are under pressure not to breach the loan covenants. With the change in timing of
the recognition the interest cover is only just achieved in both 20X7 and 20X8. This suggests that
without this change the covenant would be breached indicating that profit levels are sensitive.
• The auditor’s responsibility to all stakeholders, including shareholders.
• In this case the auditor would have a legal and moral responsibility to the venture capitalists who
have invested in Bellevue Ltd, to ensure that profits are fairly stated.
• The implications of the disagreement with the treatment by the audit manager in 20X7 which was
overruled by the partner. This is now of particular concern, as the audit partner has left the firm
abruptly. This potentially raises questions about the integrity of the partner.
• Whether there is sufficient evidence to support the conclusion that some of the subscription fees
are consultancy in nature and should therefore be recognised as the work is completed ie, when
the performance obligation is satisfied (IFRS 15) rather than being recognised over the duration
of the contract.
• Whether fees treated as subscription fees in previous years should have been recognised as
consultancy fees resulting in the need for a prior-period adjustment.
• The basis on which the figure of 40% was established and whether there is evidence to support
this estimation, particularly as this is exactly the same percentage as applied in 20X7.
• The overall increase in audit risk due to the need to comply with the loan agreement.
HB2021

1 Easter
Issues
(1) In relation to Easter, there is a threat of self-interest arising, as a member of the audit team has
an indirect financial interest in the client.
The relevant factors are as follows:
• The interest is unlikely to be material to the client or Paul, as the investment is recent and Paul’s
interest is in a pool of general investments made in the exchange on his behalf.
• Paul is the audit junior and does not have a significant role on the audit in terms of drawing audit
conclusions or audit risk areas.
The risk that arises to the independence of the audit here is therefore not significant. It would be
inappropriate to require Paul to divest his interest in the audit client. If I wanted to eliminate all
elements of risk in this situation, I could simply change the junior assigned to my team, but such a
step is not vital in this situation.
(2) Regarding the management charges, there is a threat that the management charges are
accepted as correct, simply because another assurance firm has recommended those charges to
Easter.
To query the charges could imply a lack of trust in Bunny, with the possible effect of bringing the
profession into disrepute. There is a risk that you as the assurance professional may not have the
necessary knowledge to determine whether or not Easter has been acting correctly. There is also an
intimidation threat in that the client is implying the charges are valid as another assurance firm has
recommended the changes.
The relevant factors to take into account include the following:
• The legality or otherwise of the transactions. Information concerning the management charges
must be obtained and compared to the law, not only of the individual countries but also of the EU
as a whole. It remains a possibility that Easter has acted in accordance with laws of individual
jurisdictions, but not the EU overall.
• Your level of knowledge. Where necessary, specialist advice must be obtained from the taxation
department to determine the legality or otherwise of the transactions.
• The materiality of the management charges involved and the reduction in the taxation expense.
Given that Easter is attempting to minimise its taxation charge, then the amounts are likely to be
material and therefore as the audit firm, the transactions will have to be audited.
• Your knowledge of Bunny & Co. The assurance firm may well be skilled in advising on this type of
issue, in which case there is likely to be less of an issue with the legality of the charges. However, if
the reputation of Bunny is suspect, then additional work on the management charges may be
required.
The intimidation threat is significant; it is unlikely that Easter would expect your firm to query the
charges as another professional firm has confirmed them. A discussion with the FD may be required
to confirm the purposes of the audit and the extent of evidence required to reach an audit opinion.
Material transactions affecting the financial statements and taxation charges must be subject to
standard audit procedures.
Your potential lack of knowledge is relatively easy to overcome. Specialist advice can be obtained
from the taxation department, with a tax manager/partner being present in any discussion with the
client to determine legality of the management charges.
(3) In relation to Powerful, two issues arise.
The first is that the firm appears to be providing multiple services for Powerful, which could raise a
self-interest threat. The second is that the manager assigned to the due diligence assignment wants
to engage in a personal relationship with a person connected to the subject of the assignment, which
could create a familiarity or intimidation threat.
HB2021

With regard to the issue of multiple services, insufficient information is given to draw a conclusion as
to the significance of the threat. Relevant factors would be such matters as the nature of the services,
the fee income and the team members assigned to each. Safeguards could include using different
staff for the two assignments and review by a partner not connected to the Powerful engagement.
The risk is likely to be significant only if one of the services provided is audit, which is not indicated in
the question.
In relation to the second issue, the relevant factors are these:
• The assurance team member has a significant role on the team as second in command.
• The other party represents a close family member at the company being reviewed.
• Timing.
In this situation, the firm is carrying out a one-off review of the company, and timing is a key issue.
Presently Peter does not have a personal relationship which would significantly threaten the
independence of the assignment. In this situation, the safeguard is to request that Peter does not
take any action in that direction until the assignment is completed. If he refuses, then I may have to
consider rotating my staff on this assignment, and removing him from the team.
(4) In relation to Teddies, there is a risk that my long association and personal relationship with the
client will result in a familiarity threat.
This is compounded by my acceptance of significant hospitality on a personal level.
The relevant factors are as follows:
• I have been involved with the client for 10 years and have a personal relationship with client staff.
• The company is not a listed or public interest company.
• It is an audit assignment.
The risk arising here is significant but, as the client is not listed, it is not insurmountable. However, it
would be a good idea to implement some safeguards to mitigate against the risk. I could invite a
second partner to provide a hot review of the audit of Teddies, or even consider requesting that I am
rotated off the audit of Teddies for a period, so that the engagement partner is another partner in my
firm. In addition, I must cease accepting hospitality from the directors of Teddies unless it is clearly
trivial and inconsequential.
If the independence issue cannot be resolved then the audit firm may also consider resigning from
the audit of Teddies.
(5) It appears that there are cross-directorships between Teddies and Grisly.
In other words, at least one executive in Teddies assists in setting the bonuses of directors in Grisly,
and at least one executive in Grisly is involved in setting the bonuses of directors in Teddies. This
issue provides an independence threat for those directors, especially so if the FDs are members of a
professional body such as ICAEW.
There is a further point, that you as engagement partner are aware of the issue, but your
independence may be compromised by the cruise with the managing director. There is also the issue
of the lack of clear reporting obligations in this situation. Most codes of corporate governance
require the directors of the company to make statements of compliance with that code, and in many
situations cross-directorships are not explicitly banned.
Factors to consider include:
• Whether the directors are members of a professional body. If so, the engagement partner could
tactfully ask whether there are independence conflicts and how these will be resolved.
• The level of bonuses awarded in Grisly. If these appear to be nominal then the issue of lack of
independence regarding the bonuses in Teddies is reduced.
• Whether Teddies has audit and remuneration committees and whether these are effective in
determining director remuneration and communicating concerns of the auditor to the board. As
auditor, you have access to the audit committee but not the remuneration committee, so there is
no precise way of raising concerns with the remuneration committee.
• To a certain extent, the association threat of being linked to a client where the code of corporate
governance may not be being followed.
As the engagement partner, it would be appropriate to mention the perceived lack of independence
with the Finance Director. This may be directly rather than via the audit committee due to the lack of
HB2021

communication you have with the remuneration committee. The result of any communications must
be documented in the audit file, even where communication is simply verbal.
The association risk is probably minimal, although will increase where your firm also provides
assurance services to Grisly. Where there are significant and continued breaches of the code of
governance, then your firm may consider not acting for Teddies in the future. Provision of additional
disclosure is compromised by lack of reporting obligations and your independence issue with the
managing director of Teddies.
2 Saunders plc
Issues
(1) The rental of the premises from an audit client represents a business relationship which poses a
potential threat to objectivity.
• Bourne & Berkeley would be able to continue to act if the arrangement is:
– in the ordinary course of business;
– on an arm’s length basis; and
– not material to either party.
• In this case the rental income is likely to be material to the audit client, as it represents 10% of
total income.
• The audit firm would need to take immediate steps to terminate either the client or the business
relationship.
(2) The FRC Revised Ethical Standard prohibits accounts preparation work for listed company audit
clients.
• In this case it is likely that the preparation of the financial information will involve the auditor in
making subjective judgements, as the internal reporting format will need to be converted into the
statutory format. Decisions will need to be made about, for example, the level and nature of
disclosures. This would constitute an accountancy service and would not be allowed.
(3) There is a conflict of interest here.
While it may be in the interest of Saunders plc for the auditor to disclose the information regarding
the recoverability of the debt, this information is confidential, as it was obtained in the course of audit
work performed for Walker Ltd. Disclosure of this information to Saunders plc would breach the duty
of confidentiality.
• Section 310 of the ICAEW Code requires that the auditor should disclose a conflict of interest to
the parties involved. In this case, however, the situation is complicated by the fact that the conflict
of interest has had a practical consequence rather than simply being a potential problem. In
addition, it may be difficult to make the communication without revealing confidential
information.
• The firm should consider whether there were sufficient procedures in place to prevent the conflict
of interest occurring in the first place.
• The ICAEW Code states that the auditor should take steps to identify circumstances that could
pose a conflict of interest and to put in place any necessary safeguards eg, use of separate audit
teams.
• If procedures were inadequate this may have implications for other clients.
• If the balance is not material further action is unlikely to be necessary. If the balance is material the
situation will need to be addressed.
• Saunders plc may be aware of the potential irrecoverability of the debt and an allowance for an
irrecoverable receivable may have been made in the financial statements.
• If an adjustment has been made and the auditor is in agreement with it no further action would be
required.
• Independent evidence may be available which would indicate that the debt was irrecoverable.
For example, there may have been correspondence between Saunders plc and Walker Ltd
concerning the payment of the balance. There may also be evidence in the public domain, for
example newspaper reports and the results of credit checks. However, the auditor would need to
HB2021

consider how this evidence was used, particularly if it was sought as a result of having the
confidential information.
• The audit manager could consider requesting Walker Ltd to communicate with Saunders plc.
• This may not be acceptable to Walker Ltd, who may feel that any communication would not be in
their interest. It may also make any future relationship between the auditor and Walker Ltd
difficult.
• If the issue cannot be resolved and the balance is material the auditor will not be able to form an
audit opinion. Bourne & Berkeley will need to consider resigning as the auditor of Saunders plc.
(4) Revenue recognition policy
It appears that Saunders plc is attempting to implement a change in accounting policy which
increases revenue, while at the same time intimidating the auditors to accept this policy. There is an
implied threat that Bourne & Berkeley will be removed from office if the accounting policy is not
accepted.
Factors to consider include the following:
• The materiality of the amounts involved. Given that the accounting policy is an attempt to increase
revenue, the amount is likely to be material – again it would be unlikely that the directors would
want to spend the time and effort if this was not the case.
• The accounting policies adopted by similar firms in the industry. The directors of Saunders have
noted that the income recognition policy is the same as other firms in the industry. Accounts of
similar firms need to be obtained and the accounting policies checked. If the policies are the
same as Saunders, and the technical department of Bourne & Berkeley confirm that the policy
follows GAAP, then no modification of the auditor’s report will be required, although audit
evidence will be obtained to confirm the correct application of the policy. If the revenue
recognition policy is inappropriate, then additional discussion will be required with the directors
to determine whether they will continue with the policy, and risk a modified report, or amend the
policy.
• Whether the directors would actually seek to remove Bourne & Berkeley if the revenue
recognition policy does not follow GAAP and the auditor’s report will be modified. The audit firm
needs to document the situation and be prepared to provide a statement on why it is being
removed in accordance with Companies Act requirements.
Bourne & Berkeley will find it difficult to remove the intimidation threat. Advice can be obtained from
the ethics partner, although it is unlikely that the firm’s position can be defended by agreeing to an
accounting policy if this does not follow GAAP. Bourne & Berkeley will need to maintain its integrity
by insisting that appropriate accounting policies are followed, even where this risks losing an audit
client.
3 Marden plc
MEMO
To Audit manager
From Audit senior
Date XX-XX-XX
Re Accounting issues of Marden plc
(1) Understatement of tax liability
Audit and ethics
The understatement of the tax liability is an illegal act by the client. Tuesday’s meeting offers the
opportunity to attempt to persuade the client even at this late stage.
Consider whether a partner needs to be at the meeting given the ethical importance of the issue.
The key issue is the conflict between our duty to report and our duty of confidentiality.
According to ICAEW ethical requirements in terms of reporting, this may be:
• where there is a duty to disclose
• where there is a right to disclose
HB2021

Suggested actions if the client continues to refuse to disclose to HMRC:
• Our views should be put in writing to the client
• Report to the audit committee if there is one
• Refer the matter to senior personnel in our firm – eg, the ethics partner
• The firm must consider whether to cease to act for the client
• Consider whether this is a ‘whistleblowing’ incident in the public interest
Financial reporting
If there is a material unrecognised liability in the financial statements then we need to consider
whether the financial statements give a true and fair view. Any material understatement of the tax
provision would need to be reflected in the auditor’s report. The level of detail as to the cause of the
misstatement raises confidentiality considerations.
(2) Related party transaction
Audit and ethics
The audit issue in this case is that there is a potential conflict of interest between a director and the
body of shareholders.
Directors also have a fiduciary duty to act in the interests of all shareholders. Directors must not place
themselves in a position where there is a conflict of interest between their personal interests and
their duty to the company (Regal (Hastings) Ltd v Gulliver). In certain circumstances the company may
void such contracts.
More specifically, the audit risk in this case is that the price of £30,000 for the use of the jet might not
be an arm’s length price in terms of an hourly rate for this type of hire. At £300 per hour including the
pilot’s time there is a risk that the director, Dick Tracey, may be exploiting his position.
The Companies Act imposes restrictions on the dealings of directors with companies in order to
prevent directors taking advantage of their position. This applies even where the directors are
shareholders, but particularly where the interests of non-controlling, or outside, shareholders may be
damaged.
If there has not been knowledge and approval of the transactions by the other directors then there
may be an issue of false accounting by Dick Tracey.
Audit procedures:
• Review provisions in Articles of Association regarding directors’ contracts with the company
• Examine the terms of the contract(s) ascertaining the nature of the hire agreements
• Ascertain whether any similar arm’s length hires took place and at what prices (see evidence of
such agreements where appropriate)
• Ascertain whether the other directors were aware of the nature and extent of the hire contracts
(eg, review correspondence)
• Review board minutes to see if the hire contracts have been considered and formally approved by
the board
Financial reporting
Transactions involving directors are required to be disclosed in the financial statements by both the
Companies Act 2006 and IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures.
A director is part of key management personnel and thus is a related party of the company.
According to IAS 24 the transaction should be disclosed irrespective of its materiality. However, the
name of the director need not be disclosed.
As a result, the hire fees are likely to be deemed to be a related party transaction and thus the
following disclosures should be made:
• Amounts involved
• Amounts due to or from the related party
• Irrecoverable debt write-offs to or from the related party
HB2021

(3) Directors’ share trading
Audit and ethics
There are two issues in this case:
• The failure to make a timely disclosure for personal gain by the directors
• The consequences of the underlying event of the loss of a major contract
The failure to announce the loss of the contract might leave the directors in breach of their fiduciary
duty to shareholders, as they may have manipulated the market for their own gain.
Consider taking legal advice as to whether an illegal act has been committed, as the initial
communication from Stateside in September was only about poor service. The formal notification of
the contract being terminated by Stateside was immediately communicated to the London Stock
Exchange by the directors. If this is considered illegal, it could represent money laundering under the
Proceeds of Crime Act and as such, care must be taken to avoid tipping off.
Consider also taking advice as to whether stock market rules have been breached by the directors
individually and by the company. This might affect quality of markets and may be contrary to insider
trading laws.
Regarding the underlying event of the loss of a major customer, consideration needs to be given as
to whether going concern is affected by the loss of such a large contract (eg, if the service is poor,
will other major contracts be lost?).
Financial reporting
Consider whether any provision is necessary once advice is received on whether the company has
committed an illegal act (as opposed to the directors themselves) or has been in breach of
regulations. Provisions might include fines or other penalties imposed by the courts or regulators.
If there has been a significant decline in activity, then impairment needs to be considered on the jets
if their value in use has decreased.
Consider recoverability of amounts outstanding from Stateside Leisure Inc.
(4) Audit fee outstanding
Audit and ethics
It may be that the matter of the overdue fees can be resolved amicably at Tuesday’s meeting.
If, however, the fee remains outstanding, it may be a threat to our independence. This may be
because it biases our opinion against the client. Alternatively, it may be that we do not wish to put the
client’s going concern at risk, as this may reduce the likelihood of us receiving payment.
In effect, the overdue fee may be similar to a loan to the client which is not permitted.
Actions may include the following:
• A review by an independent partner (perhaps the ethics partner) who is not involved in the audit
to agree that the objectivity of the engagement staff is not affected. This should really have been
completed before commencement of the audit so it is now a matter of urgency.
• If legal action is necessary to recover the fees it would not be possible for us to continue acting
for the client, as the Revised Ethical Standard 2019 prohibits, in most circumstances, auditors
acting for clients where there is actual or potential litigation between the two parties.
Financial reporting
A provision should be made for the audit fee outstanding.
(5) Physical inspection of jets
Audit and ethics
There are two issues here.
• The fact that one jet appears not to have been used
• The offer of ‘free’ transport on an executive jet may be deemed as a gift
HB2021

The fact that a jet has not been used for some time may have a number of possible causes.
• Technical problems – the jet may not be serviceable. We need to establish whether this is the case
(eg, hire an independent local aircraft engineer) then consider impairment testing.
• Lack of markets – there may be insufficient demand to warrant using the plane. This seems less
likely, as the plane has not been used at all. Examine usage of other Marden planes in the US.
• Unrecorded usage – the jet may be being used but the usage is unrecorded and income
understated. Alternatively, it might mean that improper use is being made of the company’s
assets (eg, by management).
Regarding the ‘free’ flight, gifts beyond what is considered trivial and inconsequential are not
permitted. However, if the flight were merely for the purpose of the audit check and there were no
added benefits (additional destinations, trips etc) then it may be permissible if agreed by the ethics
partner.
Alternatively, a local firm of auditors could be used. The check might not just be the physical
verification of the asset but also usage records (eg, flying logs, pilots’ time).
Financial reporting
The jet has not been used for some time and therefore impairment testing needs to be considered.
Technical problems – The jet may not be fully serviceable, in which case it needs to be reviewed for
impairment according to IAS 36 as both fair value and value in use may be affected.
The carrying amount at 31 December 20X6 of the jet is £1.5 million (ie, £6m – [£5m × 9/10])
The value in use, if fully operational (assuming year-end operating cash flows and including the
residual amount) is:
(£2m + £1m)/1.1 = £2.73m
Thus, there is no impairment if the plane is fully operational (the fair value less costs of disposal
calculation is not necessary as the value in use exceeds the carrying amount).
However, if the plane is not operational then both next year’s net operating inflow and the residual
value are likely to be affected. In this case an impairment charge of £1.5 million (less the present
value of any residual value obtainable for a non-operational jet) may be required.
Lack of markets – There may be insufficient demand to warrant using the plane. This will affect value
in use but perhaps not the residual value. Again, impairment testing may be needed as according to
IAS 36 value in use may be affected.
If the jet is not operational next year, but can be sold for a residual value of £1 million next year
(although selling immediately would be a better option in this case) the impairment charge is:
£1.5m – £1m/1.1 = £0.59m
Unrecorded usage – This may mean that any depreciation based on the amount of flying time may be
understated.
Any impairment on this aircraft might have further implications for impairment of other aircraft if the
cause is market based rather than technically based.
(6) Due diligence assignment
Audit and ethics
Acceptance of the due diligence assignment is not permitted, as there would be a conflict of interest
between our role as auditor of Marden and a due diligence role for the bidder for Marden, Jack
Airlines plc.
The acquisition of one million shares would take Jack Airlines to a 29% holding (Note: 30% is the
maximum permitted by the stock exchange before an offer needs to be made to all shareholders).
The offer is therefore for the remaining shares. This is a key audit risk, as directors still hold a
significant amount of the shares and this may influence their financial reporting, as the share price
will be affected by the bid.
It might be noted that the announcement was made during the period that the share price was
artificially inflated due to the Stateside Leisure Inc announcement, and this may ultimately affect the
bid.
HB2021

Financial reporting
There is no direct effect on the financial statements; however, consider:
• if the bid process is going into next year and the bid is to be defended, then a provision may
need to be made for defence costs; and
• if the bid process is going into next year, then disclosure of the bid as a non-adjusting event after
the reporting date may be necessary.
HB2021

Chapter 4
Corporate governance
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Relevance of corporate governance
2 Corporate governance concepts
3 The UK Corporate Governance Code
4 Role of the board
5 Associated guidance
6 Corporate governance: international impact
7 Corporate governance and internal control
8 Evaluation of corporate governance mechanisms
9 Communication between auditors and those charged with
governance
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Explain and appraise the nature and consequences of corporate governance and accountability
mechanisms in controlling the operating and financial activities of entities of differing sizes,
structures and industries
• Explain the rights and responsibilities of the board, board committees (eg, audit and risk
committees), those charged with governance and individual executive and non-executive
directors, with respect to the preparation and audit of financial statements
• Explain and appraise the rights and responsibilities of stakeholder groups (eg, executive
management, bondholders, government, securities exchanges, employees, public interest
groups, financial and other regulators, institutional and individual shareholders) with respect to
the preparation and audit of financial statements
• Evaluate and appraise appropriate corporate governance mechanisms
• Explain and evaluate the nature and consequence of relevant corporate governance codes and
set out the required compliance disclosures
• Explain the principles, practices and disclosures of corporate governance
• Explain the respective responsibilities of those charged with governance and auditors for
corporate risk management and risk reporting
• Explain the respective responsibilities of those charged with governance and auditors in respect
of internal control systems
• Explain and evaluate the role and requirement for effective two-way communication between
those charged with governance and auditors
• Describe and explain the roles and purposes of meetings of boards and of shareholders
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 13(a)–(j)
4

of this chapter.

1 Relevance of Approach Questions in the N/A

corporate Remind yourself of exam will require
governance the various you to evaluate the
To recap the topic, milestones in governance
we have a section corporate arrangements in
designed to remind governance history. place in a given
you of what scenario.
Stop and think
corporate
governance is and Can you think of any
why it is necessary. other examples of
poor governance
like we saw at VW?
2 Corporate Approach Instead of focusing N/A

governance Make sure you can on processes, you
concepts explain each of may wish to explain
Do you know the these terms. poor governance in
basic underpinning terms of the
concepts of sound underlying
HB2021

corporate Stop and think concepts that are in

governance? Which of these place which may not
concepts do you be in the spirit of
think is the most good governance.
important?
3 The UK Corporate Approach When questions are IQ1: UK Corporate

Governance Code Make sure you written for the exam, Governance Code
You need to be able understand each of it is likely that they As well as knowing
to discuss the the five main will use the UK about the UK Code,
various principles categories of the UK Code as a starting you may also need
and provisions Code. point, so make sure to explain how it is
currently in use in you are familiar with used (and even how
Stop and think the UK Code.
the UK Code. it could be used).
If required, could
you explain which
parts of the UK
Code require formal
disclosure by a
company?
4 Role of the board Approach You may need to N/A

Can you remember Use this section to advise a non-
what board recap the various executive director
members are responsibilities of so it is helpful to
responsible for? board members. consider their role
and background to
Stop and think make sure that your
Can you discuss the tone is appropriate.
benefits and
drawbacks
associated with non-
executive directors?
5 Associated Approach Consider whether N/A

guidance Read through each any of these could
Additional one to make sure be helpful in
publications exist to you are familiar with responding to
support good the content. requests in exam
governance in other questions where the
Stop and think UK Code does not
areas.
Can you explain apply (for example,
why each of these the role of investors
publications might from the
be necessary? Stewardship Code).
6 Corporate Approach Be prepared for N/A

governance: Review the exam questions to
international impact Sarbanes-Oxley and feature governance
What does the rest G20/OECD outside the UK.
of the world do guidance.
when it comes to Stop and think
promoting sound
corporate Compare and
governance? contrast these
approaches with the
UK Code - why are
there differences?
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 4: Corporate governance 167

7 Corporate Approach You will have N/A

governance and Use the guidance to studied risk
internal control see how this can be management and
One of the key applied in a internal control in
elements of sound practical context. previous subjects so
governance is the remember that they
Stop and think can also be
management of risk
and the use of Can you examined in
sound systems of differentiate governance context.
internal control. between the
approaches used by
WH Smith and Coca
Cola?
8 Evaluation of Approach Going concern is an N/A

corporate Although you can area that could
governance see the UK Code easily be combined
mechanisms principles and with a question on
This is especially provisions, it is governance, so
relevant to auditors important that you don’t forget to
as it includes the can discuss them in consider this angle
various governance the context of the when attempting
disclosures that audit. suitable questions.
companies are Stop and think
required to make in
their annual reports. Can you list the
various disclosures
that the auditor is
required to review?
9 Communication Approach Be prepared to IQ2: Reporting

between auditors Work through this explain how this responsibilities
and those charged section with the form of An efficient test of
with governance open book communication your understanding
This section deals permitted text in operates if required of the various forms
with the internal front of you. in the exam. of communication
communication Stop and think that the auditor may
between auditors need to make.
and directors. Can you map these
points to where they
are covered by ISAs
(UK) 260 and 265?
HB2021

1 Relevance of corporate governance
Section overview
• Concerns about the adequacy of financial reporting, a number of high profile corporate scandals
in the 1990s and concerns about excessive directors’ remuneration highlighted the need for
effective corporate governance.
• Corporate governance can be defined as the system by which organisations are directed and
controlled.
• The UK Corporate Governance Code was revised in July 2018.
1.1 Introduction
Corporate governance potentially covers a wide range of issues and disciplines from company
secretarial and legal through business strategy, executive and non-executive management and
investor relations to accounting and information systems.
Corporate governance issues came to prominence in the UK in the late 1980s. The main drivers
associated with the increasing demand for developments in this area included the following:
(a) Financial reporting
Issues concerning financial reporting were raised by many investors and were the focus of much
debate and litigation. Shareholder confidence in what was being reported in many instances was
eroded. While corporate governance development is not just about better financial reporting
requirements, the regulation of creative accounting practices, such as off balance sheet
financing, has led to greater transparency and a reduction in risks faced by investors.
(b) Corporate scandals
The early 1990s saw an increasing number of high profile corporate scandals and collapses,
including Polly Peck International, BCCI and Maxwell Communications Corporation. This
prompted the development of governance codes in the early 1990s. However, the scandals
since then outside the UK, including Enron, have raised questions about further measures that
may be necessary and the financial crisis in 2008–2009 triggered widespread reappraisal of
governance systems. More recently, investigations into BHS and Sports Direct have resulted in
further review of corporate governance arrangements in the UK which ultimately led to the most
recent update of the UK Corporate Governance Code in July 2018.
(c) Excessive directors‘ remuneration
Directors being paid excessive salaries and bonuses has been seen as one of the major
corporate issues for a number of years. While CEOs have argued that their packages reflect the
global market, shareholders and employees are concerned that these are often out of step with
the remuneration of other employees and do not reflect the performance of the company.
For example in 2015, the shareholders of retailer Sports Direct raised objections about the
company’s executive remuneration scheme lowering the threshold at which performance-related
bonuses would be payable while still pursuing working practices that treated workers poorly.
In the UK s.439A of CA2006 requires a quoted company’s director’s remuneration policy to be
approved by a binding shareholders’ vote at least every three years. The actual amounts of
remuneration are subject to an annual advisory vote on the remuneration report.
1.2 What is corporate governance?

There are a number of different definitions of corporate governance.
HB2021

The following definition is taken from the Cadbury Report and is still relevant in the context of the UK
Corporate Governance Code. (We will look in more detail at corporate governance reports in
sections 3 and 5.)
Definition
Corporate governance: Corporate governance involves a set of relationships between a company’s
management, its board, its shareholders and other stakeholders. Corporate governance also
provides the structure through which the objectives of the company are set, and the means of
attaining those objectives and monitoring performance are determined... providing shareholders,
board members and executives as well as financial intermediaries and service providers with the
right incentives to perform their roles within a framework of checks and balances (OECD, 2015).
An alternative definition is: The set of processes, customs, policies, laws and institutions affecting the
way in which an entity is directed, administered or controlled. Corporate governance serves the
needs of shareholders, and other stakeholders, by directing and controlling management activities
towards good business practices, objectivity and integrity in order to satisfy the objectives of the
entity.
In essence, corporate governance:

• involves the management and reduction of risk;
• specifies the distribution rights and responsibilities among different participants in the
corporation, such as the board, managers, shareholders and other stakeholders;
• spells out the rules and procedures for making decisions on corporate affairs;
• provides the structure through which objectives are set; and
• provides the means of attaining the objectives and monitoring performance.
It can be argued that good corporate governance:
• provides a framework for an organisation to pursue its strategy in an ethical and effective way and
offers safeguards against the misuse of resources, human, financial, physical or intellectual;
• can attract new investment into companies, particularly in developing nations; and
• underpins capital market confidence in companies.
1.3 Features of poor corporate governance

The scandals over the last 30 years have highlighted the need for guidance to tackle the various risks
and problems that can arise in organisations’ systems of governance.
1.3.1 Domination by a single individual

A feature of many corporate governance scandals has been boards dominated by a single senior
executive, with other board members merely acting as a rubber stamp. Sometimes the single
individual may bypass the board to act in their own interests. Even if an organisation is not
dominated by a single individual, there may be other weaknesses. The organisation may be run by a
small group centred round the chief executive and chief financial officer, and appointments may be
made by personal recommendation rather than a formal, objective process.
1.3.2 Lack of involvement of board

Boards that meet irregularly or fail to consider systematically the organisation’s activities and risks are
clearly weak. Sometimes the failure to carry out proper oversight is due to a lack of information
being provided.
1.3.3 Lack of adequate control function

An obvious deficiency is a lack of internal audit.
Another important control deficiency is lack of adequate technical knowledge in key roles, for
example in the audit committee or in senior compliance positions. A rapid turnover of staff involved
in accounting or control may suggest inadequate resourcing, and will make control more difficult
because of lack of continuity.
HB2021

1.3.4 Lack of supervision
Employees who are not properly supervised can create large losses for the organisation through
their own incompetence, negligence or fraudulent activity. The behaviour of Nick Leeson, the
employee whose trading losses caused the collapse of Barings Bank was not challenged because he
appeared to be successful. Leeson was able to run up losses because he was in charge of dealing
and settlement, a systems deficiency or lack of segregation of key roles that has featured in other
financial frauds.
1.3.5 Lack of independent scrutiny

External auditors may not carry out the necessary questioning of senior management because of
fears of losing the audit, and internal audit do not ask awkward questions because the chief financial
officer determines their employment prospects. Often corporate collapses are followed by criticisms
of external auditors, such as the Barlow Clowes affair where poorly planned and focused audit work
failed to identify illegal use of client monies.
1.3.6 Lack of contact with shareholders

Often board members may have grown up with the company but lose touch with the interests and
views of shareholders. One possible symptom of this is the payment of remuneration packages that
do not appear to be warranted by results.
1.3.7 Emphasis on short-term profitability

Emphasis on success or getting results can lead to the concealment of problems or errors, or
manipulation of accounts to achieve desired results.
1.3.8 Misleading accounts and information

Often misleading figures are symptomatic of other problems (or are designed to conceal other
problems) but clearly poor quality accounting information is a major problem if markets are trying to
make a fair assessment of the company’s value. Giving out misleading information was a major issue
in the UK’s Equitable Life scandal, where the company gave contradictory information to savers,
independent advisers, media and regulators.
1.4 Risks of poor corporate governance

Clearly the ultimate risk is of the organisation making such large losses that bankruptcy becomes
inevitable. The organisation may also be closed down as a result of serious regulatory breaches, for
example misapplying investors’ monies.
Context example: VW
During 2015, it became apparent that car manufacturer Volkswagen (VW) had created software in its
vehicles that was deliberately intended to allow its diesel vehicles to incorrectly pass engine emission
tests which are used throughout the motor industry. Many observers have pointed out that such a
practice could not have occurred without senior management approval: if this was the case, it
suggests serious ethical flaws in the company’s governance; if not, it still points to a company that is
not in control of its staff.
Often you will know that there is a problem but you may not be able to explain exactly what the
problem is. Keep in mind the basic idea that there is something not right and then use it as a way of
combing all the relevant facts until you can explain what the problem really is.
HB2021

2 Corporate governance concepts
Section overview
• Corporate governance concepts include the following:

– Fairness
– Openness/transparency
– Independence
– Probity/honesty
– Responsibility
– Accountability
– Reputation
– Judgement
– Scepticism
– Innovation
One view of governance is that it is based on a series of underlying concepts. These are important,
as good corporate governance depends on a willingness to apply the spirit of the guidance as well
as the letter of the law.
2.1 Fairness
The directors’ deliberations and also the systems and values that underlie the company must be
balanced by taking into account everyone who has a legitimate interest in the company, and
respecting their rights and views. In many jurisdictions, corporate governance guidelines reinforce
legal protection for certain groups, for example minority shareholders.
2.2 Openness/transparency
In the context of corporate governance, transparency means corporate disclosure to stakeholders.
Disclosure in this context obviously includes information in the financial statements, not just the
numbers and notes to the accounts but also narrative statements such as the directors’ report and
the operating and financial review. It also includes all voluntary disclosure; that is, disclosure above
the minimum required by law or regulation. Voluntary corporate communications include the
following:
• Management forecasts
• Analysts’ presentations
• Press releases
• Information placed on websites
• Other reports such as standalone environmental or social reports
The main reason why transparency is so important relates to the agency problem; that is, the
potential conflict between owners and managers. Without effective disclosure the position could be
unfairly weighted towards managers, since they normally have far more knowledge of the company’s
activities and financial situation than owners/investors. Reducing this information asymmetry
requires not only effective disclosure rules but also strong internal controls that ensure that the
information disclosed is reliable.
2.3 Independence
Independence is an important concept in relation to directors (as well as auditors). Corporate
governance reports have increasingly stressed the importance of independent non-executive
directors; directors who are not primarily employed by the company and who have very strictly
controlled other links with it. They should be free from conflicts of interest and in a better position to
promote the interests of shareholders and other stakeholders. Freed from pressures that could
influence their activities, independent non-executive directors should be able to carry out effective
HB2021

monitoring of the company in conjunction with independent external auditors on behalf of
shareholders and other stakeholders.
2.4 Probity/honesty
Hopefully this should be the most self-evident of the principles, relating not only to telling the truth
but also to not misleading shareholders and other stakeholders by presenting information in a
biased way.
2.5 Responsibility
For management to be held properly responsible, there must be a system in place that allows for
corrective action and penalising mismanagement. Responsible management should do, when
necessary, whatever it takes to set the company on the right path.
The board of directors must act responsively to, and with responsibility towards, all stakeholders of
the company. However, the responsibility of directors to other stakeholders, both in terms of to
whom they are responsible and the extent of their responsibility, remains a key point of contention in
corporate governance debates.
2.6 Accountability
Corporate accountability refers to whether an organisation (and its directors) are answerable in some
way for the consequences of their actions.
The board of directors is accountable to shareholders (see section 3). However, making the
accountability work is the responsibility of both parties. Directors, as we have seen, do so through
the quality of information that they provide, whereas shareholders do so through their willingness to
exercise their responsibility as owners, which means using the available mechanisms to query and
assess the actions of the board.
As with responsibility, one of the biggest debates in corporate governance is the extent of
management’s accountability towards other stakeholders, such as the community within which the
organisation operates.
2.7 Reputation
In the same way, directors’ concern for an organisation’s reputation will be demonstrated by the
extent to which they fulfil the other principles of corporate governance. There are purely commercial
reasons for promoting the organisation’s reputation, namely that the price of publicly traded shares
is often dependent on reputation and hence reputation can be a very valuable asset of the
organisation.
2.8 Judgement
Judgement means the board making decisions that enhance the prosperity of the organisation. This
means that board members must acquire a broad enough knowledge of the business and its
environment to be able to provide meaningful direction to it. This has implications not only for the
attention directors have to give to the organisation’s affairs but also for the way the directors are
recruited and trained.
The complexities of senior management mean that the directors have to bring multiple conceptual
skills to management that aim to maximise long-term returns. This means that corporate governance
can involve balancing many competing people and resource claims against each other.
2.9 Integrity
Integrity is straightforward dealing and completeness. What is required of financial reporting is that it
should be honest and that it should present a balanced picture of the state of the company’s affairs.
The integrity of reports depends on the integrity of those who prepare and present them. It can be
taken as meaning someone of high moral character, who sticks to principles no matter the pressure
to do otherwise. In working life, this means adhering to principles of professionalism and probity.
Straightforward dealing in relationships with the different people and constituencies whom you
meet is particularly important; trust is vital in relationships and belief in the integrity of those with
whom you are dealing underpins this.
HB2021

This definition highlights the need for personal honesty and integrity of preparers of accounts. This
implies qualities beyond a mechanical adherence to accounting or ethical regulations or guidelines.
At times accountants will have to use judgement or face financial situations which aren’t covered by
regulations or guidance, and on these occasions integrity is particularly important.
Integrity is an essential principle of the corporate governance relationship, particularly in relation to
representing shareholder interests and exercising agency. As with financial reporting guidance,
ethical codes don’t cover all situations and therefore depend for their effectiveness on the qualities
of the accountant. In addition, we have seen that a key aim of corporate governance is to inspire
confidence in participants in the market and this significantly depends on a public perception of
competence and integrity.
2.10 Scepticism
You should be familiar with the concept of ‘professional scepticism‘ from your earlier auditing
studies: sound governance practices should also consider the importance of being sceptical about
all parts of the business, regardless of whether they have displayed any evidence of dysfunctional
behaviour. For example, if performance continues to exceed industry averages, even in periods of
economic downturn, it could be symptomatic of fraudulent financial reporting.
2.11 Innovation
Change happens; factors such as technological advances, social behaviour, market expectations and
even freak weather conditions can all have significant impacts on organisations and their
stakeholders, which means that governance structures need to be agile and responsive in order to
stay relevant.
3 The UK Corporate Governance Code

Section overview
• The FRC has issued the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code).
• The Code applies to all companies with a premium listing of equity shares on the London Stock
Exchange, regardless of whether they are incorporated in the UK or elsewhere.
• The 2018 Code is split into five broad categories and contains 18 principles supported by 41
more detailed provisions.
• The Code includes a number of disclosure requirements.
3.1 Overview
The application of the principles described above can be seen in corporate governance codes of
best practice. The UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code), first issued by the Financial Reporting
Council (FRC) in June 2010, replaced the Combined Code on Corporate Governance. Corporate
governance guidance in the UK has been continually reviewed since it was first issued in 1992. The
2010 Code resulted from the financial crisis in 2008–9 which triggered widespread reappraisal,
locally and internationally, of the governance systems which might have contributed to it. The Code
was further revised in September 2012 as part of the FRC’s ongoing response to the global recession
and financial crisis at the time, which emphasised the importance of increased transparency in the
way directors report on their activities, including their management of risk.
Following a consultation in late 2013, the FRC published a revised Code in September 2014, this
time targeting going concern, executive remuneration and risk management. The changes, made in
response to the Sharman Inquiry in 2012, were controversial with companies and investors: the
assessment of going concern by companies, in particular, was criticised for failing to address the
investors’ concerns, and placing a heavy risk management and reporting burden on boards.
The Code was revised again in April 2016 to reflect the implementation of the EU Audit Regulation
and Directive, focusing on the competence of audit committees, the requirement for mandatory
tendering and rotation of the audit firm, and disclosure of advance notice of any retendering plans in
the annual report.
HB2021

The Code continues to evolve, as the financial climate, public outcry over disproportionate executive
remuneration, the growing focus on shareholder participation and the changing regulatory
environment all make the need for effective corporate governance codes more topical than ever. The
current Code came into effect in July 2018 and includes the following changes:
• Workforce and stakeholders: There is a new Provision to enable greater board engagement with
the workforce to understand their views. The Code asks boards to describe how they have
considered the interests of stakeholders when performing their duty under Section 172 of the
2006 Companies Act.
• Culture: Boards are asked to create a culture which aligns company values with strategy and to
assess how they preserve value over the long-term.
• Succession and diversity: To ensure that boards have the right mix of skills and experience,
constructive challenge and to promote diversity, the new Code emphasises the need to refresh
boards and undertake succession planning. Boards should consider the length of term that chairs
remain in post beyond nine years. The new Code strengthens the role of the nomination
committee on succession planning and establishing a diverse board. It identifies the importance
of external board evaluation for all companies. Nomination committee reports should include
details of the contact the external board evaluator has had with the board and individual
directors.
• Remuneration: To address public concern over executive remuneration, the new Code
emphasises that remuneration committees should take into account workforce remuneration and
related policies when setting director remuneration. Importantly formulaic calculations of
performance-related pay should be rejected. Remuneration committees should apply discretion
when the resulting outcome is not justified.
(Source: FRC (2018) A UK Corporate Governance Code that is fit for the future. [Online]. Available
from: www.frc.org.uk/news/july-2018/a-uk-corporate-governance-code-that-is-fit-for-the [Accessed 1
October 2021])
ICAEW has published numerous articles and thought-leadership projects on the Corporate
Governance section of its website: icaew.com/en/technical/corporate-governance. We would
recommend that you use this link to keep abreast of the current UK and international developments
around corporate governance.
It would also be beneficial to read around the subject by visiting the FRC’s sections on corporate
governance, found at: www.frc.org.uk/Our-Work/Corporate-Governance-Reporting.aspx
3.1.1 Compliance
The Code applies to all companies with a Premium Listing although any company can adopt it on a
voluntary basis as a benchmark of best practice.
All companies incorporated in the UK or elsewhere and listed on the Main Market of the London
Stock Exchange must disclose in their annual reports how they have applied the principles of the
Code. The Listing Rules require listed companies to make a disclosure statement in two parts:
(a) The company has to report on how it applies the principles in the Code. The form and content
of this part of the statement are not prescribed, the intention being that companies should have
a free hand to explain their governance policies in the light of the principles, including any
special circumstances applying to them which have led to a particular approach.
(b) The company has either to confirm that it complies with the Code’s provisions or to provide an
explanation where it does not.
The introduction to the Code makes the following points:
• Reporting should be meaningful when explaining how the Code has been applied, avoiding what
is sometimes referred to as ‘boilerplate’ reporting.
• Non-compliance may be justified if factors such as the size, complexity, history or ownership
structure of a company demand that an alternative approach is reported.
• Temporary departures from any of the Code’s provisions should indicate a timescale for
conformance.
• Explanations should be seen as an opportunity not an obligation.
• Governance disclosures should complement all other forms of reporting to present a coherent
view of the company and how it has been run.
HB2021

Since its overall introduction, the FRC has continued to review the effectiveness of using the ‘comply
or explain’ approach as part of its corporate governance regime. However, despite being welcomed
by both company boards and investors for the flexibility it offers, there are still concerns that
companies are not engaging fully enough with the reporting rationale, meaning the desired
transparency in some cases is still missing and ‘boilerplate’ reporting is still happening.
In 2021, the FRC published its most recent findings on this subject, observing that ‘tick-box
compliance’ that gives the impression of compliance still seems to be preferred in order to mask any
kind of detailed disclosure on non-compliance. The FRC stated that companies need to remember
non-compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code is not necessarily a bad thing, and it is
better to be open about this so the circumstances surrounding departure from the provisions of the
Code can be evaluated by stakeholders in the context of the company and their individual
circumstances.
(Source: FRC (2021), Improving the quality of ‘comply or explain’ reporting [Online]. Available from:
https://www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/6a4c93cf-cf93-4b33-89e9-4c42ae36b594/Improving-the-
quality-of-comply-or-explain-reporting-final.pdf [Accessed: 10 June 2021])
The UK Corporate Governance Code does not apply to:
• AIM companies (AIM companies still need to either ‘comply’ or ‘explain’ using a recognised
corporate governance code, but it does not need to be the UK Corporate Governance Code); or
• companies below FTSE 350 (this exemption applies to certain provisions only).
3.2 Principles of good corporate governance

The Code is split into five main categories:
• Board leadership and company purpose
• Division of responsibilities
• Composition, succession and evaluation
• Audit, risk and internal control
• Remuneration
These are supported by 18 core principles and a further 41 more detailed provisions.
The key principles of the Code are summarised below. Section 4 of this chapter looks at the role of
the board in more detail by referring to supporting provisions.
Board leadership and

company purpose
The role of the board Every company should be headed by an effective and entrepreneurial
board which is collectively responsible for the long-term sustainable
success of the company and to add value to shareholders and society in
general.
Culture The board should promote a culture that is aligned to the company’s
overall purpose, values and strategy by ensuring directors act with
integrity.
Resources To be effective, the company should have sufficient resources to assess

the achievement of its objectives, including suitable internal controls to
manage risks.
Engagement Boards should engage fully with both shareholders and stakeholders to
allow suitable participation by all parties in the management of the
company.
Workforce The way the company manages the workforce must be in line with the
company’s overall culture and must allow their views to be heard.
HB2021

Division of
responsibilities
Chair The chair should lead the board and ensure it is effective in directing the
company by demonstrating sound judgement and promoting inclusive
and informed debate.
Balance The board should consist of an appropriate mix of executives and non-
executives, stressing the role that independence can play in reducing
unwelcome dominance.
Non-executives Non-executive directors (NEDs) should have sufficient time and resource
to allow them to challenge and support management in an appropriate
way.
Support Boards need suitable levels of information, time and other resources,
including the company secretary, to function in an efficient and effective
manner.
Composition,
succession and
evaluation
Appointments Board recruitment should be based on a formal and transparent

process, driven by a logical succession plan and promoting diversity
throughout.
Qualities The board should always possess appropriate levels of skill, experience
and knowledge which should be achieved by regularly refreshing the
board’s membership.
Assessment Both individual board members and the board as a whole should be
appraised on a regular basis to ensure they continue to achieve the
company’s objectives.
Audit, risk and internal

control
Audit and reporting Directors should ensure both internal and external audit are effective
and independent and that the company’s reports display suitable levels
of integrity.
Viability The board should ensure a realistic and clear picture of the company’s
current and future prospects is presented to all stakeholders.
Risk and control The board should understand the risks that the company faces and
ensure they help achieve the company’s objectives, supported by
suitable internal controls.
Remuneration
Policy There should be a direct link between executive remuneration policies

and practices and the achievement of the company’s long term strategic
objectives.
Procedure Remuneration for directors and management should be set in a

transparent and objective manner.
Judgement All remuneration decisions should reflect the company’s performance

and other factors as appropriate to ensure they display suitable levels of
discretion.
HB2021

3.3 Disclosure requirements of the Code
As well as the need to report on how the company has applied the core principles of the Code
(including satisfying the more detailed provisions) there are also a number of other disclosure
requirements which can be seen in an annual report (summarised here by principle and provision).
Board leadership and company purpose
The opportunities and risks that the company faces, the corresponding sustainability of the current
business model and how the current system of governance adopted by the company helps to
achieve each of these (Provision 1).
An overview of the company culture and how the company manages the workforce (Provision 2).
Details of any significant disagreements between the board and shareholders when voting on a
resolution (Provision 4).
An overview of how the company has engaged with the company’s key stakeholders (Provision 5).
Division of responsibilities
The independence of non-executive directors and the company’s rationale for reaching this
assessment (Provision 10).
The number of meetings of the board and its committees and individual attendance by all directors
(Provision 14).
Composition, succession and evaluation
Transparency over the identity and independence of any external recruiters used as part of any
board recruitment and any external evaluators used when assessing board performance (Provisions
20 and 21).
An overview of the work of the nomination committee, including processes, policies and its
commitment to diversity (Provision 23).
Audit, risk and internal control
There should be disclosure of the work of the audit committee including:
• reasons for the absence of an internal audit function where there is none;
• significant issues that it considered in relation to the financial statements, and how these issues
were addressed;
• an explanation how it has assessed the effectiveness of the external audit process and the
approach taken to the appointment or reappointment of the external auditor, including the length
of tenure of the current audit firm and when a tender was last conducted;
• explanation of why the board did not accept any of the audit committee’s recommendations
regarding the external auditor; and
• if the external auditor provides non-audit services, an explanation of how auditor objectivity and
independence is safeguarded.
(Provision 26)
An explanation from the directors of their responsibility for preparing the financial statements and
how they believe these statements support shareholders in holding them to account (Provision 27).
The processes used by directors for identifying and managing the company’s principal risks
(Provision 28).
A report on the board’s review of the effectiveness of the company’s risk management and internal
controls systems (Provision 29).
Confirmation that the company will continue to be a viable going concern and any material
uncertainties that might place this under some form of jeopardy (Provision 30).
An assessment of the company’s future prospects and ability to meet future liabilities (Provision31).
HB2021

Remuneration
Where remuneration consultants have been appointed, whether they have any other connection with
the company (Provision 35).
A description of the work of the remuneration committee, including the rationale behind the
processes used and how the company has engaged with the shareholders and the workforce
(Provision 41).
3.4 Additional requirements of the Code

As well as those provisions that require disclosure by companies adopting the Code, there are a
number of others that could appear in exam questions which you should be familiar with:
• The need for an independent chair, separate from the chief executive, plus chief executive not
going on to chair the same company (Provision 9)
Context example: British Airways

UK airline British Airways (BA) is a well-known company that is often used as the benchmark in its
industry, yet in 2019 the roles of chair and chief executive were filled by the same individual. How
was this allowed? BA is actually owned by the International Airlines Group (IAG) which at the time
had a more robust governance structure of chair, 10 non-executive directors and two executive
directors (finance director and chief executive). It is therefore important to understand the ownership
structure of an entity when appraising how it is directed and controlled.
• Length of service limits of no more than nine years for the chair and any non-executive directors
(Provisions 10 and 19)
• Non-executive directors (preferably independent, excluding the chair) to make up the majority of
the board (Provision 11)
• The crucial roles that both the senior independent director and non-executive directors can play
in supporting the board and shareholders (Provisions 12 and 13)
• Nominations committees consisting of a majority of non-executive directors (Provision 17)
• All directors (including non-executives) to be subject to annual re-election (Provision 18)
• Audit committees should consist entirely of at least three independent non-executive directors
with at least one member possessing suitable financial experience (Provision 24)
• Audit committees should review the financial statements, internal control and risk management
systems, as well as the effectiveness of internal audit and all matters related to the external
auditor’s appointment, terms of reference, independence, effectiveness and any non-audit work
carried out (Provision 25)
• Remuneration committees should consist entirely of at least three independent non-executive
directors (Provision 32)
• Non-executive directors’ fees should either be set by the board or set out in the company’s
articles of association, with no share options or performance-related elements allowed (Provision
34)
• Executive remuneration schemes where share options are used should use a vesting period of at
least five years (Provision 36)
• Executive remuneration schemes should allow for awards to be reclaimed from directors for a
specified reason (Provision 37)
There were some areas of the 2016 Code that were not carried forward to the current version:
• The need to arrange insurance cover in respect of legal action against directors
• Boards should be of sufficient size to accommodate business needs
• Non-executives should be appointed for a fixed period, ideally not exceeding six years (now
superseded by Provision 18)
• Benchmarking remuneration against other companies, leading to policies that risk the upward
ratchet of remuneration levels with no corresponding improvement in performance
• Remuneration disclosures for executives who leave the company to take up a non-executive
position at another company
HB2021

• Controls to limit the use of options for remunerating non-executive directors and remuneration
policies for non-executive directors where shareholders are involved (superseded by Provision
34)
• Shareholders should be involved in approving long-term incentive schemes
• Various miscellaneous rules about annual general meetings and proxy votes
Use the various principles and provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code to help you
structure an answer when presented with a series of governance issues.
Interactive question 1: UK Corporate Governance Code

Compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code is a London Stock Exchange requirement for
all companies with a premium listing. It is recommended for other companies. Some argue that the
Code should be mandatory for all companies.
Requirements
1.1 Discuss the benefits of the UK Corporate Governance Code to shareholders and other
interested users of financial statements.
1.2 Discuss the merits and drawbacks of having such provisions in the form of a voluntary code.
4 Role of the board

Section overview
• The board of directors should be responsible for taking major policy and strategic decisions and
use the best information available to it, reporting how they have fulfilled their duties.
• Directors should have a mix of skills and their performance should be assessed regularly.
• Independent non-executive directors have a key role in governance. Their number and status
should mean that their views carry significant weight.
4.1 Scope of role

The guidance in the Code is developed in the FRC publication Guidance on Board Effectiveness
(2018). If the board is to act effectively, its role must be defined carefully. The Code suggests that the
board should have a formal schedule of matters specifically reserved to it for decision. Some would
be such decisions as mergers and takeovers that are fundamental to the business and therefore
should not be taken just by executive managers. Other decisions would include acquisitions and
disposals of assets of the company or its subsidiaries that are material to the company and
investments, capital projects, bank borrowing facilities, loans and their repayment, and foreign
currency transactions, all above a certain size (to be determined by the board).
Other tasks the board should perform include:
• monitoring the chief executive officer;
• overseeing strategy;
• monitoring risks and control systems;
• monitoring the human capital aspects of the company in regard to succession, morale, training,
remuneration etc; and
• ensuring that there is effective communication of its strategic plans, both internally and externally.
HB2021

Context example: Role of the board
For the voluntary sector, the UK’s Good Governance, A Code for the Voluntary and Community Sector
stresses the board of trustees’ role in ensuring compliance with the objects, purposes and values of
the organisation and with its governing document. The Code stresses that the board must ensure
that the organisation’s vision, mission, values and activities remain true to its objects.
The Code also lays more stress than the governance codes targeted at listed companies on trustees
focusing on the strategic direction of their organisation and not becoming involved in day to day
activities. The chief executive officer should provide the link between the board and the staff team,
and the means by which board members hold staff to account. Where in smaller organisations
trustees need to become involved in operational matters, they should separate their strategic and
operational roles.
4.2 Attributes of directors

In order to carry out effective scrutiny, directors need to have relevant expertise in industry,
company, functional area and governance. The board as a whole needs to contain a mix of expertise
and show a balance between executive management and independent non-executive directors.
New and existing directors should also have appropriate training to develop the knowledge and
skills required.
4.3 Possession of necessary information

As we have seen above, in many corporate scandals, the board was not given full information. The
Code states that the chair is responsible for ensuring that the directors receive accurate, timely and
clear information. Directors should seek clarification where necessary.
4.4 Performance of board

Appraisal of the board’s performance is an important control over it. The performance of the board
should be assessed once a year (for FTSE 350 companies this should be externally facilitated every
three years).
4.5 Board membership and division of responsibilities

All reports acknowledge the importance of having a division of responsibilities at the head of an
organisation. The simplest way to do this is to require the roles of chair and chief executive to be
held by two different people.
Context example: Director Influence

Another area of concern is whether individual directors are exercising disproportionate influence on
the company. For example, Boots prohibited the chair of the remuneration committee from serving
on the audit committee and vice versa.
4.6 Strategic report

Section 414 of the Companies Act (2006) provides guidance on the creation of a formal
communication known as the strategic report which is required for entities that have outgrown the
classification of a small company or who are required to produce one in the public interest, either as
result of the nature of their business (such as banking or insurance) or their ownership structure
(listed on the stock market). The purpose of the strategic report is to inform the members of the
company, and help them assess, how the directors have performed their duty under section 172 of
the Companies Act (2006) which is the duty to promote the success of the company.
The strategic report must contain:
(a) a fair review of the company’s business; and
(b) a description of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the company.
HB2021

The strategic report should include analysis which uses both financial and non-financial key
performance indicators (KPIs) and provide information and trends about the company’s business and
prospects, as well as appropriate employee-related, environmental and corporate social
responsibility (CSR) issues.
The strategic report is presented in the same document as the audited financial statements, usually
the annual report, so is often considered at the same time as ISA (UK) 720 The auditor’s
responsibilities relating to other information. Given the nature of the obligations about business
continuity that the directors are addressing here, it also sits alongside the auditor’s responsibilities to
evaluate an entity’s going concern assessment under ISA (UK) 570 (Revised September 2019) Going
concern.
The adoption of such a rigorous disclosure regime is clearly designed to reduce the chances of
future corporate failures such as Carillion plc but it will only be as effective as the responses to this
communication by the stakeholders who read it.
Context example: Diageo Strategic Report 2020

In the Strategic Business Management materials you will find a real world example that illustrates
how the strategic report works in summary. It uses Diageo, a global drinks manufacturer, as an
example of how the strategic report considers the position and prospects of the company and
explains how the directors have responded to various risks and obligations in the context of the
global drinks industry in 2020. It is revisited here for the relevant governance aspects that apply to
Corporate Reporting.
Within the Diageo strategic report, the chairman’s statement includes formal acknowledgement of
the directors’ responsibilities under section 172 of the Companies Act (2006) while the section on
principal risks and risk management satisfies the UK Corporate Governance Code by including the
following viability statement:
Viability statement
In accordance with the United Kingdom’s Corporate Governance Code, the Directors have assessed
the viability of the group for the three years to 30 June 2023, considering our current position and
prospects, our strategy, the Board’s risk appetite, our business model to create a truly sustainable
business for the very long term that includes our people, brands, relationships, insight and know-
how, infrastructure and financial strength and our principal risks as set out in the Strategic report. The
Directors believe a three-year horizon is appropriate for this assessment, as this aligns with our
normal three-year strategic business planning processes.
The three-year business plan is based on our current strategy and has been stress-tested by
modelling severe but plausible downside scenarios, linked to our principal risks. In addition, and
while still uncertain, the potential financial impact of the Covid-19 pandemic has been modelled in
our scenarios. This has required using key assumptions that have a high degree of uncertainty,
including but not limited to: the length of lockdown; the potential for a second wave; the recovery of
our on-trade business; and increases in direct and indirect taxes.
Key severe but plausible scenarios considered include:
• Material negative changes in the macro-economic environment, including the impact of Covid-19
• Severe marketing and/or route to market restrictions or fiscal changes introduced by local
governments
• Unfavourable exchange movements in foreign currencies – primarily euro & US dollar to Sterling
• A failure to adapt to or participate fully in critical industry developments
• Impact of severe climate change
• Increased potential tax rate due to changes in the international tax environment
None of these scenarios individually threaten the viability of Diageo, therefore the combined impact
of these scenarios has been evaluated as the most severe stressed scenario. Stress-testing considers
the effectiveness of mitigation actions and internal control systems and makes certain assumptions
about temporary reductions in discretionary spending including capital expenditure, dividend
payments and advertising and promotion. It also considers whether additional financing facilities
would be required.
HB2021

Based on the results of this analysis the Directors confirm they have a reasonable expectation that the
group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period to
30 June 2023. (Diageo, 2020)
You can access the full Diageo strategic report here:
Diageo (2020) Strategic Report [Online]. Available at:
https://www.diageo.com/PR1346/aws/media/11304/strategic-report.pdf [Accessed 12 October
2021]
4.7 Non-executive directors

Non-executive directors have no executive (managerial) responsibilities.
Non-executive directors should provide a balancing influence, and play a key role in reducing
conflicts of interest between management (including executive directors) and shareholders. They
should provide reassurance to shareholders, particularly institutional shareholders, that management
is acting in the interests of the organisation.
Context example: Sources of non-executive directors

Non-executive directors may come from a number of sources:
• Companies operating in international markets could benefit from having at least one non-
executive director with international experience.
• Lawyers, accountants and consultants can bring skills that are useful to the board.
• Listed companies should consider appointing directors of private companies as non-executive
directors.
• Including individuals with charitable or public sector experience but strong commercial
awareness can increase the breadth of diversity and experience on the board.
4.7.1 Role of non-executive directors

The role of non-executive directors can be summarised as follows:
• Strategy: Non-executive directors should contribute to, and challenge the direction of, strategy.
• Performance: Non-executive directors should scrutinise the performance of management in
meeting goals and objectives, and monitor the reporting of performance.
• Risk: Non-executive directors should satisfy themselves that financial information is accurate and
that financial controls and systems of risk management are robust.
• Directors and managers: Non-executive directors are responsible for determining appropriate
levels of remuneration for executives, and are key figures in the appointment and removal of
senior managers and in succession planning.
4.7.2 Advantages of non-executive directors

Non-executive directors can bring a number of advantages to a board of directors.
• They may have external experience and knowledge which executive directors do not possess.
The experience they bring can be in many different fields. They may be executive directors of
other companies, and thus have experience of different ways of approaching corporate
governance, internal controls or performance assessment. They can also bring knowledge of
markets within which the company operates.
• Non-executive directors can provide a wider perspective than executive directors, who may be
more involved in detailed operations.
• Good non-executive directors are often a comfort factor for third parties, such as investors and
creditors.
• It has been suggested that there are certain roles non-executive directors are well suited to play.
These include ‘father-confessor’ (being a confidante for the chair and other directors),’oil-can’
(intervening to make the board run more effectively) and acting as ‘high sheriff’ (if necessary
taking steps to remove the chair or chief executive).
HB2021

• The most important advantage perhaps lies in the dual nature of the non-executive director’s role.
Non-executive directors are full board members who are expected to have the level of
knowledge that full board membership implies. At the same time, they are meant to provide the
so-called strong, independent element on the board. This should imply that they have the
knowledge and detachment to be able to assess fairly the remuneration of executive directors
when serving on the remuneration committee, and to be able to discuss knowledgeably with
auditors the affairs of the company on the audit committee.
4.7.3 Problems with non-executive directors

Nevertheless, there are a number of difficulties connected with the role of non-executive director.
• In many organisations, non-executive directors may lack independence. There are in practice a
number of ways in which non-executive directors can be linked to a company, as suppliers or
customers for example. Even if there is no direct connection, potential non-executive directors are
more likely to agree to serve if they admire the company’s chair or its way of operating.
• There may be a prejudice in certain companies against widening the recruitment of non-
executive directors to include people proposed other than by the board or to include stakeholder
representatives.
• High-calibre non-executive directors may gravitate towards the best-run companies, rather than
companies which are more in need of input from good non-executives.
• Non-executive directors may have difficulty imposing their views on the board. It may be easy to
dismiss the views of non-executive directors as irrelevant to the company’s needs. This may imply
that non-executive directors need good persuasive skills to influence other directors. Moreover, if
executive directors are determined to push through a controversial policy, it may prove difficult
for the more disparate group of non-executive directors to oppose them effectively.
• It has been suggested that not enough emphasis is given to the role of non-executive directors in
preventing trouble, in warning early on of potential problems. When trouble does arise, non-
executive directors may be expected to play a major role in rescuing the situation, which they may
not be able to do.
• Perhaps the biggest problem which non-executive directors face is the limited time they can
devote to the role. If they are to contribute valuably, they are likely to have time-consuming other
commitments. In the time they have available to act as non-executive directors, they must
contribute as knowledgeable members of the full board and fulfil their legal responsibilities as
directors. They must also serve on board committees. Their responsibilities mean that their time
must be managed effectively, and they must be able to focus on areas where the value they add is
greatest.
4.7.4 Independence of non-executive directors

Various safeguards can be put in place to ensure that non-executive directors remain independent. A
number of factors will be considered, including if the director:
• has been an employee of the company within the last five years;
• has, or has had within the last three years, a material business relationship with the company
either directly, or as a partner, shareholder, director or senior employee of a body that has such a
relationship with the company;
• receives additional remuneration from the company apart from a director’s fee, participates in the
company’s share option or a performance-related pay scheme, or is a member of the company’s
pension scheme;
• has close family ties with any of the company’s advisers, directors or senior employees;
• holds cross-directorships or has significant links with other directors through involvement in other
companies or bodies;
• represents a significant shareholder; or
• has served on the board for more than nine years from the date of their first election.
Whenever a question scenario features non-executive directors, watch out for threats to, or questions
over, their independence.
HB2021

5 Associated guidance
Section overview
• The UK Stewardship Code aims to enhance the relationship between companies and institutional
investors.
• The FRC provides guidance on risk management and internal control.
• The FRC has issued specific guidance on audit committees.
5.1 The UK Stewardship Code

The UK Stewardship Code aims to enhance the quality of engagement between investors and
companies to help improve long-term returns to shareholders and the efficient exercise of
governance responsibilities. The FRC defines stewardship as ‘the responsible allocation,
management and oversight of capital to create long-term value for clients and beneficiaries leading
to sustainable benefits for the economy, the environment and society’ (FRC, 2020).
Effectively, it is guidance for investors and those who support them.
There is a strong focus on the activities and outcomes of stewardship, not just policy statements.
There are new expectations about how investment and stewardship is integrated, including
environmental, social and governance (ESG) issues. The Code asks investors to explain how they
have exercised stewardship across asset classes. For example, for listed equity, fixed income,
private equity, infrastructure investments, and in investments outside the UK.
(FRC, 2020)
The FRC views this guidance as complementary to the UK Corporate Governance Code; however,
the Stewardship Code sets out good practice using a reporting approach referred to as ‘apply or
explain‘, allowing relevant organisations to disclose how they have applied the Code principles in a
way that is most appropriate to their own strategy and approach. Reports should be clear and
balanced, approved by those in charge at the organisation.
The UK Stewardship Code is structured around two categories:
• asset owners and managers who invest funds on behalf of their clients; and
• services providers who support asset owners and managers via consultancy, research and analysis
Principles for asset owners and asset managers Principles for service providers
Purpose and governance 1. Purpose, strategy and culture
1. Purpose, strategy and culture 2. Governance, resources and incentives
2. Governance, resources and incentives 3. Conflicts of interest
3. Conflicts of interest 4. Promoting well-functioning markets
4. Promoting well-functioning markets 5. Supporting clients’ stewardship
5. Review and assurance 6. Review and assurance
Investment approach
6. Client and beneficiary needs
7. Stewardship, investment and ESG integration
8. Monitoring managers and service providers
Engagement
9. Engagement
10. Collaboration
HB2021

Principles for asset owners and asset managers Principles for service providers
11. Escalation
Exercising rights and responsibilities
12. Exercising rights and responsibilities
You should note the enhanced importance of environmental issues within the 2020 Code, which
reflects the significance of such matters throughout 21st Century corporate reporting.
(Source: FRC (2020) The UK Stewardship Code 2020. [Online] Available at:
https://www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/5aae591d-d9d3-4cf4-814a-d14e156a1d87/Stewardship-
Code_Dec-19-Final-Corrected.pdf [Accessed 6 July 2020])
5.2 The FRC’s Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial
and Business Reporting
In 2014, the FRC issued its Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and
Business Reporting, replacing and combining its earlier guidance on Internal Control: Revised
Guidance for Directors on the Combined Code and Going Concern and Liquidity Risk: Guidance for
Directors of UK Companies.
The aim of this current guidance is to provide a high level overview of factors that boards must
consider in terms of the design, implementation, monitoring and review of risk management and
control systems.
The FRC risk guidance is considered in more detail in section 7 which covers corporate governance
and internal control.
5.3 Audit committees

In December 2017, the FRC’s Audit and Assurance Lab published project outcomes under the title
‘Audit Committee Reporting’ which explored how investors’ confidence in the audit process could
be improved by the external reporting of audit committees and their work in the annual report.
In summary, the Lab found the following.
• The demanding role of the audit committee is valued by investors and could be emphasised
further to support its importance.
• A meaningful and constructive dialogue between non-executives and investors is helpful, but
requires engagement from both sides to make the audit committee effective.
• The audit committee report is seen as a vital way of supporting this dialogue, but it must be
presented in such a way as to focus on key issues.
• External auditor appointment and tendering issues need to ensure that quality and auditor
independence are both prioritised, regardless of who the auditor actually is.
• Investors are keen to know about the factors (including, but not limited to, non-audit work)
affecting the effectiveness, objectivity and independence of the external auditor.
• Significant issues and their resolution by audit committees need to be reported to address any
uncertainties over their impact.
• Whether handled by the audit committee or not, information on internal control, risk
management systems and internal audit is valued by investors and must be disclosed.
HB2021

6 Corporate governance: international impact
Section overview
• Corporate governance models differ around the world, but the following principles and
legislation are widely recognised:
– The G20/OECD Principles of Corporate Governance (G20/OECD Principles)
– The Sarbanes–Oxley Act in the US (SOX)
– The UK Corporate Governance Code (covered in earlier sections)
• The G20/OECD Principles resulted from market pressure for standardisation of governance
guidelines.
• The G20/OECD Principles are non-binding but are intended to assist governments, stock
exchanges, investors and companies. They cover the following six areas:
– Ensuring the basis for an effective corporate governance framework
– The rights of shareholders
– The equitable treatment of shareholders
– The role of stakeholders
– Disclosure and transparency
– The responsibilities of the board
• The introduction of SOX in the US resulted from the Enron scandal.
• SOX is a ‘rules-based’ rather than ‘principles-based’ approach to improving corporate
governance.
• The Act applies to all companies that are required to file accounts with the Securities and
Exchange Commission. This includes non-US companies who list their shares in the US and
therefore affects companies worldwide.
• SOX has resulted in increased compliance costs for companies.
6.1 G20/OECD Principles of Corporate Governance

6.1.1 Convergence of international guidance
Because of increasing international trade and cross-border links, there is significant pressure for the
development of internationally comparable practices and standards. Accounting and financial
reporting is one area in which this has occurred. Increasing international investment and integration
of international capital markets has also led to pressure for standardisation of governance guidelines,
as international investors seek reassurance about the way their investments are being managed and
the risks involved.
6.1.2 OECD guidance

The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) has carried out an extensive
consultation with member countries, and developed a set of principles of corporate governance that
countries and companies should work towards achieving. The OECD has stated that its interest in
corporate governance arises from its concern for global investment. Corporate governance
arrangements should be credible and understood across national borders. Having a common set of
accepted principles is a step towards achieving this aim.
The OECD developed its Principles of Corporate Governance in 1998 and issued a revised version
endorsed by the G20 in November 2015. They are non-binding principles, intended to assist
governments in their efforts to evaluate and improve the legal, institutional and regulatory framework
for corporate governance in their countries.
They are also intended to provide guidance to stock exchanges, investors and companies. The focus
is on stock exchange listed companies, but many of the principles can also apply to private
companies and state-owned organisations.
HB2021

The G20/OECD Principles deal mainly with governance problems that result from the separation of
ownership and management of a company. Issues of ethical concern and environmental issues are
also relevant, although not central to the problems of governance.
Between February 2009 and February 2010 the OECD issued a number of documents regarding the
corporate governance lessons which can be learnt from the recent financial crisis.
6.1.3 G20/OECD Principles

The G20/OECD Principles are grouped into six broad areas:
(a) Ensuring the basis for an effective corporate governance framework
The corporate governance framework should promote transparent and fair markets, and the
efficient allocation of resources. It should be consistent with the rule of law and support effective
supervision and enforcement.
(b) The rights and equitable treatment of shareholders and key ownership functions
Shareholders should have the right to participate and vote in general meetings of the company,
elect and remove members of the board and obtain relevant and material information on a
timely basis. All shareholders of the same class of shares should be treated equally, including
minority shareholders and overseas shareholders. Impediments to cross-border shareholdings
should be eliminated.
Capital markets for corporate control should function in an efficient and timely manner.
(c) Institutional investors, stock markets and other intermediaries
Institutional investors acting in a fiduciary capacity should disclose their corporate governance
and voting policies with respect to their investments and should disclose how they manage
material conflicts of interest. Parties providing advice to investors should disclose and minimise
conflicts of interest. Votes should be cast in line with the directions of the owners of the shares.
(d) The role of stakeholders
Rights of stakeholders should be protected. All stakeholders should have access to relevant
information on a regular and timely basis. Mechanisms for employee participation should be
permitted to develop. Stakeholders, including employees, should be able to freely
communicate their concerns about illegal or unethical relationships to the board and public
authorities.
(e) Disclosure and transparency
Timely and accurate disclosure must be made of all material matters regarding the company,
including the financial situation, company objectives and non-financial information, major share
ownership, including beneficial owners and voting rights, remuneration of members of the
board and key executives, information about the board (including their qualifications), related
party transactions, foreseeable risk factors, issues regarding employees and other stakeholders
and governance structures and policies. Information should be prepared and disclosed in
accordance with standards of accounting and financial and non-financial reporting. An annual
audit should be conducted by an independent, competent and qualified auditor following
relevant auditing standards. The auditor must exercise due professional care in the conduct of
the audit. Information must be disseminated through proper channels.
(f) The responsibilities of the board
The board is responsible for the strategic guidance of the company and for the effective
monitoring of management. Board members should act on a fully informed basis, in good faith,
with due diligence and care and in the best interests of the company and its shareholders. They
should treat all shareholders fairly. The board should be able to exercise independent
judgement; this includes assigning independent non-executive directors to appropriate tasks.
6.2 Sarbanes–Oxley and governance in the US

6.2.1 The Enron scandal
The most significant scandal in the US in recent years has been the Enron scandal, when one of the
country’s biggest companies filed for bankruptcy. The scandal also resulted in the disappearance of
Arthur Andersen, one of the Big Five accountancy firms who had audited Enron’s accounts. The main
reasons why Enron collapsed were overexpansion in energy markets, too much reliance on
derivatives trading which eventually went wrong, breaches of federal law, and misleading and
HB2021

dishonest behaviour. However, inquiries into the scandal exposed a number of weaknesses in the
company’s governance.
(a) A lack of transparency in the accounts
This particularly related to certain investment vehicles that were not recognised in the statement
of financial position. Various other methods of inflating revenues, offloading debt, massaging
quarterly figures and avoiding taxes were employed.
(b) Ineffective corporate governance arrangements
The company’s management team was criticised for being arrogant and overambitious and
there were potential conflicts of interest.
(c) Inadequate scrutiny by the external auditors
Arthur Andersen failed to spot or question dubious accounting treatments. Since Andersen’s
consultancy arm did a lot of work for Enron, there were allegations of conflicts of interest.
(d) Information asymmetry
That is, the agency problem of the directors/managers knowing more than the investors. The
investors included Enron’s employees. Many had their personal wealth tied up in Enron shares,
which ended up being worthless. They were actively discouraged from selling them. Many of
Enron’s directors, however, sold the shares when they began to fall, potentially profiting from
them.
(e) Executive compensation methods
These were meant to align the interests of shareholders and directors, but seemed to encourage
the overstatement of short-term profits. Particularly in the US, where the tenure of chief executive
officers is fairly short, the temptation is strong to inflate profits in the hope that share options will
have been cashed in by the time the problems are discovered.
6.2.2 The Sarbanes–Oxley Act 2002

In the US the response to the breakdown of stock market trust caused by perceived inadequacies in
corporate government arrangements and the Enron scandal was the Sarbanes–Oxley Act 2002. The
Act applies to all companies that are required to file periodic reports with the Securities and
Exchange Commission (SEC). The Act was the most far-reaching US legislation dealing with securities
in many years and has major implications for public companies. Rule-making authority was
delegated to the SEC on many provisions.
Sarbanes–Oxley shifts responsibility for financial probity and accuracy to the board’s audit
committee, which typically comprises three independent directors, one of whom has to meet certain
financial literacy requirements (equivalent to non-executive directors in other jurisdictions).
Along with rules from the SEC, the Sarbanes–Oxley Act (SOX) requires companies to increase their
financial statement disclosures, to have an internal code of ethics and to impose restrictions on share
trading by, and loans to, corporate officers.
Effectively the SOX legislates that companies and their boards must comply with provisions derived
from principles similar to the OECD Principles and those contained in the UK Corporate Governance
Code. However, this rules based approach has drawn criticism for its ‘one size fits all’ approach and
there have been concerns that it unnecessarily burdens smaller entities.
Unlike the UK Corporate Governance Code, which adopts a ‘comply or explain’ approach, the SOX is
strictly rules-based, with penalties imposed for non-compliance. There is a continuing debate around
which approach is the more effective. It is argued that the UK’s more flexible model:
• provides best practice guidance that can be applied to the varying circumstances of different
companies;
• prevents the development of a mechanistic, ‘box-ticking’ approach to decision-making and the
use of legalistic loopholes to avoid compliance with guidance; and
• focuses on the spirit of the guidance and encourages responsibility and the exercise of
professional judgement.
On the other hand, supporters of a rules-based approach argue that compliance with such guidance
is easier since the requirements are prescriptive and leave little room for misunderstanding.
Furthermore, rules-based approaches are easier to enforce.
HB2021

6.2.3 Detailed provisions of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act
These are as follows:
(a) Public Oversight Board
The Act set up a new regulator, the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board, to oversee the
audit of public companies that are subject to the securities laws.
The Board has powers to set auditing, quality control, independence and ethical standards for
registered public accounting firms to use in the preparation and issue of audit reports on the
financial statements of listed companies. In particular, the Board is required to set standards for
registered public accounting firms’ reports on listed company statements on their internal
control over financial reporting. The Board also has inspection and disciplinary powers over
firms.
(b) Auditing standards
Audit firms should retain working papers for at least seven years and have quality control
standards in place, such as second partner review. As part of the audit they should review
internal control systems to ensure that they reflect the transactions of the client and provide
reasonable assurance that the transactions are recorded in a manner that will permit preparation
of the financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. They
should also review records to check whether receipts and payments are being made only in
accordance with management’s authorisation.
(c) Non-audit services
Auditors are expressly prohibited from carrying out a number of services, including internal
audit, bookkeeping, systems design and implementation, appraisal or valuation services,
actuarial services, management functions and human resources, investment management, and
legal and expert services. Provision of other non-audit services is only allowed with the prior
approval of the audit committee.
(d) Quality control procedures
There should be rotation of lead or reviewing audit partners every five years and other
procedures such as independence requirements, consultation, supervision, professional
development, internal quality review and engagement acceptance and continuation.
(e) Auditors and audit committee
Auditors should discuss critical accounting policies, possible alternative treatments, the
management letter and unadjusted differences with the audit committee.
(f) Audit committee
Audit committees should be established by all listed companies.
All members of audit committees should be independent and should therefore not accept any
consulting or advisory fee from the company or be affiliated to it. At least one member should
be a financial expert. Audit committees should be responsible for the appointment,
compensation and oversight of auditors. Audit committees should establish mechanisms for
dealing with complaints about accounting, internal controls and audit.
(g) Corporate responsibility
The chief executive officer and chief financial officer should certify the appropriateness of the
financial statements and that those financial statements fairly present the operations and
financial condition of the issuer. If the company has to prepare a restatement of accounts due to
material non-compliance with standards, the chief financial officer and chief executive officer
should forfeit their bonuses.
(h) Off balance sheet transactions
There should be appropriate disclosure of material off balance sheet transactions and other
relationships (transactions that are not included in the accounts but that impact on financial
conditions, results, liquidity or capital resources).
(i) Internal control reporting
Annual reports should contain internal control reports. We look at this aspect in more detail in
section 7 when we consider internal control.
HB2021

(j) Whistleblowing provisions
Employees of listed companies and auditors will be granted whistleblower protection against
their employers if they disclose private employer information to parties involved in a fraud
claim.
6.2.4 Impact of Sarbanes–Oxley in the US

The biggest expense involving compliance that companies are incurring is fulfilling the requirement
to ensure their internal controls are properly documented and tested. US companies had to have
efficient controls in the past, but they are now having to document them more comprehensively than
before, and then have the external auditors report on what they have done.
The Act also formally stripped accountancy firms of almost all non-audit revenue streams that they
used to derive from their audit clients, for fear of conflicts of interest.
For lawyers, the Act strengthens requirements on them to whistleblow internally on any wrongdoing
they uncover at client companies, right up to board level.
6.2.5 International impact of Sarbanes–Oxley

The Act also has a significant international dimension. About 1,500 non-US companies, including
many of the world’s largest, list their shares in the US and are covered by Sarbanes–Oxley. There were
complaints that the new legislation conflicted with local corporate governance customs and,
following an intense round of lobbying from outside the US, changes to the rules were secured. For
example, German employee representatives, who are non-management, can sit on audit committees,
and audit committees do not have to have board directors if the local law says otherwise, as it does
in Japan and Italy.
Also, as the US is such a significant influence worldwide, arguably Sarbanes–Oxley may influence
certain jurisdictions to adopt a more rules-based approach.
6.2.6 Criticisms of Sarbanes–Oxley

Sarbanes–Oxley has been criticised in some quarters for not being strong enough on certain issues,
for example the selection of external auditors by the audit committee, and at the same time being
over-rigid on others. Directors may be less likely to consult lawyers in the first place if they believe
that legislation could override lawyer-client privilege.
In addition, it has been alleged that a Sarbanes–Oxley compliance industry has sprung up focusing
companies’ attention on complying with all aspects of the legislation, significant or much less
important. This has distracted companies from improving information flows to the market and then
allowing the market to make well-informed decisions. The Act has also done little to address the
temptation provided by generous stock options to inflate profits, other than requiring possible
forfeiture if accounts are subsequently restated.
Most significantly, perhaps, there is recent evidence of companies turning away from the US stock
markets and towards other markets such as London. Many observers have suggested that this was
partly due to companies tiring of the increased compliance costs associated with Sarbanes–Oxley
implementation. In addition, the nature of the regulatory regime may be an increasingly significant
factor in listing decisions.
While it is unlikely that you will be expected to consider the regulatory aspects of an organisation
from the US in great detail, basic knowledge of Sarbanes-Oxley will help you with the headline
issues.
HB2021

7 Corporate governance and internal control
Section overview
• The FRC publication Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Business and Financial
Reporting (based on the Turnbull Report) sets out best practice on internal control for UK-listed
companies.
• Turnbull emphasises that a risk-based approach to establishing a system of internal control should
be adopted.
• Directors should have a defined process for the review of effectiveness of control.
• International companies listed in the US must comply with Sarbanes–Oxley.
7.1 The Turnbull Report and the FRC Risk Guidance

7.1.1 Introduction
We looked briefly at the FRC’s Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Business and Financial
Reporting (also known as the Risk Guidance) in an earlier section.
Published in September 2014, the Risk Guidance revised, integrated and replaced existing FRC
guidance on internal control and going concern, and reflected changes made to the UK Corporate
Governance Code.
7.1.2 Objectives of the Risk Guidance

The objectives of the Risk Guidance, based on those in the Turnbull Report, are to encourage
companies to adopt a risk-based approach to establishing a system of internal control ie, to manage
and control risk appropriately rather than eliminate it. This should enable companies to achieve their
business objectives while being responsive to the risks they face.
The Risk Guidance emphasises the importance of an embedded and ongoing process of identifying
and responding to risks. Thus a company must:
• establish business objectives;
• identify the key risks associated with these;
• agree the controls to address the risks; and
• set up a system to implement the decision, including regular feedback.
The guidance aims to reflect sound business practice, as well as to help companies comply with the
internal control requirements of the Code.
7.1.3 Responsibilities of directors, management and employees

The responsibilities of directors, management and employees to implement the Risk Guidance are as
follows.
Directors
• Ensure the design and implementation of appropriate risk management and internal control
systems
• Determine the nature and extent of the principal risks faced and the organisation’s risk appetite
• Ensure that appropriate culture and reward systems have been embedded throughout the
organisation
• Agree how the principal risks should be managed or mitigated
• Monitor and review the risk management and internal control systems, and the management’s
process of monitoring and reviewing
• Ensure sound internal and external information and communication processes are in place and
communicate with external stakeholders on risk management and internal control
HB2021

In addition, as part of the responsibilities outlined above, the board has responsibility for
determining the organisation’s going concern status and making related disclosures in the financial
statements.
Management
• Implement board policies on risk and control
• Provide the board with timely information
• Establish clear internal responsibilities and accountabilities at all levels of the organisation
Employees
• Acquire the necessary knowledge, skills, authority etc to establish, operate and monitor the
system of internal controls
7.1.4 Review of internal financial control

• Section 4 paragraph 28 of the Risk Guidance defines risk management and internal control
systems as “the policies, culture, organisation, behaviours, processes, systems and other aspects
of a company that:
• facilitate its effective and efficient operation by enabling it to assess current and emerging risks,
respond appropriately to risks and significant control failures and to safeguard its assets;
• help to reduce the likelihood and impact of poor judgement in decision-making; risk-taking that
exceeds the levels agreed by the board; human error; or control processes being deliberately
circumvented;
• help ensure the quality of internal and external reporting; and
• help ensure compliance with applicable laws and regulations, and also with internal policies with
respect to the conduct of business.”
• A risk management and internal control system is likely to include the following:
• Risk assessment – process to identify major risks and assess their impact
• Management and monitoring of risks – including controls processes (segregation of duties,
authorisation, etc)
• Information and communication systems – include monthly reporting, comparison with budgets
etc, as well as non-financial performance indicators
• Monitoring – procedures designed to ensure risks are monitored and the internal controls
continue to be effective (audit committees, internal audit, etc)
Note: These components should remind you of the five components of internal control identified in
ISA (UK) 315, Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement Through Understanding
the Entity and its Environment.
Many perceive the overall control environment as the key component of internal control. Its
importance can be seen in the following Worked example.
Context example: Control environment

Imagine a hotel group whose management prides itself on being ‘lean and mean’.
Head office puts in controls to match this obsession. Each hotel is a separate company. Every
manager has their targets. The group has budgets and is measured by those budgets. But the key
target by which the business is run is occupancy rates.
The managers make sure that the hotels are full by reducing the room rates quite substantially. These
low rates do not filter through the system until a long time later. So their management system leads
to a totally ineffective system where expectations are high and the important controls are not there at
all – because the control environment is inappropriate.
7.1.5 Disclosure of compliance with the Risk Guidance

The Risk Guidance recommends that the assessments and processes used to manage and monitor
risk should inform disclosures in the annual reports and financial statements. The disclosures
comprise the following:
• The principal risks facing the company and how they are managed or mitigated
HB2021

• Whether the directors have a reasonable expectation that the company will be able to continue in
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due
• The going concern basis of accounting
• Reporting on the review of the risk management and internal control system, and the main
features of the company’s risk management and internal control system in relation to the financial
reporting process
There is an expectation that the period used by the company in assessing whether the going concern
basis of accounting is appropriate will be significantly longer than 12 months.
7.1.6 Example narrative statement

The following is an extract from a narrative statement on internal control, taken from the corporate
governance statement of WH Smith as part of its Annual Report for 2017. WH Smith is a well-known
UK high street retailer, selling stationery and books and is listed on the FTSE in the UK. It is therefore
obliged to report on compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code. The full statement and
related annual report and financial statements can be found on WH Smith’s website at
www.whsmithplc.co.uk.
Corporate Governance Report (extract)
Matters reserved for the Board
The Board manages the Company through a formal schedule of matters reserved for its decision,
with its key focus being on creating long-term sustainable shareholder value. The significant matters
reserved for its decision include: the overall management of the Company; approval of the business
model and strategic plans including acquisitions and disposals; approval of the Company’s
commercial strategy and operating and capital expenditure budgets; approval of the Annual report
and financial statements, material agreements and nonrecurring projects; treasury and dividend
policy; control, audit and risk management; executive remuneration; and corporate social
responsibility.
The Board has a forward timetable of business to ensure that it allocates sufficient time to key areas.
The timetable is flexible enough for items to be added to any particular agenda as necessary. The
Board’s annual business includes Chief Executive’s reports, including business reports, financial
results, strategy and strategy updates, including in-depth sessions on specific areas of the business
and strategic initiatives, risk management, dividend policy, investor relations, health and safety,
Board evaluation, governance and compliance, communications and the Annual report.
Risk management
The Board has overall responsibility for the Group’s system of risk management and internal control
(including financial controls, controls in respect of the financial reporting process and operational
and compliance controls) and has conducted a detailed review of its effectiveness during the year, to
ensure that management has implemented its policies on risk and control. This review included
receiving reports from management, discussion, challenge, and assessment of the principal risks. No
significant failings or weaknesses were identified from this review. In addition, the Board also
received presentations from management on higher risk areas, for example, cyber risk, risks arising
from the process of exiting the European Union and growing international expansion. The Board has
established an organisational structure with clearly defined lines of responsibility which identify
matters requiring approval by the Board. Steps continue to be taken to embed internal control and
risk management further into the operations of the business and to deal with areas that require
improvement which come to the attention of management and the Board. Such a system is, however,
designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives, and can
only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss.
The Board confirms that there is an ongoing process for identifying, evaluating and managing
principal risks faced by the Group, including those risks relating to social, environmental and ethical
matters. The Board confirms that the processes have been in place for the year under review and up
to the date of this report and that they accord with the FRC Guidance on Risk Management, Internal
Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting (the ‘Risk Management and Internal Control
Guidance’). The processes are regularly reviewed by the Board. The principal risks and uncertainties
facing the Group can be found in the Strategic report on pages 20 to 24.
Further information on internal controls and risk management can be found in the Audit Committee
report on pages 33 to 36.
HB2021

7.2 International focus
As we discussed earlier, large international companies may be listed in the US and are required to
comply with the US Sarbanes–Oxley Act 2002 (SOX).
The key difference between SOX and the UK approach to corporate governance is that while the UK
Corporate Governance Code is principles-based, SOX is rules-based. By contrast to the UK’s ‘comply
or explain’ approach, most of the SOX regulations are enshrined in legislation, with penalties for non-
compliance.
One area of this Act that has sparked widespread debate has been section 404 relating to the
assessment of internal control. Under SOX, management and the auditors must report on the
adequacy of the company’s internal control over financial reporting. Working to implement,
document and test controls to the degree required to make an assertion that the controls are
adequate can be a costly and time-consuming process.
Annual reports for companies affected by SOX should contain internal control reports that state the
responsibility of management for establishing and maintaining an adequate internal control
structure and procedures for financial reporting. Annual reports should also contain an assessment
of the effectiveness of the internal control structure and procedures for financial reporting. Auditors
should report on this assessment.
Companies should also report whether they have adopted a code of conduct for senior financial
officers and the content of that code.
7.2.1 Example of internal control report under SOX

The following extract has been taken from the annual report for 31 December 2017 of Coca-Cola
Enterprises, Inc.
Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting

Management of the Company is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal
control over financial reporting as such term is defined in Rule 13a-15(f) under the Securities
Exchange Act of 1934 (“Exchange Act”). Management assessed the effectiveness of the
Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2017. In making this
assessment, management used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring
Organizations of the Treadway Commission (2013 Framework) (“COSO”) in Internal Control—
Integrated Framework. Management has excluded from the scope of its assessment of internal
control over financial reporting the operations and related assets of Coca-Cola Beverages Africa
Proprietary Limited (“CCBA”), which the Company began consolidating in October 2017. The
operations and related assets of CCBA were included in the consolidated financial statements of
The Coca-Cola Company and subsidiaries and constituted 8 percent of total assets and 8 percent
of consolidated net income as of and for the year ended December 31, 2017. Based on this
assessment, management believes that the Company maintained effective internal control over
financial reporting as of December 31, 2017.
The Company’s independent auditors, Ernst & Young LLP, a registered public accounting firm, are
appointed by the Audit Committee of the Company’s Board of Directors, subject to ratification by
our Company’s shareowners. Ernst & Young LLP has audited and reported on the consolidated
financial statements of The Coca-Cola Company and subsidiaries and the Company’s internal
control over financial reporting. The reports of the independent auditors are contained in this
annual report.
Source: The Coca Cola Company (2018). ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)
OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 (Online). Available at: https://investors.coca-
colacompany.com/filings-reports/all-sec-filings/content/0000021344-18-000008/0000021344-18-
000008.pdf [Accessed 12 October 2021].
The report above can be contrasted with the compliance statement in section 7.1.6. Under SOX, a
positive statement that management believes the company maintained effective internal control is
needed. For the UK listed company, the disclosure is in relation to the existence of an ongoing
process for identifying, evaluating and managing risks and a summary of the process for reviewing
internal control effectiveness and, where necessary, addressing control weaknesses.
HB2021

8 Evaluation of corporate governance mechanisms
Section overview
• The auditor is required to review the statement of compliance with the UK Corporate Governance
Code made by directors.
• This review includes the statement on control effectiveness.
• The auditor will need to perform procedures to obtain appropriate evidence to support the
compliance statement made by the company.
8.1 Auditors‘ responsibilities

As we have already seen, companies are required to provide disclosure regarding compliance with
the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code). The Stock Exchange Listing Rules
section LR 9.8.10 R require auditors to review parts of the corporate governance statement which
relate to certain provisions in the Code.
These include sections which deal with the following matters:
Listing Rule Areas covered by the UK Corporate Governance Code

reference
LR 9.8.6 R(3) The longer term viability of the entity, including its going concern status
and any material uncertainty (provisions 30 and 31)
LR 9.8.6 R(5) The facility to deal with workforce concerns (provision 6)

The existence, members and terms of reference of the audit committee
(provisions 24 and 25)
Disclosures within the annual report related to the audit committee’s work
and the arrangements for both internal and external audit (provision 26)
The responsibilities of the board for presenting the company’s position,
performance, strategy and risks as well as an evaluation of how the
company deals with risk management and internal control (provisions 27,
28 and 29)
The auditor’s report should then include details of any non-compliance with these requirements.
ISA (UK) 720 (Revised November 2019) , The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other Information
treats the corporate governance statement as statutory other information ie, “those documents or
reports that are required to be prepared and issued by the entity … in relation to which the auditor is
required to report publicly in accordance with law or regulation” (ISA (UK) 720: para 12d). In the UK,
this statutory other information includes the directors’ report, strategic report and the separate
corporate governance statement. This ISA requires that the auditor’s report always includes a
separate section headed ‘Other Information’ and this is covered in more detail in Chapter 8.
The corporate governance disclosures necessary in the auditor’s report are therefore as follows:
• a separate section headed “Corporate Governance Statement” for entities that report on how they
have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code
• a description of the auditor’s responsibilities for considering how materially consistent the
following items are with auditor’s knowledge of the company from having undertaken the audit:
– the directors’ assessment of going concern and the long term viability of the company
– the directors’ statement that the annual report is fair, balanced and understandable
– the directors’ confirmation of current and emerging risks and how they are to be managed
– the review of the effectiveness of the company’s risk management and internal control systems
– disclosures about the work of the audit committee
HB2021

• a conclusion on the material consistency of these governance items with the auditor’s knowledge
(ISA (UK) 720: paras. 22-3 and 22-4)
The Bulletin: Illustrative Auditor’s Reports on United Kingdom Private Sector Financial Statements
(FRC, March 2020) includes example wording which the auditor will include when a material
misstatement of the other information, arising from an inconsistency between the other information
and the financial statements, is identified.
In order to conduct the review the auditor will need to obtain audit evidence to support the
compliance statement. Bulletin 2006/5 The Combined Code on Corporate Governance:
Requirements of Auditors Under the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority identifies the
following general procedures as those usually performed by the auditor:
(a) Reviewing the minutes of the meetings of the board of directors, and of relevant board
committees
(b) Reviewing supporting documents prepared for the board of directors or board committees that
are relevant to those matters specified for review by the auditor
(c) Making enquiries of certain directors (such as the chair of the board of directors and the chair of
relevant board committees) and the company secretary
(d) Attending meetings of the audit committee at which the annual report and accounts, including
the statement of compliance, are considered and approved for submission to the board of
directors
Notes
1 Bulletin 2006/5 predates the introduction of the UK Corporate Governance Code and therefore
still refers to the Combined Code, its predecessor.
2 The guidance in Bulletin 2006/5 on directors’ statements on going concern has been replaced by
guidance in Bulletin 2009/4 Developments in Corporate Governance Affecting the
Responsibilities of Auditors of UK Companies (see below).
3 These Bulletins have not been updated to reflect the changes made to the ISAs (UK) revised in
June 2016 and beyond.
8.2 Internal control effectiveness

The Code requires that the board should, at least annually, conduct a review of the effectiveness of
the company’s system of internal controls and report to shareholders that they have done so.
Bulletin 2006/5 considers what auditors should do in response to this statement on internal controls
by the directors.
The guidance states that the auditors should concentrate on the review carried out by the board.
The objective of the auditors’ work is to assess whether the company’s summary of the process that
the board has adopted in reviewing the effectiveness of the system of internal control is supported
by the documentation prepared by the directors and reflects that process.
The auditors should make appropriate enquiries and review the statement made by the board in the
annual report and the supporting documentation.
Auditors will have gained some understanding of controls due to their work on the accounts;
however, what they are required to do by auditing standards is narrower in scope than the review
performed by the directors.
Auditors are therefore not expected to assess whether the directors’ review covers all risks and
controls, and whether the risks are satisfactorily addressed by the internal controls. To avoid
misunderstanding on the scope of the auditors’ role, the Bulletin recommends that the following
wording be used in the auditor’s report.
“We are not required to consider whether the board’s statements on internal control cover all risks
and controls, or form an opinion on the effectiveness of the company’s corporate governance
procedures or its risk and control procedures.”
(Source: Bulletin (2006/5), para. 37)
The Bulletin also points out that it is particularly important for auditors to communicate quickly to the
directors any material weaknesses they find, because of the requirements for the directors to make a
statement on internal control.
HB2021

The directors are required to consider the material internal control aspects of any significant
problems disclosed in the accounts. Auditors’ work on this is the same as on other aspects of the
statement; the auditors are not required to consider whether the internal control processes will
remedy the problem. The auditors may report by exception if problems arise, such as:
• the board‘s summary of the process of review of internal control effectiveness does not reflect the
auditors‘ understanding of that process;
• the processes that deal with material internal control aspects of significant problems do not
reflect the auditors‘ understanding of those processes; or
• the board has not made an appropriate disclosure if it has failed to conduct an annual review, or
the disclosure made is not consistent with the auditors’ understanding.
The Bulletin has not been updated to reflect changes made to the ISAs (UK) revised in June 2016
and beyond.
8.3 Going concern

The Listing Rules require the directors of certain listed companies to include in the annual financial
report a statement that the business is a going concern. Bulletin 2009/4 Developments in Corporate
Governance Affecting the Responsibilities of Auditors of UK Companies sets out the auditor’s review
responsibilities with respect to this statement as follows:
• Reviewing the documentation prepared by or for the directors which explains the basis of the
directors’ conclusion with respect to going concern
• Evaluating the consistency of the directors’ going concern statement with the auditor’s
knowledge obtained in the course of the audit
• Assessing whether the directors’ statement meets the disclosure requirements of the FRC
guidance
The Bulletin also states that where the annual report includes a corporate governance statement the
auditor is required to form an opinion as to whether the information given is consistent with the
Note: ISA (UK) 570 (Revised September 2019), Going Concern requires that for entities where the
directors make a statement in the financial statements regarding going concern as part of their
application of the UK Corporate Governance Code, the auditor must report by exception in a
separate section of the audit report under the heading ‘Conclusions related to Going Concern’
whether the auditor has anything material to add or draw attention to in relation to this statement.
(ISA 570 is covered in detail in Chapter 8.)
8.3.1 Guidance on going concern

In March 2011, the FRC announced the launch of an inquiry led by Lord Sharman to identify lessons
for companies and auditors addressing going concern and liquidity risk. In June 2012 the Sharman
Inquiry Final Report and Recommendations was issued. The panel made five recommendations. The
key points are as follows:
• The FRC should take a more systematic approach to learning lessons relevant to its functions
when significant companies fail or suffer significant financial or economic distress but nonetheless
survive.
• The FRC should seek to engage with the IASB and the IAASB to agree a common international
understanding of the purposes of the going concern assessment and financial statement
disclosures about going concern.
• The FRC should review the Guidance for Directors to ensure that going concern assessment is
integrated with the directors’ business planning and risk management processes and:
– includes a focus on both solvency and liquidity risks, whatever the business;
– may be more qualitative and longer term in outlook in relation to solvency risk than in relation
to liquidity risk; and
– includes stress tests both in relation to solvency and liquidity risks that are undertaken with an
appropriate level of prudence. Special consideration should be given to the impact of risks that
could cause significant damage to stakeholders, bearing in mind the directors’ duties and
responsibilities under the Companies Act 2006.
HB2021

• The FRC should move away from a model where disclosures about going concern risks are only
highlighted when there are significant doubts about the entity’s survival.
• The FRC should consider inclusion of an explicit statement in the auditor’s report as to whether
the auditor has anything to add or emphasise in relation to the disclosures made by the directors
about the robustness of the process and its outcome, having considered the directors’ going
concern assessment process.
These recommendations were reflected in the 2014 revision of the UK Corporate Governance Code,
which we discussed earlier in this chapter and in the FRC document Risk Management, Internal
Control and Related Business and Financial Reporting. Appendix A sets out guidance for directors for
assessing whether to adopt the going concern basis of accounting, assessing whether there are
material uncertainties and reporting issues. In particular it states the following:
• The threshold for departing from the going concern basis of accounting is very high.
• Directors must determine whether there are any material uncertainties that might cast significant
doubt on the continuing use of the going concern basis.
• To be useful disclosures of material uncertainties must explicitly identify them as such.
In April 2016, the FRC issued Guidance on the Going Concern Basis of Accounting and Reporting on
Solvency and Liquidity Risk. This provides guidance to directors of companies that do not apply the
UK Corporate Governance Code. This states the following:
• All companies must assess the appropriateness of the going concern basis of accounting and
document the assessment in sufficient detail.
• Directors should consider a period of at least 12 months from the date the financial statements
are authorised for issue.
• Directors should consider threats to solvency and liquidity.
• The strategic report must include a description of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the
company.
Note: The Companies Act requires all companies that are not small or micro to prepare a strategic
report. This must contain a fair review of the company’s business and a description of the principal
risks and uncertainties it faces.
The process of reviewing the disclosures made (or even the absence of such disclosures) requires
good judgement to make sure the spirit of the UK Code is being adhered to. Do you think such
disclosures are the most effective way of informing the users of the financial statements?
9 Communication between auditors and those

charged with governance
Section overview
• Auditors have to communicate various audit-related matters to those charged with governance.
• This section summarises and builds on the important points covered by the Audit and Assurance
paper at Professional Level.
• In particular there have been some recent revisions to ISA 260 relating to the audit of entities
reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code.
HB2021

9.1 Communication during the audit
Two standards are relevant here:
• ISA (UK) 260 (Revised November 2019), Communication With Those Charged With Governance
• ISA (UK) 265, Communicating Deficiencies in Internal Control to Those Charged With Governance
and Management
The revisions to ISA 260 include the need to consider the implications of ISA (UK) 701 (Revised
January 2020), Communicating Key Audit Matters in the Independent Auditor’s Report and enhanced
auditor reporting for all public interest entities (PIEs) and listed companies.
Definition
Governance: The term used to describe the role of persons with responsibility for overseeing the
strategic direction of the entity and obligations related to the accountability of the entity. This
includes overseeing the financial reporting process. Those charged with governance may include
management only when it performs such functions. (In the UK, those charged with governance
include the directors (executive and non-executive) and members of the audit committee. In the UK,
management will not normally include non-executive directors.)
9.1.1 Objectives
ISA (UK) 260 states that the objectives of the auditor are to (ISA (UK) 260.9):
(a) communicate clearly with those charged with governance the responsibilities of the auditor in
relation to the financial statement audit and an overview of the planned scope and timing of the
audit;
(b) obtain from those charged with governance information relevant to the audit;
(c) provide those charged with governance with timely observations arising from the audit that are
significant and relevant to their responsibility to oversee the financial reporting process; and
(d) promote effective two-way communication between the auditor and those charged with
governance.
The auditor must communicate audit matters of governance interest arising from the audit of
financial statements with those charged with governance of an entity. The scope of the ISA (UK) is
limited to matters that come to the auditor’s attention as a result of the audit; the auditors are not
required to perform procedures to identify matters of governance interest.
The auditor must determine the relevant persons who are charged with governance and with whom
audit matters of governance interest are communicated.
The auditors may communicate with the whole board, the supervisory board or the audit committee
depending on the governance structure of the organisation. To avoid misunderstandings, the
engagement letter should explain that auditors will only communicate matters that come to their
attention as a result of the performance of the audit. It should state that the auditors are not required
to design procedures for the purpose of identifying matters of governance interest.
The letter may also do the following:
• Describe the form which any communications on governance matters will take
• Identify the relevant persons with whom such communications will be made
• Identify any specific matters of governance interest which it has agreed are to be communicated
Matters to be communicated
Matters would include:
The auditor’s Including that:

responsibilities in • the auditor is responsible for forming and expressing an opinion on the
relation to the financial statements; and
financial
statements • the audit does not relieve management or those charged with
governance of their responsibilities.
HB2021

Planned scope and Including:
timing of the audit • how the audit proposes to address the significant risks of material
misstatement from fraud or error;
• how the auditor plans to address areas of higher assessed risks of
material misstatement;
• the auditor’s approach to internal control;
• application of materiality;
• the extent to which the auditor will use an auditor’s expert;
• when ISA (UK) 701 applies, the auditor’s preliminary views about matters
that may be areas of significant auditor attention in the audit and
therefore may be key audit matters; and
• the auditor’s planned approach to significant changes in the applicable
reporting framework, environment financial condition or activities.
When the auditor is required or decides to communicate key audit matters
ISA (UK) 260 requires that the overview of the planned scope and timing of
the audit must also include communicating about the most significant
assessed risks of material misstatement identified by the auditor.
Significant findings Including:

from the audit • the auditor’s views about accounting policies, accounting estimates and
financial statement disclosures;
• significant difficulties, if any, encountered during the audit (eg, delays in
provision of required information, brief time in which to complete audit,
unavailability of expected information);
• significant matters arising during the audit that were discussed or subject
to correspondence with management;
• written representations the auditor is requesting;
• circumstances that affect the form and content of the auditor’s report;
and
• other significant matters, including material misstatements or
inconsistencies in other information that have been corrected.
Entities that are required or choose to report on the application of the UK
Corporate Governance Code must communicate to the audit committee
information relevant to the board and the audit committee in fulfilling their
responsibilities under the Code.
For audits of the financial statements of public interest entities the auditor is
required to submit an additional report in writing to the audit committee
explaining the results of the audit and information including:
• a declaration of independence;
• identity of key audit partners;
• a description of the scope and timing of the audit;
• a description of the methodology used;
• the quantitative level of materiality applied;
• events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability
to continue as a going concern;
• significant deficiencies in the control system; and
• significant difficulties encountered and significant matters arising from
the audit.
HB2021

Auditor In the case of listed entities matters include:
independence • a statement that relevant ethical requirements regarding independence
have been complied with;
• all relationships (including total fees for audit and non-audit services)
which may reasonably be thought to bear on independence; and
• the related safeguards that have been applied to eliminate/reduce
identified threats to independence.
In the case of public interest entities, the auditor must:
• confirm to the audit committee annually in writing that the firm and
partners, senior managers and managers, conducting the audit are
independent; and
• discuss with the audit committee the threats to the auditor’s
independence and the safeguards applied.
9.1.2 Communication process

The auditor must communicate with those charged with governance the form, timing and expected
general content of communications.
The communication process will vary with the circumstances, including:
• the size and governance structure of the entity;
• how those charged with governance operate; and
• the auditor’s view of the significance of the matters to be communicated.
For example, reports of relatively minor matters to a small client may be best handled orally via a
meeting or telephone conversation.
Before communicating matters with those charged with governance the auditor may discuss them
with management, unless that is inappropriate. For example, it would not be appropriate to discuss
questions of management’s competence or integrity with management.
Written representation should be sought from those charged with governance that explains their
reasons for not correcting misstatements brought to their attention by the auditor.
9.1.3 Adequacy of the communication process

The auditor must evaluate whether the two-way communication with those charged with governance
has been adequate for the purpose of the audit and, if not, must consider the effect on the
assessment of the risks of material misstatement and the ability to obtain sufficient, appropriate
evidence.
Interactive question 2: Reporting responsibilities

In each of the cases listed below identify to whom the auditor would initially report.
(1) The auditor has obtained evidence that the operations manager has committed a fraud against
the company.
(2) The auditor has obtained evidence that the finance director has committed a fraud against the
company.
(3) Disagreement with an accounting policy.
(4) The auditor is suspicious that the board of directors are involved in money laundering activities.
9.1.4 Reporting deficiencies in internal control

Auditors may also issue a report on control deficiencies to management. These reports were a key
element in your earlier studies in auditing.
HB2021

ISA (UK) 265, Communicating Deficiencies in Internal Control to Those Charged with Governance and
Management specifies a threshold of significance at which deficiencies in internal control should be
communicated to those charged with governance.
Significant deficiencies in internal control are those which, in the auditor’s professional judgement,
are of sufficient importance to merit the attention of those charged with governance.
Matters that the auditor may consider in deciding whether deficiencies are significant include the
following:
• Likelihood of the deficiencies leading to material misstatements in future
• Susceptibility to fraud of related assets and liabilities
• Subjectivity and complexity of determining estimated amounts, such as fair value estimates
• The financial statement amounts exposed to the deficiencies
• The volume of activity in the account balance or class of transactions
• The importance of the controls to the financial reporting process
• The cause and frequency of the exceptions detected
• The interaction of the deficiency with other deficiencies in internal control
Recap of key qualities of a report to management
(a) It should not include language that conflicts with the opinion expressed in the audit report.
(b) It should state that the accounting and internal control system were considered only to the
extent necessary to determine the auditing procedures to report on the financial statements and
not to determine the adequacy of internal control for management purposes or to provide
assurances on the accounting and internal control systems.
(c) It will state that it only discusses deficiencies in internal control which have come to the auditor’s
attention as a result of the audit and that other deficiencies in internal control may exist.
(d) It should also include a statement that the communication is provided for use only by
management (or another specific named party).
(e) The auditors will usually ascertain the actions taken, including the reasons for those suggestions
rejected.
(f) The auditors may encourage management to respond to the auditor’s comments, in which case
any response can be included in the report.
The auditor is required to communicate their findings from the course of the audit – it is imperative
that the requirements of the standards are followed or the firm could face significant problems.
HB2021

Summary
Main areas of:

− Shareholders − rights of − PCAOB established
− Shareholders − treatment of − Company requirements −
− Stakeholders audit committees etc
− Disclosure/transparency − Internal controls
− Board responsibility − Reporting (including
director affirmation)
Rules-based not
G20/OECD Principles Sarbanes–Oxley Act
principles-based
International impact
Internal control
Corporate governance and risk FRC
management
UK Stewardship Associated UK Corporate Governance Code

Code: role of guidance
institutional investors
Main Disclosure Auditor's Main

sections requirements responsibilities concepts
Listed companies − Fairness

Corporate Review and report
− Transparency
governance non-compliance re:
− Independence
report − Respective
− Probity
responsibilities
of directors and − Responsibility
− Board leadership and company purpose
auditors − Accountability
− Division of responsibilities
− Effectiveness of − Reputation
− Composition, succession and evaluation
internal controls − Judgement
− Audit, risk and internal control
− Audit committee − Scepticism
− Remuneration
provisions − Innovation
− Going concern
− Directors'
remuneration
HB2021

1. Can you explain what good and bad systems of corporate governance look like?
2. Can you explain the concepts that underpin sound corporate governance?
3. Do you understand what the UK Corporate Governance Code includes and how it expects
UK companies to apply it? Can you explain how this works in other countries?
4. Do you understand the various roles played by board members including non-executive
directors?
5. Are you aware of current developments in governance, such as the Stewardship Code, the
guidance on risk management and internal control and the various forms of
communication required to satisfy best practice?
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
SPV You may be required to assess the governance practices in place across an
organisation, so this question should help you learn how this can be
achieved.
Hammond Brothers Further scenario practice, this time focusing on remuneration issues and
matters of a control nature.
Couvert requirement Good practice of how governance could be tested in the exam.
(2)
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 Board leadership and company purpose

• Entrepreneurial leadership – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle A
• Purpose, values and strategy – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle B
• Resources – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle C
• Engagement with shareholders – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle D
• Engagement with the workforce – UK Corporate Governance Code PrincipleE
2 Division of responsibilities
• The chair – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle F
• Balance within the board – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle G
• Non-executives – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle H
• Support – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle I
3 Composition, succession and evaluation

• Appointment criteria – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle J
• Skills, experience and knowledge – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle K
• Evaluation – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle L
4 Audit, risk and internal control

• Audit and financial reporting – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle M
• Position and prospects – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle N
• Risk and internal control – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle O
5 Remuneration
• Alignment with long term strategy – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle P
• Formal and transparent policies – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle Q
• Judgement and discretion – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle R
6 Other references
Diageo (2020) Strategic Report [Online]. Available at:
https://www.diageo.com/PR1346/aws/media/11304/strategic-report.pdf [Accessed 9 June 2021]
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 SPV
SPV is listed on the stock exchange of a central European country. The company manufactures a wide
range of pharmaceutical products, including modern drugs used in preventing and treating
diseases. SPV has three factories where drugs are produced and one research and development
facility.
The board of directors comprises the chair/CEO, three executive and two non-executive directors
(NEDs). Separate audit and remuneration committees are maintained, although the chair has a seat
on both those committees. The NEDs are appointed for two and usually three consecutive four-year
terms of office before being required to resign. The internal auditor currently reports to the board
(rather than the financial accountant) on a monthly basis, with internal audit reports normally being
actioned by the board.
There have recently been problems with the development of a new research and development
facility. On a number of occasions the project has fallen behind schedule and the costs have been
much greater than expected. Because of developments that have taken place elsewhere in the
pharmaceuticals industry while the project was being completed, concern has been expressed that
the facility cannot now represent value for money. A couple of large institutional investors have
raised concerns about this, and have indicated their intention to raise the issue at the annual AGM
and possibly vote against the accounts.
Throughout the project one of the non-executive directors criticised the way the project had been
approved and monitored. She claimed that the board had been led by the senior managers in the
research and development department and had acted as no more than a rubber stamp for what they
wanted to do. She is threatening to resign at the AGM on the grounds that the board is failing to
function effectively and she does not wish to be held responsible for decisions on which she has had
no effective input. As a result, the other non-executive director has also raised questions about the
way the board is functioning.
Requirements
1.1 Explain the main responsibilities of the board, identifying the ways in which SPV’s board
appears to have failed to fulfil its responsibilities.
1.2 Evaluate the structures for corporate governance within SPV, recommending any amendments
you consider necessary to those structures.
2 Hammond Brothers
Hammond Brothers, a road haulage company, is likely to be seeking a stock exchange listing in a few
years’ time. In preparation for this, the directors are seeking to understand certain key
recommendations of the major international corporate governance codes, since they realise that
they will have to strengthen their corporate governance arrangements. In particular the directors
require information about what the governance reports have achieved in:
• defining the role of non-executive directors;
• improving disclosure in financial accounts;
• strengthening the role of the auditor; and
• protecting shareholder interests.
Previously the directors have received the majority of their income from the company in the form of
salary and have decided salary levels among themselves. They realise that they will have to establish
a remuneration committee but are unsure of its role and what it will need to function effectively. The
directors have worked together well, if informally; there is a lack of formal reporting and control
systems both at the board and lower levels of management. There is also currently no internal audit
department.
HB2021

The directors are considering whether it will be worthwhile to employ a consultant to advise on how
the company should be controlled, focusing on the controls with which the board will be most
involved.
Requirements
2.1 Explain the purpose and role of the remuneration committee.
2.2 Explain what is meant by organisation and management controls and recommend the main
organisation and management controls that Hammond Brothers should operate.
this chapter.
HB2021


1.1 Benefits of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code)
Shareholders
At its heart, the Code places great emphasis on the importance of sound governance that
allows shareholders to assess how well directors have performed and what value they have
created. There are numerous requirements to engage with shareholders (such as at formal
general meetings or via the senior independent director) and policies such as those related to
remuneration require alignment with shareholder interests.
Internal controls
Another important area for shareholders is the emphasis placed on directors monitoring and
assessing internal controls in the business on a regular basis. While it is a statutory requirement
that directors safeguard the investment of the shareholders by instituting internal controls, this
additional emphasis on quality should increase shareholders’ confidence in the business.
Directors’ re-election
The requirements of the Code make the directors more accessible to the shareholders. They
are subject to re-election every year. They are also asked to make disclosure in the financial
statements about their responsibilities in relation to preparing financial statements and going
concern.
Audit committee
Lastly, some people would argue that the existence of an audit committee will lead to
shareholders having greater confidence in the reporting process of an entity.
Other users
The key advantage to other users is likely to lie in the increased emphasis on internal controls,
as this will assist the company in operating smoothly and increasing visibility of operations,
which will be of benefit to customers, suppliers and employees.
1.2 Voluntary code
Adherence to the UK Corporate Governance Code is not a statutory necessity, although it is
possible that in the future such a Code might become part of company law.
Advantages
The key merit of the Code being voluntary for most companies is that it is flexible. Companies
can review the Code and make use of any aspects which would benefit their business.
If they adopt aspects of the Code, they can disclose to shareholders what is being done to
ensure good corporate governance, and what aspects of the Code are not being followed, with
reasons.
This flexibility is important, for there will be a cost of implementing such a Code, and this cost
might outweigh the benefit for small or owner-managed businesses.
Disadvantages
Critics would argue that a voluntary code allows companies that should comply with the Code
to get away with non-compliance unchallenged.
They would also argue that the type of disclosure made to shareholders about degrees of
compliance could be confusing and misleading to shareholders and exacerbate the problems
that the Code is trying to guard against.
HB2021

Initial report
(1) The auditor would report the matter to those charged with governance (ISA 260/240).
(2) The auditor would report the matter to any other member of the board, for example the chief
executive or the chair. Where there is doubt about the integrity of those charged with
governance as a whole, the auditor will need to seek legal advice as to the appropriate course of
action. This may include reporting to third parties eg, police or a regulatory authority (ISA 240).
(3) This would be reported to and discussed with those charged with governance (ISA 260). If the
disagreement is material and is not changed, the auditors will also report to the shareholders via
the modified opinion in the audit report.
(4) The auditor should report suspicions of money laundering activities to the firm’s Money
Laundering Compliance Principal (MLCP). The MLCP will then decide on the next appropriate
step which may involve making disclosure to the National Crime Agency.
HB2021

1 SPV
1.1 Role of board
Each individual board of directors will take on particular tasks peculiar to their own company
and these will be different from company to company. However, there are three key tasks that
will be addressed by all boards of directors to one degree or another.
Strategic management
The development of the strategy of the company will almost certainly be led by the board of
directors. At the very least they will be responsible for setting the context for the development
of strategy, defining the nature and focus of the operations of the business and determining
the mission statement and values of the business.
Strategic development will also consist of assessing the opportunities and threats facing the
business, considering, developing and screening the strategic proposals and selecting and
implementing appropriate strategies. Some or all of this more detailed strategic development
may be carried out by the board, but also may be delegated to senior management with
board supervision.
In the case of SPV, the board appears to have had inadequate involvement in the development
of strategy. While the board may use advice from expert managers, the board should also have
challenged what they provided and carried out its own analysis; possible threats from rivals
appear to have been inadequately considered.
Control
The board of directors is ultimately responsible for the monitoring and control of the activities
of the company. They are responsible for the financial records of the company and that the
financial statements are drawn up using appropriate accounting policies and show a true and
fair view. They are also responsible for the internal controls within the business that ensure the
financial information is accurate and the assets are safeguarded.
The board will also be responsible for the direction of the company and ensuring that the
managers and employees work towards the strategic objectives that have been set. This can
be done by the use of plans, budgets, quality and performance indicators and benchmarking.
Again what has happened with the projects appears to indicate board failings. It seems that
the board failed to spot inadequacies in the accounting information that managers were
receiving about the new project, and did not ensure that action was taken by managers to
control the overruns in time and the excessive costs that the accounting information may have
identified. The board also seems to have failed to identify inadequacies in the information that
it was receiving itself.
Shareholder and market relations
The board of directors has an important role externally to the company. The board is
responsible for raising the profile of the company and promoting the company’s interests in
its own and possibly other marketplaces.
The board has an important role in managing its relationships with its shareholders. The board
is responsible for maintaining relationships and dialogue with all shareholders, plus
stakeholders as well. As well as the formal dialogue at the AGM many boards of directors have
a variety of informal methods of keeping shareholders informed of developments and
proposals for the company. Methods include informal meetings, company websites, social
reports and environmental reports.
The institutional shareholders’ intention to vote against the accounts is normally seen as a last
resort measure, if other methods of exercising their influence and communicating their
concerns have failed. This indicates that the board has failed to communicate effectively with
the institutional shareholders.
HB2021

1.2 Suggestions for corporate governance
Composition of the board
Corporate governance requirements normally indicate that the board of directors should
comprise equal numbers of executive and non-executive directors. By having only two non-
executive directors, SPV may not be following requirements. SPV needs to appoint at least one
more non-executive director to the board.
There is also a lack of any recent or relevant financial experience amongst the non-executive
directors. Corporate governance regulations normally suggest that at least one NED has
financial experience so they can effectively monitor the financial information that the board is
reviewing. Making the new appointee an accountant would help to fulfil this requirement.
Role of chair/CEO
Corporate governance regulations normally require that the roles of the chair (the person
running the board) and the CEO (the person running the company) are split. The reason for
this is to ensure that no one person has too much influence over the running of the company.
The roles of chair and CEO at SPV should be split at the earliest opportunity.
Appointment and nomination committee
There does not appear to be a nomination committee for addressing succession and
appointment issues. Other issues that are not clear with the current structures relate to the
function and composition of SPV’s existing committees. Taking the UK Corporate Governance
Code as an example, the chair of the board is not normally allowed to sit on the audit
committee but they can sit on the remuneration committee provided they are independent
and do not chair the committee. SPV needs to ensure that this requirement is being followed.
Service contracts
Service contracts for NEDs should be for a specified term. Any term beyond nine years should
be subject to rigorous review and should take into account the need for progressive refreshing
of the board. The duration of contracts is limited to ensure that payments for early termination
of contracts are not excessive. The reappointment provisions apply to ensure that new NEDs
are being appointed as directors on a regular basis. NEDs who have been on the board for a
few years may become too familiar with the operations of the company and therefore may not
provide the necessary external independent check that they are supposed to do.
Service contracts need to be limited and any over nine years for NEDs (and one year for
executives) should be reviewed.
Internal audit
The internal audit department usually does not report to the financial accountant, as that
person may have a vested interest in not taking any action on the reports, especially where
reports are critical of the accountant. In that sense, reporting to the board is acceptable.
However, the board as a whole may not have the time to review internal audit reports and may
be tempted to ignore them if they are critical of the board itself. Corporate governance
regulations indicate that the internal audit department should report to the audit committee
with reports being forwarded to the board. This ensures that the report is heard by the NEDs,
who can then ensure that internal audit recommendations are implemented where
appropriate by the board.
In SPV, the internal auditor needs to report to the audit committee, for reasons already
mentioned above.
2 Hammond Brothers
2.1 Purpose and role of remuneration committee
The purpose of the remuneration committee is to provide a mechanism for determining the
remuneration packages of executive directors. The scope of the review should include not
only salaries and bonuses, but also share options, pension rights and compensation for loss of
office.
The committee’s remit may also include issues such as director appointments and succession
planning, as these are connected with remuneration levels.
HB2021

Constitution of remuneration committee
Most codes recommend that the remuneration committee should consist entirely of non-
executive directors with no personal financial interest other than as shareholders in the matters
to be decided. In addition, there should be no conflict of interests arising from remuneration
committee members and executive directors holding directorships in common in other
companies. Within Hammond, there is a requirement to first appoint NEDs and then ensure
that the remuneration committee is comprised of these individuals. The current system of the
directors deciding their own salary is clearly inappropriate; there is no independent check on
whether the salary levels are appropriate for the level of experience of the directors or their
salary compared with other similar companies.
Functioning of remuneration committee
The UK Corporate Governance Code recommends that remuneration policy should be long
term in nature and clearly linked to the successful delivery of strategy. The committee should
pay particular attention to the setting of performance-related elements of remuneration.
Within Hammond, the vast majority of remuneration is based on salary; there is little element
of performance-related pay. Governance guidelines indicate that remuneration should be
balanced between basic salary and bonuses. Hammond’s remuneration committee needs to
increase the bonus element of remuneration to focus directors more onto improving the
performance of the company. However, conditions for receipt of performance-related
remuneration should be designed to promote the long-term success of the company.
Consideration should be given to the possibility of reclaiming variable components in
exceptional circumstances of misstatement or misconduct.
Reporting of remuneration committee
A description of the work of this committee should form part of the annual report. This
description should set out company policy on remuneration and give details of the packages
for individual directors and their rationale. The report should describe the extent (if any) of
shareholder engagement with the company’s remuneration policy and workforce
engagement about how executive remuneration is aligned with the wider company pay policy.
2.2 Main concerns of board
The board’s principal concern is with controls that can be classified as organisation or
management.
Organisation controls
Organisation controls are designed to ensure everyone is aware of their responsibilities, and
provide a framework within which lower level controls can operate. Key organisation controls
include the following.
(1) Structure
The board should establish an appropriate structure for the organisation and delegate
appropriate levels of authority to different grades.
(2) Internal accounting system
The board should ensure that the system is providing accurate and relevant information on a
regular basis. Good quality information will enable the board to assess whether targets are
being met or losses are possible.
(3) Communication
Communication of organisation policies and values through manuals and other guidance to
staff is essential. It is not clear from the scenario whether Hammond actually has any of these
controls in place; however, from the relatively informal basis in which the company has been
run, it is unlikely that detailed controls have been implemented.
HB2021

Management controls
Management controls are designed to ensure that the business can be effectively monitored.
Key management controls include the following.
(1) Monitoring of business risks on a regular basis
This should include assessment of the potential financial impact of contingencies.
(2) Monitoring of financial information
Management should be alert for significant variations in results between branches or divisions
or significant changes in results.
(3) Use of audit committee
The committee should actively liaise with the external and internal auditors, and report on any
deficiencies discovered. The committee should also regularly review the overall structure of
internal control, and investigate any serious deficiencies found.
(4) Use of internal audit
Internal audit should be used as an independent check on the operation of detailed controls in
the operating departments. Internal audit’s work can be targeted as appropriate towards areas
of the business where there is a risk of significant loss should controls fail. As there is no
internal audit department at present, the board will need to establish one and define its remit.
The overall lack of controls is concerning, given the objective to obtain a listing. The directors
will need to implement the recommendations of the UK Corporate Governance Code to
ensure that a listing can be obtained.
HB2021

Chapter 5
The statutory audit: planning

and risk assessment
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Overview of the audit process
2 Audit planning
3 Professional scepticism
4 Understanding the entity
5 Business risk model
6 Audit risk
7 Creative accounting
8 Materiality
9 Responding to assessed risks
10 Other audit methodologies
11 Information technology and risk assessment
12 Big data
13 Data analytics, robotic process automation (RPA) and artificial
intelligence (AI)
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Evaluate and explain current and emerging issues in auditing including developments in the use
of technology (eg, impact of Task Force on Climate-related Financial disclosures, big data, data
analytics and artificial intelligence)
• Identify the components of risk and how these components may interrelate
• Appraise the entity and the, potentially complex, economic environment within which it operates
as a means of identifying and evaluating the risk of material misstatement
• Identify and appraise the risks, including analysing qualitative and quantitative data using data
analytics software, arising from, or affecting, a potentially complex set of business processes and
circumstances and assess their implications for the engagement
• Identify significant business risks (including those arising from cyber security and technological
advances including cloud computing, cryptocurrencies and robotic process automation) and
assess their potential impact upon the financial statements and the audit engagement
• Evaluate the impact of risk and materiality in preparing the audit plan, for example the nature,
timing and extent of audit procedures
• Evaluate the components of audit risk for a specified scenario using data analytics software when
appropriate, including the interactions of inherent risk, control risk and detection risk, considering
their complementary and compensatory nature
• Interrogate an organisation’s accounting records using audit data analytics software to identify
audit risks and communicate with the audit team
• Show professional scepticism in assessing the risk of material misstatement, having regard to the
reliability of management
• Develop and appraise, based upon planning procedures, an appropriate audit strategy and
detailed audit plan or extracts
• Analyse and evaluate the control environment for an entity based on an understanding of the
entity, its operations and its processes
• Evaluate an entity’s processes for identifying, assessing and responding to business and
operating risks as they impact on the financial statements
• Explain and evaluate the relationship between audit risk and audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 10(c), 11(a)–(e), 11(g), 11(h), 11(j), 11(k), 12(a), 12(b),
14(a)
5

of this chapter.

1 Overview of the Approach This diagram will N/A

audit process Use the diagram to help you to
A quick reminder of introduce the rest of remember where
the various stages of this chapter. you are in the audit
the audit so you can process and what (if
Stop and think anything) you may
track your progress
through this part of How much of this do still require for
the Workbook. you remember from successful
your previous completion.
auditing studies?
HB2021

2 Audit planning Approach Many questions are N/a

An overview of the Confirm your set at the planning
key auditing understanding of stage of the audit so
standards that are these standards by it’s important you
used during reference to the can apply the
planning. diagram in the standards to the
previous section. scenario if required.
Stop and think

Can you find these
standards in your
auditing standards
open book?
3 Professional Approach You can expect to N/A

scepticism Compare this see scenarios that
The role and section with the will require you to
importance of definitions of display professional
professional professional scepticism when
scepticism has scepticism that you analysing the key
grown in recent will find in both in issues.
years, following a ISA (UK) 200 and the
number of high Glossary at the back
profile corporate of the auditing
casualties. standards open
book.
Stop and think
Consider which
parts of the audit are
most likely to
require the greatest
amounts of
professional
scepticism.
4 Understanding the Approach This section N/A

entity Through reading demonstrates the
You need to both this section need to treat all
understand an entity and the contents of information in a
properly in order to ISA (UK) 315, you given scenario
be able to assess should be able to holistically in order
risks of start identifying to build a fuller
misstatements issues that could picture of the entity
within the financial lead to some form of and all the risks it
statements misstatement. Note presents.
effectively. how various
industries and
processes affect
your understanding.
Stop and think
Use the worked
example to see this
working in practice.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 217
5 Business risk model Approach You will need to be IQ1: Financial risk
As well as being part Consider business on the lookout for A short illustration of
of sound risks and how they various situations the connection
governance, could impact on the that could create between these two
business risks can financial statements. misstatement of types of risk.
be used to some kind.
Stop and think IQ2: Audit
understand the procedures
areas of the financial Can you explain why
statements at this is not the same Great practice for
greatest risk of as audit risk but can interrogating a
being misstated. still be helpful when scenario and
identifying areas of considering the
audit risk? implications of your
findings.
IQ3: Identifying
business risk
Further practice of
how the business
risk approach is
used to consider the
impact of certain
business issues on
the audit.
6 Audit risk Approach You may find it IQ4: Inherent risks

A comprehensive Review this content helpful to consider from financial
background of the with your previous the separate reporting policies
elements that go studies in mind and components of audit A useful starting
into the assessment focus on how you risk (inherent, point in explaining
of audit risk. would apply this control and inherent risk.
knowledge in a detection) in
structuring your IQ5: Audit risk
more complex
scenario. answer. A more detailed
scenario which will
Stop and think help you understand
Note how practical how to identify and
the approaches in explain audit risks in
this section are. an exam situation.
7 Creative accounting Approach Taking the list of red N/A

This is one of the Consider each of the flags as an example,
bigger risks that can causes and you should be
have a significant consequences of prepared to look for
effect on a set of creative accounting. illustrations of these
financial statements, factors in a scenario
Stop and think as they are likely to
yet it can also be
one of the hardest Note how a strong have been inserted
to detect. sense of specifically for the
professional purpose of implying
scepticism would that there is
help identify cases something more
of creative sinister buried.
accounting.
8 Materiality Approach While you can IQ6: Materiality (1)

This is what gives This section is always calculate the An assessment of
the auditor an largely revision from materiality levels to your ability to
HB2021

indication of the your previous be used in an exam calculate the

things that really auditing studies but question based on appropriate level of
matter, both at still requires your certain thresholds, materiality.
planning and in attention. don’t forget the IQ7: Materiality (2)
subsequent parts of Stop and think specific
the audit. circumstances in the A more complex
Remember that it is Note the levels of scenario that could example of the
not always a number materiality used in mean other items amount that should
that determines some of the worked are still worthy of be used to
materiality! examples. your audit focus. determine
materiality.
9 Responding to Approach Make sure you N/A

assessed risks Make sure you can consider audit
Once audit risk has differentiate procedures that are
been assessed, the between risks that suitable and based
auditor needs to affect the financial on the assessed
decide what to do statements overall risks.
next. and those at the
assertion level only.
Stop and think
You will need to
consider the
evidence required
from this evaluation.
10 Other audit Approach You should be N/A

methodologies Work through each prepared to
In addition to the of these three audit consider a variety of
risk methodologies methodologies. audit approaches
covered in this and must be led by
Stop and think the detail provided
chapter, there are
other approaches Can you remember in the scenario.
that the auditor can which
use. methodologies
support substantive
testing as opposed
to testing controls?
11 Information Approach Questions in this N/A

technology and risk Review the content area tend to require
assessment in this section that you advise a
Most organisations paying particular client on something
rely on some form of attention to the of a technical nature,
information terminology used. so it is essential that
technology to you can identify
Stop and think what the technology
support their
business operations. Are there elements is and how it should
It is essential that of this technology be used, being alert
auditors factor this that you or your to the advantages
into their audit employer make use and disadvantages.
planning. of?
12 Big data Approach Again, you are most N/A

This is another area Consider the likely to need to
of significant different Vs of big explain the
importance for data. opportunities,
HB2021
auditors and their Stop and think benefits and

clients. Make sure that you drawbacks of big
can explain what big data in an advisory
data is and how it capacity.
could be used in an
entity.
13 Data analytics, Approach This is becoming an N/A

robotic process Once you have read increasingly
automation (RPA) this section, start to challenging area to
and artificial consider how examine as the pace
intelligence (AI) technology could of change is
Technology is fast improve the audit relentless. However,
becoming the next but at the same you should consider
frontier for auditors time, what risks the the use of
as business use of technology technology in the
processes are might also bring. audit (especially
increasingly data analytics
Stop and think software) and how it
becoming more
automated. Audit How can you use can be leveraged to
quality is the technology to improve audit
ultimate winner but improve the quality quality.
it requires significant of the audit?
investment to reap
the promised
benefits.
HB2021

1 Overview of the audit process
Section overview
The audit is designed to enable the auditor to obtain sufficient, appropriate evidence.
1.1 Overview
While there may be variations between specific procedures adopted by individual firms, the audit
process as set out in auditing standards is a well-defined methodology designed to enable the
auditor to obtain sufficient, appropriate evidence.
This process can be summarised in a number of key stages:
Figure 5.1: Summary of audit process
Client acceptance/
1 establishing
engagement terms
Establish materiality
2
and assess risks
Plan and design

3
the audit approach
4 Audit of internal control
5 Tests for evidence
Complete the audit

6
and evaluate results
7 Issue audit report
In this chapter we will consider stages 1 to 4. In Chapter 6 we will consider stage 5, and in Chapter 8,
stages 6 and 7. However, it is important not to view the audit as a series of discrete stages and
individual audit procedures. For example, it can be argued that all audit procedures which provide
evidence are risk assessment procedures whether they are conducted during planning, control
evaluation, substantive testing or completion. The audit process will adopt a strategy where
complementary evidence is acquired and evaluated from a range of sources. The process is repeated
until the auditor has obtained sufficient, appropriate audit evidence which is adequate to form an
opinion.
HB2021
2 Audit planning
Section overview
You should be familiar with the basic planning process
2.1 Introduction
Auditors are required to plan their work to ensure that attention is paid to the correct areas of the
audit, and the work is carried out in an effective manner.
In order to produce this plan the auditor must do the following:
• Understand the business, its control environment, its control procedures and its accounting
system
• Assess the risk of material misstatement
• Determine materiality
• Develop an audit strategy setting out in general terms how the audit is to be carried out and the
type of approach to be adopted
• Produce an audit plan which details specific procedures to be carried out to implement the
strategy taking into account all the evidence and information collected to date
You have already covered planning and risk assessment issues in your earlier studies. The relevant
ISAs are:
• ISA (UK) 210 (Revised June 2016), Agreeing the Terms of Audit Engagements
• ISA (UK) 300 (Revised June 2016), Planning an Audit of Financial Statements
• ISA (UK) 315 (Revised July 2020), Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement
• ISA (UK) 320 (Revised June 2016), Materiality in Planning and Performing an Audit
• ISA (UK) 330 (Revised July 2017), The Auditor’s Responses to Assessed Risks
A number of issues are developed in the remainder of this chapter; however, it is assumed that you
are already familiar with the basic principles of planning and risk assessment. A summary of these
and other related ISAs can be found in the technical reference section at the end of the chapter.
3 Professional scepticism
Section overview
The auditor must maintain an attitude of professional scepticism throughout the audit.
3.1 Requirement
Definition
Professional scepticism: An attitude that includes a questioning mind, being alert to conditions
which may indicate possible misstatement due to error or fraud, and a critical assessment of audit
evidence.
HB2021

Professional scepticism includes being alert to:
• audit evidence that contradicts other audit evidence;
• information that brings into question the reliability of documents and responses to enquiries to
be used as audit evidence;
• conditions that may indicate possible fraud; and
• circumstances that suggest the need for audit procedures in addition to those required by the
ISAs.
ISA (UK) 200 (Revised January 2020), Overall Objectives of The Independent Auditor and the Conduct
of an Audit in Accordance with International Standards on Auditing requires that the auditor ‘shall
plan and perform an audit with professional scepticism recognising that circumstances may exist that
cause the financial statements to be materially misstated’. Maintaining professional scepticism
throughout the audit reduces the risks of overlooking unusual circumstances, overgeneralising when
drawing conclusions and using inappropriate assumptions in determining the nature, timing and
extent of the audit procedures and evaluating the results. ISA 200 also makes the following points:
(a) The auditor may accept records and documents as genuine unless there is reason to believe the
contrary. Where there is doubt, for example where there are indications of possible fraud, the
auditor must investigate further and determine whether to modify or increase the audit
procedures.
(b) A belief that management and those charged with governance are honest and have integrity
does not relieve the auditor of the need to maintain professional scepticism.
The same points are reiterated in ISA (UK) 240 (Revised June 2016), The Auditor’s Responsibilities
Relating to Fraud in an Audit of Financial Statements. This standard emphasises that where there are
potential fraud issues the auditor’s professional scepticism is particularly important when considering
the risks of material misstatement.
3.2 Importance of professional scepticism

The importance of professional scepticism cannot be overemphasised. An effective and compliant
audit cannot be carried out without it.
Given that it is fundamental that professional scepticism is applied for all audits of financial
statements, the audit engagement partners of audit firms must lead by example and firms should
ensure that professional scepticism is given the degree of prominence it warrants during the training
of audit staff.
Following the global financial crisis in 2008 and 2009 a common theme in a number of regulator
reports was that professional scepticism could have been more clearly demonstrated by auditors
when looking at a number of audit areas. It continues to be at the top of the agenda for regulators
and standard setters, including the IAASB in their 2018 update of the IESBA Code of Ethics as well as
the FRC, whose response to this 2018 update cited the need for ‘a global debate to focus on what
actions, key characteristics and behaviours are required on the part of a practitioner to ensure the
application of appropriate professional scepticism in a way that will meet the expectations of users of
information’ (FRC, 2018).
This section has dealt with the theoretical background of professional scepticism and the use of
professional scepticism in an audit planning context. We will look at professional scepticism again in
the more practical context of audit fieldwork in Chapter 6.
HB2021
4 Understanding the entity
Section overview
• The auditor obtains an understanding of the entity in order to assess the risks of material
misstatement.
• Information will be sought regarding the industry in which the business operates and the different
business processes within the entity itself.
• Auditors should be aware of the concept of scalability when assessing risk for entities of different
sizes and complexities.
4.1 Procedures
ISA (UK) 315 (Revised July 2020), Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement
paragraph 11 states that: “the objective of the auditor is to identify and assess the risks of material
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, at the financial statement and assertion levels thereby
providing a basis for designing and implementing responses to the assessed risks of material
misstatement”.
Figure 5.2: Audit risk assessment
Understand and identify risks

arising from the entity and its
environment, including
inherent risks and relevant
Document and communicate risk assessment
internal controls
Discuss risks amongst

engagement team Assertions:
Classes of transactions
Occurrence; Completeness; Accuracy;
Identify risk of material
Cutoff; Classification; Presentation
misstatement at the financial
statement and assertion levels Account balances
Existence; Rights and obligations;
Completeness; Accuracy, valuation and
Evaluate the design and allocation; Classification; Presentation
determine the implementation
of controls relevant to the audit
and for risks which cannot be
reduced to an acceptable level
with substantive procedures only
Determine whether any risks are

so significant that they require
special audit consideration
(Source: ICAEW Audit and Assurance Faculty (2004) Auditing Standards – All Change: A Short Guide
to Selected International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland) adapted for standards updated since
2004)
You will have studied the financial statement assertions in your earlier studies and you will find a
more detailed recap including changes resulting from the June 2016 revised standards in Chapter 6.
HB2021

ISA (UK) 315 (Revised July 2020) sets out various methods by which the auditors may obtain this
understanding as part of their risk assessment:
• Enquiries of management and others within the entity (including internal audit if appropriate)
• Analytical procedures
• Observation and inspection
• Audit team discussion of the applicable financial reporting framework and the susceptibility of the
financial statements to material misstatement
• Prior period knowledge (subject to certain requirements) and engagement-specific matters
related to acceptance and continuance
The auditors must use a combination of the top three techniques, and must engage in discussion for
every audit. The auditor may use their prior period knowledge, but must carry out procedures to
ensure that there have not been changes in the year meaning that it is no longer valid.
The ISA sets out a number of areas of the entity and its environment that the auditor should gain an
understanding of. These are summarised as follows:
• Industry, regulatory and other external factors
• Nature of the entity
• The applicable financial reporting framework and the entity’s selection and application of
accounting policies, including reasons for any changes
• Measurement and review of the company’s performance
• Inherent risk factors and the impact they have at both assertion and financial statement level
• Internal control relevant to the audit
The purpose of obtaining the understanding is to assess the risks of material misstatement in the
financial statements for the current audit. The ISA says that the auditor shall identify and assess the
risks of material misstatement at the financial statement level, and in line with ISA (UK) 330 (effectively
responding to assessed risks at the assertion level).
The approach that the auditor is required to take can be summarised by the following steps:
Step 1 Identify risks throughout the process of obtaining an understanding of the entity
Step 2 Evaluate whether the risks relate pervasively to the financial statements as a whole
Step 3 Relate the risks to what can go wrong at the assertion level
Step 4 Consider the likelihood of misstatement (including the possibility of multiple misstatements)
Step 5 Consider the likelihood of the risks causing a material misstatement
Context example: Ockey Ltd

The audit team at Ockey Ltd has been carrying out procedures to obtain an understanding of the
entity. In the course of making enquiries about the inventory system, they have discovered that
Ockey Ltd designs and produces tableware to order for a number of high street stores. It also makes
a number of standard lines of tableware, which it sells to wholesalers. By the terms of its contracts
with the high street stores, it is not entitled to sell unsold inventory designed for them to wholesalers.
Ockey Ltd regularly produces 10% more than the high street stores have ordered, in order to ensure
that they meet requirements when the stores do their quality control check. Certain stores have more
stringent control requirements than others and regularly reject some of the inventory.
The knowledge above suggests two risks, one that the company may have obsolescent inventory,
and another that if its production quality standards are insufficiently high, it could run the risk of
losing custom.
We shall look at each of these risks in turn and relate them to the assertion level.
Inventory
If certain items of the inventory are obsolescent due to the fact that it has been produced in excess of
the customer’s requirement and there is no other available market for the inventory, then there is a
HB2021
risk that inventory as a whole in the financial statements will not be carried at the appropriate value.
Given that inventory is likely to be a material balance in the statement of financial position of a
manufacturing company, and the value could be up to 10% of the total value, this has the capacity to
be a material misstatement.
The factors that will contribute to the likelihood of these risks causing a misstatement are matters
such as:
• whether management regularly review inventory levels and scrap items that are obsolescent;
• whether such items are identified and scrapped at the inventory count; or
• whether such items can be put back into production and changed so that they are saleable.
Losing custom
The long-term risk of losing custom is that in the future the company will not be able to operate (a
going concern risk). It could have an impact on the financial statements, if sales were disputed,
revenue and receivables could be overstated; that is, not carried at the correct value. However, it
appears less likely that this would be a material problem in either area, as the problem is likely to be
restricted to a few customers, and only a few sales to those customers.
Again, review of the company’s controls over the recording of sales and the debt collection
procedures of the company would indicate how likely these risks to the financial statements are to
materialise.
Some risks identified may be significant risks (indicated by the following factors), in which case they
present special audit considerations for the auditors:
• Risk of fraud
• Its relationship with recent developments
• The degree of subjectivity in the financial information
• The fact that it is an unusual transaction
• It is a significant transaction with a related party
• The complexity of the transaction
Routine, non-complex transactions are less likely to give rise to significant risk than unusual
transactions or matters of director judgement because the latter are likely to have more management
intervention, complex accounting principles or calculations, greater manual intervention or lower
opportunity for control procedures to be followed.
When auditors identify a significant risk, if they have not done so already, they should evaluate the
design and implementation of the entity’s controls in that area.
4.2 Industries and processes

During the initial planning phase, the audit firm will need to obtain information about the specific
nature of the entity being audited and the different business processes within the entity itself.
4.2.1 Industry
The type of entity being audited will have a significant impact on the audit plan. For example:
Service industry Manufacturing industry
Little or no inventory Complex costing systems to allocate costs to

inventory and work in progress
Focus on salaried employees Many production staff based paid on hours

worked including various overtime and
incentive schemes
Payment by commission May have payment by piece rates
Sales dependent on services provided Sales dependent on products sold
Relatively little investment in plant and Large investment in plant and equipment; office
equipment; office space main building cost space relatively small in comparison to
production facilities
HB2021

An understanding and appreciation of these differences will assist the auditor in identifying risk areas
and in developing an appropriate audit approach.
From the auditor’s point of view, the different entities will result in a different audit approach for each
entity. For example, the lack of inventory in service industries will obviously mean less time will be
devoted to that area. Conversely, the use of complicated costing systems will require use of specialist
computer-auditors to identify, record and test various computerised systems.
4.2.2 Business processes

From the comments above, it is possible to identify the different business processes that the auditor
will need to focus on. The five main processes are summarised in the diagram below.
Figure 5.3: Business processes
Financing Purchasing
Obtaining capital by borrowing Acquiring goods to support
or third parties investing in the production and sales of
company company’s own products
Human resources
Revenue
Business Procedures for hiring, training,
Generating revenue through
evaluating, promoting and in
sales of goods and obtaining processes
some situations making
cash from debtors
employees redundant
Inventory management
Process of accumulating and
allocating costs to inventory
and work in progress
An understanding of each process focuses the auditor’s attention on specific parts of the business.
Process Audit focus
Financing Verification of new share issues / confirming current account and loan
balances and where necessary bank support for the business.
Purchasing Audit of the purchases transaction cycle and payables balance.
Human resources Audit of wages and salaries, including bonuses linked to production and
commission on sales.
Inventory Audit of work in progress systems, including year-end inventory valuation

management and identification of inventory below cost price.
Revenue Audit of sales transaction cycle and receivables balance.
The actual audit approach will depend partly on the audit methodology used.
Scenarios are usually long and complex but will usually contain all the information you require to
evaluate audit risk. Understanding the entity is therefore a process that takes time to master, but
eventually helps you build up a better overall view of an organisation.
4.3 Scalability
ISA (UK) 315 (Revised) reminds auditors of the concept of scalability.
HB2021
Definition
Scalability: Auditors should apply the requirements of an ISA (UK) to all entities regardless of their
complexity, nature and circumstances.
What this means is that ISA (UK) 315 (Revised) should be applied to all entities regardless of their size
or complexity - small entities with poor systems of control might still be complex and therefore risky,
while larger entities with robust systems of internal control might actually be considered less risky.
There should be no preconceptions.
4.4 Standing back

In line with other ISAs (UK) there is also a need for the auditor to constantly assess the evidence that
is being uncovered as the audit engagement unfolds: should this indicate contradictory to initial
assessments, suitable action should be taken, either escalating or diminishing audit effort as
appropriate, on an iterative basis.
5 Business risk model

Section overview
• Business risk is the risk arising to the business that it will not achieve its objectives.
• Corporate governance guidelines emphasise the importance of risk management processes
within a business.
• The business risk model of auditing requires the auditor to consider the entity’s process of
assessing business risk and the impact this might have in terms of material misstatement.
5.1 Business risk

Business risk is the risk arising to entities that they will not achieve their objectives. It includes risks at
all levels of the business.
Business risks can be classified into three categories.
(a) Financial risks
(b) Operating risks
(c) Compliance risks
Definitions
Financial risks: Risks arising from the company’s financial activities (eg, investment risks) or the
financial consequences of operations (eg, receivables risks).
Examples: going concern, market risk, overtrading, credit risk, interest rate risk, currency risk, cost of
capital, treasury risks.
Operating risks: Risks arising from the operations of the business.
Examples: loss of orders; loss of key personnel; physical damage to assets; poor brand
management; technological change; stock-outs; business processes unaligned to objectives.
Compliance risks: Risks arising from non-compliance with laws, regulations, policies, procedures and
contracts.
Examples: breach of company law, non-compliance with accounting standards; listing rules; taxation;
health and safety; environmental regulations; litigation risk against client.
The UK’s adoption of the General Data Protection Regulation as part of EU law could also be
included here, although compliance is just as important for auditors as it is for their clients.
HB2021

Business risk may be caused by many factors, or a combination of factors, including the following:
• Complex environment
• Dynamic environment
• Competitors’ actions
• Inappropriate strategic decision-making
• Operating gearing
• Financial gearing
• Lack of diversification
• Susceptibility to currency fluctuations
• Inadequate actual or contingent financial resources
• Dependence on one or few customers
• Regulatory change or violation
• Adequacy and reliability of suppliers
• Overtrading
• Developing inappropriate technology
• Macroeconomic instability
• Poor management
5.2 Business risk management

Most working environments now have some form of risk management system. In Chapter 4 we
discussed the UK Corporate Governance Code and the FRC’s Guidance on risk management, internal
control and related financial and business reporting that highlight its importance. Typically the
process of risk management for the business is as follows:
• Identify significant risks which could prevent the business achieving its objectives
• Provide a framework to ensure that the business can meet its objectives
• Review the objectives and framework regularly to ensure that objectives are met
In practice, each of these stages is complex
5.3 Audit methodology: business risk model

5.3.1 Principle behind the model
ISA (UK) 315 (Revised July 2020) requires that auditors consider the entity’s process for assessing its
own business risks, and the impact that this might have on the audit in terms of material
misstatements. Auditors consider the following:
• What factors lead to the problems which may cause material misstatements
• What the audit can contribute to the business pursuing its goals
The business risk audit approach tries to mirror the risk management steps that have been taken by
the directors. In this way, the auditor will seek to establish that the financial statement objectives have
been met, through an investigation into whether all the other business objectives have been met by
the directors.
The application of the business risk model (BRM) is therefore related to the client’s:
• objectives
• business strategy
• risk management procedures
• industry environment
• economic environment
This approach to the audit has been called a top down approach because it starts with the business
and its objectives and works back down to the financial statements, rather than working up from the
financial statements which has historically been the approach to audit involving detailed tests of
transactions and balances. The BRM therefore looks at the ‘big risks’ that may significantly threaten
the valuation, profitability or even the going concern of the business. Those who support this
HB2021
approach argue that the key audit risks are more likely to relate to the failure of the company’s
strategy than the misstatement of a transaction.
The following table demonstrates the way in which business risks can have implications for the
financial statements and therefore the audit.
Principal risk Immediate Financial Statement implications
Economic pressures causing reduced unit Inventory values (IAS 2)

sales and eroding margins Going concern
Economic pressures resulting in demands for Receivables recoverability

extended credit
Product quality issues related to inadequate Inventory values – net realisable value and
control over supply chain and transportation inventory returns
damage
Customer dissatisfaction related to inability to Going concern

meet order requirements
Customer dissatisfaction related to invoicing Receivables valuation

errors and transportation damage
Unacceptable service response call rate Going concern

related to poor product quality Litigation – provisions and contingencies
Inventories – net realisable value
Out of date IT systems affecting Anywhere

management’s ability to make informed
decisions
Extensive use of freelance and contract labour Employees’ NI (may be understated if

resulting in issues regarding their freelancers/contract workers are deemed to be
employment status employees)
Fines – provisions and contingencies
Interactive question 1: Financial risk

On 1 January 20X8 a steel production company has significant steel inventories with a total value of
£20 million.
To protect the inventory from changes in value, the entity enters into a futures contract on a
commodities exchange to fix the selling price in 18 months’ time. This is the first time that the entity
has entered into this type of transaction.
Requirements
1.1 Identify the business risk in this situation.
1.2 Identify the issues which the auditor would need to consider.
HB2021

5.3.2 Impact on audit procedures
This can be summarised as follows:
Audit procedure Effect of business risk model
Tests of controls As the auditor pays greater attention to the high level controls used by
directors to manage business risks, controls testing will be focused on
items such as the control environment and corporate governance rather
than the detailed procedural controls tested under traditional
approaches.
Analytical procedures Analytical procedures are used more heavily in a business risk approach,
as they are consistent with the auditor’s desire to understand the entity’s
business rather than to prove the figures in the financial statements.
Detailed testing The combination of the above two factors, particularly the higher use of
analytical procedures, will result in a lower requirement for detailed
testing, although substantive testing will not be eliminated completely.
Interactive question 2: Audit procedures

You are using the business risk model in the statutory audit of a major international pharmaceutical
company.
You are told that the key determinant of profitability is the development of new types of drug, which
are superior to those of competitors. This is achieved by significant investment in research and
development (R&D). However, you are also informed that such drugs may take as many as 10 years
before gaining regulatory approval for use. One major R&D project is a joint venture with another
pharmaceutical company.
Requirement
Outline:
(1) the key risks facing the company
(2) controls that management might use to mitigate such risks
(3) audit procedures to be carried out in respect of such risks
Interactive question 3: Identifying business risks

KidsStuff Ltd imports children’s toys from a supplier in the Far East into its warehouse in Liverpool
and distributes them to retailers throughout the UK. The company was set up by Joseph Cooper 40
years ago and is managed by Joseph and his two sons. The company had experienced reasonable
growth until the last five years, but recent performance has been poor and the company now relies
on a substantial overdraft. Joseph feels that the decline is due in part to the competitiveness of the
market and the trend towards computer games. KidsStuff Ltd does not have a strong market
presence in this area but this is currently being addressed by Joseph’s son, Neil, who is confident that
performance has improved.
You have received the following email from the engagement partner.
To: Audrey Senior

From: Allan Partner
Subject: KidsStuff Ltd
I know you are about to start work on your planning of this audit. Can you make sure that you
specifically identify the business risks faced by KidsStuff Ltd and set out the effect of those on the
audit. Can you also make a list of the further information you need in order to plan the audit so
that I can request it from the directors?
HB2021
Requirement
Respond to the engagement partner’s email.
6 Audit risk
Section overview
• Audit risk is the risk that the auditors may give an inappropriate opinion when the financial
statements are materially misstated and consists of risks of material misstatement and detection
risk.
• Risks of material misstatement can exist at both financial statement level and assertion level.
• The risk of material misstatement at the assertion level is made up of inherent risk and control risk.
• Inherent risk factors can include complexity, subjectivity, change, uncertainty or susceptibility to
misstatement due to management bias and/or fraud.
• Information gained in obtaining an understanding of the business is used to assess risk.
• Assessment of control risk involves assessing an entity’s system of internal control which consists
of the control environment, the entity’s risk assessment process, the entity’s process for
monitoring the system of internal control, information systems and communication, control
activities and limitations of internal control.
6.1 Audit risk
Definitions
Audit risk: The risk that auditors may give an inappropriate audit opinion when the financial
statements are materially misstated. Audit risk has two key components: risks of material
misstatement in the financial statements and the risk of the auditor not detecting material
misstatements in the financial statements (detection risk).
Risks of material misstatement: According to ISA (UK) 200, risks of material misstatement exist at two
levels: the overall financial statement level (affecting many assertions) and the assertion level for
classes of transactions, account balances and disclosures. Risks of material misstatement at the
assertion level consist of inherent risk and control risk.
Inherent risk: The susceptibility of an assertion about a class of transaction, account balance or
disclosure to a misstatement that could be material, either individually or when aggregated with
other misstatements, before consideration of any related controls.
Control risk: The risk that a misstatement could occur in an assertion about a class of transaction,
account balance or disclosure and that could be material, either individually or when aggregated
with other misstatements, will not be prevented, or detected and corrected, on a timely basis by the
entity’s system of internal control.
Detection risk: The risk that the procedures performed by the auditor to reduce audit risk to an
acceptably low level will not detect a misstatement that exists and that could be material, either
individually or when aggregated with other misstatements.
6.1.1 The financial statement level

There are a number of factors which ISA (UK) 315 (Revised) discusses that could generate risks of
material misstatement at the financial statement level. Here are some examples, including the impact
that each could have on the conduct of the audit:
• Operating losses and liquidity problems which could affect the going concern status of the entity
HB2021

• Deficiencies in the entity’s system of internal control which may lead the auditor to conclude that
there are questions around management integrity
• Adverse economic conditions that could lead to the need for additional financing (this could in
turn lead to greater risk of material misstatement at the assertion level in areas susceptible to
manipulation of key areas of the financial statements, such as assets, revenue and liabilities)
• Concerns about changes to information systems could increase the risks of material misstatement
when considering the reliance to be placed upon the entity’s accounting records (ISA (UK) 315
(Revised): paras. A195-199)
6.1.2 Inherent risk

ISA (UK) 315 (Revised) Appendix 2 lists a series of inherent risk factors that indicate susceptibility to
misstatement before the consideration of any controls. They relate to the preparation of information
required by the applicable financial reporting framework and are listed below.
• Complexity
• Subjectivity
• Change
• Uncertainty
• Susceptibility to misstatement due to management bias or fraud
The susceptibility of any item prone to misstatement needs to be assessed by the auditor and this
will be undertaken in terms of likelihood and magnitude, placing such items on what is called the
spectrum of inherent risk. Items placed towards the higher end of this spectrum will be considered
significant risks and will therefore demand more of the auditor’s time and attention.
Inherent risk is the risk that items will be misstated due to characteristics of those items, such as the
fact they are estimates and that they are important items in the accounts. The auditors must use their
professional judgement and the understanding of the entity they have gained to assess inherent
risk. If no such information or knowledge is available then the inherent risk is high.
Factors affecting client as a whole
Integrity and attitude to risk of directors and Domination by a single individual can cause
management problems
Management experience and knowledge Changes in management and quality of

financial management
Unusual pressures on management Examples include tight reporting deadlines, or

market or financing expectations
Nature of business Potential problems include technological

obsolescence or overdependence on single
product
Industry factors Competitive conditions, regulatory

requirements, technological developments,
changes in customer demand
Information technology Problems include lack of supporting

documentation, concentration of expertise in a
few people, potential for unauthorised access
Factors affecting individual account balances

or transactions
Financial statement accounts prone to Accounts which require adjustment in previous

misstatement period or require high degree of estimation
Complex or subjective accounts Accounts which require expert valuations or are

subjects of current professional discussion
HB2021
Factors affecting individual account balances
or transactions
Assets at risk of being lost or stolen Cash, inventory, portable non-current assets
(computers)
Quality of accounting systems Strength of individual departments (sales,

purchases, cash etc)
High volume transactions Accounting system may have problems coping
Unusual transactions Transactions for large amounts, with unusual

names, not settled promptly (particularly
important if they occur at period end)
Transactions that do not go through the system,
that relate to specific clients or are processed
by certain individuals
Staff Staff changes or areas of low morale
Interactive question 4: Inherent risks from financial reporting policies

Fonesforall is a mobile phone network provider with its own retail outlets. It is currently offering the
following package for £30 per month.
• ZX4 mobile phone handset
• 12-month subscription to the network
• 300 ‘free’ call minutes per month (for 12 months)
• 500 ‘free’ texts per month (for 12 months)
• Any unused call minutes or texts may be carried forward to the following month
The fair value of this package is estimated to be £500.
Requirement
Identify the risks associated with the treatment of revenue in relation to this package in the financial
statements of Fonesforall.
6.1.3 Control risk

Control risk is the risk that client controls fail to detect material misstatements. A preliminary
assessment of control risk at the planning stage of the audit is required to determine the level of
controls and substantive testing to be carried out.
ISA (UK) 315 (Revised) Appendix 3 lists the matters that the auditor should consider when assessing
an entity’s system of internal control:
• Control environment
• The entity’s risk assessment process
• The entity’s process for monitoring the system of internal control
• The information system and communication
• Control activities
• Limitations in internal control
In this respect, a key initial audit question is “how does management control the business?”. An
understanding of this issue is a key element in an initial assessment of control risk.
HB2021

Substantive and reliance strategies
For an ongoing client, the auditor will already have significant information on file regarding the
control systems at the audit client. The audit strategy will therefore focus on updating this control
information.
For a new client, a judgement on audit strategy will normally be deferred until after a more detailed
understanding of the system of internal control is obtained. For the new client, the auditor will obtain
information on the control systems and then perform an initial testing of those controls to determine
whether or not they are working correctly. Where these risk assessment procedures indicate that
controls are not working correctly, then it is unlikely that the auditor will place reliance on those
controls, as control risk will be set to maximum. Substantive procedures will be used instead.
However, if the risk assessment procedures indicate that controls are working correctly, then some
reliance will be placed on internal controls. Control risk may be set only as either ‘high’ or ‘low’ in an
all or nothing approach, as previously noted. Alternatively, there may be a possibility of setting
control risk to an intermediate amount(s) within some firms’ audit methodologies.
So, providing an initial determination of the nature, timing and extent of audit procedures, two
possible audit strategies are normally identified:
• Substantive strategy – focusing on substantive testing (ie, tests of details and analytical
procedures)
• Reliance strategy – focusing on tests of controls and reliance from inherent assurance
Notes
1 There will not be one strategy for the entire audit. Each business process or specific audit
assertion will be allocated its own strategy. Similarly, each audit assertion may be allocated a
different ‘mix’ of reliance and substantive strategy.
2 Auditing standards do require some substantive testing for each material class of transactions,
account balances and disclosure, so the audit strategy for any one assertion will never be
completely a reliance strategy.
3 However, it is possible (but unusual) that substantive testing may comprise entirely of analytical
procedures, without any tests of details being carried out.
An auditor is more likely to follow a reliance strategy where:
• an entity uses electronic data interchange to initiate orders; there will be no paper
documentation to verify;
• an entity provides electronic services to its customers eg, an internet service provider or
telephone company. No physical goods are produced, with all information being collected and
billing carried out electronically; and
• the test is for understatement.
An auditor is more likely to follow a substantive strategy where:
• there are no controls available for a specific audit assertion;
• the controls are assessed as ineffective;
• it is inefficient to test the effectiveness of the controls; and
• the test is for overstatement.
Whichever strategy is chosen, the auditor will document the reasons for choosing that strategy and
then perform detailed auditing procedures in accordance with that strategy.
Control environment
Within an entity, the control system works within the control environment. A poor control
environment implies that the control system itself will also be poor, because the entity does not place
sufficient emphasis on having a good control environment.
So, the control environment sets the philosophy of an entity effectively influencing the ‘control
consciousness’ of directors and employees. The importance of the enforcement of integrity and
ethical values was illustrated in July 2011, with the closure of the News of the World newspaper
resulting from phone hacking allegations.
HB2021
Factors affecting the control environment include:
Factor Explanation
Communication and An organisation should try to maintain the integrity and ethical
enforcement of integrity standing of the employees. Membership of a professional body helps
and ethical values enforce ethical standards for professional staff. Ethics in other areas
are maintained by ensuring rules do not encourage unethical conduct
(eg, unrealistically high sales targets to earn commissions).
Commitment to Each job should have a job description showing the standards
competence expected in that job. Employees should then be hired with the
competences to carry out the job without compromising on the
quality of work produced.
Participation by those Those charged with governance should take an active role in ensuring
charged with governance ethical standards are maintained. For example, the audit committee
should ensure that directors carry out their duties correctly in the
context of the audit. Similarly, those charged with governance must
ensure appropriate independence from the company they are
governing.
Management philosophy Management should set the example of following ethical and quality
standards. Where management establish a risk management system
and regularly discuss the effect of risks on an organisation then the
auditor will gain confidence that the overall control environment is
effective.
Structure of the The structure of the organisation should ensure that authority is
organisation delegated appropriately so that lower management levels can
implement appropriate risk management procedures. However,
responsibility for risk management overall is maintained by the board.
Reporting hierarchy Within the organisation’s hierarchy, each level of management has
responsibilities for risk included in their job description. There should
also be a clear reporting system so that objectives for risk
management are communicated down the hierarchy, while identified
risks are communicated back up the hierarchy for action.
HR policies and HR policies should have appropriate policies for ensuring the integrity
procedures of staff, both for new and existing employees. This should extend to
include recruitment, retention, performance management and
disciplinary procedures.
From a review of these factors, the auditor will form an opinion on the effectiveness of the control
environment. The auditor will also consider the means by which the entity monitors controls eg, by
the internal audit department. This in turn affects the opinion on how well the internal control
systems will be implemented and operated.
Control risk will also increase where specific events occur within an organisation. Events that tend to
increase control risk include the following:
• Use of new technology
• New or substantially amended information systems
• Hiring of new personnel, especially into key management roles
• Changes to the regulatory or operating environment
• Significant growth in the organisation
• Restructuring of the company or group
• Expansion of overseas operations
HB2021

Control activities
Having assessed the control environment, the auditor will then identify and assess the operating
effectiveness of control activities carried out by management. Control activities in this context are the
policies and procedures that help ensure management’s directives are carried out.
The auditor is required to differentiate between the following:
• Direct controls – these are considered precise enough to address risks of material misstatement at
the assertion level
• Indirect controls – these are considered to be less precise and support direct controls
Control activities that the auditor will investigate include:
Control activity Explanation
Physical or Controls to ensure the security of assets including data files and computer
logical controls programs (eg, not simply tangible assets such as company motor vehicles).
Authorisation Controls that confirm a transaction is valid and that the entity is satisfied should
and approval occur (such as the approval of an expenses claim).
Segregation of Segregation of the authorisation of transactions, recording of transactions and

duties custody of any related assets. For example, employees receiving cash should
not be responsible for recording that cash in the receivables ledger – teeming
and lading could occur.
Reconciliations Comparison of two or more items to confirm their completeness and accuracy.
Verification This includes comparing actual performance against agreed standards and
policies, involving follow up to establish reasons for any variances.
Information These are controls to check the completeness, accuracy and authorisation of
processing the processing of transactions. Two types of controls are generally recognised:
controls • General IT controls – over the information processing environment as a
whole, for example to ensure the security of data processing operations
and maintenance of adequate backup facilities.
• Application controls – over the processing of individual transactions, again
ensuring the completeness and accuracy of recording.
Where the auditor is satisfied regarding the ability of the control environment to process transactions
correctly and control activities to identify deficiencies in that processing, then control risk can be set
to a low figure. Obviously, where the control environment is weak, and control activities are missing,
then control risk will be set to a higher level.
Control activities for transaction assertions
Within each class of transactions, the auditor will ensure that specific audit assertions have been
achieved. Remember that for each assertion, a different ‘mix’ of control and substantive procedures
may be used.
For each of the audit assertions relevant to transaction testing, specific control activities are normally
available.
The assertions and control activities are summarised below.
Assertion Explanation Typical control activities
Occurrence Transactions and events that have • Segregation of duties

been recorded have occurred and • Daily/monthly reconciliation of
pertain to the entity subsidiary records with an
independent review
• Prenumbering of documents (with
completeness of numbering
confirmed
HB2021
Assertion Explanation Typical control activities
Completeness All transactions and events that • Segregation of duties

should have been recorded have • Prenumbering of documents (with
been recorded, and all related completeness of numbering
disclosures that should have been confirmed)
included in the financial statements
have been included • Daily/monthly reconciliation of
subsidiary records with an
independent review
Accuracy Amounts and other data relating to • Internal confirmation of amounts

recorded transactions and events and calculations
have been recorded appropriately, • Monthly reconciliation of
and related disclosures have been subsidiary records by an
appropriately measured and independent person
described
Cut-off Transactions and events have been • Procedures for the prompt
recorded in the correct accounting recording of transactions
period • Internal verification of cut-off at
year end
Classification Transactions and events have been • Agreeing transactions against

recorded in the proper accounts chart of accounts
• Internal verification of the accuracy
of posting
Monitoring the system of internal control

The auditor should also assess the means by which management monitors internal control over
financial reporting and what (if any) action is taken to remediate any deficiencies identified. In many
entities internal auditors fulfil this function. The impact on the audit of the existence of an internal
audit function is dealt with in ISA (UK) 610 (Revised 2016), Using the Work of Internal Auditors.
ISA (UK) 315 (Revised) discusses the importance of such monitoring being undertaken on a timely
basis by the entity and differentiates between manual and automated controls. The standard also
requires auditors to understand whether monitoring is a separate activity or is simply built into the
system of internal controls – the former should go further and be set up to establish whether there
are any underlying reasons for control breaches.
6.1.4 Limitations in internal controls

Detection risk is the risk that audit procedures will fail to detect material errors. Detection risk relates
to the inability of the auditors to examine all evidence. Audit evidence is usually persuasive rather
than conclusive so some detection risk is usually present, allowing the auditors to seek ‘reasonable
confidence’.
The auditor’s inherent and control risk assessments influence the nature, timing and extent of
substantive procedures required to reduce detection risk and thereby audit risk.
However, despite the auditor’s best efforts, there will always be some inherent limitations in any
system of internal controls:
• Poor judgement by humans when making decisions and other forms of human error (such as
fatigue)
• Poor design or operation of internal controls (such as a failure to act on an exception report)
• Poor ethics displayed by employees who decide to collude in order to circumvent certain controls
HB2021

6.1.5 The entity’s risk assessment process and information and communication
Both of these categories have coverage elsewhere in the learning materials, but in the context of
how the auditor assesses the way they support the entity’s system of internal controls there are points
that will help at this stage:
• The auditor needs to understand how the entity identifies and analyses risks that could
compromise its ability to achieve its objectives (in essence, business risks) which are relevant to
the preparation of the financial statements in accordance with the applicable financial reporting
framework (such as new information systems, changes in the entity’s structure or rapid growth).
• The auditor also needs to understand how the entity’s information systems contribute to the
preparation of the financial statements, especially in the context of how transactions are
processed, how the system addresses any overrides or bypasses to controls and how
responsibilities for the preparation of the financial statements are communicated to relevant staff.
Data analytics tools may be used in risk assessment. Data analytics is discussed later in this chapter.
Although you are unlikely to explicitly use the headings of inherent, control and detection risk when
determining audit risk in a question, breaking it down into constituent parts can help you to assess
risk more effectively.
Interactive question 5: Audit risk

Forsythia is a small limited company offering garden landscaping services. It is partly owned by three
business associates, Mr Rose, Mr White and Mr Grass, who each hold 10% of the shares. The major
shareholder is the parent company, Poppy Ltd. This company owns shares in 20 different companies,
which operate in a variety of industries. One of them is a garden centre, and Forsythia regularly
trades with it. Poppy Ltd is in turn wholly owned by a parent, White Holdings Ltd.
The management structure at Forsythia is simple. Of the three non-corporate shareholders, only Mr
Rose has any involvement in management. He runs the day to day operations of the company
(marketing, sales, purchasing etc) although the company employs two landscape gardeners to
actually carry out projects. The accounts department employs a purchase clerk and a sales clerk, who
deal with all aspects of their function. The sales clerk is Mr Rose’s daughter, Justine. Mr Rose
authorises and produces the payroll. The company ledgers are kept on Mr Rose’s personal computer.
Two weeks after the year end, the sales ledger records were severely damaged by a virus. Justine has
a single printout of the balances as at the year end, which shows the total owed by each customer.
Forsythia owns the equipment which the gardeners use and pays them a salary and a bonus based
on performance. Mr Rose is remunerated entirely on a commission basis relating to sales and, as a
shareholder, he receives dividends annually, which are substantial.
Forsythia does not carry any inventories. When materials are required for a project, they are
purchased on behalf of the client and charged directly to them. Most customers pay within the 60-
day credit period, or take up the extended credit period which Forsythia offers. However, there are a
number of accounts that appear to have been outstanding for a significant period.
Justine and her father do not appear to have a very good working relationship. She does not live at
home and her salary is not significant. However, she appears to have recently purchased a sports car,
which is not a company car.
The audit partner has recently accepted the audit of Forsythia as a new client. You have been
assigned the task of planning the first audit.
Requirement
Identify and explain the audit risks arising from the above scenario.
HB2021
7 Creative accounting
Section overview
• There is a spectrum of activity with respect to accounting policy choice. Creative accounting
attempts to change users’ perceptions of the performance and position of a business.
• The occurrence of creative accounting depends on both incentives and opportunity.
• The consequences of creative accounting depend upon a range of factors that change over time
but are specific to individual companies.
• Creative accounting can be overt (disclosed) or covert (not disclosed).
• Red flags exist which may indicate that creative accounting practices have taken place.
• Empirical evidence supports the notion that creative accounting occurs on a widespread basis.
7.1 Introduction
One of the factors affecting the overall level of financial statement risk is the potential for creative
accounting.
Directors have choices and they may exercise those choices to recognise values that do not reflect
economic reality. A prime example is the choice of the cost model when an asset’s fair value is
significantly higher than cost. (Note: If an asset’s fair value and value in use were lower than cost,
then an impairment would be required under IAS 36 and directors would not have the discretion to
disclose at cost.) Directors are more likely to make use of their discretion to mislead financial
statement users if they have the opportunity (eg, imprecise accounting regulations, weak auditors)
and incentives (eg, approaching the breach of a debt covenant, an impending takeover, profit-based
bonus) to do so.
Creative accounting is covered from a financial reporting perspective in Chapter 24.
7.2 The nature of creative accounting
Definition
Creative accounting: The active manipulation of accounting results for the purpose of creating an
altered impression of the underlying financial position or performance of an enterprise by using
accounting rules and guidance in a spirit other than that which was intended when the rules were
written.
This well-documented practice is a potential problem for auditors in assessing the underlying
performance and position of a company and recent evidence suggests that it is one of the major
issues facing financial reporting.
Accounting measures involve a degree of subjectivity, choice and judgement and it would be wrong
to describe all such activity as creative accounting. Moreover, creative accounting normally falls
within permitted regulation and is not therefore illegal. It is therefore often a question of fine
judgement as to when creative accounting is of such an extent that it becomes misleading.
The spectrum of creative accounting practices may include the following (commencing with the most
legitimate):
• Exercise of normal accounting policy choice within the rules permitted by regulation (eg, first in,
first out and average cost for inventory valuation)
• Exercise of a degree of estimation, judgement or prediction by a company within reasonable
bounds (eg, non-current asset lives)
• Judgement concerning the nature or classification of a cost (eg, expensing and capitalising costs)
• Systematic selection of legitimate policy choices and estimations to alter the perception of the
position or performance of the business in a uniform direction
HB2021

• Systematic selection of policy choice and estimations that fall on the margin of permitted
regulation (or are not subject to regulation) in order to alter materially the perception of the
performance or position of the business
• Setting up of artificial transactions to create circumstances where material accounting
misrepresentation can take place
• Fraudulent activities
It can thus be a matter of fine judgement for an auditor as to where within this spectrum creative
accounting becomes unacceptable.
Companies may also seek to manipulate the perception of their performance and position by
altering underlying transactions, rather than just the way they are recorded. Accounting regulation
seeks to limit the effects of this behaviour in a number of ways as previously discussed. Nevertheless,
while it may seek to report faithfully transactions that actually take place, it cannot regulate for
transactions which do not take place, or which are delayed in order to manipulate the perception of
performance or position. These might include:
• deferring discretionary expenditure (eg, maintenance costs, R&D);
• changing the timing of the sale of investments or other assets; or
• delaying investment or financing decisions.
Context example: Patisserie Valerie

UK café chain Patisserie Valerie hit the headlines in October 2018 when trading in its shares was
suspended following allegations of irregularity about its financial position. Soon after, the company’s
finance director was also suspended as the size of the hole in its finances began to grow. In
November 2018, the FRC announced that it was launching an investigation into the audit of the
holding company, Patisserie Holdings. By January 2019, the company had been placed into
administration and was later sold for £5 million to private equity investors. In June 2019, five people
were arrested by the UK Serious Fraud Office in connection with the deficit, which at that time was
estimated to be £94 million.
The events of Patisserie Valerie came hot on the heels of the Carillion controversy of 2017, which
have both been cited as the final straw for the existing UK regulatory regime for corporate reporting
and auditing. The lessons here seem obvious: poor quality audit and inadequate responses to fraud
have serious economic consequences and therefore need to be taken more seriously.
(Sources: Economia and BBC News Website, 2018 and 2019)
Scenarios in the exam are very likely to require you to be on the lookout for possible areas of creative
accounting. Don’t forget the importance of maintaining professional scepticism and displaying
critical thinking at all times when reading the contents of a question.
7.3 Causes of creative accounting – opportunity

The causes of creative accounting have two key elements:
(a) Opportunity
(b) Incentives
Where these two elements both exist then the risks of creative accounting taking place are greatest.
This section looks at opportunity. The following section looks at incentives.
It is important for the auditor to be aware of the causes of creative accounting in order to highlight
the circumstances, where there is the greatest risk or incentives for creative accounting to take place.
The causes of opportunity for creative accounting include the following:
• Subjectivity – Areas of subjectivity lend themselves to a greater degree of choice, judgement and
uncertainty.
HB2021
• Complexity – Complex industries and transactions are difficult to regulate precisely and give more
scope for manipulation.
• Inadequate corporate governance – Inadequate or inappropriate controls over directors may
permit greater discretion.
• Insufficiently independent auditors – Auditors may come under increased managerial pressure to
approve creative accounting practices.
• Imprecise regulations – Where regulations are imprecise or inadequate, companies have greater
scope to exercise discretion, and auditors have a poor benchmark to challenge the selected
accounting procedures.
• Inadequate sources of information – Where reliable sources of audit evidence exist (eg, to
challenge management estimations) the scope for effective manipulation is more limited.
• Inadequate penalties – Where creative accounting is discovered to have misled users, the
penalties for the company, and for the directors, are regarded by some as inadequate to provide
sufficient disincentives.
7.4 Causes of creative accounting – incentives

The following have been put forward as incentives for companies/managers engaging in creative
accounting:
• Income smoothing – Companies normally prefer to show a steady trend of growth in profits,
rather than volatility with significant rises and falls. Income smoothing techniques (eg, declaring
higher provisions and deferring income recognition in good years) contribute to reducing
volatility in reported earnings.
• Achieving forecasts – Where forecasts of future profits have been made, reported earnings may
be manipulated to tie in with these forecasts.
• Profit enhancement – This is where current year earnings are boosted to enhance the short-term
perception of performance.
• Maintain or boost share price – Where markets can be made to believe that increased earnings
represent improved underlying commercial performance, then share price may rise, or at least be
higher than it would be in the absence of creative accounting.
• Accounting-based contracts – Where accounting-based contracts exist (eg, loan covenants, profit-
related pay) then any accounting policy that falls within the terms of the contract may significantly
impact on the consequences of that contract. For example, the breach of a gearing-based debt
covenant may be avoided by the use of off balance sheet financing.
• Incentives for directors – There may be personal incentives for directors to enhance profit in order
to enhance their remuneration. Examples might include: bonuses based on earnings per share
(EPS), or share incentive schemes and share option schemes that require a given EPS before they
become operative. Directors may also benefit more indirectly from creative accounting by
increasing the security of their position.
• Taxation – Where accounting practices coincide with taxation regulations there may be an
incentive to reduce profit in order to reduce taxation. In these circumstances, however, it may be
necessary to convince not only the auditor but also HMRC.
• Regulated industries – Where an industry is currently, or potentially, regulated then there may be
an incentive to engage in creative accounting to reduce profit in order to influence the decisions
of the regulator. This may include utilities where regulators may curtail prices if it is perceived that
excessive profits are being earned. It may also be relevant to avoid a reference to the Competition
Commission.
• Internal accounting – A company as a whole may have reason to move profits from division to
division (or subsidiary to subsidiary) in order to affect tax calculations or justify the
closure/expansion of a particular department.
• Losses – Companies making losses may be under greater pressure to enhance reported
performance.
• Commercial pressures – Where companies have particular commercial pressures to enhance the
perception of the company there is increased risk of creative accounting; for example, a takeover
bid, or the raising of new finance.
HB2021

Thus, a range of stakeholders may have incentives to engage in creative accounting. In particular,
however, an appropriate degree of professional scepticism should be applied where benefits arise
for directors, as they are also the group responsible for implementing creative accounting practices.
7.5 The consequences of creative accounting

It is important for the auditor to understand the consequences of creative accounting, as:
• It enables an understanding of the motivations and reasons for the company’s directors to
engage in the practice. (For instance, the existence and nature of a debt covenant that may be
affected by creative accounting.)
• It enhances the understanding of whether the practice is material ie, whether it would reasonably
influence decisions made.
• It enables an understanding of the continued impact of a particular creative accounting practice
in future years‘ financial statements and whether the impact will be sustainable year on year.
The consequences of creative accounting depend crucially upon whether or not it is disclosed.
Overt creative accounting refers to practices, which may change reported profits or the statement of
financial position, but that are disclosed externally to financial statement users. Examples may
include:
• not depreciating non-current assets
• capitalising development costs
• significant provisioning
• changing depreciation policy
Covert creative accounting refers to practices that are used to enhance profitability or asset values
but are not disclosed. Examples might be:
• the timing of revenue recognition on complex long-term transactions
• the treatment of overhead allocations
• many decisions to capitalise or expense cash outlays
As a result, such covert practices are not readily identifiable by outside users, who are thus unable, in
some cases, to distinguish increases in reported earnings arising as a result of accounting
manipulation, from those arising from improvements in substantive underlying transactions. The
potential consequences of covert creative accounting (eg, for share price movements) are therefore
likely to be more substantial than for overt creative accounting.
7.6 Sustainability
Some creative accounting practices are sustainable in the long term while others may only serve to
enhance the current year’s profit, but only with the effect that future profits are correspondingly
reduced.
Sustainable practices may include the following:
• Income smoothing – assuming it is smoothed at a normal level of profitability, it may be sustained
indefinitely
• Off balance sheet financing
Unsustainable practices include the following:
• Capitalisation of expenses – if, for instance, annual development costs are inappropriately
capitalised and amortised over 10 years then, after that period, assuming constant expenditure,
the profit will be equivalent for either write-off or amortisation policies (though not the statement
of financial position) as there will be 10 amounts of 10% amortisation recognised in profit or loss
• Revenue recognition – bringing forward the recognition of revenues may initially enhance profit,
but at the cost of reducing future profits
HB2021
7.7 Some specific consequences
Share price effects
Where creative accounting practices are disclosed then one would expect that, in a semi strong
efficient market, investors would see through the manipulation and correctly price shares, with
creative accounting having little effect. However:
• the market may not always be efficient;
• accounting-based contracts may be affected; and
• complex series of transactions may mean that markets fail to appreciate fully the impact of
creative accounting.
Covert creative accounting is likely to include all the above effects but in addition, even where the
market is semi-strong efficient, it cannot always ‘see through’ the creative accounting and shares
could be mispriced. This may result in shareholders suffering an undue loss.
Recent revelations regarding creative accounting have resulted in significant falls in the share prices
of the companies concerned providing evidence of previous mispricing. However, shares prices also
fell in other companies, as markets generally placed less trust in reported earnings and auditors were
perceived as being unable to prevent creative accounting.
Accounting-based contracts
Whether creative accounting is covert or overt, it can affect the application of accounting-based
contracts, so long as the selected accounting treatment falls within the terms of that contract.
Typically, a restrictive covenant on gearing, or interest cover, may be avoided by enhancing equity or
earnings. This may benefit one stakeholder (eg, shareholders) but disadvantage another (eg,
debtholders).
7.8 Red flags and detection

The best detection techniques for creative accounting are a good knowledge of financial reporting
regulations and a good understanding of the business. There may, however, be more general
techniques and indicators that can suggest that a company is engaging in creative accounting
practice. These include the following:
• Cash flows – Operating cash flows are systematically out of line with reported operating profits
over time.
• Reported income and taxable income – Is financial reporting income significantly out of line with
taxable income with inadequate explanation or disclosure?
• Acquisitions – Where a significant number of acquisitions have taken place, there is increased
scope for many creative accounting practices.
• Financial statement trends – Indicators include: unusual trends, comparing revenue and EPS
growth, atypical year-end transactions, flipping between conservatism and aggressive accounting
from year to year, level of provisions compared to profit indicating smoothing, EPS trend, timing
of recognition of exceptional items.
• Ratios – Ageing analyses revealing old inventories or receivables, declining gross profit margins
but increased net profit margins, inventories/receivables increasing more than sales, gearing
changes.
• Accounting policies – Consider if there is the minimum disclosure required by regulation, changes
in accounting policies, examine areas of judgement and discretion. Consider risk areas of off
balance sheet refinancing, revenue recognition, capitalisation of expenses, significant accounting
estimates.
• Changes of accounting policies and estimates – Is the nature, effect and purpose of these
changes adequately explained and disclosed?
• Management – Estimations proved unreliable in the past, minimal explanations provided.
• Actual and estimated results – Culture of always satisfying external earnings forecasts, absence of
profit warnings, inadequate or late profit warnings leading to ‘surprises’, interim financial
statements out of line with year-end financial statements.
• Incentives – Management rewarded on reported earnings, profit-orientated culture exists, other
reporting pressures eg, a takeover.
HB2021

• Audit qualifications – Are they unexpected and are any auditors’ adjustments specified in the
audit report significant?
• Related party transactions – Are these material and how far are the directors affected?
The above is not a comprehensive list, but merely includes some main factors. Also, it is not
suggested that the above practices necessarily mean there is creative accounting but, where a
number of these factors exist simultaneously, then the auditor should be put ‘on inquiry’ to make
further investigations.
7.9 Examples of creative accounting techniques

A number of examples of creative accounting have been given above and throughout these learning
materials in the context of their application. The following list draws some of these together and
provides further examples under key headings. The list is not meant to be comprehensive.
7.9.1 Timing of operating expenses

• Underprovisioning in poor years
• Overprovisioning in good years
• Manipulation of reserves
• Aggressive capitalisation of costs
• Optimistic asset lives
• Accelerating expenses in good years
• Increased write-downs and write-offs in good years
• Exceptional gains timed to offset exceptional losses
7.9.2 Revenue recognition

• Premature recognition of revenues
• Recording out of period revenue
• Recognition of revenue of service contracts before the service being performed
• Recognition of sales before physical movement of goods
• Front-end recognition of sales that should be spread over more than one accounting period
• Percentage of completion estimates in construction industry
• Cut-off misapplied
7.9.3 Off balance sheet financing

In some circumstances transactions may be structured in order to allow a particular accounting
treatment (eg, making a finance lease appear to be an operating lease) rather than presenting the
fairest view. This is one of the primary reasons for the large quantity of disclosure standards (as
against measurement standards) in previous years.
8 Materiality
Section overview
• Materiality considerations are important at the planning stage.

• An item might be material due to its nature, value or impact on readers of financial statements.
8.1 Revision of materiality

ISA (UK) 320 (Revised June 2016), Materiality in Planning and Performing an Audit states that the
auditor’s frame of reference for materiality should be based on the relevant financial reporting
framework. IAS 1 gives the following definition:
Omissions or misstatements of items are material if they could, individually or collectively,
influence the economic decisions that users make on the basis of the financial statements.
HB2021
Materiality depends on the size and nature of the omission or misstatement judged in the
surrounding circumstances. The size or nature of the item, or combination of both, could be the
determining factor.
Materiality criteria
An item might be material due to its:
Nature Given the definition of materiality that an item would affect the readers of the financial
statements, some items might by their nature affect readers. Examples include
transactions related to directors, such as remuneration and contracts with the
company.
Value Some items will be significant in the financial statements by virtue of their size; for
example, if the company had bought a piece of land with a value which comprised
three-quarters of the asset value of the company, that would be material. That is why
materiality is often expressed in terms of percentages (of assets, of profits).
Impact Some items may by chance have a significant impact on financial statements; eg, a
proposed journal which is not material in size could convert a profit into a loss. The
difference between a small profit and a small loss could be material to some readers.
Although there are general guidelines on how materiality might be calculated in practice, the
calculation involves the application of judgement. It should be reassessed throughout the course of
the audit as more information becomes available. Note that as materiality has both quantitative and
qualitative aspects risk assessment must include the analysis of both quantitative and qualitative
data.
Users’ needs
The auditor must consider the needs of the users of the financial statements when setting materiality.
The ISA indicates that it is reasonable for the auditor to assume that users:
• Have a reasonable knowledge of the business and economic activities and accounting and a
willingness to study the information in the financial statements with reasonable diligence
• Understand that financial statements are prepared and audited to levels of materiality
• Recognise the uncertainties inherent in the measurement of amounts based on the use of
estimates, judgement and the consideration of future events
• Make reasonable economic decisions on the basis of the information in the financial statements
8.2 Applying materiality

The application of materiality to an audit can be summarised in three key steps:
Figure 5.4: Steps in applying materiality on an audit
Establish a preliminary judgement

Step 1
about materiality
Step 2 Determine performance materiality
Estimate likely misstatements and

Step 3 compare totals to the preliminary
judgement about materiality
Steps 1 and 2 would normally be performed as part of the planning process. Step 3 is normally
performed as part of the review stage of the audit when the auditor evaluates the audit evidence.
Auditors of companies applying the UK Corporate Governance Code are required to make
significant disclosures in the auditor’s report about how they have applied materiality in their audit.
HB2021

8.2.1 Preliminary judgement
Materiality considerations during audit planning are extremely important. The assessment of
materiality at this stage should be based on the most recent and reliable financial information and
will help to determine an effective and efficient audit approach. Materiality assessment will help the
auditors to:
• determine the amount of audit work necessary to facilitate audit efficiency and effectiveness;
• put audit risk in context;
• decide whether to use sampling techniques;
• determine the applicability of accounting standards which normally apply only to material items;
• evaluate uncorrected misstatements during the audit; and
• evaluate what level of error is likely to lead to a modified audit opinion.
In specifying materiality, an auditor should establish a benchmark (or benchmarks) to which a
percentage factor is applied. Factors that may affect the identification of an appropriate benchmark
include the following:
• The elements of the financial statements
• Items on which the attention of the users tends to be focused
• The nature of the entity, where it is in its life cycle and the industry and economic environment in
which it operates
• The entity’s ownership structure and the way it is financed
• The relative volatility of the benchmark
The following materiality benchmarks are typically used:
Benchmark Threshold
Profit before tax Approx. 5%
Adjusted profit before tax Approx. 5%
Total revenue Approx. 1%
Total assets Approx. 1–2%
Equity Approx. 1–2%
(The benchmarks suggested above are based on information from the FRC publication Extended
Auditor‘s Reports: A review of Experience in the First Year, 2015.)
The following points should be noted:
• There is some variation used in the methods to determine materiality within and between audit
firms.
• Multiple measures are sometimes used to determine materiality.
• Adjusted profit before tax and profit before tax are the most commonly used measures.
Determining the level of materiality is a matter of professional judgement, rather than applying
benchmarks mechanically. In applying such judgements, the auditor should consider any relevant
qualitative factors, including:
• whether it is a first-year engagement;
• deficiencies in controls;
• material misstatements in prior years;
• risk of fraud;
• significant management turnover;
• unusually high market pressures;
• sensitivity of covenants in loan agreements to changes in the financial statements; and
• effect of changes in results on earnings trends.
HB2021
The auditor’s assessment of materiality is then communicated in the auditor’s report (ISA700.38(c)).
By far the most common level of materiality for listed company auditors is 5% of adjusted profit
before tax. It is also necessary to determine a materiality threshold for reporting any unadjusted
differences to the audit committee. This will be much lower than overall materiality, and may be
communicated in the auditor’s report.
In the case of a group audit, the group auditor will also set materiality for the group as a whole, as
well as component materiality for any component auditors. Component materiality is always less than
group materiality.
8.2.2 Performance materiality

The preliminary assessment of materiality, as referred to above, is in the context of the financial
statements as a whole. However, if the audit procedures are planned solely to detect individually
material misstatements this would:
• overlook the fact that the aggregate of individually immaterial misstatements could cause the
financial statements to be materially misstated; and
• leave no margin for possible undetected misstatements.
Further materiality levels must therefore be set before audit procedures are designed and
performed. The requirement to do so was introduced into ISA 320 as part of the IAASB’s Clarity
Project, and these lower materiality levels are referred to as performance materiality. Seen as a
‘working level of materiality’, performance materiality is a concept that most experienced auditors
would have applied throughout their careers.
The auditor must set an amount or amounts at less than the materiality for the financial statements as
a whole and this is known as performance materiality. This could be set in two ways:
(a) as a judgemental estimate to reduce the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and
undetected misstatements exceeds the materiality for the financial statement as a whole; or
(b) specific materiality levels may be set for particular classes of transactions, account balances or
disclosures that could have a particular influence on users’ decisions in the particular
circumstances of the entity.
Different levels of materiality may therefore be used in the various audit procedures carried out.
The following example illustrates, in a simplistic way, the role of performance materiality in an audit.
Context example: Performance materiality

The auditor of Company A has set materiality for the financial statements as a whole at £100,000
During the audit, the following misstatements were identified:
(a) Misclassification of abortive research and development expenses as an intangible asset of
£41,000. This is the only intangible asset on the statement of financial position.
(b) Overstatement of non-current assets by £50,000 due to cut-off errors.
(c) Overstatement of receivables by £29,000 representing the unpaid balance from a customer
which has been liquidated during the period.
Considering each of the misstatements on an individual basis, the auditor may overlook the
misstatements above. This would give rise to an aggregate of uncorrected misstatements of
£120,000 – exceeding materiality for the financial statements as a whole.
In addition, the uncorrected misstatement (1) could have misled the users of the financial statements,
whose attention would have been drawn to the company’s new, and only, intangible assets.
The auditor would avoid the risk of giving an inappropriate audit opinion by applying performance
materiality:
(a) Set a general performance materiality at £50,000 to reduce the probability that the aggregate
of uncorrected misstatements would exceed materiality for the financial statements as a whole:
This would identify misstatement (2) as requiring adjustment.
(b) Set performance materiality specific to intangible assets at £40,000 to reflect the specific risks
associated with this account: This would identify misstatement (1) as requiring adjustment.
HB2021

(c) Now, provided management agrees to correct misstatements (1) and (2), the only adjustment
which remains uncorrected is misstatement (3). At £29,000, this is now less than 30% of
materiality for the financial statements as a whole
Performance materiality should be used in both the planning and fieldwork stages of the audit. In the
November 2011 issue of the ICAEW Audit & Assurance Faculty newsletter, the article ‘Living in a
material world’ by David Gallagher usefully sets out four circumstances in which performance
materiality can be applied:
At the planning stage:
(1) to determine when no work is necessary, and where evidence is required, the extent of that
evidence; and
(2) to help identify which items to test (for example, if a substantive test of detail approach is
adopted, the auditor may consider selecting all items above performance materiality first, and then
consider whether any, and if so how many, further items should be sampled).
At the fieldwork stage:
(3) to help evaluate the results of sample tests (for example, if on a particular test the extrapolated
difference of potential misstatements is less than materiality, the auditor may conclude that sufficient
audit evidence had been obtained in this area); and
(4) to help evaluate the results of analytical procedures (for example, if the results of a
reasonableness test produced a difference between the predicted and actual amounts which is less
than performance materiality, the auditor may conclude that sufficient audit evidence had been
obtained in this area).
Students who work in an audit practice may have come across tolerable misstatement (previously
called ‘tolerable error’) In carrying out audit engagements. Essentially, tolerable misstatement is an
example of how the concept of performance materiality is applied to sampling (points (2) and (3)
above).
What constitutes sufficient audit evidence, and the different audit procedures, are covered in further
detail in Chapter 6. However, you should already be familiar with these topics from your earlier
studies.
8.2.3 Estimation of likely misstatements

Towards the end of the audit, the auditor will aggregate the misstatements from each account
balance, class of transaction or disclosure (including both known and likely misstatements) and
compare this with the preliminary assessment of materiality. Where additional information has come
to light the preliminary assessment of materiality may need to be revised. If this is the case, the
circumstances should be adequately documented. Comparison of the aggregated misstatements
and materiality will determine whether the financial statements require adjustment.
Like materiality for the financial statements as a whole, performance materiality is linked to audit risk.
Where the audit risk has been revised during an audit, and the materiality level for the financial
statements as a whole has been reduced, the auditor must consider whether performance materiality
also needs to be revised. This may affect the nature, timing and extent of further audit procedures.
8.2.4 Auditor’s report

Auditors of companies applying the UK Corporate Governance Code must disclose the materiality
level used in the audit for the financial statements as a whole. This area is covered in more detail in
Chapter 8 of this Workbook, but for now it may be helpful to see a real-life example of such a
disclosure. For instance, PwC’s auditor’s report for Barclays plc (in relation to the 2016 Annual Report)
included the following statement.
“Overall group materiality [was set at]: £320 million [which represents] 5% of Barclays Core profit
before tax excluding notable items. The use [of this measure of profit]is appropriate as it reflects the
underlying business management is focusing upon and will be what is left once disposals from Non-
core have occurred.”
(Source: Barclays plc (2016) Building the bank of the future: Annual Report. [Online]. Available from:
https://home.barclays/content/dam/home-barclays/documents/investor-
relations/ResultAnnouncements/2016FYResults/Barclays%20PLC%20Annual%20Report%202016.pdf
[Accessed 12 October 2021])
HB2021
Deloitte’s auditor’s report for Tesco plc (in relation to the 2016 Annual Report) includes the following
description of the basis on which materiality was derived, making reference to the effect on the
materiality level of the change of auditors.
“We determined materiality for the Group to be £50 million (2014/15: materiality determined by the
previous auditor of £50 million). Professional judgement was applied in determining an appropriate
level of materiality and we considered a number of profit based and other measures with reference
to the Group’s performance. We concluded that it was appropriate to determine materiality with
reference to the Group’s average profitability over a three year period (2013/14, 2014/15, and
2015/16), adjusted for exceptional items.
In our professional judgement, we believe that the use of an adjusted profit measure is appropriate
as the amounts which have been excluded from the Group’s profit before tax are one-off items which
would otherwise skew the level of materiality determined and are not reflective of the Group’s
trading activity. However, we capped the materiality determined to that applied by the previous
auditor in the light of the Group’s lower level of profit in the current year and as a result of 2015/2016
being our first year of appointment.”
(Source: Tesco (2016) Annual Report and Financial Statements. [Online]. Available from:
www.tescoplc.com/media/264194/annual-report-2016.pdf [Accessed 12 October 2021])
Ernst and Young’s auditor’s report for J Sainsbury plc (in relation to the 2016 Annual Report) provides
information about both overall materiality and performance materiality as follows:
“We determined materiality for the Group to be £31.9 million, which is 5% of profit before tax
excluding one-off items of £90 million as described in note 3. We believe that this materiality basis
provides us with the best assessment of the requirements of the users of the financial statements.
This is consistent with the approach taken by auditors in the prior period.
On the basis of our risk assessments, together with our assessment of the Group’s overall control
environment and this being our first period of engagement, our judgement was that performance
materiality was approximately 50% of our planning materiality, namely £16 million.”
(Source: J Sainsbury plc (2016) Annual Report and Financial Statements. [Online]. Available from:
www.about.sainsburys.co.uk/~/media/Files/S/Sainsburys/documents/reports-and-
presentations/annual-reports/annual-report-2016.pdf [Accessed 12 October 2021])
8.3 Problems with materiality

As discussed above, materiality is a matter of judgement for the auditor. Therefore, prescriptive rules
will not always be helpful when assessing materiality. A significant risk of prescriptive rules is that a
significant matter, which falls outside the boundaries of the rules, could be overlooked, leading to a
material misstatement in the financial statements.
The percentage guidelines of assets and profits that are commonly used for materiality (eg, those
referred to in section 8.2.1) must be handled with care. The auditor must bear in mind the focus of
the company being audited.
In some companies, post-tax profit is the key figure in the financial statements, as the level of
dividend is the most important factor in the accounts.
In owner-managed businesses, if owners are paid a salary and are indifferent to dividends, the key
profit figure stands higher in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, say at
gross profit level. Alternatively in this situation, the auditor should consider a figure that does not
appear on the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income: profit before directors‘
salaries and benefits.
Some companies are driven by assets rather than the need for profits. In such examples, higher
materiality might need to be applied to assets. In some companies, say charities, costs are the driving
factor, and materiality might be considered in relation to these.
While rules or guidelines are helpful to auditors when assessing materiality, they must always keep in
mind the nature of the business they are dealing with. Materiality must be tailored to the business
and the anticipated user of financial statements, or it is not truly materiality. The extracts from
auditors’ reports included in section 8.2.4 above demonstrate how these principles are applied in
practice.
The FRC published Audit Quality Thematic Review: Materiality in December 2017 and found that
the quality and frequency of materiality judgements displayed by audit firms was improving: for
example, in three out of the eight firms visited, the FRC found that performance materiality was
HB2021

reduced to reflect the increased risk presented by the first year of audit. The review did conclude that
the disclosure of judgements associated with materiality could be explained further by auditors
within the auditor’s extended report and that there should be greater dialogue about materiality
between audit committees and their external auditors to ensure full visibility of the audit approach,
but overall, there was optimism that this area was seeing some improvement in quality.
The evaluation of materiality often starts with a calculation but encourages auditors to consider other
factors as well when determining what should really be the focus in the audit. This approach of
combining both quantitative and qualitative factors is therefore a good way of demonstrating
judgement.
Interactive question 6: Materiality (1)

You are the manager responsible for the audit of Albreda Ltd. The draft consolidated financial
statements for the year ended 30 September 20X6 show revenue of £42.2 million (20X5 £41.8
million), profit before taxation of £1.8 million (20X5 £2.2 million) and total assets of £30.7 million
(20X5 £23.4 million). In September 20X6, the management board announced plans to cease offering
‘home delivery’ services from the end of the month. These sales amounted to £0.6 million for the
year to 30 September 20X6 (20X5 £0.8 million). A provision of £0.2 million has been made at 30
September 20X6 for the compensation of redundant employees (mainly delivery van drivers).
Requirement
Comment upon the materiality of these two issues.
Interactive question 7: Materiality (2)

You are the auditor of Oscar Ltd and are in the process of planning the audit for the year ended 31
December 20X8. In the past the audit of this company has been straightforward. The following
information is available:
20X8 20X7
£’000 £’000
Total assets 1,800 1,750
Total revenue 2,010 1,900
Profit before tax 10 300
Materiality has been calculated by a colleague as follows:

Profit before tax = £10,000 × 5% = £500
Requirement
Comment on the suitability of the planning materiality figure.
HB2021
9 Responding to assessed risks
Section overview
Further audit procedures should be designed in response to the risks identified.
As a result of the auditor’s risk assessment and assessment of materiality an audit strategy will be
developed in response. ISA (UK) 330 (Revised July 2017), The Auditor’s Responses to Assessed Risks
makes the following points in this context which you should be familiar with.
9.1 Overall responses

The auditor should design and implement overall responses to address the risks of material
misstatement at the financial statement level. This may include the following:
• Emphasising to the audit team the need to maintain professional scepticism in gathering and
evaluating audit evidence
• Assigning more experienced staff, those with special skills or using experts
• Providing more supervision
• Incorporating additional elements of unpredictability in the selection of further audit procedures
The auditor may also make general changes to the nature, timing or extent of audit procedures, for
example by performing substantive procedures at the period end instead of at an interim date.
These decisions will take into account the auditor’s assessment and understanding of the control
environment.
9.2 Audit procedures responsive to risks of material misstatement at the assertion level
The auditor is required to design and perform procedures which will address the risks identified. The
ISA (UK) emphasises the link between further audit procedures and the risk assessment process.
Factors which the auditor will consider include the following:
• The reasons for the risk assessment at the assertion level for each class of transaction, account
balance or disclosure
• The likelihood of material misstatement due to the particular characteristics of the class of
transaction, account balance or disclosure involved
• Whether the risk assessment takes account of relevant controls and so requires the auditor to
obtain evidence to determine whether the controls are operating effectively
The auditor shall obtain more persuasive audit evidence the higher the assessment of risk.
The auditor will then determine the nature, timing and extent of further audit procedures. We will
look at this aspect of the audit in detail in Chapter 6.
9.3 Evaluating the sufficiency and appropriateness of audit evidence obtained

Based on the audit procedures performed and the evidence obtained, the auditor should conclude
whether sufficient, appropriate audit evidence has been obtained to reduce the risk of material
misstatement to an acceptably low level. While this will be considered by the auditor throughout the
audit, it is of particular relevance at the review stage of the audit. We will consider this in more detail
in Chapter 6.
HB2021

9.4 Documentation
The ISA emphasises the need to document the link between the audit procedures and the assessed
risks. These matters should be recorded in accordance with ISA (UK) 230 (Revised June 2016), Audit
Documentation. You should be familiar with the principles of this ISA from your earlier studies.
Whatever the auditor’s response to the risk assessment carried out, it must follow on logically from
the evidence collected at the planning stage or the audit may not address the correct audit risks.
10 Other audit methodologies

Section overview
Other audit methodologies include:

• systems audit;
• transaction cycle approach; and
• balance sheet audit approach.
10.1 Introduction
In this chapter we have looked in detail at business risk and audit risk. However, there are a number
of other audit approaches which may be adopted.
10.2 Systems audit

An auditor may predominantly test controls and systems, but substantive testing can never be
eliminated entirely. It is always used in conjunction with another approach.
You should be familiar with the systems and controls approach to auditing from your previous
studies.
Management are required to implement a system of controls which is capable of fulfilling its duty of
safeguarding the assets of the shareholders.
Auditors assess the system of controls put in place by the directors and ascertain whether they
believe it is effective enough for them to be able to rely on it for the purposes of their audit.
If they believe that the system is effective, they carry out tests of controls to ensure that the control
system operates as it is supposed to. If they believe that the control system is ineffective, they assess
control risk as high and undertake higher levels of substantive testing.
The key control objectives and procedures over the main cycles of sales, purchases and wages were
studied at length in your previous studies. If you do not feel confident in what they are, you should
go back to your learning materials in these areas and revise them now.
An auditor may choose predominantly to carry out substantive tests on the transactions and balances
of the business in the relevant period, but if internal control systems are particularly weak then no
amount of substantive testing may give adequate assurance (eg, if point of sales controls over cash
receipts are inadequate, then substantive testing may never detect material understatement of
revenues).
Two approaches to substantive testing are:
• the transaction cycle approach; and
• the balance sheet approach.
HB2021
10.3 Transaction cycle approach
Cycle testing is in some ways closely linked to systems testing, because it is based on the same
systems.
When auditors take a cycle approach, they test the transactions which have occurred, resulting in the
entries in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (for example, sales
transactions, inventory purchases, asset purchases, wages payments, other expenses).
They would select a sample of transactions and test that each transaction was valid and complete
and processed correctly throughout the cycle. In other words, they substantiate the transactions
which appear in the financial statements.
The key business cycles are outlined below. Remember that you know what the processes should be
in the cycle (you have assessed the system and controls previously). Under this approach, you are
ensuring that individual transactions were processed correctly. Hence, the cycles outlined below
should correspond to the controls processes you are already aware of.
Figure 5.5: Sales cycle
You should be aware of

controls over ordering
Take
orders
Document
Receive Chase orders
payment payment
Send
Despatch statement
invoice
Make
order
Account for Raise

invoice invoice
Despatch
order
You should be aware of Raise goods

the controls over recording despatched note
and accounting
HB2021

Figure 5.6: Purchases cycle
Raise You should be aware of

requisition controls over ordering
Supplier will Purchasing

extend credit in department
the future raise order
Send payment Receive goods
Carry on
production
Record and Raise goods
account for invoice received note
Accounts
department match
You should be aware of GRN to invoice
the controls over recording
and accounting
The auditor should be able to find an audit trail for each transaction, for example in the purchases
cycle:
• Requisition
• Invoice
• Order
• Ledger and daybook entries
• GRN
• Payment in cashbook
10.4 Balance sheet approach

An alternative to the cycles (or transactions) approach to auditing is to take the balance sheet
approach. This is the most common approach to the substantive part of the audit, after controls have
been tested.
The statement of financial position (balance sheet) shows a snapshot of the financial position of the
business at a point in time. It follows that if it is fairly stated and the previous snapshot was fairly
stated then it is reasonable to undertake lower level testing on the transactions which connect the
two snapshots; for example, analytical procedures.
Under this approach, therefore, the auditors seek to concentrate efforts on substantiating the closing
position in the year, shown in the statement of financial position, having determined that the closing
position from the previous year (also substantiated) has been correctly transferred to be the opening
position in the current year.
You should be aware of the financial statement assertions and the substantive tests in relation to the
major items on the statement of financial position from your previous studies. We will also review
these in more detail in Chapter 6.
HB2021
10.4.1 Relationship with business risk approach
The substantive element of an audit undertaken under a business risk approach is restricted due to
the high use of analytical procedures. However, the element of substantive testing which remains in a
business risk approach can be undertaken under the balance sheet approach.
In some cases, particularly small companies, the business risks may be strongly connected to the fact
that management is concentrated in one person. Another feature of small companies may be that
their statement of financial position is uncomplicated and contains one or two material items, for
example receivables or inventory.
When this is the case, it is often more cost effective to undertake a highly substantive balance sheet
audit than to undertake a business risk assessment, as it is relatively simple to obtain the assurance
required about the financial statements from taking that approach.
10.4.2 Limitations of the balance sheet approach

When not undertaken in conjunction with a risk-based approach or systems testing, the level of
detailed testing can be high in a balance sheet approach, rendering it costly.
11 Information technology and risk assessment

Section overview
• A huge number of organisations now use computer systems to run their businesses and to
process financial information.
• The main risks associated with using computerised systems include infection by viruses and
access by unauthorised users. Both these risks could potentially have a very damaging effect on
the business.
• This means that a number of the controls which the directors are required to put into place to
safeguard the assets of the shareholders must be incorporated into the computer systems.
• Auditors have to assess the effectiveness of the controls in place within computer systems and
can do this by performing a systems audit as part of their initial assessment of risk during the
planning stage of the audit.
11.1 The use of information technology

Most organisations and businesses, even very small entities, now use information technology (IT) to
some degree. The first use of a computerised accounting system is thought to have been back in
1954 by General Electric, and rapid advances in computer technology since then are allowing
companies to conduct business globally, making them indispensable and essential to an entity’s
operations.
However, the increasing use of computer systems brings with it certain risks to the business which
can also have an impact on the risk of the financial statements being misstated. These risks have
increased with the development of the internet in the last few years and with it the facility for
transactions to be conducted electronically.
One area where IT-driven business risk is growing is the increasing use of cloud computing, where
digital storage is provided by third parties in remote locations and is only accessible online. Chapter
7 contains more details on cloud computing.
HB2021

11.2 Risks associated with the use of computerised systems
Cyber-security is becoming an increasingly important issue for businesses to address. The two key
business risks of organisations using computerised systems are as follows:
• The system being put at risk by a virus or some other fault or breakdown which spreads across the
system
• The system being invaded by an unauthorised user, who could then:
– affect the smooth operation of the system; or
– obtain commercially sensitive information.
Context example: British Airways

In May 2017, IT failures at British Airways resulted in hundreds of flights at Heathrow and Gatwick
airports being cancelled and thousands of passengers disrupted. There have been suggestions that
the failure could have been avoided if the company had not outsourced its IT work. In 2016 the
company made hundreds of its IT staff redundant and outsourced its IT services to India. The failure
in May led to planes not being able to take off, baggage not being allowed to move and boarding
passes not being able to be issued to passengers.
A few days after the failure, the chief executive of British Airways’ parent company stated that the
disruption had been caused by an engineer disconnecting a power supply, leading to a power surge
when it was reconnected.
Context example: NHS

Also in May 2017, the NHS was affected by a global cyber attack which resulted in patients’
operations being cancelled, ambulances being diverted and some patient records being unavailable
in England and Scotland. The attack affected not just the UK but almost 100 other countries and
originated from malware that was using technology stolen from the National Security Agency in the
USA. The malware blocks access to PC files until a ransom is paid, in this case $300. There was no
confirmation from the UK government that NHS patient data had been backed up. The attacks used
software called WanaCryptor 2.0 or WannaCry which made use of a vulnerability in Windows –
Microsoft had issued an update to fix this in March 2017 but not all computers had installed this.
Risks and relevant controls related to cyber-security are dealt with in more detail in Chapter 7.
11.3 Systems audit (IT-specific)

As part of any audit, auditors are required to assess the quality and effectiveness of the accounting
system. Increasingly, this necessarily includes a consideration of the computer systems in place
within the organisation.
The following are the key areas they are likely to concentrate on to establish how reliable the systems
are:
• Management policy
• Segregation of duties
• Security
You should be aware that these are important control considerations in a computer environment. The
details that the auditor will consider within each area are outlined below.
Management policy
• Does management have a written statement of policy with regard to computer systems?
• Is it compatible with management policy in other areas?
• Is it adhered to?
• Is it sufficient and effective?
• Is it updated when the systems are updated?
• Does it relate to the current system?
HB2021
Segregation of duties
• Is there adequate segregation of duties with regard to data input?
• Are there adequate system controls (eg, passwords) to enforce segregation of duties?
Security
• Is there a security policy in place?:
– Physical security (locked doors/windows)
– Access security (passwords)
– Data security (virus shields)
• Is it adhered to?
• Is it sufficient and effective?
11.4 Internal controls in a computerised environment

ISA (UK) 315 (Revised) specifically requires the auditor to gain an understanding of the entity’s
accounting systems and control environment as part of the risk assessment process at the planning
stage of the audit. Today, almost any accounting system and control an auditor will encounter will
involve some form of IT.
The management policies, segregation of duties and security issues established by the organisation
are examples of the internal control activities in a computerised environment. There are two
categories of internal controls: general controls and application controls.
General IT controls are the policies and procedures that relate to many IT applications at the same
time. They support application controls by maintaining the overall integrity of information and
security of data. Examples include procedure manuals, password protection and back-up facilities.
Application controls are manual or automated procedures that typically operate at a business
process level and apply to the processing of transactions by individual applications. They are
designed to ensure the integrity of the accounting records: that transactions occurred, are
authorised, and are completely and accurately recorded and processed. Examples include edit
checks of input data and numerical sequence checks with manual follow up of exception reports.
You should already be familiar with these two types of controls from your earlier studies. We will look
at them in further detail in Chapter 7.
11.5 Cryptocurrencies and blockchain

To counter the problems of reporting financial performance and position both accurately and
securely, a virtual system known as ‘blockchain’ has become more widespread across the world.
Using what is also referred to as a ‘distributed ledger’, transactions are recorded in blocks, with
access and initiation driven by encryption technology. Instead of using a recognised currency, which
can be difficult to use online, a virtual currency called ‘cryptocurrency’ is used within blockchain (one
example of this is ‘Bitcoin’).
Why is this relevant to corporate reporting? You need to be familiar with the technology and how it
could be used in a corporate context, including the business risks created from diverting traditional
funds into forms of cryptocurrency and how to accurately record, measure and review transactions
using such technology. Make sure you revise these terms from your Professional Level Business
Strategy and Technology materials.
HB2021

12 Big data
Section overview
Big data is a broad term for data sets which are large or complex
12.1 Big data

Advances in technology have helped to make data an increasingly important resource in business.
Making use of the insights that can be gained from data analysis has made data management a
strategic issue for many organisations. The increased emphasis on the importance of data has given
rise to the now widely used terms of big data and data analytics (Data analytics is discussed in more
detail in section 13). As businesses have changed the way that they use data, auditors have had to
respond to the opportunities and challenges that this development has created.
Definition
Big data: A term that describes those “datasets whose size is beyond the ability of typical database
software to capture, store, manage and analyse.”(McKinsey Global Institute, Big data: The next
frontier for innovation, competition and productivity, 2011).
Today, organisations have access to greater quantities of data than in the past, with vast amounts of
transactional data available from a number of internal and external sources, such as suppliers and
customers.
The growth in the amount of data now available has been largely fuelled by increasing internet
usage and by developments in communication methods such as wireless networks, social media
sites and smartphones. An increasing number of organisations have embraced the so-called ‘internet
of things’ by embedding sensor technologies, such as RFID tags (Radio Frequency Identification) and
tracking devices, into their operations to gather data from a diverse range of activities. Companies
including British Gas, an energy supplier in the UK, have introduced so-called smart meters as a way
of measuring the amount of electricity consumers are using on a daily basis. Such meters also allow
home owners to better manage their household energy costs as the meter records and wirelessly
transmits the level of energy consumption back to the energy provider.
Leading data analytics software firm, SAS, offers the following explanation of big data.
Big data is a term that describes the large volume of data – both structured and unstructured –
that inundates a business on a day-to-day basis. But it’s not the amount of data that’s important.
It’s what organisations do with the data that matters. Big data can be analysed for insights that
lead to better decisions and strategic business moves.
(Source: SAS (n.d.) Big data – What it is and why it matters. [Online] Available at:
www.sas.com/en_us/insights/analytics/big-data-analytics.html [Accessed 12 October 2021])
12.2 Features of big data

As explained in the ICAEW IT Faculty document Big data and analytics – what’s new? big data is often
characterised by the three Vs:
• Large volumes of data
• High-velocity data
• Wide variety of data
Doug Laney, an analyst with technology research firm Gartner, also suggests that big data can be
defined with reference to the three Vs of volume, velocity and variety.
Volume
The vast quantities of data generated are a key feature of big data. Advances in technology and data
analytics software have enabled very large data sets to be processed. This is helping organisations to
gain a deeper understanding of customer requirements. For example, organisations can collect large
HB2021
amounts of external data about their customers from customers’ use of the internet and social media.
This data can now be combined with internally generated data for example, from customer loyalty
cards or transactions recorded at shop tills, to build up a more detailed profile of the customer. The
volume aspect of big data has challenged the strategic capabilities of many organisations wishing to
exploit its potential. Most notably, these have involved enhancing existing IT infrastructures through
the use of cloud computing architectures so that they are capable of holding greater amounts of
data.
Velocity
Velocity refers to the speed at which ‘real time’ data flows into the organisation and the speed at
which the data is processed by the organisation’s systems to produce a meaningful output. Many
online retailers have developed capabilities which enable them to record the movements and ‘clicks’
made by a customer when using the organisation’s website. As such, online retailers are now able to
build up a better picture of those products and services the customer found most interesting as
opposed to only recording the final sale transaction with the customer. Analysing the customers’
clicks while still visiting the website has enabled online retailers to recommend relevant additional
items for purchase based on those items already viewed. Online websites including Amazon and
eBay use this tactic to encourage customers to make extra purchases
Variety
Variety is concerned with the diverse range of forms that big data can take. An increasing amount of
data generated comes in an unstructured form, ie, data which is not easy to hold in a database.
Unstructured data may take the form of words used by people on social media sites such as
Facebook and Twitter, along with shared content such as photographs or video recordings.
Capturing, processing and storing unstructured data presents further challenges to organisations
which may need to develop their existing IT/IS capabilities to be able to firstly store such data and
secondly extract meaning from the data they hold. Data which is too large, moves too fast or fails to
fit neatly with existing IT infrastructures reduces the value which can be derived from it.
The three Vs of big data can also be extended to include an additional characteristic: veracity
Veracity
Veracity (value) is concerned with the truthfulness of the data collected. For data to have any value
when being used for decision-making in an organisation, it needs to be truthful, ie, it must not
present a bias or contain inconsistencies. The use of poor quality data may have expensive and far
reaching consequences for those organisations which rely on it for making strategically important
decisions. For example, an organisation may decide to introduce a type of product in the belief that
there is sufficient customer demand for it when in reality this may not be the case.
The trend in big data is being propelled by three factors: a growth in computer power, new sources
of data and infrastructure for knowledge creation. The combination of these three factors is enabling
businesses to use data in ways which were not previously possible or viable. In particular they are
using big data to:
• gain insights eg, using more granular data about customers;
• predict the future eg, customer service functions personalise services based on predictions about
individual customers; and
• automate non-routine decisions and tasks eg, using machine learning techniques to automate a
medical diagnosis.
Like business, auditors have had to respond to the changing environment brought about by big data.
Historically auditors have reviewed structured data (eg, transactions recorded in the general ledger)
however the analysis of unstructured data can provide new insights (eg, data extracted from emails,
texts and social media). Audit firms have invested heavily in recent years in data analytics tools which
will enable them to use this data to better understand their clients, identify risks and add value.
HB2021

13 Data analytics, robotic process automation
(RPA) and artificial intelligence (AI)
Section overview
Some firms are currently investing in data analytics to provide a better quality audit and to reduce
risk and liability for the auditor. Recent developments in robotic process automation (RPA) and
artificial intelligence (AI) have made this kind of technology more sophisticated thus increasing its
potential.
13.1 Data analytics

Large firms in particular have been developing a data analytics offering with many clients now
expecting their auditors to adopt this approach. However with the growing range of generic data
analytics tools becoming available it is also becoming more relevant to small and medium sized firms
too.
There are many definitions of data analytics.
Definitions
Data analytics: The process of collecting, organising and analysing large sets of data to discover
patterns and other information which an organisation can use for its future business decisions.
Closely linked to the term data analytics is data mining.
Data mining: The process of sorting through data to identify patterns and relationships between
different items. Data mining software, using statistical algorithms to discover correlations and
patterns, is frequently used on large databases. In essence, it is the process of turning raw data into
useful information.
The ICAEW Audit and Assurance faculty document Data analytics for external auditors describes data
analytics as follows:
“Data analytics involves the extraction of data using fields within the basic data structure, rather than
the format of records. A simple example is Power view, an Excel tool which can filter, sort, slice and
highlight data in a spreadsheet and then present it visually in variety of bubble, bar and pie charts.”
In simpler terms data analytics is about examining raw data with the purpose of drawing conclusions
about it. The Audit and Assurance faculty document identifies the following as commonly performed
data analytics routines:
• Comparing the last time an item was bought with the last time it was sold, for cost/NRV purposes
• Inventory ageing and how many days inventory is in stock by item
• Receivables and payables ageing and the reduction in overdue debt over time by customer
• Analysis or revenue trends split by product or region
• Analyses of gross margins and sales, highlighting items with negative margins
• Matches of orders to cash and purchases to payments
• ‘Can do did do testing’ of user codes to test whether segregation of duties is appropriate, and
whether any inappropriate combinations of users have been involved in processing transactions
• Detailed recalculations of depreciation of fixed assets by item, either using approximations (such
as assuming sales and purchases are mid-month) or using the entire data set and exact dates
• Analyses of capital expenditure v repairs and maintenance
• Three-way matches between purchases/sales orders, goods received/despatched documentation
and invoices
HB2021
Data analytics can also draw on external market data as well as internal data, for example third-party
pricing sources and foreign exchange rates can be accessed to recalculate the valuation of
investments. (‘Coming your way’ by Katherine Bagshaw and Phedra Diomidous, Audit and Beyond,
2016).
Data analytics can analyse unstructured data as well as structured data. For example an analysis of
emails could be a more effective means of identifying fraud than an analysis of journals. Data
analytics tools allow the auditor to analyse this type of information in a level of detail which would not
be possible manually.
13.2 Improved audit quality

One of the key drivers behind the use of data analytics is improved audit quality. The Audit and
Assurance faculty document identifies the following as the unique features of data analytics which
contribute to improved risk assessment:
• The ability to graphically visualise results: this makes it easier to drill down to the underlying data
and obtain a better understanding of findings
• Sophistication, and the breadth of interrogation options: this includes wide-ranging query and
filter options
• Ease of use by non-specialists: the identification of anomalies, outliers and trends could highlight
issues that would otherwise have gone unnoticed
• Scale and speed: resulting in time efficiencies
By using data analytics tools the auditor can navigate much bigger data sets much faster than before
so that while the analyses performed are not fundamentally different to those performed in the past
they are now at a more granular level. The quality of the analyses is enhanced and therefore the
judgments made on the basis of this information are enhanced too.
Data analytics can be used to ‘drill down’ into the data, for example, in order to identify which
journals need to be tested. In this way substantive procedures are better directed. For example:
• Extract and examine all credit journal entries to the Revenue Account where the corresponding
debit is not either receivables or cash (which would be the normal expected entries). These
extracted exceptions can then be investigated.
• Extract and examine all journal entries which are: Dr PPE account; Cr an expense account. This
would be an unusual entry in the normal course of business and there is a risk of creative
accounting by capitalising expenditure that should be expensed. These can be investigated
including requiring management explanations.
The Audit and Beyond article also highlights the role of data analytics in supporting the application
and demonstration of professional scepticism. For example, predictive data analytics tools might be
used to help assess the reasonableness of management representations.
A recent article by KPMG ‘Data, Analytics and Your Audit’ discusses the impact of big data and how it
affects auditors. The article emphasises that the use of data by auditors is not a new thing by any
means since auditors have always had to analyse data. Data analytics allows auditors to analyse data
at much greater speeds than before. For example, data analytics will allow auditors to sample much
higher volumes of transactions up to 100% in some cases, which will allow auditors to identify high
risk transactions over a vast array of data and in minutes rather than over weeks. The article cites the
example of a clothing retailer and shows how data analytics can allow auditors to evaluate the three-
way match between purchase orders, delivery confirmations and invoice documentation in a
graphical way that can show account relationships and transaction flows and control issues over
segregation of duties. Data analytics can also be used to examine supplier relationships (supplier
contracts, payment terms, controls over procurement processes etc).
The article includes a very useful table on the use of data analytics which is shown below.
Area Use of data analytics
Revenue and accounts Identify discrepancies in price and quantity between invoices, sales
receivable orders and shipping documentation
Identifies stockouts and customer orders coming in faster than
shipped products
HB2021

Area Use of data analytics
Segregation of duties Identifies areas of increased risk

Highlights internal control deficiencies through inefficient
segregation of duties
Purchases and accounts Identifies significant or unusual items such as invoice price
payable discrepancies against original purchased products
Shows purchase trends and activities with suppliers that are
unauthorised or where there are concentrations of spending
activities
Supply chain Identifies risks resulting from the concentration of suppliers in a

particular region
Can highlight possible issues if suppliers are affected by regional
disruptions
13.3 Technical challenges

While data analytics can be seen as the solution to many problems it is also the cause of new ones.
13.3.1 Data capture, extraction, validation and transformation

In order to apply data analytics effectively the auditor needs to be able to extract data from the
client’s system in a usable format. In order to do so they need to be able to interface with clients’
systems. This can involve a considerable amount of investment in mapping different systems,
particularly where they are bespoke to the client.
The issue of ‘transformation’ also has to be addressed. This relates to the way in which data is made
useable. This normally involves changing the data by simplifying it. Before changes are made careful
thought is required regarding the impact this will have on the quality of the evidence.
13.3.2 Data protection

Confidentiality and security of information are critical issues. This is particularly the case where there
is the potential for the creation of new personal data when analyses refer to individuals. In these
cases the auditor must ensure that relevant data protection laws and regulations are complied with.
13.3.3 Quality
Data analytics tools must be developed to the highest quality assurance standards. As the Audit and
Assurance Faculty document indicates procedures should include pilot and parallel running with the
‘normal’ audit process together with contingency plans should the software crash. There also need to
be proper controls to ensure that individuals using the tools are using them properly.
13.3.4 Data retention

The audit process has always allowed the auditor access to and retention of information which is not
its own. However the scope of data analytics is such that the volume has reached a new scale. While
there are differing views about the amount of information that should be retained and how long it
should be kept there is a consensus that ‘If an item has been tested, information about it should be
retained such that it could be identified again if necessary’.
13.4 Data analytics and auditing standards

Current auditing standards are risk-based. They require risk analysis, controls testing and sampling
against a ‘materiality’ benchmark. It could be argued that data analytics and its possibilities
challenges these concepts and therefore the audit itself. Two aspects of the audit in particular are
potentially affected as the technology is developing:
Test of controls
ISAs require evaluation and testing of controls where the auditor is to rely on them, as a means of
obtaining comfort that transactions processed by the system are properly recorded in the financial
statements. However if auditors are able to use data analytics tools which allow them to see what has
HB2021
happened to all of the transactions and these tools show that they are properly valued and recorded
why would the auditor need to test the controls applied in the system?
Sampling
Sampling has historically been adopted on the basis that it is not cost-effective (or necessary if risk
assessment has been performed) to audit 100% of all balances in the financial statements. Again
data analytics could challenge this principle. For example if it is possible to examine 100% of the
invoices automatically, both cheaply and efficiently why would the auditor choose to examine only a
sample?
Auditing data analytics
As accountants increasingly use data analytics for the purposes of visualisation, summary and
interpretation of ever larger data sets, auditors also need to become more accustomed to using this
information in their audits and develop skills that allow them to manage the output of data analytics
into their audit approach. Key to this will be unlocking the messages contained in the content
created by data analytics techniques. As a student, you should start to consider how you can
leverage your professional judgement and scepticism skills when presented with the outcome of
data analytics activity.
For example, an auditor may possess software that uses data imported from its client to perform
analysis that either applies AI or the auditor’s own judgement to highlight trends or anomalies within
a population for closer inspection.
13.5 Current developments

13.5.1 IAASB Request for input
The IAASB has set up a Data Analytics Working Group to determine how developments in IT
including data analytics might be reflected in new or revised standards. In September 2016 it issued
Request for input: Exploring the growing use of technology in the audit, with a focus on data
analytics. This aimed to inform stakeholders of the ongoing work by the IAASB in this area, but also
to obtain stakeholder input, particularly with respect to whether all of the relevant considerations
have been identified.
It makes the following points.
Data analytics and the financial statement audit – benefits
• The quality of the financial statement audit can be enhanced by the use of data analytics.
• The use of data analytics enables the auditor to obtain a more effective and robust understanding
of the entity (in an increasingly complex and high volume data environment), improving the
application of professional scepticism and professional judgement.
• The auditor is able to obtain audit evidence from the analysis of larger populations.
• The auditor obtains a better insight into the entity and its environment which in turn provides the
entity with additional information to inform its own risk assessment and business operations.
Data analytics and the financial statement audit – limitations
• Auditors need to have a clear understanding of the data they are analysing and in particular the
relevance to the audit.
• Being able to test 100% of a population does not change the fact that reasonable assurance is
provided.
• The use of data analytics does not replace the need for professional judgement and professional
scepticism, particularly in relation to accounting estimates and qualitative information.
• Care must be taken not to have ‘overconfidence’ in technology ie, adopting the attitude that if a
computer software program produced it, it must be right.
Technology and the ISAs
• The ISAs do not prohibit, nor stimulate, the use of data analytics.
• ISAs need to be robust and relevant, however they must be based on principles which drive
appropriate auditor performance rather than being tied to current practice or trends.
• Technology solutions can increase the amount of time which auditors can spend on judgemental
aspects of analysis as the amount of time spent on manual analysis is reduced.
HB2021

• There is a current challenge to fit audit evidence derived from data analytics into the current audit
evidence model set out in the ISAs.
• A lack of reference to data analytics in ISAs (with the exception of CAATs) may act as a barrier to
their adoption more widely.
• The lack of reference in ISAs to data analytics could also suggest that their use does not reduce
the procedures required by ISAs, even where these may appear to have been made redundant as
a result of the information gained from the use of data analytics.
• Risks arise where new techniques are used for which there is no strong framework within the
standards.
Unanswered questions
The IAASB document identifies a number of unanswered questions and challenges.
Data acquisition
Entity data being transferred to the auditor raises security and privacy issues together with storage
problems for large volumes of data.
Conceptual changes
The approach, information required and questions asked of the client may be quite different to the
traditional approach which may be challenging for the client.
Legal and regulatory challenges
These may relate to data security and potential restrictions on data being transferred from one
jurisdiction to another.
Resource availability
There may not be sufficient centralised resources with the required IT expertise to support the
engagement teams.
Maintaining oversight
There are challenges for oversight authorities and regulators who may have little experience of data
analytics themselves.
Investment in re-training
Training will be required to change the auditor’s mind set to that required where data analytics has
been used
Next steps
The IAASB states that an evolutionary, rather than revolutionary process should be adopted. ISAs
need to take account of the changing technological developments but care must be taken not to
commence standard-setting activities prematurely to avoid unintended consequences.
(Source: IAASB (2016) Exploring the Growing Use of Technology in the Audit, with a Focus on Data
Analytics [Online]. Available from: www.ifac.org/system/files/publications/files/IAASB-Data-Analytics-
WG-Publication-Aug-25-2016-for-comms-9.1.16.pdf [Accessed 12 October 2021])
13.5.2 FRC Audit Quality Thematic Review

In January 2017 the FRC issued Audit Quality Thematic Review: The Use of Data Analytics in the
Audit of Financial Statements. The purpose of this review was to look at firms’ policies and
procedures in respect of data analytics and to make comparisons between firms to identify areas of
good practice and areas of weakness. The review was based on the use of audit data analytics at the
six largest firms in the UK: BDO LLP, Deloitte LLP, Ernst & Young LLP, Grant Thornton UK LLP, KPMG
LLP and KPMG Audit plc and PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP.
Use of data analytics
The review document notes that the use of data analytics in the audit is not as prevalent as the
market might expect. At the time of the review the only standard tool used widely (ie, accepted
norm) by all six firms was journal entry testing. General ledger analysis/third party tools were used
regularly (ie, part of the standard auditor ‘tool kit’) by three firms, with two more using them in a
limited capacity. Revenue analytics tools were used widely by one firm and on a limited basis by
HB2021
another whilst derivatives valuation tools were used regularly by one firm only. Process analytics tools
and impairment modelling tools were either used on a limited basis or not at all.
Audit quality
The review identified that the use of audit data analytics could improve audit quality in a number of
ways including the following:
• Deepening the auditor’s understanding of the entity
• Facilitating the focus of audit testing on the areas of highest risk through stratification of large
populations
• Aiding the exercise of professional scepticism
• Improving consistency and central oversight in group audits
• Enabling the auditor to perform tests on large or complex data sets where a manual approach
would not be feasible
• Improving audit efficiency
• Identifying instances of fraud
• Enhancing communications with audit committees
From its observations of specific applications the Review team observed the following examples of
audit data analytics being used to produce good quality audit evidence:
• Tracing individual revenue transactions to debtors and subsequent cash received
• Reproduction of debtors aging
• Valuation of financial instruments
• Tracing supplier income to agreements and cash received
• Recalculation of fund management fees based on value of assets under management
Data capture for use in audit data analytics
The review notes that ‘effective and efficient data capture is the key to the successful use of audit
data analytics’. At an early stage the audit team needs to ascertain whether the quality of the data that
can be provided by the entity’s management is sufficient to support the analytic which is to be used.
In many instances specialist staff may be used to perform data capture and this may mean that the
audit team, the data analytics specialists and the data may be in different geographical locations. This
may create issues in relation to data governance, security and privacy.
Appropriate use of audit analytics tools
The Review document states that ‘Audit teams need to have a clear understanding of the purpose of
the audit data analytics technique to ensure that they obtain sufficient and appropriate audit
evidence’. This is of particular relevance at the planning stage of the audit. The Review indicates that
the following areas need to be considered when deciding whether to use an audit data analytics
tool:
• Whether the tool is a ‘good match’ for the client’s specific environment
• The need to ensure that all relevant assertions are still covered for the balance being tested
• Whether testing in other areas needs to be flexed to provide the necessary supporting evidence
for the use of audit data analytics
Evidencing of audit data analytics
The Review emphasises the point that audit documentation should enable an experienced auditor to
understand the nature, timing and extent of the audit procedures performed, including where data
analytics have been used. In particular it notes that the data analytics specialists must be considered
as part of the audit team. Auditing standards in relation to evidence and documentation therefore
cover the data analytics specialists’ work as they do any other audit work.
13.5.3 Robotic process automation (RPA)

We have already considered the use of RFID chips in the context of big data – imagine how they
could be put to use if inventory could be remotely counted and monitored using such technology.
This would create savings in terms of staffing required to physically maintain inventory and also those
required to process the data from inventory counts, none of whom would ever get sick.
HB2021

This is just one example of robotic process automation (RPA) where the opportunities to streamline
business processes via the use of smart technology are potentially limitless. Clearly, there are also
risks attached to such automation, including over-reliance on technology and the structural shift in
skills required as finance departments rely more on data analysis than on collection, cleansing and
processing. Finance staff need to be trained to operate and review such processes competently.
13.5.4 Artificial intelligence (AI)
Definition
Artificial intelligence (AI): Technology to help improve decisions made by machines, based on
machine learning, in an attempt to make better decisions than humans can. AI requires pattern
recognition and learning, rather than relying on a series of complex rules, so is not the same as
expert systems, which failed to grasp the complexities of the real world and were unable to adapt to
dynamic situations. AI systems use complex programming to know how to behave in certain
situations, while machine learning promotes automatic learning without being prompted.
Current examples of AI include Amazon’s Alexa and Apple’s Siri where small digital devices are able
to respond to voice commands when completing requests such as online searches and connection
to other smart devices (such as those that might control lighting and heating in a house). AI and
machine learning are also used in various manufacturing processes where precision is essential for
creating and maintaining competitive advantage.
AI is starting to have more widespread use in driver-less cars and forecasting algorithms for
companies. AI needs to consider both forms of decision-making: intuitive (based on instincts) and
reasoned (based on logic). There are similarities to the ‘dot com’ boom at the start of the 21st century
because no-one is really sure how far the possibilities afforded by AI could go.
AI and auditors – opportunities and issues
There is an increasing role of AI as part of audit data analytics, in automated and smart auditing of
populations, not just samples, thus reducing human error. AI-driven data analytics offer efficiencies,
better insight and added value for both accountants and their clients as they can handle large data
volumes while the system learns but it will not get tired or make mistakes. AI could support stronger
forensic auditing techniques as well (see Chapter 25). Auditors would need to be able to understand
the impact of AI and machine learning in the financial statements (such as valuation or impairment
for new and emerging technologies, including software).
Accountancy applications exist too, such as increased automation in transaction processes and
systems, greater analysis of data to differentiate between ‘rogue’ (eg, fraud) and ‘normal’ activity and
better predictions and forecasts on complex areas such as revenue.
AI is not 100% perfect though - what about unusual situations with little previous data to use for this
machine learning to occur? Currently, while it is in development, AI still requires significant
investment to become mainstream and effective and for auditors to be able to direct this AI and
interpret its findings.
Nonetheless, there is still great potential (indeed, there may be no choice to adopt once it gains
enough traction) which will lead to change and adaptation in the profession: there could be less
backward-looking review, and more forward-looking advisory work instead. There could even be
scope to determine further uses of AI, such as whether AI can apply professional scepticism without
a human’s judgement present.
13.5.5 Taskforce on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD)

In March 2020, the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA), which is the main UK financial markets
regulator, issued instructions for all UK companies listed on the UK stock market to disclose their
carbon risks to investors. This would be achieved by companies signing up to the Taskforce on
Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) and disclosing matters such as:
• describing management oversight of risks
• explaining how their strategy would cope in different temperature scenarios
• setting out risk management processes
• reporting their progress against targets
HB2021
This TCFD approach is endorsed by the UK Government in its Green Finance Strategy (BEIS, July
2019) which outlined the core elements of the recommended climate-related financial disclosures:
Figure 5.7: TCFD
Governance
Governance The organisation's governance around
climate-related risks and opportunities
Strategy
Strategy The actual and potential impacts of
climate-related risks and opportunities on
the organisation's businesses, strategy
and financial planning
Risk
management Risk management
The processes used by the organisation
to identify, assess, and manage climate-
related risks
Metrics Metrics and targets
and targets The metrics and targets used to assess
and manage relevant climate-related risks
and opportunities
According to the government’s Green Finance Strategy, 785 organisations now support the TCFD
including investors who are responsible for managing assets valued at over £1 trillion.
This comes amid a wider call for greater corporate transparency over the sustainability implications
of strategies pursued by companies (and indeed countries) as ecological issues continue to
dominate public debate. Investors in particular have welcomed this transparency as it will allow an
informed decision on the steps companies are taking to address the possibility that climate-related
issues may affect their return (for example, the risks of flooding affecting crop yields for a food
manufacturer).
Clearly, there are challenges in how corporate reporting mechanisms can address these
requirements, not only for organisations in collecting and managing the data required to support
these disclosures but also for assurance providers who may be asked to assess the validity of such
disclosures (whether as part of the audit or otherwise).
(Sources: UK Government (2019) Green Finance Strategy: Transforming Finance for a Greener Future.
[Online] Available at:
https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/
820284/190716_BEIS_Green_Finance_Strategy_Accessible_Final.pdf [Accessed 6 July 2021]
Vincent, M. (2020) UK-listed companies face compulsory climate disclosures. [Online] Available at:
https://www.ft.com/content/de915fb4-5f9e-11ea-b0ab-339c2307bcd4 [Accessed 6 July 2021])
HB2021

Summary
Audit planning
Professional Understanding
scepticism the entity
Risks: Use of Risk Materiality Performance

• System breakdown IT assessment materiality
• Unauthorised access
Internal controls:
• General IT controls Business Audit
• Application controls risk model risk model
Data analytics
Financial risk Responding to Inherent risk
Operating risk assessed risk Control risk
Compliance risk Detection risk
Creative
accounting
HB2021
1. Can you list the various stages of an audit?
2. Do you remember the auditing standards (ISAs (UK)) relevant to planning and risk
assessment?
3. Can you define professional scepticism and do you know why it matters to auditors?
4. Do you know which techniques are recommended for an effective understanding of the
entity?
5. Can you explain how business risk is used to help identify areas of misstatement in a set of
financial statements?
6. Do you know the various stages of the audit risk methodology?
7. Can you explain the term ‘creative accounting’ and suggest some examples of how it may
be present in an audited entity?
8. Can you define materiality and explain how it should be calculated for a given set of
circumstances?
9. Do you know how the auditor should respond to the assessed level of risk and can you
suggest alternative methodologies for the auditor to use?
10. Are you aware of the following current developments in auditing: information technology;
cryptocurrencies and blockchain; big data; data analytics; robotic process automation;
and artificial intelligence? Can you explain how each of these developments could impact
on the work of the auditor, including the level of audit quality?
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Gates Ltd An opportunity to see how data analytics could be used in an auditing
context.
Suttoner plc Using a larger scenario, this question asks you to apply the business risk
methodology before considering the FRC guidance on internal controls.
HB2021

Hillhire Key audit risks and the associated financial statement treatment from a
series of issues in a detailed scenario.
Dormro An integrated scenario question that requires the identification of audit

risks in the financial statements.
chapter.
HB2021
Technical reference
1 ISA (UK) 210

• Agreement of terms of audit engagements – ISA (UK) 210.9-12
– Principal contents of the engagement letter – ISA (UK) 210.10, A23–.27 & Appendix 1
2 ISA (UK) 300

• Preliminary engagement activities – ISA (UK) 300.6
• Planning activities – ISA (UK) 300.7–.11
• Documentation – ISA (UK) 300.12
3 ISA (UK) 315 (Revised)

• Risk assessment procedures – ISA (UK) 315.13–.18
• Understanding the entity and its environment – ISA (UK) 315.19–.27
• Identifying and assessing the risks of material misstatement – ISA (UK) 315.28–.37
• Financial statement assertions – ISA (UK) 315.A190
4 ISA (UK) 320

• Definition of materiality – ISA (UK) 320.2
• Relationship between materiality and planning – ISA (UK) 320.10–.11
5 ISA (UK) 330

• Overall responses to risk assessment – ISA (UK) 330.5
• Response at assertion level – ISA (UK) 330.6–.7
• Evaluation of sufficiency and appropriateness of evidence– ISA (UK) 330.25-27
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Gates Ltd
You are an audit senior at Bob & Co and have received the following email.
To: Jackie Smith, Audit senior

From: Roy Bob, Audit partner
Subject: Gates Ltd
We are about to take on the audit of Gates Ltd, a wholly owned subsidiary of a US parent
company.
Gates Ltd produces computer software for the military for battlefield simulations. It also produces
‘off the shelf’ software products for other customers. I am concerned about the accounting issues
related to these products. Based on the following information, would you please identify and
comment on the accounting issues.
• The military software usually takes at least three years to develop. The military insists on fixed
price contracts. Once the software has been authorised for use by the customer, Gates Ltd
supplies computer support services, which are charged on the time spent by the software
engineers on site.
• The ‘off the shelf’ packages are not sold to customers, but are issued under a licence giving the
right to use the software for a typical period of three years. The licence fee is paid up front by
customers and is non-refundable. As part of the licence agreement Gates Ltd supplies
maintenance services without additional charge for the three-year period.
Again, based on the above regarding the military software and the ‘off the shelf’ packages, please
can you also set out the audit issues arising.
As a firm we are keen to adopt cutting-edge audit techniques and are in the process of
developing data analytics software. I am considering the use of data analytics tools for the audit of
Gates Ltd next year and am due to discuss this idea with the audit committee next month. As an IT
company itself, the board of Gates Ltd is very interested in this approach. I am putting together
some initial thoughts for my meeting and would like you to make some short notes for me, setting
out the benefits and challenges of using data analytics as an audit tool.
Requirement
Respond to the partner’s email.
2 Suttoner plc
Suttoner plc (Suttoner) operates in the food processing sector and is listed on the London Stock
Exchange. You are a member of its internal audit department. The company purchases a range of
food products and processes them into frozen or chilled meals, which it sells to major supermarkets
in Europe and North America.
The company structure
The company sells food through five subsidiaries, each of which is under the control of its own
managing director who reports directly to the main board. Each subsidiary has responsibility for, and
is located in, its own sales region. The regions are the UK, the rest of Western Europe, Eastern
Europe, the US and Canada. Food is produced in only two subsidiaries, the UK and the US. Head
office operates central functions, including the legal, finance and treasury departments.
The board has asked the managing directors of each subsidiary to undertake a risk assessment
exercise, including a review of the subsidiary’s procedures and internal controls. This is partly due to
a review of the company’s compliance with the provisions of FRC’s Guidance on Risk Management,
HB2021
Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting and also because Suttoner has been
severely affected by two recent events and now wishes to manage its future risk exposure.
Recent events
(1) In renegotiating a major contract with a supermarket Suttoner refused to cut its price as
demanded. As a result a major customer was lost.
(2) Later in the year the company had been cutting costs by sourcing food products from lower-cost
suppliers. In so doing it acquired contaminated pork which made several consumers ill. A major
health and safety inspection led to the destruction of all Suttoner’s pork inventories throughout
Europe, due to an inability to trace individual inventories to source suppliers. More significantly,
many supermarkets refused to purchase goods from Suttoner for several months thereafter.
As a result of these events the company’s cash flow was severely disrupted, and significant additional
borrowing was needed.
The board’s view
In guiding the risk assessment exercise, the board has set clear objectives for subsidiaries to achieve:
sales growth, profit growth and effective risk management. Additionally, the board wishes to foster
integrity and competence supported by enhancing human resource development.
The board requires managing directors of each subsidiary to report to them annually on these
objectives and on internal controls. Otherwise, they have considerable autonomy on pricing, capital
expenditure, marketing and human resource management. The UK and US subsidiaries, which
process raw foodstuffs, are free to choose their suppliers. The other three subsidiaries may purchase
only from the UK or US subsidiaries.
Over a number of years each subsidiary has been managed according to the nature and experience
of its managing director, and this has resulted in different styles and levels of control being
established locally.
Email from the head of internal audit
To: Joe Lyons

From: Ben Jones
Subject: Risk assessment exercise
Joe,
As you know, we are scheduled to update our risk assessment exercise. Can you please take the
following on board for me and produce something by Wednesday afternoon?
Firstly, I need you to identify, classify and comment on the key compliance, operating and financial
risks to which the company is exposed. On the back of this, can you then draft a note for the
finance director to send to the other directors, advising them as to the extent and the likelihood of
the three most significant risks identified. For each of these, can you identify appropriate risk
management procedures.
Finally, can you draft a note in accordance with the FRC’s Guidance on Risk Management, Internal
Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting (formerly the Turnbull Report) which we can
put in our financial statements in relation to ‘Control environment and control activities’.
Cheers.
Ben
Requirement
Respond to the email from Ben Jones.
this chapter.
HB2021


1.1 The risk is the risk of changes in value of the steel inventory due to changes in the price of the
commodity. This is a financial or market risk.
1.2 The auditor would need to consider the following:
• Whether the futures contracts are to be used in a fair value hedge of the steel inventory.
• Whether the required criteria have been met ie, the hedging relationship has been formally
designated and the hedge is ‘effective’.
• Whether adequate documentation can be produced, including details of:
– identification of the hedging instrument;
– the hedged item;
– nature of the risk being hedged; and
– how hedge effectiveness will be calculated.
• If hedge accounting is to be used, the risk of incorrect accounting treatment. This risk is
increased due to the entity’s lack of experience in dealing with this type of transaction.
• Whether the accounting rules of IFRS 9, Financial Instruments (or IAS 39 if those rules are
applied) have been complied with.
The derivative should be recognised as a financial asset at fair value and any gain recognised in
profit or loss.
• The way in which fair value has been established.

Risks/controls/audit procedures
Key risk Controls to mitigate Audit procedures
• Failure of internal R&D • Constant monitoring with • Review of failed projects,

projects exit strategies controls exercised and timing
of exit
• Write-off of any capitalised
R&D
• Excessive expenditure on • Regular reviews of benefits • Cost-benefit review

R&D against costs for each • Comparison to similar
drug, each R&D unit and companies
each period
• Review of R&D cost control
and budgetary procedures
• Insufficient new drugs in • Monitoring effectiveness • Consider sustained going

the pipeline to sustain of R&D function concern
profitability • Consideration of adequate • Review plausibility of
expenditure levels alternative strategies
• Consider alternative
strategies (eg, increases in
generic drug production)
• Alternative uses for
existing drugs
HB2021
Key risk Controls to mitigate Audit procedures
• Development of new • Consider effectiveness of • Review patent registration by

drugs by competitors patent protection other companies
• Consider possibility of • Review projected impact on
licensing client
• Quantification of effects • Consider writing off any
capitalised R&D
• Joint venture failure, • Clear contractual rights • Review contractual

disagreement or decline and obligations arrangements and technical
• Transparency and progress
communication
• Technical monitoring of
procedures similar to
internal systems above
• Inadequate financial • Short-term and long-term • Consider actual and potential

resources to sustain R&D financial budgets with financial resources
actual and contingent • Evidence from bankers and
financing arrangements other finance providers or
their agents
• Changes in health • Monitor political • Review trends in health

spending or health statements and policies spending and prospective
regulation by • Political lobbying regulation in key markets
governments in major • Review client’s governmental
geographical markets • Consider impacts of
changes on profitability monitoring procedures and
information gained therefrom

Business risks faced by KidsStuff Ltd
• Exposure to foreign exchange risk if imports are not denominated in sterling.
• One major supplier – too reliant on one source.
• Distance from supplier makes resolving production errors more difficult.
• Children’s toy market tends to be seasonal – could require significant working capital for periods
of the year.
• Strict health and safety rules over children’s toys could be breached.
• May be heavily reliant on the skills of Joseph Cooper who will now be close to retirement.
• If unable to keep up with market trends the company will not be able to continue trading.
• Penetration of the computer games market would require significant investment which may not
pay off.
• The overdraft is likely to be an expensive form of financing.
• The overdraft could be withdrawn.
Effect of risks on the audit
• The going concern basis of preparation may not be appropriate due to many of the business risks
eg, reliance on overdraft.
• Payables, purchases and inventories could all be misstated if incorrect exchange rates are used.
• Exchange gains and losses may be incorrectly accounted for or miscalculated.
• The overseas supplier is likely to have a material payables balance but evidence may be difficult
to obtain.
• Importing extends delivery times and makes cut-off more difficult to administer.
HB2021

• Last year’s toys in inventories may well be obsolete.
• Provisions may be required for fines or legal claims in respect of health and safety breaches.
• If the year end is pre-busy season, inventories are likely to be material.
• If the year end is post-busy season, receivables are likely to be material.
• The bank may use the accounts in determining whether or not to renew the overdraft – a duty of
care should be considered.
• Neil Cooper may bias the accounts to show an improved performance.
Further information required
• Management accounts for the year to date
• Budgeted results for the year
• Audited financial statements for the previous year(s)
• Correspondence from the bank regarding the overdraft
• Correspondence with the previous auditor regarding: previous audit issues
• Visits to client/notes to ascertain the client’s systems
• Trade journals
• Health and safety legislation for the industry
• Minutes of board meetings
• Legal costs and correspondence with solicitors as evidence for litigation risk

Risks associated with accounting treatment include the following.
• Nature of the contract
This contract is essentially a number of goods and services bundled into one contract. This fact
adds complexity to the accounting treatment and therefore adds risk. Where the elements can be
separated and sold as individual items they should be recognised as if they were independent of
each other. In this case it would be possible to sell the handset, access to the network, the call
minutes and the texts individually so separate recognition would be appropriate.
• Revenue recognition policy not in accordance with principles of IFRS 15
A distinction will need to be made between the different elements of the package as these are
separate performance obligations. Revenue from the sale of the handset should be recognised
when this performance obligation has been met. This will normally be at the point that the
contract is signed and the customer takes receipt of the handset. Alternatively if the handset is
sent to the customer it will be at the point of delivery.
Use of the network would be treated as the rendering of a service. As the service is provided
equally over the 12-month period of the contract, the revenue attached to this element should be
recognised on a straight-line basis.
The free calls and texts would also be treated as the rendering of a service. However, this service
will not necessarily be received on an equal basis each month (as not all free calls/texts may be
used each month and may be carried over). The allocation should be based on the best estimate
of how the free calls and texts will be used over the life of the contract. This will involve a large
amount of estimation which increases audit risk. Where the allocation can be based on historical
information eg, average usage on similar packages risk will be reduced
• Each component of the package may be valued incorrectly
The package is effectively a bundle of goods and services with a fair value of £500 sold at a
discount of £140 (£500 – £360). If there is a specific discount policy this should be applied to the
individual components. For example, the whole of the discount could relate to the handset, in
which case the whole of the discount would be deducted from the fair value of the phone. If there
is no specific policy an alternative allocation method would be required eg, on a pro rata basis.
The auditor would need to ensure that the basis used is reasonable.
HB2021
Audit risks
• Inherent
– Related party transactions/group issues
– Receivables
– Fraud – possible indicators, professional scepticism
– Profit-driven management
– Credit extended – accounting/law and regulations
• Control
– Lack of segregation of duties
– PC/virus
– Suspicion of fraud?
– Key man
• Detection
– First audit
– Opening balances and comparatives – audited?
Audit risks – inherent
Related parties and group issues
Forsythia is part of a complicated group structure. This raises several issues for the audit:
• There is a risk of related party transactions existing and not being properly disclosed in the
financial statements in accordance with IAS 24.
• Similarly, there is a risk that it will be difficult to ascertain the controlling party for disclosure.
• There are likely to be some group audit implications. The firm may be required to undertake
procedures in line with the group auditors’ requirements if Forsythia is to be consolidated.
Receivables
Forsythia is a service provider, and it extends credit to customers. This is likely to mean that trade
receivables will be a significant audit balance. However, there is limited audit evidence concerning
trade receivables due to the effects of a computer virus. There are also indicators of a possible fraud.
Fraud?
There are various factors that may indicate a sales ledger fraud has taken/is taking place:
• Lack of segregation of duties
• Extensive credit offered
• The virus only destroyed sales ledger information – too specific?
• Poorly paid sales ledger clerk – with expensive lifestyle
• Sales ledger clerk is daughter of rich shareholder and they do not have a good relationship
None of these factors necessarily point to a fraud individually, but added together raise significant
concerns.
Profit-driven management
Mr Rose is motivated for the financial statements to show a profit for two reasons:
• He receives a commission (presumably sales driven, which impacts on profit).
• He receives dividends as shareholder, which will depend on profits.
There is a risk that the financial statements will be affected by management bias.
Audit risk – control
There are three significant control problems at Forsythia.
HB2021

Segregation of duties
There appears to be a complete lack of segregation of duties on the three main ledgers. This may
have led to a fraud on the sales ledger. The fact that there is no segregation on payroll is also a
concern, as this is an area where frauds are carried out.
Lack of segregation of duties can also lead to significant errors arising and not being detected by
the system. This problem means that control risk will have to be assessed as high and substantial
substantive testing be undertaken.
Personal computer
A PC is used for the accounting system. This is likely to have poor built-in controls and to further
exacerbate the problems caused by the lack of segregation of duties.
The security over PCs is also often poor, as has been the case here, where a virus has destroyed
evidence about the sales ledger.
Key man
The fact that Mr Rose is dominant in management may also be a control problem, as he can override
any controls that do exist. There are also risks if he were ever to be absent, as most controls appear to
operate through him and there are no alternative competent senior personnel.

Home delivery sales
The appropriate benchmark of materiality with regard to the home delivery sales is revenue, as the
home delivery sales form part of the total revenue of the company.
£0.6 million is 1.4% of the total revenue for 20X6 (see W1 below).
An item is generally considered to be material if it is in the region of 1% of revenue, so the home
delivery services are material.
Provision
The appropriate benchmark of materiality with regard to the provision is total assets and profit, as the
provision impacts both the statement of financial position (it is a liability) and the statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income (it is a charge against profit).
£0.2 million is 0.65% of total assets in 20X6 (see W2 below). As an item is generally considered to be
material if it is in the region of 1–2% of total assets, the provision is not material to the statement of
financial position.
However, £0.2 million is 11% of profit before tax for 20X6 (see W3 below). An item is considered
material to profit before tax if it is in the region of 5%. Therefore, the provision is material to the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
WORKING
Materiality calculations
As follows:
(1) (0.6 million ÷ 42.2 million) × 100 = 1.4%
(2) (0.2 million ÷ 30.7 million) × 100 = 0.65%
(3) (0.2 million ÷ 1.8 million) × 100 = 11%

Suitability
• Although the materiality calculation is based on a benchmark commonly used ie, percentage of
profit before tax, in this case the resulting figure does not seem appropriate.
• This is due to the fact that the profit figure of the business is volatile (£300,000 in the previous
year) and does not seem to be representative of the size of the business in terms of its assets or
revenue.
• In instances like this where the company is close to breaking even, total assets or revenue may be
a more suitable basis. Alternatively, if profits are to be used, an average figure over a number of
years would give rise to a more appropriate materiality balance.
HB2021
• Materiality as it is currently set is extremely low. The consequence of this is that it would result in
substantially increased audit procedures which would be inefficient.
HB2021

1 Gates Ltd
Accounting issues
(1) Military contracts
Long-term contract accounting
The software development should be accounted for under IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with
Customers. Specifically, it is a fixed price contract, ie, where the revenue arising is fixed at the outset
of the contract. Under such contracts there is an element of certainty about the revenue accruing, but
not about the costs which will arise. For a fixed price contract the contractor should be able to
measure reliably the total contract revenues and be able to identify and measure reliably both the
costs that have been incurred and those that will be incurred to complete the project. The contractor
should also assess whether it is probable that payment will be received under the contract.
As the contracts are fixed price there is an increased risk of the contracts being loss-making, and
such losses must be provided for in full.
Computer support
As the amount billed relates directly to the hours spent on site, it would be appropriate to recognise
this as revenue when charged.
(2) ‘Off the shelf’ packages
Licence and maintenance costs
An argument could be proposed to recognise this revenue on receipt, given that it is non-
refundable, and paid after the development work has been completed and the costs incurred.
However, under IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers it is generally not appropriate to
recognise revenue based on payments received under the contract, as stage payments set out under
the terms of the contract often bear little resemblance to the actual services performed. This is a
contract in which a performance obligation (the provision of services) is satisfied over time. Revenue
relating to the licence should therefore be recognised as the services are provided, ie, as the
performance obligation is satisfied.
The maintenance costs should be recognised on a basis that reflects the costs incurred which might
be based on the frequency of maintenance calls, probably related to the previous history of
maintenance calls.
Audit issues
Inherent risks
• Given the nature of the business and the military contracts, physical and electronic security and
controls are a major issue.
• Long-term contract accounting involves significant judgements with respect to future contract
costs. Judgement increases the likelihood of errors or deliberate manipulation. This area is
particularly difficult to audit given the specialised nature of the business, and we will need to
ensure that we have personnel with the right experience assigned to the audit.
• There is a risk with long-term contract accounting of misallocation of contract costs – particularly
away from loss-making contracts.
• The maintenance provision is an estimate and, again, susceptible to error.
Detection risks
The nature of the military contracts may mean that we are unable to review all the information
because of the Official Secrets Act. This could generate a limitation on scope.
HB2021
Notes re data analytics
Benefits
• Enhanced audit quality
• Increased sophistication and breadth of interrogation options
• Enables us to obtain audit evidence from larger populations efficiently
• Analysis at a more granular level enhancing the basis on which judgements are made
• Results in a more effective and robust understanding of the entity improving the application of
professional scepticism and professional judgement
• Ability to graphically visualise results increasing ease of use and interpretation
• Provides the entity with additional information to better inform its own risk assessment and
business operations
Challenges
• We need to ensure that the development of the software is properly managed so that a high
quality audit tool is developed.
• There may be issues with data capture, extraction, validation and transformation.
• Need to consider security and privacy issues together with storage problems for the large
volumes of data.
• There may be restrictions on data being transferred from one jurisdiction to another.
• We may have insufficient in-house resources with relevant IT expertise to use the data analytics
software and/or to provide central support.
• Need to consider how we use data analytics whilst still complying with the requirements of ISAs
(which do not yet address the changes in approach brought about by the use of data analytics).
• The use of data analytics changes the nature of the information required and questions asked of
the client. The client may find this challenging.
• We need to ensure that professional scepticism and judgement continue to be applied and that
we do not have ‘overconfidence’ in the technology.
2 Suttoner plc
Identification and classification of risks
Compliance risks
Health and safety regulations – Risk of closure of plant and/or destruction of food if contamination
arises from purchasing, processing, storing or distribution activities.
Accounting regulations – Need to comply with regulations in several different countries. May need to
restate for group accounting purposes to comply with IFRSs if those countries have domestic GAAP
that differs from IFRSs.
Taxation – Need to comply with tax regulations, particularly in respect of transfer pricing between
divisions in different countries.
Litigation risk – Arising from the possibility of food poisoning. Risks include litigation against the
company by those individuals affected and for loss of reputation by supermarkets.
Operating risks
Loss of major customers – Supermarkets may regularly renegotiate contracts and, in so doing, find
alternative suppliers. The loss of one such customer this year may be part of a trend.
Power of customers to reduce price – Even where contracts with supermarkets are retained, the
renegotiation may be on less favourable terms, resulting in a loss of profits.
Lack of goal congruence by divisional MDs – Significant autonomy at divisional level may mean
reduced co-ordination and the pursuit of conflicting goals.
Geographically dispersed supply chain – Given that processing is concentrated in only two centres,
there are significant distances involved in the supply chain. This may lead to risks of failure to supply
on time and significant low temperature transport and storage costs.
HB2021

Perishable nature of inventory – The deterioration of perishable food may involve several risks,
including inventory valuation, costs of inventory losses and unobserved perishing, which may lead to
further food poisoning and loss of reputation.
Measuring divisional performance (arbitrary transfer prices) – There is trade between divisions
arising from the supply of distribution divisions from processing divisions. As the companies are
separate subsidiaries, there are implications for attesting the profit of individual companies, given the
arbitrariness of transfer prices. Moreover, the impact of transfer prices on taxation and their
acceptance under separate tax regimes creates additional risk in respect of the taxable profit of
separate subsidiaries.
Control systems – The loss of inventory was greater due to the inability to trace the contamination to
specific inventories. This deficiency in inventory control systems magnifies any effects from
contamination risks of this type.
Generalised food scares – Food scares which are not specific to the company but which arise from
time to time may create a reluctance by consumers to purchase some types of the company’s
product portfolio.
Financial risks
Foreign exchange risk – This includes economic, transaction and translation risk.
• Economic risk – refers to adverse movements in the exchange rate making goods less competitive
in overseas markets or making inputs relatively more expensive
• Transaction risk – refers to the situation where in the period between contracting and settlement
adverse movements in the exchange rate make the contract less profitable
• Translation risk – refers to the risk of the consolidated statement of financial position showing the
assets of overseas subsidiaries at a reduced value due to adverse exchange rate movements
Borrowing – gearing risk/liquidity – Increased financial gearing due to the additional borrowing in
the year will make future earnings more volatile.
Going concern problems if further contamination scares occur – The loss of business due to the
contamination of one of the company’s products meant that additional borrowing was needed: this
may create questions of going concern if a further incident arises.
Control of financial resources at divisional level – The fact that divisional MDs have significant
autonomy has meant that different styles and methods of control have been used. This may be a
cause for concern about potential variations in control.
Briefing notes
To: Finance Director

From: Internal auditor
Date: 6 November 20X1
Subject: Extent and likelihood of three key risks
Food scare
Low probability – if appropriate controls are put in place over food quality.
High impact – arising from loss of inventory, loss of reputation, possible loss of contracts/
customers, litigation risk, closure on health grounds.
Proposed course of action – quality control procedures, contingency plans, better inventory
identification to locate and minimise infected inventory.
Loss of customer
High probability – assuming that such contracts are being renegotiated on a regular basis.
Impact depends on whether:
• sales are concentrated with a few customers;
• new customers can be generated; or
• the loss of customers is systematic, in which case the cumulative impact may be significant.
HB2021
Proposed course of action – maintain customer relationships, compete on price and non-price
issues, develop a wider customer base.
Foreign exchange
High probability – some (and possibly significant) foreign currency movements over time are very
likely.
High impact – potentially, the effects of a major currency movement may be significant, although
this would depend on the actions taken to moderate such effects. There may also be a favourable
currency impact arising from East European currencies becoming more readily acceptable in
trading.
Proposed course of action – hedge in the short term (where appropriate and where the cost of
doing so is not significant), back to back financing (eg, borrow in US dollars to finance US
operations), consider acceptability of East European currencies before significant development in
these countries.
Notes to the financial statements
Control environment and control activities
The company is committed to ensuring that a proper control environment is maintained. There is a
commitment to competence and integrity, together with the communication of clear objectives to
all divisions. These are underpinned by a human resources policy that develops quality with
integrity.
The organisational structure has been developed to delegate authority with accountability to
ensure that control and consistency are maintained, having regard to an acceptable level of risk.
Managing directors report on the control environment on a regular basis to the board. Moreover,
the performance of each division is reported and reviewed regularly.
This year the board has undertaken a specific review to assess key risks and to ensure that
appropriate information and monitoring is being received.
HB2021

Chapter 6
The statutory audit: audit

evidence
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Revision of assertions
2 Sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
3 Sources of audit evidence
4 Selection of audit procedures
5 Analytical procedures
6 Audit of accounting estimates
7 Initial audit engagements – opening balances
8 Using the work of others
9 Working in an audit team
10 Auditing in an IT environment
11 Professional scepticism in the audit fieldwork stage
12 Further guidance
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Determine analytical procedures, where appropriate, at the planning stage using technical
knowledge of corporate reporting, data analytics and skills of financial statement analysis
• Evaluate, where appropriate, the need for, and extent of reliance to be placed on expertise from
other parties to support audit processes including when to challenge the extent and working
practices of other parties
• Determine, design and develop audit objectives for each financial statement assertion
• Justify and conclude for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit
evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Apply professional scepticism to the process of gathering audit evidence and evaluating its
reliability including the use of client-generated information and external market information using
audit data analytics software
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
• Evaluate, applying professional judgement, whether the quantity and quality of evidence
gathered from various audit procedures, including interpreting and extrapolating the results of
sampling using appropriate data analysis tools and analytical procedures, is sufficient to draw
reasonable conclusions
• Recognise and prioritise using professional judgement on audit issues arising whilst gathering
assurance evidence that should be referred to a senior colleague or other specialist
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 11(f), 11(i), 14(b)–(g), 14(i)
6

of this chapter.

1 Revision of Approach Focusing on the IQ1: Financial

assertions Use the auditing right assertions will statement
One of the key standards open help you to create assertions (1)
criteria of good book to find these audit procedures A good recap
audit evidence is assertions and that are relevant for designed to refresh
that it is relevant – bookmark them for collecting the your knowledge of
this is achieved by when you need necessary audit assertions.
the use of them. evidence.
IQ2: Financial
assertions which Stop and think statement
describe the assertions (2)
characteristics that How much of this do
items in the you remember from Further practice on
financial your previous assertions using
statements need to auditing studies? more typical
possess in order to question-based
belong there. scenarios.
HB2021

2 Sufficient, Approach The acid test for any IQ3: Audit

appropriate audit This section is mainly audit evidence is evidence – revision
evidence revision from your whether or not it This is a good recap
Evidence is the earlier studies but ultimately supports of the various types
oxygen without does introduce the the auditor’s opinion of audit evidence
which the auditor use of data analytics – when discussing that you may come
cannot breathe – as a way of evidence in the across and why
how do we make generating audit exam, you should some may be better
sure we have evidence. always be clear than others.
enough of the right about what it is and
Stop and think how it helps the
kind for the audit?
Can you explain the auditors achieve
process of their objectives.
triangulation and
how it helps to
provide audit
evidence?
3 Sources of audit Approach Exam questions may N/A

evidence This should be require you to
You need to be revision but make generate audit
able to explain the sure you can procedures in
various techniques differentiate response to a
used by auditors between tests of specific issue and
for generating control and that could be driven
evidence. substantive tests. either by a
substantive test or a
Stop and think test of control, so
Can you tell the make sure you can
difference between describe each one
tests of detail and accordingly.
substantive
analytical
procedures?
4 Selection of audit Approach Audit procedures IQ4: Audit

procedures Once you have need to be specific procedures revision
This section is revisited the various to score marks in the of tangible assets
essential reading procedures, exam, so learn how This is excellent
for you – first, you consider how non- to write them in a practice for how to
will recap some of current assets could way that is specific plan an approach
the key techniques be audited. and focused on for a discrete part
for generating achieving a of the financial
Stop and think particular objective.
evidence and statements and also
second, consider Focus on how Remember to how to write
how these can be procedures are design procedures suitable audit
applied to specific written with a that use appropriate procedures.
parts of the specific assertion in verbs and which
financial mind. justify the use of that
statements. procedure in the
circumstances.
5 Analytical Approach You will definitely IQ5: Analytical

procedures While you read need to be able to procedures (1)
This is another through each of perform some kind You should note the
significant section these techniques, of analytical data that you have
in your revision of use the various procedures in your been provided with
exam (either as part
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 6: The statutory audit: audit evidence 287

how to audit – as activities presented of the audit and tailor your

well as looking at as an opportunity to elements or when approach
where (and when) add to your skill set analysing a set of accordingly.
analytical of analytical financial statements) IQ6: Analytical
procedures are procedures. so you must practise procedures (2)
used throughout Stop and think these techniques
the audit, you will and be able to As well as making
also learn how to Although very manipulate data in sure you focus on
apply these practical and logical, order to generate the audit of trade
techniques in you may still need to meaningful payables, note how
specific situations display some form of conclusions. software could be
(including creativity in your use used as part of your
engagements that of analytical analysis.
fall outside the procedures in order IQ7: Analytical
remit of audit to unlock the procedures (3)
work). messages hidden in
the data. As well as using
these techniques
for an audit, you
may be asked to
appraise an entity’s
financial health in
some way – this is
good practice of
how to use the
same techniques
for a different
outcome.
6 Audit of Approach Exam questions N/A

accounting Read through this could focus on audit
estimates section noting the procedures where
One of the areas of location of the key the evidence
criticism that terms in the auditing available may be
auditors are standards open subject to some
currently facing book. form of estimation
relates to items in uncertainty and
Stop and think management bias,
the financial
statements where Can you think of so being able to
estimates have some suggested apply some of the
been included and areas of the financial guidance suggested
the auditor has statements where here would be
failed to display estimates may be required.
suitable levels of particularly
professional common?
scepticism. ISA
(UK) 540 (Revised)
is designed to
improve the
auditor’s approach
in this area.
7 Initial audit Approach Focusing on the N/A

engagements – Revisit this material given procedures
opening balances which is revision and the information
As well as the audit from your previous in the appendix will
risks that arise from studies. help you to generate
suitable audit
HB2021

all engagements, Stop and think procedures if

taking on a new Could you find this required.
client can also lead standard in the
to audit risks from auditing standards
their opening open book if
balances. What can required?
you do to address
this risk?
8 Using the work of Approach It is possible that the IQ8: Using an

others You have met work of either an expert – revision
The auditor may experts and internal expert or an internal Use this as an
require the use of audit before so auditor may be opportunity to
specialist expertise make sure you have described in an consider how
beyond their own fully revised this exam scenario – your experts should be
skillset but must area. job is to use the used by auditors.
ensure it will result contents of the
Stop and think standards to
in sufficient
appropriate audit Can you find the evaluate the quality
evidence. necessary ISAs (UK) of this evidence and
in your auditing identify any
standards open shortcomings.
book?
9 Working in an Approach Questions may be N/A

audit team This is useful to set which require
Can you explain inform you of the you to consider the
the hierarchy of various roles in the operation of the
roles in an audit audit team. audit team and to
team? identify possible
Stop and think risks from anyone
Can you see how not performing their
each of these roles role to the best of
would help support their ability.
sound quality
control?
10 Auditing in an IT Approach The content that N/A

environment Use this section to discusses the
The use of e- understand what is considerations for
commerce is on meant by e- auditors is especially
the rise – you ned commerce. relevant to ensure
to be able to you use the correct
Stop and think form of terminology.
respond
accordingly if there Have you ever been
is evidence that it is involved in e-
being used in an commerce?
exam question.
11 Professional Approach As ever, questions N/A

scepticism in the Work through this will require you to
audit fieldwork section, noting that read through
stage the worked example everything in the
We have already will require you to scenario carefully to
discussed engage with your identify any areas
professional peers. where there could
scepticism but this be ambiguity (and as
such, could require
HB2021

section discusses Stop and think the need for greater

how it can be Note how the use of levels of professional
applied when data analytics may scepticism).
collecting audit not always be
evidence. helpful to the
auditor!
12 Appendix – Approach While these relate to N/A

External Note the content on specific types of
confirmations, external evidence gathering
sampling and confirmations and techniques, you may
directional testing sampling and how still be asked to
Further supporting you can find it in assess whether audit
information on your auditing procedures (which
gathering evidence standards open could include
that should be book. anything mentioned
considered here) that are stated
Stop and think in a scenario have
revision from your
earlier studies. Also note the use of been completed
assertions in appropriately or not.
directional testing.
HB2021

1 Revision of assertions
Section overview
• Evidence is obtained in respect of each assertion used by the auditor.
1.1 Introduction
As we have seen, audit work is about reducing risk – the risk that the financial statements include
material misstatements. At the most basic level, the financial statements simply consist of the
following information about the entity:
• Revenues
• Costs
• Assets
• Liabilities
• Capital
These items will have certain attributes if they are included correctly in the financial statements.
These attributes are referred to as financial statement assertions.
1.2 Financial statement assertions
Definition
Assertions: The representations by management, explicit or otherwise, that are embodied in the
financial statements, as used by the auditor to consider the different types of potential misstatement
that may occur.
By approving the financial statements, the directors are making representations about the
information therein. These representations or assertions may be described in general terms in a
number of ways.
For example, if the statement of financial position includes a figure for freehold land and buildings,
the directors are asserting that:
• the property concerned exists;
• it is either owned by the company outright or else the company has suitable rights over it;
• its value is correctly calculated; and
• there are no other items of a similar nature which ought to be included but which have been
omitted.
• it is disclosed in the financial statements in a way which is not misleading and is in accordance
with the relevant ‘reporting framework’ eg, international accounting standards.
ISA (UK) 315 (Revised July 2020), Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement states
that “the objective of the auditor is to identify and assess the risks of material misstatement, whether
due to fraud or error, at the financial statement and assertion levels thereby providing a basis for
designing and implementing responses to the assessed risks of material misstatement” (ISA (UK)
315.11). It gives examples of assertions in these areas. Depending on the nature of the item, certain
assertions will be more relevant than others.
HB2021

Assertions used by the
auditor
Assertions about classes of Occurrence: Transactions and events that have been recorded or
transactions, events, and disclosed have occurred and pertain to the entity.
related disclosures, for the Completeness: All transactions and events that should have been
period under audit (ISA (UK) recorded have been recorded, and all related disclosures that
315.A190(a)) should have been included have been included.
Accuracy: Amounts and other data relating to recorded
transactions and events have been recorded appropriately and
related disclosures have been appropriately measured and
described.
Cut-off: Transactions and events have been recorded in the
correct accounting period.
Classification: Transactions and events have been recorded in the
proper accounts.
Presentation: transactions and events are appropriately
aggregated or disaggregated and clearly described, and related
disclosures are relevant and understandable in the context of the
requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework.
Assertions about account Existence: Assets, liabilities and equity interests exist.
balances, and related Rights and obligations: The entity holds or controls the rights to
disclosures, at the period end assets, and liabilities are the obligations of the entity.
(ISA (UK) 315.A190(b))
Completeness: All assets, liabilities and equity interests that
should have been recorded have been recorded, and all related
disclosures that should have been included in the financial
statements have been included.
Accuracy, valuation and allocation: Assets, liabilities and equity
interests have been included in the financial statements at
appropriate amounts and any resulting valuation or allocation
adjustments have been appropriately recorded and related.
Classification: Assets, liabilities and equity interests have been
recorded in the proper accounts.
Presentation: Assets, liabilities and equity interests are
appropriately aggregated or disaggregated and clearly
described, and related disclosures are relevant and
understandable in the context of the requirements of the
applicable financial reporting framework.
1.2.1 Summary
We have seen that there are 12 assertions applying in different ways to different items in the financial
statements.
You can summarise them in the following four questions:
(a) Should it be in the financial statements at all?
(b) Is it included at the right amount?
(c) Are there any more?
(d) Has it been properly disclosed and presented?
HB2021

The following table shows how the assertions fit with these questions:
Transactions, events and Account balances and related

related disclosures disclosures at the period end
Should it be in the accounts at Occurrence Existence

all? Cut-off Rights and obligations
Is it included at the right Accuracy Accuracy, valuation and

amount? allocation
Are there any more? Completeness Completeness
Is it properly disclosed and Classification Classification

presented? Presentation Presentation
Interactive question 1: Financial statement assertions (1)

Complete the table below.
• Identify procedures to satisfy the four key questions.
• Identify the financial statement assertions that these procedures will satisfy.
Audit area Key question Examples of procedures Assertions
Non-current Should it be in the Physically verify Existence

assets accounts at all? Rights and
obligations
Is it included at the Inspect invoices/contracts Accuracy, valuation

right amount? Check depreciation and allocation
Are there any more?
Is it properly
disclosed and
presented?
Receivables Should it be in the

accounts at all?
Is it included at the
right amount?
Are there any more?
Is it properly
disclosed and
presented?
HB2021

Payables Should it be in the

accounts at all?
Payables Is it included at the

right amount?
Are there any more?
Is it properly
disclosed and
presented?
Inventory Should it be in the

accounts at all?
Is it included at the
right amount?
Are there any more?
Is it properly
disclosed and
presented?
Interactive question 2: Financial statement assertions (2)

For the following points, identify and explain the most relevant financial statement assertions.
Assume that the year end is 31 December 20X7 in each case.
2.1 Fine plc is proposing to award share options to five directors. The proposal is to issue 100,000
options to each of the five individuals on 1 September 20X7 (the grant date) at an exercise
price of £7 per share. The scheme participants will need to have been with the company for at
least three years before being able to exercise their options. It is believed that all the directors
will satisfy this condition. Other relevant information is as follows:
1 September 20X7 31 December 20X7

£ £
Market price per share 7.00 8.20 (estimated)
Fair value of each option 3.00 5.70 (estimated)
2.2 Wiggam plc has purchased goods worth £750,000 from Tepid Ltd on an arm’s length basis.
Wiggam owns 40% of the ordinary share capital in Tepid.
HB2021

2.3 Deakin plc issued 10,000 6% convertible bonds at par value of £10 on 31 December 20X7. On
this date the market interest rate for similar debt without the option to convert was 10%. Each
bond is convertible into four ordinary shares on 31 December 20X9.
2 Sufficient, appropriate audit evidence

Section overview
• Auditors need to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence.
2.1 Importance
ISA (UK) 500, Audit Evidence states that the objective of the auditor is to obtain sufficient,
appropriate audit evidence to be able to draw reasonable conclusions on which to base the auditor’s
opinion.
The importance of obtaining sufficient, appropriate audit evidence can be demonstrated in the
Arthur Andersen audit of Mattel Inc.
Context example: Mattel Inc

This is a complex case but in simple terms Mattel Inc inflated its reported earnings by using a
technique which came to be known as ‘bill and hold’. This involved billing customers for future sales.
While the sale was recorded immediately (with invoices often prepared without the knowledge of the
customer) the merchandise was not shipped. To support these sales Mattel produced false sales
orders, invoices and bills of lading. The bills of lading were signed by employees as both themselves
and the carrying company. They were then stamped ‘bill and hold’. Problems which arose when the
goods were actually sold were dealt with by making other fraudulent entries in the books.
When Arthur Andersen audited accounts receivable they sent accounts receivable confirmations to
customers. These were returned with many substantial discrepancies due to the ‘bill and hold’
entries. As part of the reconciliation process the auditors reviewed copies of bills of lading to serve
as confirmation that the goods had been shipped. However, the auditors did not question the term
‘bill and hold’ even though it was clearly stamped on the documents and did not appear to notice
that the same individual had signed as both representatives of Mattel Inc and the shipping company.
A number of entries were questioned and the audit senior who reviewed the working papers noted
that additional explanations were required but no further investigation actually took place.
(Source: Hayes, R., Dassen, R., Schilder, A., Wallage, P. (2005) Principles of Auditing: An Introduction to
International Standards on Auditing. 2nd Ed. England: Pearson Education Limited)
2.2 Sufficient and appropriate evidence

‘Sufficiency’ and ‘appropriateness’ are interrelated and apply to both tests of controls and
substantive procedures.
Sufficient evidence relates to the quantity of evidence gathered. However, it is not simply a question
of ‘more is better’, as different sources can be more or less persuasive. Broadly speaking, however, it
is possible to say that the greater the risk of misstatement, the greater the quantity of evidence
required.
However, the standards are clear that if the auditor decides to perform more comprehensive testing
eg, by selecting a bigger sample the extra work must contribute to the reduction of risk.
HB2021

Appropriateness relates to the quality of evidence. ISA (UK) 500 amplifies this term by saying that
evidence should be:
• relevant
• reliable
Relevance deals with the logical connection with the purpose of the audit procedure and, where
appropriate, the assertion under consideration.
Reliability is influenced by the source and nature of the evidence; however, you should be familiar
with the following generalisations from your earlier studies:
• Audit evidence is more reliable when it is obtained from independent sources outside the entity.
• Audit evidence that is generated internally is more reliable when the related controls imposed by
the entity are effective.
• Audit evidence obtained directly by the auditor (for example, observation of the application of a
control) is more reliable than audit evidence obtained indirectly or by inference (for example,
inquiry about the application of a control).
• Documentary evidence is more reliable, whether paper, electronic or other medium (for example,
a written record of a meeting is more reliable than a subsequent oral representation of the
matters discussed).
• Original documents are more reliable than photocopies or faxes.
2.2.1 Audit data analytics

The FRC Audit Quality Thematic Review: The Use of Data Analytics in the Audit of Financial
Statements indicates a number of issues which need to be considered at the planning stage of the
audit which relate to sufficiency and appropriateness of audit evidence. These are as follows:
• Considering whether a tool is a ‘good match’ for the client’s specific environment
• Ensuring that all relevant assertions are covered
• Whether testing in other areas needs to be flexed to provide the necessary supporting evidence
for the use of audit data analytics
• The FRC Review was covered in more detail in Chapter 5.
The issue of reliability of data also needs to be re-assessed as data analytics includes the
interrogation of a wider range of sources of information than might have traditionally been the case.
For example expectations regarding reliability relating to information generated by the client’s
accounting system will be different to those relating to the reliability of information generated by
analytics procedures performed on emails.
Interactive question 3: Audit evidence – revision

“The objective of the auditor is to […] obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence to be able to draw
reasonable conclusions on which to base the auditor’s opinion.” (ISA (UK) 500.4)
Requirements
Discuss the extent to which each of the following sources of audit evidence is appropriate and
sufficient.
3.1 Oral representation by management in respect of the completeness of sales where the majority
of transactions are conducted on a cash basis.
3.2 Flowcharts of the accounting and control system prepared by a company’s internal audit
department.
3.3 Year-end suppliers’ statements.
3.4 Physical inspection of a non-current asset by an auditor.
3.5 Comparison of revenue and expenditure items for the current period with corresponding
information for earlier periods.
3.6 A proof in total calculation performed by the auditor to validate the interest expense relating to
a bank loan.
HB2021

2.3 The work of a management‘s expert as audit evidence
Definition
Management’s expert: An individual or organisation possessing expertise in a field other than
accounting or auditing whose work in that field is used by the entity to assist the entity in preparing
Certain aspects of the preparation of financial statements may require expertise such as actuarial
calculations (relevant to accounting for pensions) or valuations (where the fair value alternative is
used for non-current assets). The entity may employ such experts or may engage the services of
external experts. ISA (UK) 500 includes guidance on the considerations that arise for the external
auditor in using this information as audit evidence.
If this work is significant to the audit the external auditor shall:
• evaluate the competence, capabilities and objectivity of the expert;
• obtain an understanding of the work of the expert; and
• evaluate the appropriateness of the expert’s work as audit evidence for the relevant assertion.
Note: Situations where the external auditor requires the assistance of an expert in obtaining audit
evidence are covered by ISA (UK) 620 (Revised November 2019), Using the Work of an Auditor’s
Expert (see later in this chapter).
2.4 Triangulation
Forming an audit opinion is a question of using professional judgement at all times and judgements
have to be made about the nature, the quality and the mix of evidence gathered. It is also essential
that individual items of evidence are not simply viewed in isolation but instead support other
evidence and are supported by other evidence. This approach views evidence from different sources
as predominantly complementary, rather than compensatory. This strategy of acquiring and
evaluating complementary evidence from a range of sources is referred to as triangulation. This
approach is an application of the general principle that evidence obtained from different sources,
that presents a consistent picture, is mutually strengthening and gives greater reliance than merely
increasing the amount of evidence from a single source. The consequence of overreliance on one
specific type and source of evidence can be seen in the case of the collapse of Parmalat.
Scenarios are always presented in such a way as to require analysis of all the available information,
which is only possible once you have reviewed everything in the question. Mastering this process of
triangulation is a key part of being able to make the best use of the information at your disposal.
Context example: Overreliance on confirmations

One of the largest examples of overreliance on one type of audit confirmation was the Parmalat
collapse of 2003.
Parmalat Finanziaria Spa is an Italian-based company. Its main operating subsidiary Parmalat Spa
dealt with dairy produce around the world. On 24 December 2003 Parmalat Spa filed for bankruptcy.
How could this happen to a company that employed 36,000 employees, operated in 30 countries
and was Italy’s biggest food maker? The answer is simply forged documentation!
Parmalat allegedly had €3.95 billion worth of cash and marketable securities in an account at the
Bank of America but under the name of Bonlat Financing Corporation. In 2002 Grant Thornton, the
auditors of Bonlat, had requested confirmation of the balances from Bank of America. Three months
later a reply was received by post, not fax, confirming the balance. It later transpired that this letter
was a forgery and Bank of America confirmed this in a press release. The Parmalat CEO left Italy on
the day of this press release. The €3.95 billion worth of cash and securities simply did not exist.
HB2021

In retrospect, additional evidence rather than simply one (forged) letter should have been obtained
for the cash balance. The case shows that even external confirmations and letters from other auditors
should be treated with some scepticism where the amounts involved are very material.
(Source: Hayes, R., Dassen, R., Schilder, A., Wallage, P. (2005) Principles of Auditing: An Introduction to
International Standards on Auditing. 2nd Ed. England: Pearson Education Limited)
3 Sources of audit evidence

Section overview
Sources of audit evidence include:

• Tests of controls (covered in Chapter 7)
• Substantive procedures
3.1 Tests of controls

You will have covered tests of controls in your earlier studies. We cover evaluation of controls and
tests of controls in more detail in Chapter 7; however, a key point to remember is even if evaluated
and tested controls are considered strong enough to rely on, there is still a need to carry out some
substantive testing.
3.2 Substantive procedures

ISA (UK) 330 (Revised July 2017), The Auditor’s Responses to Assessed Risks states that irrespective of
the assessed risk of material misstatement, the auditor shall design and perform substantive
procedures for each material class of transactions, account balance and disclosure.
There are two key types of substantive procedure.
• Substantive analytical procedures. These are generally more applicable to large volumes of
transactions that tend to be predictable over time. We will look at these in detail in section5.
• Tests of details. These are ordinarily more appropriate to obtain audit evidence regarding certain
assertions about account balances. We will see how these are applied to key aspects of the
financial statements as we work through the remainder of the chapter.
4 Selection of audit procedures

Section overview
Methods of obtaining audit evidence include:

• inquiry
• observation
• inspection
• recalculation
• reperformance
• external confirmation
• analytical procedures
The procedures used are selected according to the nature of the balance being audited and the
assertion being considered. Audit procedures may be carried out using data analytics tools as
discussed in Chapter 5.
HB2021

4.1 Types of procedure
Auditors obtain evidence by using one or more of the following procedures.
4.1.1 Inquiry
Definition
Inquiry: Consists of seeking information of knowledgeable persons both financial and non-financial
within the entity or outside the entity.
Examples
Inquiry includes obtaining responses to formal written questions and asking informal questions in
relation to specific audit assertions. The response to inquiries provides the auditor with information
that was not previously possessed or may corroborate information obtained from other sources. The
strength of the evidence depends on the knowledge and integrity of the source. Where the result of
inquiry is different from other evidence obtained, then reasons for that difference must be sought
and the information reconciled.
Business focus
Common uses of inquiry are as follows:
• Written representations – where management have information not available from any other
source
• Asking employees about the internal control systems and effectiveness of the controls they are
operating
Remember it is not normally sufficient to accept inquiry evidence by itself – some corroboration will
be sought. The US court case of Escott et al. v Bar Chris Corporation1968 ruled that the auditor was
negligent in not following up answers to management inquiries. The judge indicated that the auditor
was too easily satisfied with glib answers and that these should have been checked with additional
investigation.
4.1.2 Observation
Definition
Observation: Consists of looking at a procedure or process being performed by others.
Examples
Observation is not normally a procedure to be relied on by itself. For example, the auditor may
observe a non-current asset, such as a motor vehicle. However, this will only prove the vehicle exists;
other assertions such as rights and obligations will rely on other evidence such as invoices and
valuation possibly on the use of specialist valuers or documentation.
Business focus
Observation is commonly used in the business processes of inventory management. After inventory
has been purchased, an organisation holds raw materials, work in progress and finished goods in its
warehouses and factories. Observation is used to determine that the inventory exists, it is valued
correctly (looking for old and slow-moving inventory) and that inventory is complete in the
organisation’s books. Note the link to audit assertions here.
Additionally, the auditor will be observing the internal control systems over inventory, particularly in
respect to perpetual inventory checking and any specific procedures for year-end inventory
counting. You should be familiar with the audit procedures in respect of attendance at an inventory
count from your Assurance studies.
Observation may also be used in the human resource business process. The auditor will observe
employees operating specific controls within the internal control system to determine the
effectiveness of application of those controls, as well as the ability of the employee to operate the
control. However, the act of observing the employee limits the value of the evidence obtained; many
employees will amend their work practices when they identify the auditor observing them.
HB2021

4.1.3 Inspection
Definition
Inspection: Means the examination of records, documents or tangible assets.
Examples
By carrying out inspection procedures, the auditor is substantiating information that is, or should be,
in the financial statements. For example, inspection of a bank statement confirms the bank balance
for the bank reconciliation which in turn confirms the cash book figure for the financial statements.
Business focus
Inspection assists with the audit of most business processes. For example:
• Financing: inspection of loan agreements to confirm the term and repayment details (part of the
completeness of disclosure in the financial statements)
• Purchasing: inspection of purchase orders to ensure that the order is valid and belongs to the
company (occurrence assertion among others)
• Human resources: inspection of pay and overtime schedules as part of wages audit
• Inventory management: inspection of the work in progress ledger confirming cost allocation to
specific items of work in progress (valuation assertion)
• Revenue: inspection of sales invoices to ensure that the correct customer has been invoiced with
the correct amount of sales (completeness and accuracy assertions)
Inspection of assets that are recorded in the accounting records confirms existence, gives evidence
of valuation, but does not confirm rights and obligations.
Confirmation that assets seen are recorded in accounting records gives evidence of completeness.
Confirmation to documentation of items recorded in accounting records confirms that an asset exists
or a transaction occurred. Confirmation that items recorded in supporting documentation are
recorded in accounting records tests completeness.
Cut-off can be verified by inspecting the reverse population; that is, checking transactions recorded
after the end of the reporting period to supporting documentation to confirm that they occurred
after the end of the reporting period.
Inspection also provides evidence of valuation/accuracy, rights and obligations and the nature of
items (presentation and classification). It can also be used to compare documents (and hence test
consistency of audit evidence) and confirm authorisation.
4.1.4 Recalculation
Definition
Recalculation: Consists of checking the arithmetical accuracy of source documents and accounting
records.
Examples
Recalculation obviously relates to financial information. It is deemed to be a reliable source of audit
evidence because it is carried out by the auditor.
Business focus
Recalculation relates to most business processes. For example:
• Financing: calculation of interest payments
• Purchasing: accuracy of purchase orders and invoices
• Inventory management: valuation of work in progress
• Revenue: recalculation of sales invoices
HB2021

Recalculation is particularly effective when carried out using computer-assisted audit techniques
(CAATs), as the computer can perform the whole of the inventory calculation (for example) in a short
time period. Data analytics may also be used. For example data analytics routines may be used to
perform detailed recalculations of depreciation on non-current assets by item. Approximations could
be used (eg, assuming sales and purchases are mid-month) or by using the entire data set and exact
dates.
4.1.5 Reperformance
Definition
Reperformance: Means the auditor’s independent execution of procedures or controls that were
originally performed as part of the entity’s internal control.
Examples
Auditors will often reperform some of the main accounting reconciliations, such as the bank
reconciliation or reconciliations of individual supplier balances to supplier statements. It is also
deemed to be a reliable source of audit evidence because it is carried out by the auditor.
Business focus
Reconciliations are a key control over many transaction cycles in the business, and if performed
properly are an effective means of identifying accounting errors or omissions. If they are performed
by an individual who is not involved in the day to day accounting for the underlying transactions they
can be a deterrent against fraudulent accounting.
4.1.6 External confirmation
Definition
External confirmation: Audit evidence obtained as a direct written response to the auditor from a
third party.
Examples
A typical example of confirmation evidence is obtaining a response from a debtors’ circularisation
(see Appendix for revision on this area). The evidence obtained is highly persuasive, as it comes from
an independent external source.
Key characteristics of any confirmation are as follows:
• Information is requested by the auditor.
• The request and response are in writing and the response is sent direct to the auditor.
• The response is from an independent third party.
• The confirmation is usually required to be positive (a response is expected) rather than negative (a
non-reply is assumed to confirm information provided to the third party).
Business focus
Confirmations are normally used in the following business processes:
• Financing: agreement of bank balances, loan amounts outstanding etc, (see Appendix)
• Inventory: confirmation of inventory held at third parties
• Revenue: confirmation of amounts due from debtors and payable to creditors (see Appendix)
4.1.7 Analytical procedures

We will look at these in a later section.
4.2 Application of procedures to specific areas of the financial statements

You should be familiar with the basic principles behind the audit of key balances in the financial
statements from your Assurance studies. This section demonstrates the application of these
principles, looking in particular at non-current assets.
HB2021

4.2.1 Tangible assets
The major risks of misstatement in the financial statements are due to:
• expenses being capitalised as non-current assets (existence assertion);
• tangible assets being carried at the wrong cost or valuation (accuracy, valuation and allocation
assertion);
• tangible assets being carried at the wrong cost or valuation due to charging inappropriate
depreciation, or not depreciating (accuracy, valuation and allocation assertion); and
• tangible assets being carried at the wrong cost or valuation due to impairment reviews not being
carried out appropriately (accuracy, valuation and allocation assertion).
Interactive question 4: Audit procedures revision of tangible assets

Your firm acts as auditors to Xantippe Ltd, a manufacturer of industrial components. You have been
presented with the financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X6, which include the
following information in connection with property, plant and equipment.
At 31
At 1 January December
20X6 Additions Disposals 20X6
£ £ £ £
Cost
Freehold property 80,000 – – 80,000
Plant and machinery 438,000 62,000 (10,000) 490,000
Motor vehicles 40,500 13,000 ––––––– 53,500
558,500 75,000 (10,000) 623,500
At 31
At 1 January December
20X6 Charge for year Disposals 20X6
£ £ £ £
Depreciation
Freehold property 8,000 1,600 – 9,600
Plant and machinery 139,500 47,000 (3,000) 183,500
Motor vehicles 20,000 10,200 –––––– 30,200
167,500 58,800 (3,000) 223,300
Requirements
4.1 Explain the factors that should be considered in determining an approach to the audit of
property, plant and equipment of Xantippe Ltd.
4.2 State the procedures you would perform in order to reach a conclusion on property, plant and
equipment in the financial statements of Xantippe Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X6.
Impairment of non-current assets

An asset is impaired when its carrying amount (depreciated cost or depreciated valuation) exceeds
its recoverable amount. Management are required to determine if there is any indication that the
assets are impaired.
The auditors will consider whether there are any indicators of impairment when carrying out risk
assessment procedures. They will use the same impairment criteria laid out in IAS 36, Impairment of
HB2021

Assets as management do. If the auditors believe that impairment is indicated, they should request
that management show them the impairment review that has been carried out. If no impairment
review has been carried out, then the auditors should discuss the need for one with management
and, if necessary, modify their report on grounds of disagreement (not conforming with IAS 36) if
management refuse to carry out an impairment review.
If an impairment review has been carried out, then the auditors should audit that impairment review.
Management will have estimated whether the recoverable amount of the asset/cash generating unit
is lower than the carrying amount.
For auditors, the key issue is that recoverable amount requires estimation. As estimation is
subjective, this makes it a risky area for auditors.
Management have to determine if recoverable amount is higher than carrying amount. It may not
have been necessary for them to estimate both fair value and value in use because, if one is higher
than carrying amount, then the asset is not impaired. If it is not possible to make a reliable estimate
of net realisable value, then it is necessary to calculate value in use. Net realisable value is only
calculable if there is an active market for the goods, and would therefore be audited in the same way
as fair value. Costs of disposal such as taxes can be recalculated by applying the appropriate tax rate
to the fair value itself. Delivery costs can be verified by comparing costs to published rates by
delivery companies, for example, on the internet.
If management have calculated the value in use of an asset or cash-generating unit, then the auditors
will have to audit that calculation. The following procedures will be relevant.
Value in use
• Obtain management’s calculation of value in use.
• Reperform calculation to ensure that it is mathematically correct.
• Compare the cash flow amounts to recent budgets and projections approved by the board to
ensure that they are realistic.
• Calculate/obtain from analysts the long-term average growth rate for the products and ensure
that the growth rates assumed in the calculation of value in use do not exceed it.
• Refer to competitors’ published information to compare how much similar assets are valued at by
companies trading in similar conditions.
• Compare to previous calculations of value in use to ensure that all relevant costs of maintaining
the asset have been included.
• Ensure that the cost/income from disposal of the asset at the end of its life has been included.
• Review calculation to ensure cash flows from financing activities and income tax have been
excluded.
• Compare discount rate used to published market rates to ensure that it correctly reflects the
return expected by the market.
If the asset is impaired and has been written down to recoverable amount, the auditors should review
the financial statements to ensure that the write-down has been carried out correctly and that the
IAS36 disclosures have been made correctly. XE “Held-for-sale assets”
4.2.2 Intangible assets

Accounting guidance for intangibles is given in IAS 38, Intangible Assets and IFRS 3, Business
Combinations. The types of assets you are likely to encounter under this heading include the
following:
• Patents
• Licences
• Trademarks
• Development costs
• Goodwill
HB2021

The major risks of misstatement in the financial statements are due to:
• expenses being capitalised as non-current assets (existence assertion);
• intangible assets being carried at the wrong cost or valuation (accuracy, valuation and allocation
assertion);
• intangible assets being carried at the wrong cost or valuation due to charging inappropriate
amortisation, or not amortising (accuracy, valuation and allocation assertion); and
• intangible assets being carried at the wrong cost or valuation due to impairment reviews not
being carried out appropriately (accuracy, valuation and allocation assertion).
In order to address these, the auditor should carry out the following procedures.
Completeness
• Prepare analysis of movements on cost and amortisation accounts.
Rights and obligations
• Obtain confirmation from a patent agent of all patents and trademarks held.
• Verify payment of annual renewal fees.
Accuracy, valuation and allocation
• Review specialist valuations of intangible assets, considering:
– qualifications of valuer
– scope of work
– assumptions and methods used
• Confirm that carried down balances represent continuing value, which are proper charges to
future operations.
Additions (rights and obligations, valuation and completeness)
• Inspect purchase agreements, assignments and supporting documentation for intangible assets
acquired in period.
• Confirm that purchases have been authorised.
• Verify amounts capitalised of patents developed by the company with supporting costing
records.
Amortisation
• Review amortisation
– Check computation
– Confirm that rates used are reasonable
Income from intangibles
• Review sales returns and statistics to verify the reasonableness of income derived from patents,
trademarks, licences etc.
• Examine audited accounts of third-party sales covered by a patent, licence or trademark owned
by the company.
The requirements of a question will often need some further work to fully understand what the
examining team is looking for, especially when requesting audit procedures in relation to a stated
exhibit. Good awareness of the various types of procedure and when they should be used will help
you make sense of what you have been asked to do.
HB2021

5 Analytical procedures
Section overview
• Analytical procedures are used as part of risk assessment and are required to be used as part of
the final review process.
• Analytical procedures may be used as substantive procedures.
5.1 Use of analytical procedures

Analytical procedures are used throughout the audit.
• ISA (UK) 315 (Revised July 2020), Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement
deals with their use as risk assessment procedures.
• ISA (UK) 520, Analytical Procedures requires that analytical procedures are used near the end of
the audit when forming an overall conclusion as to whether the financial statements are consistent
with the auditor’s understanding of the entity.
Analytical procedures may also be used as substantive procedures.
Auditors should not normally rely on analytical procedures alone in respect of material balances but
should combine them with tests of detail.
However, ISA 330 paragraph A43 points out that the combination will depend on the circumstances,
and that the auditor may determine that performing only analytical procedures will be sufficient to
reduce audit risk to an acceptably low level; for example, where the auditor’s assessment of risk is
supported by audit evidence from tests of controls.
This is an area of the audit where the use of data analytics tools can be particularly effective, in
support of judgements and providing greater insights. Data analytics tools are able to draw on a
wider range of data as compared to traditional methods. For example interest and foreign exchange
rates, changes in GDP and other growth metrics could be used. External market data may also be
relevant.
Remember that as well as any quantitative data presented in the exam question, there will also be
information from the data analytics software that you will need to consider as part of your approach.
5.2 Practical techniques

Ratio analysis is one of the key techniques which the auditor will use when performing analytical
procedures. You have looked at the relevant ratios in detail in your Assurance studies. A brief
summary is provided below.
5.2.1 Ratio analysis

When carrying out analytical procedures, auditors should remember that every industry is different
and each company within an industry differs in certain aspects.
Important Gross profit margins, in total and by product, area and months/quarter (if
accounting possible)
ratios Receivables ratio (average collection period)
Inventory turnover ratio (inventory divided into cost of sales)
Current ratio (current assets to current liabilities)
Quick or acid test ratio (liquid assets to current liabilities)
Gearing ratio (debt capital to equity capital)
HB2021

Return on capital employed (profit before interest and tax to total assets less
current liabilities)
Related items Payables and purchases

Inventory and cost of sales
Non-current assets and depreciation, repairs and maintenance expense
Intangible assets and amortisation
Loans and interest expense
Investments and investment income
Receivables and irrecoverable debts expense
Receivables and sales
Ratios mean very little when used in isolation. They should be calculated for previous periods and for
comparable companies. The permanent file should contain a section with summarised accounts and
the chosen ratios for prior years.
In addition to looking at the more usual ratios the auditors should consider examining other ratios
that may be relevant to the particular client’s business, such as revenue per passenger mile for an
airline operator client, and fees per partner for a professional office.
5.2.2 Other techniques

Other analytical techniques include:
(a) Simple comparisons
A simple year on year comparison could provide very persuasive evidence that an expense such
as rent is correctly stated, providing that the auditor has sufficient knowledge of the business, for
example knowing that the same premises have been leased year on year and that there has
been no rent review.
(b) Examining related accounts
Examining related accounts in conjunction with each other could provide evidence that a
balance is fairly stated. Often revenue and expense accounts are related to asset and liability
accounts and comparisons should be made to ensure relationships are reasonable.
(c) Reasonableness tests
These involve calculating the expected value of an item and comparing it with its actual value,
for example, for straight-line depreciation.
(Cost + Additions – Disposals) × Depreciation % = Recognised in profit or loss
This may include the comparison of non-financial as well as financial information.
For example, in making an estimate of employee costs, probably for one specific department,
such as manufacturing, the auditor might use information about the number of employees in the
department, as well as rates of pay increases.
(d) Trend analysis
This is a sophisticated statistical technique that can be used to compare this period with the
previous period. Information technology can be used in trend analysis, to enable auditors to see
trends graphically with relative ease and speed.
Methods of trend analysis include the following:
– Scatter graphs
– Bar graphs
– Pie charts
– Any other visual representations
– Time series analysis
– Statistical regression
Time series analysis involves techniques such as eliminating seasonal fluctuations from sets of
figures, so that underlying trends can be analysed. This is illustrated in the figure below.
HB2021

Figure 6.1: Time series analysis
Sales
(1)
(2)
Months
June December June
Line (1) in the diagram shows the actual sales made by a business. There is a clear seasonal
fluctuation before Christmas. Line (2) shows a level of sales with ‘expected seasonal fluctuations’
having been stripped out.
In this analysis the seasonal fluctuations have been estimated. This analysis is useful, however,
because the estimate is likely to be based on past performance, so the conclusion from this is that
there might be a problem:
• Sales are below the levels of previous years.
• Sales are below expectation.
5.3 Analytical procedures as risk assessment procedures

ISA (UK) 315 (Revised) para.14 requires that risk assessment procedures include analytical
procedures.
Analytical procedures are usually carried out at the planning stage of the audit because:
• it is a tool which assists in the identification of risk; and
• the result helps the auditor to plan the audit approach.
The benefits of adopting this technique are that:
• it helps to focus on the key priorities, as it is a ‘top down’ procedure; and
• it is an efficient procedure, due to its focus on key priorities.
5.3.1 Technique
Although ISA (UK) 520 deals with analytical procedures in the context of substantive procedures the
same basic techniques would be applied when using analytical procedures as risk assessment
procedures. The key stages in the process are as follows:
• Interpretation
• Investigation
• Corroboration
When potential problem areas have been identified, one of the key questions to ask is ‘why?’.
The statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
To apply this in more detail think about the client’s statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income.
The key question must be:
Why did the client make more (or less) money this year?
HB2021

Figure 6.2: Statement of profit or loss
Revenue Margin Overhead
Volume Selling Costs Product Fixed Variable

price mix
More customers Different products Strategic decisions

Different customers Different suppliers Market forces
More spend per customer Different markets One-offs
New outlets One-offs Fraud and error
One-offs Fraud and error
Fraud and error
Changes in revenue must depend on changes in either:

• volumes; or
• prices.
Alternatively, it could be a combination of the two.
Changes in margins must have something to do with changes in:
• selling prices
• cost prices
• product mix
Changes in overheads will need to be identified line by line, but you might like to consider the
different impacts of changes in:
• fixed overheads
• variable overheads
The boxes at the bottom of the diagram give some suggestions for the reasons why. The suggestions
are not intended to be exhaustive, but they should give you a good basis for an answer to an
analytical procedures type question.
A similar approach needs to be taken both to statement of financial position areas and those
efficiency ratios which link statement of financial position figures to the performance ratios.
5.3.2 Financial and non-financial factors

ISA (UK) 520 stresses the need to consider the use of non-financial information eg, employee
numbers and available selling space. Non-financial performance indicators can be found within the
financial statements. In particular, an operating and financial review, or possibly the chair’s
statement, may serve as useful indicators as they attempt to comment on both the past and the
future of the company. However, care must be taken in assessing the reliability of this information, as
indicators may have been selected to ensure a positive message is conveyed.
Interactive question 5: Analytical procedures (1)

You are planning the audit of Darwin Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X7. You are currently
engaged in the interim audit during November 20X7. The company manufactures and distributes
light fittings for both internal and external use. Approximately 40% of revenue is generated from
overseas customers.
HB2021

You have been provided with the following operating information.
10 months to 31 Oct 10 months to 31 Oct

20X7 20X6 Year to 31 Dec 20X6
£’000 £’000 £’000
Revenue 27,187 23,516 27,068
Cost of sales 16,040 14,966 17,175
Gross profit 11,147 8,550 9,893
Operating expenses 5,437 4,938 5,678
Operating profit 5,710 3,612 4,215
Gross profit margin 41% 36% 37%
Operating profit margin 21% 15% 16%
Inventories 5,160 4,320 4,080
Requirement
Based on the operating information identify and explain the potential audit risks.

Libby Ltd is a ladies fashion retailer operating a chain of shops in the South-East of England from a
head office in Guildford. Your firm has been the auditor of Libby Ltd for some years.
During the current year one shop was closed and the product range of the remaining eight shops
was extended to include accessories and footwear.
The company has a computerised accounting system and the audit manager is keen to ensure that
the audit is as efficient as possible.
As senior in charge of the audit you are currently planning the audit procedures for trade payables
and you have obtained draft financial statements from the client.
Extracts from the draft financial statements:
Year ended 31 March

Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income Draft 20X7 Actual 20X6
£’000 £’000
Revenue 8,173 5,650
Gross profit 1,717 1,352
As at 31 March
Statement of financial position Draft 20X7 Actual 20X6
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets 2,799 2,616
Current assets 1,746 1,127
Trade payables 991 718
Other payables 514 460
HB2021

Requirements
6.1 State what observations you can draw from the extracts from the draft financial statements and
how they may affect your audit of trade payables.
6.2 Indicate how audit software could be used in the audit of trade payables to achieve a more
efficient audit.
5.4 Analytical procedures as substantive procedures

5.4.1 Factors to consider
There are a number of factors which the auditors should consider when deciding whether to use
analytical procedures as substantive procedures. You will have covered these in your Assurance
studies. A brief reminder is given below.
Factors to consider Example
The suitability of particular Substantive analytical procedures are generally more applicable to
analytical procedures for large volumes of transactions that tend to be predictable over time,
given assertions such as analysis involving revenue and gross profit margins.
The reliability of the data This will depend on factors such as:
from which the auditors’ • the source of the information; and
expectations are developed
• the comparability of the data; industry comparison may be less
meaningful if the entity sells specialised products.
The detail to which Analytical procedures may be more effective when applied to
information can be analysed financial information or individual sections of an operation such as
individual factories and shops.
The nature of information Financial: budgets or forecasts.

Non-financial: eg, the number of units produced or sold.
The relevance of the Whether the budgets are established as results to be expected
information available rather than as tough targets (which may well not be achieved).
The knowledge gained The effectiveness of the accounting and internal controls.
during previous audits The types of problems giving rise to accounting adjustments in
prior periods.
Factors which should also be considered when determining the reliance that the auditors should
place on the results of substantive analytical procedures are:
Reliability factors Example
Other audit procedures Other procedures auditors undertake in reviewing the collectability
directed towards the same of receivables, such as the review of subsequent cash receipts, may
financial statements confirm or dispel questions arising from the application of
assertions analytical procedures to a schedule of customers’ accounts which
lists for how long monies have been owed.
The accuracy with which the Auditors normally expect greater consistency in comparing the
expected results of relationship of gross profit to sales from one period to another than
analytical procedures can in comparing expenditure which may or may not be made within a
be predicted period, such as research and advertising.
The frequency with which a A pattern repeated monthly as opposed to annually.

relationship is observed
HB2021

Reliance on the results of analytical procedures depends on the auditor’s assessment of the risk that
the procedures may mistakenly identify relationships (between data) when in fact there is a material
misstatement (that is, the relationships do not in fact exist). It also depends on the results of
investigations that auditors have made if substantive analytical procedures have highlighted
significant fluctuations or unexpected relationships.
5.4.2 Substantive analytical procedures

In practical terms, the use of substantive analytical procedures involves four distinct steps:
(a) Firstly, formulate expectations
(b) Secondly, compare expected value with the actual recorded amount
(c) Thirdly, obtain possible reasons for variance between expected value and recorded amount
(d) Fourthly, evaluate impact of any unresolved differences between the expected and recorded
amounts on the audit and financial statements
Each of these steps is explained below.
Formulate expectations
The auditor develops an expectation of figures in the financial statements using prior year financial
statements, budgets, industry information etc. The expectation should be developed so that any
material difference between this and the actual values in the financial statements indicates a
potential misstatement. The auditor must also evaluate whether the expectation is sufficiently precise
to identify a misstatement.
To carry out this procedure, the auditor will need access to industry data and environmental factors
affecting that industry. Access to the financial statements is not required at this time, as this could
prejudice the expectations of the auditor.
Example
The auditor is confirming the accuracy of salary expense in the statement of profit or loss and other
The prior year salary figure can be obtained from the prior year financial statements. This year’s salary
can be estimated using the average number of employees (from personnel records) and the average
salary again from personnel records. Changes in number of staff can be checked as reasonably
accurate from knowledge of the industry sector (expanding or declining?) and initial knowledge of
the client’s business (expanding or contracting?). Average number of employees multiplied by
average salary should give an approximate salary cost for the financial statements.
Compare expected value with the actual recorded amount
The auditor compares the expected value with the actual amount in the financial statements. In
making this comparison, the auditor must decide the amount of deviation which will be allowed
between the expected and actual figures – in other words, set a materiality limit. As assessed risk
increases, the amount of difference considered acceptable without investigation decreases. If the
difference between the two figures exceeds this materiality threshold then further investigation will
be required in an attempt to explain the difference. If the difference is below the materiality threshold
then no further investigation will be necessary.
The actual salary expense in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income can be
found. Assuming that salary cost does not involve overtime, then the estimated amount and the
actual should be relatively close – materiality is likely to be set at, say, 10% difference between the
two figures.
Obtain possible reasons for variances
The auditor attempts to identify reasons for the difference between the expected figure and the
actual figure in the financial statements. The level of investigation depends to some extent on the
accuracy of the auditor’s expected figure. If the expected figure is precise, then more investigation
will be expected. Conversely, if the expected figure has a larger element of imprecision, then it is less
likely that any difference is due to misstatement and therefore less investigation work will be
performed. (The auditor should have assessed whether expectations were capable of sufficiently
precise measurement before adopting analytical procedures.)
Corroboration of any difference will normally start by obtaining written representations from
management. However, these representations should be treated with scepticism due to the inherent
HB2021

problem of reliability of this source of evidence. Evidence from other sources will be required to
ensure that written representations are accurate.
If the expected and actual salary expenses are more than 10% different, then further work is needed
to determine why this is the case. Initial discussions with management may highlight areas where
costs will be different eg, expansion in the last month of the year may skew the average number of
managers to a larger number than expected. Or a salary increase late in the year may also inflate
expectations of average salary. These written representations will be checked back in detail to the
salary records.
Evaluate impact of any unresolved differences
Finally, the auditor will evaluate the impact of any unresolved differences on audit procedures and
the financial statements. A large difference may mean that additional substantive procedures are
required on the account balance to determine its accuracy. Any small remaining difference may be
ignored as immaterial.
Hopefully, differences in expected and actual salaries will be resolved and any remaining residual
difference will be immaterial. However, where differences remain, additional substantive testing of
the salaries figure will be required.
Note: As indicated in the Ernst & Young publication How Big Data and Analytics are Transforming the
Audit, where analytics tools are used in this instance the four steps indicated above are not followed
in the same way. One of the key differences is that unusual transactions or misstatements are
identified based on the analysis of data, usually without the auditor establishing an expectation.
Auditing standards do not currently reflect this approach as they pre-date the use of these
techniques.
(Source: EY (2015) How Big Data and Analytics are Transforming the Audit [Online]. Available from:
www.ey.com/en_gl/assurance/how-big-data-and-analytics-are-transforming-the-audit [Accessed on
12 October 2021])
5.5 Analytical procedures at the completion stage

ISA (UK) 520 states that analytical procedures performed when forming an overall conclusion are
intended to corroborate conclusions formed during the audit. This assists the auditor in forming their
opinion. The steps for carrying out analytical procedures at the completion stage of the audit may be
very similar to those used as part of the risk assessment process at the planning stage. However, they
are applied in a different way:
(a) Interpretation
The individual carrying out the analytical procedures reads through the financial statements and
interprets them, considering the absolute figures themselves and the relevant ratios.
(b) Investigation
When analytical procedures are used as risk assessment procedures or as a substantive
procedure the aim is to identify potential problems. The problems are then investigated during
fieldwork by making inquiries and gathering audit evidence.
In the UK, considerations when carrying out such procedures may include the following:
(a) Whether the financial statements adequately reflect the information and explanations previously
obtained and conclusions previously reached
(b) Whether the procedures reveal any new factors which may affect presentation or disclosures in
the financial statements
(c) Whether the procedures produce results which are consistent with the auditor’s knowledge of
the entity’s business
(d) The potential impact of uncorrected misstatements identified during the course of the audit
If analytical procedures identify a previously unrecognised risk of material misstatement, then the
auditor should reassess risk and modify the audit plan and perform further procedures as required.
From a practical point of view it is worth remembering the following:
(a) For the smaller client, the working papers supporting the final analytical procedures may well be
simply an update of the work done at the planning stage.
(b) For the larger client, the review becomes much more of a specific exercise.
HB2021

(c) The financial statements used for the analytical procedures need to incorporate any adjustments
made as a result of the audit.
5.6 Analytical procedures and other engagements

In this section we have been looking at the role of analytical procedures in the audit process.
However, the skills and techniques involved may be applied to other aspects of the professional
accountants’ work.
Judgement is always necessary when analytical procedures are used as part of your answer - what is
the message behind the numbers and is any other information (either quantitative or qualitative)
required?

Harrison plc is a small jewellers based in Hatton Garden in London. Over the years it has built up an
impressive client portfolio, and boasts names from high society as regular customers. You have
recently joined the engagement team.
Harrison plc now needs to restructure its long-term and short-term financing in order to facilitate
future growth, and has provided your firm with the following data to make an assessment of its
liquidity. The firm is also looking to re-evaluate its performance measures and is seeking advice on
what might be the most appropriate non-financial performance measures.
The following is an extract from the financial information provided by Harrison plc for the year ended
30 September 20X4.
£m
Revenue 2.0
Purchases 1.2
Cost of sales 1.5
£
Non-current assets 550,000
Inventory 300,000
Receivables 150,000
Cash 100,000
Payables (100,000)
1,000,000
Ordinary shares of 25p each 250,000

Reserves 350,000
7% preference shares of £1 each 250,000
15% unsecured loan stock 150,000
1,000,000
The ordinary shares are currently quoted at 125p each, the loan stock is trading at £85 per £100
nominal, and the preference shares at 65p each.
HB2021

Requirement
Evaluate the financial performance of the company.
6 Audit of accounting estimates

Section overview
• Accounting estimates and their disclosure require judgement and therefore lead to increased
audit risk.
ISA (UK) 540 (Revised December 2018), Auditing Accounting Estimates and Related Disclosures
provides guidance on the audit of accounting estimates contained in financial statements and
requires auditors to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence regarding accounting estimates
and how they are disclosed.
Definitions
Accounting estimate: A monetary amount for which the measurement, in accordance with the
requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework, is subject to estimation uncertainty.
Estimation uncertainty: Susceptibility to an inherent lack of precision in measurement.
The ISA gives the following examples of accounting estimates (ISA (UK) 540.A1):
• Allowance to reduce inventory due to obsolescence
• Depreciation methods
• Valuation or impairment of assets or financial instruments
• Provision for a loss from a lawsuit
• Revenue recognised for long term contracts
• Determination of fair value in a goodwill calculation
Directors and management are responsible for disclosing accounting estimates within the financial
statements when something cannot be directly observed. The amount disclosed is usually referred to
as management’s point estimate.
Under ISA (UK) 540 (Revised December 2018) Auditing Accounting Estimates and Related
Disclosures auditors are most concerned about estimation uncertainty, because the inherent
limitations in any knowledge or data used to create accounting estimates inevitably lead to increased
risk of material misstatement from either deliberate or accidental management bias in the financial
statements. Auditors therefore need to consider inherent risks when assessing the estimation
uncertainty attached to an accounting estimate. Other factors that the auditor should consider are
the complexity and subjectivity involved in the creation of management’s point estimate (ISA (UK)
540.2–3).
6.1 Audit procedures

Where estimation uncertainty, complexity and subjectivity exist, the auditor may need to exercise
greater levels of professional scepticism. The ISA (UK) mentions that professional scepticism should
be maintained specifically for estimates relating to fair value, asset impairments and provisions (ISA
(UK) 540.32D-1).
Inherent risk factors that the auditor should consider include:
• the entity and its environment
• the experience that management has in developing its own point estimate
• the volatility associated with the estimate
HB2021

• the degree of judgement and subjectivity involved when creating an estimate
As well as assessing inherent risk, auditors must also gain an understanding about controls related to
accounting estimates, including sources of information and any supporting systems:
• that they exist and have been implemented
• that they are operating effectively
Audit procedures would be dependent on the results of this controls testing, although the ISA (UK)
does point out that in some cases (such as high volumes of transactions or data processing)
substantive testing alone may not be enough and controls effectiveness would still be required to
determine sufficiency and appropriateness of audit evidence (ISA (UK) 540.A87–88).
When determining the reasonableness of accounting estimates and their disclosure, auditors may
consider the following:
• how the estimate has been calculated, including the method used, its accuracy and any
assumptions and data relied upon, in the context of the company’s circumstances
• why that particular management’s point estimate was chosen
• how the estimation uncertainty surrounding the estimate has been addressed by management
and how this has been disclosed
Further audit procedures to address any concerns about estimation uncertainty may also include:
• obtaining evidence from events occurring up to the date of the auditor’s report
• developing an auditor’s point estimate or range
6.2 Evaluation of results of audit procedures

Where the auditor concludes that there is evidence of possible management bias, this should be
treated in the same way as any other fraud. Otherwise, the outcome of audit procedures on
accounting estimates should be considered in the context of the auditor’s report (and in relation to
any uncorrected factual, judgemental or projected misstatements in the context of ISA (UK) 450,
covered further in Chapter 8).
6.3 Key audit matter

Where an accounting estimate has been identified as having a high estimation uncertainty the
auditor may conclude that it is a key audit matter that requires disclosure in accordance with ISA (UK)
701 (Revised January 2020), Communicating Key Audit Matters in the Independent Auditor’s Report.
ISA 701 is also covered in Chapter 8.
7 Initial audit engagements – opening balances

Section overview
• Opening balances are those account balances which exist at the beginning of an accounting
period.
• The auditor will perform audit procedures to ensure that those balances are accurately stated.
• Specific procedures may be required where the opening balances were not audited by the
current audit firm.
7.1 Opening balances

Opening balances are those account balances which exist at the beginning of the period. Opening
balances are based on the closing balances of the prior period and reflect the effects of:
• transactions and events of prior periods; and
• accounting policies applied to the prior period.
HB2021

ISA (UK) 510 (Revised June 2016), Initial Audit Engagements – Opening Balances provides guidance
on opening balances:
• when the financial statements of an entity are audited for the first time; and
• when the financial statements for the prior period were audited by a predecessor auditor.
7.2 Requirements
The auditor shall obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence about whether the opening balances
contain misstatements that materially affect the current period’s financial statements by:
• determining whether the prior period’s closing balances have been correctly brought forward to
the current period or, when appropriate, have been restated;
• determining whether the opening balances reflect the application of appropriate accounting
policies; and
• performing one or more of the following:
– Where the prior year financial statements were audited, reviewing the predecessor auditor’s
working papers to obtain evidence regarding the opening balances
– Evaluating whether audit procedures performed in the current period provide evidence
relevant to the opening balances
– Performing specific audit procedures to obtain evidence regarding the opening balances.
When the prior period’s financial statements were audited by another auditor, the current auditor
may be able to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence regarding opening balances by
reviewing the predecessor auditor’s working papers. (As noted in Chapter 3, in audits carried out
under the UK Companies Act 2006, when the predecessor auditor ceases to hold office, if requested
by the successor auditor, the predecessor auditor must allow the successor access to all relevant
information in respect of its audit work. This includes access to relevant working papers. Access to
this information is also required by ISQC (UK) 1).
The nature and extent of audit procedures necessary to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
on opening balances depends on matters such as the following.
• The accounting policies followed by the entity
• The nature of the account balances, classes of transactions and disclosures and the risks of
material misstatement in the current period’s financial statements
• The significance of the opening balances relative to the current period’s financial statements
• Whether the prior period’s financial statements were audited and, if so, whether the predecessor
auditors’ opinion was modified
In the UK, for audits of public interest entities, the auditor must obtain an understanding of the
predecessor auditor’s methodology in order to obtain details required for the report to the audit
committee as required by ISA (UK) 260.16-2.
If the auditor obtains audit evidence that the opening balances contain misstatements, that could
materially affect the current period’s financial statements, the auditor shall perform such additional
audit procedures as are appropriate in the circumstances to determine the effect on the current
period’s financial statements.
7.2.1 Specific audit procedures

For current assets and liabilities some audit evidence may be obtained as part of the current period’s
audit procedures. For example, the collection (payment) of opening accounts receivable (accounts
payable) during the current period will provide some audit evidence of their existence, rights and
obligations, completeness and valuation at the beginning of the period.
In the case of inventories, however, the current period’s audit procedures on the closing inventory
balance provide little audit evidence regarding inventory on hand at the beginning of the period.
HB2021

Therefore, additional procedures may be necessary, such as:
• observing a current physical inventory count and reconciling it back to the opening inventory
quantities;
• performing audit procedures on the valuation of the opening inventory items; and
• performing audit procedures on gross profit and cut-off.
A combination of these procedures may provide sufficient, appropriate audit evidence.
For non-current assets and liabilities, some audit evidence may be obtained by examining the
accounting records and other information underlying the opening balances. In certain cases, the
auditor may be able to obtain some audit evidence regarding opening balances through
confirmation with third parties, for example for long-term debt and investments. In other cases, the
auditor may need to carry out additional audit procedures.
7.2.2 Consistency of accounting policies

The auditor shall obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence about whether the accounting policies
reflected in the opening balances have been consistently applied in the current period’s financial
statements, and whether changes in the accounting policies have been appropriately properly
accounted for and adequately presented and disclosed in accordance with the applicable financial
reporting framework.
7.2.3 Prior period balances audited by a predecessor auditor

When the prior period’s financial statements were audited by a predecessor auditor, the current
auditor must read the most recent financial statements and predecessor auditor’s report for
information relevant to opening balances. The current auditor may be able to obtain sufficient,
appropriate evidence regarding opening balances by performing this review depending on the
professional competence and independence of the predecessor auditor. Relevant ethical and
professional requirements guide the current auditor’s communications with the predecessor auditor.
If there was a modification to the opinion, the auditor must evaluate the effect of the matter giving
rise to the modification in assessing the risks of material misstatement in the current period’s financial
statements.
7.3 Audit conclusion and reporting

“If the auditor is unable to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the opening
balances, the auditor shall express a qualified opinion or disclaim an opinion on the financial
statements, as appropriate.
”If the auditor concludes that the opening balances contain a misstatement that materially affects
the current period’s financial statements, and the effect of the misstatement is not appropriately
accounted for or not adequately presented or disclosed, the auditor shall express a qualified
opinion or an adverse opinion, as appropriate.” (ISA (UK) 510.10–11)
Note: The Appendix to the ISA gives illustrations of auditors’ reports with modified opinions relating
to opening balances. While these have been updated to reflect the changes made to the equivalent
IAASB ISA they have not been tailored for the UK.
The auditor shall express a qualified opinion or an adverse opinion as appropriate if they conclude
that:
• the current period’s accounting policies are not consistently applied in relation to opening
balances in accordance with the applicable financial reporting framework; or
• a change in accounting policies is not appropriately accounted for or not adequately presented
or disclosed in accordance with the applicable financial reporting framework.
If the prior period auditor’s report was modified, the auditor should consider the effect on the
current period’s financial statements. For example, if there was a scope limitation in the prior period,
but the matter giving rise to the scope limitation has been resolved in the current period, the auditor
may not need to modify the current period’s audit opinion.
The ISA finishes:
“If the predecessor auditor’s opinion regarding the prior period’s financial statements included a
modification to the auditor’s opinion that remains relevant and material to the current period’s
HB2021

financial statements, the auditor shall modify the auditor’s opinion on the current period’s
financial statements.” (ISA (UK) 510.13)
8 Using the work of others

Section overview
• In certain situations the auditor will consider it necessary to employ someone else with different
expert knowledge to gain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence.
• If the auditor’s client has an internal audit department, the auditor may seek to rely on its work.
8.1 Using the work of experts: revision

Professional audit staff are highly trained and educated, but their experience and training is limited
to accountancy and audit matters. In certain situations it will therefore be necessary to employ
someone else with different expert knowledge to gain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence. ISA
(UK) 620 (Revised November 2019), Using the Work of an Auditor’s Expert covers this area and the
principles included in this standard were covered at Professional Level. The key points are covered
below.
Definition
Auditor’s expert: An individual or organisation possessing expertise in a field other than accounting
and auditing, whose work in that field is used by the auditor in obtaining sufficient, appropriate audit
evidence. An auditor’s expert may be either an auditor’s internal expert (a partner or staff of the
auditor’s firm, or a network firm) or an auditor’s external expert.
Note: The use of data analytics has increased the need for the use of IT experts in the audit team.
The ISA makes a distinction between this situation and the situation outlined in ISA (UK) 500, Audit
Evidence (see earlier in this chapter) where management use an expert to assist in preparing
When using the work performed by an auditor’s expert, auditors should obtain sufficient, appropriate
audit evidence that such work is adequate for the purposes of an audit.
The following list of examples is given by the ISA (UK) of areas where it may be necessary to use the
work of an auditor’s expert:
• The valuation of complex financial instruments, land and buildings, plant and machinery,
jewellery, works of art, antiques, intangible assets, assets acquired and liabilities assumed in
business combinations and assets that may have been impaired
• The actuarial calculation of liabilities associated with insurance contracts or employee benefit
plans
• The estimation of oil and gas reserves
• The valuation of environmental liabilities, and site clean-up costs
• The interpretation of contracts, laws and regulations
• The analysis of complex or unusual tax compliance issues
When considering whether to use the work of an expert, the auditors should review the following:
• Whether management has used a management‘s expert in preparing the financial statements
• The nature and significance of the matter, including its complexity
• The risks of material misstatement
• The auditor’s knowledge of and experience with the work of experts in relation to such matters
and the availability of alternative sources of audit evidence
HB2021

8.1.1 Competence, capabilities and objectivity of the auditor’s expert
When planning to use the work of an auditor’s expert the auditors shall assess the professional
competence (including professional qualifications, experience and resources) of the expert. The
auditor shall evaluate the objectivity of the expert.
This will involve considering:
• the expert’s professional certification, or licensing by, or membership of, an appropriate
professional body and the technical performance standards and other requirements, such as
ethical standards of that body;
• the relevance of the expert’s competence to the matter for which that expert’s work will be used,
including any areas of speciality within that expert’s field; and
• the expert’s competence with respect to relevant accounting and auditing requirements, such as
assumptions and methods required by the applicable financial reporting framework.
In considering the objectivity of the expert, the auditor should consider circumstances such as self-
interest threats, advocacy threats, familiarity threat, self-review threats and intimidation threats as well
as the safeguards that may have been put in place to eliminate or reduce these.
In the UK for audits of public interest entities the auditor must obtain confirmation from the expert
regarding their independence. (ISA (UK) 620.9-1)
Remember that although an expert may be presented as the solution to your problem, they may also
pose problems of their own if there are concerns about their competence, capability or objectivity,
so you should be on the lookout for any evidence of this in an exam question.
8.1.2 Obtaining an understanding of the field of expertise of the auditor’s expert

The auditor needs to have a sufficient understanding in order to be able to:
• determine the nature, scope and objectives of the expert’s work for the auditor’s purposes; and
• evaluate the adequacy of that work for the auditor’s purposes.
8.1.3 Agreement with the auditor’s expert

Written instructions usually cover the expert’s terms of reference and such instructions may cover
such matters as follows:
• The nature, scope and objectives of the expert’s work
• The respective roles and responsibilities of the auditor and the expert
• The nature, timing and extent of communication between the auditor and the expert, including
the form of any report to be provided by the expert
• The need for the expert to observe confidentiality requirements
8.1.4 Evaluating the adequacy of the auditor’s expert’s work

The auditors shall assess the adequacy of the expert’s work for audit purposes.
Auditors should assess whether the substance of the expert’s findings is properly reflected in the
financial statements or supports the financial statement assertions. It will also require consideration
of:
• the relevance and reasonableness of the expert’s findings or conclusions, and their consistency
with other audit evidence;
• the relevance and reasonableness of any significant assumptions and methods used; and
• the relevance, completeness and accuracy of any source data used.
The auditors do not have the expertise to judge the assumptions and methods used; this is the
responsibility of the expert. However, the auditors should seek to obtain an understanding of these
assumptions, to consider their reasonableness based on other audit evidence, knowledge of the
business and so on.
HB2021

If the results of the expert’s work are not adequate for the auditor’s purposes, the auditor shall:
• agree with the expert on the nature and extent of further work to be performed by the expert; or
• perform additional audit procedures appropriate to the circumstances.
8.1.5 Reference to the auditor’s expert in the audit report

When issuing an unmodified audit opinion, the auditor should not refer to the work of the expert
unless required by law or regulation to do so (there is no such requirement in the UK).
Such a reference may be misunderstood and interpreted as a qualification of the audit opinion or a
division of responsibility, neither of which is appropriate.
If the auditors issue a modified audit opinion, then they may refer to the work of the expert if such a
reference is relevant to an understanding of the modification. The auditor must also indicate in the
report that the reference does not reduce the auditor’s responsibility for the opinion. In such cases,
auditors may need to obtain permission in advance from the expert. If such permission is not given,
then the auditors may have to seek legal advice.
8.1.6 Documentation
In the UK, the auditor must document any request for advice from an auditor’s expert and the advice
received.
Interactive question 8: Using an expert – revision

Explain whether it is necessary to use the work of an auditor’s expert in these situations. Where
relevant, you should describe alternative procedures.
Requirements
8.1 As auditor to an oil exploration company, you have ascertained that the useful life of each
drilling platform is assessed annually on factors such as weather conditions and the period over
which it is estimated that oil will be extracted. You are auditing the useful lives of the platforms.
8.2 Piles of copper and brass, that can be distinguished with a simple acid test, have been mixed
up. You are attending the inventory count.
8.2 Using the work of internal auditors

Using the work of internal auditors is covered at Professional Level in the Audit and Assurance paper.
However, a summary of the key points of ISA (UK) 610 (Revised June 2013), Using the Work of
Internal Auditors is set out below.
8.2.1 Assessment of internal audit

First, the external auditors will determine whether and to what extent to use the work of internal
auditors for the purposes of the audit by evaluating the following:
Evaluation of internal
audit
Objectivity Consider the status of the function within the entity, who they report to,
whether they have any conflicting responsibilities or restrictions placed on
their function. Consider also to what extent management acts on internal
audit recommendations.
Competence Consider whether internal auditors have adequate resources, technical

training and proficiency, and whether internal auditors possess the
required knowledge of financial reporting. They will also consider
whether the internal auditors are members of relevant professional
bodies.
HB2021

Evaluation of internal
audit
Systematic and Consider whether internal audit is properly planned, supervised,

disciplined approach reviewed and documented, whether the function has appropriate quality
control procedures, audit manuals, work programmes and
documentation.
8.2.2 The effect on external audit procedures

The external auditor then must determine the effect of the work of the internal auditors on the
nature, timing or extent of the external auditor’s procedures. The factors to consider are as follows:
• The nature and scope of the internal audit work
• The assessed risks of material misstatement
• The degree of subjectivity involved in the evaluation of the audit evidence
8.2.3 Evaluating specific internal auditing work

The ISA states: “The external auditor shall perform sufficient audit procedures on the body of the
work of the internal audit function as a whole that the external auditor plans to use to determine its
adequacy for the purposes of the audit.” (ISA (UK) 610.23)
In practice, the evaluation here will consider the scope of work and related audit programmes and
whether the original assessment of the internal audit function remains appropriate.
Evaluation
Training and Have the internal auditors had sufficient and adequate technical training
proficiency to carry out the work?
Are the internal auditors proficient?
Supervision Is the work of assistants properly supervised, reviewed and documented?
Evidence Has adequate audit evidence been obtained to afford a reasonable basis
for the conclusions reached?
Conclusions Are the conclusions reached appropriate, given the circumstances?
Reports Are any reports produced by internal audit consistent with the result of
the work performed?
Unusual matters Have any unusual matters or exceptions arising and disclosed by internal
audit been resolved properly?
Plan Are any amendments to the external audit plan required as a result of the
matters identified by internal audit?
The nature and extent of the testing of the specific work of internal auditing will depend on the
amount of judgment involved.
The external auditor’s procedures must include reperformance of some of the work of the internal
audit function. If the external auditors decide that the internal audit work is not adequate, they
should extend their own procedures in order to obtain appropriate evidence.
8.2.4 Direct assistance

In addition to using specific work done by an internal audit function, the external auditor may obtain
direct assistance from individuals from the internal audit department. Where this is the case the
external auditor:
• obtains written confirmation from those individuals and as an authorised member of the entity
that they will follow instruction from the external audit team and that they will keep specific
matters confidential;
HB2021

• confirms with the head of internal audit or those charged with governance the role those
individuals will play and the responsibility of the external auditor for quality control and the audit
opinion;
• supervises, reviews and evaluates the work performed;
• ensures that such individuals are only involved in work where self-review or judgement is not an
important part of the procedure; and
• agrees the approach with those charged with governance.
Note: In the UK the use of internal auditors to provide direct assistance is prohibited.
8.3 Service organisations

A service organisation is a third-party organisation that provides services to user entities that are part
of those entities’ information systems relevant to financial reporting.
ISA (UK) 402, Audit Considerations Relating to an Entity Using a Service Organisation provides
guidance on how auditors carry out their responsibility to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit
evidence when the audit client (called the ‘user entity’ in the standard) uses such an organisation. The
use of service organisations will be discussed in detail in Chapter 7.
9 Working in an audit team

Section overview
• This section deals with working in an audit team.
The audit engagement partner (sometimes called the reporting partner) must take responsibility for
the quality of the audit carried out. They should assign staff with necessary competences to the audit
team.
Some audits are wholly carried out by a sole practitioner (an accountant who practises on their own)
or a partner. More commonly, the engagement partner will delegate aspects of the audit work such
as the detailed testing to the staff of the firm. The usual hierarchy of staff on an audit engagement is:
Figure 6.3: Audit staff hierarchy
Engagement
partner
Audit manager
Supervisors/audit seniors
Audit assistants
9.1 Direction
The partner directs the audit. They are required by other auditing standards to hold a meeting with
the audit team to discuss the audit, in particular the risks associated with the audit. ISA (UK) 220 para.
A13 provides examples of direction techniques that the partner might use.
HB2021

9.2 Supervision
The audit is supervised overall by the engagement partner, but more practical supervision is given
within the audit team by senior staff to more junior staff (covered more fully by ISA (UK) 220 in para.
A15).
9.3 Review
Before the auditor’s report is issued, the engagement partner must be sure that sufficient and
appropriate audit evidence has been obtained to support the audit opinion. The audit engagement
partner need not review all audit documentation, but may do so. They must review critical areas of
judgement, significant risks and other important matters (ISA (UK) 220.A16-19).
9.4 Consultation
Consultation is usually required to ensure difficult or contentious matters have been dealt with
properly and that such matters and conclusions are properly recorded.
As well as working together in a team where everyone understands their role and how they fit
together, good audit quality can only be demonstrated by the way that the team formulates and
communicates its findings.
10 Auditing in an IT environment
Section overview
• The more an organisation uses e-commerce, the greater the risk associated with it. As a
consequence, there are special considerations for auditors performing the audit of companies
who use e-commerce.
10.1 Introduction
We looked at IT-specific risks in the context of carrying out an audit risk assessment and the role of
data analytics tools in this aspect of the audit in Chapter 5. Most companies now have a presence on
the worldwide web: there are few companies who do not engage in some form of e-commerce
nowadays.
E-commerce introduces specific risks. In this section, we will look at what this means for the auditor.
Definitions
Electronic data interchange (EDI): A form of computer to computer data transfer. Information can be
transferred in electronic form, avoiding the need for the information to be re-inputted somewhere
else.
Electronic mail (email): A system of communicating with other connected computers or via the
internet in written form.
Electronic commerce (e-commerce): Involves individuals and companies carrying out business
transactions without paper documents, using computer and telecommunications links.
10.2 Engaging in e-commerce

As e-commerce is a very fast-growing area of business, it is an important area for audit. For example,
the trend is increasingly towards cloud-based services. The ICAEW Information Technology Faculty
Helpsheet: Standard terms for the provision of cloud computing services to clients describes cloud
computing as the “storage of data and software on remote computers, which are then used to deliver
HB2021

services over the internet to the users’ preferred devices”. This can be a particularly good option for
smaller businesses to handle orders and process payments. There is no upfront investment and well-
established providers offer services at competitive prices. Obvious advantages include the ‘anywhere
access’, but issues of security and the stability of providers must be considered. Auditors must have
an understanding of these kinds of developments and the impact that they will have on the business
and the audit. The issues affecting the auditor’s appraisal of systems including virtual arrangements
and cloud computing are addressed in Chapter 7.
A business can engage in e-commerce to a large or small extent. The greater the involvement a
business has with e-commerce, the more the risk associated with it. The extent of involvement is
explored in the following table.
Involvement in e-commerce Risk

moving
from:
Information provision. A website can be used as a marketing device, to provide LOW

information to potential customers, and to enable them to request further information
through an email link.
Transactions with existing customers. Existing customers can be given the opportunity
to track current contracts or initiate others over the website.
Access to new customers. A website can be used as a place where new customers may
initiate transactions with the company.
New business model. A website can be used to diversify into specific web-based HIGH
products, for example, data for download.
There are a variety of business risks specific to a company involved in e-commerce, which will exist to
a greater or lesser degree depending on the extent of involvement.
• Risk of non-compliance with taxation, legal and other regulatory issues
• Contractual issues arising: are legally binding agreements formed over the internet?
• Risk of technological failure (crashes) resulting in business interruption
• Impact of technology on going concern assumption, extent of risk of business failure
• Loss of transaction integrity, which may be compounded by the lack of sufficient audit trail
• Security risks, such as virus attacks and the risk of frauds by customers and employees
• Improper accounting policies in respect of capitalisation of costs such as website development
costs, misunderstanding of complex contractual arrangements, title transfer risks, translation of
foreign currency, allowances for warranties and returns, and revenue recognition issues
• Overreliance on e-commerce when placing significant business systems on the internet
Many of these issues have implications for the statutory audit and these are discussed in detail in the
next section.
An entity that uses e-commerce must address the business risks arising as a result by implementing
appropriate security infrastructure and related controls to ensure that the identity of customers and
suppliers can be verified, the integrity of transactions can be ensured, agreement on terms of trade
can be obtained, and payment from customers is obtained and privacy and information protection
protocols are established.
In its paper Across Jurisdictions in E-commerce, the ICAEW IT Faculty states that an e-trader must
ensure that it:
• displays and uses accurate information electronically;
• complies with relevant regulations and laws;
• intentionally trades only with specific geographical markets and customers;
• has contracts to facilitate effective transactions;
• monitors its contract process;
• keeps audit trails;
• creates and maintains appropriate levels of security; and
HB2021

• takes appropriate insurance cover.
10.3 Considerations for auditors

With the withdrawal by IAASB of IAPS 1013, Electronic Commerce – Effect on the Audit of Financial
Statements, there is currently no specific guidance on the special considerations for auditors who are
undertaking audits of companies that use e-commerce. The logic is that, given the prevalence of e-
commerce, this should no longer be viewed as a separate specialist audit area, but one to which the
principles of any statutory audit should extend.
However, the following practical points are still relevant.
First, the auditor needs to consider whether the staff assigned to the audit have appropriate IT and
internet business knowledge to carry out the audit. The auditor must also ensure that they have
sufficient knowledge of the client’s business in accordance with ISA (UK) 315 (Revised July 2020),
Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement. In particular, the auditor must consider
the following:
• The entity’s business activities and industry
• The entity’s e-commerce strategy
• The extent of the entity’s e-commerce activities
• The entity’s outsourcing arrangements
Internal controls can be used to mitigate many of the risks associated with e-commerce. The auditor
has to consider the control environment, information and communication systems and control
procedures in accordance with the requirements of ISA 315. There may be situations (such as the use
of highly automated ecommerce systems, high transaction volumes, lack of electronic evidence)
when the auditor would have to use tests of control as well as substantive procedures to render audit
risk to an acceptably low level. In these situations, CAATs could be used. (Internal controls and CAATs
will be covered in further detail in Chapter 7.)
When auditing an entity that uses e-commerce, the auditor must consider in particular the issues of
security, transaction integrity and process alignment.
Cyber security
The auditor should consider the following:
• The use of firewalls and virus protection software
• The effective use of encryption
• Controls over the development and implementation of systems used to support e-commerce
activities
• Whether security controls already in place remain effective as new technologies become
available
• Whether the control environment supports the control procedures implemented
Transaction integrity
The auditor must consider the completeness, accuracy, timeliness and authorisation of the
information provided for recording and processing in the financial records, by carrying out
procedures to evaluate the reliability of the systems used for capturing and processing the
information.
Process alignment
This is the way the IT systems used by the entity are integrated with one another to operate
effectively as one system. Many websites are not automatically integrated with the internal systems of
the entity, such as its accounting system and inventory management system, and this may affect such
issues as the completeness and accuracy of transaction processing, the timing of recognition of
sales, purchases and other transactions, and the identification and recording of disputed
transactions.
HB2021

11 Professional scepticism in the audit fieldwork
stage
Section overview
We looked at professional scepticism in Chapter 5, in the context of audit planning. Professional

scepticism is central throughout the audit process, and therefore must remain at the top of the
agenda as the auditor gathers audit evidence and documents their work.
Ongoing global financial instability has increased the risk of misstatements. The risks centre
particularly around judgemental areas where there may be no clear ‘right answer’, where the exercise
of professional scepticism is more important than ever.
The areas of particular risk today include the following:
(a) Fraud: Consideration should be given to fraud at audit engagement team meetings. Fraud must
be considered, regardless of how well the auditor knows the client.
(b) Going concern: Smaller entities often lack detailed management information (for example, profit
forecasts), so the auditor needs to consider a broader range of audit evidence. The client’s
specific circumstances and the challenges the business faces must be documented, along with
the conclusions reached.
(c) Asset impairment: The recent financial crisis has affected basic assumptions – for example, the
expected future cash flows from long-term non-financial assets such as goodwill, plant and
equipment and intangible assets. Where the audit client has non-financial assets located in, or
related to, struggling economies, the value of such assets should be actively challenged. Where
assets have been impaired, management’s assumptions behind the impairment calculation also
need to be scrutinised.
(d) Valuation of receivables and revenue recognition: Besides the likely impact of fraud on revenue
recognition, the liquidity problems faced by companies and governmental organisations mean
that bad debt allowances must be considered. Revenue should be recognised only when it is
probable that future economic benefits will flow to the entity.
Worked example: Building professional scepticism into audit methodology

Audit firms are faced with the tricky task of building the exercise of professional scepticism into their
audit methodology. How does one effectively instil a ‘state of mind’ into a standardised process
consistently applied by hundreds upon thousands of individual staff members? Let’s look at a real-life
example.
One international audit firm does this, partly, by including instructions and reminders about
exercising professional scepticism into its audit working paper templates. For example, the
walkthrough of internal controls template includes the following instructions:
”Our inquiries during the walkthrough should include questions that could help to identify the abuse
of controls or indicators of fraud. For example, our follow-up questions might include asking
personnel what they do when they encounter errors, the types of errors they encounter, what
happened as a result of finding errors, and how the errors were resolved. We might also ask the
personnel whether they have ever been asked to override processes or controls, and to describe the
situation, why it occurred, and what happened.”
The working paper template also includes a checklist at the end, which audit staff are required to
initial and date in order to indicate that they have addressed each of the requirements. An excerpt is
reproduced below:
Initials and date
We inquired of the Company personnel about their understanding of

what was required by the Company’s prescribed procedures and controls
to determine whether the processing procedures are performed as
HB2021

Initials and date
originally intended and on a timely basis.
We were alert to exceptions in the Company’s procedures and controls.
Our inquiries of Company personnel included follow-up questions that

help to identify the abuse of controls or indicators of fraud.
Requirement
Discuss the following with your peers:
(1) In what ways does this approach help to ensure professional scepticism is exercised in all audits?
(2) In what ways might the impact of this approach be limited?
(3) What other more effective methods can you think of to ensure that audit team members exercise
professional scepticism when performing audit procedures?
Solution
The ICAEW Audit and Assurance Faculty released a video in 2011 on professional scepticism and
other key audit issues (www.icaew.com/en/technical/audit-and-assurance/professional-scepticism).
The video usefully mentioned some questions which auditors should bear in mind as they perform
audit fieldwork:
• Does the reporting reflect the substance of what has happened?
• Does it make sense?
• Are we focusing on the things that are there but missing the things that are not there – but should
be?
• Are there limitations on the scope of our procedures?
• Are management’s assumptions and forecasts appropriate?
• Are the assumptions still appropriate given the changing economy?
• What evidence is there besides what management has provided to us?
• Is the evidence contradictory?
In recent years, audit inspections have regularly pointed to the lack of scepticism in the performance
of audits. Two key points emerge from these audit inspection reports:
• Understanding the assumptions made is not enough: Simply finding out what the client has done
is not the same as auditing it. The auditor must challenge the assumptions and understand how
they affect the client’s conclusions.
• The exercise of professional scepticism must be documented: Often, judgements were made
demonstrating appropriate scepticism – perhaps resulting from long conversations with the client
– but only the conclusion is documented, with little evidence of the process.
The process of documenting audit evidence and counter-evidence in itself can often help to identify
things that don’t make sense.
The following example is adapted from the transcript of the ICAEW Audit and Assurance faculty’s
video on professional scepticism. It illustrates in a helpful way what is meant by documenting the
exercise of professional scepticism.
Context example: Documenting professional scepticism

Ben is an audit senior. In the process of auditing the client’s calculation for the impairment of
accounts receivable, he identified that the discount rate used seemed out of line. He consulted
Sophie, the audit manager, and she agreed that the discount rate appears inappropriate.
Ben then asked the client to explain how the discount rate had been calculated. In the course of the
client’s explanation, it became clear that the discount rate had been based on an incorrect
assumption. After two hours of discussions, the client understood the error and agreed to revise the
impairment calculation and adjust the financial statements accordingly.
HB2021

Ben audited the revised impairment calculation and put it on the audit file. However, simply
documenting the revised calculation would give no indication of the audit work that had been
carried out earlier, nor would it show that professional scepticism had been exercised.
In order for the documentation to be complete, Ben should include a file note to explain the
following:
• What issues were discussed with the client
• What the client said
• What evidence was offered
• What questions he then asked
• What further information was provided
• How he verified the information
• The final conclusion
11.1 Discussion among the engagement team

ISA (UK) 240 specifically requires the audit engagement team to have discussions around the
susceptibility of the financial statements to fraud. Such a discussion should focus on how, and where,
material misstatements due to fraud may occur.
Such discussions will facilitate:
• the sharing of insight by the more experienced members of the audit team into how to identify
fraud risks;
• the consideration of an appropriate response to fraud risks, including determining who will
conduct certain audit procedures; and
• the sharing of results from audit procedures with the rest of the audit team, and determining how
any allegations of fraud that come to the auditor’s attention will be dealt with.
It is the audit engagement partner’s responsibility to decide which of the matters discussed are to be
communicated to those team members who are not involved in the discussion.
11.2 Impact of use of audit data analytics

The use of audit data analytics provides both opportunities and threats to professional scepticism. It
can be argued that the availability of data at a more granular level should provide the auditor with a
better understanding of the entity and its environment enhancing the auditor’s ability to apply
professional scepticism. In addition the increased use of technology may reduce unintentional bias in
audit procedures.
However care must be taken that confidence in the software is not absolute. Auditors must not
believe that the results produced by data analytics tools are infallible. Professional judgement cannot
be replaced by data analytics tools.
12 Further guidance
Section overview
This section covers a number of topics which have been dealt with in detail in your earlier studies. A
brief reminder of the key points is provided below.
12.1 External confirmation

12.1.1 Introduction
You have covered the basic audit of receivables and cash and bank in your Assurance studies. This
Appendix revisits this topic in the context of ISA (UK) 505, External Confirmations. The standard sets
HB2021

out guidance on how a confirmation should be carried out and, although it does not give a list of
examples, the principles could be applied to confirmations such as:
• Bank balances and other information from bankers
• Accounts receivable balances
• Inventories held by third parties
• Property deeds held by lawyers
• Loans from lenders
• Accounts payable balances
High profile financial failures such as Barings and Parmalat in Europe heightened awareness of the
use and reliability of external confirmations as audit evidence. Accordingly, some regulatory
authorities in major jurisdictions around the world called for more rigorous requirements pertaining
to the use of confirmations.
The major issue to be dealt with in the revision of this standard during the Clarity Project was to seek
a solution that achieved a balance between the conflicting circumstances in which regulators and
others have been demanding increasing prescription in the use of confirmations, and the anecdotal
evidence from practitioners that responses to confirmation requests may be unreliable or
unobtainable.
ISA (UK) 505 refers to the guidance on evidence from ISA (UK) 500, Audit Evidence, and the specific
requirement, now in ISA (UK) 330 (Revised July 2017), The Auditor’s Responses to Assessed Risks, to
consider, for each material class of transactions, account balance and disclosure, whether external
confirmation procedures are to be performed as substantive procedures.
12.1.2 Requirements of ISA (UK) 505
Procedures
The auditor maintains control over the confirmation requests, including:
• determining the information to be requested;
• selecting the confirming party;
• designing the confirmation requests, including ensuring that they are correctly addressed and
contain return information for replies to be sent directly to the auditor; and
• sending the requests (and second requests, if needed).
Management refusal
If management refuses to allow a confirmation request to be sent, the auditor shall do the following:
• Enquire as to the reason, and seek evidence as to their validity. (The risk here is that management
may claim that the confirmation may cause problems in the context of disputes or litigation, but
the auditor must remain sceptical and consider the possibility that this may be an attempt to deny
access to evidence that might indicate the existence of fraud.)
• Evaluate the implications of refusal on the risk assessment.
• Perform alternative procedures.
Results
There is always a risk that responses may be intercepted, altered or be in some other way fraudulent.
The auditor must be alert to any factors that suggest there is any doubt about the reliability of the
responses, such as:
• it was received by the auditor indirectly (for example, was received by the client entity and passed
on to the auditor); or
• it appeared not to come from the originally intended confirming party.
In the case of non-responses, the auditor must obtain alternative evidence, the form and nature of
which will be affected by the account and the assertion in question.
Evaluating the evidence

The auditor must evaluate whether the confirmation results provide relevant and reliable audit
evidence or whether further audit evidence is necessary.
HB2021

12.1.3 Confirmation of accounts receivable
Objectives of confirmation
ISA (UK) 505 is relevant to confirmation of accounts receivable. This section recaps the practical
application of the standard. The verification of trade accounts receivable by direct communication is
a normal means of providing audit evidence to satisfy the objective of checking whether customers
exist and owe bona fide amounts to the company (existence and rights and obligations).
Confirmation will produce a written statement from each respondent that the amount owed at the
date of the confirmation is correct. This is, prima facie, reliable audit evidence, being from an
independent source and in ‘documentary’ form. The confirmation of accounts receivable on a test
basis should not be regarded as replacing other normal audit checks, such as the in-depth testing of
sales transactions, but the results may influence the scope of such tests.
Timing
Ideally the confirmation should take place immediately after the year end and hence cover the year
end balances to be included in the statement of financial position. However, time constraints may
make it impossible to achieve this ideal.
In these circumstances it may be acceptable to carry out the confirmation before the year end
provided that confirmation is no more than three months before the yearend and internal controls
are strong.
Client’s mandate
Confirmation is essentially an act of the client, who alone can authorise third parties to divulge
information to the auditors.
The ISA outlines what the auditors’ response should be when management refuse permission for the
auditors to contact third parties for evidence.
The auditor must:
• enquire as to management’s reasons and seek supporting evidence;
• evaluate the implications on the auditor’s assessment of the risks of material misstatement,
including fraud;
• perform alternative audit procedures; and
• consider the implications for the audit opinion.
Positive vs negative confirmation

When confirmation is undertaken the method of requesting information from the customer may be
either ‘positive’ or ‘negative’.
• Under the positive method the customer is requested to confirm the accuracy of the balance
shown or state in what respect they are in disagreement.
• Under the negative method the customer is requested to reply if the amount stated is disputed.
The positive method is generally preferable, as it is designed to encourage definite replies from
those contacted.
The negative method may be used if the client has good internal control, with a large number of
small accounts. In some circumstances, say where there is a small number of large accounts and a
large number of small accounts, a combination of both methods, as noted above, may be
appropriate.
Sample selection
Auditors will normally only contact a sample of receivables balances. If this sample is to yield a
meaningful result it must be based on a complete list of all debtors. In addition, when constructing
the sample, the following classes of account should receive special attention:
• Old unpaid accounts
• Accounts written off during the period under review
• Accounts with credit balances
• Accounts settled by round sum payments
Similarly, the following should not be overlooked.
HB2021

• Accounts with nil balances
• Accounts which have been paid by the date of the examination:
Follow up procedures
Auditors must follow up customer disagreements and failure by customers to respond.
Auditors will have to carry out further work in relation to those debtors who:
• disagree with the balance stated (positive and negative confirmation); or
• do not respond (positive confirmation only).
In the case of disagreements, the customer response should have identified specific amounts which
are disputed.
Reasons for disagreements
There is a dispute between the client and the customer. The reasons for the dispute would have to
be identified, and provision made if appropriate against the debt.
Cut-off problems exist, because the client records the following year’s sales in the current year or
because goods returned by the customer in the current year are not recorded in the current year.
Cut-off testing may have to be extended.
The customer may have sent the monies before the yearend, but the monies were not recorded by
the client as receipts until after the yearend. Detailed cut-off work may be required on receipts.
Monies received may have been posted to the wrong account or a cash in transit account.
Auditors should check if there is evidence of other mis-posting. If the monies have been posted to
a cash in transit account, auditors should ensure this account has been cleared promptly.
Customers who are also suppliers may net off balances owed and owing. Auditors should check
that this is allowed.
Teeming and lading, stealing monies and incorrectly posting other receipts so that no particular
customer is seriously in debt is a fraud that can arise in this area. If auditors suspect teeming and
lading has occurred, detailed testing will be required on cash receipts, particularly on prompt
posting of cash receipts.
When the positive request method is used the auditors must follow up by all practicable means
those debtors who fail to respond. Second requests should be sent out in the event of no reply
being received within two or three weeks and if necessary this may be followed by telephoning the
customer, with the client’s permission.
After two, or even three, attempts to obtain confirmation, a list of the outstanding items will normally
be passed to a responsible company official, preferably independent of the sales accounting
department, who will arrange for them to be investigated.
Additional procedures where confirmation is carried out before yearend

The auditors will need to carry out the following procedures where their confirmation is carried out
before the yearend.
• Review and reconcile entries on the sales ledger control account for the intervening period.
• Verify sales entries from the control account by checking sales day book entries, copy sales
invoices and despatch notes.
• Check that appropriate credit entries have been made for goods returned notes and other
evidence of returns/allowances to the sales ledger control account.
• Select a sample from the cash received records and ensure that receipts have been credited to
the control account.
• Review the list of balances at the confirmation date and year end and investigate any unexpected
movements or lack of them (it may be prudent to send further confirmation requests at the year
end to material debtors where review results are unsatisfactory).
• Carry out analytical procedures, comparing receivables ratios at the confirmation date and
yearend.
HB2021

Evaluation and conclusions
All confirmations, regardless of timing, must be properly recorded and evaluated. All balance
disagreements and nonreplies must be followed up and their effect on total receivables evaluated.
Differences arising that merely represent invoices or cash in transit (normal timing differences)
generally do not require adjustment, but disputed amounts, and errors by the client, may indicate
that further substantive work is necessary to determine whether material adjustments are required.
12.1.4 Bank reports for audit purposes
Planning
The auditors should decide from which bank or banks to request confirmation, having regard to the
risks in relation to relevant financial statement assertions including bank-related information to be
disclosed in notes.
The auditor may be able to identify what banking relationships are in place by reviewing annual
facilities letters from the entity’s banks. If no such letters are available, the auditor will ask the entity’s
management to provide the information.
Given the importance of cash to an entity’s business and its susceptibility to fraud, the auditor will
usually conclude that in the absence of a bank report it will not be possible to obtain sufficient,
appropriate audit evidence from other sources.
In planning the submission of the request, the auditor will:
• determine the date by which the bank report is needed;
• determine whether confirmation is needed of additional information, such as trade finance
transactions and balances; and
• check that the bank has been given valid authority to disclose information to the auditor.
Preparation and despatch of requests and receipt of replies

Control over the content and despatch of confirmation requests is the responsibility of the auditors.
However, banks require the explicit written authority of their customers to disclose information
requested. Where possible this should take the form of an ongoing authority. Auditors need to satisfy
themselves that an authority is in place and up to date. Replies should be returned directly to the
auditors and, to facilitate such a reply, a pre-addressed envelope should be enclosed with the
request.
Content of confirmation requests

The form and content of a confirmation request letter will depend on the purpose for which it is
required and on local practices.
The most commonly requested information is in respect of balances due to or from the client entity
on current, deposit, loan and other accounts. The request letter should provide the account
description number and the type of currency for the account.
It may also be advisable to request information about nil balances on accounts, and accounts which
were closed in the 12 months before the chosen confirmation date. The client entity may ask for
confirmation not only of the balances on accounts but also, where it may be helpful, other
information, such as the maturity and interest terms on loans and overdrafts, unused facilities, lines of
credit/standby facilities, any offset or other rights or encumbrances, and details of any collateral
given or received.
The client entity and its auditors are likely to request confirmation of contingent liabilities, such as
those arising on guarantees, comfort letter, bills and so on.
Banks often hold securities and other items in safe custody on behalf of customers. A request letter
may thus ask for confirmation of such items held by the bank.
The procedure is simple but important.
(a) The banks will require explicit written authority from their client to disclose the information
requested.
(b) The auditors’ request must refer to the client’s letter of authority and the date thereof.
Alternatively it may be countersigned by the client or it may be accompanied by a specific letter
of authority.
(c) In the case of joint accounts, letters of authority signed by all parties will be necessary.
HB2021

(d) Such letters of authority may either give permission to the bank to disclose information for a
specific request or grant permission for an indeterminate length of time.
(e) Where practicable the request should reach the bank at least one month in advance of the
client’s yearend. It is advisable to allow more time at busy periods, such as those covering
December and March year ends. Fast track requests may be made where reporting deadlines
are tight. The request should state both the year-end date and the date of the authority to
disclose.
(f) The auditors should themselves check that the bank response covers all the information in the
standard and other responses.
ISA (UK) 330 (Revised July 2017) (Annexure) and ISA (UK) 505 (para. A4) both discuss how auditors
can find pro-forma templates which have been agreed with the British Bankers’ Association when
obtaining bank confirmations in the UK.
12.2 Sampling
Definition
Audit sampling: Defined by ISA (UK) 530 Audit Sampling as:
“The application of audit procedures to less than 100% of items within a population of audit
relevance such that all sampling units have a chance of selection in order to provide the auditor with
a reasonable basis on which to draw conclusions about the entire population.”
12.2.1 Nature of sampling

The audit involves a search for evidence, and sampling is, in part, a method of assessing the quantity
and quality of that evidence. In so doing, an assessment needs to be made of an acceptable level of
sampling risk ie, the risk that the sample will be unrepresentative of the population.
Sampling can be used to extract evidence for ‘tests of details’ or for ‘tests of controls’.
The stages of sampling involve the following:
(a) Sample design and selection
(b) Testing
(c) Evaluation
However, most research suggests that the proportion of evidence that is derived from sampling,
particularly in respect of tests of details, has declined in recent years in favour of other sources of
evidence. Typically, a small sample of items may be taken by many audit firms for tests of details,
where there are no special circumstances – although the precise number of items tested tends to
vary significantly.
12.2.2 Sample design

Is it necessary? – While auditing standards require some substantive testing, they do not require tests
of detail, as analytical procedures alone may be sufficient in some circumstances.
Sample objectives – It is initially necessary to determine the purpose of the sample. This is likely to be
different according to whether the sample is for tests of control or for tests of detail. Even in the latter
case, objectives of assessing completeness, accuracy or validity will influence sample objectives.
Population – The selection of an appropriate population from which to sample is important. Consider
the following.
• Is the population homogeneous? For example, if larger purchases are subject to more internal
controls than smaller purchases, then all purchase transactions are not subject to the same risk
and may need to be stratified into different samples.
• What is the level of risk expected in the population?
• If testing for understatement (completeness/omission) then it is important to sample from the
population making up the initial record then tracing to the final record.
• If testing for overstatement (completeness/accuracy/validity) then it is important to select the
sample from the population making up the final record then tracing to the initial record.
HB2021

• Directional testing would not test all items for both over- and understatement. Populations which
consist of debits would only be tested for overstatement and credits only tested for
understatement. Given the duality of double entry, this means that any one transaction is tested
for misstatement.
12.2.3 Types of sampling

ISA (UK) 530 permits either of the two basic methods of sampling:
• Statistical sampling
• Judgement sampling
All types of sampling require the exercise of judgement. However, judgement sampling is so called
as the sample size and selection are based on the auditor’s professional judgement rather than any
statistical basis.
The advantages of statistical sampling include the following.
• It provides unbiased sample selection.
• Sample sizes can be based upon probability theory and can more easily be justified in court.
• It provides greater consistency of judgement between different auditors in similar circumstances.
• Evaluation of results can more validly be extrapolated into the population.
Disadvantages include the following.
• Excessive sample sizes can arise.
• Significant judgement in assessing the level of assurance required from sampling (relative to
other evidence) is still needed, such that its statistical validity is questionable.
Statistical sampling is now less widely used than was once the case.
Methods of sampling include the following.
Random sampling – Each item in the population has an equal chance of selection.
Systematic/Interval sampling – Takes a random start and selects every nth item thereafter (ie, at a
constant interval). It is valid if errors are randomly distributed. The interval may be numerical (eg,
order numbers) or by value – monetary unit sampling (ie, every nth £ of purchases).
Block/cluster sampling – The selection of a group of transactions occurring together (eg, a test of all
sales in the month of June). This is unlikely to be representative of the population, which damages its
statistical validity. It is, however, normally quicker to extract the data.
Haphazard selection – Items are selected without following a structured technique. Care must be
taken with respect to sample selection bias and completeness of population. It may be appropriate
where client records are poorly kept. Haphazard selection is not appropriate when using statistical
sampling.
12.2.4 Sample size

Auditors need to acquire sufficient evidence and this means that determining sample size is
important. Too few items incur undue sampling risk and too many items incur unnecessary costs.
Factors affecting sample size with respect to tests of detail include the following.
• Level of assurance required from sampling – If other sources of evidence are available and
indicate low inherent and control risk then sampling may be reduced.
• Tolerable misstatement or tolerable deviation rate – When testing substantively, this is the
maximum error the auditor is willing to accept in the sample – which is based on the performance
materiality level, but could be set lower for a specific assertion. When tests of controls are being
carried out, this is the number of deviations in the sample the auditor is willing to accept without
changing the initial assessment of control risk.
• Expected misstatement or expected deviation rate – This is the expected level of error and
deviation in the sample.
• Variability of the population – This is not relevant to sampling for tests of control but increased
variability will increase sample sizes for substantive tests.
• The size of the population – Other than for very small populations, the size of the population has a
minimal effect on sample sizes.
Appendix 1 and 2 to ISA (UK) 530 contain useful summaries of the factors influencing sample sizes.
HB2021

12.2.5 Sample evaluation
For tests of details the auditor is required to project misstatements found.
The misstatements and deviations discovered in the sample need to be extrapolated into the
population in order to draw conclusions about whether the population is materially misstated. (In
order to do this appropriately it is important that the sample was representative of the population
from which it was selected.) Where the estimated misstatement exceeds the tolerable misstatement
then additional evidence may be needed.
Consider also the following.
• While management may adjust for misstatements actually discovered, consideration needs to be
given to misstatements in unsampled items and whether any global adjustment is appropriate.
• There may be patterns or trends in the misstatements discovered.
• There may be a pattern from previous years, which would add additional insight into the extent of
the misstatement in the population.
• Size and incidence of misstatements discovered eg, a few large misstatements or many small
misstatements.
• Nature of the misstatements. Are they factual or are they perceived errors of judgement/opinion?
• Whether they are fraudulent.
• Whether a misstatement relates to the statement of financial position or to the statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income.
For tests of controls an unexpectedly high sample deviation rate may lead to an increase in the
assessed risk of material misstatement unless further audit evidence substantiating the initial
assessment is obtained.
Note: Future improvements in technology and the use of audit data analytics may enable auditors to
perform testing on 100% of a population, and to monitor transactions on a more frequent or even
continuous basis(although currently the ability of data analytics to perform 100% testing is restricted
to very limited types of information and audit assertions with respect to that information)
12.3 Directional testing

Directional testing is a method of discovering errors and omissions in financial statements.
Directional testing has been discussed in your previous auditing studies. It is a method of
undertaking detailed substantive testing. Substantive testing seeks to discover errors and omissions,
and the discovery of these will depend on the direction of the test.
Broadly speaking, substantive procedures can be said to fall into two categories:
• Tests to discover errors (resulting in over- or understatement)
• Tests to discover omissions (resulting in understatement)
12.3.1 Tests designed to discover errors
These tests will start with sampling the final accounting records in which the transactions are
recorded and check from the entries to supporting documents or other evidence. Such tests should
primarily detect any overstatement but also note any understatement through causes other than
omission.
12.3.2 Tests designed to discover omissions

These tests must start from outside the accounting records and then check to those records.
Understatements through omission will never be revealed if the auditor starts with the initial
recording of a transaction (eg, an order form) and traces it through the various documents and
accounts into the financial statements. There would clearly be no chance of selecting items that have
been omitted if sampling was taken from the final accounts.
For most systems auditors would include tests designed to discover both errors and omissions. The
type of test, and direction of the test, should be recognised before selecting the test sample. If the
sample which tested the accuracy and validity of the sales ledger were chosen from a file of sales
invoices then it would not necessarily substantiate the fact that there were no errors in the sales
ledger. The approach known as ‘directional testing’ applies this testing discipline.
HB2021

12.3.3 Directional testing and double entry
The concept of directional testing derives from the principle of double entry bookkeeping, in that for
every debit there is a corresponding credit (assuming that the double entry is complete and that the
accounting records balance). Therefore, any misstatement of a debit entry will result in either a
corresponding misstatement of a credit entry or a misstatement in the opposite direction of another
debit entry.
By designing audit tests carefully the auditors are able to use this principle in drawing audit
conclusions, not only about the debit or credit entries that they have directly tested but also about
the corresponding credit or debit entries that are necessary to balance the books. Tests are therefore
designed in the following way.
Test item Example
Test debit items (expenditure or If a non-current asset entry in the nominal ledger of £1,000
assets) for overstatement by is selected, it would be overstated if it should have been
selecting debit entries recorded in recorded at anything less than £1,000 or if the company did
the nominal ledger and checking not own it, or indeed if it did not exist (eg, it had been sold
value, existence and ownership or the amount of £1,000 in fact represented a revenue
expense).
Test credit items (income or Select a goods despatched note and check that the
liabilities) for understatement by resultant sale has been recorded in the nominal ledger
selecting items from appropriate sales account. Sales would be understated if the nominal
sources independent of the ledger did not reflect the transaction at all (completeness)
nominal ledger and ensuring that or reflected it at less than full value (say if goods valued at
they result in the correct nominal £1,000 were recorded in the sales account at £900, there
ledger entry would be an understatement of £100).
In a ledger account for (say) an asset, the balance would be a debit, but there may be both debit and
credit entries in the account. In using directional testing on this asset account balance, the debit
entries would be tested for overstatement and the credit entries for understatement. The reason is
that the understatement of a credit entry would lead to the overstatement of the asset’s debit
balance on the account, the verification of which is the primary purpose of the test.
The matrix set out below demonstrates how directional testing is applied to give assurance on all
account areas in the financial statements.
Primary test also gives comfort on
Type of account Purpose of primary test Assets Liabilities Income Expenses
Assets Overstatement (O) U O O U
Liabilities Understatement (U) U O O U
Income Understatement (U) U O O U
Expense Overstatement (O) U O O U
A test for the overstatement of an asset simultaneously gives comfort on understatement of other
assets, overstatement of liabilities, overstatement of income and understatement of expenses.
HB2021

Summary
Audit risk
Should it be there?
Value? Financial statement
Any more? assertions
Disclosure?
Audit evidence
Sufficient Appropriate
Relevant Reliable
Controls
Sources of
Test of details
confidence
Analytical procedures
Client
Sources of
Third party
evidence
Auditor
Objective
Procedures Recording Method
Results
Conclusion
Direction
Statistical
Sampling
Judgemental
HB2021

1. Can you remember the assertions and how they help you to generate audit evidence?
2. Are you able to explain what sufficient, appropriate audit evidence means and what you
may need to do to make sure that you have it?
3. Can you distinguish between tests of control, substantive analytical procedures and tests
of detail?
4. Do you know how to use the following audit procedures correctly: inquiry; observation;
inspection; recalculation; reperformance; and external confirmation?
5. Can you explain the various uses of analytical procedures throughout the audit and do you
understand how different techniques can be used to generate audit evidence?
6. Do you know what the terms ‘estimation uncertainty’ and ‘management bias’ mean in the
context of the audit of accounting estimates?
7. Can you explain how an initial audit engagement creates additional problems for auditors
and describe the procedures that the auditor would use to address these problems?
8. What are the problems of working both in a team and with others when conducting an
audit? In the case of the latter, how will you evaluate the competence, capability and
objectivity of others?
9. Can you explain why the introduction of information technology adds extra risk to the
audit and how auditors address these risks?
10. Can you suggest areas of the audit where increased levels of professional scepticism may
be particularly important?
11. Can you explain how the auditor makes use of external confirmations, sampling
techniques and directional testing during the audit?
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Strombolix plc The scenario includes some fairly challenging situations that will require a
combination of approaches to generate the necessary audit evidence. This
will definitely help you to consider the evidence required in a given set of
circumstances.
TrueBlue Ltd Although this is quite a short scenario, there is still plenty of opportunity to
deploy your analytical procedures and professional scepticism skills.
HB2021

Maykem You will need to identify potential shortcomings in best practice by

evaluating the audit procedures that have been completed by the audit
assistant. This will therefore help you learn what good audit procedures
should look like.
Dormro An integrated scenario question that requires the identification of

additional audit procedures necessary to form an opinion on the group
Tydaway An opportunity to practise writing suitable audit procedures for the audit
of a specific part of the financial statements, in this case, inventory.
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 ISA 210
• Terms of audit engagements – ISA 210.9-12
2 ISA 402
• Definition – ISA 402.8
• Understanding the entity – ISA 402.9–.14
• Audit procedures for obtaining audit evidence – ISA 402.15–.16
• Reference in audit reports – ISA 402.20–.22
3 ISA 315
• List of audit assertions – ISA 315.A190
4 ISA 500
• Sufficient and appropriate audit evidence – ISA 500.A1–.A6
• Audit procedures for obtaining audit evidence – ISA 500.A10–.A25
• Evidence from information produced by a management’s expert – ISA 500.A34–.A48
5 ISA 501
• Procedures regarding litigation and claims – ISA 501.9–.12, .A17–.A25
6 ISA 505
• Considerations in obtaining external confirmation evidence – ISA 505.2–.3
• External confirmation procedures – ISA 505.7–.16
7 ISA 510
• Need to obtain audit evidence – ISA 510.3
• Audit procedures – ISA 510.5–.9
• Audit conclusions and reporting –ISA 510.10–.13
8 ISA 520
• Use of analytical procedures as substantive procedures – ISA 520.5, A4–.A16
• Analytical procedures when forming an overall conclusion – ISA520.6, A17–A19
9 ISA 530
• Definitions – ISA 530.5
• Design of the sample – ISA 530.A4–.A9
• Sample size – ISA 530.A10–.A13, Appendix 2
• Evaluation of sample results – ISA 530.A21–.A23
10 ISA 540
• Examples of accounting estimates – ISA 540.A1
• Risk assessment procedures – ISA 540.13–15
• Responses to assessed risks of material misstatement – ISA 540.18–30
• Evaluation of results of audit procedures – ISA 540.33–36
HB2021

11 ISA 550
• Definitions – ISA 550.10
• Risk assessment procedures – ISA 550.11–17
• Audit procedures – ISA 550.20–.24
• Written representations and reporting – ISA 550.26–.27
12 ISA 610
• Evaluating the internal audit function – ISA 610.15–.16
• Using the work of internal audit – ISA 610.21–.25
13 ISA 620
• Determining the need to use the work of an auditor’s expert – ISA 620.7
• Competence, capabilities and objectivity of the auditor’s expert – ISA 620.9, A14–A20
• Agreeing the scope of the auditor’s expert’s work – ISA 620.11
• Evaluating the work of the auditor’s expert – ISA 620.12–.13
• Reference in audit report – ISA 620.14–.15
• Documentation – ISA 620.15–1
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Strombolix plc
Strombolix plc (Strombolix) is a listed company which manufactures and retails paints and other
decorating products. You are the senior in charge of the audit of Strombolix for the year ending 30
June 20X2, which is currently in progress.
Background information provided
The company owns a large factory manufacturing paints. These paints are sold retail through
Strombolix’s six superstores and they are also sold wholesale to other DIY retailers. In addition, the
six superstores sell a range of other products from different suppliers. The superstores are each
separate divisions, but there are no subsidiaries.
On 23 July 20X2 a bid was announced by Simban plc (Simban) to acquire the entire ordinary share
capital of Strombolix. The directors of Strombolix are contesting the bid and are anxious to publish
the financial statements to indicate that the company is more profitable than indicated by the Simban
offer.
As a result of the bid your audit partner has sent you the following memorandum.
To: A Senior
From: Charles Church (partner)
Date: 24 July 20X2
Subject: Strombolix audit
As you will be aware, Simban made a bid for Strombolix yesterday and this increases the
significance of the financial statements that we are currently auditing.
I am having a preliminary meeting with the finance director on 1 August to discuss the conduct of
the audit. I would like you to prepare notes for me of any audit and financial reporting issues that
have arisen in your work to date that may indicate potential problems. Also include any general
audit concerns you may have arising from the takeover bid.
Let me know what you intend to do about these matters and specify any questions that you would
like me to raise with the finance director.
Further information
The following issues have been reported to you from junior audit staff during the audit to date.
AUDIT ISSUES
(1) There appears to be a significant increase in trade receivables, due to the fact that many
wholesale customers are refusing to pay a total of £50,000 for recent deliveries of a new paint
that appears to decay after only a few months of use. Some of the wholesale customers are
being sued by their own customers for both the cost of the paint and the related labour costs.
No recognition of these events has been made in the draft financial statements.
(2) A special retail offer of ‘3 for 2’ on wallpaper purchased from an outside supplier during the
year has been incorrectly recorded, as the offer was not programmed into the company’s IT
system. The sales assistants were therefore instructed by store managers to read the bar
codes of only two of the three items, and ignore the third ‘free’ item. The wallpaper sells for
£6 per roll and cost £5 per roll from the supplier. A total of 20,000 of these rolls were
processed through the IT system by sales assistants during the year.
The reason for the special offer was that a bonus payment of £90,000 will be due to
Strombolix from the supplier if 40,000 of these rolls of wallpaper are sold by 31 December
20X2. Strombolix has taken 50% of this amount (ie, £45,000) into its draft statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income as revenue for the year to 30 June 20X2.
HB2021

(3) One of the six superstores was opened on 30 May 20X2. The land had been purchased at a
cost of £400,000 on 1 August 20X1, but it was only on 1 September 20X1 that the company
began to prepare an application for planning permission. This was granted and construction
commenced immediately thereafter, being paid for in two progress payments of £1 million
each on 1 December 20X1 and on 1 June 20X2. Construction was completed, and the store
opened, on 30 May 20X2. All the costs were financed by borrowing at 8% per annum and all
the interest incurred up to 30 June 20X2 has been capitalised as part of the cost of the non-
current asset in the draft financial statements. There was no interest earned on surplus funds
from this loan.
Requirement
Draft the notes required by Charles Church’s memorandum.
2 AB Milton Ltd
You are the senior in charge of the audit of AB Milton Ltd for the year ended 31 May 20X1. Details of
AB Milton Ltd and certain other companies are given below.
AB Milton Ltd
A building company formed by Alexander Milton and his brother, Brian.
AB Milton Ltd has issued share capital of 500 ordinary £1 shares, owned as shown below.
Alexander Milton 210 42% Founder and director
Brian Milton 110 22% Founder and director
Catherine Milton (Brian’s wife) 100 20% Company secretary
Diane Hardy 20 4%
Edward Murray 60 12% Director
Edward Murray is a local businessman and a close friend of both Alexander and Brian Milton. He
gave the brothers advice when they set up the company and remains involved through his position
on the board of directors. His own company, Murray Design Ltd, supplies AB Milton Ltd with
stationery and publicity materials.
Diane Hardy is Alexander Milton’s ex-wife. She was given her shares as part of the divorce settlement
and has no active involvement in the management of the company. Alexander’s girlfriend, Fiona
Dyson, is the company’s solicitor. She is responsible for drawing up and reviewing all key building
and other contracts, and frequently attends board meetings so that she can explain the terms of a
particular contract to the directors. Her personal involvement with Alexander started in May 20X1
and, since that time, she has spent increasing amounts of time at the company’s premises.
Cuts and Curls Ltd
A poodle parlour, of which 50% of the issued shares are owned by Diane Hardy and 50% by Gillian
Milton, who is Alexander and Diane’s daughter.
Cuts and Curls operates from premises owned by AB Milton Ltd for which it pays rent at the normal
market rate.
Campbell Milton Roofing Ltd
A roofing company owned 60% by AB Milton Ltd and 40% by Ian Campbell, the managing director.
Campbell Milton Roofing Ltd carries out regular work for AB Milton Ltd and also does roofing work
for local customers. Alexander Milton is a director of Campbell Milton Roofing Ltd and Catherine
Milton is the company secretary. All legal work is performed by Fiona Dyson.
Requirements
2.1 Based on the information given above, identify the potential related party transactions you
expect to encounter during the audit of AB Milton Ltd and summarise, giving your reasons,
what disclosure, if any, will be required in the full statutory accounts.
HB2021

2.2 Prepare notes for a training session for junior staff on how to identify related party transactions.
Your notes should include the following:
(a) A list of possible features which could lead you to investigate a particular transaction to
determine whether it is in fact a related party transaction
(b) A summary of the general audit procedures you would perform to ensure that all material
related party transactions have been identified
3 TrueBlue Ltd
You are planning the audit of TrueBlue Ltd, a company that has experienced a downturn in trading
over recent years. The finance director has provided you with the following information for you to
review before a planning meeting with him.
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income extracts
20X7 20X6 20X5

£ £ £
Revenue 18,944,487 20,588,370 24,536,570
Cost of sales 14,587,254 14,413,543 17,176,922
Gross profit 4,357,233 6,174,827 7,359,648
Advertising and marketing 554,288 206,688 207,377
Legal costs 14,888 2,889 34,668
Electricity 199,488 204,844 206,488
Travel costs 65,833 30,892 53,588
Audit fee 21,000 21,000 20,488
Statement of financial position extracts
20X7 20X6 20X5

£ £ £
Trade receivables 3,477,481 3,553,609 4,089,783
Trade payables 1,056,090 1,027,380 1,164,843
Cost of sales analysis
20X7 20X6 20X5

£ £ £
Purchases 9,183,388 9,246,420 10,483,588
Other direct costs 6,419,410 6,894,300 7,087,148
Inventory movement (1,015,544) (1,727,177) (393,814)
Requirements
3.1 Outline the areas of the financial statements you would discuss with the finance director at
your planning meeting as a result of the analytical procedures that you perform on these
figures, giving your reasons and also set out any further information you would request.
3.2 Explain whether your approach would be different if you had received a tip off that the finance
director has been carrying out a fraud on receipts from receivables and, if it would be different,
outline how it would be different.
3.3 Describe how you approach the audit of receivables as a result of the tip off about the finance
director.
HB2021

4 Tofalco plc
You are an audit senior in the process of carrying out the final audit for the year ended 30 September
20X0 for Tofalco plc, a construction company with business activities across the UK and Ireland.
The following message is left on your answer machine by Paul Sykes, Head of Audit.
“Good morning Jeremy,
Paul Sykes here. Hope all is well with you.
I have left a memo in your mailbox with the items outstanding on the year-end audit of our client
Tofalco plc.
Please prepare a memo showing the appropriate financial reporting treatment for each item in the
financial statements for the year ended 30 September 20X0 and the audit procedures required to
gain assurance in each area.
I am concerned as the directors appear to be unwilling to provide full details of their related parties’
remuneration and seem to be denying access to the company board minutes. They are also refusing
to recognise the obligations required under IAS 37 with respect to environmental costs. Please give
me your opinion on the effects of these non-compliance issues on audit risk and on the form of the
audit report to be issued.
Tofalco plc have also asked that we advise them on the way they should work with Investo Ltd, a
company to which they plan to outsource their investment activities. Tofalco plc wishes to agree on
terms of co-operation that minimise risks of financial loss, fraud and error. Is there any impact on our
audit going forward?
Finally, can you prepare a list of the ethical issues you foresee on this assignment. They would be
helpful to have to hand.
Call me if you have any queries.”
To: Jeremy Wiquad

From: Paul Sykes
Subject: Year-end audit of Tofalco plc – Outstanding points
Construction contracts
Tofalco plc’s largest current project is the construction of a water pipeline under the
Mediterranean Sea. The project commenced late in 20W9 and completion is not expected until
20X6.
By 30 September 20X0, the following figures apply.
£m
Sales value of contract 8,500
Costs incurred to date 400
Estimated future costs 7,000
Sales value of work completed to date 560
The directors do not yet believe that the project is sufficiently far advanced for the outcome to be
assessed with any degree of certainty. The company’s accounting policy is to take attributable
profit on the basis of the sales value of the work completed.
Environmental and other provisions
Tofalco plc has a number of long-term obligations arising from the local laws on the environment.
Tofalco is obligated to dispose of its scrap machinery in a particular way which minimises the
damaging effect on the environment.
The machinery held by Tofalco at the year end has a total carrying amount of £25 million and it is
estimated that the present value of the cost to dispose of these machines will be some £2.5
million.
HB2021

One of Tofalco’s biggest customers, Stirly plc, is refusing to pay a sum of £4 million. No provision
has been created by the company and the reasons are unclear as to why Stirly plc is holding back
payment, with management being vague in their explanations and appearing to be denying
access to the company board minutes.
Assets held for sale
On 1 January 20X0, Tofalco plc committed to selling an owner-occupied building which had a
carrying amount of £2.16 million at that date. The building was available for immediate sale from
that date but the company continued to occupy and use the building until 1 February when the
carrying amount was approximately £2.1 million. The recoverable amount is estimated at £1.7
million. The building has yet to be sold by 30 September 20X0.
Issue of convertible loan stock
On 1 March 20X0, Tofalco plc issued £18 million of convertible loan stock, which is either
redeemable in three years’ time for £20 million, or convertible into 500,000 ordinary £1 shares.
The present values of the cash flows, discounted at the interest rate on a debt instrument with
similar terms except that there is no conversion option, are as follows.
£
Present value of principal 15,902,000
Present value of interest 960,000
16,862,000
Related parties
Tofalco plc purchases significant quantities of raw materials from Sandstone Ltd, a company
whose Finance Director is also a shareholder in Tofalco plc. During the year ended 30 September
20X0 alone, Tofalco plc purchased £230 million worth of raw material from Sandstone Ltd with a
credit payment period of three months. The normal credit period provided within the industry is
two months.
Requirement
Respond to Paul Sykes’s request.
this chapter.
HB2021

Non-current Should it be in the Physically verify Existence

assets accounts at all? Inspect title deeds/invoice/vehicle Rights and
registration documents obligations
Board minutes and other authority
thresholds
Is it included at the Inspect invoices/contracts Accuracy, valuation

right amount? Check depreciation and allocation
Are there any more? Review other accounts for items Completeness
which should be capitalised
Check assets physically verified are
included in the financial
statements
Is it properly Companies Act checklist Classification

disclosed and Presentation
presented?
Receivables Should it be in the Circularisation Existence

accounts at all? After date cash Rights and
Inspect invoices obligations
Is it included at the Inspect ageing analysis Accuracy, valuation

right amount? After date cash and allocation
Are there any more? Conclusion derived from sales Completeness

completeness testing
Cut-off work

presented?
Payables Should it be in the Suppliers’ statement reconciliation Existence

accounts at all? Conclusion derived from Rights and
purchases testing obligations
Payables Is it included at the Suppliers’ statement reconciliation Accuracy, valuation

right amount? and allocation
Are there any more? Unpaid invoices review Completeness

Review payments after year end to
check for omitted liabilities
Cut-off work
Review for obvious omissions of
accruals
Review payables at last year end to
check for omissions this year
HB2021

Review knowledge of major

suppliers to check for omissions

presented?
Inventory Should it be in the Attend inventory check – test from Existence

accounts at all? records to test counts Rights and
Cut-off work obligations
Consider inventory held for third
parties or on consignment
Is it included at the Inspect invoices and other costing Accuracy, valuation

right amount? evidence and allocation
Review for slow-moving or
obsolete items
Evidence of slow-moving or
damaged items from inventory
check
Are there any more? Attend inventory check – test from Completeness
test counts to records
Cut-off work
Consider other locations, inventory
held by third parties on
consignment

presented?

2.1 The relevant financial statement assertions would be as follows.
• Completeness
There is a risk that all share-based payments may not have been recognised in the financial
statements, as the provision of the benefit to the employee may not arise until some point in the
future. For example, in this case the options cannot be exercised until the directors have been
with the company for three years. In accordance with IFRS 2 the service acquired in a share-
based payment should be recognised as received.
• Accuracy
The remuneration expense should reflect the fact that the service received in exchange for the
share-based payment will be received over a period of time ie, three years (see calculation
below). It also needs to be estimated how many of the five directors will remain with the
company and hence how many of the options are likely to vest.
• Accuracy, valuation and allocation
Equity should be increased by the fair value of the options at the grant date (see calculation
below).
HB2021

Remuneration expense this year and equity recognised in respect of the options will be:
(5 × 100,000) × £3/3 years × 4/12 = £166,667
2.2 The relevant financial statement assertions relate to disclosure as follows.
• Classification
Whether the transaction is a related party transaction. 40% would appear to indicate the ability
of Wiggam plc to exert significant influence assuming no other entity has control.
• Completeness
Whether there are any other related party transactions between these two parties and/or
whether there are any additional related party relationships.
• Accuracy
If the disclosure states that the transaction is on an arm’s length basis this must be
substantiated.
2.3 The relevant financial statement assertions are:
• Classification
Whether a bond should be classified as debt or equity. In this case it is a compound instrument.
The liability and equity component will be shown separately.
• Accuracy, valuation and allocation
The liability component should be computed as the present value of the maximum potential
cash flows discounted @ 10% as follows.
Year Cash flow DF @ 10% Net present value

£ £
1 6,000 0.909 5,454
2 106,000 0.826 87,556
Liability 93,010
The residual amount is the equity component (100,000 – 93,010) = £6,990.

3.1 Appropriate – relevance
The relevance of audit evidence should be considered in relation to the overall audit objective
of forming an opinion and reporting on the financial statements. The evidence should allow the
auditor to conclude on the following:
• Statement of financial position items (existence, rights and obligations, completeness,
accuracy, valuation and allocation, classification and presentation)
• Statement of profit or loss items (occurrence, completeness, accuracy, cut-off, classification
and presentation)
The representations by management in respect of the completeness of sales are relevant to the
first of the objectives when gathering evidence on revenue items. Depending on the system
operated by the client and the controls over cash sales there may be no other evidence as to
the completeness of sales.
Appropriate – reliable
Reliability of audit evidence depends on the particular circumstances but the standard offers
three general presumptions:
• Documentary evidence is more reliable than oral evidence.
• Evidence obtained from independent sources outside the entity is more reliable than that
secured solely from within the entity.
• Evidence originated by the auditor by such means as analysis and physical inspection is
more reliable than evidence obtained by others.
HB2021

The oral representations by management would be regarded as relatively unreliable using the
criteria in the standard, as they are oral and internal. In the absence of any external or auditor-
generated evidence, the auditor should ensure that these representations are included in the
letter of representation so that there is at least some documentary evidence to support any
conclusions.
Sufficiency
The auditor needs to obtain sufficient relevant and reliable evidence to form a reasonable basis
for their opinion on the financial statements. Their judgements will be influenced by such
factors as:
• their knowledge of the business and its environment;
• the risk of misstatement; and
• the persuasiveness of the evidence.
The flowcharts prepared by the internal audit department will not be directly relevant to the
auditor’s opinion on individual figures in the financial statements, but rather when the auditor is
following the requirement in ISA 315 to obtain an understanding of the entity’s information
system of recording and processing transactions. The auditor will wish to assess the adequacy
of the system as a basis for the preparation of financial statements so the flowcharts will be
relevant only if they are sufficiently detailed to allow the auditor to carry out this assessment.
The auditor would also wish to make an initial assessment of internal controls at this stage so
the flowcharts will be more relevant if control procedures are specifically identified.
The assessment of how reliable the flowcharts are would depend on the auditor’s overall
assessment of the internal audit department. The factors to be considered would include its
degree of independence, the scope of its work, whether due professional care had been
exercised, the technical competence and the level of resource available to the internal audit
department. This assessment should be documented by the external auditor if they are to make
use of the flowcharts in their audit planning and design of tests.
Sufficiency
Client-prepared flowcharts are not sufficient as a basis for the auditor’s evaluation of the system.
To confirm that the system does operate in the manner described, the auditor should perform
‘walkthrough’ checks, tracing a small number of transactions through the system. There is,
however, no need for the auditor to prepare their own flowcharts if they are satisfied that those
produced by internal audit are accurate.
Year-end suppliers’ statements provide evidence relevant to the auditor’s conclusions on:
• the completeness of payables, as omissions from the purchase ledger listing would be
identified by comparing statements received to that listing;
• the existence of payables recorded in the purchase ledger;
• the fact that the liabilities are properly those of the entity (for example, the statements are
not addressed to, say, the managing director in his own name); and
• the valuation of payables at the year end with respect to cut-off of invoices and credit notes,
and discounts or allowances.
Suppliers’ statements would generally be seen as reliable evidence, being documentary and
from sources external to the entity. If the auditor had doubts as to the reliability of this evidence,
it could be improved by the auditor originating similar evidence by means of a payables
circularisation rather than relying on suppliers’ statements received by the client.
Sufficiency
Suppliers’ statements would generally be seen as reliable evidence, being documentary and
from sources external to the entity. If the auditor had doubts as to the reliability of this evidence,
it could be improved by the auditor originating similar evidence by means of a payables
circularisation rather than relying on suppliers’ statements received by the client.
HB2021

The physical inspection of a non-current asset is clearly relevant to the auditor’s opinion as to
the existence of the asset, and to some extent the completeness of recording of assets; that is,
the auditor can check that all the assets inspected have been recorded. In certain circumstances
evidence relevant to valuation might be obtained; for example, where a client has written down
a building due to impairment in value and the auditor sees it standing unused and derelict.
Physical inspection of a non-current asset is a clear example of auditor-originated evidence, so
would usually be considered more reliable than that generated by others.
Sufficiency
Inspection of a non-current asset would be sufficient evidence as to the existence of the asset
(provided it was carried out at or close to the end of the reporting period). Before concluding
on the non‑current asset figure in the accounts, the auditor would have to consider the results
of their work on other aspects, such as the ownership and valuation of the asset.
The comparison of revenue and expenditure items with prior periods will provide evidence as
to:
• completeness of recording, as omissions can be identified and investigated;
• accuracy, in cases where the auditor has appropriate information on which to base
expectations, for example, if the number of workers has doubled during the year and a set
percentage wage increase had been effected in the year; and
• presentation, as the comparison should highlight any inconsistencies of classification and
treatment from year to year.
Analysis such as this comparison of revenue and expenditure items with the prior periods
would again be termed auditor-generated evidence, and would be considered more reliable
than evidence generated by others. Ultimately the reliability of such audit evidence depends on
the reliability of the underlying data; this should be checked by tests of controls or substantive
procedures.
Sufficiency
In addition to the general considerations, such as risk and materiality, the results of a
‘comparison’ alone would not give very persuasive evidence. It would have to be followed by a
detailed investigation of variances (or lack of variances where they were expected). The results
should be compared to the auditor’s expectations based on their knowledge of the business,
and explanations given by management should be verified. The persuasiveness of the evidence
should be considered in the light of other relevant testing, for example tests of controls in
payments systems and substantive testing of expense invoices.
The proof in total calculation will provide evidence as to the accuracy of the interest expense.
Typically this would be calculated by multiplying the interest rate applicable to the loan to the
average amount of the loan for the period. Any significant difference between the total
calculated by the auditor and the amount in the financial statements would need to be
investigated further.
As above, the proof in total would again be termed auditor-generated evidence, and would be
considered more reliable than evidence generated by others. Ultimately the reliability of such
audit evidence depends on the reliability of the underlying data. Timings of repayments would
need to be considered when calculating the average level of the loan during the period and
the interest rate would need to be agreed to the loan agreement.
Sufficiency
The interest payable on the loan is likely to be relatively low risk but could be material. The
proof in total calculation may be sufficient evidence depending on the level of difference
between the amount expected by the auditor and the actual amount. Any significant
discrepancy would need to be investigated.
HB2021

4.1 Factors to consider:
Materiality
Property, plant and equipment (PPE) is likely to constitute a material proportion of the assets in
the statement of financial position of a manufacturing company. In addition, the depreciation
charge may be material to profit.
Depreciation of plant and machinery is charged to cost of sales, and therefore has a direct
impact on the gross profit margin of the business.
Inherent risk
Although PPE is generally regarded as having low inherent risk, the following factors may
increase the level of risk for Xantippe Ltd.
• Additions to plant may be misclassified as repairs and recognised in profit or loss.
• Repairs expenditure may be capitalised in error.
• Depreciation has a direct impact on profit and can potentially be manipulated by changing
the expected useful lives of assets.
Control risk
To determine the degree of reliance that can be placed on internal controls, the following will
need to be examined.
• Authorisation of expenditure on new PPE
• Client procedures for periodic review of renewals/repairs accounts
• Client reconciliations between the PPE register and nominal ledger account balances
If reliance can be placed on the above controls, assurance will be obtained that:
• PPE additions are valid business items;
• capital expenditure has been included in PPE; and
• revenue expenditure written off PPE has been accurately recorded.
Strong controls, as confirmed by tests of controls, will enable the level of substantive
procedures to be reduced.
4.2 Audit procedures:
Freehold property
• Agree opening balances to prior year working papers/financial statements.
• Inspect the title deeds to the property (or obtain assurance that they are held by the bank) in
order to confirm continuing ownership.
• Inquire whether any valuations have been carried out in the year.
• If any valuation shows a fall in value, propose adjustment (if material).
• Inspect the property to confirm (existence) that no provision for fall in value is necessary.
• Confirm from the bank letter (and discussions with management) any charges on the
property.
• Confirm all charges are properly disclosed in a note to the financial statements.
• Discuss with directors the reasonableness of their estimate of the useful life of the freehold
buildings.
• Reperform the calculation of depreciation, ensuring that the freehold land is not
depreciated.
Plant and machinery and motor vehicles
• Confirm opening balances to prior year financial statements.
• Obtain a list of additions in the year which reconciles with the total in the financial
statements.
• For a sample of additions – trace to purchase invoices to confirm ownership – review board
minutes/capital expenditure requisition for authorisation.
HB2021

• Review the list of additions to ensure that all items are of a capital nature.
• For a sample of assets on the register, physically inspect to confirm existence.
• Inspect invoices for motor vehicle additions to confirm that capital cost includes VAT but
excludes road tax.
• If motor vehicle additions involved a trade-in/part-exchange, discuss financial statement
adjustments required with directors (since no disposals accounted for).
• Inspect vehicle registration documents to confirm ownership.
• Compare the depreciation charge (as a percentage of cost) on a category by category basis
with that of the prior year to assess reasonableness.
• Reperform depreciation calculations for a sample of assets on the register.
• Obtain a list of disposals in the year which reconciles with the total in the financial
statements.
• For a sample of disposals – trace sales proceeds to sales invoice and cash book – reperform
calculation of profit on disposal and trace to statement of profit or loss and other
• Review repairs and renewals accounts to ensure that no items of a capital nature have been
written off.

Audit risks
• Revenue has increased by 15.6% as compared with 10 months to October 20X6. There is a risk
that revenue is overstated. Investigations would be required as to why this increase has taken
place. For example, it could be the result of a change in revenue recognition policy. Revenue may
also have been affected by the translation of foreign currency sales which make up a significant
proportion of total revenue. It may also be that sales prices have increased and the price lists
should be reviewed for changes, including the dates when changes were made. This includes
both official prices and discounting policy. It may also be that sales volumes or sales mix have
changed. This should be reviewed against budgeted production.
• Gross profit margin has increased. This is because cost of sales has increased by only 7.2%
compared to an increase in revenue of 15.6%. This may indicate that the increase in revenue was
largely as a result of selling price increases (which would not be reflected in increased costs)
rather than volume increases (which would have been reflected in increased cost of sales). This
proposition would be true for a retail company but, as Darwin is a manufacturing company, there
may be an alternative explanation. This is that cost of sales consists of both variable costs (eg, raw
materials) and fixed costs (manufacturing overheads, such as factory rent). If sales volumes have
increased significantly between 20X6 and 20X7 then, if fixed costs are significant, one would not
expect costs of sales to vary proportionately with sales revenue, but would increase by a smaller
percentage. The manufacturing cost structures would therefore need to be reviewed to formulate
an expectation of the relationship between cost of sales and revenue when volumes increase.
• There is also a risk that revenue may be overstated due to accounting errors; for example, items in
transit to overseas customers being included in both revenue and year-end inventories. This
would be consistent with the increase in inventory balance. Alternatively, it could be the result of
understatement of purchases.
• Changes in pricing strategy, sales mix or productivity would also have to be considered.
• Operating profit has increased and may be overstated. This could indicate understatement of
operating expenses, for example through inadequate accrual for such expenses.
• Increasing inventory values.
Assuming 360 days in a full year then inventory days have increased significantly:
10 months to 31 Oct 20X6 4,320/14,966 × 300 days = 87 days
10 months to 31 Oct 20X7 5,160/16,040 × 300 days = 97 days
• Inventory may therefore be overstated. This could be as a result of errors in the quantity of
inventory held or errors/changes in the way the inventory has been valued.
HB2021

• The business appears to be seasonal. In the 10 months to 31 October 20X6 the average monthly
sales were £2,352,000. In the two months to 31 December 20X6 average monthly sales were only
£1,776,000. The period to sell the inventory at 31 October 20X7 is therefore likely to be longer
than would be implied by the average sales for the 10-month period, as two months of low sales
are forthcoming if the pattern of 20X6 is to be repeated. This would imply inventory days of more
than 97 days and thus impairment should be considered.

6.1 Observation/Impact
Observations Impact on audit of trade payables
Gross profit margin has Business strategy and performance must be discussed with
fallen from 24% last year to the directors.
21% this year. The lower margin could arise from genuine business factors
including some relating to payables such as:
• new suppliers charging higher prices; and
• increases in the cost of raw materials used by
suppliers.
These factors would have to be confirmed during the audit of
payables.
Cost of sales has increased Where the decline in margin cannot be adequately explained
by 50% while revenue has by business factors, accounting errors must be considered.
increased by 45%. These could include:
• an inaccurate cut-off on goods received which
misstates purchases and trade payables; and
• misclassification between purchases and other
expenses.
Potential errors would increase the level of work required on
payables.
Trade payables have The scope of circularisation and/or supplier statement

increased by 38%, which is reconciliation work may have to be extended if there is an
less than the increase in increased number of suppliers, and these have not been
cost of sales. recorded.
The trade payables Information on payment terms with new suppliers (eg, for
payment period has been footwear) must be obtained to establish expectations.
reduced slightly from 61 There is a risk of unrecorded liabilities (eg, due to omission of
days last year to 56 days this goods received not invoiced or inaccurate cut-off in the
year. purchase ledger).
Review of subsequent cash payments to payables should
cover the two months after the year end.
Other payables have risen Payables for purchases may be misclassified as other
by 12% – this does not seem payables.
consistent with a reduction
in the number of shops.
6.2 Use of audit software

Reperformance of calculations:
• To cast the trade payables ledger file balances for comparison of the total with the balance
on the control account in the general ledger.
• To check arithmetic accuracy of individual suppliers’ accounts.
• Analytical procedures:
• To calculate the payment period by supplier.
HB2021

• To compare the current year balances with the prior year balances of the major suppliers at
each year end, and report any significant changes for further review.
• To determine the percentage increase or decrease for each account and in total.
Selection of data for substantive procedures:
• To select, from purchase records, a sample of suppliers for circularisation or review of
supplier statement reconciliations.
• To produce a printout of the major trade payables at the year end.
• To produce an exception report of debit balances on the payables ledger.
• To select, from inventory records, receipts immediately before the year end for matching to
goods received not invoiced accruals/trade payables.
• To identify unusual transactions (eg, relating to capital acquisitions through hire purchase
agreements).
• To identify unusual standing data (eg, accounts for inactive suppliers).
Selection of representative samples for tests of controls:
• Of purchases – to test whether they are properly authorised and matched to goods received
notes.
• Of payments – to test whether they are authorised.
Payables circularisation:
• To print requests for statements, monitor replies and produce second requests.
Cut-off:
• To identify goods received documentation unmatched on file, for verification of
inventory/payables cut-off.
• To select post year end payments for verification of cash/payables cut-off.
Disclosure:
• To extract total debits to the purchases accounts and total credits in individual suppliers’
accounts for comparison and reconciliation.
• To search ‘other payables’ for:
– individually significant balances; and
– names of trade payables.

Gearing ratios
Gearing = Debt ÷ (Debt + Equity)
(1) Book values
(250,000 + 150,000) ÷ (400,000 + 600,000) = 40%
(2) Market values
£
Equity (Ve ) 1,000,000 × 125p 1,250,000
Preference (Vp ) 250,000 × 65p 162,500
Loan stock (Vd ) 150,000 × 85% 127,500
1,540,000
(162,500 + 127,500) ÷ 1,540,000 = 18.8%

Comment
There is a significant difference between the book and market values. In particular, the market
obviously places value on the equity of the business, showing a potential confidence in the
HB2021

company’s future. On a market-based measure, gearing appears to be low and would seem
acceptable, although we have no external data to validate this.
Working capital ratios
Receivable days = (150,000 ÷ 2,000,000) × 365 = 27 days
The jewellery is sold 27 days (on average) before payment is received. Given the high value of items,
there is a high risk of bad debt. Care must be taken to ensure that credit is granted only to
creditworthy clients.
Payable days = (100,000 ÷ 1,200,000) × 365 = 30 days
Harrison plc pays its suppliers after 30 days (on average). This seems a reasonable amount of time,
and there seems to be no pressure on liquidity from this perspective.
Inventory days = (300,000 ÷ 1,500,000) × 365 = 73 days
Inventory days seem high at 73 days. However, a wide range of different items need to be displayed
in order to attract customers into the shop.
Many items, however, will be made to order, and this should be encouraged – it will help to reduce
the number of inventory days.
Non-financial measures
These include the following.
• Daily number of items sold
• Repeat business/customers
• Customer satisfaction
• Time taken for ‘made to order’ items
• Number of repairs/faulty items sold
These types of measures are important for Harrison plc, as the volume of trade will be relatively small
on a daily basis. Each extra sale will generate extra profit, and hence keeping customers happy and
satisfied will improve the overall performance of the shop.

8.1 Platforms
It is not necessary to use an auditor’s expert to audit the useful lives of the platforms, as there
are many other available sources of evidence. Relevant procedures include the following:
• Obtaining weather reports to see whether management’s determination of useful lives is
consistent with them
• Comparing budgeted oil against actual oil extracted (if the budget was optimistic, so might
the useful life be)
• Reviewing published industry comparators (such as Shell and BP); if the useful lives of their
platforms as published in financial statements is significantly different, discuss with
management why that might be
• Considering whether management’s determination of useful lives in the past has been
proved accurate
8.2 It is not necessary to use an auditor’s expert, as the question states that a ‘simple’ test is
available. The auditors should confirm that the company will be making use of this test during
the inventory count to separate the inventory. The auditor should reperform the test on a
sample of brass and copper as counted to ensure they have been separated correctly.
HB2021

1 Strombolix plc
BRIEFING NOTE
To Charles Church (partner)
From A Senior
Date 25 July 20X2
Subject Strombolix audit
Issues on the audit to date
(1) Trade receivables
Issues arising
One type of paint has suffered problems of decay after only a short period of use, and customers are
refusing to pay for recent deliveries. If these claims are valid (as would be indicated by the fact that
the complaints are coming from several different independent sources) this creates a number of
issues.
• The most obvious issue is assessing the need to make provision against, or write off, the £50,000
of receivables relating to the claim. If the claim is valid the receivables should be written off
immediately.
• Given that the decay only occurs after a few months, at least some of the paint is likely to have
been paid for already: thus repayment in respect of these sales is due. Under IAS 37, Provisions,
Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets an obligating event has occurred (the sale of faulty
paint) and there is a probable transfer of economic benefits which can be reasonably estimated.
• Provision will also need to be made against any inventories that may be held of this type of paint,
as they cannot be sold if faulty. This should include any disposal costs.
• If wholesale customers of Strombolix are being sued by their own customers, it is very probable
that they will in turn consider litigation against Strombolix. Part of any claim will be for the paint
itself for which provision is to be made as suggested above. Additionally, however, there is likely
to be a claim for the labour cost involved for the removal of the old paint, in applying new paint
and for disruption. Consideration should be given to making provision for these amounts, but
they are more uncertain in their nature, not least because there does not currently appear to be
any such legal claim against Strombolix. The situation will need to be monitored up to the time of
audit clearance to reassess the situation at that date.
• If wholesale customers of Strombolix are being sued for the faulty paint, consideration should
also be given to making similar provisions in respect of the sales by Strombolix of the paint to its
own retail customers.
• The necessary provisions are specific provisions and would be allowable for taxation. The tax
charge for the year would therefore need to be adjusted to the extent of any provisions made.
The deferred tax charge would need to be adjusted accordingly.
Audit procedures
The key audit issue is to establish whether there is a technical fault in the paint. If there is, as seems
likely, then it will be necessary to establish the extent of the problem by ascertaining the following in
respect of this particular paint.
• The amount of receivables outstanding
• Total sales to date to wholesale and retail customers
• Amount of the paint in inventories
• Review any correspondence on the issue
• Review correspondence with the company’s solicitors
• Establish whether Strombolix made the paint itself or whether it was purchased from a supplier, in
which case there may be a corresponding claim by Strombolix
HB2021

• Speak to the company’s production/technical director to establish the nature of the problem and
whether any other paints may be affected
• Attempt to estimate the non-material costs which customers may incur in replacing the faulty
paint
• Review returns inwards and customer compliant files from retail customers in respect of the faulty
paint
• Review the latest situation with respect to litigation on a continuing basis up to the time of audit
completion
Questions for finance director
• Does the company accept that it was at fault with respect to this paint?
• What attempts have been made to evaluate liability?
• What is the current status of any litigation against the company?
(2) Inventories
Issues arising
A special retail offer of ‘3 for 2’ on wallpaper purchased from an outside supplier during the year has
been incorrectly recorded, as the offer was not programmed into the company’s IT system. The
company also intends to take credit for a proportion of a quantity bonus payable by the supplier in
respect of this product.
There are two key audit issues.
• There has been a systems error which appears to have gone undetected and unreported for
some time. This raises concerns about the operation of the accounting and internal control
systems more generally.
• The extent of the substantive errors needs to be established and adjusted.
Systems errors – inventories
• Establish why the special offer was not programmed into the IT system.
• Establish whether any other such programming omissions occurred.
• Investigate why the error was not reported back to programmers from store managers who were
instructing sales staff to read only two of the three items.
• Consider the level of understanding of store managers of the IT system, and whether this may
have contributed to other similar errors.
• Establish how the error was ultimately detected, and thus what other controls had failed to detect
the problem before its discovery.
Substantive errors – inventories
Misstatement relating to special offer
• If the third item in each transaction was unrecorded, the IT records will overstate inventory. If
20,000 units have been recorded (if they have all been sold through the special 3 for 2 offer)
10,000 have been unrecorded. This will mean reducing inventories in the IT records by a
maximum of £50,000.
• Adjustment will need to be made for any similar errors discovered by the above systems review.
Taking credit for bonus
• Strombolix appears to be intending to take credit for part of the supplier’s bonus in its draft
financial statements. The bonus is, however, effectively a contingent asset under IAS 37, as the
payment is dependent on making total sales of 40,000 units, including some in the future. If this is
only probable, disclosure can be made, but a pro rata amount cannot be included in the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income in the year to 30 June 20X2.
• If,on the basis of post year end evidence before audit completion, it is virtually certain that sales of
40,000 units of the product will be made, and that settlement will be made by the supplier, then a
pro rata recognition is appropriate. However, as the sales appear to be made on the total level of
sales made by the supplier to Strombolix (ie, including the ‘free’ goods and perhaps any goods
still in inventories), then the credit would be a maximum of £67,500 (ie, (30,000 ÷ 40,000) ×
£90,000) if all sales were through the special offer.
HB2021

• In the absence of near certainty over attaining the bonus, there is an inventory valuation problem.
If the bonus is not paid, the NRV of any inventories remaining is less than its cost. For example, a
batch of three units would be valued in inventories at £15 (3 × £5), whereas its NRV is only £12 (2
× £6). In this case, consideration should be given to writing down each inventory item to £4 (ie,
£12 ÷ 3).
Audit procedures
• Obtain explanations for the systems error.
• Review the company’s internal control procedures with respect to the inclusion in the IT system of
non-standard sales arrangements.
• Obtain explanations for the non-reporting of the error by store managers.
• Review the scope for similar errors in the system in respect of both detection and reporting.
• Consider whether (and if not, why not) the physical inventory count detected the IT error.
• Evaluate the number of sales of the product made through the ‘3 for 2’ special offer, as opposed
to single purchases.
• Review post year end sales to assess the probability of achieving the bonus payment from the
supplier.
• Consider the adequacy of the inventory provision in the light of the results of the above.
• How did the systems error occur in respect of the special ‘3 for 2’ offer?
• Why did it go undetected?
• What is the justification for taking credit for part of the bonus from the supplier when the target
has not been achieved at the year end?
(3) Capitalisation of interest
Issues arising
The company had a new superstore constructed during the year, and it borrowed to finance this
project. The interest on the borrowing was all capitalised.
IAS 23, Borrowing Costs requires borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition,
construction or production of a qualifying asset to be capitalised as part of the cost of the asset. It
defines a qualifying asset as one that takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its intended
use or sale (IAS 23.5). The treatment adopted by the company therefore appears to comply with the
IAS providing that the borrowing costs are ‘directly attributable’ to construction ie, they would have
been avoided if expenditure on the construction of the asset had not been incurred.
The finance costs on the relevant borrowings become part of the overall asset and are therefore
recognised in profit or loss as the asset is depreciated over its useful life, rather than as incurred.
Capitalisation should cease when substantially all the activities necessary to get the asset ready for its
intended use or sale are complete (IAS 23.22). It is the availability for use which is important, not
when it is actually brought into use. An asset is normally ready for its intended use or sale when its
physical construction is complete.
It would appear that the interest capitalised in respect of the new superstore is as follows.
Period Payment for Calculation capitalised Interest

£
1.8.X1–30.6.X2 Land 11/12 × £400,000 × 8% 29,333
1.12.X1–30.6.X2 Progress payment 7/12 × £1m × 8% 46,667
82,667
HB2021

Assuming that commencement of preparation for planning permission was the earliest date at which
the company commenced to ‘get the asset ready for use’, then the correct interest to be capitalised is
as follows.
Period Payment for Calculation capitalised Interest

£
1.9.X1–30.5.X2 Land 9/12 × £400,000 × 8% 24,000
– Progress payment – –––––
64,000
The difference of £18,667 (£82,667 – £64,000) should be treated as a cost for the year in the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income under ‘finance costs’. There should also
be a corresponding deduction from the cost of the asset in the draft financial statements.
The amount of borrowing costs that must be capitalised is limited by the requirement that the total
value of the asset (including borrowing costs) should not exceed the asset’s recoverable amount.
The following disclosure should be made where interest is capitalised within non-current assets.
• Aggregate finance costs included in non-current assets
• Finance costs capitalised in the year (including £64,000 in respect of this transaction)
• Finance costs recognised in profit or loss (including £18,667 in respect of this transaction)
• Capitalisation rate used (8%)
Audit procedures
• Loan agreement to be inspected for interest rate and other terms
• Contract for building the superstore and associated documentation to be inspected – particularly
for amounts and dates in this context
• Evidence of the date on which activity commenced to ‘get the asset ready for use’ to be inspected
eg, preparation for planning permission
• Evidence of the date on which the asset was ready for use to be gathered (eg, builder’s reports
and other correspondence)
• Confirm that the policy on interest capitalisation is consistent with that previously adopted when
building other stores
• Why was there a delay between the purchase of land and the commencement of preparation for
planning permission?
• Does he accept that the revised calculation (above) is consistent with IAS 23?
General concerns arising from the takeover bid
The takeover bid is an inherent risk in the context of this audit, particularly as the directors are
attempting to defend the bid. In this case they will be attempting to show the company in the best
possible light. This may involve disclosing the highest possible profit in the financial statements.
This policy would be consistent with the audit issues discovered, in that there does not appear to be
any provision in respect of receivables or inventory in audit issues (1) and (2). Similarly, the amount of
interest capitalised in (3) appears to present an overoptimistic figure for profit.
Consideration will thus need to be given to the extent of reliance that can be placed on management
assurances and managerial control in this audit, even if they have proved reliable in the past.
Moreover, if the financial statements are misstated there is a possibility of litigation against our firm
for third-party negligence if Simban suffers a loss or if it relies on the financial statements – and we
know it is relying on the financial statements for the purpose of the takeover. To some extent a report
of due diligence before takeover may mitigate some of this risk, but this cannot be relied on entirely.
Consider the impact of time pressure being placed on the audit.
Reconsider materiality levels and the risk assessment in the audit plan in the light of the takeover bid.
HB2021

2 AB Milton Ltd
2.1 Potential related party transactions
Person/entity Related party Why Transaction
Alexander Milton  Director No transactions

mentioned
Brian Milton  Director No transactions

mentioned
Brian’s wife  Wife of director
Edward Murray  Director Purchases of

stationery
Murray Design  Entity controlled by a

director
Diane Hardy × No longer close family

and does not have control
or significant influence
Fiona Dyson  Presumed close family Contracts drawn

and shadow director
Cuts and Curls ? (see below) Rental agreement
Campbell Milton  Sub of AB Milton Work done for AB

Roofing (see below)
Ian Campbell /× Could be considered key

management of group
Cuts and Curls is not clear cut. For it to be a related party Gillian Milton would need to be in a
position to control Cuts and Curls and then due to her relationship with Alexander Milton her
company would come under the related party umbrella. Gillian only holds 50% and therefore
holds joint control with her mother.
Disclosure
The related party relationship between AB Milton and Campbell Milton Roofing must be
disclosed, as it is a relationship between a parent and a subsidiary. This disclosure must be
provided irrespective of whether a transaction takes place.
For other related party relationships disclosure is only required where a transaction has taken
place. In this case that would apply to the transactions with Edward Murray, Fiona Dyson and
potentially Cuts and Curls. Disclosure is required of the nature of the related party relationship
as well as information about the transaction and any outstanding balances necessary for users
to understand the potential effect of the relationship. Disclosure should include the following
as a minimum:
• A description of the relationship
• A description of the transaction and the amounts included
• The amounts due to or from the related party at the end of the year
• Any other element of the transaction necessary for an understanding of the financial
statements
2.2 Notes for staff training sessions:
(a) We are required to assess the risk of undisclosed related party transactions and to design
our audit procedures in response to that risk. A logical place to start the audit of related
party transactions would be to identify all possible related parties. This would always
• Directors and shadow directors
HB2021

• Group companies
• Pension funds of the company
• Associates
It is likely that the other related parties would include the following:
• Key management (perhaps identified by which staff have key man cover)
• Shareholder owning > 20% of the shares
• Close relatives and associates of any of the above
All related party transactions must be disclosed. Related party transactions do not
necessarily have to be detrimental to the reporting entity, but those which are will be
easier to find. The following features, among others, may indicate this:
• Unusually generous trade or settlement discounts
• Unusually generous payment terms
• Recorded in the nominal ledger code of any person previously identified as a related
party (for example, director)
• Unusual size of transaction for customers (for example, if the company were paying a
suspiciously high legal bill for a building company)
(b) Audit procedures to identify related party transactions are as follows.
Risk assessment procedures:
• Discussion by the audit team of the risk of fraud-related misstatements
• Enquiries of management
• Obtaining an understanding of the controls in place to identify related party
transactions
Other procedures might include:
• Identification of excessively generous credit terms by reference to aged trade accounts
receivable analysis
• Identification of excessive discounts by reference to similar reports
• Scrutiny of cash book for payments made to directors or officers of the company
(probably more realistic for smaller entities)
• Review of board minutes for evidence of approval of related party transactions
(directors are under a fiduciary duty not to make secret profits)
• Written representations from directors to give exhaustive list of all actual/potential
related parties (that is, allow us to make the materiality assessment, not them)
• Review of accounting rewards for large transactions, especially near the year end and
with non-established customers/suppliers
• Identification of any persons holding > 20% of the shares in the entity by reference to
the shareholders’ register
3 TrueBlue Ltd
3.1 Discussion with the finance director
Revenue and marketing expense
The trend of falling revenue has continued in 20X7 from previous years. The problem seems
worse in view of the fact that 20X7 saw a substantial increase in advertising and marketing
expenditure, without which the fall would presumably have been greater. It is important to
investigate this situation and the action taken in relation to it, because the company could be
facing significant going concern problems if its products are no longer required by the market.
However, the revenue fall in 20X7 from 20X6 is not as significant as from 20X5, and it is
possible that the sales trend in 20X6 and the beginning of 20X7 has been reversed and the
company might be beginning to perform well again.
HB2021

Additional information required:
• Does the additional marketing spend relate to 20X7 or was it to encourage sales in the
future?
• Were there any sales forecasts produced in connection with the marketing spend?
• Can you provide details of sales month by month to show the revenue pattern throughout
the year, particularly in relation to the marketing spend?
• Does management have other plans/intentions with regard to boosting revenue,
particularly if the additional marketing spend in 20X7 has not produced the expected
results?
Gross profit percentage
The gross profit percentage was stable in 20X6 and 20X5 at 30% but it has dropped in 20X7 to
23%. This implies either that there is a mistake in the figures (for example, an expense may
have been analysed incorrectly; there may have been an error in final inventory counting or
valuation; or some sales may not have been included correctly in revenue hence it has fallen),
or that there has been a change in the cost structure or sales mix resulting in this fall.
With revenue falling, if sales are also becoming less profitable, the problem outlined above
might be intensified. Alternatively, a new sales mix may be the directors’ approach to solving
revenue fall and, in the long term, increased sales at a lower margin might be the new situation
for the company.
Additional information required:
• The reason for the fall in gross profit percentage
• Analysis of sales by month and product
• Further analysis of cost of sales figures
Receivables
The trade receivables balance has fallen over the three years, which is in line with the fall in
revenue. However, it has not fallen at the same rate, which is shown by the fact that the
receivables days calculation shows that debts are now taking six more days to collect than they
were in 20X5. The significant change occurred in 20X7, with the day calculation falling from 63
to 67 days in 20X7 as opposed to 61 to 63 in 20X6.
The increase could be caused by any of the following factors.
• The marketing event has caused a change in sales patterns/debt collection later in the year
(this would be revealed by analysing detailed sales information outlined above).
• Problems with credit control/the company has uncollectible debts on the ledger that should
realistically be written off.
• It is possible that a receivables ledger fraud is being carried out.
Credit control problems would constitute a control deficiency that the auditors should note
and respond to with regard to their audit. They should assess whether the problems with
control extend further than the credit control department, as widespread control issues could
significantly affect risk assessment.
If there is a large amount of old debt on the ledger, a truer picture would be presented if it
were written off. Similarly, a fraud being carried out on the ledger would affect the true and fair
view. Four days represents 1% of the year, and therefore 1% of revenue (taken on an average
basis) and it is therefore a material issue.
Further information required:
• Aged analysis of the receivables ledger to identify whether any significant aged debts exist
which require writing off
• Remittance advices from customers to assess payment patterns
Inventory, cash and liquidity
The inventory movement assessment in the cost of sales analysis shows that inventory levels at
the company have risen consistently at the company over the last three years so that the
inventory balance is now £3 million higher than at the start of 20X5. Direct production and
purchase costs have remained stable over those years, suggesting that operation levels have
HB2021

not changed to reflect the situation in the market and the falling sales position. This is likely to
have had a devastating impact on the cash position of the company. The statement of financial
position will show a significantly illiquid position with an inventory pile and a decrease in
receivables conversion rate. If it also shows a significant cash deficit then there are immediate
concerns about whether the company can continue to finance operations.
Further information required:
• Production levels in 20X7 and management’s future intentions concerning production
• Bank statements and statements of cash flows and projections
• Inventory sheets from 20X7 count
• Inventory valuation sheets from 20X7
Other expense items
The other expense items provided in this analysis are immaterial in relation to revenue and
therefore the auditor would not focus on them at the planning meeting.
WORKINGS
(1) Gross profit margin
20X7
4,357,233 ÷ 18,944,487 = 23%
20X6
6,174,827 ÷ 20,588,370 = 30%
20X5
7,359,648 ÷ 24,536,570 = 30%
(2) Receivables days
20X7
(3,477,481 ÷ 18,944,487) × 365 = 67
20X6
(3,553,609 ÷ 20,588,370) × 365 = 63
20X5
(4,089,783 ÷ 24,536,570) × 365 = 61
(3) Payables days
20X7
(1,056,090 ÷ 9,183,388) × 365 = 42
20X6
(1,027,380 ÷ 9,246,420) × 365 = 41
20X5
(1,164,843 ÷ 10,483,588) × 365 = 41
3.2 If fraud is suspected
The auditor is required to approach their task with an attitude of professional scepticism.
Therefore, in theory, the auditor should not approach the task differently if fraud has been
suggested than they would have before. The questions arising from the analytical procedures
would be the same, and the auditor would still seek to corroborate the answers and then
assess whether they are satisfied with the corroborated answers. Given that the auditor is
required to be aware that fraud is a possibility whether they have been tipped off or not, the
corroboration of the finance director’s answers should have been thorough and based on
sources other than the finance director (such as third-party invoices and the
opinions/experience of other sources in the company) anyway.
If the auditor has been given a tip off that fraud exists, he should pass on that information to
the appropriate level of management. In this case, this would be the audit committee, as the
tip off concerns the finance director.
HB2021

3.3 Approach to the audit of receivables
There is a good source of third-party evidence in relation to the receivables balance; that is,
the customers. Usually trade receivables is audited by means of direct confirmation. It is likely
that the receivables balance at TrueBlue has been audited by a receivables confirmation in
previous years and, if there is a fraud being carried out on this balance, then it has not been
uncovered by the audit procedures. It is possible that the audit procedures have become
repetitive, that the same (largest) customers have been selected to test year on year and that
the finance director has been able to carry out a small scale fraud on smaller balances less
likely to be tested, or that the fraud has only been carried out in the current year.
The auditors should carry out a receivables confirmation in this year, as it is the best source of
audit evidence. They should increase the sample size to reflect the risk associated with the
balance and extend testing to a larger number of customers than has previously been the
case.
In addition, the auditors should carry out some transaction testing on sales receipts in the year,
tracing the transactions through the system and trying to match receipts with invoices on the
sales ledger.
If a fraud has been carried out in this area it casts significant doubt on the controls in this area
and the auditors should consider whether controls throughout the accounting function might
also not be operating effectively and what impact that has on the rest of the audit.
4 Tofalco plc
Memorandum
To Paul Sykes
From Jeremy Wiquad
Date 6 November 20X0
Re Tofalco plc
The memo below covers the financial reporting and auditing issues raised per your request.
Financial reporting treatment and audit procedures required
• Construction contracts
– Given that the outcome cannot be foreseen reliably, no profit should be recognised in the
current year. Instead, £400 million should be recognised within cost of sales and, assuming that
these costs are recoverable, the same amount within revenues (therefore showing no profit and
no loss). The value of the work done in the statement of financial position will therefore be £400
million.
Audit procedures to gain assurance include:
– reviewing the contract to confirm the duration and sales value of the contract;
– reviewing the surveyor’s report to confirm the value of the work performed to date;
– examining internal cost reports and confirming items on a sample basis to invoices; and
– obtaining a written representation from management with regards to the outcome of the
contract.
• Provisions – An environmental provision for the £2.5 million present value of the cost of disposing
of the machines is required per IAS 37 and should be presented within non-current liabilities. This
cost should also be included as part of the cost of the asset. In subsequent years the liability will
increase due to the unwinding of the discount and a corresponding finance expense will be
shown within profit or loss.
– reviewing the law with regards to the environmental provision and the underlying
documentation relating to the £2.5 million estimate provided;
– assessing whether the discount rate used to calculate the present value of the disposal costs is
appropriate; and
HB2021

– discussing with management if there are other areas/machines that require equivalent
‘environmentally friendly’ costs and that these have been provided for. Include the
completeness of these provisions in the company management representation letter.
• Receivables – Per IFRS 9, Financial Instruments (see Chapter 16), receivables are a financial asset
and it appears that an impairment of receivables (the specific debt of Stirly plc) may be needed.
– attempting to review board minutes and the correspondence file for any discussion of this
issue; and
– reviewing subsequent events for payment of the amount due.
• Assets held for sale – According to IFRS 5, assets are classified as ‘held for sale’ when, among
other criteria, management are committed to the sale and the asset is available for immediate
sale. The situation is not entirely clear, but the criteria are probably not fully met until February
20X0, when the recoverable amount is £1.7 million. Therefore an impairment adjustment of £0.4
million is required on the transfer of the asset to the held for sale category. The fact that the
building had not been sold by September is not necessarily a concern, as 12 months have yet to
elapse. However, this will be a matter for review next year.
– reviewing management documentation (eg, correspondence with estate agent and minutes)
which confirms management commitment to sell;
– checking the building is available for sale and not being used internally by the company;
– checking the selling price is close to the market value of the buildings in the immediate area;
and
– checking the building is advertised for sale and for immediate transfer.
• The issue of convertible loan stock constitutes a compound financial instrument which needs to
be split between its liability and equity components for presentation in the statement of financial
position.
£
Face value of convertible bonds 18,000,000
PVs of future cash flows of equivalent bonds with no conversion option 16,862,000 Liability
Equity (warrants) (difference between the above) 1,138,000 Equity
• Audit procedures to gain assurance include:

– reviewing the convertible bond certificate for the face value, interest and conversion terms; and
– recalculating the present value of the cash flows relating to the equivalent bond without
conversion options.
• Related parties – As per IAS 24, given the materiality of the transactions involved, all details of the
relationship between Tofalco plc and Sandstone Ltd need to be disclosed along with the
particulars of the transactions within the notes to the financial statement.
– obtaining a written representation from management that all related parties have been
disclosed; and
– reviewing invoice file to ensure that all transactions with Sandstone Ltd have been disclosed.
Effects of non-compliance on the audit risk and form of the auditor’s report
• Refusal to provide full details means that we are unable to obtain sufficient appropriate evidence
(a limitation on the scope of the audit). If the effect is deemed material, an ‘except for’ qualified
opinion is given. If the effect is deemed ‘pervasive’, then a disclaimer of opinion is made to the
effect that “We do not express an opinion …”
• Failure to disclose full remuneration constitutes a material misstatement (disagreement) in respect
of a legal issue (we conclude that the financial statements are not free from material
misstatement) and materiality by size is not a factor in this area. As the matter is material
irrespective of the sums involved, then an ‘except for’ qualified opinion will be given.
HB2021

• Refusal to recognise obligations under IAS 37 constitutes misstatement (disagreement). In the
event that these costs are material, an ‘except for’ qualified opinion is required. In the event they
are deemed pervasive, then an adverse opinion is required stating that the financial statements
‘do not give a true and fair view’.
Terms of reference of working relationship with Investo Ltd
Terms need to cover key investment risks (eg, Tofalco must set guidelines and approve investment
policy).
Internal controls with regards to the operation of the relationship (eg, weekly statements sent to
company reconciled with third-party information – eg, contract notes, share certificates, stock
exchange confirmation).
Value for money – fee comparability and return.
Impact on future audits
• Future audits will need to include procedures that address the fact that investment activities are
outsourced to Investo.
• In reaching preliminary risk assessments, assessments will need to be made of the inherent,
detection and control risks related to the investments balance and the terms of reference the
client has with Investo Ltd.
• Controls and processes carried out by Tofalco in relation to Investo’s services will need to be
documented and tested (and if the risk is great enough, those present at Investo also).
• The investments balance may also require substantive testing and so the need to obtain
underlying source documentation from Investo Ltd.
Ethical considerations
• Management integrity appears to be questionable in this assignment. Management will need to
understand the importance of their behaviour and its implications on the audit and the
relationship with the auditor.
• There appears to be non-compliance with the law with regard to environmental regulations and
the disclosure of remuneration paid to related parties. These issues are non-negotiable and will
lead to a modified audit opinion if not addressed by management.
• We should consider whether it is appropriate for us to accept this assignment given the problems
outlined above. If we do decide to resign, we need to follow legal and professional procedures –
eg, submitting a statement of circumstances to an AGM and addressing the AGM (if we wish).
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 7
The statutory audit: evaluating

and testing internal controls
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Introduction
2 Respective responsibilities of those charged with governance and
auditors
3 Evaluating and testing internal controls
4 Service organisations
5 Internal controls in an IT environment
6 Cyber security and corporate data security
7 Communicating and reporting on internal control
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Analyse and evaluate the control environment for an entity based on an understanding of the
entity, its operations and its processes
• Evaluate an entity’s processes for identifying, assessing and responding to business and
operating risks as they impact on the financial statements
• Appraise an entity’s accounting information systems and related business processes relevant to
corporate reporting and communication including virtual arrangements and cloud computing
• Analyse and evaluate strengths and weaknesses of preventive and detective control mechanisms
and processes, highlighting control weaknesses; including weaknesses related to cyber security
and corporate data controls
• Evaluate controls relating to information technology and e-commerce; including controls
associated with cyber security and corporate data security
• Explain and appraise the entity’s system for monitoring and modifying internal control systems
• Devise, explain and evaluate tests of controls
• Explain the respective responsibilities of those charged with governance and auditors in respect
of internal control systems
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 12(a)–(g), 13(h)
7

of this chapter.

1 Introduction Approach This section is a N/A

You need to Be prepared to refer reminder that you
remember the to earlier parts of the must always study
importance of study materials. your materials
internal controls holistically and not
Stop and think consider each part
and how they are
relied upon by Can you remember in isolation.
both the audited where we previously
entity and the discussed internal
auditors controls?
themselves as part
of sound
governance.
2 Respective Approach You may be asked to N/A

responsibilities of Work through this explain these
those charged section with the responsibilities and
with governance auditing standards why they are
and auditors open book in front different to a junior
An awareness of of you. member of staff.
these Stop and think
responsibilities will
assist the auditor in Did you remember
focusing on the all of the various
controls necessary definitions given
here?
HB2021

for the creation of

the financial
statements.
3 Evaluating and Approach You should use the N/A

testing internal This will be revision section on ‘tests of
controls from your previous controls’ as a good
You should be able studies. recap of the type of
to use tests of audit procedures
Stop and think that a good test of
control as sources
of valuable audit Can you remember control would
evidence. where you met this contain.
content before?
4 Service Approach Exam questions that N/A

Organisations Work through this test this content will
If your audit client section with the be easy to spot but
has outsourced auditing standards you will still need to
some key financial open book in front explain first how
functions, how do of you. service
you make sure that organisations create
Stop and think additional audit risk
you can still get
the necessary audit Can you tell the before you describe
evidence for your difference between the impact it would
opinion? type 1 and type 2 have on your audit
reports and do you approach.
know when each
would be required?
5 Internal controls in Approach While there may be N/A

an IT environment While this may be some IT-specific
When an entity revision, it is still aspects that you will
uses IT systems important to be able need to explain in
that the auditor to differentiate an exam question
needs to access, general and (such as general and
the auditor needs application controls. application controls
to understand the that may be
Stop and think necessary in a given
various controls in
place that govern You should consider scenario) you may
the way the IT how cutting edge also be asked to
works, regardless technology like data discuss the impact
of the data being analytics fits into the that introducing new
processed and traditional definition technology (such as
stored. of CAATs. cloud computing)
might have on a
client and its
accounting systems.
6 Cyber security and Approach Questions on this IQ1: NewForm Ltd

corporate data Work through this topic could take Use this as good
security section, paying many forms, such as practice for
This is vital area for particular attention an assessment of evaluating the audit
all professionals, to the content on how well-prepared risks from an IT-
not just those who GDPR and the an organisation is (or based environment
work in finance. advice on how to is not) against some and explaining how
protect yourself form of cyber attack, IT application
from cyber threats. or requesting advice controls can be used
on how an in a specific part of
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 371
organisation could the organisation’s

Stop and think implement such systems.
procedures.
Can you think of a
situation that either
you or an
organisation you are
familiar with was
affected by any of
these issues?
7 Communicating Approach You may be asked to N/A

and reporting on You covered this in explain deficiencies
internal control your previous in internal control so
Although the main studies so this make sure you can
purpose of the should be revision. communicate the
audit is not to reasons why they are
Stop and think deficiencies and
identify
deficiencies in Can you explain what the audited
internal control, what makes a entity should do to
should any be deficiency in internal address them.
identified as a control significant?
result of the audit
work completed,
the auditor needs
to pass this
information on to
those charged with
governance.
HB2021

1 Introduction
Section overview
• An entity’s system of internal controls informs the auditor’s assessment of audit risk and the nature
of the audit procedures that would be undertaken during the audit fieldwork stage.
• In addition to the auditing standards, corporate governance codes (such as the UK Corporate
Governance Code and the Sarbanes–Oxley Act) also prescribe the respective responsibilities of
the auditor and those charged with governance with regards to internal controls.
Internal control is an essential aspect of the entity about which the auditor must gain an
understanding at the start of the audit. The effectiveness of the system of internal controls informs
the auditor’s risk assessment and, consequently, the audit procedures to be carried out at the audit
fieldwork stage. Therefore, internal control will have to be considered throughout the audit life cycle
– from planning to finalisation and reporting.
In this chapter, we will revise the auditor’s responsibilities with regards to the system of internal
control and the consideration of internal controls at different stages of the audit. We will then have a
closer look at the implications of service organisations, and the risks and benefits of internal controls
in an IT environment.
As you will have seen already, internal control is central to corporate governance. Therefore, we will
regularly refer back to our discussions on corporate governance in Chapter 4.
2 Respective responsibilities of those charged with

governance and auditors
Section overview
• Auditors are responsible for obtaining audit evidence that provides reasonable assurance that the
financial statements are free of material misstatements, some of which may be caused by error.
• Management are responsible for designing and implementing a system of internal control which
is capable of preventing, or detecting and correcting, errors in the financial records.
• Auditors are required to assess the system of internal control as part of their audit in order to
determine whether to rely on the system of controls or carry out extended tests of details.
2.1 Responsibilities of those charged with governance

As you no doubt already know, the responsibility for the design, implementation and maintenance of
an effective system of internal control, one that is capable of preventing, or detecting and correcting,
errors in the financial records, lies with those charged with governance (TCWG).
Let’s revise some key definitions.
Definitions
Those charged with governance: The person(s) or organisation(s) (for example, a corporate trustee)
with responsibility for overseeing the strategic direction of the entity and obligations related to the
accountability of the entity. This includes overseeing the financial reporting process. For some
entities in some jurisdictions, those charged with governance may include management personnel,
for example, executive members of a governance board of a private or public sector entity, or an
owner-manager.
In the UK, those charged with governance include executive and non-executive directors and the
members of the audit committee.
HB2021
Error: An unintentional misstatement in financial statements, including the omission of an amount or
a disclosure.
Internal control: A process designed, implemented and maintained by those charged with
governance, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance about the
achievement of the entity’s objectives with regard to reliability of financial reporting, effectiveness
and efficiency of operations and compliance with applicable laws and regulations. It follows that
internal control is designed and implemented to address identified business risks that threaten the
achievement of any of these objectives.
2.2 Auditor‘s responsibilities

As we outlined in your earlier studies, the auditor is required to do the following:
• Assess the system of internal controls to determine whether they are capable of preventing or
detecting and correcting errors (ISA (UK) 315)
• Test the internal controls if required (ISA (UK) 330)
• Report deficiencies in internal control to TCWG where they have been identified (ISA (UK) 265)
As part of assessing the system of internal controls as part of audit risk assessment, the auditor must
do the following:
• Obtain an understanding of controls relevant to the audit
• Evaluate the design of those controls
• Determine whether they have been implemented
The auditor must then test controls if:
• the auditor intends to rely on the operating effectiveness of those controls; or
• substantive procedures alone cannot provide sufficient, appropriate audit evidence.
Finally, the auditor must determine whether the audit work has identified any deficiencies in internal
control and, where these deficiencies are significant, communicate the significant deficiencies to
TCWG in writing on a timely basis.
In the following sections, we will look at each of these stages in further detail.
Effective internal controls form a crucial part of good corporate governance. For a more detailed
discussion on the importance of internal controls, and the auditor’s role in relation to internal
controls, please refer back to Chapter 4.
3 Evaluating and testing internal controls

Section overview
Sources of audit evidence include tests of controls.
3.1 Evaluation of internal controls for audit purposes: revision

Understanding an entity’s internal control assists the auditor in identifying types of potential
misstatements and factors that affect the risks of material misstatement, and in designing the nature,
timing and extent of further audit procedures.
Step 1 Initially, the auditor must determine which controls are relevant to the audit. There is a direct
relationship between an entity’s objectives and the controls it implements to provide
reasonable assurance about their achievement. Many of these controls will relate to financial
reporting, operations and compliance, but not all the entity’s objectives and controls will be
relevant to the auditor’s risk assessment.
Step 2 While gaining an understanding of internal controls, the auditor must evaluate the design of
the relevant controls, and determine whether the controls are properly implemented.
HB2021

Evaluating the design of a control involves considering whether the control, individually or
in combination with other controls, is capable of effectively preventing, or detecting and
correcting, material misstatements.
Implementation of a control means that the control exists and that the entity is using it.
Step 3 Having determined which controls are relevant, and are adequately designed to aid in the
prevention of material misstatements in the financial statements, the auditor can then
decide whether it is more efficient to place reliance on those controls and perform tests of
controls in that area, or to perform substantive testing over that area.
Step 4 If the controls are not adequately designed, the auditor needs to perform sufficient
substantive testing over that financial statement area in light of the apparent lack of control
and increased risk. Any deficiencies are noted and, where appropriate, these will be
communicated to management.
ISA (UK) 315 (revised) divides internal control into five elements:
• The control environment
• The entity’s risk assessment process
• The information system relevant to financial reporting
• Control activities
• Monitoring of controls
3.2 Tests of controls: revision

You will have covered tests of controls in your earlier studies. The following section provides a
summary of the key points.
Testing of controls means obtaining sufficient, appropriate audit evidence about the operating
effectiveness of the controls in preventing or detecting and correcting material misstatements.
Evidence will be required to show that:
• controls were applied at relevant times during the year; and
• those controls were applied consistently (eg, because controls were performed by different
people or in different locations).
Tests of control may include the following.
(a) Inspection of documents supporting controls or events to gain audit evidence that internal
controls have operated properly eg, verifying that a transaction has been authorised.
(b) Enquiries about internal controls which leave no audit trail eg, determining who actually
performs each function, not merely who is supposed to perform it.
(c) Reperformance of control procedures eg, reconciliation of bank accounts, to ensure they were
correctly performed by the entity.
(d) Examination of evidence of management views eg, minutes of management meetings.
(e) Testing of internal controls operating on computerised systems or over the overall information
technology function eg, access controls.
(f) Observation of controls to consider the manner in which the control is being operated.
Auditors should consider the following:
• How controls were applied
• The consistency with which they were applied during the period
• By whom they were applied
Tests of controls are distinguished from substantive procedures which are designed to detect
material misstatements in the financial statements.
Deviations in the operation of controls (caused by change of staff etc) may increase control risk and
tests of control may need to be modified to confirm effective operation during and after any change.
Audit procedures will include the test of control and then other procedures (eg, substantive and/or
analytical procedures) to confirm the operating effectiveness of that control. Overall, audit
procedures may be limited where automated processing is involved, as control errors are less likely
HB2021
eg, computers tend to make fewer mistakes than humans after a given procedure has been correctly
programmed.
The use of computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs) is referred to below.
Please also refer back to Chapter 4 for the auditor’s responsibilities for the evaluation of internal
controls from a corporate governance perspective.
3.2.1 Relationship between tests of controls and risk assessment procedures

Testing of controls should not be confused with risk assessment procedures which were performed
earlier in the audit to assess the design and implementation of controls. However, in some situations
risk assessment procedures may provide persuasive evidence on the operation of controls. For
example, management review of budgets and investigation of variances on a regular basis is
indicative that controls over sales and purchases are operating effectively.
3.2.2 Conclude on the achieved level of control risk

When control testing is complete, residual audit risk to be obtained from substantive testing must be
determined. To determine the remaining detection risk the auditor will use:
• The achieved level of control risk; and
• the assessed level of inherent risk.
This detection risk is then used to decide the nature and timing of the remaining substantive testing.
Evaluating the outcome of tests of control will require an understanding of the implications for the
audit overall. This in turn will require sound skills of judgement.
4 Service organisations
Section overview
Where the auditor’s client uses a service organisation, the auditor may need to obtain evidence of
the accuracy of processing systems within a service organisation.
Definition
Service organisation: A third-party organisation that provides services to user entities that are part of
those entities’ information systems relevant to financial reporting.
ISA (UK) 402, Audit Considerations Relating to an Entity Using a Service Organisation provides
guidance on how auditors carry out their responsibility to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit
evidence when the audit client (called the ‘user entity’ in the standard) uses such an organisation.
The ISA (UK) mentions the following service organisation services that may be relevant to the audit
(this is not an exhaustive list):
• Maintenance of accounting records
• Other finance functions, such as the tax compliance function
• Management of assets
• Undertaking or making arrangements for transactions as agents of the user entity
HB2021

4.1 Requirements of the user auditor
Definition
User auditor: An auditor who audits and reports on the financial statements of a user entity.
The ISA (UK) states that the objective of the auditor is ‘to obtain an understanding of the nature and
significance of the services provided by the service organisation and their effect on the user entity’s
internal control relevant to the audit, sufficient to identify and assess the risks of material
misstatement’ (ISA (UK) 402.7).
The ISA requires the auditor to understand how the user entity uses the services of the service
organisation. In obtaining an understanding of the entity, the auditor shall consider the following:
(a) The nature of the services provided by the service organisation
(b) The nature and materiality of the transactions processed or accounts or financial accounting
processes affected by the service organisation
(c) The degree of interaction between the activities of the service organisation and those of the
user entity
(d) The nature of the relationship between the user entity and the service organisation, including
the contractual terms
(e) In the UK, if the service organisation maintains all or part of a user entity’s accounting records,
whether those arrangements impact the work the auditor performs to fulfil reporting
responsibilities in relation to accounting records (The wording of UK company law raises a
particular issue, as the wording appears to be prescriptive, requiring the company itself to keep
accounting records. Whether a company ‘keeps’ records will depend on the particular terms of
the outsourcing arrangement.)
When obtaining an understanding of internal control the auditor shall:
(a) evaluate the design and implementation of controls at the user entity that relate to the services
provided by the service organisation; and
(b) determine whether this gives sufficient understanding of the effect of the service organisation on
the user entity’s internal control to provide a basis for the identification and assessment of risks
of material misstatement.
If not then the auditor shall do one or more of the following:
(a) Obtain a report from the service organisation’s auditors (there are two different types of report,
see below)
(b) Contact the service organisation, through the user entity
(c) Visit the service organisation and perform procedures that will provide information about the
relevant controls
(d) Use another auditor to perform procedures that will provide information about the relevant
controls
4.2 Using reports from service auditors
Definitions
Type 1 report: A report that comprises both of the following:
• A description, prepared by management of the service organisation, of the service organisation’s
system, control objectives and related controls that have been designed and implemented as at a
specified date
• A report by the service auditor with the objective of conveying reasonable assurance that includes
the service auditor’s opinion on the description of the service organisation’s system, control
objectives and related controls and the suitability of the design of the controls to achieve the
specified control objectives
HB2021
Type 2 report: A report that comprises both of the following:
• A description, as in a Type 1 report of the system and controls, of their design and
implementation as at a specified date or throughout a specified period and, in some cases, their
operating effectiveness throughout a specified period
• A report by the service auditor with the objective of conveying reasonable assurance that
includes:
– the service auditor’s opinion on the description of the service organisation’s system, control
objectives and related controls, the suitability of the design of the controls to achieve the
specified control objectives, and the operating effectiveness of the controls; and
– a description of the service auditor’s tests of the controls and the results thereof.
The availability of a report on internal controls generally depends on whether the provision of such a
report is part of the contractual terms between the user entity and the service organisation.
Before placing reliance on the report, the user auditor shall do the following:
• Consider the service auditor’s professional competence and independence from the service
organisation
• Consider the adequacy of the standards under which the report was issued
• Evaluate whether the period covered is appropriate for the auditor’s purposes
• Evaluate the sufficiency and appropriateness of the report for the understanding of the internal
controls relevant to the audit
• Determine whether the user entity has implemented any complementary controls that the service
organisation, in the design of its service, has assumed will be implemented
While a Type 1 report may be useful to a user auditor in gaining the required understanding of the
accounting and internal control systems, an auditor would not use such reports as a basis for
reducing the assessment of control risk.
But a Type 2 report may provide such a basis since tests of control have been performed. If this type
of report may be used as evidence to support a lower control risk assessment, a user auditor would
have to consider whether the controls tested by the service organisation auditor are relevant to the
user’s transactions (significant assertions in the client’s financial statements) and whether the service
organisation auditor’s tests of controls and the results are adequate.
4.3 Responding to the risks of material misstatement

The user auditor shall:
• determine whether sufficient, appropriate audit evidence concerning the relevant assertions is
available from records held at the user entity; and if not
• perform further procedures (or use another auditor to perform those procedures at the service
organisation on the user auditor’s behalf).
4.3.1 Tests of controls

This evidence can be obtained by one or more of the following procedures:
• Obtaining a Type 2 report, if available
• Performing tests of controls at the service organisation
• Using another auditor to perform tests of controls at the service organisation
4.3.2 Substantive procedures

The following procedures may be considered by the auditor:
• Inspecting documents and records held by the user entity
• Inspecting documents and records held by the service organisation (access to records held by the
service organisation may be established as part of the contractual arrangement between the user
entity and the service organisation)
• Obtaining confirmation of balances and transactions from the service organisation where the user
entity maintains independent records of balances and transactions
HB2021

• Performing analytical procedures on the records maintained by the user entity or on the reports
received from the service organisation
• Where a significant proportion of the audit evidence is located at the service organisation,
substantive procedures may need to be performed at the service organisation by the user auditor
or by another auditor on behalf of the user auditor
4.4 Reporting by the user auditor

4.4.1 Modified opinions
If the user auditor is unable to obtain sufficient, appropriate evidence a modified audit opinion may
be required. This could be the case when:
• the user auditor is unable to obtain a sufficient understanding of the services provided by the
service organisation and does not have a basis for assessing the risks of material misstatement;
• the user auditor’s risk assessment includes an expectation that the controls at the service
organisation are operating effectively and the user auditor is unable to obtain sufficient
appropriate evidence about the operating effectiveness of these controls; or
• sufficient, appropriate evidence is only available from records held at the service organisation,
and the user auditor is unable to obtain direct access to these records.
4.4.2 Reference to the work of service auditors

The user auditor shall not refer to the work of a service auditor in the user auditor’s report
containing an unmodified opinion unless required by law or regulation to do so. (If such a reference
is required, the user auditor’s report must indicate that this does not diminish the user auditor’s
responsibility for the audit opinion.)
If reference to the work of a service auditor is relevant to an understanding of a modification to the
user auditor’s opinion, the user auditor’s report must indicate that this does not diminish the user
auditor’s responsibility for the audit opinion.
5 Internal controls in an IT environment

Section overview
• IT controls comprise general and application controls. General controls establish a framework of
overall control over the system’s activities whereas application controls are specific controls over
the applications maintained by the system.
• Computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs) can be used by the auditor to test application
controls within the client’s computer systems.
• Specific considerations will apply where virtual arrangements including cloud computing are
used.
5.1 Introduction
We looked at IT-specific risks in the context of carrying out an audit risk assessment in Chapter 5, and
introduced the use of CAATs in Chapter 6. Here, we will consider IT controls in more detail, along
with how to audit them.
As you should know by now, the internal control activities in a computerised environment fall within
two categories: general controls and application controls.
5.2 General controls

The purpose of general IT controls is to establish a framework of overall control over the computer
information system’s activities to provide a reasonable level of assurance that the overall objectives
of internal controls are achieved. They include controls over access security, data centre and network
operations, software acquisition, change and maintenance, and application system acquisition,
HB2021
development and maintenance. They are sometimes referred to as supervisory, management or
information technology controls. General controls are considered in detail below.
General controls
Development of Standards over systems design, programming and documentation

computer applications Full testing procedures using test data
Approval by computer users and management
Segregation of duties so that those responsible for design are not
responsible for testing
Installation procedures so that data is not corrupted in transition
Training of staff in new procedures and availability of adequate
documentation
Prevention or detection Segregation of duties

of unauthorised changes Full records of program changes
to programs
Password protection of programs so that access is limited to computer
operations staff
Restricted access to central computer by locked doors, keypads
Maintenance of program logs
Virus checks on software: use of anti-virus software and policy
prohibiting use of non-authorised programs or files
Back-up copies of programs being taken and stored in other locations
Control copies of programs being preserved and regularly compared
with actual programs
Stricter controls over certain programs (utility programs) by use of
read-only memory
Testing and Complete testing procedures

documentation of Documentation standards
program changes
Approval of changes by computer users and management
Training of staff using programs
Controls to prevent Operation controls over programs

wrong programs or files Libraries of programs
being used
Proper job scheduling
Controls to prevent Physical security over remote terminals

unauthorised Limited access to authorised personnel only
amendments to data
files Firewalls
User identification controls such as passwords
Encryption of data
Controls to ensure Storing extra copies of programs and data files offsite
continuity of operation Protection of equipment against fire and other hazards
Back-up power sources
Emergency procedures
Disaster recovery procedures eg, availability of back-up computer
facilities
Maintenance agreements and insurance
The auditors will wish to test some or all of the above general controls, having considered how they
affect the computer applications significant to the audit.
HB2021

General IT controls that relate to some or all applications are usually interdependent controls, ie, their
operation is often essential to the effectiveness of application controls. As application controls may
be useless when general controls are ineffective, it will be more efficient to review the design of
general IT controls first, before reviewing the application controls.
General IT controls may have a pervasive effect on the processing of transactions in application
systems. If these general controls are not effective, there may be a risk that misstatements occur and
go undetected in the application systems. Although deficiencies in general IT controls may preclude
testing certain IT application controls, it is possible that manual procedures exercised by users may
provide effective control at the application level.
5.3 Application controls

The purpose of application controls is to establish specific control procedures over the accounting
applications in order to provide reasonable assurance that all transactions are authorised and
recorded, and are processed completely, accurately and on a timely basis. Application controls
include data capture controls, data validation controls, processing controls, output controls and error
controls. Examples of application controls are shown in the table below.
Application controls
Controls over input: Manual or programmed agreement of control totals

completeness Document counts
One for one checking of processed output to source documents
Programmed matching of input to an expected input control file
Procedures over resubmission of rejected items
Controls over input: Programs to check data fields (for example value, reference number,
accuracy date) on input transactions for plausibility
Digit verification (eg, reference numbers are as expected)
• Reasonableness test (eg, sales tax to total value)
• Existence checks (eg, customer name)
• Character checks (no unexpected characters used in reference)
• Necessary information (no transaction passed with gaps)
• Permitted range (no transaction processed over a certain value)
Manual scrutiny of output and reconciliation to source
Agreement of control totals (manual/programmed)
Controls over input: Manual checks to ensure information input is:

authorisation • authorised; and
• input by authorised personnel.
Controls over processing Similar controls to input must be in place when input is completed, for
example, batch reconciliations
Screen warnings can prevent people logging out before processing is
complete
Controls over master One to one checking

files and standing data Cyclical reviews of all master files and standing data
Record counts (number of documents processed) and hash totals (for
example, the total of all the payroll numbers) used when master files
are used to ensure no deletions
Controls over the deletion of accounts that have no current balance
Control over input, processing, data files and output may be carried out by IT personnel, users of the
system, a separate control group and may be programmed into application software.
HB2021
5.4 The use of CAATs
Computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs) can assist the auditor in testing application controls. As
you will know from your earlier audit studies, there are generally two types of CAATs: audit software
and test data.
Audit software includes generalised audit software and custom audit software. Generalised audit
software includes programs that allow the auditor to carry out tests on computer files and databases.
An example of a generalised audit software program is ACL.
Generalised audit software allows auditors to perform a number of functions, such as database
access, sample selection, arithmetic functions, statistical analyses and report generation.
The advantages of generalised audit software include the fact that it is easy to use, limited IT
programming skills are needed, the time required to develop the application is relatively short, and
entire populations can be examined, thus negating the need for sampling. However, the drawbacks
of using this type of CAAT are that it involves auditing after the client has processed the data rather
than while the data is being processed, and it is limited to procedures that can be performed on data
that is available electronically.
Custom audit software is normally written by auditors for specific audit tasks. It is normally used in
situations where the client’s computer system is not compatible with the auditor’s generalised audit
software or where the auditor wants to do some testing that might not be possible with the
generalised audit software. However, this type of CAAT can be expensive and time consuming to
develop and may require a lot of modification if the client changes its accounting application
programs.
Test data is used to test the application controls in the client‘s computer programs. Test data is first
created for processing and it includes both valid and invalid data which is processed on the client’s
computer and application programs. The invalid data should therefore be highlighted as errors. Test
data allows the auditor to check data validation controls and error detection routines, processing
logic controls, arithmetic calculations and the inclusion of transactions in records and files.
The main benefit of test data is that it provides direct evidence on the effectiveness of controls in the
client’s application programs. However, its drawbacks include the fact that it is very time consuming
to create the test data, the auditor cannot be certain that all relevant controls are tested and the
auditor must make sure that all valid test data is removed from the client’s systems.
In the table below, we briefly examine ways of testing application controls, including the use of
CAATs to do so.
Testing of application
controls
Manual controls If manual controls exercised by the user of the application system are
exercised by the user capable of providing reasonable assurance that the system’s output is
complete, accurate and authorised, the auditors may decide to limit
tests of control to these manual controls.
Controls over system If, in addition to manual controls exercised by the user, the controls to
output be tested use information produced by the computer or are contained
within computer programs, such controls may be tested by examining
the system’s output using either manual procedures or CAATs. Such
output may be in the form of magnetic media, microfilm or printouts.
Alternatively, the auditor may test the control by performing it with the
use of CAATs.
Programmed control In the case of certain computer systems, the auditor may find that it is
procedures not possible or, in some cases, not practical to test controls by
examining only user controls or the system’s output. The auditor may
consider performing tests of control by using CAATs, such as test data,
reprocessing transaction data and, in unusual situations, examining the
coding of the application program.
HB2021

5.5 Virtual arrangements and cloud computing
Where an audit client uses virtual arrangements and/or cloud computing there are a number of
specific risks and control issues which the auditor needs to address. The ICAEW Information
Technology Faculty document Cloud Adoption: Understanding the Risk of Cloud Services is a guide
for small businesses considering the adoption of a cloud-based strategy, however many of the issues
it raises would also be relevant to the auditor when appraising an entity’s system. The following
questions would be relevant as part of this process:
Back-ups
• Does the cloud service take regular back-ups of client data?
• Does the client have its own back-up strategy?
• Is the cloud service’s process for restoring data regularly tested?
• Is there a service level agreement regarding data assurance and does the cloud service perform
exercises to ensure that these can be met?
Security
• Is the platform regularly given to third-party ‘penetration testers’ for potential vulnerabilities, who
vigorously test the platform to determine whether an attacker could gain unauthorised access?
• Is there an adequate process in place in the event of a security breach being determined?
• Is data held on the platform stored in an encrypted format?
• Is payment data held on a PCI-DSS compliant platform?
• Are there recognised, standard working processes and procedures in place and adopted (eg, are
ISO accreditations held)?
• Is the platform protected against ‘denial of service’ attacks, where attackers could prevent access
to the service indefinitely by flooding the platform with erroneous traffic or requests for
information?
Compensation for loss
• Are compensation levels for loss of data written into agreements?
Using the service
• Are there contractual commitments regarding availability of service and performance levels?
• What is the provider’s capability to develop new features ie, is there a realistic roadmap?
• To what extent are features integrated?
• Are responsibilities for ongoing support documented?
Being able to differentiate between general and application controls will allow the auditor to assess a
system and how robust it is. This demonstrates the ability to assimilate information about the system
for the purpose of evaluating the system.
HB2021
6 Cyber security and corporate data security
Section overview
Businesses need to keep their data secure whether it is in hard copy or electronic format. As business
operations increasingly use digital technology the issue of cyber security is an essential
consideration as part of the audit.
6.1 Introduction
There has always been a need for companies to keep information, or data, safe. This might be to
ensure confidentiality of customer details, to protect company ‘secrets’ or to ensure the integrity of
data. Where records and data are held in a hard copy format, as would have been the case in the
past, data security centres around physical security. This might simply involve a lock on a filing
cabinet. Increasingly, however, data is stored electronically. As a result, if a business is to keep its data
secure it must address the issue of cyber security. Addressing cyber security threats will be a key part
of its corporate data security strategy.
6.2 Nature and consequences of cyber threats

One of the key issues which is transforming the current IT risk landscape is cyber security. As
companies are increasingly involved in digital technology, mobile technology and cloud computing
so the associated risks have also increased. Potential threats may arise from a number of sources. The
Deloitte publication Cybersecurity: The Changing Role of the Audit Committee and Internal Audit
identifies these as follows:
• Cyber criminals
• Hactivists (agenda driven)
• Nation states
• Insiders/partners
• Competitors
• Skilled individual hacker
It also identifies the following risks resulting from an attack:
• Theft of IP/strategic plans
• Financial fraud
• Reputational damage
• Business disruption
• Destruction of critical infrastructure
• Threats to health and safety
(Source: Deloitte (2015) Cybersecurity: The Changing Role of the Audit Committee and Internal Audit.
[Online]. Available from: www2.deloitte.com/content/dam/Deloitte/sg/Documents/risk/sea-risk-cyber-
security-changing-role-in-audit-noexp.pdf: p.10 [Accessed 12 October 2021])
The ICAEW IT Faculty document, Audit insights: Cyber Security – Taking Control of the Agenda,
available from: https://www.icaew.com/-/media/corporate/files/technical/audit-and-assurance/audit-
insights/audit-insights-cyber-security-2016.ashx [Accessed 12 October 2021], highlights the
constantly evolving nature of cyber risks as follows:
• Threats change as attackers get more sophisticated and find new ways of breaking into systems.
New attackers also emerge, as easy-to-use tools reduce the level of skill required to carry out
attacks.
• Vulnerabilities change as businesses digitally transform their business models and ways of
working, potentially creating new weaknesses in business processes eg, mobile ways of working,
or adoption of the internet of things.
HB2021

• Existing controls and assurance models are superseded by new approaches. For example,
moving to cloud-based systems has made traditional assurance models around IT controls more
difficult to apply.
• The impact of failures increases as businesses capture more data and rely more heavily on
digitally-based services. A slow or poor response to a major breach is very quickly and publicly
shared over social media, increasing at least short-term reputational damage.
In addition there are increasing amounts of regulation, particularly regarding data protection and
personal data which companies need to consider. For example, new or forthcoming legislation in the
EU includes the following:
• The General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) came into force in the UK on 25 May 2018,
bringing it in line with the rest of the EU where similar legislation already exists. The GDPR
updates and replaces the existing regulatory framework around the protection and use of
personal data (see section 6.2.1 below for an overview of this legislation)
• The Network Information Security (NIS) directive, which specifies obligations regarding cyber
security in certain industry sectors, largely associated with the critical national infrastructure and
major information processing activities
In June 2014 the Bank of England announced a new framework for cyber-security testing in the
financial services sector and the Information Commissioner is becoming more proactive in examining
the privacy policies of major technology companies such as Facebook.
(Source: ICAEW IT Faculty document: Audit insights: Cyber Security – Taking Control of the Agenda:
p.7)
The number of high profile cases of breaches which have been reported in the press demonstrates
the challenging environment in which companies now operate. For example in 2014 a breach of
Apple’s iCloud resulted in the publication of the private photos of celebrities. In August 2015 hackers
stole and published details related to more than 30 million individuals registered with the Ashley
Madison online dating website resulting in class suit actions against the company.
(Source: ICAEW IT Faculty document: Audit insights: Cyber Security – Closing the Cyber Gap: p.4)
6.2.1 GDPR
The following table summarises the key points that are relevant to all accountants in this area.
GDPR components Implications in practice for accountants
Organisations must only collect personal data Data can only be obtained for a legitimate
(including sensitive personal data, such as business need and cannot be collected in case
biometric data used to identify an individual) it might be useful at some stage in the future.
when it can demonstrate that it has a valid This means that accountants need to consider
business need for that data. carefully what data they really need and be able
The GDPR distinguishes between data to justify it:
controllers who specify how and why data is • This includes data on employees, customers
processed and data processors who act on the and suppliers for all accountants and firms
controller’s behalf and deal directly with data • For firms, this also includes the details of any
itself. Both are liable under the GDPR. testing completed (eg, payroll and supplier
statements)
Personal data must be stored securely. It must This can include both physical storage of data
then be deleted when it is no longer required. (eg, in filing cabinets) and electronic storage –
given the vast amounts of data generated in the
21st Century due to advances in technology
such as big data and audit data analytics, this
creates a significant risk for all accountants,
especially as many organisations now use
‘cloud-based’ data storage.
All organisations need to demonstrate how Non-compliance is obviously a significant issue

they have complied with the GDPR – essentially for all accountants, given the potential size of
this means accountability and transparency of the fines that could be levied.
all data usage.
HB2021
GDPR components Implications in practice for accountants
Governance protocols require the completion Being able to demonstrate compliance requires
of a Data Protection Impact Assessment (DPIA) an understanding of the original purpose for
in situations when risk is enhanced (such as collecting such data to ensure that it is lawful
when using new technology or when and that consent was obtained from individuals
processing might lead to a high risk to before any personal data is collected.
individuals).
Breaches in the GDPR also need to be
disclosed – fines for non-compliance can reach
either €20 million or 4% of an organisation’s
global turnover.
The GDPR confers a series of rights on anyone whose personal data may be collected by an
organisation:
• The right to be informed (usually via some form of privacy notice)
• The right of access to your personal data and confirmation that it is being used
• The right of rectification if errors exist
• The right of erasure (sometimes referred to as ‘the right to be forgotten’)
• The right to restrict processing should you not wish your data to be used
• The right to data portability across different services should you wish
• The right to object (for example if you object to your data being used for marketing purposes)
• Rights in relation to automated decision-making and profiling (essentially, to ensure that all
decisions about your data are made using human not machine judgement)
Any non-compliance in relation to any of these rights may lead to fines and penalties, so they
should form part of any DPIA carried out.
(Source: The Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO) (2017) Overview of the General Data
Protection Regulation (GDPR). Available online: https://ico.org.uk/media/for-organisations/data-
protection-reform/overview-of-the-gdpr-1-13.pdf [Accessed 12 October 2021].)
Context example: BA and Marriott Hotels

In July 2019, the UK Information Commissioner’s Office imposed fines on British Airways (BA) and the
Marriott Hotel chain of £183 million and £99 million respectively in relation to data breaches.
Previously, the largest UK penalty for this offence was £500,000 imposed on Facebook in relation to
its involvement in the Cambridge Analytica scandal in 2014. The reason for such a drastic increase in
these penalties is the fact that the GDPR is now in force. Clearly, this new legislation is designed to
remind organisations of the responsibilities they bear when dealing with other people’s data, despite
claims from both companies that external entities were the source of the breach in each case.
(Sources: BBC News Website (2019) British Airways faces record £183m fine for data breach
(Available online) https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/business-48905907 [Accessed 12 October 2019]; BBC
News Website (2019) UK Watchdog plans to fine Marriott £99m (Available online).
https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/technology-48928163 [Accessed 12 October 2021])
6.3 Corporate governance and cyber security

6.3.1 Board of directors
Although there is no specific guidance as such (eg, in Corporate Governance Codes) the ultimate
responsibility for risk assessment and control, from whatever source lies with the board of directors.
In larger organisations responsibility for cyber security may lie specifically with the chief information
security officer (CISO). In many smaller organisations it may be the CEO or a chief risk officer.
HB2021

6.3.2 Audit committee
As the Deloitte publication Cybersecurity: The Changing Role of the Audit Committee and Internal
Audit explains, the audit committee may perform a useful role in “overseeing risk management
activities and monitoring management’s policies and procedures” (Deloitte, p.5).
Responsibilities might include:
• setting expectations and accountability for management;
• assessing the adequacy of resources; and
• liaising with other groups in enforcing and communicating expectations regarding security and
risk.
6.3.3 Internal audit function

The internal audit function can aid in the identification of the company’s strengths and weaknesses. It
can evaluate whether there is effective cyber risk management and also evaluate and review cyber
security related controls.
6.4 Cyber risk management

The Deloitte publication suggests that organisations adopt the following ‘Framework for Cyber Risk
Management’.
Figure 7.1: Framework for cyber risk management
Business Value
1. Governance & Leadership
Executive Technology IT Risk

Board
Management Leadership Leadership
3. Capabilities
Threat Infrastructure Identity & Access 4. Cyber lifecycle

Management Security Management Protect, detect,
respond & recover
Application Data Workforce
Security Protection Management 5. Solution lifecycle
Design, build,
Risk Third Party Crisis implement & operate
Analytics Management Management
2. Organisational Enablers
Policies & Talent & Risk Identification Stakeholder

Standards Culture & Reporting Management
The five functions (governance and leadership, organisational enablers, capabilities, cyber lifecycle
and solution lifecycle) provide a ‘strategic view of an organisation’s management of cyber security
risks’.
The ICAEW IT Faculty document, Audit insights: Cyber Security – Taking Control of the Agenda refers
to the ‘three lines of defence’ model. This applies controls, assurance and oversight at three different
levels in the organisation as follows:
• The first line is at an operational level, with controls built into processes and local management
responsible for their operation in practice ie, identifying and managing risks on a day-to-day
basis.
HB2021
• The second line is at functional specialism level, for example the role of cyber-security specialists
and a chief information officer ie, providing oversight and expertise.
• The third line is at the level of internal audit functions or independent assurance providers ie,
providing assurance and challenge concerning the overall management of the risks.
6.5 Risks external to the entity

As identified in the ICAEW IT Faculty document: Audit insights: Cyber Security – Closing the Cyber
Gap the issue is becoming an increasingly relevant aspect of supply chain risk management as many
high profile security breaches have come as a result of issues at suppliers, including IT service
providers, suppliers of non-IT goods and services and contractors. Obtaining assurance in this
respect is not an easy process meaning that companies are having to identify where the biggest risk
lies rather than simply focusing on the highest value suppliers. In addition, companies have had to
consider widening the scope of assurance processes so that they apply to all stages of the
transaction, rather than just at the procurement stage as has historically been the case. The most
common method used, particularly by large companies, is questionnaires which are sent to suppliers
to enable their processes to be evaluated and risks identified.
6.6 Cyber security economics

Implementing effective cyber security measures is expensive and boards need to be able to justify
the level of expenditure to their shareholders. This can be difficult particularly in an environment
where increased investment does not appear to prevent breaches. In the past costs have been
measured against the benefits of reduced losses caused by these breaches. However as this issue
has risen up the board agenda companies are beginning to view the benefits of this expenditure in a
different context. As identified in the ICAEW IT Faculty document: Audit insights: Cyber Security –
Closing the Cyber Gap these could include:
• a brand enhanced by the strong security culture;
• the ability to bid for contracts in a particular supply chain; and
• reduced insurance premiums.
6.7 Audit implications

As with any risk which a business faces the auditor must understand and evaluate the risk together
with the effectiveness of associated controls. In relation to cyber security the auditor will need to pay
particular attention to the control environment and specific control procedures put in place by
management.
6.7.1 Control environment

The following features would be an indication to the auditor that the control environment in respect
of cyber security is strong:
• Responsibility for cyber security elevated to board level, preferably to a designated individual eg,
a risk officer
• Evidence of active board oversight, including clear lines of responsibility and identification of key
business data and associated risks
• Cyber security policies and procedures embedded in operations and monitored for effectiveness
• Evaluation of the entity’s risk appetite and procedures to highlight risks which breach this level
• Non-executive directors and audit committee members with appropriate skills and training to
understand the issues
• Recruitment of competent in-house professionals with relevant expertise and/or use of
consultants
• Encouragement of communication between IT specialists and the board, internal auditors and the
audit committee
• Creation of an environment where staff are comfortable to report concerns and/or actual
instances of breaches of security without fear of reprisals
The ICAEW IT Faculty document, Audit insights: Cyber Security – Taking Control of the Agenda
includes a series of checklists for boards. Whilst these take the perspective of the business they
HB2021

provide an indication of what would constitute a strong control environment and the factors which
the auditor should consider when evaluating the control environment.
Checklist for boards Considerations for the auditor
Be ready to respond Consider the most serious possible breach and ask whether the
organisation, and board, are ready to cope. What would they do if
competitors accessed their IP? How does the business reassure
customers if their data is stolen?
Build intelligence What does the business know about specific threats, the actors
and their possible methods? How have other major breaches
happened, and how do the defences put in place by the business
compare? What are their peers doing to manage their risk? How
can they get ahead of the regulators?
Be specific and real How can critical data actually be accessed and by whom? What
controls are in place, and how does the business know whether
they are working? How are any breaches detected?
Link to strategic change How are major strategic initiatives changing the risks? What is the
impact of any M&A activity? What are the risks attached to new
products or market expansion?
Attach consequences What behaviour is unacceptable because of cyber risks? How does
the business know if non-compliance is occurring? What happens
to employees who do not follow the rules?
Tailor activities How relevant is cyber security training to specific roles and
responsibilities? Do higher-risk jobs have higher levels of training
and awareness-raising activities? Are staff clear about the purpose
of good cyber behaviour?
Hold boards to the same Are boards expected to follow the same rules as staff? Is the board
level of accountability clear as to the purpose and consequences of non-compliance?
Does the board see itself as a role model for good cyber
behaviour? Do members of the board act as role models?
Remember insider risk What is in place to detect suspicious behaviour or patterns? How
are disgruntled or disaffected staff identified? Does the business
know how much system access potentially disaffected staff have?
Implement cyber-by-design Are new products and services designed with cyber risks in mind?
Do business change projects consider cyber risk early on? What
are the risks of poor design?
Continually review and re- Are designs building in flexibility and resilience to cope with
evaluate changing cyber risks? How often are cyber risks reviewed? How
are changing risks incorporated into existing processes?
Take difficult decisions Is the business prepared to delay major change or strategic
projects if the security is not good enough? Is the business using a
‘sticking plaster’ approach to an old infrastructure?
Embed cyber into start-ups If investing in new businesses, are cyber risks considered?
6.7.2 Control procedures

The auditor would also need to identify and evaluate the effectiveness of specific control procedures.
This work is likely to involve the IT audit specialists.
HB2021
The Deloitte publication Cybersecurity: The Changing Role of the Audit Committee and Internal Audit
identifies that in order to be effective cyber defence needs to be:
• Secure: Are controls in place to guard against known and emerging threats?
• Vigilant: Can the company detect malicious or unauthorised activity, including the unknown?
• Resilient: Can we act and recover quickly to reduce impact?
Specific procedures to address these issues could include the following:
• Perimeter defences
• Vulnerability management
• Asset management
• Identity management
• Data protection procedures
• Threat intelligence eg, sharing intelligence with others within the same industry
• Security monitoring
• Behavioural analysis
• Risk analytics
• Incident response procedures
• Forensics
• Business continuity/disaster recovery procedures
• Crisis management
An awareness of both the control environment and control procedures should help an auditor assess
the impact of any cyber threats. This is an example of structuring a problem to achieve an effective
solution.
Interactive question 1: NewForm Ltd

NewForm Ltd (NewForm), a client of your firm, has recently established an e-commerce division
within its existing business to provide an additional outlet for its product range, which consists of
upmarket casual wear for adults. An objective in introducing the new division was to have a
completely paperless ordering, payment and despatch system.
The new e-commerce system is administered centrally by NewForm and deals with customer orders
and credit card payments. Customers are able to place orders and pay for the goods online.
Inventories for customer orders are held remotely by Key Distributors (KD), which is a completely
separate business from NewForm. Once online payment by credit card is cleared by NewForm,
despatch details are forwarded to KD electronically. KD then despatches customer orders.
Inventories are ordered by NewForm for delivery direct to KD.
Requirements
1.1 In planning the audit of NewForm, identify and explain four key audit risks that may arise from
the development of the new e-commerce division.
1.2 Identify and explain the application controls which you think are necessary for the integrity of
the ordering and payments system.
HB2021

7 Communicating and reporting on internal
control
Section overview
Auditors are required to report to those charged with governance on material deficiencies in controls
which could adversely affect the entity’s ability to record, process, summarise and report financial
data potentially causing material misstatements in the financial statements.
The specific responsibilities of the auditor in relation to communicating deficiencies in internal

control are set out in ISA (UK) 265, Communicating Deficiencies in Internal Control to Those Charged
With Governance and Management. The auditor is required to report significant deficiencies in
internal controls, where they have been identified, to those charged with governance and
management (already covered in Chapter 4).
Definitions
Deficiency: A deficiency in internal control exists when:
• a control is designed, implemented or operated in such a way that it is unable to prevent, or
detect and correct, misstatements in the financial statements on a timely basis; or
• a control necessary to prevent, or detect and correct, misstatements in the financial statements on
a timely basis is missing.
Significant deficiency in internal control: Those which in the auditor’s professional judgement are of
sufficient importance to merit the attention of those charged with governance.
The process of reporting to those charged with governance on material deficiencies in internal
control requires strong communication skills as well as the ability to conclude that the deficiency
might be significant.
HB2021
Summary
Auditor's responsibility:
• Assess
• Test
• Report deficiencies to
those charged with
Responsibility of
governance General
management
controls
Additional audit Application

procedures, Service Internal IT controls
possibly involve organisations controls environment
service auditors
Cyber security
and corporate
Evaluation of data security
Tests of controls
internal controls
Cloud
computing and
• Control environment • Inspect documents virtualisation
• Risk assessment process • Inquiries
• Information system • Reperforming control
relevant for FR procedures
• Control activities • Observation
• Monitoring of controls • Examination of
management views (ie,
board meeting minutes)
HB2021

1. Can you explain the importance of internal controls as part of the auditor’s role?
2. Can you distinguish between the relative responsibilities of those charged with
governance and the auditor?
3. Can you explain how the auditor evaluates internal controls and recommend suitable tests
of control to support the audit opinion?
4. Can you explain the impact on the audit of an entity choosing to outsource some of its
core functions? What factors will this impact be dependent on?
5. Do you know the difference between general and application controls in an IT context?
Are you aware of the impact that new technology such as cloud computing can have on
the audit?
6. Can you explain the various cyber threats that an organisation is at risk from and how such
cyber threats are mitigated?
7. How should the auditor communicate deficiencies in internal control and what makes such
a deficiency significant?
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Dodgy Burgers plc Being able to consider suitable audit procedures for testing relevant
internal controls.
Happy Flights plc This question tests how well you can discuss cyber security issues in the
context of a broader audit engagement.
UHN requirement (4) You need to be able to explain the board’s responsibilities and
accountability for cyber security.
Newpenny You should be able to evaluate Rosa’s suggestion of placing more reliance
requirement (2) on operating effectiveness of controls.
Johnson Telecom As part of the key risks from derivatives trading, you need to consider the
requirement (3) necessary general and application IT controls that would be required.
HB2021
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 ISA (UK) 315

• Risk assessment procedures – ISA (UK) 315.5–.10
• Understanding the entity and its environment – ISA (UK) 315.11–.24
• Assessing the risks of material misstatement – ISA (UK) 315.25–.31
• Financial statement assertions – ISA (UK) 315.A129
2 ISA (UK) 330

• Overall responses to risk assessment – ISA (UK) 330.5
– Response at assertion level – ISA (UK) 330.6–.7
– Evaluation of sufficiency and appropriateness of evidence – ISA (UK) 330.25–.27
HB2021
Self-test questions
1 Dodgy Burgers plc

The board of directors of your client, Dodgy Burgers plc, which runs a chain of 30 burger restaurants
across the country, has just completed a review of the structure of the business and relevant controls
which are in place within the business. This review was completed in the year ended 31 March 20X8.
A partner of your firm asked for a copy of the report that the directors completed to assist in the
identification of controls that the directors had implemented to mitigate business risk. The partner
would like to use this as a basis for testing and placing reliance on these controls to reduce the
amount of audit work undertaken for the audit for the year ended 31 March 20X8.
Listed below are some extracts from the report.
Health and safety issues
The following systems have now been introduced.
(1) The new internal audit department set up in September 20X7 will make spot checks on the
various shops to ensure that the new Health and Safety policies are being followed. Reports of
these visits will be sent to the board within two weeks of the visit. The internal audit department
plans to visit all the branches within one year.
(2) All staff will receive Health and Safety training, particularly on the areas of food handling,
storage, preparation, cooking and hygiene. This will be implemented immediately and by the
end of 20X8 we will have trained all staff.
Competition
Our main competitor, Chip Butty, has begun buying properties and setting up shops in the vicinity of
our existing branches within the large city centres. This has been a recurrent theme through 20X8 so
far and we expect this to continue into 20X9. We have identified this as a threat to our sales income
and consider that action is required.
To counteract the potential loss in sales we have embarked on three new marketing initiatives.
(1) Advertising on all major local television networks, comparing our burgers to the inferior Chip
Butty products
(2) Promoting our new toys, sold in conjunction with Dotty Films, which are free with all kiddy packs
(3) Employing a part-time member of staff to visit the competition’s premises and reporting on any
new initiatives Chip Butty embarks upon
Branch cash controls
As our business is primarily cash based, we were concerned over the potential for theft of cash
takings.
We have decided to implement a new policy in this area to monitor the takings from each branch
more closely.
All tills in every branch will include a standard float of £150. At the end of each day the takings will be
counted and bagged from each till, leaving the £150 float. A printout from the till will be made
detailing the daily takings. The physical cash will need to be reconciled to the till balance. Cash will
then be banked and the reconciliation emailed to head office.
Discount prices will be set in the till to ensure that no meals can be sold at below the discounted
price.
Increased turnaround in branches
We have identified a capacity problem in our branches, given the limited seating area at each of the
branches during peak times.
HB2021

Following a cost-benefit review of the branches it was decided not to increase these areas, as we feel
that it would not be cost effective due to the huge increase in rates that would be incurred, the
building costs and lost time due to renovation.
The board is prepared to accept the risk that some customers may be lost during peak times, but
may in the future consider some form of takeaway discount at peak times.
Environmental policy
We felt it was necessary to reassure the public that as a company our policies are ‘environmentally
friendly’ as this was key to a consumer business such as ours. The increased cost of the packaging
products has been passed on in full via a small price increase, as we have been able to negotiate an
excellent package with our suppliers and the waste contractors.
We have therefore introduced the following.
(1) Recycled packaging in all our branches, which has been clearly labelled to show that it is made
from paper used from managed forests
(2) Waste separation at branches, which is collected on a daily basis by an external contractor who
pays us £30 for each ton of paper and plastic collected
Requirement
Answer the following questions:
(1) Identify the business risks set out in the board report and state the risk category (ie, financial,
operational or compliance). For each risk identified state the strategy management have
adopted to deal with the risk.
(2) For each of the risks identified set out the audit procedures that would need to be completed
before reliance could be placed on the controls in place.
2 Happy Flights plc

Happy Flights plc (HF), a listed company is a low-cost airline that was established 15 years ago and
has since grown rapidly. You are a senior on the audit of HF for its year ended 30 June 20X6.
As part of the audit planning procedures the assignment manager, Geraint Johns, visited the finance
director of HF, Rory Hiller, and identified a number of risk areas (Exhibit 1).
Geraint rang you immediately after the meeting:
I have just been to visit HF and there are a number of issues that have arisen. The audit team needs
to discuss these matters at a planning meeting so we can determine our approach. I would like you
to prepare a memorandum for the meeting which explains in detail the key audit risks including any
cyber-security related issues, arising from these matters. I would also like you to identify the audit
procedures that we will need to carry out in respect of each of these risks. If there are any financial
reporting issues on these matters could you also explain these as part of the memorandum.
Requirement
Prepare the memorandum requested by the assignment manager.
Exhibit: Risk areas

Plane crash
You will be aware that on 20 June 20X6 one of the HF planes crashed with a loss of 56 lives and a
further 121 injuries. The cause of the crash has not yet been established. Indeed, it is unclear whether
HF is to blame. Some legal claims have begun to arrive at HF headquarters but it is still early in the
investigation process. Final settlement, if applicable, may take some years.
Operating issues
HF has suffered declining profits in recent years and recorded an operating loss for the first time in
the year to 30 June 20X5.
HB2021
As a consequence, there have been continuing cash flow problems which have been partially
alleviated by special measures adopted this year, including:
• significant discounts for bookings made, and paid for in full, at least six months before travel;
• extension of short-term leases on existing aircraft, rather than leasing new aircraft (all planes are
leased); and
• significant new fixed-term borrowings.
Database system
A new database system for bookings was introduced in January 20X4 by IT consultants. The purpose
of the new system was to allow data on HF’s flight availability to be accessed by travel agents and
other flight booking agencies around the world. Agencies can all make bookings on the same
system.
The database system is used not just for bookings but also as part of the receivables accounting
system for agents to collect money from customers and pay to HF after deducting their commission.
The data collected then feeds into the financial statements.
Unfortunately, since installation, the following problems have been discovered, either in the database
system, or relating to operatives using the system:
• It is HF’s policy to overbook its flights by 5% of seat capacity. However, there have been a number
of instances where overbookings have far exceeded 5% due to processing delays.
• The system has crashed on a number of occasions causing delays in processing and loss of data.
• A computer virus penetrated the system, although it did not cause any damage and was quickly
removed.
• Cash received in advance has been recorded as revenue at the date of receipt by HF.
this chapter.
HB2021


1.1 Key risks from the development of the e-commerce division
There are a number of concerns that an auditor of NewForm should address in relation to its
new e-commerce division. However, the general rule is that the scale of risk that is related to e-
commerce is directly proportional to the number of users and the value of their transactions,
which is critical to NewForm’s proposal. The key areas are likely to be as follows.
• Consider what cyber security issues have been addressed by the company. For example,
there may be difficulties with ensuring the integrity of the payments system and protecting
customer data (including bank details) from hackers, which will result in an increased focus
on revenue from online sales.
• Cyber attacks could also lead to disruption or suspension of the e-commerce platform
resulting in loss of sales and reputational damage.
• There may be breaches of data protection regulations regarding customer details resulting
from fraud (eg, cyber attacks) or poor procedures. This could result in the company being
exposed to litigation and fines, which may require provisions in the financial statements.
• Consider what additional inventory control measures have been implemented. Inventories
are presumably fairly high value, and hence will be material to NewForm’s activities. What
measures have been implemented to track customer orders? What procedures have been
put in place to deal with returned goods in relation to checking claims relating to returned
goods and authorisation/processing of refunds? This may be a particular difficulty, given the
remote nature of the shipment of goods.
• Assess if NewForm has the technical skills to develop and support a new e-commerce
division of the type proposed.
• Evaluate if consideration has been given to ensuring the continuity of operations, given the
increasing reliance of the business on technology. Specific issues include:
– Lack of resources may undermine effective contingency plans; this may force a business
to accept a higher tolerance of errors in the system, thus leading to a deeper inherent risk
within the organisation
– Inadequate controls surrounding the interaction of e-commerce applications with other
business critical applications
– Undermining of otherwise effective controls, eg, from inadequate recognition and use of
controls, combined with inadequate monitoring of control compliance
• Inventories are held remotely, and thus control over a significant asset is exercised largely by
a third party.
• Online ordering creates problems of security and data protection.
• Lack of audit trail in a paperless system.
• Dependence on a sole distributor.
1.2 Application controls
A number of application controls may be relevant, for example the following:
• Pre-processing authorisation
– Customer password systems
– Credit payment authorisation
– Customer account balance limit tests
• Validation tests
– Consistency with previous orders in terms of value
HB2021
1 Dodgy Burgers plc

Risk/Audit procedure
(1) Business risk and Management (2) Audit procedures to be completed in

category strategy to combat order to place reliance on the controls in
risk place
Health and safety
• Partially cooked • Management has • Obtain a copy of the Health and Safety
burgers have been set up a Health policy and review to ensure that the
sold. and Safety training policies are adequate. File on the
• This constitutes an programme. permanent audit file for future reference.
operational risk • Hold discussions with the branch
(failure to comply will managers on a sample basis to ensure that
result in the company the policy has been implemented if staff
being shut down) and do not reach the required standard.
compliance risk • Review the training course to establish
(breach of Health and what procedures are being taught to the
Safety regulations). staff, and what follow up has been
implemented if staff do not reach the
required standard.
• Internal audit spot • Assess the internal audit department staff

checks on Health to ensure they have the appropriate
and Safety are to authority, and are technically competent to
be carried out at complete the review.
the branches. • Discuss with the internal audit department
how the branches have been selected for
sampling.
• Review copies of the internal audit reports
to identify:
– the issues found;
– how they have been resolved;
– what follow-up work was required; and
– how this was monitored.
• Discuss with the directors how many visits
have been completed in the year and
whether they received all the copies of the
reports.
• Review correspondence files and external
Health and Safety visits during the period
before the internal audit department was
setup.
• Provided that the internal visits are
effective, audit procedures can be limited
to the period before the internal audit
department was set up, as this is likely to
be the higher audit risk area.
HB2021

risk place
New competitor
• A new competitor has • Advertising • Review gross profit margins to assess if

set up in major cities campaigns and there has been a major impact on sales.
within the vicinity of promotional gifts. • Discuss with the directors and review the
Dodgy Burgers plc. • New staff member national press to identify what impact this
• This constitutes an employed to visit competition is likely to have and whether
operational risk rivals. or not they are aiming for the same market.
(could lead to going • Review the advertising expenses account
concern problems to ensure that adverts have been bought
and, ultimately, and paid for.
closure).
• Review correspondence from the
• The instigation of a Advertising Standards Authority to ensure
major advertising no complaints have been logged as a
campaign itself result of the advert.
constitutes a
compliance risk • Review contracts with the television
(Advertising companies to ensure that primetime slots
Standards need to be had been given.
complied with). • Review sales accounts to establish that
• The campaign and sales have increased in the period during
promotional gifts lead or following the advertising campaigns.
to financial risk (large • Review the employment records to ensure
cash outlay). that the staff member has been employed
on a part-time basis and review the
contract/job description.
• Review the reports sent to the board to
establish if suitable observations have
been made and have been acted on.
Cash controls
• Risk of theft of cash • New controls • Review returns from branches to head
takings (financial risk). implemented to office on a sample basis.
set till floats and • Discuss the differences identified with
provide head office staff and review the action
reconciliations to taken.
head office on a
daily basis.
Limited seating
• Lack of seating in • No strategy has There is therefore no control as such to rely on

most branches during been put in place but there are potential going concern issues.
peak times due to cost-benefit • Discuss with branch managers the number
(operational risk – loss considerations but of customers at peak times, and the level
of customers). takeaway discount of complaints re the lack of seating area.
at peak times may
be considered in • Discuss with the directors the impact this
the future. may have in the future if competitors are
close by to the branches, loss of customer
may increase.
• Spot check the branches on a sample basis
to establish the customers leaving without
purchasing to confirm the extent of
problem highlighted by the directors.
HB2021
risk place
Recycled products
• A lack of confidence • The use of • Review the contracts with the suppliers to
from the public in recycled ensure that recycled packages are clearly
Dodgy Burgers plc’s packaging. specified and the price is comparable to
environmental • Waste separations the original prices of non-recycled
policies (operational and collections. products.
and compliance risk). • Review the branch returns to ensure that
delivery notes have been signed for the
waste collection and the receipts match
the tonnage collected. Ensure that these
are in line with expectations from the
preliminary analytical procedures on the
accounts.
• Review the new packaging for evidence
that the recycled symbols have been
correctly displayed.
• Discuss with the branch managers if any
further costs have been incurred from
having to separate the waste for collection,
or whether separate bins have been
provided in the branches for the public to
use.
2 Happy Flights plc

Memorandum
To Geraint Johns (Assignment Manager)
From A Senior
Date 24 July 20X6
Subject Happy Flights – audit risks
(1) Plane crash
Financial reporting issues
The plane crash occurred in the year to 30 June 20X6, thus potentially gives rise to a liability that
might need to be recognised in the current period. This might include:
• civil litigation by those passengers injured and the relations of those killed;
• criminal penalties against HF and/or its directors;
• if health and safety regulations have been breached then further penalties and constraints may
apply; or
• liability for employees killed and injured.
Any litigation may be in several jurisdictions according to the location of the crash and the nationality
of the passengers, thus the issues may be complex and take some time to resolve.
While such liabilities may ultimately be substantial they may also turn out to be small if the fault lies
with airport authorities or other causes. It seems likely that these issues will be unresolved when the
financial statements are authorised for issue thus it is unclear whether a contingency or a provision
would arise. If there is significant uncertainty, or if there is a low probability of a claim, this might
indicate a contingency, but more information would be needed to draw a firmer conclusion (see
below).
HB2021

Audit risks
A key audit risk is the lack of information on which to base a judgement in respect of the following:
• Whether any liability is probable or only possible
• The amount and timing of such a liability is unlikely to be known at the date of audit completion
According to IAS 37 where the amount of an obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability
then it should be disclosed as a contingent liability. In this case it would not be recognised in the
financial statements. If the information available is still fundamentally unclear at the date the financial
statements are authorised for issue, then this may be the most appropriate treatment.
If the company is insured then recovery of any insurance should be regarded as a separate matter
from the provision/contingency question.
Going concern – Notwithstanding the treatment of the provision/contingency then going concern is
likely to be an issue. Given that the company is already struggling financially, any claim may prove to
be a significant additional factor in assessing going concern. However, insurance recovery may be
considered in making any such assessment.
There may, however, be other more immediate going concern issues arising from the crash other
than the settlement of litigation.
These include:
• reduction in passenger numbers, as the reputation for safety may have diminished;
• grounding of aircraft by health and safety regulators perhaps resulting in loss of revenues,
cancellations and delays; and
• reconsideration of leasing older planes resulting in additional costs.
Audit procedures
• Review claims against HF received by audit completion.
• Review correspondence with HF’s legal advisers and consider taking independent legal advice
regarding the amount and probability of any claim against HF.
• Review any announcements by investigation teams and any correspondence with HF regarding
causes of the crash and the extent HF was to blame up to the date of audit completion (eg, ‘black
box’ flight recorder evidence).
• Consider the possibility of counter claims by HF against others responsible for the crash by
considering legal advice.
• Review any correspondence with Health and Safety Executive regarding grounding of planes or
possible causes of the crash.
• Review flight bookings since crash for evidence of a decline in reputation and fall in future sales.
• Assess impact on budgeted cash flows to consider impact on going concern.
(2) Operating issues
• The decline in operating profits is further evidence of going concern problems.
• If the short-term leases have been extended then they will need to be recognised as right-of-use
assets in the statement of financial position.
Audit risks
The key audit risk is going concern. If there is adequate disclosure in the financial statements by the
directors regarding the uncertainties about going concern then an unmodified audit opinion will be
issued but the audit report will include a separate section headed ‘Material Uncertainty Related to
Going Concern’. However, if the directors do not disclose going concern uncertainties appropriately,
it may be necessary to modify the audit opinion.
The receipt of cash from customers in advance is likely to cause concern if the company does have
going concern issues, as this may amount to fraudulent trading if the customers, as unsecured
creditors, are unable to recover their payment.
The additional borrowing also increases financial risk and makes profit more sensitive to changes in
the level of operating activity.
HB2021
Audit procedures
As already noted, cash flow forecasts will need to be reviewed up to the date of audit completion to
assess the future viability of the company. This should include the following:
• Examining overdraft and other lending facilities (eg, for ‘headroom’ against existing liabilities, for
interest rates and for capital repayment dates). Build a picture of future financial commitments.
• Identifying the level of advanced payments and discuss with the directors the issue of continuing
the policy of advanced payments and the implications for fraudulent trading.
• Examining budgets and cash flow projections as part of going concern. Review to assess future
expected changes in liquidity.
• Examining lease contracts to assess the lease renewals position in order to ascertain future levels
of commitment.
(3) Database system
Audit risks
General systems issues
The nature of the fault needs to be identified ie, there may be issues with the work and or
hardware/software supplied by the consultants. Some of the problems appear to be with the people
operating the systems rather than the system itself. These are employees of the company so this
effect also needs to be assessed.
Cyber security may also be an issue as a virus was able to circumvent existing security measures.
There appear to be two control risks in the IT system:
• The maintenance and control of the database itself and the information contained therein
• The online processing of transactions
Separate controls are needed over each of these aspects.
Specific issues
Excess bookings – risks include the following:
• A system error appears to have arisen, as the system should not accept unintentional double
bookings. The level of confidence in the system is thus reduced, thereby increasing our
assessment of control risk.
• Revenue may have been double counted if two bookings have been taken.
System crashing – risks include the following:
• Loss of data is a major problem, as it not only affects operating capability but also reduces
confidence in IT controls over financial statement assertions as the database feeds into the
• There may be a risk of corruption of data as well as loss of data. This may have been a cause of
the above double bookings.
Computer virus – risks include the following:
• Loss of future data if it reoccurs
• Corruption of data
• Loss of confidentiality of information
• Risk of fraud from ‘hacking’ into system to create false bookings or false payments
Advance payments recognised as revenue:
• If payments are recognised as revenue on receipt, then revenue is overstated if payments occur in
one financial year and the flight occurs in the next financial year. The risk is that all such payments
recognised in advance have not been identified.
The key financial reporting issue is the inappropriate recognition of revenue for advance payments
by customers. While this can be corrected in the draft financial statements in the current year, it may
have also have occurred in the previous year. If material, this should be recognised as a prior period
error. Retained earnings brought forward should be adjusted and the relevant revenue should be
correctly recognised in the current year with comparatives adjusted.
HB2021

Audit procedures
The control risk relating to the IT system needs to be established. If reliance cannot be placed on the
IT system it may not be possible to test income for understatement due to lack of relevant, reliable
audit evidence. This may lead to a modified audit opinion on the basis of insufficient evidence
(limitation of scope).
Regarding online processing, tests of controls with respect to the following may be relevant:
• Access controls, passwords (eg, review logs of access and user authorisation)
• Programming (review programming faults discovered, actions taken to amend faults,
reoccurrence of same faults)
• Firewall (consider response to virus and why firewall failed to detect it; procedures for updating
firewalls; best practice review)
• Use of CAATs to interrogate the system’s ability to detect and prevent errors and fraud
Regarding database itself:
• Review procedures manuals for database management system. This is the software that creates,
operates and maintains the database.
• Review data independence procedures (the data should be independent of the application such
that the structure of the data can be changed independently of the application).
• Consider the wider database control environment. This includes the general controls and who has
access to change particular aspects of the database.
• General controls might include: a standard approach for development and maintenance of
application programs; access rights; data resource management; data security, cyber-security and
data recovery.
HB2021
HB2021

Chapter 8
The statutory audit: finalisation,

review and reporting
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Review and audit completion
2 Subsequent events
3 Going concern
4 Comparatives
5 Written representations
6 The auditor’s report
7 Other reporting responsibilities
8 Appendix (Illustrations)
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Appraise the appropriateness of the going concern basis of accounting and evaluate relevant
going concern disclosures
• Appraise and assess the significance of events after the reporting period
• Evaluate, quantitatively and qualitatively, using analytical procedures and appropriate data
analysis tools, the results and conclusions obtained from audit procedures
• Conclude and justify the nature of the report on an audit engagement, and formulate an opinion
for a statutory audit, which are consistent with the results of the audit evidence gathered
• Compose suitable extracts for reports (for example any report to the management or those
charged with governance issued as part of the engagement)
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 15(a)–(e)
8

of this chapter.

1 Review and audit Approach If this is examined, N/A

completion Most of this is you will need to
In order to be revision from your refer to the
ready to conclude previous studies so appropriate auditing
the audit, there are run through it again standard to ensure
several completion with your auditing that each of these
standards that the standards open completion tasks
auditor must book in front of you. has been addressed.
address. Stop and think
Note how AI and
RPA can be applied
to this completion
stage.
2 Subsequent Approach You should always IQ1: Subsequent

events This is also revision be alert to the risk events
This section should so make sure you that subsequent To answer this
serve as a remember the key events could derail question, you will
reminder that messages. the audit at any need to ask yourself
there will always point so read the when the oil leak
Stop and think scenario carefully.
be events that actually took place.
could affect the Do you remember
audit regardless of this from your
when they occur. previous studies?
3 Going concern Approach Going concern can IQ2: Going concern

Confirming the Responsibilities, straddle many This is a very
going concern indicators and different disciplines practical example
status of an entity responses to going in an exam question, that requires good
is fundamental to concern issues are from the use of analytical skills as
preparing a set of all revision from your analytical well as sound logic
financial previous studies, so procedures to when deciding the
HB2021

statements: make sure you find assess viability and most appropriate
consequently, the the relevant sections qualitative responses to your
auditor needs to of ISA (UK) 570 in evaluation via the analysis.
know how to your auditing scenario all the way
assess this. standards open through to how the
book. auditor’s report
Stop and think could be affected in
various situations.
Reporting You therefore need
responsibilities are to practise questions
complex and in order to be fully
depend on how well prepared.
any going concern
issues have been
disclosed by
management – can
you remember what
to do in various
situations?
4 Comparatives Approach Comparative figures N/A

The auditor’s This will be revision are usually
responsibilities to from your previous presented as part of
audit the financial studies so make sure a set of financial
statements extend you remember statements but the
to include the where to find this requirements of ISAs
previous year’s content. (UK) 510 and 710
figures as well. may be tested by a
Stop and think scenario which
Do this year’s includes change of
comparatives match some kind (such as a
last year’s figures? new auditor or a
Should they? change in
accounting policies).
5 Written Approach These could form IQ3: Written

representations Without obtaining part of the overall representations
Another of the these evidence that the This is a good test of
auditor’s ‘pre-flight representations, the auditor needs to whether you
checks’ before auditor does not collect, so you understand (a) the
they can issue their have all the should be prepared purpose of
opinion is to evidence they need for any situations obtaining
obtain for their opinion. where representations and
representations representations (b) the process.
Stop and think might be required.
from management.
Can you remember
what happens if the
client refuses to
provide these
representations to
the auditor?
6 The auditor’s Approach There is plenty of IQ4: Forming an

report There are many scope for questions audit opinion
This is the auditor’s elements to this on the auditor’s This is a great
opportunity to section: the report report to appear in illustration of the job
explain what they structure, key audit your exam – this of the auditor –
have achieved matters, any content may also be unless you can
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 409
during the course necessary added to another explain that there is

of the engagement modifications and requirement where a problem with the
and requires great the auditor’s you need to accounting
skill and responsibilities for consider the impact treatment here,
judgement to other information. of your findings on there is a risk that
prepare. None of this is new the auditor’s report you will issue an
material but you still and/or the opinion. unmodified opinion
need to be prepared Be prepared! despite the possible
in case it is presence of
examined. accounting
Stop and think irregularities.
Reporting therefore
Can you differentiate requires strong
between situations corporate reporting
where you might knowledge in
only need to modify conjunction with
the auditor’s report your audit reporting
and those where the knowledge. Don’t
audit opinion forget about
requires modifying? materiality!
7 Other reporting Approach Questions on these N/A

responsibilities You should have topics may only
Some covered most of this represent a handful
engagements in your previous of marks, but you
require specific studies so this still need to be
reporting which should be revision. prepared to explain
you also need to the auditor’s
Stop and think responsibilities if
be familiar with.
How do you think required.
XBRL tagging fits
into the new digital
workplace?
8 Appendix Approach You need to know N/A

You need to be You covered this in which parts of the
familiar with the your previous report would need
various studies so this to be modified
modifications to should be revision. under certain
the auditor’s report situations and
Stop and think explain the reasons
under different
circumstances. Can you find each of why.
these in the auditing
standards open
book?
HB2021

1 Review and audit completion
Section overview
• Towards the end of an audit, a series of reviews and evaluations are carried out.
• This is an important aspect of quality control.
1.1 Introduction
Auditing initially may be carried out on components, with opinions being formed on elements of the
financial statements in isolation. However, it is essential that auditors step back from the detail and
assess the financial statements as a whole, based on knowledge accumulated during the audit
process. In particular, the following procedures will need to be performed at the review and
completion stage of the audit:
• Consider governance issues
• Review the financial statements
• Perform completion procedures
• Report to the board
• Prepare the auditor’s report
Review and reporting issues have been covered in the Audit and Assurance Workbook at the
Professional Level, however, there have been some substantial changes over recent years in this area
affecting the auditor’s responsibilities relating to ‘other information’ and auditor’s reports in
particular. The following ISAs (UK) are relevant to this stage of the audit:
• ISA (UK) 260 (Revised November 2019), Communication With Those Charged With Governance
• ISA (UK) 520, Analytical Procedures
• ISA (UK) 560, Subsequent Events
• ISA (UK) 570 (Revised September 2019), Going Concern
• ISA (UK) 700 (Revised January 2020), Forming an Opinion and Reporting on Financial Statements
• ISA (UK) 701 (Revised January 2020), Communicating Key Audit Matters in the Independent
Auditor’s Report
• ISA (UK) 705 (Revised June 2016), Modifications to the Opinion in the Independent Auditor’s
Report
• ISA (UK) 706 (Revised June 2016), Emphasis of Matter Paragraphs and Other Matter Paragraphs in
the Independent Auditor’s Report
• ISA (UK) 710, Comparative Information – Corresponding Figures and Comparative Financial
Statements
• ISA (UK) 720 (Revised November 2019), The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other
Information
In the remainder of this chapter we will look at a number of key aspects of these ISAs (UK) in more
detail. A summary is also provided in the technical reference at the end of the chapter.
1.2 Governance issues

1.2.1 Quality control
We have looked at the importance of quality control in Chapter 1 of this Workbook. Quality control is
an important consideration throughout the audit. In particular, for the audit of listed entities, ISA (UK)
220 (Revised November 2019), Quality Control for an Audit of Financial Statements states that the
auditor’s report should not be dated until the completion of the engagement quality control review
(ISA (UK) 220.19c).
HB2021
This includes ensuring that:
• the work has been carried out in accordance with professional and regulatory requirements;
• a proper evaluation of the firm’s independence was carried out;
• significant matters are given further consideration;
• appropriate consultations have taken place and been documented;
• where appropriate the planned work is revised;
• the work performed supports the conclusions;
• the evidence obtained supports the audit opinion;
• the objectives of the audit have been achieved; and
• the auditor’s report is appropriate in the circumstances.
In addition, under Sarbanes–Oxley, a concurring or second partner review should be performed by
another partner not associated with the audit or by an independent reviewer (see Chapter 4 for more
details of the Sarbanes–Oxley Act 2002 or SOX).
In its ‘Strategy 2018/21: Budget and Levies 2018/19 (March 2018)’ the FRC reiterated that
“promoting high audit quality and assurance” was one of its strategic priorities – this is underpinned
by its ongoing system of monitoring the quality of firms and their work, including periodic audit
quality thematic reviews on issues such as materiality (see Chapter 5).
1.2.2 Governance evidence

Important governance evidence will be obtained from the following sources:
• Written representation letters from management (see later in this chapter)
• Information about contingent liabilities and commitments (Chapter 13)
• Information about related parties (Chapter 9)
1.3 Financial statement review

1.3.1 Introduction
Once the bulk of the substantive procedures have been carried out, the auditors will have a draft set
of financial statements which should be supported by appropriate and sufficient audit evidence. At
the beginning of the end of the audit process, it is usual for the auditors to undertake an overall
review of the financial statements. This review, in conjunction with the conclusions drawn from the
other audit evidence obtained, gives the auditors a reasonable basis for their opinion on the
financial statements. It should be carried out by a senior member of the audit team, with appropriate
skills and experience.
1.3.2 Compliance with accounting regulations

The auditors should consider whether:
• the information presented in the financial statements is in accordance with local/national
statutory requirements; and
• the accounting policies employed are in accordance with accounting standards, properly
disclosed, consistently applied and appropriate to the entity.
An important consideration in assessing the presentation of the financial statements is the adequacy
of disclosure. In addition to the basic Companies Act requirements in the UK and compliance with
accounting standards, the entity may need to satisfy the requirements of the UK Corporate
Governance Code and/or Sarbanes–Oxley (SOX).
When examining the accounting policies, auditors should consider:
• policies commonly adopted in particular industries;
• policies for which there is substantial authoritative support;
• whether any departures from applicable accounting standards are necessary for the financial
statements to give a true and fair view; and
• whether the financial statements reflect the substance of the underlying transactions and not
merely their form.
HB2021

When compliance with local/national statutory requirements and accounting standards is
considered, the auditors may find it useful to use a checklist.
1.3.3 Review for consistency and reasonableness

The auditors should consider whether the financial statements are consistent with their knowledge of
the entity’s business and with the results of other audit procedures, and the manner of disclosure is
fair. The principal considerations are as follows.
• Whether the financial statements adequately reflect the information and explanations previously
obtained and conclusions previously reached during the course of the audit
• Whether the review reveals any new factors which may affect the presentation of, or disclosure in,
the financial statements
• Whether analytical procedures applied when completing the audit, such as comparing the
information in the financial statements with other pertinent data, produce results which assist in
arriving at the overall conclusion as to whether the financial statements as a whole are consistent
with their knowledge of the entity’s business
• Whether the presentation adopted in the financial statements may have been unduly influenced
by the directors’ desire to present matters in a favourable or unfavourable light
• The potential impact on the financial statements of the aggregate of uncorrected misstatements
(including those arising from bias in making accounting estimates) identified during the course of
the audit
1.3.4 Analytical procedures

In Chapter 6, we discussed how analytical procedures are used as part of the overall review
procedures at the end of an audit. The procedures may be similar to those performed at the
planning stage as risk assessment procedures but, at the end of the audit, the purpose of the
procedures is to corroborate the conclusions drawn during detailed testing. This may also involve
reviewing results derived from data analytics tools.
As at other stages, significant fluctuations and unexpected relationships must be investigated and
documented.
1.3.5 Summarising misstatements

During the course of the audit, misstatements will be discovered which may be material or
immaterial to the financial statements. It is very likely that the client will adjust the financial statements
to take account of these during the course of the audit. At the end of the audit, however, some
misstatements may still be uncorrected and the auditors will summarise these uncorrected
misstatements.
An example is provided below.
Context example: Schedule of uncorrected misstatements
SoPL SoFP SoPL SoFP

(Current period) (Current period) (Prior period) (Prior period)
Dr Cr Dr Cr Dr Cr Dr Cr
£ £ £ £ £ £ £ £
ABC Ltd
debt
(a) unprovided 10,470 10,470 4,523 4,523
Opening/
closing
inventory
(b) underval’d* 21,540 21,540 21,540 21,540
HB2021
SoPL SoFP SoPL SoFP
(Current period) (Current period) (Prior period) (Prior period)
Dr Cr Dr Cr Dr Cr Dr Cr
£ £ £ £ £ £ £ £
Closing
inventory
(c) underval’d 34,105 34,105
(d) Opening unaccrued expenses
Telephone* 453 453 453 453
Electricity* 905 905 905 905
(e) Closing unaccrued expenses
Telephone 427 427
Electricity 1,128 1,128
Obsolete
inventory
(f) write‑off 2,528 ––––– ––––– 2,528 3,211 ––––– ––––– 3,211
Total 36,093 35,463 35,463 36,093 9,092 21,540 21,540 9,092

Cancelling
items* 21,540 21,540
453 453
––––– 905 905 –––––
14,553 34,105 34,105 14,553
The summary of misstatements will list misstatements not only from the current year (adjustments (c)
and (e)) but also those in the previous year(s). This will allow misstatements to be highlighted which
are reversals of misstatements in the previous year. For example, in this instance last year’s closing
inventory was undervalued by £21,540 (adjustment (b)). Inventory in the prior year statement of
financial position should be increased (Dr) and profits increased (Cr). At the start of the current
accounting period the closing inventory adjustment is reversed out so that the net effect on the
cumulative position is zero. This also applies to the adjustment to last year’s accrued expenses
(adjustment (d)). Cumulative misstatements may also be shown, which have increased from year to
year, for example adjustments (a) and (f). It is normal to show both the statement of financial position
and the effect on profit or loss, as in the example given here. This may also be extended to the entire
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
1.3.6 Evaluating the effect of misstatements

ISA (UK) 450 (Revised June 2016), Evaluation of Misstatements Identified During the Audit states that
the objective of the auditor is to evaluate:
(a) the effect of identified misstatements on the audit, and
(b) the effect of uncorrected misstatements, if any, on the financial statements. (ISA (UK) 450.3)
All misstatements identified during the audit should be accumulated, other than those that are
clearly trivial (ISA (UK) 450.5). (The ISA explains that ‘clearly trivial’ does not mean the same as ‘not
material’; it implies something of a wholly different – smaller – order of magnitude.) The auditor must
document any threshold used to define what has been considered to be clearly trivial.
HB2021

The aggregate of uncorrected misstatements comprises the following:
(a) Specific misstatements identified by the auditors, including the net effect of uncorrected
misstatements identified during the audit of the previous period if they affect the current
period’s financial statements
(b) Their best estimate of other misstatements which cannot be quantified specifically
ISA (UK) 450 distinguishes between the following:
• Factual misstatements – about which there is no doubt
• Judgemental misstatements – differences arising from judgements of management including
those concerning recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure in the financial
statements (including the selection or application of accounting policies) that the auditor
considers unreasonable or inappropriate
• Projected misstatements – the auditor’s best estimate of misstatements in populations, involving
the projection of misstatements identified in samples to entire populations
(ISA (UK) 450.A6)
If the auditors consider that the aggregate of misstatements may be material, they must consider
reducing audit risk by extending audit procedures or requesting management to adjust the financial
statements (which management may wish to do anyway).
If the aggregate of the uncorrected misstatements that the auditors have identified approaches the
materiality level, the auditors should consider whether it is likely that undetected misstatements,
when taken with aggregated uncorrected misstatements, could exceed the materiality level. Thus, as
aggregate uncorrected misstatements approach the materiality level the auditors should consider
reducing the risk by:
• performing additional audit procedures; and
• requesting management to adjust the financial statements for identified misstatements.
The schedule will be used by the audit manager and partner to decide whether the client should be
requested to make adjustments to the financial statements to correct the misstatements.
Audits are generally very procedural and as such can be quite complex when trying to complete all
the stages in order to form an audit opinion and report it accordingly. Knowledge of the various
auditing standards here will provide a sound structure for ensuring that all the necessary elements of
the engagement have been completed.
1.4 Artificial intelligence (AI) and robotic process automation (RPA)

In Chapter 5 we discussed the advances in audit data analytics and how artificial intelligence (AI) and
robotic process automation (RPA) have helped auditors to increase the scope, detail and accuracy of
testing large populations of data. This software can even be programmed to summarise findings and
prioritise the results of testing, making the process of evaluation more efficient as the parameters
that are used to identify items of significance can now be programmed with much more subtlety (for
example, the patterns of behaviours which may be indicative of fraudulent activity within an account
category such as expenses claims).
2 Subsequent events
Section overview
Auditors must review events after the reporting period and determine whether those events impact
on the year-end financial statements.
HB2021
2.1 Events after the reporting period
In accordance with ISA (UK) 560, Subsequent Events, subsequent events include:
• events occurring between the period end and the date of the auditor’s report; and
• facts discovered after the date of the auditor’s report.
IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period deals with the treatment in financial statement of events,
favourable and unfavourable, occurring after the period end. It identifies two types of event:
(a) Those that provide further evidence of conditions that existed at the period end
(b) Those that are indicative of conditions that arose subsequent to the period end
The extent of the auditor’s responsibility for subsequent events depends on when the event is
identified.
Note: While ISA (UK) 560 does not deal with matters relating to the auditor’s responsibilities for other
information obtained after the date of the auditor’s report which are addressed in ISA (UK) 720
(Revised June 2016), The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other Information, this type of other
information may bring to light a subsequent event relevant to the application of ISA (UK) 560.
2.2 Events occurring up to the date of the auditor’s report

The auditor must perform procedures designed to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence that
all events up to the date of the auditor’s report that may require adjustment of, or disclosure in, the
financial statements have been identified. In summary, these procedures consist of making enquiries
of management about changes or risks, and inspecting relevant documentation (such as board
minutes and any internally available financial information such as management accounts).
These procedures should be applied to any matters examined during the audit which may be
susceptible to change after the period end, in addition to tests on specific related transactions eg,
cut-off tests.
The ISA lists procedures to identify subsequent events which may require adjustment or disclosure.
They should be performed as near as possible to the date of the auditor’s report.
Reviews and updates of these procedures may be required, depending on the length of the time
between the procedures and the signing of the auditor’s report and the susceptibility of the items to
change over time.
When the auditor becomes aware of events which materially affect the financial statements, the
auditor should consider whether such events are properly accounted for and adequately disclosed
in the financial statements.
2.3 Facts discovered after the date of the auditor’s report but before the financial
statements are issued
The financial statements are the management’s responsibility. They should therefore inform the
auditors of any material subsequent events between the date of the auditor’s report and the date
the financial statements are issued. The auditors do not have any obligation to perform procedures,
or make inquiries regarding the financial statements after the date of their report.
If, after the date of the auditor’s report but before the financial statements are issued, the auditor
becomes aware of a fact that, had it been known to the auditor at the date of the auditor’s report,
may have caused the auditor to amend the auditor’s report, the auditor shall:
• Discuss the matter with the management;
• Consider whether the financial statements need amendment; and if so
• Inquire how management intends to address the matter in the financial statements.
When the financial statements are amended, the auditors shall do the following:
• Extend the procedures discussed above to the date of their new report
• Carry out any other appropriate procedures
• Issue a new auditor’s report dated no earlier than the date of approval of the amended financial
statements
HB2021

If the auditor believes the financial statements need to be amended, and management does not
amend them:
• If the auditor’s report has not yet been released to the entity, the auditor shall modify the opinion
in line with ISA 705 and then provide the auditor’s report.
• If the auditor’s report has already been released to the entity, the auditor shall notify those who
are ultimately responsible for the entity (the management or possibly a holding company in a
group) not to issue the financial statements or auditor’s reports before the amendments are
made. If the financial statements are issued anyway, the auditor shall take action to seek to
prevent reliance on the auditor’s report. The action taken will depend on the auditor’s legal rights
and obligations and the advice of the auditor’s lawyer.
2.4 Facts discovered after the financial statements have been issued
Auditors have no obligations to perform procedures or make inquiries regarding the financial
statements after they have been issued. In the UK, this includes the period up until the financial
statements are laid before members at the annual general meeting (AGM).
When, after the financial statements have been issued, the auditor becomes aware of a fact which
existed at the date of the auditor’s report and which, if known at that date, may have caused the
auditor to modify the auditor’s report, the auditor should consider whether the financial statements
need revision, discuss the matter with management, and take action as appropriate in the
circumstances.
The ISA (UK) gives the appropriate procedures which the auditors should undertake when
management revises the financial statements.
• Carry out the audit procedures necessary in the circumstances.
• Review the steps taken by management to ensure that anyone in receipt of the previously issued
financial statements together with the auditor’s report thereon is informed of the situation.
• Issue a new report on the revised financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 560.15)
The new auditor’s report should include an emphasis of matter paragraph or other matter
paragraph referring to a note to the financial statements that more extensively discusses the reason
for the revision of the previously issued financial statements and to the earlier report issued by the
auditor.
(ISA (UK) 560.16)
Where local regulations allow the auditor to restrict the audit procedures on the financial statements
to the effects of the subsequent event which caused the revision, the new auditor’s report should
contain a statement to that effect.
Where management does not revise the financial statements but the auditors feel they should be
revised, or if management does not intend to take steps to ensure anyone in receipt of the previously
issued financial statements is informed of the situation, the auditors should consider taking steps to
prevent reliance on their report. The actions taken will depend on the auditor’s legal rights and
obligations and legal advice received. In the UK, the auditor has a legal right to make statements at
the AGM.
In the UK, where the auditor becomes aware of a fact relevant to the audited financial statements
which did not exist at the date of the auditor’s report, there are no statutory provisions for revising
the financial statements. In this situation, the auditor discusses with those charged with governance
whether they should withdraw the financial statements. Where those charged with governance
decide not to do so, the auditor may wish to take advice on whether it might be possible to withdraw
their report. In either case, other possible courses of action include those charged with governance
or the auditors making a statement at the AGM.
(ISA (UK) 560.A18-1-3)
Gaining full visibility of the timescales involved in a scenario is essential for the satisfactory resolution
of a requirement. This will therefore help you fully visualise the problem so it can be resolved.
HB2021
Interactive question 1: Subsequent events
You are the auditor of Extraction, an oil company. You have recently concluded the audit for the year
ended 31 December 20X7 and the auditor’s report was signed on 28 March 20X8. The financial
statements were also authorised for issue on this date. On 1 April, you are informed that the
company has identified a major oil leak which has caused significant environmental damage.
Requirement
Identify and explain the implications of the information regarding the oil spill.
3 Going concern
Section overview
• The auditor will test whether the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate to ensure it
applies to the audit client.
• Financial risk is indicated by the following circumstances:
– Financial indications
– Operating indications
– Other indications
3.1 Reporting consequences

If an entity is a going concern it is ordinarily viewed as continuing in business for the foreseeable
future with neither the intention nor the necessity of liquidation, ceasing trading or seeking
protection from creditors pursuant to laws or regulations. Accordingly, assets and liabilities are
recorded on the basis that the entity will be able to realise its assets and discharge its liabilities in the
normal course of business.
However, if management determines that it intends to, or has no realistic alternative but to, liquidate
the entity or cease trading, then the financial statements should not be prepared on the going
concern basis. This is specified by IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period. The entity should instead
adopt a basis of preparation that is considered more appropriate in the circumstances, although no
specific guidance is provided in IAS 10. In practice, the most obvious method is break-up or
liquidation basis. Specific accounting consequences will include the need to consider the following:
• Impairment of assets
• Recognition of provisions eg, for onerous contracts
Disclosure of the change of basis of preparation should be provided in accordance with IAS 1,
Preparation of Financial Statements. In addition, the directors of listed companies must report
specifically on the going concern status of the company under the UK Corporate Governance Code
(covered in Chapter 4). They must include a detailed ‘viability statement’ within the Strategic Report,
providing a broad assessment of the entity’s solvency, liquidity, risk management and viability.
3.2 Financial risk

The possibility of a business not being a going concern is one of the financial risks to which a
business is exposed. Financial risks are those risks arising from the financial activities of the company,
for example:
• Raising capital
• The capital structure
• Financial consequences of an operation eg, operating in an overseas environment
HB2021

As a consequence of the original capital structure or subsequent operation, there may be a risk due
to a shortage of finance or an inability to manage finance in accordance with a company’s day to day
requirements.
ISA (UK) 570 (Revised September 2019), Going Concern identifies events and conditions that may
cast doubt about the entity’s ability to use the going concern basis of accounting, under the
headings of financial, operating and other (ISA (UK) 570, para. A3).
The significance of such indications can often be mitigated by other factors, for example:
(a) the effect of an entity being unable to make its normal debt repayments may be
counterbalanced by management’s plans to maintain adequate cash flows by alternative means,
such as by disposal of assets, rescheduling of loan repayments, or obtaining additional capital.
(b) the loss of a principal supplier may be mitigated by the availability of a suitable alternative
source of supply.
3.3 ISA (UK) 570, Going Concern

The following is a summary of the key points from the revised ISA (UK).
Management’s responsibility
(a) ISA (UK) 570 states that when preparing accounts, management should make an explicit
assessment of the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.
(b) When management are making the assessment, the following factors should be considered:
(1) The degree of uncertainty about the events or conditions being assessed increases
significantly the further into the future the assessment is made.
(2) Judgements are made on the basis of the information available at the time.
(3) Judgements are affected by the size and complexity of the entity, the nature and condition
of the business and the degree to which it is affected by external factors.
Auditor’s responsibilities
(a) When planning and performing audit procedures and in evaluating the results thereof, the
auditor shall consider whether there are events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on
the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.
(b) The auditor’s objectives are as follows:
(1) To obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding, and conclude on, the
appropriateness of management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting
(2) To conclude, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists
related to events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to
continue as a going concern
(3) To report in accordance with ISA (UK) 570
(ISA (UK) 570.9)
(c) The auditor shall remain alert for evidence of events or conditions and related business risks
which may cast doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern throughout the audit.
If such events or conditions are identified, the auditor shall consider whether they affect the
auditor’s assessments of the risk of material misstatement.
(d) Management may already have made a preliminary assessment of going concern. If so, the
auditors would review potential problems management had identified, and management’s plans
to resolve them. Alternatively auditors may identify problems as a result of discussions with
management.
(e) The auditor shall evaluate management’s assessment of the entity’s ability to continue as a going
concern maintaining professional scepticism and an awareness of the risk of management bias
throughout the audit. The auditors shall consider:
(1) the process management used and the robustness of the assessment of the company’s
risks;
(2) the assumptions on which management’s assessment is based; and
(3) management’s plans for future action.
HB2021
(f) If management’s assessment covers a period of less than 12 months from the end of the
reporting period, the auditor shall ask management to extend its assessment period to 12
months from the end of the reporting period. In the UK, if the directors have not considered a
year from the date of approval of the financial statements and not disclosed that fact, the auditor
shall disclose it in the auditor’s report.
(ISA (UK) 570.14-1)
(g) Management shall not need to make a detailed assessment if the entity has a history of
profitable operations and ready access to financial resources. In this case, the auditor’s
evaluation of the assessment may be made without performing detailed procedures if sufficient
evidence is available from other audit procedures. In the UK, the extent of the auditor’s
procedures is influenced primarily by the excess of the financial resources available to the entity
over the financial resources that it requires.
(ISA (UK) 570.A8-1)
(h) The auditor shall inquire of management as to its knowledge of events or conditions beyond the
period of assessment used by management that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability
to continue as a going concern.
(ISA (UK) 570.A6-1)
As the degree of uncertainty increases as an event or condition gets further into the future, the
indications of going concern issues would need to be significant before the auditor would consider it
necessary to take any further action based on this information. The auditor’s responsibility to carry
out procedures to identify issues beyond the period of assessment would normally be limited to
inquiries of management.
(ISA (UK) 570.A6-2)
Additional audit procedures
(a) When events or conditions have been identified which may cast significant doubt on the entity’s
ability to continue as a going concern, the auditor shall do the following:
(1) Evaluate management’s plans for future actions based on its going concern assessment
(2) Where the entity has prepared a cash flow forecast and analysis of this is significant in the
evaluation of management’s plans for future action:
• Evaluate the reliability of the underlying data
• Determine whether there is adequate support for the assumptions underlying the
forecast
(3) Consider whether any additional facts or information have become available since the date
of management’s assessment
(4) Seek written representations from management regarding its plans for future action and the
feasibility of these plans
(b) When questions arise on the appropriateness of the going concern assumption, some of the
normal audit procedures carried out by the auditors may take on an additional significance.
Auditors may also have to carry out additional procedures or update information obtained
earlier. The ISA (UK) lists various procedures which the auditors shall carryout in this context.
(1) Analyse and discuss cash flow, profit and other relevant forecasts with management.
(2) Analyse and discuss the entity’s latest available interim financial statements.
(3) Read the terms of debentures and loan agreements and determine whether they have
been breached.
(4) Read minutes of the meetings of shareholders, the board of directors and important
committees for reference to financing difficulties.
(5) Inquire of the entity’s lawyer regarding litigation and claims.
(6) Confirm the existence, legality and enforceability of arrangements to provide or maintain
financial support with related and third parties.
(7) Assess the financial ability of such parties to provide additional funds.
(8) Evaluate the entity’s plans to deal with unfulfilled customer orders.
(9) Perform audit procedures regarding subsequent events to identify those that either mitigate
or otherwise affect the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.
HB2021

(10) Confirm the existence, terms, and adequacy of borrowing facilities.
(11) Obtain and review reports of regulatory actions.
(12) Determine the adequacy of support for any planned disposals of assets.
(c) Based on the audit evidence obtained, the auditor shall determine if, in the auditor’s judgement,
a material uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that, alone or in aggregate, may cast
significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern. The auditor must
document the extent of their concern (if any) about the entity’s ability to continue as a going
concern.
Going concern – auditor conclusions and reporting
Use of the going concern basis of accounting appropriate and no material uncertainty exists
Where the use of the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate and no material uncertainty
exists, in the UK the auditor must:
• Determine whether a key audit matter (KAM) must be disclosed in respect of going concern, and
if so include the KAM in the auditor’s report
• Include a separate section in the auditor’s report under the heading ‘Conclusions relating to
Going Concern’. This should:
– describe the responsibilities of those charged with governance relating to the use of the going
concern basis of accounting and disclosure of material uncertainties;
– describe the auditor’s responsibilities including the auditor’s reporting responsibilities if the
auditor concludes that management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting is not
appropriate or that management has not disclosed material uncertainties over a period of at
least 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements;
– for entities which apply the UK Corporate Governance Code, report by exception as to whether
the auditor has anything material to add regarding the directors’ statement about going
concern; and
– in other cases, to report by exception as to whether the auditor concludes that management’s
use of the going concern basis is not appropriate or that management has not disclosed
material uncertainties over a period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of the
(ISA (UK) 570.21-1)
Use of going concern basis of accounting appropriate but a material uncertainty exists
(a) The auditor shall determine whether the financial statements:
(1) adequately disclose the events and conditions that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s
ability to continue as a going concern and management’s plans to deal with these; and
(2) disclose clearly that there is a material uncertainty which may cast significant doubt about
the company’s ability to continue as a going concern.
(b) If adequate disclosure is made in the financial statements, the auditor shall express an
unmodified opinion but include a separate section under the heading ‘Material Uncertainty
Related to Going Concern’. This must draw attention to the note in the financial statements that
discloses the matter and must state that these events or conditions indicate that a material
uncertainty exists that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going
concern and that the auditor’s opinion is not modified in this respect.
(ISA (UK) 570.22 and Appendix: Illustration 1)
See Appendix Illustration 6.
(c) If adequate disclosure is not made in the financial statements, the auditor shall express a
qualified or adverse opinion, as appropriate. In the Basis for Qualified or Adverse Opinion
section of the auditor’s report the auditor must state that there is a material uncertainty which
may cast significant doubt on the company’s ability to continue as a going concern and that the
financial statements do not adequately disclose this.
(ISA (UK) 570.23)
HB2021
Management unwilling to make or extend its assessment
• If management is unwilling to make or extend its assessment when requested to do so by the
auditor, the auditor shall consider the need to modify the auditor’s report as a result of the
inability to obtain sufficient appropriate evidence.
Use of going concern assumption is inappropriate
• If the going concern basis has been used but in the auditor’s judgement this is not appropriate,
the auditor shall express an adverse opinion.
Communication with those charged with governance
Unless all those charged with governance are involved with managing the entity the auditor must
communicate with those charged with governance events or conditions that cast significant doubt on
the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern, including the following details:
• Whether the events or conditions constitute a material uncertainty
• Whether management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate
• The adequacy of related disclosure
• Where applicable the implications for the auditor’s report
(ISA (UK) 570.25)
Significant delay
If there is a significant delay in the approval of the financial statements the auditor must enquire as to
the reasons for this. Where it is believed that the delay could be related to going concern issues the
auditor must perform additional audit procedures and consider the effect on the auditor’s conclusion
regarding the existence of a material uncertainty.
When evaluating a company’s going concern status, it is rarely a case of ‘yes’ or ‘no’ but instead is
more likely to be ‘maybe’ and ‘it depends’. You will need to identify those factors from the scenario
that point you in the right direction and reach an overall conclusion about this using your
professional judgement.
3.4 Other guidance

The responsibility for assessing the company’s ability to continue as a going concern and for
disclosing significant uncertainties rests with the directors. The Financial Reporting Council (FRC) has
published Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business
Reporting in September 2014 which replaces an Update for Directors: Going Concern and Liquidity
Risk. This is primarily directed at companies subject to the UK Corporate Governance Code and aims
to bring together elements of best practice for risk management. Appendix A specifically deals with
going concern and provides guidance on how to determine whether to adopt the going concern
basis, how to determine whether there are material uncertainties and relevant disclosures.
In April 2016 FRC issued Guidance on the Going Concern Basis of Accounting and Reporting on
Solvency and Liquidity Risk. This provides guidance to directors of companies that do not apply the
UK Corporate Governance Code. This includes principles for best practice. It summarises the main
requirements as follows:
Main requirement Micro-entity Small Large or

company medium-
sized
company
Financial statements
Assessment of appropriateness of the going   

concern basis of accounting
HB2021

Main requirement Micro-entity Small Large or
company medium-
sized
company
Disclosure when there are material uncertainties × × ×

or when the company does not prepare financial
statements on a going concern basis of
accounting
Additional disclosures that may be required to ×  

give a true and fair view
Other relevant financial statement disclosures × × 
Strategic report
The strategic report must contain a description of × × 

the principal risks and uncertainties facing the
company
Note: In June 2012, the Sharman Inquiry issued its Final Report and Recommendations. This includes
recommendations regarding going concern assessment and disclosure (see Chapter 4).
Interactive question 2: Going concern

You are the senior on the audit of Truckers Ltd whose principal activities are road transport and
warehousing services, and the repair of commercial vehicles.
You have been provided with extracts from the draft accounts for the year ended 31 October 20X5.
Draft 20X5 Actual 20X4

£’000 £’000
Summary statement of profit or loss
Revenue 10,971 11,560
Cost of sales (10,203) (10,474)
Gross profit 768 1,086
Administrative expenses (782) (779)
Interest payable and similar charges (235) (185)
Net (loss) profit (249) 122
Summary statement of financial position
Non-current assets 5,178 4,670
Current assets
Inventory (parts and consumables) 95 61
Receivables 2,975 2,369
3,070 2,430
Current liabilities
Bank loan 250 –
Overdraft 1,245 913
Trade payables 1,513 1,245
Lease obligations 207 –
HB2021
Draft 20X5 Actual 20X4
£’000 £’000
Other payables 203 149
3,418 2,307
Non-current liabilities
Bank loan 750 1,000
Lease obligations 473 ––––––
1,223 1,000
Net assets 3,607 3,793
You have been informed by the managing director that the fall in revenue is due to the following
factors:
• The loss, in July, of a longstanding customer to a competitor
• A decline in trade in the repair of commercial vehicles
Due to the reduction in the repairs business, the company has decided to close the workshop and
sell the equipment and spares inventory. No entries resulting from this decision are reflected in the
draft accounts.
During the year, the company replaced a number of vehicles, funding them by a combination of
leasing and an increased overdraft facility. The facility is to be reviewed in January 20X6 after the
audited accounts are available.
The draft accounts show a loss for 20X5 but the forecasts indicate a return to profitability in 20X6, as
the managing director is optimistic about generating additional revenue from new contracts.
Requirements
2.1 State the circumstances particular to Truckers Ltd which may indicate that the company is not a
going concern. Explain why these circumstances give cause for concern.
2.2 Describe the audit procedures to be performed in respect of going concern at Truckers Ltd.
4 Comparatives
Section overview
• ISA (UK) 710 provides guidance on corresponding figures and comparative financial statements.
• The auditor should obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence that the corresponding figures
meet the requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework.
4.1 ISA (UK) 710, Comparative Information

ISA (UK) 710, Comparative Information – Corresponding Figures and Comparative Financial
Statements establishes standards and provides guidance on the auditor’s responsibilities regarding
comparatives.
Comparatives are presented differently under different countries’ financial reporting frameworks.
Generally comparatives can be defined as corresponding amounts and other disclosures for the
preceding financial reporting period(s), presented for comparative purposes. Because of these
variations in countries’ approach to comparatives, the ISA refers to the following frameworks and
methods of presentation.
HB2021

Corresponding figures are amounts and other disclosures for the prior period included as an integral
part of the current period financial statements, and are intended to be read only in relation to the
amounts and other disclosures relating to the current period (referred to as ‘current period figures’).
The level of detail presented in the corresponding amounts and disclosures is dictated primarily by
its relevance to the current period figures. This is the usual approach in the UK.
Comparative financial statements are amounts and other disclosures for the prior period included
for comparison with the financial statements of the current period but, if audited, are referred to in
the auditor’s opinion. The level of information included in those comparative financial statements is
comparable with that of the financial statements of the current period.
Comparatives are presented in compliance with the relevant financial reporting framework. The
essential audit reporting differences are that:
• for corresponding figures, the auditor’s report only refers to the financial statements of the
current period; and
• for comparative financial statements, the auditor’s report refers to each period for which financial
statements are presented.
ISA (UK) 710 provides guidance on the auditor’s responsibilities for comparatives (the audit
procedures are essentially the same for both approaches) and for reporting on them under the two
frameworks. We will concentrate on corresponding figures, as this is the approach usually adopted in
the UK.

The auditor must obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence that the comparative information
meets the requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework.
Audit procedures performed on the comparative information are usually limited to checking that the
comparative information has been correctly reported and is appropriately classified. Auditors must
assess whether the following are true:
• Accounting policies used for the comparative information are consistent with those of the current
period or whether appropriate adjustments and/or disclosures have been made.
• Comparative information agrees with the amounts and other disclosures presented in the prior
period or whether appropriate adjustments and/or disclosures have been made. In the UK and
Ireland this will include checking whether related opening balances in the accounting records
were brought forward correctly.
If the auditor becomes aware of a possible material misstatement in the comparative information
while performing the current period audit, then additional audit procedures should be performed to
obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence to determine whether a material misstatement exists.
Written representations are required for all periods referred to in the auditor’s opinion and specific
representations are also required regarding any restatement made to correct a material
misstatement in prior period financial statements that affect the comparative information. In the case
of corresponding figures representations are requested for the current period only because the
auditor’s opinion is on those financial statements which include corresponding figures.
When the financial statements of the prior period:
• have been audited by other auditors, or
• were not audited,
then the incoming auditors must assess whether the corresponding figures meet the conditions
specified above and also follow the guidance in ISA (UK) 510 (Revised June 2016), Initial Audit
Engagements – Opening Balances.
4.3 Reporting
When the comparatives are presented as corresponding figures, the auditor should issue an
auditor’s report in which the comparatives are not specifically identified because the auditor’s
opinion is on the current period financial statements as a whole, including the corresponding figures.
HB2021
The auditor’s report will only make any specific reference to corresponding figures in the
circumstances described below.
(a) When the auditor’s report on the prior period, as previously issued, included a qualified opinion,
disclaimer of opinion, or adverse opinion and the matter which gave rise to the modification is
unresolved:
(1) if the effects or possible effects of the matter on the current period’s figures are material, the
auditor’s opinion on the current period’s financial statements should be modified and the
basis for modification paragraph of the report should refer to both periods in the
description of the matter; or
(2) in other cases the opinion on the current period’s figures should be modified and the basis
for modification paragraph should explain that the modification is due to the effects or
possible effects of the unresolved matter on the comparability of the current period’s figures
and the corresponding figures.
(b) In performing the audit of the current period financial statements, the auditors, in certain unusual
circumstances, may become aware of a material misstatement that affects the prior period
financial statements on which an unmodified report has been previously issued. If the prior
period financial statements have not been revised and reissued, and the corresponding figures
have not been properly restated and/or appropriate disclosures have not been made, the
auditor shall express a qualified opinion or an adverse opinion in the report on the current
period financial statements, modified with respect to the corresponding figures included
therein.
4.4 Incoming auditors: additional requirements

When the prior period financial statements were audited by other auditors, in some countries the
incoming auditors can refer to the predecessor auditor’s report on the corresponding figures in the
incoming auditor’s report for the current period.
When the auditor decides to refer to another auditor, the incoming auditor’s report should indicate:
• that the financial statements of the prior period were audited by the predecessor auditor;
• the type of opinion expressed by the predecessor auditor and, if the opinion was modified, the
reasons therefore; and
• the date of that report.
In the UK, the existing auditor does not make reference to another auditor in their report.
The situation is slightly different if the prior period financial statements were not audited.
When the prior period financial statements are not audited, the incoming auditor must state in the
auditor’s report that the corresponding figures are unaudited.
However, the inclusion of such a statement does not relieve the auditors of the requirement to
perform appropriate procedures regarding opening balances of the current period. If there is
insufficient evidence about corresponding figures or inadequate disclosures, the auditor should
consider the implications for their report.
In situations where the incoming auditor identifies that the corresponding figures are materially
misstated, the auditor should request management to revise the corresponding figures or, if
management refuses to do so, appropriately modify the report.
Note: In the UK in accordance with Companies Act 2006 a predecessor auditor must allow the
successor auditor access to all relevant information in respect of the audit, including relevant working
papers.
HB2021

5 Written representations
Section overview
• Written representations are normally obtained towards the end of the audit as a letter written by
management and addressed to the auditor.
• Where there is doubt as to the reliability of written representations or if management refuse to
provide representations, the auditor will need to reassess the level of assurance obtained from
this source of evidence.
5.1 Representations
ISA (UK) 580 (Updated January 2020), Written Representations covers this area and states that the
objectives of the auditor are as follows:
• To obtain written representations from management and, where appropriate, those charged with
governance that they believe that they have fulfilled their responsibility for the preparation of the
financial statements and for the completeness of the information provided to the auditor.
• To support other audit evidence relevant to the financial statements or specific assertions in the
• To respond appropriately to the representations or if representations are not provided.
5.2 Management from whom written representations are requested

”The auditor shall request written representations from management with appropriate
responsibilities for the financial statements and knowledge of the matters concerned.”
(ISA (UK) 580.9)
ISA (UK) 580 requires the auditor to determine the appropriate individuals from whom to seek
written representations. In most cases this is likely to be management, as they would be expected to
have sufficient knowledge of the way in which the entity’s financial statements have been prepared.
However, the ISA goes on to point out that in circumstances where others are responsible for the
financial statements, for example those charged with governance, then they should be requested to
provide the representations.
In the UK, where written representations are critical to obtaining sufficient, appropriate evidence they
should be provided by those charged with governance rather than simply the entity’s management.
(In the UK those charged with governance are responsible for the preparation of the financial
statements.)
The ISA emphasises the need for management to make informed representations. In some cases the
auditor may request that management confirms that it has made appropriate inquiries to enable it to
do so.
5.3 Written representations

5.3.1 Management’s responsibilities
ISA 580 specifies a number of general representations which management must provide.
These are as follows:
• That management has fulfilled its responsibility for the preparation and presentation of the
financial statements as set out in the terms of the audit engagement.
• Whether the financial statements are prepared and presented in accordance with the applicable
financial reporting framework.
• That management has provided the auditor with all the relevant information.
• That all transactions have been recorded and are reflected in the financial statements.
• A description of management’s responsibilities.
HB2021
Notes
1 In the UK management may include qualifying language to the effect that the representations are
made to the best of their knowledge and belief.
2 In the UK the representation that all transactions have been recorded and reflected in the
financial statements may be modified, for example to state that all transactions that may have a
material effect on the financial statements have been recorded.
5.3.2 Other written representations

Other written representations may be required regarding specific issues. These may be required due
to the provisions of other ISAs (UK) (a list is given in Appendix 1 of ISA (UK) 580) or to support other
audit evidence. In particular, written representations may be sought where sufficient, appropriate
evidence cannot be obtained independently. This might be the case where an assertion is affected
by judgement or management intent. For example, management intent would be an important factor
in the valuation basis used to value investments.
However, the ISA stresses that written representations do not provide sufficient, appropriate audit
evidence on their own. The fact that management has provided reliable written representations does
not affect the nature and extent of other audit evidence that the auditor obtains.
The auditor may also consider it necessary to obtain other representations about the following.
• Whether the selection and application of accounting policies are appropriate
• Whether the following have been recognised, measured and presented (where relevant):
– Plans or intentions that may affect the carrying value or classification of assets and liabilities
– Liabilities, both actual and contingent
– Title to, or control over, assets, the liens or encumbrances on assets, and assets pledged as
collateral
– Aspects of laws, regulations and contractual agreements that may affect the financial
statements
• That management has communicated to the auditor all deficiencies in internal control of which
management is aware
5.3.3 Threshold amount

The ISA (UK) allows for the possibility that the auditor may agree a ‘threshold amount’ above which
matters cannot be regarded as clearly trivial.
5.4 Date of written representations

“The date of the written representations shall be as near as practicable to, but not after, the date of
the auditor’s report on the financial statements. The written representations shall be for all the
financial statements and periods referred to in the auditor’s report.”
(ISA (UK) 580.14)
Because written representations are audit evidence, the auditor’s report cannot be dated before the
date of the written representations.
Where a representation about a specific issue has been obtained during the course of the audit the
auditor may request an updated written representation.
5.5 Form of written representations

“The written representation shall be in the form of a representation letter addressed to the auditor. If
law or regulation requires management to make written public statements about its responsibilities
and the auditor determines that such statements provide some or all of the representations required
by paragraphs 10 or 11 (covered in paragraph 5.3.1 above), the relevant matters covered by such
statements need not be included in the representation letter.”
(ISA (UK) 580.15)
HB2021

Appendix 2 of ISA (UK) 580 provides an illustrative example of a representation letter. It is not a
standard letter, and representations will vary from one period to the next and from one company to
another.
5.6 Doubts as to reliability

Where the auditor has concerns about the competence, integrity and ethical values of the
management, the auditor must consider the effect this will have on the reliability of both oral and
written representations.
In particular, if written representations are inconsistent with other audit evidence the auditor will
need to perform audit procedures in an attempt to resolve the matter. If the situation remains
unresolved, the auditor will need to consider the potential effect on the audit opinion.
Where the auditor concludes that representations about management’s responsibilities regarding
the preparation and presentation of financial statements and information provided to the auditor are
not reliable, the audit opinion will be a disclaimer.
5.7 Written representations not provided

ISA 580 requires the following procedures to be followed where written representations are not
provided.
• Discuss the matter with management
• Re-evaluate the integrity of management and evaluate the effect that this may have on the
reliability of representations (oral and written) and evidence in general
• Take appropriate actions, including determining the possible effect on the audit opinion
Where management does not provide representations about management’s responsibilities
regarding the preparation and presentation of financial statements and information provided to the
auditor, the audit opinion will be a disclaimer.
Interactive question 3: Written representations

You are an audit manager reviewing the completed audit file of Leaf Oil.
(1) There have been no events subsequent to the period end requiring adjustment in the financial
statements.
(2) The company has a policy of revaluing properties on an annual basis. A large revaluation gain
has been recorded for two properties in the year, on the basis that the directors believe that the
property market is going to boom next year. However, the directors have not provided
supporting evidence for the revaluation, and a survey of business property values in the area
does not show any increase.
(3) The directors confirm that the company owns 75% of the newly formed company, Subsidiary, at
the year end.
(4) The directors confirmed that the 500 gallons of oil in Warehouse B belong to Leaf Oil.
Requirement
Comment on whether you would expect to see these matters referred to in the written
representation letter.
HB2021
6 The auditor’s report
Section overview
• Auditors must provide clear and understandable auditor’s reports on the financial statements
audited.
• As well as the standard auditor’s report, the wording of the report may be changed to express a
modified opinion, or an emphasis of matter or other matter paragraph may be added to the
report.
• Listed company auditor’s reports include a description of key audit matters.
• Modifications result either from material misstatements (disagreements) in the financial
statements or from an inability to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence (limitation on
scope).
• The auditor’s report must include a separate section with a heading ‘Other Information’.
• Auditors must form, and then critically appraise, their audit opinion on the financial statements.
• Auditor’s reports can be made available electronically; in this situation the auditor must ensure
that their report is not misrepresented.
6.1 The standard unmodified auditor’s report

ISA (UK) 700 (Revised January 2020) states that the auditor’s report must contain the following:
(a) Title
The term ‘independent auditor’ is usually used in the title to distinguish the auditor’s report from
reports issued by others.
(ISA (UK) 700.21)
(b) Addressee
In the UK the Companies Act 2006 requires the auditor to report to the company’s members.
(ISA (UK) 700.22)
(c) Auditor’s opinion
This is now required to be the first section of the auditor’s report. It must have the heading
‘Opinion’ and in the UK when an unmodified opinion is expressed it must state clearly that the
financial statements give a true and fair view.
(ISA (UK) 700.23 & .25)
This section must also:
– identify whose financial statements have been audited;
– state that the financial statements have been audited;
– identify the title of each statement comprising the financial statements;
– refer to the notes, including the summary of accounting policies; and
– specify the date of, or period covered by, each financial statement comprising the financial
statements.
(ISA (UK) 700.24)
(d) Basis for opinion
This section must immediately follow the ‘Opinion’ section and must have the heading ‘Basis for
opinion’. It must include the following information:
– States that the audit was conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) and applicable law
– Refers to the section of the auditor’s report that describes the auditor’s responsibilities under
the ISAs (UK)
– Includes a statement that the auditor is independent of the entity in accordance with relevant
ethical requirements including the FRC’s Ethical Standard
HB2021

– States whether the auditor believes that the audit evidence the auditor has obtained is
sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for the auditor’s opinion.
(ISA (UK) 700.28)
(e) Going concern
Where applicable the auditor must report on going concern in accordance with ISA (UK) 570
(see earlier section of this chapter).
(ISA (UK) 700.29)
(f) Fraud and irregularities
The auditor’s report shall explain to what extent the audit was considered capable of detecting
irregularities, including fraud.
(ISA (UK) 700.29-1)
(g) Key audit matters
In the UK, a key audit matters section must be included in accordance with ISA (UK) 701 for
audits of public interest entities and other entities that have applied the UK Corporate
Governance Code (see later in this chapter).
(ISA (UK) 700.30-31)
(h) Other information
In the UK, the auditor’s report must always include a separate section with a heading ‘Other
information’ (see later in this chapter).
(ISA (UK) 700.32 and ISA (UK) 720.21)
(i) Responsibilities for the financial statements
The auditor’s report must include a section with the heading ‘Responsibilities of those charged
with governance for the Financial Statements’. This includes a statement describing the
responsibility of those charged with governance for:
– preparing financial statements that give a true and fair view;
– such internal control as management determines is necessary to enable the preparation of
financial statements that are free from material misstatement; and
– assessing the ability of the entity to continue as a going concern, assessing whether the use of
the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate and disclosing matters relating to going
concern.
(j) Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
ISA (UK) 700’s requirements regarding the description of the auditor’s responsibilities is
extensive. These include statements:
– of the objectives of the auditor;
– that reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance but is not a guarantee that an audit will
always detect a material misstatement;
– that misstatements can arise from fraud or error; and
– that the auditor exercises professional judgment and maintains professional scepticism
throughout the audit.
This section also includes a description of an audit and includes the following points:
– The auditor assesses risks of material misstatement, designs and performs audit procedures
and obtains sufficient, appropriate evidence to provide a basis for the audit opinion.
– The auditor obtains an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit.
– The appropriateness of accounting policies is assessed.
– The auditor concludes on the appropriateness of management’s use of the going concern
basis of accounting and whether a material uncertainty exists.
– The auditor communicates with those charged with governance regarding the planned scope
and timing of the audit and significant findings.
(ISA (UK) 700.37– .40a)
For audits of listed entities the auditor’s responsibilities section will also include the following:
HB2021
– Confirmation that the auditor has provided those charged with governance with a statement
that the auditor has complied with relevant ethical requirements regarding independence
– Where key audit matters are communicated a statement that the auditor determines these
matters to be of the most significance in the audit. This applies to all entities for which key audit
matters are communicated (not just listed companies).
(ISA (UK) 700.40b&c)
In the UK the description of the auditor’s responsibilities may be given in the body of the
auditor’s report, within an appendix to the auditor’s report or by cross reference to the
description maintained on a website by an appropriate authority eg, FRC.
(ISA (UK) 700.41)
(k) Other reporting responsibilities
If the auditor addresses other reporting responsibilities in addition to those under ISAs (UK),
these must be addressed in a separate section of the auditor’s report.
If the auditor is required to report on certain matters by exception this section of the auditor’s
report must describe the auditor’s responsibilities and incorporate a suitable conclusion. For
example in the UK the Companies Act 2006 requires the auditor to report when a company has
not maintained adequate books and records.
(ISA (UK) 700.43)
Additional requirements apply for audits of public interest entities. In this instance the auditor
must:
– state by whom the auditor was appointed;
– indicate the date of the appointment and the period of total uninterrupted engagement;
– explain the extent to which the audit was capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
(‘Staff Guidance Note 02/2017’ issued by the FRC provided further guidance on the
information that the auditor should include in the auditor’s report, ensuring that so-called ‘
boiler-plate‘ text is avoided in order to make such disclosure meaningful);
– confirm that the audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the audit committee;
– declare that non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standards were not provided;
and
– indicate any services in addition to the audit which were provided by the firm and which have
not been disclosed in the financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 700.45-1)
(l) Name of the engagement partner
The name of the engagement partner shall be included in the auditor’s report on financial
statements of listed entities unless such disclosures would lead to a personal security threat.
(m) Auditor’s signature
Where the auditor of a UK company is a firm, the report is signed by the senior statutory auditor.
(n) Auditor’s address
The report must name the location where the auditor is based.
(o) Date of the report
The date of the report is the date on which the auditor signs the report expressing an opinion on
the financial statements. It must be no earlier than the date on which the auditor has obtained
sufficient appropriate audit evidence.
Under Companies Act 2006, publicly traded companies are required to include a corporate
governance statement in their annual report. If this is not included the auditor must report by
exception.
6.1.1 Auditor’s report on individual company financial statements

The FRC issued Bulletin: Illustrative Auditor’s Reports on United Kingdom Private Sector Financial
Statements in March 2020. The auditor’s report set out below is from Appendix 6 of the Bulletin.
HB2021

Independent auditor’s report to the members of XYZ PLC
Appendix 6 – Publicly traded premium listed company preparing group and parent company
financial statements under IFRSs
• Company is a premium listed company, a quoted company and a public interest entity.
• Financial statements are prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU and are also
prepared in accordance with IFRSs as issued by the IAASB.
• Company prepares group financial statements.
• Section 408 exemption not taken in respect of parent company’s own profit and loss account.
• Corporate governance statement not incorporated into the strategic report or the directors’
report, either directly or by incorporation by cross-reference.
Independent auditor’s report to the members of [XYZ Plc]

Opinion
We have audited the financial statements of [XYZ Plc] (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the
‘group’) for the year ended [date] which comprise [specify the titles of the primary statements] and
notes to the financial statements, including significant accounting policies. The financial reporting
framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and International Financial
Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union.
In our opinion the financial statements:
• give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at [date]
and of the group’s and the parent company’s [profit/loss] for the year then ended;
• have been properly prepared in accordance with [IFRSs as adopted by the European Union]; and
• have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as
regards the group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.
Separate opinion in relation to IFRSs as issued by the IASB
As explained in note [X] to the group financial statements, the group in addition to complying with its
legal obligation to apply IFRSs as adopted by the European Union, has also applied IFRSs as issued
by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).
In our opinion the group financial statements give a true and fair view of the consolidated financial
position of the group as at [date] and of its consolidated financial performance and its consolidated
cash flows for the year then ended in accordance with IFRSs as issued by the IASB.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and
applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s
responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. We are independent of
the group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial
statements in the UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities,
and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We
believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for
our opinion.
Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern
basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. Our evaluation of
the directors’ assessment of the entity’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of
accounting included [Explanation of how the auditor evaluated management’s assessment and the
key observations arising with respect to that evaluation].
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to
events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the [entity]’s ability
to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial
statements are authorised for issue.
HB2021
In relation to the entities reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code,
we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to the directors’ statement in the
financial statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going
concern basis of accounting.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are
described in the relevant sections of this report.
Our approach to the audit
[Overview of the scope of the parent company and group audits]
Key audit matter and how our scope addressed this matter
• [Description of each key audit matter in accordance with ISA (UK) 701 (Revised November 2019).
The significant judgements made by the engagement team with respect to each key audit matter
should be explained. The auditor should include a description of the most significant assessed
risks of material misstatement, a summary of their response and any key observations arising in
relation to those risks]
• [Explanation of how the scope addressed each key audit matter and was influenced by the
auditor’s application of materiality]
Our application of materiality
[Explanation of how the auditor applied the concept of materiality in planning and performing the
parent and group company audits. This is required to include the threshold used by the auditor as
being materiality for the group financial statements as a whole, as well as the threshold used by the
auditor as being performance materiality but may include other relevant disclosures. The significant
judgements made by the auditor in determining both of these thresholds should also be explained]
Other information
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report other than the
financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other
information contained within the annual report. Our opinion on the financial statements does not
cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do
not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. Our responsibility is to read the other
information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with
the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be
materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements,
we are required to determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the financial
statements themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a
material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.
Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion, the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly
prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
• the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial year for
which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements and those
reports have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements;
• the information about internal control and risk management systems in relation to financial
reporting processes and about share capital structures, given in compliance with rules 7.2.5 and
7.2.6 in the Disclosure Rules and Transparency Rules sourcebook made by the Financial Conduct
Authority (the FCA Rules), is consistent with the financial statements and has been prepared in
accordance with applicable legal requirements; and
• information about the company’s corporate governance code and practices and about its
administrative, management and supervisory bodies and their committees complies with rules
7.2.2, 7.2.3 and 7.2.7 of the FCA Rules.
Matters on which we are required to report by exception
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and the parent company and its
environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in:
HB2021

• the strategic report or the directors’ report; or
• the information about internal control and risk management systems in relation to financial
reporting processes and about share capital structures, given in compliance with rules 7.2.5 and
7.2.6 of the FCA Rules.
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act
2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:
• adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for
our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or
• the parent company financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be
audited are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or
• certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
• we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
• a corporate governance statement has not been prepared by the parent company.
Corporate governance statement
The Listing Rules require us to review the directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer
term viability and that part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the [entity]’s
compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Statement specified for our review.
Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following
elements of the Corporate Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial
statements or our knowledge obtained during the audit:
• Directors’ statement with regard to the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of
accounting and any material uncertainties identified [set out on page….];
• Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the entity’s prospects, the period this assessment
covers and why this period is appropriate [set out on page….];
• Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable [set out on page….];
• Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal
risks [set out on page….];
• The section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management
and internal control systems [set out on page….]; and
• The section describing the work of the audit committee [set out on page….]
Responsibilities of directors
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement [set out on page …], the directors
are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a
true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the
preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or
error.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the company’s
ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern
and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the
company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole
are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report
that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance but is not a guarantee
that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement
when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually
or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users
taken on the basis of these financial statements.
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design
procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in
respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of
detecting irregularities, including fraud, is detailed below.
HB2021
[Explanation as to what extent the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including
fraud.]
A further description of our responsibilities is available on the Financial Reporting Council’s website
at: [website link] [see Appendix below]. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.
Other matters which we are required to address
Following the recommendation of the audit committee, we were appointed by [state by whom or
which body the auditor was appointed] on [date] to audit the financial statements for the year ending
[date] and subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is [X] years,
covering the years ending [date] to [date].
The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the group or
the parent company and we remain independent of the group and the parent company in
conducting our audit.
[Indicate any services, in addition to the audit, which were provided by the firm to the group that have
not been disclosed in the financial statements or elsewhere in the annual report.]
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the audit committee.
[Signature]
Michelle Roberts (Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of ABC LLP, Statutory Auditor
[Address]
[Date]
Appendix: Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
As part of an audit in accordance with ISAs (UK), the auditor exercises professional judgment and
maintains professional scepticism throughout the audit. The auditor also:
• Identifies and assesses the risks of material misstatement of the entity’s (or where relevant, the
consolidated) financial statements, whether due to fraud or error, designs and performs audit
procedures responsive to those risks, and obtains audit evidence that is sufficient and appropriate
to provide a basis for our opinion. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement resulting from
fraud is higher than for one resulting from error, as fraud may involve collusion, forgery,
intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal control.
• Obtains an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit in order to design audit
procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an
opinion on the effectiveness of the entity’s (or where relevant, the group’s) internal control.
• Evaluates the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting
estimates and related disclosures made by the directors.
• Concludes on the appropriateness of the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting
and, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events
or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s (or where relevant, the group’s) ability
to continue as a going concern. If the auditor concludes that a material uncertainty exists, the
auditor is required to draw attention in the auditor’s report to the related disclosures in the
financial statements or, if such disclosures are inadequate, to modify the auditor’s opinion. The
auditor’s conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up to the date of the auditor’s
report. However, future events or conditions may cause the entity (or where relevant, the group) to
cease to continue as a going concern.
• Evaluates the overall presentation, structure and content of the financial statements, including the
disclosures, and whether the financial statements represent the underlying transactions and
events in a manner that achieves fair presentation.
• Where the auditor is required to report on consolidated financial statements, obtains sufficient
appropriate audit evidence regarding the financial information of the entities or business activities
within the group to express an opinion on the consolidated financial statements. The group
auditor is responsible for the direction, supervision and performance of the group audit. The
group auditor remains solely responsible for the audit opinion.
The auditor communicates with those charged with governance regarding, among other matters, the
planned scope and timing of the audit and significant audit findings, including any significant
deficiencies in internal control that the auditor identifies during the audit.
HB2021

For listed entities and public interest entities, the auditor also provides those charged with
governance with a statement that the auditor has complied with relevant ethical requirements
regarding independence, including the FRC’s ethical standard, and communicates with them all
relationships and other matters that may reasonably be thought to bear on the auditor’s
independence, and where applicable, related safeguards.
Where the auditor is required to report on key audit matters, from the matters communicated with
those charged with governance, the auditor determines those matters that were of most significance
in the audit of the financial statements of the current period and are therefore the key audit matters.
The auditor describes these matters in the auditor’s report unless law or regulation precludes public
disclosure about the matter or when, in extremely rare circumstances, the auditor determines that a
matter should not be communicated in the auditor’s report because the adverse consequences of
doing so would reasonably be expected to outweigh the public interest benefits of such
communication.
Don’t forget that all the illustrations of suitable forms of communication (like the auditor’s report) are
going to be in your open book permitted text so make sure you know your way around this.
6.2 Key audit matters

The IAASB project on auditor’s reports resulted in the issue of a new auditing standard. This standard
has now been adopted by the FRC as ISA (UK) 701 (Revised January 2020), Communicating Key
Audit Matters in the Independent Auditor’s Report. It applies to the audits of all listed entities but can
be applied to other audits when the auditor believes it to be necessary. In the UK, the standard also
applies to the audit of other public interest entities and entities that report on how they have applied
the UK Corporate Governance Code. The key points in this ISA are summarised below.
6.2.1 Determining key audit matters (KAMs)
Definition
Key audit matters (KAMs): Those matters, that in the auditor’s professional judgment, were of most
significance in the audit of the financial statements of the current period. KAMs are selected from
matters communicated with those charged with governance. In the UK, these include the most
significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by the
auditor, including those that had the greatest effect on:
• the overall audit strategy;
• the allocation of resources in the audit; and
• directing the efforts of the engagement team.
(ISA (UK) 701.8 & .A8-1)
ISA (UK) 701 identifies the purpose of including this information as being to:
• enhance the communicative value of the auditor’s report;
• provide additional information to intended users; and
• assist users in understanding significant audit matters and the judgments involved.
(ISA (UK) 701.2)
Note: The inclusion of a KAM section does not constitute a modification of the auditor’s report and
cannot be used as a substitute for a modified opinion. In addition, the KAM section cannot be used
as a substitute for disclosures that should have been made.
HB2021
ISA (UK) 701 suggests a three-step ‘filtering’ approach to determining what constitutes a KAM:
Step 1 The auditor starts by considering all the matters communicated with those charged with
governance
Step 2 From these the auditor will assess which of these matters required significant audit
attention. This process will involve taking into account areas of higher/significant risk,
significant auditor/management judgment and the effect of significant events or
transactions that occurred in the period
Step 3 The auditor will then select from those matters identified in Step 2 the matters which were of
most significance in the audit
Step 3 is clearly the most important step of the process in which the auditor is required to apply
judgment in evaluating the relative significance of different issues.
In making this decision the auditor would consider the following:
• Matters which resulted in significant interaction with those charged with governance
• The importance of the matter to the intended users’ understanding of the financial statements as
a whole
• The nature/complexity/subjectivity of selection of accounting policies
• The nature and materiality of misstatements (corrected and uncorrected)
• The nature and extent of audit effort needed to address the matter
• Whether there were issues in applying audit procedures
• Extent of related control deficiencies
• Whether the matter affected more than one area of the financial statements
(ISA (UK) 701.A27 & .A29)
6.2.2 Disclosure
Where relevant the auditor’s report must include a separate section with the heading ‘Key Audit
Matters’. This includes an introduction followed by information about each individual KAM. The
introductory material states that:
• the matters described are the matters of ‘most significance’; and
• the auditor does not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
(ISA (UK) 701.11)
The description of an individual KAM would include the following:
• Why the matter was considered to be one of the most significant in the audit
• How the matter was addressed in the audit
Reference should also be made to any related disclosures in the financial statements.
In the UK the following information must also be provided:
• A description of the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement
• A summary of the auditor’s responses to those risks
• Key observations arising in respect to those risks
(ISA (UK) 701.13–.13-2)
The ICAEW Audit and Assurance Faculty published a report in 2017 titled ‘The start of a conversation
– The extended audit report‘ to support all parties involved in this form of communication. Clearly,
this process is still in its infancy, but presenting it in terms of a dialogue is intended to support the
perception that it is a two-way process. The report also suggests metrics that could be used to assess
the quality of this dialogue in respect of KAMs: (i) the average number of KAMs in a report; and (ii)
most common topics making up KAMs.
HB2021

Here is an example of how KAMs could appear, taken from the IAASB’s guidance publication Auditor
Reporting – Illustrative Key Audit Matters:
Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance
in our audit of the financial statements of the current period. These matters were addressed in the
context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon,
and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
Goodwill
Under IFRSs, the Group is required to annually test the amount of goodwill for impairment. This
annual impairment test was significant to our audit because the balance of XX as of December 31,
20X1 is material to the financial statements. In addition, management’s assessment process is
complex and highly judgmental and is based on assumptions, specifically [describe certain
assumptions], which are affected by expected future market or economic conditions, particularly
those in [name of country or geographic area].
Our audit procedures included, among others, using a valuation expert to assist us in evaluating
the assumptions and methodologies used by the Group, in particular those relating to the
forecasted revenue growth and profit margins for [name of business line]. We also focused on the
adequacy of the Group’s disclosures about those assumptions to which the outcome of the
impairment test is most sensitive, that is, those that have the most significant effect on the
determination of the recoverable amount of goodwill.
The Company’s disclosures about goodwill are included in Note 3, which specifically explains that
small changes in the key assumptions used could give rise to an impairment of the goodwill
balance in the future.
Revenue recognition
The amount of revenue and profit recognized in the year on the sale of [name of product] and
aftermarket services is dependent on the appropriate assessment of whether or not each long-
term aftermarket contract for services is linked to or separate from the contract for sale of [name
of product]. As the commercial arrangements can be complex, significant judgment is applied in
selecting the accounting basis in each case. In our view, revenue recognition is significant to our
audit as the Group might inappropriately account for sales of [name of product] and long-term
service agreements as a single arrangement for accounting purposes and this would usually lead
to revenue and profit being recognized too early because the margin in the long-term service
agreement is usually higher than the margin in the [name of product] sale agreement.
Our audit procedures to address the risk of material misstatement relating to revenue recognition,
which was considered to be a significant risk, included:
• Testing of controls, assisted by our own IT specialists, including, among others, those over:
input of individual advertising campaigns’ terms and pricing; comparison of those terms and
pricing data against the related overarching contracts with advertising agencies; and linkage to
viewer data; and
• Detailed analysis of revenue and the timing of its recognition based on expectations derived
from our industry knowledge and external market data, following up variances from our
expectations.
(Source: IAASB guidance publication, (2015) Auditor Reporting – Illustrative Key Audit Matters)
In very limited circumstances it may be the case that KAMs exist but cannot or should not be
disclosed. These might include circumstances where law or regulation does not allow disclosure or
where the adverse consequences of disclosure would outweigh the public interest benefit.
(ISA (UK) 701.14b)
It is also possible, although again very rare, that there may be no KAMs to disclose in the KAMs
section. Where this is the case a KAM section is still included in the auditor’s report but a statement is
made that there are no KAMs to communicate. ISA (UK) 701.A58 provides the following illustration of
the appropriate wording in this situation:
[Except for the matter described in the Basis for Qualified (Adverse) Opinion section or Material
Uncertainty Related to Going Concern section,] We have determined that there are no [other]
key audit matters to communicate in our report.
HB2021
6.2.3 Interaction between descriptions of key audit matters and other elements included in the auditor’s
report
Where a matter results in a modified audit opinion, the matter by definition would be a KAM.
However modified audit opinions must be reported in accordance with ISA (UK) 705 (Revised June
2016), Modifications to the Opinion in the Independent Auditor’s Report and as a result a description
of the matter will be included in the ‘Basis for modified opinion’ paragraph and not in the KAM
section. The KAM section must however include a reference to the basis for modified opinion
paragraph.
ISA 701 also makes particular reference to going concern issues. As we have seen in section 3 of this
chapter in accordance with ISA 570 if adequate disclosure is made in the financial statements of a
material uncertainty relating to going concern, the auditor expresses an unmodified opinion but
includes a separate section under the heading ‘Material Uncertainty Related to Going Concern’. The
matter is not also described as a KAM, although the KAM section should include a reference to the
‘Material Uncertainty Related to Going Concern’ section.
6.2.4 Communicating other audit planning and scoping matters

In the UK, ISA (UK) 701 also requires the auditor’s report to provide information about materiality
(including the threshold used for the financial statements as a whole) and an overview of the scope
of the audit.
(ISA (UK) 701.16-1)
6.2.5 Communication with those charged with governance

The auditor is required to communicate to those charged with governance either the KAMs included
in the auditor’s report or the fact that there are no KAMs.
(ISA (UK) 701.17)
6.2.6 Documentation
Audit documentation must include the ‘significant audit matters’ from which the KAMs were then
selected and the rationale for determining whether each of these is a KAM or not. Where the auditor
has concluded that there are no KAMs, or that a KAM is not able to be disclosed the reasons for this
should be documented.
(ISA (UK) 701.18)
6.3 Modified opinions, emphasis of matter and other matter paragraphs

6.3.1 Modifications to the audit opinion
Modifications to the audit opinion are covered by ISA (UK) 705 (Revised June 2016), Modifications to
the Opinion in the Independent Auditor’s Report.
ISA (UK) 705 requires a modified opinion when:
(a) the auditor concludes that, based on the evidence obtained, the financial statements as a whole
are not free from material misstatement; or
(b) the auditor is unable to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence to conclude that the
financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement.
and, in the auditor’s judgement, the effect of the matter is or may be material to the financial
statements.
There are three types of modified opinion:
• Qualified opinion
• Disclaimer of opinion
• Adverse opinion
6.3.2 Determining the type of modification

In accordance with ISA (UK) 705 there are different types and degrees of modified opinion.
• A material misstatement (disagreement) may lead to a qualified opinion or an adverse opinion.
HB2021

• An inability to obtain sufficient, appropriate evidence (limitation on scope) may lead to a qualified
opinion or a disclaimer of opinion.
• The degree of modification depends on whether the auditor considers that the misstatement, or
possible misstatement, is pervasive to the financial statements.
Definition
Pervasive effects: Pervasive effects on the financial statements are those that, in the auditor’s
judgement:
• are not confined to specific elements, accounts or items of the financial statements;
• if so confined, represent or could represent a substantial proportion of the financial statements; or
• in relation to disclosures, are fundamental to users’ understanding of the financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 705.5)
The following table based on the table from ISA (UK) 705.A1 summarises the different types of
modified opinion, and we will look at the detail of each of these in turn:
Nature of circumstances Material but not Material and pervasive

pervasive
Financial statements are Qualified opinion Adverse opinion

materially misstated Except for … (Auditors state that the financial
(disagreement) statements do not give a true and fair
view)
Inability to obtain Qualified opinion Disclaimer of opinion

sufficient, appropriate Except for ... might (Auditors state they are unable to form
audit evidence (limitation an opinion on the truth and fairness of
on scope) the financial statements as a whole)
The ISA (ISA (UK) 705.7–.9) describes these different modified opinions and the circumstances
leading to them as follows.
(a) A qualified opinion must be expressed when the auditor concludes that an unmodified opinion
cannot be expressed but that the effect of any misstatement, or the possible effect of
undetected misstatements, is material but not pervasive. A qualified opinion should be
expressed as being “except for the effects of the matter to which the qualification relates”.
(b) A disclaimer of opinion must be expressed when the auditor has not been able to obtain
sufficient appropriate audit evidence and accordingly is unable to express an opinion on the
financial statements. In rare circumstances involving multiple uncertainties the auditor may issue
a disclaimer even though sufficient appropriate evidence has been obtained regarding each of
the individual uncertainties, due to the potential interaction of these uncertainties and their
possible cumulative effect on the financial statements.
(c) An adverse opinion must be expressed when the auditor has obtained sufficient appropriate
audit evidence and concludes that misstatements, individually or in aggregate, are both material
and pervasive to the financial statements.
Basis for opinion paragraph
Where the auditor modifies the opinion on the financial statements, the title of the basis paragraph
should also be modified to read ‘Basis for Qualified Opinion’, ‘Basis for Adverse Opinion’ or ‘Basis for
Disclaimer of Opinion’ as appropriate.
Misstatement
The auditor may disagree with management about matters such as the acceptability of accounting
policies selected, the method of their application, or the adequacy of disclosures in the financial
statements. The ISA states that if such disagreements are material to the financial statements, the
auditor should express a qualified or an adverse opinion.
See Appendix Illustrations 1 and 2.
HB2021
Inability to obtain evidence
The standard identifies three circumstances where there might be an inability to obtain sufficient
evidence:
(a) Circumstances beyond the entity’s control (such as where the entity’s accounting records have
been destroyed).
(b) Circumstances relating to the nature or timing of the auditor’s work (for example, when the
timing of the auditor’s appointment is such that the auditor is unable to observe the counting of
physical inventory). It may also arise when, in the opinion of the auditor, the entity’s accounting
records are inadequate or when the auditor is unable to carry out an audit procedure believed
to be desirable. In these circumstances, the auditor would attempt to carry out reasonable
alternative procedures to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence to support an unqualified
opinion.
(c) A limitation on the scope of the auditor’s work may sometimes be imposed by management (for
example, when management prevents the auditor from observing the counting of physical
inventory). This would constitute a limitation on scope if the auditor was unable to obtain
sufficient, appropriate evidence by performing alternative procedures.
If the auditor experiences a limitation on scope after they have accepted appointment which is both
material and pervasive they should consider withdrawal from the audit where it is practicable and
possible under applicable law or regulation. Where this is not the case the auditor must disclaim an
opinion on the financial statements.
When the limitation in the terms of a proposed engagement is such that the auditor believes the
need to express a disclaimer of opinion exists before the appointment has been accepted, the
auditor would usually not accept such a limited audit engagement, unless required by statute. Also, a
statutory auditor would not accept such an audit engagement when the limitation infringes on the
auditor’s statutory duties.
See Appendix Illustrations 3 and 4.
6.3.3 Emphasis of matter and other matters

ISA (UK) 706 (Revised June 2016), Emphasis of Matter Paragraphs and Other Matter Paragraphs in the
Independent Auditor’s Report deals with circumstances where the auditor considers it necessary to
draw users’ attention to important matters.
Definition
Emphasis of matter paragraph: A paragraph included in the auditor’s report that refers to a matter
appropriately presented or disclosed in the financial statements that, in the auditor’s judgement, is
of such importance that it is fundamental to users’ understanding of the financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 706.7a)
Examples
• An uncertainty relating to the future outcome of exceptional litigation or regulatory action
• Early application of a new accounting standard that has a pervasive effect on the financial
statement before its effective date
• A major catastrophe that has had, or continues to have, a significant effect on the entity’s financial
position
Other ISAs specify circumstances in which it may be necessary to include an emphasis of matter
paragraph for example ISA (UK) 560, Subsequent Events which was covered earlier in this chapter.
This paragraph must be included in a separate section of the auditor’s report with an appropriate
heading including the term ‘Emphasis of Matter’. This section must also state that the auditor’s report
is not modified in this respect.
(ISA (UK) 706.9)
Note: In some circumstances matters identified as KAMs may also be fundamental to users’
understanding of the financial statements. In this situation however, the matter is not disclosed in an
emphasis of matter paragraph as well as being disclosed as a KAM. Instead the auditor must
HB2021

consider highlighting the importance of the matter, for example, by presenting it more prominently
in the KAM section. (ISA (UK) 706.A2)
Where a matter is not determined to be a KAM but is fundamental to users’ understanding an
emphasis of matter paragraph would be included in the auditor’s report.
(ISA (UK) 706.A3)
Definition
Other matter paragraph: A paragraph included in the auditor’s report that refers to a matter other
than those presented or disclosed in the financial statements that, in the auditor’s judgement, is
relevant to users’ understanding of the audit, the auditor’s responsibilities or the auditor’s report.
(ISA (UK) 706.7b)
This paragraph must also be included as a separate section in the auditor’s report headed ‘Other
Matter’ or another appropriate heading.
Note: An ‘Other Matter’ paragraph would not be included where the matter has been determined to
be a KAM (ISA (UK) 706.10).
An example of an emphasis of matter paragraph is contained in the Appendix to this chapter. See
Illustration 5.
It’s very unlikely that in an exam you will be presented with an organisation where everything runs
smoothly and there are no tricky decisions to have to make. Emphasis of matter paragraphs, other
matter paragraphs and key audit matters are all areas where the auditor needs to display sound
judgement in how to communicate the events before them in the most effective way. Use the
questions at your disposal to understand how each of these works.
6.4 Current issues

6.4.1 The act of communication
In essence, the auditor’s job is straightforward. They carry out tests and inquiries and evaluate
evidence received with the purpose of drawing an audit opinion. They then communicate that
opinion, in the form of an auditor’s report, as we have been discussing. This can cause problems.
The communication problem is caused by a number of different problems that can be identified
under three headings, although some of the problems are broadly linked between categories. The
three problematic areas are as follows:
• Understandability
• Responsibility
• Availability
6.4.2 Understandability
Although the essence of the auditor’s role is simple, in practice it is surrounded by auditing
standards and guidance, as it is a technical art. It also involves relevant language, or ‘jargon’, that
non-auditors may not understand.
Communicating the audit opinion in a way that people can understand is a challenge. ISA (UK) 700
(Revised January 2020) together with ISA (UK) 701 go some way to addressing those challenges (see
earlier sections).
6.4.3 Responsibility
Connected with the problem of what the audit is and what the audit opinion means is the question of
what the auditors are responsible for. As far as the law is concerned, auditors have a restricted
number of duties. Professional standards and other bodies, such as the Financial Conduct Authority,
put other duties on auditors.
HB2021
Users of financial statements, and the public, may not have a very clear perception of what the
auditors are responsible for and what the audit opinion relates to, or what context it is in.
The issue of auditor’s liability ties in here. Auditor’s reports are addressed to shareholders, to whom
auditors have their primary and legal responsibility. However, audited financial statements are used
by significantly more people than that. Should this fact be addressed in the auditor’s report?
6.4.4 Availability
The fact that a significant number of people use audited financial statements has just been
mentioned. Auditor’s reports are publicly available, as they are often held on public record. This fact
alone may add to any perception that exists that auditors address their report to more than just
shareholders.
The problem of availability is exacerbated by the fact that many companies publish their financial
statements on their website. This means that millions of people around the world have access to the
auditor’s report.
This issue may cause misunderstanding:
• Language barriers may cause additional understandability problems.
• It may not be clear which financial information an auditor’s report refers to.
• The auditor’s report may be subject to malicious tampering by hackers or personnel.
If an auditor’s report is published electronically, auditors lose control of the physical positioning of
the report; that is, what it is published with. This might significantly impact on understandability and
also perceived responsibility.
When financial information is available electronically, auditors must ensure that their report is not
misrepresented.
Interactive question 4: Forming an audit opinion

You are an audit senior. You are nearing the end of the audit of Russell Ltd for the year ended 30
June 20X7. The financial statements show a profit before tax of £14 million (20X6: £6 million) and a
statement of financial position total of £46 million (20X6: £30 million). The following points have
arisen on the audit:
(1) Russell Ltd owns a number of its retail premises, which it revalues annually. This year several of its
shops did rise sharply in value due to inflated property prices in their locality. Russell Ltd also
capitalises refits of its shops. Four shops were refitted in the year. The total increase in assets due
to refits and revaluations is £20 million. Russell Ltd does not revalue its factory premises, which
are recognised in the statement of financial position at £250,000.
(2) Russell Ltd makes approximately 20% of its sales via an internet site from which it sells the
products of Cairns plc. Russell Ltd earns commission of 15% on these sales. Customers place
their order on the internet site and pay for goods by providing their credit card details. Once
Russell Ltd has received authorisation from the credit card company the order is passed to
Cairns plc. The product is then shipped directly to the customer and all product returns and
credit card related issues are dealt with by Cairns plc. The total product sales achieved through
the internet site and despatched to customers in the year were £6,000,000. This amount has
been recognised as revenue for the year ended 30 June 20X7.
Requirement
Comment on the matters you will consider in relation to the implications of the above points on the
auditor’s report of Russell Ltd.
6.5 The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other Information

The FRC has issued ISA (UK) 720 (Revised November 2019), The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to
Other Information.
HB2021

6.5.1 What is other information?
Definitions
Other information: Financial and non-financial information (other than financial statements and the
auditor’s report) included in an entity’s annual report (such as summaries of key financial results,
explanations of critical accounting estimates and financial measures or ratios).
Statutory other information: In the UK this includes the directors’ report, the strategic report and the
separate corporate governance statement, all of which is relevant here.
Misstatement of the other information: This exists when the other information is incorrectly stated or
otherwise misleading (including because it omits or obscures information necessary for a proper
understanding of a matter disclosed in the other information).
In the UK a misstatement of other information also exists when the statutory other information has
not been prepared in accordance with the legal and regulatory requirements applicable.
(ISA (UK) 720.12 and Appendix 1)
ISA (UK) 720.2 makes it clear that the auditor does not express an opinion on the other information.
(The exception to this principle in the UK relates to the auditor’s responsibilities relating to the
directors’ report, the strategic report and the corporate governance statement. We will look at this
issue separately in a later section)
The auditor is required, however, to read the other information and do the following:
(a) Consider whether there is a material inconsistency between the other information and the
financial statements
(b) Consider whether there is a material inconsistency between the other information and the
auditor’s knowledge obtained in the audit
(c) Respond appropriately when the auditor identifies that such a material inconsistency appears to
exist, or when the auditor otherwise becomes aware that other information appears to be
materially misstated
(d) Report in accordance with ISA (UK) 720
6.5.2 Access to other information

In order for the auditor to satisfy their obligations under ISA (UK) 720, timely access to other
information will be required. The auditors therefore must make arrangements with the client to
obtain such information before the date of their report where possible. Where some or all of the
documents will not be available until after the date of the auditor’s report the auditor must request a
written representation that the information will be provided as soon as it is available.
(ISA (UK) 720.13)
6.5.3 Material inconsistency or material misstatement of other information

If, on reading the other information, the auditor identifies a material inconsistency or becomes aware
that the other information appears to be materially misstated, the auditor must determine whether:
• The audited financial statements need to be amended
• The other information needs to be amended
• Or whether the auditor’s understanding of the entity and its environment needs updating.
The auditor should seek to resolve the matter through discussion with those charged with
governance.
If an amendment is necessary in the audited financial statements and the entity refuses to make the
amendment, the auditor should express a qualified or adverse opinion.
If an amendment is necessary in the other information obtained before the date of the auditor’s
report and the entity refuses to make the amendment, the auditor shall communicate this to those
charged with governance and:
(a) include in the ‘Other information’ section of the auditor’s report a statement describing the
uncorrected material misstatement; or
(b) withdraw from the engagement.
HB2021
(ISA (UK) 720.18)
If a material misstatement exists in other information obtained after the date of the auditor’s report
the actions taken by the auditor depend on whether a correction is made. If the other information is
corrected the auditors will perform additional procedures which will normally include checking that
the correction has been made properly and reviewing the steps taken by management to inform
parties who have already received the information.
(ISA (UK) 720.A48)
If the other information is not corrected the specific action taken would depend on the auditor’s legal
rights and obligations. As a result it is likely that the auditor will seek legal advice. In the UK, the
auditor may also consider using the right to be heard at the AGM.
6.5.4 Reporting
In the UK, all auditor’s reports must include an ‘Other Information‘ section. This must include the
following:
(a) A statement that management is responsible for other information
(b) Identification of other information obtained before the date of the auditor’s report (and, for the
audit of a listed entity, other information, if any expected to be obtained after the date of the
auditor’s report)
(c) A statement that the auditor’s opinion does not cover the other information and that the auditor
does not express an audit opinion or any form of assurance conclusion on this (however, see
section 6.5.5)
(d) A description of the auditor’s responsibilities relating to reading, considering and reporting on
other information
(e) When other information has been obtained before the date of the auditor’s report, either:
– a statement that the auditor has nothing to report; or
– where there is a material uncorrected misstatement a statement that describes this.
(ISA (UK) 720.22)
6.5.5 Statutory other information

In the UK, the auditor has a statutory duty to report on the directors’ report, the strategic report and
the corporate governance statements where applicable. In order to do so the auditor is required to
read this information, and based on the audit work undertaken determine whether this information
appears to be materially misstated.
(ISA (UK) 720.12d)
In the auditor’s report, the auditor is required to state whether:
• the information given in the statutory other information is consistent with the financial statements
and prepared in accordance with legal requirements;
• the auditor has identified any material misstatements in the statutory other information; and
• if applicable, give an indication of the nature of each misstatement.
(ISA (UK) 720.22)
For entities that report on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code (or why they
have not) the auditor must review the statements made and report on them either stating that they
have nothing to report or by describing the uncorrected material misstatement.
(ISA (UK) 720.22)
6.5.6 Current issues

In December 2018, the FRC published ‘Audit Quality Thematic Review: Other Information in the
Annual Report‘ to highlight the variation in approach taken by UK firms when auditing other
information. This is the first time that the FRC has reviewed the work of auditors in this area and it
complements other recent Thematic Reviews covering the quality of audit work performed in the UK.
In summary, the FRC found that more could be done by auditors and audit committees regarding
other information disclosures to inform users of financial statements adequately on non-financial and
other qualitative factors.
HB2021

You have already seen from your studies that questions on the auditor’s report usually require some
form of conclusion to be drawn, so you must make sure you don’t sit on the fence and commit to a
specific course of action. This is central to the auditor’s primary role of communication.
7 Other reporting responsibilities

Section overview
• Auditors may have to report on entire special purpose financial statements or simply one element
of those financial statements.
• Auditors may have to report on summary financial statements.
• The Companies Act 2006 allows limited liability agreements to be negotiated with the audit client.
7.1 Special Considerations – Audits of Financial Statements Prepared in Accordance

with Special Purpose Frameworks
7.1.1 Introduction
ISA (UK) 800 (Revised), Special Considerations – Audits of Financial Statements Prepared in
Accordance with Special Purpose Frameworks was issued in October 2016 by the FRC and is effective
for periods commencing on or after 1 January 2016.
7.1.2 Overview
The ISA aims to address special considerations that are relevant to complete sets of financial
statements prepared in accordance with another comprehensive basis of accounting.
The aim of the ISA is simply to identify additional audit requirements relating to these areas. To be
clear, all other ISAs still apply to the audit engagement.
7.1.3 General considerations

• Before undertaking a special purpose audit engagement, the auditor should ensure there is
agreement with the client as to the exact nature of the engagement and the form and content of
the report to be issued.
• To avoid the possibility of the auditor’s report being used for purposes for which it was not
intended, the auditor may wish to indicate in the report the purpose for which it is prepared and
any restrictions on its distribution and use.
7.1.4 Special purpose frameworks

In the context of the ISA, special purpose frameworks refer to accounts which are prepared in
situations other than within a Companies Act statutory audit. Specific examples of special purpose
frameworks given in the ISA include the following:
• Tax basis of accounting for a set of financial statements that accompany an entity’s tax return
• Cash receipts and payments basis of accounting for cash flow information that an entity may be
requested to prepare for creditors
• The financial reporting provisions established by a regulator to meet that regulator’s
requirements
• The financial reporting provisions of a contract, such as a bond, indenture, a loan agreement and
a project grant
The auditor’s report in these circumstances should include an emphasis of matter that indicates the
basis of accounting used or should refer to the note to the financial statements giving that
information. The opinion should state whether the financial statements are prepared, in all material
respects, in accordance with the identified basis of accounting.
HB2021
In the UK the auditor must specifically describe the financial reporting framework as a special
purpose framework in the auditor’s report. The auditor must also specifically state that the audit has
been carried out in accordance with ISAs, including ISA (UK) 800 and/or ISA (UK) 805).
7.1.5 Special Considerations – Audits of Single Financial Statements and Specific Elements, Accounts or
Items of a Financial Statement
ISA (UK) 805 (Revised), Special Considerations – Audits of Single Financial Statements and Specific
Elements, Accounts or Items of a Financial Statement relates to individual elements of financial
statements, such as the liability for accrued benefits of a pension plan and a schedule of employee
bonuses. This ISA was issued by the FRC in October 2016 and is effective for periods commencing
on or after 1 January 2017.
Many financial statement items are interrelated. Therefore, when reporting on a component the
auditor will not always be able to consider it in isolation and will need to examine other financial
information. This will need to be considered when assessing the scope of the engagement and
determining whether the audit of a single statement or single element is practicable.
The auditor’s report should indicate the applicable financial reporting framework adopted or the
basis of accounting used, and should state whether the component is prepared in accordance with
this.
Reporting considerations
Engagements that involve reporting • The auditor shall express a separate opinion for each.
on a single statement or specific • The auditor shall ensure that management presents the
element in conjunction with single financial statement or element in such a way that it
auditing the entity’s complete set is clearly differentiated from the complete set of financial
of financial statements statements.
The auditor’s opinion on the entity’s • The auditor must determine whether this will affect the
complete set of financial statements opinion on the single financial statement or element.
is modified or includes an
emphasis of matter or other matter
paragraph, a material uncertainty
related to going concern,
communication of key audit matters
or a statement describing an
uncorrected material misstatement
of other information
The auditor has expressed an • The auditor must not include an unmodified opinion on
adverse opinion or disclaimed an a single financial statement or element that forms part of
opinion on the entity’s complete set those financial statements in the same report (as this
of financial statements would contradict the adverse opinion or disclaimer on
the complete set of financial statements).
• The auditor must not express an unmodified opinion on
a single financial statement of a complete set of financial
statements even if the report on the single financial
statement is not published with the auditor’s report
containing the adverse opinion or disclaimer.
• The auditor may express an unmodified opinion on an
element of the financial statements if:
– not prohibited by law;
– the opinion is published separately; and
– the element does not form a major portion of the
entity’s complete set of financial statements.
7.1.6 Engagements to Report on Summary Financial Statements

ISA 810 (Revised), Engagements to Report on Summary Financial Statements was revised by the
IAASB in March 2016. It has not been adopted in the UK as an ISA (UK). The key point which this ISA
HB2021

makes is that the auditor should not express an opinion on the summarised financial statements
unless they have expressed an audit opinion on the financial statements from which they have been
derived.
Reporting considerations: Form of report
Unmodified opinion on summary Unless law specifies otherwise, the wording should be:
financial statements • the accompanying summary financial statements are
consistent in all material respects with the audited
financial statements, in accordance with (the applied
criteria); or
• the accompanying summary financial statements are a
fair summary of the audited financial statements, in
accordance with (the applied criteria).
When the auditor’s report on the If the auditor is satisfied that an unmodified opinion, as
audited financial statements above, is appropriate for the summary financial statements,
includes a qualified opinion, an the report must:
emphasis of matter or an other • state that the auditor’s report on the audited financial
matter paragraph, a material statements includes a qualified opinion, an emphasis of
uncertainty related to going matter or an other matter paragraph, a material
concern, a KAM section or a uncertainty related to going concern, a KAM section or
statement describing an uncorrected a statement describing an uncorrected material
material misstatement of the other misstatement of the other information;
information
• explain the basis for the above; and
• state the effect on the summary financial statements if
any.
When the auditor’s report on the The auditor must:

audited financial statements • state that the auditor’s report on the audited financial
contains an adverse opinion, or a statements contains an adverse opinion or disclaimer of
disclaimer opinion;
• explain the basis for the adverse opinion or disclaimer;
and
• state that it is inappropriate to express an opinion on
the summary financial statements.
Modified opinion on the summary If the summary financial statements are not consistent in all
financial statements material respects with the audited financial statements (or
not a fair summary of the audited financial statements) and
management does not agree to make changes, the auditor
shall express an adverse opinion.
7.2 XBRL tagging of information in audited financial statements

In September 2009, HMRC announced that the Company Tax Return, including the supporting
statutory accounts and tax computations, must be delivered electronically using the Inline XBRL
format. XBRL stands for eXtensible Business Reporting Language.
7.2.1 Audit
Guidance for auditors is contained in Bulletin 2010/1 XBRL Tagging of Information in Audited
Financial Statements – Guidance for Auditors.
Although HMRC is requiring financial statements supporting a company’s tax return to be transmitted
using iXBRL, there is no requirement for an audit of data or of the XBRL tagging. The Bulletin states
that ISAs do not impose a general requirement on the auditor to check XBRL tagging of financial
statements as part of the audit. Furthermore, because the XBRL tagging is simply a machine-readable
rendering of the data within the financial statements, rather than a discrete document, it does not
constitute ‘other information’ either.
HB2021
While the auditor does not provide assurance as to the accuracy of the tagging, audit clients may
request non-audit services, including the following:
• Performing the tagging exercise
• Undertaking an agreed-upon procedures engagement
• Providing advice on the selection of individual tags
• Supplying accounts preparation software that automates the tagging
• Training management in XBRL tagging
If this type of service is provided, ethical issues must be considered.
In December 2017, the FRC’s Financial Reporting Lab published Deep-dive: Digital future of
corporate reporting suggesting that more still needs to be done to unlock the potential of XBRL.
7.3 Companies Act 2006

The Companies Act 2006 contains a number of audit-related provisions that affect audit reporting.
7.3.1 Reckless auditing

The Act includes a criminal offence, punishable by an unlimited fine, for ‘knowingly or recklessly’ to
cause an auditor’s report to include “any matter that is misleading, false, deceptive in a material
particular, or cause a report to omit a statement that is required under certain sections of the Act” – s
507 CA2006. The offence can be committed by a partner, director, employee or agent of the audit
firm if that person would be eligible for appointment as auditor of the company. In other words, the
offence is related not just to the partners of the firm but also to any member of staff who has a
practising certificate.
The Government’s view is that ‘recklessness’ has a very high hurdle and would only catch an auditor
who is aware that an action or failure to act carried risks, that they personally knew that the risks were
not reasonable ones to take, and that, despite knowing that, they went ahead. The real point is that
this is a long way above negligence; one cannot be reckless inadvertently. In other words, ‘recklessly’
is a subjective test because a risk taken must be unreasonable in the mind of the person taking it.
The offence has yet to be tested in court. However, professional bodies continue to argue that
‘honest mistakes’ should not be punishable.
7.3.2 Audit liability

Sections 534–538 of the Act allow members to pass an ordinary resolution to limit the liability of
their auditors for negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust occurring during the course
of an audit, by means of a limitation of liability agreement. Key points of this agreement are as
follows:
(a) Liability can only be limited where to do so would be ‘fair and reasonable’ in regard to all
circumstances. In other words, the agreement could be set aside by the court where the auditor
appeared to be contracting out of liability too much, or where a high standard of work was
expected and the auditor failed to provide this.
(b) Shareholder approval can be obtained either before or after the company enters into the
agreement with the auditor.
(c) The agreement must be disclosed in the directors’ report.
(d) The agreement must be renewed annually.
(e) The members can terminate the agreement by ordinary resolution at any time.
The actual terms of the agreement therefore have to be decided between auditor and client.
However, the Act does not contain automatic proportional liability, which appeared to be the
objective of the profession.
7.3.3 Signature on auditor’s reports

Where the auditor is a firm, the signature on the auditor’s report will be that of the ‘senior statutory
auditor’ signed in their own name, for and on behalf of the audit firm (s504). This is a requirement of
the EU Statutory Audit Directive. However, guidance on the Directive indicates that this does not
place any additional liability on this person. Under ISAs, senior statutory auditor has the same
meaning as the term ‘engagement partner’.
HB2021

7.3.4 Right of members to raise audit concerns at general meeting
Members of quoted companies may require a company to publish a statement on its website on any
matter which it intends to raise at the shareholders’ meeting where the annual accounts are to be
approved. The matters that can be raised are those relating to the audit of the accounts and the
circumstances connected to an auditor ceasing to hold office.
The request needs to be made by members holding 5% or more of the total voting rights or by 100
members holding fully paid-up shares which on average exceed £100 per member.
8 Appendix (Illustrations)
Note: As per ISA (UK) 705, illustrations 1–4 in this Appendix have not been tailored for the UK but
they illustrate the requirements of the ISAs (UK).
Illustration 1
Qualified opinion – Material misstatement of the financial statements
Qualified opinion
We have audited the financial statements of ABC Company (the Company), which comprise the
statement of financial position as at December 31, 20X1, and the statement of comprehensive
income, statement of changes in equity and statement of cash flows for the year then ended, and
notes to the financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies. In our
opinion, except for the effects of the matter described in the Basis for Qualified Opinion section of
our report, the accompanying financial statements give a true and fair view of the financial position of
the Company as at December 31, 20X1, and of its financial performance and its cash flows for the
year then ended in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).
Basis for qualified opinion
The company’s inventories are carried in the statement of financial position at xxx. Management has
not stated the inventories at the lower of cost and net realisable value but has stated them solely at
cost, which constitutes a departure from IFRSs. The Company’s records indicate that, had
management stated the inventories at the lower of cost and net realisable value, an amount of xxx
would have been required to write the inventories down to their net realisable value. Accordingly
cost of sales would have increased by xxx, and income tax, net income and shareholders’ equity
would have been reduced by xxx, xxx and xxx, respectively.
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (ISAs). Our
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s Responsibilities for the
Audit of the Financial Statements section of our report. We are independent of the Company in
accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in
[jurisdiction], and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these
requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to
provide a basis for our qualified opinion.
(Source: Illustration 1 (extract) ISA (UK) 705 (Revised June 2016), Modifications to the Opinion in the
Independent Auditor’s Report)
Illustration 2
Adverse opinion. Material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements
Adverse opinion
We have audited the consolidated financial statements of ABC Company and its subsidiaries (the
Group), which comprise the consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X1,
and the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in
equity and consolidated statement of cash flows for the year then ended, and notes to the
consolidated financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies.
In our opinion, because of the significance of the matter discussed in the Basis for Adverse Opinion
section of our report, the accompanying consolidated financial statements do not give a true and
fair view of the consolidated financial position of the Group as at December 31, 20X1, and of its
consolidated financial performance and its consolidated cash flows for the year then ended in
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).
HB2021
Basis for adverse opinion
As explained in Note X, the Group has not consolidated subsidiary XYZ Company that the Group
acquired during 20X1 because it has not yet been able to determine the fair values of certain of the
subsidiary’s material assets and liabilities at the acquisition date. This investment is therefore
accounted for on a cost basis. Under IFRSs, the Company should have consolidated this subsidiary
and accounted for the acquisition based on provisional amounts. Had XYZ Company been
consolidated, many elements in the accompanying consolidated financial statements would have
been materially affected. The effects on the consolidated financial statements of the failure to
consolidate have not been determined.
Audit of the Consolidated Financial Statements section of our report. We are independent of the
Group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the consolidated
financial statements in [jurisdiction], and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in
accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is
sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our adverse opinion.
Illustration 3
Qualified opinion – Due to auditor’s inability to obtain sufficient audit evidence regarding a foreign
associate
Qualified opinion
We have audited the consolidated financial statements of ABC Company and its subsidiaries (the
Group), which comprise the consolidated statement of financial position as at December 31, 20X1,
and the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in
equity and consolidated statement of cash flows for the year then ended, and notes to the
consolidated financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies.
In our opinion, except for the possible effects of the matter described in the Basis for Qualified
Opinion section of our report, the accompanying consolidated financial statements give a true and
fair view of the financial position of the Group as at December 31, 20X1, and of its consolidated
financial performance and its consolidated cash flows for the year then ended in accordance with
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).
Basis for qualified opinion
The Group’s investment in XYZ Company, a foreign associate acquired during the year and
accounted for by the equity method, is carried at xxx on the consolidated statement of financial
position at December 31, 20X1, and ABC’s share of XYZ’s net income of xxx is included in ABC’s
income for the year then ended. We were unable to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence
about the carrying amount of ABC’s investment in XYZ as at December 31, 20X1, and ABC’s share of
XYZ’s net income as we were denied access to the financial information, management, and the
auditors of XYZ. Consequently, we were unable to determine whether any adjustments to these
amounts were necessary.
Audit of the Consolidated Financial Statements section of our report. We are independent of the
Group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the consolidated
financial statements in [jurisdiction], and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in
accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is
sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our qualified opinion.
HB2021

Illustration 4
Disclaimer of opinion. Due to the auditor’s inability to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence
about a single element of the consolidated financial statements
Disclaimer of opinion
We were engaged to audit the consolidated financial statements of ABC Company and its
subsidiaries (the Group), which comprise the consolidated statement of financial position as at
December 31, 20X1, and the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated
statement of changes in equity and consolidated statement of cash flows for the year then ended,
and notes to the consolidated financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting
policies.
We do not express an opinion on the accompanying consolidated financial statements of the Group.
Because of the significance of the matter described in the Basis for Disclaimer of Opinion section of
our report, we have not been able to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence to provide a basis
for an audit opinion on these consolidated financial statements.
Basis for Disclaimer of opinion
The Group’s investment in its joint venture XYZ Company is carried at xxx on the Group’s
consolidated statement of financial position, which represents over 90% of the Group’s net assets as
at December 31, 20X1. We were not allowed access to the management and the auditors of XYZ
Company, including XYZ Company’s auditor’s audit documentation. As a result, we were unable to
determine whether any adjustments were necessary in respect of the Group’s proportional share of
XYZ Company’s assets that it controls jointly, its proportional share of XYZ Company’s liabilities for
which it is jointly responsible, its proportional share of XYZ’s income and expenses for the year, and
the elements making up the consolidated statement of changes in equity and consolidated cash flow
statement.
Illustration 5
Emphasis of matter paragraph
We draw attention to note X of the financial statements, which describes the effects of a fire in the
Company’s production facilities. Our opinion is not modified in respect of this matter.
(Source: Appendix 4 (extract) ISA (UK) 706 (Revised June 2016), Emphasis of Matter Paragraphs and
Other Matter Paragraphs in the Independent Auditor’s Report )
Note: This paragraph is inserted after the conclusions relating to going concern section.
Illustration 6
Unqualified opinion. Material uncertainty that may cast significant doubt about the company’s
ability to continue as a going concern. Disclosure is adequate
Opinion
In our opinion the financial statements:
• Give a true and fair view of the state of the company’s affairs as at [date] and of its [profit/loss] for
the year then ended;
• Have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted
Accounting Practice; and
• Have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
Material uncertainty related to going concern
We draw attention to note [X] in the financial statements, which indicates that [brief description of
events or conditions identified that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a
going concern]. As stated in note [X], these events or conditions, along with the other matters as set
forth in note [X], indicate that a material uncertainty exists that may cast significant doubt on the
company’s ability to continue as a going concern. Our opinion is not modified in respect of this
matter.
HB2021
(Source: Appendix 4 (extract) FRC, Bulletin: Illustrative Auditor’s Reports on United Kingdom Private
Sector Financial Statements)
HB2021

Summary
Governance issues
Audit
completion Review of financial Analytical procedures
statements
Responsibilities:
• Up to date of audit
report
• After date of audit
Subsequent
report but before
events
issued
• After financial
statements issued
Reporting implications
Going concern Management's responsibilities
Auditor's responsibilities
Corresponding figures
Comparatives
Comparative financial
statements Standard auditor's
report
Internal reporting
Key audit matters
Reporting External reporting
Modified reports
Other reporting
responsibilities Emphasis of matter
and other matters
Other
information
HB2021
1. Do you know the various stages of the audit completion process and can you find the
necessary standards in your open book?
2. Can you distinguish between the various responsibilities that the auditor needs to fulfil at
different stages of the audit, including right up to the date of the AGM?
3. Do you know how to identify and communicate the most appropriate conclusion
regarding the audited entity’s going concern status?
4. Can you explain the auditor’s responsibilities for dealing with comparatives and written
representations?
5. Do you know how to structure the auditor’s report, whether it is modified or requires some
form of modification?
6. Can you explain when you would apply the various modifications to the audit opinion and
what form they would take?
7. Can you explain the auditor’s responsibilities regarding other engagements (for example,
summary financial statements)?
8. Can you find the various modifications to the auditor’s report in the auditing standards
open book?
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Branch plc This will allow you to critically appraise extracts from a draft auditor’s
report in line with your knowledge of how it should look and the facts
presented in the scenario.
SafeAsHouses plc This question is a typical example of being ‘thrown in at the deep end’ on
a problematic engagement that is nearing its completion. How should you
respond?
UHN requirement (3) Although the question asks for key areas of audit risk, you will need to
consider the going concern status of UHN and the impact (if any) that this
could have on the auditor’s report and opinion.
HB2021

Tawkcom The question asks for an overview of the auditor’s responsibilities under
ISA (UK) 701 on key audit matters – do you know what these are?
Biltmore requirement You need to be able to discuss impact on the auditor’s report if necessary
(3) changes are not made to the draft financial statements.
chapter.
HB2021
Technical reference
1 ISA (UK) 260

• Auditor’s objectives – ISA (UK) 260.9
• Who auditor should communicate to – ISA (UK) 260.11–.13
• Matters to be communicated to those charged with governance – ISA (UK) 260.14-.16
• Timing of communications – ISA (UK) 260.21
• Form of communications – ISA (UK) 260.19–.20
2 ISA (UK) 265

• Identifying significant deficiencies – ISA (UK) 265.A5–.A7
• Written communication – ISA (UK) 265.11
3 ISA (UK) 450

• Evaluating the effects of misstatements – ISA (UK) 450.10–.11
4 ISA (UK) 520

• Analytical procedures at the end of the audit – ISA (UK) 520.6,.A17–.A19
• Investigating unusual items – ISA (UK) 520.7
5 ISA (UK) 560

• Auditor’s duty – ISA (UK) 560.6
• Audit procedures for obtaining audit evidence – ISA (UK) 560.7–.9
• Events after date of auditor’s report but before date financial statements issued – ISA (UK)
560.10–.13
• Events after date financial statements have been issued – ISA (UK) 560.14–.17
6 ISA (UK) 570

• Auditor’s responsibility – ISA (UK) 570.6–.7
• Auditor’s objectives – ISA (UK) 570.9
• Indicators of going concern problems – ISA (UK) 570.A3
• Audit procedures – ISA (UK) 570.16, A16
• Evaluating management assessment of going concern – ISA (UK) 570.12–.14
• Audit procedures – period beyond management’s assessment – ISA (UK) 570.15
• Audit conclusions and reporting – ISA (UK) 570.17–.24
7 ISA (UK) 580

• Definition – ISA (UK) 580.7
• Acknowledgement of management responsibility – ISA (UK) 580.10–.12
• Representations by management as audit evidence – ISA (UK) 580.13
• Documentation of representations – ISA (UK) 580.15
• Elements of a representation letter – ISA (UK) 580 Appendix 2
• Actions if management refuse to provide written representations – ISA (UK) 580.19
8 ISA (UK) 700

• Auditor’s objective – ISA (UK) 700.6
• Elements of a standard auditor’s report – ISA (UK) 700.21–.49
HB2021

9 ISA (UK) 701
• Determining key audit matters – ISA (UK) 701.9–10
• Communicating key audit matters – ISA (UK) 701.11–17
10 ISA (UK) 705

• Circumstances when modifications are required – ISA (UK) 705.6
• Types of modification – ISA (UK) 705.7–10, A1
11 ISA (UK) 706

• Emphasis of matter paragraphs – ISA (UK) 706.8–.9
• Other matter paragraphs – ISA (UK) 706.10–.11
12 ISA (UK) 710

• Reporting responsibilities – ISA (UK) 710.3
• Overview of audit procedures – ISA (UK) 710.7–.9
• Corresponding figures – reporting – ISA (UK) 710.10–.14
• Comparative financial statements – reporting – ISA (UK) 710.15–.16
13 ISA (UK) 720

• Action when a material misstatement of the other information exists – ISA (UK) 720.17–.19
• Action on identifying a material misstatement in the financial statements – ISA (UK) 720.20
• Reporting – ISA (UK) 720.21–.24
14 ISA (UK) 800

• Reports on financial statements prepared in accordance with a special purpose framework – ISA
(UK) 800.11–.14 & Appendix
15 ISA (UK) 805

• Reports on a single financial statement or specific element of a financial statement – ISA (UK)
805.11–.17 & Appendix
16 ISA 810 (Revised)

• Reports on summary financial statements – ISA 810.16–.21
17 Bulletin: Illustrative auditor’s reports on United Kingdom private sector financial

statements
FRC (2020). Bulletin: Illustrative Auditor’s Reports on United Kingdom Private Sector Financial
Statements [Online]. Available from: https://www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/d2efe37f-6953-40af-
a277-1746ad94e057/Illustrative-Auditors-Reports-Bulletin-March-2020-V1-2-4.pdf [Accessed: June
2021]
HB2021
Self-test questions
1 Branch plc
You are an audit partner. Your firm carries out the audit of Branch plc, a listed company. Because the
company is listed, you have been asked to perform a second partner review of the audit file for the
year ended 30 June 20X7 before the audit opinion is finalised. Reported profit before tax is £1.65
million and the statement of financial position total is £7.6 million.
You have read the following notes from the audit file:
”Earnings per share
The company has disclosed both basic and diluted earnings per share. The diluted earnings per
share has been incorrectly calculated because the share options held by a director were not included
in the calculations. Disclosed diluted earnings per share are 22.9p. Had the share options held by the
director been included, this figure would have been 22.4p. This difference is immaterial.
Financial performance statement
The directors have currently not amended certain financial performance ratios in this statement to
reflect the changes made to the financial statements as a result of the auditor’s work. The difference
between the reported ratios and the correct ratios is minimal.
Opinion
We recommend that an unmodified audit opinion be issued.”
You have noted that there is no evidence on the audit file that the corporate governance statement
to be issued as part of the annual report has been reviewed by the audit team. You are aware that the
company does not have an audit committee.
You are also aware that the director exercised his share options last week.
Requirement
Comment on the suitability of the proposed audit opinion and other matters arising in the light of
your review. Your comments should include an indication of what form the auditor’s report should
take.
2 SafeAsHouses plc
SafeAsHouses plc (SAH) was incorporated and commenced trading on 1 June 20X0 to retail small
household electronics products via free magazines inserted into newspapers. It has established a
presence in the market, but the early years of business have been a struggle with low profitability as
it has sought to create market share. On 1 June 20X2, it set up a 100% owned subsidiary, eSAH, with
a view to redirecting the business to internet-based sales in the hope of reducing printing and
physical distribution costs of its free magazine. SAH plans to obtain an AIM listing in the near future.
Your firm acts as auditors to both companies and you have recently been drafted into the audit
because the existing senior has been taken ill. Exhibit 1 comprises draft statements of financial
position and notes for both companies. Exhibit 2 comprises audit file notes prepared by the
previous audit senior.
The audit manager has asked you to take over the detailed audit work and to identify for her in a
briefing note those issues arising in the work to date that are likely to be problematic. Given the late
stage of the audit, and the consequent delays because of audit staff sickness, only the major issues
are to be highlighted in your briefing note to the manager. The audit manager is concerned that,
because the FD is new, the retention of the audit is potentially at risk and that there should be no
further delay in the audit. The FD is pressing for these matters to be finalised and the accounts to be
signed quickly.
HB2021

Requirement
Prepare the briefing note as requested.
Exhibit 1: Draft statements of financial position

The draft statements of financial position of SAH (parent company only) and eSAH at 31 May 20X3
are as follows.
SAH eSAH
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Non-current assets at cost 1,895 408
Less depreciation (400) (25)
1,495 383
Current assets
Inventories 422 –
Receivables 550 225
Bank –––– 5
972 230
Current liabilities (662) (313)
Net current assets/(liabilities) 310 (83)
1,805 300
8% debentures (1,000) ––––
805 300
Financed by
Issued ordinary share capital 200 300
Share premium account 100 –
Retained earnings 505 ––––
805 300
Additional information
(1) Current liabilities
SAH eSAH
£’000 £’000
Bank overdraft 92 –
Other payables 40 –
Accruals 100 13
662 313
(2) Property in SAH had been revalued during the year. The revaluation amounted to £0.5 million.
(3) Debentures were issued at par on 1 June 20X0 and are due for redemption at par on 31
December 20X4.
HB2021
Exhibit 2: Audit file notes
(1) eSAH has received £120,000 as a payment on account from a customer on 27 May 20X3 for
delivery of goods to the customer by SAH in the following months. eSAH has a confirmed contract
for this and has recorded the amount in revenue for the year.
(2) eSAH has capitalised software development costs to the amount of £408,000 during the year.
There are no specific details as yet, but it appears to relate almost entirely to the development of new
e-based sales systems. £186,000 of the capitalised amount related to computers and consulting
support staff time bought and brought in specifically to help test the new system. eSAH is adopting
its standard five-year, straight-line depreciation policy with respect to the £408,000.
(3) I have gathered together some data relating to SAH before performing analytical procedures, but
have yet to get around to doing it. The relevant data is:
Year end May 20X1 20X2 20X3

Revenue (£’000) 500 1,140 990
Gross profit margins (%) 22 19 17
Profit/(loss) retained in the year (£’000) 2 45 (42)
I understand eSAH’s provisional revenue to the year end 31 May 20X3 to be about £500,000, and
gross profitability was at 10%. Inventory has remained constant during the year ended 31 May 20X3
in SAH.
(4) SAH is planning to pay a dividend for the first time this year of about £50,000. This has yet to be
finalised and has not been provided for in the financial statements. The FD said he would get back to
me once the figure has been finalised.
(5) The FD has suggested that the format of the business of eSAH is completely different from that of
SAH and is insisting on not consolidating the results of eSAH on the grounds that it would undermine
a true and fair view of the financial statements.
There are some debt covenants relating to the debenture (in SAH) of which we should be aware. I
have not done any work on these, as yet.
• Net current assets are to remain positive.
• Overdraft balances are to be no more than £150,000 at all times.
• Receivables days and payable days are not to exceed 180 days each. Calculations to be based on
year-end figures.
• Bank consent is required for any significant changes in the structure of the business.
• I understand that a breach of any of these conditions converts the debenture into a loan
repayable on demand.
When eSAH was incorporated, bank consent was obtained in accordance with the covenants.
Consent was obtained on the basis that the covenants would now apply on a consolidated basis.
this chapter.
HB2021


Implications
(1) Accounting treatment
(a) The accounting treatment of the oil spill depends on when the event (ie, the oil spill) took
place.
(b) If the oil spill took place before the financial statements were authorised for issue the spill is
an event after the reporting period. The key question then is whether it should be treated as
an adjusting or non-adjusting event in accordance with IAS 10.
(c) Although the spill has only come to light on 1 April, it is possible that the leak was present at
the reporting date but was not detected at this time. If this were the case, then the event
would be an adjusting event and the financial statements should include a provision for the
costs of rectifying the damage, including that caused to the environment. If it can be
demonstrated that the leak occurred after the year end and that the effects are material,
which is probable in this case, the nature of the event and an estimate of the financial effect
should be disclosed.
(d) If the leak took place after 28 March ie, when the financial statements were authorised for
issue, the event would not be recognised in the financial statements for 20X7 but would be
recognised in 20X8.
(e) It is likely that expert evidence would need to be sought to determine how the leak has
occurred and therefore to estimate when the leak might have started.
(2) Auditor’s responsibility
(a) Once the auditor’s report has been signed, the auditor does not have any responsibility to
perform audit procedures regarding subsequent events. However, the fact that the oil spill is
revealed so soon after the signing of the auditor’s report may call into question whether the
directors were attempting to conceal information and avoid a provision being made in the
current year financial statements. It also calls into question whether all other relevant
information has been given to the auditors up to this date.
(b) As the financial statements have not been issued, the auditor should consider the need to
amend the financial statements. This will depend on the application of IAS 10 as described
above. If the financial statements are amended to provide for an adjusting event or disclose
a non-adjusting event, additional audit procedures will be required and a new auditor’s
report would be issued.

2.1 Circumstances/concern
Circumstances Why cause for concern?
Fall in gross profit % While the fall in absolute revenue has been explained the fall in
achieved gross profit margin is more serious.
This will continue to be a problem, as expenses seem constant and

interest costs are growing.
This will make a future return to profitability difficult.
Losses £249,000 Such levels of losses by comparison to 20X4 profits will make
negotiations with the bank difficult, especially with the loss of a
major customer.
HB2021
Circumstances Why cause for concern?
Increased receivables Worsening debt collection is bad news when the company is
balance and making losses and has a deteriorating liquidity position.
increased ageing
20X4 74.8 days
The increase in average debt collection period may be due to an
20X5 96.7 days irrecoverable receivable on the account of the major customer lost
in the year.
An irrecoverable receivable write-off would cause much increased

losses.
Worsening liquidity This is a significant fall which will worsen further if an allowance for
ratio irrecoverable receivables is required.
20X4 1.03 The company has loan and lease commitments which possibly may
20X5 0.87 not be met.
Increasing reliance on This does not secure the future.

short-term finance
Summary – If the company is not a going concern the financial statements would be truer and
fairer if prepared on a break-up basis. Material adjustments may then be required to the
• Analyse post-reporting date sale proceeds for non-current assets, inventory, cash received
from customers.
• Review the debt ageing and cash recovery lists. Ask directors if outstanding amounts from
lost customer are recoverable.
• Discuss the optimistic view of likely future contracts with the MD. Orders in the post-
reporting date period should be reviewed to see if they substantiate his opinion.
• Obtain his opinion about future contracts in a written representation letter.
• Review bank/loan records to assess the extent to which the company has met its loan and
lease commitments in the post-reporting date period.
• Review sales orders/sales ledger for evidence of additional lost custom in post-reporting
date period.
• Obtain cash flow and profit forecasts:
– Discuss assumptions with the directors
– Perform sensitivity analysis flexing the key assumptions ie, interest rates, date of payment
of payables and receipts from customers
• Check all commitments have been cleared in accordance with legal agreements:
– Agree budgets to any actual results achieved in the post-reporting date period
– Assess reasonableness of assumptions in the light of the success of the achievement of
the company’s budgets set for 20X5. Discuss with the directors any targets not achieved
– Reperform calculations
– Ensure future budgeted profits are expected to meet likely interest charges
• Review bank records to ensure that the company is operating within its overdraft facility in
the post-reporting date period. Review bank certificate for terms and conditions of the
facility. Review bank correspondence for any suggestion the bank is concerned about its
current position.
• Ask management whether the new vehicle fleet is attracting new contracts as anticipated.
Scrutinise any new contracts obtained and check improved gross profit margins will be
achieved.
• Obtain written representation as to the likelihood of the company operating for 12 months
from the date of approval of the financial statements.
HB2021

Matters
(1) I would expect to see this referred to in a written representation letter. Appendix 1 to ISA 580
cross refers to the requirement in ISA (UK) 560, Subsequent Events that management should
inform auditors of relevant subsequent events.
(2) This should not appear on a written representation letter, even though management opinion is
involved. This indicates an incorrect accounting treatment which the auditors should be in
disagreement with the directors over.
(3) This should not appear on a written representation letter, as there should be sufficient alternative
evidence for this matter. The auditor should be able to obtain registered information about
Subsidiary from the companies’ registrar.
(4) This should not appear on a written representation letter. The auditors should be able to obtain
evidence from Leaf Oil that the inventory belongs to them.

Matters
(1) Non-current assets
There are two issues here. The first is whether Russell Ltd’s policy of revaluations is correct and
the second is whether Russell Ltd should capitalise refit costs.
The most important thing to consider is materiality, as only material items will affect the audit
opinion. The revaluations and refit total is material to the statement of financial position. It is
possible that any revaluation of the factory premises would also be material.
(a) Revaluation policy
Per IAS 16, non-current assets may be held at cost or valuation. Where a company applies a
revaluation policy, IAS 16 requires that all revaluations are made with sufficient regularity
that the carrying amount does not vary materially from that which would be determined if
fair value were used. Russell Ltd revalues annually, so meets the latter requirement.
Russell Ltd revalues property and IAS 16 requires that all items in the same class of assets be
revalued, so the question arises as to whether it should also revalue the factory. This might
have a material effect on the statement of financial position.
IAS 16 states that a ‘class’ of property, plant and equipment is a grouping of assets of a
similar nature and use in an entity’s operations. Although the IAS implies that buildings
comprise one class, in this case the nature and use of the two kinds of building are quite
distinct. Therefore creating two classes (retail premises and manufacturing premises) would
appear reasonable.
(b) Refits
Assets should be held at cost or valuation as discussed above. However, in some cases, IAS
16 allows the cost of refits to be added to the original cost of the asset. This is when it is
probable that future economic benefits in excess of the originally assessed standard of
performance of the existing asset will flow to the entity. A retail shop will be subject to
refitting and this refitting may enhance its value. However, it is possible in a shop that such
refitting might be better classified as expenditure on fixtures and fittings. Russell Ltd’s policy
should be consistent and comparable so, if they have followed a policy of capitalising refits
into the cost of the shop in the past, this seems reasonable.
Conclusion
The issues relating to non-current assets were material and could have affected the auditor’s report.
However, having considered the issues, it appears that there are no material misstatements relating
to these issues. As there appears to have been no problem in obtaining sufficient appropriate
evidence in relation to non-current assets, the audit opinion would be unmodified in relation to these
issues.
(2) Revenue recognition
The key question is the nature of the revenue earned by Russell Ltd on the internet sales. Russell Ltd
is acting as an agent for Cairns plc. At no point do the risks and rewards of ownership of the goods
HB2021
sold on the internet pass to Russell Ltd. This is evidenced by the fact that goods are sent directly to
the customer by Cairns plc and they are responsible for all after-sales issues. The revenue earned by
Russell Ltd is therefore the commission on sales generated rather than the sales price of the goods
sold. Equally there will be no recognition of cost of sales or inventory in respect of these items.
Therefore the current treatment in the financial statements is incorrect.
In accordance with IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers commission received by a party
acting as an agent should be recognised as earned. As Russell Ltd has no further obligations once
the initial transaction has been undertaken the commission should be recognised at this time.
Commission of approximately £900,000 should be recognised (£6,000,000 × 15%). An additional
adjustment may be required in respect of sales made not despatched. The £6,000,000 trading
revenue should be eliminated with any associated costs of sale and inventory. These amounts are
likely to be material to the financial statements.
Conclusion
The financial statements should be revised, as they do not comply with IFRS 15. If management
refuse to adjust the financial statements the auditor will need to qualify the audit opinion on the
grounds of a misstatement (disagreement) which is material but not pervasive.
HB2021

1 Branch plc
Earnings per share
The problem in the EPS calculation relates to share options held by a director. As they are held by a
director, it is unlikely that they are immaterial, as matters relating to directors are generally
considered to be material by their nature. The fact that EPS is a key shareholder ratio which is
therefore likely to be material in nature to the shareholders should also be considered.
As the incorrect EPS calculation is therefore material to the financial statements, the audit opinion
should be modified in this respect, unless the directors agree to amend the EPS figure. This would be
a qualified opinion using the term except for’ on the grounds of material misstatement
(disagreement with the accounting treatment).
Share options
The share options have not been included in the EPS calculations. The auditors must ensure that the
share options have been correctly disclosed in information relating to the director in both the
financial statements and the other information, and that these disclosures are consistent with each
other. If proper disclosures have not been made, the auditor will have to modify the audit opinion
due to lack of disclosure in this area which also represents a material misstatement.
Exercise of share options
The fact that the director has exercised his share options after the year end does not require
disclosure in the financial statements. However, it is likely that he has exercised them as part of a new
share issue by the company and, if so, the share issue would be a non-adjusting event after the
reporting period that would require disclosure in the financial statements. We should check if this is
the case and, if so, whether it has been disclosed. Non-disclosure would be further grounds for
opinion modification as a material misstatement.
Financial performance statement
The financial performance statement forms part of the other information that the auditor is required
to review under ISA (UK) 720. The auditor’s report would include an ‘Other Information’ section in
accordance with this standard. The ISA states that the auditors should seek to rectify any apparent
misstatements in this information. The ratio figures are misstated, and the auditor should encourage
the directors to correct them, regardless of the negligible difference.
The ISA refers to material items. The ratios will be of interest to shareholders, being investor
information, and this fact may make them material by their nature. However, as the difference is
negligible in terms of value, on balance, the difference is probably not sufficiently material for the
auditors to make any specific reference to this in their auditor’s report.
Corporate governance statement
For the company to meet stock exchange requirements, the auditors must review the corporate
governance statement. For our own purposes, we should document that we have done so. As having
an audit committee is a requirement of the UK Corporate Governance Code and the company does
not have one, the corporate governance statement should explain why the company does not
comply with the Code in this respect.
We would not modify our audit opinion over the corporate governance statement, although we
would make reference to it in the ‘Other Information’ section, if we do not feel the disclosure is
sufficient in respect of the non-compliance with the requirement to have an audit committee.
The audit opinion would not be modified in this respect. We are also required to report by exception
if we have identified information that is:
• inconsistent with the information in the audited financial statements; or
• materially misstated based on the knowledge acquired by the auditor in the course of the audit.
HB2021
Overall conclusion
None of the matters discussed above, either singly or seen together, are pervasive to the financial
statements. The auditor’s report should be modified on the material matter of the incorrect EPS
calculation and the inadequate disclosures on EPS (and possibly the undisclosed share issue as well)
by means of a qualified opinion and a basis section that explains this qualified opinion. We should
also review the corporate governance statement: if the statement does not adequately address the
issue of the company not having an audit committee, we will need to address this in the ‘Other
Information’ of our report. Our audit opinion will not be modified in this respect.
2 SafeAsHouses plc
BRIEFING NOTES TO MANAGER
To Audit Manager
From Audit Senior
Date July 20X3
Client SafeAsHouses (hereafter SAH) and eSAH
Subject Major issues arising in audit work performed to date
There are a host of issues that need to be addressed. Some are important, and these are those I have
highlighted for your attention.
While there may now be some urgency with respect to completing the audit it is not acceptable for
us to be rushed in forming our judgement. This creates a threat to our objectivity through possible
intimidation.
Incorrect financial statements
The financial statements are incorrectly stated for SAH. There is no revaluation reserve and it seems,
after looking at the retained earnings in the analytical procedures, that the revaluation has been
credited to profit or loss. Retained earnings should therefore be £5,000 and the revaluation reserve
balance should be £500,000. (The revaluation would also be recognised as other comprehensive
income in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.) The implication of this is
that the company has insufficient distributable reserves to pay the proposed dividend. There also
appears to be little cash to pay any dividend given the overdraft in SAH.
The intention not to consolidate the 100% subsidiary is unlikely to be allowed. IFRS 10, Consolidated
Financial Statements does not allow exclusion of a subsidiary from consolidation on the basis of
differing activities.
The company does not appear to have established a sinking fund for the redemption of the
debenture. There is not enough cash in the financial statements to approach the figure required and
the profitability of SAH is not sufficient to generate the amount required in the months remaining.
eSAH does not appear to be generating any cash at all. Nevertheless, the company appears to have
had or raised £300,000 to launch eSAH.
Moreover, in SAH, revenue and profit margins have been falling since 20X1. We will need to ascertain
why this has happened and consider any explanations received in conjunction with available forecast
figures.
I am seriously concerned at the levels of receivables and payables in both companies. Not enough
cash is coming into the businesses and not enough, it appears, is being used to pay the payables.
There is a solvency issue pending which may well be crystallised when one considers the debt
covenants.
Net current assets
These stand at £310,000 for SAH and are clearly positive, which satisfies the constraint in place from
the debt covenant. However, there are some issues in eSAH that indicate that its net current assets
figures (already negative) may have to be further adjusted downward.
(1) The treatment of the payment on account of £120,000 is incorrect and does not accord with
prudent revenue recognition rules. The payment should not have been taken to revenue, but
credited to an account in short-term payables. This adjustment will reduce net current assets to
(£203,000).
HB2021

(2) This means that the provisional revenue figure for eSAH of £500,000 should be reduced by
£120,000 to £380,000. There is also an intra-group element that requires adjustment in that SAH
still presumably holds the inventory to which the amount of £120,000 relates.
(3) In general, the inventory figure in SAH looks large and we will have to prepare an audit
programme that challenges this figure in order to establish its accuracy. Given its central role in
relation to the covenants, this will be important.
Other issues
(1) The development costs of the software seem to be correctly treated under IAS 38, Intangible
Assets in that an intangible asset may be recognised as arising from development (or from the
development phase of an internal project) if the following can be demonstrated.
(a) The technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset so that it will be available for use
or sale.
(b) The entity’s intention to complete the intangible asset and use or sell it.
(c) Its ability to use or sell the intangible asset.
This would also appear to relate to the testing costs since they meet the criteria of
development activities under the standard (‘the design, construction and testing of a chosen
alternative for new or improved materials, devices, products, processes, systems or services’,
para 59).
More generally, the testing costs of £186,000 look substantial in relation to the overall
£408,000 spent. This may have indicated some problems with the software. We should
establish why the testing costs were so high and, if there were problems, obtain assurance
of their resolution.
(2) The depreciation provision in eSAH’s accounts does not seem to accord with its stated policy.
They have charged only £25,000 out of a maximum of £81,600 (£408,000 ÷ 5). This would imply
a charge only relating to 3.6 months of the year. We will need to ascertain what the depreciation
policy is and exactly what capitalised costs have been incurred.
(3) I am suspicious that eSAH has made a nil profit in the year. It looks too coincidental and may
have been the result of an arbitrary calculation on, say, depreciation with which I have some
doubts anyway.
(4) The investment in the subsidiary eSAH has not been separately presented in SAH’s accounts.
£300,000 will need to be recorded as a non-current asset investment once it has been identified
where the incorrect debit has been recorded (possibly in the ‘non-current assets’ total figure).
(5) Overdraft. Unless we see a cash flow forecast demonstrating a dramatic improvement I cannot
see how breaching the overdraft condition can be avoided. Two forces are at work in relation to
this. First, the debenture interest at 8% suggests a repayment schedule of £130,000 per annum.
Allied to significant investment in the subsidiary, cash flow may well be strained in the
forthcoming year. Second, unless a refinancing package is agreed, I cannot see how the
company can redeem its debenture. I cannot see any course of action at this stage other than to
require disclosures on the grounds of going concern.
Receivable and payable days
I have calculated these on a consolidated basis. The relevant figures are
Receivables: (550 + 225)/(990 + (500 – 120)) × 365 = 206 days (assuming revenues are all on credit)
With inventory remaining constant in SAH (and no inventory values in eSAH), then cost of sales is
equivalent to purchases. Assuming these are all on credit then
Trade payables: (430 + 300)/((990 × 83%) + ((500 – 120) × 90%)) × 365 = 229 days
The covenant is exceeded. Once this is reported, the debenture holders will be able to enforce the
conversion of the debenture into a loan repayable on demand.
I consider it highly likely that the company SAH will become insolvent. It will then be up to the
debenture holders to assess if a reorganisation plan is viable. In particular we will need to do the
following:
• See and investigate what projections are available for SAH with a view to considering the viability
of the business.
HB2021
• These projections will have implications for the plans for a listing in the near future which look too
ambitious as there is likely to be too much uncertainty for the business to be floated successfully.
• Assess if there are any refinancing arrangements in place or proposed that would underpin the
survival of the company.
• Look to correspondence with financiers to ascertain evidence of refinancing or a relaxation of the
covenants.
HB2021

Chapter 9
Reporting financial
performance
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements
2 IFRS 8, Operating Segments
3 IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued
Operations
4 IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures
5 IFRS 1, First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting
Standards
6 IAS 34, Interim Financial Reporting
7 IFRS 14, Regulatory Deferral Accounts
8 Audit focus – general issues with reporting performance
9 Audit focus – specific issues
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Explain how different methods of recognising and measuring assets and liabilities can affect
reported financial performance
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to reporting performance: in respect of
presentation of financial statements; revenue; operating segments; continuing and discontinued
operations; EPS; interim reporting
• Formulate and evaluate accounting and reporting policies for single entities and groups of
varying sizes and in a variety of industries
• Calculate and disclose, from financial and other qualitative data, the amounts to be included in an
entity’s financial statements according to legal requirements, applicable financial reporting
standards and accounting and reporting policies
• Appraise the significance of inconsistencies and omissions in reported information in evaluating
performance
• Compare the performance and position of different entities allowing for inconsistencies in the
recognition and measurement criteria in the financial statement information provided
• Make adjustments to reported earnings in order to determine underlying earnings and compare
the performance of an entity over time
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 2(a)–(d), 9(f)–(h), 14(f)
9

of this chapter.

1 IAS 1, Presentation Approach IAS 1 formats will be N/A

of Financial This section will be ‘taken as read’ in
Statements largely revision from your exam. One
IAS 1 forms the your earlier studies. issue that could
basis of financial However, it includes come up is that of
reporting, setting a recent Practice other
out the formats of Statement on comprehensive
the financial materiality income, and
statements and their judgements that whether an item
structure and you will not have may be reclassified
content. met before, so work from other
through this part comprehensive
carefully. income to profit or
loss.
Stop and think
Is it possible for a
financial report to
provide too much
information?
HB2021

2 IFRS 8, Operating Approach As IFRS 8 is a IQ1: Segments

Segments This topic is new at disclosure standard, This question tests
External users of Advanced Level, so it is likely to come reportable
financial statements needs to be worked up in the context of segments requiring
rely on the limited through carefully. financial analysis application of size
disaggregation The best way to and also audit. criteria and
provided as a result learn is by looking aggregation.
of the requirements at the summary in
of accounting 3.6.1 and the
standards such as example and
the disclosure of proforma in 3.6.3
segmental and 3.6.4.
information. Stop and think
How does
disaggregation of
data help facilitate
the assessment of a
company’s
performance?
3 IFRS 5, Non-current Approach Both assets held for IQ2: Held for sale
Assets Held for Sale You have studied sale and This question asks
and Discontinued this topic at discontinued you to apply the
Operations Professional Level, operations are held-for-sale criteria.
External users of so work through regularly tested, Make sure you
financial statements quickly then do the both in the single come to a
rely on the limited interactive question. silo FR question and conclusion.
disaggregation the integrated
Stop and think question. Scenarios
provided as a result
of the requirements How do standards are often very
of accounting such as IFRS 5 and detailed and IFRS 5
standards such as IFRS 8 help provide will interact with
the disclosure of disaggregated other standards,
discontinued information to such as IAS 10.
operations. users?
4 IAS 24, Related Approach As a disclosure IQ4: Related party

Party Disclosures You have met this standard, IAS 24 is transactions
Related party standard in your often tested in the This question tests
transactions happen earlier studies but context of audit. It related parties in a
in any size of entity, as it comes up quite can also come up in group context.
and are perfectly regularly, it is best to the context of group
legal, but need to approach it as if accounts.
be disclosed. learning it from
scratch.
Stop and think
What is the
significance in terms
of the company’s
performance of
disclosing related
party transactions?
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 9: Reporting financial performance 473

5 IFRS 1, First-time Approach As yet IQ5: IFRS 1

Adoption of This standard is undetermined as Read through the
International examinable at Level this standard has question and ‘audit’
Financial Reporting C and has not yet not been examined. the answer.
Standards been examined, so
While this standard read through but
is within the not at the expense
syllabus, and has of other standards
affected companies in this chapter.
in practice, it is not Stop and think
as significant for
your exam. Questions will
generally feature
companies that
already use IFRS
rather than
adopting it for the
first time.
6 IAS 34, Interim Approach The key point to IQ6: Interim

Financial Reporting IAS 34, Interim remember if IAS 34 financial statements
The preparation of Financial Reporting comes up in an This short question
interim financial (a new topic at exam is that an deals with the
statements may Advanced Level) entity should use appropriate tax rate
present a number of lays down the the same to apply to the
challenges. It is principles and recognition and profits in an interim
common for some guidelines for the measurement report.
business production of principles in its
arrangements, such interim reports. interim statements
as supply pricing as it does in its
Stop and think annual financial
agreements, bonus
schemes, taxation What does IAS 34 statements.
and overhead say about holiday
allocation, to be pay?
based on
annualised
approaches. The
measurement and
presentation of such
information may
therefore be
complex.
7 IFRS 14, Regulatory Approach This standard has N/A

Deferral Accounts IFRS 14, Regulatory not yet been
This is a fairly minor Deferral Accounts is examined and is
standard for the in the syllabus, but given Level C in the
purposes of your is not a key topic syllabus. However, it
studies and has not yet could still be
been examined. examined, though
not in as much
Stop and think detail as some of
IFRS 14 tackles an the other IFRS.
accounting
mismatch. Can you
think of another
IFRS that does this?
HB2021

8 Audit focus – Approach An exam will test N/A

general issues with Read through specifics rather than
reporting quickly general points.
performance
Stop and think
This is a brief
section outlining Is the auditor
general issues with concerned only with
performance in the fraud?
context of ISA (UK)
200
9 Audit focus – Approach Many questions IQ7: Audit

specific issues Work through all of have a scenario in procedures – held-
This section gives this section, which you are asked for-sale assets
detailed guidance focusing particularly to explain the This question is in
on the audit of: on the audit of financial reporting the style of (though
related parties as treatment and then shorter) one you
• Segment discuss audit issues.
information this comes up a lot. might get as part of
It makes sense to do Question 3.
• Held-for-sale Stop and think the FR first as the
assets How would the audit follows on
• Related parties auditor determine from that. However,
whether the IFRS 5 questions may also
• First-time
held for sale criteria be set in which he
adoption of IFRS
have been met? financial reporting
arises from the audit
issue. This approach
is a key difference
from Professional
Level.
HB2021

Section overview
• IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements sets down the format of financial statements,
containing requirements as to their presentation, structure and content.
1.1 Main features

1.1.1 Titles of financial statements
• The three main financial statements under IAS 1 are as follows:
• Statement of financial position
• Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
• Statement of cash flows
You may still see the older names, particularly balance sheet for statement of financial position as
these titles are not mandatory.
1.1.2 Reporting owner changes in equity and comprehensive income

IAS 1 classifies changes in equity in a period as either:
• owner changes in equity; or
• non-owner changes in equity.
Owner changes in equity arise from transactions with owners in their capacity as owners, eg,
dividends paid and issues of share capital. These are presented in the statement of changes in
equity.
Non-owner changes in equity (known as ‘comprehensive income’) include:
• the profit or loss for the period; and
• income or expenditure recognised directly in equity (known as ‘other comprehensive income’).
These are presented in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
Summary
IAS 1
Profit or loss for period Statement of profit or loss and other

comprehensive income
Non-owner transactions recognised directly in equity
Owner transactions Statement of changes in equity
1.1.3 Presentation of comparatives

IAS 1 requires disclosure of comparative information in respect of the previous period. It also
requires inclusion of a statement of financial position as at the beginning of the earliest comparative
period when an entity:
• retrospectively applies an accounting policy;
• retrospectively restates items in the financial statements; or
• reclassifies items in the financial statements.
In effect this will result in the presentation of three statements of financial position when there is a
prior period adjustment.
HB2021

1.2 Materiality and aggregation
Entities must be able to use judgement when presenting their financial reports. Accordingly, the
following are required by IAS 1 paragraph 30A:
(a) Materiality. Information should not be obscured by aggregating or by providing immaterial
information. Materiality considerations apply to the parts of the financial statements. Materiality
considerations still apply, even when a standard requires a specific disclosure.
(b) Statement of financial position and statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
The list of line items to be presented in these statements can be disaggregated and aggregated
as relevant and additional guidance is given on subtotals in these statements. An entity’s share of
other comprehensive income of equity-accounted associates and joint ventures should be
presented in aggregate as single line items based on whether or not it will subsequently be
reclassified to profit or loss.
Information is material if omitting, misstating or obscuring it could reasonably be expected to
influence decisions that the primary users of general-purpose financial statements make on the basis
of those financial statements, which provide financial information about a specific reporting entity. In
other words, materiality is an entity-specific aspect of relevance based on the nature or magnitude,
or both, of the items to which the information relates in the context of an individual entity’s financial
report. (IAS 1: para. 7)
The IASB has amended the definition of ‘material’ to make it clear that obscuring information has the
same effect as omitting or misstating it. Obscuring information means making the information so
difficult to find or so difficult to understand, that it may as well have been omitted.
This addresses the issue that too much information can be just as problematic as the omission or
misstatement of information.
1.2.1 Practice Statement 2: Making Materiality Judgements

The IASB issued Practice Statement 2: Making Materiality Judgements in 2017. This is a tool to aid
management in using judgement to decide what information is material and what is not; it is a non-
mandatory document and does not have the status of an IFRS.
The key point is a four‑step process for making materiality judgements:
Step 1 Identify information that has the potential to be material. This step requires consideration of
IFRS requirements and the common information needs of primary users.
Step 2 Assess whether the information identified is material. Both quantitative and qualitative
factors should be considered.
Step 3 Organise the information within the draft financial statements so that it supports clear and
concise communication.
Step 4 Review the information provided as a whole, considering whether it is material individually
and in combination with other information. At this stage information may need to be added
or removed.
This Practice Statement is an example of where two professional skills interact. In order to apply
judgement, you need to identify the relevant information, taking into account IFRS requirements and
users’ information needs.
Having assimilated and organised the information (steps 1 to 3 of the Practice Statement process),
you will be in a position to make judgements about whether it is material. Other information may be
needed to support the judgements.
HB2021

1.3 Statement of financial position
Note that reserves other than share capital and retained earnings may be grouped as ‘other
components of equity’.
Statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X7
31 Dec 20X7 31 Dec 20X6

$m $m
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment X X
Goodwill X X
Other intangible assets X X
Investments in associates X X
Investments in equity instruments X X
X X
Current assets
Inventories X X
Trade receivables X X
Other current assets X X
Cash and cash equivalents X X
X X
Total assets X X
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity attributable to owners of the parent
Share capital X X
Retained earnings X X
Other components of equity X X
X X
Non-controlling interests X X
Total equity X X
Long-term borrowings X X
Deferred tax X X
Long-term provisions X X
Total non-current liabilities X X
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables X X
Short-term borrowings X X
Current portion of long-term borrowings X X
Current tax payable X X
HB2021

31 Dec 20X7 31 Dec 20X6
$m $m
Short-term provisions X X
Total current liabilities X X
Total liabilities X X
Total equity and liabilities X X
1.4 Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income

The statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income presents the total comprehensive
income of an entity for a period.
Total comprehensive income is the change in equity during a period resulting from transactions and
other events, other than those changes resulting from transactions with owners in their capacity as
owners. It includes all components of profit or loss and of ‘other comprehensive income’.
Other comprehensive income includes income and expenses that are not recognised in profit or
loss, but instead recognised directly in equity. It includes:
• changes in the revaluation surplus;
• remeasurements (actuarial gains and losses on defined benefit plans recognised in accordance
with IAS 19, Employee Benefits (Chapter 18);
• gains and losses arising from translating the financial statements of a foreign operation (Chapter
21);
• gains and losses on remeasuring investments in equity instruments where an irrevocable election
has been made to record changes in OCI (Chapter 16); and
• the effective portion of gains and losses on hedging instruments in a cash flow hedge (Chapter
17).
1.4.1 Presentation of other comprehensive income

The issue
The blurring of distinctions between different items in OCI is the result of an underlying general lack
of agreement among users and preparers about which items should be presented in OCI and which
should be part of the profit or loss section. For instance, a common misunderstanding is that the split
between profit or loss and OCI is on the basis of realised versus unrealised gains. This is not, and has
never been, the case.
This lack of a consistent basis for determining how items should be presented can lead to the
somewhat inconsistent use of OCI in financial statements.
This is an example where judgement can shade into subjectivity, and more specific guidance is
needed to focus the judgement of the preparer of financial statements.
IAS 1 approach
Entities are required to group items presented in OCI on the basis of whether they would be
reclassified to (recycled through) profit or loss at a later date, when specified conditions are met.
The amendment does not address which items are presented in OCI or which items need to be
reclassified.
Income tax
IAS 1 requires an entity to disclose income tax relating to each component of OCI. This is because
these items often have tax rates different from those applied to profit or loss.
HB2021

This may be achieved by either:
• presenting individual components of OCI net of the related tax; or
• presenting individual components of OCI before tax, with one amount shown for the aggregate
amount of income tax relating to those components.
Presentation
IAS 1 allows comprehensive income to be presented in two ways:
(a) A single statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income; or
(b) A statement displaying components of profit or loss plus a second statement beginning with
profit or loss and displaying components of OCI (statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income).
The recommended format of a single statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income is
as follows:
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X7
20X7 20X6
$m $m
Revenue X X
Cost of sales (X) (X)
Gross profit X X
Other income X X
Distribution costs (X) (X)
Administrative expenses (X) (X)
Other expenses (X) (X)
Finance costs (X) (X)
Share of profit of associates X X
Profit before tax X X
Income tax expense (X) (X)
Profit for the year from continuing operations X X
Loss for the year from discontinued operations (X)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR X X
Other comprehensive income:
Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss:
Gains on property revaluation X X
Investment in equity instruments (X) X
Actuarial gains (losses) on defined benefit pension plans (X) X
Share of gain (loss) on property revaluation of associates X (X)
Income tax relating to items that will not be reclassified X (X)
(X) X
Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:
Exchange differences on translating foreign operations X X
Cash flow hedges (X) (X)
HB2021

20X7 20X6
$m $m
Income tax relating to items that may be reclassified (X) (X)
X X
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax (X) X
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR X X

Profit attributable to:
Owners of the parent X X
X X
Total comprehensive income attributable to:
Owners of the parent X X
X X
Earnings per share ($)
Basic and diluted X X
Alternatively, components of OCI could be presented in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income net of tax.
Statements of profit or loss

Throughout this Workbook, income and expense items which are included in the ‘top half’ of the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income are referred to as recognised in profit
or loss, or recognised in the income statement.
Income and expense items included in the ‘bottom half’ of the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income are referred to as recognised in other comprehensive income.
For exam purposes, you must ensure that you clarify where in the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income an item is recorded, by referring to recognition:
• in profit or loss; or
• in other comprehensive income.
1.5 Statement of changes in equity

All changes in equity arising from transactions with owners in their capacity as owners are shown in
the statement of changes in equity.
Non-owner transactions are not permitted to be shown in the statement of changes in equity other
than in aggregate.
HB2021

Statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 20X7
Share capital
Retained
earnings
foreign ops
Inv. in equity
instrum’ts
Cash flow
hedges
Revaluat’n
surplus
Total
Non-controlling
interest
Total equity
Trans. of
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Balance at
1 Jan
20X7 X X (X) X X – X X X
Changes in
acc’g
policy – X – – – – X – X
Restated
balance X X (X) X X – X X X
Changes in
equity
during
20X7
Issue of
share
capital X – – – – – X – X
Dividends – (X) – – – – (X) (X) (X)
Total comp.
income
for the
year – X X X X X X X X
Transfer to
retained
earn’gs – X – – – (X) – – –
Balance at
31 Dec
20X7 X X X X X X X X X
A comparative statement for the prior period is also required. Here is an example of a statement of
changes in equity with some real figures in, to give you a better idea of what it looks like:
Olive Group: statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 June 20X9
Inv. in Non-
Share Retained equity Revaluat’n controlling Total
capital earnings instrum’ts surplus Total interest equity
£m £m £m £m £m £m £m
Balance at
1 July
20X8 14,280 10,896 384 96 25,656 1,272 26,928
Share
capital
issued 1,320 1,320 1,320
Dividends (216) (216) (120) (336)
HB2021

Inv. in Non-
Share Retained equity Revaluat’n controlling Total
capital earnings instrum’ts surplus Total interest equity
£m £m £m £m £m £m £m
Total comp.
income
for the
year (1,296) 72 48 (1,176) 528 (648)
Balance at
30 June
20X9 15,600 9,384 456 144 25,584 1,680 27,264

Section overview
An important aspect of reporting financial performance is segment reporting. This is covered by IFRS
8, Operating Segments.
IFRS 8 is a disclosure standard.
• Segment reporting is necessary for a better understanding and assessment of:
– past performance;
– risks and returns; and
– informed judgements.
• IFRS 8 adopts the managerial approach to identifying segments.
• The standard gives guidance on how segments should be identified and what information
should be disclosed for each.
It also sets out requirements for related disclosures about products and services, geographical areas
and major customers.
2.1 Introduction
Large entities produce a wide range of products and services, often in several different countries.
Further information on how the overall results of entities are made up from each of these product or
geographical areas will help the users of the financial statements. This is the reason for segment
reporting.
• The entity’s past performance will be better understood.
• The entity’s risks and returns may be better assessed.
• More informed judgements may be made about the entity as a whole.
Risks and returns of a diversified, multinational company can be better assessed by looking at the
individual risks and rewards attached to groups of products or services or in different geographical
areas. These are subject to differing rates of profitability, opportunities for growth, future prospects
and risks.
2.2 Objective and scope

An entity must disclose information to enable users of its financial statements to evaluate the nature
and financial effects of the business activities in which it engages and the economic environments in
which it operates.
Only entities whose equity or debt securities are publicly traded (ie, on a stock exchange) need
disclose segment information. In group accounts, only consolidated segmental information needs to
HB2021

be shown. (The statement also applies to entities filing or in the process of filing financial statements
for the purpose of issuing instruments.)
2.3 Definition of operating segment
Definition
Operating segment: This is a component of an entity:
• that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur expenses (including
revenues and expenses relating to transactions with other components of the same entity);
• whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity’s chief operating decision maker to
make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its performance; and
• for which discrete financial information is available.
The term ‘chief operating decision maker’ identifies a function, not necessarily a manager with a
specific title. That function is to allocate resources and to assess the performance of the entity’s
operating segments.
2.4 Aggregation
Two or more operating segments may be aggregated if the segments have similar economic
characteristics, and the segments are similar in all of the following respects:
• The nature of the products or services
• The nature of the production process
• The type or class of customer for their products or services
• The methods used to distribute their products or provide their services
• If applicable, the nature of the regulatory environment
2.5 Determining reportable segments

An operating segment is reportable where:
• It meets the definition of an operating segment; and
• Any of the following size criteria are met:
– Segment revenue ≥ 10% of total (internal and external) revenue
– Segment profit or loss ≥ 10% of the profit of all segments in profit (or loss of all segments
making a loss if greater)
– Segment assets ≥ 10% of total assets
At least 75% of total external revenue must be reported by operating segments. Where this is not
the case, additional segments must be identified (even if they do not meet the 10% thresholds).
2.5.1 Aggregating segments

Two or more operating segments below the thresholds may be aggregated to produce a reportable
segment if the segments have similar economic characteristics, and the segments are similar in a
majority of the aggregation criteria above.
Evidence of similar economic characteristics is given by similar long-term financial performance. For
example, similar long-term average gross margins for two operating segments would be expected if
their economic characteristics were similar.
2.5.2 Non-reportable segments

Operating segments that do not meet any of the quantitative thresholds may be reported separately
if management believes that information about the segment would be useful to users of the financial
statements.
Non-reportable segments are required by IFRS 8 to be combined and disclosed in an ‘all other
segments’ category separate from other reconciling items in the reconciliations required by IFRS8.
Entities must disclose the sources of revenue in the ‘all other segments’ category.
HB2021

IFRS 8 provides a framework for structuring the problem of comparing like with like and identifying
important areas of the business. First segments need to be identified – not always easy in real life or
in the exam. Then the relevant disclosures need to be made.
2.6 Disclosures
2.6.1 Segment disclosures
Disclosures required by the IFRS are extensive and best learned by looking at the example and pro
forma, which follow the list. Disclosure is required of:
• Factors used to identify the entity’s reportable segments
• Types of products and services from which each reportable segment derives its revenues
• For each reportable segment:
– Operating segment profit or loss
– Segment assets
– Segment liabilities
– Certain income and expense items
Figure 9.1: IFRS 8 Disclosures
External
Revenue
Inter segment
Interest revenue
Interest expense
Depreciation and amortisation
Other material non-cash items
Material income/expense (IAS 1)

Profit, assets
Share of profit of associates/jointly controlled entities equity accounted
and liabilities
Profit or loss (as reported to chief operating decision maker)
Income tax expense
Non-current assets
Investments in associates/jointly controlled entities
Expenditures for reportable assets
Segment liabilities
A reconciliation of each of the above material items to the entity’s reported figures is required.
Reporting of a measure of profit or loss by segment is compulsory. Other items are disclosed if
included in the figures reviewed by or regularly provided to the chief operating decision maker.
HB2021

2.6.2 Entity-wide disclosures
The following disclosures are required for the whole entity:
• External revenue by each product and service (if reported basis is not products and services)
• Geographical information:
by:
External revenue
Geographical • entity's country of domicile, and
areas Non-current assets • all foreign countries (subdivided if material)
Notes
1 External revenue is allocated based on the customer’s location.
2 Non-current assets exclude financial instruments, deferred tax assets, post-employment benefit
assets, and rights under insurance contracts.
• Information about reliance on major customers (ie, those who represent more than 10% of
external revenue)
2.6.3 Disclosure example from IFRS 8

The following example is adapted from the IFRS 8, Implementation Guidance, which emphasises that
this is for illustrative purposes only and that the information must be presented in the most
understandable manner in the specific circumstances.
The hypothetical company does not allocate tax expense (tax income) or non-recurring gains and
losses to reportable segments. In addition, not all reportable segments have material noncash items
other than depreciation and amortisation in profit or loss. The amounts in this illustration,
denominated as dollars, are assumed to be the amounts in reports used by the chief operating
decision maker.
Car Motor All

parts vessel Software Electronics Finance other Totals
$ $ $ $ $ $ $
Revenues from external
customers 3,000 5,000 9,500 12,000 5,000 1,000 35,500
Inter-segment revenues – – 3,000 1,500 – – 4,500
Interest revenue 450 800 1,000 1,500 – – 3,750
Interest expense 350 600 700 1,100 – – 2,750
Net interest revenue – – – – 1,000 – 1,000
Depreciation and
amortisation 200 100 50 1,500 1,100 – 2,950
Reportable segment
profit 200 70 900 2,300 500 100 4,070
Other material non-cash
items:
Impairment of assets – 200 – – – – 200
Reportable segment
assets 2,000 5,000 3,000 12,000 57,000 2,000 81,000
Expenditure for
reportable segment
non-current assets 300 700 500 800 600 – 2,900
Reportable segment
liabilities 1,050 3,000 1,800 8,000 30,000 – 43,850
HB2021

• ‘All other’ segment results are attributable to four operating segments of the company which do
not meet the quantitative thresholds. Those segments include a small property business, an
electronics equipment rental business, a software consulting practice and a warehouse leasing
operation. None of those segments has ever met any of the quantitative thresholds for
determining reportable segments.
• The finance segment derives a majority of its revenue from interest. Management primarily relies
on net interest revenue, not the gross revenue and expense amounts, in managing that segment.
Therefore, as permitted by IFRS 8, only the net amount is disclosed.
2.6.4 Suggested pro forma
Information about profit or loss, assets and liabilities
Segment Segment Segment All other Inter Entity

A B C segments segment total
Revenue – external
customers X X X X – X
Revenue – inter segment X X X X (X) –
X X X X (X) X
Interest revenue X X X X (X) X
Interest expense (X) (X) (X) (X) X (X)
Depreciation and
amortisation (X) (X) (X) (X) – (X)
Other material non-cash
items X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X)
Material income/expense
(IAS 1) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X) X/(X)
Share of profit of
associate/JVs X X X X – X
Segment profit before tax X X X X (X) X
Income tax expense (X) (X) (X) (X) – (X)
Unallocated items X/(X)
Profit for the period X
Segment assets X X X X (X) X
Investments in associate/JVs X X X X – X
Unallocated assets X
Entity’s assets X
Expenditures for reportable
assets X X X X (X) X
Segment liabilities X X X X (X) X
Unallocated liabilities X
Entity’s liabilities X
Information about geographical areas
Country of domicile Foreign countries Total

Revenue – external customers X X X
Non-current assets X X X
HB2021

Interactive question 1: Segments
Endeavour, a public limited company, trades in six business areas which are reported separately in its
internal accounts provided to the chief operating decision maker. The results of these segments for
the year ended 31 December 20X5 are as follows.
Operating segment information as at 31 December 20X5
Segment
External Internal Total profit/ Segment Segment
revenue revenue revenue (loss) assets liabilities
£m £m £m £m £m £m
Chemicals:
Europe 14 7 21 1 31 14
Rest of world 56 3 59 13 78 34
Pharmaceuticals
wholesale 59 8 67 9 104 35
Pharmaceuticals
retail 22 0 22 (2) 30 12
Cosmetics 12 3 15 2 18 10
Hair care 11 1 12 4 21 8
Body care 18 24 42 (6) 54 19
192 46 238 21 336 132
Requirement
Which of the operating segments of Endeavour constitute a ‘reportable’ operating segment under
IFRS 8, Operating Segments for the year ending 31 December 20X5?
3 IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and

Discontinued Operations
Section overview
IFRS 5 requires assets and groups of assets that are ‘held for sale’ to be presented separately on the
face of the statement of financial position and the results of discontinued operations to be presented
separately in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. This is required so that
users of financial statements will be better able to make projections about the financial position,
profits and cash flows of the entity based on continuing operations only.
Definition
Disposal group: A group of assets to be disposed of, by sale or otherwise, together as a group in a
single transaction, and liabilities directly associated with those assets that will be transferred in the
transaction. (In practice a disposal group could be a subsidiary, a cash-generating unit or a single
operation within an entity.)
(IFRS 5)
HB2021

A disposal group could form a group of cash-generating units, a single cash-generating unit or be
part of a cash-generating unit.
The disposal group should include goodwill if it is a cash-generating unit (or group of cash-
generating units to which goodwill has been allocated under IAS 36). Only goodwill recognised in
the statement of financial position can be included in the disposal group. If a previous generally
accepted accounting practice (GAAP) allowed goodwill to be recorded directly in reserves, this
goodwill does not form part of a disposal group.
A disposal group may include current and non-current assets and current and non-current liabilities.
However, only liabilities that will be transferred as part of the transaction are classified as part of the
disposal group. If any liabilities remain with the vendor, these are not included in the scope of IFRS 5.
IFRS 5 does not apply to certain assets covered by other accounting standards:
• Deferred tax assets (IAS 12)
• Assets arising from employee benefits (IAS 19)
• Financial assets (IFRS 9)
• Investment properties accounted for in accordance with the fair value model (IAS 40)
• Agricultural and biological assets that are measured at fair value less estimated point of sale costs
(IAS 41)
• Insurance contracts (IFRS 4)
3.1 Classification of assets held for sale

A non-current asset (or disposal group) should be classified as held for sale if its carrying amount will
be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. A number of
detailed criteria must be met:
• The asset must be available for immediate sale in its present condition.
• Its sale must be highly probable (ie, significantly more likely than not).
For the sale to be highly probable, the following must apply.
• Management must be committed to a plan to sell the asset.
• There must be an active programme to locate a buyer.
• The asset must be marketed for sale at a price that is reasonable in relation to its current fair
value.
• The sale should be expected to take place within one year from the date of classification.
• It is unlikely that significant changes to the plan will be made or that the plan will be withdrawn.
An asset (or disposal group) can still be classified as held for sale, even if the sale has not actually
taken place within one year. However, the delay must have been caused by events or circumstances
beyond the entity‘s control and there must be sufficient evidence that the entity is still committed to
sell the asset or disposal group. Otherwise the entity must cease to classify the asset as held for sale.
Subsidiaries acquired exclusively with a view to resale
If an entity acquires a disposal group (eg, a subsidiary) exclusively with a view to its subsequent
disposal it can classify the asset as held for sale only if the sale is expected to take place within one
year and it is highly probable that all the other criteria will be met within a short time (normally three
months).
Abandoned assets
An asset that is to be abandoned should not be classified as held for sale. This is because its carrying
amount will be recovered principally through continuing use. However, a disposal group that is to be
abandoned may meet the definition of a discontinued operation and therefore separate disclosure
may be required (see below).
Interactive question 2: Held for sale

On 1 December 20X3, a company became committed to a plan to sell a manufacturing facility and
has already found a potential buyer. The company does not intend to discontinue the operations
currently carried out in the facility. At 31 December 20X3 there is a backlog of uncompleted
customer orders. The subsidiary will not be able to transfer the facility to the buyer until after it
HB2021

ceases to operate the facility and has eliminated the backlog of uncompleted customer orders. This
is not expected to occur until Spring 20X4.
Requirement
How should the manufacturing facility be accounted for as at 31 December 20X3?
3.2 Measurement of assets held for sale

A non-current asset (or disposal group) that is held for sale should be measured at the lower of its
carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell (net realisable value).
An impairment loss should be recognised where fair value less costs to sell is lower than carrying
amount. Note that this is an exception to the normal rule. IAS 36, Impairment of Assets requires an
entity to recognise an impairment loss only where an asset’s recoverable amount is lower than its
carrying value. Recoverable amount is defined as the higher of net realisable value and value in use.
IAS 36 does not apply to assets held for sale.
Non-current assets held for sale should not be depreciated, even if they are still being used by the
entity.
A non-current asset (or disposal group) that is no longer classified as held for sale (for example,
because the sale has not taken place within one year) is measured at the lower of the following:
• Its carrying amount before it was classified as held for sale, adjusted for any depreciation that
would have been charged had the asset not been held for sale
• Its recoverable amount at the date of the decision not to sell
3.3 Presenting discontinued operations
Definition
Discontinued operation: A component of an entity that has either been disposed of, or is classified
as held for sale, and:
• represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations;
• is part of a single co-ordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business or
geographical area of operations; or
• is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale.
Operations and cash flows that can be clearly distinguished, operationally and for financial reporting
purposes, from the rest of the entity.
An entity should present and disclose information that enables users of the financial statements to
evaluate the financial effects of discontinued operations and disposals of non-current assets or
disposal groups.
An entity should disclose a single amount on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income (or statement of profit or loss where presented separately) comprising the
total of:
• the post-tax profit or loss of discontinued operations; and
• the post-tax gain or loss recognised on the measurement to fair value less costs to sell or on the
disposal of the assets or disposal group(s) constituting the discontinued operation.
An entity should also disclose an analysis of the above single amount into:
• the revenue, expenses and pre-tax profit or loss of discontinued operations;
• the related income tax expense;
• the gain or loss recognised on the measurement to fair value less costs to sell or on the disposal
of the assets or the discontinued operation; and
• the related income tax expense.
HB2021

This may be presented either on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income or in the notes. If it is presented on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income it should be presented in a section identified as relating to discontinued
operations, ie, separately from continuing operations. This analysis is not required where the
discontinued operation is a newly acquired subsidiary that has been classified as held for sale.
An entity should disclose the net cash flows attributable to the operating, investing and financing
activities of discontinued operations. These disclosures may be presented either on the face of the
statement of cash flows or in the notes.
Gains and losses on the remeasurement of a disposal group that is not a discontinued operation but
is held for sale should be included in profit or loss from continuing operations.
Interactive question 3: Closure

On 20 October 20X3 the directors of a parent company made a public announcement of plans to
close a steel works. The closure means that the group will no longer carry out this type of operation,
which until recently has represented about 10% of its total revenue. The works will be gradually shut
down over a period of several months, with complete closure expected in July 20X4. At 31
December 20X3 output had been significantly reduced and some redundancies had already taken
place. The cash flows, revenues and expenses relating to the steel works can be clearly distinguished
from those of the subsidiary’s other operations.
Requirement
How should the closure be treated in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December
20X3?
3.4 Presentation of a non-current asset or disposal group classified as held for sale
Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale should be presented separately
from other assets in the statement of financial position. The liabilities of a disposal group should be
presented separately from other liabilities in the statement of financial position.
• Assets and liabilities held for sale should not be offset.
• The major classes of assets and liabilities held for sale should be separately disclosed either on
the face of the statement of financial position or in the notes.
3.5 IFRS 5 and impairment

There are particular rules on impairment in the context of IFRS 5. These are covered in Chapter 12,
section 1.4 of this Workbook.
3.6 Additional disclosures

In the period in which a non-current asset (or disposal group) has been either classified as held for
sale or sold, the following should be disclosed.
(a) A description of the non-current asset (or disposal group)
(b) A description of the facts and circumstances of the disposal
(c) Any gain or loss recognised when the item was classified as held for sale
(d) If applicable, the segment in which the non-current asset (or disposal group) is presented in
accordance with IFRS 8, Operating Segments
Where an asset previously classified as held for sale is no longer held for sale, the entity should
disclose a description of the facts and circumstances leading to the decision and its effect on results.
HB2021

Section overview
The objective of IAS 24 is to ensure that an entity’s financial statements contain the disclosures
necessary to draw attention to the possibility that its financial position and/or profit or loss may have
been affected by the existence of related parties or by related party transactions.
4.1 Overview of material from earlier studies

Scope
IAS 24 requires disclosure of related party transactions, and outstanding balances, in the separate
financial statements of:
• a parent;
• a venturer; or
• an investor.
What constitutes a related party?
A related party is a person or entity that is related to the entity that is preparing its financial
statements.
(a) A person or a close member of that person’s family is related to a reporting entity if that person:
(1) has control or joint control over the reporting entity;
(2) has significant influence over the reporting entity; or
(3) is a member of the key management personnel of the reporting entity or of a parent of the
reporting entity.
(b) An entity is related to a reporting entity if any of the following conditions apply:
(1) The entity and the reporting entity are members of the same group (which means that each
parent, subsidiary and fellow subsidiary is related to the others).
(2) One entity is an associate or joint venture of the other entity (or an associate or joint venture
of a member of a group of which the other entity is a member).
(3) Both entities are joint ventures of the same third party.
(4) One entity is a joint venture of a third entity and the other entity is an associate of the third
entity.
(5) The entity is a post-employment defined benefit plan for the benefit of employees of either
the reporting entity or an entity related to the reporting entity. If the reporting entity is itself
such a plan, the sponsoring employers are also related to the reporting entity.
(6) The entity is controlled or jointly controlled by a person identified in (a).
(7) A person identified in (a)(1) has significant influence over the entity or is a member of the
key management personnel of the entity (or of a parent of the entity).
(8) The entity, or any member of a group of which it is a part, provides key management
personnel services to the reporting entity or the parent of the reporting entity.
Exclusions
• Two entities simply because they have a director or other key management in common
(notwithstanding the definition of related party above, although it is necessary to consider how
that director would affect both entities)
• Two venturers, simply because they share joint control over a joint venture
• Certain other bodies, simply as a result of their role in normal business dealings with the entity:
– Providers of finance
– Trade unions
– Public utilities
HB2021

– Government departments and agencies
• Any single customer, supplier, franchisor, distributor or general agent with whom the entity
transacts a significant amount of business, simply by virtue of the resulting economic dependence
What constitutes a related party transaction?
Definition
Related party transaction: A transfer of resources, services or obligations between related parties,
regardless of whether a price is charged.
What must be disclosed?

• A related party relationship between parent and subsidiaries
• Compensation, being the consideration in exchange for their services, received by key
management personnel
• Disclosures required about related parties only if transactions have taken place between them
during the period:
– The nature of the relationship (but remember this must always be disclosed in respect of a
parent)
– The amount of the transactions
– The amount of any balance outstanding at the yearend
– The terms and conditions attaching to any outstanding balance (for example, whether security
or guarantees have been provided and what form the payment will take)
– If an amount has been provided against or written off any outstanding balance due
• Disclosure of the fact that transactions are on an arm’s length basis (the term ‘arm’s length’
continues to be used in the context of IAS 24, even though it has been removed from the
definition of fair value in IFRS 13 (see Chapter 2, section 4))
Interactive question 4: Related party transactions

P owns S and a number of other subsidiaries. The following details relate to amounts due to the key
management personnel (KMP) of P and of S for the year ended 31 December 20X5.
£
Salaries and related taxes payable by S to its KMP for services rendered to S 500,000
Salaries and related taxes payable by P to S’s KMP for services rendered to S 60,000
Salaries and related taxes payable by S to its KMP for services rendered to P 20,000
Pension benefits accruing within the group-wide pension scheme to S’s KMP for
services rendered to S 50,000
Share options granted under the group-wide share option scheme to S’s KMP for
services rendered to S 28,000
658,000
Requirement
What transactions should be disclosed as key management personnel compensation in the financial
statements of S?
HB2021

4.2 Application of substance over form
Under IAS 24 attention should be directed to the substance of the relationship rather than focusing
on its legal form. For example, the following are not related parties:
• Two entities simply because they have a director (or other member of key management
personnel) in common, or because a member of key management personnel of one entity has
significant influence over the other entity
• Two venturers simply because they share joint control over a joint venture
• Providers of finance, trade unions, public utilities and government departments and agencies of a
government that does not control, jointly control or significantly influence the reporting entity
simply by virtue of their normal dealings with an entity
• A customer, supplier, franchisor, distributor or general agent, with whom an entity transacts a
significant volume of business, simply by virtue of the resulting economic dependence
Context example: Related parties

The following examples illustrate the application of the definition of a related party to practical
situations:
(a) Alan Jones owns 30% of Benson Co and Clark Co owns 40% of Benson Co. The remaining 30%
is held by many unconnected shareholders.
Benson Co is the reporting entity:
Alan Jones is a related party under definition (a)(2) and Clark Co is a related party under
definition (b)(2)
Clark Co is the reporting entity:
Benson Co is a related party under definition (b)(2)
(b) Alan Jones and Benson Co have joint control over Clark Co
Clark Co is a related party under definition (b)(2)
Alan Jones is a related party under definition (a)(1) and Benson Co is a related party under
definition (b)(2)
(c) Alan Jones is a non-executive director of Benson Co
Alan Jones falls within the definition of Benson Co’s key management personnel and is a related
party under definition (a)(3)
(d) Alan Jones owns 70% of Benson Co and is a director of Clark Co
Alan Jones is a related party under definition (a)(1) and Clark Co is a related party under
definition (b)(7)
Alan Jones falls within the definition of Clark Co’s key management personnel and is a related
party under definition (b)(3)
Benson Co is a related party under definition (b)(6)
HB2021

5 IFRS 1, First-time Adoption of International
Financial Reporting Standards
Section overview
• IFRS 1 gives guidance to entities applying IFRS Standards for the first time.
The adoption of a new body of accounting standards will inevitably have a significant effect on the
accounting treatments used by an entity and on the related systems and procedures. In 2005 many
countries adopted IFRS for the first time and over the next few years other countries are likely to do
the same.
In addition, many Alternative Investment Market (AIM) companies and public sector companies
adopted IFRS Standards for the first time for accounting periods ending in 2009 and 2010. US
companies are likely to move increasingly to IFRS, although the US Securities and Exchange
Commission did not give any definite timeline for this in its 2012 work plan.
As discussed in Chapter 2 of this Manual, the regulatory shift away from UK GAAP means that all
entities except those small enough to qualify as micro-entities will be required to report in
accordance with FRS102, with an option to use IFRS.
IFRS 1, First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards was issued to ensure that an
entity’s first IFRS financial statements contain high quality information that fulfil the following criteria:
• It is transparent for users and comparable over all periods presented.
• It provides a suitable starting point for accounting under IFRS Standards.
• It can be generated at a cost that does not exceed the benefits to users.
5.1 General principles

An entity applies IFRS 1 in its first IFRS financial statements.
An entity’s first IFRS financial statements are the first annual financial statements in which the entity
adopts IFRS Standards by an explicit and unreserved statement of compliance with IFRS Standards.
Any other financial statements (including fully compliant financial statements that did not state so)
are not the first set of financial statements under IFRS Standards.
An entity may apply IFRS 1 more than once, for example if a UK company adopted IFRS Standards,
then reverted to UK GAAP, then moved to IFRS Standards again.
5.2 Opening IFRS statement of financial position

An entity prepares and presents an opening IFRS statement of financial position at the date of
transition to IFRS Standards as a starting point for IFRS accounting.
Generally, this will be the beginning of the earliest comparative period shown (ie, full retrospective
application). Given that the entity is applying a change in accounting policy on adoption of IFRS 1,
IAS1, Presentation of Financial Statements requires the presentation of at least three statements of
financial position (and two of each of the other statements).
Context example: Opening IFRS SOFP

Comparative year First year of adoption
1.1.20X8 31.12.20X8 31.12.20X9
Transition
date
HB2021

Preparation of an opening IFRS statement of financial position typically involves adjusting the
amounts reported at the same date under previous GAAP.
All adjustments are recognised directly in retained earnings (or, if appropriate, another category of
equity) not in profit or loss.
5.3 Estimates
Estimates in the opening IFRS statement of financial position must be consistent with estimates made
at the same date under previous GAAP even if further information is now available (in order to
comply with IAS 10).
5.4 Transition process

(a) Accounting policies
The entity should select accounting policies that comply with IFRS Standards effective at the end
of the first IFRS reporting period.
These accounting policies are used in the opening IFRS statement of financial position and
throughout all periods presented. The entity does not apply different versions of IFRS Standards
effective at earlier dates.
(b) Derecognition of assets and liabilities
A previous GAAP statement of financial position may contain items that do not qualify for
recognition under IFRS.
Eg, IFRS Standards do not permit capitalisation of research, staff training and relocation costs.
(c) Recognition of new assets and liabilities
New assets and liabilities may need to be recognised.
Eg, deferred tax balances and certain provisions such as environmental and decommissioning
costs.
(d) Reclassification of assets and liabilities
Eg, compound financial instruments need to be split into their liability and equity components.
(e) Measurement
Value at which asset or liability is measured may differ under IFRS Standards.
Eg, discounting of deferred tax assets/liabilities not allowed under IFRS Standards.
5.5 Main exemptions from applying IFRS Standards in the opening IFRS statement of
financial position
(a) Property, plant and equipment, investment properties and intangible assets
– Fair value/previous GAAP revaluation may be used as a substitute for cost at date of transition
to IFRS Standards.
(b) Business combinations
For business combinations before the date of transition to IFRS Standards:
– The same classification (acquisition or uniting of interests) is retained as under previous GAAP.
– For items requiring a cost measure for IFRS Standards, the carrying value at the date of the
business combination is treated as deemed cost and IFRS rules are applied from thereon.
– Items requiring a fair value measure for IFRS Standards are revalued at the date of transition to
IFRS Standards.
– The carrying value of goodwill at the date of transition to IFRS Standards is the amount as
reported under previous GAAP.
(c) Employee benefits
– Unrecognised actuarial gains and losses can be deemed zero at the date of transition to IFRS
Standards. IAS 19 is applied from then on.
HB2021

(d) Cumulative translation differences on foreign operations
– Translation differences (which must be disclosed in a separate translation reserve under IFRS
Standards) may be deemed zero at the date of transition to IFRS Standards. IAS 21 is applied
from then on.
(e) Adoption of IFRS Standards by subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures
If a subsidiary, associate or joint venture adopts IFRS Standards later than its parent, it measures
its assets and liabilities either:
– at the amount that would be included in the parent’s financial statements, based on the
parent’s date of transition; or
– at the amount based on the subsidiary (associate or joint venture)’s date of transition.
Disclosure
• A reconciliation of previous GAAP equity to IFRS Standards is required at the date of transition to
IFRS Standards and for the most recent financial statements presented under previous GAAP.
• A reconciliation of profit for the most recent financial statements presented under previous GAAP.
5.6 Organisational and procedural changes

The technical changes involved in adopting a new body of standards will provide a challenge to
company management and their advisers.
These are some of the key issues:
• Accurate assessment of the task involved. Underestimation or wishful thinking may hamper the
effectiveness of the conversion and may ultimately prove inefficient.
• Proper planning. This should take place at the overall project level, but a detailed task analysis
could be drawn up to control work performed.
• Human resource management. The project must be properly structured and staffed.
• Training. Where there are skills gaps, remedial training should be provided.
• Monitoring and accountability. A relaxed ‘it will be all right on the night’ attitude could spell
danger. Implementation progress should be monitored and regular meetings set up so that
participants can personally account for what they are doing as well as flag up any problems as
early as possible. Project drift should be avoided.
• Achieving milestones. Successful completion of key steps and tasks should be appropriately
acknowledged, ie, what managers call ‘celebrating success’, so as to sustain motivation and
performance.
• Physical resources. The need for IT equipment and office space should be properly assessed.
• Process review. Care should be taken not to perceive the conversion as a one-off quick fix. Any
change in future systems and processes should be assessed and properly implemented.
• Follow-up procedures. Good management practice dictates that follow-up procedures should be
planned and in place to ensure that the transfer is effectively implemented and that any necessary
changes are identified and implemented on a timely basis.
• Contractual terms. These may be affected, such as covenants related to borrowing facilities based
on statement of financial position ratios. The potential effect of the new standards on these
measurements should be assessed and discussed with the lenders at an early stage.
Interactive question 5: IFRS 1

Europa is a listed company incorporated in Molvania. It will adopt International Financial Reporting
Standards (IFRS Standards) for the first time in its financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X8.
The directors of Europa are unclear as to the impact of IFRS 1, First-time Adoption of International
Financial Reporting Standards.
Advise the directors of Europa on the following.
Requirements
5.1 The procedure for preparing IFRS financial statements for the first time (as required by IFRS 1).
HB2021

5.2 The practical steps that the company should take in order to ensure an efficient transfer to
accounting under IFRS.
5.3 In its previous financial statements for 31 December 20X6 and 20X7, which were prepared
under local GAAP, the company:
(1) made a number of routine accounting estimates, including accrued expenses and
provisions; and
(2) did not recognise a provision for a court case arising from events that occurred in
September 20X7. When the court case was concluded on 30 June 20X8, Europa was
required to pay $10 million and paid this on 10 July 20X8, after the 20X7 financial
statements were authorised for issue.
In the opinion of the directors, the company’s estimates of accrued expenses and provisions
under local GAAP were made on a basis consistent with IFRS Standards.
5.4 Discuss how the matters above should be dealt with in the financial statements of Europa for
the year ended 31 December 20X8.

Section overview
IAS 34 recommends that publicly traded entities should produce interim financial reports and, for
entities that do publish such reports, it lays down principles and guidelines for their production.
The following definitions are used in IAS 34.
Definitions
Interim period: A financial reporting period shorter than a full financial year.
Interim financial report: A financial report containing either a complete set of financial statements (as
described in IAS 1) or a set of condensed financial statements (as described in this standard) for an
interim period.
6.1 Scope of IAS 34

IAS 34 does not make the preparation of interim financial reports mandatory, taking the view that this
is a matter for governments, securities regulators, stock exchanges or professional accountancy
bodies to decide within each country. The IASB does, however, strongly recommend to governments
and regulators that interim financial reporting should be a requirement for companies whose equity
or debt securities are publicly traded.
IAS 34 encourages publicly traded entities:
• to provide an interim financial report for at least the first six months of their financial year (ie, a
half year financial report); and
• to make the report available no later than 60 days after the end of the interim period.
Thus, a company with a year ending 31 December would be required as a minimum to prepare an
interim report for the half year to 30 June and this report should be available before the end of
August.
6.2 Minimum components

IAS 34 specifies the minimum component elements of an interim financial report as follows:
• Condensed statement of financial position
HB2021

• Condensed statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, presented either as a
single condensed statement or a statement of profit or loss and a statement showing other
• Condensed statement of changes in equity
• Condensed statement of cash flows
• Selected note disclosures
IAS 34 applies where an entity is required to or chooses to publish an interim financial report in
accordance with IFRS Standards.
An interim report complying with IFRS Standards may be:
• a complete set of financial statements at the interim reporting date complying in full with IFRS
Standards; or
• a condensed interim financial report prepared in compliance with IAS 34.
The rationale for allowing only condensed statements and selected note disclosures is that entities
need not duplicate information in their interim report that is contained in their report for the previous
financial year. Interim statements should focus more on new events, activities and circumstances.
6.3 Form and content

Where full financial statements are given as interim financial statements, IAS 1 should be used as a
guide, otherwise IAS 34 specifies minimum contents.
The condensed statement of financial position should include, as a minimum, each of the major
components of assets, liabilities and equity as were in the statement of financial position at the end
of the previous financial year, thus providing a summary of the economic resources of the entity and
its financial structure.
The condensed statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income should include, as a
minimum, each of the component items of total comprehensive income as were shown in the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the previous financial year, together
with the earnings per share and diluted earnings per share.
The condensed statement of cash flows should show, as a minimum, the three major subtotals of
cash flow as required in statements of cash flows by IAS 7, namely: cash flows from operating
activities, cash flows from investing activities and cash flows from financing activities.
The condensed statement of changes in equity should include, as a minimum, each of the major
components of equity as were contained in the statement of changes in equity for the previous
financial year of the entity.
6.3.1 Selected explanatory notes

IAS 34 states that relatively minor changes from the most recent annual financial statements need
not be included in an interim report. However, the notes to an interim report should include the
following (unless the information is contained elsewhere in the report).
• A statement that the same accounting policies and methods of computation have been used for
the interim statements as were used for the most recent annual financial statements. If not, the
nature of the differences and their effect should be described. (The accounting policies for
preparing the interim report should only differ from those used for the previous annual accounts
in a situation where there has been a change in accounting policy since the end of the previous
financial year, and the new policy will be applied for the annual accounts of the current financial
period.)
• Explanatory comments on the seasonality or ‘cyclicality‘ of operations in the interim period. For
example, if a company earns most of its annual profits in the first half of the year, because sales
are much higher in the first six months, the interim report for the first half of the year should
explain this fact
• The nature and amount of items during the interim period affecting assets, liabilities, capital, net
income or cash flows, that are unusual, due to their nature, incidence or size
• The issue or repurchase of equity or debt securities
• Nature and amount of any changes in estimates of amounts reported in an earlier interim report
during the financial year, or in prior financial years if these affect the current interim period
HB2021

• Dividends paid on ordinary shares and the dividends paid on other shares
• Segmental results for entities that are required by IFRS 8, Operating Segments to disclose
segment information in their annual financial statements
• Any significant events since the end of the interim period
• Effect of changes in the composition of the entity during the interim period including the
acquisition or disposal of subsidiaries and long-term investments, restructurings and
discontinued operations
• Any significant change in a contingent liability or a contingent asset since the date of the last
annual statement of financial position
Changes in the business environment such as changes in price, costs, demand, market share and
prospects for the full year should be discussed in the management discussion and analysis of the
financial review.
The entity should also disclose the fact that the interim report has been produced in compliance with
IAS 34 on interim financial reporting.
Worked example: Disclosure

Give some examples of the type of disclosures required according to the above list of explanatory
notes.
Solution
The following are examples:
• Write down of inventories to net realisable value and the reversal of such a write down
• Recognition of a loss from the impairment of property, plant and equipment, intangible assets, or
other assets, and the reversal of such an impairment loss
• Reversal of any provisions for the costs of restructuring
• Acquisitions and disposals of items of property, plant and equipment
• Commitments for the purchase of property, plant and equipment
• Litigation settlements
• Corrections of fundamental errors in previously reported financial data
• Any debt default or any breach of a debt covenant that has not been corrected subsequently
• Related party transactions
IAS 34 is concerned with communication – publicly traded entities need more information to be
communicated than do private companies. While a private company would often produce
management accounts, these would be for internal purposes and not communicated to the public.
6.4 Periods covered

The standard requires that interim financial reports should provide financial information for the
following periods or as at the following dates.
• Statement of financial position data as at the end of the current interim period, and comparative
data as at the end of the most recent financial year
• Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income data for the current interim period
and cumulative data for the current year to date, together with comparative data for the
corresponding interim period and cumulative figures for the previous financial year
• Statement of cash flows data should be cumulative for the current year to date, with comparative
cumulative data for the corresponding interim period in the previous financial year
HB2021

• Data for the statement of changes in equity should be for both the current interim period and for
the year to date, together with comparative data for the corresponding interim period, and
cumulative figures, for the previous financial year
6.5 Materiality
Materiality should be assessed in relation to the interim period financial data. It should be recognised
that interim measurements rely to a greater extent on estimates than annual financial data.
6.6 Recognition and measurement principles

A large part of IAS 34 deals with recognition and measurement principles, and guidelines as to their
practical application. The guiding principle is that an entity should use the same recognition and
measurement principles in its interim statements as it does in its annual financial statements.
This means, for example, that a cost that would not be regarded as an asset in the year-end
statement of financial position should not be regarded as an asset in the statement of financial
position for an interim period. Similarly, an accrual for an item of income or expense for a transaction
that has not yet occurred (or a deferral of an item of income or expense for a transaction that has
already occurred) is inappropriate for interim reporting, just as it is for year-end reporting.
Applying this principle of recognition and measurement may result, in a subsequent interim period
or at the yearend, in a remeasurement of amounts that were reported in a financial statement for a
previous interim period. The nature and amount of any significant remeasurements should be
disclosed.
6.6.1 Revenues received occasionally, seasonally or cyclically

Revenue that is received as an occasional item, or within a seasonal or cyclical pattern, should not be
anticipated or deferred in interim financial statements, if it would be inappropriate to anticipate or
defer the revenue for the annual financial statements. In other words, the principles of revenue
recognition should be applied consistently to the interim reports and year-end reports.
6.6.2 Costs incurred unevenly during the financial year

These should only be anticipated or deferred (ie, treated as accruals or prepayments) if it would be
appropriate to anticipate or defer the expense in the annual financial statements. For example, it
would be appropriate to anticipate a cost for property rental where the rental is paid in arrears, but it
would be inappropriate to anticipate part of the cost of a major advertising campaign later in the
year, for which no expenses have yet been incurred.
The standard goes on, in an appendix, to deal with specific applications of the recognition and
measurement principles. Some of these examples are explained below, by way of explanation and
illustration.
6.6.3 Payroll taxes or insurance contributions paid by employers

In some countries these are assessed on an annual basis, but paid at an uneven rate during the
course of the year, with a large proportion of the taxes being paid in the early part of the year, and a
much smaller proportion paid later on in the year. In this situation, it would be appropriate to use an
estimated average annual tax rate for the year in an interim statement, not the actual tax paid. This
treatment is appropriate because it reflects the fact that the taxes are assessed on an annual basis,
even though the payment pattern is uneven.
6.6.4 Cost of a planned major periodic maintenance or overhaul

The cost of such an event later in the year must not be anticipated in an interim financial statement
unless there is a legal or constructive obligation to carry out this work. The fact that a maintenance or
overhaul is planned and is carried out annually is not of itself sufficient to justify anticipating the cost
in an interim financial report.
6.6.5 Other planned but irregularly occurring costs

Similarly, these costs, such as charitable donations andemployee training costs, should not be
accrued in an interim report. These costs, even if they occur regularly and are planned, are
nevertheless discretionary.
HB2021

6.6.6 Year-end bonus
A year-end bonus should not be provided for in an interim financial statement unless there is a
constructive obligation to pay a year-end bonus (eg, a contractual obligation, or a regular past
practice) and the size of the bonus can be reliably measured.
Worked example: Bonus

An entity’s accounting year ends on 31 December each year and it is currently preparing interim
financial statements for the half year to 30 June 20X4. It has a contractual agreement with its staff that
it will pay them an annual bonus equal to 10% of their annual salary if the full year’s output exceeds
one million units. Budgeted output is 1.4 million units and the entity has achieved budgeted output
during the first six months of the year. Annual salaries are estimated to be £100 million, with the cost
in the first half year to 30 June being £45 million.
Requirement
How should the bonus be reflected in the interim financial statements?
Solution
It is probable that the bonus will be paid, given that the actual output already achieved in the year is
in line with budgeted figures, which exceed the required level of output. So a bonus of £4.5 million
should be recognised in the interim financial statements at 30 June 20X4.
6.6.7 Holiday pay

The same principle applies here. If holiday pay is an enforceable obligation on the employer, then
any unpaid accumulated holiday pay may be accrued in the interim financial report.
6.6.8 Non-monetary intangible assets

The entity might incur expenses during an interim period on items that might or will generate non-
monetary intangible assets. IAS 38, Intangible Assets requires that costs to generate non-monetary
intangible assets (eg, development expenses) should be recognised as an expense when incurred
unless the costs form part of an identifiable intangible asset. Costs that were initially recognised as an
expense cannot subsequently be treated as part of the cost of an intangible asset instead. IAS 34
states that interim financial statements should adopt the same approach. This means that it would be
inappropriate in an interim financial statement to ‘defer’ a cost in the expectation that it will
eventually be part of a non-monetary intangible asset that has not yet been recognised: such costs
should be treated as an expense in the interim statement.
6.6.9 Depreciation
Depreciation should only be charged in an interim statement on non-current assets that have been
acquired, not on non-current assets that will be acquired later in the financial year.
6.6.10 Foreign currency translation gains and losses

These should be calculated by the same principles as at the financial year end, in accordance with
IAS 21.
6.6.11 Tax on income

An entity will include an expense for income tax (tax on profits) in its interim statements. The tax rate
to use should be the estimated average annual tax rate for the year. For example, suppose that in a
particular jurisdiction, the rate of tax on company profits is 30% on the first £200,000 of profit and
40% on profits above £200,000. Now suppose that a company makes a profit of £200,000 in its first
half year, and expects to make £200,000 in the second half year. The rate of tax to be applied in the
interim financial report should be 35%, not 30%, ie, the expected average rate of tax for the year as a
whole. This approach is appropriate because income tax on company profits is charged on an annual
basis, and an effective annual rate should therefore be applied to each interim period.
As another illustration, suppose a company earns pre-tax income in the first quarter of the year of
£30,000, but expects to make a loss of £10,000 in each of the next three quarters, so that net income
before tax for the year is zero. Suppose also that the rate of tax is 30%. In this case, it would be
inappropriate to anticipate the losses, and the tax charge should be £9,000 for the first quarter of the
HB2021

year (30% of £30,000) and a negative tax charge of £3,000 for each of the next three quarters, if
actual losses are the same as anticipated.
Where the tax year for a company does not coincide with its financial year, a separate estimated
weighted average tax rate should be applied for each tax year, to the interim periods that fall within
that tax year.
Some countries give entities tax credits against the tax payable, based on amounts of capital
expenditure or research and development, etc. Under most tax regimes, these credits are calculated
and granted on an annual basis; therefore it is appropriate to include anticipated tax credits within
the calculation of the estimated average tax rate for the year, and apply this rate to calculate the tax
on income for the interim period.
Worked example: Taxation charge

An entity’s accounting year ends on 31 December 20X4, and it is currently preparing interim financial
statements for the half year to 30 June 20X4. Its profit before tax for the six month period to 30 June
20X4 is £6 million. The business is seasonal and the profit before tax for the six months to 31
December 20X4 is almost certain to be £10 million. Income tax is calculated as 25% of reported
annual profit before tax if it does not exceed £10 million. If annual profit before tax exceeds £10
million the tax rate on the whole amount is 30%.
Requirement
Under IAS 34 what should the taxation charge be in the interim financial statements?
Solution
The taxation charge in the interim financial statements is based upon the weighted average rate for
the year. In this case the entity’s tax rate for the year is expected to be 30%. The taxation charge in the
interim financial statements will be £1.8 million.
Interactive question 6: Interim financial statements

The Alshain Company’s profit before tax for the six months to 30 September 20X6 was £4 million.
However, the business is seasonal and profit before tax for the six months to 31 March 20X7 is almost
certain to be £8 million. Profit before tax equals taxable profit for this company.
Alshain operates in a country where income tax on companies is at a rate of 25% if annual profits are
below £11 million and a rate of 30% where annual profits exceed £11 million. These tax rates apply
to the entire profit for the year.
Requirement
Under IAS 34, Interim Financial Reporting, what should be the income tax expense in Alshain’s
interim financial statements for the half year to 30 September 20X6?
6.6.12 Inventory valuations

Within interim reports, inventories should be valued in the same way as year-end accounts. It is
recognised, however, that it will be necessary to rely more heavily on estimates for interim reporting
than for year-end reporting.
In addition, it will normally be the case that the net realisable value of inventories should be
estimated from selling prices and related costs to complete and dispose at interim dates.
Worked example: Inventory valuations

An entity’s accounting year ends on 31 December 20X4, and it is currently preparing interim financial
statements for the half year to 30 June 20X4. The price of its products tends to vary. At 30 June 20X4,
it has inventories of 100,000 units, at a cost per unit of £1.40. The net realisable value of the
inventories is £1.20 per unit at 30 June 20X4. The expected net realisable value of the inventories at
31 December 20X4 is £1.55 per unit.
HB2021

Requirement
How should the value of the inventories be reflected in the interim financial statements?
Solution
The value of the inventories in the interim financial statements at 30 June 20X4 is the lower of cost
and NRV at 30 June 20X4. This is:
100,000 × £1.20 = £120,000
6.7 Use of estimates

Although accounting information must be reliable and free from material error, it may be necessary
to sacrifice some accuracy and reliability for the sake of timeliness and cost benefits. This is
particularly the case with interim financial reporting, where there will be much less time to produce
reports than at the financial year end. The standard therefore recognises that estimates will have to
be used to a greater extent in interim reporting, to assess values or even some costs, than in year-end
reporting.
An appendix to IAS 34 gives some examples of the use of estimates.
• Inventories. An entity might not need to carry out a full inventory count at the end of each interim
period. Instead, it may be sufficient to estimate inventory values using sales margins.
• Provisions. An entity might employ outside experts or consultants to advise on the appropriate
amount of a provision, as at the year end. It will probably be inappropriate to employ an expert to
make a similar assessment at each interim date. Similarly, an entity might employ a professional
valuer to revalue non-current assets at the year end, whereas at the interim date(s) the entity will
not rely on such experts.
• Income taxes. The rate of income tax (tax on profits) will be calculated at the year end by applying
the tax rate in each country/jurisdiction to the profits earned there. At the interim stage, it may be
sufficient to estimate the rate of income tax by applying the same ‘blended’ estimated weighted
average tax rate to the income earned in all countries/jurisdictions.
• Classification of current and non-current assets and liabilities. The investigation for classifying
assets and liabilities as current and non-current may be more thorough at annual reporting dates
than at interim ones.
• Pensions. IAS 19, Employee Benefits encourages the use of a professionally qualified actuary in
the measurement of the plan’s defined benefit obligations. For interim reporting purposes
reliable estimates may be obtained by extrapolation of the latest actuarial valuation.
• Contingencies. Normally the measurement of contingencies may involve formal reports giving
the opinions of experts. Expert opinions about contingencies and uncertainties relating to
litigation or assessments may or may not be needed at interim dates.
• Revaluations and fair value accounting. Where an entity carries assets at fair value such as non-
current assets in accordance with IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment or investment properties
in accordance with IAS 40, Investment Property, it may rely on independent professional
valuations at annual reporting dates, though not at interim reporting dates.
• Intercompany reconciliations. Intercompany balances that are reconciled at a detailed level at the
year end may be reconciled at a less detailed level at the interim reporting date.
• Specialised industries. Interim period measurement in specialised industries may be less precise
than at year end due to their complexity, and the cost and time investment that is required.
The principle of materiality applies to interim financial reporting, as it does to year-end reporting. In
assessing materiality, it needs to be recognised that interim financial reports will rely more heavily on
estimates than year-end reports. Materiality should be assessed in relation to the interim financial
statements themselves, and should be independent of ‘annual materiality’ considerations.
6.8 IFRIC 10, Interim Financial Reporting and Impairment

This IFRIC, issued in 2006, addresses the apparent conflict between IAS 34 and the requirement in
other standards on the recognition and reversal in financial statements of impairment losses on
goodwill and certain financial assets.
HB2021

IFRIC 10 states that any such impairment losses recognised in an interim financial statement must not
be reversed in subsequent interim or annual financial statements.
6.9 IFRS 13, amendments

IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement amended IAS 34, requiring interim reports to make the disclosures
required by paragraphs 91–93(h), 94–96, 98 and 99 of IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement and
paragraphs 25, 26 and 28–30 of IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures.

Section overview
• IFRS 14, Regulatory Deferral Accounts permits entities adopting IFRS for the first time to continue
to account, with some limited changes, for ‘regulatory deferral account balances’ in accordance
with their previous GAAP, both on initial adoption of IFRS and in subsequent financial statements.
• Regulatory deferral account balances, and movements in them, are presented separately in the
statement of financial position and statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
Specific disclosures are required.
IFRS 14, Regulatory Deferral Accounts was issued in January 2014 and is effective for an entity’s first
annual IFRS financial statements for a period beginning on or after 1 January 2016. IFRS 14 is an
interim standard, applicable to first-time adopters of IFRS that provide goods or services to
customers at a price or rate that is subject to rate regulation by the Government eg, the supply of gas
or electricity.
The following definitions are used in IFRS 14.
Definitions
Rate regulation: A framework for establishing the prices that can be charged to customers for goods
and services and that framework is subject to oversight and/or approval by a rate regulator.
Rate regulator: An authorised body that is empowered by statute or regulation to establish the rate
or range of rates that bind an entity.
Regulatory deferral account balance: The balance of any expense (or income) account that would
not be recognised as an asset or a liability in accordance with other Standards, but that qualifies for
deferral because it is included, or is expected to be included, by the rate regulator in establishing the
rate(s) that can be charged to customers.
7.1 Objective
The objective of IFRS 14 is to specify the financial reporting requirements for ‘regulatory deferral
account balances’ that arise when an entity provides goods or services to customers at a price or rate
that is subject to rate regulation.
7.2 Scope of IFRS 14

IFRS 14 is permitted, but not required, to be applied where an entity conducts rate-regulated
activities and has recognised amounts in its previous GAAP financial statements that meet the
definition of ‘regulatory deferral account balances’ (sometimes referred to as ‘regulatory assets’ and
‘regulatory liabilities’).
7.3 Main issues

Rate regulation is a means of ensuring that specified costs are recovered by the supplier, and that
prices charged to customers are fair. These twin objectives mean that prices charged to customers at
a particular time do not necessarily cover the costs incurred by the supplier at that time. In this case,
the recovery of such costs is deferred and they are recognised through future sales.
HB2021

This leads to a mismatch. IFRS does not have specific requirements in respect of accounting for this
mismatch. However, established practice is that amounts are recognised in profit or loss as they arise.
In some jurisdictions, however, local GAAP allows or requires a supplier of rate-regulated activities to
recognise costs to be recovered either as a separate regulatory deferral account or as part of the cost
of a related asset.
The IASB is currently working on a comprehensive project to address this issue, but the project is not
complete. In the meantime, IFRS 14 permits first-time adopters of IFRS to continue to recognise
amounts related to rate regulation in accordance with their previous GAAP when they adopt IFRS.
This is effected through an exemption from paragraph 11 of IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in
Accounting Estimates and Errors, which generally requires an entity to consider the requirements of
IFRS Standards dealing with similar matters and the requirements of the Conceptual Framework
when setting its accounting policies.
An entity may change its policy for regulatory deferral accounts in accordance with IAS 8, but only if
the change makes the financial statements more relevant and reliable to users.
7.4 Presentation
The amounts of regulatory deferral account balances are separately presented in an entity’s financial
statements.
7.5 Disclosures
Specific disclosures are required in order to enable users to assess:
• the nature of, and risks associated with, the rate regulation that establishes the price(s) the entity
can charge customers for the goods or services it provides; and
• the effects of rate regulation on the entity’s financial statements.
8 Audit focus – general issues with reporting

performance
Section overview
The auditor must consider the risk of fraud in general, and the risk of creative accounting in
particular, when auditing financial performance.
ISA (UK) 200 (Revised June 2016), Overall Objectives of the Independent Auditor and the Conduct of
an Audit in Accordance with the International Standards on Auditing (UK) states the auditor’s overall
objectives as follows:
• To obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, thereby enabling the auditor to express an
opinion on whether the financial statements are prepared, in all material respects, in accordance
with an applicable financial reporting framework
• To report on the financial statements, and communicate as required by the ISAs (UK), in
accordance with the auditor’s findings
(ISA 200.11)
Note that the auditor is concerned with material misstatements arising both as a result of error, and
as a result of fraud.
We looked at creative accounting, a form of fraudulent financial reporting, in Chapter 5. We will look
at the audit approach to fraud and creative accounting in more detail in Chapter 24.
Another point which is worth drawing out is the need for the auditor to report and communicate as
required by the ISAs. As ISA 200 makes clear, the auditor must fully understand and comply with all
the ISAs relevant to the audit.
HB2021

9 Audit focus – specific issues
Section overview
This section looks at some of the audit issues related to certain financial reporting treatments
covered earlier in this chapter.
9.1 Presentation and disclosure of segment information

ISA (UK) 501, Audit evidence –Specific Considerations for Selected Items governs the auditor’s
approach to auditing segment information.
Auditors are required to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence regarding the presentation and
disclosure of segment information by:
(a) obtaining an understanding of the methods used by management in determining segment
information:
– evaluating whether such methods are likely to result in disclosure in accordance with the
applicable financial reporting framework,
– where appropriate, testing the application of such methods; and
(b) performing analytical procedures or other audit procedures appropriate in the circumstances.
(ISA 501.13)
When the ISA talks about obtaining an understanding of management’s methods, the following may
be relevant:
• Sales, transfers and charges between segments, elimination of inter-segment amounts
• Comparisons with budgets and other expected results; for example, operating profits as a
percentage of sales
• Allocations of assets and costs among segments
• Consistency with prior periods, and the adequacy of the disclosures with respect to
inconsistencies
It is important to stress that auditors only have a responsibility in relation to the financial statements
taken as a whole. Auditors are not required to express an opinion on the segment information
presented on a standalone basis.
9.2 Held-for-sale assets

As we have seen above, IFRS 5 requires that assets which meet the criteria ‘held for sale’ are shown at
the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell, that held-for-sale assets are classified
separately on the statement of financial position and the results of discontinued operations are
presented separately on the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
Audit procedures to ensure assets meet the criteria include the following:
• Make enquiries/obtain written representations from management concerning intentions
• Review minutes of management for evidence of firm plan to sell
• Ascertain whether appropriate estate agent appointed (by reviewing contract between the
parties)
• Review sale particulars
• Comparison of sale price per sale particulars to fair value
• Confirm likelihood of completion within a year by asking estate agent
Interactive question 7: Audit procedures – held-for-sale assets

Robinson Ltd has a balance of £250,000 in respect of assets classified as held for sale in the financial
statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
HB2021

This is in respect of two assets as follows:
• £70,000 relates to production machinery used for a product which is to be withdrawn. Production
will be run down until the end of January 20X8 so that outstanding orders can be completed. The
plant will then be serviced and uninstalled in early February.
• £180,000 relates to a piece of land which was classified as held for sale on 1 October. (You should
assume that the IFRS 5 criteria are satisfied.) On this date the land’s fair value was estimated to be
£210,000 with costs to advertise the asset as being available for sale estimated at £6,000. The
£180,000 represents the carrying value of the land on the basis that it is lower than fair value less
costs to sell. Robinson Ltd has adopted a revaluation policy for land.
Requirements
Do the following for each of the above assets:
(a) Identify the key audit issue
(b) State the audit procedures which would be performed to address this issue
9.3 Related parties

Related parties are often involved in cases of fraudulent financial reporting, as highlighted in many
major corporate scandals. Transactions with related parties provide scope for distorting financial
information in financial statements and hiding the economic substance of transactions or fraud in
companies.
The overall aim of ISA (UK) 550, Related Parties is to enhance the auditor’s consideration of related
parties and related party transactions with a focus on risk assessment, including the recognition of
fraud risk factors. The firm must establish an approach that requires the auditor to assess the risks of
misstatement and design audit procedures to address these. In particular, the ISA includes the
following:
• Clearer responsibilities for the auditor, with a distinction being made between circumstances
where the accounting framework includes disclosure and other reporting requirements for related
parties, and circumstances where either there are no such requirements or they are inadequate
• Clearer distinction between the risk assessment procedures and the further audit procedures
• A definition of a related party, which is to be used as a minimum level for audit purposes where
the applicable financial reporting framework establishes minimal or no related party requirements
9.4 Related parties: key issues

Readers of financial statements normally assume that transactions reflected in financial statements
are made with independent parties unless told otherwise.
Readers will also normally assume that a company is owned by a number of shareholders and is not
subject to control or significant influence by any one person or company unless told otherwise, eg,
through disclosure of the identity of the parent company and significant shareholdings disclosure.
Where a company does business with ‘related parties’, for instance with shareholders or directors,
these assumptions may not be valid.
9.5 The audit of related parties

9.5.1 Scope
ISA 550 provides guidance on the auditor’s responsibilities, and audit procedures regarding related
parties and transactions with such parties.
ISA 550 is applicable whether or not IAS 24,Related Party Disclosures is a requirement of the
reporting framework for the entity concerned. ISA 550, therefore, applies to private companies in
the UK as well as listed companies. ISA 550 provides the following definition.
HB2021

Definition
Related party: A party that is either:
(a) a related party as defined in the applicable financial reporting framework; or
(b) where the applicable financial reporting framework establishes minimal or no related party
requirements:
(1) a person or other entity that has control or significant influence, directly or indirectly through
one or more intermediaries, over the reporting entity;
(2) another entity over which the reporting entity has control or significant influence, directly or
indirectly through one or more intermediaries; or
(3) another entity that is under common control with the reporting entity through having:
• common controlling ownership;
• owners who are close family members; or
• common key management.
However, entities that are under common control by a state (ie, a national, regional or local
government) are not considered related unless they engage in significant transactions or share
resources to a significant extent with one another.
(ISA 550.10)
9.5.2 Responsibilities
Management is responsible for the identification of related parties and the disclosure of transactions
with such parties. Management should set up appropriate internal controls to ensure that related
parties are identified and disclosed along with any related party transactions.
It may not be self-evident to management whether a party is related. Furthermore, many accounting
systems are not designed to either distinguish or summarise related party transactions, so
management will have to carry out additional analysis of accounting information.
The auditor has a responsibility to perform audit procedures to identify, assess and respond to the
risks of material misstatement arising from the entity’s failure to appropriately account for or disclose
related party relationships, transactions or balances.
9.5.3 Risks
The following audit risks may arise from a failure to identify a related party.
• Failure of the financial statements to comply with IAS 24.
• There may be a misstatement in the financial statements – transactions may be on a non arm’s
length basis and thus may result in assets, liabilities, profit or loss being overstated or
understated. For example, special tax rates may apply to profits reported on sales to related
parties.
• The reliance on a source of audit evidence may be misjudged. An auditor may rely on what is
perceived to be third-party evidence when in fact it is from a related party. More generally,
reliance on management assurances may be affected if the auditor were made aware of non-
disclosure of a related party.
• The motivations of related parties may be outside normal business motivations and thus may be
misunderstood by the auditor if there is non-disclosure. In the extreme, this may amount to fraud.
The inherent risk linked to related party transactions (RPT) can be high, especially where
management is unaware of the existence of all the related party relationships or transactions, or
where there is an opportunity for collusion, concealment or manipulation by management. There is
an increased risk that the auditor may fail to detect a RPT, where:
• there has been no charge made for a RPT (ie, a zero cost transaction);
• disclosure would be sensitive for directors or have adverse consequences for the company;
• the company has no formal system for detecting RPTs;
• RPTs are with a party that the auditor could not reasonably expect to know is a related party;
• RPTs from an earlier period have remained as an unsettled balance;
HB2021

• management have concealed, or failed to disclose fully, related parties or transactions with such
parties; and
• the corporate structure is complex.
Note: The term ‘arm’s length’ continues to be used in the context of IAS 24 even though it has been
removed from the definition of fair value in IFRS 13.
9.5.4 Risk assessment procedures

In planning the audit, the auditor needs to consider the risk of undisclosed related party
transactions. This is a difficult area because IAS 24 does not have consideration for materiality. Thus,
even small RPTs should be disclosed by a company. Indeed, related party relationships where there is
control (eg, a subsidiary) need to be disclosed even where there are no transactions with this party.
The auditor needs to perform the following procedures:
(a) The engagement team shall discuss the risks of fraud-related misstatements.
Matters to be addressed would include the importance of maintaining professional scepticism
and circumstances which may indicate the existence of related party relationships or transactions
that management has not identified.
(b) Make inquiries of management about the identities of related parties and any RPTs.
This includes:
(1) the identity of related parties, including changes from prior period;
(2) the nature of the relationships between the entity and its related parties;
(3) whether any transactions occurred between the parties and, if so;
(4) what controls the entity has to identify, account for and disclose related party relationships
and transactions;
(5) what controls the entity has to authorise and approve significant transactions and
arrangements with related parties; and
(6) what controls the entity has to authorise and approve significant transactions and
arrangements outside the normal course of business.
(c) Obtain an understanding of controls established to identify, account for and disclose RPTs and
to authorise and approve significant transactions with related parties / outside the normal course
of business.
Where controls are ineffective or non-existent, the auditor may be unable to obtain sufficient,
appropriate audit evidence and will need to consider the impact of this on the audit opinion.
The auditor is also required to be alert for related party information when reviewing records or
documents. In particular, the auditor must inspect bank and legal confirmations and minutes of
meetings of the shareholders and those charged with governance. Where these procedures reveal
significant transactions outside the entity’s normal course of business, the auditor must inquire of
management about the nature of these transactions and whether a related party could be involved.
9.5.5 Responses to the risks of material misstatement

In accordance with ISA 330, the auditor must design and perform further audit procedures to obtain
sufficient, appropriate evidence about the assessed risks of material misstatement. These may
include:
• confirming or discussing the transactions with intermediaries eg, banks, lawyers or agents;
• confirming the purposes, specific terms or amounts of the transaction with the related party; and
• reading the financial statements of the related party for evidence of the transaction in the related
party’s accounting records.
Where the risk of misstatement may be due to fraud additional procedures may apply:
• Inquiries of and discussion with management and those charged with governance
• Inquiries of the related party
• Inspection of significant contracts with the related party
• Background research eg, internet
• Review of employee whistleblowing reports
HB2021

Identification of previously unidentified or undisclosed related parties or significant related party
transactions
If the auditor identifies related parties or significant related party transactions that management has
not previously identified or disclosed to the auditor, the auditor must do the following:
• Promptly communicate the relevant information to the other members of the engagement team
• Where the applicable reporting framework establishes related party requirements request
management to identify all transactions with the newly identified related parties and inquire as to
why the entity’s controls have failed to identify and disclose the transaction
• Perform appropriate substantive audit procedures
These might include making inquiries regarding the nature of the entity’s relationships with the
newly identified related party, conducting an analysis of accounting records for transactions with
the newly identified related party and verifying the terms and conditions of the newly identified
related party transaction
• Reconsider the risk that other unidentified related parties or significant related party transactions
may exist
• If the non-disclosure by management appears intentional and therefore indicates possible fraud
evaluate the implications for the rest of the audit
Identified significant related party transactions outside the entity’s normal course of business
Where significant related party transactions outside the entity’s normal course of business are
identified, the auditor must do the following:
• Inspect the underlying contracts and agreements and evaluate whether:
– the business rationale or lack of suggests fraud;
– the terms are consistent with the management’s explanations; and
– the transaction has been appropriately accounted for and disclosed.
• Obtain audit evidence that transactions have been appropriately authorised and approved
Management assertions
If management has made assertions in the financial statements to the effect that a related party
transaction was conducted on terms equivalent to those prevailing in an arm’s length transaction, the
auditor must obtain evidence to support this. The nature of the evidence obtained will depend on
the support management has obtained to substantiate their claim but may involve:
• considering the appropriateness of management’s process for supporting the assertion;
• verifying the source of internal and external data supporting the assertion and testing it for
accuracy, completeness and relevance; and
• evaluating the reasonableness of any significant assumptions on which the assertion is based.
9.5.6 Evaluation of accounting and disclosure

The auditor is required to evaluate whether related parties and related party transactions have been
properly accounted for and disclosed and do not prevent the financial statements from achieving fair
presentation.
9.5.7 Written representations

The auditor is required to obtain written representations from management and, where appropriate,
those charged with governance that all related parties and related party transactions have been
disclosed to the auditor and that these have been appropriately accounted for and disclosed.
In the UK, an entity may require its management and those charged with governance to sign
individual declarations in relation to related party matters. It may be helpful if any such declarations
are addressed jointly to a designated official of the entity and also to the auditor.
9.5.8 Documentation
The auditor is required to include in the audit documentation the identity of related parties and the
nature of related party relationships.
Note: The law regarding transactions with directors was covered in Chapter 1 of this Workbook.
HB2021

9.6 Related parties: practical application
The ICAEW Audit faculty has produced guidance in its publication The Audit of Related Parties in
Practice. This proposes a five point action plan as follows:
• Plan your work on the audit of related party relationships and transactions thoroughly.
• Focus on the risk of material misstatement that might arise from related party transactions.
• Understand the internal controls at the company to identify related parties and to record related
party transactions.
• Design procedures to respond to risks identified.
• Perform completion procedures.
9.6.1 Identifying undisclosed related parties

It is often difficult to identify related party relationships and transactions which should have been
disclosed, but are not.
ISA 550 points out that the existence of the following relationships may indicate the presence of
control or significant influence:
(a) Direct or indirect equity holdings or other financial interests in the entity
(b) The entity’s holdings of direct or indirect equity or other financial interests in other entities
(c) Being part of those charged with governance or key management (that is, those members of
management who have the authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling
the activities of the entity)
(d) Being a close family member of any person referred to in subparagraph (c)
(e) Having a significant business relationship with any person referred to in subparagraph (c)
The related parties described in subparagraph (c) above, and by extension those described in (d)
and (e), are often the hardest to identify. While entities related through equity interest should be fairly
clearly documented, auditors frequently struggle to identify related party transactions established
through connected persons.
The following risk assessment procedures are relevant when testing for the existence of undisclosed
related parties:
• Enquire of management and the directors as to whether transactions have taken place with
related parties that are required to be disclosed by the disclosure requirements that are
applicable to the entity
• Review prior year working papers for names of known related parties
• Review minutes of meetings of shareholders and directors and other relevant statutory records,
such as the register of directors’ interests
• Review accounting records for large or unusual transactions or balances, in particular transactions
recognised at or near the end of the financial period
• Review confirmations of loans receivable and payable and confirmations from banks. Such a
review may indicate the relationship, if any, of guarantors to the entity
• Review investment transactions, for example purchase or sale of an interest in a joint venture or
other entity
• Enquire as to the names of all pension and other trusts established for the benefit of employees
and the names of their management and trustees
• Enquire as to the affiliation of directors and officers with other entities
• Review the register of interests in shares to determine the names of principal shareholders
• Enquire of other auditors currently involved in the audit, or predecessor auditors, as to their
knowledge of additional related parties
• Review the entity‘s tax returns, returns made under statute and other information supplied to
regulatory agencies for evidence of the existence of related parties
• Review invoices and correspondence from lawyers for indications of the existence of related
parties or related party transactions
HB2021

9.7 First-time adoption of IFRS
Companies adopting IFRS for the first time are required to produce comparative financial statements,
restating prior period figures in accordance with IFRS.
Auditing the financial statements of a company adopting IFRS for the first time poses a special
challenge to the auditor, as set out in ISA (UK) 710, Comparative Information: Corresponding Figures
and Comparative Financial Statements. We have discussed the auditing of comparatives in detail in
Chapter 8.
9.7.1 Scope of the audit

Comparative financial statements refer to a full set of financial statements for the prior period,
included in the current period’s annual report. This differs from corresponding figures, where prior
period figures are set out next to current period figures in a set of financial statements for
comparison.
While the auditor does not express an opinion on corresponding figures, where comparative
financial statements are issued, the auditor is required to express an opinion on both the restated
prior period and the current period.
9.7.2 Audit procedures

ISA 710 requires the auditor to evaluate:
• Whether the comparative information agrees with the amounts and other disclosures presented
in the prior period or, when appropriate, have been restated; and
• Whether the accounting policies reflected in the comparative information are consistent with
those applied in the current period or, if there have been changes in accounting policies, whether
those changes have been properly accounted for and adequately presented and disclosed.
If the auditor identifies any possible misstatement, they should carry out additional audit procedures
to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence about whether a material misstatement actually
exists.
In addition, auditors must obtain written representations for all the periods referred to in the
auditor’s report. This means that written representations must be obtained for the restated period, as
well as the current period.
9.7.3 Audit reporting

ISA 710 states that ‘the auditor’s opinion shall refer to each period for which the financial statements
are presented’.
It is possible for different audit opinions to be expressed for each period. Where a modified audit
opinion is given for the restated period, an Other Matter paragraph should be included, explaining
the reason for the modification.
HB2021

Summary
IAS 1, Presentation
of Financial
Statements
Statement of Present SFP at start of previous period

financial position where prior period adjustment
Statement of profit Profit for period

or loss and other
comprehensive income Other comprehensive income
Statement of
cash flows
Statement of
Transactions with owners
changes in equity
HB2021

• Change in accounting
policies (retrospective)
• Change in estimate
(prospective)
• Prior period errors Corporate Directors' IFRS for
(retrospective) governance report SMEs
Accounting
policies, estimates Reporting Other
and errors (IAS 8)
performance
IFRS 5 Non-current Segment reporting Related parties

assets held for sale (IFRS 8) (IAS 24)
and discontinued
operations
Related party Related party
Operating segments relationship transactions
Non-current Discontinued Zero price
assets held operations
Reportable Aggregated Substance Artificial price
for sale segments segments over form
• Statement of Arm's length
profit and loss Control
Profits, assets
Classification • Statement of Influence
and liabilities
cash flows
Management
• Statement of
Measurement financial Other
• External revenue
position
• Geographical
UK: Only material
information related party
Disclosure transactions
Reconciliation disclosed
Disclosure
HB2021

Interim Financial Reporting
IAS 34
Minimum Minimum
requirements disclosure
Condensed Where relevant Impact of any

statement of how performance is changes in
financial position affected by seasonality accounting policies
Condensed Changes in debt or Statement that

statement of profit or equity from new accounting policies
loss and other issues, repurchases or followed are
comprehensive income repayments consistent with
latest full financial
statements
Nature and effect
Condensed statement
of any material
of changes in equity
changes in estimates
Changes in contingent
liabilities or contingent
Condensed An update of segmental assets since last
statement information reporting date
of cash flows
Any changes in the

composition of the Dividends paid
entity for each class of share
Material events after

the reporting period Any unusual items
HB2021

1. Do you understand the IAS 1 rules on presenting comparatives? (Topic 1)
2. Do you understand what is meant by an operating segment? (Topic 3)
3. Can you measure assets held for sale as per IFRS 5? (Topic 4)
4. What are the minimum components of interim financial statements under IFRS 34? (Topic
7)
5. Do you understand the role of the auditor in relation to segment information? (Topic 10)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
AZ This is a very good question to revise your knowledge of IAS 1 and

preparation of financial statements, which you covered at Professional
Level.
Ndombe This tests IFRS 5, specifically classifying and valuing non-current assets
held for sale. This should be assumed knowledge from earlier studies, but
if you struggle you may need to go back to your earlier study material.
Mareotis This is a comprehensive question on related parties, an area that could be

tested as part of a longer question.
attempt.
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference

• Requires an entity to report its operating segments based on the data reported internally to
management. Geographical disclosures of external revenue and non-current assets are also
required. – IFRS 8 Paragraph 20–22
• The minimum disclosure is of profit/loss by segment.
• Geographical disclosures of external revenue and non-current assets are also required.
2 IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations

• Discontinued operations
• Definition – IFRS 5.31–32
• Disclosures on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income: – IFRS
5.33(a)
– A single amount comprising the total of:
◦ The post-tax profit or loss of discontinued operations, and
◦ The post-tax gain or loss recognised on related assets
• Disclosures on the face or in the notes – IFRS 5.33(b) (c)
– An analysis of the single amount on the face
• Comparative figures must be restated – IFRS 5.34
• Narrative disclosures are also required – IFRS 5.41

• Definition of a related party and related party transaction – IAS 24.9
• Exclusions from definition of related party – IAS 24.11
• Disclosures – IAS 24.12, 16, 17, 18
4 IFRS 1, First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards

• Opening IFRS SOFP – IFRS 1.6
• Accounting policies – IFRS 1.7–12
• Estimates – IFRS 1.23-33
• Transition process – IFRS 1 App C,D
• Exemptions – IFRS 1.20–33
• Disclosure

• Minimum components of an interim financial report – IAS 34.8
• Form and content of interim financial statements – IAS 34.9–11
• Selected explanatory notes – IAS 34.16
• Disclosure of compliance with IFRS Standards – IAS 34.19
• Periods for which interim financial statements are required to be presented – IAS 34.20
• Materiality – IAS 34.23

• Applies to all general purpose financial statements
• Links back to much in the IASB Framework
• Presentation and disclosure rules apply only to material items – IAS 1.31 and IAS 1.7
HB2021

• Statement of financial position – IAS 1.54, 56, 60, 66, 69, 79
7 Disclosure in annual financial statements

• If an estimate of an amount reported in an interim period is changed significantly during the final
interim period of the financial year but a separate financial report is not published for that final
interim period, the nature and amount of that change in estimate shall be disclosed in a note to
the annual financial statements for that financial year. – IAS 34.26
8 Recognition and measurement

• An entity should apply the same accounting policies in its interim financial statements as are
applied in its annual financial statements, except for accounting policy changes made after the
date of the most recent annual financial statements that are to be reflected in the next annual
financial statements. However, the frequency of an entity’s reporting (annual, half-yearly, or
quarterly) should not affect the measurement of its annual results. To achieve that objective,
measurements for interim reporting purposes should be made on a year-to-date basis. – IAS
34.28
9 Revenues received seasonally, cyclically, or occasionally

• Revenues that are received seasonally, cyclically, or occasionally within a financial year shall not be
anticipated or deferred as of an interim date if anticipation or deferral would not be appropriate
at the end of the entity’s financial year. – IAS 34.37
10 Costs incurred unevenly during the financial year

• Costs that are incurred unevenly during an entity’s financial year shall be anticipated or deferred
for interim reporting purposes if, and only if, it is also appropriate to anticipate or defer that type
of cost at the end of the financial year. – IAS 34.39
• Applying the recognition and measurement principles – IAS 34.40
• Use of estimates – IAS 34.41
• Restatement of previously reported interim periods – IAS 34.43

• Specifies the financial reporting requirements for ‘regulatory deferral account balances’ that arise
when an entity provides goods or services to customers at a price or rate that is subject to rate
regulation. – IFRS 14.1
• Eligible entities can continue to apply the accounting policies used for regulatory deferral
account balances under the basis of accounting used immediately before adopting IFRS
(‘previous GAAP’) when applying IFRS Standards, subject to the presentation requirements of IFRS
14. – IFRS 14.11
• The impact must be presented separately. – IFRS 14.20
• Specific disclosures are required. – IFRS 14.27
12 ISA 501
• Audit of segment information – ISA 501.13
13 ISA 550
• Definition of related parties – ISA 550.10
• Auditor’s responsibilities in relation to related parties – ISA 550.3–7
• Audit procedures in respect of related parties – ISA 550.11–28
14 ISA 710
• Audit procedures in respect of comparative financial statements – ISA 710.7–9
• Audit reporting in respect of comparative financial statements – ISA 710.10–19
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 AZ
AZ is a quoted manufacturing company. Its finished products are stored in a nearby warehouse until
ordered by customers. AZ has performed very well in the past, but has been in financial difficulties in
recent months and has been reorganising the business to improve performance.
The trial balance for AZ at 31 March 20X3 was as follows:
$’000 $’000
Sales 124,900
Cost of goods manufactured in the year to 31 March 20X3
(excluding depreciation) 94,000
Distribution costs 9,060
Administrative expenses 16,020
Restructuring costs 121
Interest received 1,200
Loan note interest paid 639
Land and buildings (including land $20,000,000) 50,300
Plant and equipment 3,720
Accumulated depreciation at 31 March 20X2:
Buildings 6,060
Plant and equipment 1,670
Investment properties (at market value) 24,000
Inventories at 31 March 20X2 4,852
Trade receivables 9,330
Bank and cash 1,190
Ordinary shares of $1 each, fully paid 20,000
Share premium 430
Revaluation surplus 3,125
Retained earnings at 31 March 20X2 28,077
Ordinary dividends paid 1,000
7% loan notes 20X7 18,250
Trade payables 8,120
Proceeds of share issue –––––– 2,400
214,232 214,232
Additional information provided:

(1) The property, plant and equipment are being depreciated as follows:
Buildings 5% per annum straight line.
Plant and equipment 25% per annum reducing balance.
HB2021

Depreciation of buildings is considered an administrative cost while depreciation of plant and
equipment should be treated as a cost of sale.
(2) On 31 March 20X3 the land was revalued to $24,000,000.
(3) Income tax for the year to 31 March 20X3 is estimated at $976,000. Ignore deferred tax.
(4) The closing inventories at 31 March 20X3 were $5,180,000. An inspection of finished goods
found that a production machine had been set up incorrectly and that several production
batches, which had cost $50,000 to manufacture, had the wrong packaging. The goods cannot
be sold in this condition but could be repacked at an additional cost of $20,000. They could then
be sold for $55,000. The wrongly packaged goods were included in closing inventories at their
cost of $50,000.
(5) The 7% loan notes are 10-year loans due for repayment by 31 March 20X7. Interest on these
loan notes needs to be accrued for the six months to 31 March 20X3.
(6) The restructuring costs in the trial balance represent the cost of a major restructuring of the
company to improve competitiveness and future profitability.
(7) No fair value adjustments were necessary to the investment properties during the period.
(8) During the year the company issued 2 million new ordinary shares for cash at $1.20 per share.
The proceeds have been recorded as ‘Proceeds of share issue’.
Requirement
Prepare the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and statement of changes in
equity for AZ for the year to 31 March 20X3 and a statement of financial position at that date.
Notes to the financial statements are not required, but all workings must be clearly shown.
2 Viscum
The Viscum Company accounts for non-current assets using the cost model.
On 25 April 20X6 Viscum classified a non-current asset as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5,
Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations. At that date the asset’s carrying
amount was £30,000, its fair value was estimated at £22,000 and the costs to sell at £3,000.
On 15 May 20X6 the asset was sold for net proceeds of £18,400.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 5, what amount should be included as an impairment loss in Viscum’s
financial statements for the year ended 30 June 20X6?
3 Reavley
The Reavley Company accounts for non-current assets using the cost model.
On 20 July 20X6 Reavley classified a non-current asset as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5,
Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations. At that date the asset’s carrying
amount was £19,500, its fair value was estimated at £26,500 and the costs to sell at £1,950.
The asset was sold on 18 October 20X6 for £26,000.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 5, at what amount should the asset be stated in Reavley’s statement of
financial position at 30 September 20X6?
4 Smicek
The Smicek Company classified an asset as being held for sale on 31 December 20X6. The asset had
been purchased for a cost of £1.2 million on 1 January 20X4, and then had a 12-year useful life. On
31 December 20X6 its carrying amount was £900,000, its fair value was £860,000 and the expected
sale costs were £20,000.
On 31 December 20X7 the board of Smicek, having failed to sell the asset during 20X7, decided to
reverse their original decision and therefore use the asset in the business. At 31 December 20X7 the
asset had a fair value of £810,000 and expected sale costs of £20,000. The directors estimate that
HB2021

annual cash flows relating to the asset would be £200,000 per year for the next 6 years. The effect of
discounting is not material.
Requirement
What is the effect on profit or loss of Smicek’s ceasing to classify the asset as held for sale, according
to IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations?
5 Ndombe
The Ndombe Company classified a group of assets as held for sale on 31 December 20X6. Their fair
value less costs to sell was £1,180,000.
During 20X7 the company decided that one of the assets, a polishing machine, should no longer be
treated as an asset held for sale. The sale of the other assets was delayed due to events beyond the
control of Ndombe and the company remains committed to their sale, which is highly probable in
20X8.
Asset values and dates are as follows:
Polishing machine Other assets

£ £
Cost at 1 January 20X5 400,000 1,500,000
Accumulated depreciation to 31 December 20X6 (160,000) (600,000)
Carrying amount on 31 December 20X6 240,000 900,000
Useful life 5 years 5 year
Fair value less costs to sell 31 December 20X6 210,000 970,000
Fair value less costs to sell 31 December 20X7 190,000 880,000
Value in use at 31 December 20X7 170,000 810,000
Requirement
Under IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations what are the amounts
that should be shown under assets on the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X6 and
31 December 20X7?
6 Sapajou
The Sapajou Company bought a property with a useful life of 10 years for £1,200,000 on 1 January
20X4.
On 1 July 20X6 the board of Sapajou made a decision to sell the property, and immediately vacated
it and advertised it for sale. At this date fair value less costs to sell was estimated at £880,000.
Negotiations with a buyer appeared successful, and a sale was provisionally agreed for 1 August
20X7 for £880,000. At the last minute the buyer withdrew and Sapajou had to re-advertise the
property.
A new buyer was found in November 20X7 and a new price was agreed at fair value less costs to sell
of £995,000. The sale is scheduled to take place in February 20X8.
Requirement
What are the amounts that should be included in profit or loss for the years ending 31 December
20X6 and 31 December 20X7?
7 Sulafat
The Sulafat Company has a 70% subsidiary Vurta and is a venturer in Piton, a joint venture company.
During the financial year to 31 December 20X6, Sulafat sold goods to both companies.
Consolidated financial statements are prepared combining the financial statements of Sulafat and
Vurta.
HB2021

Requirement
Which transactions should be disclosed under IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures, in the separate
financial statements of Sulafat for 20X6?
8 Phlegra
In the year ended 31 December 20X7, the Phlegra Company undertook transactions with the
following entities to the value stated.
(1) The Nereidum Company, one of whose non-executive directors is an executive director of
Phlegra: £300,000.
(2) The Chub Company, which sources 100% of its raw materials requirements from Phlegra:
£190,000.
Requirement
Under IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures, what is the total amount to be disclosed in respect of
transactions with related parties in Phlegra’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December
20X7?
9 Mareotis
The Mareotis Company is a partly owned subsidiary of the Bourne Company. In the year ended 31
December 20X7 Mareotis undertook transactions with the following entities to the value stated.
(1) The Hayles Company, in which the Wrasse Company holds 55% of the equity. Bourne holds 40%
of the equity of Wrasse and has the power to appoint 3 out of the 5 members of Wrasse’s board
of directors: £300,000.
(2) The Galaxius Company, which is controlled by Danielle (the aunt of Agnes, a member of
Mareotis’s board of directors): £500,000.
Requirement
Under IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures, what is the total amount of transactions with related parties
to be disclosed in Mareotis’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7?
10 Marmoset
The Marmoset Company offers the service of transport consultations. Its accounting year ends on 31
December each year and it is currently preparing half-yearly interim financial statements for the six
months to 30 June 20X7.
During 20X7 the directors drew up a plan to introduce a new bonus scheme for all junior consultants
in order to provide incentives and improve retention. The details of the scheme were announced to
employees the day before the interim financial statements were released on 15 August 20X7. Under
the planned scheme any bonus would be paid on 31 March 20X8.
The bonus will be equal to 1% of profit before tax (calculated before recognising the bonus) of the
year ended 31 December 20X7.
The business is seasonal such that 60% of the annual profit before tax is earned in the first six months
of the year. The profit before tax in the interim financial statements for the six months to 30 June
20X7 is £6 million.
Requirement
What amount should be recognised in profit or loss for Marmoset for the six months to 30 June 20X7
in respect of the bonus, according to IAS 34, Interim Financial Reporting?
11 Aconcagua
The Aconcagua Company sells fashion shoes, the price of which varies during the year. Its
accounting year ends on 31 December and it prepares half-yearly interim financial statements.
At 30 June 20X7 it has inventories of 2,000 units which cost £30 each. The net realisable value of the
inventories at 30 June, when the shoes are out of season, is £20 each. No sales are expected in the
HB2021

period to 31 December 20X7, but the expected net realisable value of the shoes at that date (when
they are about to come back into season) is £28 each.
Requirement
Should any changes in inventory values be reflected in the interim financial statements of Aconcagua
for the six months ending 30 June 20X7 and for the six months ending 31 December 20X7,
according to IAS 34, Interim Financial Reporting?
this chapter.
HB2021


IFRS 8, Operating Segments states that an operating segment is separately reportable if it has been
identified as a separate operating segment meeting the operating segment definition, and:
• its reported revenue is 10% or more of the combined revenue (external and internal) of all
operating segments, or
• the absolute amount of its reported profit or loss is 10% or more of the greater of the combined
profit of all operating segments that did not report a loss and the combined reported loss of all
operating segments that reported a loss, or
• its assets are 10% or more of the combined assets of all operating segments.
Revenue as % of total Profit or loss as % of Assets as % of total

revenue (£238m) profit of all segments in assets (£336m)
profit (£29m)
Chemicals * 33.6% 48.3% 32.4%
Pharmaceuticals 28.2% 31.0% 31.0%

wholesale
Pharmaceuticals retail 9.2% 6.9% 8.9%
Cosmetics 6.3% 6.9% 5.4%
Hair care 5.0% 13.8% 6.3%
Body care 17.6% 20.7% 16.1%
* The chemicals segments are aggregated due to their similar economic characteristics
At 31 December 20X5 four of the six operating segments are reportable operating segments:
Chemicals
All size criteria are met.
Pharmaceuticals wholesale
Pharmaceuticals retail
The Pharmaceuticals retail segment is not separately reportable, as it does not meet the quantitative
thresholds. It can, however, still be reported as a separate operating segment if management
believes that information about the segment would be useful to users of the financial statements.
Alternatively, the group could consider amalgamating it with the Pharmaceuticals wholesale
segment, providing the two operating segments have similar economic characteristics and share a
majority of the ‘aggregation’ criteria which, excluding the type of customer, may be the case.
Otherwise it would be disclosed in an ‘All other segments’ column.
Cosmetics
The Cosmetics segment does not meet the quantitative thresholds and therefore is not separately
reportable. It can also be reported separately if management believes the information would be
useful to users. Alternatively the group may be able to amalgamate it with the Body care segment,
providing the operating segments have similar economic characteristics and share a majority of the
‘aggregation’ criteria. Otherwise it would also be disclosed in an ‘All other segments’ column.
Hair care
The Hair care segment is separately reported due to its profitability being greater than 10% of total
segments in profit.
HB2021

Body care
Note: IFRS 8.15 states that at least 75% of total external revenue must be reported by operating
segments. This condition has been met, as the reportable segments account for 82% of total external
revenue (158/192).

The facility will not be transferred until the backlog of orders is completed; this demonstrates that the
facility is not available for immediate sale in its present condition. The facility cannot be classified as
‘held for sale’ at 31 December 20X3. It must be treated in the same way as other items of property,
plant and equipment: it should continue to be depreciated and should not be separately disclosed.

Because the steel works is being closed, rather than sold, it cannot be classified as ‘held for sale’. In
addition, the steel works is not a discontinued operation. Although at 31 December 20X3 the group
was firmly committed to the closure, this has not yet taken place and therefore the steel works must
be included in continuing operations. Information about the planned closure could be disclosed in
the notes to the financial statements.

In its financial statements S must disclose all benefits provided in exchange for services rendered to S
(but not those rendered to P), whether they are provided by S, by P, or on behalf of S (as are the
pension benefits and the share options). All the amounts listed should be disclosed by S, with the
exception of the £20,000 payable in respect of services rendered to P.

5.1 Europa’s first IFRS financial statements will be for the year ended 31 December 20X8. IFRS 1
requires that at least one year’s comparative figures are presented and therefore the date of
transition to IFRS Standards is the beginning of business on 1 January 20X7 (or close of
business on 31 December 20X6).
Therefore the procedure for adopting IFRS Standards is:
• Identify accounting policies that comply with IFRS Standards effective at 31 December 20X8
(the reporting date for the first IFRS financial statements).
• Restate the opening statement of financial position at 1 January 20X7 (the date of transition)
using these IFRS Standards retrospectively, by:
– Recognising all assets and liabilities whose recognition is required by IFRS Standards
– Not recognising items as assets or liabilities if IFRS Standards do not permit such
recognition
– Reclassifying items that were recognised under previous GAAP as one type of asset,
liability or component of equity, but are a different type of asset, liability or component of
equity under IFRS Standards
– Measuring all recognised assets and liabilities in accordance with IFRS Standards
The company will almost certainly need to change some of its accounting policies and to adjust
some of the amounts that it reported previously at the same dates using previous GAAP. It
should recognise these adjustments directly in retained earnings (ie, in equity).
• Explain the effect of the transition from previous GAAP to IFRS Standards, by presenting:
– A reconciliation of equity reported under previous GAAP to equity under IFRS Standards
at the date of transition and at the latest previous GAAP reporting date
– A reconciliation of the profit or loss reported under previous GAAP to profit or loss
reported under IFRS Standards for the last period presented under previous GAAP
If Europa presented a statement of cash flows under previous GAAP, it should also explain any
material adjustments to the statement of cash flows.
HB2021

Although the general rule is that all IFRS Standards should be applied retrospectively, a number
of exemptions are available. These are intended to cover cases in which the cost of complying
fully with a particular requirement would outweigh the benefits to users of the financial
statements. Europa may choose to take advantage of any or all of the exemptions.
5.2 Changing from previous GAAP to IFRS Standards is likely to be a complex process and should
be carefully planned. Although previous GAAP and IAS/IFRS may follow broadly the same
principles, there are still likely to be many important differences in the detailed requirements of
individual standards.
If Europa has foreign subsidiaries outside Molvania it will need to ensure that they comply with
any previous reporting requirements. This may mean that subsidiaries have to prepare two sets
of financial statements: one using their previous GAAP; and one using IFRS Standards (for the
consolidation).
The process will be affected by the following:
• The differences between previous GAAP and IFRS Standards as they affect the group
financial statements in practice. The company will need to carry out a detailed review of
current accounting policies, paying particular attention to areas where there are significant
differences between previous GAAP and IFRS Standards. These will probably include
deferred tax, business combinations, employee benefits and foreign currency translation. It
should be possible to estimate the effect of the change by preparing pro forma financial
statements using IFRS Standards.
• The level of knowledge of IFRS Standards of current finance staff (including internal
auditors). It will probably be necessary to organise training and the company may need to
recruit additional personnel.
• The group’s accounting systems. Management will need to assess whether computerised
accounting systems can produce the information required to report under IFRS Standards.
They will also need to produce new consolidation packages and accounting manuals.
Lastly, the company should consider the impact of the change to IFRS Standards on investors
and their advisers. For this reason management should try to quantify the effect of IFRS
Standards on results and other key performance indicators as early as possible.
5.3 Advice
(1) Accounting estimates
Estimates under IFRS Standards at the date of transition must be consistent with those made at
the same date under previous GAAP (after adjustments to reflect any difference in accounting
policies). The only exception to this is if the company has subsequently discovered that these
estimates were in error. This is not the case here and therefore the estimates are not adjusted in
the first IFRS financial statements.
(2) Court case
The treatment of this depends on the reason why Europa did not recognise a provision under
previous GAAP at 31 December 20X7.
If the requirements of previous GAAP were consistent with IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent
Liabilities and Contingent Assets, presumably the directors concluded that an outflow of
economic benefit was not probable and that the recognition criteria were not met. In this case,
Europa’s assumptions under IFRS Standards are consistent with its previous assumptions under
previous GAAP. Europa does not recognise a provision at 31 December 20X7 and accounts for
the payment in the year ended 31 December 20X8.
If the requirements of previous GAAP were not consistent with IAS 37, Europa must determine
whether it had a present obligation at 31 December 20X7. The directors should take account of
all available evidence, including any additional evidence provided by events after the reporting
period up to the date the 20X7 financial statements were authorised for issue in accordance
with IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period.
5.4 The outcome of the court case confirms that Europa had a liability in September 20X7 (when
the events that resulted in the case occurred), but this event occurred after the 20X7 financial
statements were authorised for issue. Based on this alone, the company would not recognise a
provision at 31 December 20X7 and the $10 million cost of the court case would be recognised
in the 20X8 financial statements. If the company’s lawyers had advised Europa that it was
HB2021

probable that they would be found guilty and suggested the expected settlement amount
before the financial statements were authorised for issue, the provision would be recognised in
the 20X7 financial statements reporting under IFRS Standards for that amount.

30% × £4m = £1.2m
The tax rate for the entire year is applied to the profits for the interim period.

(a) Production machinery
In this case the key issue is whether or not the asset should be classified as held for sale. In
accordance with IFRS 5 a held-for-sale asset must be available for immediate sale. In this
instance this does not appear to be the case, as the asset is still required for production
purposes until after the year end. It should only be classified as held for sale at the end of
January 20X8 when it has been serviced and uninstalled. Relevant audit evidence would include
orders to be fulfilled compared to goods made by this machine compared to available
inventory, budgets and inquiries of production staff.
Land
The key issue is the valuation of the land. As the entity has adopted the revaluation model the
land should have been revalued to fair value (£210,000) immediately before being reclassified
as held for sale. Any gain would be recognised in the revaluation surplus and disclosed as other
comprehensive income in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. On
reclassification the £6,000 costs to sell would be recognised in profit or loss as an impairment
loss resulting in a carrying value of the asset of £204,000 (£210,000 – £6,000).
(b) Production machinery
Audit procedures would be as follows:
• Discuss with management intentions to run down production and the timescales involved.
• Review minutes of management/board meetings to confirm management’s intentions.
• If material, agree with the management the reclassification of the asset as part of plant and
machinery.
• Consider whether an impairment adjustment is required as the asset will no longer be used
for its current purpose.
Land
Audit procedures would be as follows:
• Review the process of estimating the fair value of the land on 1 October and the necessary
advertising costs.
• Discuss with management why the land was not revalued on classification as held for sale.
HB2021

1 AZ
AZ statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 March 20X3
$’000
Revenue 124,900
Cost of sales (W1) (94,200)
Gross profit 30,700
Distribution costs (W1) (9,060)
Administrative expenses (W1) (17,535)
Other expenses (W1) (121)
Finance income 1,200
Finance costs (18,250 × 7%) (1,278)
Profit before tax 3,906
Income tax expense (976)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 2,930
Gain on land revaluation 4,000
Total comprehensive income for the year 6,930
AZ statement of financial position as at 31 March 20X3
$’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (W2) 48,262
Investment properties 24,000
72,262
Current assets
Inventories (5,180 – (W3) 15) 5,165
Trade receivables 9,330
Cash and cash equivalents 1,190
15,685
87,947
Equity
Share capital (20,000 + (W4) 2,000) 22,000
Share premium (430 + (W4) 400) 830
Retained earnings (28,077 – 1,000 + 2,930) 30,007
Revaluation surplus (3,125 + 4,000) 7,125
59,962
HB2021

$’000
7% loan notes 20X7 18,250
Current liabilities
Income tax payable 976
Interest payable (1,278 – 639) 639
9,735
87,947
AZ statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 March 20X3
Share Share Retained Revaluation

capital premium earnings surplus Total
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Balance at 1 April 20X2 20,000 430 28,077 3,125 51,632
Issue of share capital 2,000 400 2,400
Dividends (1,000) (1,000)
Total comprehensive income for
the year ––––– ––– 2,930 4,000 6,930
Balance at 31 March 20X3 22,000 830 30,007 7,125 59,962
WORKINGS
(1) Expenses
Cost of
sales Distribution Admin Other
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Per TB 94,000 9,060 16,020 121
Opening inventories 4,852
Depreciation on buildings (W2) 1,515
Depreciation on P&E (W2) 513
Closing inventories (5,180 – (W3) 15) (5,165) –––– –––
94,200 9,060 17,535 121
(2) Property, plant and equipment
Land Buildings P&E Total

$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Cost b/d 20,000 30,300 3,720 54,020
Acc’d depreciation b/d ––––– (6,060) (1,670) (7,730)
20,000 24,240 2,050 46,290
HB2021

Land Buildings P&E Total
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Depreciation charge for year:
$30,300 × 5% – (1,515) (1,515)
($3,720 – $1,670) × 25% (513) (513)
20,000 22,725 1,537 44,262
Revaluation (balancing figure) 4,000 ––––– ––––– 4,000
Carrying amount c/d 24,000 22,725 1,537 48,262
(3) Inventories
$’000
Defective batch:
Selling price 55
Cost to complete: repackaging required (20)
NRV 35
Cost (50)
Write-off required (15)
(4) Share issue

The proceeds have been recorded separately in the trial balance. This requires a transfer to the
appropriate accounts:
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Proceeds of share issue 2,400
CREDIT Share capital (2,000 × $1) 2,000
CREDIT Share premium (2,000 × $0.20) 400
2 Viscum
£11,000
IFRS 5.15 requires assets classified as held for sale to be measured at the time of classification at the
lower of (1) the carrying value (£30,000) and (2) the fair value less costs to sell (£19,000).
IFRS 5.20 requires recognition of the resulting impairment loss (£30,000 – £19,000). The gain or loss
on disposal is treated separately per IFRS 5.24.
3 Reavley
£19,500
IFRS 5.15 requires that a non-current asset held for sale should be stated at the lower of (1) the
carrying amount (£19,500) and (2) the fair value less costs to sell (£24,550).
4 Smicek
£40,000
At the end of the current year, a non-current asset that has ceased to be classified as held for sale
should be valued at the lower of:
HB2021

(1) The carrying amount had it not been recognised as held for sale, ie, to charge a full year’s
depreciation of £100,000 for 20X7 and reduce the carrying amount from £900,000 at 31
December 20X6 to £800,000.
(2) The recoverable amount, which is the higher of the £790,000 fair value less costs to sell
(£810,000 less £20,000) and value in use (the cash flows generated from using the asset) of
£1,200,000.
Therefore the asset should be carried at £800,000 in the statement of financial position at 31
December 20X7.
At the end of the prior year, when the asset was classified as held for sale, the asset would have been
carried at the lower of carrying amount (£900,000) and fair value less costs to sell of £840,000
(£860,000 less £20,000). Therefore the asset has fallen in value from £840,000 to £800,000 in the
current year, giving a charge to profits of £40,000.
5 Ndombe
31 December 20X6: the assets should be shown in the statement of financial position at a value of
£1,140,000.
31 December 20X7: the assets should be shown in the statement of financial position at a value of
£1,040,000.
At the end of 20X6 the assets are classified as held for sale. The assets should be measured at the
lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell (IFRS 5.15). The carrying amount was
£1,140,000 and the fair value less costs to sell was £1,180,000 so they were measured at £1,140,000.
No depreciation is charged on these assets in 20X7 (IFRS 5.25).
At the end of 20X7, it is still possible to classify the ‘other’ assets as held for sale as the company is
still committed to the sale (IFRS 5.29). These assets would be measured at fair value less costs to sell
of £880,000, as this is lower than the carrying amount of £900,000.
However, the polishing machine should be valued at the lower of £160,000 carrying amount had
classification as held for sale not occurred (£400,000 × 2/5) and the higher of fair value less costs to
sell (£190,000) and value in use (£170,000) (IFRS 5.27). This gives a value of £160,000.
This gives a total value of £1,040,000 at 31 December 20X7.
6 Sapajou
An expense of £20,000 is shown in the profit or loss part of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X6.
Income of £20,000 is shown in the profit or loss part of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
Under IFRS 5.15 an asset classified as held for sale is measured at the lower of carrying amount
immediately before the reclassification of £900,000 (£1,200,000 – 2.5 × £120,000), and fair value less
costs to sell of £880,000. The £20,000 impairment loss is charged to profits (IFRS 5.20).
In the following year, the increase in fair value less costs to sell is £115,000, but only £20,000 of this
can be recognised in profit (IFRS 5.21) as this is the reversal of the previous impairment loss.
7 Sulafat
Disclosure is required of transactions with both Vurta and Piton. See IAS 24.3, which states that
entities under both direct and common control are related parties.
8 Phlegra
Nil under IAS 24.11 (a) two entities are not related parties simply because they have a director in
common, nor per IAS 24.11 (b) simply because the volume of transactions between them results in
economic dependence.
So neither Nereidum nor Chub is a related party of Phlegra.
HB2021

9 Mareotis
£300,000
Under IAS 24.9, Hayles is a related party of Mareotis. Bourne ‘controls’ Wrasse (by virtue of the power
to appoint the majority of directors) and Wrasse ‘controls’ Hayles (by virtue of holding the majority of
the equity). So Bourne ‘controls’ both Mareotis and Hayles, which are therefore related parties as a
result of being under common control.
Being an aunt does not make Danielle a close member of Agnes’s family so, although Galaxius is
controlled by a relative of Agnes, the relationship is not close enough to make Galaxius a related
party of Mareotis. So only transactions with Hayles have to be disclosed.
10 Marmoset
Nil
Interim reports should apply the normal recognition and measurement criteria, using appropriate
estimates under IAS 34.41.
There is no legal or constructive obligation at the interim reporting date to pay the bonus, as no
announcement had been made at this date. Under IAS 34 App B B6 no expense is required.
11 Aconcagua
Inventory values change
Six months ending 30 June 20X7 £20,000 profit decrease
Six months ending 31 December 20X7 £16,000 profit increase
Interim reports should apply the normal recognition and measurement criteria, using appropriate
estimates under IAS 34.41. IAS 34 App B B25–B26 links these general principles to inventories by
requiring them to be written down to net realisable value at the interim date; the write down is then
reversed at the year end, if appropriate.
So the profit decrease in the six months to 30 June 20X7 is 2,000 × (£30 – £20) = £20,000, while the
profit increase in the six months to 31 December 20X7 is 2,000 × (£28 – £20) = £16,000.
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 10
Reporting revenue
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Context
2 IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers
3 Applications of IFRS 15
4 Audit focus
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
10
Learning outcomes
reported financial performance
financial statements; revenue; operating segments; continuing and discontinued operations; EPS;
interim reporting
• Calculate and disclose, from financial and other qualitative data, the amounts to be included in an
entity’s financial statements according to legal requirements, applicable financial reporting
standards and accounting and reporting policies
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 2(a), 2(b), 2(d), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
10

of this chapter.

1 Context Approach This section deals N/A

Revenue is often the You have met this with background
single largest item topic before, but knowledge only.
in the financial now it is examinable
statements, and has at Level A. Read
in the past been through this
open to introductory section
manipulation. This quickly.
led to the Stop and think
development of a
recent standard Can you think of any
IFRS 15, Revenue recent scandals
from Contracts with involving
Customers. recognition of
revenue?
IFRS 15 recognises
separate
performance
obligations will arise
for distinct goods or
services. This could
result in some
revenue being
attributed to goods
or services that were
previously
considered
HB2021

incidental to the
contract – for
instance, to mobile
phones that are
provided free of
charge with airtime
contracts and to
some post-delivery
services, such as
maintenance and
installation.
2 IFRS 15, Revenue Approach IFRS 15 is a recent, IQ1—4

from Contracts with Pay particular topical standard, Work through all the
Customers attention to the five- and could be tested examples and
The five-stage stage model for in a number of ways. questions on
model will be used recognising revenue It was examined for applying this model,
in practice for in section 2: the first time in July especially:
recognising revenue 2019, when it
(1) Identify the formed a large part IQ5: Caravan
and is useful for contract(s) with a
exam questions. of the content of This deals with all
customer. Question 3 (audit five stages of IFRS
(2) Identify separate and financial 15.
performance reporting).
obligations. The five-stage
(3) Determine the model will help
transaction price. structure your
answer in an exam,
(4) Allocate
but you will get no
transaction price to
marks for just listing
performance
them without
obligations.
applying them to a
(5) Recognise scenario.
revenue as or when
each performance
obligation is
satisfied.
Stop and think
A performance
obligation can be
satisfied at a point in
time, such as in
retail sales, or over
time, such as a
construction
contract taking
place over weeks,
months or even
years. You will not
have studied
construction
contracts before, so
pay particular
attention to section
2.10.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 10: Reporting revenue 537

3 Applications of IFRS Approach Any of these topics Work through all the
15 You will have dealt could come up in an examples and
Section 3 deals with with these topics at exam. Revenue is questions on
specific applications Professional Level, regularly examined applying this model,
of IFRS 15. The most so read through for and could take up especially:
important of these revision and focus most of the IQ6: Sale or return
are sale or return, on doing the question.
This is not as
sale and repurchase interactive straightforward as
and goods and questions. you might think.
services in the same Stop and think
contract.
In a principal/agent
relationship, what is
the agent’s
revenue?
4 Audit focus Approach To avoid repetition IQ11: Construction

This gives auditing Study this section of the five stages, it contracts
guidance relating to carefully and is best to deal with A must-do question
each stage of IFRS attempt the each stage first from on auditing revenue
15 and for specific integrated the FR point of view, from contracts in
transactions. interactive question. then in terms of which performance
auditing. Questions obligations are
Stop and think are very likely to test satisfied over time.
Where performance both.
obligations are
satisfied over time,
how would you
determine whether
contract costs had
been overstated?
HB2021

1 Context
Section overview
• Income, as defined by the IASB’s Conceptual Framework, includes both revenues and gains.
Revenue is income arising in the ordinary course of an entity’s activities and it may be called
different names, such as sales, fees, interest, dividends or royalties.
• IFRS 15, Revenuefrom Contracts with Customers establishes a single comprehensive framework
for accounting for the majority of contracts that result in revenue.
• Revenue recognition is straightforward in most business transactions, but can be complicated in
some situations.
1.1 Accrual accounting

Financial statements are prepared on the underlying assumption of the accrual basis of accounting,
whereby effects of transactions are recognised when they occur and not when the cash associated
with them is received or paid.
But this raises questions about when a transaction ‘occurs’:
• Is it when the buyer takes possession of the goods, in circumstances where the contract for sale
contains clauses that seek to ensure that ownership does not pass to the customer until the seller
has been paid in full?
• Is it when services are provided, in circumstances where the seller undertakes to come back to do
additional work without charge if needed, eg, remedial work carried out by a building contractor?
• When does the profit arise on a contract for the provision of services to a customer over time,
such as under a maintenance contract of two years’ duration? Only at the start, only in the middle,
only at the end, or over the period of two years?
IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers was brought in to address this.
It is by no means always easy in practice to assimilate information about revenue, as the points above
show. An exam question is likely to contain a detailed scenario with revenue apparently occurring at
different times.
1.2 Significance of revenue

Revenue is often the largest single item in the financial statements. US studies have shown that over
half of all financial statement frauds and requirements for restatements of previously published
financial information involved revenue manipulation.
The most blatant example was the Satyam Computer Services fraud in 2009, in which false invoices
were used to record fictitious revenue amounting to £1.5 billion. Revenue recognition fraud also
featured in the Enron and WorldCom cases.
The directors of Enron inflated the value of ‘agency’ services by reporting the entire value of each of
its trades as revenue, rather than just the agency commission on the sale. Other energy companies
then adopted this ‘model’ in a bid to keep up with Enron’s results.
In the UK, an example showing the weaknesses of IFRS 15’s predecessor IAS 18, Revenue is
supermarket giant, Tesco.
Context example: Tesco

In 2014, supermarket giant Tesco made headline news amid claims that it had overstated its first-half
profits by some £250 million. It is possible that the issue of incorrect timing of revenue recognition
could have played a part. IAS 18’s vagueness and inconsistency will not have helped in this respect,
and has allowed scope for aggressive earnings management, although this has not yet been
HB2021

demonstrated in the case of Tesco. In particular, the timing of revenue has been a cause for criticism
because of the lack of clear and comprehensive guidance.
On the website Wiley Global Insight, Steve Collings wrote:
“It appears that Tesco may have accelerated the recognition of revenue relating to suppliers’ rebates
(hence recognising revenue too early) and at the same time delayed the recognition of costs. The
result of this accounting treatment is that accounting profits are brought into the first half of the year,
with costs pushed into the second half of the year so that the profits look disproportionately healthy
in the first-half of the year.
[…]
Whether this new standard [IFRS 15] will lessen the potential for companies to adopt aggressive
earnings management in their revenue recognition policies remains to be seen. The steps in IFRS 15
do offer more clarity than IAS 18.”
IFRS 15 only came into force in January 2018. However, early adoption was permitted. In a paper
given at the Annual Paris Business Research Conference in July 2016 titled IFRS 15 Early Adoption
and Accounting Quality: The Evidence from Real Estate Companies, Nadia Sbei Trabelsi concluded:
“Results indicate that early adoption of IFRS 15 by REC has a significant positive effect on earnings
and stockholders’ equity for all firms analyzed in the paper. The new standard has a double favorable
effect: revenue could be recognized over time and not at a point of time in almost all contracts with
customers and contract costs are more likely capitalized rather than expensed. The application of
IFRS 15 leads to providing accounting information which is in harmony with qualitative characteristics
of the Conceptual Framework.”
1.2.1 Significance for your exam

IFRS 15 is a recent, topical standard, and could be tested in a number of ways. It was examined for
the first time in July 2019, when it formed a large part of the content of Question 3 (audit and
financial reporting). The question focused mainly on performance obligations satisfied (or not
satisfied) over time, and was set in the context of financial reporting (comment on recognition policy),
risk of misstatement and a potential ethical issue (breach of contract). Reference was also made to
data analytics, which could be a focus of future questions on revenue.
2 IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with

Customers
Section overview
• Revenue is income arising in the course of an entity’s ordinary activities.

• Revenue should be recognised to depict the transfer of goods or services to a customer in an
amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled.
• Generally revenue is recognised when the entity has transferred to the buyer control of the asset.
• IFRS 15 sets out a five-stage process for this.
2.1 Objective and scope

The objective of IFRS 15 is to establish the principles that should be applied to report on the nature,
amount, timing and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows arising from a contract with a customer.
(IFRS 15.1)
HB2021

IFRS 15 applies to all contracts with customers except:
• leases within the scope of IFRS 16, Leases
• insurance contracts within the scope of IFRS 4, Insurance Contracts
• non-monetary exchanges between entities in the same line of business
2.2 Revenue
Income is defined in the IASB’s Conceptual Framework (para. 4.2) as “Increases in assets, or
decreases in liabilities, that result in increases in equity, other than those relating to contributions
from holders of equity claims.” Revenue is simply income arising in the course of an entity’s
ordinary activities (IFRS 15: Appendix A) and it may be called different names such as:
• Sales
• Turnover
• Interest
• Dividends
• Royalties
2.3 Core principle

The core principle of IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers is that an entity recognises
revenue to depict the transfer of promised goods or services to customers in an amount that reflects
the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services
(IFRS 15. IN7).
The transfer of goods and services is evidenced by the transfer of control.
Revenue is recognised in accordance with this core principle by applying a five-step model.
2.4 Five-step model

IFRS 15 takes a five-step approach to recognising revenue:
Step 1 Identify the contract(s) with a customer.
Step 2 Identify separate performance obligations.
Step 3 Determine the transaction price.
Step 4 Allocate transaction price to performance obligations.
Step 5 Recognise revenue as or when each performance obligation is satisfied.
Revenue is therefore recognised when control over goods or services is transferred to the customer.
IFRS 15 is a good example of an IFRS structuring a problem. The five-stage process provides the
structure.
2.5 Identify the contract with the customer

The contract can be written, verbal or implied. For instance, in retail sales the contract is implied.
The criteria to be met are as follows:
(a) All parties have approved the contract.
(b) The entity can identify each party’s rights regarding the goods or services to be transferred.
(c) The payment terms can be identified.
(d) The contract has commercial substance.
(e) It is probable that the entity will collect the consideration to which it will be entitled in exchange
for the goods or services.
(IFRS 15.9)
HB2021

2.6 Identify the performance obligations in the contract
A performance obligation is a promise to transfer to the customer either:
(a) a distinct good or service (or bundle of goods or services); or
(b) a series of distinct goods or services.
(IFRS 15.22)
A good or service is distinct if it can be sold separately and has a distinct function. If this does not
apply, it will form part of a distinct bundle.
The definition of distinct is therefore key when identifying separate performance obligations. A good
or service (or a bundle of goods or services) is distinct if the customer can benefit from the good or
service on its own or together with other readily available resources and the entity’s promise is
separately identifiable from other promises in the contract).
If goods or services are not distinct, the reporting company must combine them with other promised
goods or services until a bundle of goods or services that is distinct can be identified.
Worked example: Performance obligations (1)

Colossal Construction plc has recently signed a contract to build a warehouse for SupaSave Ltd.
Colossal Construction is responsible for designing the building, preparing the site, purchasing raw
materials, construction, plumbing, wiring and finishing.
Requirement
Identify the performance obligation(s) in the contract.
Solution
In the context of this contract, Colossal Construction is contracted to provide a significant service of
integrating the inputs in order to produce a single output; this being the warehouse. Therefore the
provision of each good or service is not separately identifiable.
The promises are not distinct and therefore there is only a single performance obligation, being the
development of the property.
Worked example: Performance obligations (2)

MetaConnect Software Services plc (MetaConnect) supplies computer aided design packages to
customers. It has recently signed a contract with EverTel Design Ltd to provide a licence to use a
software package, installation service (which does not involve customising the software package) and
technical support for four years. MetaConnect is not the only company that could install the software
and provide technical support.
Requirement
Identify the performance obligation(s) in the contract.
Solution
Each good or service provided (the provision of the licence, the installation service and the technical
support) is capable of being distinct because a customer could gain benefit from each either on its
own or by obtaining the other goods/services from another supplier. The good or service could
therefore benefit the customer either on its own or together with other resources that are readily
available.
In the context of this contract, MetaConnect is not integrating the goods or services, none of the
goods or services modifies another and the goods/services are not highly interrelated. Therefore
each promise is separately identifiable. Therefore the promise to transfer the good or service to the
customer is separately identifiable from other promises in the contract
In conclusion, there are three distinct performance obligations in the contract, being:
(1) Installation of the software
(2) Provision of the licence
HB2021

(3) Provision of technical support
2.7 Determine the transaction price

This is the amount of consideration in a contract to which an entity expects to be entitled for
transferring promised goods or services to a customer (IFRS 15.47).
This may include both fixed and variable elements but not amounts collected on behalf of third
parties. Variable amounts could be discounts, refunds, price concessions, incentives, bonuses or
other items.
Variable consideration is included in the transaction price based on either:
• its expected value (the sum of probability weighted amounts in a range of possible outcomes); or
• the single most likely amount (the single most likely amount in a range of possible consideration
amounts).
The expected value approach is generally appropriate if the vendor has a large number of contracts
with similar characteristics.
The single most likely outcome may be appropriate if a contract has only two possible outcomes (eg,
an entity achieves a performance bonus or does not).
The chosen approach should be that which is expected to provide a better prediction of
consideration.
Variable consideration is included in the transaction price only to the extent that it is highly probable
that a significant amount will not be reversed when the uncertainty associated with the variable
consideration is resolved. When assessing whether it is highly probable that a significant reversal will
occur, an entity should consider both the likelihood and magnitude of the revenue reversal. Factors
that may increase the likelihood or magnitude of reversal include any of the following:
(a) The amount of consideration is very susceptible to factors outside the entity’s influence eg,
weather conditions or market volatility.
(b) The uncertainty about consideration is not expected to be resolved for a long period of time.
(c) The entity’s experience with similar types of contracts is limited or has limited predictive value.
(d) The entity has a practice of offering a wide range of price concessions or changing the payment
terms and conditions of similar contracts in similar circumstances.
(e) The contract has a large number and broad range of possible consideration amounts.
Worked example: Variable consideration

On 1 July 20X8, Danmar Construction plc (Danmar) signs a contract to build an extension to a retail
outlet. The total price agreed is £80 million. The contract terms require completion by 31 March
20X9. The price will decrease by £200,000 for every day after this date that the project remains
incomplete. At the year end of 31 December 20X8, Danmar expects that there is an 80% chance of
the project being completed on time, a 10% chance of it being completed a day late, a 7% chance of
it being completed two days late and a 3% chance of it being completed three days late.
Requirement
What is the transaction price?
Solution
The consideration is variable due to the fact that Danmar will accept an amount that is less than the
price stated in the contract if the project overruns (the price concession).
Here the calculation of transaction price is based on expected values.
£
80% × £80,000,000 64,000,000
10% × £79,800,000 7,980,000
7% × £79,600,000 5,572,000
HB2021

£
3% × £79,400,000 2,382,000
Transaction price 79,934,000
2.8 Allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract
The transaction price is allocated to each performance obligation on the basis of the stand-alone
selling price of each distinct good or service in the contract. If the good or service does not have a
stand-alone selling price, it will need to be estimated (IFRS 15.IN7).
This applies particularly where a bundle of goods is sold which the entity also supplies unbundled.
An example of this is a mobile phone service contract which includes a free handset. In accordance
with IFRS 15, the entity will have to allocate some of the revenue to the handset, based on its stand-
alone selling price.
Worked example: Allocation of transaction price

The contract between MetaConnect and EverTel Design (see Worked example: Performance
obligations 2) is priced at £6,000. The stand-alone selling prices of each element are as follows:
£
Provision of a licence 5,000
Installation service 1,500
Provision of technical support 3,000
9,500
Requirement
Allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract.
Solution
Licence provision £5,000/£9,500 × £6,000 = £3,158
Installation service £1,500/£9,500 × £6,000 = £947
Technical support service £3,000/£9,500 × £6,000 = £1,895
Context example: Unbundling

A mobile phone company gives customers a free handset when they sign a two-year contract for
provision of network services. The handset has a stand-alone price of £52 and the contract is for £20
per month.
Under IFRS 15, revenue must be allocated to the handset because delivery of the handset constitutes
a performance obligation. This will be calculated as follows:
£ %
Handset 52 10
Network services 480 90
Total value 532 100
As the transaction price is the total receipts of £480, this is the amount which must be allocated to
the separate performance obligations.
HB2021

Revenue will be recognised as follows:
£
Year 1
Handset (480 × 10%) 48
Contract (480 – 48)/2 216
264
Year 2
Contract as above 216
2.9 Recognise revenue when (or as) a performance obligation is satisfied

A performance obligation is satisfied when control of the good or service specified in the contract is
transferred to the customer (IFRS 15.31).
A performance obligation can be satisfied at a point in time, such as in retail sales, or over time, such
as a construction contract taking place over weeks, months or even years.
Where a performance obligation is satisfied at a point in time, that point will occur when control is
transferred. At that point the customer is able to direct the use of the asset and obtain substantially
all the remaining benefits from it (IFRS 15.33).
The following events can indicate that control has been transferred (IFRS 15.38):
• The entity has a present right to payment for the asset
• The customer has legal title to the asset
• The entity has transferred physical possession of the asset
• The significant risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred to the customer
• The customer has accepted the asset
A performance obligation satisfied over time will meet one of the following criteria:
• The customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits as the performance obligation
is satisfied.
• The entity’s performance creates or enhances an asset that the customer controls as the asset is
created or enhanced.
• The entity’s performance does not create an asset with an alternative use to the entity and the
entity has an enforceable right to payment for performance completed to date.
(IFRS 15.35)
Where performance obligations are satisfied over time, the entity recognises revenue by measuring
progress towards complete satisfaction of the performance obligation. Progress can be measured
using output methods (measuring the value to the customer of goods or services transferred to date)
or input methods (measuring the cost to the entity of goods or services transferred to date) (IFRS
15.B14).
In the early stages of a contract it may not be possible to reasonably measure the outcome of a
performance obligation, but the entity is entitled to recover costs incurred. In this case, revenue can
be measured to the extent of costs incurred.
A contract where performance obligations are recognised over time may give rise to asset or liability
amounts at the end of the reporting period.
Contracts with customers will be presented in an entity’s statement of financial position as a contract
liability, a contract asset or a receivable, depending on the relationship between the entity’s
performance and the customer’s payment.
(IFRS 15.105)
HB2021

A contract liability is recognised and presented in the statement of financial position where a
customer has paid an amount of consideration prior to the entity performing by transferring control
of the related good or service to the customer.
(IFRS 15.106)
When the entity has performed but the customer has not yet paid the related consideration, this will
give rise to either a contract asset or a receivable. A contract asset is recognised when the entity’s
right to consideration is conditional on something other than the passage of time, for instance future
performance. A receivable is recognised when the entity’s right to consideration is unconditional
except for the passage of time.
(IFRS 15.107)
Where revenue has been invoiced a receivable is recognised. Where revenue has been earned but
not invoiced, it is recognised as a contract asset.
Worked example: Performance obligation satisfied over time

Associated Solutions Ltd is building a bespoke software system for an insurance company. The
contract started on 1 January 20X7 with an estimated completion date of 31 December 20X9. The
contract price is £2 million. As at 31 December 20X7:
(1) costs incurred amounted to £800,000;
(2) half the work on the contract was completed;
(3) certificates of work completed have been issued by the insurance company, to the value of £1
million; and
(4) it is estimated with reasonable certainty that further costs to completion will be £800,000.
Requirement
What is the contract profit in 20X7, and what entries would be made for the contract at 31 December
20X7?
Solution
This is a contract in which the performance obligation is satisfied over time. The entity is carrying out
the work for the benefit of the customer rather than creating an asset for its own use and in this case
it has an enforceable right to payment for work completed to date. We can see this from the fact that
certificates of work completed have been issued.
IFRS 15 states that the amount of payment that the entity is entitled to corresponds to the amount of
performance completed to date (ie, goods and/or services transferred).
In this case, the contract is certified as 50% complete, measuring progress under the output method.
At 31 December 20X7, the entity will recognise revenue of £1,000,000 and cost of sales of £800,000,
leaving profit of £200,000. The contract asset will be the costs to date plus the profit – that is
£1,000,000. We are not told that any of this amount has yet been invoiced, so none of this amount is
classified as receivables.
Interactive question 1: Publishing revenue

A magazine publisher launched a new monthly magazine on 1 January 20X7. During January it
received £48,000 in annual subscriptions in advance. It has despatched four issues by the year end
31 March 20X7.
Requirement
What revenue should be recognised for the year ended 31 March 20X7?
HB2021

Interactive question 2: Advance sales
A DIY store is about to sell a new type of drill. Customer demand is high and the store has taken
advance orders for the drill. The selling price of the drill will be £50 and so far 200 customers have
paid an initial 10% deposit on the selling price of the drill. No drills are yet held in inventory.
Requirement
What amount should be recognised as revenue?
Interactive question 3: Rendering of services

A £210,000 fixed-price contract is entered into for the provision of services. At the end of 20X7, the
first accounting period, the contract is thought to be 33% complete and costs of £45,000 have been
incurred in performing that 33% of the work.
Requirements
Calculate the revenue to be recognised in 20X7 on the alternative assumptions that:
(a) The costs to complete are reliably estimated at £90,000; and
(b) The costs to complete cannot be reliably estimated, and it is thought that £40,000 of the costs
incurred are recoverable from the customer.
Interactive question 4: Service contract

An entity entered into a contract for the provision of services over a two year period. The total
contract price was £150,000 and the entity initially expected to earn a profit of £20,000 on the
contract. In the first year, costs of £60,000 were incurred and 50% of the work was completed. The
contract did not progress as expected and management was not sure of the ultimate outcome but
believed that the costs incurred to date would be recovered from the customer.
Requirement
What revenue should be recognised for the first year of the contract?
2.10 Performance obligations satisfied over time: ‘construction contracts’

Before IFRS 15 came into force ‘construction contracts’, sometimes called ‘long-term contracts’ had
their own IAS, and you may still come across these terms. However, IFRS 15 does not specifically use
these terms, but refers to them as contracts in which performance obligations are satisfied over time.
Such contracts often include contracts for large construction projects falling into more than one
accounting period. As mentioned in section 2.9 above, the entity recognises revenue by measuring
progress towards complete satisfaction of the performance obligation. Progress can be measured
using output methods (measuring the value to the customer of goods or services transferred to date)
or input methods (measuring the cost to the entity of goods or services transferred to date) (IFRS
15.B14).
Worked example: Contract to construct a conference centre

During the year ended 31 July 20X9, Frizco Construction plc (Frizco) began the construction of a
leisure centre on behalf of a local authority. The agreed contract price was £70 million. However this
will be reduced by £6 million if Frizco completes the centre a month or more behind schedule.
During the year ended 31 July 20X9, costs incurred amounted to £18.6 million, including £1,000,000
material that could not be used in the project as it was of the incorrect grade to meet regulations.
HB2021

The total cost of the project (excluding the £1,000,000 in wasted material) is estimated to be £44
million. Work certified at the year-end was £24.5 million.
The construction is currently progressing in accordance with the agreed schedule.
Requirements
1 What amount of revenue is recognised in profit or loss in the year ended 31 July 20X9 if an
output method is used to assess progress?
2 What amount of revenue is recognised in profit or loss in the year ended 31 July 20X9 if an input
method is used to assess progress?
Solution
The transaction price is £70 million. £64 million is fixed consideration and £6 million is variable
consideration. The transaction price is £70 million as the project is currently expected to be
completed on time and therefore the single most likely outcome is the receipt of £70 million.
1 Output method
Using the output method the project is 35% complete:
Work certified ÷ Transaction price = 24,500 ÷ 70,000 = 35%
Therefore 35% × £70m = £24.5 million is recognised as revenue in the year.
2 Input method
Using the input method the project is 40% complete:
Costs incurred to date ÷ Total expected costs = (18,600 – 1,000) ÷ 44,000 = 40%
Therefore 40% × £70m = £28 million is recognised as revenue in the year.
Note that the £1 million wasted material is not relevant to the assessment of progress, however, it
must be recognised in profit or loss as a wastage expense.
Contract costs are considered in further detail in section 2.12.
2.11 Deferred consideration

In some sectors of the retail industry it is common practice to provide interest-free credit to
customers in order to encourage sales of, for example, furniture and new cars.
IFRS 15 refers to this as a ‘financing component’ in the contract. When the contract contains a
significant financing component, such as a period of interest-free credit exceeding one year, the
amount of consideration should be adjusted for the time value of money (IFRS 15.60, .63).
Where an extended period of credit is offered, the revenue receivable has two separate elements:
• The value of the goods on the date of sale
• Financing income
In order to separate these two elements the future receipts are discounted to present value at an
imputed interest rate, identified as either:
• the prevailing rate for lending to a customer with a credit rating similar to that of the customer; or
• the rate of interest which discounts the receivable back to the current cash selling price.
The effect on the timing of the revenue recognition is that:
• the fair value of the goods is recognised on delivery of the goods
• the finance element is recognised over the period that the financing is provided
Worked example: Deferred consideration 1

A car retailer sells its new cars by requiring a 20% deposit followed by no further payments until the
full balance is due after two years. The price of the cars is calculated using a 10% per annum finance
charge.
On 1 January 20X7 a car was sold to a customer for £20,000.
HB2021

Requirement
How should the revenue be recognised in the year ended 31 December 20X7 and what should the
carrying amount of the customer receivable be on that date?
Solution
Revenue to be recognised
£
Sale of goods (£4,000 + £13,223 (W)) 17,223
Financing income (£13,223 (W) × 10%) 1,322
Carrying amount of receivable (£13,223 (W) × 1.10) 14,545
WORKING
The deposit is £4,000 (£20,000 × 20%), so the amount receivable in two years is £16,000.
This is discounted at 10% for two years to £13,223 (£16,000 × 1/1.102).
Context example: Deferred consideration 2

Comfy Couches Ltd sells an item of furniture to a customer on 1 September 20X7 for £2,500 with a
one-year interest-free credit period. The fair value of the consideration receivable is £2,294. (In other
words, if the company tried to sell this debt, this is the amount it would expect to receive now.)
In this case the transaction would be split into two components:
(a) Interest revenue of £206 (2,500 – 2,294), which would be recognised over the period of credit
(b) Sales revenue of £2,294, which would be recognised on 1 September 20X7
2.12 Contract costs

IFRS 15 deals with the costs of obtaining a contract and the costs of fulfilling a contract.
2.12.1 Costs of obtaining a contract

The incremental costs of obtaining a contract (such as sales commission) are recognised as an asset
if the entity expects to recover those costs.
Costs that would have been incurred regardless of whether the contract was obtained are
recognised as an expense as incurred.
Costs incurred in fulfilling a contract, unless within the scope of another standard, (such as IAS 2,
Inventories, IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment or IAS 38, Intangible Assets) are recognised as an
asset if they meet the following criteria (IFRS 15.95):
(a) The costs relate directly to an identifiable contract (costs such as labour, materials, management
costs)
(b) The costs generate or enhance resources of the entity that will be used in satisfying (or
continuing to satisfy) performance obligations in the future
(c) The costs are expected to be recovered
Costs recognised as assets are amortised on a systematic basis consistent with the transfer to the
customer of the goods or services to which the asset relates.
Worked example: Costs of obtaining a contract

Copyquick Ltd enters into contracts for five-year terms to service and repair a customer’s
photocopiers. The contracts may be subsequently renewed on a one-year rolling basis and the
average customer term is seven years. Copyquick pays its sales staff a commission of £35,000 when a
new customer signs an initial contract.
HB2021

On 1 January 20X8, the Copyquick sales staff secured a new customer contract.
Requirement
How is the cost of commission of £35,000 accounted for?
Solution
The £35,000 is an incremental cost of obtaining a new contract, and Copyquick expects to recover
the cost by charging the customer for servicing and repairing their photocopiers.
Copyquick should capitalise the £35,000 and amortise it over a period to reflect the transfer of
services to the customer. Although the original contract is for five years, this is usually extended for a
further two years and so the amortisation period is seven years.
Therefore the annual amortisation charge is £5,000 (£35,000/7 years).
As we have seen, while IFRS 15 provides structure and guidance, it does not remove the need for
judgement. The area of costs is one where judgement must be applied. An example of this is the
question of whether to use an input method or an output method.
2.13 Presentation and disclosure

2.13.1 Presentation
Contracts with customers will be presented in an entity’s statement of financial position as a contract
liability, a contract asset, or a receivable depending on the relationship between the entity’s
performance and the customer’s payment.
A contract liability is recognised and presented in the statement of financial position where a
customer has paid an amount of consideration before the entity has transferred control of the related
good or service to the customer.
When the entity has performed but the customer has not yet paid the related consideration, this will
give rise to either a contract asset or a receivable. A contract asset is recognised when the entity’s
right to consideration is conditional on something other than the passage of time, for instance future
performance. A receivable is recognised when the entity’s right to consideration is unconditional
except for the passage of time.
Where revenue has been invoiced, a receivable is recognised. Where revenue has been earned but
not invoiced, it is recognised as a contract asset.
2.13.2 Disclosure
Disclosure of the following is required:
(a) Revenue from contracts with customers (separately from other sources of revenue) in categories
that depict how the nature, timing, amount and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows are
affected by economic factors (eg, by type of goods or geographical area). Sufficient information
should be disclosed to enable users to understand the relationship between the disclosure of
disaggregated revenue and revenue information that is disclosed for each reportable segment
(where IFRS 8 is applied).
(b) Impairment losses recognised on receivables, or contract assets arising from contracts with
customers (by category, as above).
(c) The opening and closing balances of receivables, contract assets and contract liabilities and
explanation of significant changes in contract assets and liabilities, including both qualitative and
quantitative information.
(d) Revenue recognised in the reporting period that was included in the contract liability balance at
the start of the period and revenue recognised in the period from performance obligations
satisfied in previous periods (eg, due to changes in transaction price).
HB2021

(e) A description of performance obligations including the following:
(1) When they are typically satisfied
(2) Significant payment terms
(3) The nature of goods or services that an entity has promised to transfer, highlighting
obligations to arrange for another party to transfer goods or services
(4) Obligations for returns, refunds or similar
(5) Types of warranties and related obligations
(f) The transaction price allocated to performance obligations that are unsatisfied at the end of the
reporting period, and an explanation of when related revenue is expected to be recognised. This
information need not be disclosed if the performance obligation is part of a contract lasting 12
months or less, or the entity recognises revenue from the satisfaction of the performance
obligation in the amount that it has a right to invoice (because the amount directly corresponds
with the value to the customer of the entity’s performance completed to date).
Worked example: Applying the IFRS 15 five-step model

On 1 January 20X4, Peterloo enters into a 12-month ‘pay monthly’ contract for a mobile phone. The
contract is with Westerfield, and terms of the plan are as follows:
• Peterloo receives a free handset on 1 January 20X4.
• Peterloo pays a monthly fee of £200, which includes unlimited free minutes. Peterloo is billed on
the last day of the month.
Customers may purchase the same handset from Westerfield for £500 without the payment plan.
They may also enter into the payment plan without the handset, in which case the plan costs them
£175 per month.
The company’s year-end is 31 July 20X4.
Requirement
Show how Westerfield should recognise revenue from this plan in accordance with IFRS 15, Revenue
from Contracts with Customers. Your answer should give journal entries:
(1) On 1 January 20X4
Solution
IFRS 15 requires application of its five-step process:
(1) Identify the contract with a customer. A contract can be written, oral or implied by customary
business practices.
(2) Identify the separate performance obligations in the contract. If a promised good or service is
not distinct, it can be combined with others.
(3) Determine the transaction price. This is the amount to which the entity expects to be ‘entitled’.
For variable consideration, the probability-weighted expected amount is used.
(4) Allocate the transaction price to the separate performance obligations in the contract. For
multiple deliverables, the transaction price is allocated to each separate performance obligation
in proportion to the stand-alone selling price at contract inception of each performance
obligation.
(5) Recognise revenue when (or as) the entity satisfies a performance obligation. That is when the
entity transfers a promised good or service to a customer. The good or service is only
considered as transferred when the customer obtains control of it.
Application of the five-step process to Westerfield
(1) Identify the contract with a customer. This is clear. Westerfield has a 12-month contract with
Peterloo.
(2) Identify the separate performance obligations in the contract. In this case there are two distinct
performance obligations:
(a) The obligation to deliver a handset
HB2021

(b) The obligation to provide network services for 12 months
(The obligation to deliver a handset would not be a distinct performance obligation if the
handset could not be sold separately, but it is in this case because the handsets are sold
separately.)
(3) Determine the transaction price. This is straightforward: it is £2,400, that is 12 months × the
monthly fee of £200.
(4) Allocate the transaction price to the separate performance obligations in the contract. The
transaction price is allocated to each separate performance obligation in proportion to the
stand-alone selling price at contract inception of each performance obligation, that is the stand-
alone price of the handset (£500) and the stand-alone price of the network services (£175 × 12 =
£2,100):
Stand-alone selling Revenue (= relative selling

Performance obligation price % of total price = £2,400 × %)
£ £
Handset 500.00 19.2 460.80
Network services 2,100.00 80.8 1,939.20
Total 2,600.00 100 2,400.00
(5) Recognise revenue when (or as) the entity satisfies a performance obligation. That is when the
entity transfers a promised good or service to a customer. This applies to each of the performance
obligations:
• When Westerfield gives a handset to Peterloo, it needs to recognise the revenue of £460.80.
• When Westerfield provides network services to Peterloo, it needs to recognise the total revenue
of £1,939.20. It’s practical to do it once per month as the billing happens.
Journal entries
The entries in the books of Westerfield will be:
DEBIT Receivable (unbilled revenue) £460.80

CREDIT Revenue £460.80
Being recognition of revenue from the sale of the handset

The monthly payment from Peterloo is split between amounts owing for network services and
amounts owing for the handset:
DEBIT Bank/Receivable (Peterloo) £200

CREDIT Revenue (1,939.20/12) £161.60
CREDIT Receivable (unbilled revenue) (460.80/12) £38.40
Being recognition of revenue from monthly provision of network services and ‘repayment’ of
handset.
Interactive question 5: Caravan

Caravans Deluxe is a retailer of caravans, dormer vans and mobile homes, with a year end of 30 June.
It is having trouble selling one model – the £30,000 Mini-Lux, and so is offering incentives for
customers who buy this model before 31 May 20X7.
(1) Customers buying this model before 31 May 20X7 will receive a period of interest free credit,
provided they pay a non-refundable deposit of £3,000, an instalment of £15,000 on 1 August
20X7 and the balance of £12,000 on 1 August 20X9.
HB2021

(2) Equipment for the caravan, normally worth £1,500, is included free in the price of the caravan.
On 1 May 20X7, a customer agrees to buy a Mini-Lux caravan, paying the deposit of £3,000. Delivery
is arranged for 1 August 20X7.
As the sale has now been made, the sales director of Caravans Deluxe wishes to recognise the full
sale price of the caravan, £30,000, in the accounts for the year ended 30 June 20X7.
Requirement
Show how the IFRS 15 five-step plan is applied to this sale. Assume a 10% discount rate. Show the
journal entries for this treatment.
3 Applications of IFRS 15
Section overview
• IFRS 15 includes Application Guidance, which explains how the provisions of the standard should
be applied to a number of situations.
• These include:
– Sales with a right of return
– Extended warranties
– Transactions involving an agent
– Licensing
– Royalties
– Repurchase agreements
– Consignment arrangements
– Bill and hold arrangements
– Non-refundable upfront fees
3.1 Sales with a right of return

Some contracts give the customer the right to return the product and receive a refund, a credit or a
replacement.
The entity should recognise (IFRS 15.B21):
• revenue for the transferred products
• a refund liability
• an asset in respect of products to be returned
The asset is:
• measured at the former carrying amount of the products less any expected decreases in value
and other costs to recover the products;
• presented separately from the refund liability; and
• remeasured to reflect changes in expectations about the products to be returned at each
reporting date.
Interactive question 6: Sale or return

Bags Galore Ltd operates a number of high-end handbag outlets. On 28 January 20X9, it sells 50
identical bags to different customers for £850 each. The bags cost £400 each. The customers have 28
days in which they can return purchases in exchange for a full refund and, based on past experience,
Bags Galore Ltd expects a returns level of 6%. Bags Galore Ltd’s ‘Fabulous February’ sale starts on 1
February and the selling price of the bags will be reduced to 50% of the original price from that date.
HB2021

Requirements
6.1 How should Bags Galore account for the sale of the bags?
6.2 How would the accounting treatment change if the selling price of the bags was to be reduced
to 40% of the original price in the Fabulous February sale?
3.2 Warranties
It is necessary to distinguish between warranties which give the customer assurance that the product
complies with agreed upon specifications, and warranties which provide the customer with a distinct
service (such as free repairs over a specified period).
A warranty which the customer purchases separately will always be a service warranty.
A service warranty is accounted for as a separate performance obligation and a portion of the
transaction price is allocated to it.
A warranty which does not promise a service is simply accounted for in accordance with IAS 37,
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets (IFRS 15.B28–30).
When considering whether a warranty is standard or extended, IFRS 15 requires that the following
factors are considered:
(a) Whether the provision of the warranty is a legal requirement; this would indicate that it is a
standard warranty
(b) The length of the warranty period – the longer the period, the more likely it is to be an additional
or extended warranty
(c) The nature of the tasks promised within the warranty and whether they relate to providing
assurance that a product will function as intended
3.3 Principal versus agent

IFRS 15 specifically excludes amounts collected on behalf of third parties from the transaction price
attached to a contract (IFRS 15.47).
Individually or in combination, the following criteria indicate that the entity is acting as an agent (IFRS
15.B37):
• Another party has the primary responsibility for providing the goods or services to the customer,
or for fulfilling the order.
• The entity does not have the inventory risk before or after the customer order, during shipping or
on return.
• The entity does not have discretion in establishing prices for the goods or services.
• The entity’s consideration is in the form of commission.
• The entity is not exposed to credit risk on the amount due from the customer.
An entity is a principal if it controls the promised good or service before it is transferred to the
customer. In this case, when the performance obligation is satisfied the entity recognises the
revenue.
An entity is an agent if its performance obligation is to arrange for the provision of goods or services
by another party. When this performance obligation is satisfied, it recognises revenue only for the fee
or commission to which it is entitled (IFRS 15.B36).
Worked example: Agent or principal?

An entity runs a website which enables customers to buy goods from a range of suppliers. Prices are
set by suppliers, and payments are processed through the entity’s website. Customers pay in
advance and goods are delivered directly from the supplier to the customer.
The entity receives a commission of 10% of the sales price and has no further obligation to the
customer after arranging for the products to be shipped.
HB2021

Requirement
Is the entity an agent or the principal?
Solution
The entity is acting as an agent based on the following points:
• Goods travel directly from the supplier to the customer, so the entity never has physical custody
of them and does not bear the associated risk.
• The supplier, not the entity, has the obligation to the customer.
• The entity does not set prices or bear credit risk.
• The payment received by the entity is in the form of commission.
So the entity should only recognise the commission received from suppliers as revenue.
3.4 Goods and services provided in one contract

One marketing approach frequently used is to bundle together both goods and services into one
transaction. For example, a car dealer may sell new cars with one year’s free servicing and insurance.
In such cases:
• the components of the package which could be sold separately should be identified; and
• each should be measured and recognised as if sold separately.
IFRS 15 does not specifically state how each component should be measured but general principles
require that each component should be:
• measured at its fair value; and
• recognised as revenue only when it meets the recognition criteria.
If the total of the fair values exceeds the overall price of the contract, an appropriate approach would
be to apply the same discount percentage to each separate component.
Worked example: Goods and services

A car dealer sells a new car, together with 50 litres of fuel per month for a year and one year’s
servicing, for £27,000. The fair values of these components are: car £28,000, fuel £1,200 and
servicing £800.
Requirement
How should the £27,000 be recognised as revenue?
Solution
The total fair value of the package is £30,000 (28,000 + 1,200 + 800) but is being sold for £27,000, a
discount of £3,000 or 10%.
The discounted fair value of the car should be recognised as revenue upon delivery:
£28,000 × 90% = £25,200
The discounted fair value of the fuel should be recognised as revenue on a straight line basis over
the next 12 months:
£1,200 × 90% = £1,080
The discounted fair value of the servicing should be recognised as revenue at the earlier of when the
servicing is provided and the end of the year:
£800 × 90% = £720
Interactive question 7: Goods and services

An entity sells an item of equipment to a customer on 1 January 20X7 for £1.5 million. Due to the
specialised nature of the equipment, the entity has agreed to provide free support services for the
HB2021

next two years, despite the cost to the entity of that support being estimated at £120,000 in total. The
entity usually earns a gross margin of 20% on such support service contracts.
Requirement
How much revenue should the entity recognise for the year ended 30 April 20X7?
£
Revenue:
Interactive question 8: Servicing fees

On the last day of its current accounting period, Computer Ltd completes the handover of a new
system to a client and raises an invoice for £800,000. This price includes after-sales support for the
next two years, which is estimated to cost £35,000 each year. Computer Ltd normally earns a gross
profit margin of 17.5% on such support activity.
Requirement
Calculate the revenue to be included in Computer Ltd’s current year statement of profit or loss in
respect of this sale.
After-sales support
Remainder
Total selling price
So the revenue from the sale in the current year is:
3.5 Licences
A licence allows a customer to access intellectual property such as software, patents, trademarks,
franchises, copyrights and media (eg, films).
The grant of a licence may be accompanied by the promise to transfer other goods or services in the
following circumstances:
(a) Where the promise to grant a licence is distinct, it forms a separate performance obligation from
that for goods and services.
(b) Where the promise to grant a licence is a separate performance obligation, revenue is either
recognised at a point in time or over time depending on the nature of the contract.
(c) Where the promise to grant a licence is not distinct from the promised goods and services, the
goods, services and licence are combined as one single performance obligation (eg, software
that requires ongoing upgrade services in order to function or a software hosting agreement on
an internet site). This performance obligation may be satisfied at a point in time or over time and
this should be determined in accordance with IFRS guidance (see section 2.9).
HB2021

(d) Where the licence allows the customer access to the vendor’s intellectual property as it exists at
any given time in the licence period (ie, the vendor continues to support and update the
intellectual property), this is a performance obligation satisfied over time.
(e) Where the licence allows the customer access to the vendor’s intellectual property as it exists at
the date the licence is granted, this is a performance obligation satisfied at a point in time.
Worked example: Licensing

A fast food company ‘PizzaTheAction’ grants a franchise licence to a customer, allowing the customer
to use the PizzaTheAction brand and sell company products for a 10-year period. During the 10-year
period, management at PizzaTheAction will perform customer analysis, continuously improve the
product and advertise the brand, all of which will affect the franchise licence.
Requirement
Explain how the revenue arising from this transaction is recognised.
Solution
PizzaTheAction is providing access to its intellectual property as it exists throughout the licence
period (ie, the customer will benefit from continuous improvements and marketing etc). Therefore
the performance obligation is satisfied over time and PizzaTheAction recognises revenue over the
licence period.
3.6 Royalties
A contract to license intellectual property may require as consideration a royalty that is measured by
reference to sales or usage. In such cases, the seller recognises revenue when the later of the
following events occurs:
• The subsequent sale or usage arises.
• The performance obligation to which some or all of the sales- or usage-based royalty has been
allocated is satisfied (or partially satisfied).
3.7 Repurchase agreements

Under a repurchase agreement an entity sells an asset and has the option to repurchase it. This can
come in one of three forms (IFRS 15.B64):
(a) An obligation to repurchase (a forward contract)
(b) A right to repurchase (a call option)
(c) An obligation to repurchase at the customer’s request (a put option)
Under a forward contract or a call option the customer does not obtain control of the asset because
that control is limited by the repurchase option. The contract is accounted for as a lease if the
repurchase price is below the original selling price, or a financing arrangement if the repurchase
price is equal to or above the original selling price (IFRS 15.B66).
Under a put option, if the customer does not have sufficient economic incentive to exercise the right
to request repurchase, the agreement should be treated as if it were a sale with a right of return. If
the customer does have sufficient economic incentive, for instance if the repurchase price is above
the original selling price and above market value, the contract is treated as a financing arrangement
(IFRS 15.B73).
Worked example: Repurchase agreement

An entity sold an investment property to a financial institution for £4 million when the fair value of the
property was £5 million. Further investigation uncovered an agreement whereby the entity could
repurchase the property after one year for £4.32 million.
Requirement
How should this transaction be accounted for?
HB2021

Solution
The entity has a right to repurchase the property – a call option. The repurchase price is above the
original selling price, so this is, in effect, a financing arrangement.
The sale of the property at 20% below fair value is sufficient to cast doubt on whether a real sale has
been made. Also, the repurchase price is below fair value at the date of sale and represents a return
to the financial institution of 8% ((£4.32m – £4m) as a percentage of £4 million) on the amount paid
out.
The substance of the arrangement appears to be that the financial institution has granted the entity a
one-year loan secured on the property, charging interest at 8%.
The transaction should be accounted for by:
• continuing to recognise the property as an asset;
• crediting the £4 million received to a liability account;
• recognising £0.32 million as a finance cost in profit or loss and crediting it to the liability account;
and
• derecognising the liability when the £4.32 million cash is paid out.
Interactive question 9: Sale and repurchase

Builder Ltd specialises in building high quality executive flats in city centres. On 1 March 20X6 it sells
a plot of building land to Finance plc, an unconnected company, for £1.5 million. Builder Ltd retains
rights of access and supervision over the plot, the right to build on this land until 28 February 20X9
and the right to buy the plot back again on that date for £1.9 million. On 1 March 20X6 the plot is
valued at £2.5 million.
Requirement
Explain how this sale transaction would be dealt with in Builder Ltd’s financial statements for the year
ended 28 February 20X7.
3.8 Consignment arrangements

In a consignment arrangement, a dealer does not obtain control of an asset. Such arrangements are
common in the motor industry. Often a car manufacturer will enter into an arrangement with a car
dealer such that the dealer takes and displays vehicles with a view to selling them to a customer. In
such situations, the manufacturer cannot recognise any revenue because the dealer does not obtain
control of the cars at the point of delivery.
The following are indicators that an arrangement is a consignment arrangement:
• The product is controlled by the seller (manufacturer) until a specified event occurs (eg, the
product is sold onwards or a specified period of time expires).
• The seller (manufacturer) can require the return of the product or transfer it to another party.
• The customer (dealer) does not have an unconditional obligation to pay for the product.
3.9 Bill and hold arrangements

Under these arrangements, an entity bills the customer for the product but delivery is delayed with
the agreement of the customer, perhaps because the customer is short of space. In this case, the
entity must determine the point in time at which it has satisfied its performance obligation by
transferring control of the product to the customer. It may be that the customer is still able to exercise
control without having physical possession of the product.
(IFRS 15 .B79)
Control may pass at the point of delivery or when the product is shipped or at an earlier date ie, the
customer may obtain control even though the seller has physical possession of the product.
HB2021

All the following IFRS 15 criteria must have been met in a bill and hold arrangement, in order for
control to be said to have passed:
(a) There must be a substantive reason for the bill and hold arrangement, for example, the customer
has requested it.
(b) The product must be identified as belonging to the customer.
(c) The product must be ready for physical transfer to the customer.
(d) The seller must not be able to use the product or transfer it to another customer.
If these criteria are met, enabling revenue to be recognised on a bill and hold basis, the seller should
consider whether to allocate a proportion of the transaction price to the provision of a storage
service.
Interactive question 10: Bill and hold

Walbrooke Engineering plc enters into a contract with Southfield Beverages Ltd on 1 January 20X8
for the sale of a bottling machine and spare parts. It takes two years to manufacture these and on 31
December 20X9 the customer pays for both the machine and the spare parts, but only takes physical
possession of the machine. The customer inspects and accepts the spare parts, but requests that
Walbrooke Engineering continues to store them at its warehouse.
Requirement
Explain when Walbrooke Engineering should recognise revenue in respect of this transaction.
3.10 Options for additional goods and services

An option in a sales contract may grant the customer the right to acquire additional goods or
services for free or at a discount. In some cases this may take the form of ‘loyalty points’. For example,
airlines often give passengers loyalty points when they buy a flight. When enough loyalty points are
acquired, they can be redeemed for a free flight.
The option to acquire additional goods or services forms a separate performance obligation if the
option can only be obtained by entering into the initial sales contract.
In this case, part of the transaction price is allocated to the option to acquire additional goods or
services, and part is allocated to the goods or services that are the subject of the sales contract.
Revenue is recognised in respect of the option to acquire additional goods or services at the earlier
of:
• the date on which the additional goods or services are provided;
• the date on which the option to acquire the additional goods or services expires.
The allocation of transaction price to the option is based on the stand-alone selling price of the
additional goods or services, taking account of the discount and adjusted for the likelihood that the
option will be exercised.
If the option granted to the customer does not offer a discount, it is treated as a marketing offer and
no contract exists until the customer exercises the option to purchase.
Worked example: Customer loyalty scheme

GymGo Ltd, a ‘pay as you go’ gym operates a customer loyalty scheme whereby if a customer pays
for nine visits and has a loyalty card stamped, the tenth visit is provided free of charge. During 20X7,
customers visit the gym a total of 94,995 times, paying £10 per visit, so earning the right to a
maximum of 10,555 (94,995/9) free visits, each of which has an average stand-alone price of £10. The
gym expects 7,400 of the free visits to be claimed and by 31 December 20X7, 4,350 have been
claimed.
Requirement
Explain how revenue is recognised by GymGo Ltd.
HB2021

Solution
The promise to provide a free tenth visit is a performance obligation, and total revenue of £949,950
(94,995 × £10) is allocated between visits to the gym by customers and the loyalty scheme.
Revenue is allocated to the provision of ‘stamps’ based on the expected take up rate and the stand-
alone selling price basis ie, based on a total stand-alone selling price of £74,000 (7,400 × £10):
£
Gym visits £949,950 × (949,950/(949,950 + 74,000)) 881,298
Loyalty stamps £949,950 × (74,000/(949,950 + 74,000)) 68,652
949,950
At 31 December 20X7, 4,350 of the expected 7,400 free visits have been claimed, therefore of the
£68,652 transaction price allocated to loyalty stamps:
• £40,356 (4,350/7,400 × £68,652) is recognised as revenue; and
• £28,296 is recognised as a contract liability for the unredeemed loyalty stamps.
Therefore total revenue recognised in 20X7 is £921,654 (881,298 + 40,356).
3.11 Non-refundable upfront fees

A non-refundable upfront fee is often charged at the beginning of a contract, such as joining fees in
health club membership contracts.
In many cases upfront fees do not relate to the transfer of any promised good or service, but are
simply advance payments for future goods or services. In this case revenue is recognised when the
future goods or services are provided.
If the fee relates to a good or service the entity should evaluate whether or not it amounts to a
separate performance obligation. This depends on whether it results in the transfer of an asset to the
customer. The fee may relate to costs incurred in setting up a contract, but these setup activities may
not result in the transfer of services to the customer.
4 Audit focus
Section overview
This section looks at audit procedures relevant when considering the appropriateness of the
accounting treatment adopted for construction contracts.
4.1 Audit procedures for testing IFRS 15
Stage of IFRS 15 Suggested audit procedures
Step 1 • Obtain copies of contracts between entities and customers

Identify the • Inspect contracts to confirm they are legally binding and effective for
contract(s) with a the year of audit
customer. • For implied contracts (such as retail contracts) clarify the likely
contractual terms to establish rights and responsibilities in each case
Step 2 • Confirm the goods or services to be transferred, either individually or as

Identify separate part of a series, by reference to the contracts in place
performance • Confirm whether any of the goods or service are not distinct by
obligations. reference to the contracts in place and if separate bundles
HB2021

Step 3 • Identify the amount of consideration by reference to the contract

Determine the • Where appropriate, confirm the split between variable and fixed
transaction price. elements and re-calculate any variable amounts by reference to the
contract terms
• Test the hypothesis that variable consideration is highly probable by
reviewing the reasonableness of the underlying assumptions used in the
entity’s calculations
Step 4 • Confirm stand-alone prices to individual elements of the contract as

Allocate transaction performance obligations are settled
price to • In the case of estimated stand-alone prices, test the assumptions
performance underpinning the calculations used by the entity for reasonableness
obligations.
Step 5 • For performance obligations satisfied at a point in time (such as retail

Recognise revenue sales) confirm the occurrence of the event required (such as the sale
as or when each itself) by reference to supporting documentation
performance (For performance obligations satisfied over time refer to section 4.2
obligation is below.)
satisfied.
Other tests • For deferred consideration, confirm the proportion split between the
value of the goods on the date of sale and the financing income by
reference to the contract and testing the reasonableness of the entity’s
calculations for recognising revenue (such as interest rates for estimating
fair value)
Returns • Review contract/terms of sale and confirm that this is allowed

• For a sample of goods inwards, determine whether any relate to returns
and ensure no revenue has been recognised for such goods
• Review returns activities in the next reporting period to ensure revenue
has not been overstated in relation to returns
Warranties • For service warranties, review sales activity to identify evidence of

related performance obligations and identify revenue allocated to such
warranties
Revenue collected • Establish existence of any third parties for whom revenue would be
on behalf of third collected (ideally during the process of understanding the entity at the
parties planning stage)
• For a sample of revenue items, confirm the revenue is not due to be
passed on to any third parties identified
Bundled services, • Clearly complex, these will require a review of contracts/terms of sale to
licences, royalties establish their likelihood and conditions and the audit team briefed to
and repurchase include these in audit tests as appropriate
agreements
Consignment • Consider the existence of any indicators of consignment arrangements,

arrangements such as:
– Confirming who controls the product and what (if any) conditions
need to have occurred for control to be passed on
– Clarifying who can require the return of a product or transfer it to a
third party
HB2021

Bill and hold • Consider the existence of such arrangements and if present, review the
arrangements conditions required by IFRS 15 have been met:
– Confirm that the customer owns the products stored by the seller by
reference to the contract terms, and obtain confirmation from the
customer that they are happy for the seller to hold them
– Inspect the agreement between the seller and customer to confirm
the products can be accessed at any time and not transferred to
another customer
Non-refundable • For a sample of revenues recognised during the reporting period,

upfront fees determine whether any related to upfront fees
• Confirm any upfront fees recognised that relate to performance
obligations have now been satisfied (for example, in a health club, that
services have been provided)
Just as the financial accountant must apply the five-stage structure of IFRS 15 in determining when
and in what amount to recognise revenue, the auditor must also apply this structured approach to
selecting audit procedures at each of the five stages.
Exam focus note

It is possible that you could be examined on IFRS 15 and that you will need to know the auditing
implications of this complex standard: here are two illustrations since it became an examinable
standard that show just how complex the accounting for revenue can actually be for the auditor.
Question 2 of the November 2019 exam contained a requirement to account for a customer
reward scheme which included specific performance obligations in relation to the redemption of
the points earned by customers under the scheme. Auditing issues were not tested in this
question, but what if they were? You might have been required to consider procedures such as
obtaining details about the scheme to confirm the criteria in place and challenging the client on
any of the information supplied (such as confirming how many of the points earned had been
redeemed and recalculating the client’s estimates of points not yet redeemed that would need to
be recognised as a contract liability).
November 2019 Question 3 featured another incentive scheme, this time for a listed caterer
whose customers can pay to join a club which offers discounts for future events booked within a
set period of time. The scenario presented different revenue streams, each with their own
performance obligations, which required candidates to discuss audit risks related to cut-off and
other recognition issues (which in turn were likely to indicate questionable management integrity
and manipulation). The audit procedures also required in this question were driven by some data
visualisations presented in the scenario; as exams now include live data analytics software it is
entirely possible that the use of graphical and other analytical procedures within the software
might be required to answer similar questions on revenue. Familiarity with the data analytics
software practice questions is therefore a high priority.
4.2 Audit procedures for contracts in which performance obligations are satisfied over
time (‘construction contracts’)
Remember, under IFRS 15, the entity recognises revenue in such cases by measuring progress
towards complete satisfaction of the performance obligation. Progress can be measured using
output methods (measuring the value to the customer of goods or services transferred to date) or
input methods (measuring the cost to the entity of goods or services transferred to date).
(IFRS 15.B14)
HB2021

The following audit procedures will be relevant:
• Confirm contract price to contract agreed between client and customer
• Determine any amounts of conditional revenue/costs including the associated conditions
• Confirm the progress to date of the work completed, including any potential delays or problems
• Confirm costs incurred to date (inputs) by reference to management accounts, invoices, budgets
and other relevant documentation
• Identify any expenditure not supporting fulfilment of the contract by inspecting board minutes,
management accounts or other documentation (such as legal correspondence)
• Confirm total costs estimated for contract to ensure no planned overspends have been identified
(again, budgets, board minutes or management accounts can be inspected)
• Confirm the amounts of contract work certified as complete (outputs) at the year end by
reference to relevant documentation (such as surveyors’ reports or client estimates)
Interactive question 11: Construction contracts

Construction Co has entered into a fixed price contract to construct an office block. Construction
commenced on 1 March 20X6 and is expected to take 36 months. You are auditing the financial
statements for the year ended 31 December 20X6.
The contract price is made up as follows:
£’000
Contract price 600
Incentive payment if completed on time 40
640
Total contract costs were originally estimated to be £470,000. At the end of 20X6 this estimate has
increased to £570,000 due to extra costs incurred to rectify a number of construction faults.
At the end of 20X6 the contract was assessed as being 30% complete. The draft financial statements
show that revenue of £192,000 has been recognised in respect of this contract.
Requirements
For the year ended 31 December 20X6:
(a) Identify the audit issues you would need to consider
(b) List the audit procedures you would perform
Context example: Carillion

In July 2017, UK construction firm Carillion collapsed leaving over £1 billion in debts and a number
of unfulfilled contracts, as well as a significant unfunded pension scheme. A UK parliamentary
committee interviewed the company’s directors, internal auditors Deloitte, and external auditors
KPMG and asked why this could not have been foreseen in March 2017, only four months earlier,
when the 2016 financial statements were signed off, despite a number of so-called ‘red flags’ which
had been identified by investors. Carillion went into liquidation in January 2018.
These ‘red flags’ included poor corporate governance, uncertainty over complex accounting
practices for goodwill and revenue (including the cash-flows on individual contracts) and inadequate
site visits as part of managing high-profile construction contracts clients.
The imminent need to adopt IFRS 15 from 2018 onwards is considered to be one of the key triggers
for these events. In its interim financial statements for the six months to 30 June 2017, the company
estimated that the adoption of IFRS 15 would reduce reserves by up to £150 million, an amount that
could have seen operating profits for 2017 almost entirely eliminated. Of course, revenue
recognition wasn’t the only issue facing Carillion: insufficient cash-flow from an excess of loss-making
HB2021

contracts had made the company vulnerable and this could be seen by the frequency with which
their shares were being shorted by investors keen to capitalise on an already doomed share price.
Overall, the fundamental need to communicate position and performance (and viability for that
matter) in a true and fair manner must never be forgotten by companies, regulators, investors and
auditors and the Carillion case has framed the discussion for how auditing, reporting and
governance should evolve.
(Sources: Shoaib, A. (26 February 2018) Carillion inquiry: missed red flags, aggressive accounting
and the pension deficit. AccountacyAge. [Online]. Available from:
www.accountancyage.com/2018/02/26/carillion-inquiry-missed-red-lights-aggressive-accounting-
pension-deficit/;
O’Connell, D. (20 January 2018) Carillion: the signals that the company was going bust. BBC News
Website. [Online]. Available from https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/business-42744949;
Ryland, P. (26 September 2019) Cash vs concept. Investor’s Chronicle [Online]. Available from:
https://www.investorschronicle.co.uk/shares/2019/09/26/cash-vs-concept/;
Carillion plc (29 September 2017) Financial results for the six months ended 30 June 2017 Strategic
and operational review update [Online]. Available from: https://www.rns-
pdf.londonstockexchange.com/rns/2047S_1-2017-9-29.pdf
[All accessed 23 June 2021])
The worked example above (Carillion) illustrates a situation where the professional skills of
concluding, recommending and communicating were not applied. Red flags over revenue were
identified, but the wrong conclusion drawn.
HB2021

Summary
IFRS 15, Revenue from

Contracts with Customers
Five-step approach
Step 1 – Identify the contract(s)

with the customer
Are the goods Promise to

or services Step 2 – Identify separate provide goods
distinct? performance obligations or services
Step 3 – Determine the

transaction price
Step 4 – Allocate the Per

transaction price to stand-alone
performance obligations selling prices
Step 5 – Recognise revenue as

At a point or when performance Over time
in time obligations are satisfied
HB2021

1. Can you list and apply the IFRS 15 five-step model for recognising revenue? (Topic 2)
2. What does ‘distinct’ mean in the context of performance obligations? (Topic 2)
3. Can you deal with performance obligations satisfied over time? (Topic 2)
4. What is the IFRS 15 treatment for sales with a right of return? (Topic 2)
5. How would each of IFRS 15’s five steps be audited? (Topic 5)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Southwell A sale and repurchase question with a financing element, this is a short
question to get you started.
Taplop A comprehensive question on variable consideration, this is an exam-

standard test of this topic (though not exam-style as it is much shorter).
Clavering Part (a) deals with the issue of whether control has transferred, which it
must in order to satisfy a performance obligation. There is scope for
different interpretations. Part (b) deals with identifying performance
obligations and allocating the transaction price.
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Wayte This requires you to separate out performance obligations to determine

the appropriate timing of revenue recognition.
Solvit This tests the five-step process in detail and also the audit aspects.
Roada A comprehensive, detailed question on IFRS 15, focusing mainly on

performance obligations satisfied over time, but with a number of different
revenue streams.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the next
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers

Revenue is income arising in the course of an entity’s ordinary activities. – IFRS 15 Appendix A
Five-step approach is used: – IFRS 15 (IN7)
• Identifying the contract – IFRS 15 (9)
• Identifying the performance obligations – IFRS 15 (22)
– Satisfaction of performance obligations – IFRS 15 (31)
– Performance obligations satisfied over time – IFRS 15 (35)
– Performance obligations satisfied at a point in time – IFRS 15 (38)
• Determining the transaction price – IFRS 15 (47)
• Allocating the transaction price to the performance obligations – IFRS 15 (73)
• Recognising revenue as/when obligations are satisfied – IFRS 15 (31)
Incremental costs of a contract are recognised. – IFRS 15 (91–94)
Costs incurred to fulfil a contract are recognised as an asset if and only if all of certain criteria are
met: – IFRS 15 (95)
• The costs relate directly to a contract (or a specific anticipated contract);
• The costs generate or enhance resources of the entity that will be used in satisfying performance
obligations in the future; and
• The costs are expected to be recovered.
Costs include direct labour, direct materials, and the allocation of overheads that relate directly to the
contract. – IFRS 15 (97)
The asset recognised in respect of the costs to obtain or fulfil a contract is amortised on a systematic
basis that is consistent with the pattern of transfer of the goods or services to which the asset relates.
– IFRS 15 (99)
IFRS 15 gives further guidance on: – IFRS 15 (App B)
• Performance obligations satisfied over time
• Methods for measuring progress towards complete satisfaction of a performance obligation
• Sale with a right of return
• Warranties
• Principal versus agent considerations
• Customer options for additional goods or services
• Customers’ unexercised rights
• Non-refundable upfront fees
• Licensing
• Repurchase agreements
• Consignment arrangements
• Bill-and-hold arrangements
• Customer acceptance
• Disclosures of disaggregation of revenue
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Webber
Webber sells two types of product, the Sleigh and the Sled. Webber sells the sleigh as an agent of
Caplin receiving commission of 15% on selling price. Webber sells the sled as principal at a gross
margin of 30%.
The following information relates to the year ended 30 September 20X8.
Sleighs Sleds
£ £
Total sales 200,000 75,000
Requirement
According to IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers what revenue should Webber
recognise in total for Sleighs and Sleds for the year ended 30 September 20X8?
2 Alexander
On 1 January 20X0, Alexander Ltd supplied goods to David Ltd for an agreed sum of £600,000. This
amount becomes payable on 31 December 20X2. David Ltd could have bought the goods for cash
of £450,000 on 1 January 20X0. The imputed rate of interest to discount the receivable to the cash
sales price is 10%.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers what amounts for revenue and
interest income should Alexander Ltd record in profit or loss relating to this transaction for the year
ended 31 December 20X0?
3 Southwell
Southwell Ltd, a manufacturing company, sold a property with a carrying amount of £4.5 million for
£5 million to Financier Ltd on 1 January 20X4. Southwell Ltd retains the right to occupy the property
and has an option to repurchase the property after two years for £6 million. Property prices are
expected to rise and the current market value is £8 million. The annual rate for 20% over two years is
9.5%.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS, 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers what should be recognised in
the financial statements relating to this transaction for the year ended 31 December 20X4?
4 White Goods
White Goods Ltd sells an electrical appliance for £2,400 on 1 October 20X7 making a mark up on
cost of 20%. The customer is given a one-year interest-free credit period. White Goods Ltd has a cost
of capital of 9%.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers, what amount should the
company recognise as revenue from the sale of the appliance in profit or loss for the year ended 31
December 20X7?
HB2021

5 Tree
You are the accountant of Tree, a listed limited liability company that prepares consolidated financial
statements. Your Managing Director, who is not an accountant, has recently attended a seminar at
which key financial reporting issues were discussed. She remembers being told the following.
• Financial statements of an entity should reflect the substance of its transactions.
• Revenue from the contracts with customers should only be recognised when certain conditions
have been satisfied. Transfer of legal title to the goods is not necessarily sufficient for an entity to
recognise revenue from their ‘sale’.
The year end of Tree is 31 August. In the year to 31 August 20X1, the company entered into the
following transactions.
Transaction 1
On 1 March 20X1, Tree sold a property to a bank for £5 million. The market value of the property at
the date of the sale was £10 million. Tree continues to occupy the property rent-free. Tree has the
option to buy the property back from the bank at the end of every month from 31 March 20X1 until
28 February 20X6. Tree has not yet exercised this option. The repurchase price will be £5 million plus
£50,000 for every complete month that has elapsed from the date of sale to the date of repurchase.
The bank cannot require Tree to repurchase the property and the facility lapses after 28 February
20X6. The directors of Tree expect property prices to rise at around 5% each year for the foreseeable
future.
Transaction 2
On 1 September 20X0, Tree sold one of its branches to Vehicle for £8 million. The net assets of the
branch in the financial statements of Tree immediately before the sale were £7 million. Vehicle is a
subsidiary of a bank and was specifically incorporated to carry out the purchase – it has no other
business operations. Vehicle received the £8 million to finance this project from its parent in the form
of a loan.
Tree continues to control the operations of the branch and receives an annual operating fee from
Vehicle. The annual fee is the operating profit of the branch for the 12 months to the previous 31
August less the interest payable on the loan taken out by Vehicle for the 12 months to the previous
31 August. If this amount is negative, then Tree must pay the negative amount to Vehicle.
Any payments to or by Tree must be made by 30 September following the end of the relevant
period. In the year to 31 August 20X1, the branch made an operating profit of £2,000,000. Interest
payable by Vehicle on the loan for this period was £800,000.
Requirements
5.1 Explain the conditions that need to be satisfied before revenue can be recognised. You should
support your answer with reference to IFRS 15.
5.2 Explain how the transactions described above will be dealt with in the consolidated financial
statements (statement of financial position and statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income) of Tree for the year ended 31 August 20X1 in accordance with IFRS
15.
6 Taplop
Taplop supplies laptop computers to large businesses. On 1 July 20X5, Taplop entered into a
contract with TrillCo, under which TrillCo was to purchase laptops at £500 per unit. The contract
states that if TrillCo purchases more than 500 laptops in a year, the price per unit is reduced
retrospectively to £450 per unit. Taplop’s year end is 30 June.
• As at 30 September 20X5, TrillCo had bought 70 laptops from Taplop. Taplop therefore estimated
that TrillCo’s purchases would not exceed 500 in the year to 30 June 20X6, and would therefore
not be entitled to the volume discount.
• During the quarter ended 31 December 20X5, TrillCo expanded rapidly as a result of a substantial
acquisition, and purchased an additional 250 laptops from Taplop. Taplop then estimated that
TrillCo’s purchases would exceed the threshold for the volume discount in the year to 30 June
20X6.
HB2021

Requirements
Calculate the revenue Taplop would recognise in:
(a) The quarter ended 30 September 20X5
(b) The quarter ended 31 December 20X5
Your answer should apply the principles of IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
7 Clavering
Clavering Leisure Co owns and operates a number of hotels. The company is preparing its financial
statements for the year ended 31 May 20X3, and has come across the following issues.
(1) One of the hotels owned by Clavering Leisure is a complex which includes a theme park and a
casino as well as a hotel. The theme park, casino and hotel were sold in the year ended 31 May
20X3 to Manningtree Co, a public limited company, for £200 million but the sale agreement
stated that Clavering Leisure would continue to operate and manage the three businesses for
their remaining useful life of 15 years. The residual interest in the business reverts back to
Clavering Leisure after the 15-year period. Clavering Leisure would receive 75% of the net profit
of the businesses as operator fees, and Manningtree would receive the remaining 25%.
Clavering Leisure has guaranteed to Manningtree that the net minimum profit paid to
Manningtree would not be less than £15 million per year.
(2) Clavering Leisure has recently started issuing vouchers to customers when they stay in its hotels.
The vouchers entitle the customers to a £30 discount on a subsequent room booking within
three months of their stay. Historical experience has shown that only one in five vouchers are
redeemed by the customer. At the company’s year end of 31 May 20X3, it is estimated that there
are vouchers worth £20 million which are eligible for discount. The income from room sales for
the year is £300 million and Clavering Leisure is unsure how to report the income from room
sales in the financial statements.
Requirement
Advise Clavering Leisure on how the above accounting issues should be dealt with in its financial
statements in accordance with IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
8 Rockwye
Rockwye is a manufacturer of luxury watches which it sells to customers via a number of independent
retailers. Rockwye recognises revenue and derecognises inventory when it supplies each retailer with
deliveries of watches for display. Watches are then displayed by retailers at a price set by the
manufacturer – once a watch is sold to a customer, the retailer passes the revenue back to Rockwye.
Any unsold watches are returned to Rockwye after a period of 11 months.
Requirement
Comment on the accounting treatment in operation at Rockwye and recommend suitable audit
procedures that you should undertake.
this chapter.
HB2021


Magazine revenue: £16,000
Explanation
Revenue for the magazines should be recognised in the periods in which they are despatched,
assuming the items are of similar value in each period. Despatch of the magazine constitutes
satisfaction of the performance obligation. Thus the revenue to be recognised in the year ended 31
March 20X7 is £48,000 × 4/12 = £16,000.

Revenue: £nil
Explanation
Revenue should be recognised when the drills are delivered to the customer. This is the point at
which the performance obligation is satisfied. Until then no revenue should be recognised and the
deposits should be carried forward as deferred income.

(a) Costs to complete are £90,000
This is a contract with performance obligations satisfied over time and 33% of the performance
has been completed to date.
Revenue can be recognised on the output basis by the percentage of completion method, so
33% of £210,000 = £69,300.
Note: The project is profitable overall (total revenue £210,000, total costs £135,000), so no
provision for a contract loss need be made.
(b) Costs to complete cannot be estimated reliably
As the outcome of the overall contract cannot be estimated reliably, revenue is recognised to the
extent of the costs incurred which are recoverable ie, £40,000. The current period therefore
recognises the contract loss to date of £5,000.

Contract revenue: £60,000
Explanation
If the outcome of a services transaction cannot be estimated reliably, revenue should only be
recognised to the extent that expenses incurred are recoverable from the customer.

The Sales Director wishes to recognise the sale as early as possible. However, following IFRS 15,
Revenue from Contracts with Customers, revenue from the sale should only be recognised when the
performance obligations in the contract have been satisfied.
Performance obligations in the contract
The contract contains a promise to deliver the caravan and a promise to deliver additional goods
free of charge. These are distinct promises and therefore the contract contains two performance
obligations.
Transaction price
The transaction price is made up of three elements.
A significant financing component must be considered where consideration is received more than 12
months before or after the date on which revenue is recognised (being the delivery date, 1 August
HB2021

20X7). Therefore the payment on 1 August 20X9 must be discounted to present value at 1 August
20X7.
£
Deposit 3,000
Payment on 1.8.X7 (the delivery date) 15,000
Payment on 1.8.X9 (£12,000/1.12) 9,917
27,917
Allocation to performance obligations

The transaction price is allocated based on standalone selling prices:
Caravan 30,000/31,500 × £27,917 = £26,588

Free equipment 1,500/31,500 × £27,917 = £1,329
Recognition of revenue
The two performance obligations are satisfied simultaneously on 1 August 20X7, and therefore all
revenue is recognised on this date.
Journal entries are as follows:
1 May 20X7
The receipt of cash in the form of the £3,000 deposit is recognised on receipt as a contract liability
(deferred income) in the statement of financial position by:
DEBIT Bank £3,000

CREDIT Contract liability (deferred income) £3,000
1 August 20X7
Revenue is recognised together with payment of the first £15,000. The contract liability is transferred
to be revenue:
DEBIT Bank £15,000

DEBIT Contract liability £3,000
DEBIT Receivable £9,917
CREDIT Revenue £27,917
Note: This question is rather fiddly, so do not worry too much if you didn’t get all of it right. Read
through our solution carefully, going back to first principles where required.

6.1 Account for sale
• Bags Galore Ltd expects 3 bags (6% × 50) to be returned.
• Therefore on 28 January 20X9 revenue is recognised in relation to 47 bags, giving a total of
£39,950 (47 × £850).
• A refund liability of £2,550 (3 × £850) is recognised.
• The cost of 47 bags of £18,800 (47 × £400) is transferred to cost of sales. The remaining 3
bags are recognised as an asset (the right to recover the bags) at cost of £1,200 (3 × £400).
The ‘right to recover’ asset is measured at the original cost of the bags that are expected to
be returned because, even in the ‘Fabulous February’ sale, they are capable of being sold for
£425 (50% × £850) ie, more than cost.
HB2021

The required accounting entries are:
DEBIT Bank (50 × £850) £42,500

CREDIT Refund liability £2,550
To recognise the sale of bags and expectation that 6% will be returned.
DEBIT Asset (right to recover inventory) £1,200

DEBIT Cost of sales (47 × £400) £18,800
CREDIT Asset (inventory) £20,000
To recognise the transfer of items of inventory that are not expected to be returned to become
cost of sales and that are expected to be returned to become assets (the right to recover the 3
bags).
6.2 If the selling price of the bags were reduced to £340 (40% × £850):
• The revenue and refund liability would be recorded as before.
• The retained asset would be measured at £1,020 (3 × £340), so resulting in a write down of
the carrying amount of inventory in profit or loss.
£
Revenue:
– Sale of goods (W) 1,350,000
– Sale of services (W) 25,000
1,375,000
WORKING
£
After-sale support (120,000/ (100% – 20%)) 150,000
Remainder = sale of goods (bal fig) 1,350,000
Total revenue 1,500,000
Revenue for sale of services recognised in the four months to 30 April 20X7 should be £150,000/2
years × 4/12 = £25,000
£
After-sales support (2 × (35,000/82.5%)) 84,848
Remainder 715,152
Total selling price 800,000
So the revenue from the sale in the current year is: 715,152
HB2021

Sale transaction
• As there is an option to repurchase, this is a call option with a repurchase price above the original
selling price, so it is treated as a financing arrangement.
• Through the rights of access and supervision, together with the right to build on the land, Builder
Ltd has retained the risks and rewards of ownership over the building plot, so should continue to
show it as an asset in its statement of financial position.
• The fact that the consideration for the sale on 1 March 20X6 is so far below the valuation is further
evidence that the transaction is in substance a three-year loan, with the £400,000 difference
between the selling and repurchase prices being interest on the loan.
• The right to repurchase in the future for much less than the current valuation (making the exercise
of the repurchase right almost a certainty) is further evidence that this is not a real sale.
• So Builder Ltd will show the building plot in its 28 February 20X7 statement of financial position
as a current asset (as it will be realised in the normal course of its operating cycle) at its original
acquisition cost (not given in the Interactive question).
• In the same statement of financial position it will show the £1.5 million received on 1 March 20X6
as a liability, together with any unpaid part of the £400,000 interest which is attributable to the
first year of the loan.
• The appropriate part of the total interest will be charged to profit or loss for the year ended 28
February 20X7.

The contract contains three performance obligations – transfer of the machine, transfer of the spare
parts and the custodial services. The transaction price is allocated to the three performance
obligations and revenue is recognised when (or as) control passes to the customer.
The machine and the spare parts are both performance obligations satisfied at a point in time, this
being 31 December 20X9. In the case of the spare parts, the customer has paid for them, the
customer has legal title to them and the customer has control of them as they can remove them from
storage at any time.
The custodial services are a performance obligation satisfied over time, so revenue will be
recognised over the period during which the spare parts are stored.

(a) Audit issues
• Whether revenue recognised to date includes a proportion of the incentive payment. This
would only be appropriate if it is probable that this income will be received.
• Total costs to complete have been increased during the year due to rectification costs. There
is a risk that there may be other rectification costs which have yet to be identified.
• Whether the accounting treatment of the revenue recognised is in accordance with IFRS 15.
The current figure of £192,000 appears to be based on 30% of the expected total revenue
(640 × 30%) but it is unclear where this 30% has come from. If revenue is being measured on
costs incurred to date (input basis) the additional £100,000 of contract costs may not be
allowable as part of this calculation. Similarly, if certified as complete (output basis) on a pro-
rated time basis, the contract is only 10 months old – this would give a percentage of 10/36 =
27.8% which could lead to overstated revenue.
(b) Audit procedures
• Agree the contract price and incentive payment to the sales contract.
• Discuss with management the basis on which they have recognised the incentive payment
and review their performance on other similar contracts to determine the likelihood of the
contract being completed on time.
• Establish the basis on which the percentage completion of 30% has been determined. If a
surveyor has been used to make this estimate assess the extent to which this evidence can be
relied on.
HB2021

• Discuss with management the nature of the rectification costs and assess the likelihood of
other similar additional costs being incurred. Obtain a schedule of these and agree to
supporting documentation.
• Review management calculations regarding costs to complete and seek corroboration for
any assumptions made.
• Discuss with management the revenue recognition policy adopted. If material to the financial
statements the figures should be revised in accordance with IFRS 15.
HB2021

1 Webber
Revenue
£
Revenue recognised as agent (£200,000 × 15%) 30,000
Revenue recognised as principal 75,000
Total revenue 105,000
2 Alexander
At the time of supply, revenue is recognised for the cash sale price of £450,000. Interest will then be
accrued until payment is made. For the year ended 31 December 20X0 the interest charge is
£450,000 × 10% = £45,000.
3 Southwell
As there is an option to repurchase, this is a call option with a repurchase price above the original
selling price, so it is treated as a financing arrangement.
Initial loan: DEBIT Cash £5m

CREDIT Loan £5m
Interest: DEBIT Interest (Profit or loss) (5m × 9.5%) £0.475m
CREDIT Loan £0.475m
Total loan liability is £5.475 million.
4 White Goods
The amount receivable discounted to present value = £2,400 × 1/1.09 = £2,202
This is recognised as income on 1 October 20X7. The difference between this and the sale proceeds
(2,400 – 2,202 = 198) is treated as interest and will be recognised over the 12‑month interest-free
credit period.
5 Tree
5.1 IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers states the following (IFRS 15.35):
Revenue is recognised when (or as) a performance obligation is satisfied. The entity satisfies a
performance obligation by transferring control of a promised good or service to the customer.
A performance obligation can be satisfied at a point in time, such as when goods are
delivered to the customer, or over time. An obligation satisfied over time will meet one of the
following criteria:
• The customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits as the performance takes
place.
• The entity’s performance creates or enhances an asset that the customer controls as the
asset is created or enhanced.
• The entity’s performance does not create an asset with an alternative use to the entity and
the entity has an enforceable right to payment for performance completed to date.
HB2021

The amount of revenue recognised is the amount allocated to that performance obligation. An
entity must be able to reasonably measure the outcome of a performance obligation before
the related revenue can be recognised. In some circumstances, such as in the early stages of a
contract, it may not be possible to reasonably measure the outcome of a performance
obligation, but the entity expects to recover the costs incurred. In these circumstances,
revenue is recognised only to the extent of costs incurred.
5.2 Transaction 1
Tree has the option to repurchase the property but cannot be required to do so. This is a call
option in which the repurchase price is equal to or above the original selling price, so it should
be accounted for as a financing arrangement.
Tree has not transferred control of the property to the bank as it still has the right to exercise
this option, so no performance obligation has been satisfied that could justify the recognition
of revenue.
The transaction is essentially a loan secured on the property, rather than an outright sale. The
£50,000 payable for each month that the bank holds the property is interest on the loan.
The property remains in the consolidated statement of financial position at its cost or market
value (depending on the accounting policy adopted by Tree). The loan of £5 million and
accrued interest of £300,000 (6 × 50,000) are reported under non-current liabilities. Interest of
£300,000 is recognised in consolidated profit or loss.
Transaction 2
The key issue is whether Tree has transferred control of the branch.
Tree continues to control the operations of the branch and the amount that it receives from
Vehicle is the operating profit of the branch less the interest payable on the loan. Tree also
suffers the effect of any operating losses made by the branch. Therefore, the position is
essentially the same as before the ‘sale’ and Tree has not satisfied any performance obligation
in return for the consideration of £8 million.
Although Vehicle is not a subsidiary of Tree as defined by IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial
Statements, it is a special purpose entity (quasi-subsidiary). It gives rise to benefits for Tree that
are in substance no different from those that would arise if it were a subsidiary. Its assets,
liabilities, income and expenses must be included in the consolidated financial statements.
The assets and liabilities of Vehicle are included in the consolidated statement of financial
position at £7 million (their original value to the group). The loan of £8 million is recognised as
a non-current liability. The profit on disposal of £1 million and the operating fee of £1,200,000
are cancelled as intra-group transactions. The operating profit of £2 million is included in
consolidated profit or loss, as is the loan interest of £800,000.
6 Taplop
(a) Applying the requirements of IFRS 15 to TrillCo’s purchasing pattern at 30 September 20X5,
Taplop should conclude that it was highly probable that a significant reversal in the cumulative
amount of revenue recognised (£500 per laptop) would not occur when the uncertainty was
resolved, that is when the total amount of purchases was known. Consequently, Taplop should
recognise revenue of 70 × £500 = £35,000 for the first quarter ended 30 September 20X5.
(b) In the quarter ended 31 December 20X5, TrillCo’s purchasing pattern changed such that it
would be legitimate for Taplop to conclude that TrillCo’s purchases would exceed the threshold
for the volume discount in the year to 30 June 20X6, and therefore that it was appropriate to
reduce the price to £450 per laptop. Taplop should therefore recognise revenue of £109,000 for
the quarter ended 31 December 20X5. The amount is calculated as from £112,500 (250 laptops
× £450) less the change in transaction price of £3,500 (70 laptops × £50 price reduction) for the
reduction of the price of the laptops sold in the quarter ended 30 September 20X5.
HB2021

7 Clavering
Sale of hotel complex
The issue here is one of revenue recognition, and the accounting treatment is governed by IFRS 15,
Revenue from Contracts with Customers. Step (5) of the standard’s revenue recognition process
requires that revenue is recognised when (or as) a performance obligation is satisfied. The entity
satisfies a performance obligation by transferring control of a promised good or service to the
customer. A performance obligation can be satisfied at a point in time, such as when goods are
delivered to the customer, or over time. In the case of the hotel transfer, the issue is that of a
performance obligation satisfied at a point in time. One of the indicators of control is that significant
risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred to the customer.
It can be argued in some cases where property is sold that the seller, by continuing to be involved,
has not satisfied the performance obligation by transferring control, partly because the seller has
not transferred the risks and rewards of ownership. In such cases, the sale is not genuine, but is often
in substance a financing arrangement. IFRS 15 requires that the substance of a transaction is
determined by looking at the transaction as a whole. If two or more transactions are linked, they
should be treated as one transaction to better reflect the commercial substance.
Clavering Leisure continues to operate and manage the hotel complex, receiving the bulk (75%) of
the profits, and the residual interest reverts back to Clavering Leisure; effectively, Clavering Leisure
retains control by retaining the risks and rewards of ownership. Manningtree does not bear
substantial risk: its minimum annual income is guaranteed at £15 million. The sale should not be
recognised. In substance it is a financing transaction. The proceeds should be treated as a loan, and
the payment of profits as interest.
Discount vouchers
The treatment of the vouchers is governed by IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers. The
principles of the standard require the following:
• The voucher should be accounted for as a separate component of the sale.
• The promise to provide the discount is a performance obligation.
• The entity must estimate the stand-alone selling price of the discount voucher in accordance with
paragraph B42 of IFRS 15. That estimate must reflect the discount that the customer would obtain
when exercising the option, adjusted for both of the following:
– Any discount that the customer could receive without exercising the option
– The likelihood that the option will be exercised.
The vouchers are issued as part of the sale of the room and redeemable against future bookings. The
substance of the transaction is that the customer is purchasing both a room and a voucher.
Vouchers worth £20 million are eligible for discount as at 31 May 20X3. However, based on past
experience, it is likely that only one in five vouchers will be redeemed, that is vouchers worth £4
million. Room sales are £300 million, so effectively, the company has made sales worth £(300m +
4m) = £304 million in exchange for £300 million. The stand-alone price would give a total of £300
million for the rooms and £4 million for the vouchers.
To allocate the transaction price, following step (4) of IFRS 15’s five-step process for revenue
recognition, the proceeds need to be split proportionally pro rata the stand-alone prices, that is the
discount of £4 million needs to be allocated between the room sales and the vouchers, as follows:
Room sales: 300/304 × £300m = £296.1m
Vouchers (balance) = £3.9m
The £3.9 million attributable to the vouchers is only recognised when the performance obligations
are fulfilled, that is when the vouchers are redeemed.
8 Rockwye
Matters to consider
The accounting treatment adopted by Rockwye does not appear to comply with IFRS 15 as it
appears to be a consignment arrangement in place with retailers. This means that Rockwye cannot
recognise any revenue or derecognise inventory when the watches are delivered to retailers because
HB2021

control has not passed from Rockwye to the retailer due to control being retained (the right to fix the
price and receive the watches back after 11 months).
Revenue should only be recognised when the retailer makes a sale to a customer. This means that
revenue in Rockwye’s financial statements is likely to be overstated. In addition, if watches are
returned unsold, there may also be a risk that inventory is overstated if any of the watches have
suffered any impairment.
Audit procedures
• The auditor should obtain copies of the contracts in place between Rockwye and individual
retailers to confirm the supplier arrangements in place and which party retains controls of the
watches.
• The auditor should establish the proportion of watches that are returned unsold to determine if
there are any indicators of impairment in the inventory held.
• The auditor should re-calculate revenue for a sample of months using the consignment approach
and compare to actual revenue recorded to establish if there is any material misstatement.
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 11
Earnings per share
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 EPS: overview of material covered in earlier studies
2 Basic EPS: weighted average number of shares
3 Basic EPS: profits attributable to ordinary equity holders
4 Diluted earnings per share
5 Diluted earnings per share: convertible instruments
6 Diluted EPS and options
7 Diluted EPS: contingently issuable shares
8 Retrospective adjustments, presentation and disclosure
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
11
Learning outcomes
presentation of financial statements; revenue; operating segments continuing and discontinued
operations; EPS; interim reporting
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 2(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
11

of this chapter.

1 EPS: overview of Approach You may be asked IQ1: Adjustment for

material covered in This section will be for a simple EPS preference shares
earlier studies revision from your calculation, or more This is a
IAS 33, Earnings per earlier studies, so likely re-calculation straightforward
Share seeks to should not take long once a series of question, revising
provide guidance to to work through. Do adjustments have material from your
ensure a consistent not overlook the been made to the earlier studies.
basis is followed so brief subsection on SPLOCI. Otherwise
that a meaningful auditing EPS. you are more likely
comparison can be to get complications
Stop and think that were not tested
made over time.
Why is an at Professional
adjustment needed Level.
for preference
shares?
2 Basic EPS: Approach These topics could N/A

weighted average While you have come up as part of a
number of shares done the weighted financial analysis
This could be used average calculations question.
in practice to at Professional
compare companies Level, you may not
for investment have come across
purposes. all the factors that
determine when
shares are included
in the weighted
average.
Stop and think
What is the impact
of bonus issues,
rights issues and
share consolidations
HB2021

on EPS?
3 Basic EPS: profits Approach This area has not yet IQ2: Redeemable
attributable to Focus on the been examined preference shares
ordinary equity redeemable versus under the current This a short,
holders irredeemable syllabus. straightforward
This section focuses distinction and question to
on the adjustments examples rather reinforce the main
to earnings arising than the increasing point in this section.
as a result of rate preference
preference shares. shares, which is less
likely to come up.
Stop and think
Why does it matter
whether the
preference shares
are redeemable or
not?
4 Diluted earnings Approach Diluted earnings per N/A

per share This section revises share is often tested,
In addition to basic material from your together with basic
EPS, IAS 33 requires earlier studies EPS, in a question
a diluted figure before moving on to requiring
which takes into more difficult topics. adjustments to
account the financial statements.
Stop and think
existence of
convertible What does
instruments already ‘antidilutive’ mean?
issued that could
increase the number
of shares.
5 Diluted EPS: Approach This is a regular IQ3: Test of dilution

convertible Although this topic topic for This is a
instruments won’t be entirely examination and comprehensive
Convertible new, you may not may arise in the question to enable a
instruments are one have considered the context of financial firm grasp of the
of the most indicators that a instruments. dilutive/ antidilutive
common reasons for convertible distinction,
dilution. instrument is
antidilutive.
Stop and think
What is the impact
of convertibles on
EPS?
6 Diluted EPS: Approach Next to convertibles, IQ4: Diluted

options The key method to options are the most earnings per share
Options are another take away is: common way that This is a crucial
reason for dilution. the complications of question as options
• Calculate the IAS 33 will be
Options are dilutive number of shares are new to
when they are ‘in tested. Advanced Level.
issued at market
the money’. price.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 11: Earnings per share 583

• Find the number

of shares issued
at nil
consideration
(the dilutive
shares).
• Add the dilutive
shares to the
number of shares
under basic EPS.
Stop and think
What is the impact
of options on EPS?
7 Diluted EPS: Approach These are usually N/A

contingently Key points to tested in the context
issuable shares remember: of performance-
These arise in a based options.
• Do not include
business the shares in
combination, where basic EPS unless
consideration takes and until issued.
the form of shares
which will only be
• Include in DEPS
issued if certain only if the
targets are met in conditions have
the future. been met.
• Include from the
They are also issued
beginning of the
to senior staff as a
period or the
reward for meeting
date of the
certain targets.
agreement if
later.
Stop and think
What is the impact
of contingently
issuable shares on
EPS?
8 Retrospective Approach This topic is most N/A

adjustments, Note how IAS 33 likely to be tested
presentation and interacts with IAS 8 by requiring DEPS
disclosure in requiring for prior periods to
Additional EPS adjustments be adjusted.
figures are often adjusted for the
reported by entities effects of errors and
based on what they those resulting from
consider to be changes in
sustainable accounting policies
earnings. These are accounted for
intended to provide retrospectively.
a more realistic Stop and think
measure of future
performance. Why are additional
EPS measures often
disclosed?
HB2021

HB2021

1 EPS: overview of material covered in earlier
studies
Section overview
This section reviews the material on basic and diluted earnings per share covered at Professional
Level.
1.1 Scope
IAS 33, Earnings per Share applies to entities whose ordinary shares are publicly traded or are in the
process of being issued in public markets.
1.2 Basic earnings per share (EPS)

• Basic earnings per share (EPS) is calculated as:
(Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent) ÷ (Weighted average number of
ordinary shares outstanding during the period)
• Profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders is based on profit after tax after the deduction of
preference dividends and other financing costs in relation to preference shares classified as
equity under IAS 32. Whether an adjustment is needed depends on the type of preference share:
Redeemable No adjustment is required as these shares are classified as liabilities and the
preference shares finance charge relating to them will already have been charged to profit or
loss as part of finance charges.
Irredeemable These shares are classified as equity and the dividend relating to them is
preference shares disclosed in the statement of changes in equity. This dividend must be
deducted from profit for the year to arrive at profit attributable to the
ordinary shareholders.
• The weighted average number of shares should be adjusted for changes in the number of shares
without a corresponding change in resources, for example a bonus issue, by assuming that the
new number of shares had always been in issue.
Shares should generally be included in the weighted average number of shares from the date the
consideration for their issue is receivable.
• An entity is required to calculate and present a basic EPS amount based on the profit or loss for
the period attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the parent entity. If results from
‘continuing operations’ and ‘discontinued operations’ are reported separately, EPS on these
results should also be separately reported.
1.3 Diluted earnings per share

• A diluted EPS figure should also be reported by an entity. A dilution is a reduction in the EPS
figure (or increase in a loss per share) that will result from the issue of more equity shares on the
conversion of convertible instruments already issued.
• For the purpose of calculating diluted earnings per share, an entity shall adjust profit or loss
attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity, and the weighted average number of
shares outstanding for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares.
1.4 Presentation
• Basic and diluted EPS figures (and from continuing operations if reported separately) should be
presented on the face of the statement of comprehensive income with equal prominence.
• Where changes in ordinary shares occur during the accounting period, an amendment is
necessary to the number of shares used in the EPS calculations. In some situations, the EPS in
prior periods will also have to be adjusted.
HB2021

• Treasury shares are accounted for as a deduction from shareholders’ funds. Since such shares are
no longer available in the market, they are excluded from the weighted average number of
ordinary shares for the purpose of calculating EPS.
Interactive question 1: Adjustment for preference shares

A company has issued £100,000 4% redeemable non-cumulative preference shares. Should the
dividend be subtracted from the reported profit after tax figure for the calculation of EPS?
1.4.1 Auditing issues

Clearly, the main auditing issues with EPS can be summarised as follows:
• Ensuring that the stated EPS figures comply with IAS 33 (for example, obtaining a breakdown of
the amounts and tracing each of them back to their source)
• Ensuring that both basic and diluted EPS figures are presented (so obtaining a copy of the draft
financial statements to vouch this)
• Addressing any other disclosure issues as required (for example, treasury shares) by reference to
the draft financial statements
2 Basic EPS: weighted average number of shares

Section overview
This section deals with certain adjustments to the number of shares used for the calculation of basic
earnings per share.
IAS 33 requires that a time-weighted average number of shares should be used in the denominator
of the earnings per share calculation. The basic idea of how to calculate such a weighted average has
been covered at Professional Level. In this section we deal with issues relating to the treatment of
share repurchases, partly paid shares, bonus and rights issues and the impact of consolidation.
2.1 Calculation of the weighted average number of shares

The use of the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period reflects
the possibility that the amount of shareholders’ capital varied during the period.
The weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period is the number of
ordinary shares outstanding at the beginning of the period, adjusted by the number of ordinary
shares bought back or issued during the period multiplied by a time-weighting factor.
2.2 Time weights determination

Shares are usually included in the weighted average number of shares from the date consideration is
receivable (which is generally the date of their issue), for example:
• Ordinary shares issued in exchange for cash are included when cash is receivable.
• Ordinary shares issued on the voluntary reinvestment of dividends on ordinary or preference
shares are included when dividends are reinvested.
• Ordinary shares issued as a result of the conversion of a debt instrument to ordinary shares are
included from the date that interest ceases to accrue.
• Ordinary shares issued in place of interest or principal on other financial instruments are included
from the date that interest ceases to accrue.
• Ordinary shares issued in exchange for the settlement of a liability of the entity are included from
the settlement date.
• Ordinary shares issued as consideration for the acquisition of an asset other than cash are
included as of the date on which the acquisition is recognised.
HB2021

• Ordinary shares issued for the rendering of services to the entity are included as the services are
rendered.
• Ordinary shares issued as part of the cost of a business combination are included in the weighted
average number of shares from the acquisition date. This is because the acquirer incorporates
into its results the acquiree’s profits and losses from that date.
• Ordinary shares that will be issued upon the conversion of a mandatorily convertible instrument
are included in the calculation of basic earnings per share from the date the contract is entered
into.
• Contingently issuable shares are included in the calculation of basic earnings per share only from
the date when all necessary conditions for their issue are satisfied. Shares that are issuable solely
after the passage of time are not contingently issuable shares, because the passage of time is a
certainty.
• Outstanding ordinary shares that are contingently returnable (ie, subject to recall) are excluded
from the calculation of basic earnings per share until the date the shares are no longer subject to
recall.
Worked example: Weighted average number of ordinary shares

The following information is provided for an entity.
Shares Treasury Shares

issued shares outstanding
1 Jan 20X1 Balance at beginning of year 2,000 300 1,700
31 May 20X1 Issue of new shares for cash 800 – 2,500
1 Dec 20X1 Purchase of treasury shares for cash – 250 2,250
31 Dec 20X1 Balance at year end 2,800 550 2,250
Requirement
Calculate the weighted average number of shares in issue during the year.
Solution
The calculation can be performed on a cumulative basis:
Weighted average
1 Jan X1 – 30 May X1 1,700 × 5/12 708
Share issue 800
31 May X1 – 30 Nov X1 2,500 × 6/12 1,250
Share purchase (250)
1 Dec X1 – 31 Dec X1 2,250 × 1/12 188
2,146
or alternatively each issue or recall treated separately:
Weighted average
1 Jan X1 – 31 Dec X1 1,700 12/12 1,700
31 May X1 – 31 Dec X1 800 7/12 467
1 Dec X1 – 31 Dec X1 (250) 1/12 (21)
2,146
HB2021

2.3 Partly paid shares
Where ordinary shares are issued but not fully paid, they are treated in the calculation of basic
earnings per share as a fraction of an ordinary share to the extent that they were entitled to
participate in dividends during the period relative to a fully paid ordinary share.
To the extent that partly paid shares are not entitled to participate in dividends during the period
they are treated as the equivalent of warrants or options in the calculation of diluted earnings per
share. The unpaid balance is assumed to represent proceeds used to purchase ordinary shares. The
number of shares included in diluted earnings per share is the difference between the number of
shares subscribed and the number of shares assumed to be purchased.
Worked example: Partly paid shares

At 1 January 20X5 an entity had 900 ordinary shares in issue. It issued 600 new shares at 1
September 20X5, at a subscription price of £4 per share. At the date of issue each shareholder paid
£2. The balance of £2 per share will be paid during 20X6. Each part-paid share will be entitled to
dividends in proportion to the percentage of the issue price paid up on the share. The entity has a
year end of 31 December.
Requirement
Calculate the weighted average number of shares for the year ended 31 December 20X5.
Solution
The new shares issued should be included in the calculation of the weighted average number of
shares in proportion to the percentage of the issue price received from the shareholding during the
period.
Weighted
Shares Fraction of average
issued period shares
1 January 20X5 – 31 August 20X5 900 8/12 600
Issue of new shares for cash, part paid (2/4 × 600) 300
1 September 20X5 – 31 December 20X5 1,200 4/12 400
Weighted average number of shares 1,000
2.4 The impact of bonus issues and share consolidations on the number of shares
The weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period must be adjusted
for events that have changed the number of ordinary shares outstanding without a corresponding
change in resources. These include the following:
• Bonus issues (capitalisation issues)
• Share consolidation
2.4.1 Bonus issue

In a bonus or capitalisation issue, or a share split, ordinary shares are issued to existing shareholders
for no additional consideration. Therefore, the number of ordinary shares outstanding is increased
without a corresponding increase in resources.
The number of ordinary shares outstanding before the event is adjusted for the proportionate
change in the number of ordinary shares outstanding as if the event had occurred at the beginning
of the earliest period presented. For example, on a 2 for 1 bonus issue, the number of ordinary
shares outstanding before the issue is multiplied by three to obtain the new total number of ordinary
shares, or by two to obtain the number of additional ordinary shares.
HB2021

Bonus issue after the reporting date
Where a bonus issue takes place after the reporting date but before the financial statements are
authorised for issue, the number of shares in the EPS calculation is adjusted for the current and prior
periods as though the bonus issue took place during the current year.
Worked example: Bonus issue

The following information is given for an entity.
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders for y/e 30 September 20X6 £300
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders for y/e 30 September 20X7 £900
Ordinary shares outstanding until 30 September 20X7 200
Bonus issue 1 October 20X7 – two ordinary shares for each ordinary share
outstanding at 30 September 20X7
Requirement
Calculate the basic earnings per share for 20X6 and 20X7.
Solution
The bonus issue arose in the period after the reporting date. It should be treated as if the bonus issue
arose during 20X7, and EPS calculated accordingly:
Additional shares issued 200 × 2 = 400
Basic EPS 20X7
£900 ÷ (200 + 400) = £1.50
Basic EPS 20X6
£300 ÷ (200 + 400) = £0.50
2.4.2 Share consolidation

A consolidation of ordinary shares generally reduces the number of ordinary shares outstanding
without a corresponding reduction in resources.
Sometimes, however, shares are repurchased at fair value, and in this instance, there is a
corresponding reduction in resources. An example is a share consolidation combined with a special
dividend. In this case, the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding for the period is
adjusted for the reduction in the number of ordinary shares from the date the special dividend is
recognised.
Worked example: Share consolidation

At the start of its financial year ended 31 December 20X5, an entity had 10 million ordinary shares in
issue. On 30 April 20X5 it issued three million shares in consideration for the acquisition of a majority
holding in another entity. On 31 August 20X5 it went through a share reconstruction by
consolidating the shares in issue, on the basis of one new share for two old shares.
Requirement
Calculate the weighted number of shares in issue for the year to 31 December 20X5.
Solution
The three million new shares issued at the time of the acquisition should be weighted from the date
of issue, but the consolidation should be related back to the start of the financial year (and to the
start of any previous years presented as comparative figures).
The calculation of the weighted number of shares in issue is as follows:
HB2021

Adjusted
Number Weighting number
At 1 January 20X5 10,000,000
Effect of consolidation is to halve the number of shares
(since one new share was issued for every two old
shares held) (5,000,000)
5,000,000 12/12 5,000,000
30 April 20X5 issue 3,000,000

Effect of consolidation is to halve the number of shares (1,500,000)
1,500,000 8/12 1,000,000
Weighted average shares in issue 6,000,000
Worked example: Special dividend and share consolidation

A company has issued 20,000 shares with a nominal value of 20p each. At the beginning of 20X7 it
considers whether to launch a share repurchase of 2,000 shares at the current market price of £2 per
share, or pay a special dividend of 20p per share to be followed by a share consolidation of 9 new
shares for 10 old shares. The profit after tax for 20X6 and 20X7 is expected to be £4,000 for each
year. Interest rates stand at 5% and the company tax rate is 20%.
Requirement
Calculate the basic EPS for the two alternatives.
Solution
Basic EPS
(1) Share repurchase at fair value
20X7 20X6
£ £
Loss of interest as cash
paid out £4,000 × 0.05 × 0.80* (160) ––––––
Earnings 3,840 4,000
Number of shares outstanding 18,000 20,000
Earnings per share 21.33p 20.00p
(2) Special dividend followed by share consolidation
20X7 20X6
£ £
Loss of interest on cash paid out as dividend
£4,000 × 0.05 × 0.80* (160) ––––
Earnings 3,840 4,000
HB2021

The effect of share consolidation is to leave the total nominal value of outstanding shares the same,
but to reduce the number of shares from 20,000 to 18,000, and raising the market price of a share
from £2 to £2.22.
20X7 20X6
Number of shares 18,000 20,000
Earnings per share 21.33p 20.00p
No adjustment to prior year’s EPS is made for the share consolidation.

* 0.80 = (1 – tax rate)
2.5 Rights issue

A rights issue is an issue of shares for cash to the existing ordinary equity holders in proportion to
their current shareholdings, at a discount to the current market price.
Because the issue price is below the market price, a rights issue is in effect a combination of an issue
at fair value and a bonus issue.
In order to calculate the weighted average number of shares when there has been a rights issue, an
adjustment factor is required:
Adjustment factor = Pre-rights issue price of shares ÷ Theoretical ex-rights price (TERP)
The TERP is the theoretical price at which the shares would trade after the rights issue and takes into
account the diluting effect of the bonus element in the rights issue. It is calculated as:
TERP = (Total market value of original shares pre-rights issue + Proceeds of rights issue) ÷ Number of
shares post rights issue
The adjustment factor is used to increase the number of shares in issue before the rights issue for the
bonus element.
Where the rights are to be publicly traded separately from the shares before the exercise date, fair
value for the purposes of this calculation is established at the close of the last day on which the
shares are traded together with the rights.
Worked example: Rights issue

The following information is provided for an entity which is making a rights issue.
20X4 20X5 20X6

Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity £1,100 £1,500 £1,800
Shares outstanding before rights issue: 500 shares

Rights issue: One new share for each five outstanding shares (100 new shares total)
Exercise price: £5.00
Date of rights issue: 1 January 20X5
Last date to exercise rights: 1 March 20X5
Market price of one ordinary share immediately before exercise on 1 March 20X5: £11.00
Reporting date 31 December
Requirement
Calculate the theoretical ex-rights value per share and the basic EPS for each of the years 20X4, 20X5
and 20X6.
HB2021

Solution
Calculation of theoretical ex-rights value per share
No. Price Total

Pre-rights issue holding 5 £11 £55
Rights share 1 £5 £5
6 £60
Therefore TERP = £60/6 = £10

(The TERP may also be calculated on the basis of all shares in issue ie, £6,000/600 shares.)
Calculation of adjustment factor
Adjustment factor = Fair value share before exercise of rights ÷ Theoretical ex-rights value per share
Calculation of basic earnings per share
20X4
20X4 basic EPS as originally

reported: £1,100 ÷ 500 shares = £2.20
20X4 basic EPS restated for rights
issue in 20X5 accounts: £1,000 ÷ (500 shares) × (adjustment factor) = £2.00
Alternatively the restated EPS may be calculated by applying the reciprocal of the adjustment factor
to the basic EPS as originally reported:
£2.20 × 10/11 = £2.00
20X5
Weighted average number of shares:
1 January – 28 February 500 × 11/10 × 2/12 92

Rights issue 100
1 March – 31 December 600 × 10/12 500
592
Basic EPS including effects of rights issue: £1,500 ÷ 592 shares = £2.53
20X6
Basic EPS: £1,800 ÷ 600 shares = £3.00
Worked example: Cash and rights issue

An entity had 14 million ordinary shares in issue on 1 January 20X4 and 20X5. In its financial year
ended 31 December 20X5 it issued further shares, as follows:
• On 1 April 20X5, 4 million shares in consideration for the majority holding in another entity.
• On 1 July 20X5 a rights issue of 1 for 6 at £15 when the market price of the existing shares was
£20. There were 18 million shares in issue at this date, another 3 million shares were therefore
issued.
A profit of £17 million attributable to the ordinary equity holders was reported for 20X5 and £14
million for 20X4.
Requirement
Calculate the earnings per share for 20X5 and restate the comparative for 20X4.
HB2021

Solution
As the shares issued on the acquisition were issued at full fair value, a time apportionment
adjustment over the period they are in issue is required.
The rights issue shares require a time apportionment adjustment and an adjustment for the bonus
element in the rights. The latter adjustment should be applied to the shares issued on 1 April as well
as to those issued earlier.
To adjust for the bonus element the theoretical ex-rights fair value per share is required:
Computation of theoretical ex-rights price (TERP):
No. Price Total

Pre-rights issue holding 6 £20 £120
Rights share 1 £15 £15
7 £135
Therefore TERP = £135/7 = £19.29

The adjustment factor is therefore £20/£19.29
20X4 and earlier EPS figures would be adjusted by dividing the corresponding earnings figure by
1.037.
The weighted number of shares in issue in 20X5 is calculated as:
Number Weighting Adjusted number

1 January to 31 March 14,000,000 × 20/19.29 3/12 3,628,823
Issue 1 April 4,000,000
1 April to 30 June 18,000,000 × 20/19.29 3/12 4,665,630
Rights issue 1 July 3,000,000
1 July to 31 December 21,000,000 6/12 10,500,000
20X5 EPS:
£17m/18,794,453 shares = £0.90
20X4 restatement – original EPS: £14m ÷ 14m shares = £1.00
£1.00 × 19.29/20.00 = £0.96
3 Basic EPS: profits attributable to ordinary

equity holders
Section overview
In this section we discuss the adjustments that are required to earnings as a result of preference
shares, in order to calculate profits attributable to ordinary shareholders (equity holders).
As we have seen in earlier studies, for the purpose of calculating basic earnings per share, we must
calculate the amounts attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity in respect of profit
or loss.
HB2021

This is done in two steps:
• First the profit or loss which includes all items of income and expense that are recognised in a
period, including tax expense, dividends on preference shares classified as liabilities or non-
controlling interest is calculated according to IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements.
• In the second step the calculated profit or loss is adjusted for the after-tax amounts of preference
dividends, differences arising on the settlement of preference shares, and other similar effects of
preference shares classified as equity under IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation.
3.1 Adjusting earnings for the impact of preference shares

Where an entity has preference shares in issue depending on their terms these will be classified
under IAS 32 as either:
• financial liabilities; or
• equity.
3.1.1 Preference shares classified as equity

Any dividends and other appropriations (for example, amortised premium or discount) is debited
directly to equity, in the statement of changes in equity. Therefore an adjustment is required to
deduct these amounts from the profit for the period in order to derive the profit attributable to
ordinary shareholders (equity holders).
3.1.2 Preference shares classified as liabilities

Any dividends or other appropriations are treated as finance costs in arriving at profit for the period
and no adjustment is required.
In both the above cases the treatment is the same, as in both cases the amounts are deducted from
profit attributable to ordinary shareholders. In the latter case the deduction will already have been
made in arriving at reported profit and loss, however in the former case an adjustment to reported
profits is required.
3.1.3 Cumulative preference shares

Where preference shares are cumulative, the dividends for the period need to be taken into account
irrespective of whether these have been declared or not.
3.1.4 Non-cumulative preference shares

For non-cumulative preference dividends only the amount of dividend declared for the period
should be deducted in arriving at profit or loss attributed to ordinary equity holders.
Interactive question 2: Redeemable preference shares

Turaco is a company listed on a recognised stock exchange. Given below is an extract from its
statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X6.
£
Tax 150,000
Profit after tax 350,000
The company paid an ordinary dividend of £20,000 and a dividend on its redeemable preference
shares of £70,000.
The company had £100,000 of £0.50 ordinary shares in issue throughout the year and authorised
share capital of 1,000,000 ordinary shares.
Requirement
What is the basic earnings per share figure for the year according to IAS 33, Earnings per Share?
HB2021

3.1.5 Other adjustments in respect of preference shares
Increasing rate preference shares
These are preference shares that provide for a low initial dividend to compensate an entity for selling
the preference shares at a discount, or an above-market dividend in later periods to compensate
investors for purchasing preference shares at a premium.
Under IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation and IFRS 9, Financial Instruments any original issue
discount or premium on increasing rate preference shares is amortised using the effective interest
method and treated as a preference dividend for the purposes of calculating earnings per share.
In addition, there may be other elements amortised such as transaction costs.
All these elements should be deducted in arriving at the earnings attributed to ordinary equity
holders.
Note: The sale of shares at a discount is not allowed by UK Company Law, however it may be
permitted in certain jurisdictions, and is therefore examinable
Worked example: Increasing rate preference shares

Dennison Co issued non-convertible, non-redeemable class A cumulative preference shares of £100
par value on 1 January 20X1. The class A preference shares are entitled to a cumulative annual
dividend of £7 per share starting in 20X4.
At the time of issue, the market rate dividend yield on the class A preference shares was 7% a year.
Thus, Dennison Co could have expected to receive proceeds of approximately £100 per class A
preference share if the dividend rate of £7 per share had been in effect at the date of issue.
There was, however, to be no dividend paid for the first three years after issue. In consideration of
these dividend payment terms, the class A preference shares were issued at £81.63 per share ie, at a
discount of £18.37 per share. The issue price can be calculated by taking the present value of £100,
discounted at 7% over a three-year period.
Requirement
Calculate the imputed dividends attributable to preference shares that need to be deducted from
earnings to determine the profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders.
Solution
Because the shares are classified as equity, the original issue discount is amortised to retained
earnings using the effective interest method and treated as a preference dividend for earnings per
share purposes. To calculate basic earnings per share, the following imputed dividend per class A
preference share is deducted to determine the profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of
the parent entity.
Carrying amount of class A Imputed Carrying amount of class A Dividend

Year preference shares 1 Jan dividend preference shares 31 Dec paid
£ £ £ £
20X1 81.63 5.71 87.34 –
20X2 87.34 6.12 93.46 –
20X3 93.46 6.54 100.00 –
Thereafter 100.00 7.00 107.00 (7.00)
Convertible preference shares

An entity may achieve early conversion of convertible preference shares by improving the original
conversion terms or paying additional consideration.
• Where this is the case, then the excess amount transferred as a result of the improvement of
conversion terms is treated as a return to the preference shareholders and so should be deducted
in arriving at earnings attributable to ordinary equity holders.
HB2021

Fair value of ordinary shares Fair value of ordinary shares
Deduction = –
issued/consideration paid issuable under original terms
Worked example: Cumulative convertible preference shares

An entity issued £100,000 2% cumulative convertible preference shares in 20X4 and the shares were
due to be converted in the current year, 20X6.
The convertible shares were converted at the beginning of 20X6 and no dividend was accrued in
respect of the year, although the previous year’s dividend was paid immediately before conversion.
The terms of conversion were also amended and the revised terms entitled the preference
shareholders to a total additional 100 ordinary shares on conversion with a fair value of £300.
Requirement
If the profit attributable to ordinary equity holders for the year is £150,000 what adjustments need to
be made for the purpose of calculating EPS in 20X6?
Solution
The excess of the fair value of additional ordinary shares issued on conversion of the convertible
preference shares over fair values of the ordinary shares to which they would have been entitled
under the original conversion terms is deducted from profit as it is an additional return to the
convertible preference shareholders.
£
Profits attributable to the ordinary equity holders 150,000
Fair value of additional ordinary shares issued on conversion of convertible
preference shares (300)
149,700
There is no adjustment in respect of the preference shares as no dividend accrual was made in
respect of the year. The payment of the previous year’s cumulative dividend is ignored for EPS
purposes as it will have been adjusted for in the prior year.
Repurchase of preference shares

• Where the fair value of consideration paid to preference shareholders exceeds the carrying value
of the preference shares repurchased, the excess is a return to the preference shareholders and
must be deducted in calculating profits attributable to ordinary equity holders.
• Where the carrying value of preference shares repurchased exceeds the fair value of
consideration paid, the excess is added in calculating profit attributable to ordinary equity
holders.
In respect of preference shares that are classified as liabilities, the above adjustments, where these
are relevant, would have already been made in arriving at the profit or loss for the period.
Worked example: Repurchase of preference shares

An entity has issued £100,000 8% non-redeemable non-cumulative preference shares. Half way
through the year, the entity repurchased half of the preference shares at a discount of £1,000. No
dividends were paid on these shares in respect of the amounts repurchased or outstanding at the
end of the year.
Requirement
If the profit attributable to ordinary equity holders for the year is £150,000, what adjustments should
be made for the purpose of calculating EPS?
HB2021

Solution
Adjustments
£
Profit for the year attributed to ordinary equity holders 150,000
Plus discount on repurchasing of preference shares 1,000
151,000
The discount on repurchase of the preference shares has been credited to equity and it must
therefore be adjusted against profit.
Had there been a premium payable on repurchase, the loss on repurchase would have been
subtracted from profit.
No accrual for the dividend on the 8% preference shares is required as these are non-cumulative.
Had a dividend been paid for the year it would have been deducted from profit for the purpose of
calculating basic EPS as the shares are treated as equity and the dividend would have been charged
to equity in the financial statements.
3.2 Participating securities and two-class ordinary shares

The equity of some entities includes:
• instruments that participate in dividends with ordinary shares according to a predetermined
formula (for example, 2 for 1) with an upper limit on the extent of participation (for example, up to,
but not beyond, a specified amount per share); or
• a class of ordinary shares with a different dividend rate from that of another class of ordinary
shares.
Profit or loss for the period is allocated to the different classes of shares and participating equity
instruments in accordance with their dividend rights or other rights to participate in undistributed
earnings.
To calculate basic earnings per share:
• Profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity is adjusted as previously
discussed.
• The remaining profit or loss is allocated to ordinary shares and participating equity instruments to
the extent that each instrument shares in earnings as if all of the profit or loss for the period had
been distributed. The total profit or loss allocated to each class of equity instrument is determined
by adding together the amount allocated for dividends and the amount allocated for a
participation feature.
• The total amount of profit or loss allocated to each class of equity instrument is divided by the
number of outstanding instruments to which the earnings are allocated to determine the earnings
per share for the instrument.
Worked example: Participating equity instruments

The following information is provided for an entity.
Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent entity £100,000

Ordinary shares outstanding 10,000
Non-convertible preference shares 6,000
Non-cumulative annual dividend on preference shares
(before any dividend is paid on ordinary shares) £5.50 per share
After ordinary shares have been paid at a dividend of £2.10 per share, the preference shares
participate in any additional dividends on a 20:80 ratio with ordinary shares.
Dividends on preference shares paid – £33,000 (£5.50 per share × 6,000 shares)
HB2021

Dividends on ordinary shares paid – £21,000 (£2.10 per share × 10,000 shares)
Requirement
Calculate the earnings attributable to ordinary shares.
Solution
Basic earnings per share is calculated as follows
£ £
Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent entity 100,000
Less dividends paid:
Preference 33,000
Ordinary 21,000
(54,000)
Undistributed earnings 46,000
Allocation of undistributed earnings

Let A be the allocation of undistributed earnings per ordinary share and B the allocation per
preference share. That is:
(A × 10,000) + (B × 6,000) = £46,000
As B’s entitlement is one quarter that of A’s, we can eliminate B from the equation as follows:
(A × 10,000) + (1/4 × A × 6,000) = £46,000
10,000A + 1,500A = £46,000
11,500A = £46,000
A = £46,000/11,500
A = £4.00
Therefore B = £1.00
Basic per share amounts Basic per share amounts
Per preference share Per ordinary share

Distributed earnings £5.50 £2.10
Undistributed earnings £1.00 £4.00
Totals £6.50 £6.10
As we have seen, although the basic EPS calculation is straightforward, a great deal of information
needs to be assimilated and understood, both regarding earnings (adjustments for preference
shares) and weighted average number of shares (changes in share capital). The two interact.
HB2021

Section overview
This section deals with the adjustments required to earnings in order to take into account the dilutive
impact of potential ordinary shares.
The objective of diluted earnings per share is consistent with that of basic earnings per share; that is,
to provide a measure of the interest of each ordinary share in the performance of an entity taking
into account dilutive potential ordinary shares outstanding during the period.
4.1 Potential ordinary shares

Potential ordinary shares are financial instruments or other contracts that may entitle their holders to
ordinary shares. Potential ordinary shares are as follows:
• Various financial liabilities or equity instruments, including preference shares that are convertible
into ordinary shares
• Options
• Warrants
• Shares that would be issued on satisfaction of certain conditions that result from contractual
arrangements, such as the purchase of a business or other assets
The conversion of potential ordinary shares will lead in the future to an increase in the weighted
average number of ordinary shares outstanding by the weighted average number of additional
ordinary shares that would have been outstanding assuming the conversion of all dilutive potential
ordinary shares.
Conversion may also lead to consequential changes in income or expenses. For example, the
reduction of interest expense related to convertible debt and the resulting increase in profit or
reduction in loss may lead to an increase in the expense related to a non-discretionary employee
profit-sharing plan.
For the purpose of calculating diluted earnings per share, profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity
holders of the parent entity is adjusted for any such consequential changes in income or expense.
4.2 Dilutive and antidilutive potential ordinary shares

Potential ordinary shares are dilutive when their conversion to ordinary shares would decrease
earnings per share or increase loss per share from continuing operations.
Potential ordinary shares are antidilutive when their conversion to ordinary shares would increase
earnings per share or decrease loss per share from continuing operations. Antidilution is therefore
the situation where the ‘diluted’ EPS is greater than the basic EPS (or where there is a lower loss per
share). IAS 33 defines antidilution as follows.
Definition
Antidilution: An increase in earnings per share or a reduction in loss per share resulting from the
assumption that convertible instruments are converted, that options or warrants are exercised, or that
ordinary shares are issued upon the satisfaction of specified conditions.
In computing diluted EPS only potential ordinary shares that are dilutive are considered in the
calculations. The calculation ignores the effects of potential ordinary shares that would have an
antidilutive effect on earnings per share.
Determining whether potential ordinary shares are dilutive or antidilutive
In determining whether potential ordinary shares are dilutive or antidilutive, each issue or series of
potential ordinary shares is considered separately rather than in aggregate.
HB2021

A separate EPS calculation is performed for each potential share issue.
(a) Those individual EPS which exceed the entity’s basic EPS are disregarded as they are antidilutive.
(b) Those individual EPS which are less than the entity’s basic EPS are dilutive and are ranked from
most to least dilutive. Options and warrants are generally included first because they do not
affect the numerator of the calculation. These dilutive factors are added one by one into the
DEPS calculation in order to identify the maximum dilution.
The calculation showing each issue or series of potential ordinary shares being considered
separately is shown in the worked example Convertible loan stock 2.
4.3 Computation of diluted earnings

For the purpose of calculating diluted earnings per share, the profit or loss attributable to ordinary
equity holders of the parent entity should be adjusted for the after-tax effect of:
• any dividends or other items related to dilutive potential ordinary shares deducted in arriving at
profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders;
• any interest recognised in the period related to dilutive potential ordinary shares; and
• any other changes in income or expense that would result from the conversion of the dilutive
potential ordinary shares.
After the potential ordinary shares are converted into ordinary shares, the dividends, interest and any
other expenses associated with the potential ordinary shares will no longer arise. Instead, the new
ordinary shares are entitled to participate in profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of
the parent entity. The expenses associated with potential ordinary shares include transaction costs
and discounts accounted for in accordance with the effective interest method.
4.4 Calculation of the number of shares

In the calculation of diluted earnings per share, the number of ordinary shares in the denominator is
the weighted average number of ordinary shares calculated for the basic earnings per share plus the
weighted average number of ordinary shares that would be issued on the conversion of all the
dilutive potential ordinary shares into ordinary shares. That is:
Number of shares in diluted Number of shares in basic Dilutive potential

= +
earnings per share earnings per share ordinary shares
• Dilutive potential ordinary shares shall be deemed to have been converted into ordinary shares at
the beginning of the period or, if later, the date of the issue of the potential ordinary shares (ie,
where the convertible instruments or options are issued during the current period).
• Potential ordinary shares are weighted for the period they are outstanding.
• Potential ordinary shares that are cancelled or allowed to lapse during the period are included in
the calculation of diluted earnings per share only for the portion of the period during which they
are outstanding.
• Potential ordinary shares that are converted into ordinary shares during the period are included in
the calculation of diluted earnings per share from the beginning of the period to the date of
conversion. From the date of conversion, the resulting ordinary shares are included in both basic
and diluted earnings per share.
• The number of ordinary shares that would be issued on conversion of dilutive potential ordinary
shares is determined from the terms of the potential ordinary shares. When more than one basis
of conversion exists, the calculation assumes the most advantageous conversion rate or exercise
price from the standpoint of the holder of the potential ordinary shares.
HB2021

5 Diluted earnings per share: convertible
instruments
Section overview
This section deals with the impact of convertible instruments on the diluted earnings per share.
5.1 Convertible instruments

Convertible instruments, such as convertible loan stock or convertible preference shares impact both
the profit or loss attributed to ordinary equity holders, and the number of ordinary shares, on
conversion.
Where this has a dilutive effect, the instrument should be taken into account when calculating diluted
earnings per share (DEPS).
Indicators that convertible instruments are antidilutive
Convertible preference shares are antidilutive whenever the amount of the dividend on such shares
declared in, or accumulated for, the current period per ordinary share obtainable on conversion
exceeds basic earnings per share.
Similarly, convertible debt is antidilutive whenever its interest (net of tax and other changes in
income or expense) per ordinary share obtainable on conversion exceeds basic earnings per share.
Worked example: Convertible loan stock 1

On 1 January 20X5 entity A had in issue:
• 24 million ordinary shares of £1 nominal value each; and
• £8 million of 8% convertible loan stock. These were issued on 1 January 20X5 and are convertible
at any time from 1 January 20X8. The conversion terms are one ordinary share for each £2
nominal of loan stock.
The split accounting required for compound financial instruments per IAS 32 resulted in a liability
element for the loan stock of £7 million and an effective interest rate of 10%.
After charging income tax at 20%, the entity reported profit attributable to the ordinary equity
holders of £15 million for its year ended 31 December 20X5.
Requirement
Calculate the basic and diluted earnings per share for 20X5.
Solution
Basic EPS
£15m/24m shares = £0.63
Diluted EPS
To calculate the diluted earnings per share we need to consider the impact on both earnings and
number of shares.
Impact on earnings: On conversion, after tax earnings attributed to ordinary shareholders

should be increased by the reduction in the interest charge payable to
loan holders.
Taking tax into account, the interest saved will be:
£7m × 0.1 × (1 – 0.2) = £0.56m
Therefore diluted earnings = £15m + £0.56m = £15.56m
HB2021

Impact on number of On conversion the number of ordinary shares will increase by £8m/2 =
shares: 4 million shares, raising the number of ordinary shares after conversion
to 28 million ordinary shares.
Therefore DEPS = £15.56m/28 million shares = £0.56
The approach to calculating diluted EPS requires skills at structuring the problem. First basic EPS
needs to be calculated. Then the profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent
entity needs to be adjusted for dividends, interest or relating to the dilutive potential of any other
changes in income or expense that would result from the conversion of the dilutive potential
ordinary shares. Then the basic EPS denominator needs to be adjusted for the weighted average
number of ordinary shares that would be issued on the conversion of all the dilutive potential
ordinary shares into ordinary shares.
Interactive question 3: Test of dilution

The issued share capital of Entity A at 31 December 20X5 was 2,000,000 ordinary shares of £1 each.
On 1 January 20X6, Entity A issued £1,500,000 of 7% convertible loan stock for cash at par. (Ignore
the requirement to split the value of a compound financial instrument.) Each £100 nominal of the
loan stock may be converted into 140 ordinary shares at any time after 1 January 20X9.
The profit before interest and taxation for the year ended 31 December 20X6 amounted to
£1,050,000 and arose exclusively from continuing operations. The rate of tax is 30%.
Requirement
Test whether the potential shares are dilutive.
Worked example: Convertible loan stock 2

On 1 January 20X5 Entity A had in issue:
(1) 20 million ordinary shares;
(2) £11 million of 6.5% convertible loan stock, convertible at any time from 1 January 20X7. The
conversion terms are one ordinary share for each £2 nominal of loan stock, the 1 January
carrying amount of the liability component is £10 million and the effective interest rate is 9%;
(3) £9 million of 6.75% convertible loan stock, convertible at any time from 1 January 20X8. The
carrying amount of the liability component is £8 million and the effective interest rate is 8%; and
(4) £12.6 million of 9% convertible loan stock, convertible at any time from 1 January 20X9. The
carrying amount of the liability component is £12 million and the effective interest rate is 12%.
The entity reported profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders of £4 million for its year ended
31 December 20X5.
Requirement
Ignoring taxes, calculate the diluted earnings per share.
Solution
The incremental earnings per share for each type of potential ordinary shares is shown below.
HB2021

Increase in Increase in Earnings per
earnings number of additional
(interest saved) shares share
£ £
£11 million of 6.5% convertible loan stock
£10m × 9% convertible loan stock 900,000
1 ordinary share for £2 nominal of loan stock 5,500,000 0.16
£9 million of 6.75% convertible loan stock
£8m × 8% convertible loan stock 640,000
£12.6 million of 9% convertible loan stock
£12m × 12% convertible loan stock 1,440,000
The earnings per share can be calculated adjusting both the earnings and the number of shares for
each type of potential shares, and the results are shown below. Each issue of potential ordinary
shares is added to the calculation at a time, taking the most dilutive factor first.
Number of Earnings per

Earnings shares share
£ £
Shares already in issue 4,000,000 20,000,000 0.20
Including 6.75% convertible loan stock 4,640,000 24,500,000 0.189
Including 6.5% convertible loan stock 5,540,000 30,000,000 0.185
Including 9% convertible loan stock 6,980,000 32,100,000 0.217
The diluted earnings per share will be £0.185. The 9% convertible loan stock is antidilutive since it
increases earnings per share, and it will not be taken into account in calculating diluted earnings per
share.
The above example is a good illustration of the skill of assimilating information (the position at the
start, the effect on both earnings and number of shares of each type of potential shares), as well as
the skill of using this information by presenting each effect in a logical layout in order to arrive at the
resulting diluted earnings per share figure.
5.2 Testing for dilution

In some cases some convertible preference shares are redeemed or converted in a period, and
others remain outstanding.
Where this occurs, any excess consideration paid on redemption or conversion is attributed to those
shares which have been redeemed or converted.
Outstanding convertible preference shares are therefore tested for dilution as normal and without
regard to this excess.
HB2021

6 Diluted EPS and options
Section overview
This section deals with the impact of options on diluted earnings per share.
Definition
Options and warrants: Financial instruments that give the holder the right to purchase ordinary
shares.
6.1 Options, warrants and their equivalents

Options and warrants are dilutive when they would result in the issue of ordinary shares for less than
the average market price of ordinary shares during the period (ie, when they are ‘in the money’).
To calculate diluted EPS where there are options or warrants, the potential ordinary shares at less
than average market price are treated as consisting of two elements:
• A contract to issue some shares at average market price. These shares are assumed to be fairly
priced and to be neither dilutive nor antidilutive. They are ignored in the calculation of diluted
EPS.
• A contract to issue the remaining ordinary shares for no consideration. These shares are dilutive
and are added to the number of ordinary shares outstanding in the calculation of diluted EPS.
Average market price of ordinary shares
• Theoretically every market transaction for an entity’s ordinary shares could be included in the
determination of the average market price. It is however adequate to use a simple average of
weekly or monthly prices.
• Generally, closing market prices are adequate for calculating the average market price. When
prices fluctuate widely, however, an average of the high and low prices usually produces a more
representative price.
• The method used to calculate the average market price must be used consistently unless it is no
longer representative because of changed conditions. For example, an entity that uses closing
market prices to calculate the average market price for several years of relatively stable prices
might change to an average of high and low prices if prices start fluctuating greatly and the
closing market prices no longer produce a representative average price.
Interactive question 4: Diluted earnings per share

At 31 December 20X6, the issued share capital of Entity A consisted of 3,000,000 ordinary shares of
20p each. Entity A has granted options that give holders the right to subscribe for ordinary shares
between 20X8 and 20X9 at 50p each. Options outstanding at 31 December 20X7 were 600,000.
There were no grants, exercises or lapses of options during the year. The profit after tax attributable
to ordinary equity holders for the year ended 31 December 20X7 amounted to £900,000 arising
from continuing operations. The average market price of one ordinary share during year 20X7 was
£1.50.
Requirement
Calculate the diluted earnings per share for 20X7.
6.2 Employee share options

The most common type of option that leads to earnings dilution is an employee share option
granted by a company to its employees.
HB2021

Employee share options give the right to the holder to acquire shares in the company at a price that
is fixed when the options are issued.
Employee share options can normally be exercised after a certain time eg, once the employee has
completed a period of service and within a certain period eg, over a period of five years after they
become exercisable.
Employee share options that can be exercised are vested options, whereas options that cannot yet
be exercised are unvested options.
Worked example: Vested options

The profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders of an entity for the year ended 31 December
20X5 was £30 million and the weighted average number of its ordinary shares in issue was 60
million. Its basic earnings per share was £0.50.
In addition, there was a weighted average of five million shares under options which had vested (ie,
were able to be exercised). The exercise price for the options was £21 and the average market price
per share over the year was £30.
Requirement
Calculate the diluted EPS.
Solution
The amount to be received on exercise is £21 × 5m = £105m
The number of shares issued at average market price is: £105m / £30 = 3.5m
The number of ‘free’ shares is: 5 million issued – 3.5 million issued at average market price = 1.5
million
Diluted earnings per share:
£30m/(60m + 1.5m) = £0.49
Where shares are unvested, the amount still to be recognised in profit or loss before the vesting date
must be taken into account when calculating the number of ‘free’ shares.
Worked example: Unvested options

Assume the same information as in above example, except that:
• the options have not yet vested; and
• the amount to be recognised in relation to these options in the entity’s profit or loss over future
accounting periods up to date of vesting, as calculated according to IFRS 2, is £15 million.
Requirement
Calculate the diluted EPS.
Solution
The amount to be recognised in profit or loss is reduced to a per share amount: £15m/5m = £3
This is added to the exercise price: £21 + £3 = £24
The amount to be received on exercise: £24 × 5m = £120m
The number of shares issued at average market price: £120m/£30 = 4m
The number of ‘free’ shares: 5m – 4m = 1m
Diluted earnings per share: £30m/(60m + 1m) = £0.49
HB2021

7 Diluted EPS: contingently issuable shares
Section overview
This section deals with the impact of contingently issuable shares on the number of ordinary shares
used in the calculation of diluted earnings per share.
7.1 Contingently issuable shares

The consideration for acquisitions of other entities may partly be in the form of shares which will only
be issued if certain targets are met in the future. The additional consideration is contingent
consideration and the additional shares are described as contingently issuable.
Contingently issuable shares may also arise where senior staff members are issued shares as a
performance reward.
• Until the shares are issued (if indeed they ever are), they should not be taken into account when
calculating basic EPS.
• They should be taken into account when calculating diluted EPS if and only if the conditions
leading to their issue have been satisfied. For these purposes the end of the accounting period is
treated as the end of the contingency period.
• Contingently issuable shares are included from the beginning of the period (or from the date of
the contingent share agreement, if later).
Worked example: Contingently issuable shares

20X5 was £20 million and the weighted average number of its ordinary shares in issue was 16
million. Basic earnings per share was therefore £1.25.
Under an agreement relating to a business combination, two million additional shares were to be
issued if the share price on 30 June 20X6 was £8 or above. On 31 December 20X5 the share price
was £9. Assuming the end of the reporting period was the end of the contingency period, the
condition would have been met.
Requirement
Determine the diluted EPS.
Solution
As the two million additional shares do not result in additional resources for the entity, they are
brought into the diluted earnings per share calculation from the start of the 20X5 reporting period.
The diluted earnings per share is therefore:
Diluted earnings per share = £20m/(16m + 2m) = £1.11
7.2 Conditions for issue

Contingently issuable shares are included within the calculation of diluted EPS where:
• the shares have not yet been issued
• the relevant performance criteria have been met
Future earnings
Achieving or maintaining a specified level of earnings for a particular period may be the condition
for contingent issue.
In this case, if the effect is dilutive, the calculation of diluted EPS is based on the number of ordinary
shares that would be issued if the amount of earnings at the end of the reporting period were the
amount of earnings at the end of the contingency period.
HB2021

Market price of shares
The number of ordinary shares contingently issuable may depend on the future market price of the
ordinary shares.
In this case, if the effect is dilutive, the calculation of diluted EPS is based on the number of ordinary
shares that would be issued if the market price at the end of the reporting period were the market
price at the end of the contingency period.
If the condition is based on an average of market prices over a period of time that extends beyond
the end of the reporting period, the average for the period of time that has lapsed is used.
Future earnings and market price of shares
The number of ordinary shares contingently issuable may depend on future earnings and future
prices of the ordinary shares.
In such cases, the number of ordinary shares included in the diluted EPS calculation is based on both
conditions (ie, earnings to date and the current market price at the end of the reporting period).
Contingently issuable ordinary shares are not included in the diluted earnings per share calculation
unless both conditions are met
Other conditions
In other cases, the number of ordinary shares contingently issuable may depend on a condition
other than earnings or market price (for example, the opening of a specific number of retail stores).
In this case, the contingently issuable ordinary shares are included in the calculation of diluted
earnings per share according to the status at the end of the reporting period
Cumulative targets
Note that where performance criteria involve a cumulative target, no dilution is accounted for until
the cumulative target has been met. For example, where the issue of shares is dependent upon
average profits of £300,000 over four years, the cumulative target is £1,200,000. No dilution is
accounted for until this cumulative target is met.
Worked example: Cumulative targets

A manufacturer has in issue 3,000,000 ordinary shares at 1 January 20X7. It agreed to issue 500,000
shares to its staff if factory output averages 100,000 units per annum over the period from 1 January
20X7 to 31 December 20X9. The shares are to be issued on 1 January 20Y0.
Results for the three periods are:
Units produced Profits
20X7 120,000 £780,000
20X8 99,000 £655,000
20X9 105,000 £745,000
Requirement
What are basic and diluted EPS in each of the years 20X7–20X9?
Solution
The cumulative target of 3 years × 100,000 units is not met in 20X7 and 20X8, therefore no dilution is
accounted for.
In 20X9, the cumulative target is met as is the average target, therefore a diluted EPS is disclosed:
Basic EPS Diluted EPS
20X7 £780,000 ÷ 3,000,000 shares £0.26 Not relevant
20X8 £655,000 ÷ 3,000,000 shares £0.22 Not relevant
HB2021

Basic EPS Diluted EPS
20X9 £745,000 ÷ 3,000,000 shares £0.25 £745,000 ÷ 3,500,000 £0.21

shares
7.3 Issue of contingently issuable shares

Where contingently issuable shares are issued at the end of a contingency period, they must be
included within the calculation of basic EPS. Any outstanding contingently issuable shares are
included in diluted EPS as discussed above.
Worked example: Contingently issuable shares

20X5 was £200 million and the number of its ordinary shares in issue at 1 January 20X5 was 80
million.
Under an agreement relating to a business combination, 12 million additional shares were to be
issued each time the entity’s products were ranked in the top three places in a consumer satisfaction
survey conducted by a well-known magazine. A maximum of 36 million shares was issuable under
this agreement and the products appeared in the top three places in surveys dated 28 February and
30 September 20X5.
There were no other issues of ordinary shares.
Requirement
Determine the basic and diluted EPS.
Solution
Basic earnings per share
The 24 million additional shares are weighted by the period they have been in issue:
Issued Weighting Adjusted number

1 January 20X5 – 28 February 80,000,000 2/12 13,333,333
Issued 28 February 12,000,000
1 March – 30 Sept 92,000,000 7/12 53,666,667
Issued 30 September 12,000,000
30 September – 31 December 104,000,000 3/12 26,000,000
Basic earnings per share = £200m/93m = £2.15

Diluted earnings per share
As the 24 million additional shares do not result in any additional resources for the entity, the diluted
calculation assumes all the new shares were issued at the start of the year (see section 2.4).
Diluted earnings per share = £200m/(80m + 12m + 12m) = £1.92
HB2021

8 Retrospective adjustments, presentation and
disclosure
Section overview
This section deals with retrospective adjustments to EPS and the provisions of IAS 33 concerning
presentation and disclosure.
8.1 Retrospective adjustment

Bonus issues, share splits and share consolidations
If the number of ordinary or potential ordinary shares outstanding increases as a result of a
capitalisation, bonus issue or share split, or decreases as a result of a share consolidation, the
calculation of basic and diluted earnings per share for all periods presented must be adjusted
retrospectively.
If these changes occur after the year end but before the financial statements are authorised for issue,
EPS calculations for all periods presented must be based on the new number of shares.
The fact that EPS calculations reflect such changes must be disclosed.
Prior period adjustments and errors
Basic and diluted earnings per share of all periods presented must be adjusted for the effects of
errors (IAS 8) and adjustments resulting from changes in accounting policies accounted for
retrospectively.
DEPS
An entity does not restate diluted earnings per share of any prior period presented for changes in
the assumptions used in earnings per share calculations or for the conversion of potential ordinary
shares into ordinary shares.
8.2 Presentation
• Please note the following key points regarding presentation.
• Basic and diluted EPS for the year (and from continuing operations if reported separately) must
be presented on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income with
equal prominence for all periods presented.
• Where a separate statement of profit or loss is presented, basic and diluted EPS should be
presented on the face of this statement.
• Earnings per share is presented for every period for which a statement of comprehensive income
is presented.
• If diluted earnings per share is reported for at least one period, it shall be reported for all periods
presented, even if it equals basic earnings per share.
• If basic and diluted earnings per share are equal, dual presentation can be accomplished in one
line on the statement of comprehensive income.
• An entity that reports a discontinued operation shall disclose the basic and diluted amounts per
share for the discontinued operation either on the face of the statement of comprehensive
income or in the notes.
• An entity shall present basic and diluted earnings per share, even if the amounts are negative (ie,
a loss per share).
HB2021

8.3 Disclosure
An entity shall disclose the following:
• The amounts used as the numerators in calculating basic and diluted earnings per share, and a
reconciliation of those amounts to profit or loss attributable to the parent entity for the period.
The reconciliation shall include the individual effect of each class of instruments that affects
earnings per share.
• The weighted average number of ordinary shares used as the denominator in calculating basic
and diluted earnings per share, and a reconciliation of these denominators to each other. The
reconciliation shall include the individual effect of each class of instruments that affects earnings
per share.
• Instruments (including contingently issuable shares) that could potentially dilute basic earnings
per share in the future, but were not included in the calculation of diluted earnings per share
because they are antidilutive for the period(s) presented.
• A description of ordinary share transactions or potential ordinary share transactions, other than
retrospective adjustments, that occur after the reporting date and that would have changed
significantly the number of ordinary shares or potential ordinary shares outstanding at the end of
the period if those transactions had occurred before the end of the reporting period.
Examples of transactions referred to in the paragraph above include the following:
• An issue of shares for cash
• An issue of shares when the proceeds are used to repay debt or preference shares outstanding at
the reporting date
• The redemption of ordinary shares outstanding
• The conversion or exercise of potential ordinary shares outstanding at the reporting date into
ordinary shares
• An issue of options, warrants, or convertible instruments
• The achievement of conditions that would result in the issue of contingently issuable shares
Earnings per share amounts are not adjusted for such transactions occurring after the reporting date
because such transactions do not affect the amount of capital used to produce profit or loss for the
period.
Financial instruments and other contracts generating potential ordinary shares may incorporate
terms and conditions that affect the measurement of basic and diluted earnings per share. These
terms and conditions may determine whether any potential ordinary shares are dilutive and, if so, the
effect on the weighted average number of shares outstanding and any consequential adjustments to
profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders. The disclosure of the terms and conditions of
such financial instruments and other contracts is encouraged, if not otherwise required (refer also to
IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures in Chapter 15).
8.4 Additional EPS

If an entity discloses, in addition to basic and diluted earnings per share, amounts per share using a
reported component of profit other than one required by IAS 33, such amounts shall be calculated
using the weighted average number of ordinary shares determined in accordance with this Standard.
Basic and diluted amounts per share relating to such a component shall be disclosed with equal
prominence and presented in the notes.
An entity shall indicate the basis on which the numerator(s) is (are) determined, including whether
amounts per share are before tax or after tax.
HB2021

If a component of profit is used that is not reported as a line item in the statement of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income, a reconciliation shall be provided between the component used
and a line item that is reported in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
Judgement is needed as to whether the additional EPS potentially undermines the EPS as calculated
in accordance with IAS 33. Although it is required by the standard to have equal prominence, the
preparer of the financial statements needs to weigh up whether it is really necessary.
Context example: Allied Irish Bank plc

In addition to the required EPS under IAS 33, Allied Irish Bank plc reports an adjusted EPS measure
excluding hedge volatility, profit on disposal of property and business and construction contract
income. A comment to the disclosure states that the adjusted measure is presented to help better
understand underlying business performance.
Allied Irish Bank plc 31 December 2006
Extract from Notes to the accounts:
Profit attributable Earnings per share

2006 2005 2006 2005
19 Adjusted earnings per share €m €m €m €m
(a) Basic earnings per share
As reported (Note 18(a)) 2,147 1,305 246.8 151.0
Adjustments:
Construction contract income (82) (38) (9.4) (4.4)
Hedge volatility 4 (6) 0.5 (0.7)
Profit on disposal of property (290) – (33.4) –
Profit on disposal of business (189) –––– (21.7) –––––
1,590 1,261 182.8 145.9
Although not required under IFRS, adjusted earnings per share is presented to help understand the
underlying performance of the Group. The adjustments in 2006 and 2005 are items that
management believe do not reflect the underlying business performance. The adjustment in respect
of profit on sale of property relates only to the profit on sale of properties that are subject to sale and
leaseback arrangements (Note 12). The adjustments listed above are shown net of taxation.
While earnings per share is a useful tool, users should be wary of relying solely on this figure. In
particular, the context of the size of the entity, and the nature of its businesses should be taken into
account.
HB2021

Summary
IAS 33, Earnings

per Share
Earnings Number of shares
Minus Plus rights

earnings attributable issues and bonus
to preference shareholders issues
Earnings attributable Total number

to ordinary shareholders of shares
Basic EPS
Adjust for potential shares

Adjust earnings resulting
due to
from change in convertible • Convertible debt
debt • Options
• Contingently issuable
shares
Diluted
EPS
HB2021

1. Can you calculate the weighted average number of shares for basic and diluted EPS?
(Topic 2)
2. Why is the distinction between redeemable and irredeemable preference shares

significant? (Topic 3)
3. What is meant by antidilutive? (Topic 4)
4. Can you calculate EPS in the context of convertible shares and options? (Topic 7)
5. Can you calculate EPS in the context of contingently issuable shares? (Topic 7)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Puffbird A straightforward EPS question with a bonus issue and adjustment of the
prior year figure, this is a good one to start on.
Whiting An intermediate question, with a discontinued operation and convertible

loan stock.
Citric This is about as complicated as EPS gets, covering warrants and

convertible bonds and test of dilution.
next chapter.
In later chapters, we will recommend questions from the Question Bank for you to attempt. Earnings
per share calculations often come at the end of scenario questions requiring adjustments to financial
statements for financial reporting issues covered in later chapters.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 Earnings
• Amounts attributable to ordinary equity holders in respect of profit or loss for the period (and
from continuing operations where reported separately) adjusted for the after tax amounts of
preference dividends. – IAS 33.12
2 Shares
• For the calculation of basic EPS the number of ordinary shares should be the weighted average
number of shares outstanding during the period adjusted where appropriate for events, other
than the conversion of shares, that have changed the number of ordinary shares outstanding
without a corresponding change in resources. – IAS 33.26

• For the purposes of calculating diluted earnings per share an entity shall adjust profit or loss
attributable to ordinary equity holders and the weighted number of shares outstanding for the
effects of dilutive potential ordinary shares. – IAS 33.30, IAS 33.31
4 Dilutive potential ordinary shares

• Potential ordinary shares shall be treated as dilutive when, and only when, their conversion to
ordinary shares could decrease earnings per share or increase loss per share from continuing
operations. – IAS 33.41
5 Options, warrants and their equivalents – IAS 33.45
6 Convertible instruments – IAS 33.49
7 Contingently issuable shares – IAS 33.52
8 Retrospective adjustments
• Basic and diluted EPS should be adjusted retrospectively for all capitalisations, bonus issues or
share splits or reverse share splits that affect the number of shares in issue without affecting
resources. – IAS 33.64
9 Presentation – IAS 33.66
10 Disclosure – IAS 33.70
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Puffbird
Puffbird is a company listed on a recognised stock exchange. Its financial statements for the year
ended 31 December 20X6 showed earnings per share of £0.95.
On 1 July 20X7 Puffbird made a 3 for 1 bonus issue.
Requirement
According to IAS 33, Earnings per Share, what figure for the 20X6 earnings per share will be shown
as comparative information in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7?
2 Urtica
The Urtica Company is listed on a recognised stock exchange.
During the year ended 31 December 20X6, the company had 5 million ordinary shares of £1 and
500,000 6% irredeemable preference shares of £1 in issue.
Profit before tax for the year was £300,000 and the tax charge was £75,000
Requirement
According to IAS 33, Earnings per Share, what is Urtica’s basic earnings per share for the year?
3 Issky
The following extracts relate to the Issky Company for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
£’000
Statement of comprehensive income
Statement of financial position

Ordinary shares of £1 8,400
In addition, the company had in issue throughout the year 1,800,000 share options granted to
directors at an exercise price of £15. These were fully vested (ie, conditions required before these
could be exercised were fulfilled and the options were exercisable) but had not yet been exercised.
The market price for Issky’s shares was £24 at 1 January 20X7, £30 at 31 December 20X7, and the
average for 20X7 was £27.
Requirement
What is the diluted earnings per share for 20X7 according to IAS 33, Earnings per Share?
4 Whiting
The Whiting Company has the following financial statement extracts in the year ended 31 December
20X7.
HB2021

£
Profit after tax
Continuing operations 1,600,000
Discontinued operations (400,000)
Total attributable to ordinary equity holders 1,200,000

Ordinary shares of £9,600,000 in £1 shares
On 1 January 20X7, Whiting issued £1.2 million of 7% redeemable convertible bonds, interest being
payable annually in arrears on 31 December. The split accounting required of compound financial
instruments resulted in the following classification.
£
Equity component 100,000
Liability component 1,100,000
1,200,000
The effective interest rate on the liability component is 10%. The bonds are convertible on specified
dates in the future at the rate of one ordinary share for every £2 bond.
The tax regime under which Whiting operates gives relief for the whole of the charge based on the
effective interest rate and applies a tax rate of 20%.
Requirement
Based upon the profit from continuing operations attributable to ordinary equity holders, what
amount, if any, for diluted earnings per share should be presented by Whiting in its financial
statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7 according to IAS 33, Earnings per Share?
5 Garfish
The Garfish Company had profits after tax of £3.0 million in the year ended 31 December 20X7.
On 1 January 20X7, Garfish had 2.4 million ordinary shares in issue. On 1 April 20X7 Garfish made a
1 for 2 rights issue at a price of £1.40 when the market price of Garfish’s shares was £2.00.
Requirement
What is Garfish’s basic earnings per share figure for the year ended 31 December 20X7, according to
IAS 33, Earnings per Share?
6 Sakho
The Sakho Company has 850,000 ordinary shares in issue on 1 January 20X7 and had the following
share transactions in the year ended 31 December 20X7.
(1) A 1 for 5 bonus issue on 1 May 20X7
(2) A 2 for 5 rights issue on 1 September 20X7 at £0.45 when the market price was £1.50
Requirement
Indicate whether the following statements are true or false according to IAS 33, Earnings per Share.
(1) The basic earnings per share for the year ended 31 December 20X6 has to be adjusted by a
fraction of 5/6.
(2) For the calculation of 20X7 basic earnings per share, the number of shares in issue before the
rights issue has to be adjusted by a rights fraction of 1.50/1.20.
HB2021

7 Sardine
The Sardine Company operates in Moldania, a jurisdiction in which shares may be issued at a
discount. It has profit after tax and before preference dividends of £200,000 in the year ended 31
December 20X7.
On 1 January 20X7 Sardine has in issue 500,000 ordinary shares, and on 1 January 20X7 issues
£300,000 of £100 non-convertible, non-redeemable preference shares. Cash dividends of 8% per
annum will only start to be paid on the preference shares from 1 January 20X9, so the shares are
issued at a discount. The effective interest rate of the discount is 8%.
Requirement
According to IAS 33, Earnings per Share, what is the basic earnings per share for Sardine in the year
8 Citric
The following information relates to The Citric Company for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
Profit after tax – £100,000
Ordinary shares of £1 – 1,000,000
There are warrants outstanding in respect of 1.7 million new shares in Citric at a subscription price of
£18.00. Citric’s share price was £22.00 on 1 January 20X7, £24.00 on 30 June 20X7, £30.00 on 31
December 20X7 and averaged £25.00 over the year.
On 1 January 20X7 Citric issued £2 million of 6% redeemable convertible bonds, interest being
payable annually in arrears on 31 December. The split accounting required of compound financial
instruments resulted in a liability component of £1.75 million and effective interest rate of 7%. The
bonds are convertible on specified dates many years into the future at the rate of two ordinary shares
for every £5 bonds.
The tax regime under which Citric operates gives relief for the whole of the effective interest rate
charge on the bonds and applies a tax rate of 25%.
Requirement
Determine the following amounts in respect of Citric’s diluted earnings per share for the year ending
31 December 20X7 according to IAS 33, Earnings Per Share:
(1) The number of shares to be treated as issued for no consideration (ie, ‘free’ shares) on the
subscription of the warrants
(2) The earnings per incremental share on conversion of the bonds, expressed in pence (to one
decimal place)
(3) The diluted earnings per share, expressed in pence (to one decimal place)
this chapter.
HB2021


No, the 4% preference shares are classed as liabilities under IAS 32. The dividend has been charged
to profits as part of the finance cost and no adjustment is necessary.

£1.75
Being the total earnings £350,000 divided by the number of shares in issue (200,000).
The redeemable preference share dividend is included as a finance cost and deducted in arriving at
profit before tax.

Basic EPS
20X6
£
Trading results
Profit before interest and tax 1,050,000
Interest on 7% convertible loan stock (105,000)
Taxation (283,500)
Number of shares outstanding 2,000,000
Basic EPS (£661,500/2,000,000 shares) £0.33
Testing for dilutive impact

Increase in earnings = interest saved (£1,500,000 × 7% × (1 – 30%)) – £73,500
Increase in number of shares (£1,500,000/£100 × 140) – 2,100,000
EPS (£73,500/2,100,000) = 3.5p
This is less than basic EPS and therefore the convertible loan stock is dilutive.

Diluted EPS
20X7
£
Trading results
Profit after tax 900,000.00
Number of shares outstanding 3,000,000.00
Basic EPS 0.30
Number of shares under option
Issued at full market price (600,000 × 50p)/£1.50 200,000.00
HB2021

20X7
£
Issued at nil consideration 600,000 – 200,000 400,000.00
Total number of shares under option 600,000.00
Number of equity shares for basic EPS 3,000,000.00
Number of dilutive shares under option 400,000.00
Adjusted number of shares 3,400,000.00
Diluted EPS (£900,000/3,400,000) 0.26
HB2021

1 Puffbird
23.75 pence
Last year’s EPS figure is adjusted by the reciprocal of the bonus fraction:
Bonus fraction = Number of shares post issue ÷ Number of shares pre issue = 4 ÷ 1
Therefore revised EPS = 95p × ¼ = 23.75p
2 Urtica
3.9 pence
IAS 33 12–13 define earnings for basic EPS as after tax and after dividends on irredeemable
preference shares.
£
Tax (75,000)
Preference dividend (£500,000 × 6%) (30,000)
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders 195,000
Therefore BEPS = £195,000/5,000,000 shares = 3.9p
3 Issky
58.7 pence
Number of shares under option

Issued at average market price (£15 × 1,800,000)/£27 1,000,000
Issued at nil consideration (1,800,000 – 1,000,000) 800,000
Number of equity shares for basic EPS 8,400,000

Number of dilutive shares under option 800,000
Adjusted number of shares 9,200,000
Diluted EPS (£5,400,000/9,200,000 shares) 58.7p
According to IAS 33.46, the proceeds of the options should be calculated using the average market
price during the year. The difference between the number of ordinary shares issued and the number
that would have been issued at the average market price are the ‘free’ shares that create the dilutive
effect.
4 Whiting
16.6 pence
Basic EPS Based on continuing operations £1,600,000 ÷ 9,600,000 16.7 p
HB2021

Incremental EPS Increment to profits after conversion of bonds:
£1,100,000 × 10% × (1 – 20%) = £88,000
Increase to number of shares:
£1,200,000/£2 = 600,000
Therefore: £88,000 ÷ 600,000 14.7 p
Diluted EPS Based on continuing operations

£(1,600,000 + 88,000) ÷ (9,600,000 + 600,000 shares) 16.6 p
The shares issuable on conversion of the bonds are potentially dilutive, but IAS 33.41 only requires
them to be taken into account if they dilute the basic EPS figure based on continuing operations.
5 Garfish
89.1 pence
Weighted average number of shares:
TERP 2 Shares @ £2.00 = £4.00
1 Shares @ £1.40 = £1.40
3 £5.40 Therefore £5.40/3 = £1.80
Adjustment factor: Market value of share ÷ TERP = £2.00 ÷ £1.80
1 Jan X7 – 31 March X7 2,400,000 × (2.00 ÷ 1.80) × 3/12 666,667

Rights issue 1,200,000
1 April X7 – 31 Dec X7 3,600,000 × 9/12 2,700,000
3,366,667
Basic EPS:
£3,000,000 ÷ 3,366,667 shares = 89.1p
6 Sakho
Statements
(1) False
(2) True
Bonus fraction = Number of shares post issue ÷ Number of shares pre issue = 6 ÷ 5
Rights adjustment factor = MV of share ÷ TERP = 1.50 ÷ 1.20
TERP 5 Shares @ £1.50 = £7.50
2 Shares @ £0.45 = £0.90
7 £8.40 Therefore £8.40/7 = £1.20
The basic EPS for the prior year is multiplied by the inverse of the rights factor and the bonus factor,
so 1.20/1.50 × 5/6 = 2/3.
7 Sardine
35.9 pence
Issue price of preference shares = £300,000/1.082 = £257,202
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders = £200,000 – (8% × £257,202) = £179,424
HB2021

Basic EPS = £179,424 ÷ 500,000 shares = 35.9p
As no dividend is payable on the preference shares in 20X7, the discount on issue is amortised using
the effective interest method and treated as preference dividend when calculating earnings for EPS
purposes (IAS 33.15).
The £300,000 preference shares must be discounted at 8% for the two years between issue and the
date when dividends commence. A dividend is then calculated at 8% per annum compound on that
value.
8 Citric
Diluted EPS
(1) 476,000
(2) 11.5 pence
(3) 6.78 pence
Explanation
(1) Shares issued at average market price (1,700,000 × £18)/£25 – 1,224,000
Shares issued at nil consideration (1,700,000 – 1,224,000) – 476,000
(2) Incremental profits (£1,750,000 × 7% × (1 – 25%)) – £91,875
Increase in number of shares (£2,000,000/£5 × 2) – 800,000
Therefore incremental EPS (£91,875/800,000 shares) – 11.5p
(3)
Profits Number of shares EPS

Basic EPS £100,000 1,000,000 10p
Add in options £100,000 1,446,000 6.78p
The warrants (treated as issued for nil consideration) are more dilutive than the bonds, so are dealt
with first under IAS 33.44. As the 11.5 pence earnings per incremental share on conversion of the
bonds is antidilutive, under IAS 33.36 the conversion is left out of the calculation of diluted EPS.
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 12
Reporting of assets
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Review of material from earlier studies
2 IAS 40, Investment Property
3 IAS 41, Agriculture
4 IFRS 6, Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources
5 IFRS 4, Insurance Contracts
6 Audit focus points
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
12
Learning outcomes
reported financial position and explain the role of data analytics in financial asset and liability
valuation
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to assets and non-financial liabilities for
example: property, plant and equipment; intangible assets, held-for-sale assets; inventories;
investment properties; provisions and contingencies
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 3(a), 3(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
12

of this chapter.

1 Review of material Approach Just because these IQ2: Impairment

from earlier studies Read the summary standards are tested loss
Section 1 gives a of knowledge at earlier levels does You should aim to
brief revision of brought forward not mean that do all the interactive
standards covered and try the relevant questions that questions because
in great detail in questions. If you include them will be you will struggle to
terms of content have any difficulty, easy. tackle a complex
and application at go back to your These are likely to scenario question
Professional Level. earlier study be examined in an without a
They address the material and revise integrated way with knowledge of the
reporting of assets, it. other areas at basics. This question
impairment, Use the questions in Advanced Level. is the one to focus
liabilities, provisions the electronic Self- For example, a on.
and contingencies test bank for further question on
and events after the revision. property may range
reporting period. Stop and think from owner-
These are likely to occupied (IAS 16) to
be examined in an What is the investment property
integrated way with definition of an (IAS 40) to
other areas at asset in the 2018 leasehold property
Advanced Level. Conceptual (IFRS 16, covered in
Framework? Chapter 14).
Inventories can
often be the most
significant current
asset in an entity’s
statement of
In addition, whether
an asset is
HB2021

capitalised or not,
the value attributed
to it and how it is
depreciated or not
has a significant
impact on the
2 IAS 40, Investment Approach Investment property IQ11: Replacement

Property This is a new comes up quite property
Entities may invest standard at regularly as part of a Although short, this
in property (IAS 40) Advanced Level, so longer scenario is a useful question
for the potentially work through question and in the because it tests how
attractive returns carefully. Make sure context of audit and IAS 40 interacts with
that are available you can distinguish fair value (IFRS 13). other standards.
from capital gains investment property With IFRS 16, Leases
and rental income. form owner- being a topical
Measuring such occupied property, standard, expect to
investment that you know when see examined the
properties as a to recognise interaction between
series of out-of-date investment property this and IAS 40.
historic costs is not and how to measure
an appropriate it, and can deal with
reflection of a change of use.
volatility caused by Stop and think
changes in property
values. An investment
property held under
the fair value model
is developed for
future sale. How
should it be
accounted for?
3 IAS 41, Agriculture Approach This topic has yet to IQ13: Costs to sell
Working in the This standard is set be examined. This is a quick, test-
context of the at level A, so this your-knowledge
agricultural sector section should be question.
or of extractive studied carefully,
industries you will even though the
need to make topic has not yet
judgements on the been examined. Do
valuation of both interactive
biological questions.
assets/the
appropriate Stop and think
capitalisation of What are bearer
expenditure. biological assets?
Since the use of a
historic cost model
was not seen as
wholly appropriate
for accounting for
agricultural activity
IAS 41, Agriculture
is based on a fair
value model.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 12: Reporting of assets 627

4 IFRS 6, Exploration Approach This topic has yet to N/A

for and Evaluation This is examinable be examined.
of Mineral at level D, so is not a
Resources key topic. Read
Entities such as through quickly. The
those in the oil and key point is that the
gas industry follow a recognition criteria
wide range of for impairment are
practices for the different from IAS
accounting of 36 but, once
exploration and impairment is
evaluation recognised, the
expenditure (IFRS measurement
6). criteria are the same
as for IAS 36.
Stop and think
How should these
assets be measured
on initial
recognition?
5 IFRS 4, Insurance Approach This topic has yet to N/A

Contracts This is examinable be examined.
IFRS 4 provides at level D, so should
interim guidance on not be prioritised at
accounting for the expense of key
insurance contracts. standards, such as
It will be replaced in IAS 40.
2023 by IFRS 17. Stop and think
Focus more on
other standards!
6 Audit focus points Approach You are very likely to IQ14: Investment
This section focuses Read and learn the get investment property and fair
on the audit of table in Section 6.2, property as part of value
investment which gives an an integrated A typical scenario as
properties, as the approach to financial reporting part of Question 3,
other key topics auditing and auditing covering both audit
were covered at classification, question. issues and audit
Professional Level. valuation and procedures in
disclosure. relation to IAS 40
Stop and think and IFRS 13.
Why might
investment property
be more risky than
owner-occupied
property?
HB2021

1 Review of material from earlier studies
Section overview
You should already be familiar with the standards relating to current and non-current assets from
earlier studies. If not, go back to your earlier study material.
• IAS 2, Inventories
• IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment
• IAS 38, Intangible Assets
• IAS 36, Impairment of Assets
Read the summary of knowledge brought forward and try the relevant questions. If you have any
difficulty, go back to your earlier study material and revise it.
Assets have been defined in many different ways and for many purposes. The definition of an asset is
important because it directly affects the treatment of such items. A good definition will prevent
abuse or error in the accounting treatment: otherwise some assets might be treated as expenses,
and some expenses might be treated as assets.
In the current accounting climate, where complex transactions are carried out daily a definition that
covers ownership and value is not sufficient, leaving key questions unanswered.
• What determines ownership?
• What determines value?
The definition of an asset in the IASB’s Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting from earlier
studies is given below.
Definition
Asset: A present economic resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events. An economic
resource is a right that has the potential to produce economic benefits. (Conceptual Framework, para.
4.2)
This definition ties in closely with the definitions produced by other standard-setters, particularly the
FASB (USA) and the ASB (UK).
A general consensus seems to exist in the standard setting bodies as to the definition of an asset
which encompasses three important characteristics.
• Future economic benefit
• Control
• The transaction to acquire control has already taken place
1.1 Property, plant and equipment

The following concepts will be familiar to you from your earlier studies.
• Cost is the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value of the other consideration
given to acquire an asset at the time of its acquisition or construction.
• Residual value is the estimated amount that an entity would currently obtain from disposal of the
asset, after deducting the estimated costs of disposal, if the asset were already of the age and in
the condition expected at the end of its useful life.
HB2021

• Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an
orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (Note that this
definition changed when IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement came into force in January 2013 – see
Chapter 2, section 4.)
• Carrying amount is the amount at which an asset is recognised after deducting any accumulated
depreciation and accumulated impairment losses.
Accounting treatment
• As with all assets, recognition depends on two criteria:
– It is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the entity.
– The cost of the item can be measured reliably.
• These recognition criteria apply to subsequent expenditure as well as costs incurred initially (ie,
there are no longer separate criteria for recognising subsequent expenditure).
• Once recognised as an asset, items should initially be measured at cost.
• Cost is the purchase price, less trade discount/rebate plus:
– directly attributable costs of bringing the asset to working condition for intended use; and
– initial estimate of the unavoidable cost of dismantling and removing the item and restoring
the site on which it is located.
IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment also does the following:
• Provides additional guidance on directly attributable costs, including the cost of an item of
property, plant and equipment
• States that income and related expenses of operations that are incidental to the construction or
development of an item of property, plant and equipment should be recognised in profit or loss
for the period
• Specifies that exchanges of items of property, plant and equipment, regardless of whether the
assets are similar, are measured at fair value, unless the exchange transaction lacks commercial
substance or the fair value of neither of the assets exchanged can be measured reliably. If the
acquired item is not measured at fair value, its cost is measured at the carrying amount of the
asset given up
• Permits a choice of measurement models subsequent to initial recognition
– Cost model: carrying asset at cost less depreciation and any accumulated impairment losses
– Revaluation model: carrying asset at revalued amount, ie, fair value less subsequent
accumulated depreciation and any accumulated impairment losses. (IAS 16 makes clear that
the revaluation model is available only if the fair value of the item can be measured reliably.)
HB2021

Figure 12.1: Revaluations
Asset is
UPWARDS DOWNWARDS
revalued
Has the asset Has the asset

previously suffered previously had
NO NO
a downward an upward
valuation? valuation?
Recognise the increase Recognise the

as a revaluation surplus. decrease directly
YES (Other comprehensive in profit or loss. YES
income)
Recognise the increase in Recognise the decrease

profit or loss up to the against the revaluation
value of the downward surplus up to the value of
valuation. Any excess should the upward valuation. Any
be recognised as a revaluation excess should be recognised
surplus. (Other comprehensive directly in profit or loss.
income)
The above flowchart is an example of how to structure a problem, in this case PPE revaluations. It
should form part of your revision.
Interactive question 1: Revaluations

Binkie Co has an item of land carried in its books at £13,000. Two years ago a slump in land values
led the company to reduce the carrying amount from £15,000. This was recorded as an expense.
There has been a surge in land prices in the current year, however, and the land is now worth
£20,000.
In the example given above assume that the original cost was £15,000, revalued upwards to £20,000
two years ago. The value has now fallen to £13,000.
Crinkle Co bought an asset for £10,000 at the beginning of 20X6. It had a useful life of five years. On
1 January 20X8 the asset was revalued to £12,000. The expected useful life has remained unchanged
(ie, three years remain).
Requirements
1.1 Account for the revaluation in the current year
1.2 Account for the decrease in value
1.3 Account for the revaluation and state the treatment for depreciation from 20X8 onwards
HB2021

1.2 Inventories
Valuation Allowable costs

Lower of: Include:
• Cost • Cost of purchase
• Net realisable value Exclude:
Each item/group/category considered • Cost of storage
separately • Cost of selling
Determining cost Net realisable value

• First in, first out (FIFO) • Estimated cost of completion
• Weighted average cost • Estimated costs necessary to make the sale
(eg, marketing, selling and distribution)
1.3 IAS 38, Intangible Assets

• An intangible asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance, such as a
licence, patent or trademark.
• An intangible asset is identifiable if it is separable (ie, it can be sold, transferred, exchanged,
licensed or rented to another party on its own rather than as part of a business) or it arises from
contractual or other legal rights.
• An intangible asset should be recognised if it is probable that future economic benefits
attributable to the asset will flow to the entity and the cost of the asset can be measured reliably.
• At recognition the intangible should be recognised at cost (purchase price plus directly
attributable costs). After initial recognition an entity can choose between the cost model and the
revaluation model. The revaluation model can only be adopted if an active market (as defined)
exists for that type of asset.
• An intangible asset (other than goodwill recognised in the acquiree’s financial statements)
acquired as part of a business combination should initially be recognised at fair value.
• Internally generated goodwill should not be recognised.
• Expenditure incurred in the research phase of an internally generated intangible asset should be
expensed as incurred.
• Expenditure incurred in the development phase of an internally generated intangible asset
mustbe capitalised provided certain tightly defined criteria are met.
– Expenditure incurred before the criteria being met may not be capitalised retrospectively.
• An intangible asset with a finite useful life should be amortised over its expected useful life,
commencing when the asset is available for use in the manner intended by management.
• Residual values should be assumed to be nil, except in the rare circumstances when an active
market exists or there is a commitment by a third party to purchase the asset at the end of its
useful life.
• An intangible asset with an indefinite life should not be amortised, but should be reviewed for
impairment on an annual basis.
– There must also be an annual review of whether the indefinite life assessment is still
appropriate.
• On disposal of an intangible asset the gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss.
HB2021

1.4 IAS 36, Impairment of Assets
1.4.1 Key points
Recoverable An asset’s recoverable amount is the higher of value in use (net cash flows)
amount and fair value less costs of disposal.
Impairment losses occur where the carrying amount of an asset is above its
recoverable amount.
Impairment An entity must do an impairment test when there are impairment

indicators indicators. These can be internal or external.
Cash-generating Where cash flows cannot be measured separately, the recoverable amount
units is calculated by reference to the CGU.
Recognition of Impairment losses are charged first to other comprehensive income (re any
impairment losses revaluation surplus relating to the asset) and then to profit or loss.
In the case of a CGU, the credit is allocated first against any goodwill and
then pro-rata over the other assets of the CGU.
After the After the impairment review, depreciation/amortisation is allocated over the
impairment review asset’s revised remaining useful life.
Interactive question 2: Impairment loss

An entity has a single manufacturing plant which has a carrying value of £749,000. A new
government elected in the country passes legislation significantly restricting exports of the product
produced by the plant. As a result, and for the foreseeable future, the entity’s production will be cut
by 40%. Cash flow forecasts have been prepared derived from the most recent financial
budgets/forecasts for the next five years approved by management (excluding the effects of general
price inflation).
Year 1 2 3 4 5
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Future cash flows 230 211 157 104 233

(including disposal
proceeds)
If the plant was sold now it would realise £550,000, net of selling costs.
The entity estimates the pre-tax discount rate specific to the plant to be 15%, after taking into
account the effects of general price inflation.
Requirement
Calculate the recoverable amount of the plant and any impairment loss.
Note: PV factors at 15% are as follows.
Year PV factor @15%

1 0.86957
2 0.75614
3 0.65752
4 0.57175
5 0.49718
HB2021

Judgement must be applied in considering whether an item is a cash-generating unit. Both in the
exam, and in real life, it may not be obvious.
Interactive question 3: Cash-generating units

Discuss whether the following items would be cash-generating units in their own right, or part of a
larger cash-generating unit.
(1) A pizza oven in a pizza restaurant
(2) A branch of a pizza restaurant in Warsaw
(3) A monorail that takes fee paying visitors to a theme park from its car park
(4) A monorail that transports fee paying commuters from a suburban part of town to the centre of
town
(5) The internal large telephone network of a country’s railway system, although its use is currently
not permitted to anybody other than railway workers
1.4.2 Treatment of the non-controlling interest element of goodwill

The revision to IFRS 3 allows two methods of initially valuing the non-controlling (minority) interest in
an entity:
• As a share of the net assets of the entity at the acquisition date; or
• at fair value.
The non-controlling interest is then taken into account in the goodwill calculation per the revised
standard:
Purchase consideration X
Non-controlling interest X
X
Total fair value of net assets of acquiree (X)
Goodwill X
This means that the resulting goodwill will represent:

• only the parent’s share of total goodwill when valuing the non-controlling interest using the
proportion of net assets method; and
• full goodwill (ie, the parent’s share plus the non-controlling interest share) when using the fair
value method.
Where the share of net assets method is used to value the non-controlling interest, the carrying
amount of a CGU therefore comprises:
• the parent and non-controlling share of the identifiable net assets of the unit; and
• only the parent’s share of the goodwill.
Part of the calculation of the recoverable amount of the CGU relates to the unrecognised share in the
goodwill.
For the purpose of calculating the impairment loss, the carrying amount of the CGU is therefore
notionally adjusted to include the non-controlling share in the goodwill by grossing it up.
The consequent impairment loss calculated is only recognised to the extent of the parent’s share.
Where the fair value method is used to value the non-controlling interest, no adjustment is required.
HB2021

Interactive question 4: Allocation of impairment loss
Peter acquired 60% of Stewart on 1 January 20X1 for £450 million recognising net assets of £600
million, a non-controlling interest (valued as a proportion of total net assets) of £240 million and
goodwill of £90 million. Stewart consists of a single cash-generating unit.
Due to adverse publicity, the recoverable amount of Stewart had fallen by 31 December 20X1. The
depreciated value of the net assets at that date was £550 million (excluding goodwill). No
impairment losses have yet been recognised relating to the goodwill.
Requirement
Show the allocation of the impairment losses:
(1) if the recoverable amount was £510 million at 31 December 20X1
(2) if the recoverable amount was £570 million at 31 December 20X1
1.4.3 Reversal of past impairments

A reversal for a CGU is allocated to the assets of the CGU, except for goodwill, pro rata with the
carrying amounts of those assets.
However, the carrying amount of an asset is not increased above the lower of:
• its recoverable amount (if determinable); and
• its depreciated carrying amount had no impairment loss originally been recognised.
Any amounts left unallocated are allocated to the other assets (except goodwill) pro rata.
The reversal is recognised in profit or loss, except where reversing a loss recognised on assets
carried at revalued amounts, which are treated in accordance with the applicable IFRS.
For example, an impairment loss reversal on property, plant and equipment first reverses the loss
recorded in profit or loss and any remainder is credited to the revaluation surplus (IAS 16).
Goodwill
Once recognised, impairment losses on goodwill are not reversed.
1.4.4 Impairment and IFRS 5

IFRS 5 is covered in detail in Chapter 9. Regarding impairment, note the following:
• Immediately before initial classification as held for sale, the asset (or disposal group) is measured
in accordance with the applicable IFRS (eg, property, plant and equipment held under the IAS 16
revaluation model is revalued).
• On classification of the non-current asset (or disposal group) as held for sale, it is written down to
fair value less costs to sell (if less than carrying amount).
• Any impairment loss arising under IFRS 5 is charged to profit or loss (and the credit allocated to
assets of a disposal group using the IAS 36 rules, ie, first to goodwill then to other assets pro rata
based on carrying value).
• Non-current assets/disposal groups classified as held for sale are not depreciated/amortised.
• Any subsequent changes in fair value less costs to sell are recognised as a further impairment
loss (or reversal of an impairment loss).
• However, gains recognised cannot exceed cumulative impairment losses to date (whether under
IAS 36 or IFRS 5).
HB2021

Section overview
• An investment property is land or buildings or both that is held by an entity to earn rentals and/or
for its capital appreciation potential.
• Following initial measurement, investment property may be measured using the cost model or the
fair value model.
One of the distinguishing characteristics of investment property is that it generates cash flows largely
independent of the other assets held by an entity.
Owner-occupied property is not investment property and is accounted for under IAS 16, Property,
Plant and Equipment.
2.1 Recognition
Investment property should be recognised as an asset when two conditions are met.
• It is probable that the future economic benefits that are associated with the investment property
will flow to the entity.
• The cost of the investment property can be measured reliably.
2.2 Initial measurement and further aspects of recognition

An investment property should initially be measured at its cost, including transaction costs.
Further aspects of recognition
Transaction costs Expenses that are directly attributable to the investment

property, for example professional fees and property transfer
taxes. Cost does not include activities that, while related to the
investment property, are not directly attributable to it. For
example, start- up costs, abnormal amounts of wasted resources
in constructing the property, relocation costs, losses incurred
before full occupancy and the normal servicing of the property
are not directly attributable.
Self-constructed investment Property being self-constructed or under development for

properties future use as an investment property qualifies itself as an
investment property.
Leases An investment property held by a lessee as a right-of-use asset

must be recognised in accordance with IFRS 16, Leases (see
Chapter 14).
Entity occupies part of If the two portions can be sold separately or leased separately,
property and leases out each is accounted for as appropriate. If not, entire property is an
balance investment property only if insignificant portion is owner
occupied.
Entity supplies services to the An investment property only if the services are insignificant to
lessee of the property the arrangement as a whole.
Property leased to and An investment property in entity’s own accounts but owner
occupied by parent, subsidiary occupied from group perspective.
or other group company
HB2021

Interactive question 5: Identification of investment property
(1) An entity has a factory that has been shut down due to chemical contamination, worker unrest
and strike. The entity plans to sell this factory.
(2) An entity has purchased a building that it intends to lease out under an operating lease.
(3) An entity has acquired a large-scale office building, with the intention of enjoying its capital
appreciation. Rather than holding it empty, the entity has decided to try to recover its running
costs by renting the space out for periods which run from one week to one year. To make the
building attractive to potential customers, the entity has fitted the space out as small office units,
complete with full-scale telecommunications facilities, and offers reception, cleaning, a loud
speaker system and secretarial services. The expenditure incurred in fitting out the offices has
been a substantial proportion of the value of the building.
(4) An entity acquired a site on 30 April 20X4 with the intention of building office blocks to let. After
receiving planning permission, construction started on 1 September 20X4 and was completed at
a cost of £10 million on 30 March 20X5 at which point the building was ready for occupation.
The building remained vacant for several months and the entity incurred significant operating losses
during this period.
The first leases were signed in July 20X5 and the building was not fully let until 1 September 20X6.
Requirement
Do the buildings referred to in (1)–(4) above meet the definition of investment property?
2.3 Measurement subsequent to initial recognition

Following initial measurement, investment properties are held either:
• at cost less accumulated depreciation (the cost model); or
• measured at fair value (the fair value model).
2.3.1 Cost model

Where the cost model is adopted, the property should be accounted for in accordance with IAS 16,
Property, Plant and Equipment.
2.3.2 Fair value model

• After initial recognition, an entity that chooses the fair value model should measure all of its
investment property at fair value, except in the extremely rare cases where this cannot be
measured reliably. In such cases it should apply the IAS 16 cost model.
• A gain or loss arising from a change in the fair value of an investment property should be
recognised in net profit or loss for the period in which it arises.
• The fair value of investment property should reflect market conditions at the reporting date.
• A change in use of an investment property may lead to a change in classification.
Whatever policy the entity chooses should be applied to all of its investment property.
Interactive question 6: Estimating fair value

An entity with a 31 December year end owns the freehold of an office block standing on a city centre
site on which there are four other similar buildings, none of which are owned by the entity. All the
office buildings were constructed at the same time as the entity’s building and the floors in all five
buildings are let out on standard 25-year leases.
Requirements
Which of the following values could be used by the entity as a basis for estimating the fair value of its
office building at 31 December 20X5, according to IAS 40?
6.1 The first of the other office buildings changed hands early in 20X5 for £5 million as a result of
an auction which was widely publicised in the professional property press.
HB2021

6.2 The second of the other office buildings changed hands late in 20X5 for £6 million as a result of
a sale to an entity, 55% of whose shares were owned by the seller.
6.3 The third of the other office buildings changed hands late in 20X5 for £4.5 million as a result of
sale to a financial institution to which the seller owed £3.5 million. It is understood that the seller
had breached its banking covenants and had to raise cash by the end of 20X5.
6.4 The fourth of the other office buildings changed hands late in 20X5 for £5.5 million as a result
of a sale to an overseas institution which was seeking to establish its first foothold in the
country’s property market. The offer of the office building was widely publicised in the
professional property press although it is understood that local institutions were only prepared
to offer in the region of £4.9 million.
2.4 Derecognition
When an investment property is derecognised, a gain or loss on disposal should be recognised in
profit or loss. The gain or loss should normally be determined as the difference between the net
disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset.
Interactive question 7: Disposal of investment property

An entity purchased an investment property on 1 January 20X3, for a cost of £5.5 million. The
property has a useful life of 50 years, with no residual value and at 31 December 20X5 had a fair
value of £6.2 million. On 1 January 20X6 the property was sold for net proceeds of £6 million.
Requirement
Calculate the profit or loss on disposal under both the cost and fair value model.
2.5 Transfers following a change in use

A change in use may lead to recognition or de-recognition of an investment property. The following
is a summary of such instances.
Evidence of change in use Accounting treatment
Commencement of owner • Owner-occupied property recognised under IAS 16.

occupation • If fair value model was used, treat fair value as deemed cost.
Commencement of • Reclassify as inventory under IAS 2.

development with a view to • If fair value model was used, treat fair value as deemed cost.
sale
Development with view to • Continue to hold as an investment property.

continue letting
End of owner occupation with • Transfer to investment properties under IAS 40.
view to let to third parties • If fair value model to be used, revalue at date of change and
recognise difference as revaluation under IAS 16.
Property held as inventory now • Transfer to investment properties under IAS 40.
let to a third party • If fair value model to be used, revalue at date of change and
recognise difference in profit or loss.
Commencement of lease to • Transfer from property, plant and equipment to investment

another party property under IAS 40.
HB2021

When considering a change of use, it is important to understand all the required evidence about its
current use and its future use, including the model that is to be used. The current use affects the
future accounting treatment.
It is possible that you may, in an exam, come to the wrong conclusion about change of use, but you
will gain credit for any valid arguments that led you to your conclusion, and which are clearly
communicated.
Interactive question 8: Change of use

An entity with a 31 December year end purchased an office building, with a useful life of 50 years, for
£5.5 million on 1 January 20X1. The amount attributable to the land was negligible. The entity used
the building as its head office for five years until 31 December 20X5 when the entity moved its head
office to larger premises. The building was reclassified as an investment property and leased out
under a five-year lease.
Owing to a change in circumstances the entity took possession of the building five years later on 31
December 20Y0, to use it as its head office once more. At that date the remaining useful life of the
building was confirmed as 40 years.
The fair value of the head office was as follows.
• At 31 December 20X5 £6 million
• At 31 December 20Y0 £7.5 million
Requirements
How should the changes of use be reflected in the financial statements on the assumption that:
(a) the entity uses the cost model for investment properties?
(b) the entity uses the fair value model for investment properties?
2.6 Summary of disclosure requirements

An entity shall disclose the following:
• Whether it has followed the fair value model or cost model
• Whether property interests held as leases are included in investment property
• Criteria for classification as investment property
• Assumptions in determining fair value
• Use of independent professional valuer (encouraged but not required)
• Rental income and expenses
• Any restrictions or obligations
2.6.1 Fair value model – additional disclosures

An entity that adopts this must also disclose a reconciliation of the carrying amount of the investment
property at the beginning and end of the period.
2.6.2 Cost model – additional disclosures

These relate mainly to the depreciation method, rates and useful lives used as well as a reconciliation
of the carrying amount at the beginning and end of the period. In addition, an entity which adopts
the cost model must disclose the fair value of the investment property.
HB2021

Interactive question 9: Installation of new equipment 1
An entity owns the freehold of an office building which was acquired on 31 December 20X0 for £17
million, £2 million of which was attributable to the land. The freehold is an investment property
measured under the cost model with the building’s useful life estimated at 30 years. The building was
fully equipped with an air-conditioning system. No separate value was placed on the air conditioning
unit as this was not something that was required by accounting standards at the time of acquisition.
On 31 December 20X5 the entity replaced the air-conditioning system for £1.2 million, which has an
estimated useful life of 10 years. As no more reliable information was available, it used this cost as an
indication of the cost of the old system.
Requirement
How should the replacement of the air-conditioning be accounted for?
Interactive question 10: Installation of new equipment 2

An entity with a 31 December year end owns an office building which is recognised as an investment
property. The lift system is an integral part of the office building. The entity uses the fair value model
for measurement of investment properties.
The lift system was purchased on 1 January 20X0 for £400,000 and is being depreciated at 12.5%
per annum on cost. Its carrying amount has been accepted as a reasonable value at which to include
it within the fair value of the office building as a whole.
Early in December 20X5 a professional valuer determined the fair value of the office building,
including the lift system, to be £3 million. The lift system failed on 28 December 20X5 and was
immediately replaced on 31 December 20X5 with a new system costing £600,000.
Requirement
How should the lift system be recognised?
Interactive question 11: Replacement property

An entity with a 31 December year end owns an investment property which it measures using the fair
value model. At 31 December 20X4, the property’s carrying amount is £4 million. On 30 June 20X5,
an explosion close to the property causes major damage to the property. In July 20X5, the entity
makes a number of insurance claims as a result, one of which is for the rebuilding cost, estimated at
£3.7 million.
Although the property is repairable, the entity decides to sell it in its present state and buy a
replacement property. This decision is made on 30 September 20X5, on which date the damaged
property meets the criteria for classification as held for sale. Its fair value on that date is £350,000 and
the costs to sell are £35,000. The fair value does not change between 30 September 20X5 and 31
December 20X5. The sale is completed in the middle of 20X6 for £375,000, with selling costs of
£40,000.
On 1 March 20X6, the entity acquires a replacement property for £3.8 million.
The entity’s insurers contest the claim relating to the building on the basis of an exclusion clause. The
entity disagrees with the insurers’ interpretation and in February 20X6 initiates legal proceedings.
Negotiations are protracted and it is not until the end of 20X7 that the insurers agree to settle for
£3.9 million.
Requirement
How should the entity recognise these transactions?
HB2021

Section overview
IAS 41 sets out the accounting treatment, including presentation and disclosure requirements, for
agricultural activity.
3.1 Definitions
Definitions
Agricultural activity: Defined as the management of the biological transformation of biological
assets for sale, into agricultural produce, or into additional biological assets.
Agricultural activities include, for example, raising livestock, forestry and cultivating orchards and
plantations.
In its simplest form a biological transformation is the process of growing something such as a crop,
although it also incorporates the production of agricultural produce such as wool and milk.
Biological transformation: Comprises the processes of growth, degeneration, production and
procreation that cause qualitative or quantitative changes in a biological asset.
Biological asset: A living plant or animal.
Agricultural produce: The harvested produce of an entity’s biological assets.
IAS 41 considers the classification of biological assets and how their characteristics, and hence value,
change over time. The standard applies to agricultural produce up to the point of harvest, after which
IAS 2, Inventories is applicable. A distinction is made between the two because IAS 41 applies to
biological assets throughout their lives but to agricultural produce only at the point of harvest.
IAS 41 includes a table of examples which clearly sets out three distinct stages involved in the
production of biological assets. For example, we can identify dairy cattle as the biological asset, milk
as the agricultural produce and cheese as the product that is processed after the point of harvest.
Calves and cows are biological assets as they are living animals whereas beef and milk are
agricultural produce.
Agricultural activities may be quite diverse, but all such activities have similar characteristics as
described below.
Common characteristics of agricultural activities
• Capacity to change – living animals and plants are capable of changing. For example, a sapling
grows into a fruit tree which will bear fruit and a sheep can give birth to a lamb;
• Management of change – the biological transformation relies on some form of management
input, ensuring, for example, the right nutrient levels for plants, providing the right amount of
light or assisting fertilisation; and
• Measurement of change – the changes as a result of the biological transformation are measured
and monitored. Measurement is in relation to both quality and quantity.
Context example: Common characteristics of agricultural activities

An entity is involved in the production and sale of raw materials for food products, in the sale of fish
reared at its own ‘fish farms’ and in the sale of fish caught in the Northern seas by ocean-going
trawlers. An analysis of the processes involved is as follows.
Food products raw materials
The entity owns farmland on which it grows annual crops of corn for sale to food manufacturers. The
growing process is aided by the careful application of a range of nutrients, while additives are
administered to the underlying land immediately after harvesting has ended. This is an agricultural
activity; the corn growing each year is the biological transformation; growth is encouraged by
HB2021

management’s activities and the change is monitored, to identify the time at which harvest should
commence.
Fish farming
The entity leases a number of privately-owned lakes into which it puts underwater tanks for the
rearing of fish. This is an agricultural activity, because the fish are grown to the size suitable for sale
and their feed must be provided for them since the amount available naturally in the tanks will be
insufficient.
Ocean fishing
The entity owns a number of trawlers. The trawlers go to sea in search of suitable fish. This is not an
agricultural activity. Although there is biological transformation on the part of the fish, there is no
management intervention in the process; neither is there any routine measurement of the amount of
any change which has taken place. The trawlers harvest what the seas yield naturally.
3.1.1 Bearer biological assets

An amendment was issued to IAS 41 in 2014 regarding plant-based bearer biological assets, which
would include trees grown in plantations, such as grape vines, rubber trees and oil palms.
These plants are used solely to grow crops over several periods and are not in themselves
consumed. When no longer productive they are usually scrapped.
It was decided that fair value was not an appropriate measurement for these assets as, once they
reach maturity, the only economic benefit they produce comes from the agricultural produce they
create. In this respect, they are similar to assets in a manufacturing activity.
Consequently, these assets have been removed from the scope of IAS 41 and should be accounted
for under IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment. They are measured at accumulated cost until
maturity and are then subject to depreciation and impairment charges. The IAS 16 revaluation model
could also be applied. Agricultural produce from these plants continues to be recognised under IAS
41.
Interactive question 12: Classification

Into which category would the following items be classified according to IAS 41, Agriculture?
12.1 Wool
12.2 Sugar
3.2 Recognition and measurement

3.2.1 Recognition criteria
A biological asset or agricultural produce should only be recognised when:
• the entity controls the asset as a result of past events, for example the acquisition of dairy cattle.
The past event is the purchase, and control is obtained as the entity is now the legal owner;
• it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to the entity, for example because the dairy
cattle will produce milk which can be sold or processed into cheese and sold; and
• fair value, or cost, of the asset can be measured reliably.
3.2.2 Measurement of biological assets

A biological asset should initially be measured at its fair value less estimated costs to sell, such as
duty and commission to brokers or dealers.
Costs to sell
Costs to sell do not include any costs that are necessary to get the asset to a market, for example
transport. These should, however, be deducted in determining fair value.
HB2021

Fair value
Fair value is ‘the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an
orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date’ – see Chapter 2, section 4.
Where an active market exists for a biological asset the quoted price in the market is the appropriate
fair value.
Where an active market does not exist, then fair value may be derived by using:
• the most recent transaction in the market, assuming that similar economic conditions exist at the
time of the transaction and at the reporting date;
• market prices for similar assets with appropriate adjustments to reflect differences; and
• sector-based benchmarks, for example the value of meat per kilogram.
IAS 41 includes the presumption that it will be possible to fair value a biological asset. But if fair value
cannot be measured reliably at the time of initial recognition then the biological asset should be
recognised at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment cost (ie, the decrease in the
recoverable amount of an asset). Fair value should then be used as soon as a reliable measurement
can be made.
At subsequent reporting dates a biological asset should continue to be measured at its fair value.
Once a biological asset has been measured at fair value it is not possible to revert to cost.
3.2.3 Measurement of agricultural produce

Agricultural produce should be measured at its fair value, less estimated costs to sell at the point of
harvest. Subsequent measurement is by reference to IAS 2. It will always be possible to fair value the
agricultural produce since, by its very nature, there must be a market for it.
Interactive question 13: Costs to sell

Which of the following expenses would be classified as costs to sell when valuing biological assets
and agricultural produce?
A Commission to brokers
B Transfer taxes and duties
C Transport costs
D Advertising costs
Worked example: Fair value

An entity rears animals to be sold in a local market. The market is 50 km away, and transport to
market costs £1 per animal. At the measurement date the open market value is £60. The auctioneers
charge a sales commission of 2% of market value and there is a government levy, based on market
value, of 1% on purchases and 3% on sales.
Requirement
How should the fair value less cost to sell be calculated?
Solution
The fair value less costs to sell is calculated as:
£
Market value 60.00
Transport to market costs (1.00)
Fair value 59.00
Costs to sell
Auctioneers’ commission – 2% of £60 (1.20)
HB2021

£
Government levy – 3% of £60 (1.80)
Fair value less costs to sell 56.00
3.2.4 Grouping assets

Grouping biological assets, or agricultural produce, according to significant attributes, such as age or
quality, may help to establish fair value. Such groupings should be consistent with attribute
groupings that are used in the market as a basis for pricing, for example, by wine vintage.
Some biological assets are physically attached to land, for example tree plantations, and it is
necessary to value the land and biological assets together as one asset, even though agricultural
land is not within the scope of IAS 41. To obtain the fair value of the biological assets, the fair value of
the land element should be deducted from the combined fair value.
Land is dealt with under IAS 16 or IAS 40.
3.3 Gains and losses

Gains or losses arising on the initial recognition at fair value of a biological asset and agricultural
produce should be reported directly in profit or loss for the period to which they relate, for example
a gain may arise on the birth of a calf. Subsequent changes in the fair value will also be reported
directly in profit or loss.
Gains or losses on the initial recognition of agricultural produce should also be included in profit or
loss in the period in which they arise. Such gains or losses may arise as a result of harvesting,
because the harvested crop may be worth more than the unharvested crop. In this case a gain would
arise.
Worked example: Changes in fair value

A herd of five four-year old animals was held on 1 January 20X3. On 1 July 20X3, a 4.5-year old
animal was purchased. The fair values less estimated costs to sell were as follows.
4-year-old animal at 1 January 20X3 £200

4.5-year-old animal at 1 July 20X3 £212
5-year-old animal at 31 December 20X3 £230
Requirement
Show the reconciliation of the changes in fair value.
Solution
The movement in the fair value less estimated costs to sell of the herd can be reconciled as follows.
£
At 1 January 20X3 (5 × £200) 1,000
Purchased 212
Change in fair value (the balancing figure) 168
At 31 December 20X3 (6 × £230) 1,380
The entity is encouraged to disclose separately the amount of the change in fair value less estimated
costs to sell arising from physical changes and price changes.
If it is not possible to measure biological assets reliably and they are instead recognised at their cost
less depreciation and impairment an explanation should be provided of why it was not possible to
HB2021

establish fair value. A full reconciliation of movements in the net cost should be presented with an
explanation of the depreciation rate and method used.
4 IFRS 6, Exploration for and Evaluation of

Mineral Resources
Section overview
IFRS 6, Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources has been effective since 2006 and
essentially deals with two matters.
• Allows entities to use existing accounting policies for exploration and evaluation assets.
• Requires entities to assess exploration and evaluation assets for impairment. The recognition
criteria for impairment are different from IAS 36 but, once impairment is recognised, the
measurement criteria are the same as for IAS 36.
4.1 Scope
The standard deals with the accounting of expenditures on the exploration for and evaluation of
mineral resources (that is, minerals such as gold, copper, etc, oil, natural gas and similar resources),
except:
• expenditures incurred before the acquisition of legal rights to explore; and
• expenditures incurred following the assessment of technical and commercial feasibility.
IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors still applies to such industries
in helping them determine appropriate accounting policies. Thus, accounting policies must present
information that is relevant to the economic decision needs of users. Entities may change their
policies under IFRS 6 as long as the new information comes closer to meeting the IAS 8 criterion.
4.2 Measurement at recognition

At recognition, exploration and evaluation assets must be measured at cost.
Entities must determine which expenditures to recognise and apply their policy consistently. Such
expenditure may include acquisition of rights to explore, exploratory drilling, sampling, studies and
activities relating to commercial evaluation.
Expenditure related to the development of mineral resources is outside the scope of IFRS 6. This
comes under IAS 38.
4.3 Measurement after recognition

Entities must apply either the cost model or the revaluation model in IAS 16.
4.4 Changes in accounting policies

These may be made if the change makes the financial statements more relevant to users. IAS 8
criteria need to be applied.
4.5 Classification and reclassification

Exploration and evaluation assets are classified as tangible or intangible according to the nature of
the assets acquired. The classification must be applied consistently. They should no longer be
classified as such when the technical feasibility and commercial viability of extracting a mineral
resource are demonstrable.
HB2021

4.6 Impairment
The difficulty with respect to exploratory activities is that future economic benefits are generally very
uncertain and hence forecasting future cash flows, for example, is difficult. IFRS 6 modifies IAS 36 to
state that impairment tests are required:
• When the technical and commercial viability of extraction is demonstrable, at which point IFRS 6 is
no longer relevant to the asset.
• When other facts indicate that the carrying amount exceeds recoverable amounts, such as:
– exploration rights have expired;
– substantive expenditure on further exploration for and evaluation of mineral resources in the
specific area is neither budgeted nor planned;
– there has been no success in finding commercially viable mineral resources and the entity has
decided to discontinue exploratory activities within a specific area; and
– estimates suggest that the carrying amounts of assets are unlikely to be recovered in full
following successful development of the mineral resource.
In such circumstances, impairment is undertaken in accordance with IAS 36.
4.7 Presentation and disclosure

Exploration and evaluation assets are recorded as tangible or intangible assets, as appropriate. Once
benefits are demonstrable, assets dealt with under IFRS 6 are superseded by other appropriate
standards and are reclassified accordingly.
Disclosure relates to the following:
• A description of the accounting policies applied
• The amounts relating to assets, liabilities, income and expense, and operating and investing cash
flows arising from exploration for and evaluation of mineral resources

Section overview
IFRS 4 represents interim guidance, as the first phase of a bigger project on insurance contracts. The
objective of IFRS 4 is to make limited improvements to accounting practices for insurance contracts
and to require an issuer of insurance contracts to disclose information that identifies and explains
amounts arising from such contracts.
5.1 Background
IFRS 4 specifies the financial reporting for insurance contracts by any entity that issues such contracts,
or holds reinsurance contracts. It does not apply to other assets and liabilities held by insurers.
In the past there was a wide range of accounting practices used for insurance contracts and the
practices adopted often differ from those used in other sectors. As a result the IASB embarked on a
substantial project to address the issues surrounding the accounting for insurance contracts. Rather
than issuing one standard that covered all areas, the IASB decided to tackle the project in two
phases.
Interim guidance has been issued in phase one of the project in the form of IFRS 4; it is a stepping
stone to the second phase of the project. IFRS 4 largely focuses on improving the disclosure
requirements in relation to insurance contracts; however, it also includes a number of limited
improvements to existing accounting requirements.
Although IFRS 4 sets out a number of accounting principles as essentially best practice, it does not
require an entity to use these if it currently adopts different accounting practices. An insurance entity
is however prohibited from changing its current accounting policies to a number of specifically
identified practices.
HB2021

5.2 What is an insurance contract?
Definition
Insurance contract: A contract between two parties, where one party, the insurer, agrees to
compensate the other party, the policyholder, if it is adversely affected by an uncertain future event.
An uncertain future event exists where at least one of the following is uncertain at the inception of an
insurance contract:
• the occurrence of an insured event;
• the timing of the event; or
• the level of compensation that will be paid by the insurer if the event occurs (IFRS 4 Appendix B).
Some insurance contracts may offer payments-in-kind rather than compensation payable to the
policyholder directly. For example, an insurance repair contract may pay for a washing machine to be
repaired if it breaks down; the contract will not necessarily pay monetary compensation.
In identifying an insurance contract it is important to make the distinction between financial risk and
insurance risk. A contract that exposes the issuer to financial risk without significant insurance risk
does not meet the definition of an insurance contract.
Financial risk is where there is a possible change in a financial or non-financial variable, for example a
specified interest rate, commodity prices, an entity’s credit rating or foreign exchange rates.
Definition
Insurance risk: A risk that is not a financial risk. The risk in an insurance contract is whether an event
will occur (rather than arising from a change in something), for example a theft, damage against
property, or product or professional liability.
Examples of insurance contracts

Appendix B to IFRS 4, which forms an integral part of the standard, includes an extensive list of
examples of insurance contracts including:
• life insurance and prepaid funeral plans. It is the timing of the event that is uncertain here, for
example certain life cover plans only pay out if death occurs within a specified period of time;
• disability and medical cover;
• credit insurance, covering the policyholder for non-recoverable receivables; and
• travel cover to provide against any loss suffered while travelling.
Examples of an insurer taking on insurance risk are as follows:
• An insurance contract issued to a policyholder against the escalation of claims from faulty
motorcycles. The fault was discovered a year ago and the extent of total claims is yet to be
established. This is an insurance contract since the insured event is the discovery of the ultimate
cost of the claims.
• A gas boiler repair service available from a supplier who, for the payment of a fixed fee, will fix the
malfunctioning boiler. This is an insurance contract as it is a payment-in-kind contract, with the
uncertain event being whether the boiler will break down and the policyholder will be adversely
affected.
Examples which are not insurance contracts
It is important to distinguish between insurance contracts and other contracts that are not covered
by IFRS 4 but which might look like insurance contracts. To provide clarification IFRS 4 specifically
identifies a number of areas where its provisions do not apply, for example:
• the provision of product warranties given directly by the manufacturer, dealer or retailer;
• employers’ assets and liabilities in relation to employee benefit plans and obligations under a
defined benefit plan;
• a contractual right, or obligation, that is contingent on the right to use a non-financial item, for
example some licences;
HB2021

• a lease that contains a residual value guaranteed by the lessee, ie, a specified value for the asset
at the end of the lease is guaranteed by the lessee;
• financial guarantees within the scope of IFRS 9, Financial Instruments;
• contingent consideration that has arisen as a result of a business combination; and
• insurance contracts that the entity holds as policyholder.

IFRS 4 exempts an insurer temporarily (during phase one of the IASB’s insurance project) from the
need to consider the IASB Framework in selecting accounting policies for insurance contracts where
there is no specific accounting requirement set out in another international Standard (IFRS 4.13,
through its reference to IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors).
However, IFRS 4 expressly:
• requires a test for the adequacy of recognised insurance liabilities – referred to as the liability
adequacy test;
• prohibits provisions for possible claims under contracts that are not in existence at the reporting
date (referred to as catastrophe or equalisation provisions);
• requires an impairment test for reinsurance assets. An impairment is only recognised where after
the commencement of a reinsurance contract, an event has occurred that will lead to amounts
due under the contract not being recovered in full, and a reliable estimate of the shortfall can be
assessed; and
• requires an insurer to continue to recognise insurance liabilities in its financial statements until
they are discharged, cancelled or expire, and to present such liabilities without offsetting them
against related reinsurance assets.
Liability adequacy test
An insurer recognises its insurance liabilities at each reporting date based on the current estimate of
future contractual cash flows, and related items such as handling costs, arising under the insurance
contracts.
This provision should be reassessed at each reporting date and any identified shortfall should be
recognised immediately as part of profit or loss for the period. This is the so called liability adequacy
test.
The assessment should be based on current estimates for future cash flows under the insurance
contracts issued. If the recognised insurance liability is assessed as being adequate, then IFRS 4 does
not require any further action by the insurer. However, if the liability is found to be inadequate, then
the entire shortfall should be recognised in profit or loss.
The liability adequacy test considers all contractual cash flows under current insurance contracts, and
related costs, such as claims handling costs. Where there are embedded options or guarantees
within a contract, any cash flows arising should also be included in the assessment. Where an entity
has deferred acquisition costs and related intangible assets, such as those arising from an insurance
based business combination these should be deducted from the insurance liabilities.
If the accounting policies of an insurer do not demand that a liability adequacy test should be carried
out, as described above, then an assessment is still required of the potential net liability (ie, the
relevant insurance liabilities less any related deferred acquisition costs). In these circumstances the
insurer is required to recognise at least the amount that would be required to be recognised as a
provision under the application of IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
That is, if the carrying amount of the IAS 37 calculated provision is greater than that recognised, then
the insurer should increase the liabilities as appropriate.
Context example: Liability adequacy test

An insurance entity writes one-year policies for one of its classes of general insurance business and is
carrying the following amounts for that class in its draft statement of financial position at 31
December 20X5.
HB2021

£m
Liabilities
Provision for claims – discounted value of likely claims for insured losses occurring
up to 31 December 20X5 75
Liability for unearned premiums – proportion of premiums for policies already
written which relates to cover in 20X6 30
Assets
Deferred acquisition costs – proportion of commission and other business
acquisition costs for policies already written which relate to the unearned
premiums 10
The effect of reinsurance is immaterial.

The entity’s procedure for calculating the provision for claims is as follows.
(a) To use past experience to make a range of estimates of amounts ultimately payable to insured
persons in respect of claims for losses occurring by the reporting date and of the timing of the
payments
(b) To select the most likely amount and timing as its central estimate
(c) To discount the amount by reference to a risk-free rate
(d) To use past experience to increase the discounted amount by a risk margin to reflect the
inherent uncertainty in this discounted estimate
(e) To increase the adjusted amount by an estimate, based on past experience and discounted, of
the internal costs (such as employee benefits and accommodation costs) which will be incurred
in handling the loss claims over the period up to their settlement
The cost of the provision is recognised in profit or loss. As this procedure meets the requirements of
IFRS 4 no further action is necessary.
The entity also estimates on a similar basis the discounted total amount, including claims handling
costs, which will be payable in respect of insured losses arising after the reporting date over the
period of cover which generates the unearned premiums. The estimated amount is £25 million.
As all the policies extend for one year, in 20X6 the whole of the £30 million unearned premiums will
become earned. But in 20X6 the deferred acquisition costs of £10 million will be charged against
those premiums. Against this net income of £20 million, the estimated cost of claims is £25 million.
Hence, there is a premium deficiency of £5 million in 20X6, which should be recognised in profit or
loss in 20X5.
5.4 Disclosures
IFRS 4 sets out an overriding requirement that the information to be disclosed in the financial
statements of an insurer “helps users understand the amounts in the insurer’s financial statements
that arise from insurance contracts” (IFRS 4: para 4.36).
This information should include the accounting policies adopted and the identification of recognised
assets, liabilities, income and expense arising from insurance contracts.
More generally, the risk management objectives and policies of an entity should be disclosed, since
this will explain how an insurer deals with the uncertainty it is exposed to.
An entity is not generally required to comply with the disclosure requirements in IFRS 4 for
comparative information that relates to annual periods beginning before 1 January 2005. However,
comparative disclosure is required in relation to accounting policies adopted and the identification
of recognised assets, liabilities, income and expense arising from insurance contracts.
HB2021

5.5 Current developments: IFRS 17
5.5.1 Background
IFRS 4 has been criticised for allowing a large number of different accounting policies, resulting in a
lack of comparability, even within insurance groups. To address this the IASB has developed a new
standard, IFRS 17, Insurance Contracts.
Adoption of IFRS 17 is mandatory for reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2023. Early
adoption is permitted. In addition insurance companies are permitted to delay initial adoption of
IFRS 9 (see Chapter 16) until IFRS 17 is applied.
Tutorial note
IFRS 4 is still the examinable standard, so an overview of the main features of IFRS 17 is required,
bearing in mind that companies may early adopt.
IFRS 17 was published in 2017 and introduces a comprehensive financial reporting framework for
insurance contracts which aims to achieve greater comparability and consistency in financial
reporting by insurers.
5.5.2 Scope
The scope of IFRS 17 is similar to IFRS 4 and encompasses insurance contracts issued, reinsurance
contracts both issued and held and investment contracts with discretionary participation features if
issued by insurers.
5.5.3 Simplified measurement model

A simplified measurement model referred to as the premium allocation approach can be used for
short term insurance contracts and is similar to the use of an unearned premium reserve under IFRS
4.
5.5.4 General measurement model

The general measurement method is more complex and will be applied to long-term insurance
contracts. It uses a building block approach to establish the value of insurance contracts on initial
recognition.
This general method discounts future cash flows related to the contract and adjusts for non-financial
risk to arrive at the value of fulfilment cash flows. To these is added an equal and opposite amount
representing the unearned profit over the contract life, referred to as contractual service margin.
Insurance contracts are remeasured at each subsequent year end and a proportion of contractual
service margin is released to profit or loss as part of the insurance service result.
Contracts for which the value of fulfilment cash flows is negative (liability) are referred to as onerous
contracts. This amount is not mirrored in the creation of a contractual service margin, but rather is
recognised immediately in profit or loss.
In practice the measurement models of IFRS 17 will generally be applied to groups of contracts with
similar characteristics aggregated together rather than on an individual contract basis.
5.5.5 Reinsurance contracts

The measurement of reinsurance contracts follows the same measurement principles and mirrors
that of the primary insurance contract(s) to which it is related.
5.5.6 Implementation challenges

The implementation of such a significant change to the financial reporting of insurance contract is
likely to represent a significant systems challenge to insurers and auditors will need to perform
additional work in relation to these systems and the related internal controls. Implementing IFRS 17 is
likely to be a complex, lengthy process, with the following implications:
(a) Changes to profit recognition patterns
(b) Increased volatility of profit and equity
(c) Increased options and requirement for judgement
Set against this, it can be argued that the changes will bring greater transparency through disclosure.
HB2021

6 Audit focus points
Section overview
The audit of investment properties should focus on:

• whether the property has been correctly classified;
• whether the valuation is materially correct (either under the cost model or the FV model); and
• whether the disclosure complies with IAS 40/IFRS 13.
Other areas will have been tested at the Professional Level in Audit and Assurance but may still
require some key questions to be answered by auditors in the Corporate Reporting exam.
6.1 General approach to auditing assets

You should be familiar with the auditing of tangible and intangible assets from the Certificate Level
Assurance exam. If you do not feel confident in this area, we would recommend that you revise it.
Your earlier studies should give you a good understanding of the audit techniques, and the sources
of audit evidence, that an auditor can use in a range of different scenarios. Your knowledge of the
financial reporting standards will inform your specific approach in the exam. For example:
• testing for tangible non-current assets should consider both over- and under-statement, as well as
valuation and impairment
• intangible assets can vary significantly, but in most cases, the auditor is on the lookout for creative
accounting and instances where expenditure might not be recognised when it should be, leading
to overstated assets and understated expenses
• inventory is usually going to be a material balance, so auditors must concentrate on the two key
issues of quantity (using the inventory count) and valuation (lower of cost and net realisable value)
6.2 Auditing investment properties
Definition
Investment property: Property (land or a building – or part of a building – or both) held (by the owner
or by the entity as a right-of-use asset) to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both, rather than
for:
• use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes; or
• sale in the ordinary course of business.
The following would be non-investment properties:

• Property held for sale in the ordinary course of business
• Property being constructed or developed on behalf of third parties
• Owner-occupied property
Investment property is initially measured at its cost (including transaction costs and directly
attributable expenditure). After recognition it is measured at either depreciated cost or fair value.
Audit evidence
Issue Evidence
Classification as an Confirm that all investment properties are classified in accordance with
investment property the IAS 40 definition. This will include:
• a building owned by the entity and leased out under one or more
operating leases; and
HB2021

Issue Evidence
• a building that is vacant but is held to be leased under one or more

operating leases.
Verify rental agreements, ensuring that the occupier is not a connected

company and that the rent has been negotiated at arm’s length
If the building has recently been built, check the architect’s certificates
to ensure that cost/fair value is reasonable
Valuation If cost model adopted, check compliance with IAS 16.

If fair value model adopted:
• Check that fair value has been measured in accordance with IFRS 13
• Where current prices in an active market are not available confirm
that alternative valuation basis is reasonable and in accordance with
IFRS 13, and document the relevant audit evidence
• Agree valuation to valuer’s certificate
• Recalculate gain or loss on change in fair value and agree to amount
in statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
• If fair value cannot be measured reliably confirm use of cost model
• Consider the use of an auditor’s expert to review the
appropriateness of the underlying market assumptions and
valuation methodology used
Disclosure Confirm compliance with IAS 40/IFRS 13, for example:

• Disclosure of policy adopted
• If fair value model adopted disclosure of a reconciliation of carrying
amounts of investment property at the beginning and end of the
period
• Disclosure of the inputs used to measure fair value based on the fair
value hierarchy (Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3)
• Where Level 2 or Level 3 inputs are used, a description of the
valuation techniques and inputs used (interest rates, net reversionary
yield, stabilised net rental value, costs to complete and developer’s
profit)
• For fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs
(Level 3), the effect of the measurements on profit or loss and other
comprehensive income for the period
Note: IAS 40 states that fair value should be measured in accordance with IFRS 13.
Interactive question 14: Investment property and fair value

Propertyco, an investment property company, has a portfolio of properties, including the following:
Property A This is used as the company head office.
Property B This is held as a right-of-use asset and is currently rented out to a non-group
company under an operating lease.
Property C This was acquired in the year at a cost of £3 million including legal fees. It is
currently vacant but a tenant is being actively sought.
Property D This has been owned by Propertyco for a number of years and is currently rented
out to a non-group company.
HB2021

Propertyco uses the fair value model in accordance with IAS 40. Currently all the above properties
are recorded in the financial statements at fair value.
Requirements
Based on the information above:
(a) Identify the audit issues which the auditor would need to consider
(b) List the audit procedures you would perform regarding fair values
Context example: Big Yellow Group plc

Deloitte, the statutory auditor of the Big Yellow Group plc – the self-storage solutions business listed
on the FTSE 250 – noted in the auditor’s report in the group’s financial statements for the year ended
31 March 2015 that investment properties constituted an area of particular audit risk. The nature of
the risk and the auditor’s responses to the risk were described in the following excerpt from the
auditor’s report. The full annual report can be found at the following URL:
http://html.investis.com/B/Big-yellow-plc/reports/ar2015/pdfs/Big_Yellow_AR2015.pdf
Risk
At 31 March 2015, the Group held wholly owned investment properties and investment properties
under construction valued at £1,022.8 million.
Investment properties are held at fair value on the balance sheet. The net valuation gain, relating to
Group held properties was £64.5 million, which was recognised through the Consolidated Income
Statement during the year. The fair values at 31 March 2015 are calculated using actual and forecast
inputs, such as occupancy, capitalisation rates, an assessment of cost to complete for investment
properties under construction and net rent per square foot by property. In addition, the valuers apply
professional judgement concerning market conditions and factors impacting individual properties.
The valuation process is inherently judgemental, which is why we consider this to be a risk of material
misstatement. In particular, changes in assumptions such as the capitalisation rates, forecast rent per
square foot, forecast occupancy levels and, in the case of investment property under construction,
cost to complete can lead to significant movements in the value of the property, as can changes in
the underlying market conditions.
How the scope of our audit responded to the risk
(a) We assessed the design and implementation of controls around the property valuations by
considering the level of management oversight and review of the valuations prepared by the
external valuation specialists engaged by management, who have been named in note 14;
(b) We tested the integrity of the information provided by management to the valuers by agreeing
key inputs such as actual occupancy and net rent per square foot to underlying records and
source evidence;
(c) We modelled eight years of valuations and key valuation inputs to the investment property
portfolio, to understand the historical trends of key inputs and compared these against the key
forecast assumptions included in the property valuation;
(d) We met with the valuers. We assessed their independence, the scope of the work they were
requested to perform by management, and the valuation methodology applied. For each
property we identified as having significant or unusual valuation movements (compared to
market data or previous periods), we challenged the valuers on the key assumptions applied.
Our challenge was informed by input from our internal valuation specialists, utilising their
knowledge and expertise in the market at a macro level and the relevant geographies to
challenge the key judgemental inputs noted adjacent. We also researched comparable
transactions and understood trends in analogous industries. We understood the rationale for
outlying valuations or movements and obtained corroborative evidence. We also assessed the
valuations for a sample of other properties; and
(e) We visited a sample of properties to assess the condition of the buildings.
HB2021

Investment property can be risky and subject to judgement on the part of valuers. Effective
communication on the part of the auditors is therefore particularly important. The above case study
shows the auditors acting with professional scepticism while maintaining sufficient trust to elicit the
necessary information.
HB2021

Summary
IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment
Definition Recognition Depreciation
Measurement at recognition Measurement

• Purchase price after recognition
• Directly attributable costs
• Finance costs
Cost Revaluation
model model
IAS 38, Intangible Assets
Amortisation/
Definition Recognition
impairment test
Finite useful Indefinite useful

life life
Measurement at Measurement after

recognition recognition
Cost Revaluation
model model
Acquired in Acquisition by Exchanges Internally Internally

Separate
business way of a of generated generated
acquisition
combination government grant assets goodwill intangibles
HB2021

IAS 2, Inventories
Value at FIFO
lower of Weighted average
Cost including Net

all costs of realisable
purchase/production value
IAS 36, Impairments
Impairment CGUs
Indicators
= Notional goodwill for NCI
carrying value – recoverable amount Allocate any loss to goodwill
then other assets on pro rata basis
HB2021

IAS 40,
Investment Property
Recognition as
investment property?
No Yes
Treat according to Recognise according

IAS 16 to IAS 40
Subsequent
measurement
Initial recognition
– accounting policy
choice
Cost Fair value
model model
At cost – At cost less

Fair value
including • depreciation
IAS 40
transaction costs impairment
paras 33 – 35
IAS 40 para 20 • IAS 40 para 56
HB2021

Other Standards
IAS 41, Agriculture
Biological assets Agricultural produce

initial recognition at the point of
subsequent harvest
measurement fair value less
at fair value point of sale
less point of sale costs
costs
IFRS 6, Exploration for and

IFRS 4, Insurance Contracts
Evaluation of Mineral Resources
Recognition of exploration
Unbundle and evaluation assets
contracts into Liability
insurance adequacy test
After recognition, apply
component recognise
either the cost model
(apply IFRS 4) deficiency
in profit or or the revaluation model
deposit
component loss
(apply IFRS 9)
HB2021

1. Can you list the key points in IAS 36, Impairment of Assets? (Topic 1)
2. How should change in use be dealt with under IAS 40? (Topic 2)
3. How should biological assets be measured under IAS 41? (Topic 3)
4. How should exploration and evaluation assets be measured under IFRS 5? (Topic 4)
5. What should be the auditor’s main focus when auditing investment properties? (Topic 6)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Ruapehu You should have no trouble with this quick revision of inventory from your
earlier studies.
Oruatua This is on PPE, and is rather more complex than you will have met in your
earlier studies.
Acetone This tests impairment of goodwill, including ‘notional’ goodwill, which you
may have found tricky in your Professional Level studies.
Ramshead Investment property is new at Advanced Level, so you need a substantial

question to get you started. This one tests the interaction of IAS 40 with
IFRS 5, which you covered in an earlier chapter.
attempt.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment

• Recognition – IAS 16.7
• Initial costs – IAS 16.11
• Subsequent costs – IAS 16.12
• Measurement at recognition – IAS 16.15
• Measurement after recognition – IAS 16.29
• Derecognition – IAS 16.67-72
• Disclosure – IAS 16.73-79
2 IAS 38, Intangible Assets

• Scope – IAS 38.2
• Definition – IAS 38.8
• Intangible assets – IAS 38.9-10
• Identifiability – IAS 38.11-12
• Control – IAS 38.13
• Future economic benefits – IAS 38.17
• Recognition and measurement – IAS 38.18-67
• Recognition of an expense – IAS 38.68
• Measurement after recognition – IAS 38.72
• Cost model – IAS 38.74
• Revaluation model – IAS 38.75-87
• Useful life – IAS 38.88-96
• Intangible assets with finite useful lives – IAS 38.97-106
• Intangible assets with indefinite useful lives – IAS 38.107-110
• Recoverability of the carrying amount - impairment losses – IAS 38.111
• Retirements and disposals – IAS 38.112
• Disclosure – IAS 38.118
3 IAS 2, Inventories
• Measurement and disclosure but not recognition – IAS 2.1
• Measured at lower of cost and net realisable value – IAS 2.9
• Cost = expenditure incurred, in bringing the items to their present location and condition, so the
cost of purchase and the cost of conversion – IAS 2.10
– Fixed costs includes by reference to normal levels of activity – IAS 2.13
• Cost formula: FIFO or Weighted average – IAS 2.25
• NRV includes costs to complete and selling costs – IAS 2.6
• Disclosures include accounting policies, carrying amounts and amounts recognised as an
expense – IAS 2.36-38
4 IAS 36, Impairment of Assets

(1) Indications
• At each reporting date assess whether indication of impairment: – IAS 36.9
– If so, estimate recoverable amount (RA)
HB2021

– RA is higher of fair value less costs to sell and value in use (present value of future cash flows in
use and on disposal) – IAS 36.6
– Review both external and internal information for evidence of impairment – IAS 36.12
• Impairment loss where carrying amount exceeds RA – IAS 36.59
(2) Fair value less costs to sell
• The way in which fair value is determined depends on whether there is a binding sale agreement
and/or an active market – IAS 36.25-27
• Examples of disposal costs – IAS 36.28
(3) Value in use
• Calculation involves the estimation of future cash flows as follows: – IAS 36.39
– Cash flows from continuing use
– Cash flows necessarily incurred to generate cash inflows from continuing use
– Net cash flows receivable/payable on disposal
• These should reflect the current condition of the asset – IAS 36.44
• The discount rate should reflect:
– The time value of money – IAS 36.55
– Risks specific to the asset for which the future cash flow estimates have not been adjusted
(4) Cash-generating units
• Estimate recoverable amount of CGU if not possible to assess for an individual asset – IAS 36.66
• Identification of an asset’s CGU involves judgement – IAS 36.68
• Goodwill should be allocated to each of the acquirer’s CGUs that are expected to benefit – IAS
36.80
• Goodwill that cannot be allocated to a CGU on a non-arbitrary basis is allocated to the group of
CGUs to which it relates – IAS 36.81
• Annual impairment review required for any CGU which includes goodwill – IAS 36.90
• Corporate assets should be allocated on a reasonable and consistent basis – IAS 36.102
(5) Impairment losses
• If the asset is held under the cost model the impairment should be recognised in profit or loss –
IAS 36.60
• If the asset has been revalued the impairment loss is treated as a revaluation decrease – IAS 36.60
• An impairment loss for a CGU should be allocated: – IAS 36.104
– To goodwill then
– To all other assets on a pro rata basis
• When a CGU is a non-wholly owned subsidiary and non-controlling interest is measured at
acquisition date at share of net assets, notionally gross up goodwill for that part attributable to the
non-controlling interest – IAS 36 (Appendix C)
(6) Reversals
• An impairment loss recognised for goodwill should not be reversed – IAS 36.124
(7) Disclosures
• All impairments – IAS 36.126
• For a material impairment on an individual asset – IAS 36.130
• For a material impairment on a CGU – IAS 36.130

• Definition of investment property – IAS 40.5
• Definition of fair value – IFRS 13.9
• Property held as a right-of-use asset may be investment property – IAS 40.6
• Fair value model – IAS 40.33-35, IAS 40.38
• Cost model – IAS 40.56
HB2021

• Agricultural activities – IAS 41.5, 8
– Biological assets
– Agricultural produce at the point of harvest
– Government grants
• Recognition and measurement – IAS 41.10, 12-13
• Gains and losses – IAS 41.26, 28
• Government grants – IAS 41.34-35
• Disclosure – IAS 41.40, 41, 46-50, 54-57
7 IFRS 6, Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources

• Scope – IFRS 6.3-5
• Measurement at recognition – IFRS 6.8-11
• Measurement after recognition – IFRS 6.12
• Changes in accounting policies – IFRS 6.13
• Impairment – IFRS 6.18

• Objective – IFRS 4.1
• Scope – IFRS 4.2-6
• Embedded derivatives – IFRS 4.7-9
• Liability adequacy test – IFRS 4.15
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 IAS 40
Which of the following properties fall under the definition of investment property and therefore
within the scope of IAS 40, Investment Property?
A Property occupied by an employee paying market rent
B A building owned by an entity and leased out under an operating lease
C Property being constructed on behalf of third parties
D Land held for long-term capital appreciation
2 Ruapehu
The Ruapehu Company manufactures a single type of concrete mixing machine, which it sells to
building companies. Ruapehu is currently considering the value of its inventories at 31 December
20X7. The following data are relevant at this date:
Cost per item £

Variable production costs 200,000
Fixed production costs 40,000
240,000
There are 85 mixing machines held in inventory.

The company has a contract to sell 15 concrete mixing machines at £225,000 each to a major local
building company in January 20X8. The normal selling price is £260,000 per machine. Selling costs
are minimal.
Requirement
What is the value of Ruapehu’s inventory at 31 December 20X7, according to IAS 2, Inventories?
3 Utah
The Utah Company manufactures motors for domestic refrigerators. A major customer is The
Bushbaby Company, which is a major international electrical company making refrigerators as one of
its products.
Utah is currently preparing its financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7 and it expects
to authorise them for issue on 3 March 20X8.
Utah holds significant inventories of motors (which are unique to the Bushbaby contract) as
Bushbaby requires them to be supplied on a just-in-time basis and has variable production
schedules.
On 3 January 20X8, Bushbaby announced that it was fundamentally changing the design of its
refrigerators and that, while this had been planned for some time, it had not been possible to warn
Utah for reasons of commercial confidentiality. As a consequence, it would cease to use Utah’s
motors from 30 April 20X8 and would reduce production before that date. Details for Utah are as
follows:
Number of motors held in inventory at 31 December 4,000 motors

Expected sales in the four months to 30 April 20X8 1,600 motors
Net selling price per motor sold to Bushbaby £50
Net selling price per motor unsold at 30 April 20X8 £10
HB2021

Cost per motor £25
Requirement
At what value should the inventories of motors be stated by Utah in its statement of financial position
at 31 December 20X7 according to IAS 2, Inventories, and IAS 10, Events after the Reporting Period?
4 Niobium
The Niobium Company operates in the petrol refining industry. A fire at a competitor using similar
plant has revealed a safety problem and the Government has introduced new regulations requiring
the installation of new safety equipment in the industry. The refinery had a carrying amount of £30
million before the installation of the safety equipment. The new safety equipment cost £5 million and
was fully operational at 31 December 20X7, but it does not generate any future economic benefits.
The refinery would, however, be closed down without such equipment being installed.
At 31 December 20X7 the net selling price of the refinery was estimated at £33 million. In
determining its value in use, the directors have determined that the refinery would generate annual
cash flows of £3.2 million from next year in perpetuity, to be discounted at 10% per annum.
Requirement
According to IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment, what is the carrying amount of the refinery in
Niobium’s statement of financial position at 31 December 20X7?
5 Oruatua
The Oruatua Company acquired a piece of machinery for £800,000 on 1 January 20X6. It identified
that the asset had three major components as follows:
Component Useful life Cost (£’000)
Pump 5 years 110
Filter 4 years 240
Engines 15 years 450
Under the terms of the 15-year licence agreement for the use of the machinery, the engines (but not
the other components) were to be dismantled at the end of the licence period. The machinery
contained three engines, and dismantling costs for all three engines were initially estimated at a total
cost of £480,000 (ie, £160,000 per engine) payable in 15 years’ time. Oruatua’s discount rate
appropriate to the risk specific to this liability is 7% per annum.
One of the three engines developed a fault on 1 January 20X7 and had to be sold for scrap for
£40,000. A replacement engine was purchased at a cost of £168,000 on 1 January 20X7, for use until
the end of the licence period, when dismantling costs on this engine estimated at £150,000 would
be payable.
At a rate of 7% per annum the present value of £1 payable in 15 years’ time is 0.3624 and of £1
payable in 14 years’ time is 0.3878.
Requirements
Calculate the following figures for inclusion in Oruatua’s financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X7 according to IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment, and IAS 37, Provisions,
Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
(a) The carrying amount of the machinery at 31 December 20X6;
(b) The profit/loss on the disposal of the faulty engine;
(c) The carrying amount of the machinery at 31 December 20X7.
HB2021

6 Antimony
The Antimony Company acquired its head office on 1 January 20W8 at a cost of £5.0 million
(excluding land). Antimony’s policy is to depreciate property on a straight-line basis over 50 years
with a zero residual value.
On 31 December 20X2 (after five years of ownership) Antimony revalued the non-land element of its
head office to £8.0 million. Antimony does not transfer annual amounts out of revaluation reserves as
assets are used: this is in accordance with the permitted treatment in IAS 16, Property, Plant and
Equipment.
In January 20X8, localised flooding occurred and the recoverable amount of the non-land element of
the head office property fell to £2.9 million.
Requirement
What impairment charge should be recognised in the profit or loss of Antimony arising from the
impairment review in January 20X8 according to IAS 36, Impairment of Assets?
7 Sundew
The Sundew Company is a vertically integrated manufacturer of chainsaws. It has two divisions.
Division X manufactures engines, all of which are identical. Division Y assembles complete chainsaws
and sells them to third party dealers.
Division X, a cash-generating unit, sells to Division Y at cost price but sells to other chainsaw
manufacturers at cost plus 50%. Details of Division X’s budgeted revenues for the year ending 31
December 20X7 are as follows:
Engines Price per engine

Sales to Division Y 2,500 £1,000
Third party sales 1,500 £1,500
Requirement
What are the 20X7 cash inflows which should be used in determining the value in use of Division X
according to IAS 36, Impairment of Assets?
8 Cowbird
The Cowbird Company operates in the television industry. It acquired a licence to operate in a
particular region for 20 years at a cost of £10 million on 31 December 20X3. Cowbird’s policy was to
amortise the fee paid for the licence on a straight-line basis.
By 31 December 20X5 it had become apparent that Cowbird had overpaid for the licence and,
measuring recoverable amount by reference to value in use, it recognised an impairment charge of
£4.05 million, leaving a carrying amount of £4.95 million.
At 31 December 20X7 the market place had improved, such that the conditions giving rise to the
original impairment no longer existed. The recoverable amount of the licence by reference to value
in use was now £11 million.
Requirement
What should be the carrying amount of the licence in the statement of financial position of Cowbird
at 31 December 20X7, according to IAS 36, Impairment of Assets?
9 Acetone
The Acetone Company is testing for impairment two subsidiaries which have been identified as
separate cash-generating units.
Some years ago, Acetone acquired 80% of The Dushanbe Company for £600,000 when the fair value
of Dushanbe’s identifiable assets was £400,000. As Dushanbe’s policy is to distribute all profits by
way of dividend, the fair value of its identifiable net assets remained at £400,000 on 31 December
HB2021

20X7. The impairment review indicated Dushanbe’s recoverable amount at 31 December 20X7 to be
£520,000.
Some years ago Acetone acquired 85% of The Maclulich Company for £800,000 when the fair value
of Maclulich’s identifiable net assets was £700,000. Goodwill of £205,000 (£800,000 – (£700,000 ×
85%)) was recognised. As Maclulich’s policy is to distribute all profits by way of dividend, the fair
value of its identifiable net assets remained at £700,000 on 31 December 20X7. The impairment
review indicated Maclulich’s recoverable amount at 31 December 20X7 to be £660,000.
It is Acetone group policy to value the non-controlling interest using the proportion of net assets
method.
Requirements
Determine the following amounts in respect of Acetone’s consolidated financial statements at 31
December 20X7 according to IAS 36, Impairment of Assets.
(a) The carrying amount of Dushanbe’s assets to be compared with its recoverable amount for
impairment testing purposes.
(b) The carrying amount of goodwill in respect of Dushanbe after the recognition of any impairment
loss.
(c) The carrying amount of the non-controlling interest in Maclulich after recognition of any
impairment loss.
10 Titanium
On 1 January 20X7 The Titanium Company acquired the copyright to four similar magazines, each
with a remaining legal copyright period for 10 years. At the end of the legal copyright period, other
publishing companies will be allowed to tender for the copyright renewal rights.
At 31 December 20X7 the following information was available in respect of the assets:
Publication Copyright cost Remaining period over which Value in active market
name at 1 January publication is expected to generate at 31 December 20X7
20X7 cash flows at 1 January 20X7
Dominoes £900,000 6 years £700,000
Billiards £1,200,000 16 years £1,150,000
Skittles £1,700,000 8 years Unknown
Darts £1,400,000 Indefinite £2,100,000
Titanium uses the revaluation model as its accounting policy in relation to intangible assets.
Requirement
What is the total charge to profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X7 in respect of these
intangible assets per IAS 38, Intangible Assets?
11 Lewis
The following issues have arisen in relation to business combinations undertaken by the Lewis
Company.
(1) Lewis acquired the trademark of a type of wine when it acquired 80% of the ordinary share
capital of The Calcium Company on 1 April 20X7. This wine is produced from a vineyard that is
exclusively used by Calcium.
(2) When Lewis bought a football club on 1 May 20X7, it acquired the registrations of a group of
football players.
(3) Lewis acquired a 75% share in the Stilt Company during 20X7. At the acquisition date Stilt was
researching a new pharmaceutical product which is expected to produce future economic
benefits.
The cost of these assets can be measured reliably.
HB2021

Requirement
Indicate which of the above items should or should not be recognised as assets separable from
goodwill in Lewis’s statement of financial position at 31 December 20X7, according to IAS 38,
Intangible Assets.
12 Diversified group
The following issues have arisen within a diversified group of businesses.
(1) The Thrasher Company has signed a three-year contract with a team of experts to write
questions for a computer based examination on International Financial Reporting Standards. The
contract states that the experts cannot work on similar projects for rival entities. Thrasher
incurred costs of £5,000 in training the experts to use the software, and believes that the product
developed by the team will be a market leader.
(2) The Curium Company has a loyalty card scheme for customers. Every customer purchase is
recorded in such a way that Curium is able to create a profile of spending amounts and habits of
customers, and uses this to target them with special offers and discounts to encourage repeat
business. The database has cost £60,000 to create and Curium has been approached by another
company wishing to buy the contents of the database.
Requirement
Which of the above items should be classified as intangible assets per IAS 38, Intangible Assets?
13 Cadmium
The Cadmium Company produces a globally recognised dog food that is a market leader. The
trademark was established over 50 years ago and is renewable every eight years. The last renewal
was effective from 1 January 20X2 and cost £65,000. Cadmium intends to continue to renew the
trademark in future years.
Cadmium uses the revaluation model where allowed for measuring intangible assets, in accordance
with IAS 38, Intangible Assets. A valuation of £50 million was made by an independent valuation
expert on 31 December 20X7, who charged £650,000 for the valuation report.
Requirement
What is the carrying amount of the trademark in Cadmium’s statement of financial position at 31
December 20X7 per IAS 38, Intangible Assets?
14 Piperazine
The Piperazine Company’s financial reporting year ends on 31 December. It has adopted the
revaluation model for intangible assets and revalues them on a regular three-year cycle. For
intangibles with a finite life Piperazine transfers the relevant amount from revaluation reserve to
retained earnings each year.
During 20X4 Piperazine incurred £70,000 on the process of preparing an application for licences for
15 taxis to operate in a holiday resort where, in order to prevent excessive traffic pollution, the
licensing authority only allowed a small number of taxis to operate. The outcome of its application
was uncertain up to 30 November 20X4 when the local authority accepted its application. In
December 20X4 Piperazine incurred a total cost of £9,000 in registering its licences. The licences
were for a period of nine years from 1 January 20X5. The licences are freely transferable and an
active market in them exists. The fair value of the licences at 31 December 20X4 was £9,450 per taxi
and Piperazine carried them at fair value in its statement of financial position at 31 December 20X4.
At 31 December 20X7, Piperazine undertook its regular revaluation. On that date the licensing
authority announced that it would triple the number of licences offered to taxi operators and there
were transactions in the active market for licences with six years to run at £4,500.
Requirements
Determine the following amounts in respect of the revaluation reserve in respect of these taxi
licences in Piperazine’s financial statements according to IAS 38, Intangible Assets.
14.1 The balance at 31 December 20X4
HB2021

14.2 The balance at 31 December 20X7 before the regular revaluation
14.3 The balance at 31 December 20X7 after the regular revaluation
15 Boron
The Boron Company is an investment property company. On 31 December 20X6, it purchased a
retirement home as an investment at a cost of £600,000. Legal costs associated with the acquisition
of this property were a further £50,000.
At 31 December 20X7 Boron adopted the fair value model. The fair value of the retirement home at
this date was £700,000 and costs to sell were estimated at £40,000.
Requirement
What amount should appear in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of
Boron in the year ending 31 December 20X7 in respect of the retirement home under IAS 40,
Investment Property?
16 Laburnum
The Laburnum Company is an investment property company. One of its properties is a warehouse
which has the specialist use of storing tropical plants at high temperatures. As a result, the central
heating system is an important and integral part of the warehouse building. Laburnum uses the fair
value model for investment properties.
The central heating system was purchased on 1 January 20X2 for £80,000. It is being depreciated at
10% per annum on cost and it has been agreed by the valuer that the carrying amount of the central
heating system is a reasonable value at which to include it in the fair value of the entire warehouse.
In December 20X7, the valuer initially determined the fair value of the warehouse, including the
central heating system, to be £1,250,000. Unfortunately, the central heating system completely failed
on 25 December 20X7 and was immediately scrapped and replaced with a new heating system
costing £140,000 on 31 December 20X7.
Requirement
According to IAS 40, Investment Property, at what value should the warehouse, including the heating
system, be recognised in the financial statements of Laburnum in the year ending 31 December
20X7?
17 Ramshead
On 1 January 20X6, The Ramshead Company acquired an investment property for which it paid £3.1
million and incurred £100,000 agency and legal costs. The property’s useful life was estimated at 20
years, with no residual value; its fair value at 31 December 20X6 was estimated at £3.45 million and
agency and legal costs to dispose of the property at that date were estimated at £167,500.
On 1 July 20X7, Ramshead decided to dispose of the property. The criteria for being classified as
held for sale were met on that date, when the property’s fair value was £3.5 million. Agency and legal
costs to dispose of the property were estimated at £160,000.
On 1 October 20X7, the property was sold for a gross price of £3.7 million, with agency and legal
costs of £165,000 being incurred.
Requirements
Calculate the following amounts in respect of Ramshead’s financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X7 in accordance with IAS 40, Investment Property and IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held
for Sale and Discontinued Operations.
17.1 The gain or loss arising in 20X6 from the change in carrying amount if the fair value model is
used to account for the property
17.2 The gain or loss on disposal arising in 20X7 if the cost model is used
17.3 The increase or decrease, compared with the cost model, in the gain or loss on disposal arising
in 20X7 if the fair value model is used
HB2021

18 Arapawanui
The Arapawanui Company keeps a flock of sheep on its land, selling the milk outputs to make
cheese. The day after its production, the milk is collected on behalf of the purchasers and revenue
from its sale is recognised.
On 30 June 20X7 300 animals were born, all of which survived and were still owned by Arapawanui
at 31 December 20X7. 10,000 litres of milk were produced in the year to 31 December 20X7.
The following market data is available in respect of the sheep.
At 30 June 20X7 At 31 December 20X7

Type of animal Fair value per animal Fair value per animal
£ £
Newborn 22 23
6 months old 25 26
The animal fair values are based on transactions prices in the local markets. Auctioneers’ commission
is 1.5% of the transaction price and the government sales levy is 0.5% of that price.
The production cost, including overheads, of the milk was £0.08 per litre and the fair values were
£0.13 per litre throughout 20X7 and £0.14 per litre throughout 20X8. Costs to sell were estimated at
4%.
Requirement
What gain should be recognised in respect of the newborn sheep and the milk in Arapawanui’s
financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7, according to IAS 41, Agriculture?
19 Tepev
The Tepev Company bought a flock of 400 sheep on 1 December 20X7. The cost of each sheep was
£80, which represented fair value at that date. Auctioneers’ fees on sale are 5% of fair value, and the
cost of transporting each sheep to market is £4.00. An agricultural levy of £2.00 is payable on each
sheep sold.
At 31 December 20X7 all of the sheep are still held and fair value has increased to £90 per sheep. No
other costs have changed. Tepev has a contract to sell the sheep on 31 March 20X8 for £100 each.
Requirement
What is the carrying amount of the flock in the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X7,
according to IAS 41, Agriculture?
20 Saving
The Saving Company bought a flock of 500 sheep on 1 December 20X7. The cost of each sheep was
£95, which represented fair value at that date. Auctioneers’ fees on sale are 5% of fair value, and the
cost of transporting each sheep to market is £3.00. An agricultural levy of £2.00 is payable on each
sheep sold.
At 31 December 20X7 all of the sheep are still held and fair value has increased to £107 per sheep.
No other costs have changed. Saving has a contract to sell the sheep on 31 March 20X8 for £119
each.
Requirement
What is the gain arising in relation to the flock between the date of initial recognition as an asset and
31 December 20X7, according to IAS 41, Agriculture?
21 Monkey
The Monkey Company has the following information in relation to a cattle herd in the year ended 31
December 20X7.
HB2021

£’000
Cost of herd acquired on 1 January 20X7 (which equates to fair value) 1,800
Auctioneers’ sales fees 2% of sale price
Loan obtained at 8% to finance acquisition of herd 1,500
Fair value of herd at 31 December 20X7 2,500
Transport cost to market 35
Government transfer fee on sales – no fee on purchases 50
Requirement
What is the loss arising on initial recognition of the herd as biological assets and the gain arising on
its subsequent remeasurement under IAS 41, Agriculture, in the year ended 31 December 20X7?
22 Blackbuck
The Blackbuck Company has in issue unit-linked contracts which pay benefits measured by reference
to the fair value of the pool of investments supporting the contracts. The terms of the contracts
include the following.
(1) On surrender by the holder or on maturity, the benefits shall be the full fair value of the relevant
proportion of the investment.
(2) In the event of the holder’s death before surrender or maturity, the benefits shall be 120% of the
full value of the relevant proportion of the investments.
Blackbuck’s accounting policies do not otherwise require it to recognise all the obligations under any
deposit component within these contracts.
Blackbuck’s financial controller is unclear whether these contracts should be accounted for under
IFRS 4, Insurance Contracts, or under IFRS 9, Financial Instruments.
Requirement
Explain how these contracts should be accounted for.
23 Traore
The Traore Company is organised into a number of divisions operating in different sectors. The
accounting policies applied in two of its divisions before the introduction of IFRS 4, Insurance
Contracts are as follows.
Accounting policy (1) In its car breakdown division, Traore offers unlimited amounts of
roadside assistance in exchange for an annual subscription. Although it
has always accepted that this activity is in the nature of offering
insurance against breakdown, it accounts for these subscriptions by
using the stage of completion method under IAS 18, Revenue, and
making relevant provisions for fulfilment costs under IAS 37, Provisions,
Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
Accounting policy (2) In its property structures insurance division, Traore makes a detailed
estimate for the cost of each outstanding claim but adopts the practice
of adding another 20% to the total on a ‘just in case’ basis.
Requirement
Which of these accounting policies is Traore permitted to continue to use under IFRS 4, Insurance
Contracts?
24 Evaluation and exploration

Give examples of circumstances that would trigger a need to test an evaluation and exploration asset
for impairment.
HB2021

this chapter.
HB2021


1.1 The double entry is:
DEBIT Asset value (statement of financial position) £7,000

CREDIT Profit or loss £2,000
CREDIT Revaluation surplus (other comprehensive income) £5,000
The case is similar for a decrease in value on revaluation. Any decrease should be recognised
as an expense, except where it offsets a previous increase taken as a revaluation surplus in other
comprehensive income. Any decrease greater than the previous upwards increase in value must
be recorded as an expense in profit or loss.
1.2 The double entry is:
DEBIT Revaluation surplus (other comprehensive income) £5,000

DEBIT Profit or loss £2,000
CREDIT Asset value (statement of financial position) £7,000
There is a further complication when a revalued asset is being depreciated. An upward

revaluation means that the depreciation charge will increase. Normally, a revaluation surplus is
only realised when the asset is sold, but when it is being depreciated, part of that surplus is
being realised as the asset is used. The amount of the surplus realised is the difference between
depreciation charged on the revalued amount and the (lower) depreciation which would have
been charged on the asset’s original cost. This amount can be transferred to retained (ie,
realised) earnings but not through profit or loss.
1.3 On 1 January 20X8 the carrying value of the asset is £10,000 – (2 × £10,000 ÷ 5) = £6,000. For
the revaluation:
DEBIT Asset value (statement of financial position) £6,000

CREDIT Revaluation surplus (other comprehensive income) £6,000
The depreciation for the next three years will be £12,000 ÷ 3 = £4,000 compared to
depreciation on cost of £10,000 ÷ 5 = £2,000. Each year the extra £2,000 is treated as realised
and transferred to retained earnings:
DEBIT Revaluation surplus £2,000

CREDIT Retained earnings £2,000
This is a movement within reserves, not an item in profit or loss.

The fair value less costs to sell of the plant is below its carrying value so it may be impaired. It is now
necessary to find the value in use in order to determine whether an impairment has occurred and to
quantify any impairment loss.
Discounted future cash

Year Future cash flows PV factor at 15% flows
£’000 £’000
1 230 0.86957 200
2 211 0.75614 160
HB2021

Discounted future cash
Year Future cash flows PV factor at 15% flows
£’000 £’000
3 157 0.65752 103
4 104 0.57175 59
5 233 0.49718 116
638
To calculate the impairment loss, compare the carrying value of £749,000 with the higher of value in
use (£638,000) and fair value less costs to sell (£550,000). The impairment loss is therefore £749,000
– £638,000 = £111,000.

The key issue is whether the cash-generating unit produces cash flows which are independent of
other assets or not.
The CGUs which appear to have cash flows independent of the other assets (and can therefore be
subject to reliable assessment of their recoverable value) are:
(2) a branch of a pizza restaurant in Warsaw; and
(4) a commuter monorail.
Options (1) and (3) are not generators of independent cash flows and are therefore too small to be
CGUs in their own right. In the case of (3) the CGU is the theme park as one entity.
Additionally (5) is a CGU in its own right as there is an external active market for its services, even
though these are not openly available (IAS 36.71).

In both scenarios:
(1) (2)
£m £m
Recognised goodwill 90 90
Notional goodwill (£90m × 40/60) 60 60
Carrying amount of net assets 550 550
700 700
Recoverable amount 510 570
Impairment loss 190 130
Allocation of impairment loss:
£m £m
Recognised goodwill 90 90
Notional goodwill 60 40
Other assets pro rata 40 –––
190 130
HB2021

Carrying value after impairment:
£m £m
Goodwill (90 – (150 × 60%))/(90 – (130 × 60%)) – 12
Other net assets (550 – 40) 510 550
510 562

For each scenario:
(1) The factory is not an investment property. It should be classified as property held for sale and
accounted for under IFRS 5.
(2) The building would qualify as an investment property under IAS 40, as the entity intends to earn
rentals from it under an operating lease.
(3) The provisions offered over and above the office space itself fall within what IAS 40 describes as
‘ancillary services’. Considering the nature and extent of these services, it would be unlikely that
they could be described as ‘insignificant’ in relation to the arrangements as a whole. The
building is, in essence, being used for the provision of serviced offices and therefore does not
meet the definition of an investment property.
Although the entity’s main objective in acquiring the building is its potential capital appreciation,
the building should be recognised and measured in accordance with IAS 16 rather than IAS 40.
(4) The property should be recognised as an investment property on 30 March 20X5 when the
offices were ready to be occupied. Costs incurred, and consequently operating losses, after this
date should be expensed even though the entity did not start to receive rentals until later in
20X5. Losses incurred during this ‘empty’ period are part of the entity’s normal business
operations and do not form part of the cost of the investment property.

6.1 The £5 million value could be used as a basis of fair value, because the price was agreed
between market participants.
6.2 The £6 million value could not be used as a basis of fair value, because the sale transaction
cannot be presumed to be between market participants in an orderly transaction.
6.3 The £4.5 million value could not be used as a basis of fair value, because the sale transaction
would appear to have been made by a forced, not willing, seller, and therefore not an orderly
transaction.
6.4 The £5.5 million value could not be used as a basis of fair value, because the sale transaction
would appear to have been made to a buyer who was not knowledgeable of local market
conditions, and therefore not a market participant in an orderly transaction.

Profit or loss on disposal
The cost model £m

Net proceeds 6.00
Carrying amount £5,500,000 × 47/50 (5.17)
Profit on sale 0.83
HB2021

The fair value model £m
Net proceeds 6.0
Fair value (6.2)
Loss on sale (0.2)

(a) The changes of use will be reflected in the financial statements based on whether the entity uses
the cost model or the fair value model for investment properties as follows.
The cost model for investment properties
At 31 December 20X5, the building has a carrying amount of:
£5.5m × 45/50 years = £4.95 million in accordance with IAS 16.
On 1 January 20X6 the property will be recognised as an investment property at its IAS 16
carrying amount of £4.95 million and will continue to be depreciated over its remaining 45-year
life.
At 31 December 20Y0, the building has a carrying amount of:
£4.95m × 40/45 years = £4.4 million in accordance with IAS 40.
On 1 January 20Y1 the property will be recognised as property, plant and equipment at its IAS
40 carrying amount of £4.4 million and will continue to be depreciated over its remaining 40-
year life.
(b) The fair value model for investment properties
At 31 December 20X5, the building has a carrying amount of £4.95 million in accordance with
IAS 16 (as set out above).
On 1 January 20X6, the property will be recognised as an investment property. However, the
property should be revalued to fair value at 31 December 20X5, and any change in value should
be recognised in accordance with IAS 16.
The property will therefore be recognised at a carrying amount of £6 million and the difference
of £1.05 million should be recognised as a revaluation surplus (other comprehensive income).
During the period between 1 January 20X6 and 31 December 20Y0 the building is measured at
fair value with any gain or loss recognised directly in profit or loss. At the end of 20Y0 the
cumulative gain is £1.5 million.
At 31 December 20Y0, the building has a carrying amount of £7.5 million being its fair value and
this is the amount that should be recognised as its carrying amount under IAS 16. The carrying
amount will be depreciated over the building’s remaining 40-year useful life.

£1 million is derecognised being the depreciated cost of the replaced system: £1.2 million × (25/30
years)
£1.2 million is capitalised as the cost of the new system and will be depreciated over its estimated
useful life of 10 years.

The carrying amount of the failed system should be derecognised:
Carrying amount is £100,000 (£400,000 less six years’ depreciation at 12.5%)
The replacement system should be recognised:
Total carrying amount of the office building is £3,500,000
(£3m – £100,000 + £600,000)
HB2021

The entity recognises these transactions and events as follows.
20X5
The property continues to be measured under the fair value model on classification as held for sale
on 30 September. An impairment of £3.65 million is recognised (£4 million less £350,000).
At 31 December the property is presented as held for sale within current assets at £350,000.
20X6
The replacement property is recognised at a cost of £3.8 million and a loss on disposal is recognised
of £15,000 being (proceeds of £375,000 less selling costs of £40,000 less carrying amount of
property of £350,000).
20X7
The insurance proceeds of £3.9 million are recognised in profit or loss.
Note: The requirement to measure an asset ‘held for sale’ at the lower of carrying amount and fair
value less costs to sell does not apply to investment properties measured at fair value (IFRS 5.5). IAS
40.37 states that costs to sell should not be deducted from fair value.

12.1 Wool: Agricultural produce
12.2 Sugar: Products that are the result of processing after harvest

The correct answers are:
A Commission to brokers
B Transfer taxes and duties
Commissions to brokers and transfer taxes and duties are recognised costs to sell in the
standard.

(a) Audit issues
(1) Classification as an investment property
Property A: As this property is owner occupied it does not fall within the definition of an
investment property in accordance with IAS 40 (IAS 40(9)).
Property B: While this property is not legally owned it is held as a right-of-use asset under IFRS
16 and therefore can be treated as an investment property (IAS 40(5)).
Property C: Although this property is currently vacant, on the basis that it is being held for
investment purposes it can be classified as an investment property (IAS 40(8d)).
Property D: This is an investment property as it is legally owned by Propertyco and is let out to a
non-group company (IAS 40(5)).
(2) Valuation
Property A: Should be valued in accordance with IAS 16 ie, cost less accumulated depreciation
unless the revaluation model is to be adopted.
Property B: Would have been recognised in accordance with IFRS 16 at the inception of the
lease at the present value of the future lease payments, plus payments made at or before
commencement less lease incentives. After initial recognition it would be valued at fair value in
accordance with company policy in respect of investment properties.
Property C: Should initially be recognised at cost including transaction costs. In this case the
asset should initially be recognised at £3 million. As the fair value model is adopted by
Propertyco the value will then be revised to fair value.
HB2021

Property D: Should be recognised at fair value in accordance with IAS 40 and the accounting
policy adopted by Propertyco. Changes in fair value should be recognised in profit or loss for
the period.
(b) Audit procedures
• Evaluate the control environment and the process by which Propertyco establishes fair values.
• Determine the basis on which fair values have been calculated. (In accordance with IAS
40/IFRS 13 this should be the price that would be received to sell an asset in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date.) Current prices per square
metre in an active market for similar property in the same location and condition are likely to
provide the best evidence or observable market rents. (IAS 40.40 states that the fair value
must reflect rental income from current leases and other assumptions that participants would
use when pricing investment property under current market conditions).
• Where external valuers have been used assess the extent to which they can be relied on in
accordance with the principles of using the work of a management’s expert in ISA (UK) 500,
Audit Evidence.
• If fair values have been based on discounted cash flows ie, discounted future rental incomes
compare predicted cash flows to current rental agreements and assess whether this is the
most appropriate basis for estimating fair value in accordance with IFRS 13. Review the basis
on which the interest rate applied has been selected and any other assumptions built into this
calculation eg, consider management’s history of carrying out its intentions.
• Review any documentation to support assumptions.
• Agree level of disclosure is in accordance with IAS 40/IFRS 13.
HB2021

1 IAS 40
The correct answers are:
B A building owned by an entity and leased out under an operating lease
D Land held for long-term capital appreciation
IAS 40.8 and 9 give examples of types of investment property.
2 Ruapehu
£20,175,000
IAS 2.31 requires that NRV should take into account the purpose for which inventory is held. The NRV
for the contract is therefore determined separately from the general sales, thus:
£
Contract: NRV is lower than cost thus use NRV, so (£225,000 × 15) = 3,375,000
General: Use cost as this is less than NRV, so (£240,000 × (85 – 15)) = 16,800,000
20,175,000
3 Utah
£64,000
IAS 2.30 requires the NRV of inventories to be calculated on the basis of all relevant information,
including events after the reporting period. This is supported by the example in IAS 10.9(b).
Thus:
£
£25 × 1,600 expected to be sold to Bushbaby: 40,000
£10 × 2,400 remainder 24,000
Total 64,000
4 Niobium
£33 million
IAS 16.11 requires the capitalisation of essential safety equipment even if there are no future
economic benefits flowing directly from its operation.
It does however subject the total value of all the related assets to an impairment test. In this case the
recoverable amount is £33 million, as the net selling price £33 million is greater than the value in use
£32 million (ie, £3.2m/0.1). As this is less than the total carrying amount of £35 million (£30m + 5m),
the assets are written down to £33 million.
5 Oruatua
(a) £850,355
The initial cost of the asset must include the dismantling cost at its present value, where the time
value of the money is material (IAS 16.16(c) and IAS 37.45). The present value of these costs at 1
January 20X6 is £173,952 (£480,000 × 0.3624), making the total cost of the engines £623,952.
Each part of the asset that has a cost which is significant in relation to the total asset cost should
HB2021

be depreciated separately (IAS 16.43). Therefore, at the end of 20X6 the carrying amount of the
asset is £850,355 (£110,000 × 4/5) + (£240,000 × 3/4) + (£623,952 × 14/15).
(b) £(154,118)
The loss on disposal is (per IAS 16.71) the difference between the carrying amount of an
individual engine at 1 January 20X7 of £194,118 (£623,952/3 × 14/15)) and the scrap sale
proceeds of £40,000, to give a loss of £154,118.
(c) £756,521
The replacement engine is capitalised at cost of £226,170 (£168,000 + £150,000 × 0.3878), and
then depreciated over the remaining length of the licence of 14 years. The carrying amount of
the asset at 31 December 20X7 is therefore £756,521 (£110,000 × 3/5) + (£240,000 × 2/4) +
(£623,952 × 2/3 × 13/15) + (£226,170 × 13/14).
6 Antimony
£0.7 million
IAS 36.60 and 61 (also IAS 16.40) require that an impairment that reverses a previous revaluation
should be recognised through the revaluation reserve to the extent of that reserve. Any remaining
amount is recognised through profit or loss. Thus:
• The carrying amount at 31 December 20X2 is 45/50 × £5.0m = £4.5 million.
• The revaluation reserve created is £3.5 million (ie, £8.0m – £4.5m).
• The carrying amount at 31 December 20X7 is 40/45 × £8.0m = £7.1 million.
• The recoverable amount at 31 December 20X7 is £2.9 million.
• The total impairment charge is £4.2 million (ie, £7.1m – £2.9m).
• Of this, £3.5 million is a reversal of the revaluation reserve, so only £0.7 million is recognised
through profit or loss.
7 Sundew
£6,000,000
IAS 36.70 requires that in determining value in use where internal transfers are made, then a best
estimate should be made of prices that would be paid in an orderly transaction between market
participants at the measurement date.
Thus revenues are 4,000 × £1,500 = £6,000,000
8 Cowbird
£8.0 million
IAS 36.110 requires consideration of whether an impairment loss recognised in previous years has
reversed or decreased.
IAS 36.117 and 118 restrict the recognition of any such reversal to the value of the carrying amount
at the current reporting date had the original impairment not taken place. Thus:
Carrying amount under original conditions = £10m × 16/20 years = £8.0m.
HB2021

9 Acetone
(a) £750,000
Book value of Dushanbe’s net assets 400,000

Goodwill recognised on acquisition
£600,000 – (80% × £400,000) 280,000
Notional goodwill (£280,000 × 20/80) 70,000
750,000
(b) £96,000
The impairment loss is the total £750,000 less the recoverable amount of £520,000 = £230,000.
Under IAS 36.104 this is firstly allocated against the £350,000 goodwill. (As the impairment loss
is less than the goodwill, none is allocated against identifiable net assets.)
As only the goodwill relating to Acetone is recognised, only its 80% share of the impairment loss
is recognised:
£
Carrying value of goodwill 280,000
Impairment (80% × 230,000) (184,000)
Revised carrying amount of goodwill 96,000
(c) £99,000
£
Carrying amount of Maclulich’s net assets 700,000
Recognised goodwill 205,000
Notional goodwill (15/85 × £205,000) 36,176
941,176
Recoverable amount (660,000)
Impairment loss 281,176
Allocated to:
Recognised and notional goodwill 241,176
Other net assets 40,000
Therefore the non-controlling interest is (£700,000 – £40,000) × 15% = £99,000.
10 Titanium
£672,500
IAS 38.94 deals with the identification of the useful life of an intangible asset arising from legal rights.
The Dominoes publication has a useful life of six years, and so should be amortised over this period.
At the year end the carrying amount of £750,000, (900,000 × 5/6), exceeds the active market value,
so an impairment of £50,000 is required. This gives a total charge of £200,000 (£150,000
amortisation plus £50,000 impairment charge)
The Billiards publication is initially amortised over the period of 10 years to the end of the copyright
arrangement, as there is no certainty that the company can publish the magazine after this date. This
gives a charge of £120,000.
HB2021

The Skittles publication is amortised over the period it is expected to generate cash flows of eight
years, giving a charge of £212,500.
The Darts publication has an indefinite period over which it is expected to generate cash flows.
Under normal circumstances it would be automatically subject to an annual impairment review.
However, because the copyright arrangement does have a finite period, amortisation should take
place over 10 years, and so a charge of £140,000 is required.
The total charge is £672,500.
11 Lewis
For each statement:
(1) Recognised
The vineyard trademark is not separable because it could only be sold with the vineyard itself.
But under IAS 38.36, the combination of the vineyard and the trademark should be recognised.
(2) Recognised
The footballers’ registrations represent a legal right which meets the identifiability criterion in
IAS 38.12.
(3) Recognised
The research project should be treated as a separate asset, as on a business combination it
meets the definition of an asset and is identifiable (IAS 38.34).
12 Diversified group
For each item:
(1) Not an intangible
The training costs would not satisfy the definition of an intangible asset. This is because Thrasher
has insufficient control over the expected future benefits of the team of experts (IAS 38.15).
(2) An intangible
The database would be classified as an intangible asset because the willingness of another party
to buy the contents provides evidence of a potential exchange transaction for the relationship
with customers and that the asset is separable (IAS 38.16).
13 Cadmium
£16,250
The revaluation model cannot be used for this trademark, because for a unique item there cannot be
the active market required by IAS 38.75. (A professional valuation does not rank as a value by
reference to an active market.) IAS 38.81 requires the cost model to be applied to such an item, even
if it is in a class for which the revaluation model is used.
The cost of renewal should be treated as part of the cost of an intangible, under IAS 38.28(b), but the
valuation expenses should be charged directly to profit or loss, as administration overheads (IAS
38.29(c)).
The trademark is therefore carried at the cost of renewal, depreciated for six of the eight years’ life
since last renewal, so £65,000 × 2/8 = £16,250.
14 Piperazine
14.1 £132,750
Under IAS 38.21 the £70,000 spent in 20X4 in applying for the licences must be recognised in
profit or loss, because the generation of future economic benefits is not yet probable. The
£9,000 incurred in December 20X4 in registering the licences is treated as the cost of the
licences because the economic benefits are then probable. The carrying amount of the
licences under the revaluation model at 31 December 20X4 is £141,750 (£9,450 × 15), so the
balance on the revaluation reserve is the £132,750 uplift (IAS 38.75 & 85).
HB2021

14.2 £88,500
After three years the accumulated amortisation based on the revalued amount is £47,250
(£141,750 × 3/9), whereas the accumulated amortisation based on the cost would have been
£3,000 (£9,000 × 3/9). So £44,250 will have been transferred from the revaluation reserve to
retained earnings (IAS 38.87). The remaining balance before the regular revaluation is £88,500
(£132,750 – £44,250).
14.3 £61,500
The carrying amount of the licences immediately before the revaluation is £94,500 (£141,750 –
£47,250). The revalued carrying amount is £67,500 (£4,500 × 15). The deficit of £27,000 is
recognised in the revaluation reserve, reducing the balance to £61,500 (IAS 38.86).
15 Boron
£50,000
Under the fair value model IAS 40.33 requires investment properties to be measured at fair value,
while IAS 40.37 requires fair value to be determined excluding transaction costs that may be incurred
on sale or other disposal. IAS 40.35 requires changes in fair value to be recognised in profit or loss.
IAS 40.20 requires transaction costs, such as legal costs, to be included in the initial measurement.
So the change in fair value is £700,000 – (£600,000 + £50,000) = £50,000.
16 Laburnum
£1,358,000
IAS 40.19 and 68 require derecognition of the carrying amount of the failed system & inclusion of the
replacement.
Thus £1,250,000 – (£80,000 × 4/10) + £140,000 = £1,358,000
17 Ramshead
17.1 £250,000 gain
Transaction costs should be included in the initial measurement of investment properties (IAS
40.20). Under the fair value model an investment property is subsequently carried at fair value
without any deduction for costs to sell (IAS 40.33 & 5). The gain recognised in profit or loss is
£250,000 (£3.45m – (£3.1m + £0.1m)).
17.2 £575,000 gain
Any asset classified as held for sale is measured in accordance with applicable IFRS
immediately before classification. So if the cost model is used, the carrying amount before
initial classification is cost less depreciation to the date of classification, so £2.96 million (£3.2m
less 18 months’ depreciation at 5% per annum). On initial classification, the property is
measured at the lower of this carrying amount and the £3.34 million (£3.5m – £160,000) fair
value less costs to sell (IFRS 5.15) so £2.96 million. There is no subsequent depreciation (IFRS
5.25), so the carrying amount will be the same at the date of disposal. The profit on disposal is
net disposal proceeds less the carrying amount (IAS 40.69), so net sales proceeds of £3.535
million (£3.7m – £165,000) less £2.960 million gives a profit on disposal of £575,000.
17.3 £540,000 decrease
If the fair value model is used, then the carrying amount immediately before initial
classification will be the £3.5 million fair value. The requirement to measure an asset ‘held for
sale’ at the lower of carrying amount at fair value less costs to sell does not apply to investment
properties measured at fair value (IFRS 5.5) and so the property continues to be measured at
fair value. IAS 40.37 states that costs to sell should not be deducted from fair value, so the
property continues to be measured at £3.5 million. Profit on disposal will be net sales proceeds
of £3.535m less £3.5m = £35,000. This is a reduction of £540,000 on the cost model gain. If
the fair value model is used, then the carrying amount immediately before initial classification
will be the £3.5 million fair value. The requirement to measure an asset ‘held for sale’ at the
lower of carrying amount at fair value less costs to sell does not apply to investment properties
measured at fair value (IFRS 5.5) and so the property continues to be measured at fair value.
HB2021

IAS 40.37 states that costs to sell should not be deducted from fair value, so the property
continues to be measured at £3.5 million. Profit on disposal will be net sales proceeds of
£3.535m less £3.5m = £35,000. This is a reduction of £540,000 on the cost model gain.
18 Arapawanui
The newborn sheep are biological assets and should be measured at fair value less costs to sell, both
on initial recognition and at each reporting date (IAS 41.12). The gains on initial recognition and from
a change in this value should be recognised in profit or loss (IAS 41.26). As the animals are six
months old at the year end, the total gain in the year (being the initial gain based on a newborn fair
value of £22 plus the year-end change in value by £4 to £26) is £7,644 (300 × £26 × (100% – 1.5% –
0.5%)).
The milk is agricultural produce and should be recognised initially under IAS 41 at fair value less
costs to sell (IAS 41.13). (At this point it is taken into inventories and dealt with under IAS 2.) The gain
on initial recognition should be recognised in profit or loss (IAS 41.28). The gain is £1,248 (10,000
litres × £0.13 × (100% – 4)).
Total gain is £8,892.
19 Tepev
£33,400
Biological assets should be measured at fair value less costs to sell (IAS 41.12). Costs to sell include
sales commission and regulatory levies but exclude transport to market (IAS 41.14). Transport costs
are in fact deducted from market value in order to reach fair value. In this question fair value of £90 is
provided; it is assumed that this is calculated as a market value of £94 less the quoted transport costs
of £4. Contracts to sell agricultural assets at a future date should be ignored (IAS 41.16).
The statement of financial position carrying amount per sheep is:
£
Fair value 90.00
Costs to sell (£90 × 5%) + £2.00 (6.50)
Value per sheep 83.50
For the flock of 400 sheep, the amount is £33,400.
20 Saving
£5,700
Biological assets should be measured at fair value less costs to sell, both on initial recognition and at
each reporting date (IAS 41.12). Costs to sell include sale commission and regulatory levies but
exclude transport to market (IAS 41.14). Transport costs are in fact deducted from market value in
order to reach fair value. Contracts to sell agricultural assets at a future date should be ignored (IAS
41.16).
£
FV at reporting date (£107 – commission (£107 × 5%) – levy £2.00) 99.65
Initial FV per sheep (£95 – commission (£95 × 5%) – levy £2.00) (88.25)
Gain per sheep 11.40
There is, therefore, a gain on the flock of 500 sheep of £5,700.
21 Monkey
£86,000 loss on initial recognition
£686,000 gain on subsequent measurement
HB2021

£’000
Cost of herd 1,800
Recognised at FV – costs to sell (£1.8m – fees (£1.8m × 2%) – gvnmt fee £50,000) (1,714)
Initial loss on recognition 86
On acquisition of the herd, the cattle are initially recognised as biological assets at fair value less
costs to sell (IAS 41.27), which in this case is less than cost by the costs to sell which are immediately
deducted (IAS 41.27). Acceptable costs to sell include auctioneers’ fees and government transfer
fees (IAS 41.14) but exclude transport to market costs (IAS 41.14). The interest on the loan taken out
to finance the acquisition is not a cost to sell (IAS 41.22).
The value is then restated to fair value less costs to sell at each reporting date (IAS 41.12)
£’000
Fair value at 31 December 20X7 2,500
Costs to sell: auctioneers fees (£2.5m × 2%) (50)
Government fees (50)
Carrying value 2,400
Less initial recognition value (1,714)
Gain 686
22 Blackbuck
The extra payable on death before surrender/maturity should be accounted for under IFRS 4 and the
remainder under IAS 39.
Given the entity’s accounting policies in relation to the recognition of obligations under the deposit
components, IFRS 4.10 requires the insurance component and the deposit component to be
unbundled; IFRS 4.12 requires the insurance component to be accounted for under IFRS 4 and the
deposit component under IAS 39.
23 Traore
The entity is permitted to continue with both policies.
IFRS 4.13 disapplies the provisions of IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates
and Errors, in relation to selection of accounting policies where there is no IFRS. Entities are therefore
only required to change existing policies in the circumstances listed in IFRS 4.14. Accounting policy
(1) is not caught by this paragraph, so its continued use is permitted.
The application of Accounting policy (2) involves the use of excessive prudence. The continued use
of excessive prudence is permitted by IFRS 4.26.
24 Evaluation and exploration

Circumstances that would trigger a need to test an evaluation and exploration asset for impairment:
• The expiration or anticipated expiration in the near future of the period for which the entity has
the right to explore the relevant area, unless the right is expected to be renewed.
• The lack of available planned or budgeted expenditure for further exploration and evaluation of
the specific area.
• A decision to discontinue evaluation activities in the exploration and specific area when
commercially viable resources have not been identified.
HB2021

Chapter 13
Reporting of non-financial
liabilities
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period
2 IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets
3 Audit focus
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
13
Learning outcomes
reported financial position, and explain the role of data analytics in financial asset and liability
valuation
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to assets and non-financial liabilities for
example: property, plant and equipment; intangible assets, held-for-sale assets; inventories;
investment properties; provisions and contingencies
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 3(a), 3(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
13

of this chapter.

1 IAS 10, Events After Approach Although this IQ2: Significant

the Reporting This section should standard was tested events
Period be mainly revision at Level A at This short,
Regardless of how from your earlier Professional Level, straightforward
quickly the financial studies. Make sure questions at question will test
statements are you do all the Advanced Level will whether you have
published after the questions and look be more complex remembered this
end of the year, back to your earlier and there will be topic from your
subsequent events studies if you are more interaction earlier studies.
and transactions can still unsure. between standards.
be so significant Stop and think Ethical issues may
that they need to be arise, for example if
considered for What type of events a sale of an asset is
either disclosure or could be classified treated incorrectly
adjustment or (in as adjusting or non- as an adjusting
extreme situations) adjusting event, rather than
for their effect on respectively? non-adjusting,
the underlying What type of events causing revenue
principle of going could affect the and profit to be
concern. IAS 10, underlying principle recognised too
Events After the of going concern? early.
Reporting Period
deals with the
treatment of these
issues.
You will need to
identify the
appropriate cut-off
date which will
HB2021

depend on the
process of
authorisation and
the reporting
entity’s jurisdiction.
2 IAS 37, Provisions, Approach IAS 37 appears IQ6: Restructuring

Contingent The key point is that regularly in exam This tests IAS 37 in
Liabilities and provisions need to questions within a conjunction with IAS
Contingent Assets be recognised on scenario that tests 36.
You will be required the basis of other standards, for
example IAS 19 and IQ7: Obligation to
to identify obligations rather dismantle
circumstances in than management IFRS 15.
which provisions will intentions. Possible ethical Tests onerous
be required and issues may arise, contracts and
Stop and think discounting.
when contingent such as the directors
liabilities or A provision may be wishing to make a
contingent assets required in relation lower provision than
should be to cyber security is required.
disclosed. breaches.
3 Audit focus Approach Integrated IQ8: Contingencies

This section focuses The audit focus questions have This is an integrated
on provisions and section will help you generally focused question with an FR
contingencies, and with the integrated on contraventions of part on disclosures
also covers ISA (UK) questions on this IAS 10 and what the and an audit part on
501, Audit Evidence area. auditors should do procedures to be
– Specific in such cases. carried out to
Stop and think
Considerations for determine whether
Selected Items Why would the a company will have
which provides auditors need to to pay damages and
guidance on communicate with if so, how much.
procedures the company’s
regarding litigation lawyers?
and claims.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 13: Reporting of non-financial liabilities 687

Section overview
• Events after the reporting period are split into adjusting and non-adjusting events. Those events
that may affect the going concern assumption underlying the preparation of the financial
statements must be considered further.
• The following is a summary of the material covered in earlier studies.
1.1 Overview of earlier studies

Events after the reporting period are split into adjusting and non-adjusting events.
1.1.1 Adjusting events after the reporting period

Adjusting events are events that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the reporting date,
and the financial statements should be adjusted to reflect them. Examples include the following:
• Settlement of a court case that confirms that the entity had an obligation at the reporting date
• Evidence that an asset was impaired at the reporting date eg:
– Bankruptcy of a customer
– Selling prices achieved for inventory
• Determination of profit-sharing or bonus payments relating to the year
• Finalisation of prices for assets sold or purchased before year end
• The discovery of fraud or errors (where material) that show that the financial statements are
misstated
• An adjustment to the disclosed earnings per share (EPS) for transactions such as bonus issues,
share splits or share consolidations where the number of shares altered without an increase in
resources. The additional shares are thus treated as having been in issue for the whole period
1.1.2 Non-adjusting events after the reporting period

Non-adjusting events are events that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting date.
Disclosure should be made in the financial statements where the outcome of a non-adjusting event
would influence the economic decisions made by users of the financial statements. Examples are as
follows:
• A major business combination after the reporting date (IFRS 3 or the disposing of a major
subsidiary)
• Announcement of plan to discontinue an operation
• Major purchases and disposals of assets
• Classification of assets as held for sale
• Expropriation of assets by government
• Destruction of assets, for example by fire or flood
• Announcing or commencing the implementation of a major restructuring
• Major ordinary share transactions (unless these involve transactions such as capitalisation and
bonus issues where there is a change in the number of shares without an inflow or outflow of
resources, see adjusting events above. Such transactions require EPS to be restated as if the new
number of shares was in issue for the whole year)
• Decline in the market value of investments including investment properties after the reporting
date. These should reflect the fair value at the reporting date and should not be affected by
hindsight
HB2021

1.1.3 Going concern basis
Financial statements are prepared on the ‘going concern‘ basis. Where an entity goes into liquidation
after the reporting date, it is no longer considered to be a going concern and the financial
statements should not be prepared on this basis.
Where the going concern basis is clearly not appropriate, a basis other than the going concern basis
should be adopted, for example the ‘break-up basis’. The break-up basis measures the assets at their
recoverable amount in a non-trading environment, and a provision is recognised for future costs that
will be incurred to ‘break-up’ the business.
Where the financial statements are not prepared on a going concern basis, this should be fully
disclosed, along with the actual basis of preparation used.
Management is required to make an explicit assessment of the entity’s ability to continue as a going
concern by considering a number of financial, operating and other indicators. Indicative of inability
to continue as a going concern would be major restructuring of debt, adverse key financial ratios,
substantial sale of non-current assets not intended to be replaced, loss of key staff or major markets.
1.1.4 The period of review

The cut-off date for the consideration of events after the reporting period is the date on which the
financial statements are authorised for issue. Events that occur after the reporting date but before the
financial statements are authorised for issue need to be considered, regardless of what financial
information has been made publicly available during this period.
Normally the financial statements are authorised by the directors before being issued to the
shareholders for approval; the authorisation date is the date these are authorised for issue to the
shareholders, and not the date they are approved by the shareholders.
Where a supervisory board is made up wholly of non-executive directors, the financial statements will
first be authorised by the executive directors for issue to that supervisory board for its approval. The
relevant cut-off date for the review of events that have occurred after the reporting date is the date
on which the financial statements are authorised for issue to the supervisory board.
The date on which the financial statements were authorised for issue should be disclosed, since
events occurring after that date will not be reflected in the financial statements.
1.1.5 Treatment of errors

Errors identified before the authorisation date will be adjusted in the current financial statements.
Those identified after the financial statements have been published should be dealt with in a
subsequent period under IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors.
IAS 8 requires an error relating to a prior period to be treated as an adjustment to the comparative
information presented in the subsequent financial statements.
If a significant event occurs after the authorisation of the financial statements but before the annual
report is published, the entity is not required to apply the requirements of IAS 10. However, if the
event was so material that it affects the entity’s business and operations in the future, the entity may
wish to discuss the event in the narrative section at the front of the Annual Review but outside the
financial statements themselves.
1.1.6 Equity dividends

These should only be recognised as a liability where they have been declared before the reporting
date, as this is the date on which the entity has an obligation. Where equity dividends are declared
after the reporting date, this fact should be disclosed but no liability recognised at the reporting
date.
HB2021

1.1.7 Further points to note
Information on customers and suppliers
• Information after the reporting date on either a customer or supplier may not only affect amounts
that have been recorded in the financial statements but also impact on the future trading of the
entity.
• This should be assessed and disclosure made if the liquidation of a major customer or supplier is
likely to influence the economic decisions of users of the financial statements.
• Significant customer and supplier relationships are fundamental where an entity relies on one
major supplier. An example of a significant supplier/customer relationship is Intel Corporation
and Dell Inc, where until recently Dell computers have used only Intel microprocessors. Dell relies
almost totally on the ongoing supplier/customer relationship with Intel, and the success of Intel is
vitally important to the future trade of Dell itself.
1.1.8 Contingent liabilities

Evidence may come to light regarding a contingent liability or provision that an entity was unaware
of at the reporting date. The distinction between a contingent liability and a provision is discussed in
IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets. An example of an unknown provision
is where, because of a major fault with goods which were purchased before the reporting date, an
electrical retail chain has had the goods returned after the reporting date. The fault may raise safety
issues and the retailer may have to recall all such items sold within a period of time in order to repair
the fault. In such circumstances, a provision should be recognised for the repair of all items that have
been sold before the reporting date. The entity may not have been aware of the problem at the
reporting date but, as it existed at that date, a provision should be recognised in light of the new
information.
Interactive question 1: Various events

The Roach Company is completing the preparation of its draft financial statements for the year
ended 31 May 20X6.
On 24 July 20X6, an equity dividend of £200,000 was declared and a contractual profit share
payment of £35,000 was made, both based on the profits for the year to 31 May 20X6.
On 20 June 20X6, a customer went into liquidation having owed the company £31,000 for the past
six months. No provision had been made against this debt.
On 17 July 20X6, a manufacturing plant was destroyed by fire resulting in a financial loss of
£200,000.
Requirement
According to IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period, which amounts should be recognised in
Roach’s financial statements for the year to 31 May 20X6 to reflect adjusting events after the
reporting period?
Interactive question 2: Significant events

An entity’s draft financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X3 were completed on 30
May 20X4, approved by the finance director on 7 June 20X4, authorised for issue on 20 June 20X4
and approved by the shareholders on 5 July 20X4.
The following events occurred after the reporting date (assume all amounts are significant to the
entity):
Requirements
How should the entity treat these events in its financial statements?
(a) Notification on 18 February 20X4 that a customer owing £100,000 as at 31 December 20X3 has
gone into liquidation. The financial statements already include a specific provision of £20,000 for
this customer and the entity does not make general provisions.
HB2021

(b) A rights issue on 6 April 20X4 to raise £1,500,000 for an acquisition.
(c) Confirmation on 28 May 20X4 from the entity’s insurer that they will pay £500,000 for inventories
that were destroyed in a fire on 24 December 20X3. The entity had claimed £650,000 and
included this as a receivable in the financial statements.
Interactive question 3: Dividends proposed and declared

The recent financial calendar of an entity with a 31 December year end has included the following:
Authorised by Approved in annual

directors for issue general meeting
Financial statements for 20X2 28 February 20X3 3 May 20X3
Financial statements for 20X3 28 February 20X4 4 May 20X4
Dividends on Proposed by Declared by directors Approved in annual

ordinary shares directors general meeting
20X2 final 28 Feb 20X3 no yes
20X3 interim 31 Aug 20X3 yes no
20X3 final 28 Feb 20X4 no yes
Requirement
How will the dividends be dealt with in the entity’s financial statements?
While IAS 10 was covered at earlier levels, the focus at Advanced Level will be on more complex
scenarios, where conclusions will need to be drawn.
2 IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and

Contingent Assets
Section overview
The following is a summary of the material covered in earlier studies
2.1 Overview of earlier studies
Definition
Provision: A liability where there is uncertainty over its timing or the amount at which it will be
settled.
HB2021

2.1.1 Recognition
• A provision should be recognised when:
– an entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event;
– it is probable that there will be an outflow of resources in the form of cash or other assets; and
– a reliable estimate can be made of the amount.
• A provision should not be recognised in respect of future operating losses since there is no
present obligation arising from a past event.
2.1.2 Onerous contracts

• If future benefits under a contract are expected to be less than the unavoidable costs under it, the
contract is described as onerous. The excess unavoidable costs should be provided for at the time
a contract becomes onerous.
• A lease agreement that becomes onerous is only within the scope of IAS 37, and therefore results
in the creation of a provision, if simplified accounting is applied, so that no lease liability has been
recognised. This is only the case where a lease is short-term or for an asset with a low value.
Definition
Unavoidable costs: Unavoidable costs of meeting an obligation are the lower of:
• The cost of fulfilling the contract, and
• Any penalties from failure to fulfil the contract
2.1.3 2020 Amendment

In May 2020, the IASB issued an amendment to IAS 37, Onerous Contracts – Cost of Fulfilling a
Contract. This clarifies that the cost of fulfilling the contract includes the costs that relate directly to
the contract. These costs include the incremental costs of fulfilling the contract (eg, labour and
materials) as well as an allocation of other direct costs (eg an allocation of depreciation of a machine
used in fulfilling the contract) (IAS 37: para. 68A).
This amendment is effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after January 1, 2022. It is
therefore not yet examinable in full, but you should be aware of it as a current issue.
2.1.4 Restructuring costs

• A constructive obligation, requiring a provision, only arises in respect of restructuring costs where
the following criteria are met:
– A detailed formal plan has been made, identifying the areas of the business and number of
employees affected with an estimate of likely costs and timescales
– An announcement has been made to those who will be affected by the restructuring
2.1.5 Contingent liability

• A contingent liability arises where a past event may lead to an entity having a liability in the future
but the financial impact of the event will only be confirmed by the outcome of some future event
not wholly within the entity’s control.
• A contingent liability should be disclosed in the financial statements unless the possible outflow
of resources is thought to be remote.
2.1.6 Contingent asset

• A contingent asset is a potential asset that arises from past events but whose existence can only
be confirmed by the outcome of future events not wholly within an entity’s control.
• A contingent asset should be disclosed in the financial statements only when the expected inflow
of economic benefits is probable.
HB2021

2.1.7 Reimbursement
• An entity may be entitled to reimbursement from a third party for all or part of the expenditure
required to settle a provision. In these circumstances, an entity generally retains the contractual
obligation to settle the expenditure. A provision and reimbursement are therefore recognised
separately in the statement of financial position. A reimbursement should be recognised only
when it is virtually certain that an amount will be received.
2.1.8 Recognition and disclosure

• A full reconciliation of movements in provisions should be presented in the financial statements.
Detailed narrative explanations should also be provided in relation to provisions, contingent
liabilities and contingent assets. The narrative should include an estimate of the financial amount
in relation to contingent liabilities and assets as well as indications of uncertainties.
• The required disclosures have already been covered at Professional Level. In particular, in relation
to discounting, any increase in the value of the discounted amount arising from the passage of
time or the effect of any change in the discount rate need to be disclosed.
2.1.9 Disclosure let out

• IAS 37 permits reporting entities to avoid disclosure requirements relating to provisions,
contingent liabilities and contingent assets if they would be expected to be seriously prejudicial
to the position of the entity in dispute with other parties. However, this should only be employed
in extremely rare cases. Details of the general nature of the provision/contingency must still be
provided, together with an explanation of why it has not been disclosed.
2.1.10 Discounting to present value

• Where the time value of money is material, the amount of provision should be the present value
of the expenditures required to settle the obligation. The main types of provision where the
impact of discounting may be significant are those relating to decommissioning and other
environmental restoration liabilities. For most other provisions, no discounting will be required, as
the cash flows are not sufficiently far into the future.
• The discount rate to be used should reflect current market assessments of the time value of
money and the risks specific to the liability (ie, it would be a risk-adjusted rate). In practice it may
be more appropriate to use a risk-free rate and adjust the cash flows for risk. For further guidance
on the risk-free rate you may refer to your Strategic Business Management Workbook. Whichever
method is adopted, it is important not to double count risk.
2.1.11 Unwinding the discount

• Where discounting is used, the carrying amount of the provision increases each period to reflect
the passage of time and this is recognised as a finance cost in profit or loss.
As the above overview from earlier studies shows, deciding whether a provision should be made and
if so, how much, may require complex information to be assimilated. In particular, when considering
the discount rate, the risks specific to the liability must be taken into account.
Interactive question 4: Constructive obligation

On 25 September 20X7, further to a decision made earlier in the year by the board of directors,
Industrial plc publicly announced a decision to reduce the level of harmful emissions from its
manufacturing plants.
The directors had reached their decision to proceed with the project after appraising the investment
using discounted cash flow techniques and an annual discount rate of 8%.
The directors estimated that the future cash payments required to meet their stated objective would
be as follows:
• £20 million on 30 September 20X8
• £25 million on 30 September 20X9
HB2021

• £30 million on 30 September 20Y0
No contracts were entered into until after the start of the new accounting year on 1 October 20X7;
however, the entity has a reputation of fulfilling its financial commitments after it has publicly
announced them. Industrial included a provision for the expected costs of its proposal in its financial
statements for the year ended 30 September 20X7. The actual expenditure in September 20X8 was
£20 million as expected.
The average remaining useful lives of the factories on 30 September 20X7 (the reporting date) was
30 years and depreciation is computed on a straight-line basis and charged to cost of sales.
Requirements
4.1 Compute the appropriate provision in the statements of financial position in respect of the
proposed expenditure at 30 September 20X7 and 30 September 20X8, and explain why the
directors decided to recognise the provision.
4.2 Compute the two components of the charge to profit in respect of the proposal for the year
ended 30 September 20X8. You should explain how each component arises and identify where
in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income each component is
reported.
The interactive question you have just done is an example of structuring problems, both on your part
and the part of the directors in the scenario. First, an investment appraisal is carried out by the
directors, then the provision is announced, then calculated by you.
Interactive question 5: Unwinding the discount

A company has a present obligation at 31 December 20X0, which it expects to settle in four years’
time for £200,000. It calculates that the present value of the obligation is £136,603, discounted at
10%.
The unwinding of the discount in 20X1, 20X2, 20X3 and 20X4 is shown in the table below.
Provision
Cr balance b/f 1 Jan Cr unwinding discount @ CF balance c/f 31 Dec

10% 31 Dec
£ £ £
20X1 136,603 13,660 150,263
20X2 150,263 15,026 165,289
20X3 165,289 16,529 181,818
20X4 181,818 18,182 200,000
Requirement
What are the accounting entries for the above for 20X1?
HB2021

In the case of provisions, it is likely that the discount rate will be given to you. However, in other cases
and in practice, choosing an appropriate discount rate is an area where judgement may need to be
exercised. Selecting an appropriate discount rate is important as different discount rates can have a
significant effect on the calculation. For example, in the July 2021 exam candidates were asked to
consider how a change in discount rate for a pension liability would impact the net present value.
Spreadsheets can be used to try out different discount rates and see their effect on the NPV.
Interactive question 6: Restructuring

How should these matters be recognised in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income?
Requirements
6.1 An entity has a 31 December year end. The directors approved a major restructuring
programme on 1 December 20X5 and announced the details on the entity’s intranet and to the
media on 2 December 20X5. The programme involves two stages.
Stage 1
Closure of three production lines during 20X6, the redundancy of 3,000 employees on 31
March 20X6, and the transfer during 20X6 of 500 employees to continuing parts of the
business. All associated costs would be settled during 20X6.
Stage 2
Probable closure of four more production lines during 20X7, with probable redundancies of
3,500 employees during 20X7. Other staff will be transferred to continuing businesses. All
associated costs would be settled during 20X7. Assume that the details of Stage 2 were
formally confirmed on 1 November 20X6.
6.2 The entity had some years ago signed a ‘take or pay’ contract with a supplier, in order to ensure
the reliable supply each year of 100,000 tonnes of critical raw materials to each of the seven
production lines affected by the restructuring programme. Under the contract, the entity must
pay for the 700,000 tonnes each year, even if it decides not to take delivery. This contract falls
due for renewal on 1 January 20X8.
Interactive question 7: Obligation to dismantle

A company is awarded a contract to build and operate a nuclear power station on 1 January 20X1.
The power station comes into operation on 31 December 20X3 and the operating licence is for 30
years from that date.
The construction cost of the power station was £450 million. Part of the agreement for the contract
was that, in addition to building and operating the power station, the company is obliged to
dismantle it at the end of its 30-year life and make the site safe for alternative use. At 31 December
20X3, the estimated cost of the obligation was £50 million.
An appropriate discount rate reflecting market assessments of the time value of money and risks
specific to the power station is 8%.
Requirement
Explain the treatment of the cost of the power station and obligation to dismantle it as at 31
December 20X3 and for the year ended 31 December 20X4.
Work to the nearest £0.1 million.
HB2021

3 Audit focus
Section overview
Auditors will carry out specific procedures on provisions and contingencies.
3.1 Auditing provisions and contingencies

Much of the audit work here is focused on ensuring that the recognition and treatment of these items
is in accordance with IAS 37, which we looked at in section 2 of this chapter.
The audit procedures that should be carried out on provisions and contingent assets and liabilities
are as follows.
• Obtain details of all provisions which have been included in the accounts and all contingencies
that have been disclosed.
• Obtain a detailed analysis of all provisions showing opening balances, movements and closing
balances.
• Determine for each material provision whether the company has a present obligation as a result
of past events by:
– reviewing of correspondence relating to the item; and
– discussing with the directors. Have they created a valid expectation in other parties that they
will discharge the obligation?
• Determine for each material provision whether it is probable that a transferof economic benefits
will be required to settle the obligation by:
– confirming whether any payments have been made after the end of the reporting period in
respect of the item;
– reviewing correspondences with solicitors, banks, customers, insurance company and suppliers
both pre and post year end for evidence of the existence of any liabilities;
– sending a letter to the solicitor to obtain their views (where relevant);
– discussing the position of similar past provisions with the directors. Were these provisions
eventually settled?; and
– considering the likelihood of reimbursement.
• Recalculate all provisions made.
• Compare the amount provided with any post year end payments and with any amount paid in the
past for similar items.
• In the event that it is not possible to estimate the amount of the provision, confirm that this
contingent liability is disclosed in the accounts.
• Consider the nature of the client‘s business. Would you expect to see any other provisions, for
example warranties?
• Consider whether disclosures of provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets are
correct and sufficient.
3.2 Procedures regarding litigation and claims

3.2.1 Introduction
• ISA (UK) 501, Audit Evidence – Specific Considerations for Selected Items provides guidance on
procedures regarding litigation and claims.
A summary of the procedures regarding litigation and claims is provided below.
3.2.2 Litigation and claims

Litigation and claims involving the entity may have a material effect on the financial statements, and
so will require adjustment to or disclosure in those financial statements.
HB2021

The auditor shall design and perform procedures in order to identify any litigation and claims
involving the entity which may give rise to a risk of material misstatement. (ISA 501.9)
Such procedures would include the following:
• Make appropriate inquiries of management and those charged with governance including
obtaining representations.
• Review board minutes and correspondence with the entity’s lawyers.
• Examine legal expenseaccount.
• Use any information obtained regarding the entity’s business including information obtained
from discussions with any in-house legal department.
When litigation or claims have been identified or when the auditor believes they may exist, the
auditor must seek direct communication with the entity’s lawyers. (ISA 501.10)
This will help to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence as to whether potential material
litigation and claims are known and management’s estimates of the financial implications, including
costs, are reliable.
Form of the letter of inquiry
The letter, which should be prepared by management and sent by the auditor, should request the
lawyer to communicate directly with the auditor.
If it is thought unlikely that the lawyer will respond to a general inquiry, the letter should specify the
following.
• A list of litigation and claims
• Management’s assessment of the outcome of the litigation or claim and its estimate of the
financial implications, including costs involved
• A request that the lawyer confirm the reasonableness of management’s assessments and provide
the auditor with further information if the list is considered by the lawyer to be incomplete or
incorrect
The auditors must consider these matters up to the date of their report and so a further, updating
letter may be necessary.
A meeting between the auditors and the lawyer may be required, for example where a complex
matter arises, or where there is a disagreement between management and the lawyer. Such
meetings should take place only with the permission of management, and preferably with a
management representative present.
If management refuses to give the auditor permission to communicate with the entity’s lawyers or if
the lawyer refuses to respond as required and the auditor can find no alternative sufficient evidence,
this would mean that the auditor is unable to obtain sufficient, appropriate evidence and should
ordinarily lead to a qualified opinion or a disclaimer of opinion. (ISA 501.11)
Interactive question 8: Contingencies

In February 20X7 the directors of Newthorpe Engineering suspended the managing director. At a
disciplinary hearing held by the company on 17 March 20X7 the managing director was dismissed
for gross misconduct, and it was decided the managing director’s salary should stop from that date
and no redundancy or compensation payments should be made.
The managing director has claimed unfair dismissal and is taking legal action against the company to
obtain compensation for loss of his employment. The managing director says he has a service
contract with the company which would entitle him to two years’ salary at the date of dismissal.
The financial statements for the year ended 30 April 20X7 record the resignation of the director.
However, they do not mention his dismissal and no provision for any damages has been included in
the financial statements.
Requirements
8.1 State how contingent liabilities should be disclosed in financial statements according to IAS 37,
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
HB2021

8.2 Describe the audit procedures you will carry out to determine whether the company will have
to pay damages to the director for unfair dismissal, and the amount of damages and costs
which should be included in the financial statements.
Note: Assume the amounts you are auditing are material.
Provisions are an area where judgement is required, for example in assessing the likelihood of
success of a legal claim. In an exam, you are generally told whether a claim is likely to be successful,
but in practice it could be difficult to determine.
3.3 Procedures regarding events after the reporting period

ISA (UK) 560, Subsequent Events sets out the audit requirements in relation to events occurring after
the reporting period. Please refer to Chapter 8 for a more detailed discussion.
HB2021

Summary
Events after the reporting period,

provisions and contingencies
IAS 10, IAS 37,

Events after the Provisions and
Reporting Period Contingencies
Did the event

occur between Is there a present No No
Possible
the reporting date obligation as a result
obligation?
and the date of an obligating event?
on which the Yes Yes
No Yes
were authorised Probable outflow? Remote?
for issue?
Yes No
Yes No No (rare)
Reliable estimate?
Does the
Yes
event relate Outside
to a condition the Provide Disclose contingent liability Do nothing
that existed scope
as at the of IAS 10
reporting date?
Yes No
This is Does the

an adjusting event mean that
event and management
financial statements will have to
should be liquidate the
adjusted as entity or cease
appropriate trading?
Yes No
Going concern This is a

basis not appropriate. non-adjusting
Disclosure event and the
of the change of basis numbers in the
to be made in financial statements
accordance with should not be
IAS 1, Presentation of changed. However,
Financial Statements disclosure should
generally be provided
HB2021

1. What is an adjusting event (IAS 10)? Give examples (Topic 1)
2. What are IAS 10’s requirements in relation to dividends? (Topic 1)
3. When should a provision be recognised? (Topic 2)
4. When, if at all, should a contingent liability be recognised? (Topic 2)
5. When, if at all, should a contingent asset be recognised? (Topic 2)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Saimaa This question revises knowledge of IAS 10, but requires application to an
outcome that is uncertain.
Quokka This question is good practice because it tests the interaction of two
standards: IAS 10 and IAS 2.
Wilcox In this question your brought forward knowledge of IAS 37, including
discounting, is tested.
Mervyn This tests both IAS 10 and IAS 37. A sale has been incorrectly classified
and you need to show the correct treatment. IAS 37 is tested with an
explanation and calculations.
Upstart Records This tests IAS 37 in the context of a restructuring plan in considerably
(Exhibit 3) more depth and complexity than at earlier levels.
Newpenny (Exhibit 1 You will need to determine whether a provision is required for additional
(1)) payment if a set volume of purchases is not met.
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference

• Authorisation
– Process of authorisation of financial statements – IAS 10.4
– Authorisation date is the date on which financial statements are authorised for issue to
shareholders – IAS 10.5, 10.6
– The relevant cut-off date for consideration of events after the reporting period is the
authorisation date – IAS 10.7
• Adjusting events
– Amounts recognised in financial statements should be adjusted to reflect adjusting events after
the reporting date – IAS 10.8, 10.9
– Examples of adjusting events include
◦ Outcome of court case that confirms obligation at reporting date
◦ Receipt of information on recoverability or value of assets
◦ Finalisation of profit sharing or bonus payments
◦ Discovery of fraud or errors
• Non-adjusting events
– An entity should not adjust amounts recognised in financial statements for non-adjusting
events after the reporting period (an example is the subsequent decline of market value of
investments) – IAS 10.10
– Non-adjusting events may need to be disclosed – IAS 10.10
– Dividends proposed or declared on equity instruments after the reporting date cannot be
recognised as a liability at the reporting date – IAS 10.12
– Dividends proposed or declared after the reporting date should be disclosed – IAS 10.13
• Going concern basis
– Financial statements are not to be prepared on going concern basis if management intends to
liquidate entity or cease trading – IAS 10.14
– If going concern assumption no longer appropriate, disclosures required in accordance with
IAS 1 – IAS 10.16
• Disclosure
– Date of authorisation to be disclosed – IAS 10.17
– Disclosures relating to information after the reporting date to be updated in the light of new
information – IAS 10.19
– For material non-adjusting events after the reporting period an entity shall disclose: – IAS 10.21
◦ Nature of event
◦ Estimate of financial effect
2 IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets

• Definitions – IAS 37.10
• Recognition of provisions – IAS 37.14–15
• Contingent liabilities – IAS 37.27
• Contingent assets – IAS 37.31
• Measurement best estimate – IAS 37.36
• Risks and uncertainties – IAS 37.42
• Present value – IAS 37.45–47
HB2021

• Future events – IAS 37.48
• Onerous contracts – IAS 37.66
• Restructuring – IAS 37.70–72, IAS 37.78–80
3 ISA 501
• Audit procedures in respect of litigation and claims – ISA 501.9–12
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 ABC International
ABC International Inc is a company that deals extensively with overseas entities and its financial
statements include a substantial number of foreign currency transactions. The entity also holds a
portfolio of investment properties.
Requirements
Discuss the treatment of the following events after the reporting date.
(a) Between the reporting date of 31 December 20X6 and the authorisation date of 20 March 20X7,
there were significant fluctuations in foreign exchange rates that were outside those normally
expected.
(b) The entity obtained independent valuations of its investment properties at the reporting date
based on current prices for similar properties. On 15 March 20X7, market conditions which
included an unexpected rise in interest rates and the expectation of further rises resulted in a fall
in the market value of the investment properties.
(c) A competitor introduced an improved product on 1 February 20X7 that caused a significant
price reduction in the entity’s own products.
2 Saimaa
The Saimaa Company operates in the banking industry. It is attempting to sell one of its major
administrative office buildings and relocate its employees.
Saimaa has found a potential buyer, The Nipigon Company, which operates a chain of retail stores.
Nipigon would like to convert the building into a new retail store but would require planning
permission for this change of use. Nipigon may, however, still consider purchasing the building and
using it for its own administrative offices if planning permission is declined. It is estimated that there
is approximately a 50% probability of planning permission being granted.
A contract for sale of the building is to be drawn up in November 20X7 and two alternatives are
available:
Contract 1: This sale contract would be made conditional on planning permission being granted.
Thus the contract would be void if planning permission is not granted but it would otherwise be
binding.
Contract 2: This contract would be unconditional and binding, except that the price would vary
according to whether or not planning permission is granted.
The financial statements of Saimaa for the year to 31 December 20X7 are authorised for issue on 28
March 20X8. A decision on planning permission will be made in February 20X8.
Requirement
With respect to the financial statements of Saimaa for the year to 31 December 20X7, and according
to IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period, indicate whether the granting of planning permission on
each of the contracts is an adjusting event.
3 Quokka
The Quokka Company manufactures balers for agricultural use. The selling price per baler, net of
selling expenses, at 31 December 20X7 is £38,000. Due to increasing competition, however, Quokka
decides to reduce the selling price by £5,000 on 3 January 20X8.
On 4 January 20X8 a health and safety report was delivered to Quokka by the Government, showing
that some of its balers were toppling over on moderate gradients. £9,000 per baler would need to
be incurred by Quokka to correct the fault. No further sales could be made without the correction.
HB2021

Quokka had been unaware of any problem or health and safety investigation until the report was
delivered.
The financial statements of Quokka for the year to 31 December 20X7 are to be authorised for issue
on 23 March 20X8.
The cost of manufacture for each baler was £36,000 and there were 80 balers in inventory at 31
December 20X7.
Requirement
After adjustment (if any) for the above events, what should be the carrying amount of the inventory in
the financial statements of Quokka at 31 December 20X7, in accordance with IAS 10, Events After the
Reporting Period and IAS 2, Inventories?
4 Labeatis
The financial statements of the Labeatis Company for the year to 31 December 20X7 were approved
and issued with the authority of the board of directors on 6 March 20X8. However, the financial
statements were not presented to the shareholders’ meeting until 27 March 20X8.
The following events took place:
Event 1: On 18 February 20X8 the Government announced a retrospective increase in the tax rate
applicable to Labeatis’s year ending 31 December 20X7.
Event 2: On 19 March 20X8 a fraud was discovered which had had a material effect on the financial
statements of Labeatis for the year ending 31 December 20X7.
Requirement
State which event (if any) is an adjusting event according to IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period.
5 Scioto
The Scioto Company’s financial statements for the year ended 30 April 20X7 were approved by its
finance director on 7 July 20X7 and a public announcement of its profits for the year was made on 10
July 20X7.
The board of directors authorised the financial statements for issue on 15 July 20X7 and they were
approved by the shareholders on 20 July 20X7.
Requirement
Under IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period, after which date should consideration no longer be
given as to whether the financial statements to 30 April 20X7 need to reflect adjusting and non-
adjusting events?
6 Fushia
The Fushia Company sells electrical goods covered by a one-year warranty for any defects.
Of sales of £60 million for the year, the company estimates that 3% will have major defects, 6% will
have minor defects and 91% will have no defects.
The cost of repairs would be £5 million if all the products sold had major defects and £3 million if all
had minor defects.
Requirement
What amount should Fushia provide as a warranty provision?
7 Wilcox
The Wilcox Company has been lead mining in Valovia for many years. To clean the lead, Wilcox uses
toxic chemicals which are then deposited back into the mines. Historically there has not been any
legislation requiring environmental damage to be cleaned up. The company has a policy of only
observing its environmental responsibilities when legally obliged.
HB2021

In December 20X7, the Government of Valovia introduced legislation on a retrospective basis,
forcing mining companies to rectify environmental damage that they have caused.
Wilcox estimates that the damage already caused will cost £27 million to rectify, but the work would
not be paid for until December 20X9. It also estimates that damage caused by its operations each
year for the remaining four years of the mines’ lifespan will be £3 million, payable at the end of the
relevant year.
17% is the pre-tax rate that reflects the time value of money and the risk specific to these liabilities.
Requirement
To the nearest £1 million, what provision should be shown in the statement of financial position of
Wilcox at 31 December 20X7 under IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets?
8 Noble
The Noble Company operates a fleet of commercial aircraft. On 1 April 20X7, a new law was
introduced requiring all operators to use aircraft fitted with fuel-efficient engines only.
At 31 December 20X7 Noble had not fitted any fuel-efficient engines and the total cost of fitting
them throughout the fleet was estimated at £4.2 million.
Under the terms of the legislation, the company is liable for a fine of £1 million for non-compliance
with legislation for any calendar year, or part of a year, in which the law has been broken. The
Government rigorously prosecutes all violations of the new law.
The effect of the time value of money is immaterial.
Requirement
State the provision required in Noble’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7
under IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
this chapter.
HB2021


The £35,000 profit share payment and the £31,000 bad debt expense are adjusting events and
should be recognised in the financial statements.
See IAS 10.9, 10.12 and 10.22.

(a) This is an adjusting event, as it provides more up to date information about a provision that was
recognised at the reporting date. The £100,000 receivable should be written off.
(b) This is a disclosable non-adjusting event. The rights issue occurred after the reporting date, but
is considered to be of significant importance and should be disclosed in the financial
statements.
(c) This is an adjusting event since it is in relation to an asset that was recognised at the reporting
date. The receivable should be reduced to £500,000.

These dividends will be dealt with in the entity’s financial statements for 20X2, 20X3 and 20X4 as
follows:
Financial statements for: 20X2 20X3 20X4
20X2 final dividend Disclosed in the Charged to –

notes statement of
changes in equity
20X3 interim dividend – Charged to –

statement of
changes in equity
20X3 final dividend – Disclosed in the Charged to

notes statement of
changes in equity

4.1 Provision at 30 September 20X7
Expenditure on: £’000

30 September 20X8 20,000 × 0.926 18,520
30 September 20X9 25,000 × 0.857 21,425
30 September 20Y0 30,000 × 0.794 23,820
63,765
Provision at 30 September 20X8
Expenditure on: £’000

30 September 20X9 25,000 × 0.926 23,150
30 September 20Y0 30,000 ×0.857 25,710
48,860
HB2021

A provision should be recognised where:
(1) there is a present obligation as a result of a past event;
(2) there is a probable outflow of economic benefits; and
(3) the amount can be measured reliably.
(2) and (3) are clearly met, as Industrial will incur expenditure and the detailed estimates of the
amounts have been prepared.
By announcing the plan to reduce emissions publicly, Industrial has created a constructive
obligation to carry out the project. Therefore, although there is no legal obligation, Industrial
should record a provision for the estimated (and discounted) costs of the project.
4.2 The charge to profit or loss for the year ended 30 September 20X8 consists of:
(1) Depreciation (£63,765,000 ÷ 30) = £2,125,500
This is reported in cost of sales.
The provision of £63,765,000 also represents an asset, as it gives rise to future economic
benefits (it enhances the performance of the factories). This is capitalised and depreciated over
30 years (the average useful life of the factories).
(2) Unwinding of the discount (see working) = £5,095,000
This is reported as a finance cost.
WORKING
£’000
Provision at 1 October 20X7 63,765
Expenditure on 30 September 20X8 (20,000)
Unwinding of discount (balancing figure) 5,095
Provision at 30 September 20X8 48,860
The accounting entry to record the unwinding of the discount in 20X1 will be:
DEBIT Finance costs £13,660

CREDIT Provisions £13,660

6.1 Detailed information was made available about who would be affected by Stage 1 and when
the various steps in the first stage of the closure programme would take place.
The announcement about Stage 2 was more of an overview. It was not until 1 November 20X6
that information was announced in respect of Stage 2 in as much detail as that provided in
December 20X5 about Stage 1. There is a constructive obligation in respect of Stage 1 on 2
December 20X5; no such obligation in respect of Stage 2 is made until 1 November 20X6.
Although the announcement is made as a single restructuring programme, there will be two
entirely separate restructuring provisions.
The costs of this major programme will be recognised in profit or loss for the years ending 31
December 20X5–20X7 as follows:
Reason Stage 1 Stage 2
Termination payments to those taking Restructuring 20X5 20X6

voluntary redundancy provision
Termination payments to those being made Restructuring 20X5 20X6

compulsorily redundant provision
HB2021

Reason Stage 1 Stage 2
Employment costs during closing down Restructuring 20X5 20X6

activities and selling off inventory provision
One-off payments to employees agreeing to Continuing 20X6 20X7

move to continuing parts of the business activities
Cost of moving plant and equipment to Continuing 20X6 20X7

continuing parts of the business activities
Cost of moving saleable inventory to Continuing 20X6 20X7

continuing parts of the business activities
Impairment losses on non-current assets See Note 20X5 & 20X5 to

20X6 20X7
Losses on disposal of non-current assets Year when loss 20X6 20X7

on disposal
incurred
Revenue less expenses up to date of closure, Year when 20X6 20X7

other than itemised expenses operating
losses incurred
Note: The announcement of a restructuring programme is an indicator of impairment under IAS

36, so an impairment test should be carried out at the time of the first announcement for all
relevant non-current assets. Despite Stage 2 only being ‘probable’, its assets should still be
tested for impairment in 20X5.
6.2 A provision should be recognised in respect of all contracts when they become onerous,
regardless of whether this is associated with a restructuring programme. If the entity’s
production lines were loss-making before the restructuring announcement, then this contract
may already have been classified as onerous.
If it had not already been identified as being onerous then, at a minimum, a provision should be
made for the 300,000 tonnes per annum for the three Stage 1 production lines, for the period
from when they cannot take any further supplies through to the end of the contract on 31
December 20X7.
A provision should be made for the remaining 400,000 tonnes per annum for the four Stage 2
production lines for the period from when they cannot take any further supplies through to the
end of the contract on 31 December 20X7.
Note: This answer includes a comprehensive list of issues to be considered under restructuring
programmes, included for learning purposes.

At 31 December 20X3
The discounted amount of the provision would be included in the initial measurement of the cost of
the power station as at 31 December 20X3:
£m
Cost 450.0
Provision (£50m × 1/1.0830) 5.0
455.0
Year ended 31 December 20X4

The power plant would be depreciated over its 30-year life resulting in a charge of £455.0m/30 =
£15.2m to profit or loss and a carrying amount of £455m – £15.2m = £439.8m.
The provision would begin to be compounded resulting in an interest charge of £5.0 × 8% = £0.4m
and an outstanding provision of £5.0 + £0.4 = £5.4m in the statement of financial position.
HB2021

Any change in the expected present value of the provision would be made as an adjustment to the
provision and to the asset value (affecting future depreciation charges).

8.1 IAS 37 states that a provision should be recognised in the accounts if:
• an entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event;
• a transfer of economic benefits will probably be required to settle the obligation; and
• a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.
Under IAS 37 contingent liabilities should not be recognised. However, they should be
disclosed unless the prospect of settlement is remote. The entity should disclose:
• the nature of the liability;
• an estimate of its financial effect;
• the uncertainties relating to any possible payments; and
• the likelihood of any reimbursement.
8.2 The following procedures should be carried out to determine whether the company will have to
pay damages and the amount to be included in the financial statements.
• Review the director’s service contract and ascertain the maximum amount to which he
would be entitled and the provisions in the service contract that would prevent him making
a claim, in particular those relating to grounds for justifiable dismissal.
• Review the results of the disciplinary hearing.Consider whether the company has acted in
accordance with employment legislation and its internal rules, the evidence presented by
the company and the defence made by the director.
• Review correspondence relating to the case and determine whether the company has
acknowledged any liability to the director that would mean that an amount for
compensation should be accrued in accordance with IAS 37.
• Review correspondence with the company’s solicitors and obtain legal advice, either from
the company’s solicitors or another firm, about the likelihood of the claim succeeding.
• Review correspondence and contact the company’s solicitors about the likely costs of the
case.
• Consider the likelihood of costs and compensation being reimbursed by reviewing the
company’s insurance arrangements and contacting the insurance company.
• Consider the amounts that should be accrued and the disclosures that should be made in
the accounts. Legal costs should be accrued, but compensation payments should only be
accrued if the company has admitted liability or legal advice indicates that the company’s
chances of success are very poor. However, the claim should be disclosed unless legal
advice indicates that the director’s chance of success appears to be remote.
HB2021

1 ABC International
(a) Details of the abnormal fluctuations in exchange rates should be disclosed as a non‑adjusting
event after the reporting period.
(b) The decline in the value of investment properties is a non-adjusting event, as it does not reflect
the state of the market at the reporting date. The valuation should reflect the state of the market
at the reporting date and should not be affected by hindsight or events at a later date.
(c) The improved product issued by the competitor is likely to have been developed over a period
of time. The value of inventories should be reviewed and adjusted to their net realisable value
where appropriate. Non-current assets may need to be reviewed for possible impairment. This is
an adjusting event, as it reflects increased competitive conditions which existed at the reporting
date even if the entity was not fully aware of them.
2 Saimaa
Contract 1 is a non-adjusting event. Contract 2 is an adjusting event.
Under IAS 10.3, events after the reporting period are those which occur after the reporting period
but before the financial statements are authorised for issue. The planning permission decision is such
an event, because it is to be made before the financial statements are to be authorised for issue on
28 March 20X8. Adjusting events are those providing evidence of conditions that existed at the
reporting date and non-adjusting events are those indicative of conditions that arose after that date.
Under Contract 1, the uncertainty surrounding the contract at the reporting date would be such that
no sale could be recognised as at that date. So there is no transaction for which the planning
permission decision could provide evidence and there would not be an adjusting event.
Under Contract 2, there would be an unconditional sale recognised at the reporting date, with only
the consideration needing to be confirmed after the reporting date. According to IAS 10.9(c) the
planning permission decision would provide additional evidence of the proceeds and would be an
adjusting event.
3 Quokka
£1,920,000
IAS 2.9 states that inventories should be stated at the lower of cost and NRV, and under IAS 10.9(b)(ii)
the sale of inventories after the reporting date may give evidence of NRV at the reporting date.
The 3 January price reduction is a response to competitive conditions which would have existed at
the reporting date. So even though it comes after the year end, it is an adjusting event. Similarly, the
safety report received after the year end relates to conditions at the year end (as the balers in
inventories were defective at this date) and is an adjusting event.
The carrying amount is 80 balers at the lower of cost (£36,000) and NRV £(38,000 – 5,000 – 9,000).
So 80 × £24,000 = £1,920,000
4 Labeatis
Event 1 is a non-adjusting event. Event 2 happened after the statements were authorised, so does
not constitute an event after the reporting period.
Applying IAS 10.3, events after the reporting period are those which occur after the 31 December
20X7 reporting date but before the financial statements are authorised for issue on 6 March 20X8.
Event 1 occurs before 6 March 20X8 but is a non-adjusting event, because in accordance with IAS
10.22(h) this change was not enacted before the reporting date. This is the case even though the
announcement has a retrospective effect on the financial statements still being prepared.
HB2021

Event 2, the discovery of fraud, would have been an adjusting event per IAS 10.9(e), had it occurred
before the date of authorisation for issue. As it was not discovered until 19 March 20X8, it is not even
an event after the reporting period, let alone an adjusting event.
5 Scioto
15 July is the correct answer.
IAS 10.7 states that the authorisation date is the date on which the financial statements are
authorised for issue, even if this is after a public announcement of profit. IAS 10.5 confirms that it is
not the date on which the shareholders approve the financial statements.
6 Fushia
£330,000
Provision must be made for estimated future claims by customers for goods already sold.
The expected value (£5m × 3%) + (£3m × 6%) is the best estimate of this amount (IAS 37.39).
7 Wilcox
£20 million
At the year end a legal obligation exists – through the retrospective legislation – as a result of a past
event (the environmental damage caused in the past) (IAS 37.14). The company should therefore
create a provision for the damage that has already been caused.
It should not now set up a provision for the future damage, because that will be caused by a future
event (the company could close down the mines and therefore not cause further damage to the
environment).
Because the effect of discounting at 17% over two years is material, the cost should be discounted to
present value (IAS 37.45).
So, the provision is £27m/1.172 = £20 million (to the nearest £m)
8 Noble
No provision is required for the fitting of the engines. This is because the present obligation as a
result of the past event required by IAS 37.14 does not exist. The company can choose not to fit the
engines and then not to operate the aircraft.
However, a provision of £1.0 million is required in relation to the fines, because at the reporting date
there is a present obligation in respect of a past event (the non-compliance with legislation).
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 14
Leases, government grants

and borrowing costs
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Identifying a lease
2 Lessee accounting
3 Sale and leaseback transactions
4 Lessor accounting
5 IAS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of
Government Assistance
6 IAS 23, Borrowing Costs
7 Statements of cash flows
8 Audit focus
Summary
Technical references
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
14
Learning outcomes
• Determine and calculate how different bases for recognising, measuring and classifying financial
assets and financial liabilities can impact upon reported performance and position
• Appraise and evaluate cash flow measures and disclosures in single entities and groups
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to an entity’s financing activities which
include: financial instruments; leasing; cash flows; borrowing costs; and government grants
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 4(a), 4(b), 4(d), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
14

of this chapter.

1 Identifying a lease Approach ‘Is it a lease?’ is a IQ2: Is it a lease?

Lease finance is a Make sure you question that could This is an essential
common route to know the detailed well be asked in an interactive question,
acquiring assets. It definition of a lease exam, perhaps in covering a wide
is also topical, by heart and are the context of range of
being the subject of able to apply it to ethics, where a transactions that
a recent standard, any scenario. director wants to may or may not be
IFRS 16, Leases. reduce gearing by leases.
Stop and think claiming it isn’t.
In a working context Do leases always Right of use is a key
you may have to need to be test in this respect.
decide whether an recognised in the
arrangement statement of
constitutes a lease. financial position?
2 Lessee accounting Approach Once it is IQ3: Payments in

For lessees, all As this is a recent, established that it is arrears
leases other than topical standard a lease, any aspect This is a relatively
short leases and and ripe for of IFRS 16 could be straightforward
leases of low value examination, it is tested. question and
assets must be necessary to go A regular way of should be done in
recognised in the through all worked testing this is a conjunction with
statement of examples and scenario in which the rather trickier
financial position. interactive the lease has been next question.
‘Creative’ questions very incorrectly treated, IQ4: Payments in
accountants may try carefully. for example by just advance
to argue that an Stop and think showing the lease
arrangement is not payments as an Doing these
a lease in order to How is the right-of- expense in the SPL, questions together
avoid showing it in use asset made up? rather than an asset will show clearly
the SOFP and in the SOFP. You how the treatment
HB2021

thereby reducing would need to differs.

gearing. explain why this is
wrong, calculate the
correct figures and
often adjust the
for this and other
errors.
3 Sale and leaseback Approach Sale and leaseback IQ6: Sale and
transactions Ensure you is a regular topic for leaseback where
Sale and leaseback understand the examination. IFRS the transfer is a sale
arrangements can different scenarios 16 interacts with This is a
provide entities relating to sale and IFRS 15 as the sale comprehensive
with capital funding leaseback. And the has to meet the question on this
by releasing capital formula to calculate IFRS 15 criteria for a topic and will
caught up in the the right-of-use sale in order to be prepare you for
business for asset and the gain treated as a most exam
investment in other on the sale. genuine sale and scenarios.
core opportunities. leaseback.
Stop and think
You will later Why is it important
encounter sale and to consider whether
leaseback an arrangement
transactions again constitutes a lease?
in practical real life
situations in
Chapters 23 and 24
on financial
analysis.
4 Lessor accounting Approach Lessor accounting N/A

It is common for a The key point to is less commonly
company to rent note is that for examined than
out a building, as lessors, a distinction lessee accounting,
you saw earlier in is made between but it does come up
your studies of IAS finance leases, occasionally.
40, Investment which transfer the It is very important
Property. risks and rewards of in an exam that you
ownership, and consider carefully
operating leases, whether the
which do not. company is a lessee
Finance leases are or a lessor, as the
recognised in the financial reporting
SOFP; operating treatment is very
lease receipts are different in each
credited to P/L case.
Stop and think

Why is the
unguaranteed
residual value of a
leased asset
important?
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 715
5 IAS 20, Accounting Approach IAS 20 has not been IQ8: Government
for Government Revise IAS 20 tested under the grants
Grants and through interactive current syllabus This is a quick
Disclosure of questions and revision question
Government earlier material if asking for an
Assistance necessary. explanation of the
This is revision from Stop and think two methods of
your earlier studies. recognising
It is important to government grants.
distinguish grants
related to assets
from grants related
to income.
6 IAS 23, Borrowing Approach Borrowing costs are IQ10: Borrowing

Costs Revise IAS 23 likely to be tested costs 2
This is revision from through interactive as part of a scenario A detailed question
your earlier studies. questions and also testing other covering any
earlier material if PPE standards. complications you
necessary. are likely to
Stop and think encounter.
Borrowing costs
must be capitalised
as part of the cost
of the asset if they
are directly
attributable to
acquisition/
construction/
production. Other
borrowing costs
must be expensed.
7 Statements of cash Approach The statement of IQ11: Single

flows Start off with the cash flows in an company statement
This section is for interactive exam could be a of cash flows
revision of single question, referring consolidated one. You should be able
company to the summary The most likely to get this question
statements of cash only if you get context is a financial almost completely
flows. You will cover stuck. analysis question or right. If not, have a
consolidated analytical go at Self-test
Stop and think procedures
statements of cash question 9 and
flows in Chapter 20. What are the question. practise questions
benefits of a from your earlier
statement of cash studies.
flows?
8 Audit focus Approach Exam questions N/A

This section is Read and learn the could focus on the
concerned with the table in Section 8.1, financial reporting
audit of leases, which takes you of leases.
following the through the audit of Alternatively there
structure of the lessees. could be an audit
financial reporting issue relating to
sections. leases which gives
rise to a financial
HB2021

Stop and think reporting issue. In

With lessors, the addition, an ethical
main concern for issue may arise
the auditor will be whereby a
establishing company claims
whether the that a transaction is
arrangement is an not a lease, or,
operating lease or a where the company
finance lease. is a lessor, that the
lease is an
operating lease
rather than a
finance lease.
HB2021
1 Identifying a lease
Section overview
• IFRS 16, Leases replaced IAS 17 in 2016.

• A contract to obtain the use of an asset is within the scope of IFRS 16 if it meets the definition of a
lease contract.
• IFRS 16 provides optional exemptions from the application of the standard lessee accounting
model for short-term leases and leases of low-value assets.
• A contract may contain both a lease component and a non-lease component. IFRS 16 requires
entities to account for the lease component of the contract separately from the non-lease
component.
Tutorial note
You have studied leasing in your Professional Studies. However, the new standard on leasing, IFRS
16, introduced major changes, so you are advised to treat this as a new topic, and effectively study
it from scratch
1.1 Leasing agreements and IFRS 16

As you learned in your Professional level studies, one way by which businesses can obtain the use of
an asset is by a leasing agreement. A contract has to meet the definition of a lease contract to be in
the scope of IFRS 16, Leases.
IFRS 16 was published in 2016. IFRS 16 takes the approach of a lessee measuring the ‘right of use’ of
an asset, and recognising it on the statement of financial position.
Definitions
Lease: A contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset (the underlying asset)
for a period of time, in exchange for consideration.
Underlying asset: An asset that is the subject of a lease, for which the right to use that asset has been
provided by a lessor to a lessee.
In a leasing transaction, there is a contract between the lessor and the lessee for the hire of an asset.
• The lessor is owner and supplier of the underlying asset.
• The lessee is the entity who has the right to use the underlying asset.
The lessor retains legal ownership but transfers to the lessee the right to use the asset for an agreed
period of time in return for specified payments.
Definition
Right-of-use asset: An asset that represents a lessee’s right to use an underlying asset for the lease
term.
HB2021

The below guidance provides a structure for identifying whether an arrangement is a lease. You
should expect that at Advanced Level the issue may not be clear cut, so the guidance will provide a
useful tool in making the decision.
1.2 Identifying a lease

Under IFRS 16, a contract is deemed to contain a lease if it conveys the right to control the use of an
identified asset for a period of time, in return for consideration (usually cash, although this purposely
doesn’t restrict the definition).
The right to control the use of the underlying asset depends on the lessee having both:
• the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from using the asset; and
• the right to direct the use of the identified asset.
Note: If the supplier can substitute the asset for an equivalent during the lease, the lessee is not
deemed to have the right to use an identified asset.
Identified asset
• The asset must be specified in the lease.
• May be part of an asset (such as part of an office facility).
• If the supplier has the practical ability to substitute the asset for an equivalent during the lease,
and would benefit economically from doing so (ie, they have a substantive substitution right),
there is no identified asset and the contract is not a lease.
Period of time is either:
• a period of time, such as years; or
• the amount of use, based upon the production of the asset, such as number of units produced.
Right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits
• Can be achieved through holding, using or sub-leasing the asset.
• Assessed only within the parameters of the contract eg, a lease contract for a car may restrict its
use to within one country, in which case only economic benefits within that country are
considered.
Right to direct the use of the asset (control)
• Lessee can direct how and for what purpose the asset is used throughout the period of use.
• Assessment is unaffected by protective rights within the terms of the contract that are designed
to protect the asset eg, prohibiting a truck from being used to carry explosives.
The following flowchart, taken from IFRS 16, Appendix B, paragraph B31, may assist you in
determining whether a lease should be identified in the examples that follow:
HB2021
Is there an identified asset?
NO
Consider paragraphs B13-B20.
YES
Does the customer have the right to obtain

substantially all of the economic benefits from
NO
use of the asset throughout the period of use?
YES
Does the customer, the supplier or neither party

CUSTOMER
have the right to direct how and for what purpose SUPPLIER
the asset is used throughout the period of use?
NEITHER; HOW AND FOR WHAT PURPOSE

THE ASSET WILL BE USED IS PREDETERMINED
Does the customer have the right to operate the asset

throughout the period of use, without the supplier
YES
having the right to change those operating instructions?
Consider paragraph B24(b)(i).
NO
Did the customer design the asset in a way that

predetermines how and for what purpose the
NO
asset will be used throughout the period of use?
Consider paragraph B24(b)(ii).
YES
The contract contains a lease The contract does

not contain a lease
Worked example: Is it a lease 1?

Big Farm Ltd has three Fassey Mergason tractors under contract from Agrirental Ltd. The tractors are
leased for five years, during which time Big Farm Ltd uses and keeps them on the farm, and they
cannot be retrieved by Agrirental Ltd (except in the case of default of payment). Agrirental Ltd will
supply a replacement tractor if any of the three requires servicing or repair. The tractors are returned
to Agrirental Ltd after five years.
Requirement
Is this a lease?
Solution
This is a lease. There are identifiable assets (the three tractors), and Big Farm Ltd has the right to
direct their use for the period of the contract in order to obtain substantially all economic benefits
from them. Agrirental Ltd cannot substitute or swap one of the tractors, unless it requires a repair or
servicing; this is not a substantive substitution right. Therefore, the contract is classified as a lease.
HB2021

Big Farm Ltd also has the use of two combine harvesters under contract from Agrirental Ltd. The
contract agrees that Big Farm Ltd will have access to combine harvesters which have VARIO cutters,
however, Agrirental Ltd can decide on the brand and specific machine supplied to Big Farm Ltd,
albeit with VARIO cutters. As harvesting is not a year round activity, Agrirental Ltd retains the
combine harvesters at its depot, but will supply them as requested within 24 hours.
Requirement
Is this a lease?
Solution
This is not a lease. There are no identifiable assets (the combine harvesters), and although Big Farm
Ltd has the right to use the machines for the period of the contract, Agrirental Ltd can decide upon
the actual combines (provided they have the VARIO cutters) provided to Big Farm Ltd.
Therefore the contract is not classified as a lease, and the rental payments should be expensed to
profit or loss.
In the above examples, the background is the same and some of the details are similar. Your task is to
take account of all the information and focus on the differences.

Outandabout Co provides tours round places of interest in the tourist city of Sightsee. While these
tours are mainly within the city, it does the occasional day trip to visit tourist sites further away.
Outandabout Co has entered into a three-year contract with Fastcoach Co for the use of one of its
coaches for this purpose. The coach must seat 50 people, but Fastcoach Co can use any of its 50-
seater coaches when required.
Requirement
Is this arrangement a lease within the scope of IFRS 16, Leases?
Solution
This is not a lease. There is no identifiable asset. Fastcoach can substitute one coach for another, and
would derive economic benefits from doing so in terms of convenience. Therefore Outandabout
should account for the rental payments as an expense in profit or loss.

Coketown Council has entered into a five-year contract with Carefleet Co, under which Carefleet Co
supplies the council with 10 vehicles for the purposes of community transport. Carefleet Co owns the
relevant vehicles, all 10 of which are specified in the contract. Coketown Council determines the
routes taken for community transport and the charges and eligibility for discounts. The council can
choose to use the vehicles for purposes other than community transport. When the vehicles are not
being used, they are kept at the council’s offices and cannot be retrieved by Carefleet unless
Coketown Council defaults on payment. If a vehicle needs to be serviced or repaired, Carefleet is
obliged to provide a temporary replacement vehicle of the same type.
Requirement
Is this a lease?
HB2021
Solution
This is a lease. There is an identifiable asset, the 10 vehicles specified in the contract. The council has
a right to use the vehicles for the period of the contract. Carefleet Co does not have the right to
substitute any of the vehicles unless they are being serviced or repaired. Therefore Coketown
Council would need to recognise an asset and liability in its statement of financial position.

This example is taken from IFRS 16 illustrative example 3.
Kabal enters into a 10-year contract with a utilities company (Telenew) for the right to use three
specified, physically distinct dark fibres within a larger cable connecting North Town to South Town.
Kabal makes the decisions about the use of the fibres by connecting each end of the fibres to its
electronic equipment (ie, Kabal ‘lights’ the fibres and decides what data, and how much data, those
fibres will transport). If the fibres are damaged, Telenew is responsible for the repairs and
maintenance. Telenew owns extra fibres, but can substitute those for Kabal’s fibres only for reasons of
repairs, maintenance or malfunction (and is obliged to substitute the fibres in these cases).
Requirement
Is this a lease?
Solution
This is a lease. The contract contains a lease of dark fibres. Kabal has the right to use the three dark
fibres for 10 years.
There are three identified fibres. The fibres are explicitly specified in the contract and are physically
distinct from other fibres within the cable. Telenew cannot substitute the fibres other than for reasons
of repairs, maintenance or malfunction (IFRS 16: Para B18).
Kabal has the right to control the use of the fibres throughout the 10-year period of use because:
(1) Kabal has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the fibres over
the 10-year period of use and Kabal has exclusive use of the fibres throughout the period of use.
(2) Kabal has the right to direct the use of the fibres because IFRS 16: Para B24 applies:
(a) The customer has the right to direct how and for what purpose the asset is used during the
whole of its period of use, or
(b) The relevant decisions about use are pre-determined and the customer can operate the
asset without the supplier having the right to change those operating instructions.
Kabal makes the relevant decisions about how and for what purpose the fibres are used by deciding
(a) when and whether to light the fibres and (b) when and how much output the fibres will produce
(ie, what data, and how much data, those fibres will transport). Kabal has the right to change these
decisions during the 10-year period of use.
Although Telenew’s decisions about repairing and maintaining the fibres are essential to their
efficient use, those decisions do not give Telenew the right to direct how and for what purpose the
fibres are used. Consequently, Telenew does not control the use of the fibres during the period of
use.
The above example, taken from IFRS 16, analyses a complex situation and comes to a conclusion. In
an exam, if you missed one of the details and came to a different conclusion, you would still gain
credit for parts of your analysis that were correct.
1.3 Your exam

Under IAS 17, Leases, the predecessor of IFRS 16, there was a distinction between an operating lease
and a finance lease. The classification of the type of lease was essential to how the lessee and lessor
HB2021

would account for the transaction in their financial statements. Questions were asked on this
distinction because accounting for an item as an operating lease removed it from the lessee’s
statement of financial position, so companies who wished to create a favourable gearing ratio, for
example, were incentivised to account for leases as operating leases.
IFRS 16 has removed the differentiation between operating and finance leases from the lessee’s
point of view (although it remains for lessors – see Section 4). However, the incentive to keep
liabilities off the SOFP remains, and preparers of financial statements who wish to do this may argue
that a transaction is not a lease when in fact it is, and therefore should appear on the SOFP. An exam
question could present an ethical dilemma, where the auditor or junior accounting staff member is
under pressure to accept this incorrect financial reporting treatment.
1.4 Recognition exemptions

IFRS 16 provides optional exemptions from the application of the standard lessee accounting model.
Instead of applying the recognition requirements of IFRS 16 described below, a lessee may elect to
account for lease payments as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term or another
systematic basis for the following two types of leases (IFRS 16: paras. 5, 6 and 8). These are available
for:
• Short term leases, which are those for less than 12 months that do not contain a purchase option.
The election to use the exemption must be made by asset class.
• Leases for low value assets, being assets with a low value when new (such as laptop computers,
mobile phones or small items of office furniture). An asset can only be of low value if:
– The lessee can benefit from using the underlying asset on its own or with other available
resources; and
– The underlying asset is not highly dependent on or interrelated with other assets, for example,
a circuit board costing £200 but which is required to operate an item of plant worth £40,000.
This election may be made on a lease-by-lease basis.
Leases of low-value assets are leases of assets with a value, when new, of $5,000 or less (IFRS 16,
Basis for Conclusions, Para 100).
Interactive question 1: Short lease

Oscar Co is preparing its financial statements for the year ended 30 June 20X6. On 1 May 20X6,
Oscar made a payment of £32,000 for an eight-month lease of a milling machine.
Requirement
How should the transaction be recognised in the financial statements?
Context example: Leases of low-value assets and portfolio application

IFRS 16 Illustrative Example 11 is of a lessee in the pharmaceutical manufacturing and distribution
industry with leases including the following:
(a) Leases of IT equipment for use by individual employees (such as laptop computers, desktop
computers, hand held computer devices, desktop printers and mobile phones)
(b) Leases of servers, including many individual modules that increase the storage capacity of those
servers. The modules have been added to the mainframe servers over time as the lessee has
needed to increase the storage capacity of the servers
(c) Leases of office equipment:
(1) Office furniture such as desks, chairs and partitions
(2) Water dispensers
The company determines that the leases of IT equipment to individual employees and the office
furniture and water dispensers qualify as leases of low-value assets on the basis that the underlying
assets, when new, are individually of low value.
HB2021
However, although each module within the servers, if considered individually, might be an asset of
low value, the leases of modules within the servers do not qualify as leases of low-value assets. This is
because each module is highly interrelated with other parts of the servers. The lessee would not
lease the modules without also leasing the servers. Accordingly, the company would apply the
recognition and measurement requirements of IFRS 16 to the servers.
Interactive question 2: Is it a lease?

Consider whether the following meet the criteria to be classified as leases.
Question Fill in your answer
A company leases a laptop computer for their

financial controller over a three year period.
A company leases a photocopier. The copier will

remain on the client site, and will only be
returned to the lessor in the event of a major
repair.
A company leases cars for their team of sales

representatives for a three-year period. The cars
are required to be estate models, but from time
to time, the car may be changed by the lessor.
A company acquires three architect’s drawing

desks which are paid for over 10 months. The
company already has four of these desks, and no
elections have been made.
1.5 Separating components of a contract

A contract may contain both a lease component and a non-lease component. In other words, it may
include an amount payable by the lessee for activities and costs that do not transfer goods or
services to the lessee (IFRS 16: Para B33). These activities and costs might, for example, include
maintenance, repairs or cleaning.
IFRS 16 requires entities to account for the lease component of the contract separately from the
non-lease component. The entity must split the rental or lease payment and:
• account for the lease component under IFRS 16; and
• account for the service element separately, generally as an expense in profit or loss.
The consideration in the contract is allocated on the basis of the stand-alone prices of the lease
component(s) and the non-lease component(s).
Context example: Separating components of a contract

Livery Co leases a delivery van from Bettalease Co for three years at £12,000 per year. This payment
includes servicing costs.
Livery could lease the same make and model of van for £11,000 per year and would need to pay
£2,000 a year for servicing.
Livery Co would allocate £10,154 (£12,000 × £11,000 ÷ £(11,000 + 2,000)) to the lease component
and account for that as a lease under IFRS 16.
Livery Co would allocate £1,846 (£12,000 × £2,000 ÷ £(11,000 + 2,000)) to the servicing component
and recognise it in profit or loss as an expense.
HB2021

2 Lessee accounting
Section overview
• IFRS 16 recognises an asset and corresponding liability for all leases (unless the lease is for less
than 12 months term, or the underlying asset is of low value).
• A lease liability is initially recognised at the present value of future lease payments; interest
accrues subsequently.
• A right-of-use asset is initially recognised at the amount of the lease liability, subject to some
adjustments; it is subsequently depreciated.
• In the statement of financial position, a right-of-use asset and lease liability are recognised in
respect of leased assets.
• Lease payments reduce the lease liability and cover any accrued interest.
• Interest accrues on the outstanding liability in each period of the lease.
• The finance charge is recognised in profit or loss.
• Where a contract is a lease, a right-of-use asset and a lease liability are recognised at the
commencement date.
2.1 Initial measurement of the right-of-use asset

The right-of-use asset is measured at cost, which includes:
• the amount of the initial measurement of the lease liability;
• any lease payments made at or before the commencement date, less any lease incentives
received;
• any initial direct costs incurred by the lessee related to the asset; and
• an estimation of any costs or penalties to be incurred by the lessee at the end of the lease term,
such as dismantling costs or removal costs.
Worked example: Initial measurement of the right-of-use asset

Beta Ltd commenced a five-year lease to acquire plant on 1 January 20X8. Beta Ltd has paid an initial
deposit of £800, and received lease incentives of £250. At the commencement date, the present
value of the future lease payments was £12,500. Beta Ltd has incurred legal costs of acquiring the
lease of £1,200. The plant will produce a new product, the XR3, and marketing costs for the new
product have been incurred of £300.
At the end of the lease, Beta Ltd will have to pay £750 (at present value) to remove the plant.
Requirement
What is the initial measurement of the right-of-use asset?
Solution
Right-of-use asset
£
PVFLP 12,500
Initial deposit 800
Direct costs 1,200
End of term costs to remove the plant 750
Less: lease incentives (250)
Right-of-use asset 15,000
HB2021
Note: that the marketing costs for the new product to be made by the plant are not included as these
costs are not directly attributable to the lease. This is consistent with IAS 16 (s.19(b)), where
marketing costs cannot be capitalised as part of the non-current asset.
2.2 Subsequent measurement of the right-of-use asset

Subsequently, the right-of-use asset will be measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and
impairment losses in line with IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment.
The right-of-use asset will be depreciated from the commencement date to the earlier of the end of
its useful life or the end of the lease term unless the asset is expected to be transferred to the lessee
at the end of the lease term. In that case, the asset will be depreciated over the useful life of the
asset.
Worked example: Subsequent measurement of the right-of-use asset

Taking the information from the previous example, Beta has estimated that the useful life of the plant
will be six years. There is no option to purchase at the end of the lease term.
Requirement
What is the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset at 31 December 20X8?
Solution
Right-of-use asset is initially measured at £15,000.
The depreciation period is the shorter of the useful life (six years) or the lease term (five years).
£15,000/5 years = £3,000 depreciation charge.
Carrying amount of the right-of-use asset at 31 December 20X8 is £12,000 (£15,000 – £3,000).
2.3 Depreciating the asset

DEBIT Depreciation expense
The asset should be depreciated over the shorter of
CREDIT Accumulated depreciation the lease term or the asset’s useful life
The asset should be depreciated over the shorter of the lease term or the asset’s useful life
Points to note
• Depreciation policies adopted should be consistent with other non-current assets of the same
class.
• If any impairment reviews are required, these must be conducted in accordance with IAS 36,
Impairment of Assets.
• If there is reasonable certainty that the lessee will eventually own the asset, then it should be
depreciated over its estimated useful life.
• The lease term comprises the period for which the lessee has contracted to lease the asset and
any further terms for which there is reasonable certainty at the inception of the lease that the
lessee will exercise the option.
2.4 Initial measurement of the lease liability

At the commencement of the lease, the lease liability is measured at the present value of future lease
payments including any payments expected at the end of the lease.
Lease liability will include:
• fixed payments less any lease incentives receivable;
• variable lease payments that depend on an index (eg, the consumer price index) or rate (eg,
market rental rates);
HB2021

• amounts expected to be payable by the lessee under residual value guarantees;
• purchase options (if reasonably certain to be exercised); and
• penalties for early termination.
The discount rate used is the interest rate implicit in the lease, or if this is not available, the lessee’s
incremental borrowing rate.
Definition
Lease payments: Payments made by a lessee to a lessor in order to use an underlying asset during
the lease term, less any lease incentives.
IFRS 16 requires lease payments to also include the exercise price of a purchase option if the lessee
is reasonably certain to exercise that option, and any penalty payments for terminating the lease.
Context example: Present value of future lease payments

Alpha Ltd has commenced a four-year lease on 1 January 20X8. Payments are £10,000 p.a. in arrears
and the interest rate implicit in the lease is 10%. The present value of the future lease payments can
be calculated using the PV spreadsheet function. The PV spreadsheet function is used to calculate
the present value (PV) of a series of equal cash flows (annuities). Type =PV( to begin the function
entry then insert the rate of return required (this is the interest rate implicit in the lease), the number
of periods and the payment made in each period, finally insert a closed bracket ).
B4 =PV(B1,B2,B3)
A B
1 rate 0.10
2 number 4
3 payment 10,000
4 Present value of future lease payments 31,698
Therefore, at 1 January 20X8, the lease liability is measured at £31,698.
2.5 Interest rate implicit in the lease

You can also use a spreadsheet to calculate the interest rate implicit in the lease from a given
payments schedule and the present value of the future lease payments. For an example of this
calculation, see Chapter 16, Section 1.
2.6 Subsequent measurement of the lease liability

In future periods, the lease liability is amortised.
• Interest will accrue on the outstanding lease, at the rate stated in the lease contract.
• Payments made in respect of the lease by the lessee will reduce the outstanding liability.
Context example: Context example: Year 2 lease liability

Taking the example of Alpha Ltd in the previous example.
In the previous example, Alpha Ltd had calculated the initial lease liability to be £31,698 on 1 January
20X8.
Year £
1.1.X8: Lease liability (PVFLP) 31,698
31.12.X8: Interest 10% 3,170
HB2021
Year £
31.12.X8: Instalment in arrears (10,000)
Liability at 31.12.X8 24,868
Therefore, at 1 January 20X9, the lease liability will be £24,868.
2.7 Setting up accounts in the statement of financial position

IFRS 16 requires that, when an asset is leased, the accounting treatment should reflect the substance
of the transaction. In the lessee’s books therefore:
DEBIT Right-of-use asset account

The amount to be recorded in this way is the present
CREDIT Payables: Lease liabilities value of the future lease payments
The initial deposit, if any, counts as one of the lease payments and hence is included in the cost of
the asset.
Points to note
• The entries are made at the commencement of the lease term, with the values determined at the
start of the lease (see section 2.1 and 2.4 above).
• The present value of the future lease payments is derived by discounting them at the interest rate
implicit in the lease. If it is not practicable to determine the interest rate implied in the lease, then
the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate can be used.
• Initial direct costs can be treated as part of the cost of the asset – provided they are directly
attributable to activities performed by the lessee to obtain the lease.
• Although interest is payable under the lease, this is accrued over time. The justification is that the
capital could, in theory, be paid off at any time, with cancellation charges. These charges could be
avoided, so they are not a ‘true’ long term liability. Interest is therefore recognised as it accrues.
2.8 Making the payment

Every period, the payments are accounted for as follows.
DEBIT Payables: Lease liabilities Each lease payment is comprised partly of a

repayment of capital and partly of an interest charge
CREDIT Cash for the period.
2.9 Finance charge

The finance charge is dealt with as follows.
DEBIT Profit or loss: Finance cost

With the amount of the interest accrued over the
CREDIT Payables: Lease liabilities period
2.10 Allocating the interest charge to accounting periods

IFRS 16 requires the total finance charge to be allocated to each period during the lease term so as
to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the outstanding lease obligation.
As the lessee pays off the capital sum, the total capital owed falls from period to period. You would
therefore also expect a reduction in the total interest payable too, on the outstanding balance.
For example, if you owe £10,000 and pay 15%, the interest will be £1,500. After you have paid off,
say, £8,000 of the capital, interest would be £300 (on £2,000). The monthly payments remain the
same, but the mix of interest and capital changes over the life of the loan.
Therefore, in the earlier years, the finance charge (interest) is a higher proportion of the annual lease
payments. Towards the end of the lease, the finance charge will be smaller as the outstanding lease
liability is smaller.
HB2021

2.11 Instalments in arrears
Worked example: Lease payments in arrears

A Ltd has a year-end of 31 December.
A lease commences on 1 January 20X1. Lease payments comprise three payments of £10,000
annually, commencing on 31 December 20X1.
There is no transfer of asset at the end of the lease and no purchase option.
The implicit interest rate is 10%.
Requirement
You are required to calculate the interest charge and the year-end liability for each year of the lease.
Round your discounted amounts to the nearest £10.
Solution
The lease liability is measured at the present value of the three payments:
B4 =PV(B1,B2,B3)
A B
1 rate 0.10
2 number 3
3 payment 10,000
£
20X1 balance b/f 24,869
Interest 10% 2,487
Payment 31/12/X1 (10,000)
20X2 balance b/d 17,356
Interest 10% 1,736
Payment 31/12/X2 (10,000)
20X3 balance b/d 9,092
Interest 10% 909
Payment 31/12/X3 (10,000)
-
Note: The balance doesn’t come down to exactly the outstanding amount due to rounding.
2.12 Instalments in advance

As we have seen in the examples above, interest accrues over time and is included in the payment at
the end of each period of borrowing. However, where instalments are paid in advance:
• The first instalment repays capital only as no time has yet elapsed for interest to accrue.
• At the end of each accounting period the year-end liability will include capital and interest that
has accrued to date but which has not been paid.
HB2021
• The initial payment in advance (and/or any deposit) is not included in the calculation of the lease
liability. It is added to the right-of-use asset.
Worked example: Lease payments in advance

[This is based on IFRS 16 Illustrative example 13.]
A lessee enters into a five-year lease of a building which has a remaining useful life of 10 years. Lease
payments are £50,000 per annum, payable at the beginning of each year.
The lessee incurs initial direct costs of £20,000 and receives lease incentives of £5,000. There is no
transfer of the asset at the end of the lease and no purchase option.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is not immediately determinable but the lessee’s incremental
borrowing rate is 5%.
Requirement
Calculate the initial lease liability and calculate the value of the right-of-use asset.
Solution
At the commencement date the lessee pays the initial £50,000, incurs the direct costs and receives
the lease incentives. The lease liability is measured at the present value of the remaining four
payments, ie, the future lease payments:
B4 =PV(B1,B2,B3)
A B
1 rate 0.05
2 number 4
3 payment 50,000
Assets and liabilities will initially be recognised as follows:
Debit Credit
£ £
Right-of-use asset:
Initial payment 50,000
Discounted liability 177,297
Initial direct costs 20,000
Incentives received (5,000)
242,297
Lease liability 177,297
Cash (50,000 + 20,000 – 5,000) –––––– 65,000
242,297 242,297
HB2021

2.13 Disclosure: lease liability
IFRS 16 requires that there is presentation in the statement of financial position for the following
items:
• the right-of-use asset
• the lease liability.
Right-of-use assets may be presented as a separate line item in the statement of financial position
under the heading non-current assets. Alternatively, they may be included in the total of the relevant
class of assets, and in this case the carrying amount of right-of-use assets is disclosed in the notes to
IFRS 16 makes no specific requirement to split lease liabilities between non-current and current
liabilities. However, in accordance with the Conceptual Framework’s fundamental principle of faithful
representation, they should be presented in this way as best practice, so that the users of the
financial statements can understand the impact of the lease liability in future years.
Interactive question 3: Payments in arrears

Using the facts from the Worked Example: Lease payments in arrears, show the presentation of the
lease liability at the end of 20X1.
The lease liability working from the Worked example was as follows:
£
20X1 balance b/f 24,869
Interest 10% 2,487
Payment 31/12/X1 (10,000)
20X2 balance b/d (current period) 17,356
Interest 10% 1,736
Payment 31/12/X2 (10,000)
20X3 balance b/d (future periods) 9,092
Interest 10% 909
Payment 31/12/X3 (10,000)
3.1 Total lease liability at 31 December 20X1 = £
Capital > 1 year = £
< 1 year (β) = £
3.2 Prepare journals to show accounting entries in respect of the lease during 20X1
Interactive question 4: Payments in advance

Using the facts from the Worked Example: Lease payments in advance, show the split of the lease
liability at the end of year 1.
2.14 Other disclosures

Note: The leased assets and lease liabilities should not be netted off against each other.
HB2021
Non-current assets
• Disclosure must be made of the carrying amount of right-of-use assets, by class of underlying
asset, either on the face of the statement of financial position, or in a note.
• Depreciation charge for right-of-use assets
• Additions to right-of-use assets
• Carrying amount of right-of-use assets at the end of the reporting period by class of underlying
asset
• Gains/losses resulting from any sale and leaseback transactions (see section 3)
Liabilities
• Interest expense on lease liabilities
Other disclosures
• In the case of most entities, the IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements requirement to disclose
significant accounting policies would result in the disclosure of the policy in respect of leases.
• Expenses relating to short-term and low-value leases
• Total cash outflow for leases
Interactive question 5: Summary

Summer Ltd leases an asset on 1 January 20X1. The terms of the lease are to pay a non-refundable
deposit of £575 followed by seven annual instalments of £2,000 payable in arrears. The asset is
expected to have a useful life of seven years.
The present value of the future lease payments (excluding the deposit) is £11,164.
There is no option to purchase the asset at the end of the lease term.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 6%.
Requirement
Calculate the value of the lease liability and the right-of-use asset at 31 December 20X1 and 31
December 20X2.
Note: (Round your answers to the nearest pound)
IFRS 16 has tightened the rules on leasing to the extent that there is limited scope for judgement.
The standard was brought in to remedy abuses and loopholes. However, there remains some scope,
for example in electing to show potentially exempt leases in the statement of financial position, or in
the estimation of the useful economic life of the underlying asset.
3 Sale and leaseback transactions

Section overview
• A sale and leaseback transaction involves the sale of an asset and the subsequent leasing back of
the same asset.
• The treatment of a sale and leaseback transaction will depend on whether the transfer is a sale as
defined by IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
HB2021

3.1 Introduction
Companies can raise finance in a number of different ways. These include short-term measures such
as a bank overdraft, medium-term measures such as loans or leases and longer-term measures
including secured loans.
Another option is a sale and leaseback transaction. This is a common feature of certain industries,
including retailing and hotels. It involves the original owner of the asset selling it, typically to a
finance house or bank, and immediately leasing it back, thereby raising cash and retaining the use of
the asset. Such arrangements provide entities with the opportunity to release capital caught up in the
business for investment in other opportunities or to return it to shareholders. In essence, an entity
acquires cash in exchange for a commitment to make regular lease payments without losing use of
the asset.
Under IFRS 16, the key initial assessment is whether or not the transfer of the asset constitutes a
genuine sale. For this to be the case, the requirements of IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with
Customers for determining when a performance obligation is satisfied must be met.
3.2 IFRS 15 criteria for a sale

The transfer of an asset qualifies as a sale if the customer obtains control of the asset. In determining
this, the following should be considered (IFRS 15, para. 38):
(a) Whether the selling entity has a present right to payment for the asset
(b) Whether the selling entity has transferred legal title to the asset
(c) Whether the selling entity has transferred physical possession of the asset
(d) Whether the selling entity has transferred the risks and rewards of ownership of the asset to the
customer
(e) Whether the purchaser has accepted the asset
Criterion 4, relating to the risks and rewards of ownership, is likely to be the most important of the
above criteria in considering whether control has passed to the customer and therefore whether the
IFRS 15 criteria for a sale have been satisfied.
Context example: Transfer is a sale (1)

[This is based on IFRS 16 Illustrative example 13.]
A lessee enters into a five-year lease of a building which has a remaining useful life of 10 years. Lease
payments are £50,000 per annum, payable at the beginning of each year.
If the transfer of the asset is a sale:
Stage 1
The seller/lessee measures the right-of-use asset arising from the leaseback as a proportion of the
previous carrying amount of the asset that relates to the right of use retained by the seller/lessee:
Carrying amount × (PV of future lease payments at transfer date ÷ Fair value of asset at transfer date)
Stage 2
The seller/lessee only recognises the amount of any gain or loss on the sale that relates to the rights
transferred to the buyer.
Calculating the gain or loss on sale:
WORKINGS
Calculate the total gain on the sale:
£
Fair value X
Less: carrying amount (X)
Total gain/(loss) on the sale X/(X)
Then determine the gain that relates to the rights retained
HB2021
Gain × (PV of future lease payments ÷ Fair value of asset at transfer date) = Gain related to rights
retained
Stage 3
The gain relating to the rights transferred is the balancing figure:
Gain on rights transferred = total gain (W1) – gain on rights retained (W2)
The right-of-use asset continues to be depreciated as normal, although there may be a revision of
the useful life required (see 2.3).
Worked example: Transfer is a sale (2)

Hill plc owned a machine with a carrying amount of £5,040,000 on 1 July 20X5. On this date Hill plc
sold the property to Dale plc for £7,920,000, which was the fair value of the machine, and then
undertook to lease it back under a 20-year lease. Annual lease payments were £240,000 in arrears
and the present value of future lease payments at the 6% interest rate implicit in the lease were
£2,752,800 at 1 July 20X5.
The machine was transferred to Dale plc’s premises, but Hill plc has the right to use it. Hill plc has no
option to repurchase the machine at the end of the lease period.
Requirement
How should the transaction be accounted for by Hill plc in the year ended 30 June 20X6?
Solution
The fact that the machine has been transferred to the new lessor’s premises, and the fact that Hill plc
has no right to repurchase the machine both indicate that control has transferred to Dale plc, and
that this qualifies as a sale under IFRS 15.
Part of the carrying amount of the asset is allocated to be a right-of-use asset retained. This is
calculated based on the right-of-use asset (lease liability) as a proportion of fair value:
Right of use asset = £5,040,000 × (2,752,800 ÷ 7,920,000) = £1,751782
The remaining carrying amount of £3,288,218 (5,040,000 – 1,751,782) represents the transferred
asset.
The overall gain on disposal is £2,880,000 (£7,920,000 – 5,040,000); only that part of the gain
relating to the transferred asset is recognised:
Gain relating to retained rights = £2,880,000 × (2,752,800 ÷ 7,920,000) = £1,001,018
Therefore the recognised gain relating to the transferred rights is £1,878,982 (2,880,000 –
1,001,018).
At 1 July 20X5, the following entries are required:
DEBIT Right-of-use asset £1,751,782

DEBIT Bank £7,920,000
CREDIT PPE £5,040,000
CREDIT Gain on disposal £1,878,982
CREDIT Lease liability £2,752,800
The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated over the lease term of 20 years; therefore in the
year ended 30 June 20X6:
DEBIT Depreciation expense (1,751,782/20) £87,589

CREDIT Right-of-use asset £87,589
The lease liability is amortised:
HB2021

£
1 July 20X5 2,752,800
Interest at 6% 165,168
Lease payment (240,000)
28 June 20X6 2,677,968
Amortisation for the year ended 30 June 20X6 is recognised by: £87,589
DEBIT Finance charge £165,168

DEBIT Lease liability £74,832
CREDIT Bank £240,000
Interactive question 6: Sale and leaseback where the transfer is a sale

Frayn plc sold an asset (with a carrying amount at 31 December 20X0 of £70,000) and entered into a
sale and leaseback arrangement on 1 January 20X1, when:
• the sale proceeds were at fair value of £120,000
• the remaining useful life of the asset was four years
The lease provided for five annual rentals of £25,000 payable in arrears on 31 December of each
year. The interest rate implicit in the lease was 5% and the present value of the future lease payments
was £108,225.
Requirement
Set out the journal entries at the date of disposal and calculate the amounts to be recognised in
profit or loss in the year to 31 December 20X1 and in the statement of financial position at that date.
Sale and leaseback is a clear illustration of the importance of structuring your approach. Use the
three-stage process above to focus your answer.
3.3 Transfer is not a sale

If the transfer is not a sale under IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers, ie, the
performance obligation is not satisfied, then the seller/lessee will continue to recognise the
transferred asset and also recognises a financial liability equal to the transfer proceeds, accounting
for it using IFRS 9, Financial Instruments.
The treatment is reversed in the books of the buyer/lessor:
Seller/lessee Buyer/lessor
Continue to recognise the transferred asset No physical asset recognised
Recognise a financial liability measured at Recognise a financial asset measured at transfer

transfer proceeds proceeds
HB2021
Worked example: Transfer is a not a sale
Green plc has a year end of 31 December. The company owned a machine with a carrying amount of
£720,000 on 1 January 20X3. On this date Green plc sold the machine to Blue Bank plc for £480,000,
and then undertook to lease it back under a five-year lease. The asset is retained at Green plc’s
premises and the company continues to use it. Green plc is also responsible for insuring the
machine.
The annual rental is £120,000 payable in arrears and the interest rate implicit in the lease is 8%.
Requirements
1 Show how this transaction should be accounted for by Green plc.
2 Show the journal entries in relation to this transaction for the year ended 31 December 20X3.
Solution
1 Green plc retains the machine at its premises and continues to use it. Green plc also insures the
machine, which means that the risks and rewards of ownership have not been transferred to the
customer. Both these matters indicate that the buyer has not obtained control of the machine and
therefore that the transfer is not a sale in accordance with IFRS 15.
Therefore on 1 January 20X3 the sale proceeds are recognised as a financial liability as follows:
At the date of sale/inception of the lease
DEBIT Cash £480,000

CREDIT Financial liability £480,000
The liability is accounted for in line with IFRS 9 at amortised cost (because it is not held for
trading):
Year ended B/f Interest at 8% Payment C/f

£ £ £ £
31 December 20X3 480,000 38,400 (120,000) 398,400
31 December 20X4 398,400 31,872 (120,000) 310,272
31 December 20X5 310,272 24,822 (120,000) 215,222
31 December 20X6 215,222 17,218 (120,000) 112,439
31 December 20X7 112,439 8,995* (120,000) –
* rounding difference £1,434

2 In the year ended 31 December 20X3, the amortisation of the liability is recognised as follows:
At the date of sale/inception of the lease
DEBIT Financial liability £81,600

DEBIT Finance charge £38,400
HB2021

3.4 Transfer is a sale not on market terms
If the fair value of the consideration for the sale does not equal the fair value of the asset, or if the
lease payments are not at market rates, adjustments should be made to the accounting entries as this
is deemed to be a method of additional financing:
Below market terms Above market terms
Treat as a prepayment of lease payments Treat as additional financing by the lessor/buyer
Adjust the PVFLP by the excess of consideration

over the fair value of the asset
In practice the consideration for the sale is much more likely to be above market terms, and this is
the scenario that will be tested in the exam. IFRS 16 gives detailed guidance on this situation. A sale
below market price is unlikely to happen, and may even be an indicator of fraud.
Worked example: Sale and leaseback not at market rates

Sydney plc has a year end of 31 December.
The company sold a building on 1 January 20X5 for £1.2 million. The fair value of the building was
£1 million.
The carrying amount of the building at 31 December 20X4 was £900,000.
Sydney plc arranges to leaseback the building for a period of six years, and the remaining useful life
of the building is 20 years.
The lease payments will be made in arrears starting 31 December 20X5 of £180,000 p.a. The implicit
interest rate of the lease is 5%.
Requirement
Produce the journal entries for the financial statements as at 31 December 20X5 reflecting the above
transactions.
Solution
Step 1
Calculate the value of the lease liability
The present value of future lease payments is £913,625 (W1)
However, the consideration (£1,200,000) was in excess of the fair value (£1,000,000). This excess of
£200,000 is considered as additional financing, therefore:
PVFLP = £913,625
Consideration > FV of asset Lease liability £713,625

£200,000
Step 2
Calculate the right-of-use asset
Carrying amount × (PVFLP ÷ FV) (adjusted for excess consideration)
£900,000 × (£713,625 ÷ £1,000,000) = £642,262
Initial measurement of the right-of-use asset is £642,262
Depreciation will be charged over six years as this is the shorter of the useful life (20 years) and the
lease term (six years).
Therefore, charge for year ended 31 December 20X5 is £642,262/6 = £107,044
HB2021
Step 3
Calculate the gain on sale and leaseback
The gain is calculated based on the fair value of the transferred asset rather than full proceeds.
Sydney plc can only recognise the amount of gain relating to the rights transferred.
• Stage 1 (calculate the gain): £1,000,000 – £900,000 = £100,000
• Stage 2 (gain relating to rights retained): £100,000 × £713,625/£1,000,000 = £71,363
• Stage 3 (gain on the rights transferred): £100,000 – £71,363 = £28,637
Journal entry
£ £
DEBIT Cash 1,200,000
DEBIT Depreciation expense 107,044
DEBIT Right-of-use asset 642,262
CREDIT Building (carrying amount) 900,000
CREDIT Accumulated depreciation 107,044
CREDIT Lease liability 913,625
CREDIT Gain on rights transferred –––––––– 28,637
1,949,306 1,949,306
WORKING
Lease payment Discount £

180,000 1.051 171,429
2
180,000 1.05 163,265
180,000 1.053 155,491
180,000 1.054 148,086
5
180,000 1.05 141,035
180,000 1.056 134,319
Total PVFLP 913,625
Interactive question 7: Sale and leaseback

On 1 April 20X2, Wigton Co bought an injection moulding machine for £600,000. The carrying
amount of the machine as at 31 March 20X3 was £500,000. On 1 April 20X3, Wigton Co sold it to
Whitehaven Co for £740,000, its fair value. Wigton Co immediately leased the machine back for five
years, the remainder of its useful life, at £160,000 per annum payable in arrears. The present value of
the annual lease payments is £700,000 and the transaction satisfies the IFRS 15 criteria to be
recognised as a sale.
Requirement
What gain or loss should Wigton Co recognise for the year ended 31 March 20X4 as a result of the
sale and leaseback?
HB2021

4 Lessor accounting
Section overview
• For lessor accounting, IFRS 16 makes a distinction between finance leases and operating leases.
• Finance leases: record the amount due to the lessor in the statement of financial position at the
net investment in the lease, recognise finance income to give a constant periodic rate of return.
• Operating leases: record the asset as a non-current asset and depreciate over useful life, record
income on a straight-line basis over the lease term.
4.1 Introduction
Several definitions are relevant to lessor accounting in particular, all from IFRS 16 Appendix A.
Definitions
Finance lease: A lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of
an underlying asset.
Operating lease: A lease that does not transfer substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to
ownership of an underlying asset.
Unguaranteed residual value: That portion of the residual value of the underlying asset, the
realisation of which by the lessor is not assured or is guaranteed solely by a party related to the
lessor.
Gross investment in the lease: The sum of:
(a) The lease payments receivable by the lessor under a finance lease; and
(b) Any unguaranteed residual value accruing to the lessor.
Net investment in the lease: The gross investment in the lease discounted at the interest rate implicit
in the lease.
Unearned finance income: The difference between:
(a) The gross investment in the lease; and
(b) The net investment in the lease.
4.2 Risks and rewards

The classification of leases is based on the extent to which risks and rewards incidental to ownership
of a leased asset lie with the lessee or the lessor. When we talk of risks here, we specifically mean the
risks of ownership, not other types of risk. Risks of ownership include the possibility of losses from
idle capacity or technological obsolescence, or variations in return due to changing economic
conditions. The rewards are represented by the expectation of profitable operation over the asset’s
economic life, and also any gain from appreciation in value or realisation of a residual value.
There are some specific examples that suggest a finance lease such as the lessee receives ownership
of the asset at the end of the lease term, the lessee is expected to exercise the option to purchase,
the lease term forms the majority of the asset’s economic life, the asset is substantially loaned
whereby the present value of lease payments is almost all of the fair value of the asset and/or the
asset is specialised for use by the lessee or entities authorised by the lessee.
When a lease includes both land and building elements, the classification of each element as an
operating or finance lease should be made separately. In determining whether the land element is
an operating or finance lease, an important consideration is that land normally has an indefinite
economic life.
4.3 Operating leases

A lessor continues to recognise an asset that is leased out by way of an operating lease, and charges
depreciation over the useful life of the asset. Lease income from the operating lease is recognised on
HB2021
a straight-line basis over the lease term, unless another systematic and rational basis is more
representative of the time pattern in which the benefit from the leased asset is receivable.
The cost of incentives provided to the lessee is recognised as a reduction of the rental income over
the lease term, generally on a straight-line basis.
If a lessor incurs costs to negotiate and arrange an operating lease, these costs are capitalised within
the carrying amount of the underlying asset that is the subject of the lease. They are amortised over
the lease term on the same basis as lease income.
Worked example: Operating lease

At 1 April 20X3, SupaTruck plc owns a tow truck costing £75,000 with an economic life of 10 years.
The company entered into a two years lease agreement to lease the truck to Dimble Recovery plc for
£10,000 per year. SupaTruck continues to retain ownership of the tow truck and charges depreciation
on a straight line basis, with no residual value.
Requirement
What journal entries should SupaTruck record in the year ended 31 March 20X4?
Solution
SupaTruck recognises a non-current asset at historical cost less depreciation at year-end. The
depreciation charge is £75,000/10 years = £7,500 and rental income of £10,000 is also recognised
with appropriate disclosures.
The required journal entries in the year ended 31 March 20X4 are (£):
£ £
DEBIT Depreciation expense 7,500
CREDIT PPE (accumulated depreciation) 7,500
and
DEBIT Cash/receivable 10,000

CREDIT Rental income 10,000
4.4 Finance leases

Although a lessor is the legal owner of an asset leased to another party under a finance lease, it has
passed the risks and rewards of ownership to the lessee in return for a cash flow stream. As a result,
the lessor derecognises the asset and instead recognises a receivable equal to the net investment in
the lease. This is the present value of the aggregate of:
(a) The lease payments receivable by the lessor; and
(b) Any unguaranteed residual amount accruing to the lessor.
An unguaranteed residual amount is that part of the residual value of a leased asset that is not
assured or is guaranteed only by a party related to the lessor.
Initial direct costs incurred in negotiating and arranging the lease are added to the receivable.
Upon receipt of cash payments from the lessee, the amount received is allocated between the
repayment of principal and finance income. The finance income should be recognised so as to
generate a constant periodic rate of return on the outstanding net investment.
Worked example: Finance lease

Leighton Machinery plc leased a machine to a customer with effect from 1 January 20X4. The fair
value of the machine at this date (equal to the net investment in the lease) was £14,875 and
arrangement fees amounted to £125. The lease term was eight years and rentals of £2,750 are
payable annually in advance. The interest rate implicit in the lease is 12.8%.
HB2021

Requirement
What amounts are recognised in Leighton Machinery’s financial statements in the year ended 31
December 20X4 in respect of the lease?
Solution
The receivable is initially recognised at £14,875 + £125 = £15,000
Interest accrues to the receivable and payments reduce it as follows over the first two years of the
term:
Finance
y/e Balance b/f Repayment Balance c/f income Balance c/f
£ £ £ £ £
31.12.X4 15,000 (2,750) 12,250 1,568 13,818
31.12.X5 13,818 (2,750) 11,068 1,417 12,485
Therefore in the statement of financial position of Leighton Machinery, a current and non-current
asset are recognised.
Non-current asset: Net investment in finance lease: £11,068
Current asset: Net investment in finance lease: £2,750
Interest receivable of £1,568 is recognised in the statement of profit or loss and other
4.4.1 Summary
For lessor accounting, IFRS 16 makes a distinction between finance leases and operating leases.
5 IAS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and

Disclosure of Government Assistance
Section overview
This section gives a very brief overview of the material covered in earlier studies.
Definitions
Government assistance: Action by government designed to provide an economic benefit specific to
an entity or range of entities qualifying under certain criteria.
Government grants: Assistance by government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity in
return for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the
entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value
placed upon them and transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the normal
trading transactions of the entity.
Grants related to assets: Government grants whose primary condition is that an entity qualifying for
them should purchase, construct or otherwise acquire long-term assets. Subsidiary conditions may
also be attached restricting the type or location of the assets or the periods during which they are to
be acquired or held.
Grants related to income: Government grants other than those related to assets.
Forgivable loans: Loans which the lender undertakes to waive repayment of under certain
prescribed conditions.
HB2021
Accounting treatment
• Recognise government grants and forgivable loans once conditions complied with and
receipt/waiver is assured.
• Grants are recognised under the income approach: recognise grants as income to match them
with related costs that they have been received to compensate.
• Use a systematic basis of matching over the relevant periods.
• Grants for depreciable assets should be recognised as income on the same basis as the asset is
depreciated.
• Grants for non-depreciable assets should be recognised as income over the periods in which the
cost of meeting the obligation is incurred.
• A grant may be split into parts and allocated on different bases where there are a series of
conditions attached.
• Where related costs have already been incurred, the grant may be recognised as income in full
immediately.
• A grant in the form of a non-monetary asset may be valued at fair value or a nominal value.
• Grants related to assets may be presented in the statement of financial position either as
deferred incomeor deducted in arriving at the carrying value of the asset.
• Grants related to income may be presented in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income (in profit or loss) either as a separate creditordeducted from the related
expense.
• Repayment of government grants should be accounted for as a revision of an accounting
estimate.
Disclosure
• Accounting policy note
• Nature and extent of government grants and other forms of assistance received
• Unfulfilled conditions and other contingencies attached to recognised government assistance
Interactive question 8: Government grants

IAS 20 suggests that there are two approaches to recognising government grants: a capital approach
(credit directly to shareholders’ interests) and an income approach. IAS 20 requires the use of the
income approach.
Requirement
What are the arguments in support of each method?

Section overview
• This section gives a very brief overview of the material covered in earlier studies.
• IAS 23 deals with the treatment of borrowing costs, often associated with the construction of self-
constructed assets, but which can also be applied to an asset purchased that takes time to get
ready for use/sale.
Definitions
Borrowing costs: Interest and other costs incurred by an entity in connection with the borrowing of
funds.
HB2021

Qualifying asset: An asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its
intended use or sale.
6.1 Accounting treatment

Note the following key points, which should be familiar from your earlier studies.
• Borrowing costs must be capitalised as part of the cost of the asset if they are directly attributable
to acquisition/construction/production. Other borrowing costs must be expensed.
• Borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation are those that would have been avoided otherwise.
Use judgement where a range of debt instruments is held for general finance.
• Amount of borrowing costs available for capitalisation is actual borrowing costs incurred less any
investment income from temporary investment of those borrowings.
• For borrowings obtained generally, apply the capitalisation rate to the expenditure on the asset
(weighted average borrowing cost). It must not exceed actual borrowing costs.
• Capitalisation is suspended if active development is interrupted for extended periods.
(Temporary delays or technical/administrative work will not cause suspension.)
• Capitalisation ceases (normally) when physical construction of the asset is completed. When an
asset is comprised of separate stages, capitalisation should cease when each stage or part is
completed.
• Where the recoverable amount of the asset falls below carrying amount, it must be written
down/off.
6.2 Disclosure
• Amount of borrowing costs capitalised during the period
• Capitalisation rate used to determine borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation
Interactive question 9: Borrowing costs 1

On 1 January 20X8, Rechno Co borrowed £15 million to finance the production of two assets, both
of which were expected to take a year to build. Production started during 20X8. The loan facility was
drawn down on 1 January 20X8 and was used as follows, with the remaining funds invested
temporarily.
Asset X Asset Y
£m £m
1 January 20X8 2.5 5.0
1 July 20X8 2.5 5.0
The loan rate was 10% and Rechno Co can invest surplus funds at 8%.
Requirement
Ignoring compound interest, calculate the borrowing costs which must be capitalised for each of the
assets and consequently the cost of each asset as at 31 December 20X8.
HB2021
Interactive question 10: Borrowing costs 2
Zenzi Co had the following loans in place at the beginning and end of 20X8.
1 January 20X8 31 December 20X8

£m £m
10.0% bank loan repayable 20Y3 120 120
9.5% bank loan repayable 20Y1 80 80
8.9% debenture repayable 20Y8 – 150
The 8.9% debenture was issued to fund the construction of a qualifying asset (a piece of mining
equipment), construction of which began on 1 July 20X8.
On 1 January 20X8, Zenzi Co began construction of a qualifying asset, a piece of machinery for a
hydroelectric plant, using existing borrowings. Expenditure drawn down for the construction was:
£30 million on 1 January 20X8, £20 million on 1 October 20X8.
Requirement
Calculate the borrowing costs to be capitalised for the hydroelectric plant machine.
7 Statements of cash flows

Section overview
This section briefly revises single company statements of cash flows, which was covered at
Professional Level. Try the interactive questions here to make sure you are comfortable with this topic
before revising consolidated statements of cash flows in Chapter 20.
7.1 Basic statements of cash flows – revision

(a) A statement of cash flows prepared in accordance with IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows provides
information about the historical changes in an entity’s cash and cash equivalents. This
information is presented in a statement that classifies cash flows between operating activities,
investing activities and financing activities.
(b) Cash, as defined in IAS 7, includes not only cash itself but also any instrument that can be
converted into cash so quickly that it is in effect equivalent to cash.
(c) ‘Operating activities’ are the principal revenue-generating activities of an entity, together with
any other activities which are not identified as being investing or financing in nature.
(d) The cash flows from an entity’s operating activities can be presented using two methods:
(1) The direct method, which discloses the major classes of gross cash receipts and payments;
or
(2) The indirect method, where the entity starts with the net profit or loss for the period and
adjusts it for non-cash transactions, deferrals or accruals of income and expenditure and
items that will form part of the entity’s investing and financing activities.
(e) ‘Investing activities’ are acquisitions and disposals of long-term assets and investments, other
than cash and cash equivalents. Examples include: cash paid or received to acquire or sell an
item of property, plant or equipment, a receipt of cash from the sale of a business, and cash
advanced as a loan to another entity.
HB2021

(f) ‘Financing activities’ are activities that change the amount and composition of an entity’s equity
capital and borrowings. Examples include: cash proceeds from issuing shares, cash paid to
repay debt instruments, and the capital element in a finance lease payment.
(g) Investing and financing activities that do not impact on cash, for example the conversion of debt
to equity, should not be included in the statement of cash flows.
Interactive question 11: Single company statement of cash flows

Elida is a publicly listed company. The following financial statements of Elida are available:
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for year ended 31 March 20X8
£’000
Revenue 5,740
Cost of sales (4,840)
Gross profit 900
Income from and gains on investment property 60
Distribution costs (120)
Administrative expenses (Note (ii)) (350)
Finance costs (50)
Profit before tax 440
Profit for the year 280
Other comprehensive income
Gains on property revaluation 100
Total comprehensive income 380
Statements of financial position as at:
31 March 20X8 31 March 20X7

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
ASSETS
Non-current assets (Note (1))
Property, plant and equipment 2,880 1,860
Investment property 420 400
3,300 2,260
Current assets
Inventory 1,210 810
Trade receivables 480 540
Income tax asset nil 50
Bank 10 1,700 nil 1,400
Equity
Equity shares of 20p each (Note (3)) 1,000 600
HB2021
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Share premium 600 nil
Revaluation reserve 150 50
Retained earnings 1,440 2,190 1,310 1,360
3,190 1,960
6% loan notes (Note (2)) nil 400
Deferred tax 50 50 30 430
Current liabilities
Bank overdraft nil 120
Warranty provision (Note (4)) 200 100
Current tax payable 150 1,760 nil 1,270
Total equity and liabilities 5,000 3,660
The following supporting information is available:

(1) An item of plant with a carrying amount of £240,000 was sold at a loss of £90,000 during the
year. Depreciation of £280,000 was charged (to cost of sales) for property, plant and equipment
in the year ended 31 March 20X8.
Elida uses the fair value model in IAS 40, Investment Property. There were no purchases or sales
of investment property during the year.
(2) The 6% loan notes were redeemed early incurring a penalty payment of £20,000 which has been
charged as an administrative expense in the statement of profit or loss.
(3) There was an issue of shares for cash on 1 October 20X7. There were no bonus issues of shares
during the year.
(4) Elida gives a 12-month warranty on some of the products it sells. The amounts shown in current
liabilities as warranty provision are an accurate assessment, based on past experience, of the
amount of claims likely to be made in respect of warranties outstanding at each year end.
Warranty costs are included in cost of sales.
(5) A dividend of 3p per share was paid on 1 January 20X8.
Requirement
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Elida for the year to 31 March 20X8 in accordance with IAS 7,
Statement of Cash Flows.
HB2021

8 Audit focus
Section overview
Matters that the auditor should consider when auditing leases for lessees include:
• correctly identifying whether a lease exists;
• confirming the amounts to be included in the financial statements; and
• whether the disclosure is in line with applicable accounting standards.
Auditing issues for lessors require the distinction between operating and finance leases.
Auditors should also be aware of the issues presented by the replacement of IAS 17 by IFRS 16 in
order to continue to understand and support their clients.
8.1 Auditing leases for lessees

In auditing leases recognised at fair value (eg, investment properties), the auditor must evaluate
whether the fair value is appropriate. We will cover the auditing of fair value in further detail in the
Audit Focus Sections (10 to 12) in Chapter 17.
The table below summarises the areas of audit focus when auditing leases in accordance with IFRS
16, and provides some examples of audit evidence required.
Issue Evidence
Identifying right-of-use As the key test here is correctly identifying an asset as a right-of-use
assets asset, the auditor should consider the following:
• Obtain contract for relevant assets and determine whether lessee
has control (via evidence of receiving economic benefits and the
ability to direct the use of the asset concerned)
• Review assets for any below the threshold (eg, $5,000 or 12 months
in duration) to determine any exemptions
• Review contracts for any separate components (such as maintenance
contracts) and confirm each component is separately identified and
the correct costs are used
Confirming the correct Obtain details of the costs of any leased right-of-use assets and confirm
accounting treatment they include attributable costs (such as incentives or advance
of right-of-use assets payments) by reference to terms of contract and any supporting
transactions
Confirm correct treatment of recognition throughout the asset’s life by
challenging management on the depreciation policy used (for example,
is the asset life appropriate?)
Lease liabilities Amounts recognised as liabilities should be confirmed by reference to

the contract and challenged for attributable amounts (such as amounts
paid in advance or arrears)
Sale and leaseback As these are likely to be complex, auditors should obtain an
arrangements understanding of the sale and leaseback arrangements via the contract
and the client to ensure they reflect the reality of the transaction (for
example, does it satisfy the IFRS 15 conditions required to be
recognised as a sale?)
Disclosure in the Review the IFRS 16 disclosures in the financial statements to determine
financial statements whether they are consistent and complete
HB2021
8.2 Auditing leases for lessors
Central to the work of the auditor for a lessor is being able to confirm whether any leases are finance
or operating leases. The key procedure here is to obtain a copy of the contract in place for any such
lease and to confirm who bears the ultimate risk and reward (the contract will not specify this, so the
auditor will need to consider this by analysing the terms stated).
8.3 Issues following on from the adoption of IFRS 16

Now IFRS 16 has replaced IAS 17, financial statements for entities with leased assets may look quite
different: consequently, auditors will need to understand the differences in terminology and
approach presented by this update, as well as the impact it will have on the audits they conduct.
• Clients may not understand how IFRS 16 should be adopted, so may ask for assistance from their
auditor.
• Financial statements may be deliberately misstated to present short term or low value assets
inappropriately to avoid the need to show lease liabilities.
• Lessee clients with assets previously classified as operating leases may misstate the new lease
asset and liability, either deliberately or by mistake.
• Sale and leaseback arrangements will now require an accounting treatment that supports IFRS 15
and auditors will need to ensure their clients have followed this treatment in such cases.
HB2021

Summary
Leases (IFRS 16)
A contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset,

the underlying asset, for a period of time in exchange for consideration.
Identifying a lease Lease liability Right-of-use asset
• Identified asset Lease liability includes Initial measurement

• Period of time • Fixed payments PVFLP +/- adjustments =
• In exchange for • Variable payments RoU asset
consideration (related to index/rate)
• Right to control: • Amounts paid under
– substantially all residual value Subsequent periods:
economic benefits guarantee
• Cost less depreciation
from use • Purchase options (if less impairment
– direct the use reasonably certain
• IAS 16 applies
to exercise)
(revaluation model);
LESS
OR
• Lease incentives
Exemptions from • IAS 40 (fair value
Discount at rate implicit model)
standard lessee in the lease (lessee's
accounting model incremental borrowing
• Low value assets rate) to give PVFLP
(election by class
of asset)
• Lease <12 months
(election lease by Sale and leaseback
lease basis)
Sale under Not a sale

Lessor accounting
IFRS 15 (IFRS 15)
Finance lease Operating lease Derecognise rights Financing

transferred and arrangement
recognise (IFRS 9)
associated gain/
• Lease that transfers • A lease that does loss.
substantially all the not transfer Transfer retained
risks and rewards substantially all rights to be
of ownership the risks and right-of-use asset
• Derecognise asset rewards of and recognise
• Set up a receivable ownership liability.
at the net investment • Retain asset in
in the lease the books of
• Receipts – split the lessor
between finance • Credit rentals to
income and capital P/L straight line
over lease term
or other
systematic basis
HB2021
Government
grants
Recognition Presentation Repayment Government

assistance
Grants related Accounted for as a

Only when there Grants related
to assets change in an
is reasonable to income
accounting estimate
assurance that
entity will:
• Comply with Deferred Credit to Excluded from
conditions of income method income definition of
grant or netting off or government
• Receive grant method Deduct from grants:
related expense • Free technical/
marketing
advice
Should be
recognised under • Provision of
the income guarantees
approach • Transactions
with
government
that cannot be
Should not be distinguished
accounted for on from normal
a cash basis trading
transactions
Non-monetary
grants measured
at fair value or
nominal amount
Borrowing
costs
Capitalise
Directly attributable
Qualifying asset
borrowing costs
Period of
capitalisation
HB2021

Statement of cash flows
Consolidated
Single entity statement of cash
flows (see Chapter 20)
Split finance lease Acquisition/

Dividends Dividends Acquisition of
instalments disposal of
paid to NCI received associate
Interest = operating subsidiary
from associates
activities
Capital = financing
activities Classify as cash Classify as cash Show payments
Show net cash
flows from flows from effect as part under cash
financing investing of cash flows flows from
activities from investing investing
activities activities
Disclosure in
notes to the
statement
HB2021
1. What is meant by ‘control’ in the context of IFRS 16, Leases? (Topic 1)
2. Can you identify a lease as defined in IFRS 16? (Topic 1)
3. How should the right-of-use asset be measured on initial recognition and subsequently?
(Topic 2)
4. How should the lease liability be measured on initial recognition and subsequently? (Topic
2)
5. Can you account for sale and leaseback transactions? (Topic 3)
6. How does lessor accounting differ from lessee accounting? (Topic 4)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Isaac This is a useful leasing question, because you are asked for the total
charge to profit or loss without being told how this is made up.
Snow Here you are tested on two aspects of leasing that regularly come up: the
carrying amount of the right-of-use asset and sale and leaseback.
Noname This recaps provisions and emphasises that the treatment of onerous
leases falls under IFRS 16, rather than IAS 37.
Tonto The single company statement of cash flows is revised from your earlier
studies, in preparation for consolidated statements of cash flows
introduced in a later chapter.
Telo (note 3 issue This deals with lessor accounting, which is less commonly tested than
only) lessee accounting.
Solvit (sale and You have answered other parts of this question in earlier chapters. The
leaseback only) issue of sale and leaseback gets tested regularly and the calculations will
get easy with practice.
HB2021

UHN (issue 1 only) This tests a more complicated sale and leaseback. Note that you are later
required to show the impact of this and other adjustments on the gearing
and interest cover ratio, but you can’t do this just from one adjustment.
chapter.
HB2021
Technical references
1 IFRS 16, Leases

(1) Identification of a lease
• An assessment of whether the contract contains a lease by considering the following elements: –
IFRS 16 (9)
– A right to control an asset – IFRS 16 (B24)
– Use of an identified asset – IFRS 16 (B13)
– Use for a period of time in exchange for consideration – IFRS 16 (10)
• At the commencement date, the lessee shall recognise a ‘right-of-use’ asset – IFRS 16 (23)
(2) Measurement
• Initial measurement of the right-of-use asset includes: – IFRS 16 (24), IAS 16 (18-19)
– Initial measurement of the lease liability
– Lease payments made before the commencement date
– Less any lease incentives received
– Any initial direct costs incurred by the lessee
– Estimate of costs required to dismantle and remove the asset at the end of the lease term to be
incurred by the lessee
• Depreciate asset over its useful life, or the lease term if shorter and no reasonable certainty that
lessee will obtain ownership at end of lease – IFRS 16 (30)
• Consider whether IAS 36 impairment procedures are needed – IFRS 16 (33)
• Disclosures:
– Disclose information about the leases either in a single note or in a separate section of the
financial statements – IFRS 16 (52)
– Disclosure is required of the following: – IFRS 16 (53)
◦ Depreciation charge for the right-of-use assets – IFRS 16 (53)(a)
◦ Interest expense on lease liabilities – IFRS 16 (53)(b)
◦ Additions to right-of-use assets – IFRS 16 (53)(h)
◦ Gains or losses arising from sale and leaseback transactions – IFRS 16 (53)(i)
◦ Carrying amount of right-of-use assets at the end of the reporting period by class of
underlying asset – IFRS 16 (53)(j)
◦ Details of low value and short term transactions – IFRS 16 (53)(c)(d)
(3) Sale and leaseback
• If the fair value of the consideration for the sale of an asset does not equal the fair value, below
market terms are accounted for as a prepayment of lease payments and any above market terms
are accounted for as additional financing provided by the buyer – IFRS 16 (101)
• Any potential adjustment is calculated on the difference between the fair value of the
consideration and the fair value of the asset – IFRS 16 (102)
(4) Lessor accounting
Finance lease:
• A lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an
underlying asset – IFRS 16 AppA
• Recognise a receivable measured at an amount equal to the net investment in the lease – IFRS
16.67
• Net investment in the lease is the present value of the payments receivable by the lessor plus the
value of any unguaranteed residual value accruing to the lessor – IFRS 16 AppA
• Include initial direct costs incurred – IFRS 16.69
HB2021

• Recognition of finance income should be based on a pattern reflecting a constant periodic rate of
return on the lessor’s net investment – IFRS 16.75
• Finance income should be allocated on a systematic and rational basis – IFRS 16.76
Operating lease:
• A lease that does not transfer substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an
underlying asset – IFRS 16 AppA
• The asset should be recorded in the statement of financial position according to its nature – IFRS
16.71
• Operating lease income should be recognised on a straight-line basis over the lease term, unless
another basis is more appropriate – IFRS 16.81
• Asset should be depreciated as per other similar assets – IFRS 16.84
• IAS 36 should be applied to determine whether the asset is impaired – IFRS 16.85
• Disclosures – IFRS 16.89
2 IAS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance
(1) Treatment
• Should only be recognised if reasonable assurance that: – IAS 20.7
– Entity will comply with conditions
– Grant will be received
• Manner in which received does not affect accounting method adopted – IAS 20.9
• Should be recognised as income over periods necessary to match with related costs – IAS 20.12
• Income approach, where grant is taken to income over one or more periods should be adopted –
IAS 20.13
• Grants should not be accounted for on a cash basis – IAS 20.16
• Grants in recognition of specific expenses are recognised as income in same period as expense –
IAS 20.17
• Grants related to depreciable assets usually recognised in proportion to depreciation – IAS 20.17
• Grants related to non-depreciable assets requiring fulfilment of certain obligations should be
recognised as income over periods which bear the cost of meeting obligations – IAS 20.18
• Grant received as compensation for expenses already incurred recognised in period in which
receivable – IAS 20.20
• Non-monetary grants should be measured at fair value or a nominal amount – IAS 20.23
(2) Presentation of grants related to assets
• Can be presented in the statement of financial position by: – IAS 20.24
– Setting up the grant as deferred income or
– Netting it off against the carrying amount of the asset
(3) Presentation of grants related to income – IAS 20.29
• Either:
– Recognised in profit or loss as income separately or under a general heading or
– Deducted in arriving at the amount of the related expense recognised in profit or loss
(4) Repayment of government grants
• Accounted for as a revision to an accounting estimate – IAS 20.32
(5) Government assistance
• The following forms of government assistance are excluded from the definition of government
grants: – IAS 20.34–35
– Assistance which cannot reasonably have a value placed on it
– Transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the normal trading
transactions of the entity
HB2021
(6) Disclosures
• Required disclosures – IAS 20.39

• Core principle – IAS 23.1 and 8
• Qualifying asset – IAS 23.5 and 7
• Directly attributable borrowing costs – IAS 23.10–11
• Eligible borrowing costs – IAS 23.12–15
• Excess of carrying amount over recoverable amount of asset – IAS 23.16
• Commencement of capitalisation – IAS 23.17–19
• Suspension of capitalisation – IAS 23.20–21
• Cessation of capitalisation – IAS 23.22–25
• Disclosure – IAS 23.26
4 IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows

• Objective of the statement of cash flows
– The statement of cash flows should show the historical changes in cash and cash equivalents
– Cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits – IAS 7.6
– Cash equivalents are short-term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known
amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value – IAS 7.6
• Presentation of a statement of cash flows – Appendix A
– Cash flows should be classified by operating, investing and financing activities – IAS 7.10
– Cash flows from operating activities are primarily derived from the principal revenue-producing
activities of the entity – IAS 7.13–14
– Cash flows from investing activities are those related to the acquisition or disposal of any non-
current assets, or trade investments together with returns received in cash from investments (ie,
dividends and interest) – IAS 7.16
• Financing activities include: – IAS 7.17
– Cash proceeds from issuing shares
– Cash proceeds from issuing debentures, loans, notes, bonds, mortgages and other short- or
long-term borrowings
– Cash repayments of amounts borrowed
– Dividends paid to shareholders / the non-controlling interest
– Principal receipts of amounts advanced under leases
• Cash flows from operating activities
– There are two methods of presentation allowed:
◦ Direct method – IAS 7.19
◦ Indirect method – IAS 7.20
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Henry
Henry acquired an asset on a lease. The details were as follows.
Date of acquisition 1 January 20X1
Present value of future lease payments £7,210
Annual lease payments in arrears £2,000
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 12% pa. The payments are made on the last day of each year.
There is no option to purchase the asset at the end of the lease.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 16, Leases what is the lease liability at 31 December 20X2?
Round your answer to the nearest pound.
2 Sam plc
Sam plc acquired a machine on a lease. The details were as follows.
Date of commencement 1 July 20X6
Present value of future lease payments £24,300
Deposit (including the first payment) £8,000
Remaining annual lease payments (in advance) 4 @£8,000
Interest rate implicit in the lease 12%
The useful life of the machine is 8 years. There is no option to purchase the machine at the end of the
lease.
Requirement
What is the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset as at 30 June 20X7 in accordance with IFRS 16,
Leases?
3 Isaac Co
Isaac Co acquired an item of plant under a lease on 1 January 20X7. The present value of the future
lease payments at the commencement date was £7,731,000 and three lease payments of £3 million
p.a. are due to be paid in arrears on 31 December each year.
The useful life of the plant is deemed to be six years. There is no option to buy the asset at the end of
the lease term.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 8% p.a.
Requirement
What is the total charge to the statement of profit or loss in respect of this lease for the year ended
31 December 20X7?
4 Alpha plc
Alpha plc enters into a lease with Omega Ltd for a plastics moulding machine.
HB2021
The terms of the 10 year lease require Alpha plc to make 10 annual lease payments of £36,000 in
arrears. The discounted value of the lease payments at the implicit rate within the lease of 6% is
£264,960.
There is an option to buy the machine on the final date of the lease for £25,000 (discounted value of
£13,950), which Alpha plc is expected to exercise.
The useful life of the machine is 15 years.
Requirements
Calculate the following values:
(a) The initial measurement of the right-of-use asset at the commencement of the lease on 1
January 20X1.
(b) The carrying amount of the machine at 31 December 20X1.
(c) The lease liability brought forward at 1 January 20X2.
5 Snow plc
On 1 January 20X1 Snow plc entered into the following lease agreements.
(1) Snow machine
To lease a snow machine for five years from Slush plc. The snow machine is estimated to have a
useful life of eight years.
Snow plc has agreed to make five annual payments of £35,000, payable in arrears, commencing on
31 December 20X1. The present value of future discounted lease payments is £151,515. There is no
option to purchase the machine at the end of the lease. Lease incentives of £3,000 were received by
Snow plc in respect of this asset.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 5%.
(2) Head office and warehouse
Snow plc has agreed to sell its Head Office and warehouse to Slush plc on 1 January 20X1 for £6
million. Slush plc is to lease the building back to Snow plc over a period of 10 years.
The carrying amount of the building in Snow plc’s books on the date of the sale was £5.2 million, and
its fair value was £6 million.
The present value of the lease payments was calculated to be £4.2 million, with the remaining useful
life of the building being 15 years.
The transaction constitutes a sale in accordance with IFRS 15.
Requirements
5.1 Calculate the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset at 31 December 20X1 in respect of the
snow machine.
5.2 What is the initial measurement of the right-of-use asset in respect of the leased building?
5.3 What is the gain on the sale that should be recognised on 1 January 20X1 in the financial
statements of Snow plc?
6 Sidcup plc
On 1 January 20X6, Sidcup plc sold its head office building to Eltham Co for £3 million and
immediately leased it back on a 10-year lease. On that date, the carrying value of the building was
£2.6 million and its fair value was £3 million. The present value of the lease payments was calculated
as £2.1 million. The remaining useful life of the building at 1 January 20X6 was 15 years. The
transaction constituted a sale in accordance with IFRS 15.
Requirements
6.1 A right-of-use asset must be recognised in respect of the leased building. At what value should
this right-of-use asset be recognised on 1 January 20X6 in the financial statements of Sidcup
plc?
HB2021

6.2 What is the gain on the sale that may be recognised on 1 January 20X6 in the financial
statements of Sidcup plc?
7 Noname
The Noname Company decided to carry out a fundamental restructuring of its papermaking division
which operates in Hyberia. The effect was that most activities carried out in this location would cease
with a number of employees being made redundant, whereas other activities and employees would
relocate to Sidonia where there was unused capacity. Negotiations with landlords and employee
representatives were concluded on 30 December 20X7 and a formal announcement was made to all
employees on 31 December 20X7.
The restructuring budget approved by the board of directors in November 20X7 included the
following amounts:
£
Payments to employees:
Termination payments to those taking voluntary redundancy 90,000
Termination payments to those being made compulsorily redundant 180,000
One-off payments to employees agreeing to move to Sidonia 37,000
Employment cost for closing down activities in Hyberia in preparation for
the move to Sidonia 50,000
Lease costs:
5 years remaining of a lease which can immediately be sublet for £70,000
per annum 45,000 per annum
7 years remaining of a lease which can immediately be sublet for £35,000
per annum 90,000 per annum
Cost of moving plant and equipment from Hyberia to Sidonia 26,000
Impairment losses on non-current assets under IAS 36, Impairment of
Assets 110,000
Trading transactions in Hyberia up to date of closure, other than those
itemised above:
Revenue 850,000
Expenses 1,150,000
None of these amounts has yet been recognised in Noname’s financial statements. The effect of the
time value of money is immaterial.
Requirement
Determine the amounts to be included in the financial statements for the Noname Company for the
year ending 31 December 20X7 according to IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and
Contingent Assets.
8 Tonto
The following information relates to the draft financial statements of Tonto.
HB2021
Summarised statements of financial position as at:

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (Note (1)) 19,000 25,500
Current assets
Inventory 12,500 4,600
Trade receivables 4,500 2,000
Tax refund due 500 nil
Bank nil 1,500
Equity
Equity shares of £1 each (Note (2)) 10,000 8,000
Share premium (Note (2)) 3,200 4,000
Retained earnings 4,500 7,700 6,300 10,300
17,700 18,300
10% loan note (Note (3)) nil 5,000
Lease obligations 4,800 2,000
Deferred tax 1,200 6,000 800 7,800
Current liabilities
10% loan note (Note (3)) 5,000 nil
Tax nil 2,500
Bank overdraft 1,400 nil
Lease obligations 1,700 800
Trade payables 4,700 12,800 4,200 7,500
Summarised statements of profit or loss for the years ended:

£’000 £’000
Revenue 55,000 40,000
Cost of sales (43,800) (25,000)
Operating expenses (12,000) (6,000)
Finance costs (Note (4)) (1,000) (600)
Profit (loss) before tax (1,800) 8,400
HB2021

£’000 £’000
Income tax relief (expense) 700 (2,800)
Profit (loss) for the year (1,100) 5,600
The following additional information is available:

(1) Property, plant and equipment is made up of:
As at: 31 March 20X1 31 March 20X0

£’000 £’000
Leasehold property nil 8,800
Owned plant 12,500 14,200
Leased plant 6,500 –––––
19,000 25,500
During the year Tonto sold its leasehold property for £8.5 million and entered into an arrangement to
rent it back from the purchaser. There were no additions to or disposals of owned plant during the
year. The depreciation charges (to cost of sales) for the year ended 31 March 20X1 were:
£’000
Leasehold property 200
Owned plant 1,700
Leased plant 1,800
3,700
(2) On 1 July 20X0 there was a bonus issue of shares from share premium of one new share for every
10 held. On 1 October 20X0 there was a fully subscribed cash issue of shares at par.
(3) The 10% loan note is due for repayment on 30 June 20X1. Tonto is in negotiations with the loan
provider to refinance the same amount for another five years.
(4) The finance costs are made up of:
For year ended: 31 March 20X1 31 March 20X0

£’000 £’000
Lease charges 300 100
Overdraft interest 200 nil
Loan note interest 500 500
1,000 600
Requirement
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Tonto for the year ended 31 March 20X1 in accordance with IAS
7, Statement of Cash Flows, using the indirect method.
this chapter.
HB2021

The lease is for eight months, which counts as a short-term lease, and so it does not need to be
recognised in the statement of financial position. If the short-term lease exemption is adopted, then
the amount charged to profit or loss for the year ended 30 June 20X6 is £32,000 × 2/8 = £8,000.
If the short-term lease exemption is not adopted, then the standard IFRS 16 model must be applied;
an asset and liability will be recognised for the leased asset at 30 June 20X6.
Question Fill in your answer
A company leases a laptop computer for their This can be classified as a lease, or the
financial controller over a three year period. company may make an election for this lease
to be classified as a low value item, and
therefore exempt from the IFRS 16 standard
model.
A company leases a photocopier. The copier will Lease: The arrangement involves an identified
remain on the client site, and will only be asset which the customer has the right to
returned to the lessor in the event of a major control. Substitution rights are not substantive.
repair.
A company leases cars for their team of sales Not a lease: The lease is not for identified
representatives for a three-year period. The cars assets, as the lessor can change the exact
are required to be estate models, but from time model of car provided during the lease.
to time, the car may be changed by the lessor.
A company acquires three architect’s drawing These would qualify as a short-term lease,
desks which are paid for over 10 months. The however, IFRS 16 requires the election to be
company already has four of these desks, and no made for the whole class of assets, and this
elections have been made. has not been done, so the full standard should
be applied.

3.1 Total lease liability at 31 December 20X1 = £17,356
Capital > 1 year = £9,092
< 1 year (β) = £8,264
3.2 Journals
£ £
DEBIT Right-of-use asset 24,869
Being recognition of right-of-use asset and lease
liability at commencement of lease.
DEBIT Finance charge (profit or loss) 2,487
Being interest on lease
DEBIT Lease liability 10,000
HB2021

£ £
CREDIT Cash 10,000
Being payment in respect of lease

At the end of year 1 the liability will be measured as:
£
Opening balance 177,297
Interest 5% 8,865
186,162
Current liability 50,000

Non-current liability (bal. fig). 136,162
186,162

Calculations
(1) Calculation of the right-of-use asset
£
PVFLP 11,164
Deposit 575
11,739
Depreciate the asset over seven years

11,739/7 = £1,677 per annum
Carrying amount at 31 December 20X1: £11,739 – £1,677 = £10,062
Carrying amount at 31 December 20X2: £10,062 – £1,677 = £8,385
(2) Calculation of the lease liability
Balance of the lease liability at 31 December 20X1: £9,834
Balance of the lease liability at 31 December 20X2: £8,424
CR CR DR CR
Interest accrued at
Bal b/f 1 Jan 6% Payment 31 Dec Bal c/f 31 Dec
£ £ £ £
20X1 11,164 670 (2,000) 9,834
20X2 9,834 590 (2,000) 8,424
Note: You can do these calculations in vertical format (as in the chapter body) or horizontal,
whichever is easiest. The principles are the same.
HB2021
Journal entries at date of disposal
£ £
DEBIT Cash 120,000
CREDIT Non-current asset (carrying amount) 70,000
CREDIT Gain on rights transferred (W2) 4,906
DEBIT Right-of-use asset (W1) 63,131
CREDIT Lease liability (PVFLP) 108,225
WORKINGS
(1) Calculate the right-of-use asset
Carrying amount × (PVFLP ÷ FV) = £70,000 × (£108,225 ÷ £120,000) = £63,131
(2) Calculate the gain on rights transferred
As follows:
(1) Calculate the gain on the sale:
Fair value – carrying amount = £120,000-£70,000 = £50,000
(2) Calculate the gain relating to the rights retained by the seller/lessee:
Gain × PVFLP/fair value = £50,000 × £108,225/£120,000 = £45,094
(3) Calculate the gain relating to the rights transferred:
Total gain (1) – Gain relating to the rights retained (2) = £50,000 – £45,094 = £4,906
(3) Lease liability and interest accrued
£
1.1.X1 Lease liability (PVFLP) 108,225
31.12.X1 Interest accrued 108,225 × 5% 5,411
31.12.X1 Instalment paid (25,000)
Lease liability carried down at 31.12.X1 88,636
31.12.X2 Interest accrued 88,636 × 5% 4,432
31.12.X2 Instalment paid (25,000)
Lease liability carried down at 31.12.X2 68,068
Therefore, current liabilities (<12 months) at 31.12.X1 would be £88,636 – £68,068 = £20,568, of
which £4,432 is the finance charge (interest payable).
HB2021

Alternative presentation:
Finance cost at
Balance 5% Lease payment Balance
£ £ £ £
20X1 108,225 5,411 (25,000) 88,636
20X2 88,636 4,432 (25,000) 68,068
Statement of profit or loss
£
Depreciation (63,131/4) (15,783)
Interest (108,225 × 5%) (W3) (5,411)
£
Non-current assets
Carrying amount at 1 January 20X1 (W1) 63,131
Depreciation (W3) (15,783)
Carrying amount at 31 December 20X1 47,348
Obligations under leases (W3) 68,068
Current liabilities
Obligations under leases (88,636 – 68,068) 20,568

The answer is £12,973
Stage 1: Gain on sale: £740,000 – £500,000 = £240,000
Stage 2: Gain relating to rights retained = £(240,000 × 700,000/740,000) = £227,027
Stage 3: Gain relating to rights transferred = £240,000 – £227,027 = £12,973

IAS 20 gives the following arguments in support of each method.
Capital approach
(1) The grants are a financing device, so should go through the statement of financial position. In
the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income they would simply offset the
expenses which they are financing. No repayment is expected by the Government, so the grants
should be credited directly to shareholders’ interests.
(2) Grants are not earned, they are incentives without related costs, so it would be wrong to record
them in profit or loss.
Income approach
(1) The grants are not received from shareholders so should not be credited directly to
shareholders’ interests.
(2) Grants are not given or received for nothing. They are earned by compliance with conditions
and by meeting obligations. There are therefore associated costs with which the grant can be
matched in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, as these costs are
being compensated by the grant.
HB2021
(3) Grants are an extension of fiscal policies and so, as income and other taxes are charged against
income, grants should be credited to income.

Cost of each asset as at 31 December 20X8
Asset X Asset Y
£’000 £’000
Borrowing costs
£5.0m/£10m × 10% 500 1,000
Less investment income
To 30 June 20X8: £2.5m/£5.0m × 8% × 6/12 (100) (200)
400 800
Cost of assets
Expenditure incurred 5,000 10,000
Borrowing costs 400 800
5,400 10,800

Capitalisation rate = weighted average rate = (10% × (120 ÷ (120 + 80))) + (9.5% × (80 ÷ (120 +80)))
= 9.8%
Borrowing costs = (£30m × 9.8%) + (£20m × 9.8% × 3/12)
= £3.43m

Elida – statement of cash flows for the year to 31 March 20X8
£’000 £’000
Cash flows from operating activities
Loss on sale of plant 90
Depreciation 280
Early redemption penalty 20
Finance costs 50
Investment income (60)
Increase in warranty provision (200 – 100) 100
920
Increase in inventory (1,210 – 810) (400)
Decrease in receivables (480 – 540) 60
Increase in trade payables (1,410 – 1,050) 360
Cash generated from operations 940
Interest paid (50)
HB2021

£’000 £’000
Tax refund received (W1) 60
Net cash from operating activities 950
Cash flows from investing activities
Proceeds of sale of plant (240 – 90) 150
Purchase of plant (W2) (1,440)
Income from investment property (60 – 20) 40
Net cash used in investing activities (1,250)
Cash flows from financing activities
Share issue ((1,000 – 600) + 600) 1,000
Loan notes repaid (400)
Early redemption penalty (20)
Dividend paid (1,000 × 5 × 0.03) (150)
Net cash from financing activities 430
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 130
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period (120)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period 10
WORKINGS
(1) Income tax payable
£’000 £’000
Bal b/d (current tax) 50 Bal b/d (deferred tax) 30
Bal c/d (current tax) 150 Profit or loss charge 160
Bal c/d (current tax) 50 Cash received (balancing figure) 60
250 250
(2) Property, plant and equipment
£’000 £’000
Bal b/d 1,860 Disposal 240
Revaluation (150 – 50) 100 Depreciation 280
Additions (balancing figure) 1,440 Bal c/d 2,880
3,400 3,400
HB2021
1 Henry
Liability at 31.12.X2 is £4,804
Date B/f Interest 12% Payment C/f

£ £ £ £
31.12.X1 7,210 865 (2,000) 6,075
31.12.X2 6,075 729 (2,000) 4,804
2 Sam plc
The carrying amount of the machine is 32,300 – 6,460 = £25,840
£
Lease liability (PVFLP) 24,300
Deposit payments at the start of the lease (deposit) 8,000
Depreciate the machine over the shorter of the lease term (5 years) and the useful life (8 years)
Depreciation charge for the year £32,300/5 = £6,460
3 Isaac Co
Total lease liability
£ Finance charge
Initial liability (PV of future lease payments) 7,731,000
Interest 8% (£7,731,000 × 8%) 618,480 618,480
Payment (3,000,000)
Total lease liability at 31.12.X8 5,349,480
Depreciation is charged based on the shorter of the lease term (three years) and the useful life (six
years) as there is no option to purchase the asset the end of the lease period.
Depreciation charge
Right-of-use asset 7,731,000
Depreciation charge 7,731,000/3 (2,577,000) 2,577,000
Carrying amount 5,154,000
Charge to the profit and loss is £618,480 + £2,577,000 = £3,195,480
HB2021

4 Alpha plc
(a) Right-of-use asset
£
Discounted future lease payments 264,960
Option to purchase (discounted) 13,950
Lease liability and right-of-use asset 278,910
(b) Carrying amount at 31 December 20X1
£
Less Depreciation (W1) (18,594)
Carrying amount 260,316
WORKING
278,910/15 years = £18,594
The asset is depreciated over 15 years as there is an option to purchase the asset which Alpha
plc is expected to exercise.
(c) Lease liability brought forward at 1 January 20X2
£
Lease liability 278,910
Interest at 6% 16,735
Less payment (36,000)
Liability 259,645
5 Snow plc
5.1 Right-of-use asset at 31 December 20X1
Lease liability Interest

B/f @ 5% Payment C/f
£ £ £ £
31 December 20X1 151,515 7,576 (35,000) 124,091
£
Right-of-use asset
Present value of future lease payments 151,515
Less lease incentive (3,000)
Less depreciation 148,515/5 years (29,703)
Carrying amount 31 December 118,812
HB2021
5.2 Calculation of the right-of-use asset
Building
Calculation of the right-of-use asset:
Carrying amount × (present value of lease payments ÷ fair value of asset)
£5.2m × (£4.2m ÷ £6m) = £3.64m
5.3 Stage 1: Gain on sale: £6m - £5.2m = £0.8m
Stage 2: Gain that relates to rights retained = £0.56
Stage 3: Gain relating to rights transferred = £0.8m - £0.56m = £0.24m
6 Sidcup plc
6.1 £1,820,000
IFRS 16 requires that, at the start of the lease, Sidcup should measure the right-of-use asset
arising from the leaseback of the building at the proportion of the previous carrying amount of
the building that relates to the right of use retained. This is calculated as carrying amount ×
discounted lease payments/fair value. The discounted lease payments were given in the
question as £2.1million.
The right-of-use asset is therefore: £2.6m × £2.1m/£3m = £1,820,000.
6.2 £120,000
Sidcup only recognises the amount of gain that relates to the rights transferred.
Stage 1: Gain is £3,000,000 – £2,600,000 = £400,000
Stage 2: Gain relating to rights retained £(400,000 × 2,100,000/3,000,000) = £280,000
Stage 3: Gain relating to rights transferred £(400,000 – 280,000) = £120,000
7 Noname
The total amount recognised in profit or loss under IAS 37 is the £270,000 restructuring provision +
the £110,000 impairment losses = £380,000.
The five-year lease is not onerous because the premises can be sublet at profit. The seven-year lease
is onerous and under IFRS 16 will lead to an impairment review of the right-of-use asset for the
premises; however following IFRS 16 there is no longer a provision to be recognised under IAS 37.
Under IAS 37.80 all the payments to employees should be included in the restructuring provision,
with the exception of the employment costs of £50,000 in preparation for the move to Sidonia and
£37,000 payable to those moving to Sidonia – this relates to the ongoing activities of the business, so
is disallowed by IAS 37.80(b). For the same reason the costs of moving plant and equipment is
disallowed. Impairment losses reduce the carrying amount of the relevant assets rather than
increasing the restructuring provision and revenue less expenses are trading losses which are
disallowed by IAS 37.63. So provision = £270,000.
8 Tonto
Tonto statement of cash flows for the year ended 31.3.20X1
£’000 £’000
Loss before tax (1,800)
Depreciation (W1) 3,700
Interest expense 1,000
Loss on disposal of leasehold property (8,500 – (8,800 – 200)) 100
Increase in inventories (12,500 – 4,600) (7,900)
Increase in receivables (4,500 – 2,000) (2,500)
HB2021

£’000 £’000
Increase in payables (4,700 – 4,200) 500
Cash used in operations (6,900)
Interest paid (1,000)
Tax paid (W2) (1,900)
Net cash used in operating activities (9,800)
Cash from sale of leasehold property 8,500
Net cash from investing activities 8,500
Dividends paid (6,300 – 4,500 – 1,100) (700)
Payments made under leases (W3) (2,100)
Share issue (10,000 + 3,200) – (8,000 + 4,000) 1,200
Net cash used in financing activities (1,600)
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents (2,900)
Cash and cash equivalents at 31.3.20X0 1,500
Cash and cash equivalents at 31.3.20X1 (1,400)
WORKINGS
(1) PPE – CARRYING AMOUNT
£’000 £’000
B/d 25,500 Disposal (8,800 – 200) 8,600
Lease plant additions Depreciation (β) 3,700
(6,500 – 2,500 + 1,800) 5,800 C/d 19,000
31,300 31,300
(2) INCOME TAX
£’000 £’000
Profit or loss 700 31.3.X0 – Current tax 2,500
31.3.X1 – Deferred tax 1,200 31.3.X0 – Deferred tax 800
Tax paid β 1,900 Refund due 500
3,800 3,800
(3) LEASE LIABILITY
£’000 £’000
Payments made β 2,100 Balance b/f (2,000 + 800) 2,800
Additions (W1) 5,800
Balance c/f (4,800 + 1,700) 6,500 ––––
8,600 8,600
HB2021
HB2021

Chapter 15
Financial instruments:
presentation and disclosure
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Overview of material from earlier studies
2 Objective and scope
3 Disclosures in financial statements
4 Other disclosures
5 Financial instruments risk disclosure
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
15
Learning outcomes
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 4(a), 4(d)
15

of this chapter.

1 Overview of Approach At Advanced Level, IQ7: Purchase of

material from Although you will you will be own equity
earlier studies have a detailed concerned with instruments
The use of financial knowledge of IAS more complex This question has
instruments by 32 from earlier issues than at the finance director
business for studies, the Professional Level, of a company
funding, investment importance of this for example the claiming that an
and risk topic cannot be sometimes difficult instrument is equity
management overestimated. distinction between rather than a
purposes is an Make sure you debt and equity. liability, and you
essential part of understand the An ethical dilemma have to discuss
operations. issues relating to the may arise whereby a whether they are
You will need to accounting of company wishes to correct.
prepare detailed compound financial reduce gearing by
disclosures for instruments. claiming that an
financial instruments Stop and think instrument is equity
and establish the rather than a
When might a liability.
correct presentation contract require
of preference shares delivery of the
and convertible entity’s own equity
instruments instruments but be
between debt and classified as a
equity. financial liability?
2 Objective and Approach An exam question N/A

scope The key point to would not ask for a
This is a short remember from this list of instruments
section on the short section is that that IFRS 7 does not
objective and scope the objective of IFRS apply to. However,
of the standard that 7 is for the user to you would be
will take up the rest evaluate: expected to know
of the chapter: IFRS that disclosures
• The significance relating to certain
7, Financial of financial
Instruments: instruments are
instruments for covered by other
Disclosures the entity’s standards, for
financial position example IFRS 2,
HB2021

and Share-based
performance; payment.
and
• The nature and
extent of risks
arising from
financial
instruments
Stop and think
IFRS 7 applies to
recognised and
unrecognised
financial
instruments.
3 Disclosures in Approach As part of an audit N/A

financial statements There is no short cut question you may
The detailed to reading through need to mention
qualitative and and understanding procedures to check
quantitative these disclosures. whether financial
disclosures required Rather than learn instruments have
by IFRS 7 are them by heart, it is been disclosed in
intended to provide best to know where the financial
to the users of to find them in the statements in
financial statements open books. accordance with
an understanding of IFRS 7.
Stop and think
the significance of
financial instruments The individual
for the entity’s classes of financial
position and instruments will
performance, and mean more to you
an analysis of the once you have
risks to which the studied recognition
entity is exposed and measurement in
and how it manages Chapter 16.
them.
4 Other disclosures Approach This section will not N/A

This section Skim through be examined
contains summaries specifically; it is for
Stop and think awareness only to
of and references to
quantitative and IFRS 13, Fair Value link to other
qualitative Measurement material.
disclosures in the affects a large
financial statements number of areas,
which are covered particularly financial
elsewhere. instruments.
5 Financial Approach Risk disclosures are N/A

instruments risk Study the table in likely to be However, you can
disclosure Section 5.1. You examined in the try Self-test
IFRS 7 also provides should focus on context of audit questions 2 and 3,
an analysis of the credit risk, liquidity risks and which deal with risk
risks to which the risk and market risk. procedures. and sensitivity
entity is exposed analysis.
and how it manages
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 15: Financial instruments: presentation and disclosure 775

them. Stop and think

What qualitative
disclosures are
required by IFRS 7
in relation to risk?
HB2021

1 Overview of material from earlier studies
Section overview
• IAS 32 applies to all entities and all types of financial instruments except where explicitly covered
by another standard, such as IFRS 10 for subsidiaries and IAS 28 for associates and joint ventures.
• A financial instrument should be classified as either equity, financial liability or financial asset. This
classification is made at the time the financial instrument is issued and not changed subsequently.
• Compound financial instruments, ie, instruments that contain both a liability and an equity
component, should be split into their component parts at the date they are issued.
• Interest, dividends, losses and gains arising from financial instruments classified as financial
liabilities are recognised in the profit or loss for the year. Dividends paid to holders of a financial
instrument classified as equity are charged directly against equity.
• Financial assets and financial liabilities are presented as separate items in the statement of
financial position with offset being allowed only in limited cases.
• Treasury shares are deducted from equity with the consideration paid or received recognised
directly in equity. Gains or losses on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of equity instruments
are not recognised in profit or loss.
1.1 Refresh your memory

The definition of a financial instrument is consistent throughout the accounting standards covering
financial instruments. It is introduced in IAS 32.
Definition
Financial instrument: Any contract that gives rise to a financial asset of one entity and a financial
liability or equity instrument of another entity.
Note that a financial instrument has two parties. It should be recognised as an asset by one party and
either a liability or equity by the other. The classification of a financial instrument as a financial
liability or equity is particularly important as it will have an effect on gearing.
1.2 Test your memory

Try these questions to see how well you remember the material covered in your earlier studies.
Interactive question 1: Financial instruments

Why do you think that physical assets and prepaid expenses do not qualify as financial instruments?
Interactive question 2: Liability or equity?

During the financial year ended 31 December 20X5, Kim issued the financial instrument described
below. Identify whether it should be classified as liability or equity, giving reasons for your choice.
Redeemable preference shares with a coupon rate 5%. The shares are redeemable on 31 December
20X9 at premium of 20%.
HB2021

Interactive question 3: Convertible bond 1
An entity issues a convertible bond for £1,000. The bond is convertible into equity shares of the
issuer at the discretion of the holder at any time in the next 10 years. The bond converts into a
variable number of shares equal to the value of the liability.
The entity also issues £7,000 of 8% convertible redeemable preference shares. In five years’ time the
preference shares will either be redeemed or converted into 5,000 equity shares of the issuer, at the
option of either the holder or issuer.
Requirement
How should the entity account for the instruments according to IAS 32?
Interactive question 4: Convertible bond 2

An entity issued 5,000 8% convertible bonds at par value of £10 on 1 January 20X5. Each bond is
convertible into three ordinary shares on 31 December 20X6. Interest is payable annually in arrears.
The entity incurred transaction costs of £1,000. On the date of issue the market interest rate for
similar debt without the conversion option was 10%.
Requirement
Calculate the liability and equity component of the convertible bond on issue.
Interactive question 5: Options contract

An entity enters into an options contract to acquire 100 ounces of platinum in 90 days’ time. The
entity will settle the contract by delivering as many of its own shares as are equal to the cash value of
£1,000 on the purchase date.
Requirement
Explain whether the options contract should be classified as a financial asset, financial liability or
equity.
Interactive question 6: Offsetting

An entity issues debt with a variable rate of interest linked to SONIA. (SONIA (Sterling Overnight
Index Average) is a benchmark rate that replaced LIBOR in 2021.) It enters into a corresponding,
receive floating, pay fixed interest rate swap for the period of the debt. The effect of the two
instruments is to synthesise a fixed-rate long-term loan.
Requirement
Explain whether the two instruments should be presented separately or whether they should be
offset.
This section was for revision from earlier studies. At Advanced Level, the scenarios will be much more
complex and you will need to sift through detail and pick out the important principles that you need
HB2021

to apply. So if you’re at all shaky on the above examples, it is a good idea to practise questions on
this area from your earlier studies.
1.3 More complex issues

1.3.1 Debt/equity distinction
The separation of debt and equity components of a financial instrument should be familiar to you
from your Professional Level studies, and you should not have had any serious difficulty with the
convertible bond question above (Interactive question 4). However, at Advanced Level you will need
to consider more complex, ‘real world’ issues. In practice, the debt/equity distinction may not be
clear cut. Classification of financial instruments as debt or equity can have a significant effect on the
financial statements. Guidance is provided in IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation (and other
standards for items outside IAS 32’s scope), but there are sometimes areas where it is difficult to
determine whether a transaction is debt or equity.
A contract is not an equity instrument solely because it may result in the receipt or delivery of the
entity’s own equity instruments. It is necessary to consider whether the settlement results in receipt or
delivery of variable or fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments.
If the contract results in delivery of variable number of equity instruments, the fair value of the equity
instruments equals to the amount of the fixed contractual right or obligation. Such a contract does
not evidence a residual interest in the entity’s assets after deducting all of its liabilities.
The following contracts require delivery of the entity’s own equity instruments but are classified as
financial liability:
• A contract to deliver as many of the entity’s own equity instruments as are equal in value to £6,000
• A contract to deliver as many of the entity’s own equity instruments as are equal in value to 200
ounces of gold
Contingent settlement provisions
A financial instrument may require the entity to deliver cash or another financial asset in the event of
occurrence or non-occurrence of uncertain future events that are beyond the control of both the
issuer and holder of the instrument. These are known as contingent settlement provisions and could
relate to changes in stock market index, consumer price index, interest rate, issuer’s future profits or
revenues. Such instruments are classified as financial liability. This is because the issuer does not
have an unconditional right to avoid delivering cash or another financial asset.
The financial instrument would be an equity instrument if it has equity-like features, for example,
obligation arises only in the event of liquidation of the issuer.
Context example: Redemption of preference shares

High Growth Bank issues 7% fixed preference shares. The dividends on the preference shares are
cumulative. The terms and conditions of the issue of preference shares indicate that they will be
redeemed if the net profit of the bank increases by more than 50% in the next three years.
In this case, the contingent event is outside the control of both the bank and the holder. If the net
profit of the bank increases by more than 50% in the next three years, it does not have the
unconditional right to avoid delivering cash. The preference shares also pay a fixed cumulative
dividend and hence are classified as financial liability.
Context example: Contingent convertible bonds (CoCos)

Contingent convertible bonds issued by Stable Bank give it the right to convert the debt to equity in
the event of its capital ratio falling below a pre-set level. To offset the risk the holder is undertaking,
the yields that Stable Bank offers on its CoCos are 6.6% compared to an average yield to maturity on
other medium-term bonds of 3.5%.
Stable Bank must classify the bonds as a hybrid instrument with both debt and equity features.
HB2021

1.3.2 Practical implications
The classification of financial instruments as debt versus equity is particularly important with items
that are financial liabilities or equity as the presentation of the two items and associated financial
effects are very different.
Consider the following examples.
Worked example: Debt or equity?

1 Acquittie issued 40 million non-redeemable £1 preference shares at par value. Under the terms
attaching to the preference shares, a dividend is payable on the preference shares only if
Acquittie also pays a dividend on its ordinary shares relating to the same period.
2 Acquittie entered into a contract with a supplier to buy a significant item of equipment. Under the
terms of the agreement the supplier will receive ordinary shares with an equivalent value of £5
million one year after the equipment is delivered.
3 The directors of Acquittie, on becoming directors, are required to invest a fixed agreed sum of
money in a special class of £1 ordinary shares that only directors hold. Dividend payments on the
shares are discretionary and are ratified at the annual general meeting (AGM) of the company.
When a director’s service contract expires, Acquittie is required to repurchase the shares at their
nominal value.
Solution
1 IAS 32 requires a financial instrument to be classified as a liability if there is a contractual
obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset to another entity.
In the case of the preference shares, as they are non-redeemable, there is no obligation to repay
the principal.
In the case of the dividends, because of the condition that preference dividends will only be paid
if ordinary dividends are paid in relation to the same period, the preference shareholder has no
contractual right to a dividend. Instead, the distributions to holders of the preference shares are
at the discretion of the issuer as Acquittie can choose whether or not to pay an ordinary dividend
and therefore a preference dividend. Therefore, there is no contractual obligation in relation to
the dividend.
As there is no contractual obligation in relation to either the dividends or principal, the definition
of a financial liability has not been met and the preference shares should be treated as equity
and initially recorded at fair value ie, their par value of £40 million.
The treatment of dividends should be consistent with the classification of the shares and should
therefore be charged directly to retained earnings.
2 The price of the equipment is fixed at £5 million one year after delivery. In terms of recognition
and measurement of the equipment, the £5 million price would be discounted back one year to
its present value.
The company is paying for the equipment by issuing shares. However, this is outside the scope of
IFRS 2, Share-based Payment because the payment is not dependent on the value of the shares, it
is fixed at £5 million.
This is an example of a contract that “will or may be settled in an entity’s own equity instruments
and is a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to deliver a variable number of
the entity’s own equity instruments” (IAS 32.11) ie, a financial liability.
It is the number of shares rather than the amount paid that will vary, depending on share price.
Therefore it should be classed as a financial liability and initially measured at the present value of
the £5 million.
Subsequently, as it is not measured at fair value through profit or loss (as it is not held for short-
term profit-taking or a derivative), it should be measured at amortised cost.
As a result, interest will be applied to the discounted amount over the period until payment and
recognised in profit or loss with a corresponding increase in the financial liability.
3 Most ordinary shares are treated as equity as they do not contain a contractual obligation to
deliver cash.
HB2021

However, in the case of the directors’ shares, a contractual obligation to deliver cash exists on a
specific date as the shares are redeemable at the end of the service contract.
The redemption is not discretionary, and Acquittie has no right to avoid it. The mandatory nature
of the repayment makes this capital a financial liability. The financial liability will initially be
recognised at its fair value ie, the present value of the payment at the end of the service contract.
It will be subsequently measured at amortised cost and effective interest will be applied over the
period of the service contract.
Dividend payments on the shares are discretionary as they must be ratified at the AGM.
Therefore, no liability should be recognised for any dividend until it is ratified. When recognised,
the classification of the dividend should be consistent with the classification of the shares and
therefore any dividends are classified as a finance cost rather than as a deduction from retained
earnings.
The classification of a financial instrument as debt or equity is an area where judgement must be
applied. This area is still under consideration by the IASB in the form of a Discussion Paper.
The debt/equity distinction also exercises the student/practitioner’s ability to structure problems and
approach them logically. For example, just because it may result in the receipt or delivery of the
entity’s own equity instruments does not necessarily follow it is an equity instrument.
Interactive question 7: Purchase of own equity instruments

Emporium is a listed retail group, and has a year end of 31 October. On 21 October 20X8, Emporium
carried out a bonus issue where the shareholders of Emporium received certain rights. The
shareholders are able to choose between the following:
receiving newly issued shares of Emporium, which could be traded on 30 November 20X8; or
transferring their rights back to Emporium by 10 November 20X8 for a fixed cash price which would
be paid on 20 November 20X8.
While preparing the financial statements at 31 October 20X8, the finance director of Emporium
argued that the criteria for the recognition of a financial liability as regards the second option were
not met at 31 October 20X8 because it was impossible to reliably determine the full amount to be
paid until 10 November 20X8.
Requirement
Discuss whether the finance director is correct regarding the recognition of a financial liability.
2 Objective and scope

Section overview
This section discusses the objectives and sets out the scope of IFRS 7, Financial Instruments:
Disclosures.
HB2021

2.1 Objective
The principles of IFRS 7 complement the principles for recognising, measuring and presenting
financial assets and financial liabilities in IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation and IFRS 9,
Financial Instruments.
IFRS 7 requires entities to provide disclosures in their financial statements that enable users to
evaluate:
• the significance of financial instruments for the entity’s financial position and performance; and
• the nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments to which the entity is exposed
during the period and at the reporting date, and how the entity manages those risks.
The main presentation and disclosure requirements as detailed in IFRS 7 and IAS 32 together with
certain aspects of recognition and measurement of IFRS 9 have already been covered at Professional
Level. This chapter extends the coverage of the disclosure requirements of IFRS 7 and the
presentation requirements.
2.2 Scope
IFRS 7 applies to all entities and to all types of financial instruments, except instruments that are
specifically covered by other standards. Examples of financial instruments not covered by IFRS 7
• Interests in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures that are accounted for in accordance with
IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements or IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures
• Employers’ rights and obligations arising from employee benefit plans, to which IAS 19, Employee
Benefits applies
• Insurance contracts as defined in IFRS 4, Insurance Contracts
• Financial instruments, contracts and obligations under share-based payment transactions to
which IFRS 2, Share-based Payment applies
IFRS 7 applies to recognised and unrecognised financial instruments. Recognised financial
instruments include financial assets and financial liabilities that are within the scope of IFRS 9.
Unrecognised financial instruments include some financial instruments that, although outside the
scope of IFRS 9, are within the scope of IFRS 7 (such as some loan commitments).
IFRS 7 also applies to contracts to buy or sell a non-financial item that are within the scope of IFRS 9
because they can be settled net and there is not the expectation of delivery, receipt or use in the
ordinary course of business.
2.3 General considerations

2.3.1 Classes of financial instruments and level of disclosures
IFRS 7 requires that certain disclosures should be given by class of financial instruments. The classes
of financial instruments that will be disclosed should be appropriate to the nature of the information
disclosed and should take into account the characteristics of those financial instruments. An entity
should provide sufficient information to permit reconciliation to the line items presented in the
statement of financial position.
In deciding how to disclose the classes of financial instruments, an entity should not necessarily
adopt the classification of IFRS 9. The classes should be determined by the entity, but at the
minimum it should:
• provide distinctive classes for financial instruments at amortised cost and financial instruments at
fair value; and
• provide a separate class or classes for financial instruments outside the scope of IFRS 7.
Note: A ‘class’ is not the same as a classification under IFRS 9 (investment in equity instruments,
financial assets held at amortised cost, financial assets at fair value through profit or loss and financial
assets at fair value through other comprehensive income).
2.3.2 Significance of financial instruments for financial position and performance

An entity must disclose information that enables users of its financial statements to evaluate the
significance of financial instruments for its financial position and performance.
HB2021

2.3.3 Risks from financial instruments
IFRS 7 requires qualitative and quantitative disclosure about the following risks associated with
financial instruments:
• Market risk. This is the risk of changes in the market value of a financial instrument. When changes
in the market value can be attributed to changes in interest rates then the market risk is normally
called interest rate risk, and when it can be attributed to changes in exchange rates, market risk is
called currency risk.
• Credit risk. This is the risk that one party to a financial instrument will fail to fulfil the obligations
that arise for the financial instrument causing loss to the other party.
• Liquidity risk. This is the risk that an entity will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations
associated with financial liabilities.
3 Disclosures in financial statements

Section overview
This section discusses the basic disclosures required by IFRS 7 in the financial statements.
3.1 Statement of financial position

3.1.1 Categories of financial assets and financial liabilities
The carrying amounts of each of the following categories, as defined in IFRS 9, must be disclosed
either in the statement of financial position or in the notes:
• Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, showing separately:
– those designated as such on initial recognition; and
– those classified as held for trading in accordance with IFRS 9.
• Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
• Financial assets held at amortised cost
• Investments in equity instruments
• Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss, showing separately:
– those designated as such on initial recognition; and
– those classified as held for trading in accordance with IFRS 9.
• Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost
3.1.2 Loans and receivables at fair value through profit or loss

(a) Disclosures
If the entity has designated a loan or receivable (or group of loans or receivables) as at fair value
through profit or loss, it should disclose the following:
(1) The maximum exposure to credit risk of the loan or receivable (or group of loans or
receivables) at the reporting date
(2) The amount by which any related credit derivatives or similar instruments mitigate that
maximum exposure to credit risk
(3) The amount of change, during the period and cumulatively, in the fair value of the loan or
receivable (or group of loans or receivables) that is attributable to changes in the credit risk
of the financial asset
(4) The amount of the change in the fair value of any related credit derivatives or similar
instruments that has occurred during the period and cumulatively since the loan or
receivable was designated
HB2021

(b) Calculation
The amount of any change in the fair value attributable to credit risk can be calculated as the
amount of the change not attributed to market risk. That is:
[Amount of change in fair value attributed to credit risk] = [Total amount of change in fair value] –
[Amount of change in fair value attributed to market risk]
(c) Alternative method
The standard allows the employment of an alternative method to calculate the amount of
change in the fair value attributed to credit risk if the entity believes that such a method more
faithfully represents the amount of change in its fair value that is attributable to changes in the
credit risk of the asset.
(d) Market risk
Changes in market conditions that give rise to market risk include changes in an observed
(benchmark) interest rate, commodity price, foreign exchange rate or index of prices or rates.
3.1.3 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

(a) Disclosures
If the entity has designated a financial liability as at fair value through profit or loss it should
disclose the following:
(1) The amount of change, during the period and cumulatively, in the fair value of the financial
liability that is attributable to changes in the credit risk of that liability
(2) The difference between the financial liability’s carrying amount and the amount the entity
would be contractually required to pay at maturity to the holder of the obligation
(b) Calculation
The amount of any change in the fair value attributable to credit risk can be calculated as the
amount of the change not attributed to market risk. That is:
[Amount of change in fair value attributed to credit risk] = [Total amount of change in fair value] –
[Amount of change in fair value attributed to market risk]
(c) Alternative method
The standard allows the employment of an alternative method to calculate the amount of
change in the fair value attributed to credit risk if the entity believes that such a method is more
accurate.
(d) Market risk
Changes in market conditions that give rise to market risk include changes in a benchmark
interest rate, the price of another entity’s financial instrument, a commodity price, a foreign
exchange rate or an index of prices or rates. For contracts that include a unit-linking feature,
changes in market conditions include changes in the performance of the related internal or
external investment fund.
The example below illustrates how an entity can arrive at the change in fair value attributable to
credit risk by estimating the amount of change in fair value attributable to risks other than credit
risk.
Context example: Credit risk and change in value

On 1 January 20X6, an entity issues a five-year bond with a par value of £200,000, and an annual
fixed coupon rate of 7%. The coupon rate reflects the market SONIA rate and the credit spread
associated with the bond at the time of the issue. At the time of the issue SONIA was 5%, implying a
credit spread of 2%.
The price of the bond will subsequently change either due to change in SONIA (market risk) or due
to a change in the credit spread (credit risk).
Thus a change in the fair value of the bond attributed to credit risk can be calculated by subtracting
from the total change in the fair value the changes due to market risk (ie, due to changes in SONIA).
Suppose that on 31 December 20X6, the value of the bond has decreased to £196,651, as the
SONIA has increased to 5.25%. The yield to maturity for the bond has now risen to 7.50%. The credit
spread has now increased to 2.25% implying deterioration in the credit quality of the bond.
HB2021

In order to calculate the change in the value of the bond due to changes in SONIA alone, we shall
calculate the fair value of the bond, at the new SONIA of 5.25% assuming that the credit spread has
remained at 2%. This means that we need to discount the remaining four payments using a discount
rate of 7.25%.
Using this discount factor produces
(14,000/1.0725) + (14,000/1.07252) + (14,000/1.07253) + (14,000 + 200,000/1.07254) = £198,316
Total change in market value (£200,000 – £196,651) £3,349

Change in market value due to market risk (£200,000 – £198,316) £1,684
Difference in value due to credit risk (£198,316 – £196,651) £1,665
3.1.4 Reclassification
If an entity has reclassified a financial asset, previously measured at fair value as measured at cost or
amortised cost or vice versa, it should disclose the amount reclassified into and out of each category
and the reason for that reclassification.
3.1.5 Derecognition
An entity may have transferred financial assets in such a way that part or all of the financial assets do
not qualify for derecognition. In such a case, the entity should disclose the following for each class of
financial assets:
• The nature of the assets
• The nature of the risksand rewards of ownership to which the entity remains exposed
• When the entity continues to recognise all of the assets, the carrying amounts of the assets and of
the associated liabilities
• When the entity continues to recognise the assets to the extent of its continuing involvement, the
total carrying amount of the original assets, the amount of the assets that the entity continues to
recognise, and the carrying amount of the associated liabilities
3.1.6 Collateral
An entity should disclose the following:
• The carrying amount of financial assets it has pledged as collateral for liabilities or contingent
liabilities, including amounts that have been reclassified
• The terms and conditions relating to its pledge
When an entity holds collateral (of financial or non-financial assets) and is permitted to sell or re-
pledge the collateral in the absence of default by the owner of the collateral, it shall disclose the
following:
• The fair value of the collateral held
• The fair value of any such collateral sold or re-pledged, and whether the entity has an obligation
to return it
• The terms and conditions associated with its use of the collateral
3.2 Profit or loss for the year

Items of income, expense, gains or losses
An entity should disclose the following items of income, expense, gains or losses either in the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income or in the notes:
(a) Net gains or net losses on:
(1) Financial assets or financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss, showing separately
those on financial assets or financial liabilities designated as such on initial recognition, and
those on financial assets or financial liabilities that are classified as held for trading in
accordance with IFRS 9
(2) Investments in equity instruments where gains are recognised in profit or loss for the period
(3) Held-to-maturity investments
HB2021

(4) Loans and receivables
(5) Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost
(b) Total interest income and total interest expense (calculated using the effective interest method)
for financial assets or financial liabilities that are not at fair value through profit or loss
(c) Fee income and expense (other than amounts included in determining the effective interest
rate) arising from:
– financial assets or financial liabilities that are not at fair value through profit or loss; and
– trust and other fiduciary activities that result in the holding or investing of assets on behalf of
individuals, trusts, retirement benefit plans and other institutions.
(d) Interest income on impaired financial assets
(e) The amount of any impairment loss for each class of financial asset
4 Other disclosures
Section overview
This section discusses additional quantitative and qualitative disclosures in the financial statements.
4.1 Accounting policies

An entity should disclose, in the summary of significant accounting policies, the measurement basis
(or bases) used in preparing the financial statements and the other accounting policies used that are
relevant to an understanding of the financial statements.
4.2 Hedge accounting

Hedge accounting is covered in Chapter 17. The disclosures are dealt with in that chapter.
4.3 Fair value

IFRS 7 retains the following general requirements in relation to the disclosure of fair value for those
financial instruments measured at amortised cost:
• For each class of financial assets and financial liabilities an entity should disclose the fair value of
that class of assets and liabilities in a way that permits it to be compared with its carrying amount.
• In disclosing fair values financial liabilities into classes, but should offset them only to the extent
that their carrying amounts are offset in the statement of financial position.
It also states that disclosure of fair value is not required:
• where carrying amount is a reasonable approximation of fair value; and
• for investments in equity instruments that do not have a quoted market price in an active market
for an identical instrument, or derivatives linked to such equity instruments.
IFRS 13 (see Chapter 2, section 4) provides disclosure requirements in respect of the fair value of
financial instruments measured at fair values. It requires that information is disclosed to help users
assess:
• For assets and liabilities measured at fair value after initial recognition, the valuation techniques
and inputs used to develop those measurements
• For recurring fair value measurements (ie, those measured at each period end) using significant
unobservable (Level 3) inputs, the effect of the measurements on profit or loss or other
comprehensive income for the period
In order to achieve this, the following should be disclosed as a minimum for each class of financial
assets and liabilities measured at fair value:
• The fair value measurement at the end of the period
• The level of the fair value hierarchy within which the fair value measurements are categorised in
their entirety
HB2021

• For assets and liabilities measured at fair value at each reporting date (recurring fair value
measurements), the amounts of any transfers between Level 1 and Level 2 of the fair value
hierarchy and reasons for the transfers
• For fair value measurements categorised within Levels 2 and 3 of the hierarchy, a description of
the valuation techniques and inputs used in the fair value measurement, plus details of any
changes in valuation techniques
• For recurring fair value measurements categorised within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy:
– A reconciliation from the opening to closing balances
– The amount of unrealised gains or losses recognised in profit or loss in the period and the line
item in which they are recognised
– A narrative description of the sensitivity of the fair value measurement to changes in
unobservable inputs
• For recurring and non-recurring fair value measurements categorised within Level 3 of the fair
value hierarchy, a description of the valuation processes used by the entity
An entity should also disclose its policy for determining when transfers between levels of the fair
value hierarchy are deemed to have occurred.
Context example: Fair value disclosures

For financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value at the end of the reporting period, IFRS 13
requires quantitative disclosures about the fair value measurements for each class of financial assets
and liabilities.
An entity might disclose the following for financial assets and financial liabilities (excludes
comparatives and further quantitative disclosures in relation to fair value hierarchy):
Fair value measurements at the end of the

reporting period using
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Description 31.12.X5 inputs inputs inputs
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Trading portfolio assets 95 95
Non-trading equity securities 73 73
Corporate bonds 175 25 150
Designated at fair value 33 31 2
Investments in equity instruments 41 11 25 5
Derivatives – interest rate swaps 55 ––– 55 ––
Financial assets at fair value 472 131 261 80
Trading portfolio liabilities 60 40 20
Designated at fair value 12 9 3
Derivatives – interest rate swaps 55 ––– 55 ––
Financial liabilities at fair value 127 40 84 3
HB2021

5 Financial instruments risk disclosure
Section overview
An entity should disclose information that enables users of its financial statements to evaluate the
nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments to which the entity is exposed at the
reporting date. These risks include, but are not limited to, credit risk, liquidity risk and market risk.
5.1 Types of risk

In undertaking transactions in financial instruments, an entity may assume or transfer to another party
one or more different types of financial risk as defined below. The disclosures required by the
standard show the extent to which an entity is exposed to these different types of risk, relating to
both recognised and unrecognised financial instruments.
Credit risk The risk that one party to a financial instrument will cause a financial loss for
the other party by failing to discharge an obligation.
Currency risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in foreign exchange rates.
Interest rate risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market interest rates.
Liquidity risk The risk that an entity will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations
associated with financial liabilities.
Loans payable Loans payable are financial liabilities, other than short-term trade payables
on normal credit terms.
Market risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market prices. Market risk comprises three
types of risk: currency risk, interest rate risk and other price risk.
Other price risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market prices (other than those arising from
interest rate risk or currency risk), whether those changes are caused by
factors specific to the individual financial instrument or its issuer, or factors
affecting all similar financial instruments traded in the market.
Past due A financial asset is past due when a counterparty has failed to make a
payment when contractually due.
5.2 Qualitative disclosures

For each type of risk arising from financial instruments, an entity must disclose the following:
(a) The exposures to risk and how they arise
(b) Its objectives, policies and processes for managing the risk and the methods used to measure
the risk
(c) Any changes in (a) or (b) from the previous period
5.3 Quantitative disclosures

For each financial instrument risk, summary quantitative data about risk exposure must be disclosed.
This should be based on the information provided internally to key management personnel. More
information should be provided if this is unrepresentative.
HB2021

Information about credit risk must be disclosed by class of financial instrument:
(a) Maximum exposure at the year end
(b) Any collateral pledged as security
(c) In respect of the amount disclosed in (b), a description of collateral held as security and other
credit enhancements
(d) Information about the credit quality of financial assets that are neither past due nor impaired
(e) Financial assets that are past due or impaired, giving an age analysis and a description of
collateral held by the entity as security
(f) Collateral and other credit enhancements obtained, including the nature and carrying amount
of the assets and policy for disposing of assets not readily convertible into cash
For liquidity risk, entities must disclose the following:
• A maturity analysis of financial liabilities
• A description of the way risk is managed
Disclosures required in connection with market risk:
• Sensitivity analysis, showing the effects on profit or loss of changes in each market risk
• If the sensitivity analysis reflects interdependencies between risk variables, such as interest rates
and exchange rates, the method, assumptions and limitations must be disclosed
5.3.1 Credit risk disclosures in more detail

Information about credit risk must be disclosed by class of financial instrument:
(a) Maximum exposure at the year end, which for a financial asset is the gross carrying amount, net
of:
– any amounts offset in accordance with IAS 32; and
– any impairment losses recognised in accordance with IFRS 9.
The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date should be without taking account of
any collateral held or other credit enhancements (eg, netting agreements that do not qualify for
offset in accordance with IAS 32).
(b) In respect of the amount disclosed in (a), a description of collateral held as security and other
credit enhancements.
(c) Information about the credit quality of financial assets that are neither past due nor impaired.
(d) Financial assets that are past due or impaired, giving an age analysis and a description of
collateral held by the entity as security.
(e) Collateral and other credit enhancements obtained, including the nature and carrying amount
of the assets and policy for disposing of assets not readily convertible into cash.
(f) Analysis of financial assets that are individually determined to be impaired as at the reporting
date, including the factors the entity considered in determining that they are impaired.
The activities that give rise to credit risk and the associated maximum exposure to credit risk
include, but are not limited to the following:
• Grant of loans to customers and placing deposits with other entities: Maximum exposure to credit
risk is the carrying amount of related financial assets.
• Derivative contracts: When the resulting financial asset is measured at fair value, the maximum
exposure to credit risk at the end of the reporting period will equal the carrying amount.
• Grant of financial guarantees: Maximum exposure to credit risk is the maximum amount the entity
could have to pay if the guarantee is called on, which may be significantly greater than the
amount recognised as a liability.
• Making a loan commitment that is irrevocable over the life of the facility or is revocable only in
response to a material adverse change: If the issuer cannot settle the loan commitment net in
cash or another financial instrument, the maximum credit exposure is the full amount of the
commitment.
HB2021

Additional disclosures
These include disclosures such as the following:
• Reconciliation of loss allowances
• Explanation of how significant changes in the gross carrying amount of financial instruments
during the period contributed to changes in loss allowance
• Inputs, assumptions and techniques in estimating 12-month and lifetime expected credit losses
including how forward looking information has been incorporated into the determination of
expected credit losses
• Separate disaggregation by credit risk rating grades of the gross carrying amount
• Information about collateral, modified financial assets and write offs still subject to enforcement
activity
5.4 Sensitivity analysis: more detail

The standard requires that an entity should disclose a sensitivity analysis for each type of market risk
to which the entity is exposed.
The standard gives two options regarding disclosure of the sensitivity analysis.
Option 1
An entity should disclose the following:
(a) Sensitivity analysis for each type of market risk to which the entity is exposed at the reporting
date, showing how profit or loss and equity would have been affected by changes in the relevant
risk variable that were reasonably possible at that date. Risk variables that are relevant to
disclosing market risk include, but are not limited to:
– the yield curve of market interest rates, for example the SONIA rate. It may be necessary to
consider both parallel and non-parallel shifts in the yield curve;
– foreign exchange rates;
– prices of equity instruments; and
– market prices of commodities.
(b) The methods and assumptions used in preparing the sensitivity analysis
(c) Changes from the previous period in the methods and assumptions used, and the reasons for
such changes
The effect on profit or loss and equity of reasonably possible changes in the relevant risk variables
may include changes in the prevailing interest rates for interest-sensitive instruments, and/or
changes in currency rates for foreign currency financial instruments.
For interest rate risk, the sensitivity analysis might show separately the effect of a change in market
interest rates on interest income and expenditure, on other items of profits and on equity.
Option 2
Alternatively, if an entity prepares a sensitivity analysis, such as value at risk, that reflects
interdependencies between risk variables (eg, interest rates and exchange rates) and uses it to
manage financial risks, it may use that sensitivity analysis in place of the analysis specified in the
previous paragraph. In this case the entity should also disclose:
• an explanation of the method used in preparing such a sensitivity analysis, and of the main
parameters and assumptions underlying the data provided; and
• an explanation of the objective of the method used and of limitations that may result in the
information not fully reflecting the fair value of the assets and liabilities involved.
It is important for auditors to test this sensitivity analysis and document this on their files. For
example, they should document how they gained comfort over the underlying assumptions and
sensitivity analysis methodology. Auditing financial instruments is covered in Chapter 17, section 11.
HB2021

5.5 Other market risk disclosures
Other market risk is any market risk which is not currency or interest rate risk. When the disclosure of
sensitivity analyses discussed above are unrepresentative of a risk inherent in a financial instrument
(for example because the year-end exposure does not reflect the exposure during the year), the
entity shall disclose that fact and the reason it believes the sensitivity analyses are unrepresentative.
It can be seen that a great deal of information needs to be assimilated and applied in order to carry
out a sensitivity analysis.
Many financial instruments, particularly those held at fair value, are risky. Risk is not necessarily a
negative, provided it is communicated to users and disclosures are transparent.
HB2021

Summary
IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures
Statement of Profit or loss Other disclosures

financial position and equity
Categories of Other disclosures Income, expenses, Accounting policies

assets/liabilities gains and losses
at carrying
value
Reclassification Hedge accounting
Net gains/losses
Further detailed on all asset/liability
disclosures categories
relating to Derecognition Fair value
risk for financial
assets/liabilities
at fair value Total interest
Collateral income Credit risk
through profit
or loss
Allowances accounted Fee income Liquidity risk

for credit loss and expenditure
• Financial assets/
liabilities not
Compound financial at FVTPL Market risk
instrument with • Trust and other
multiple embedded fiduciary activities
derivatives
Interest income
on impaired
Defaults and breaches financial assets
Amount of
impairment loss
for each class of
financial asset
HB2021

IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation
Presentation in financial
statements
Treasury shares (own shares)

acquired by entity
• To be deducted from equity
• Consideration paid/received
recognised directly in equity
Liability or equity
Compound financial instruments,

Equity Liability Offsetting eg, convertible instruments
• Ordinary shares • Redeemable • Legally enforceable
• Irredeemable preference shares rights of set-off
preference shares not • Entity intends to
requiring payment of settle net or
an annual fixed dividend simultaneously Liability element
Interest, dividends, gains Equity element
and losses relating to a (valued as fair value (valued as total value
financial liability are of similar liability – liability element)
• Transaction costs of
recognised in profit without equity
an equity transaction
or loss component)
are accounted for as
a deduction from equity
• Distributions to holders
of an equity instrument
are debited to equity
HB2021

1. What issues arise when distinguishing debt and equity? (Topic 1)
2. IFRS 7 requires certain disclosures relating to risk. What are the three main types of risk
identified by the standard? (Topic 2)
3. What disclosures does IFRS 7 require in relation to loans and receivables at fair value
through profit or loss? (Topic 3)
4. What are IFRS 7’s minimum disclosure requirements in respect of the fair value of financial
instruments measured at fair value, on recognition and subsequently? (Topic 4)
5. In relation to risk, can you distinguish qualitative disclosures and quantitative disclosures?
(Topic 5)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Short-answer This is a quick test of knowledge of IFRS 7 disclosures.

question
Warburton This is revision of the IAS 32 requirement regarding convertible bonds.
Erubus This is a further exercise in separating the liability and equity components,
but slightly more complex.
attempt.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation

Presentation of equity and liabilities
• Classification as financial asset, financial liability or equity instrument – IAS 32.15–16
• Contractual obligation and substance of instrument – IAS 32.17–18
• Settlement options – IAS 32.26–27
• Treasury shares – IAS 32.33–34
• Interest, dividends, losses and gains – IAS 32.35–36
• Offsetting – IAS 32.42
Compound instruments
• Recognising liability and equity elements – IAS 32.28
• Example of convertible bonds – IAS 32.29–30
• Calculation of liability and equity elements – IAS 32.31–32
2 IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures

• Statement of financial position disclosures – IFRS 7.8–19
• Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and statement of changes in equity
disclosures – IFRS 7.20
• Nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments
– Purpose of disclosures – IFRS 7.31–32
– Qualitative disclosures – IFRS 7.33
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Disclosure
What is the main objective of the disclosure requirements of IFRS 7?
2 IFRS 7
How does IFRS 7 define the following?
2.1 Liquidity risk
2.2 Market risk
3 Sensitivity analysis
Why does IFRS 7 require entities to disclose sensitivity analysis to market risk?
4 Warburton
The Warburton Company issued £10 million of convertible bonds at par on 31 December 20X7.
Interest is payable annually in arrears at a rate of 7%. The bonds are redeemable on 31 December
20X9. The bonds can be converted at any time up to maturity into 12.5 million ordinary shares.
At the time of issue, the market interest rate on debt with a similar credit status and the same cash
flows, but without conversion rights, was 10% per annum.
Requirement
What carrying amount should be recognised for the liability in the statement of financial position of
Warburton at 31 December 20X7 in respect of the convertible bond, in accordance with IAS 32,
Financial Instruments: Presentation?
5 Erubus
The Erubus Company issued £15 million of 6% convertible bonds at par on 31 December 20X7. The
bonds are redeemable at 31 December 20Y1. The bonds can be converted by their holders any time
up to maturity into ordinary shares of Erubus.
At 31 December 20X7 the present value of the future capital and interest payments discounted at
the prevailing market interest rate for similar bonds without the conversion rights is £13 million.
The transaction costs directly attributable to the issue of the convertible bonds were £400,000. These
costs are deductible against Erubus’s taxable profits. Erubus’s tax rate is 25%.
Requirement
What increase in equity should be recognised in the statement of financial position of Erubus at 31
December 20X7 as a result of the issue of the convertible bonds, in accordance with IAS 32, Financial
Instruments: Presentation?
Note: Some of the requirements of IAS 32 relate to derivatives and embedded derivatives. These will
be tested after you have covered those topics in Chapter 16
this chapter.
HB2021


Refer to the definitions of financial assets and liabilities.
• Physical assets: Control of these creates an opportunity to generate an inflow of cash or other
assets, but it does not give rise to a present right to receive cash or other financial assets.
• Prepaid expenses, etc: The future economic benefit is the receipt of goods/services rather than
the right to receive cash or other financial assets.

Liability. The preference shares require regular distributions to the holders but more importantly
have the debt characteristic of being redeemable. Therefore, according to IAS 32, Financial
Instruments: Presentation they must be classified as liability.

The convertible bond is not a compound financial instrument, as it is not settled in a fixed amount of
shares. It should instead be wholly classified as a liability.
The convertible redeemable preference shares are compound instruments. They have a financial
liability component, as there is an obligation to deliver cash through dividends and on redemption in
five years’ time to deliver either cash or equity instruments (through the holder’s right to convert into
equity).

The liability component is computed as the present value of the maximum potential cash flows
discounted at 10%.
Time Cash flow Discount factor @ 10% PV

£ £
1 4,000 0.909 3,636
2 54,000 0.826 44,604
48,240
The equity component of the gross proceeds is therefore (£50,000 – £48,240) £1,760.
The issue costs of £1,000 are split in the ratio 48,240:1,760 ie, £965 is netted against the liability and
£35 is netted against the equity.
The entries are therefore:
£ £
DEBIT Cash 50,000
CREDIT Liability 48,240
CREDIT Equity 1,760
and
CREDIT Cash 1,000
DEBIT Liability 965
DEBIT Equity 35
HB2021

The net liability initially recognised is £47,275. This is then amortised to £50,000 over the next 2 years
at an effective interest rate of 11.19% (the IRR of the cash flows of £47,275, –£4,000 and –£54,000) as
follows:
Year B/fwd Interest expense at 11.19% Cash flow C/fwd

£ £ £ £
1 47,275 5,290 (4,000) 48,565
2 48,565 5,435 (4,000) 50,000

The contract is a financial asset or financial liability, even though the entity must settle it by issuing its
own equity. It is not an equity instrument, as it is settled using a variable number of the entity’s own
equity instruments.

Offsetting is not appropriate.
Each of the financial instruments has its own terms and conditions and may be transferred or settled
separately. The risks of the financial instruments are different.
They should not be offset unless they meet the criteria in IAS 32 (legal right of set-off and intention to
settle net), which is unlikely. However, disclosure of the relationship between the two financial
instruments would provide useful information to users of the financial statements.

Emporium’s finance director is incorrect. A financial liability for the present value of the maximum
amount payable to shareholders should be recognised in the financial statements as of 31 October
20X8. At 31 October 20X8, the rights are equivalent to a written put option because they represent
for Emporium a purchase obligation which gives shareholders the right to sell the entity’s own equity
instruments for a fixed price. The fundamental principle of IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation
is that a financial instrument should be classified as either a financial liability or an equity instrument
according to the substance of the contract, not its legal form, and the definitions of financial liability
and equity instrument. IAS 32 states that a contract which contains an entity’s obligation to purchase
its own equity instruments gives rise to a financial liability, which should be recognised at the present
value of its redemption amount. IAS 32 also states that a contractual obligation for an entity to
purchase its own equity instruments gives rise to a financial liability for the present value of the
redemption amount even if the obligation is conditional on the counterparty exercising a right to
redeem, as is the case with the bonus issue of Emporium.
HB2021

1 Disclosure
The main objective of the disclosure requirements of IFRS 7 is to show the significance of financial
instruments for an entity’s financial position and financial performance and qualitative and
quantitative information about exposure to risks arising from financial instruments.
2 IFRS 7
2.1 Liquidity risk is defined as the risk that an entity will encounter difficulty in meeting the
obligations associated with its financial liabilities.
2.2 Market risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market prices.
3 Sensitivity analysis
Sensitivity analysis helps users of financial statements to evaluate the effect of possible changes in
the entity’s financial position and financial performance due to changes in market risk factors.
4 Warburton
£9,479,339
IAS 32.28 requires the separation of the compound instrument into its liability and equity elements.
IAS 32.31 and .32 explain how this separation should be made. IAS 32.AG30 – AG35 explain the
application of this principle.
Thus the liability is (£0.7m/1.10) + (£10.7m/1.102) = £9,479,339.
5 Erubus
£1,960,000
IAS 32.28 requires the separation of a compound instrument into liability and equity elements where
this is appropriate.
IAS 32.35 and 32.37 require that transaction costs of an equity transaction shall be deducted from
equity net of tax.
IAS 32.38 requires that transaction costs directly attributable to a compound financial instrument
should be allocated to the liability and equity components in proportion to the allocation of the
proceeds.
Liability component of gross proceeds: £13m
Equity component of gross proceeds: £2m
Issue costs are £400,000, allocated:
Liability component (13/15) £346,667
Equity component (2/15) £53,333
The initial liability recognised is therefore (£13m – £346,667) £12,653,333.
The equity component is (£2m – (£53,333 – 25% tax relief on £53,333) £1,960,000
Note that tax relief on the issue costs allocated to the liability component will be given, as they are
amortised against profit or loss. Initially they attract no relief and so there is no tax adjustment for
them in the original allocation of the issue costs.
Requires the separation of a compound instrument into liability and equity elements where this is
appropriate.
HB2021

IAS 32.35 and 32.37 require that transaction costs of an equity transaction shall be deducted from
equity net of tax.
IAS 32.38 requires that transaction costs directly attributable to a compound financial instrument
should be allocated to the liability and equity components in proportion to the allocation of the
proceeds.
Liability component of gross proceeds: £13m
Equity component of gross proceeds: £2m
Issue costs are £400,000, allocated:
Liability component (13/15) £346,667
Equity component (2/15) £53,333
The initial liability recognised is therefore (£13m – £346,667) £12,653,333.
The equity component is (£2m – (£53,333 – 25% tax relief on £53,333) £1,960,000
Note: Note that tax relief on the issue costs allocated to the liability component will be given, as they
are amortised against profit or loss. Initially they attract no relief and so there is no tax adjustment for
them in the original allocation of the issue costs.
HB2021

Chapter 16
Financial instruments:
recognition and measurement
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Introduction and overview of earlier studies
2 Recognition, classification and derecognition
3 Measurement
4 Credit losses (impairment)
5 Application of IFRS 13 to financial instruments
6 Derivatives and embedded derivatives
7 Current developments
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
16
Learning outcomes
• Evaluate the impact of accounting policies and choice in respect of financing decisions for
example hedge accounting and fair values
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 4(a), 4(c), 4(d)
16

of this chapter.

1 Introduction and Approach All the topics IQ3: Loan

overview of earlier Although you have covered in this This is a very
studies studied IFRS 9 at section are assumed straightforward
Financial Professional Level, knowledge and can question. If you
instruments, the subject is be tested in the struggle with it, you
especially treated in much exam. need to go back to
derivatives, can more depth and your material from
significantly change complexity. It is earlier studies and
the risk profile of essential, therefore revise.
organisations. The that you have a clear
IASB has therefore grasp of the basics,
paid a great deal of so do not skip or
attention to skim read this
developing IFRS 9, section.
Financial Stop and think
Instruments
Section 1.2 is a ‘stop
and think’ section,
stepping back
before looking at
the detail.
2 Recognition, Approach This is a key area IQ4: Contractual

classification and Note that IFRS 9 and frequently cash flows and
derecognition requires that tested. selling financial
This section builds financial assets are You could get a assets
on your previous classified as financial reporting While this question
studies, which only measured at either: question requiring is only short it is
dealt with financial • Amortised cost; adjustments to the essential you do it
assets and liabilities or financial statements as it does test
at amortised cost. with a substantial whether you have
• Fair value number of understood the
through other adjustments based issue.
comprehensive around financial
income; or instruments.
HB2021

• Fair value You must know the

through profit or business model test
loss. in detail, as it could
Your earlier studies easily come up.
only dealt with
amortised cost.
Stop and think
What is the basis for
classification?
3 Measurement Approach Any of the topics in IQ8: Investment in

This section deals Work through this the worked listed shares
with initial section very examples could Use the summary
measurement (cost carefully, paying come up in the table in Paragraph
= fair value), the particular attention exam and will be of 3.6 to help you with
treatment of to the worked the same level of this and other
transaction costs examples, especially difficulty. questions. This table
and subsequent the debt instrument will be useful in
measurement. and FVTOCI. With revising for your
Subsequent liabilities make sure exam.
measurement you fully understand
depends on how Section 3.9.2 on
the instrument has credit risk, which
been classified on may seem
initial recognition counterintuitive.
(amortised cost, Stop and think
FVTPL or FVTOCI).
How are transaction
costs recognised?
4 Credit losses Approach This area could be IQ12: Modification

(impairment) Make sure you examined within the This deals with a
This deals with the understand what is context of a situation where the
complex area of meant by: scenario question terms of the loan
credit losses requiring are modified and
• Credit loss adjustments to the
(impairment). IFRS 9 credit risk increases.
uses an expected
• Expected credit financial statements.
loss model, which is loss
a change from the • Lifetime
earlier incurred loss expected credit
model loss
• 12 month
expected credit
loss
Stop and think
What is meant by
Stages 1, 2 and 3?
5 Application of IFRS Approach The interaction of IQ13: Fair value of

13 to financial Skim quickly IFRS 9 and IFRS 13 liability
instruments through para. 5.1, has been tested in This question
IFRS 13 works its which should be depth, for example, requires fair valuing
way into many familiar to you. the valuation of a liability in the
standards, Focus more on fair unquoted shares, books of two
particularly IFRS 9, value of financial and also in the companies with
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 16: Financial instruments: recognition and measurement 803

because so many assets (5.2 and context of quoted different credit

financial instruments financial liabilities). shares, for example ratings.
are measured at fair Stop and think in July 2020.
value.
The approach to fair
valuing financial
liabilities and own
equity shares may
differ from financial
assets.
6 Derivatives and Approach Derivatives IQ15: Embedded

embedded Work carefully commonly derivatives
derivatives through section 6 examined include This question has
Derivatives are on derivatives swaps and options. two embedded
financial instruments including all the derivatives, one
whose value worked examples, which needs to be
changes in interactive separated from the
response to a questions and host contract and
change in the value illustrations. one that doesn’t.
of an underlying Note in particular There is a useful
security, commodity, the need to summary diagram in
currency, index or separate the host paragraph 6.6 that
other financial instrument from the will guide you with
instrument(s). They embedded this.
normally require a derivative, unless
zero, or small, initial the host contract is a
net investment and financial asset within
are settled at a the scope of IFRS 9,
future date. in which case the
whole contract is
measured at fair
value through profit
or loss.
Stop and think
What instruments
qualify as
derivatives for
accounting
purposes?
What is the
accounting
treatment of
derivatives?
7 Current Approach This will not be N/A

developments Skim read this for examined in detail
Now that IFRS 9 is background only. as it is only at the
fully examinable, Discussion Paper
Stop and think stage.
there is less going
on in the area of Why is the
current debt/equity
developments, the distinction
main one being important?
financial instruments
with the
HB2021

characteristics of
equity.
HB2021

1 Introduction and overview of earlier studies
Section overview
This section gives a chapter overview and summarises the material covered at Professional Level in
order to consolidate student knowledge before more advanced issues are covered.
• IFRS 9, Financial Instruments
– Financial assets and financial liabilities are classified on initial recognition. This classification
drives subsequent measurement of the instruments.
– Financial assets are classified as either measured at amortised cost, fair value through other
comprehensive income or fair value through profit or loss.
– Reclassifications are permitted only if there is a change in the entity’s business model for
holding the financial asset.
– The financial statements should reflect the general pattern of deterioration or improvement in
the credit quality of financial instruments within the scope of IFRS 9. The impairment model in
IFRS 9 is based on the premise of providing for expected losses.
• IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement
– The IAS 39 rules on hedging may still be applied, and are therefore covered in Chapter 17.
1.1 Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to provide thorough coverage of the accounting treatment of financial
instruments. The main presentation and disclosure requirements as detailed in IAS 32, Financial
Instruments: Presentation and IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures together with certain aspects
of recognition and measurement were covered at Professional Level and revisited in Chapter 15. This
chapter extends the coverage of recognition and derecognition of financial assets and liabilities, and
their initial and subsequent measurement and impairment, and finally discusses particular issues
relating to the definition of derivatives and the accounting treatment of derivatives and embedded
derivatives.
1.2 What are financial instruments?

Before looking at formal definitions and technical details, it is worth stepping back and thinking
clearly about what financial instruments are and what they are for. We can start by demystifying some
of the definitions:
Financial asset: an asset can be defined in simple terms as something you own or a favour that you
can call in; similarly a financial asset can be defined as money that you own, or are owed. You can
also own shares in a company. You have paid for the shares, and the company you have invested in
owes you something of monetary value in return.
Financial liability: the party who owes you the money has a liability equal to your financial asset.
Equity investment: if the company is solvent, this is your share of the amount left over after
deducting the liabilities from the assets.
It follows from the above that a financial asset of one entity is either a financial liability or equity of
another entity. This is reflected in the formal definition of a financial instrument: “A financial
instrument is any contract that gives rise to a financial asset of one entity and a financial liability or
equity instrument of another entity“ (IAS 32: para. 11). The new word in the formal definition is
contract: this is what distinguishes financial instruments from other assets and liabilities.
Types of financial instruments: financial instruments can be divided into three basic types according
to the rights and obligations they carry:
• Debt instruments (including receivables)
• Equities (for example shares)
• Derivatives: these are contracts with negligible or zero initial net value and subsequent fair value
changes depending on the value of the underlying assets. Derivatives can be either assets or
liabilities depending on whether there is a gain or loss on the contract.
HB2021

Two further terms are worth introducing at this stage, as they are not particularly intuitive.
Bond holder = Lender (Imagine, if it helps, holding in your hand the contract in which the debtor
agrees to pay you back.)
Bond issuer = Borrower (As with shares, a bond is issued to raise cash. You owe this to the lender,
who is holding your contract.)
Finally, a term that comes up in many definitions concerning financial instruments is accounting
mismatch. This is a measurement or recognition inconsistency that would otherwise arise from
measuring assets or liabilities or recognising gains or losses on them on different bases. IFRS
occasionally has rules which enable an accounting mismatch to be eliminated, for example hedging,
or designating a financial asset at fair value through profit or loss if this would eliminate the
mismatch.
1.2.1 Summary: features of financial instruments
Category Rights or obligations Asset or (liability) for: Example
Debt Defined amount and timing Lender/holder Bond

(Borrower/payer) Receivable
Equity Residual rights (in assets less Investor/shareholder Share

liabilities), obligation only (No liability within scope of
while solvent IFRS 9)
Derivative Fair value of underlying Gain Options, swaps,

(Loss) futures
1.2.2 Summary: recognition of financial assets and liabilities

The category of financial instrument and the rights and/or obligations associated with it, determine
how it is measured on recognition and subsequently. We will look at recognition and measurement
in detail below. For now, here are summaries to relate to the above table. As we have seen, debt
instruments and derivatives can be financial assets or financial liabilities, but an equity instrument can
only be a financial asset:
Financial assets
Initial measurement Subsequent measurement

(IFRS 9: para. 5.1.1) (IFRS 9: paras. 4.1.2–4.1.5,
5.7.5)
1 Investments in debt instruments Fair value + Amortised cost

Business model approach: transaction costs
(a) Held to collect contractual cash

flows; and cash flows are solely
principal and interest
(b) Held to collect contractual cash Fair value + Fair value through other
flows and to sell; and cash flows are transaction costs comprehensive income (with
solely principal and interest reclassification to profit or
loss (P/L) on derecognition)
NB: interest revenue
calculated on amortised cost
basis recognised in P/L
2 Investments in equity instruments Fair value + Fair value through other

not ‘held for trading’ transaction costs comprehensive income (no
(optional irrevocable election on reclassification to P/L on
initial recognition) derecognition)
NB: dividend income
recognised in P/L
HB2021

(IFRS 9: para. 5.1.1) (IFRS 9: paras. 4.1.2–4.1.5,
5.7.5)
3 All other financial assets (and any Fair value (transaction Fair value through profit or
financial asset if this would eliminate costs expensed in loss
or significantly reduce an ‘ P/L)
accounting mismatch‘)
Financial liabilities

(IFRS 9: para. 5.1.1) (IFRS 9: para. 4.2.1)
1 Most financial liabilities (eg, trade Fair value less Amortised cost
payables, loans, preference shares transaction costs
classified as a liability)
2 Financial liabilities at fair value Fair value (transaction Fair value through profit or
through profit or loss costs expensed in loss
• ‘Held for trading’ (short-term P/L)
profit making)
• Derivatives that are liabilities
• Designated on initial recognition
at ‘fair value through profit or
loss’ to eliminate/significantly
reduce an ‘accounting mismatch’
• A group of financial liabilities (or
financial assets and financial
liabilities) managed and
performance evaluated on a fair
value basis in accordance with a
documented risk management or
investment strategy
In exam questions on financial instruments at Advanced Level, you will often be presented with a
great deal of seemingly complex information, which you must analyse. It helps to have the principles
in the above summary in mind or to hand in order to avoid getting lost or overwhelmed.
The above summary may also play a useful role in structuring problems. What is the nature and
purpose of the financial instrument? How is it valued?
HB2021

1.2.3 Further points forward from Professional Level
(a) A compound financial instrument (that is, one that has features of both debt and equity) should
be split into its component parts according to their substance at the date that it is issued.
(b) Interest, dividends, losses or gains relating to a financial instrument (or a component) that is a
financial liability should be recognised as income or expense in profit or loss.
(c) Dividend distributions paid to holders of an equity instrument should be debited directly to
equity, net of any related income tax benefit. These should be presented in the statement of
changes in equity.
(d) Financial assets and financial liabilities should generally be presented as separate items in the
statement of financial position. No offsetting is allowed except where it is required because an
entity has a legally enforceable right to set off recognised amounts and the entity intends to
settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.
1.3 Practical implications for key ratios

The type of financial instrument, how it is measured and where changes in value are measured have
important effects on key ratios. The classification of financial instruments as debt versus equity is
particularly important with items that are financial liabilities or equity as the presentation of the two
items and associated financial effects are very different.
If a financial instrument is classified as a financial liability (debt) it will be reported within current or
non-current liabilities. Non-current liabilities are relevant in determining an entity’s gearing ie, the
proportion of debt finance versus equity finance of a business, and therefore risk to ordinary equity
holders.
Distributions relating to instruments classified as financial liabilities are categorised as finance cost,
having an impact on reported profitability.
If a financial instrument is classified as equity, reported gearing will be lower than if it were classified
as a financial liability. However, classification as equity is sometimes viewed negatively as it can be
seen as a dilution of existing equity interests.
Distributions on instruments classified as equity are charged to equity and therefore do not affect
reported profit.
If a company elects for changes in value on an equity instrument to be recorded in other
comprehensive income, rather than profit or loss, this will affect key profitability ratios. The
requirement for such an election to be irrevocable prevents manipulation by booking gains to profit
or loss one year and losses to other comprehensive income in the following year.
Classification of instruments can also have financial implications for businesses. For example, debt
covenants on loans from financial institutions often contain clauses that reported gearing cannot
exceed a stated figure, with penalties or call-in clauses if it does. Companies with high gearing may
also find it harder to get financing or financing may be at a higher interest rate.
High gearing is particularly unpopular in the current economic climate and there have been high
profile cases of companies that have been pressed to sell off parts of their business to reduce their
‘debt mountains’ eg, Telefónica SA, the Spanish telecoms provider, selling O2 Ireland to Hutchison
Whampoa (the owner of the ‘3’ telephone network).
Interactive question 1: Classification

For each of the below instruments, identify whether it should be classified as a financial liability or as
part of equity, explaining the reason for your choice.
1.1 Redeemable preference shares with a coupon rate of 8%. The shares are redeemable on 28
February 20X9 at a premium of 10%.
1.2 A grant of share options to senior executives. The options may be exercised from 28 February
20X8.
HB2021

Interactive question 2: Transactions covered by IFRS 9
Should the following be recognised under IFRS 9?
2.1 A guarantee to replace or repair goods sold by a business in the normal course of business
2.2 A firm commitment (order) to purchase a specific quantity of cocoa beans for use in
manufacturing
2.3 A forward contract to purchase cocoa beans at a specified price and quantity on a specified
date
1.4 Amortised cost: revision

The amortised cost category applies to an asset held within a business model whose objective is to
hold financial assets in order to collect contractual cash flows and where the contractual terms of the
asset give rise to cash receipts of interest and capital on specific dates. This applies to most debt
instruments. Such assets are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method.
Amortised cost is:
• the initial amount recognised for the financial asset
• less any repayments of the principal sum
• plus any amortisation
The amount of amortisation should be calculated by applying the effective interest method to spread
the financing cost (that is the difference between the initial amount recognised for the financial asset
and the amount receivable at maturity) over the period to maturity. The amount amortised in respect
of a financial asset should be recognised as income in profit or loss.
Definition
Effective interest rate: The rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts
through the expected life of the instrument or, when appropriate, a shorter period to the net carrying
amount of the financial asset or financial liability.
If required, the effective interest rate will be given in the examination. You will not be expected to
calculate it in the exam. The following illustration has been included to aid your understanding only.
Worked example: Effective interest rate

An entity acquires a 6% coupon bond paying interest on an annual basis; it is redeemable in four
years’ time at its par value of £100. The current market price of this bond is £105 per £100 nominal
value.
Requirement
Calculate the effective interest rate of this bond.
Solution
The RATE spreadsheet function is used to calculate the effective interest rate of a bond. To calculate
the RATE, the following variables need to be input to the RATE function:
Nper = the number of periods
Pmt = the amount (of interest) paid in any single period
Pval = the present value of the asset (its market price), inserted as a negative number
Fval = the future value (the amount paid at maturity).
Type and guess can be left blank.
This will give the effective interest rate (known as the yield to maturity) over a given period.
HB2021

Alternatively, type =RATE( to begin the function entry then insert the number of periods, the
payment made in each period, the present value (as a negative value) and the future value, and end
by inserting a closed bracket ).
=RATE(B1,B2,B3,B4)
A B
1 Nper = the number of periods 4
2 Pmt = the amount (of interest) paid in any single period 6
3 Pval = the present value of the asset (its market price) –105
4 Fval = the future value (the amount at maturity) 100
5 Effective interest rate 0.046
In the Corporate Reporting exam, the amount amortised in respect of a financial asset should be
recognised as income in profit or loss using the effective rate of interest (here 4.6%) as this
represents the true return on the bond to maturity. The 6% coupon rate in this example is not the true
return on the bond as it does not take account of the difference between the initial amount
recognised for the financial asset (£105) and the amount receivable at maturity (£100).
Worked example: Amortised cost

An entity acquires a zero coupon bond with a nominal value of £20,000 on 1 January 20X6 for
£18,900. The bond is quoted in an active market and broker’s fees of £500 were incurred in relation
to the purchase. The bond is redeemable on 31 December 20X7 at a premium of 10%. The effective
interest rate on the bond is 6.49%.
Requirement
Set out the journals to show the accounting entries for the bond until redemption if it is classified as
being held at amortised cost. The entity has a 31 December year end.
Solution
On 1 January 20X6
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset (£18,900 plus £500 broker fees) 19,400
CREDIT Cash 19,400
On 31 December 20X6
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset (£19,400 × 6.49%) 1,259
CREDIT Interest income 1,259
On 31 December 20X7
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset ((£19,400 + £1,259) × 6.49%) 1,341
DEBIT Cash 22,000
CREDIT Financial asset 22,000
HB2021

1.4.1 Loan
A financial asset classified as a loan should also be measured at amortised cost using the effective
interest method.
Amortisation should be recognised as income in profit or loss.
Most financial assets that meet this classification are simple receivables and loan transactions.
Interactive question 3: Loan

Hallowes plc has agreed to lend a customer £9,500 on 1 January 20X2 subject to the following
terms:
• The loan is repaid on 31 December 20X4 in full.
• Three interest payments of £1,000 are paid on 31 December each year.
Hallowes plc incurred £250 of legal fees in agreeing the loan documentation with the customer. The
effective rate of interest on the loan is 9.48%.
Requirement
Demonstrate by journal entries how the loan should be recorded in the financial statements of
Hallowes plc for the year ended 31 December 20X2 and subsequent years.
2 Recognition, classification and derecognition

Section overview
• This section deals with recognition, classification and derecognition of financial assets and
financial liabilities.
• IFRS 9 requires an entity to recognise financial assets and financial liabilities when it becomes a
party to the contractual provisions of the instrument rather than when the contract is settled.
• IFRS 9 requires that financial assets are classified as measured at either:
– Amortised cost;
– Fair value through other comprehensive income; or
– Fair value through profit or loss.
Subsequent measurement depends on the category into which financial assets and financial
liabilities are classified on origination.
• There is an option to designate a financial asset at fair value through profit or loss to reduce or
eliminate an ‘accounting mismatch’ (measurement or recognition inconsistency).
• Financial assets are measured at amortised cost if: the asset is held within a business model
whose objective is to collect contractual cash flows; and the cash flows are solely payments of
principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding.
• Holdings of debt instruments are measured at fair value through other comprehensive income if:
the asset is held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting
contractual cash flows and selling financial assets; and cash flows are solely payments of principal
and interest on the principal amount outstanding.
• Financial liabilities are classified as being measured at fair value through profit or loss, or
amortised cost.
• Reclassification of financial assets is permitted only if the business model within which they are
held changes.
• Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual rights to the cash flows expire or the
entity passes substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to another party. Rights and
obligations are recognised to reflect continuing involvement with the financial asset that has been
transferred.
HB2021

• Financial liabilities are derecognised when they are extinguished ie, when they are discharged,
expired or cancelled.
• Regular way purchase and sale transactions are recognised using either trade date accounting or
settlement date accounting for financial assets.
2.1 Introduction
When an entity first recognises a financial asset or financial liability, it must classify it into an
appropriate category. This classification determines how the financial instrument will be
subsequently measured.
A financial asset or financial liability should be derecognised, that is removed, from an entity’s
statement of financial position, when the entity ceases to be a party to the financial instrument‘s
contractual provisions.
2.2 IFRS 9 definitions

Before we look in more detail at recognition, classification and derecognition, here are the IFRS 9
definitions that are applicable.
Definitions
Financial asset: Any asset that is:
• cash;
• an equity instrument of another entity;
• a contractual right:
– to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity; or
– to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another entity under conditions that are
potentially favourable to the entity; or
• a contract that will or may be settled in the entity’s own equity instruments and which is:
– a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to receive a variable number of the
entity’s own equity instruments; or
– a derivative that will or may be settled other than by exchange of a fixed amount of cash or
another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments. For this
purpose the entity’s own equity instruments do not include instruments that are themselves
contracts for the future receipt or delivery of the entity’s own equity instruments.
Financial liability: Any liability that is:
• a contractual obligation:
– to deliver cash or another financial asset to another entity; or
– to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another entity under conditions that are
potentially unfavourable to the entity; or
• a contract that will or may be settled in the entity’s own equity instruments and which is:
– a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to deliver a variable number of the
entity’s own equity instruments; or
– a derivative that will or may be settled other than by exchange of a fixed amount of cash or
another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments. For this
purpose the entity’s own equity instruments do not include instruments that are themselves
contracts for the future receipt or delivery of the entity’s own equity instruments.
Equity instrument: Any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after
deducting all of its liabilities.
2.3 Initial recognition and measurement

An entity will recognise a financial asset or financial liability on its statement of financial position
when it becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument rather than when the
HB2021

contract is settled. An important consequence of this is that all derivatives should be recognised in
the statement of financial position. This is because even if there is no initial investment or the initial
investment is relatively low, derivative contracts expose the entity to risks and rewards due to
changes in value of the underlying. In most cases, the date on which an entity becomes a party to a
financial instrument’s contractual obligations is fairly obvious. For example, option contracts are
recognised as assets or liabilities when the holder or writer becomes a party to the contract.
2.4 Classification of financial assets

2.4.1 Introduction
On recognition, IFRS 9 requires that financial assets are classified as measured at either:
• amortised cost;
• fair value through other comprehensive income; or
• fair value through profit or loss.
2.4.2 Basis of classification

The IFRS 9 classification is made on the basis of both:
(a) the entity’s business model for managing the financial assets; and
(b) the contractual cash flow characteristics of the financial asset.
Amortised cost
A financial asset is classified as measured at amortised cost where:
(a) the objective of the business model within which the asset is held is to hold assets in order to
collect contractual cash flows; and
(b) the contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are
solely payments of principal and interest on the principal outstanding.
Fair value through other comprehensive income
A debt instrument must be classified and measured at fair value through other comprehensive
income (unless the asset is designated at fair value through profit or loss under the fair value option)
if it meets both the following criteria:
(a) The financial asset is held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both
collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets.
(b) The contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are
solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding.
Fair value through profit or loss
All other debt instruments must be measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Fair value through profit or loss option to avoid an ‘accounting mismatch’
Even if an instrument meets the above criteria for measurement at amortised cost or fair value
through other comprehensive income, IFRS 9 allows such financial assets to be designated, at initial
recognition, as being measured at fair value through profit or loss. This concession is limited to
cases where a recognition or measurement inconsistency (an ‘accounting mismatch’) would
otherwise arise from measuring assets or liabilities or recognising the gains and losses on them on
different bases.
Equity instruments
Equity instruments may not be classified as measured at amortised cost and must be measured at fair
value. This is because contractual cash flows on specified dates are not a characteristic of equity
instruments. However, if an equity instrument is not held for trading, an entity can make an
irrevocable election at initial recognition to measure it at fair value through other comprehensive
income with only dividend income recognised in profit or loss.
This is different from the treatment of debt instruments, where the fair value through other
comprehensive income classification is mandatory for assets meeting the criteria, unless the fair
value through profit or loss option is chosen.
(IFRS 9.4.1.1–.4.1.2)
HB2021

IFRS 9 is very specific about how instruments may be classified, which means there is limited scope
for judgement. However, entities have a choice about the irrevocable FVTOCI election for equity
instruments not held for trading.
2.4.3 Business model test in more detail

IFRS 9 contains a business model test that requires an entity to assess whether its business objective
for a debt instrument is to collect the contractual cash flows of the instrument as opposed to
realising its fair value change from sale prior to its contractual maturity. Note the following key
points:
(a) The assessment of a ‘business model’ is not made at an individual financial instrument level.
(b) The assessment is based on how key management personnel actually manage the business,
rather than management’s intentions for specific financial assets.
(c) An entity may have more than one business model for managing its financial assets and the
classification need not be determined at the reporting entity level. For example, it may have one
portfolio of investments that it manages with the objective of collecting contractual cash flows
and another portfolio of investments held with the objective of trading to realise changes in fair
value. It would be appropriate for entities like these to carry out the assessment for classification
purposes at portfolio level, rather than at entity level.
(d) Although the objective of an entity’s business model may be to hold financial assets in order to
collect contractual cash flows, the entity need not hold all of those assets until maturity. Thus an
entity’s business model can be to hold financial assets to collect contractual cash flows even
when sales of financial assets occur.
The following examples, from the Application Guidance to IFRS 9 (IFRS 9: AG, B4.1.1–B4.1.26), are of
situations where the objective of an entity’s business model may be to hold financial assets to
collect the contractual cash flows.
Context example: Collecting contractual cash flows 1

A Co holds investments to collect their contractual cash flows but would sell an investment in
particular circumstances, perhaps to fund capital expenditure, or because the credit rating of the
instrument falls below that required by A Co’s investment policy.
Although A Co may consider, among other information, the financial assets’ fair values from a
liquidity perspective (ie, the cash amount that would be realised if A Co needs to sell assets), A Co’s
objective is to hold the financial assets and collect the contractual cash flows. Some sales would not
contradict that objective. If sales became frequent, A Co might be required to reconsider whether
the sales were consistent with an objective of collecting contractual cash flows.

B Co has a business model with the objective of originating loans to customers and subsequently to
sell those loans to a securitisation vehicle. The securitisation vehicle issues instruments to investors.
B Co, the originating entity, controls the securitisation vehicle and thus consolidates it. The
securitisation vehicle collects the contractual cash flows from the loans and passes them on to its
investors in the vehicle.
It is assumed for the purposes of this example that the loans continue to be recognised in the
consolidated statement of financial position because they are not derecognised by the securitisation
vehicle.
The consolidated group originated the loans with the objective of holding them to collect the
contractual cash flows.
HB2021

However, B Co has an objective of realising cash flows on the loan portfolio by selling the loans to
the securitisation vehicle, so for the purposes of its separate financial statements it would not be
considered to be managing this portfolio in order to collect the contractual cash flows.

C Co’s business model is to purchase portfolios of financial assets, such as loans. Those portfolios
may or may not include financial assets that are credit impaired. If payment on the loans is not made
on a timely basis, C Co attempts to extract the contractual cash flows through various means – for
example, by contacting the debtor through mail, telephone, and so on.
In some cases, C Co enters into interest rate swaps to change the interest rate on particular financial
assets in a portfolio from a floating interest rate to a fixed interest rate.
The objective of C Co’s business model is to hold the financial assets and collect the contractual cash
flows. The entity does not purchase the portfolio to make a profit by selling them.
The same analysis would apply even if C Co does not expect to receive all of the contractual cash
flows (eg, some of the financial assets are credit impaired at initial recognition).
Moreover, the fact that C Co has entered into derivatives to modify the cash flows of the portfolio
does not in itself change C Co’s business model.
2.4.4 Contractual cash flow test in more detail

The requirement in IFRS 9 to assess the contractual cash flow characteristics of a financial asset is
based on the concept that only instruments with contractual cash flows of principal and interest on
principal may qualify for amortised cost measurement. By interest, IFRS 9 means consideration for
the time value of money and the credit risk associated with the principal outstanding during a
particular period of time.
Measurement at amortised cost is permitted when the cash flows on a loan are entirely fixed (eg, a
fixed interest rate loan or zero coupon bond), or where interest is floating (eg, a GBP loan where
interest is contractually linked to GBP SONIA), or combination of fixed and floating (eg, where
interest is SONIA plus a fixed spread). Note that SONIA (Sterling Overnight Index Average) is a
benchmark rate that replaced LIBOR in 2021.
2.4.5 Examples of instruments that pass the contractual cash flows test
The following instruments satisfy the IFRS 9 criteria.
(a) A variable rate instrument with a stated maturity date that permits the borrower to choose to pay
three-month SONIA for a three-month term or one-month SONIA for a one-month term
(b) A fixed term variable market interest rate bond where the variable interest rate is capped
(c) A fixed term bond where the payments of principal and interest are linked to an unleveraged
inflation index of the currency in which the instrument is issued
2.4.6 Examples of instruments that do not pass the contractual cash flows test
The following instruments do not satisfy the IFRS 9 criteria:
• A bond that is convertible into equity instruments of the issuer
• A loan that pays an inverse floating interest rate (eg, 8% minus SONIA)
2.4.7 Business model of both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets
The following examples, from the Application Guidance to IFRS 9 (IFRS 9: AG, B4.1.1 – B4.1.26), are
of situations where the objective of an entity’s business model is achieved by both collecting
contractual cash flows and selling financial assets.
Context example: Both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets 1
D Co expects to incur capital expenditure in a few years’ time. D Co invests its excess cash in short
and long-term financial assets so that it can fund the expenditure when the need arises. Many of the
financial assets have contractual lives that exceed D Co’s anticipated investment period.
HB2021

D Co will hold financial assets to collect the contractual cash flows and, when an opportunity arises, it
will sell financial assets to re-invest the cash in financial assets with a higher return.
The remuneration of the managers responsible for the portfolio is based on the overall return
generated by the portfolio.
The objective of the business model is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and
selling financial assets. D Co decides on an ongoing basis whether collecting contractual cash flows
or selling financial assets will maximise the return on the portfolio until the need arises for the
invested cash.
Context example: Both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets 2
Logan plc holds financial assets to meet its everyday liquidity needs. The company actively manages
the return on the portfolio in order to minimise the costs of managing those liquidity needs. That
return consists of collecting contractual payments, as well as gains and losses from the sale of
financial assets.
To this end, Logan plc holds financial assets to collect contractual cash flows, and sells financial assets
to reinvest in higher yielding financial assets or to better match the duration of its liabilities. In the
past, this strategy has resulted in frequent sales activity and such sales have been significant in value.
This activity is expected to continue in the future.
The objective of the business model is to maximise the return on the portfolio to meet everyday
liquidity needs and Logan plc achieves that objective by both collecting contractual cash flows and
selling financial assets. In other words, both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial
assets are integral to achieving the business model’s objective.
Interactive question 4: Contractual cash flows and selling financial assets

E Co expects to pay a cash outflow in 10 years to fund capital expenditure and invests excess cash in
short-term financial assets. When the investments mature, E Co reinvests the cash in new short-term
financial assets. E Co maintains this strategy until the funds are needed, at which time E Co uses the
proceeds from the maturing financial assets to fund the capital expenditure. Only sales that are
insignificant in value occur before maturity (unless there is an increase in credit risk).
Requirement
How is the business model of E Co classified under IFRS 9?
2.5 Classification of financial liabilities

On recognition, IFRS 9 requires that financial liabilities are classified as measured either:
(a) at fair value through profit or loss; or
(b) at amortised cost.
A financial liability is classified at fair value through profit or loss if:
(a) it is held for trading; or
(b) upon initial recognition it is designated at fair value through profit or loss. This is permitted
when it results in more relevant information because:
(1) it eliminates or significantly reduces a measurement or recognition inconsistency
(‘accounting mismatch’); or
(2) it is a group of financial liabilities or financial assets and liabilities and its performance is
evaluated on a fair value basis, in accordance with a documented risk management or
investment strategy.
Derivatives are always measured at fair value through profit or loss.
HB2021

2.6 Reclassification of financial assets
IFRS 9 requires that when an entity changes its business model for managing financial assets, it
should reclassify all affected financial assets. This is expected to be a rare event.
A change in an entity’s business model will occur only when an entity begins or ceases to perform an
activity that is significant to its operations – for example, when the entity has acquired, disposed of or
terminated a business line.
The examples of change in a business model include the following:
• An entity has a portfolio of commercial loans that it holds to sell in the short term. The bank
acquires an entity that manages commercial loans and has a business model that holds the loans
in order to collect the contractual cash flows. The portfolio of commercial loans is no longer for
sale, and the portfolio is now managed together with the acquired commercial loans and all are
held to collect contractual cash flows.
• An entity decides to shut down its retail mortgage business. That business no longer accepts new
business and the bank is actively marketing its mortgage loan portfolio for sale.
If an entity reclassifies financial assets, the reclassification is applied prospectively from the first day
of the first reporting period following the change in business model (the reclassification date).
The impact of reclassification of financial assets is as follows:
Asset category Reclassified to: Impact of reclassification
Amortised cost Fair value through • Fair value is measured at the date of
profit or loss reclassification
• Difference between amortised cost and fair value
is recognised in profit or loss
Amortised cost Fair value through • Fair value is measured at the date of
other reclassification
comprehensive • Difference between amortised cost and fair value
income is recognised in other comprehensive income
Fair value through Fair value through • Continue to measure at fair value
other profit or loss • Cumulative gain or loss in other comprehensive
comprehensive income is reclassified to profit or loss at the
income reclassification date
Fair value through Amortised cost • Fair value at the reclassification date is the new
other gross carrying amount
comprehensive • Cumulative gain or loss is removed from other
income comprehensive income (removed from equity
and adjusted against fair value at the
reclassification date but is not a reclassification
adjustment hence does not affect profit or loss)
Fair value through Fair value through • Continue to measure at fair value
profit or loss other • Subsequent gains and losses are recognised in
comprehensive OCI
income
Fair value through Amortised cost • Fair value at the reclassification date is the new
profit or loss gross carrying amount
• Effective interest rate is determined on the basis
of the fair value at the reclassification date
Reclassification is not permitted for derivatives, financial liabilities and equity investments that are
designated as at fair value through other comprehensive income on initial recognition.
When financial instruments are reclassified, disclosures are required under IFRS 7.
HB2021

2.7 Derecognition of financial assets
2.7.1 Criteria for derecognition
Derecognition is the removal of a previously recognised financial instrument from an entity’s
An entity should derecognise a financial asset when:
(a) the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire; or
(b) the entity transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial asset to
another party.
Derecognition of a financial asset is often straightforward, as the above criteria can be implemented
easily. For example, a bond should be derecognised when an entity has collected all the payments of
coupon and principal amount – ie, the bond has matured. The collection of payment signifies the end
of any exposure to risks or any continuing involvement.
There may, however, be more complex transactions which involve the transfer of legal title to another
entity but only a partial transfer of risks and rewards. In such instances, further analysis is required to
evaluate whether the asset should be fully derecognised, and whether a separate asset or liability
recognised, to reflect the remaining rights or obligations.
2.7.2 Accounting treatment

On derecognition of a financial asset the difference between the carrying amount and any
consideration received should be recognised in profit or loss. For investments in debt instruments
that are measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, any accumulated gains or
losses that have been recognised in other comprehensive income should be reclassified to profit or
loss on derecognition of the asset.
2.7.3 The IFRS 9 derecognition steps

The complexity of financial transactions and the difficulty of establishing whether the transfer of legal
title leaves residual risk and reward exposures as well as control and involvement, has prompted the
IASB to produce a fairly prescriptive set of rules to aid companies in the derecognition of financial
assets.
The following flowchart, included in the application guidance which accompanies IFRS 9 (IFRS 9: AG,
Appendix B, 3.2.1), summarises the evaluation of whether, and to what extent, a financial asset
should be derecognised.
HB2021

Figure 16.1: Derecognition of financial assets (IFRS 9.B3.2.1)
Consolidate all subsidiaries (including any SPE)
Determine whether the derecognition principles below are

applied to a part or all of an asset (or group of similar assets)
Have the rights to the cash flows

YES Derecognise the asset
from the asset expired?
NO
Has the entity transferred its right to receive

the cash flows from the asset?
NO
Has the entity assumed an obligation to

YES NO Continue to recognise the asset
pay the cash flows from the asset?
YES
Has the entity transferred substantially

YES Derecognise the asset
all risks and rewards?
NO
Has the entity retained substantially

YES Continue to recognise the asset
all risks and rewards?
NO
Has the entity retained control of the asset? NO Derecognise the asset
YES
Continue to recognise the asset to the extent

of the entity’s continued involvement
The following points relate to this flowchart:

• If the contractual rights to receive the cash flows from the asset have expired or have been wholly
transferred, the whole of the asset should be derecognised. This is also the case if the contractual
rights have been retained by the entity but it has assumed a contractual obligation to pay the cash
flows to one or more recipients. Such an obligation is only assumed if:
– there is no obligation to pay unless amounts are actually collected;
– the entity is forbidden to sell or pledge the original asset other than to the recipient of the cash
flows; and
– the entity must remit the cash flows collected, including any interest earned during temporary
investment between the date of collection to date of remittance, without material delay.
HB2021

• If an entity has sold just a portion of the cash flows arising from an asset, only part of the asset
should be derecognised.
• If substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred, the financial asset
should be derecognised and separate assets or liabilities should be recognised for any rights or
obligations created in the transfer.
• If the entity has neither retained nor transferred all the risks and rewards of ownership, it should
determine whether it has retained control of the financial asset. If it has, it continues to recognise
the asset to the extent of its continuing involvement.
Repurchase agreements may be employed in order to try to remove assets from the statement of
Remember always to apply the principle of substance over legal form.
2.7.4 Repurchase agreements

In a repurchase agreement, a financial asset such as a bond is sold with a simultaneous agreement to
buy it back at some future date at a specified price, which may be the future market price.
Worked example: Repurchase agreements

1 Green Co sells a bond carried on its statement of financial position to Red Co for £1,000. Green
Co commits to buy back the bond in three months for £1,025.
Has Green Co transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership?
2 Would your answer be different if Green Co commits to buyback in three months at market price?
Solution
1 IFRS 9 includes examples with regard to these situations:
This is a sale and repurchase transaction where the repurchase price is a fixed price or at the sale
price plus a lender’s return. Green Co has not transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of
ownership and hence the bond is not derecognised. Green Co will recognise a loan liability of
£1,000 and interest expense of £25 to reflect the collateralised borrowing.
2 This is a sale of a financial asset together with commitment to repurchase the financial asset at its
fair value at the time of repurchase. Because any repurchase is at the then fair value, all risks and
rewards of ownership are with the buying party and hence Green Co will derecognise the bond.
2.8 Derecognition of financial liabilities

An entity should derecognise a financial liability when it is extinguished ie, when the obligation
specified in the contract is discharged or cancelled or expires.
• An entity discharges its obligation by paying in cash, other financial assets or by delivering other
goods or services to the counterparty.
• An obligation may expire due to passage of time as, for example, an unexercised written option.
• An obligation is cancelled when through the process of law, or via negotiation with a creditor, an
entity is released from its primary obligation to pay the creditor.
When a liability is extinguished, the difference between its carrying amount and the consideration
paid including any non-cash assets transferred and any new liabilities assumed is recognised in profit
or loss.
Context example: Extinguishing a financial liability

Entity A has borrowed £10 million from a bank to invest in commercial development. However, due
to a recession, the shops built did not yield the expected rental income and Entity A cannot service
the debt. It negotiates with the bank to transfer the ownership of the development to the bank in
settlement of the outstanding debt. The market value of the development is £7 million. The
development’s carrying amount was £7 million as it was measured at fair value.
HB2021

As a result of the transfer, Entity A should extinguish the liability but it should also recognise a gain of
£3 million in profit or loss, arising from the difference between the carrying amount of the liability
(£10 million) and the value of the development (£7 million) that was transferred to the bank.
2.9 Partial derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities

It is possible for only part of a financial asset or liability to be derecognised. This is the case if the part
comprises:
(a) only specifically identified cash flows; or
(b) only a fully proportionate (pro rata) share of the total cash flows.
For example, if an entity holds a bond, it has the right to two separate sets of cash inflows: those
relating to the principal and those relating to the interest. It could sell the right to receive the interest
to another party while retaining the right to receive the principal.
On derecognition, the amount to be included in profit or loss for the year is calculated as follows:
£
Carrying amount (measured at the date of derecognition) allocated to the part
derecognised X
Less consideration received for the part derecognised (including any new asset obtained
less any new liability assumed) (X)
Difference to profit or loss X
Where only part of a financial asset is derecognised, the carrying amount of the asset should be
allocated between the part retained and the part transferred based on their relative fair values on the
date of transfer. A gain or loss should be recognised based on the proceeds for the portion
transferred.
Worked example: Partial derecognition

Westerly plc purchased £100,000 of bonds which were classified as designated at fair value through
profit or loss. One year later, 25% of the bonds were sold for £37,500. Total cumulative gains
previously recognised in profit or loss in respect of the asset were £6,250.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 9, Financial Instruments, what is the amount of the gain on the disposal to be
recognised in profit or loss?
Solution
When a part of a financial asset is derecognised, the amount recognised in profit or loss should be
the difference between the carrying amount allocated to the part derecognised and the sum of:
(1) the consideration received for the part derecognised; and an
(2) any cumulative gain or loss allocated to it that had been recognised in other comprehensive
income.
The previous gains had been recognised in profit or loss and so are not included in the calculation.
£
Carrying amount of the assets sold/derecognised (25% of £106,250) 26,562.50
Proceeds from sale of 25% of bonds 37,500.00
Gain recognised in the period of sale 10,937.50
HB2021

Interactive question 5: Sale of cash flows from debt instrument
During the year ended 31 December 20X0, Jones sold to a third party the right to receive the
interest cash flows on a fixed maturity debt instrument it holds and will continue to legally own up to
the date of maturity. The debt instrument is quoted in an active stock market. The entity has no
obligation to compensate the third party for any cash flows not received.
Requirement
Discuss whether the debt instrument should be derecognised.
Interactive question 6: Derecognition of financial assets and liabilities

Discuss whether the following financial instruments should be derecognised.
6.1 ABC sells an investment in shares, but retains a call option to repurchase those shares at any
time at a price equal to their current market value at the date of repurchase.
6.2 DEF enters into a stock lending agreement where an investment is lent to a third party for a
fixed period of time for a fee.
6.3 XYZ sells title to some of its receivables to a debt factor for an immediate cash payment of 90%
of their value. The terms of the agreement are that XYZ has to compensate the factor for any
amounts not recovered by the factor after six months.
2.10 Exchange or modification of debt

If a new loan is agreed between a borrower and a lender, or the two parties agree revised terms for
an existing loan, the accounting depends on whether the original liability should be derecognised
and a new liability recognised, or whether the original liability should be treated as modified.
A new liability should be recognised if the new terms are substantially different from the old terms.
The terms are substantially different if the present value of the cash flows under the new terms,
including any fees payable/receivable, discounted at the original effective interest rate, is 10% or
more different from the present value of the remaining cash flows under the original terms. There is
said to be an ‘extinguishment’ of the old liability. In these circumstances:
• the difference between the carrying amount extinguished and the consideration paid should be
recognised in profit or loss; and
• the fees payable/receivable should be recognised as part of that gain or loss.
If the difference between the two present values is below this cut-off point, there is said to be a
modification of the terms. In these circumstances:
• the existing liability is not derecognised; and
• its carrying amount is adjusted by the fees payable/receivable and amortised over the remaining
term of the modified liability.
Worked example: Modification of debt

On 1 May 20X4 Delta plc issues £10 million 10% loan stock redeemable at par after 10 years. Interest
is paid annually in arrears. On 1 May 20X9, Delta plc and the loan stockholders agree to a
modification with the following terms:
• No further interest payments are made
• The loan stock is redeemed on the original date for £17 million
Legal and other fees relating to the modification amount to £500,000. Assume the borrowing cost of
Delta has not changed over the years.
Requirement
How is this modification accounted for by Delta plc?
HB2021

Solution
The present value of remaining cash flows is compared with the present value of cash flows under
the new terms.
The present value of the cash flows arising on the old terms is £10 million:
£
Interest 30.4.Y0 (£1m/1.1) 909,091
Interest 30.4.Y1 (£1m/1.12) 826,446
Interest 30.4.Y2 (£1m/1.13) 751,315
4
Interest 30.4.Y3 (£1m/1.1 ) 683,013
Interest and principal 30.4.Y4 (£11m/1.15) 6,830,135
10,000,000
The present value of cash flows arising after the modification is £11,055,662:
£
Principal (£17m/1.15) 10,555,662
Fees incurred 500,000
11,055,662
The increase in cash flows represents more than a 10% change from £10 million. Therefore the
original financial liability is derecognised and a new financial liability on the new terms is recognised.
The new financial liability is initially measured at fair value in accordance with IFRS 9 and any
difference between this amount and the derecognised financial liability is recognised in profit or loss.
2.11 Regular way transactions

Note: As regards purchases, this issue relates to recognition rather than derecognition; however, it
was necessary to understand the classification aspects in detail before studying this section.
Most financial markets set out regulations for ‘regular way’ transactions whereby purchases and sales
are contractually deliverable (and therefore settled) on a specified date. Settlement date is later than
the contractual date of the transaction (the ‘trade date’). A regular way purchase or sale is the
acquisition or disposal of a financial asset under a contract requiring delivery within a specified time
frame. The time frame may be established through regulation or convention in the market.
Regular way purchases and sales of financial instruments should be recognised using either the
trade date or the settlement date. The method chosen should be applied consistently for all financial
assets. A derivative contract is not a regular way contract, since it can be settled on a net basis.
For purchases, trade date accounting requires the recognition of an asset and the liability to pay for
it at the trade date. After initial recognition, the financial asset is subsequently measured either at
amortised cost or at fair value, depending on its initial classification. For sales of financial assets, the
asset is derecognised and the receivable from the buyer, together with any gain or loss on disposal,
are recognised on the trade date.
With settlement date accounting, an asset purchased is not recognised until the date on which it is
received. Movements in fair value of the contract between the trade date and settlement date are
recognised in the same way as the acquired asset. For assets classified as assets at fair value through
profit or loss, the change is recognised in profit or loss. For assets classified at fair value through
other comprehensive income, the change is recognised in other comprehensive income.
For sales of financial instruments, the asset is derecognised and the receivable from the buyer,
together with any gain or loss on disposal, are recognised on the day that it is delivered by the entity.
Any change in the fair value of the asset between the trade date and settlement date is not
recognised, as the sale price is agreed at the trade date, making subsequent changes in fair value
irrelevant from the seller’s perspective.
HB2021

Worked example: Regular way purchase of a financial asset
IDB Bank entered into a contractual commitment on 27 December 20X8 to purchase a financial asset
for £2,500. On 31 December 20X8, the bank’s reporting date, the fair value was £2,513. The
transaction was settled on 5 January 20X9 when the fair value was £2,519. The bank has classified the
asset at fair value through profit or loss.
Requirement
How should the transactions be accounted for under trade date accounting and settlement date
accounting?
Solution
Trade date accounting
• On 27 December 20X8, the bank should recognise the financial asset and the liability to the
counterparty at £2,500.
• At 31 December 20X8, the financial asset should be re-measured to £2,513 and a gain of £13
recognised in profit or loss.
• On 5 January 20X9, the liability to the counterparty of £2,500 will be paid in cash. The fair value of
the financial asset should be re-measured to £2,519 and a further gain of £6 recognised in profit
or loss.
Settlement date accounting
• No transaction should be recognised on 27 December 20X8.
• On 31 December 20X8, a receivable of £13 should be recognised (equal to the fair value
movement since the trade date) and the gain recognised in profit or loss.
• On 5 January 20X9, the financial asset should be recognised at its fair value of £2,519. The
receivable should be derecognised, the payment of cash to the counterparty recognised and the
further gain of £6 recognised in profit or loss.
Interactive question 7: Regular way sale of a financial asset

High Growth Bank acquired a financial asset on 1 January 20X8 for £3,000. On 27 December 20X8, it
entered into a contract to sell the asset for £3,250. On 31 December 20X8, the bank’s reporting date,
the fair value of the asset was £3,293. The transaction was settled on 5 January 20X9. The bank
classified the asset as at fair value through other comprehensive income.
Requirement
How should the transactions be accounted for under trade date accounting and settlement date
accounting?
HB2021

3 Measurement
Section overview
• Financial assets should initially be measured at cost = fair value.

• Transaction costs increase this amount for financial assets classified as measured at amortised
cost, or where an irrevocable election has been made to take all gains and losses through other
comprehensive income and decrease this amount for financial liabilities classified as measured at
amortised cost.
• Subsequent measurement of both financial assets and financial liabilities depends on how the
instrument is classified: at amortised cost or fair value.
3.1 Initial measurement: financial assets

Financial instruments are initially measured at the transaction price, that is the fair value of the
consideration given (IFRS 9.5.1.1).
An exception is where part of the consideration given is for something other than the financial asset.
In this case, the financial asset is initially measured at fair value evidenced by a quoted price in an
active market for an identical asset (ie, an IFRS 13 level 1 input) or based on a valuation technique
that uses only data from observable markets. The difference between the fair value at initial
recognition and the transaction price is recognised as a gain or loss.
In the case of financial assets classified as measured at amortised cost or at fair value through other
comprehensive income, transaction costs directly attributable to the acquisition of the financial asset
are added to this amount.
3.2 Initial measurement: financial liabilities

IFRS 9 requires that financial liabilities are initially measured at transaction price, ie, the fair value of
consideration received except where part of the consideration received is for something other than
the financial liability. In this case the financial liability is initially measured at fair value measured as for
financial assets (see above). Transaction costs are deducted from this amount for financial liabilities
classified as measured at amortised cost (IFRS 9: Chapter 5, para. 5.1.1).
3.3 Subsequent measurement: financial assets

Under IFRS 9, financial assets are measured subsequent to recognition either:
• at amortised cost, using the effective interest method, or
• at fair value through other comprehensive income, or
• at fair value through profit or loss. (IFRS 9.5.2.1)
3.4 Financial assets measured at amortised cost
Definitions
Amortised cost: The amount at which the financial asset or liability is measured at initial recognition
minus principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative amortisation using the effective interest
method of any difference between that initial amount and the maturity amount and, for financial
assets, adjusted for any loss allowance.
Effective interest method: A method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial instrument and
of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the relevant period.
Worked example: Financial asset at amortised cost

On 1 January 20X4, Beta plc purchases a debt instrument for its fair value of £1,000. The debt
instrument is due to mature on 31 December 20X8. The instrument has a principal amount of £1,250
and carries fixed interest at 4.72% that is paid annually. (The effective interest rate is 10%.)
HB2021

Requirement
How should Beta plc account for the debt instrument over its five year term?
Solution
Beta plc will receive interest of £59 (1,250 × 4.72%) each year and £1,250 when the instrument
matures.
Beta must allocate the discount of £250 and the interest receivable over the five-year term at a
constant rate on the carrying amount of the debt. To do this, it must apply the effective interest rate
of 10%.
The following table shows the allocation over the years:
Profit or loss: Interest received

Amortised cost at Interest income for during year (cash Amortised cost at
Year beginning of year year (@10%) inflow) end of year
£ £ £ £
20X4 1,000 100 (59) 1,041
20X5 1,041 104 (59) 1,086
20X6 1,086 109 (59) 1,136
20X7 1,136 113 (59) 1,190
20X8 1,190 119 (1,250 + 59) –
Each year the carrying amount of the financial asset is increased by the interest income for the year
and reduced by the interest actually received during the year.
3.5 Financial assets measured at fair value

Where a financial asset is classified as measured at fair value, fair value is established at each period
end in accordance with IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement.
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date.
IFRS 13 provides extensive guidance on how the fair value of assets and liabilities should be
established.
This standard requires that the following are considered in determining fair value:
(a) The asset or liability being measured
(b) The principal market (ie, that where the most activity takes place) or where there is no principal
market, the most advantageous market (ie, that in which the best price could be achieved) in
which an orderly transaction would take place for the asset or liability
(c) The highest and best use of the asset or liability, and whether it is used on a standalone basis or
in conjunction with other assets or liabilities
(d) Assumptions that market participants would use when pricing the asset or liability
Having considered these factors, IFRS 13 provides a hierarchy of inputs for arriving at fair value. It
requires that Level 1 inputs are used where possible:
Level 1: Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets that the entity can access at the
measurement date
Level 2: Inputs other than quoted prices that are directly or indirectly observable for the asset
Level 3: Unobservable inputs for the asset
If an entity has investments in equity instruments that do not have a quoted price in an active
market, they should also be measured at fair value. IFRS 13 should be applied, for example the
market approach, using prices and other relevant information that have been generated by market
transactions that involve identical or comparable assets (IFRS 13 para B5).
HB2021

The fair value on initial recognition is normally the transaction price. However, if part of the
consideration is given for something other than the financial instrument, then the fair value should be
estimated using a valuation technique.
Any changes in fair value are normally recognised in profit or loss.
There are three exceptions to this rule:
(a) The asset is part of a hedging relationship (see Chapter 17).
(b) The financial asset is an investment in an equity instrument not held for trading. In this case, the
entity can make an irrevocable election to recognise changes in the fair value in other
(c) It is a financial asset measured at fair value through other comprehensive income because it
meets the criteria above, that is the financial asset is held within a business model whose
objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets.
Note that direct costs of acquisition are capitalised only in the case of a financial asset or financial
liability not held at fair value through profit or loss. If the asset or liability is held at fair value through
profit or loss, the costs of acquisition are expensed. This means that in the case of financial assets
held at amortised cost, costs of acquisition are capitalised. They would be added to the asset and
deducted from the liability amount. Similarly, if an irrevocable election has been made to take gains
and losses on the financial asset to other comprehensive income, costs of acquisition should be
added to the purchase cost.
Investments whose fair value cannot be reliably measured should be measured at cost.
Worked example: Asset measurement

On 8 February 20X8, Orange Co acquires a quoted investment in the shares of Lemon Co with the
intention of holding it in the long term. The investment cost £850,000. At Orange Co’s year end of 31
March 20X8, the market price of an identical investment is £900,000.
Requirement
How is the asset initially and subsequently measured?
Orange Co has elected to recognise changes in the fair value of the equity investment in other
Solution
Measurement
• The asset is initially recognised at the fair value of the consideration, being £850,000.
• At the period end it is re-measured to £900,000.
• This results in the recognition of £50,000 in other comprehensive income.
Interactive question 8: Investment in listed shares

In January 20X6 Wolf purchased 10 million £1 listed equity shares in Hall at a price of £5 per share.
Transaction costs were £3 million. Wolf’s year end is 30 November.
At 30 November 20X6, the shares in Hall were trading at £6.50. On 31 October 20X6 Wolf received a
dividend from Hall of 20p per share.
Requirements
Show the financial statement extracts of Wolf at 30 November 20X6 relating to the investment in Hall
on the basis that:
(a) the shares were bought for trading;
(b) the shares were bought as a source of dividend income and were the subject of an irrevocable
election at initial recognition to recognise them at fair value through other comprehensive
income; and
(c) the shares were bought as a source of dividend income and were the subject of an irrevocable
election at initial recognition to recognise them at fair value through other comprehensive
HB2021

income. However, on 1 June 20X6, Wolf sold half of its shareholding in Hall when the shares
were trading at £6.
3.6 Summary of measurement rules

The following table summarises the IFRS 9 measurement rules. It is a useful reference point for your
exam.
Amortised Fair value through Fair value through Fair value

cost other comprehensive other comprehensive through
income: equity income: debt profit or loss
instrument instrument
Interest/ Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss

dividend income
Expected credit Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss
losses (see
section 4)
Foreign Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss

exchange
gains/losses
Other – Other comprehensive Other comprehensive Profit or loss

gains/losses on income income
remeasurement
Gain/loss on Profit or loss Profit or loss but OCI Profit or loss Profit or loss
derecognition is not reclassified* Amounts previously
recognised in OCI are
reclassified to profit
or loss
Note: *While the gain/loss on derecognition of an equity instrument at FVTOCI is recognised in

profit or loss, in practice this should normally be a nil amount, assuming the disposal is at fair value.
The asset’s carrying amount is remeasured to fair value at the date of derecognition (IFRS 9: para.
3.2.12) immediately prior to the disposal. Any change resulting from such a remeasurement is
recognised in OCI.
Worked example: Debt instrument at fair value through other comprehensive income
On 1 January 20X1 Gemma plc purchases a quoted debt instrument for its fair value of £1,000. The
debt instrument is due to mature on 31 December 20X5 and the entity has the intention to hold the
debt instrument until that date in order to collect contractual cash flows. The instrument has a
principal amount of £1,250 and carries fixed interest at 4.72% that is paid annually. (The effective
interest rate is 10%.)
Gemma plc holds the debt instrument within a business model with the intention of collecting
contractual cash flows and selling assets. The fair value of the debt instrument is £1,210 at 31
December 20X1, £1,340 at 31 December 20X2, £1,400 at 31 December 20X3 and £1,445 at 31
December 20X4.
Requirements
1 How should Gemma plc account for the debt instrument over its five year term?
2 How should Gemma plc account for the debt instrument on derecognition?
HB2021

Solution
1 The financial asset is classified as measured at fair value through other comprehensive income
since it is held within a business model to collect contractual cash flows and sell assets. It gives
rise to contractual cash flows on specified dates that are solely payments of principal and interest
on the principal outstanding.
The following table shows the measurement over the term.
Interest and/or Gain or loss on

Profit or loss: principal received remeasurement to
Carrying Interest income during year (cash fair value/
Year amount b/f for year (@ 10%) inflow) derecognition Fair value
£ £ £ £
20X1 1,000 100 (59) 169 1,210
20X2 1,210 104 (59) 85 1,340
20X3 1,340 109 (59) 10 1,400
20X4 1,400 113 (59) (9) 1,445
20X5 1,445 119 (1,309) (255) 0
Note that interest income is calculated based on amortised cost and interest received is
calculated based on the principal amount.
The required journal entries in 20X1 are:
£
DEBIT Financial asset through other comprehensive income 1,000
CREDIT Cash/bank 1,000
To recognise the financial asset on 1 January 20X1
£
DEBIT Financial asset through other comprehensive income 210
DEBIT Cash/bank 59
CREDIT Profit or loss (interest income) 100
CREDIT Other comprehensive income 169
To recognise interest income at the effective rate and the change in fair value.
2 On derecognition of a debt instrument measured at fair value through other comprehensive
income, any amounts previously recognised as other comprehensive income are reclassified to
profit or loss. Note that this is different from equity instruments held at FVTOCI, where gains and
losses previously recognised through OCI are not reclassified.
Therefore in the example above, a loss of £255 is recognised in profit or loss on derecognition:
DEBIT Profit or loss £255

CREDIT Financial asset £255
And a cumulative net gain of £255 (169 + 85 + 10 – 9) is reclassified by:
DEBIT Other comprehensive income £255

CREDIT Profit or loss £255
HB2021

3.7 Subsequent measurement of financial liabilities
After initial recognition, all financial liabilities should be measured at amortised cost, with the
exception of financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss (including most derivatives). These
should be measured at fair value, but where the fair value is not capable of reliable measurement,
they should be measured at cost (IFRS 9.5.3.1).
3.8 Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost

The definitions of amortised cost, effective interest method and effective interest rate that are used
for measurement of financial assets are also used for financial liabilities.
Worked example: Liability measurement

Galaxy Co issues a bond for £503,778 on 1 January 20X2. No interest is payable on the bond, but it
will be redeemed on 31 December 20X4 for £600,000. The effective interest rate of the bond is 6%.
Requirement
Calculate the charge to profit or loss of Galaxy Co for the year ended 31 December 20X2 and the
balance outstanding at 31 December 20X2.
Solution
The bond is a ‘deep discount’ bond and is a financial liability of Galaxy Co. It is measured at
amortised cost. Although there is no interest as such, the difference between the initial cost of the
bond and the price at which it will be redeemed is a finance cost. This must be allocated over the
term of the bond at a constant rate on the carrying amount.
The effective interest rate is 6%.
The charge to profit or loss for the year is £30,227 (503,778 × 6%).
The balance outstanding at 31 December 20X2 is £534,004 (503,778 + 30,226).
Interactive question 9: Measurement of liability

On 1 January 20X3 Deferred issued £600,000 loan notes. Issue costs were £200. The loan notes do
not carry interest, but are redeemable at a premium of £152,389 on 31 December 20X4. The
effective finance cost of the loan notes is 12%.
Requirement
What is the finance cost in respect of the loan notes for the year ended 31 December 20X4?
A £72,000
B £76,194
C £80,613
D £80,640
3.9 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

Financial liabilities which are held for trading are re-measured to fair value each year in accordance
with IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (see section 5.3) with any gain or loss recognised in profit or
loss (IFRS 9.5.7.1).
3.9.1 Exceptions
The exceptions to the above treatment of financial liabilities are as follows:
(a) It is part of a hedging arrangement (see Chapter 17).
(b) It is a financial liability designated as at fair value through profit or loss and the entity is required
to present the effects of changes in the liability’s credit risk in other comprehensive income (see
3.9.2 below).
HB2021

3.9.2 Credit risk
IFRS 9 requires that financial liabilities which are designated as measured at fair value through profit
or loss are treated differently. In this case the gain or loss in a period must be classified into:
• gain or loss resulting from credit risk; and
• other gain or loss.
This provision of IFRS 9 was in response to an anomaly regarding changes in the credit risk of a
financial liability.
Changes in a financial liability‘s credit risk affect the fair value of that financial liability. This means
that when an entity’s creditworthiness deteriorates, the fair value of its issued debt will decrease (and
vice versa). For financial liabilities measured using the fair value option, this causes a gain (or loss) to
be recognised in profit or loss for the year. For example:
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (extract) - Profit or loss for the year
£’000
Liabilities at fair value (except derivatives and liabilities held for trading)
Change in fair value 100
Profit (loss) for the year 100
Many users of financial statements found this result to be counter-intuitive and confusing.
Accordingly, IFRS 9 requires the gain or loss as a result of credit risk to be recognised in other
comprehensive income, unless it creates or enlarges an accounting mismatch (see 3.9.3), in which
case it is recognised in profit or loss. The other gain or loss (not the result of credit risk) is recognised
in profit or loss.
On derecognition any gains or losses recognised in other comprehensive income are not transferred
to profit or loss, although the cumulative gain or loss may be transferred within equity.
Context example: IFRS 9 presentation

Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (extract)
Profit or loss for the year
£’000
Liabilities at fair value (except derivatives and liabilities held for trading)
Change in fair value not attributable to credit risk 90
Profit (loss) for the year 90
Other comprehensive income (not reclassified to profit or loss)
£’000
Fair value loss on financial liability attributable to change in credit risk 10
3.9.3 Accounting mismatch

IFRS 9 allows the recognition of the full amount of change in the fair value in the profit or loss only if
the recognition of changes in the liability’s credit risk in other comprehensive income would create
or enlarge an accounting mismatch in profit or loss. That determination is made at initial recognition
and is not reassessed (IFRS 9.4.1.5).
An accounting mismatch is a measurement or recognition inconsistency arising from measuring
assets or liabilities or recognising the gains or losses on them on different bases.
HB2021

4 Credit losses (impairment)
Section overview
• This section covers the key points in the IFRS 9 expected credit loss impairment model.
• The previous standard, IAS 39, required an impairment loss to be recognised if and only if there
was objective evidence of impairment. This approach was criticised after the Global Financial
Crisis of 2007/08 as recognising impairments ‘too little, too late’. IFRS 9 therefore requires the
expected credit loss model to ensure timely recognition of credit losses.
• On initial recognition of the financial asset, an impairment allowance is recognised based on 12-
month expected credit losses.
• If there is a significant increase in credit risk after initial recognition, impairment allowances are
recognised based on lifetime expected credit losses (LEL).
• The general or three-stage approach requires the financial asset to be classified in Stage 1 on
initial recognition. If there is a significant increase in credit risk, the asset is moved to Stage 2. On
default the financial asset transfers to Stage 3. Interest revenue is calculated on the net carrying
amount of the asset (after the deduction of the impairment allowance) in Stage 3.
• Assessment of a significant increase in credit risk may be based on quantitative indicators,
qualitative indicators or a mixture of both. It requires the use of reasonable and supportable
information available without undue cost or effort, including use of forward looking macro-
economic data.
• If a financial asset is purchased or originated credit-impaired, expected credit losses shall be
discounted using the credit-adjusted effective interest rate determined at initial recognition.
• Simplified approaches and practical expedients may be used by non-financial entities for
operational simplification in applying the impairment model.
4.1 Indications of impairment

The following are indications that a financial asset or group of assets may be impaired (IFRS 9:
Appendix A).
(a) Significant financial difficulty of the issuer
(b) A breach of contract, such as a default in interest or principal payments
(c) The lender granting a concession to the borrower that the lender would not otherwise consider,
for reasons relating to the borrower’s financial difficulty
(d) It becomes probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy
(e) The disappearance of an active market for that financial asset because of financial difficulties
(f) The purchase or origination of a financial asset at a deep discount that reflects the incurred
credit losses
It is not always possible to single out one particular event; rather, several events may combine to
cause an asset to become credit-impaired.
4.2 Background and scope of IFRS 9 impairment model

IFRS 9, Financial Instruments was published in response to an urgent need to improve the accounting
for financial instruments. IFRS 9 requires an expected credit loss model to ensure earlier and timely
recognition of credit losses. This has a significant impact on banks as both incurred and future
expected credit losses are considered in the measurement of impairment. A single set of impairment
requirements applies to all instruments within the scope of the new standard. Financial liabilities are
not subject to impairment.
The following instruments are in the scope of IFRS 9 impairment requirements:
• Financial assets that are debt instruments measured at amortised cost or fair value through other
HB2021

• Loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts not accounted for at fair value through profit
or loss under IFRS 9
• Contract assets under IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers
• Lease receivables under IFRS 16, Leases
All instruments measured at fair value through profit or loss are not required to be assessed for
impairment because any fair value movements are automatically reflected in profit or loss.
4.3 IFRS 9 impairment model

4.3.1 Initial recognition of financial asset
An entity is required to create a credit loss allowance/impairment allowance on initial recognition of
the financial asset. This is calculated by multiplying the probability of a default occurring in the next
12 months by the total lifetime expected credit losses that would result from that default. Note that
this is not the same as the expected cash shortfalls over the next 12 months.
4.3.2 Subsequent treatment of financial asset

An entity may continue to provide for 12-month expected credit losses if there is not a significant
change in credit risk. However, the probability of default occurring in the next 12 months may have
changed and the credit loss allowance would have to be adjusted to reflect this.
If the credit risk increases significantly since initial recognition the 12-month expected credit
impairment allowance is replaced by lifetime expected credit losses. If the credit quality
subsequently improves and the lifetime expected credit losses criterion is no longer met, the 12-
month expected credit loss basis is reinstated which means that the credit impairment allowance will
reduce.
Definitions
Credit loss: The difference between all contractual cash flows that are due to an entity in accordance
with the contract and all the cash flows that the entity expects to receive discounted at the original
effective interest rate.
Expected credit losses (ECL): The weighted average of credit losses with the respective risks of the
default occurring as the weights.
Lifetime expected credit losses: Those that result from all possible default events over the expected
life of a financial instrument.
12-month expected credit losses: The portion of lifetime expected credit losses which represent the
expected credit losses that result from default events on a financial instrument that are possible
within the 12 months after the reporting date.
4.3.3 General or 3-stage approach

The amount of the impairment to be recognised on financial assets depends on whether or not they
have significantly deteriorated since their initial recognition. For this purpose, financial instruments
are classified into three stages as follows:
Step 1 Financial assets on initial recognition and financial assets where credit quality has not
significantly deteriorated since initial recognition. Stage 1 contains loans from all risk classes
except ‘credit-impaired’ loans (section 4.4)
Step 2 Financial assets whose credit quality has significantly deteriorated since their initial
recognition
Step 3 Financial assets for which there is objective evidence of impairment at the reporting date
For Stage 1 financial instruments, the impairment represents the present value of expected credit
losses that will result if a default occurs in the 12 months after the reporting date (12 months’
expected credit losses).
For financial instruments classified as Stage 2 or 3, an impairment is recognised at the present value
of expected credit shortfalls over their remaining life (lifetime expected credit loss). Entities are
HB2021

required to reduce the gross carrying amount of a financial asset in the period in which they no
longer have a reasonable expectation of recovery.
4.3.4 Interest
For Stage 1 and 2 instruments interest revenue will be calculated on their gross carrying amounts,
whereas interest revenue for Stage 3 financial instruments would be recognised on a net basis (ie,
after deducting expected credit losses from their carrying amount).
4.3.5 Summary
The following figure gives a useful summary of the process.
Figure 16.2: The three-stage approach
Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3
When? Initial recognition Credit risk Objective

(and increases evidence of
subsequently if significantly impairment exists
no significant (rebuttable at the reporting
deterioration in presumption if > date
credit risk) 30 days past due)
Credit losses 12-month Lifetime Lifetime

recognised expected credit expected credit expected credit
losses losses losses
Calculation of On gross carrying On gross carrying On carrying

effective amount amount amount net of
interest allowance for
credit losses after
date evidence
exists
Worked example: Impairment loss

On 1 January 20X2 Dexter Lee plc originated a loan of £500,000. It classified the financial asset as
measured at amortised cost. The loan is fully repayable at the end of Year 5. The effective interest rate
is 4% per annum (payable at the end of each year).
On initial recognition, the loan has a low credit risk and the probability of default in the next 12
months is 1% with lifetime credit losses estimated at £125,000.
At 31 December 20X2, there has been no significant deterioration in credit quality and the loan is
considered to be low credit risk. The probability of default increases to 1.5% due to marginal
increase in credit risk of the borrower. The lifetime credit losses are still estimated at £125,000.
At 31 December 20X3, there has been a significant deterioration of credit quality but there is no
objective evidence of impairment loss. The expected credit losses over the remaining life of the loan
are estimated at £50,000.
At 31 December 20X4, there is evidence of loss event and the loan defaults. The actual impairment
loss is estimated at £125,000.
Requirements
Explain how the loan should be accounted for under IFRS 9 including the following:
(a) Impairment loss allowance to be recognised on origination of the loan and at the end of each of
the year ended 31 December 20X2, 20X3 and 20X4 with relevant journal entries.
(b) Amount of interest income to be recognised in each of the years ended 31 December 20X2 to
20X5.
HB2021

Solution
(a) Impairment loss recognised on origination and adjusted subsequently for changes in credit risk.
Initial recognition
£
DEBIT Loan receivable 500,000
CREDIT Cash 500,000
£
DEBIT Impairment loss (P/L) 1,250
CREDIT Loan asset/loss allowance 1,250
(Based on 12-month expected credit losses = 1% of £125,000)

Loan is classified in Stage 1
£
DEBIT Impairment loss (P/L) 625
CREDIT Loan asset/loss allowance 625
(Based on 12-month expected credit losses = 1.5% of £125,000 less £1,250 previously
recognised)
Loan remains in Stage 1 as there is no significant increase in credit risk
Interest amount = 4% of £500,000 = £20,000.
£
(Based on lifetime expected credit losses = £50,000 less £1,875 previously recognised)
Loan is moved to Stage 2 as there is a significant increase in credit risk
£
(Based on lifetime expected credit losses = £125,000 less £50,000 previously recognised)
Loan is moved to Stage 3 as it is credit-impaired
(b) Year ended 31 December 20X5
Interest amount in the year ended 31 December 20X5 = 4% of £375,000 = £15,000
The loan has moved to Stage 3 at the end the year ended 31 December 20X4. The interest in the
year ended 31 December 20X5 is calculated on the net carrying amount of the loan.
4.3.6 Simplified approach for trade and lease receivables

For trade receivables that do not have an IFRS 15 financing element, the loss allowance is measured
at the lifetime expected credit losses, from initial recognition.
HB2021

For other trade receivables and for lease receivables, the entity can choose (as a separate accounting
policy for trade receivables and for lease receivables) to apply the three-stage approach or to
recognise an allowance for lifetime expected credit losses from initial recognition.
Worked example: Trade receivable provision matrix

On 1 June 20X4, Kredco sold goods on credit to Detco for £200,000. Detco has a credit period with
Kredco of 60 days. Kredco applies IFRS 9, and uses a pre-determined matrix for the calculation of
allowances for receivables as follows.
Days overdue Expected loss provision
Nil 1%
1 to 30 5%
31 to 60 15%
61 to 90 20%
90 + 25%
Detco had not paid by 31 July 20X4, and so failed to comply with its credit term, and Kredco learned
that Detco was having serious cash flow difficulties due to a loss of a key customer. The finance
controller of Detco has informed Kredco that they will receive payment.
Ignore sales tax.
Requirement
Show the accounting entries on 1 June 20X4 and 31 July 20X4 to record the above, in accordance
with the expected credit loss model in IFRS 9.
Solution
On 1 June 20X4
The entries in the books of Kredco will be:
£
DEBIT Trade receivables 200,000
CREDIT Revenue 200,000
Being initial recognition of sales

An expected credit loss allowance, based on the matrix above, would be calculated as follows:
£
DEBIT Expected credit losses 2,000
CREDIT Allowance for receivables 2,000
Being expected credit loss: £200,000 × 1%

On 31 July 20X4
Applying Kredco’s matrix, Detco has moved into the 5% bracket, because it has exhausted its 60-day
credit period (note that this does not equate to being 60 days overdue!). Despite assurances that
Kredco will receive payment, the company should still increase its credit loss allowance to reflect the
increased credit risk.
Kredco will therefore record the following entries on 31 July 20X4:
£
DEBIT Expected credit losses 8,000
CREDIT Allowance for receivables 8,000
HB2021

Being expected credit loss: £200,000 × 5% – £2,000
Worked example: Impairment of trade receivable

Included in Timpson’s trade receivables at 31 October 20X8 is an amount due from its customer
Thompson of £51,542,000. This relates to a sale which took place on 31 October 20X6, payable in
three annual instalments of £20,000,000 commencing 31 October 20X7 discounted at a market rate
of interest adjusted to reflect the risks of Thompson of 8%. Based on previous sales where
consideration has been received in annual instalments, the directors of Timpson estimate a lifetime
expected credit loss in relation to this receivable of £14.4 million. The probability of default over the
next 12 months is estimated at 25%. For trade receivables containing a significant financing
component, Timpson chooses to follow the three-stage approach for impairments (rather than
always measuring the loss allowance at an amount equal to lifetime credit losses). No loss allowance
has yet been recognised in relation to this receivable.
Requirement
How should the receivable be treated in the financial statements?
Solution
A loss allowance for the trade receivable should be recognised at an amount equal to 12-month
expected credit losses. Although IFRS 9 offers an option for the loss allowance for trade receivables
with a financing component to always be measured at the lifetime expected losses, Timpson has
chosen instead to follow the three-stage approach of IFRS 9.
The 12-month expected credit losses are calculated by multiplying the probability of default in the
next 12 months by the lifetime expected credit losses that would result from the default. Here this
amounts to £3.6 million (£14.4m × 25%).
Adjustment:
£m
DEBIT Expected credit loss 3.6
Allowance for receivables (this is offset against trade
CREDIT receivables) 3.6
Worked example: Impairment review

Blacksmith holds a financial asset: an investment in debt instruments, measured at amortised cost,
which has a carrying amount of £430,000 (before adjustments for impairment and/or fair value
changes) at 31 December 20X3. Impairment indicators require an impairment test to be conducted
on each asset at 31 December 20X3. The investment in debt instruments has an impairment
allowance brought forward at 1 January 20X3 of £6,000 as a Stage 1 12-month expected credit loss
based on a probability of default of 2%.
Revised estimated future cash flows, measured as at 31 December 20X3 are:
20X4 20X5 20X6 20X7 20X8

£ £ £ £ £
Cash inflows 80,000 80,000 80,000 100,000 100,000
Cash flows are assumed to occur on 31 December each year. The original contractual cash flows for
the investment in debt instruments were £100,000 on each of the above dates. The probability of
default has increased to 2.5% because of the reduced cash flows.
The investment in debt instruments is held at amortised cost, using an effective interest rate of 5.25%.
Its fair value at 31 December 20X3 (due to a rise in market interest rates) is £360,000. It would cost
£1,000 in transaction fees to sell the instruments.
HB2021

Requirement
Discuss how the asset should be accounted for in the financial statements of Blacksmith for the year
ended 31 December 20X3.
Solution
An impairment test on financial assets is only required for investments in debt instruments measured
at amortised cost or at fair value through other comprehensive income. An impairment allowance is
recognised on initial recognition of the debt instrument based on 12-month expected credit losses
(ie, lifetime expected credit losses multiplied by the probability of a default arising in the next 12
months). Debt instruments at amortised cost hold an impairment allowance on the statement of
financial position (with movements taken to profit or loss). Debt instruments at fair value through
other comprehensive income recognise impairment allowances in other comprehensive income
(with the movement taken to profit or loss).
An impairment test is performed annually to assess any changes in credit risk. If there is no change in
credit risk, the 12-month expected credit losses are recalculated using latest estimates and the asset
remains in Stage 1. If there has been a significant increase in credit risk, the asset moves to Stage 2
and lifetime expected credit losses must be calculated and recognised. A significant increase in
credit risk is presumed for debts more than 30 days past due. If there is ‘objective evidence’ of
impairment (such as a default in interest or capital payments) the asset moves to Stage 3, lifetime
expected credit losses continue to be recognised and interest is calculated on the asset net of the
impairment allowance. Default is presumed for debts more than 90 days past due.
Worked example: Portfolio of mortgages and personal loans

Credito Bank operates in South Zone, a region in which clothing manufacture is a significant industry.
The bank provides personal loans and mortgages in the region. The average loan to value ratio for all
its mortgage loans is 75%.
All loan applicants are required to provide information regarding the industry in which they are
employed. If the application is for a mortgage, the customer must provide the postcode of the
property which is to serve as collateral for the mortgage loan.
Credito Bank applies the expected credit loss impairment model in IFRS 9, Financial Instruments. The
bank tracks the probability of customer default by reference to overdue status records. In addition, it
is required to consider forward-looking information as far as that information is available.
Credito Bank has become aware that a number of clothing manufacturers are losing revenue and
profits as a result of competition from abroad, and that several are expected to close.
Requirement
How should Credito Bank apply IFRS 9 to its portfolio of mortgages in light of the changing situation
in the clothing industry?
Solution
Credito Bank should segment the mortgage portfolio to identify borrowers who are employed by
clothing manufacturers and suppliers and service providers to the clothing manufacturers. This
segment of the portfolio may be regarded as being ‘in Stage 2’, that is having a significant increase in
credit risk. Lifetime credit losses must be recognised.
In estimating lifetime credit losses for the mortgage loans portfolio, Credito Bank will take into
account amounts that will be recovered from the sale of the property used as collateral. This may
mean that the lifetime credit losses on the mortgages are very small even though the loans are in
Stage 2.
Interactive question 10: Particular defaults identified

Later in the year, more information emerged, and Credito Bank was able to identify the particular
loans that defaulted or were about to default.
HB2021

Requirement
How should Credito Bank treat these loans?
Interactive question 11: Mortgage loans

A bank makes mortgage loans to clients. Interest charged to these clients is SONIA (Sterling
Overnight Index Average) + 1%, reset monthly.
The bank recognises that in its portfolio of clients there will be some clients who will experience
financial difficulties in the future and will not be able to keep up mortgage payments.
Under the mortgage agreement, the bank takes first legal charge over the mortgaged property and,
in the event of a default where payments cannot be rescheduled, the property would be sold to
cover unpaid debts.
Requirement
Discuss how revenue relating to the above would be accounted for under IFRS 9.
4.4 Purchased credit-impaired approach

A financial asset is described as ‘credit-impaired’ when one or more events that have a negative
effect on future expected cash flows have already occurred.
Where financial assets are already credit-impaired when they are purchased/originated, the following
approach is taken:
(a) Purchased credit-impaired financial assets are initially measured at the transaction price without
an allowance for expected contractual cash shortfalls that are implicit in the purchase price.
(b) Lifetime credit losses are included in the estimated cash flows for the purposes of calculating the
effective interest rate.
(c) Interest revenue is calculated on the net carrying amount at the credit-adjusted effective interest
rate.
(d) Expected credit losses are discounted using the credit-adjusted effective interest rate
determined at initial recognition.
(e) Subsequent changes from the initial expected credit losses are recognised immediately in profit
or loss.
4.5 Recognition of credit losses

Impairment losses are recognised in profit or loss with a corresponding credit entry as follows:
Financial asset Credit entry
Financial assets at amortised cost Credit an allowance account.

This is offset against the carrying amount of the financial asset
so that a net position is presented in the statement of financial
position.
Financial assets at fair value Credit an ‘accumulated impairment amount’ in other

through other comprehensive comprehensive income.
income The carrying amount remains at fair value in the statement of
Loan commitments and financial Credit a provision account, which is presented as a separate
guarantee contracts liability.
HB2021

4.6 Modifications to existing financial assets
Loans and advances may be subject to modification, for example, if forbearance terms are offered
such as a payment holiday or a reduction in the rate of interest charged.
The modification of cash flows may lead to derecognition of the existing financial asset if there is a
substantial change in terms. Judgement will need to be applied regarding what constitutes a
substantial change.
When the modification results in the derecognition of the existing financial asset, the modified
financial asset is considered to be a new financial asset. The new financial asset is therefore treated as
any other financial asset on initial recognition and a loss allowance equal to 12-month expected
credit losses is created.
In rare circumstances, the new asset may be credit-impaired at initial recognition and would be
treated according to section 4.4. This could occur if a distressed asset was subject to a substantial
modification.
When the modification does not result in the derecognition of the existing financial asset, the entity
must assess whether there has been a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition using
the principles outlined in section 4.3.2.
Evidence that the criteria for the recognition of lifetime expected credit losses are no longer met, and
that the asset may return from Stage 2 to Stage 1, may include a history of up-to-date and timely
payments against modified contractual terms. A customer would need to demonstrate consistently
good payment behaviour over a period of time before the credit risk is considered to have
decreased. For example, a history of missed payments would not be erased simply by making one
payment on time following a modification of the contractual terms.
Worked example: Modification

Melrose Bank originated a loan of £2.3 million to Cosima Ltd on 1 January 20X8. The terms of the
loan were that interest at SONIA plus 2.5% would be paid annually in arrears and a bullet capital
repayment was due in three years’ time. The 12-month expected credit losses on initial recognition
were £200,000.
Cosima Ltd suffered cash flow problems during 20X8 and informed Melrose Bank on 31 December
20X8 that it could not make its first interest payment on 31 December 20X8. Melrose Bank assessed
Cosima Ltd’s cash flow and profit forecasts and offered it forbearance on the loan. Forbearance terms
are such that a fixed rate of interest will be charged to enable Cosima to manage its cashflows and
the loan term will extend to five years term with a premium on redemption.
Requirement
How should Melrose Bank recognise impairment on the loan to Cosima Ltd in its financial statements
for the year ended 31 December 20X8 based on the three-stage general model for expected credit
losses?
Solution
The loan to Cosima Ltd should initially be in Stage 1 of the IFRS 9 three-stage general model, which
requires 12-month expected credit losses of £200,000 to be recognised.
When forbearance is offered to Cosima Ltd, Melrose Bank must assess whether there is a substantial
change in the terms of the loan.
The changes are from variable to fixed interest rate and to the term of the loan and there will be a
premium on redemption. If the changes to the terms are considered substantial, the loan should be
derecognised on 31 December 20X8 and a new loan recognised on which 12-month expected
credit losses are provided. The assessment of subsequent increases in credit risk is based on the
date the new loan is recognised. If the changes to the terms are not considered substantial, the
original loan continues to be recognised.
HB2021

Interactive question 12: Modification
Southwold Co originated a 4% fixed rate loan of $3.5 million to Framlingham Inc on 1 May 20X8. The
term of the loan was three years, at which point the loan would be repaid in full. Interest is paid
annually in arrears.
Framlingham Inc approached Southwold Co on 1 June 20X9 to ask for an extension to the loan of a
further two years, making the total loan term five years. Interest continues to accrue at the fixed rate
of 4% for the additional two years and is payable at the end of each year.
Requirement
Explain how the modification of the loan to Framlingham Inc should be accounted for in Southwold
Co’s financial statements for the year ending 31 December 20X9.
Would the accounting treatment change if interest no longer accrued in the additional two years of
the loan term?
5 Application of IFRS 13 to financial instruments

Section overview
The use of fair value accounting is permitted, or required in some instances, by IFRS 9. Additional
guidance is provided in IFRS 13 on how the standard is applied to financial assets and liabilities, and
own equity instruments.
5.1 Introduction
IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement gives extensive guidance on how the fair value of assets and
liabilities should be established. It sets out to:
• define fair value
• set out in a single IFRS a framework for measuring fair value
• require disclosures about fair value measurements
IFRS 13 was covered in Chapter 2 and referred to in section 3 of this chapter. This section gives more
detail of its application to financial instruments. Below is a reminder of the definition of fair value and
the three-level valuation hierarchy.
The standard establishes a three-level hierarchy for the inputs that valuation techniques use to
measure fair value:
Level 1: Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the
reporting entity can access at the measurement date.
Level 2: Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or
liability, either directly or indirectly eg, quoted prices for similar assets in active markets or for
identical or similar assets in non-active markets or use of quoted interest rates for valuation purposes.
Level 3: Unobservable inputs for the asset or liability ie, using the entity’s own assumptions about
market exit value.
HB2021

5.2 Financial assets
The following should be considered where a financial asset is being fair valued:
(a) If a quoted item has a bid price (the price that buyers are willing to pay) and an ask price (the
price that sellers are willing to achieve), the price within the bid-ask spread that is most
representative of fair value is used to measure fair value. The use of bid prices for financial assets
and the use of ask prices for financial liabilities is permitted but not required. IFRS 13 does not
preclude the use of mid-market pricing.
(b) In the case of equity shares, a control premium is considered when measuring the fair value of a
controlling interest. Similarly, any non-controlling interest discount is considered when
measuring a non-controlling interest.
(c) If an entity holds a position in a single asset or liability (including a position comprising a large
number of identical assets or liabilities, such as a holding of financial instruments) and the asset
or liability is traded in an active market, the fair value of the asset or liability shall be measured
within Level 1 as the product of the quoted price for the individual asset or liability and the
quantity held by the entity. That is the case even if a market’s normal daily trading volume is not
sufficient to absorb the quantity held, and placing orders to sell the position in a single
transaction might affect the quoted price.
(d) A subsidiary, associate or joint venture investment in quoted equity shares is always measured as
a multiple of the share price, with no adjustment for a premium associated with influence or
control.
(e) The valuation of unlisted equity investments involves significant judgment and different
valuation techniques are likely to result in different fair values, however this does not mean that
any of the techniques are incorrect. Certain techniques are better suited to particular types of
business, for example an asset-based approach is relevant to property companies whilst an
income-based approach is more relevant to service businesses. It is likely that valuation will be
based on some unobservable inputs and as a result the overall fair value will be classified as a
Level 3 measurement.
5.3 Liabilities and own equity instruments

Liabilities and own equity instruments must be measured on the assumption that the liability or
equity is transferred to a market participant at the measurement date and therefore:
• a liability would remain outstanding and the market participant would be required to fulfil the
obligation; and
• an entity’s own equity instrument would remain outstanding and the market participant would
take on the rights and responsibilities associated with the instrument.
This differs (sometimes significantly so) from a measurement that is based on the assumed
settlement of a liability or cancellation of an entity’s own equity instrument.
IFRS 13 further requires that the fair value of a liability must factor in non-performance risk. Anything
that could influence the likelihood of an obligation being fulfilled is considered a non-performance
risk, including an entity’s own credit risk.
Worked example: Fair value of liabilities

Crossley Co has a bank loan with a nominal value of £1 million that attracts a market rate of interest.
Due to market concern regarding non-performance risk of Crossley Co, the market value of the loan
to the bank is just £800,000. The bank will not agree to discount the amount paid by Crossley Co to
extinguish the loan.
Miller Co is seeking similar financing to the bank loan and has a similar credit profile to Crossley Co.
Miller Co is indifferent to obtaining a new bank loan or assuming Crossley Co’s bank loan.
Requirement
What is the fair value (transfer value) of Crossley Co’s bank loan?
Solution
As Miller Co has the same credit profile as Crossley Co, if it were to take out a bank loan, the bank
would lend only £800,000 (the market value of Crossley Co’s loan) in return for the same cash flows
HB2021

as are outstanding in respect of Crossley Co’s loan. This is because the bank would require a higher
rate of interest to compensate for the increased credit risk.
Therefore the transfer value (fair value) of Crossley Co’s loan is £800,000.
Interactive question 13: Fair value of liability

Morden Co and Merton Co individually enter into legal obligations to each pay £200,000 to
Wallington Co in seven years’ time in exchange for some goods.
Morden Co has a very good credit rating and can borrow at 4%. Merton Co’s credit rating is lower
and it can borrow at 8%.
Requirement
What is the fair value of the legal obligation that Morden Co and that Merton Co must record in their
financial statements?
5.4 Liabilities and own equity instruments

The specific approach to fair value liabilities and an entity’s own equity instruments sometimes differs
from the concepts to fair value an asset and is summarised in the following flowchart:
Figure 16.3: Fair value of liabilities
Is there a quoted price for the

transfer of an identical or Use quoted
YES
similar liability, or entity's own price
equity instrument?
NO
Is there an identical item held

YES NO
by another entity as an asset?
Measure the fair value of the Measure the fair value of the
liability or equity instrument liability or equity instrument
from the perspective of using a valuation technique
market participant that from the perspective of a
holds the identical item market participant that
as an asset at the owes the liability or has
measurement date. issued the equity.
HB2021

6 Derivatives and embedded derivatives
Section overview
• Derivatives are financial instruments whose value changes in response to a change in the value of
an underlying security, commodity, currency, index or other financial instrument(s). They normally
require a zero, or small, initial net investment and are settled at a future date.
• IFRS 9 requires derivatives to be recognised when the entity becomes a party to the contractual
provisions of the contract, rather than when the contract is settled.
• Derivatives are measured at fair value through profit or loss (except for derivatives used as
hedging instruments in certain types of hedges).
• An embedded derivative is a component of a hybrid instrument that also includes a non-
derivative host contract, and which causes some of the cash flows of the combined instrument to
vary in a way similar to a standalone derivative.
• Where the host contract is a financial asset within the scope of IFRS 9, the whole contract is
measured at fair value through profit or loss.
• If the host contract is not an asset within the scope of IFRS 9, the embedded derivative should be
separated from the host contract and recognised separately as a derivative if:
– economic characteristics and risks are not closely related to the host contract;
– a separate instrument with the same terms as the embedded derivative would meet the
definition of a derivative; and
– the hybrid instrument is not measured at fair value through profit or loss
6.1 Definition of a derivative – further examples

The definition of derivative was set out earlier in the summary of the material covered at Professional
Level. A quick reminder – it is a financial instrument:
• whose value changes in response to the change in price of an underlying security, commodity,
currency, index or other financial instrument(s);
• where the initial net investment is zero or is small in relation to the value of the underlying
security or index; and
• that is settled at a future date.
A derivative normally has a notional amount, such as a number of shares or other quantity specified
in the contract. For example, a forward currency contract has a quoted amount of currency even
though neither the holder nor, writer is required to invest or receive this amount at the inception of
the contract. However, this is not a requirement and a derivative could require a fixed payment or a
variable payment based on the outcome of some future event that is unrelated to the notional
amount. For example, a contract that requires the fixed payment of £1,000 if a commodity price
increases by 5% or more is a derivative.
Common types of derivatives include the following:
• Swaps
• Purchased or written options (call and put)
• Futures
• Forwards
Underlying variables
Examples of underlying variables attaching to the derivatives include the following:
• Interest rates
• Currency rates
• Commodity prices
• Equity prices
• Credit-related variables
HB2021

In determining whether a derivative exists, the substance of the transaction should be considered.
Non-derivative transactions should be aggregated and treated as derivatives when the transactions
result, in substance, in derivatives. For example, if Entity A grants a fixed rate loan to Entity B and in
return Entity B grants a variable rate loan of the same amount and maturity, both entities should treat
the arrangement as an interest rate swap and account for it as a derivative.
(a) A defining characteristic of a derivative is that it requires either no initial investment or an initial
net investment smaller than would be required for other types of contracts that would be
expected to have a similar response to changes in market factors. A purchased call option
contract, for example, meets this definition because the premium is less than the investment that
would be required to obtain the underlying financial instrument to which the option is linked.
(b) An interest rate swap in which the parties settle on a net basis qualifies as a derivative
instrument. This is because the definition of a derivative makes reference to future settlement,
but not to the method of settlement.
(c) If a party prepays its obligation under a pay-fixed, receive-variable interest rate swap at
inception, the swap should be classified as a derivative.
(d) However, if the fixed rate payment obligation is prepaid subsequent to initial recognition this
would be regarded as a terminationoftheold swap and an origination of a new instrument.
(e) A prepaidpay-variable, receive-fixed interest rate swap is not a derivative if it is prepaid at
inception, and it is no longer a derivative if it is prepaid after inception because it provides a
return on the prepaid (invested) amount comparable to the return on a debt instrument with
fixed cash flows. The prepaid amount fails the ‘no initial net investment or an initial net
investment that is smaller than would be required for other types of contracts that would be
expected to have a similar response to changes in market factors’ criterion of a derivative.
(f) An option which is expected not to be exercised, for example because it is ‘out of the
money’,stillqualifies as a derivative.
This is because an option is settled upon exercise or at its maturity. Expiry at maturity is a form of
settlement even though there is no additional exchange of consideration.
(g) Many derivative instruments, such as futures contracts and exchange-traded written options,
require margin accounts.
The margin account is not part of the initial net investment in a derivative instrument. Margin
accounts are a form of collateral for the counterparty or clearing house and may take the form of
cash, securities or other specified assets, typically liquid assets. Margin accounts are separate
assets that are accounted for separately.
(h) A derivative may have more than one underlying variable.
(i) A contract to buy or sell a non-financial asset is a derivative if:the contract was not entered for
the purpose of receipt or delivery of the non-financial item to meet the entity’s expected
purchase, sale or usage requirements.
(1) it can be settled net in cash or by exchanging another financial instrument; and
(2) the contract was not entered for the purpose of receipt or delivery of the non-financial item
to meet the entity’s expected purchase, sale or usage requirements.
An example would be a gas supply contract in the UK (where there is an active market)
where the supplier or purchaser has the right to refuse delivery or receipt of the gas for
financial reasons, for example because they can get a better price in the market. However, if
the right to refuse delivery on the part of the seller can only be invoked for operational
reasons (ie, they do not have the gas available to supply), this does not on its own make the
contract a derivative.
6.1.1 Currency swaps

A currency swap (or cross-currency swap) is an interest rate swap with cash flows in different
currencies. It is an agreement to make a loan in one currency and to receive a loan in another
currency. With the currency swap there are three sets of cash flows. Initially, the underlying principals
are exchanged when the swap starts; interest payments are then made over the life of the swap; and
finally the underlying principal amounts are re-exchanged.
A currency swap could also be interpreted as issuing a bond in one currency (and paying interest on
this bond) while investing in a bond in another currency (and receiving interest on this bond).
HB2021

Worked example: Currency swap
Two entities enter into a 10-year fixed currency swap of euros (€) and pounds (£). Current interest
rates relating to € and £ are 4% and 6% respectively. At inception of the contract the current rate of
exchange is €2 per £1. The contract requires the initial exchange of €2,000 and £1,000.
Annual interest payments are made between the parties without netting of €80 (4% × €2,000) and
£60 (6% × £1,000). After 10 years, the swap terminates and the original principal amounts are
returned.
Requirement
Does the instrument fit the definition of a derivative?
Solution
The currency swap meets the definition of a derivative, as the exchange of the initial fair values
means there is zero initial investment, its value changes in response to a specified exchange rate and
it is settled at a future date.
Interactive question 14: Loan agreement as derivatives

Two entities make loans to each other for the same amount and on the same terms except that one is
based on a fixed rate of interest and the other on a variable rate of interest. There are no transfers of
principal at inception of the transaction since the two entities have a netting agreement.
Requirement
Does the transaction fit the definition of a derivative?
Worked example: Forward contract to buy commodity

SML, a tools manufacturer, entered into a contract to buy 50 tonnes of steel in 12 months’ time, in
accordance with its expected use requirements. The contract permits SML to take physical delivery of
the steel or to pay or receive a net settlement in cash based on the change in the market price of
steel.
Requirement
Is the contract a derivative?
Solution
The contract meets some of the criteria of a derivative; that is, there is no initial investment and it is to
be settled at a future date. However, because the underlying is a non-financial asset, classification as
a derivative will depend on whether the contract was entered into in order to benefit from short-term
price fluctuations by selling it. If SML intends to take delivery of the steel and use it as an input in its
production process, then the contract is not a derivative.
6.2 Accounting for derivatives

As noted previously, derivatives are classified as held for trading (unless they are hedging
instruments – see the next chapter), so they should be measured at fair value and changes in fair
value should be recognised in profit or loss. The following example highlights the accounting
treatment of derivatives.
Context example: Accounting treatment of purchased option

On 31 December 20X0, Theta purchases put options over 100,000 shares in Omega which expire on
31 December 20X2. The exercise price of the option is £2, the market price on 31 December 20X0
and the premium paid is £11,100.
HB2021

The intrinsic value of the option (ie, the exercise price less the price per share, times the number of
shares specified in the option contract) is zero at acquisition. The cost of £11,100 reflects the time
value of the option which depends on the time to expiration, the price of the stock and its volatility.
If the stock price falls below £2 the put becomes in the money by the amount below the £2 strike
price times the number of option shares. For instance, if the price of Omega stock fell to £1.90, the
intrinsic value gain on the put option is £0.10 per share. If the stock price rises and stays above £2 for
the term of the contract, the put option expires worthless to the buyer because it is out of the money.
The purchaser of the put option loses the premium which is kept by the seller (writer).
Economic assumptions
The value of the shares in Omega and the put options are shown in the table below. The value of the
put option increases as the stock price decreases.
31.12.20X0 30.6.20X1 31.12.20X1

Omega shares £ £ £
Price per share 2.00 1.90 1.85
Value of put option 11,100 13,500 15,000
On 31 December 20X1, Theta sells the option.
Accounting entries under IFRS 9:
Debit Credit
£ £
31 December 20X0
Financial asset – put option 11,100
Cash 11,100
(To record the purchase of the put option)
30 June 20X1
Financial asset – put option (13,500 – 11,100) 2,400
Profit or loss – gain on put option 2,400
(To record the increase in the fair value of the put option)
31 December 20X1
Financial asset – put option (15,000 – 13,500) 1,500
Profit or loss – gain on put option 1,500
(To record the increase in the fair value of the put option)
Cash 15,000
Financial asset – put option 15,000
(To record the sale of the put option on 31.12.20X1)
6.3 Embedded derivatives

Certain contracts that are not themselves derivatives (and may not be financial instruments) include
derivative contracts that are ‘embedded’ within them.
Definition
Embedded derivative: A component of a hybrid (combined) instrument that also includes a non-
derivative host contract – with the effect that some of the cash flows of the combined instrument vary
in a way similar to a stand-alone derivative.
HB2021

6.4 Embedded derivatives: the basics
Below we look at some basic examples and their treatment. Then we will look in detail at more
complex issues.
Examples of host contracts
Possible examples include the following:
(a) An investment in a debt instrument that is convertible into ordinary shares of the issuer. The debt
instrument is the host contract and the conversion option is the embedded derivative.
(b) A debt instrument with an extension option with the interest rate in the extension period reset to
1.2 times the market rate. The debt instrument is the host contract with embedded extension
option.
(c) A lease contract has a rent adjustment clause based on changes in the local inflation rate. The
lease is the host contract with inflation-related rentals being the embedded derivative.
Examples of embedded derivatives
Possible examples include:
(a) A construction contract priced in a foreign currency. The construction contract is a non-
derivative contract, but the changes in foreign exchange rate is the embedded derivative.
(b) A bond which is redeemable in five years’ time, with part of the redemption price being based
on the increase in the FTSE 100 Index:
Figure 16.4: Embedded derivatives
'Host' Accounted for as normal ie,

Bond
contract amortised cost
Treat as derivative ie, remeasured to

Embedded Option on
fair value with changes recognised in
derivative equities
profit or loss
Accounting treatment of embedded derivatives

The basic rule for accounting for an embedded derivative is that, if the host contract is a financial
asset within the scope of IFRS 9, the whole contract is measured as at fair value through profit or loss.
Context example: Embedded derivative – host is a financial asset

Myrtle plc has made an investment in a bond which has interest payments linked to the price of
platinum.
The bond investment is a financial asset within the scope of IFRS 9, therefore the entire contract is
measured at fair value through profit or loss.
If the host contract is not a financial asset within the scope of IFRS 9, the embedded derivative should
be separated from its host contract and accounted for separately as a derivative. The purpose is to
ensure that the embedded derivative is measured at fair value and any changes in its fair value are
recognised in profit or loss. But this separation should only be made when the following conditions
are met:
(a) The economic characteristics and risks of the embedded derivative are not closely related to the
economic characteristics and risks of the host contract.
(b) A separate instrument with the same terms as the embedded derivative would meet the
definition of a derivative.
(c) The hybrid (combined) instrument is not measured at fair value with changes in fair value
recognised inprofit or loss (if changes in the fair value of the total hybrid instrument are
recognised in profit or loss, then the embedded derivative is already accounted for on this basis,
so there is no benefit in separating it out).
The meanings of ‘closely related‘ and ‘not closely related‘ are dealt with in more detail below.
HB2021

Note that an entity may, subject to conditions, designate a hybrid contract as at fair value through
profit or loss, thereby avoiding the need to measure the fair value of the embedded derivative
separately from that of the host contract.
The conditions for classifying the entire hybrid contract as at fair value through profit or loss are as
follows:
(a) If the host contract is not an asset within the scope of IFRS 9, an entity may designate the whole
contract as at fair value through profit or loss unless:
(1) the embedded derivative does not significantly modify the host contract’s cash flows; or
(2) it is clear with little or no analysis that separation of the embedded derivative is prohibited,
such as a prepayment option embedded in a loan that permits the holder to prepay the loan
for approximately its amortised cost.
(b) If the entity is required to separate the embedded derivative but it cannot be measured
separately, the entity may designate the entire contract as at fair value through profit or loss.
If the fair value of the embedded derivative cannot be determined due to the complexity of its
terms and conditions, but the value of the hybrid and the host can be determined, then the
value of the embedded derivative should be determined as the difference between the value
of the hybrid and the value of the host contract.
Context example: Embedded derivative – host is not a financial asset (1)

Zainab Co leases machinery to Kool Ltd to produce a new product. The payments under the lease
are determined by reference to the sales Kool Ltd makes of the new product.
The variable lease payments are created by an embedded derivative within the lease host contract.
The embedded derivative is based on the underlying sales of the new product.
The host contract (the lease) is not a financial asset under IFRS 9. Zainab Co may not separate the
embedded derivative from the host contract because it is closely related to the host. The whole
hybrid instrument may be designated at fair value through profit or loss.
Context example: Embedded derivative – host is not a financial asset (2)

Ayia Co has a lease contract with a rent adjustment clause based on changes in the inflation rate. The
lease contract (outside the scope of IFRS 9) contains an embedded derivative based on inflation.
The embedded derivative is not separated from the lease contract because it is considered to be
closely related to the host lease contract.
If the lease contract has a rent adjustment clause based on leveraged inflation (say twice the change
in the inflation rate), the embedded derivative must be separated because it is not closely related to
the host contract.
6.5 Key characteristics of embedded derivatives

An embedded derivative causes some or all of the cash flows of the host contract to be modified,
based on a specified interest rate, financial instrument price, commodity price, foreign exchange
rate, index of price or rates, credit rating or credit index or other variables. As a result, the financial
payoffs of the hybrid instrument will resemble those of a standalone derivative.
A key characteristic of embedded derivatives is that the embedded derivative cannot be transferred
to a third party independently of the instrument. For example, the embedded equity option in a
convertible bond cannot be exercised with the bond being retained. If the conversion option is
exercised, the bond will have to be derecognised. This is different from a bond with a detachable
warrant, which gives the right to the owner to exercise the warrant and buy shares while retaining the
bond. This is not a hybrid or combined instrument. The warrant is a separate financial instrument, not
an embedded derivative.
6.6 Separation of host and embedded derivatives

If the host contract within a hybrid instrument is not a financial asset under IFRS 9, the embedded
derivative may need to be separated out. Whether there is a requirement to separate the host
HB2021

contract from its embedded derivative can require complex analysis. The three conditions above
must be met. This diagram shows how these three conditions should be tested for.
Figure 16.5: Establishing the treatment of embedded derivatives
Is the hybrid
Do not separate
instrument
out the
measured at fair YES
embedded
value through
derivative
profit or loss?
NO
Would it be a Do not separate

derivative if it out the
NO
was a separate embedded
instrument? derivative
YES
Are its
Do not separate
characteristics/risks
out the
closely related to YES
embedded
those of the host
derivative
contract?
NO
Account separately
for the embedded
derivative
6.7 Identification of embedded derivatives

Embedded derivatives can be structured deliberately, as has been already mentioned, or they may
arise inadvertently. An example of this would be a currency that is different from the functional
currencies of both the buyer and seller of goods. Multiple embedded derivatives are treated as if
they were a single embedded derivative, unless they relate to different risk exposures which can be
identified and separated, in which case they can be accounted for separately.
Although, theoretically, the host of an embedded derivative could be any type of contract that is not
recorded at fair value, in practice there is a small number of contracts that have derivatives
embedded in them, the most common of which are:
• debt instruments
• equity instruments
• leases
• insurance contracts
• executory contracts such as purchase and sale contracts
The identification of embedded derivatives requires the entity to consider all executory contracts
such as purchases and sales contracts, and commitments.
For example, an embedded derivative may be identified if contracts contain:
• rights or obligations to exchange at some time in the future;
• rights or obligations to buy or sell;
• provisions for adjusting the cash flows according to some interest rate, price index or specific
time period;
HB2021

• options which permit either party to do something not closely related to the contract; and/or
• unusual pricing terms (eg, a lease which charges interest at rates linked to the FTSE 100 yield
contains an embedded swap).
Finally, a comparison of the terms of a contract (such as maturity, cancellation or payment provisions)
with the terms of another similar, non-complex contract may indicate the existence, or not, of an
embedded derivative.
6.8 Examples of embedded derivatives not closely related

Examples where the embedded derivative is not closely related to the host instrument include the
following:
• The option to extend the term on a fixed rate debt instrument without resetting the interest rate
to market rates
• Credit derivatives in a debt instrument
• A put option embedded in an instrument that enables the holder to require the issuer to
reacquire the instrument for an amount of cash or other assets, which varies on the basis of the
change in an equity or commodity price or index
• Equity-indexed interest or principal payments embedded in a host debt instrument or insurance
contract
• Commodity-indexed interest or principal payments embedded in a host debt instrument or
insurance contract
• A call, put, or prepayment option embedded in a host debt contract or host insurance contract
• Credit derivatives that are embedded in a host debt instrument allowing the transfer of credit risk
from one party to another.
In all of the above circumstances, the embedded derivative is separated out from the host contract
for accounting purposes.
6.9 Examples of closely related embedded derivatives

No definition of ‘closely related‘ is included in IFRS 9. In general, an embedded derivative is
considered to be closely related if it modifies the inherent risk of the combined contract but leaves
the instrument substantially unaltered. Some common examples of closely related embedded
derivatives are given below.
• An embedded derivative based on an interest rate (or interest rate index) that can change the
amount of interest otherwise paid or received on an interest-bearing debt or insurance host
contract.
• An embedded floor or cap on the interest rate on a debt contract or insurance contract, provided
the floor is at or below, and the cap is at or above, the market rate of interest when the contract is
issued, and the cap or floor is not leveraged in relation to the host contract.
• An embedded foreign currency derivative that provides a stream of principal or interest
payments that are denominated in a foreign currency and is embedded in a host debt instrument
(eg, a dual currency bond). Such a derivative is not separated from the host instrument because
IAS 21 requires foreign currency gains and losses on monetary items to be recognised in profit or
loss.
• An embedded foreign currency derivative in a host contract that is an insurance contract or not a
financial instrument (such as a contract to purchase a non-financial item where the price is
denominated in a foreign currency), provided the payment is to be in the functional currency of
one of the substantial parties to the contract, or in the currency in which the contracted good or
service is routinely denominated (such as the US dollar for crude oil transactions).
• An embedded prepayment option in an interest-only or principal-only strip is closely related to
the host contract provided the host contract initially resulted from separating the right to receive
contractual cash flows of a financial instrument that, in and of itself, did not contain an embedded
derivative, and does not contain any terms not present in the original host debt contract.
HB2021

• An embedded derivative in a host lease contract is closely related to the host contract if the
embedded derivative is an inflation-related index such as an index, of lease payments to a
consumer price index (provided that the lease is not leveraged and the index relates to inflation in
the entity’s own economic environment), contingent rentals based on related sales or contingent
rentals based on variable interest rates.
• A unit-linking feature embedded in a host financial instrument or host insurance contract is
closely related to the host instrument or host contract if the unit-denominated payments are
measured at current unit values that reflect the fair values of the assets of the fund. A unit-linking
feature is a contractual term that requires payments denominated in units of an internal or
external investment fund.
• A derivative embedded in an insurance contract is closely related to the host insurance contract if
the embedded derivative and host insurance contract are so interdependent that an entity cannot
measure the embedded derivative separately (ie, without considering the host contract).
In all of the above circumstances, the hybrid contract is accounted for as a whole – the embedded
derivative is not separated out.
6.10 Accounting for embedded derivatives

A common transaction involving an embedded derivative is the purchase or sale of goods at a price
denominated in a foreign currency – for example, the purchase by an entity of 100 items for $10 each
with settlement in 90 days, where the functional currency of the purchasing entity is the pound (£).
Under the guidance set out above, the embedded derivative should be separated out unless:
• the vendor’s functional currency is the dollar ($); or
• the items in the transaction are routinely denominated in dollars in international commerce.
The terms of non-option-based derivatives, such as forwards and swaps, should be determined such
that the derivative has a fair value of nil at inception. Option-based derivatives, such as puts,
swaptions (an option on a swap), and caps, should be separated based on the terms in the contract.
Multiple embedded derivatives are required to be separated as a single compound embedded
derivative.
Interactive question 15: Embedded derivatives

Moorgate plc is based in the UK and has sterling (£) as its functional currency. In the ordinary course
of business it entered into the following contracts:
Contract (1)
Supply of services to Blue Co which operates in Andlay, whose functional currency is the CU. Under
the contract Moorgate plc will supply services for a fixed price of INR12 million and is due to receive
INR3 million in each of the next four years. The INR is infrequently used as the measure of contract
prices in UK or Andlay.
Contract (2)
Issue of debt in £ with interest payable at SONIA plus credit spread of 100 basis points. SONIA at
issuance is 1.5% so the rate at inception of the debt is 2.5%. The debt contract provides that if SONIA
were to rise, the rate payable on the debt would not rise above 4%.
Neither contract is measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Requirement
Explain in respect of each contract whether there is an embedded derivative and, if so, whether it
should be recognised separately in the financial statements of Moorgate plc.
6.11 Reassessment of embedded derivatives

IFRS 9 addresses the question of whether it is necessary to reassess the treatment of an embedded
derivative throughout the life of a contract if certain events occur after an entity first becomes a party
to the contract. It concludes that reassessment is not permitted unless there is a significant change
to the terms of the contract.
HB2021

6.12 Impact on financial statements
Derivatives and embedded derivatives are measured at fair value with changes in fair value
recognised in profit or loss. Derivative contracts are entered into for both trading and risk
management purposes. Derivatives enable entities to hedge against fair value or cash flow
exposures. Banks should be clear about the objectives of originating such exposures that are likely to
have a significant impact on the financial statements. It is important to regularly review the exposures
and accounting treatment of derivatives as their values are subject to changes in value of an
underlying, which is generally beyond the control of the entity. The fair value movements can have a
significant impact on the financial performance and financial position of the entity.
The auditors have to verify that the principles in IFRS 9 are appropriately applied to identify and
account for embedded derivatives. An assessment of management judgement (on whether an
embedded derivative is closely related to the host contract) is required since this is a factor in
determining whether the embedded derivative should be separated or not. The auditors may need
to review in detail the terms and conditions of the hybrid contract.
This complex area involving management judgement requires considerable communication skills.
Professional scepticism is important, and if the auditors disagree with management’s assessment,
they will need to support their reasons for doing so.
7 Current developments
Section overview
This section deals with a new discussion paper on financial instruments with the characteristics of
equity.
7.1 Financial instruments with the characteristics of equity

The issue of distinguishing, in some cases, between equity and debt has been an IASB project since
2010. The significance of the distinction was discussed in Chapter 15 in connection with IAS 32,
Financial Instruments: Presentation. In practice, the debt/equity distinction may not be clear cut.
Classification of financial instruments as debt or equity can have a significant effect on the financial
statements.
The project is linked to the Conceptual Framework as the complexity of questions around
distinguishing between liabilities and equity meant that these were excluded from the project to
revise the Conceptual Framework. The revised framework therefore includes a revised definition of a
liability and new supporting guidance, but the definition of equity remained unchanged.
7.1.1 2018 Discussion Paper

In 2018, the IASB issued a Discussion Paper, Financial Instruments with Characteristics of Equity. The
main proposals are as follows:
(a) At least initially, the main principle of IAS 32 is to remain unchanged. In other words, equity is a
residual that remains if the characteristics of a financial liability are not fulfilled.
(b) Accordingly, a financial instrument must be classified as a financial liability if its contractual terms
contain an unavoidable obligation:
(1) to transfer cash or another financial asset at a specified time other than at liquidation (timing
feature); and/or
(2) for an amount independent of the entity’s available economic resources (amount feature).
HB2021

Summary
IFRS 9, Financial Instruments
Derivatives Financial assets Financial liabilities
Embedded derivative
Initial recognition
and measurements
Subsequent
measurement
Reclassification
Derecognition
HB2021

1. Can you distinguish between debt instruments at amortised cost and debt instruments at
FVTOCI? (Topic 1)
2. Which financial liabilities are valued at FVTOCI? (Topic 1)
3. Can you apply the business model test? (Topic 2)
4. Can you apply IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement to a financial instrument? (Topic 4)
5. Can you apply the correct financial reporting treatment for embedded derivatives? (Topic
6)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Trowbridge This is an amortised cost calculation requiring journal entries and

knowledge of the IFRS 9, Financial Instruments business model. It builds
on simpler calculations at Professional Level.
Longridge One of the trickier areas of IFRS 9 is impairment and the expected credit
loss model. This question should be a good stepping stone to this topic
should it come up in the exam.
Gaia This provides further practice at expected credit losses with the emphasis
on explaining rather than calculating.
Robicorp This question tests derecognition, fair value of an equity instrument and
fair value of an interest-free loan to employees.
Expando You are required to show the correct treatment – the company has treated
it incorrectly – and to consider auditing issues.
Verloc This requires a detailed discussion on derecognition of a financial liability.
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 IFRS 9, Financial Instruments

Recognition and measurement
• Initial recognition – IFRS 9.3.1.1
• Regular way purchase or sale – IFRS 9.3.1.2, B3.1.3–B3.1.6
• Derecognition of financial assets – IFRS 9.3.2
• Initial measurement – IFRS 9.5.1
• Subsequent measurement of financial assets – IFRS 9.5.2
• Subsequent measurement of financial liabilities – IFRS 9.5.3
• Amortised cost measurement – IFRS 9.5.4
• Embedded derivatives – IFRS 9.4.3
Impairment
• IFRS 9 impairment of financial assets
– General approach – IFRS 9.5.5.1–5.5.8
– Significant increase in credit risk – IFRS 9.5.5.9–11, B5.5.15–24
– Collective and individual assessment – IFRS 9.B5.5.1–6
– Purchased or originated credit-impaired assets – IFRS 9.5.5.13
– Simplified approach – IFRS 9.5.5.15–16
– Measurement of expected credit losses – IFRS 9.5.5.17–20, B5.5.28–35
– Reasonable and supportable information – IFRS 9.B5.5.49–5
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Stripe Co
On 6 November 20X3 Stripe Co acquires an equity investment with the intention of holding it in the
long term. The investment cost £500,000. At Stripe Co’s year end of 31 December 20X3, the market
price of the investment is £520,000.
Stripe Co has elected to present the equity investment at FVTOCI.
Requirement
How is the asset initially and subsequently measured?
2 Trowbridge Co
On 1 January 20X8, Trowbridge Co purchased 1,000 bonds issued by Spectra Tech Limited for
£97,327. The remaining period to maturity on these bonds is three years and the bonds will be held
until maturity when they will be redeemed at par. The par value of each bond is £100.
The annual coupon on these bonds, receivable in arrears, is 5% and the effective interest rate is 6%.
Requirement
Present journal entries to show how the bond asset and related income are recognised over the
three years ending 31 December 20X8, 20X9 and 20Y0 if the bonds are in the business model of
being held to collect contractual cash flows.
3 Purple Company
During 20X1, The Purple Company invested in 80,000 shares in a stock market quoted company. The
shares were purchased at £4.54 per share. The broker collected a commission of 1% on the
transaction.
Purple elected to measure these shares at fair value through other comprehensive income.
The quoted share price at 31 December 20X1 was £4.22–£4.26.
Purple decided to ‘bed and breakfast’ the shares to realise a tax loss, and therefore sold the shares at
market price on 31 December 20X1 and bought the same quantity back the following day. The
market price did not change on 1 January 20X2. The broker collected a 1% commission on both the
transactions.
Requirement
Explain the IFRS 9 accounting treatment of the above shares in the financial statements of Purple for
the year ended 31 December 20X1 including relevant calculations.
4 Marland
The Marland Co is preparing its financial statements for the year ended 30 April 20X5. Included in
Marland’s trade receivables is an amount due from its customer, Metcalfe, of £128.85 million. This
relates to a sale which took place on 1 May 20X4, payable in three annual instalments of £50 million
commencing 30 April 20X5 discounted at a market rate of interest adjusted to reflect the risks of
Metcalfe of 8%. Based on previous sales where consideration has been received in annual
instalments, the directors of Marland estimate a lifetime expected credit loss of £75.288 million in
relation to this receivable balance. The probability of default over the next 12 months is estimated at
25%. For trade receivables containing a significant financing component, Marland chooses to follow
the three-stage approach for impairments (rather than always measuring the loss allowance at an
amount equal to lifetime credit losses). No loss allowance has yet been recognised in relation to this
receivable.
HB2021

Requirement
Explain, with supporting calculations, how this receivable should be accounted for in the financial
statements of Marland for the year ended 30 April 20X5.
5 Longridge Co
Longridge Co purchased a bond on 1 January 20X8 for its par value of £100,000 and measures it at
fair value through other comprehensive income. The instrument has a contractual term of five years
and an interest rate of 5%, payable annually in arrears on 31 December. The 12-month expected
credit losses on origination are £1,000.
On 31 December 20X8, the fair value of the debt instrument has decreased to £96,000 as a result of
changes in market interest rates. There has been no significant increase in credit risk since initial
recognition, and expected credit losses are measured at an amount equal to 12-month expected
credit losses, amounting to £1,500.
On 1 January 20X9, the company sells the bond for its fair value of £96,000.
Requirement
Explain the impact of the above transactions in 20X8 and 20X9 on profit or loss, other
comprehensive income and the statement of financial position under IFRS 9.
6 Gaia Bank
Gaia Bank holds a portfolio of credit card loans held at £460 million on its statement of financial
position at 31 December 20X8. Gaia Bank intends to collect contractual cash flows of interest and
principal repayments from its customers. The average balance on each credit card is approximately
£1,200. On average, the probability of default on initial recognition is 18% and the loss given default
is 90%. Impairment allowances are assessed collectively for unsecured lending on credit cards.
The probability of default remains the same over the product life. Gaia Bank does not classify credit
card loans and receivables as Stage 3 until required payments are outstanding for more than 120
days.
Requirement
Explain the correct financial reporting treatment of the credit card loans and advances under IFRS 9.
7 Pike
The Pike Company issued £18 million of convertible bonds at par on 31 December 20X7. Interest is
payable annually in arrears at a rate of 11%. The bondholders can convert into 8 million ordinary
shares after 31 December 20Y1.
The bond has no fixed maturity and contains a call option whereby Pike can redeem the bond at any
time at par value.
At 31 December 20X7, a bond with a similar credit status and the same cash flows as the one issued
by Pike, but without conversion rights or a call option, is valued in the market at £11 million.
Using an option pricing model, it is estimated that the value of the call option on a similar bond
without conversion rights would be £3 million.
Requirement
What carrying amount should be recognised for the liability in respect of the convertible bond in the
statement of financial position of Pike at 31 December 20X7, in accordance with IAS 32, Financial
8 Mullet
The Mullet Company issued £55 million of convertible bonds at par on 31 December 20X7. Interest
is payable annually in arrears at a rate of 8%. The bondholders can convert into 20 million ordinary
shares after 31 December 20Y1.
HB2021

The bond has no fixed maturity and contains a call option whereby Mullet can redeem the bond at
any time at par value.
At 31 December 20X7, a bond with a similar credit status and the same cash flows as the one issued
by Mullet but without conversion rights or a call option is valued in the market at £52 million.
Using an option pricing model it is estimated that the value of the call option on a similar bond
without conversion rights would be £1 million.
Requirement
What carrying amount should be recognised for the equity element of the convertible bond in the
statement of financial position of Mullet at 31 December 20X7, in accordance with IAS 32, Financial
this chapter.
HB2021


1.1 The redeemable preference shares require regular distributions to the holders, but more
importantly have the debt characteristic of being redeemable. Therefore, according to IAS 32
they should be classified as debt (a financial liability).
1.2 According to IFRS 2, Share-based Payment the grant of share options must be recognised in
equity. Share options are an alternative to cash as remuneration, so an expense should be
measured in profit or loss with a credit to equity.

2.1 A guarantee to replace or repair goods sold by a business in the normal course of business
does not fall within the definition of a financial liability, so it should be dealt with under IAS 37
2.2 A firm commitment (order) to purchase a specific quantity of cocoa beans for use in
manufacturing is not a financial liability. This is a normal operating purchase which is not
recognised until delivery when there is a contractual obligation on the part of the purchaser to
pay for the cocoa beans.
2.3 A forward contract such as this falls within the definition of a derivative, so in principle it does
fall within IFRS 9. The only exception would be if the contract is for the entity’s expected usage
of cocoa beans in its business (outside the scope of IFRS 9). This would be accounted for as a
normal purchase on delivery, as (b).

1 January 20X2
£ £
DEBIT Loan (£9,500 + £250 legal fees) 9,750
CREDIT Cash 9,750
31 December 20X2
£ £
DEBIT Cash 1,000
CREDIT Interest income (£9,750 × 9.48%) 924
CREDIT Loan (bal fig) 76
Note: Loan balance is now £9,674 (£9,750 – £76).

31 December 20X3
£ £
DEBIT Cash 1,000
CREDIT Loan (bal fig) 83
Note: Loan balance is now £9,591 (£9,674 – £83).
HB2021

31 December 20X4
£ £
DEBIT Cash (£9,500 + £1,000) 10,500
CREDIT Loan (bal fig) 9,591

The objective of E Co’s business model is to hold financial assets to collect contractual cash flows.
Selling financial assets is only incidental to E Co’s business model.

This is a derecognition issue. Legally the debt instrument remains the property of the entity.
However, in order to determine whether the investment in the debt instrument should be
derecognised, the entity needs to establish if substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership
have been transferred.
In this case, the risks and rewards relating to the interest cash flows generated by the asset have
been transferred because the entity has no obligation to compensate the third party for any cash
flows not received ie, the third party suffers the risk. This is not the case for the ultimate maturity cash
flow (the principal).
Under IFRS 9, where an entity transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of part of a financial
asset, that part is derecognised providing that part comprises only specifically identified cash flows.
An interest rate strip is given as an example by the standard.
Any difference between the proceeds received and the carrying amount (measured at the date of
derecognition) of the interest cash flows derecognised is recognised in profit or loss. The amount
derecognised is calculated by multiplying the carrying amount of the debt instrument by the
proportionate fair value of the interest flows versus the whole fair value of the debt instrument, both
at the date of the transfer. This leaves a ‘servicing asset’ (the principal element) which continues to be
recognised.

6.1 ABC should derecognise the asset as its option to repurchase is at the prevailing market value.
6.2 DEF should not derecognise the asset as it has retained substantially all the risks and rewards of
ownership. The stock should be retained in its books even though legal title is temporarily
transferred.
6.3 XYZ has received 90% of its transferred receivables in cash, but whether it can retain this
amount permanently is dependent on the performance of the factor in recovering all of the
receivables. XYZ may have to repay some of it and therefore retains the risks and rewards of
100% of the receivables amount. The receivables should not be derecognised. The cash
received should be treated as a loan.
The 10% of the receivables that XYZ will never receive in cash should be treated as interest over
the six-month period; it should be recognised as an expense in profit or loss and increase the
carrying amount of the loan.
At the end of the six months, the receivables should be derecognised by netting them against
the amount of the loan that does not need to be repaid to the factor. The amount remaining is
bad debts which should be recognised as an expense in profit or loss.

Trade date accounting
The financial asset should be derecognised on 27 December 20X8 and a receivable of £3,250
recognised. At the same date, a gain of £250 should be recognised in profit or loss, which includes
any previous gains recognised in other comprehensive income which are now reclassified to profit or
loss.
HB2021

On 5 January 20X9, the counterparty pays the £3,250 to clear the receivable.
Settlement date accounting
• The financial asset should be re-measured at the fair value of £3,250 on 27 December 20X8. The
cumulative gain of £250 should be recognised in other comprehensive income.
• No further entries are made on 31 December 20X8, as the entity has no right to further fair value
movements.
• On 5 January 20X9 the financial asset should be derecognised and the gain of £250 reclassified
to profit or loss.

(a) Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (extract)
Profit or loss for the year £m

Investment income (10m × (6.5 – 5.0)) 15
Dividend income (10m × 20p) 2
Transaction costs (3)
Statement of financial position (extract)

Investments in equity instruments (10m × 6.5) = 65
(b) Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (extract)
£m
Dividend income 2
Gain on investment in equity instruments (65 – ( 50 + 3)) 12
Investments in equity instruments (10m × 6.5) 65
(c) Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (extract)
£m
Dividend income (5m × 20p) 1.0
Gain on revaluation of investment prior to disposal (5m × 6) – (25 + 1.5) 3.5
Gain on remaining investment in equity instruments (5m × 6.5) – (25 + 1.5) 6.0
32.5
Investments in equity instruments (5m × 6.5)
HB2021

The correct answer is:
C £80,613
The premium on redemption of the loan notes represents a finance cost. The effective rate of
interest must be applied so that the debt is measured at amortised cost.
At the time of issue, the loan notes are recognised at their net proceeds of £599,800 (£600,000 –
£200).
The finance cost for the year ended 31 December 20X4 is calculated as follows:
B/f Interest @ 12% C/f

£ £ £
20X3 599,800 71,976 671,776
20X4 671,776 80,613 752,389

The loans are now in Stage 3. Lifetime credit losses should continue to be recognised, and interest
revenue should switch to a net interest basis, that is on the carrying amount net of allowance for
credit losses.

The revenue associated with mortgage loan assets is the interest. Under IFRS 9, the variable element
of the interest is accrued on a time basis, and the fixed element is reduced to reflect any initial
transaction costs and to reflect a constant return on the balance outstanding.

The loan to Framlingham Inc was initially recognised on 1 May 20X8. At this point in time, 12-month
expected credit losses would be recognised to reflect the probability of default within the next 12
months multiplied by total lifetime expected credit losses.
In the year ended 31 December 20X9, the terms of the loan to Framlingham Inc were modified.
Southwold Co must assess whether it is a substantial change in terms. Given the delayed repayment
is compensated by the continued accrual of interest and no other terms have changed, it looks likely
that the initial loan will not be derecognised.
Therefore, Southwold Co must consider whether there has been a significant increase in credit risk
since 1 May 20X8 and, if so, the loan moves to Stage 2 and Southwold Co recognises lifetime
expected credit losses ie, the lifetime probability of default multiplied by total lifetime expected
credit losses.
If interest did not accrue in the fourth and fifth years of the extended loan, Southwold Co may
consider that the forbearance terms constitute a substantial change to the original terms. If so, the
original loan is derecognised and a new loan recognised in Stage 1 with 12-month expected credit
loss on initial recognition.

The fair value of Morden Co’s promise is approximately £152,000. This is the present value of
£200,000 in seven years’ time at 4% (£200,000 × 1/1.047).
The fair value of Merton Co’s promise is approximately £116,700. This is the present value of
£200,000 in seven years’ time at 8% (£200,000 × 1/1.087).
These two values are different, even though the amount and period are the same, due to the
different risk profiles of the two companies.
HB2021

In substance, the effect of the two transactions is an interest rate swap with no initial investment. This
therefore meets the definition of a derivative since there is no initial net investment, an underlying
variable is present and future settlement will take place. This would be the same even if no netting
agreement existed because the definition of a derivative does not include a requirement for net
settlement.

In Contract (1) there is an embedded derivative which should be separated from the host contract.
In Contract (2) there is an embedded derivative but this should not be separated from the host
contract.
An embedded derivative should be separated from the host contract if:
• the economic characteristics and risks are not closely related to the host contract;
• a separate instrument with the same terms would meet the definition of a derivative; and
• the combined instrument has not been designated as at fair value through profit or loss.
Contract (1): The derivative embedded in this contract must be separated out, because the INR, the
currency in which the contract is denominated, is not the functional currency of either party, nor is it
the currency used internationally as the measure of contract prices so it is not closely related.
Contract (2): The cap is an embedded derivative that is closely related to the host debt contract
because, at the time of the issuance of the debt, the cap is out-of-the-money. The embedded
derivative does not require separation as it is closely related.
HB2021

1 Stripe Co
The asset is initially recognised at the fair value of the consideration, being £500,000.
At the period end it is remeasured to £520,000.
This results in the recognition of £20,000 in other comprehensive income.
2 Trowbridge Co
Trowbridge Co has purchased the bonds to hold until maturity. The interest payments are solely
payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding and they are held within a
business model to collect contractual cash flows. The bonds are initially measured at fair value, the
purchase price of £97,327, and are subsequently measured at amortised cost.
The company has purchased bonds at discount of £(100,000 – 97,327) = £2,673. This discount is
amortised over the remaining expected life of the bond using the effective interest method.
The bond amortisation schedule is as follows:
Interest income at
Year Opening balance EIR = 6% Cash received Closing balance
£ £ £ £
20X8 97,327 5,840 (5,000) 98,167
20X9 98,167 5,890 (5,000) 99,057
20Y0 99,057 5,943 (105,000) –
The closing balance at the end of each year is the amortised cost of the bonds which is recognised in
the statement of financial position. This is the present value of the estimated future cash flows
discounted at the original effective interest rate.
Journal entries (amounts are rounded to nearest £):
1 January 20X8
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset 97,327
CREDIT Cash 97,327
(Purchase of bond asset at discount)
31 December 20X8
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset 840
DEBIT Cash 5,000
CREDIT Interest income (6% of £97,327) 5,840
(Recognise interest income and bond amortisation based on
EIR)
HB2021

31 December 20X9
£ £
DEBIT Cash 5,000
EIR)
31 December 20Y0
£ £
DEBIT Cash 5,000
EIR)
DEBIT Cash 100,000
CREDIT Financial asset 100,000
(Amounts received on redemption of bond at par value)
3 Purple Company
The shares are initially measured at fair value (the purchase price here) plus transaction costs:
(80,000 × £4.54) = £363,200 + (£363,200 × 1%) = £366,832
The investment is derecognised on 31 December. The fact that the same quantity of shares are
repurchased the next day does not prevent derecognition as the company has no obligation to
repurchase them, therefore the risks and rewards of ownership are not retained.
Immediately before derecognition a loss is recognised in other comprehensive income as the
company elected to hold the investment at fair value through other comprehensive income and the
investment must be remeasured to fair value at the date of derecognition (IFRS 9.3.2.12a):
(80,000 × £4.22 bid price) = £337,600 – £366,832 = £29,232 loss
The transaction costs on sale of £3,376 (£337,600 × 1%) are recognised in profit or loss.
4 Marland
The trade receivable of £128.85 million should be recognised in the statement of financial position
as at 30 April 20X5 as a financial asset.
Interest on the trade receivable is £128.85m × 8% = £10.308 million. This should be recognised in
the statement of profit or loss as interest income.
A loss allowance for the trade receivable should be recognised at an amount equal to 12 months’
expected credit losses. Although IFRS 9, Financial Instruments offers an option for the loss allowance
for trade receivables with a financing component to always be measured at the lifetime expected
losses, Marland has chosen instead to follow the three-stage approach of IFRS 9.
The 12-month expected credit losses are calculated by multiplying the probability of default in the
next 12 months by the lifetime expected credit losses that would result from the default. Here this
amounts to £18.822 million (£75.288m × 25%). Because this allowance is recognised at 1 May 20X4,
the discount must be unwound by one year: £18.822m × 8% = £1.506m.
HB2021

Overall adjustment:
£m £m
DEBIT Finance costs (impairment of receivable) (18.822 + 1.506) 20.328
CREDIT Loss allowance 20.328
5 Longridge Co
Longridge Co classifies the bond at fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI). It
recognises a loss allowance equal to 12-month expected credit losses on origination. This is
recognised in profit or loss. Any subsequent increase in the loss allowance is also recognised in profit
or loss. The fair value movements on the bond are recognised in other comprehensive income until
sale when they are recycled to profit or loss.
1 January 20X8 £ £
DEBIT Debt instrument – FVOCI 100,000
CREDIT Cash 100,000
(Purchase of bond at FVOCI)
DEBIT Impairment allowance – profit or loss 1,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income 1,000
(12-month expected credit losses on orig.)
Expected credit losses are not recognised in the statement of financial position for debt instruments
measured at FVOCI, as the carrying amount of this asset should be the fair value. The impairment
allowance is instead recognised in other comprehensive income as the accumulated impairment
amount.
31 December 20X8 £ £
DEBIT Cash 5,000
(Interest income at 5% of £100,000)
DEBIT Impairment allowance – profit or loss 500

(Increase in 12-month expected credit losses)
DEBIT Other comprehensive income 4,000

CREDIT Debt instrument – FVOCI 4,000
(Fair value adj. to reduce asset value to
£96,000)
1 January 20X9 £ £
DEBIT Cash 96,000
CREDIT Debt instrument – FVOCI 96,000
DEBIT Loss on sale – profit or loss 2,500
HB2021

(Proceeds from sale and
recycling of fair value loss
to profit or loss)
The gross carrying amount of the debt instrument may be reduced through use of an allowance
account.
6 Gaia Bank
The credit card loans and advances are classified as amortised cost because the cash flows are solely
payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding, and the business model
within which the balances are held is to collect the contractual cash flows rather than to sell the
balances.
Under IFRS 9, the credit card loans are initially measured at fair value and are subsequently
measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate over the life of the loan.
Impairment allowances must be recognised on initial recognition of the credit card loans when they
are classified in Stage 1. The impairment allowance is equal to the 12-month probability of default
multiplied by lifetime expected credit losses. Expected credit losses on credit cards will be relatively
high because the lending is unsecured and the loss given default is, on average, 90%.
Gaia Bank must assess at each reporting date whether the credit risk has significantly increased. It
may do this on a collective basis because there is a very large number of customers (approximately
400,000 customers) but the grouping for collective assessment must be based on shared credit risk
characteristics. Therefore, this could reflect the length of time a customer is past due, credit rating,
past behaviour in terms of repayment, forbearance offered etc.
If credit risk has significantly deteriorated, the loan is moved to Stage 2 and lifetime expected credit
losses must be recognised. The fact that the probability of default does not reduce on the credit
cards as time goes on, is potentially an indicator of increased credit risk. However, spending on
credit cards can vary, and the credit limit may be used to a greater or lesser extent over the product
life. Behaviour on credit cards can be difficult to model because of this. It is also unclear how long
customers intend to use the credit card and therefore what the expected product life is.
Gaia Bank does not appear to be defining Stage 3 accurately under IFRS 9. There is a rebuttable
presumption that a loan is in default and moves to Stage 3 if payments are more than 90 days past
due. The expected credit losses are still recognised on a lifetime basis, but interest is calculated
differently. The effective interest rate is applied to the net balance, after impairment allowances, for
loans in Stage 3. Therefore Gaia Bank could be overstating its interest income in the statement of
profit or loss.
7 Pike
£8 million
IAS 32.31 requires that any derivative features embedded within a compound financial instrument
(such as the call option) are ‘included’ in the liability component. The value of the option (£3 million),
which is an asset for the company as it enables it to buy back the bonds when it wants to, is deducted
from the liability element of the compound instrument (£11 million).
8 Mullet
£4 million
IAS 32.31 requires that any derivative features embedded within a compound financial instrument
(such as the call option) are included in the liability component. The value of the option (£1 million) is
deducted from the liability element of the compound instrument (£52 million) giving a final liability
element of £51 million.
The equity element is the fair value of the compound instrument (£55 million) less the liability
element after taking account of the derivative (£51 million), as IAS 32.31 requires that no gain or loss
should arise on initial recognition of the component elements. The equity element is therefore £4
million.
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 17
Financial instruments: hedge

accounting
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Hedge accounting: the main points
2 Hedged items
3 Hedging instruments
4 Conditions for hedge accounting
5 Fair value hedge
6 Cash flow hedge
7 Hedge of a net investment
8 Disclosures
9 IAS 39 requirements on hedge accounting
10 Audit focus: fair value
11 Auditing financial instruments
12 Auditing derivatives
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
17
Learning outcomes
• Evaluate the impact of accounting policies and choice in respect of financing decisions for
example hedge accounting and fair values
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 4(a), 4(c), 4(d), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
17

of this chapter.

1 Hedge accounting: Approach Hedge accounting IQ2: Simple fair

the main points Hedge accounting is tested very value hedge
Many entities which can appear regularly, often in a As the title suggests,
are exposed to complicated, so it is question that covers this question is
various financial essential to work a number of other relatively
risks employ through this issues relating to straightforward for a
hedging techniques overview to get the financial difficult topic. Make
to reduce big picture of what instruments. sure you understand
fluctuations in the hedge accounting is it fully before
value or cash flows aiming to do. Work moving on.
of financial through the basic
instruments. hedge examples.
Stop and think
Key point: hedge
accounting reduces
or eliminates the
volatility in profit or
loss which would
arise if the items
were not linked for
accounting
purposes.
2 Hedged items Approach Where there is N/A

Hedge accounting Study the definition hedge accounting
attempts to reflect of a hedged item, there will be a
the economic then look at hedging instrument
aspects of hedging paragraph 2.2 to and a hedged item.
HB2021

in the accounting see the forms a

treatment of such hedged item may
relationships. take.
Stop and think
Can a group of
assets be a hedged
item?
3 Hedging Approach The most common N/A

instruments Focus on options hedging
Nearly all (Section 3.3), as this instruments you will
derivatives and is most likely to meet in your exam
some non- come up in the are options,
derivatives can be exam. forwards and
designated as a futures.
Stop and think
hedging instrument.
Purchased options,
whether call options
or put options, have
the potential to
hedge price,
currency and
interest rate risks
and can always
qualify as hedging
instruments.
4 Conditions for Approach Part of a past exam N/A

hedge accounting This is a short question involved a
Under IFRS 9 the section, but you Finance Director
hedge effectiveness should be very who was unsure if
criteria are familiar with the hedge accounting
principles-based hedge accounting could be applied, so
and aligned with conditions, so take familiarity with this
risk management your time over it. topic could be a
activities. good source of easy
Stop and think marks.
What is
rebalancing?
5 Fair value hedge Approach Fair value hedge IQ4: Fair value
A fair value hedge is You have been accounting could hedge
an investment introduced to fair be examined This question
position taken by a value hedging in the together with cash involves a futures
company or an overview section. flow hedge contract and
investor aiming to This section focuses accounting in a requires accounting
protect the fair on application and scenario where you with and without
value of a specific examples. are advising a hedge accounting,
asset, liability or finance director to illustrating the
Stop and think choose between
unrecognised purpose of hedge
company What would be a alternatives. accounting clearly.
commitment from suitable hedging
risks that can affect instrument to hedge
their profit and loss changes in fair value
accounts. of a fixed rate
bond?
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 17: Financial instruments: hedge accounting 873

6 Cash flow hedge Approach Questions could IQ7: Swap in cash

A cash flow hedge is You met cash flow cover anything from flow hedge 2
an investment hedging in the the choice of cash This is a short
position taken by a overview section. flow hedging or fair question, but the
company or an This section focuses value hedging to answer is not
investor aiming to on application and journal entries and obvious.
offset the potential practical examples. adjustments of
impact of a financial statements
Key point: to use of cash flow
particular risk on the
cash flows of an The part of the gain hedging that is not
asset, liability or or loss arising from appropriate. Entities
another sort of an effective hedge are not always
exposure. of a hedging permitted a choice
instrument is between fair value
They are quite recognised in OCI hedging and cash
common among while the ineffective flow hedging.
export companies portion should be
or those with an recognised in profit
international supply or loss.
chain, who tend to
use financial Learn the summary
derivatives to table in Section 7.6 –
protect their costs it is essential for
and revenues from your exam.
exchange rate Stop and think
volatility.
What is a forecast
transaction?
7 Hedge of a net Approach Hedges of a net N/A

investment Come back to this investment have not
An overseas equity section after you come up as
investment, ie a have studied frequently as fair
subsidiary, associate Chapter 21 on value and cash flow
or joint venture is foreign currency hedges. When they
hedged by a transactions. The have come up they
derivative or non- treatment is similar tend to be poorly
derivative contract. to a cash flow answered, so work
The net investment hedge as regards through this section
in a foreign the treatment of carefully.
operation under IAS effective and
21, is the amount of ineffective portions.
the reporting Stop and think
entity’s interest in
the net assets of the Why do you think
operation, including hedging might be
any recognised used for an
goodwill. overseas equity
investment?
8 Disclosures Approach You are unlikely to N/A

Certain disclosures Read through and be asked to list
must be made highlight. these disclosures,
separately for each although in an
Stop and think auditing context you
type of hedge
described in IFRS 9 Why do cash flow may need to verify
(ie, fair value hedges have that they have been
hedges, cash flow additional made.
HB2021

hedges and hedges disclosures?

of net investments
in foreign
operations). Cash
flow hedges have
extra disclosures.
9 IAS 39 Approach You will not be N/A

requirements on You should work examined solely on There are no
hedge accounting through section 9 the IAS 39 hedging interactive
IFRS 9 is now the for an overview of rules except in questions just on
examinable what these rules are, overview by way of the IAS 39 rules, but
standard, so you focusing on the contrast with the you can test yourself
should focus on the differences from IFRS 9 rules. No using the table in
IFRS 9 hedging IFRS 9. The table in aspects of IAS 39 Section 9.3 by
rules. However, Section 9.3 will be other than hedging covering up the IAS
entities may apply useful for this. The will be examined. 39 column.
the hedge main difference
accounting rules of relates to the hedge
IAS 39 to all of its effectiveness
hedging criteria. Under IFRS
relationships while 9 this is principles-
following the based and aligned
classification and with risk
measurement rules management
of IFRS 9. activities. IAS 39, in
contrast, has a
quantitative hedge
effectiveness test
under which hedge
effectiveness must
fall in the range
80%–125%.
Stop and think
Why would
companies apply
the IAS 39 rules?
10 Audit focus: fair Approach Any of the areas in N/A

value Read carefully and the left-hand
This section applies consider why column could give
more broadly than auditing fair value rise to a question in
just to financial might be more risky which fair value
instruments and fair than historical cost. must be considered
value hedging. Fair in the audit process.
Stop and think
value is a key issue
to investment Professional
property, pension scepticism is
costs, share-based needed.
payments and many
other areas of
financial accounting.
HB2021

11 Auditing financial Approach Risk is likely to IQ14: Convertible

instruments Work through feature in any debenture
The key issue when Section 11.1.2 very audit/integrated This is a short
auditing financial carefully, especially questions on ‘issues’ and
instruments is risk, the section on financial ‘procedures’
in particular credit assessing and instruments. question.
risk and market risk. responding to the
risk of material
misstatement
Stop and think
How might
valuation of financial
instruments be
tested?
12 Auditing derivatives Approach Particular risks apply IQ15: Derivatives

Derivatives are risky Pay particular to derivatives. Risks This is a
instruments and attention to Section (credit, market, comprehensive
much can go wrong. 12.1 and the legal, settlement, question such as
An understanding worked example. solvency) and you might get as
of the business controls relating to Question 3,
Stop and think those risks have
process in integrating financial
derivatives trading Derivative traders been examined. reporting and
is necessary to audit are the sort of auditing. The audit
derivatives. people who thrive part is mainly
Adequate internal on risk. Check out concerned with risk,
controls must be in Nick Leeson. but also with the
place. audit of IFRS 7
disclosures.
HB2021

1 Hedge accounting: the main points
Section overview
Pay particular attention to this first section, as it contains the main points you need to know.
1.1 Introduction
In earlier levels of your study for the ACA qualification, such as Financial Management, you have
covered the way hedging is an important means by which a business can manage the risks it is
exposed to.
As an example, a manufacturer of chocolate can fix now the price at which it buys a specific quantity
of cocoa beans at a predetermined future date by arranging a forward contract with the cocoa beans
producer.
The forward price specified in the forward contract may be higher or lower than the spot price at the
time the contract is agreed, depending on seasonal and other factors. But by agreeing the forward
contract both the manufacturer and the producer have removed the risk they otherwise would face
of unfavourable price movements (price increases being unfavourable to the chocolate manufacturer
and price decreases unfavourable to the cocoa beans producer) between now and the physical
delivery date. Equally, they have removed the possibility of favourable price movements (price
decreases being favourable to the chocolate manufacturer and price increases favourable to the
cocoa beans producer) over the period.
Another way of achieving the same effect would be for the chocolate manufacturer to purchase
cocoa bean futures on a recognised trading exchange. On the delivery date the manufacturer would
close out the futures in the futures market and then buy the required quantity in the spot market. The
profit/(loss) on the futures transaction should offset the increase/(decrease) in the spot price over the
period.
Hedge accounting is the accounting process which reflects in financial statements the commercial
substance of hedging activities. It results in the gains and losses on the linked items (eg, the
purchase of coffee beans and the futures market transactions) being recognised in the same
accounting period and in the same section of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income ie, both in profit or loss, or both in other comprehensive income.
Hedge accounting reduces or eliminates the volatility in profit or loss which would arise if the items
were not linked for accounting purposes.
Tutorial note
The forward contract is a derivative. Without hedge accounting, the profit/(loss) in the futures
market would be recognised as the contract is remeasured to fair value at each reporting date, but
the increased/(decreased) cost of the cocoa beans would be recognised at the later date when
the chocolate is sold. Both would be recognised in profit or loss, but possibly in different
accounting periods.
In the previous chapter the point was made that financial assets should be classified or designated at
the time of their initial recognition, not at any later date. This is to prevent businesses making
classifications or designations with the benefit of hindsight so as to present figures to their best
advantage. Similarly, hedge accounting is only permitted by IFRS 9, Financial Instruments if the
hedging relationship between the two items (the cocoa beans and the futures contract in the above
example) is designated at the inception of the hedge. Designation is insufficient by itself; there must
be formal documentation, both of the hedging relationship and of management’s objective in
undertaking the hedge.
HB2021

1.1.1 IFRS 9
IFRS 9 provides guidance relating to hedging and allows hedge accounting where there is a
designated hedging relationship between a hedging instrument and a hedged item. It is prohibited
otherwise. Hedge accounting is therefore not mandatory.
1.1.2 IAS 39
The IASB currently allows an accounting policy choice to apply either the IFRS 9 hedging model or
the IAS 39 model, with an additional option to use IAS 39 for macro hedging (currently a separate
project) if using IFRS 9 for general hedge accounting (IFRS 9.7.2.21).
For this reason, the IAS 39 rules are covered in overview in section 9. However, IFRS 9 is the
examinable standard. For examination purposes you only need an awareness of the differences
between IAS 39 and IFRS 9 with regard to hedging.
1.2 Overview
In simple terms the main components of hedge accounting are as follows:
(a) The hedged item is an asset, a liability, a firm commitment (such as a contract to acquire a new
oil tanker in the future) or a forecast transaction (such as the issue in four months’ time of fixed
rate debt) which exposes the entity to risks of fair value/cash flow changes. The hedged item
generates the risk which is being hedged.
(b) The hedging instrument is a derivative or other financial instrument whose fair value/cash flow
changes are expected to offset those of the hedged item. The hedging instrument
reduces/eliminates the risk associated with the hedged item.
(c) There is a designated relationship between the item and the instrument which is documented.
(d) At inception the hedge must be expected to be highly effective and it must turn out to be highly
effective over the life of the relationship.
(e) To qualify for hedging, the changes in fair value/cash flows must have the potential to affect
profit or loss.
(f) There are two main types of hedge:
(1) The fair value hedge: the gain and loss on such a hedge are recognised in profit or loss.
(2) The cash flow hedge: the gain and loss on such a hedge are initially recognised in other
comprehensive income and subsequently reclassified to profit or loss.
Notes
1 The key reason for having the two types of hedge is that profits/losses are initially recognised in
different places.
2 In some circumstances the entity can choose whether to classify a hedge as a fair value or a cash
flow hedge.
3 There is a third type of hedge: the hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation, such as the
hedge of a loan in respect of a foreign currency subsidiary. This is accounted for similarly to cash
flow hedges.
1.3 Effectiveness of the hedge

The effectiveness of the hedge is measured as the extent to which the change in the hedging
instrument offsets the change in the hedged item. IFRS 9 has three hedge effectiveness tests, which
will be covered in more detail later.
Note: Here are three definitions you may need for the illustration that follows.
Definitions
Forward contract: A commitment to undertake a future transaction at a set time and at a set price.
Future: This represents a commitment to an additional transaction in the future that limits the risk of
existing commitments.
Option: This represents a commitment by a seller to undertake a future transaction, where the buyer
has the option of not undertaking the transaction.
HB2021

Worked example: Basic hedging 1
1 January
On 1 January the price (the spot price) of a consignment of cocoa beans is £1,000.
You know you will need to buy a consignment of cocoa beans on 28 February, as they will be needed
to fulfil a customer order. You are afraid that the price of cocoa beans will rise significantly between 1
January and 28 February.
You therefore contract with a cocoa beans supplier to buy a consignment of cocoa beans at £1,050
on 28 February.
28 February
The price of a consignment of cocoa beans is now £1,100.
You nevertheless can hold the supplier to the forward contract and can buy the cocoa beans at
£1,050.
However, if the market had not behaved as predicted and the price of cocoa beans was £980 on 28
February, you would still be obliged to buy the cocoa beans at the price of £1,050.
Similarly, if the customer had pulled out of the transaction, you would still have to buy the
consignment of cocoa beans and dispose of them as best you could.
Hedging deals with the bad news you do not expect!
1 January
You have already agreed to buy a consignment of cocoa beans for £1,200 on 28 February, which
means you appear to be at risk of paying too much for the cocoa beans.
You buy a three-month cocoa futures contract at £1,100 that expires on 31 March. This means you are
committing to buying an additional consignment of cocoa beans, not at today’s spot price, but at the
futures price of £1,100. £1,100 represents what the market thinks the spot price will be on 31 March.
28 February
You buy the consignment of cocoa beans at £1,200.
You are still committed to buying the consignment at £1,100 on 31 March, but that will mean that you
have two consignments of cocoa beans rather than just the one you need. You therefore sell the
futures contract you bought on 1 January to eliminate this additional commitment. The futures
contract is now priced at £1,233, as the market now believes that £1,233 will be the spot price on 31
March.
Because you have sold the contract for more than the purchase price, you have made a gain on the
futures contract of £1,233 – £1,100 = £133. This can be set against the purchase you made.
Net cost = £1,200 – £133 = £1,067; the cost of paying more for the cocoa beans has been offset by
the profit made on the futures contract.
1 January
You know you will need to buy a consignment of cocoa beans on 28 February, as they will be needed
to fulfil a customer order. You think it is likely that the price of cocoa beans will rise significantly
between 1 January and 28 February, but you believe that with current market uncertainty, the price of
cocoa beans could even fall.
You therefore take out an option to buy cocoa beans at £1,050 on 28 February. Because you are
being given the privilege of choosing whether or not to fulfil the option contract, you have to pay a
premium of £30.28 February.
Requirements
1 What if the price of the cocoa beans has now risen to £1,100?
2 What if the price of cocoa beans has fallen to £980? You could let the option contract lapse and
buy cocoa beans at £980.
3 What if your customer pulls out of the contract?
HB2021

Solution
1 You can hold the supplier to the option contract and buy the cocoa beans at £1,050.
Total cost = 1,050 + 30 = £1,080.
2 Total cost = 980 + 30 = £1,010.
3 You would not have to buy the cocoa beans and the only cost to you will be the premium of £30.
Worked example: Basic hedging 2

Red, whose functional currency is the pound (£), has invested €4.75 million in purchasing a majority
shareholding in Blue. The investment in Blue is entirely financed by a loan in euros. The directors of
Red decide to designate the loan as a hedging instrument and the investment as the related hedged
item.
Requirement
Describe the accounting treatment of any gains or losses arising on the investment and the loan,
assuming that the hedging relationship meets all the conditions required by IFRS 9, Financial
Instruments to qualify for hedge accounting.
Solution
The transaction entered into by Red is a hedging transaction of a net investment in a foreign entity.
The loan is the hedging instrument and the investment in Blue is the hedged item.
As the loan has been designated as the hedging instrument at the outset, and the transaction meets
the hedging criteria of IFRS 9, the exchange movements in both items should be recognised in other
comprehensive income. Any ineffective portion of the hedge should be recognised in profit or loss
for the year.
Below are two simple illustrative examples of accounting for a fair value hedge and accounting for a
cash flow hedge. The definitions and rules for a fair value hedge and a cash flow hedge are covered
in greater detail in sections 5 and 6 of this chapter.
1.4 Accounting for a simple fair value hedge

On 1 August 20X5, an entity owned 50,000 litres of vegetable oil which had cost it £5 per litre and
which had a selling price (spot price = fair value) of £6 per litre. The entity was concerned that the fair
value might fall over the next three months, so it took out a three-month future to sell at £6 per litre.
On 31 October the spot price of the oil had fallen to £5.60. On that date the entity closed out its
future and sold its inventory, both transactions being at the spot price.
The sale of 50,000 litres at £5.60 generates revenue of £280,000; deducting the cost of £250,000,
the profit recognised in profit or loss should be £30,000.
The entity also makes a profit of £0.40 (£6.00 – £5.60) per litre in the futures market, so on 50,000
litres a profit of £20,000 should be recognised in profit or loss.
Subject to any futures market transaction costs, the entity has protected itself against a fall in fair
value below the £6 fair value at 1 August 20X5.
1.5 Accounting for a simple cash flow hedge

On 1 November 20X5 an entity, whose functional currency is the pound (£), entered into a contract to
sell goods on 30 April 20X6 for $300,000. In fixing this dollar ($) price it worked on the basis of the
spot exchange rate of $1.50 = £1, so that revenue would be £200,000. To ensure it received
£200,000, on 30 June 20X6 the entity took out a six-month future to sell $300,000 for £200,000.
On 31 December 20X5 (which is the company’s reporting date) an equivalent futures contract traded
at a value of £18,182. This may be taken as an acceptable approximation to fair value. The future was
therefore worth £18,182 and the entity recognised that amount as a financial asset and as a profit in
other comprehensive income.
HB2021

On 30 April 20X6, the spot exchange rate was $1.75 = £1 and the future was worth £28,571
(£200,000 – £(300,000/1.75)). The entity closed out its future position at the then spot price and sold
the goods. The accounting entries should be:
DEBIT Customer £(300,000/1.75) £171,429

DEBIT Financial asset (28,571 – 18,182) £10,389
DEBIT (Reclassification of gain to profit or loss) £18,182
The customer account and the financial asset are then cleared by cash receipts. Note that revenue is
measured at the amount fixed as a result of the hedging transaction.
Interactive question 1: Simple derivative and hedging

BCL entered into a forward contract on 31 July 20X0 to purchase $2 million at a contracted rate of
£1: $0.64 on 31 October 20X0. The contract cost was nil. BCL prepares its financial statements to 31
August 20X0. At 31 August 20X0, an equivalent contract for the purchase of $2 million could be
acquired at a rate of £1 : $0.70.
Requirements
1.1 Explain how this financial instrument should be classified and prepare the journal entry
required for its measurement as at 31 August 20X0.
1.2 Assume now that the instrument described above was designated as a hedging instrument in a
cash flow hedge, and that the hedge was 100% effective.
(a) Explain how the gain or loss on the instrument for the year ended 31 August 20X0 should
now be recorded and why different treatment is necessary.
(b) Prepare an extract of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for
BCL for the year ended 31 August 20X0, assuming the profit for the year of BCL was £1
million, before accounting for the hedging instrument.
Interactive question 2: Simple fair value hedge

VB acquired 40,000 shares in another entity, JK, in March 20X3 for £2.68 per share. An irrevocable
election was made under IFRS 9 to record changes in fair value in other comprehensive income. The
shares were trading at £2.96 per share on 31 July 20X3. Commission of 5% of the value of the
transaction is payable on all purchases and disposals of shares.
Requirement
(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the initial recognition of this financial asset and its
subsequent measurement at 31 July 20X3 in accordance with IFRS 9, Financial Instruments.
(b) The directors of VB are concerned about the value of VB’s investment in JK and, in an attempt to
hedge against the risk of a fall in its value, are considering acquiring a derivative contract. The
directors wish to use hedge accounting in accordance with IFRS 9.
Requirement
Discuss how both the investment in equity instruments and any associated derivative contract
would be subsequently accounted for, assuming that the criteria for hedge accounting were
met, in accordance with IFRS 9.
HB2021

2 Hedged items
Section overview
This section deals with detailed issues related to hedged items in a hedging relationship.
Definitions
Hedged item: An asset, liability, firm commitment, highly probable forecast transaction or net
investment in a foreign operation that:
• exposes the entity to risk of changes in fair value or future cash flows; and
• is designated as being hedged.
Firm commitment: A binding agreement for the exchange of a specified quantity of resources at a
specified price on a specified future date or dates.
Forecast transaction: An uncommitted but anticipated future transaction.
Note: Neither firm commitments nor forecast transactions are normally recognised in financial
statements. As is explained in more detail in a later part of this chapter, it is only when they are
designated as hedged items that they are recognised.
2.1 Financial risks

Hedged items as defined above are exposed to a variety of risks that affect the value of their fair
value or cash flows. For hedge accounting, these risks need to be identified and hedging
instruments which modify the identified risks selected and designated. The risks for which the above
items can be hedged are normally classified as follows:
• Market risk
Which can be made up of:
– price risk
– interest rate risk
– currency risk
• Credit risk
• Liquidity risk
IFRS 9 allows for a portion of the risks or cash flows of an asset or liability to be hedged. For example,
the hedged item may be as follows:
• Oil inventory (which is priced in $) for a UK company, where the fair value of foreign currency risk
is being hedged but not the risk of a change in $ market price of the oil
• A fixed rate liability, exposed to foreign currency risk, where only the interest rate and currency
risk are hedged but the credit risk is not hedged
2.2 Nature of hedged items

In this section we discuss some of the key aspects of the definition of a hedged item.
(a) The hedged item can be:
(1) a single asset, liability, unrecognised firm commitment, highly probable forecast transaction
or net investment in a foreign operation;
(2) a group of assets, liabilities, firm commitments, highly probable forecast transactions or net
investments in foreign operations with similar risk characteristics; or
(3) a portion of a portfolio of financial assets or financial liabilities which share exposure to
interest rate risk. In such a case, the portion of the portfolio that is designated as a hedged
item is a hedged item with regard to interest rate risk only.
HB2021

(b) Assets and liabilities designated as hedged items can be either financial or non-financial items.
(1) Financial items can be designated as hedged items for the risks associated with only a
portion of their cash flows or fair values. So a fixed rate liability that is exposed to foreign
currency risk can be hedged in respect of currency risk, leaving the credit risk not hedged.
(2) IFRS 9 allows separately identifiable and reliably measurable risk components of non-
financial items to be designated as hedged items.
(c) Unrecognised assets and liabilities cannot be designated as hedged items. So unrecognised
intangibles cannot be hedged items.
(d) Only assets, liabilities, firm commitments or highly probable transactions that involve a party
external to the entity can be designated as hedged items. The effect is that hedge accounting
can be applied to transactions between entities or segments in the same group only in the
individual or separate financial statements of those entities or segments, and not in the
consolidated financial statements.
(e) As an exception, an intra-group monetary item qualifies as a hedged item in the consolidated
financial statements if it results in an exposure to foreign exchange rate gains and losses that are
not eliminated on consolidation.
Context example: Intra-group hedge

The functional currency of Anson Co and its subsidiary Benson Co are the pound (£) and dollar ($)
respectively. Benson Co sells $100 of goods to Anson Co just before the year end. The amount
remains unsettled at the year end.
While the intercompany balances are eliminated on consolidation, the exchange differences that
arise in Anson Co from the retranslation of the monetary liability are not eliminated on consolidation.
Hence, the intercompany monetary item can be designated as a hedged item in a foreign currency
hedge.
2.3 Designation of a group of assets as hedged items

IFRS 9 permits the designation of a group of assets as a hedged item provided that the following
conditions are met.
(a) It consists of items which are individually eligible as hedged items.
(b) The items in the group are managed together on a group basis for risk management purposes.
(c) In the case of a cash flow hedge of a group of items whose variabilities in cash flows are not
expected to be approximately proportional to the overall variability in cash flows of the group:
(1) it is a hedge of foreign currency risk; and
(2) the designation of that net position specifies the reporting period in which the forecast
transactions are expected to affect profit or loss, as well as their nature and volume.
For a hedge of a net position whose hedged risk affects different line items in the statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income, any hedging gains or losses in that statement are
presented in a separate line from those affected by the hedged items.
(IFRS 9.6.6.4)
Worked example: Group of assets

An entity constructs a portfolio of shares to replicate a stock index and uses a put option on the index
to protect itself from fair value losses.
Requirement
Can the portfolio of shares be designated as a hedged item?
Solution
The portfolio cannot be designated as a hedged item. Similar financial instruments should be
aggregated and hedged as a group only if the change in fair value attributable to the hedged risk for
each individual item in the group is expected to be approximately proportional to the overall change
in fair value attributable to the hedged risk of the group. In the scenario above, the change in the fair
HB2021

value attributable to the hedged risk for each individual item in the group (individual share prices) is
not expected to be approximately proportional to the overall change in fair value attributable to the
hedged risk of the group; even if the index rises, the price of an individual share may fall.
2.4 Hedging an overall net position

IFRS 9 allows hedge accounting to be applied to groups of items and net positions if the group
consists of individually eligible hedged items and those items are managed together on a group
basis for risk management purposes.
For a cash flow hedge of a group of items, if the variability in cash flows is not expected to be
approximately proportional to the group’s overall variability in cash flows, the net position is eligible
as a hedged item only if it is a hedge of foreign currency risk. In addition, the designation must
specify the reporting period in which forecast transactions are expected to affect profit or loss,
including the nature and volume of these transactions.
2.5 Risk components of non-financial items

IFRS 9 allows separately identifiable and reliably measurable risk components of non-financial items
to be designated as hedged items.
2.6 Components
IFRS 9 allows a component that is a proportion of an entire item or a layer component to be
designated as a hedged item in a hedging relationship. A layer component may be specified from a
defined, but open, population or a defined nominal amount. For example, an entity could designate
20% of a fixed rate bond as the hedged item, or the top layer of £20 principal from a total amount of
£100 (defined nominal amount) of fixed-rate bond. It is necessary to track the fair value movements
of the nominal amount from which the layer is defined.
2.7 Aggregate exposure

IFRS 9 allows aggregated exposures that include a derivative to be an eligible hedged item.
Context example: Aggregated exposure as hedged item

Zeta Bank has a fixed rate foreign currency loan which exposes it to both foreign exchange rate risk
and fair value risk due to changes in interest rates. The bank enters into a cross-currency interest rate
swap to eliminate the foreign exchange risk and fair value risk due to changes in interest rates but is
now exposed to variable functional currency interest payments.
Zeta Bank may hedge the aggregated exposure (foreign currency loan + cross-currency interest rate
swap) by using, for example, a pay fixed and receive floating interest rate swap in its own functional
currency.
2.8 Equity investments at fair value through other comprehensive income

IFRS 9 allows an entity to classify equity investments not held for trading, at fair value through other
comprehensive income through an irrevocable option on origination of the instrument. The gains
and losses are recognised in other comprehensive income and never reclassified to profit or loss.
IFRS 9 allows these equity investments at fair value through other comprehensive income to be
designated as hedged items. In this case, both the effective and ineffective portion of the fair value
changes in the hedging instruments are recognised in other comprehensive income.
2.9 Fair value designation for credit exposures

Many banks use credit derivatives to manage credit risk exposures arising from their lending
activities. The hedges of credit risk exposure allow banks to transfer the risk of credit loss to a third
party. This may also reduce regulatory capital requirements.
IFRS 9 allows credit exposure or part of the credit exposure to be measured at fair value through
profit or loss if an entity uses a credit derivative measured at fair value through profit or loss to
HB2021

manage the credit risk of all, or part of, the credit exposure. In addition, an entity may make the
designation at initial recognition or subsequently, or while the financial instrument is unrecognised.
Interactive question 3: Credit derivative and credit exposures

Excel Bank extends a fixed rate loan commitment of £1 million to a customer. The bank’s risk
management strategy is to hedge the credit risk exposure of any individual loan commitment to the
extent that it exceeds £500,000. As a result, Excel Bank enters into a credit default swap of £500,000
in relation to this loan commitment to the customer.
Requirement
Explain the accounting for the credit default swap and the loan commitment under IFRS 9.
2.10 Firm commitments as hedged items

Firm commitments (as defined above) are the result of legally binding contracts which normally
specify penalties for non-performance. A firm commitment can be a hedged item.
2.11 Forecast transactions as hedged items

A forecast transaction (as defined above) qualifies as a hedged item only if the transaction is highly
probable. Examples of forecast transactions that qualify as a hedged item include the following:
(a) The anticipated issue of fixed rate debt. This can be recognised as a hedged item under a cash
flow hedge of a highly probable forecast transaction that will affect profit or loss.
(b) Expected, but not contractual, future foreign currency revenue streams, provided that the
revenues are highly probable. A hedge of an anticipated sale can qualify as a cash flow hedge.
Context example: Forecast transaction

An airline may use models based on past experience and historical economic data to project its
revenues in various currencies. If it can demonstrate that forecast revenues for a period of time into
the future in a particular currency are highly probable, it may designate a currency borrowing as a
cash flow hedge of the currency risk of the future revenue stream. The portion of the gain or loss on
the borrowing that is determined to be an effective hedge is recognised in other comprehensive
income until the revenues occur.
It is unlikely that an entity can reliably predict 100% of revenues for a future year. On the other hand,
it is possible that a portion of predicted revenues, normally those expected in the short term, will
meet the ‘highly probable’ criterion.
Because forecast transactions can only be hedged under cash flow hedges, the ways to assess the
probability of a future transaction are covered below under cash flow hedges.
2.12 Intra-group and intra-entity hedging transactions

It has already been noted that hedged items have to involve a party external to the entity, with the
result that intra-group transactions can be designated as hedged items only in the individual or
separate financial statements and not in consolidated financial statements. There are only two cases,
both involving foreign exchange translation, where intra-group transactions will be recognised in the
The first case is a result of IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates under which
foreign exchange gains and losses on an intra-group monetary asset or liability between entities with
different functional currencies are not fully eliminated in the consolidated profit or loss. This is
because a foreign currency monetary item represents a commitment to convert one currency into
another one and exposes the reporting entity to a gain or loss through currency fluctuations.
Because such exchange differences are not fully eliminated on consolidation, they will affect profit or
loss in the entity’s consolidated financial statements and hedge accounting may be applied.
HB2021

The second case arises because IFRS 9 permits the foreign currency risks of a highly probable
forecast intra-group transaction to be designated as a hedged item in the consolidated financial
statements provided the following two conditions are met.
(a) The highly probable forecast intra-group transaction is denominated in a currency other than the
functional currency of the group member entering into that transaction.
(b) The foreign currency risk will affect the group’s consolidated profit or loss.
Worked example: Hedging intra-group monetary items

An Australian company, whose functional currency is the Australian dollar, has forecast purchases in
Japanese yen that are highly probable. The Australian entity is wholly owned by a Swiss entity that
prepares consolidated financial statements (which include the Australian subsidiary) in Swiss francs.
The Swiss parent entity enters into a forward contract to hedge the change in yen relative to the
Australian dollar.
Requirement
Explain whether the hedge can qualify for hedge accounting in the Swiss entity’s consolidated
Solution
The hedge can qualify for hedge accounting. Since the Australian entity did not hedge the foreign
currency exchange risk associated with the forecast purchases in yen, the effects of exchange rate
changes between the Australian dollar and the yen will affect the Australian entity’s profit or loss and,
therefore, would also affect consolidated profit or loss. IFRS 9 does not require the operating unit
that is exposed to the risk being hedged to be a party to the hedging instrument.
Section overview
This section considers in detail the financial instruments that can be designated as hedging
instruments for hedge accounting purposes.
3.1 Hedging instruments

Contracts that can be designated as hedging instruments include:
• derivatives; and
• non-derivative financial assets or liabilities measured at fair value through profit or loss (with the
exception of financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss, for which changes in
fair value attributable to credit risk are presented in other comprehensive income).
For the hedge of a foreign currency risk, the foreign currency risk component of a non-derivative
financial asset or liability may be designated as a hedging instrument, provided that it is not an
investment in an equity instrument measured at fair value through comprehensive income by
election.
An implication of this definition is that financial assets and liabilities whose fair value cannot be
reliably measured cannot be designated as hedging instruments.
An entity may exclude the following from hedging relationships:
• Time value of purchased options
• Forward element of forward contracts and foreign currency basis spreads
HB2021

3.2 Derivatives
Any derivative financial instrument, with the exception of written options to which special rules apply,
can be designated as a hedging instrument. It is important to note that the fair value of derivative
instruments correlates highly with that of the underlying.
3.3 Options
Options provide a more flexible way of hedging risks compared to other derivative instruments such
as forwards, futures and swaps, because they give to the holder the choice as to whether or not to
exercise the option.
When an entity purchases a put option, it buys the right to sell the underlying at the strike price. If the
price of the underlying falls below the strike price, the entity exercises its option and receives the
strike price; it has protected the value of its position. Similarly, if an entity needs to buy an asset in the
future, it can purchase a call option on the asset that gives the entity the right to purchase the asset at
the strike price, protecting it from a rise in the price of the asset in the future.
The difference between the purchased option and a forward contract is that under a forward contract
the entity is obliged to buy or sell at the strike price, whereas under a purchased option it has the
right, but not the obligation, to buy or sell at the strike price.
Purchased options, whether call options or put options, have the potential to hedge price, currency
and interest rate risks and can always qualify as hedging instruments.
Examples of purchased options include options on equities, options on currencies and options on
interest rates. An interest rate floor is achieved through a put option on an interest rate, and an
interest rate cap is achieved through a call option on an interest rate.
In IFRS 9, an entity may designate only the change in intrinsic value of a purchased option as the
hedging instrument in a fair value or cash flow hedge. The change in fair value of the time value of
the option is recognised in other comprehensive income to the extent it relates to the hedged item.
This change in IFRS 9 makes options more attractive as hedging instruments.
The method used to reclassify the amounts from equity to profit or loss is determined by whether the
hedged item is transaction-related or time period-related.
The time value of a purchased option relates to a transaction-related hedged item if the nature of
the hedged item is a transaction for which the time value has the character of costs of the transaction.
For example, future purchase of a commodity or non-financial asset.
The change in fair value of the time value of an option (transaction-related hedged item) is
accumulated in other comprehensive income over the term of the hedge, to the extent it relates to
the hedged item. It is then treated as follows:
• If the hedged item results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or liability or firm
commitment for a non-financial asset or liability, the amount accumulated in equity is removed
and included in the initial cost or carrying amount of the asset or liability.
• For other hedging relationships, the amount accumulated in equity is reclassified to profit or loss
as a reclassification adjustment in the period(s) in which the hedged expected cash flows affect
profit or loss.
The time value of a purchased option relates to a time period-related hedged item if the following
apply:
(a) The nature of the hedged item is such that the time value has the character of the cost for
obtaining protection against a risk over a particular time period.
(b) The hedged item does not result in a transaction that involves the notion of a transaction cost.
The change in fair value of the time value of an option (time period-related hedged item) is
accumulated in other comprehensive income over the term of the hedge, to the extent it relates to
the hedged item. The time value of the option at the date of designation is amortised on a straight-
line or other systematic and rational basis, and the amortisation amount is reclassified to profit or loss
as a reclassification adjustment.
HB2021

4 Conditions for hedge accounting
Section overview
Hedge accounting is permitted in certain circumstances, provided the hedging relationship is clearly
defined, measurable and actually effective.
4.1 Hedge accounting conditions

Before a hedging relationship qualifies for hedge accounting, all of the following conditions must be
met:
(a) The hedging relationship must consist only of eligible hedging instruments and eligible hedged
items.
(b) At the inception of the hedge, there must be formal designation and documentation of the
hedging relationship and the entity’s risk management objective and strategy for undertaking
the hedge. Documentation must include identification of the hedged item, the hedging
instrument, the nature of the hedged risk and how the entity will assess whether the hedging
relationship meets the hedge effectiveness requirements (including its analysis of the sources of
hedge ineffectiveness and how it determines the hedge ratio).
(c) The hedging relationship meets all of the hedge effectiveness requirements:
(1) An economic relationship exists between the hedged item and the hedging instrument ie,
the hedging instrument and the hedged item are expected to have offsetting changes in
value;
(2) The effect of credit risk does not dominate the value changes ie, the value changes due to
credit risk are not a significant driver of the value changes of either the hedging instrument
or the hedged item; and
(3) The hedge ratio of the hedging relationship (quantity of hedging instrument vs quantity of
hedged item) is the same as that resulting from the quantity of the hedged item that the
entity actually hedges and the quantity of the hedging instrument that the entity actually
uses to hedge that quantity of hedged item. (IFRS 9.6.4.1)
Definition
Hedge ratio: The relationship between the quantity of the hedging instrument and the quantity of
the hedged item in terms of their relative weighting.
IFRS 9 requires that the hedge ratio used for accounting purposes is the same as that used for risk
management purposes. This ensures that amounts are not manipulated in order to achieve a
particular accounting outcome.
The hedge effectiveness criteria are an example of an area where judgement must be applied.
Judgement is generally needed where risk management is concerned, but having arbitrary
percentage ranges, as IFRS 9’s predecessor did, does not make the criteria any more precise, and
could be misleading.
HB2021

Context example: Hedge ratio
CoffeeBar plc buys coffee in a part-processed state, prior to the milling stage. As a result, it pays a
discounted price compared to that for fully processed coffee. The price of fully processed coffee on
the commodities market is on average 1.7 times the raw material price that CoffeeBar pays.
Therefore CoffeeBar uses a notional 1,000 pounds of forward contract for the commodity to hedge a
highly probable forecast purchase of 1,700 pounds of raw material. The hedge ratio is therefore 1 :
1.7.
4.2 Rebalancing
Rebalancing refers to adjustments to the designated quantities of the hedged item, or the hedging
instrument of an already existing hedging relationship for the purpose of maintaining a hedge ratio
that complies with the hedge. This may be achieved by increasing or decreasing the volume of either
hedged item or hedging instrument.
The standard requires rebalancing to be undertaken if the risk management objective remains the
same, but the hedge effectiveness requirements are no longer met. Where the risk management
objective for a hedging relationship has changed, rebalancing does not apply and the hedging
relationship must be discontinued.
Context example: Rebalancing

Continuing with the previous example, assume that the relationship between the commodity price
and raw material price changes over Year 1 such that by the end of the year the commodity price has
decreased to an average 1.3 times the raw material price. In this case, management of the reporting
entity might reset the hedge ratio to 1 : 1.3. Therefore to rebalance the hedging relationship
management can either:
• decrease the raw material that forms the hedged item so that the hedged item is 1.31 pounds
(1/1.3 × 1.7); or
• increase the commodity that forms the hedging instrument, so that the hedging instrument is 1.3
pounds.
5 Fair value hedge

Section overview
The application of fair value hedge accounting is discussed through a number of practical examples.
5.1 Fair value hedges

A fair value hedge is a hedge of an entity‘s exposure to changes in fair value of a recognised asset
or liability or an unrecognised firm commitment, or a part thereof, that is attributable to a particular
risk and could affect profit or loss. Examples of fair value hedges include the hedge of exposures to
changes in fair value of fixed rate debt using an interest rate swap and the use of an oil forward
contract to hedge movements in the price of oil inventory.
HB2021

5.1.1 Examples of fair value hedging
Hedged item Risk exposure Type of risk Example of hedging

instrument
Commodity inventory Change in value due to Market risk Forward contract

changes in the price of (price risk)
commodity
Equities Change in the value of the Market risk Purchase put option
investments due to (price risk)
changes in the price of
equity
Issued fixed rate bond Change in the value of the Market risk Interest rate swap
bond as interest rates (interest rate risk)
change
Purchase of materials Depreciation of the local Market risk Forward contract

denominated in foreign currency and increase in (foreign
currency in three months the cost of material currency)
5.1.2 Hedge accounting and risk reduction

IFRS 9 does not require that in order for a hedging relationship to qualify for hedge accounting, it
should lead to a reduction in the overall risk of the entity. A hedging relationship that satisfies the
conditions for hedge accounting may be designed to protect the value of a particular asset. The
following example illustrates the point.
Worked example: Qualification for hedge accounting

An entity has a fixed rate financial asset and a fixed rate financial liability, each having the same
principal amount. Under the terms of the instruments, interest payments on the asset and liability
occur in the same period and the net cash flow is always positive because the interest rate on the
asset exceeds the interest rate on the liability. The entity wishes to hedge the financial asset and
enters into an interest rate swap to receive a floating interest rate and pay a fixed interest rate on a
notional amount equal to the principal of the asset. It designates the interest rate swap as a fair value
hedge of the fixed rate asset.
Requirement
Does the hedging relationship qualify for hedge accounting even though the effect of the interest
rate swap on an entity-wide basis is to create an exposure to interest rate changes that did not
previously exist?
Solution
Yes. IFRS 9 does not require risk reduction on an entity-wide basis as a condition for hedge
accounting. Exposure is assessed on a transaction basis and, in this instance, the asset being hedged
has a fair value exposure* to interest rate increases that is offset by the interest rate swap.
* The fair value of a loan is the present value of the cash flows. A fixed rate loan has constant cash
flows so the fair value is directly affected by a change in the discount rate (ie, the market interest
rate).
HB2021

5.2 Fair value hedge accounting
In a fair value hedge:
(a) the hedged item is a recognised asset or liability. This is re-measured to fair value at the end of
the reporting period and the gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk is
recognised in profit or loss;
(b) the hedging instrument is a derivative. The gain or loss resulting from re-measuring the hedging
instrument at fair value is also recognised in profit or loss;
(c) if the hedged item is an equity investment measured at fair value through OCI, the gains and
losses on the hedged investment and hedging instrument are both recognised in other
comprehensive income rather than profit or loss; and
(d) if the hedged item is an unrecognised firm commitment, the cumulative change in the fair value
of the hedged item after it has been designated as a hedged item is recognised as an asset or
liability with a corresponding amount recognised in profit or loss.
Context example: Gain or loss on hedged item recognised in profit or loss

At 1 November 20X5, an entity held inventory with a cost of £400,000 and a fair value of £600,000.
The entity acquired a derivative to hedge against a fall in the fair value of its inventory below
£600,000. At its year end two months later, the fair value of its inventory had fallen by £20,000 and
the derivative it holds had a value of £20,000.
The journals required at the year end are as follows.
DEBIT Financial asset £20,000

To recognise the gain on the derivative hedging instrument
DEBIT Profit or loss £20,000

CREDIT Inventories £20,000
To adjust the carrying amount of inventories by the loss in its fair value (because closing inventories
reduce cost of sale, a decrease in their carrying amount increases cost of sales and reduces profit).
The effect is as follows:
(a) The loss on the hedged item has been recognised in profit or loss.
(b) There is a nil net effect in profit or loss, because the hedge has been 100% effective.
(c) Inventories are carried at £380,000. This is neither cost (£400,000) nor fair value (£580,000).
(d) The entity has been protected against loss of profit. If it had sold the inventory on 1 November, it
would have made a profit of £200,000 (£600,000 – £400,000); if it sells the inventory on 1
January 20X6, it will make a profit of £200,000 (£580,000 – £380,000).
Interactive question 4: Fair value hedge

A company owns inventories of 40,000 gallons of oil which cost £800,000 on 1 December 20X3.
In order to hedge the fluctuation in the market value of the oil, on 1 December 20X3 the company
signs a futures contract to deliver 40,000 gallons of oil on 31 March 20X4 at the futures price of £22
per gallon.
The market price of oil on 31 December 20X3 is £22.25 per gallon, and the futures price at that date
for delivery on 31 March 20X4 is £24 per gallon.
Assume that the IFRS 9 hedging criteria are met.
Requirements
Explain how these transactions should be accounted for at 31 December 20X3:
(a) without hedge accounting
(b) with hedge accounting
HB2021

If only particular risks attributable to a hedged item are hedged, recognised changes in the hedged
item’s fair value unrelated to the hedged risk are recognised as normal. This means that changes in
fair value of a hedged financial asset or liability that is not part of the hedging relationship would be
accounted for as follows:
(a) For instruments measured at amortised cost, such changes would not be recognised.
(b) For instruments measured at fair value through profit or loss, such changes would be recognised
in profit or loss in any event.
(c) For equity instruments in respect of which another comprehensive income election has been
made, such changes would be recognised in other comprehensive income, as explained above.
However, exceptions to this would include foreign currency gains and losses on monetary items
and impairment losses, which would be recognised in profit or loss in any event.
If the fair value hedge is 100% effective (as in the above example), then the change in the fair value
of the hedged item will be wholly offset by the change in the fair value of the hedging instrument
and there will be no effect in profit or loss. Whenever the hedge is not perfect and the change in the
fair value of the hedged item is not fully cancelled by change in the fair value of the hedging
instrument, the resulting difference will be recognised in profit or loss. This difference is referred to
as hedge ineffectiveness.
Worked example: Fair value hedge of inventory

On 1 July 20X6, a jewellery trader acquired 10,000 ounces of a material which it held in its inventory.
This cost £200 per ounce, so a total of £2 million. The trader was concerned that the price of this
inventory would fall, so on 1 July 20X6 he sold 10,000 ounces in the futures market for £210 per
ounce for delivery on 30 June 20X7. On 1 July 20X6, the conditions for hedge accounting were all
met, and these continued to be met throughout the hedging period.
At 31 December 20X6, the end of the trader’s reporting period, the fair value of the inventory was
£220 per ounce while the futures price for 30 June 20X7 delivery was £227 per ounce. On 30 June
20X7 the trader sold the inventory and closed out the futures position at the then spot price of £230
per ounce.
Requirement
Set out the accounting entries in respect of the above transactions.
Solution
Entries
Debit Credit
1 July 20X6 £ £
Inventory 2,000,000
Cash 2,000,000
(To record the initial purchase of material)
At 31 December 20X6 the increase in the fair value of the inventory was £200,000 (10,000 × (£220 –
£200)) and the increase in the forward contract liability was £170,000 (10,000 × (£227 – £210)). The
IFRS 9 hedge accounting criteria have been met, so hedge accounting was permitted.
Debit Credit
Profit or loss 170,000
Financial liability 170,000
(To record the loss on the forward contract)
Inventories 200,000
HB2021

Debit Credit
(To record the increase in the fair value of the inventories)
At 30 June 20X7 the increase in the fair value of the inventory was another £100,000 (10,000 × (£230
– £220)) and the increase in the forward contract liability was another £30,000 (10,000 × (£230 –
£227)).
Debit Credit
30 June 20X7 £ £
(To record the loss on the forward contract)
Inventories 100,000
(To record the increase in the fair value of the inventories)
Profit or loss 2,300,000
Inventories 2,300,000
(To record the inventories now sold)
Cash 2,300,000
Profit or loss – revenue 2,300,000
(To record the revenue from the sale of inventories)
Cash 200,000
(To record the settlement of the net balance due on closing the
financial liability)
Note that because the fair value of the material rose, the trader made a profit of only £100,000 on the
sale of inventories. Without the forward contract, the profit would have been £300,000 (£2,300,000 –
£2,000,000). In the light of the rising fair value, the trader might in practice have closed out the
futures position earlier, rather than waiting until the settlement date.
5.2.1 Interest rate futures

An interest rate futures contract has interest-bearing instruments as its underlying asset. Futures
contracts are available in relation to short-term interest rates in major currencies like sterling, euros,
yen and Swiss francs. These derivatives can be used to gain exposure to, or hedge exposure against,
interest rate movements. Three-month sterling future (short sterling) is a 90-day sterling SONIA
interest rate future traded on ICE Futures Europe with the following characteristics:
Unit of trade: £500,000 (this is a notional amount on which interest effect is measured)
Quote: 100 minus interest rate
Tick size: 0.01 (smallest permitted quote movement ie, one basis point)
Tick value: £12.50 (£500,000 × 0.01% × 3/12)
The contract is cash settled ie, one party pays to the other the difference in value between the
interest for three months at the rate agreed when the contract was originated and actual rate on
maturity.
HB2021

(Note that SONIA (Sterling Overnight Index Average) is a benchmark rate that replaced LIBOR in
2021.
Worked example: Fair value hedge using interest rate futures

Zeta Bank has a fixed rate financial asset of £10 million and is concerned that interest rates will
increase from the current levels.
Requirement
Explain how Zeta Bank can hedge the fair value of the fixed rate financial asset of £10 million against
an increase in interest rates using interest rate futures.
Solution
If interest rates increase, the fair value of the fixed rate financial asset will decrease. Zeta Bank
requires a futures position that will yield profits when interest rates increase to offset this loss. It
should therefore sell £(10,000,000/500,000) = 20 futures contracts. If the interest rate increases, the
gain on the futures position will offset the loss on the fixed rate financial asset.
Zeta Bank should designate the futures contract as the hedging instrument and the fixed rate
financial asset as the hedged item in a fair value hedge. If the IFRS 9 conditions for hedge accounting
are met, the fair value movements on the futures contract and the financial asset will be recognised
and offset in profit or loss.
5.3 Hedging of firm commitments

The hedging of a firm commitment should be treated as a fair value hedge, except that a firm
commitment with a price fixed in foreign currency may be treated as either a fair value hedge or a
cash flow hedge of the foreign currency risk.
When an unrecognised firm commitment to acquire an asset or to assume a liability is designated as
a hedged item in a fair value hedge, the accounting treatment is as follows:
(a) The subsequent cumulative change in the fair value of the firm commitment attributable to the
hedged risk since inception of the hedge is recognised as an asset or liability with a
corresponding gain or loss recognised in profit or loss.
(b) The changes in the fair value of the hedging instrument are also recognised in profit or loss.
(c) When the firm commitment is fulfilled, the initial carrying amount of the asset or liability is
adjusted to include the cumulative change in the firm commitment that has been recognised in
the statement of financial position (SOFP) under the first point above.
5.4 Discontinuing fair value hedge accounting

Fair value hedge accounting should be discontinued if the hedging instrument expires or is sold,
terminated or exercised, if the criteria for hedge accounting are no longer met, or if the entity
revokes the designation.
The discontinuance should be accounted for prospectively ie, the previous accounting entries are
not reversed. The hedged item is not adjusted for any further changes in its fair value and
adjustments already made are recognised in profit or loss over the life of the item.
6 Cash flow hedge

Section overview
The application of cash flow hedge accounting is discussed in this section through a series of
practical examples.
HB2021

6.1 Cash flow hedge
A cash flow hedge is a hedge of the variability in an entity‘s cash flows. The variability should be
attributable to a particular risk associated with a recognised asset or liability, or a highly probable
forecast transaction and could affect profit or loss.
Examples of cash flow hedges include the following:
(a) The use of interest rate swaps to change floating rate debt into fixed rate debt. The entity is
hedging the risk of variability in future interest payments which may arise for instance from
changes in market interest rates. The fixed rate protects this cash flow variability (but with the
consequence that the fair value of the instrument may now vary in response to market interest
movements).
(b) The use of a commodity forward contract for a highly probable sale of the commodity in future.
The entity is hedging the risk of variability in the cash flows to be received on the sale, due to
changes in the market price of the goods.
The hedge of foreign currency assets and liabilities using forward exchange contracts can be treated
as either a fair value or a cash flow hedge. This is because movements in exchange rates change
both the fair value of such assets and liabilities and ultimate cash flows arising from them. Similarly, a
hedge of the foreign currency risk of a firm commitment may be designated as either a fair value or a
cash flow hedge.
6.2 Forecast transaction

A forecast transaction is an uncommitted but anticipated future transaction. To qualify for cash flow
hedge accounting, the forecast transaction should be:
• specifically identifiable as a single transaction or a group of individual transactions which share
the same risk exposure for which they are designated as being hedged;
• highly probable. The factors to be taken into account when assessing the probability of the
transaction are discussed further below; and
• with a party that is external to the entity.
6.2.1 Specifically identifiable

Identification of hedged forecast transaction
A forecast transaction such as the purchase or sale of the last 15,000 units of a product in a specified
period, or as a percentage of purchases or sales during a specified period, does not qualify as a
hedged item.
This is because the hedged forecast transaction must be identified and documented with sufficient
specificity so that when the transaction occurs, it is clear whether the transaction is or is not the
hedged transaction. Therefore, a forecast transaction may be identified as the sale of the first 15,000
units of a specific product during a specified three-month period, but it could not be identified as the
last 15,000 units of that product sold during a three-month period because the last 15,000 units
cannot be identified when they are sold. For the same reason, a forecast transaction cannot be
specified solely as a percentage of sales or purchases during a period.
Documentation of timing of forecast transaction
For a hedge of a forecast transaction, the documentation of the hedge relationship that is
established at inception of the hedge should identify the date on which, or time period in which, the
forecast transaction is expected to occur. This is because the hedge must relate to a specific
identified risk and it must be possible to measure its effectiveness reliably. In addition, the hedged
forecast transaction must be highly probable.
To meet these criteria, an entity is not required to predict and document the exact date a forecast
transaction is expected to occur. However, it is required to identify and document the time period
during which the forecast transaction is expected to occur within a reasonably specific and generally
narrow range of time from a most probable date, as a basis for assessing hedge effectiveness. To
determine that the hedge will be effective, it is necessary to ensure that changes in the fair value of
the expected cash flows are offset by changes in the fair value of the hedging instrument, and this
test may be met only if the timing of the cash flows occur within close proximity to each other.
HB2021

6.2.2 What is ‘highly probable’?
The term ‘highly probable’ indicates a much greater likelihood of happening than the term ‘more
likely than not’. An assessment of the likelihood that a forecast transaction will take place is not based
solely on management’s intentions because intentions are not verifiable. A transaction’s probability
should be supported by observable facts and the attendant circumstances.
In assessing the likelihood that a transaction will occur, an entity should consider the following
circumstances:
(a) The frequency of similar past transactions
(b) The financial and operational ability of the entity to carry out the transaction
(c) Substantial commitments of resources to a particular activity (for example, a manufacturing
facility that can be used in the short run only to process a particular type of commodity)
(d) The extent of loss or disruption of operations that could result if the transaction does not occur
(e) The likelihood that transactions with substantially different characteristics might be used to
achieve the same business purpose (for example, an entity that intends to raise cash may have
several ways of doing so, ranging from a short-term bank loan to an offering of ordinary shares)
(f) The entity’s business plan
6.2.3 Further matters to consider

The length of time until a forecast transaction is projected to occur is also a factor in determining
probability. Other factors being equal, the more distant a forecast transaction is, the less likely it is
that the transaction would be regarded as highly probable and the stronger the evidence that would
be needed to support an assertion that it is highly probable.
For example, a transaction forecast to occur in five years may be less likely to occur than a transaction
forecast to occur in one year. However, forecast interest payments for the next 20 years on variable
rate debt would typically be highly probable if supported by an existing contractual obligation.
In addition, other factors being equal, the greater the physical quantity or future value of a forecast
transaction in proportion to the entity’s transactions of the same nature, the less likely it is that the
transaction would be regarded as highly probable and the stronger the evidence that would be
required to support an assertion that it is highly probable. For example, less evidence generally
would be needed to support forecast sales of at least 100,000 units in the next month than 950,000
units in that month when recent sales have averaged 950,000 units per month for the past three
months.
A history of having designated hedges of forecast transactions and then determining that the
forecast transactions are no longer expected to occur would call into question both an entity’s ability
to predict forecast transactions accurately and the propriety of using hedge accounting in the future
for similar forecast transactions.
With so many factors to consider, some of which may point to different conclusions, a considerable
amount of judgement is needed in both financial reporting and auditing of probable forecast
transactions.
6.3 Cash flow hedge accounting

A cash flow hedge involves hedging future cash flows. Initially therefore, only the hedging instrument
(the derivative) is recognised.
The part of the gain or loss arising from an effective hedge of a hedging instrument is recognised in
other comprehensive income while the ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging
instrument should be recognised in profit or loss.
Amounts recognised in other comprehensive income are accumulated in a cash flow hedge reserve.
At a given reporting date this will be the lower of:
(a) the cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument from the inception of the hedge; and
(b) the cumulative change in fair value (present value) of the expected future cash flows on the
hedged item from inception of the hedge.
HB2021

When the separate component of equity has been adjusted to this amount, any remaining gain or
loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in profit or loss.
In the period in which the hedged expected future cash flows affect profit or loss, the amount
accumulated in the cash flow hedge reserve is reclassified to profit or loss with the following
exception:
If the hedged transaction results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or liability, the amount
accumulated in the cash flow hedge reserve is transferred to be included in the initial cost or carrying
amount of the non-financial item. This is not a reclassification adjustment and does not affect the
other comprehensive income of the period.
Interactive question 5: Cash flow hedge

A company enters into a hedge in order to protect its future cash inflows relating to a recognised
financial asset held at amortised cost.
At inception the value of the hedging instrument was £0, but by the year end a gain of £8,800 was
made when measured at market value. The corresponding loss in respect of the future cash flows
amounted to £9,100 in fair value terms.
Requirement
How should the transaction be accounted for?
Interactive question 6: Swap in cash flow hedge 1

An entity issues a fixed rate debt instrument and enters into a receive-fixed, pay-variable, interest rate
swap to offset the exposure to interest rate risk associated with the debt instrument.
Requirement
Can the entity designate the swap as a cash flow hedge of the future interest cash outflows
associated with the debt instrument?
Interactive question 7: Swap in cash flow hedge 2

An entity manages interest rate risk on a net basis. On 1 January 20X6, it forecasts aggregate cash
inflows of £1 million on a fixed rate financial asset and aggregate cash outflows of £900,000 on a
fixed rate financial liability in the first quarter of 20X7. For risk management purposes it uses a
receive-variable, pay-fixed, forward rate agreement (FRA) to hedge the forecast net cash inflow of
£100,000. The entity designates as the hedged item the first £100,000 of cash inflows on fixed rate
assets in the first quarter of 20X7.
Requirement
Can it designate the receive-variable, pay-fixed FRA as a cash flow hedge of the exposure to
variability to cash flows in the first quarter of 20X7 associated with the fixed rate assets?
Worked example: Cash flow hedge – inventories

Bets Co is a manufacturer and retailer of gold jewellery.
On 31 October 20X1, the cost of Bets’s inventories of finished jewellery was £8.280 million with a
gold content of 24,000 troy ounces. At that date their sales value was £9.938 million.
The selling price of gold jewellery is heavily dependent on the current market price of gold (plus a
standard percentage for design and production costs).
HB2021

Bets’s management wished to reduce their business risk of fluctuations in future cash inflow from sale
of the jewellery by hedging the value of the gold content of the jewellery. In the past this has proved
to be an effective strategy.
Therefore, it sold futures contracts for 24,000 troy ounces of gold at £388 per troy ounce at 31
October 20X1. The contracts mature on 30 October 20X2.
On 30 September 20X2 the fair value of the jewellery was £9.186 million and the forward price of
gold per troy ounce for delivery on 30 October 20X2 was £352.
Requirement
Explain how the above transactions would be treated in Bets’s financial statements for the year
ended 30 September 20X2.
Solution
Bets is hedging the volatility of the future cash inflow from selling the gold jewellery. The futures
contracts can be accounted for as a cash flow hedge in respect of those inflows, providing the criteria
for hedge accounting are met.
The gain on the forward contract should be calculated as:
£
Forward value of contract at 31.10.X1 (24,000 × £388) 9,312,000
Forward value of contract at 30.9.X2 (24,000 × £352) 8,448,000
Gain on contract 864,000
The change in the fair value of the expected future cash flows on the hedged item (which is not
recognised in the financial statements) should be calculated as:
£
At 31.10.X1 9,938,000
At 30.9.X2 9,186,000
752,000
As this change in fair value is less than the gain on the forward contract, the hedge is not fully
effective and only £752,000 of the gain on the forward should be recognised in other
comprehensive income. The remainder should be recognised in profit or loss:
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset (Forward a/c) 864,000
CREDIT Profit or loss 112,000
A hedging relationship continues to qualify for hedge accounting if it is effective. In this case:
• an economic relationship continues to exist between the hedged item and hedging instrument
(since they are both gold); and
• the effect of credit risk does not dominate the value changes that result from the economic
relationship.
The third criterion for hedge effectiveness is that the hedge ratio of the hedging relationship is the
same as that resulting from the quantity of hedged item that the entity actually hedges and the
quantity of hedging instrument that the entity actually uses to hedge that quantity of hedged items.
Since this hedge relationship results in a gain on futures contract of £864,000 but a loss on hedged
item of only £752,000, it appears that the relationship should be rebalanced.
The current hedge ratio is 1:1 (with hedged item and hedging instrument both based on 24,000 troy
ounces of gold); to maintain 100% effectiveness this should be reset by reducing the quantity of
HB2021

hedging instrument to 20,889 troy ounces (752/864 × 24,000) or increasing the quantity of hedged
item to 27,574 troy ounces (864/752 × 24,000).
Interactive question 8: Foreign currency hedge 1

Allison Co has a foreign currency liability payable in six months’ time and it wishes to hedge the
amount payable on settlement against foreign currency fluctuations. To that end, it takes out a
forward contract to buy the foreign currency in six months’ time. The conditions for hedge
accounting were met.
Requirements
8.1 Should the hedge be treated as a fair value hedge of the foreign currency liability or as a cash
flow hedge of the amount to be settled in the future?
8.2 How should gains and losses on the liability and the forward contract be accounted for?
Interactive question 9: Foreign currency hedge 2

An entity exports a product at a price denominated in a foreign currency. At the date of the sale, the
entity obtains a receivable for the sale price payable in 90 days and takes out a 90-day forward
exchange contract in the same currency as the receivable to hedge its foreign currency exposure.
The conditions for hedge accounting were met.
Under IAS 21, the sale is recorded at the spot rate at the date of sale, and the receivable is restated
during the 90-day period for changes in exchange rates with the difference being taken to profit or
loss (IAS 21.23 and IAS 21.28).
Requirement
If the foreign exchange forward contract is designated as a hedging instrument, does the entity have
a choice whether to designate it as a fair value hedge of the foreign currency exposure of the
receivable, or as a cash flow hedge of the collection of the receivable?
How should gains and losses on the receivable and the forward contract be accounted for?

RapidMart is a company that operates a chain of large out of town supermarkets. It has expanded
rapidly over the last 10 years, opening new stores in its home country and overseas. It has also
moved into a wide range of non-food sales and the provision of services, such as opticians. The
company is currently preparing its consolidated financial statements for the year ending 30
September 20X5.
During the last year, RapidMart began to operate an online retail division, RapidMart Direct, as a pilot
scheme. The service uses a fleet of delivery vans. This has proved to be very popular with customers
and the company wants to expand this operation. The finance director identified a key risk of
volatility of diesel prices and has taken out a forward contract to hedge against this.
On 1 August 20X5, RapidMart entered into a forward contract to hedge its expected fuel
requirements for the second quarter of the next financial year for delivery of 1 million litres of diesel
on 31 December 20X5 at a price of £2.04 per litre.
The company intended to settle the contract net in cash and purchase the actual required quantity of
diesel in the open market on 31 December 20X5.
At the company’s year end the forward price for delivery on 31 December 20X5 had risen to £2.16
per litre of fuel.
HB2021

Requirement
How should the above transaction be accounted for in the financial statements of RapidMart for the
year ending 30 September 20X5?
The above question contains quite a lot of information, but you should quickly have spotted the fact
that RapidMart is expanding and moving into new areas of business. Cash flow is likely to be an issue,
as is volatility in prices.
Interactive question 11: Foreign currency receivables and forward contract

Armada is a public limited company reporting under IFRS Standards. It is preparing the financial
statements as at 31 December 20X1. Included in trade receivables is an amount due from a customer
located abroad. The amount (30.24 million coronna) was initially recognised when the exchange rate
was £1 = 5.6 coronna.
At 31 December 20X1, the exchange rate was £1 = 5.4 coronna. No adjustment has been made to
the trade receivable since it was initially recognised.
Given the size of the exposure, the company entered into a forward contract, at the same time as the
receivable was initially recognised, in order to protect cash flows from fluctuations in the exchange
rate. The forward contract is to sell 30.24 million coronna and it satisfies the necessary criteria to be
accounted for as a hedge.
In the period between inception of the forward contract and the year end, the loss in fair value of the
forward contract was £220,000. The company elected to designate the spot element of the hedge as
the hedging relationship. The difference between the change in fair value of the receivable and the
change in fair value of the forward contract since inception is the interest element of the forward
contract.
Requirement
Show how this transaction should be accounted for in the financial statements of Armada for the year

On 1 November 20X2, Blenheim entered into a contract to purchase 3,000 tonnes of refined
sunflower oil. The contract is for delivery in February 20X3 at a price of £1,440 per tonne. Blenheim
uses sunflower oil to make its products.
At 31 December 20X2, an equivalent new contract for delivery of 3,000 tonnes of refined sunflower
oil in February 20X3 could be entered into at £1,400 per tonne.
Blenheim does not intend to take delivery of the sunflower oil and instead intends to settle the
contract net in cash, then purchase the actual required quantity based on demand at the time.
The contract is designated as a cash flow hedge of the highly probable forecast purchase of
sunflower oil. All necessary documentation was prepared to treat the contract as a cash flow hedge.
No accounting entries have been made.
Tax rules follow accounting rules in respect of financial instruments in the tax jurisdiction (with both
profit and other comprehensive income items subject to tax at 30%) in which Blenheim operates. No
current or deferred tax adjustments have been made for this transaction.
HB2021

Requirement
Show how this transaction should be accounted for in the financial statements of Blenheim for the
6.4 Discontinuing cash flow hedge accounting

Cash flow hedge accounting should be discontinued if the hedging instrument expires or is sold,
terminated or exercised, if the criteria for hedge accounting are no longer met, a forecast transaction
is no longer expected to occur or if the entity revokes the designation.
The discontinuance should be accounted for prospectively ie, the previous accounting entries are
not reversed. The cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument should be reclassified to profit
or loss, as the hedged item is recognised in profit or loss.
7 Hedge of a net investment

Section overview
This section discusses issues specific to the accounting treatment of hedge of net investments.
7.1 Definition
Hedges of a net investment arise in the consolidated accounts where a parent company takes a
foreign currency loan in order to buy shares in a foreign subsidiary. The loan and the investment
need not be denominated in the same currency, however, assuming that the currencies perform
similarly against the parent company’s own currency, it should be the case that fluctuations in the
exchange rate affect the asset (the net assets of the subsidiary) and the liability (the loan) in opposite
ways, hence gains and losses are hedged.
In this type of accounting hedge, the hedging instrument is the foreign currency loan rather than a
derivative.

You may understand this type of hedge better after studying Chapter 21, which deals with
consolidation of foreign operations, but in a simple sense, without applying hedging rules:
(a) The loan would be retranslated to the parent’s own currency at the year end using the spot
exchange rate; any resultant gain or loss would be recognised in profit or loss.
(b) Prior to consolidation, the subsidiary’s accounts would be translated into the parent’s own
currency with any gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income.
(c) On consolidation, the gain or loss on the loan would affect consolidated profit or loss and the
loss or gain on the translation of the subsidiary’s net assets would affect consolidated reserves.
The net investment hedge ensures that the gains and losses are both recognised in other
comprehensive income and accumulated in reserves by:
• recognising the portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument that is determined to be
effective in other comprehensive income; and
• recognising the ineffective portion in profit or loss.
Any gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is reclassified to profit or loss on the
disposal or partial disposal of the foreign operation.
HB2021

7.3 Hedging with a non-derivative financial instrument
A foreign currency borrowing can be designated as a hedge of a net investment in a foreign
operation, with the result that any translation gain or loss on the borrowing should be recognised in
other comprehensive income to offset the translation loss or gain on the investment. (For hedges
other than hedges of foreign currency risk, when an entity designates a non‑derivative financial asset
or a non‑derivative financial liability measured at fair value through profit or loss as a hedging
instrument, it may only designate the non‑derivative financial instrument in its entirety or a
proportion of it.)
Context example: Use of non-derivative to hedge a net investment

Jenkins Co, whose functional currency is the pound (£), has a subsidiary in France. The subsidiary was
purchased on 30 June 20X6 for €20 million and the acquisition was financed with a loan of €20
million. The carrying amount of the subsidiary in the consolidated financial statements (including
goodwill acquired in the business combination) is €20 million. Jenkins Co has designated the foreign
currency loan of €20 million as a hedge of its net investment in the foreign subsidiary.
Jenkins Co has a 30 June year end. The foreign currency rates at 30 June 20X6 and 30 June 20X7
were £1 = €1.52 and £1 = €1.48 respectively. In the year ended 30 June 20X7, the exchange
difference on the opening net investment should be calculated as:
€ £
At 30 June 20X6 20,000,000 13,157,895
At 30 June 20X7 20,000,000 13,513,514
Exchange gain 355,619
There is a corresponding loss on the foreign currency loan of £355,619. Because the hedge is
perfectly effective, both the gain and the entire loss will be recognised in other comprehensive
income. There is no ineffective portion of the loss on the hedging instrument to be recognised in
profit or loss.
7.4 Hedging with derivatives

A net investment can be hedged with a derivative instrument, such as a currency forward contract. In
this case, however, it would be necessary to designate at inception that effectiveness can be
measured by reference to changes in spot exchange rates or changes in forward exchange rates.
7.5 The effect of re-balancing on hedge accounting

As we saw in section 4, in order to maintain a hedge ratio that complies with hedge effectiveness
requirements, a hedge relationship may have to be rebalanced. There are two ways of achieving this.
(a) Increasing or decreasing the volume of the hedging instrument; or
(b) Increasing or decreasing the volume of the hedged item
The effect of a rebalancing on the accounting treatment described in the sections above is as
follows:
Volume of hedging No effect on measurement of changes in fair value of original volume of

instrument increased hedging instrument.
No effect on measurement of changes in fair value of hedged item.
Changes in value of additional volume of hedging instrument are
measured starting from the date of rebalancing rather than from the date
on which the hedging relationship was designated.
Volume of hedging No effect on measurement of changes in fair value of volume of hedging

instrument decreased instrument that continues to be designated part of the hedge.
No effect on measurement of changes in fair value of hedged item.
HB2021

The volume by which the hedging instrument was decreased is no longer
part of the hedging relationship. The reporting entity therefore retains a
derivative, but only part of it is a hedging instrument in the hedge
relationship. The undesignated part of the derivative is accounted for in
accordance with normal IFRS 9 requirements ie, at fair value through profit
or loss.
Volume of hedged No effect on measurement of changes in fair value of hedging instrument.

item increased No effect on measurement of changes in fair value of original volume of
hedged item.
Changes in value of additional volume of hedged item are measured
starting from the date of rebalancing rather than from the date on which
the hedging relationship was designated.
Volume of hedged No effect on measurement of changes in fair value of hedging instrument.

item decreased No effect on measurement of changes in fair value of volume of hedged
item that continues to be designated part of the hedge.
The volume by which the hedged item was decreased is not part of the
hedge from the rebalancing date, and is accounted for as a
discontinuation of hedge accounting.
7.6 Summary of hedge accounting

The following table summarises the accounting treatment under IFRS 9 of the main types of hedges.
Fair value hedge Cash flow hedge
Gain or loss on Profit or loss Other comprehensive

hedging instrument (Or OCI if the hedged item is an equity income
instrument for which an entity has elected to
present changes in fair value in OCI)
Adjustment to hedged Profit or loss N/A

item (Or OCI if an equity instrument and OCI
election made)
Hedge ineffectiveness Yes Yes

is recorded in profit or
loss
Gains or losses N/A Yes

reclassified to profit or
loss later
7.7 Types of hedge and their treatment

The following grid will be useful in distinguishing the types of hedge and their treatment.
Firm commitment Forecast transaction (highly probable)
Foreign currency Either fair value hedge or cash flow Cash flow hedge
hedge
Other Fair value hedge Cash flow hedge
HB2021

It may not be immediately obvious what type of hedge is being used. The above tables sum up the
treatment and can be used as an overview in order to structure your thinking about the information
in the question.
Interactive question 13: Comprehensive fair value hedge

Toprate Exports, whose functional currency is the dollar (USD), has significant receipts in pounds
sterling (GBP). In order to protect itself from currency fluctuations relating to its foreign currency
receivables, it frequently enters into contracts to sell GBP forward. On 31 October 20X1 the company
recognised a receivable of GBP 1 million, due on 31 January 20X2.
On 31 October 20X1 the company entered into a three-month forward contract for settlement on 31
January 20X2 to sell GBP 1 million at USD 1 = GBP 0.6202. The spot rate on 31 October 20X1 was
USD 1 = GBP 0.6195.
At 31 December 20X1, the forward rate for settlement on 31 January 20X2 was USD 1 = GBP 0.6440
(spot rate on 31 December 20X1 was USD 1 = GBP 0.6435).
The applicable dollar yield curve gives the following (annualised) rate for discounting a cash flow
occurring on 31 January 20X2:
At 31 December 20X1 0.325%
The company set up the appropriate documentation on 31 October 20X1 to treat the forward
contract as a fair value hedge and designated the hedging relationship as being changes in the spot
element of the forward exchange contract.
Requirement
Explain, showing relevant financial statement extracts, the accounting treatment of these transactions
in Toprate Exports’s financial statements (insofar as the information provided permits) for the year
ended 31 December 20X1. (Notes to the financial statements are not required.)
You should perform any discounting necessary to the nearest month and work to the nearest $1.
8 Disclosures
Section overview
This section covers the disclosures required in respect of hedging.
Under IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures an entity should disclose the following separately for
each type of hedge described in IFRS 9 (ie, fair value hedges, cash flow hedges and hedges of net
investments in foreign operations):
• A description of each type of hedge
• A description of the financial instruments designated as hedging instruments and their fair values
at the reporting date
• The nature of the risks being hedged
For cash flow hedges, an entity should disclose the following:
• The periods when the cash flows are expected to occur and when they are expected to affect
profit or loss
• A description of any forecast transaction for which hedge accounting had previously been used,
but which is no longer expected to occur
HB2021

• The amount that was recognised in other comprehensive income during the period
• The amount that was reclassified from equity to profit or loss for the year, showing the amount
included in each line item in the statement of comprehensive income
• The amount that was reclassified from equity during the period and included in the initial cost or
other carrying amount of a non-financial asset or non-financial liability whose acquisition or
incurrence was a hedged highly probable forecast transaction
An entity should disclose the following separately:
• In fair value hedges, gains or losses:
– on the hedging instrument; and
– on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk
• The ineffectiveness recognised in profit or loss that arises from cash flow hedges
• The ineffectiveness recognised in profit or loss that arises from hedges of net investments in
foreign operations
9 IAS 39 requirements on hedge accounting

Section overview
• This section provides an overview of the hedging rules in IFRS 9’s predecessor, IAS 39, Financial
Instruments: Recognition and Measurement.
• Entities may apply the new IFRS 9 rules in their entirety, or entities may apply the hedge
accounting rules of IAS 39 to all of their hedging relationships while following the classification
and measurement rules of IFRS 9.
• Entities undertaking macro hedging activities may apply the new general hedge accounting
model in IFRS 9 while continuing to apply the specific macro hedging requirements of IAS 39.
• IFRS 9 is the default standard for your exam.
Note: For the purpose of the exam, the candidate would be expected to use IFRS 9, but must
understand the main differences in IAS 39, which can still be applied with regard to hedging.
9.1 What is macro hedging?

Macro hedging, also known as portfolio hedging, is a technique whereby financial instruments with
similar risks are grouped together and the risks of the portfolio are hedged together. Often this is
done on a net basis with assets and liabilities included in the same portfolio. For example, instead of
using interest rate swaps to hedge interest rate exposure on a loan by loan basis, banks hedge the
risk of their entire loan book or specific portions of the loan book.
Currently, IFRS 9 does not address macro hedging.
In general, IAS 39 does not permit an overall net position to be designated as a hedged item, for
example a UK entity that has to make a purchase of £10 million in 30 days and a sale of £2 million in
30 days cannot designate the net purchase of £8 million as the hedged item. The exception is that
IAS 39 permits macro hedging for the interest rate risk associated with a portfolio of financial assets
or liabilities. There are, however, clearly prescribed procedures that must be followed in order to do
so.
9.2 IAS 39 hedging differences

A number of aspects of hedge accounting are different under IAS 39; however, the following are the
same as IFRS 9:
• The terminology used in IAS 39 and IFRS 9 is generally the same.
• The three types of hedges – fair value hedge, cash flow hedge and net investment hedge are the
same.
• Hedge ineffectiveness is recognised in profit or loss except for the other comprehensive income
option for equity investments.
HB2021

• Hedge accounting with written options is prohibited.
9.3 IFRS 9 hedging v IAS 39 hedging: summary of key differences

The IFRS 9 model for hedge accounting differs from that in IAS 39 in the following key areas:
IFRS 9 IAS 39
Eligibility of Any financial instrument may be a Derivatives may be designated as

hedging hedging instrument if it is hedging instruments.
instruments measured at fair value through Non-derivatives may be designated as
profit or loss. hedging instruments only for hedge of
foreign currency risk.
Therefore, under IAS 39 non-derivative items are less widely used as hedging instruments than
under IFRS 9.
Eligibility of In addition to IAS 39 eligible Recognised assets, liabilities, firm

hedged items hedged items, IFRS 9 allows a risk commitments, highly probable forecast
component of a non-financial transactions and net investments in
asset or liability to be designated foreign operations may be designated as
as a hedged item in some hedged items. In some circumstances,
circumstances. risk components of a financial asset or
liability may be designated as a hedged
item.
Therefore fewer items can be designated as hedged items under IAS 39.
Qualifying criteria Hedge effectiveness criteria are A hedging relationship only qualifies for
for applying principles-based and aligned with hedge accounting if certain criteria are
hedge risk management activities. met, including a quantitative hedge
accounting effectiveness test under which hedge
effectiveness must fall in the range 80% -
125%.
Therefore genuine hedging relationships captured by IFRS 9 may be missed when applying IAS
39 rules.
Rebalancing Rebalancing is permitted by IFRS The concept of rebalancing does not

9 in some circumstances (see exist within IAS 39.
above).
Lack of guidance on rebalancing means that hedge accounting needs to be discontinued under
IAS 39, while it could continue under IFRS 9.
Discontinuation Hedge accounting may not be Hedge accounting may be discontinued

of hedging discontinued where the hedging at any time.
relationships relationship continues to meet
qualifying criteria. Can only
discontinue when qualifying
criteria are no longer met.
The absence of strict discontinuation rules means that IAS 39 was less precise than IFRS 9.
Accounting for The time value component of an The forward element of a forward
the time value option is a cost of hedging contract may also be presented in OCI.
component of presented in OCI. The part of an option that reflects time
options and value and the forward element of a
forward contracts forward contract are treated as
derivatives held for trading purposes.
IAS 39 therefore led to greater volatility in profit or loss than IFRS 9 does.
HB2021

10 Audit focus: fair value
Section overview
• Fair value measurements of assets, liabilities and components of equity may arise from both the
initial recording of transactions and later changes in value.
• Auditing fair value requires both the assessment of risk and evaluating the appropriateness of the
fair value and how it is disclosed.
• Fair value is a key issue to investment property, pension costs, share-based payments and many
other areas of financial accounting.
10.1 Audit issues around fair value

For the auditor, the use of fair values will raise a number of issues. The determination of fair value will
generally be more difficult than determining historical cost. It will be more difficult to establish
whether fair value is reasonable for complex assets and liabilities than for more straightforward
assets or liabilities which have an actively traded market and therefore a market value.
Generally speaking, the trend towards fair value accounting will increase audit work required, not
only because determining fair values is more difficult, but also because fair values fluctuate in a way
that historical costs do not, and will need vouching each audit period. Fair value will, for the same
reasons, increase audit risk.
ISA (UK) 540 (Revised December 2018) Auditing Accounting Estimates and Related Disclosures
addresses the ongoing complexity and subjectivity of accounting estimates in company accounts
(including those related to financial instruments) by considering factors such as estimation
uncertainty for management and professional scepticism for auditors when assessing such
estimates. ISA 540 is covered in more detail in Chapter 6.
10.2 Auditing fair values

ISA 540 (revised) considers all accounting estimates, including those that relate to fair value. In
overview, the standard requires the following when auditing fair values.
• When assessing the risk of material misstatement, ISA 540 (revised) requires auditors to consider
both the entity and its environment and any internal controls in place at the entity (ISA 540.13).
• Risk assessment is usually split into inherent and control risks (ISA 540.16):
– Inherent risks would include the inherent complexity and subjectivity associated with fair
values, such as changes in the marketplace (ISA 540.A59).
– Control risk would consider the techniques used by management in creating accounting
estimates, especially if models are required (ISA 540.A39) or the use of an expert for
calculations requiring complicated level 3 fair values (ISA 540.A31).
• The audit of fair value estimates is a contest between auditor and management, where
professional scepticism is used by the former to counter the risk of bias by the latter (ISA
540.32D-1).
– For example, when reviewing ranges subject to estimation uncertainty, auditors should
consider the reasonableness of ranges used by management to reach such amounts (ISA
540.A47).
– Auditors should also consider if suitable segregation of duties exists in departments who are
responsible for deriving fair value estimates for which they would receive a bonus (ISA
540.A51).
• Subsequent events are used to assess the reasonableness of fair value estimates (ISA 540. A92).
• The auditor should adopt suitable procedures for determining adequate disclosure (ISA 540.31)
especially in relation to the various quantitative and qualitative risks involved.
HB2021

Section overview
• Financial instruments include items such as cash, accounts receivable and payable, loans
receivable and payable, debt and equity investments, and derivatives.
• Financial instruments should be classified as either financial assets, financial liabilities or equity
instruments.
• The key audit issue with these instruments is risk and IAS 32; IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 deal with the
accounting/disclosure related to these instruments.
• Guidance for the auditor is provided by IAPN 1000.
11.1 IAPN 1000

In December 2011, the IAASB issued IAPN 1000, Special Considerations in Auditing Financial
Instruments. IAPN 1000 has been developed to help auditors with different levels of familiarity with
financial instruments. It is therefore structured in two sections. Section I provides background and
educational material to help those less familiar with financial instruments to understand some of the
common features, and how they are used, managed and controlled by entities and particular
financial reporting issues. Section II provides guidance on the relevant auditing considerations.
The introduction of the IAPN sets out the scope. It explains that the IAPN does not address the
simplest financial instruments such as cash, simple loans, trade accounts receivable and trade
accounts payable, nor the most complex ones. It also does not address specific accounting
requirements, such as those relating to hedge accounting, offsetting or impairment.
11.1.1 Section I – Background information about financial instruments

Purpose and risks of using financial instruments
Financial instruments are used for the following purposes:
• Hedging purposes (ie, to change an existing risk profile to which an entity is exposed)
• Trading purposes (ie, to enable an entity to take a risk position to benefit from long-term
investment returns or from short-term market movements)
• Investment purposes (eg, to enable an entity to benefit from long-term investment returns)
Management and those charged with governance might not:
• fully understand the risks of using financial instruments
• have the expertise to value them appropriately
• have sufficient controls in place over financial instrument activities
Business risk and the risk of material misstatement also increase when management inappropriately
hedge risk or speculate.
In particular the entity may be exposed to the following types of risk:
(a) Credit risk (the risk that one party will cause a financial loss to another party by failing to
discharge an obligation)
(b) Market risk (the risk that the fair value or future cash flow of a financial instrument will fluctuate
because of changes in market prices eg, currency risk, interest rate risk, commodity and equity
price risk)
(c) Liquidity risk (includes the risk of not being able to buy or sell a financial instrument at an
appropriate price in a timely manner due to a lack of marketability for that financial instrument)
(d) Operational risk (related to the specific processing required for financial instruments)
The risk of fraud may also be increased where an employee in a position to perpetrate a financial
fraud understands both the financial instruments and the process for accounting for them, but
management and those charged with governance have a lesser degree of understanding.
HB2021

Fair value is an area where judgement must be applied, particularly in the context of financial
instruments where some instruments, such as derivatives and options, are high risk.
Controls relating to financial instruments

The level of sophistication of an entity’s internal control will be affected by the size of the entity and
the extent and complexity of the financial instruments used. An entity’s internal control over financial
instruments is more likely to be effective when management and those charged with governance
have:
(a) established an appropriate control environment;
(b) established a risk management process;
(c) established information systems that provide an understanding of the nature of the financial
instrument activities and the associated risks; and
(d) designed, implemented and documented a system of internal control to:
(1) provide reasonable assurance that the use of financial instruments is within the entity’s risk
management policies;
(2) properly present financial instruments in the financial statements;
(3) ensure that the entity is in compliance with applicable laws and regulations; and
(4) monitor risk.
The Appendix to IAPN 1000 provides examples of controls that may exist in an entity that deals with
a high volume of financial instrument transactions. These include authorisation, segregation of duties
(particularly of those executing the transaction (dealing) and those initiating cash payments and
receipts (settlements)) and reconciliations of the entity’s records to external banks’ and custodians’
records.
Completeness, accuracy and existence
The IAPN discusses a number of practical issues. For example, it explains that where transactions are
cleared through a clearing house the entity should have processes to manage the information
delivered to the clearing house. Adequate IT controls must also be maintained.
It also explains that in financial institutions where there is a high volume of trading, a senior
employee typically reviews daily profits and losses on individual traders’ books to evaluate whether
they are reasonable based on the employee’s knowledge of the market. Doing so may enable
management to determine that particular trades were not completely or accurately recorded, or may
identify fraud by a particular trader.
Valuation of financial instruments
Section I also provides material on financial reporting requirements. It explains that many financial
reporting frameworks require financial instruments, including embedded derivatives, to be
measured at fair value. In general, the objective of fair value is to arrive at the price at which an
orderly transaction would take place between market participants at the measurement date under
current market conditions; that is, it is not the transaction price for a forced liquidation or distressed
sale. In meeting this objective all relevant market information is taken into account. It also explains
that fair value measurement may arise at both the initial recording of transactions and later when
there are changes in value. Changes in fair value measurement may be treated differently depending
on the reporting framework. The IAPN then explores features of different financial reporting
frameworks, including the following:
• The fair value hierarchy (as adopted by IFRS 13)
• The effects of inactive markets
• Management’s valuation processes
• The use of models, third-party pricing sources and experts (entities often make use of a third party
to obtain fair value information, particularly when expertise or data are required that management
does not possess)
HB2021

11.1.2 Section II – Audit considerations relating to financial instruments
IAPN 1000 identifies certain factors that make auditing complex financial instruments particularly
challenging:
• Management and the auditors may find it difficult to understand the nature of the instruments and
the risks to which the entity is exposed.
• Markets can change quickly, placing pressure on management to manage their exposures
effectively.
• Evidence supporting valuation may be difficult to obtain.
• Individual payments may be significant, which may increase the risk of misappropriation of assets.
• The amount recorded may not be significant, but there may be significant risks and exposures
associated with these complex financial instruments.
• A few employees may exert significant influence on the entity’s financial instruments transactions,
in particular where compensation arrangements are tied to revenue from these.
Professional scepticism
The need for professional scepticism increases with the complexity of the financial instruments, for
example with regard to the following:
• Evaluating whether sufficient appropriate audit evidence has been obtained (which can be
particularly challenging when models are used or in determining if markets are inactive)
• Evaluating management’s judgements and potential for management bias in applying the
applicable financial reporting framework (eg, choice of valuation techniques, use of assumptions
in valuation techniques)
• Drawing conclusions based on the audit evidence obtained (for example assessing the
reasonableness of valuations prepared by management’s experts)
Planning considerations
The auditor’s focus in planning is particularly on the following:
• Understanding the accounting and disclosure requirements
ISA 540 requires the auditor to obtain an understanding of the requirements of the applicable
financial reporting framework relevant to accounting estimates.
• Understanding the complex financial instruments
This helps the auditor to identify whether:
– important aspects of a transaction are missing or inaccurately recorded;
– a valuation appears appropriate;
– the risks inherent in them are fully understood and managed by the entity; or
– the financial instruments are appropriately classified into current and non-current assets and
liabilities.
Understanding management’s process for identifying and accounting for embedded
derivatives will help the auditor to understand the risks to which the entity is exposed.
• Determining whether specialised skills and knowledge are needed in the audit
The engagement partner must be satisfied that the engagement team and any auditor’s experts
collectively have the appropriate competence and capabilities.
• Understanding and evaluating the system of internal control in the light of the entity’s financial
instrument transactions and the information systems that fall within the scope of the audit
This understanding must be obtained in accordance with ISA 315. This understanding enables the
auditor to identify and assess the risks of material misstatement at the financial statement and
assertions levels, providing a basis for designing and implementing responses to the assessed
risks of material misstatement.
• Understanding the nature, role and activities of the internal audit function
Areas where the work of the internal audit function may be particularly relevant are as follows:
– Developing a general overview of the extent of use of financial instruments
HB2021

– Evaluating the appropriateness of policies and procedures and management’s compliance with
them
– Evaluating the operating effectiveness of financial instrument control activities
– Evaluating systems relevant to financial instrument activities
– Assessing whether new risks relating to financial instruments are identified, assessed and
managed
• Understanding management’s process for valuing financial instruments, including whether
management has used an expert or a service organisation
Again this understanding is required in accordance with ISA 540.
• Assessing and responding to the risk of material misstatement (see below)
Assessing and responding to the risk of material misstatement
Factors affecting the risk of material misstatement include the following:
• The volume of financial instruments to which the entity is exposed
• The terms of the financial instruments
• The nature of the financial instruments
• Fraud risk factors (eg, where there are employee compensation schemes, difficult financial market
conditions, ability to override controls)
The assessment of risk will determine the appropriate audit approach in accordance with ISA 330,
The Auditor’s Responses to Assessed Risks, including substantive procedures and tests of controls.
Where the entity is involved in a high level of trading and use of financial instruments, it is unlikely
that sufficient evidence will be obtained through substantive testing alone. Where there are relatively
few transactions of this nature a substantive approach may be more efficient. In reaching a decision
on the nature, timing and extent of testing of controls the auditor may consider factors such as:
• the nature, frequency and volume of financial instrument transactions;
• the strength of controls including design;
• the importance of controls to the overall control objectives;
• the monitoring of controls and identified deficiencies in control procedures;
• the issues controls are intended to address;
• frequency of performance of control activities;
• level of precision the controls are intended to achieve;
• evidence of performance of control activities; and
• timing of key financial instrument transactions (eg, whether they are close to the period end).
Designing substantive procedures will include consideration of the following:
• Use of analytical procedures – they may be less effective as substantive procedures when
performed alone, as the complex drivers of valuation often mask unusual trends
• Non-routine transactions – this applies to many financial instrument transactions and a substantive
approach will normally be the most effective means of achieving the planned audit objectives
• Availability of evidence – eg, when the entity uses a third-party pricing source, evidence may not
be available from the entity
• Procedures performed in other audit areas – these may provide evidence about completeness of
financial instrument transactions eg, tests of subsequent cash receipts and payments, and the
search for unrecorded liabilities
• Selection of items for testing – where the financial instrument portfolio comprises instruments with
varying complexity and risk judgemental sampling may be useful
In some cases ‘dual-purpose’ tests may be used ie, it may be efficient to perform a test of controls
and a test of details on the same transaction eg, testing whether a signed contract has been
maintained (test of controls) and whether the details of the financial instrument have been
appropriately captured in a summary sheet (test of details). Areas of significant judgement would
normally be tested close to, or at, the period end.
HB2021

Procedures relating to completeness, accuracy, existence, occurrence and rights and obligations may
• Remaining alert during the audit when inspecting records or documents (eg, minutes of meetings
of those charged with governance, specific invoices and correspondence with the entity’s
professional advisers)
• External confirmation of bank accounts, trades and custodian statements
• Reconciliation of external data with the entity’s own records
• Reading individual contracts and reviewing support documentation
• Reviewing journal entries or the internal control over the recording of such entries to determine if
entries have been made by employees other than those authorised to do so
• Testing controls eg, by reperforming controls
Valuation of financial instruments
Management is responsible for the valuation of complex financial instruments and must develop a
valuation methodology. In testing how management values the financial instrument, the auditor
should undertake one or more of the following procedures:
(a) Test how management made the accounting estimate and the data on which it is based
(including any models)
(b) Test the operating effectiveness of controls over how management made the accounting
estimate, together with appropriate substantive procedures
(c) Develop a point estimate or a range to evaluate management’s point estimate
(d) Determine whether events occurring up to the date of the auditor’s report provide audit
evidence regarding the accounting estimate
Audit procedures may include the following:
• Reviewing and assessing the judgements made by management
• Considering whether there are any other relevant price indicators or factors to take into account
• Obtaining third-party evidence of price indicators eg, by obtaining a broker quote
• Assessing the mathematical accuracy of the methodology employed
• Testing data to source materials
Significant risk
The auditor’s risk assessment may lead to the identification of one or more significant risks relating to
valuation. The following circumstances would be indicators that a significant risk may exist:
• High measurement uncertainty
• Lack of sufficient evidence to support management’s valuation
• Lack of management understanding of its financial instruments or expertise to value these
correctly
• Lack of management understanding of the complex requirements of the applicable financial
reporting framework
• The significance of valuation adjustments made to model outputs when the applicable reporting
framework requires or permits such adjustments
Where significant risks have been identified the auditor is required to evaluate how management has
considered alternative assumptions or outcomes and why it has rejected them, or how management
has addressed estimation uncertainty in making the accounting estimate. The auditor must also
evaluate whether the significant assumptions used by management are reasonable. To do this the
auditor must exercise professional judgement.
The IAPN also considers audit considerations for valuation in three specific circumstances: when
management uses a third-party pricing source, when management estimates fair value using a model
and when a management’s expert is used.
Possible approaches to gathering evidence regarding information from third-party pricing sources
may include the following:
• For Level 1 inputs, comparing the information from third-party pricing sources with observable
market prices
HB2021

• Reviewing disclosures provided by third-party pricing sources about their controls and processes,
valuation techniques, inputs and assumptions
• Testing the controls management has in place to assess the reliability of information from third-
party pricing sources
• Performing procedures at the third-party pricing source to understand and test the controls and
processes, valuation techniques, inputs and assumptions used for asset classes or specific
financial instruments of interest
• Evaluating whether the prices obtained from third-party pricing sources are reasonable in relation
to prices from other third-party pricing sources, the entity’s estimate or the auditor’s own estimate
• Evaluating the reasonableness of valuation techniques, assumptions and inputs
• Developing a point estimate or a range for some financial instruments priced by the third-party
pricing source and evaluating whether the results are within a reasonable range of each other
• Obtaining a service auditor’s report that covers the controls over validation of the prices
When management estimates fair value using a model IAPN 1000 states that testing the model can
be accomplished by two main approaches:
(a) The auditor can test management’s model, by considering the appropriateness of the model
used by management, the reasonableness of the assumptions and data used, and the
mathematical accuracy.
(b) The auditor can develop their own estimate and then compare the auditor’s valuation with that
of the entity.
When a management expert is used the requirements which must be applied are the basic
requirements of ISA 500 as discussed in Chapter 6. Procedures would include evaluating the
competence, capabilities and objectivity of the management’s expert, obtaining an understanding of
their work and evaluating the appropriateness of that expert’s work as audit evidence.
Presentation and disclosure
Audit procedures around presentation and disclosure are designed in consideration of the assertions
of occurrence and rights and obligations, completeness, classification and understandability, and
accuracy and valuation.
As was mentioned in connection with derivatives in the previous chapter, the complexity of hedging
makes clear and transparent communication essential.
Other relevant audit considerations

Written representations should be sought from management in accordance with ISA 540 and ISA
580, Written Representations.
11.1.3 Practice Note 23

Practice Note 23 Special Considerations in Auditing Financial Instruments was revised in July 2013.
The revised Practice note is based on IAPN 1000 discussed above. Some additional points are
however included as follows:
Section 1
• Operational risk includes model risk (the risk that imperfections and subjectivity of valuation
models are not properly understood, accounted for or adjusted for) (PN23.18)
• Complete and accurate recording of financial instruments is an essential core objective (PN23.24-
1)
• When quoted prices are used as evidence of fair value, the source should be independent and
where possible more than one quote (PN23.44-1)
• Where a price has been obtained from a pricing service and that price has been challenged,
when considering whether the corrected price is a suitable basis for valuation, consideration
should be given to how long the challenge process has taken and whether the underlying data
remains valid (PN23.56-1)
HB2021

• A key control over management’s valuation process may be an independent price verification
function which forms part of internal control (PN23.62-1)
Section 2
• Although it is not part of the auditor’s role to determine the amount of risk an entity should take
on, obtaining an understanding of the risk management process may identify risks of material
misstatement (PN23.70-1)
• Assertions about valuation may be based on highly subjective assumptions, therefore evaluating
audit evidence in respect of these requires considerable judgment (PN23.71-2)
• Determining materiality for financial instruments may be particularly difficult (PN23.73-1)
• When deciding which audits other than those of listed entities require an engagement quality
control review, the existence of financial instruments may be a relevant factor (PN23.73-2)
• When obtaining an understanding of the entity’s financial instruments, the auditor will consider
the view of any correspondence with regulators in accordance with the FCA Code (PN23.76-2)
• The involvement of experts or specialists may be needed (PN23.79)
• The auditor may need to consider the control environment applicable to those responsible for
functions dealing with financial instruments (PN23.89-2)
• Substantive procedures will include reviewing operational data such as reconciling differences
(PN23.104)
• The auditor may use information included in a Prudent Valuation Return (prepared by UK banks
and other regulated entities in the financial sector) to understand the uncertainties associated
with the financial instruments used and disclosed by these entities (PN23.108-1)
• Tests of valuation include: verifying the external prices used to value financial instruments,
confirming the validity of valuation models, and evaluating the overall results and reserving for
residual uncertainties (PN23.113-1)
• The auditor must consider whether management has given proper consideration to the models
used (PN23.134-1)
• When evaluating the amount of an adjustment that might be required, the auditor considers all
factors taken into account in the valuation process and uses experience and judgment (PN23.137-
1)
Interactive question 14: Convertible debenture

On 1 January 20X8 Berriman plc issued a £10 million debenture at par. The debenture has a nominal
rate of interest of 4% and is redeemable on 1 January 20Y3. On this date, the holder has the option
to convert the debenture to 6 million £1 ordinary shares in Berriman plc. The financial statements
currently show a long-term liability which represents the net proceeds of the debenture. The first
payment of interest on 31 December 20X8 has also been recorded.
Requirements
14.1 Identify the issues surrounding this debenture
14.2 List the audit procedures you would perform
Context example: Royal Bank of Scotland

In the Royal Bank of Scotland (RBS)’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2014,
Deloitte, RBS’s statutory auditors, noted that the valuation of complex or illiquid financial instruments
was an area of audit risk which had merited specific audit focus. Their auditor’s report described the
risk, and the audit team’s responses to the risk, as follows:
Risk
The valuation of the Group’s financial instruments was a key area of focus of our audit given the
degree of complexity involved in valuing some of the financial instruments and the significance of
the judgements and estimates made by the directors. As set out in Note 11 of the consolidated
financial statements, financial instruments held at fair value comprised assets of £534 billion and
HB2021

liabilities of £497 billion. In the Group’s accounting policies, the directors have described the key
sources of estimation involved in determining the valuation of financial instruments and in particular
when the fair value is established using a valuation technique due to the instrument’s complexity or
due to the lack of availability of market-based data.
Our audit has focused on testing the valuation adjustments including those for credit risk, funding
related and own credit. A particular area of focus of our audit has been in testing the valuation of the
more illiquid financial instruments disclosed as Level 3 instruments which comprised assets of £5
billion and liabilities of £5 billion.
How the scope of our audit responded to the risk
We tested the design and operating effectiveness of the key controls in the Group’s financial
instrument valuation processes including the controls over data feeds and other inputs into valuation
models and the controls over testing and approval of new models or changes to existing models.
Our audit work also included testing a sample of the underlying valuation models and the
assumptions used in those models using a variety of techniques. This work included valuing a sample
of financial instruments using independent models and source data and comparing the results to the
Group’s valuations and the investigation of any significant differences.
For instruments with significant, unobservable valuation inputs, we used our own internal valuation
experts to assess and challenge the valuation assumptions used, including considering alternative
valuation methodologies used by other market participants.
12 Auditing derivatives
Section overview
It is necessary for auditors to understand the process of derivative trading in order to audit
derivatives successfully.
12.1 Auditing derivatives in the modern world

The key to using derivatives as part of an overall investment strategy is to have adequate internal
controls in place and trained personnel handling the investments. Derivatives, which have been
around for a very long time in one form or another, have been put to good use by transferring risk
from one party, the hedger, to another, the speculator. There are many factors in today’s world which
can cause derivative investment strategies to go wrong. As we have seen, such factors can include
the following:
• A lack of internal controls
• A laissez-faire management
• Greed
• Ineffective systems to identify and monitor risk
• Inexperience
An understanding of the business process involved in derivatives trading is necessary in order to
audit derivatives successfully. The steps in a typical process are as follows:
(a) Entering the deal in the trader’s deal sheet
(b) Trader types the deal into the system and sends an email
(c) The back office include the deal in reports
(d) Back office process the deal using market quote information from agencies
(e) Enter details into a ‘pre-programmed’ Excel sheet and/or other processing package
(f) Confirm deal with brokers/counterparties
(g) Carry out monthly settlement/processing
(h) Net off between Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable and wire the payment as necessary
HB2021

Each type of derivative will be different and non-standard derivatives will be unique. This poses
challenges for the auditor.
Generally, however, the auditor should seek to:
(a) understand the client‘s business in order to establish the real role played by, and the risks that
are inherent in, the derivatives activity;
(b) document the system. This would involve documenting various processes;
(c) identify the controls in each process in order to establish the risk passed to the client by
inadequate or missing controls; and, therefore, to establish the audit risk and thus the audit work
that needs to be performed;
(d) carry out the appropriate control and substantive audit procedures; and
(e) make conclusions and report on the outcome of the audit of derivatives.
Obviously the exact nature of what is to be done is dependent on the circumstances of the client.
Ensuring that the information has been captured completely and accurately in each case is
important.
Worked example: Systems and processes

Typically a large oil refining company in one country will obtain oil from different sources and refine
it, producing various petroleum products for its customers.
Imagine the company is involved in trading in crude oil futures. The traders will take forward
positions strategically with the information relating to future oil price movement available at the time.
If the traders expect the price to rise, they will take a long position (buy the commodity forward) and
if they expect it to fall they will take a short position (sell the commodity forward).
Requirement
Identify the key processes that the auditor would seek evidence for in connection with this.
Solution
Capture of information: The primary source document is the trader’s deal sheet. This document
should contain the date, time, oil index, quantity traded, position (long or short), nature of trade
(hedge or speculation) and rationale for the trade.
Processing of information: The back office report should contain the same information as in the deal
sheet.
Confirmation of information: There should be a statement from the clearing agents (since these are
futures) confirming the details. (Note: Swaps transactions would be confirmed differently, via
counterparty and broker confirmations and options are confirmed in the same way that futures are.)
Depositing of margin money: There should be evidence that margin money had been deposited
with the exchange as required (in case the mark to market crosses the exchange’s threshold limits).
Settlement: There will be clearing statements from clearing agents. These should be used in
collaboration with internally generated information to confirm that the appropriate settlement
amounts changed hands.
Accounting: The deals have been accounted for correctly.
In all these processes controls will have been implemented and the auditor should identify these and
assess their utility.
Interactive question 15: Derivatives

You are the auditor in charge of the audit of Johannes plc, a UK company with the pound (£) as its
functional currency.
On 1 January 20X7, Johannes plc (J) entered into a forward contract to purchase 40,000 barrels of
crude oil at $70 per barrel on 1 January 20X9. J is not using this as a hedging instrument and is
speculating that the price of oil will rise and plans to net settle the contract if the price rises. J does
not pay anything to enter into this forward contract. At 31 December 20X7, the fair value of the
HB2021

forward contract has increased to £500,000. At 31 December 20X8, the fair value of the forward
contract has declined to £400,000.
Requirements
15.1 Identify the accounting entries you would expect to see at the inception of the contract, at 31
December 20X7, and at 31 December 20X8.
15.2 Identify the risks you would expect to find in this arrangement, and the audit procedures that
you would carry out.
15.3 Outline the steps that you would take to ensure compliance with IFRS 7, Financial Instruments:
Disclosures.
HB2021

Summary
IFRS 9, Financial Instruments:

Recognition and Measurement
Designated
hedging relationships
Hedged item Hedging instrument
Hedge accounting
conditions
Hedge effectiveness Documentation
Types of hedge
Hedge of
Fair value hedges Cash flow hedges
net investment
IFRS 7, Financial Instruments:

Disclosures
Hedge accounting
HB2021

1. What are the three types of hedge dealt with in IFRS 9, Financial Instruments? (Topic 1)
2. What is a hedged item? (Topic 2)
3. Which contracts can be designated as hedging instruments? (Topic 3)
4. Do you understand the conditions that must be met for hedge accounting to be applied?
(Topic 4)
5. How should a hedge of a firm commitment be treated? (Topic 6)
6. What are the main issues for the auditor when auditing derivatives? (Topic 7)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Hedging This is a short, straightforward introduction to a complex topic.
JayGee This question requires explanation rather than calculation, which could
happen in an exam, particularly in the context of decision making for the
future.
Anew This is an integrated question, which revises derivatives, covered in an

earlier chapter and tests the audit, trading and hedging aspects.
Kime (note 2 only) This part of the question deals with hedging a trade receivable from a
customer located abroad using a forward contract.
Johnson Telecom This is a must-do full question on financial instruments, integrating FR and
audit. Instruments covered are: investments in equity instruments,
derivatives (with hedging), debt investments and a loan note.
Tydaway (forward You are asked to consider four hedging scenarios relating to how the
contract with China forward contract should be treated.
only)
HB2021

chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 Hedging relationships – IFRS 9

• Types of hedging relationships – IFRS 9.6.1
• Examples – IFRS 9. IE
2 Hedge accounting
• Definition – IFRS 9 Appendix A
• Conditions – IFRS 9 6.4.1
• Qualifying instruments – IFRS 9 6.2.1
• Written and purchased options – IFRS 9 6.2.1
• Non-qualifying instruments – IFRS 9 6.4.1
• Designations of hedging instruments – IFRS 9 6.2.1
4 Fair value hedges

• Recognition of gains or losses – IFRS 9 6.5.1
• Discontinuing fair value hedge accounting – IFRS 9 6.5.1
5 Cash flow hedges

• Recognition of gains or losses – IFRS 9 6.5.1
• Hedge of a forecast transaction – IFRS 9 6.5.1
• Discontinuing cash flow hedge accounting – IFRS 9 6.5.1
6 Hedges of a net investment – IFRS 9 6.5.1
7 Hedge effectiveness
• Criteria – IFRS 9 6.4.1
• Timing of assessment and methods of assessing effectiveness – IFRS 9 6.4.1
8 Auditing fair value measurements and disclosures

• Understanding the entity’s process – ISA 540.8
• Evaluating reasonableness – ISA 540.18, A116–A119
• Audit procedures – ISA 540.13
• Written representations – ISA 540.22

• Professional scepticism – IAPN 1000.71
• Planning – IAPN 1000.73–.84
• Substantive procedures – IAPN 1000.96
• Valuation – IAPN 1000.114, .118
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Hedging
A company owns 100,000 barrels of crude oil which were purchased on 1 July 20X2 at a cost of
$26.00 per barrel.
In order to hedge the fluctuation in the market value of the oil, the company signs a futures contract
on the same date to deliver 100,000 barrels of oil on 31 March 20X3 at a futures price of $27.50 per
barrel. The conditions for hedge accounting were met.
Due to unexpected increases in production, the market price of oil on 31 December 20X2 was
$22.50 per barrel and the futures price for delivery on 31 March 20X3 was $23.25 per barrel at that
date.
Requirement
Explain the impact of the transactions on the financial statements of the company for the year ended
31 December 20X2.
2 Columba
The Columba Company has hedged the cash flows relating to its interest rate risk by purchasing an
interest rate cap. The conditions for hedge accounting were met.
Additional interest charges up to the end of the financial year amount to £17,000 while the fair value
of the interest rate cap increased by £20,000.
Requirement
What amount relating to the interest rate cap should be recorded in profit or loss?
3 Pula
The Pula Company manufactures heavy engineering equipment which it sells in many countries
throughout the world. The functional currency of Pula is the pound (£).
On 1 November 20X7 Pula entered into a contract with the Roadmans Company, whose functional
currency is the N$, to sell a bulldozer for delivery on 1 April 20X8. The contract price is fixed in N$.
Also on 1 November 20X7, Pula entered into a foreign currency forward contract to hedge its future
exposure to changes in the £:N$ exchange rate, arising from the contract with Roadmans.
The conditions for hedge accounting were met.
Requirement
What designations are available to Pula in respect of the hedging arrangement?
4 JayGee
On 1 August 20X1, JayGee entered into a non-cancellable purchase order to acquire equipment
from Zenda Corporation, a Ruritanian entity, at 300 million rurits (Ru). Payment is made upon delivery
of the equipment to the UK on 31 December 20X1. On 30 September 20X1, JayGee entered into a
forward contract to exchange Ru 300 million at a pre-determined exchange rate between the rurit
and pound sterling on 31 December 20X1. The functional currency of JayGee is the pound sterling
(£).
Requirement
Discuss the accounting implications for the purchase contract and forward contract if fair value
hedge accounting is adopted.
HB2021

5 Tried & Tested plc
You are a senior in the firm that acts as auditors and advisers to Tried & Tested plc (T&T). The finance
director of T&T is proposing to restructure the company’s loans to find cheaper sources of finance,
because she thinks that the company’s financial gearing is too high in relation to its uncertain cash
inflows. The engagement partner has attended a meeting with the finance director and has obtained
the following information.
T&T: Notes of meeting
• T&T has completed 2 years of a 10-year 8.5% fixed-rate mortgage on its premises amounting to
£2.5 million, and it is on this loan that the finance director is looking to reduce interest costs.
• T&T’s bank has indicated that it could swap the interest charges on its loan with another of its
customers, LeytonPlus plc (LP), which wishes to fix its interest liabilities in view of uncertain interest
rate prospects.
• LP has a floating rate loan of £3.8 million on which it currently pays SONIA + 2.0%.
The swap agreement
Because of its higher credit rating T&T has negotiated that it should pay LP at a rate of SONIA + 1.0%
as its contribution to the swap. For its part LP would pay 8.8% fixed to T&T. The bank will charge T&T
0.04% per annum of the swap value for the service. The swap agreement would last for 5 years and
would be for £2.5 million (assume the current SONIA to be 6%).
Other credit facilities
LP and T&T have additional loan facilities available to them as follows:
• LP can obtain fixed rate loans at 10% per annum for up to 20 years.
• T&T can obtain floating rate loans at SONIA + 1.0%.
You have been sent the following note by the engagement partner.
On the basis of my meeting notes please draft notes covering the following issues:
• The audit and assurance issues regarding the swap arrangement including an assessment of
whether the proposed swap may be designated a hedge.
• The control structure you would expect to be in place to manage the risks associated with the
swap.
• The finance director has had little experience of swap agreements, and requires confirmation of
the net reduction in annual interest costs to T&T if the swap is agreed. Please produce this
calculation.
Requirement
Respond to the partner’s note.
6 Anew plc
Anew plc (Anew), a client of your firm, has recently established a treasury and investment division
within its existing business. The division deals in derivatives, in addition to other treasury and
investment instruments, for both trading and hedging purposes. Most of the company’s derivative
trading activities relate to sales, positioning and arbitrage. Sales activities involve offering products to
customers and banks in order to enable them to transfer, modify or reduce current and future risks.
Positioning involves managing market risk positions with the expectation of profiting from favourable
movements in prices, rates or indices. Arbitrage involves profiting from price differentials between
markets or products.
The company has adopted a comprehensive system for the measurement and management of risk.
Part of the risk management process involves managing the company’s exposure to fluctuations in
foreign exchange and commission rates, to reduce exposure to currency and commission rate risks
to acceptable levels as determined by the board of directors within the guidelines issued by the
Central Bank. The company uses different types of derivatives, including swaps, forwards and futures,
forward rate agreements, options and swaptions.
HB2021

Requirements
6.1 In planning the audit of Anew, identify and explain five key risks that may arise from the
derivatives trading activities that the newly formed division is involved in.
6.2 Identify and explain the general controls and application controls which you consider
necessary for ensuring that these risks are controlled appropriately.
6.3 You have as one of the assistants on the audit Melanie, who has just completed the
professional level examinations. She has asked you for a briefing note on “how to distinguish
derivatives activity for trading purposes from derivatives activity for hedging purposes, and
how these are accounted for and audited within the international accounting and auditing
framework”.
Requirement
In response to this request and considering that Melanie’s main interest is in the audit of these
instruments, draft a memorandum to Melanie providing her with the advice she requires,
clarifying any ambiguous phrases in her request.
Your memorandum should be structured under the following headings.
• Derivative instruments
• Use of derivatives for trading purposes
• Use of derivatives for hedging purposes
• The audit of derivative instruments
7 Terent Property plc

You are a senior in the firm that acts as auditors and advisers to Terent Property plc (TP), a listed
property developer. The engagement partner has recently been to a meeting with the finance
director of TP, Michael Mainor (MM), to discuss the expansion of TP’s property portfolio. In order to
finance this expansion, TP will require further funding but it expects that operating cash flows arising
from proposed developments will more than offset any financing costs. The proposals for new
developments were discussed at the meeting with the engagement partner, who has made the
following notes.
Meeting notes
• TP has a range of sites to develop over the next seven years and is considering financing the
portfolio over that period.
• MM is concerned that, in order to arrange sufficient financing over such a period, higher returns
than normal will have to be offered to investors. He is considering issuing convertible debt and
has had a quotation of likely costs from his banking adviser (Exhibit 1).
• In order to keep investors with the company over such a long period, enhanced interest
convertible debt (Exhibit 1) is being considered, and that is the basis of the quotation provided.
• MM has mentioned the following matters.
• He is uncertain as to the impact on the financial statements of such an issue and he is worried
about City reaction, since as recently as last year the company had a rights issue, which proved to
be a difficult exercise.
• MM is concerned with the board’s reaction to the financing proposal. The directors have been
advised by their bankers that the rates quoted really are the lowest they are likely to achieve. He is
particularly concerned that the financing meets the company’s normal criteria for investing
(Exhibit 2).
You have been sent the following note from the engagement partner.
To Senior
Have a look at this and let me know how the proposed debt will impact on the points raised by MM.
Please clarify what this type of debt is. Also, for our purposes, outline any assurance issues arising for
the forthcoming audit and, very importantly, those relating to fair value.
Signed: A Partner
HB2021

Requirement
Respond to the partner’s note.
Exhibit 1: Financing arrangements – Terent Property plc

A £10 million convertible debt with enhanced interest is proposed.
Issued at a 10% premium and redeemed at par.
Issue costs of £288,000 are expected.
The effective interest rate is 10%.
Interest payable annually in arrears.
Redemption without conversion after seven years.
Exhibit 2: Background file note

Current capital structure is:
£m
Share capital (£1 shares) 10.0
Retained earnings 9.6
Long-term debt (11% irredeemable bonds) 8.2
Corporation tax rate: 23%. The current share price of TP is £12.48 and the P/E ratio is 8 (before
interest charges). The company operates a policy that any additional debt financing must reduce the
company’s overall cost of capital.
this chapter.
HB2021


1.1 Explanation
This forward contract is a derivative. It is a financial liability because it is unfavourable at the
year end.
Under the forward contract, BCL has to pay £3.125 million ($2m ÷ 0.64).
At the year end, an equivalent contract would only have cost £2.857 million ($2m ÷ 0.7).
Therefore, the contract is standing at a loss of £0.268 million (£3.125m – £2.857m) at the year
end. This is why it is a financial liability.
Normally derivatives are treated as being held for trading, so this contract will be treated as a
financial liability at fair value through profit or loss.
Journal entry:
DEBIT Profit or loss £0.268m

CREDIT Financial liability £0.268m
Being the recognition of the liability and loss on forward contract

1.1
(a) Recording the gain or loss
If the forward contract is to be treated as a hedging instrument, it should still be measured
at its fair value of £0.268 million but the loss should be recognised in other comprehensive
income instead of profit or loss.
Why different treatment is necessary
The reason for hedging is to try to offset the gain/loss on the hedged item with the
corresponding loss/gain on the hedging instrument.
With a cash flow hedge, the hedged item is often a future or forecast transaction that has
not yet been recorded in the financial statements. If the normal accounting treatment was
applied, the loss on this hedging instrument would be recognised in profit or loss in one
period and the gain on the hedged item would be recognised in profit or loss in a later
period, so the offsetting effect would not be reflected.
When the gain on the hedged item occurs and is recognised in profit or loss, the loss on
the forward contract should be reclassified from other comprehensive income to profit or
loss. This matches the gain and loss and better reflects the offsetting that was the purpose
of the transaction.
(b) Extract from statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year
ended 31 August 20X0
£m
Profit for the year 1.000
Loss on forward contract (0.268)
Total comprehensive income 0.732
HB2021

(a) Initial recognition
DEBIT Investment in equity instruments £112,560

Being the initial recognition of investment in equity instruments at fair value, including
transaction costs (W1).
Measurement at 31 July 20X3
DEBIT Investment in equity instruments £5,840

CREDIT Other comprehensive income £5,840
Being the gain on remeasurement of the investment in equity instruments (W2). (The gain will be
recognised in other components of equity.)
WORKINGS
(1) Fair value March 20X3
£
Fair value (40,000 shares @ £2.68) 107,200
Commission (5% × 107,200) 5,360
112,560
(2) Gain to 31 July 20X3
£
Fair value (40,000 shares @ £2.96) 118,400
Previous value (112,560)
5,840
(b) Discussion as follows:

Fair value hedge
The entity has elected under IFRS 9 to recognise gains and losses on investments in equity
instruments in other comprehensive income and the gain or loss on a derivative is recognised in
profit or loss.
However, assuming that the derivative meets the criteria to be treated as a hedging instrument, it
would be treated as a fair value hedge. This means that:
• the gain or loss on the investment in equity instruments (the ‘hedged item’) would be taken to
other comprehensive income; and
• this would be offset by the corresponding loss or gain on the derivative, also in other
comprehensive income (IFRS 9.5.8).
This treatment is a fair reflection of the economic substance of the hedging arrangement, where
the intention is that the changes in value of the derivative will cancel out the changes in value of
the hedged item.

The credit default swap (CDS) is recognised as a derivative at fair value through profit or loss. IFRS 9
allows fair value option for a proportion of the loan commitment. If this option is elected, then
£500,000 of the loan commitment is accounted for at fair value through profit or loss and, as a result,
provides an offset to the fair value through profit or loss on the CDS.
HB2021

(a) The futures contract was intended to protect the company from a fall in oil prices (which would
have reduced the profit when the oil was eventually sold). However, oil prices have actually risen,
so that the company has made a loss on the contract.
Without hedge accounting
The futures contract is a derivative and therefore should be remeasured to fair value under IFRS
9. The loss on the futures contract should be recognised in profit or loss:
DEBIT Profit or loss (40,000 × [£24 – £22]) £80,000

CREDIT Financial liability £80,000
(b) With hedge accounting

The loss on the futures contract should be recognised in profit or loss, as before.
There is an increase in the fair value of the inventories:
£
Fair value at 31 December 20X3 (40,000 × £22.25) 890,000
Fair value at 1 December 20X3 = cost (800,000)
Gain 90,000
The gain should also be recognised in profit or loss and adjusted against the carrying amount of
the inventories:
DEBIT Inventory £90,000

The net effect on profit or loss is a gain of £10,000 compared with a loss of £80,000 without
hedging.

The hedge is fully effective, as the gain on the hedging instrument is less than the loss on the cash
flows. The total gain of £8,800 is therefore recognised in other comprehensive income. The double
entry is:
DEBIT Hedging instrument (SOFP) £8,800

CREDIT Other comprehensive income £8,800

No. A cash flow hedge is defined as a hedge of the exposure to variability in cash flows attributable
to a particular risk. In this case, the issued debt instrument does not give rise to any exposure to
volatility in cash flows since the interest is calculated at a fixed rate.
The entity may designate the swap as a fair value hedge of the debt instrument, but it cannot
designate the swap as a cash flow hedge of the future cash outflows of the debt instrument.

No. The FRA does not qualify as a cash flow hedge of the cash flow relating to the fixed rate assets
because they do not have a cash flow exposure.
The entity could, however, designate the FRA as a hedge of the fair value exposure that exists before
the cash flows are remitted.
HB2021

8.1 IFRS 9 allows both of these two methods.
If the hedge is treated as a fair value hedge, the gain or loss on the fair value remeasurement of
the hedging instrument and the gain or loss on the fair value remeasurement of the hedged
item for the hedged risk should be recognised immediately in profit or loss.
8.2 If the hedge is treated as a cash flow hedge, the portion of the gain or loss on remeasuring the
forward contract that is an effective hedge should be recognised in other comprehensive
income. The amount should be reclassified in profit or loss in the same period or periods
during which the hedged item (the liability) affects profit or loss ie, when the liability is
remeasured for changes in foreign exchange rates. Therefore, if the hedge is effective, the gain
or loss on the derivative is released to profit or loss in the same periods during which the
liability is measured, not when the payment occurs.

The entity does have this choice.
If the entity designates the foreign exchange contract as a fair value hedge, the gain or loss from
remeasuring the forward exchange contract at fair value is recognised immediately in profit or loss,
and the gain or loss on remeasuring the receivable is also recognised in profit or loss.
If the entity designates the foreign exchange contract as a cash flow hedge of the foreign currency
risk associated with the collection of the receivable, the portion of the gain or loss that is determined
to be an effective hedge should be recognised in other comprehensive income, and the ineffective
portion in profit or loss. The amount held in equity should be reclassified to profit or loss in the same
period or periods during which changes in the measurement of the receivable affect profit or loss.

Given that RapidMart is hedging the volatility of the future cash outflow to purchase fuel, the forward
contract is accounted for as a cash flow hedge, assuming all the criteria for hedge accounting are
met (ie, the hedging relationship consists of eligible items, designation and documentation at
inception as a cash flow hedge, and the hedge effectiveness criteria are met).
At inception, no entries are required as the fair value of a forward contract at inception is zero.
However, the existence of the hedge is disclosed under IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures.
At the year end, the forward contract must be valued at its fair value of £0.12 million as follows. The
gain is recognised in other comprehensive income (items that may subsequently be reclassified to
profit or loss) in the current year as the hedged cash flow has not yet occurred. This will be
reclassified to profit or loss in the next accounting period when the cost of the diesel purchase is
recognised.
WORKING
£m
Market price of forward contract for delivery on 31 December (1m × £2.16) 2.16
RapidMart’s forward price (1m × £2.04) (2.04)
Cumulative gain 0.12
The gain is recognised in other comprehensive income as the cash flow has not yet occurred:
DEBIT Forward contract (financial asset in SOFP) £0.12m

CREDIT Other comprehensive income £0.12m
HB2021

Foreign currency receivables
£’000
Receivable originally recorded (30,240/5.6) 5,400
Receivable at year end (30,240/5.4) 5,600
Exchange gain 200
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Trade receivables 200
CREDIT Profit or loss (other income) 200
Forward contract
This is a cash flow hedge: £’000 £’000

DEBIT Other comprehensive income 200
DEBIT Finance cost (forward points) 20
CREDIT Financial liability 220
As the change in cash flow affects profit or loss in the current period, a reclassification adjustment is
required (£’000):
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Profit or loss 200

Cash flow hedge
Value of contract: £’000

Price at 31 December 20X2 (3,000 × 1,400) 4,200
Price at 1 November 20X2 (3,000 × 1,440) (4,320)
Loss (120)
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Other comprehensive income 120
CREDIT Financial liability 120
The tax treatment follows the IFRS treatment. However, the current tax credit has not yet been
recorded. This is credited to other comprehensive income rather than profit or loss, as the loss itself
on the contract is recognised in other comprehensive income (IAS 12.61A):
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Current tax liability (SOFP) (120 × 30%) 36
CREDIT Income tax credit (OCI) 36
HB2021

The purpose of the forward contract is to hedge the fair value of the recognised receivable due to
fluctuations in exchange rates. It is therefore a fair value hedge.
Providing relevant documentation has been set up, which appears to be the case here, hedge
accounting rules can be used provided that:
• the hedge is expected to be highly effective at achieving offsetting changes in fair value;
• the effectiveness of the hedge can be reliably measured; and
• the hedge is assessed to actually have been highly effective.
The foreign currency receivable will initially be recognised at the spot rate at the date of the
transaction ie, at USD1,614,205 (GBP 1 million/0.6195).
At 31 December 20X1, the receivable is restated in accordance with IAS 21 to USD1,554,002 (GBP 1
million/0.6435). A loss of USD60,203 ($1,614,205 – $1,554,002) is therefore recognised in profit or
loss.
The forward contract is recognised in the financial statements at 31 October 20X1. However, no
double entries are recorded, as the value of a forward contract at inception is zero.
However, recognition of the hedge will trigger disclosure under IFRS 7 as follows:
• A description of the hedge
• A description of the forward contract designated as a hedging instrument
• The nature of the risk being hedged (ie, change in exchange rates affecting the fair value of the
receivable)
• Gains and losses on the hedging instrument and the hedged item
At 31 December 20X1, the change in fair value of the forward contract is recognised in profit or loss
as this is a fair value hedge:
$
[(–1mGBP/0.6440 + (1mGBP/0.6202)) × (1/1.003251/12)] 59,572
At 31 October 20X1 (zero at inception) (0)
Change in fair value of forward contract (gain) 59,572
The company has designated changes in the spot element of the forward contract as the hedge. The
change in the spot element is:
$
[(–1mGBP/0.6435 + (1mGBP/0.6195)) × (1/1.003251/12)] 60,187
At 31 October 20X1 (zero at inception) (0)
Change in fair value of spot element of forward contract (gain) 60,187
Effectiveness of the hedge is calculated as:

(Cumulative change in fair value of spot element of hedging instrument/Cumulative change in fair
value of hedged item)
= ($60,187/($60,203*) = 99.97% (or 100.03% if measured the other way around)
* If the effect of discounting short-term receivables to obtain a more precise fair value is taken into
account, this could be measured at $60,187 giving effectiveness of exactly 100%.
The hedge is measurable and effective. Therefore hedge accounting can be used, assuming the
hedge is expected to be highly effective until 31 January 20X2.
HB2021

The interest element (which arises due to different interest rates between the currencies of the
forward contract) is excluded from the hedging relationship and recognised as a finance cost:
$ $
Forward contract 59,572
DEBIT Finance costs (P/L) (60,187 – 59,572) 615
CREDIT Profit or loss 60,187
Profit or loss: $
Loss on foreign currency receivable (60,203)
Gain on hedging instrument 60,187
Finance costs (615)
Current assets $
Trade receivables (1,614,205 – 60,203) 1,554,002
Forward contract hedging instrument 59,572

14.1 Issues
The treatment of the debenture does not appear to comply with accounting standards. It
should be treated as a hybrid instrument, split into its equity and liability components. Normally
the liability component should be calculated as the discounted present value of the cash flows
of the debenture, discounted at the market rate of interest for a comparable borrowing with no
conversion rights. The remainder of the proceeds represents the fair value of the right to
convert and this element should be reclassified as equity.
14.2 Procedures
• Obtain a copy of the debenture deed and agree the nominal interest rate and conversion
terms
• Assuming the revised treatment is adopted, review schedule calculating the fair value of the
liability at the date of issue. Confirm that an appropriate discount rate has been used (ie,
market rate of interest for a comparable borrowing with no conversion rights)
• Agree initial proceeds and interest payment to cash book and bank statement
• Review adequacy of disclosures in accordance with accounting standards

15.1 There are no accounting entries at the inception of the forward contract.
On 31 December 20X7, there is an increase in derivative asset (increase in fair value of forward
contract) of £500,000 and this is reflected in profit or loss as a gain.
On 31 December 20X8, there is a decrease in derivative asset of £100,000 and this is reflected
as a loss in profit or loss for the year.
15.2 As illustrated in part (a) one of the risks is that the fair value of the asset will go down. This is
referred to as market risk – a risk relating to the adverse changes in the fair value of the
derivative; in this case the forward contract. This is a very real risk for J.
There is foreign exchange risk. This is the risk that J’s earnings will be affected as a result of
fluctuations in currency exchange rates. J’s functional currency is GBP but crude oil prices are
quoted in the USD. The movement in the £/$ exchange rate will affect J’s earnings arising from
this contract.
There is credit risk – the risk that the counterparty will not settle the obligation at full value.
HB2021

There is the related settlement risk – the risk that settlement will take place without J receiving
value from the counterparty.
Solvency risk is the risk that J will not have the funds to settle when the payment for the barrels
becomes due. This may be related to the market risk described above.
There is also interest rate risk. This is the risk that J will suffer loss as a result of fluctuations in the
value of the forward contract due to changes in market interest rates. If the movement in
interest rates is such that the price of crude goes down then J will be affected adversely.
• As auditor, I would need to do the following:
• Assess the audit risk and design audit procedures to ensure that risk is reduced to an
acceptable level.
• Understand J’s accounting and internal control system to enable me to assess whether it is
adequate to deal with forward contracts of this type specifically, but also with any type of
derivatives J carries out, generally. I would need to assess the control environment to ensure
that it is strong enough and that J has clear control objectives in place. Control objectives
would include authorised execution of the deal, checking completeness and accuracy of the
information, prevention and detection of errors, appropriate accounting for changes in the
value of the derivative (the forward contract), and general ongoing monitoring.
• Confirm that appropriate reconciliations are carried out and that there are appropriate
controls around the reconciliations. The reconciliations would include:
– the one between the dealer’s deal sheet and the back office records used for the ongoing
monitoring process; the one between the clearing and bank accounts and the broker
statements to ensure that all outstanding items are identified and promptly cleared; and
the one between J and the appropriate brokers and agents.
• Verify that data security procedures are adequate to ensure recovery in the case of disaster
by reference to either IT staff or via observation of suitable back-up procedures.
• I would carry out procedures to ensure that the amounts recorded at the year ends (31
December 20X7 and 31 December 20X8) are appropriate. These would include:
– inspecting the agreement for the forward contract and the supporting documentation to
ensure that the agreement occurred (at 31 December 20X7 only) and confirming that the
situation has not changed subsequently;
– inspecting documentation for evidence of the purchase price (at 31 December 20X7
only); and
– obtaining evidence collaborating the fair value of the forward contract; for example
quoted market prices.
15.3 I would confirm that the following IFRS 7 disclosures have been made.
• The accounting policy for financial instruments including forwards, especially how fair value
is measured.
• Net gains to be recorded in profit or loss (£500,000 for year ending 31 December 20X7) and
net losses (£100,000 for year ending 31 December 20X8).
• The fair value of the asset category which includes the forward contract. The disclosure
should be such that it permits the information to be compared with the corresponding
carrying amount.
• The nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments, including forward contracts.
The disclosures should be both qualitative and quantitative.
HB2021

1 Hedging
The futures contract was entered into to protect the company from a fall in oil prices and hedge the
value of the inventories. It is therefore a fair value hedge.
The inventories should be recorded at their cost of $2,600,000 (100,000 barrels at $26) on 1 July
20X2.
The futures contract has a zero value at the date it is entered into, so no entry is made in the financial
statements.
Note: However, the existence of the contract and associated risk would be disclosed from that date
in accordance with IFRS 7.
At the year end the inventories should be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
Hence they should be measured at $2,250,000 (100,000 barrels at $22.50) and a loss of $350,000
However, a gain has been made on the futures contract:
$
The company has a contract to sell 100,000 barrels on 31 March 20X3 at $27.50 2,750,000
A contract entered into at the year end would sell these barrels at $23.25 on 31
March 20X3 2,325,000
Gain (= the value the contract could be sold on for to a third party) 425,000
The gain on the futures contract should also be recognised in profit or loss:
DEBIT Future contract asset $425,000

CREDIT Profit or loss $425,000
The net effect on profit or loss is a gain of $75,000 ($425,000 less $350,000), whereas without the
hedging contract there would have been a loss of $350,000.
Note: If the fair value of the inventories had increased, the carrying amount of the inventories should
have been increased by the same amount and this gain also recognised in profit or loss (normally
gains on inventories are not recognised until the goods are sold). A loss would have occurred on the
futures contract, which should also have been recognised in profit or loss.
2 Columba
A gain of £3,000 should be recognised in profit or loss.
The ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument should be recognised in profit
or loss. In a cash flow hedge the amount to be recognised in other comprehensive income is the
lower of:
• the cumulative gain/loss on the hedging instrument ie, £20,000; and
• the cumulative change in fair value of the hedged item ie, £17,000.
So £17,000. This leaves £3,000 of the increase in the fair value of the cap to be recognised in profit
or loss.
3 Pula
The hedging relationship may be designated either a fair value hedge or a cash flow hedge.
The contract to sell the bulldozer represents a firm commitment with Roadmans, not merely a
proposed transaction, and it is expressed in a currency other than Pula’s functional currency. A hedge
HB2021

of the foreign currency risk of a firm commitment may be accounted for as a fair value hedge or as a
cash flow hedge.
4 JayGee
If JayGee designates the hedge as a fair value hedge, the non-cancellable purchase order in rurits is
considered as a firm commitment to be hedged (hedged item) in connection with the spot foreign
currency risk.
The rurit forward contract is considered to be the hedging instrument.
As a financial derivative, the rurit forward contract will have been reported at fair value on each
reporting date, with gains or losses reported in profit or loss.
Under a fair value hedge, the change in fair value of the firm commitment related to the hedged risk
will also be recognised in profit or loss and adjusts the carrying amount of the hedged item. This
applies if the hedged item is otherwise measured at cost. For JayGee’s hedged item, which is an
unrecognised firm commitment, its cumulative change in the fair value attributable to the hedged
risk is recognised as an asset or liability.
5 Tried & Tested plc

Audit and assurance issues
Assessment of proposed swap
• The hedging relationship qualifies for hedge accounting only if all the following conditions are
met:
(a) At the inception of the hedge there is formal designation and documentation of the
hedging relationship, and the entity’s risk management objective and strategy for
undertaking the hedge. That documentation shall include identification of the hedging
instrument, the hedged item or transaction, the nature of the risk being hedged and how
the entity will assess the hedging instrument’s effectiveness in offsetting the exposure to
changes in the hedged item’s fair value or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk.
(b) The hedge is expected to be highly effective in achieving offsetting changes in fair value or
cash flows attributable to the hedged risk, consistently with the originally documented risk
management strategy for that particular hedging relationship.
(c) For cash flow hedges, a forecast transaction that is the subject of the hedge must be highly
probable and must present an exposure to variations in cash flows that could ultimately
affect profit or loss.
(d) The effectiveness of the hedge can be reliably measured ie, the fair value or cash flows of
the hedged item that are attributable to the hedged risk and the fair value of the hedging
instrument can be reliably measured.
(e) The hedge is assessed on an ongoing basis and determined actually to have been highly
effective throughout the financial reporting periods for which the hedge was designated.
Other audit and assurance issues
• This is a relatively complex transaction which will increase audit risk, particularly as the finance
director has had little experience of this type of transaction before.
• T&T is exposed to interest rate risk if the swap goes ahead. T&T has changed its fixed interest
commitments to variable commitments. It is possible that interest rates will rise, particularly as
interest rates are said to be uncertain.
• Since T&T has a better credit rating, it is possible that it may face risk of default from LP on the
loan payments under the swap agreement.
• The finance director is concerned about the level of gearing within the company. While steps are
being taken to deal with the situation, this issue will need to be considered as part of the going
concern review.
• The extent to which the bank will be expecting to place reliance on financial information as part of
the process of agreeing the swap and any specific assurances which we might be required to
provide.
HB2021

6 Anew plc
6.1 Reduction in annual interest costs
Variable rate interest liabilities and income for T&T
%
Interest on fixed loan currently paid 8.5
Received from LP under swap agreement (8.8)
Difference (0.3)
Payment by T&T to LP under swap agreement (SONIA + 1) 6 + 1.0
Total variable payments by T&T 6.7
This is a 0.3% reduction on its SONIA facilities.
£ £
T&T currently pays – fixed (8.5% × £2.5m) 212,500
Will pay
Interest (6.7% × £2.5m) 167,500
Bank charge (0.04% × £2.5m) 1,000
(168,500)
Net annual saving 44,000
6.2 Necessary general controls and application controls

Note: This answer assumes that a computer system is used in processing trades involving
derivatives.
General controls
A number of general controls may be relevant in this case, for example the following:
• For credit risk, general controls may include ensuring that off-market derivative contracts
are only entered into with counterparties from a specific list and establishing credit limits for
all customers.
• For legal risk, a general control may be to ensure that all transactions are reviewed by
properly qualified lawyers and regulation specialists.
• For market risk, a general control may be to set strict investment acceptance criteria and
ensure that these are adhered to.
• For settlement risk, a general control may be to set up a third party through whom
settlement takes place, ensuring that the third party is instructed not to give value until
value has been received.
• For solvency (liquidity) risk, general controls may include having diversified funding
sources, managing assets with liquidity in mind, monitoring liquidity positions, and
maintaining a healthy cash and cash equivalents balance.
Application controls
These include the following:
• A computer application may identify the credit risk. In this case, an appropriate control may
be monitoring credit exposure, limiting transactions with an identified counterparty and
stopping any further risk-increasing transactions with that counterparty.
• For legal risk, an application control may be the system insisting that it will not process a
transaction/trade until an authorised person has signed into the system to give the
authority. Such an authorised person may be different depending on the nature and type of
transaction. In some cases it may be the company specialist solicitor; yet in other cases it
may just be the dealer’s supervisor.
HB2021

• For market risk, an application control may carry out mark to market activity frequently and
the production of timely exception management reports.
• For settlement risk, an application control may be a computer settlement system refusing to
release funds/assets until the counterparty’s value has been received, or an authorised
person has confirmed to the system that there is evidence that value will be received.
• For solvency risk, an application control may be that the system will produce a report for
management informing management that there needs to be a specific amount of funds
available on a given date to settle the trades coming in for settlement on that date.
6.3 Memorandum
To Melanie
From Jane Chadge
Date 12 November 20X7
Subject Briefing note on all manner of things derivative
Thank you for your recent email asking me to explain how to distinguish derivatives activity for
trading purposes from derivatives activity for hedging purposes. In the same email you asked
me to explain how these instruments are accounted for and audited within the international
accounting and auditing framework. In this briefing note, I am assuming that your reference to
international accounting and auditing framework is to IFRS Standards/IASs (International
Financial Reporting Standards/International Accounting Standards) and ISAs (International
Standards on Auditing UK) for Accounting and Auditing respectively. I am also assuming that
‘… for trading purposes …‘ refers to engagement in derivatives activity for speculative
purposes.
Derivative instruments
• These are financial contracts between two parties where payments are dependent on
movements in price in one or more underlying financial instruments, reference rates or
indices.
• They are financial instruments or other contracts within the scope of relevant accounting
standards. IAS 32, IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 deal with the accounting and disclosure requirements
for derivatives.
• IFRS 9 requires that derivatives be measured at fair value in the statement of financial
position unless they are linked to, and must be settled by, an investment in an unquoted
equity instrument that cannot be reliably measured at fair value.
• In general, derivatives can be used either for speculation (trading) or for hedging (offsetting
risk). How the derivative is accounted for and disclosed will depend on whether it is for
speculative or hedging purposes.
• Generally, a derivative instrument can be any instrument that has the three characteristics
stated in IFRS 9. Derivative instruments include swaps, options, swaptions, forwards and
futures. A derivative instrument can be embedded in another (non-derivative) instrument;
for example, a company issuing a bond whose interest is linked to the USD price of crude
oil, such that the interest payments increase and decrease with this price.
Use of derivatives for trading purposes
• Speculators may trade with other speculators as well as with hedgers. In most financial
derivatives markets, the value of speculative trading is far higher than the value of true
hedge trading.
• As well as outright speculation, derivatives traders may look for arbitrage opportunities
between different derivatives on identical or closely related underlying securities.
• Derivatives such as options, futures or swaps generally offer the greatest possible reward
for betting on whether the price of an underlying asset will go up or down. For example, a
person may believe that an oil company may find more oil reserves in the next year. If the
person bought the stock (share) for £10, and it went to £20 after the discovery was
announced, the person would have made a profit and have a return on his investment.
• Other uses of derivatives are to gain an economic exposure to an underlying security in
situations where direct ownership of the underlying security is too costly or is prohibited by
legal or regulatory restrictions, or to create a synthetic short position. In addition to
HB2021

directional plays (ie, simply betting on the direction of the underlying security), speculators
can use derivatives to place bets on the volatility of the underlying security. This technique
is commonly used when speculating with traded options.
The audit of derivative instruments
• For many entities, the use of derivatives has reduced exposure to changes in exchange
rates, interest rates and commodity prices and other risks.
• The inherent characteristics of derivatives usually result in increased financial risk, in turn
increasing audit risk and presenting the auditor with new challenges.
• To audit derivatives adequately, the auditor needs to:
– have specialist skills and knowledge. In the case of Anew the auditor will need to
understand the operating characteristics and risk profile of the industry in which Anew
operates, the characteristics of the specific derivative used, Anew’s derivatives
information system, how Anew values derivatives and reporting requirements of IFRS 9
and IFRS 7;
– know the business including industrial sector issues, political, economic, sociocultural
and technological factors, the strengths and weaknesses of Anew (eg, experience of
management and those charged with governance), and the reasons for using specific
derivatives (in this case both speculative and risk management);
– identify the key risks (as already identified);
– assess the risk and the internal controls in accordance with ISA (UK) 315 (Revised July
2020), Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement;
– identify internal controls (and test those controls identified to check if they are ‘fit for
purpose’;
– carry out substantive procedures to ensure that key assertions, as identified in ISA 315,
are met. These key assertions relate to existence and occurrence, rights and obligations,
completeness, accuracy, valuation and allocation, and presentation. These would have to
be considered for all material derivatives; and
– handle non-standard derivatives according to the circumstances ensuring that control
and substantive tests have been carried out as appropriate.
I trust that the above points have provided you with the information you require. Please do not
hesitate to seek further clarification on any of these points.
7 Terent Property plc

Points raised by MM
Reporting
An enhanced interest convertible has a dual nominal rate, with the higher rate payable in the latter
part of the term.
The advantage to TP is that it delays the larger cash interest payments to match, presumably, the cash
inflows it will have from its long-term projects (given that a seven-year horizon is envisaged).
Compound instruments have both a liability and an equity element. In that case, IAS 32, Financial
Instruments: Presentation requires that the component parts be split, with each part accounted for
and presented separately according to its substance. A convertible bond is an example that has a
debt element and the value that might be ascribed to the right to purchase future equity. The right
has value, otherwise it would not be packaged into a convertible bond and issued to investors.
IAS 32 requires both liability and equity elements to be disclosed, and suggests some measurement
methods, although it should be realised that these are likely to be approximations.
An example of one measurement method is that the issuer of a bond convertible into ordinary
shares, for example, first determines the carrying amount of the liability component by measuring
the fair value of a similar liability that does not have an associated conversion element. The carrying
amount of the equity option to convert into ordinary shares is then determined by deducting the fair
value of the financial liability from the fair value of the compound financial instrument as a whole.
The financial liability element has a stepped or enhanced interest feature. As such, the payments
required by the debt should be apportioned between a finance charge at a constant rate on the
HB2021

outstanding obligation, and a reduction of the carrying amount. The effect of this accounting on a
stepped interest loan is that an overall effective interest cost will be charged in each accounting
period; an accrual will be made in addition to the cash payments in earlier periods and will reverse in
later periods.
The requirement is that the financing costs are allocated over the term of the loan at a constant
average rate.
For the loan proposal in question, the following would appear in the financial statements over the
term of the loan. (The effective interest rate is 10%.)
Year Bal b/d Finance cost (10%) Cash paid Closing balance
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
1 10,712 1,071 (490) 11,293
2 11,293 1,129 (490) 11,932
3 11,932 1,193 (1,510) 11,615
4 11,615 1,162 (1,510) 11,267
5 11,267 1,127 (1,510) 10,884
6 10,884 1,088 (1,510) 10,462
7 10,462 1,046 (1,510) 9,998
(Rounding error of
£2,000)
The effect given in the financial statements is that of smoothing the costs relating to the debt, with
costs greater than interest actually paid in early years and lower in later years.
The above calculations assume that there is no value attributable to equity conversion rights. The
split accounting treatment in IAS 32 should really use the interest rate on similar bonds without
conversion rights, rather than the 10% rate above, to determine the value of the liability. A constant
rate would apply to all seven years.
Investment criteria
Assuming that the debt is held to redemption, then the cost of debt (yield to redemption) after tax is
found by trial and error. As an initial guess, the cost of debt is likely to be between 15.1% and 4.9%,
and less than the 10% calculated above because of the tax relief on interest, say 8%.
By trial and error therefore:
10.712m = (1 – 0.23)(0.49m × AF2@kd) + (1 – 0.23)(1.51m × AF3–7@kd) + (10m/(1+kd)7)
Try 8%:
RHS = (0.77 × 0.49m × 1.783) + (0.77 × 1.51m × (3.993/1.082) ) + 5.835m
= 0.673m + 3.980m + 5.835m
= 10.488m
This is discounted too much, therefore decrease rate.
Try 7%:
RHS = (0.77 × 0.49m × 1.808) + (0.77 × 1.51m × (4.1/1.072) ) + 6.227m
= 0.682m + 4.164m + 6.227m
= 11.073m
The actual value of 10.712 million is approximately 40% between the two values and thus the after-
tax cost of debt is approximately 7.6%, ie, substituting kd = 7.6% confirms that this is the IRR or cost
of debt after tax.
The impact on WACC, the cost of capital for the company, can then be determined.
The current (growth-adjusted) cost of equity of the company can be found by inverting the P/E ratio.
Thus:
1/8 = 12.5%
HB2021

The current pre-tax cost of debt is taken as the SOFP value at 11%. Therefore the current WACC is as
follows.
Current MV of equity = £12.48 × 10m
= £124.8m
Current value of debt plus equity = £(124.8 + 8.2)m
= £133m
WACC = [((12.5% × 124.8)/133) + (((1 – 0.23) × 11% × 8.2)/133)]
= 12.25%
Since the cost of debt of the convertibles is lower, WACC will fall to:
Revised WACC = (12.25% × 133 + 7.6% × 10.712) ÷ (133 + 10.712)
= 11.90%
This is below the company’s current cost of capital.
However, it is important to appreciate that we have not taken into account any increases in the cost of
equity that might arise as a result of increased financial risk. This is likely to increase, but will be
marginal given that the company’s overall gearing is low.
Without details of cash flow increases from the project we cannot determine by how much the cost of
equity might increase.
Assurance issues
Given that the company had difficulty in raising a rights issue last year, there may be some doubt that
the company can raise debt.
In any case, if the company wishes to finance projects that add to the company’s risk profile, it should
be prepared to accept more relaxed financing criteria than it currently adopts.
We need to assess the additional burden on profitability that the new debt issue will impose. As
mentioned, during the course of our audit, it would be worthwhile seeing the projections relating to
the net cash inflows arising from the proposed developments.
It will be important to assess interest cover relating to the overall debt charges to ensure that the
company is not overexposing itself.
There will be a large redemption in seven years and we should make sure that the company
establishes a sinking fund for this. This will be an additional drain on cash resources.
We will need to verify if there are any covenants on the existing debt. The company may well be in
breach of these should it undertake to develop and finance it in the way proposed.
Once the property development begins we will have to take professional advice on year by year
valuations of the assets.
We will need to review the status of the debt issue for redemptions. Any redemptions will alter
subsequent interest calculations. This will depend on the details of redemption dates in the debt
contract and the likely value of the future share price of the company, which is unknowable at this
time.
It will be important to determine the nature of the cash flows arising from the new development since
there is a substantial increase in interest costs relating to the new debt after the second year.
Presumably the structuring of the debt agreement in this way matches the projected income flows
from the future developments. We should review this to ensure that the company has the appropriate
cash capacity to deal with these levels of outflows.
I have assumed a tax rate of 23%, although this may change in the future and the conclusions of this
report may alter accordingly. As part of our audit it may well be worthwhile conducting some
sensitivity analysis of the cash projects from the new developments to obtain some idea of the
degree of risk to which the company is exposed.
Fair value
The assurance relating to fair value is dealt with in ISA (UK) 540 (Revised December 2018), Auditing
Accounting Estimates and Related Disclosures, and the auditors will almost certainly seek to conduct
their audit in relation to this standard. In particular, they will obtain audit evidence that fair value
measurements and disclosures are in accordance with the entity’s applicable financial reporting
HB2021

framework, including IFRS 13. This will involve gaining an understanding of the entity’s process for
determining fair value measurements and disclosures and of the relevant control activities.
In understanding the processes used to measure fair value, the auditor might look to obtain
assurance on the following:
• Relevant control activities over the process used to measure fair value
• The expertise and experience of those persons determining the fair value measurements
• The precise role that information technology has in the process
• The types of accounts or transactions requiring fair value measurements or disclosures (for
example, whether the accounts arise from the recording of routine and recurring transactions or
whether they arise from non-routine or unusual transactions)
• The extent to which the entity’s process relies on a service organisation to provide fair value
measurements or the data that supports the measurement. When an entity uses a service
organisation, the auditor complies with the requirements of ISA (UK) 402, Audit Considerations
Relating to an Entity Using a Service Organisation
• The extent to which the entity uses the work of experts in determining fair value measurements
and disclosures
• The valuation techniques adopted (ie, Level 1, 2 or 3)
• The valuation approach adopted (income approach, market approach, cost approach)
• The significant management assumptions used in determining fair value (particularly if Level 3
unobservable inputs are used)
• The documentation supporting management’s assumptions
• The methods used to develop and apply management assumptions and to monitor changes in
those assumptions
• The integrity of change controls and security procedures for valuation models and relevant
information systems, including approval processes
• The controls over the consistency, timeliness and reliability of the data used in valuation models
After obtaining an understanding of the processes, the auditor is likely to identify and assess the risks
of material misstatement at the assertion level related to the fair value measurements and disclosures
in the financial statements in order to determine the nature, timing and extent of the further audit
procedures.
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 18
Employee benefits
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Objectives and scope of IAS 19, Employee Benefits
2 Short-term employee benefits
3 Post-employment benefits overview
4 Defined contribution plans
5 Defined benefit plans – recognition and measurement
6 Defined benefit plans – other matters
7 Defined benefit plans – disclosure
8 Other long-term employee benefits
9 Termination benefits
10 IAS 26, Accounting and Reporting by Retirement Benefit Plans
11 Audit focus
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
18
Learning outcomes
• Explain how different methods of providing remuneration for employees may impact upon
reported performance and position
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to employee remuneration which include
different forms of short-term and long-term employee compensation; retirement benefits; and
share-based payment
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 5(a), 5(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
18

of this chapter.
Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive Question

significance
1 Objectives and Approach Although IAS 19 is N/A

scope of IAS 19, Employee benefits frequently
Employee Benefits is one of two examined, you
This very short chapters addressing won’t be tested just
section introduces employee on this introductory
the standard and remuneration. It is a material.
states that it is new and complex
structured as topic to which you
follows: will need to devote
• Short-term a significant amount
employee of time.
benefits Section 1 gives a
• Post- summary of the
employment types of benefits
benefits that the standard
addresses.
• Other long-term
employee Stop and think
benefits Share-based
• Termination payments are
benefits excluded because
they are the subject
of a separate
standard.
2 Short-term Approach The most common N/A

employee benefits The accounting for short-term benefits
Employee benefit short-term that have been
costs can be a very employee benefits tested are bonuses
significant is relatively and holiday pay.
proportion of total straightforward. Both could be
tested in an
HB2021

significance
expenses. The application of integrated way. In

Accounting for the accruals the case of bonuses,
short-term benefits concept in relation ethical issues could
presents few, if any, to liabilities means arise.
problems. that a short-term
benefit should be
recognised as an
employee provides
the services to the
entity on which the
benefits are
payable.
Stop and think
Consider what
short-term benefits
are offered in your
workplace.
3 Post-employment Approach This overview is N/A

benefits overview Read carefully, using unlikely to be tested
This section the diagrams in directly in an exam –
introduces the Sections 3.1 and 3.2 it is there for
concept of defined to aid your background only.
contribution (money understanding.
purchase) and Stop and think
defined benefit
(final salary) plans. Why are defined
benefit plans more
risky than defined
contribution plans?
4 Defined Approach Defined N/A

contribution plans The key points are: contribution plans
You will need to be Recognise have been tested
able to apply the contributions occasionally but you
requirements of IAS payable as an are more likely to be
19 to the relatively expense in the asked about
straightforward period in which the defined benefit
defined employee provides plans.
contribution plans. services
Recognise a liability
where contributions
remain unpaid at
the period end.
Study the worked
example carefully.
Stop and think
Why are defined
contribution plans
becoming more
common?
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 18: Employee benefits 945

significance
5 Defined benefit Approach IAS 19 is new at N/A

plans – recognition Make sure you Advanced Level and
and measurement understand the is examined very
The cost of long- main issue in 5.1 – frequently. The
term and the plan may be in movement on the
post-employment surplus or deficit asset or liability is
benefits, which and the often tested in a
include pension contributions will scenario where the
plans, medical vary accordingly. company has failed
benefits and life to do this properly
Paragraphs 5.4 and treated the plan
insurance, is difficult (movement in
to estimate. like a defined
defined benefit contribution plan.
The entity must rely plan) and 5.5 (four-
on the expertise of step method) are
actuaries. the most important.
Stop and think
What discount rate
should be used?
6 Defined benefit Approach Curtailments and IQ1: Defined

plans – other Past service costs past service costs benefit 1
matters arise from plan have been This is a
This section deals amendments, for examined regularly, comprehensive
with past service example increasing sometimes question covering
costs, curtailments, the benefits interacting with the movement on
settlements and the payable. They deferred tax. the asset or liability
asset ceiling test. usually increase the over three years
obligation, but may with a settlement
reduce it. and an additional
Remeasure the payment.
obligation first. You should do all
Learn the suggested four interactive
approach in Section questions in this
6.5 – this will cover section.
most situations in
the exam.
Stop and think
What is the asset
ceiling?
7 Defined benefit Approach This topic has yet to N/A

plans – disclosure Read through this be examined.
The main section, but
disclosures include remember you can
a description of the always look it up in
plan, a the open book,
reconciliation of the should it be
fair value of plan examined.
assets from the Stop and think
opening to closing
position, the actual Why do we have to
return on plan disclose key
assets, a assumptions and
reconciliation of methods used in the
accounting for
HB2021

significance
movements in the defined benefit

present value of the pension plans?
defined benefit
obligation during
the period, an
analysis of the total
expense recognised
in profit or loss, and
the principal
actuarial
assumptions made.
8 Other long-term Approach This area has not yet N/A

employee benefits Read through been examined yet.
Examples include quickly.
paid sabbaticals Stop and think
and long-term sick
leave. Where are actuarial
gains and losses
recognised?
9 Termination Approach This has briefly been N/A

benefits Read through tested in the context
These are payments quickly. of audit. Disclosures
to encourage could also be
Stop and think tested.
voluntary
redundancy or Recognise a
payments before termination benefit
the normal when there is a firm
retirement date. commitment to end
the employment.
10 IAS 26, Accounting Approach This standard has IQ5: Scope

and Reporting by Skim through not yet been This is a quick
Retirement Benefit quickly – this is examined. multiple choice
Plans examinable only at question which
Retirement benefit Level D. should not take
plans must also Stop and think long.
prepare financial
statements. What are net assets
available for
benefits?
11 Audit focus Approach The audit of defined N/A

Retirement benefits Do not neglect the benefit schemes has
are a challenge for audit focus section – been tested
auditors because of pensions are a regularly, partly in
the degree of popular topic and the context of risk.
judgement and as likely to come up
estimate involved, in an integrated
and the consequent question as in a
risk. single silo FR
question.
Learn the table in
Section 11.1
HB2021

significance
Stop and think

The auditor must
evaluate the
appropriateness of
fair value
measurements,
particularly in
relation to plan
assets.
HB2021

1 Objectives and scope of IAS 19, Employee Benefits
Section overview
IAS 19 considers the following employee benefits:

• Short-term employee benefits
• Post-employment benefits
• Other long-term employee benefits
• Termination benefits
IAS 19, Employee Benefits should be applied by all entities in accounting for the provision of all
employee benefits, except those benefits which are equity based and to which IFRS 2, Share-based
Payment applies. The standard applies regardless of whether the benefits have been provided as
part of a formal contract or an informal arrangement.
Employee benefits are all forms of consideration, for example cash bonuses, retirement benefits and
private health care, given to an employee by an entity in exchange for the employee’s services.
A number of accounting issues arise due to:
• the valuation problems linked to some forms of employee benefits; and
• the timing of benefits, which may not always be provided in the same period as the one in which
the employee’s services are provided.
IAS 19 is structured by considering the following employee benefits:
• Short-term employee benefits; such as wages, salaries, bonuses and paid holidays
• Post-employment benefits; such as pensions and post-retirement health cover
• Other long-term employee benefits; such as sabbatical and long-service leave
• Termination benefits; such as redundancy and severance pay
2 Short-term employee benefits

Section overview
Short-term employee benefits are those that fall due within 12 months from the end of the period in
which the employees provide their services. The required accounting treatment is to recognise the
benefits to be paid in exchange for the employee’s services in the period on an accruals basis.
2.1 All short-term benefits
Definition
Short-term employee benefits: Employee benefits (other than termination benefits) that fall due
within 12 months from the end of the period in which the employees provide their services.
Short-term employee benefits include the following:

(a) Wages, salaries and social security contributions
(b) Short-term absences where the employee continues to be paid, for example paid annual
vacation, paid sick leave and paid maternity/paternity leave. To fall within the definition, the
absences should be expected to occur within 12 months of the end of the period in which the
employee services were provided
HB2021

(c) Profit sharing and bonuses payable within 12 months of the end of the period
(d) Non-monetary benefits, for example private medical care, company cars and housing
The application of the accruals concept in relation to liabilities means that a short-term benefit
should be recognised as an employee provides his services to the entity on which the benefits are
payable. The benefit will normally be treated as an expense, and a liability should be recognised for
any unpaid balance at the year end.
2.2 Short-term compensated absences
Definition
Short-term compensated absences: Compensated absences are periods of absence from work for
which the employee receives some form of payment and which are expected to occur within 12
months of the end of the period in which the employee renders the services.
Examples of short-term compensated absences are paid annual vacation and paid sick leave.
Short-term compensated absences fall into two categories:
• Accumulating absences. These are benefits, such as paid annual vacation, that accrue over an
employee’s period of service and can potentially be carried forward and used in future periods;
and
• Non-accumulating absences. These are benefits that an employee is entitled to, but are not
normally capable of being carried forward to the following period if they are unused during the
period, for example paid sick leave, maternity leave and compensated absences for jury service.
The cost of providing compensation for accumulating absences should be recognised as an expense
as the employee provides the services on which the entitlement to such benefits accrues. Where an
employee has an unused entitlement at the end of the reporting period and the entity expects to
provide the benefit, a liability should be created.
The cost of providing compensation for non-accumulating absences should be expensed as the
absences occur.
Worked example: Paid vacation

An entity has five employees and each is entitled to 20 days’ paid vacation per year, at a rate of £50
per day. Unused vacation is carried forward to the following year.
At the year end, four of the employees have used their full holiday entitlement; the remaining one
has four days’ holiday to carry forward.
All five employees work for the entity throughout the year and are therefore entitled to their 20 days
of vacation.
Requirement
How should the expense be recognised in the financial statements?
Solution
An expense should be recognised as part of staff costs for:
5 employees × 20 days × £50 = £5,000
Four of the employees use their complete entitlement for the year and the other, having used 16
days, is permitted to carry forward the remaining four days to the following period. A liability will be
recognised at the period end for:
1 employee × 4 days × £50 = £200
HB2021

2.3 Profit sharing and bonus plans
An entity should recognise an expense and a corresponding liability for the cost of providing profit-
sharing arrangements and bonus payments when:
(a) the entity has a present legal or constructive obligation. The legal obligation arises when
payment is part of an employee’s employment contract. The constructive obligation arises where
past performance has led to the expectation that benefits will be payable in the current period;
and
(b) a reliable estimate of the obligation can be made.
Worked example: Bonus plan

An entity has a contractual agreement to pay a total of 4% of its net profit each year as a bonus. The
bonus is divided between the employees who are with the entity at its year end. The following data is
relevant:
Net profit £120,000

Average employees 5
Employees at start of year 6
Employees at end of year 4
Requirement
How should the expense be recognised?
Solution
An expense should be recognised for the year in which the profits were made and therefore the
employees’ services were provided, for:
£120,000 × 4% = £4,800
Each of the four employees remaining with the entity at the year end is entitled to £1,200. A liability
of £4,800 should be recognised if the bonuses remain unpaid at the year end.
Conditions may be attached to such bonus payments; commonly, the employee must still be in the
entity’s employment when the bonus becomes payable. An estimate should be made based on the
expectation of the level of bonuses that will ultimately be paid. IAS 19 sets out that a reliable estimate
for bonus or profit-sharing arrangements can be made only when:
• there are formal terms setting out determination of the amount of the benefit;
• the amount payable is determined by the entity before the financial statements are authorised for
issue; or
• past practice provides clear evidence of the amount of a constructive obligation.
Worked example: Annual bonus

An entity with a 30 June year end has a past practice of paying an annual bonus to employees,
although it has no contractual obligation to do so. Its practice is to appropriate 4% of its pre-tax
profits, before charging the bonus, to a bonus pool and pay it to those employees who remain in
employment on the following 30 September.
The total bonus is allocated to employees in proportion to their 30 June salaries, and amounts due to
those leaving over the next three months are retrieved from the bonus pool for the benefit of the
entity.
HB2021

Past experience is that employees with salaries representing 8% of annual salaries leave employment
by 30 September. The entity’s pre-tax profits for the year ended 30 June 20X5 were £4 million.
Requirement
How should the bonus be recognised in the financial statements?
Solution
The bonus to be recognised as an expense in the year ended 30 June 20X5 is:
£4m × 4% × (100 – 8)% = £147,200
3 Post-employment benefits overview

Section overview
Post-employment benefits are employee benefits which are payable after the completion of
employment.
These can be in the form of either of the following:
• Defined contribution schemes where the future pension depends on the value of the fund.
• Defined benefit schemes where the future pension depends on the final salary and years worked.
Definition
Post-employment benefits: Employee benefits (other than termination benefits) which are payable
after the completion of employment. The benefit plans may have been set up under formal or
informal arrangements.
Post-employment benefits include retirement benefits such as:

• pensions
• continued private medical care
• post-employment life assurance
There are two main types of post-employment benefit schemes:
• Defined contribution schemes (money purchase schemes)
• Defined benefit schemes (final salary schemes)
These two alternative schemes are discussed in more detail below.
A pension scheme will normally be held in the form of a trust separate from the sponsoring
employer. Although the directors of the sponsoring company may also be trustees of the pension
scheme, the sponsoring company and the pension scheme are separate legal entities that are
accounted for separately. IAS 19 covers accounting for the pension scheme in the sponsoring
company’s accounts.
3.1 Defined contribution plans

Characteristics of a defined contribution plan are as follows:
• Contributions into the plan are fixed, normally at a percentage of an employee’s salary.
• The amount of pension paid to retirees is not guaranteed and will depend on the size of the plan,
which in turn depends on the performance of the pension fund investments.
HB2021

Figure 18.1: Defined contribution plans
Variables – returns on investments

Time
defined (therefore)
contributions variable
benefits
Risk associated with defined contribution schemes

Contributions are usually paid into the plan by both the employer and the employee. The
expectation is that the investments made will grow through capital appreciation and the
reinvestment of returns and that, on a member’s retirement, the plan should have grown to be
sufficient to provide the anticipated benefits.
If the investments have not performed as anticipated, the size of the plan will be smaller than initially
anticipated and therefore there will be insufficient assets to meet the expected benefits. This
insufficiency of assets is described as the investment risk and is carried by the employee.
The other main risk with retirement plans is that a given amount of annual benefit will cost more than
expected if, for example, life expectancy has increased markedly by the time benefits come to be
drawn; this is described as the actuarial risk and, in the case of defined contribution plans, this is also
carried by the employee.
Definitions
Investment risk: This is the risk that, due to poor investment performance, there will be insufficient
funds in the plan to meet the expected benefits.
Actuarial risk: This is the risk that the actuarial assumptions such as those on employee turnover, life
expectancy or future salaries vary significantly from what actually happens.
3.2 Defined benefit plans
In the case of pension plans, particularly defined benefit plans, accountants and auditors need to rely
on the judgement of actuaries, whose calculations may lie outside their field of expertise. In turn, the
actuaries themselves may rely on assumptions from external parties about the future direction of the
economy and other matters.
These are defined by IAS 19 as all plans other than defined contribution plans.
Characteristics of a defined benefit plan are as follows:
• The amount of pension paid to retirees is defined by reference to factors such as length of service
and salary levels (ie, it is guaranteed).
• Contributions into the plan are therefore variable depending on how the plan is performing in
relation to the expected future obligation (ie, if there is a shortfall, contributions will increase and
vice versa).
HB2021

Figure 18.2: Defined benefit plans
Variables – returns on investments, mortality rates, etc

Time
(therefore) defined
variable benefits
contributions
Contribution levels
The actuary advises the company on contributions necessary to produce the defined benefits (‘the
funding plan’). It cannot be certain in advance that contributions plus returns on investments will
equal benefits to be paid.
Formal actuarial valuations will be performed periodically (eg, every three years) to reveal any
surplus or deficit on the scheme at a given date. Contributions may be varied as a result; for
example, the actuary may recommend a contribution holiday (a period during which no
contributions are made) to eliminate a surplus.
Risk associated with defined benefit schemes
As the employer is obliged to make up any shortfall in the plan, it is effectively underwriting the
investment and actuarial risk associated with the plan. Thus in a defined benefit plan, the employer
carries both the investment and the actuarial risk.
3.2.1 Types of defined benefit plan

There are two types of defined benefit plan:
(a) Funded plans
These plans are set up as separate legal entities and are managed independently, often by trustees.
Contributions paid by the employer and employee are paid into the separate legal entity. The assets
held within the separate legal entities are effectively ring-fenced for the payments of benefits.
Funded plans, illustrated diagrammatically below, represent the most common arrangement.
Figure 18.3: Funded plans
The
company
Pays
contributions
The Separate legal

pension entity under
scheme trustees
Pays Receives pension

contributions and other benefits
on retirement
The
employee
(b) Unfunded plans

These plans are held within employer legal entities and are managed by the employers’
management teams. Assets may be allocated towards the satisfaction of retirement benefit
obligations, although these assets are not ring-fenced for the payment of benefits and remain the
assets of the employer entity. In the UK and the US, unfunded plans are common in the public sector
but rare in the private sector. However, unfunded plans are the normal method of pension provision
in many European countries (eg, Germany and France) and also in Japan.
HB2021

3.2.2 Plans with promised returns on contributions
IAS 19 gives a number of examples of plans that would be deemed to be defined benefit plans even
though on the face of it these may appear to be defined contribution. Examples include
circumstances where an entity’s obligation is not limited to an agreed level of contributions through
either a legal or a constructive obligation ie, through an entity’s past practices. Examples include:
• where there is a guaranteed level of return on contributions made or on the assets of the plan; in
practical terms this means that the employee benefits from the upside potential on the investment
but has a level of protection from downside risk;
• where a plan’s level of benefits is not linked solely to the amount of contributions made into the
plan; or
• where informal practices have led to the entity having a constructive obligation to provide
additional benefits under a plan. A past practice of increasing benefits over and above the level
due from the plan, to protect the retired person against inflation for example, would create a
constructive obligation, even if the entity has no legal requirement to increase benefits.
Context example: Defined contribution or defined benefit?

Scenario 1
Entity ABC has a separately constituted retirement benefit plan for its employees which sets out that
both ABC and its employees contribute 7% of annual salaries into the plan; contributions in respect
of an individual employee create a right to a specified proportion of the plan assets, which on
retirement is then used to buy the employee an annuity.
This is a defined contribution plan, because there appears to be no obligation on the part of ABC,
other than to pay its annual 7% contribution.
Scenario 2
Entity DEF has a separately constituted retirement benefit plan for its employees; the plan is the
same as the ABC plan, set out above, except that DEF has a contractual obligation to top up the plan
assets if the return (calculated according to the rules) on these assets in any year is below 5%.
This is a defined benefit plan, because DEF has provided a guarantee over and above its obligation
to make contributions.
Scenario 3
Entity GHI has a separately constituted retirement benefit plan for its employees; the plan is the same
as the ABC plan, set out above. For some years GHI has made additional payments directly to retired
ex-employees if the increase in the general price index exceeds 7% in any year. Such payments are at
the discretion of GHI.
This is a defined benefit plan, because over and above its obligation to make contributions GHI has a
past practice of increasing benefits in payment over and above the level due from the plan. This
creates a constructive obligation that the entity will continue to do so.
4 Defined contribution plans

Section overview
Accounting for defined contribution plans is straightforward, as the obligation is determined by the
amount paid into the plan in each period.

Contributions into a defined contribution plan by an employer are made in return for services
provided by an employee during the period. The employer has no further obligation for the value of
the assets of the plan or the benefits payable.
HB2021

• The entity should recognise contributions payable as an expense in the period in which the
employee provides services (except to the extent that labour costs may be included within the
cost of assets).
• A liability should be recognised where contributions arise in relation to an employee’s service, but
remain unpaid at the period end.
In the unusual situation where contributions are not payable during the period (or within 12 months
of the end of the period) in which the employee provides his or her services on which they accrue,
the amount recognised should be discounted to reflect the time value of money.
• Any excess contributions paid should be recognised as an asset (prepaid expenses) but only to
the extent that the prepayment will lead to a reduction in future payments or a cash refund.
Worked example: Defined contribution plan

Mouse Co agrees to contribute 5% of employees’ total remuneration into a post-employment plan
each period.
In the year ended 31 December 20X9, the company paid total salaries of £10.5 million. A bonus of
£3 million based on the income for the period was paid to the employees in March 20Y0.
The company had paid £510,000 into the plan by 31 December 20X9.
Requirement
Calculate the total expense for post-employment benefits for the year and the accrual which will
appear in the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X9.
Solution
Total expense
£
Salaries 10,500,000
Bonus 3,000,000
13,500,000 × 5% = £675,000
£ £
DEBIT Staff costs expenses 675,000
CREDIT cash 510,000
CREDIT accruals 165,000
4.2 Disclosure requirements

Where an entity operates a defined contribution plan during the period, it should disclose:
• the amount that has been recognised as an expense during the period in relation to the plan; and
• a description of the plan.
HB2021

5 Defined benefit plans – recognition and
measurement
Section overview
The accounting treatment for defined benefit plans is more complex than that applied to defined
contribution plans:
• The value of the pension plan is recognised in the sponsoring employer’s statement of financial
position.
• Movements in the value of the pension plan are broken down into constituent parts and
accounted for separately.
5.1 The problem

As we have seen, contributions to defined benefit schemes will vary depending on whether the
actuary assesses the value of the plan to be adequate to meet future obligations.
In some instances there will be a shortfall, in which case the actuary will advise increased
contributions. In other instances there may be a surplus, in which case the actuary may recommend a
contributions holiday. Contributions will therefore vary substantially from year to year.
For this reason, it is inappropriate to apply the accounting treatment for defined contribution
schemes and expense contributions through profit or loss.
5.2 Introduction to accounting for defined benefit plans

IAS 19 instead requires that the defined benefit plan is recognised in the sponsoring entity’s
statement of financial position as either a liability or asset depending on whether the plan is in deficit
or surplus.
The value of the pension plan is calculated in its simplest form as:
£
Present value of the defined benefit obligation at the reporting date X
Fair value of plan assets at the reporting date (X)
Plan deficit/surplus X/(X)
5.2.1 Present value of the defined benefit obligation
Definition
Defined benefit obligation: The defined benefit obligation is the present value of all expected future
payments required to settle the obligation resulting from employee service in the current and prior
periods.
Expected future payments

Expected future payments are based on a number of assumptions and estimates, such as:
• the final benefits payable under the plan (often dependent on future salaries, as benefits are often
quoted as a percentage of the employee’s final salary); and
• the number of members who will draw benefits (this will in turn depend on employee turnover
and mortality rates).
HB2021

Discounting to present value
• Once determined, the expected future benefits should be discounted to present value (including
those which may become payable within 12 months) using a discount rate determined by
reference to:
– market yields on high-quality fixed-rate corporate bonds at the reporting date, or where there is
no market in such bonds; and
– market yields on government bonds.
The corporate or government bonds should be denominated in the same currency as the defined
benefit obligation, and be for a similar term.
Note: The examples of discount rates used in this chapter are merely to illustrate relevant
calculations and may therefore be rather higher than would currently be found in practice.
Performance of valuations
IAS 19 encourages the use of a qualified actuary to measure the defined benefit obligation. However,
this is not a requirement.
Frequency of valuations
Valuations are not required at each reporting date; however, they should be carried out sufficiently
regularly to ensure that amounts recognised are not materially different from those which would be
recognised if they were valued at the reporting date.
5.2.2 Fair value of plan assets
Definition
Plan assets: Those assets held by a long-term benefit fund and those insurance policies which are
held by an entity, where the fund/entity is legally separate from the employer and assets/policies can
only be used to fund employee benefits.
Investments owned by the employer which have been earmarked for employee benefits but which
the employer could use for different purposes are not plan assets.
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (IFRS 13)
Guidance on fair value is given in IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (see Chapter 2, section 4). Under
IFRS 13, fair value is a market-based measurement, not an entity-specific measurement. It focuses on
assets and liabilities and on exit (selling) prices. It also takes into account market conditions at the
measurement date.
5.3 Actuarial assumptions

Actuarial assumptions are needed to estimate the size of the future (post-employment) benefits that
will be payable under a defined benefit plan. The main categories of actuarial assumptions are as
follows.
(a) Demographic assumptions are about mortality rates before and after retirement, the rate of
employee turnover, early retirement, claim rates under medical plans for former employees, and
so on.
(b) Financial assumptions include future salary levels (allowing for seniority and promotion as well
as inflation) and the future rate of increase in medical costs (not just inflationary cost rises, but
also cost rises specific to medical treatments and to medical treatments required given the
expectations of longer average life expectancy).
HB2021

The standard requires actuarial assumptions to be neither too cautious nor too imprudent: they
should be ‘unbiased’. They should also be based on ‘market expectations’ at the year end, over the
period during which the obligations will be settled.
5.4 Accounting for the movement in defined benefit plans

Both the present value of the defined benefit obligation and the fair value of plan assets, and
therefore the overall plan surplus or deficit, will change from year to year. This movement is broken
down into its constituent parts and each is accounted for separately.
The opening and closing obligation and plan assets can be reconciled as follows:
PV of defined
benefit obligation FV of plan assets
£ £
B/f at start of year (advised by actuary) (X) X
Retirement benefits paid out X (X)
Contributions paid into plan X
Interest on plan assets X
Interest cost on obligation (X)
Current service cost (X) ––––
(X) X
Gains/losses on remeasurement (balancing figure) X/(X) X/(X)
C/f at end of year (advised by actuary) (X) X
Note that while the interest on plan assets and interest on obligation are calculated separately, they
are presented net and the same rate is used for both.
5.5 Outline of the method

There is a four-step method for recognising and measuring the expenses and liability of a defined
benefit pension plan.
An outline of the method used by an employer to account for the expenses and obligation of a
defined benefit plan is given below. The stages will be explained in more detail later.
Step 1
(a) An actuarial technique (the projected unit credit method) should be used to make a
reliable estimate of the amount of future benefits employees have earned from service
in relation to the current and prior years. The entity must determine how much benefit
should be attributed to service performed by employees in the current period, and in
prior periods. Assumptions include, for example, levels of employee turnover, mortality
rates and future increases in salaries (if these will affect the eventual size of future
benefits such as pension payments).
(b) The benefit should be discounted to arrive at the present value of the defined benefit
obligation and the current service cost.
(c) The fair value of any plan assets should be deducted from the present value of the
defined benefit obligation.
Step 2 The surplus or deficit measured in Step 1 may have to be adjusted if a net benefit asset has
to be restricted by the asset ceiling (see section 6.2).
Step 3 Determine the amounts to be recognised in profit or loss:
(a) Current service cost
(b) Any past service cost and gain or loss on settlement
HB2021

(c) Net interest on the net defined benefit liability (asset)
Step 4 Determine the remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability (asset), to be recognised
in other comprehensive income (items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss):
(a) Actuarial gains and losses
(b) Return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest on the net defined
benefit liability (asset))
(c) Any change in the effect of the asset ceiling (excluding amounts included in net interest
on the net defined benefit liability (asset))
5.5.1 Retirement benefits paid out

During an accounting year, some of the plan assets will be paid out to retirees, thus discharging part
of the benefit obligation. This is accounted for by:
DEBIT PV of defined benefit obligation X

CREDIT FV of plan assets X
Note that there is no cash entry, as the pension plan itself rather than the sponsoring employer pays
the money out.
5.5.2 Contributions paid into plan

Contributions will be made into the plan as advised by the actuary. This is accounted for by:
DEBIT FV of plan assets X

CREDIT Cash X
5.5.3 Return on plan assets
Definition
Return on plan assets: Defined as interest, dividends and other revenue derived from plan assets
together with realised and unrealised gains or losses on the plan assets, less any costs of
administering the plan and less any tax payable by the plan itself.
Accounting for the return on plan assets is explained in more detail below.
5.6 The statement of financial position

In the statement of financial position, the amount recognised as a defined benefit liability (which
may be a negative amount ie, an asset) should be the following.
(a) The present value of the defined obligation at the year end; minus
(b) The fair value of the assets of the plan as at the year end (if there are any) out of which the future
obligations to current and past employees will be directly settled.
The earlier parts of this section have looked at the recognition and measurement of the defined
benefit obligation. Now we will look at issues relating to the assets held in the plan.
5.7 Plan assets

Plan assets are:
(a) assets such as stocks and shares, held by a fund that is legally separate from the reporting entity,
which exists solely to pay employee benefits; and
(b) insurance policies, issued by an insurer that is not a related party, the proceeds of which can only
be used to pay employee benefits.
Investments which may be used for purposes other than to pay employee benefits are not plan
assets.
HB2021

The standard requires that the plan assets are measured at fair value, as ‘the price that would be
received to sell an asset in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement
date’. This is consistent with IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (see Chapter 2).
IAS 19 includes the following specific requirements:
(a) The plan assets should exclude any contributions due from the employer but not yet paid.
(b) Plan assets are reduced by any liabilities of the fund that do not relate to employee benefits,
such as trade and other payables.
5.8 The statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income

All the gains and losses that affect the plan obligation and plan assets must be recognised. The
components of defined benefit cost must be recognised as follows in the statement of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income:
Component Recognised in
(1) Service cost Profit or loss
(2) Net interest on the net defined benefit liability Profit or loss
(3) Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability Other comprehensive income (not
reclassified to profit or loss)
5.9 Service costs

These comprise the following:
(a) Current service cost; this is the increase in the present value of the defined benefit obligation
resulting from employee services during the period. The measurement and recognition of this
cost was introduced in section 5.5.
(b) Pastservice cost; this is the change in the obligation relating to service in prior periods. This
results from amendments or curtailments to the pension plan, and
(c) Any gain or loss on settlement.
The detail relating to points 2 and 3 above will be covered in a later section. First, we will continue
with the basic elements of accounting for defined benefit pension costs.
5.10 Net interest on the net defined benefit liability (asset)

In section 5.5 we looked at the recognition and measurement of the defined benefit obligation. This
figure is the discounted present value of the future benefits payable. Every year the discount must be
‘unwound’, increasing the present value of the obligation as time passes through an interest charge.
5.10.1 Interest calculation

IAS 19 requires that the interest should be calculated on the net defined benefit liability (asset). This
means that the amount recognised in profit or loss is the net of the interest charge on the obligation
and the interest income recognised on the assets.
The net defined benefit liability/(asset) should be measured as at the start of the accounting period,
taking account of changes during the period as a result of contributions paid into the scheme and
benefits paid out.
Many exam questions include the assumption that all payments into and out of the scheme take
place at the end of the year, so that the interest calculations can be based on the opening balances.
5.10.2 Discount rate

The discount rate adopted should be determined by reference to market yields on high-quality
fixed-rate corporate bonds. In the absence of a ‘deep’ market in such bonds, the yields on
comparable government bonds should be used as reference instead. The maturity of the corporate
bonds that are used to determine a discount rate should have a term to maturity that is consistent
with the expected maturity of the post-employment benefit obligations, although a single weighted
average discount rate is sufficient.
HB2021

Worked example: Interest cost
In 20X8, an employee leaves a company after working there for 24 years. The employee chooses to
leave his accrued benefits in the pension scheme until he retires in seven years’ time (he now works
for another company).
At the time of his departure, the actuary calculates that it is necessary at that date to have a fund of
£296,000 to pay the expected pensions to the ex-employee when he retires.
At the start of the year, the yield on high quality corporate debt was 8%, and remained the same
throughout the year and the following year.
Requirement
Calculate the interest cost to be debited to profit or loss in Years 1 and 2.
Solution
Interest cost to be debited to profit or loss
£
Year 1:
Discounted cost b/f 296,000
Interest cost (profit or loss) (8% × £296,000) 23,680
Obligation c/f (statement of financial position) 319,680
Year 2:
Interest cost (profit or loss) (8% × £319,680) 25,574
Obligation c/f (statement of financial position) 345,254
5.11 Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability

Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability/(asset) comprise the following:
(a) Actuarial gains and losses
(b) The return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest on the net defined benefit
liability/(asset))
(c) Any change in the effect of the asset ceiling (excluding amounts included in net interest on the
net defined benefit liability/(asset))
The gains and losses relating to points 1 and 2 above will arise in every defined benefit scheme so
we will look at these in this section. The asset ceiling is a complication that is not relevant in every
case, so it is dealt with separately, later in the chapter.
5.11.1 Actuarial gains and losses

Actuarial gains and losses arise for several reasons, and IAS 19 requires these to be recognised in
full in other comprehensive income.
At the end of each accounting period, a new valuation, using updated assumptions, should be
carried out on the obligation. Actuarial gains or losses arise because of the following.
• Actual events (eg, employee turnover, salary increases) differ from the actuarial assumptions that
were made to estimate the defined benefit obligations
• The effect of changes to assumptions concerning benefit payment options
• Estimates are revised (eg, different assumptions are made about future employee turnover, salary
rises, mortality rates, and so on)
• The effect of changes to the discount rate
HB2021

Actuarial gains and losses are recognised in other comprehensive income. They are not reclassified
to profit or loss under the 2011 revision to IAS 1 (see Chapter 9).
5.11.2 Return on plan assets

The return on plan assets must be calculated.
A new valuation of the plan assets is carried out at each period end, using current fair values. Any
difference between the new value, and what has been recognised up to that date (normally the
opening balance, interest, and any cash payments into or out of the plan) is treated as a
‘remeasurement’ and recognised in other comprehensive income.
Note: In the examples in this chapter, it is assumed that cash from contributions is received and
pensions paid out at the end of the year, as no interest arises on it. In practice, it is more likely that
contributions would be paid in part way through the year, and pensions paid out part way through
the year or evenly over the year.
Worked example: Remeasurement of the net defined benefit liability

At 1 January 20X2 the fair value of the assets of a defined benefit plan was £1,100,000 and the
present value of the defined benefit obligation was £1,250,000. On 31 December 20X2, the plan
received contributions from the employer of £490,000 and paid out benefits of £190,000.
The current service cost for the year was £360,000 and a discount rate of 6% is to be applied to the
net liability/(asset).
After these transactions, the fair value of the plan’s assets at 31 December 20X2 was £1.5 million. The
present value of the defined benefit obligation was £1,553,600.
Requirement
Calculate the gains or losses on remeasurement through other comprehensive income (OCI) and the
return on plan assets and illustrate how this pension plan will be treated in the statement of profit or
loss and other comprehensive income and statement of financial position for the year ended 31
December 20X2.
Solution
It is always useful to set up a working reconciling the assets and obligation:
Assets Obligation
£ £
Fair value/present value at 1.1.X2 1,100,000 1,250,000
Interest (1,100,000 × 6%)/(1,250,000 × 6%) 66,000 75,000
Current service cost 360,000
Contributions received 490,000
Benefits paid (190,000) (190,000)
Return on plan assets excluding amounts in net interest
(balancing figure) (OCI) 34,000 –
Loss on remeasurement (balancing figure) (OCI) –––––––– 58,600
1,500,000 1,553,600
The following accounting treatment is required.
HB2021

(1) In the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the following amounts will be
recognised.
£
In profit or loss:
Net interest on net defined benefit liability (75,000 – 66,000) 9,000
In other comprehensive income (34,000 – 58,600) 24,600
(2) In the statement of financial position, the net defined benefit liability of £53,600 (1,553,600 –
1,500,000) will be recognised.
5.12 Section summary

The recognition and measurement of defined benefit plan costs are complex issues.
• Learn and understand the definitions of the various elements of a defined benefit pension plan
• Learn the outline of the method of accounting (see section 5.5)
• Learn the recognition method for the:
– statement of financial position
– statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
6 Defined benefit plans – other matters

Section overview
We have now covered the basics of accounting for defined benefit plans. This section looks at the
special circumstances of:
• past service costs
• curtailments
• settlements
• asset ceiling test
6.1 Past service cost and gains and losses on settlement

In paragraph 5.9 we identified that the total service cost may comprise not only the current service
cost but also other items, past service cost and gains and losses on settlement. This section explains
these issues and their accounting treatment.
6.1.1 Past service cost

Past service cost is the change in the present value of the defined benefit obligation resulting from a
plan amendment or curtailment.
A plan amendment arises when an entity either introduces a defined benefit plan or changes the
benefits payable under an existing plan. As a result, the entity has taken on additional obligations
that it has not hitherto provided for. For example, an employer might decide to introduce a medical
benefits scheme for former employees. This will create a new defined benefit obligation that has not
yet been provided for.
HB2021

A curtailment occurs when an entity significantly reduces the number of employees covered by a
plan. This could result from an isolated event, such as closing a plant, discontinuing an operation or
the termination or suspension of a plan.
Past service costs can be either positive (if the changes increase the obligation) or negative (if the
change reduces the obligation).
6.1.2 Gains and losses on settlement

A settlement occurs when an employer enters into a transaction to eliminate part or all of its post-
employment benefit obligations (other than a payment of benefits to or on behalf of employees
under the terms of the plan and included in the actuarial assumptions).
A curtailment and settlement might happen together, for example when an employer brings a
defined benefit plan to an end by settling the obligation with a one-off lump-sum payment and then
scrapping the plan.
The gain or loss on a settlement is the difference between:
(a) the present value of the defined benefit obligation being settled, as valued on the date of the
settlement; and
(b) the settlement price, including any plan assets transferred and any payments made by the entity
directly in connection with the settlement.
6.1.3 Accounting for past service cost and gains and losses on settlement
An entity should remeasure the obligation (and the related plan assets, if any) using current actuarial
assumptions, before determining past service cost or a gain or loss on settlement.
The rules for recognition for these items are as follows.
Past service costs are recognised at the earlier of the following dates:
(a) When the plan amendment or curtailment occurs
(b) When the entity recognises related restructuring costs (in accordance with IAS 37, see Chapter
13) or termination benefits
All gains and losses arising from past service costs or settlements must be recognised immediately in
profit or loss.
6.2 Asset ceiling test

When we looked at the recognition of the net defined benefit liability/(asset) in the statement of
financial position at the beginning of section 5 the term ‘asset ceiling’ was mentioned. This term
relates to a threshold established by IAS 19 to ensure that any defined benefit asset (ie, a pension
surplus) is carried at no more than its recoverable amount. In simple terms, this means that any net
asset is restricted to the amount of cash savings that will be available to the entity in future.
6.3 Net defined benefit assets

A net defined benefit asset may arise if the plan has been overfunded or if actuarial gains have
arisen. This meets the definition of an asset (as stated in the Conceptual Framework) because all the
following apply.
(a) The entity controls a resource (the ability to use the surplus to generate future benefits).
(b) That control is the result of past events (contributions paid by the entity and service rendered by
the employee).
(c) Future benefits are available to the entity in the form of a reduction in future contributions or a
cash refund, either directly or indirectly to another plan in deficit.
The asset ceiling is the present value of those future benefits. The discount rate used is the same as
that used to calculate the net interest on the net defined benefit liability/(asset). The net defined
benefit asset would be reduced to the asset ceiling threshold. Any related write-down would be
treated as a remeasurement and recognised in other comprehensive income.
HB2021

If the asset ceiling adjustment was needed in a subsequent year, the changes in its value would be
treated as follows:
(a) Interest (as it is a discounted amount) recognised in profit or loss as part of the net interest
amount
(b) Other changes recognised in profit or loss
6.4 Other issues

6.4.1 Multiple plans and offsetting
Where a sponsoring employer runs more than one defined benefit scheme, each must be accounted
for separately and a plan deficit in one cannot be set off against a plan surplus in another unless
there is a legal right of offset and the entity intends to settle on a net basis.
6.4.2 Projected unit credit method

The projected unit credit method is the method required by IAS 19 to be used in determining the
present value of the defined benefit obligation and current service cost.
This method sees each period of service giving rise to an additional unit of benefit entitlement (ie, for
each extra year worked by an employee, their pension increases).
Each of these units is measured separately and the total of all units to date (both current year and
previous years) is the final obligation under the plan.
The total of the current year units is the current service cost.
Attribution of benefit to period of service
In order to apply the projected unit credit method, a unit, or amount of future benefit, must be
attributed to each period of service
Worked example: Projected unit credit method 1

A defined benefit plan provides a lump-sum benefit of £100 per year of service payable on
retirement.
Requirement
How is this benefit attributed to periods of service and how is the resulting current service cost and
defined benefit obligation calculated?
Solution
A benefit of £100 is attributed to each year.
The current service cost = the present value of £100.
The present value of the defined benefit obligation = the present value of £100 × number of years of
service to reporting date.
Worked example: Projected unit credit method 2

A company operates a defined benefit scheme that pays a lump-sum benefit equal to £500 for each
year of service.
An employee joins the company at the beginning of Year 1 and is due to retire after five years of
service.
For the sake of simplicity ignore the possibility of the employee leaving the company before the
expected date.
The discount rate is 10%.
Requirement
Calculate the current service cost to be debited to profit or loss in Years 1 to 5, and the present value
of the defined benefit obligation in each of these years.
HB2021

Solution
Current service cost to be debited to profit or loss
Year 1 2 3 4 5
£ £ £ £ £
Current year benefit 500 500 500 500 500
Current service cost 500 ÷ (1.1)4 500 ÷ (1.1)3 500 ÷ (1.1)2 500 ÷ (1.1)
= 342 = 376 = 413 = 455 500
PV of defined benefit
obligation 342 376 × 2 413 × 3 455 × 4 500 × 5
= 752 = 1,239 = 1,820 = 2,500
Note: Previously we have said that the present value of the obligation moves from year to year due
to: payments out to retirees, the unwinding of one year’s discount, and the current service cost.
This can be applied to Year 2 as follows:
£
PV of defined benefit obligation b/f 342
Unwinding of discount (342 × 10%) 34
Current service cost 376
PV of defined benefit obligation c/f 752
6.5 Suggested approach

The suggested approach to defined benefit schemes is to deal with the change in the obligation and
asset in the following order.
Step Item Recognition
1 Record opening figures:

Asset
Obligation
2 Interest cost on obligation DEBIT – Interest cost (P/L) (x% × b/d

Based on discount rate and PV obligation obligation)
at start of period. CREDIT – PV defined benefit obligation
Should also reflect any changes in (SOFP)
obligation during period.
3 Interest on plan assets DEBIT – Plan assets (SOFP)

Based on discount rate and asset value at CREDIT – Interest cost (P/L) (x% × b/d
start of period. assets)
Technically, this interest is also time
apportioned on contributions less benefits
paid in the period.
4 Current service cost DEBIT – Current service cost (P/L)

Increase in the present value of the CREDIT– PV defined benefit obligation
obligation resulting from employee service (SOFP)
in the current period.
HB2021

Step Item Recognition
5 Contributions DEBIT – Plan assets (SOFP)

As advised by actuary. CREDIT – Company cash
6 Benefits DEBIT – PV defined benefit obligation

Actual pension payments made. (SOFP)
CREDIT – Plan assets (SOFP)
7 Past service cost Positive (increase in obligation):

Increase/decrease in PV obligation as a DEBIT – Past service cost (P/L)
result of introduction or improvement of CREDIT – PV defined benefit obligation
benefits. (SOFP)
Negative (decrease in obligation):
DEBIT – PV defined benefit obligation
(SOFP)
CREDIT – Past service cost (P/L)
8 Gains and losses on settlement Gain

Difference between the value of the DEBIT – PV defined benefit obligation
obligation being settled and the (SOFP)
settlement price. CREDIT – Service cost (P/L)
Loss
DEBIT – Service cost (P/L)
CREDIT – PV defined benefit obligation
(SOFP)
9 Remeasurements: actuarial gains and Gain

losses DEBIT – PV defined benefit obligation
Arising from annual valuations of (SOFP)
obligation. CREDIT – Other comprehensive income
On obligation, differences between Loss
actuarial assumptions and actual
experience during the period, or changes DEBIT – Other comprehensive income
in actuarial assumptions. CREDIT – PV defined benefit obligation
(SOFP)
10 Remeasurements: return on assets Gain

(excluding amounts in net interest) DEBIT – FV plan assets (SOFP)
Arising from annual valuations of plan CREDIT – Other comprehensive income
assets
Loss
DEBIT – Other comprehensive income
CREDIT – FV plan assets (SOFP)
11 Disclose in accordance with the standard See section 7.
The good news is that exam pension questions usually give rise to the structured approach
suggested in the above table. However, the question is unlikely to have all the elements in the table,
for example, a settlement.
HB2021

Interactive question 1: Defined benefit plan 1
For the sake of simplicity and clarity, all transactions are assumed to occur at the year end.
The following data applies to the post-employment defined benefit compensation scheme of BCD
Co.
Discount rate: 10% (each year)
Present value of obligation at start of 20X2: £1m
Market value of plan assets at start of 20X2: £1m
The following figures are relevant.
20X2 20X3 20X4

£’000 £’000 £’000
Current service cost 140 150 150
Benefits paid out 120 140 150
Contributions paid by entity 110 120 120
Present value of obligation at year end 1,200 1,650 1,700
Fair value of plan assets at year end 1,250 1,450 1,610
Additional information:
(1) At the end of 20X3, a division of the company was sold. As a result of this, a number of the
employees of that division opted to transfer their accumulated pension entitlement to their new
employer’s plan. Assets with a fair value of £48,000 were transferred to the other company’s plan
and the actuary has calculated that the reduction in BCD’s defined benefit liability is £50,000.
The year-end valuations in the table above were carried out before this transfer was recorded.
(2) At the end of 20X4, a decision was taken to make a one-off additional payment to former
employees currently receiving pensions from the plan. This was announced to the former
employees before the year end. This payment was not allowed for in the original terms of the
scheme. The actuarial valuation of the obligation in the table above includes the additional
liability of £40,000 relating to this additional payment.
Requirement
Show how the reporting entity should account for this defined benefit plan in each of years 20X2,
20X3 and 20X4.

Peters operates a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. At 1 January 20X5 the fair value of
the pension plan assets was £5,200,000 and the present value of the plan liabilities was £5,800,000.
The actuary estimates that the current and past service costs for the year ended 31 December 20X5
are £900,000 and £180,000 respectively. The past service cost is caused by an increase in pension
benefits. The plan liabilities at 1 January and 31 December 20X5 correctly reflect the impact of this
increase.
The yield on high-quality corporate bonds is estimated at 8% and the expected return on plan assets
at 5%.
The pension plan paid £480,000 to retired members in the year to 31 December 20X5. Peters paid
£1,460,000 in contributions to the pension plan and this included £180,000 in respect of past service
costs.
At 31 December 20X5 the fair value of the pension plan assets is £6,800,000 and the present value
of the plan liabilities is £7,000,000.
HB2021

In accordance with IAS 19, Employee Benefits,, Peters recognises gains and losses on
remeasurement of the defined benefit asset/liability in other comprehensive income in the period in
which they occur.
Requirement
Calculate the actuarial gains or losses on pension plan assets and liabilities that will be included in
other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X5. (Round all figures to the
nearest £’000.)

The defined benefit pension plan of Leadworth plc was formed on 1 January 20X3. The following
details relate to the scheme at 31 December 20X3.
£m
Present value of obligation 208
Fair value of plan assets 200
Current service cost for the year 176
Contributions paid 160
Interest cost on obligation for the year 32
Interest on plan assets for the year 16
The directors are aware that IAS 19 has been revised but are unsure how to treat any gain or loss on
remeasurement of the plan asset or liability.
Requirement
Show how the defined benefit pension plan should be dealt with in the financial statements for the

Baseline plc has a defined benefit pension scheme and wishes to recognise the full deficit in its
Requirement
Using the information below, prepare extracts from the statement of financial position and the
statement of comprehensive income, together with a reconciliation of scheme movements for the
year ended 31 January 20X8. Ignore taxation.
(1) The opening scheme assets were £3.6 million on 1 February 20X7 and scheme liabilities at this
date were £4.3 million.
(2) Company contributions to the scheme during the year amounted to £550,000.
(3) Pensions paid to former employees amounted to £330,000 in the year.
(4) The yield on high-quality corporate bonds was 8% and the actual return on plan assets was
£295,000.
(5) During the year, five staff were made redundant, and an extra £58,000 in total was added to the
value of their pensions.
(6) Current service costs as provided by the actuary are £275,000.
(7) The actuary valued the plan liabilities at 31 January 20X8 as £4.54 million
HB2021

As you will have seen in the above interactive questions, all the information given in the pensions
element of a question is used in the answer. Assimilating it and using it is therefore the
straightforward bit, at least in the exam. In practice, this may be much harder.
7 Defined benefit plans – disclosure

Section overview
• The disclosure requirements for defined benefit plans are extensive and detailed in order to
enable users to understand the plan and the nature and extent of the entity’s commitment.
Detailed disclosure requirements are set out in IAS 19 in relation to defined benefit plans, to provide
users of the financial statements with information that enables an evaluation of the nature of the plan
and the financial effect of any changes in the plan during the period.
Requirements for disclosures include a description of the plan, a reconciliation of the fair value of
plan assets from the opening to closing position, the actual return on plan assets, a reconciliation of
movements in the present value of the defined benefit obligation during the period, an analysis of
the total expense recognised in profit or loss, and the principal actuarial assumptions made.
Additional disclosures set out in the amendment to IAS 19 include:
• an analysis of the defined benefit obligation between amounts relating to unfunded and funded
plans;
• a reconciliation of the present value of the defined benefit obligation between the opening and
closing statement of financial position, separately identifying each component in the
reconciliation;
• a reconciliation of the present value of the defined benefit obligation and the fair value of the
plan assets to the pension asset or liability recognised in the statement of financial position;
• a breakdown of plan assets for the entity’s own financial instruments, for example an equity
interest in the employing entity held by the pension plan and any property occupied by the entity
or other assets used by the entity;
• for each major category of plan assets the percentage or amount that it represents of the total fair
value of plan assets;
• the effect of a one percentage point increase or decrease in the assumed medical cost trend rate
on amounts recognised during the period, such as service cost and the pension obligation
relating to medical costs;
• amounts for the current annual period and the previous four annual periods of the present value
of the defined benefit obligation, fair value of plan assets and the resulting pension surplus or
deficit, and experience adjustments on the plan liabilities and assets in percentage or value terms;
and
• an estimate of the level of future contributions to be made in the following reporting period.
HB2021

Section overview
The accounting treatment for other long-term employee benefits is a simplified version of that
adopted for defined benefit plans
Definition
Other long-term employee benefits: Employee benefits (other than post-retirement benefit plans
and termination benefits) which do not fall due wholly within 12 months after the end of the period in
which the employees render the service.
Examples of other long-term employee benefits include long-term disability benefits and paid
sabbatical leave.
Although such long-term benefits have many of the attributes of a defined benefit pension plan, they
are not subject to the same level of uncertainty. Furthermore, the introduction of such benefits or
changes to these benefits rarely causes a material amount of past service cost. As a consequence,
the accounting treatment adopted is a simplified version of that for a defined benefit plan. The only
difference is that all actuarial gains and losses are recognised immediately in profit or loss.
Section overview
Termination benefits are recognised as an expense when the entity is committed to either:
• terminating the employment before normal retirement date; or
• providing termination benefits in order to encourage voluntary redundancy.
Definition
Termination benefits: Employee benefits payable on the termination of employment, through
voluntary redundancy or as a result of a decision made by the employer to terminate employment
before the normal retirement date.
Where voluntary redundancy has been offered, the entity should measure the benefits based on an
expected level of take-up. If, however, there is uncertainty about the number of employees who will
accept the offer, then there may be a contingent liability, requiring disclosure under IAS 37,
An entity should recognise a termination benefit when it has made a firm commitment to end the
employment. Such a commitment will exist where, for example, the entity has a detailed formal plan
for the termination and it cannot realistically withdraw from that commitment.
Where termination benefits fall due more than 12 months after the reporting date they should be
discounted.
HB2021

Worked example: Termination benefits
The directors of an entity met on 23 July 20X3 to discuss the need to decrease costs by reducing the
number of employees. On 17 August 20X3 they met again to agree a plan. On 6 September 20X3
other members of the management team were informed of the plan. On 7 October 20X3 the plan
was announced to the employees affected and implementation of the formalised plan began.
Requirement
When should the entity recognise the liability?
Solution
The entity should only recognise the liability for the termination benefits when it is demonstrably
committed to terminating the employment of those affected. This occurred on 7 October 20X3 when
the formal plan was announced and it is at this date that there is no realistic chance of withdrawal.
10 IAS 26, Accounting and Reporting by Retirement

Benefit Plans
Section overview
IAS 26 applies to the preparation of financial reports by retirement benefit plans which are either set
up as separate entities and run by trustees or held within the employing entity.
10.1 Objectives, scope and definitions of IAS 26

The objective of IAS 26 is to provide useful and consistently produced information on retirement
benefit plans for members of the plans and other interested parties.
IAS 26 should be applied in the preparation of financial reports by retirement benefit plans.
Although it is commonplace for a retirement benefit plan to be set up as a separate legal entity run
by independent trustees, plan assets may be held within the entity employing the plan’s members.
IAS 26 applies in both sets of circumstances. In the latter case IAS 26 still regards the retirement
benefit plan as a reporting entity separate from the employing entity.
The preparation of a retirement benefit plan’s financial report should be in accordance with not only
IAS 26 but also all other international standards to the extent that they are not overridden by IAS 26.
IAS 26 does not cover:
• the preparation of reports to individual participants about their retirement benefit rights; or
• the determination of the cost of retirement benefits in the financial statements of the employer
having pension plans for its employees and providing other employee benefits.
Definition
Retirement benefit plans: Arrangements whereby an entity provides benefits for its employees on or
after termination of service (either in the form of an annual income or as a lump sum), when such
benefits, or the employer’s contributions towards them, can be determined or estimated in advance
of retirement from the provisions of a document or from the entity’s practices.
HB2021

There are two main types of retirement benefit plan, both discussed in section 3 of this chapter.
(a) Defined contribution plans (sometimes called ‘money purchase schemes’). These are retirement
plans under which payments into the plan are fixed. Subsequent payments out of the plan to
retired members will therefore be determined by the value of the investments made from the
contributions that have been made into the plan and the investment returns reinvested.
(b) Defined benefit plans (sometimes called ‘final salary schemes’). These are retirement plans
under which the amount that a retired member will receive from the plan during retirement is
fixed. Contributions are paid into the scheme based on an estimate of what will have to be paid
out under the plan.
Interactive question 5: Scope

To which of the following does IAS 26, Accounting and Reporting by Retirement Benefit Plans apply?
A The general purpose financial reports of pension schemes
B The cost to companies of employee retirement benefits
C The financial statements relating to an actuarial business
D Reports to individuals of their future retirement benefits
10.2 Key concepts

‘Funding‘ represents the employer’s contributions paid to the fund in order to meet the future
obligations under the plan for the payment of retirement benefits.
‘Participants‘ are those employees who will benefit under the plan (ie, employees and retired
employees).
The ‘net assets available for benefits‘ are the assets less liabilities of the plan that are available to
generate future investment income that will increase the plan’s assets. These net assets are calculated
before the deduction of the actuarial assessment of promised retirement benefits.
10.3 Key requirements

The following summarises the key requirements of IAS 26.
Key requirements Defined Defined All

contribution benefit retirement
plans plans plans
Investments to be carried at fair value wherever Yes

possible
Recognition of the actuarial present value of Yes

promised retirement benefits
A statement of changes in net assets available for Yes

benefits
No requirement for an actuarial report Yes
10.4 Disclosure
The report of all retirement benefit plans should include the following information.
• A statement of changes in the net assets that are available in the fund to provide future benefits
• A summary of the plan’s significant accounting policies
The statement of changes in the net assets available to provide future benefits should disclose a full
reconciliation showing movements during the period, for example contributions made to the plan
split between employee and employer, investment income, expenses and benefits paid out.
HB2021

Information should be provided on the plan’s funding policy, the basis of valuation for the assets in
the fund and details of significant investments that exceed a 5% threshold of net assets in the fund
available for benefits. Any liabilities that the plan has other than those of the actuarially calculated
figure for future benefits payable and details of any investment in the employing entity should also
be disclosed.
General information should be included about the plan, such as the names of the employing entities,
the groups of employees that are members of the plan, the number of participants receiving benefits
under the plan and the nature of the plan ie, defined contribution or defined benefit. If employees
contribute to the plan, this should be disclosed along with an explanation of how the promised
benefits are calculated and details of any termination terms of the plan. If there have been changes
in any of the information disclosed then this fact should be explained.
Users of IAS 26 reports include plan members, who do not usually have specialist knowledge. The
general information referred to above should therefore be clearly written, avoiding specialist jargon.
11 Audit focus
Section overview
• The estimation of pension costs, particularly those for defined benefit pension schemes, involves
a high level of uncertainty.
• The auditor must evaluate the appropriateness of the fair value measurements.
Fair value accounting applies to pension costs, so auditors must be aware of the issues around
auditing fair value when auditing this area. Please refer back to Chapter 17 for further details on the
IAASB’s guidance on auditing fair value.
Context example: British Home Stores (BHS)

Established UK high street retailer BHS went into administration in 2016, ceasing to trade later in the
same year. It had been sold by its previous owner Arcadia to Retail Acquisitions Ltd in 2015 for £1 in
the hope that the company’s underlying trading position could be improved. However, in addition to
this problem, BHS had also been attempting to improve its pension scheme which was displaying
significant deficits: by 2016, the funding level of the scheme was as low as 65% showing a combined
deficit that was valued as high as £571 million. In 2017, the 19,000 members received news of a
settlement worth £363 million from Sir Philip Green, the previous owner, who had agreed to address
the deficit. In 2018, the remaining liabilities of the fund were sold to an insurance company.
While most of the blame associated with the demise of BHS has been attributed to both Philip Green
and the person to whom he sold BHS, Dominic Chappell, and their combined failure to address the
problems faced by BHS, the importance of the pension scheme cannot be overestimated, given the
sums required to address its liabilities and the impact they would have had on its already strained
(Source: The Pensions Regulator (2017) TPR publishes report on BHS case. [Online]. Available from:
www.thepensionsregulator.gov.uk/en/media-hub/press-releases/tpr-publishes-report-on-bhs-case
[Accessed 3 October 2019]
Auditors need to ensure they have reviewed the various assumptions used by management when
accounting for pension schemes and have assessed their sensitivity to change in the current
economic climate using suitable levels of professional scepticism. The issues discussed in Chapter 6
on ISA (UK) 540 (Revised) are extremely relevant here: complexity, subjectivity and estimation
uncertainty.
HB2021

11.1 Auditing pension costs
The table below summarises the areas of audit focus, and the audit evidence required, when
auditing pension costs.
Issue Evidence
Scheme assets (including • Ask directors to reconcile the scheme assets valuation at the
quoted and unquoted scheme year-end date with the assets valuation at the
securities, debt instruments, reporting entity’s date being used for IAS 19 purposes.
properties) • Obtain direct confirmation of the scheme assets from the
investment custodian.
• Consider requiring scheme auditors to perform procedures.
Scheme liabilities • Auditors must follow the principles relating to work done by a
management’s expert as defined in ISA (UK) 500, Audit
Evidence (and covered in Chapter 6) to assess whether it is
appropriate to rely on the actuary’s work.
• Specific matters would include:
– the source data used;
– the assumptions and methods used; and
– the results of actuaries’ work in the light of auditors’
knowledge of the business and results of other audit
procedures.
• Actuarial source data is likely to include:
• scheme member data (for example, classes of member and
contribution details); and
• scheme asset information (for example, values and income
and expenditure items).
Actuarial assumptions (for Auditors will not have the same expertise as actuaries and are
example, mortality rates, unlikely to be able to challenge the appropriateness and
termination rates, retirement reasonableness of the assumptions. They should nevertheless
age and changes in salary and ascertain the qualifications and experience of the actuaries.
benefit levels) Auditors can, also, through discussion with directors and
actuaries:
• obtain a general understanding of the assumptions and
review the process used to develop them;
• consider whether assumptions comply with IAS 19
requirements ie, are unbiased and based on market
expectations at the year end, over the period during which
obligations will be settled;
• compare the assumptions with those which directors have
used in prior years;
• consider whether, based on their knowledge of the reporting
entity and the scheme, and on the results of other audit
procedures, the assumptions appear to be reasonable and
compatible with those used elsewhere in the preparation of
the entity’s financial statements; and
• obtain written representations from directors confirming that
the assumptions are consistent with their knowledge of the
business.
Items charged to profit or loss • Discuss with directors and actuaries the factors affecting
(current service cost, past current service cost (for example, a scheme closed to new
service cost, gains and losses entrants may see an increase year on year as a percentage of
on settlements and pay with the average age of the workforce increasing).
HB2021

Issue Evidence
curtailments) • Confirm that net interest cost has been based on the discount
rate determined by reference to market yields on high-quality
fixed-rate corporate bonds.
Items recognised in other • Check basis of updated assumptions used to calculate

comprehensive income actuarial gains/losses.
• Check basis of calculation of return on plan assets ie, using
current fair values. Fair values must be measured in
accordance with IFRS 13.
Contributions paid into plan Agree cash payments to cash book/bank statements.
(Retirement benefits paid out
are paid by the pension plan
itself so there is no cash entry
in the entity’s books)
Where the results of auditors’ work are inconsistent with those reached by directors and actuaries,
additional procedures, such as requesting directors to obtain evidence from another actuary, may
help in resolving the inconsistency.
Employee benefits, particularly retirement benefits, are a sensitive area of any audit given the widely
publicised, if rare, scandals regarding appropriation. Communication skills are of paramount
importance for the auditor.
HB2021

Summary
Employee benefits
Short-term Post-employment Other long-term Termination

benefits benefits benefits benefits
Same principles as Recognise only if

Accruals Defined Defined firm commitment
defined benefit plans
basis contribution benefit to pay
except all gains / losses
are recognised in profit
or loss
Payable within 12
Disclosure Recognition months of reporting
date
• Amount Yes No
Contributions an
recognised as expense, and
expense • Unpaid contributions Accruals Benefits
• A description a liability basis discounted
of the plan • Excess contributions
an asset if these will
reduce future liability
Disclosure Recognition
See next page

Profit or loss Statement of
financial position
Current service cost
Present value
Net interest of the defined
benefit obligation
at reporting date
Past service cost
LESS
Other Fair value of
comprehensive plan assets
income
Remeasurement
gains / losses
HB2021

Disclosure
Narrative Components of Defined benefit Reconciliation Other standards

disclosure total expense obligation
IAS 24
IAS 37
– Description of the plan Opening and IAS 1
Arising closing balances
– Actuarial assumptions
from
Funded Unfunded
Plan assets plans plans
Actual return Fair value of plan assets Present value of

on plan assets Fair value of
– For each category defined benefit
plan assets
of entity's own obligation
instruments
– For property or
asset used by entity
– By main categories
of instruments
Reconciliation of above
in percentage terms
to assets and liabilities
in statement of
financial position
IAS 26, Accounting and Reporting

by Retirement Benefit Plans
Defined Defined
benefit contribution
plans plans
Actuarial present value of

promised retirement
benefits
Valuation
of plan
assets
HB2021

1. What is the IAS 19 accounting treatment for holiday pay? (Topic 2)
2. Can you distinguish a defined contribution pension plan from a defined benefit plan?
(Topic 3)
3. How is the value of a defined benefit pension plan calculated? (Topic 3)
4. Can you account for the movement in a defined benefit plan? (Topic 4)
5. What is the IAS 19 treatment of gains and losses on remeasurement of the net defined
benefit asset or liability? (Topic 5)
6. Can you account for past service costs, curtailments and settlements? (Topic 6)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Lampard A short question, this will test whether you have understood the concept
of past service costs.
Interest This question focuses on the discount factor to be used in accounting for
employee benefits in accordance with IAS 19.
Straw Holdings The focus of this question is on giving advice to directors unsure how to
apply IAS 19. You are also asked for the benefits of moving to a defined
contribution plan, which is happening in practice.
Flynt (Dipper This part of the question requires comprehensive pension plan
pension scheme calculations and explanations of how gains and losses on remeasurement
only) might arise.
Aytace (notes 2 and 3 Note 2 requires the calculation (with explanation) of the defined benefit
only) expense, including an improvement to the scheme. Note 3 requires
calculation of a holiday pay accrual.
Maykem This part of the question is based around correcting an incorrect treatment
of the pension contribution and requires calculation of the loss on
remeasurement and the required IAS 19 presentation in the financial
statements.
HB2021

chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
IAS 19, Employee Benefits
1 Four categories of employee benefits – IAS 19.4

• Short-term employee benefits
• Post-employment benefits
• Other long-term employee benefits
• Termination benefits
2 Short-term employee benefits – IAS 19.7, 19.8

• Wages, salaries and social security contributions falling due within 12 months of employee service
• Short-term compensated absences such as vacation entitlement and paid sick leave
• Profit-sharing and bonuses
• Non-monetary benefits
3 Accounting for short-term employee benefits – IAS 19.10

• Short-term employee benefits are recognised as an expense and a corresponding liability and are
accounted for on an undiscounted basis
4 Post-employment benefits
• Classified as either:
– Defined contribution plans
– Where entity’s legal or constructive obligation is limited to the amount it agrees to contribute to
the fund and consequently bears no actuarial or investment risk
– Defined benefit plans
– Where entity provides agreed benefits and bears both actuarial and investment risk – IAS
19.25, 19.26, 19.27
5 Multi-employer plans – IAS 19.7

• Defined contribution or defined benefit plans that:
– Pool assets contributed by entities not under common control
– Provide benefits to employees of more than one entity with benefits determined without regard
to the identity of the entity
• Defined benefit plans that share risks between entities under common control are not multi-
employer plans – IAS 19.34
6 Recognition and measurement of defined contribution plans

Recognise as a liability and expense unless another standard allows inclusion in asset (eg, IAS 2 or
IAS 16) – IAS 19.44
Disclose expense and required disclosure under – IAS 24 IAS 19.46, 19.47
7 Recognition and measurement of defined benefit plans

• Entity underwriting both investment and actuarial risk – IAS 19.50
• Accounting involves following steps:
– Using actuarial techniques make reliable estimate of the amount of benefit employees earned
in current and prior periods
– Discount benefit using projected unit credit method
– Determine fair value of plan assets
– Determine total amount of remeasurement gains and losses to be recognised
HB2021

– Where plan introduced or changed determine resulting past service cost
– Where plan has been curtailed or settled calculate resulting gain or loss – IAS 19.50
8 Defined benefit scheme

• Recognised in statement of financial position as the net of:
– Present value of defined benefit obligation at reporting date, minus
– Fair value at the reporting date of plan assets – IAS 19.54
• Recognised in profit or loss
– Current service cost
– Net interest on the net defined benefit liability (asset)
– Past service cost
– Effect of curtailments or settlements – IAS 19.61
• Recognised in other comprehensive income
– Actuarial gains and losses
– Returns on plan assets (excluding amounts in net interest) – IAS 19.61
9 Actuarial assumptions
• Shall be unbiased and mutually compatible
– Demographic assumptions
– Financial assumptions – IAS 19.72
10 Discount rate – IAS 19.78

• Rate used to discount post-employment obligations shall be determined by reference to market
yields at reporting date on high quality corporate bonds
11 Actuarial gains and losses

• Gains and losses on remeasurement of plan assets and liabilities must be recognised in other
comprehensive income (not reclassified to profit or loss) in the period in which they occur – IAS
19.93 B
12 Past service cost

• Arises when entity introduces defined benefit plan or changes benefit under an existing defined
benefit plan – IAS 19.97
• Entity shall recognise past service cost as an expense in profit or loss – IAS 19.96
13 Reimbursements – IAS 19.104A

• An entity shall recognise its right to reimbursement as a separate asset only when it is virtually
certain that another party will reimburse some or all of the expenditure required to settle a
defined benefit obligation
14 Business combinations – IAS 19.108

• In a business combination (see IFRS 3, Business Combinations) an entity shall recognise assets
and liabilities arising from post-employment benefits at the:
– Present value of the obligation, less
– Fair value of any plan assets
• The present value of the obligation includes all of the following even if not recognised by
acquiree:
– All actuarial gains and losses
– Past service cost before acquisition date
– Amounts not recognised under transitional provisions
HB2021

• Examples include sabbatical leave and long-term disability benefits – IAS 19.126
• Amount recognised as a liability is the net of the following:
– Present value of the defined benefit obligation at the reporting date, minus
– The fair value of plan assets at the reporting date – IAS 19.128
• Amount recognised in profit or loss is as for defined benefit schemes except that all actuarial
gains and losses are recognised immediately in profit or loss – IAS 19.127
• Termination benefits are recognised as an expense when the entity is committed to
– Terminate the employment before normal retirement date, or
– Provide termination benefits as a result of an offer for voluntary redundancy – IAS 19.133
• Where termination benefits fall due more than 12 months after the reporting date they shall be
discounted – IAS 19.139
17 IAS 26, Accounting and Reporting by Retirement Benefit Plans

• Defined contribution plans – IAS 26.13
• Defined benefit plans – IAS 26.17–19
• Frequency of actuarial valuations – IAS 26.27
• Financial statement content – IAS 26.28–31
• All plans:
– Valuation of plan assets – IAS 26.32
– Disclosure – IAS 26.34
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Employee benefits
Under which category of employee benefits should the following items be accounted for according
to IAS 19, Employee Benefits?
Item Category
Paid annual leave
Lump-sum benefit of 1% of the final salary for

each year of service
Actuarial gains
2 Lampard
The Lampard company operates two major benefit plans on behalf of its employees under which the
amounts of benefit payable depend on a number of factors, the most important of which is length of
service. The plans are:
(1) Plan Deben, a post-retirement defined benefit plan
(2) Plan Limen, a long-term disability benefits plan
Changes to the terms of these plans coming into effect from 31 December 20X7 will result in past
service cost attributable to unvested benefits, to the extent of £500,000 on Plan Deben and
£220,000 on Plan Limen. Within each plan the average period until benefits become vested is five
years. There are no past service costs brought forward on either plan.
Requirement
Under IAS 19, Employee Benefits, what is the total amount of past service costs which must be
recognised by Lampard in the year ended 31 December 20X7?
3 Tiger
The Tiger company operates a post-retirement defined benefit plan under which post-retirement
benefits are payable to ex-employees and their partners.
For all the years this plan has been in operation, Tiger has used the market yield on its own corporate
bonds as the rate at which it has discounted its defined obligation, because the yield on its own
bonds has been the same as that on high-quality corporate bonds. In the current year Tiger has
experienced a sharp downgrading in its credit rating, such that the yield on its own bonds at the year
end is 8% while that on high-quality corporate bonds is 6%. Tiger is proposing to use the yield on its
own bonds as the discount rate, to reflect the greater risk
Requirement
Indicate whether Tiger’s approach is correct according to IAS 19, Employee Benefits.
4 Interest
An entity’s defined benefit net liability at 31 December 20X4 and 20X5 is measured as follows
20X4 20X5
£ £
Defined benefit obligation 950,000 1,150,000
HB2021

Requirements
4.1 Calculate the interest cost to be charged to profit or loss for 20X5.
4.2 How should the discount factor that is used to discount post-employment benefit obligations
be determined?
4.3 What elements should the discount rate specifically not reflect according to IAS 19?
5 Straw Holdings plc

John Cork, financial director of Straw Holdings plc, your audit client, has recently written to you for
advice on pension scheme accounting.
The company’s defined benefit pension scheme has net assets valued at £20.2 million. Scheme
assets of £19.4 million at the beginning of the year were expected to be enhanced by a cash
contribution to the scheme of £0.4 million greater than payments to pensioners. An appropriate
discount rate of 10% has been identified.
Based on these figures Mr Cork has prepared the following reconciliation.
Assets at 31 December 20X1
£m
Opening scheme net assets 19.40
Add interest on assets @ 10% 1.94
Net contributions received 0.40
Less actuarial deficit (balancing figure) (1.54)
Closing scheme net assets 20.20
The deficit of £1.54 million has come as a surprise to Mr Cork. He is unsure how to treat this deficit in
the financial statements and is concerned about the impact it will have on the company’s profits.
Requirements
5.1 Explain the impact of the actuarial valuation of the scheme’s assets and the resultant deficit on
the financial statements of Straw Holdings plc for the year ended 31 December 20X1
5.2 Identify two benefits to Straw Holdings plc of moving from a defined benefit to a defined
contribution scheme.
6 IAS 26
Answer the following questions in accordance with IAS 26, Accounting and Reporting by Retirement
Benefit Plans.
6.1 How should a defined contribution retirement benefit plan carry property, plant and
equipment used in the operation of the fund?
6.2 Is a defined contribution retirement benefit plan permitted to use a constant rate redemption
yield to measure any securities with a fixed redemption value which are acquired to match the
obligations of the plan?
6.3 Does IAS 26 specify a minimum frequency of actuarial valuations?
7 Commercial Properties plc

Commercial Properties plc is a construction company based in Leeds which specialises in the
construction of manufacturing units and warehouses. You are conducting the audit for the year
ended 31 December 20X8 and have obtained the following information.
The company has two warehouses which it lets to commercial tenants, one located in York and the
other in Huddersfield. The property in York has been held for a number of years while construction of
the property in Huddersfield was completed on 1 January 20X8 and then subsequently let.
HB2021

The policy of the company in respect of investment properties is to carry them in the statement of
financial position at open market value. They are revalued annually on the advice of professional
surveyors at eight times the aggregate rental income.
In March 20X9 a rent review on the warehouse in York was implemented. The directors intend to
base the valuation of this warehouse for the year ended 31 December 20X8 on this revised figure on
the basis that this represents a more up to date assessment of the market value of the property.
The property in Huddersfield has been let on special terms to another company in which one of the
directors holds an interest.
Commercial Properties plc also operates a defined benefit pension scheme on behalf of its
employees. The actuary has performed an annual review of funding and based on these figures the
statement of financial position is showing the pension fund as a net liability. There is an actuarial
surplus on liabilities of £375,000 and a deficit on assets of £525,000. The discount rate determined
by reference to market yields on high-quality fixed-rate corporate bonds is 12%.
Requirements
7.1 Identify and explain the audit issues regarding the two investment properties.
7.2 List the audit procedures you would perform to confirm the valuation of the properties.
7.3 List the audit procedures relating to the above pension scheme to be carried out as part of the
20X8 audit.
this chapter.
HB2021


The actuarial gain or loss is established as a balancing figure in the calculations, as follows.
Present value of obligation
20X2 20X3 20X4

£’000 £’000 £’000
PV of obligation at start of year 1,000 1,200 1,600
Interest cost (10%) 100 120 160
Past service cost – – 40
Benefits paid (120) (140) (150)
Settlements – (50) –
Actuarial (gain)/loss on obligation: balancing figure 80 320 (100)
PV of obligation at end of year 1,200 *1,600 1,700
* (1,650 – 50)
Market value of plan assets
20X2 20X3 20X4

£’000 £’000 £’000
Market value of plan assets at start of year 1,000 1,250 1,402
Interest on plan assets (10%) 100 125 140
Contributions 110 120 120
Benefits paid (120) (140) (150)
Settlements – (48) –
Gain on remeasurement through OCI: balancing figure 160 95 98
Market value of plan assets at year end 1,250 *1,402 1,610
* (1,450 – 48)
In the statement of financial position, the liability that is recognised is calculated as follows.
20X2 20X3 20X4

£’000 £’000 £’000
Present value of obligation 1,200 1,600 1,700
Market value of plan assets 1,250 1,402 1,610
Liability/(asset) in statement of financial position (50) 198 90
HB2021

The following will be recognised in profit or loss for the year:
20X2 20X3 20X4

£’000 £’000 £’000
Past service cost – – 40
Net interest on defined benefit liability (asset) – (5) 20
Gain on settlement of defined benefit liability –––– (2) –––
Expense recognised in profit or loss 140 143 210
The following remeasurements will be recognised in other comprehensive income for the year:
20X2 20X3 20X4

£’000 £’000 £’000
Actuarial (gain)/loss on obligation 80 320 (100)
Return on plan assets (excluding amounts in net interest) (160) (95) (98)

Gains or losses on plan assets
£’000
Fair value of plan assets at 1.1.20X5 5,200
Interest on plan assets (8% × £5,200) 416
Contributions 1,460
Benefits paid (480)
Remeasurement gain to OCI (balancing figure) 204
Fair value of plan assets at 31.12.20X5 6,800
Gains or losses on obligation
£’000
Present value of obligation at 1.1.20X5 5,800
Past service cost 180
Interest cost (8% × £5,800) 464
Benefits paid (480)
Remeasurement loss to OCI (balancing figure) 136
Present value of obligation at 31.12.20X5 7,000

The defined benefit pension plan is treated in accordance with IAS 19, Employee Benefits, as revised
in 2011.
The pension plan has a deficit of liabilities over assets.
HB2021

£m
Fair value of plan assets 200
Less present value of obligation (208)
(8)
The deficit is reported as a liability in the statement of financial position.

Profit or loss for the year includes:
£m
Net interest on net defined benefit liability (32 – 16) 16
192
The company is required by the revised IAS 19 to recognise the £24,000,000 remeasurement gain
(see working) immediately in other comprehensive income.
WORKING
PV of FV of plan
obligation assets
£m £m
b/f Nil Nil
Contributions paid 160
Interest on plan assets 16
Interest cost on obligation 32
Actuarial difference (bal fig) ––– 24
c/f 208 200

Extracts as follows:
Statement of financial position extract £’000

Non-current liabilities (4,115 – 4,540) 425
Statement of comprehensive income extract £’000

Charged to profit or loss
Net interest on net defined benefit liability (344 – 288) 56
Curtailment cost 58
389
HB2021

Other comprehensive income £’000
Actuarial gain on obligation 107
Return on plan assets (excluding amounts in net interest) 7
Changes in the present value of the defined benefit obligation £’000

Defined benefit obligation at 1 Feb 20X7 4,300
Interest cost @ 8% 344
Pensions paid (330)
Curtailment 58
Actuarial gain (residual) (107)
Defined benefit obligation at 31 Jan 20X8 4,540
Changes in the fair value of plan assets £’000

Fair value of plan assets at 1 Feb 20X7 3,600
Contributions 550
Pensions paid (330)
Interest on plan assets 8% × 3,600 288
Remeasurement gain (295 – 288) 7
Fair value of plan assets at 31 Jan 20X8 (residual) 4,115

The correct answer is:
A The general purpose financial reports of pension schemes
HB2021

1 Employee benefits
Item Category
Paid annual leave Short term employee benefits
Lump-sum benefit of 1% of the final salary for Defined benefit plans

each year of service
Actuarial gains Defined benefit plans
IAS 19.9 highlights paid annual leave as a short-term benefit.

The actuarial gains and the lump-sum benefit relate to defined benefit plans (per IAS 19.24–27 and
54).
2 Lampard
£720,000 (£500,000 + £220,000)
Under IAS 19, Employee Benefits (revised 2011), past service cost attributable to all benefits, whether
vested or not within a post-retirement defined benefit plan, must be recognised immediately in profit
or loss. Similarly, past service cost attributable to all benefits, whether vested or not, within a long-
term disability benefits plan must be recognised immediately in profit or loss, so the full £720,000
must be recognised.
3 Tiger
Tiger should not be using 8% as its discount rate.
Under IAS 19.78 the yield on high-quality corporate bonds must be used as the discount rate for the
defined benefit obligation. (Using a higher rate would result in a lower obligation, which would not
reflect greater risk.)
4 Interest
4.1 The interest cost for 20X5 is calculated by multiplying the defined benefit obligation at the
start of the period by the discount rate at the start of the period, so:
£950,000 × 6.5% = £61,750.
4.2 The discount factor should be determined by reference to high-quality corporate bonds with
similar currency and maturity as the benefit obligations.
Where no market in corporate bonds exists the discount rate should be determined by
reference to government debt.
Where there is no deep market in corporate bonds with sufficiently long maturities the
standard requires the use of current market rates of appropriate term to discount short‑term
payments and the estimation of the rate for longer maturities by extrapolating current market
rates on the yield curves.
4.3 The discount rate should not reflect:
• investment risk
• actuarial risk
• specific risk relating to the entity’s business
HB2021

5 Straw Holdings plc
5.1 Impact of actuarial valuation
The plan assets are less than expected by £1.54 million, this being a remeasurement loss.
Under IAS 19, Employee Benefits (revised 2011), such losses must be recognised in other
comprehensive income in the period in which they occur. This would result in the net actuarial
difference (the £1.54 million loss on the assets combined with any actuarial gain or loss on the
obligation) being presented as other comprehensive income and debited directly to reserves.
There would therefore be no direct impact on profit or loss.
5.2 Two benefits of moving to defined contribution scheme:
(1) Defined contribution schemes are easier for the company to administer and manage. A
fixed level of contributions is paid in monthly instalments for each employee. The risk
resulting from the variable returns achieved by funds invested is then borne by the
employee. This risk is borne by the employer with a defined benefit scheme.
(2) Defined contribution schemes are easier to account for.
Contributions are charged to profit or loss on a systematic basis.
Provided the company is not in arrears on contributions, the monthly double entry
required is therefore:
£ £
DEBIT Staff costs X
CREDIT Cash X
6 IAS 26
6.1 Under IAS 26.33 all types of retirement benefit plan should account for assets used in the
operation of the plan under the applicable standards. IAS 16 is applicable in this case and
either the cost model or the revaluation model may be used.
6.2 All types of retirement plan are permitted by IAS 26.33 to use this method of measuring such
securities.
6.3 No minimum frequency of actuarial valuation is specified in IAS 26.27 or elsewhere.
7 Commercial Properties plc

7.1 As follows:
• Audit issues
– Whether the two warehouses fall within the IAS 40, Investment Property definition of an
investment property
– Based on the following evidence, it would appear that the definition is satisfied:
◦ Both properties are held for the purposes of generating rental income
◦ They are not owner occupied but let to third parties
– Whether the initial recognition of the newly completed warehouse is in accordance with
IAS 40
The property would normally be measured at cost during the period of construction
(although IAS 40 does allow construction cost to be measured at fair value if it can be
measured reliably).
– Whether the accounting treatment adopted for the subsequent measurement of the
investment properties is in accordance with IAS 40
Under IAS 40, a company may choose to adopt the cost model or the fair value model.
Commercial Properties plc has adopted the fair value model. As a result of this, no
depreciation should be charged and any changes in fair value should be recognised in
profit or loss for the period.
– Whether the basis used as fair value is appropriate
HB2021

Rental income has been used as a basis of calculating an estimated fair value. This is a
suitable basis, provided rentals are an indication of the market-based exit value at the
measurement date.
IFRS 13 states that fair value should reflect market conditions at the measurement date.
The use of the revised rentals following the rent review therefore does not seem to be
appropriate. This is because the rent reviews took place after the year end date and, at
the end of the reporting period, would not have been guaranteed. As a result, they could
not have been reflected in a fair value at 31 December 20X8.
In accordance with IFRS 13, the market-based current exit price is based on the concept
that an exchange between unrelated knowledgeable and willing parties has taken place.
The warehouse in Huddersfield is being let to another company with which a director is
associated. As a result of the relationship between the two parties the rent may not reflect
market conditions and therefore may not be a suitable estimation of fair value.
– Whether there is a related party relationship
The relationship between the director and the company leasing the warehouse in
Huddersfield may constitute a related party transaction, which may require disclosure in
– Materiality
The materiality of any adjustments required as a result of any changes to the fair values of
the investment properties will need to be considered. As any changes in fair value are
reflected in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, materiality
will need to be assessed both in terms of the impact on the statement of financial
position and on the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
Tutorial Note
This question contains a revision of the audit of investment properties, covered in Chapter
12.
7.2 As follows:
• Audit procedures: investment properties
– Obtain the report produced by the professional surveyors to confirm their valuation at
eight times aggregate rental income, and to support the assumption that rentals provide
an indication of an appropriate exit value in accordance with IFRS 13.
– Consider the extent to which their expertise can be relied on eg, reputable firm,
experience etc.
– Obtain a copy of the rental agreement for the warehouse in York both before and after
the rent review. Confirm that the year-end value has been based on the revised rent and
calculate the adjustment which would be required if based on the initial agreement.
– Discuss the nature of the special terms on which the warehouse in Huddersfield has been
let and the nature of the relationship between the director and the entity.
– Compare fair values as calculated by the directors with current prices for similar
properties in similar locations.
– Where cash flows have been discounted, review whether any assumptions built in to the
calculation are reasonable eg, discount rates used.
– Compare any proposed adjustments with materiality levels set for the audit.
7.3 As follows:
• Audit procedures: pension scheme
– Obtain the client’s permission to liaise with the actuary, and review the actuary’s
professional qualification.
– Agree the validity and accuracy of the actuarial valuation.
◦ Agree that the actuarial valuation method satisfies the accounting objectives of IAS 19.
◦ Confirm that net interest cost has been based on the discount rate determined by
reference to market yields on high-quality fixed-rate bonds.
HB2021

– Agree the completeness of the actuarial valuation.
◦ Identify major events that should have been taken into account.
◦ Scrutinise relevant correspondence eg, between the client, the actuary, the solicitor.
◦ Review minutes of board meetings.
– Agree opening balances to last year’s working papers.
– Reconcile closing balance provision to opening statement of financial position.
– Agree contributions paid to the cash book and to the funding rate recommended by the
actuary in the most recent actuarial valuation.
– Check that disclosures comply with the requirements of IAS 19.
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 19
Share-based payment
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Background
2 Objective and scope of IFRS 2, Share-based Payment
3 Share-based transaction terminology
4 Equity-settled share-based payment transactions
5 Cash-settled share-based payment transactions
6 Share-based payment with a choice of settlement
7 Group and treasury share transactions
8 Disclosure
9 Distributable profits and purchase of own shares
10 Audit focus
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
19
Learning outcomes
• Appraise corporate reporting regulations, and related legal requirements, with respect to
presentation, disclosure, recognition and measurement
• Explain how different methods of providing remuneration for employees may impact upon
reported performance and position
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to employee remuneration which include
different forms of short-term and long-term employee compensation; retirement benefits; and
share-based payment
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(b), 5(a), 5(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
19

of this chapter.

1 Background Approach Share-based N/A

In a working Read through this payment is new to
environment you Section quickly – it Advanced Level and
may have to assess gives the is examinable at
the effect of background behind Level A.
granting stock the publication of The reasons why
options as a IFRS 2. IFRS 2 was needed
remuneration policy Stop and think will not be tested
on the entity’s directly, but it helps
financial statements If the granting of to understand them
and advise on how equity instruments in order to
these should be does not require the understand IFRS 2
reported and entity to part with itself.
disclosed. assets, why should a
charge be
In major capital recognised in profit
markets the or loss?
potential gains that
senior management
can achieve through
share-based
payment
transactions are so
significant that they
may dwarf other
elements of
remuneration
packages.
HB2021

2 Objective and Approach In your exam you N/A

scope of IFRS 2, This is a short will need to
Share-based section with the key recognise and
Payment point being that distinguish between
The general there are three these three types of
principle of IFRS 2 is types of share- share-based
that an entity based payment: payment in order to
recognises an get the financial
Equity-settled share- reporting treatment
expense for goods based payment
or services with the right.
transactions
credit entry
recognised either in Cash-settled share-
equity or as a based payment
liability depending transactions
on the classification Transactions with a
of the share-based choice of settlement
payment award.
Stop and think
Why has this been a
controversial
standard polarising
views at the highest
political level?
3 Share-based Approach An exam will not ask N/A

transaction Use the diagram in for these definitions
terminology Section 3 to directly, but you will
IFRS 2 has understand what is need to know them
distinctive going on before you when tackling
terminology that approach the scenario-based
must be learned. definitions. questions.
Stop and think

What are market-
based vesting
conditions?
4 Equity-settled Approach This topic is IQ2: Non-market-

share-based The key point is that regularly examined. based vesting
payment the fair value of the Typically you would conditions
transactions transaction is need to identify that A short question in
The entity receives recognised in profit share options which the condition
goods or services in or loss, spread over represent an equity- attached to the
exchange for equity the vesting period. settled share-based grant relates to
instruments of the payment and employees still
Stop and think account for the
entity (including being in service at
shares or share Fair value has a share-based the vesting date.
options). different definition payment correctly.
from the IFRS 13
one, because share-
based payments are
outside the scope of
IFRS 13.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 19: Share-based payment 999

5 Cash-settled share- Approach Cash-settled share- IQ6: Share-based

based payment The key points are based payment payment
transactions that: transactions are This question asks
The entity receives examined as you to show the
The credit entry in frequently as equity-
goods or services in respect of a cash- double entry for
exchange for settled. An exam equity-settled SBP
settled share-based scenario arose with
amounts of cash payment transaction and to explain how
that are based on a company deciding this would be
is reported as a whether to use
the price (or value) liability. different if it were
of the entity’s shares cash-based or cash-settled.
or other equity The fair value of the equity-settled SBP.
instruments of the liability should be
entity. remeasured at each
reporting date until
settled. Changes in
the fair value are
recognised in profit
or loss.
Stop and think
Can you think of any
examples of cash-
settled share based
payment
transactions?
6 Share-based Approach This is less IQ7: Share-based

payment with a The key point is that frequently payment
choice of the treatment examined than This is a more
settlement depends on who when there is no complex question
The entity receives has the choice. choice. with several ‘what if’
goods or services If the issuing entity scenarios.
and either the entity has the choice
or the supplier has a recognise a liability
choice as to to the extent that it
whether the entity has a present
settles the obligation to deliver
transaction in cash cash.
(or other assets) or
by issuing equity If the counterparty
instruments has the choice, use
split accounting.
Stop and think
What should the
treatment be if the
issuing entity does
not have a present
obligation to deliver
cash?
7 Group and treasury Approach This topic has not N/A

share transactions Read through yet been examined.
This is a fairly quickly.
marginal topic. Stop and think
What are treasury
shares?
HB2021

8 Disclosure Approach Disclosures don’t N/A

In a working Pay particular tend to get tested in There are no
environment you attention to Section detail. interactive
may need to advise 8.4 (effect on questions relating to
on how the impact financial this section.
of share-based performance and
payment on an position).
entity’s financial Stop and think
performance and
position should be How do share
reported and options affect
disclosed. earnings per share?
9 Distributable profits Approach Distributable profits IQ8: Main rules

and purchase of Distributable profits came up recently, A straightforward,
own shares is revision from your when candidates bookwork question.
Dividends may only earlier studies, so were required to If you’re in a hurry,
be paid out of work though this calculate the just highlight the
distributable profits. quickly. Purchase of amount of a main points in the
own shares is new company’s legally answer.
There are strict rules distributable
relating to reduction to Advanced Level.
reserves. In the past
of a company’s Stop and think it has also come up
capital. Why might a as a combined
company wish to FR/audit issue.
reduce its capital?
10 Audit focus Approach As indicated earlier, IQ10: Share-based

As is often the case, Use the table to share-based payments
the auditor must determine the payment A short, audit-based
focus on fair value: evidence required transactions can be question focusing
is the fair value of for each issue. tested from both the on compliance with
the payment FR and the auditing IFRS 2 and fair value
Stop and think standpoint.
appropriate? and disclosure.
How would you
audit the fair value
of cash-settled SBP
transactions?
HB2021

1 Background
Section overview
Companies sometimes pay for goods and services provided to them in the form of shares or share
options. This raises the issue of how such payments should be accounted for, and in particular
whether they should be expensed in profit or loss.
1.1 Introduction
Share-based payment occurs when an entity purchases goods or services from another party such as
a supplier or employee and rather than paying directly in cash, settles the amount owing in shares,
share options or future cash amounts linked to the value of shares. This is common:
• in e-businesses which do not tend to be profitable in early years and are cash poor;
• within all sectors where a large part of the remuneration of directors is provided in the form of
shares or options. Employees may also be granted share options.
1.2 The accounting problem

Pre-IFRS 2
Before the publication of IFRS 2, Share-based Payment there appeared to be an anomaly to the
extent that if a company paid its employees in cash, an expense was recognised in profit or loss, but
if the payment was in share options, no expense was recognised.
IFRS 2 requirements
As will be seen throughout the chapter, IFRS 2 requires an expense to be recognised in profit or loss
in relation to share-based payments.
The publication of IFRS 2 in 2004 and introduction of this requirement to recognise an expense
caused huge controversy, with opposition especially strong among high tech companies. The
arguments over expensing share-based payments polarised opinion, especially in the US.
• The main argument against recording an expense was that no cash changes hands as part of such
transactions, and it is claimed therefore that there is no true expense.
• The main argument for was that share-based payments are simply another form of compensation
that should go into the calculation of earnings for the sake of transparency for investors and the
business community. It was also argued that recording an expense better reflects the accruals
basis of financial statement preparation.
Practical application of IFRS 2
In practice, the implementation of IFRS 2 has resulted in earnings being reduced, sometimes
significantly. It is generally agreed that as a result of this standard companies focus more on the
earnings effect of different rewards policies.
Following the adoption of IFRS 2, some companies have admitted that they are re-evaluating the use
of share options as part of employee remuneration.
Context example: GlaxoSmithKline plc

The effect of IFRS 2 on reported performance can be substantial even in mature businesses.
GlaxoSmithKline plc (GSK), a company listed on both the London and New York Stock Exchanges,
operating in the pharmaceutical industry, adopted IFRS 2 in 2004 and restated its 2003 results. In line
with IFRS 2, GSK recognised a charge of £226 million in 2006 (£236 million in 2005 and £333 million
in 2004). The IFRS 2 adjustment to restate pre-tax profits for 2003 was £369 million which
represented 5.8% of pre-tax profits.
HB2021

Following the restatement of the 2003 results to reflect IFRS 2, there appears to be a trend towards a
reduction in share-based compensation as a percentage of pre-tax profits.
2006 2005 2004 2003

£m £m £m £m
Profit before tax 7,799 6,732 6,119 6,335
Share-based compensation 226 236 333 369
% % % %
Share-based compensation as a % of pre-tax profits 2.9 3.5 5.4 5.8
2 Objective and scope of IFRS 2, Share-based

Payment
Section overview
A share-based payment transaction is one in which the entity transfers equity instruments, such as
shares and share options, in exchange for goods and services supplied by employees or third
parties.
2.1 Transactions within the scope of IFRS 2

IFRS 2 applies to all share-based payment transactions. The standard recognises and addresses three
types of transactions according to the method of settlement.
• Equity-settled share-based payment transactions
The entity receives goods or services in exchange for equity instruments of the entity (including
shares or share options).
• Cash-settled share-based payment transactions
The entity receives goods or services in exchange for amounts of cash that are based on the price
(or value) of the entity’s shares or other equity instruments of the entity.
• Transactions with a choice of settlement
The entity receives goods or services and either the entity or the supplier has a choice as to
whether the entity settles the transaction in cash (or other assets) or by issuing equity instruments.
IFRS 2 requires an entity to recognise share-based payment transactions in its financial statements.
Transactions in which an entity receives goods or services as consideration for equity instruments of
the entity (including shares or share options) are share-based payment transactions. Such
transactions give rise to expenses (or, if applicable, assets) that should be measured at fair value.
IFRS 2 was amended in 2009 to address situations in those parts of the world where, for public policy
or other reasons, companies give their shares or rights to shares to individuals, organisations or
groups that have not provided goods or services to the company. An example is the issue of shares
to a charitable organisation for less than fair value, where the benefits are more intangible than usual
goods or services.
Note that the requirements of IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (see Chapter 2) do not apply to
share-based payment transactions within the scope of IFRS 2.
2.1.1 Share-based payments among group entities

Payment for goods or services received by an entity within a group may be made in the form of
granting equity instruments of the parent company, or equity instruments of another group
company.
HB2021

IFRS 2.3 states that this type of transaction qualifies as a share-based payment transaction within the
scope of IFRS 2.
In 2009, the standard was amended to clarify that it applies to the following arrangements:
• Where the entity’s suppliers (including employees) will receive cash payments that are linked to
the price of the equity instruments of the entity
• Where the entity’s suppliers (including employees) will receive cash payments that are linked to
the price of the equity instruments of the entity’s parent
Under either arrangement, the entity’s parent had an obligation to make the required cash payments
to the entity’s suppliers. The entity itself did not have any obligation to make such payments. IFRS 2
applies to arrangements such as those described above even if the entity that receives goods or
services from its suppliers has no obligation to make the required share-based cash payments.
2.2 Transactions outside the scope of IFRS 2

The following are outside the scope of IFRS 2:
• Transactions with employees and others in their capacity as a holder of equity instruments of the
entity (for example, where an employee receives additional shares in a rights issue to all
shareholders)
• The issue of equity instruments in exchange for control of another entity in a business
combination
• Contracts to buy or sell non-financial items that may be settled net in shares or rights to shares are
outside the scope of IFRS 2 and are addressed by IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation and
IFRS 9, Financial Instruments.
Context example: Transactions within and outside the scope of IFRS 2

Scenario 1: Entity A grants share warrants and its own equity to its external consultants. The warrants
become exercisable once an initial public offering (IPO) is made and on condition that the
consultants continue to provide agreed services to Entity A until the date the IPO is made.
This transaction is a share-based payment within the scope of IFRS 2.
Scenario 2: Entity B buys back some of its own shares from employees in their capacity as
shareholders for the market value of those shares.
This transaction is a simple purchase of treasury shares and is outside the scope of IFRS 2, being
governed instead by IAS 32.
Scenario 3: Entity C buys back some of its own shares but pays an amount in excess of their market
value only to shareholders who are employees.
The excess over market value to employees only would be considered as a compensation expense
within the scope of IFRS 2.
Scenario 4: Entity D enters into a contract to buy a commodity for use in its business for cash, at a
price equal to the value of 1,000 shares of Entity D at the date the commodity is delivered. Although
Entity D can settle the contract net, it does not intend to do so, nor does it have a past practice of
doing so.
This transaction is within the scope of IFRS 2, as it meets the definition of a cash-settled share-based
payment transaction. Entity D will be acquiring goods in exchange for a payment, the amount of
which will be based on the value of its shares.
If, however, Entity D has a practice of settling these contracts net, or did not intend to take physical
delivery, then the forward contract would be within the scope of IAS 32 and IFRS 9 and outside the
scope of IFRS 2.
HB2021

3 Share-based transaction terminology
Section overview
Share-based transactions are agreed between an entity and counterparty at the grant date; the
counterparty becomes entitled to the payment at the vesting date.
Before considering the accounting treatment of share-based payment transactions, it is important to

understand the terminology used within the topic.
Figure 19.1: Vesting period
Vesting period
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
Grant date Vesting date
Definitions
Grant date: The date at which the entity and other party agree to the share-based payment
arrangement. At this date the entity agrees to pay cash, other assets or equity instruments to the
other party, provided that specified vesting conditions, if any, are met. If the agreement is subject to
shareholder approval, then the approval date becomes the grant date.
Vesting conditions: The conditions that must be satisfied for the other party to become entitled to
receive the share-based payment.
Vesting period: The period during which the vesting conditions are to be satisfied.
Vesting date: The date on which all vesting conditions have been met and the employee/third party
becomes entitled to the share-based payment.
In some cases the grant date and vesting date are the same. This is the case where vesting conditions
are met immediately and therefore there is no vesting period.
3.1 Vesting conditions

IFRS 2 recognises two types of vesting conditions:
Non-market-based vesting conditions
These are conditions other than those relating to the market value of the entity’s shares. Examples
include vesting dependent on:
• the employee completing a minimum period of service (also referred to as a service condition)
• achievement of minimum sales or earnings target
• achievement of a specific increase in profit or earnings per share
• successful completion of a flotation
• completion of a particular project
Market-based vesting conditions
Market-based performance or vesting conditions are conditions linked to the market price of the
shares in some way. Examples include vesting dependent on achieving:
• a minimum increase in the share price of the entity
• a minimum increase in shareholder return
• a specified target share price relative to an index of market prices
HB2021

Restricted definition of vesting conditions
The definition of vesting conditions:
• is restricted to service conditions and performance conditions; and
• excludes other features such as a requirement for employees to make regular contributions into a
savings scheme.
Under IFRS 2, features of a share-based payment that are not vesting conditions should be included
in the grant date fair value of the share-based payment. The fair value also includes market-related
vesting conditions.
Vesting conditions and cancellations
Under IFRS 2, a failure to meet a condition, other than a vesting condition, is treated as a cancellation.
Following a 2008 amendment, IFRS 2 specifies the accounting treatment of cancellations by the
entity and gives guidance on the treatment of cancellations by parties other than the entity. The
amendment requires cancellations by parties other than the entity to be accounted for in the same
way as cancellations by the entity.
January 2018 amendment
IFRS 2 was amended in 2018. The 2018 amendments to IFRS 2 have a significant influence on the
way companies measure and account for share-based payment transactions. Their purpose is to
clarify issues which were not unambiguously defined in the existing standard and, in so doing, to
reduce complexity in relation to measurement and classification. There are three areas of
amendment:
(a) Classification of share-based payments that have a net settlement feature within the framework
of an equity-settled plan
(b) Accounting for modifications that change the classification of payments from cash-settled to
equity-settled
(c) The effects of vesting/non-vesting conditions on cash-settled share-based payments
4 Equity-settled share-based payment

transactions
Section overview
Where payment for goods or services is in the form of shares or share options, the fair value of the
transaction is recognised in profit or loss, spread over the vesting period.
4.1 Introduction
If goods or services are received in exchange for shares or share options, the transaction is
accounted for by:
£ £
DEBIT Expense/Asset X
CREDIT Equity X
IFRS 2 does not stipulate which equity account the credit entry is made to. It is normal practice to
credit a separate component of equity, although an increasing number of UK companies are
crediting retained earnings.
We must next consider:
(a) Measurement of the total expense taken to profit or loss
(b) When this expense should be recorded
HB2021

4.2 Measurement
When considering the total expense to profit or loss, the basic principle is that equity-settled share-
based transactions are measured at fair value, as the amount for which an asset could be exchanged,
a liability settled, or an equity instrument granted could be exchanged, between knowledgeable,
willing parties in an arm’s length transaction.
Note that this definition is still applicable, rather than the definition in IFRS 13, because IFRS 13 does
not apply to transactions within the scope of IFRS 2.
Fair value will depend on who the transaction is with:
(a) There is a rebuttable presumption that the fair value of goods/services received from a third
party can be measured reliably.
(b) It is not normally possible to measure services received when the shares or share options form
part of the remuneration package of employees.
Figure 19.2: Measurement of equity-settled share-based transactions
Transaction with third parties Transaction with employees
Can the fair value of goods/services

NO
be measured reliably?
YES
Measure at fair value of the goods/ Measure at the fair value of the equity
services on the date they were received instruments granted at grant date
= direct method = indirect method
The above decision tree is one way to structure a problem if you are diagrammatically minded. This is
particularly useful because IFRS 2 does not follow the usual fair value rules in IFRS 13.
4.3 Allocation of expense to financial years

Immediate vesting
Where the instruments granted vest immediately, ie, the recipient party becomes entitled to them
immediately, then the transaction is accounted for in full on the grant date.
Vesting period exists
Where entitlement to the instruments granted is conditional on vesting conditions, and these are to
be met over a specified vesting period, the expense is spread over the vesting period.
4.4 Transactions with third parties (non-employees)

Applying the rules seen in the sections above, transactions with third parties are normally:
• Measured at the fair value of goods/services received
• Recorded when the goods/services are received
Worked example: Third-party transactions – direct method

Entity A has been paying Entity B, a corporate finance consultancy, in cash at the rate of £600 per
hour for advice. Entity B is proposing to increase its fees by 5% per annum. Entity A is experiencing
cash flow pressures, so it has persuaded Entity B to accept payment in the form of shares with effect
from 1 July 20X5. The initial arrangement is for two years with Entity A agreeing to issue 6,000 of its
HB2021

shares to Entity B every six months in exchange for Entity B providing 300 hours of advice evenly
over the six-month period.
Requirement
What is the expense in profit or loss and the corresponding increase in equity?
Solution
The services received and the shares issued by Entity A are measured at the fair value of the services
received. For the first year, the hourly rate will be measured at that originally proposed by Entity B,
105% of £600. Entity B plans to increase that rate by another 5% for the second year.
The expense in profit or loss and the increase in equity associated with these arrangements will be:
£
July – December 20X5 300 × £630 189,000
January – December 20X6 (300 × £630) + (300 × £630 × 1.05) 387,450
January – June 20X7 300 × £630 × 1.05 198,450
4.5 Transactions with employees

Applying the rules seen in the sections above, transactions with employees are normally:
• measured at the fair value of equity instruments granted at grant date; and
• spread over the vesting period (often a specified period of employment).
Worked example: Employee transactions – indirect method

A company provides each of 10 key employees with 1,000 share options on 1 January 20X7. Each
option has a fair value of £9 at the grant date, £11 on 1 January 20X8, £14 on 1 January 20X9 and
£12 on 31 December 20X9.
The options do not vest until 31 December 20X9 and are dependent on continued employment. All
10 employees are expected to remain with the company.
Requirement
What are the accounting entries to be recorded in each of the years 20X7, 20X8 and 20X9?
Solution
The changes in the value of equity instruments after grant date do not affect the charge to profit or
loss for equity-settled transactions.
Based on the fair value at grant date, the remuneration expense is calculated as follows.
Number of employees × Number of equity instruments × Fair value of equity instruments at grant
date
= 10 × 1,000 × £9 = £90,000
The remuneration expense should be recognised over the vesting period of three years. An amount
of £30,000 should be recognised for each of the three years 20X7, 20X8 and 20X9 in profit or loss
with a corresponding credit to equity.
Interactive question 1: Employee transactions

An entity provides each of its employees with 10 share options at 1 July 20X5, but the options do not
vest until 30 June 20X7. The share options may be exercised after vesting date provided that the
employees remain in the entity’s employment.
The fair value of the share options is £20 on grant date and there are 1,500 employees in the entity’s
employment at 1 July 20X5.
HB2021

Requirement
How should the entity account for the transaction if all employees remain in the entity’s employment?
Most problems involving share-based payments will be like the above example, with relatively small
amounts of information. However, some will be longer, including complications like deferred tax.
4.5.1 Immediate vesting

Some share-based transactions with employees vest immediately. In this case, it is assumed that the
relevant services have already been received and so the transaction is recognised on the grant date.
Worked example: Share options vest immediately

An entity issues 10 share options to each of its employees on 1 July 20X5. The share options vest
immediately and there is a two-year period over which the employees may exercise the share
options. Employees are entitled to exercise the options regardless of whether or not they remain in
the entity’s employment during the period of exercise. The fair value of the share options is £10 on
grant date and there are 1,500 employees in the entity’s employment at 1 July 20X5.
Requirement
How should the transaction be accounted for?
Solution
The total fair value for the share options issued at grant date is:
£10 × 1,500 employees × 10 options = £150,000
The entity should therefore charge £150,000 to profit or loss as employee remuneration on 1 July
20X5 and the same amount will be recognised as part of equity on that date.
4.6 The impact of different types of vesting conditions

As we have seen earlier, vesting conditions may be:
• Non-market-based ie, not relating to the market value of the entity’s shares; or
• market-based ie, linked to the market price of the entity’s shares in some way.
4.6.1 Non-market-based vesting conditions

• These conditions are taken into account when determining the expense which must be taken to
profit or loss in each year of the vesting period.
• Only the number of shares or share options expected to vest will be accounted for.
• At each period end (including interim periods), the number expected to vest should be revised as
necessary.
• On the vesting date, the entity should revise the estimate to equal the number of shares or share
options that do actually vest.
Worked example: Non-market-based vesting conditions

On 1 January 20X1 an entity grants 100 share options to each of its 400 employees. Each grant is
conditional upon the employee working for the entity until 31 December 20X3. The fair value of each
share option at the grant date is £20.
During 20X1 20 employees leave and the entity estimates that a total of 20% of the employees will
leave during the three-year period.
HB2021

During 20X2 a further 25 employees leave and the entity now estimates that 25% of its employees
will leave during the three-year period.
During 20X3 a further 10 employees leave.
Requirement
Calculate the remuneration expense that will be recognised in respect of the share-based payment
transaction for each of the three years ended 31 December 20X3.
Solution
IFRS 2 requires the entity to recognise the remuneration expense, based on the fair value of the
share options granted, as the services are received during the three-year vesting period.
In 20X1 and 20X2 the entity estimates the number of options expected to vest (by estimating the
number of employees likely to leave) and bases the amount that it recognises for the year on this
estimate.
In 20X3 it recognises an amount based on the number of options that actually vest. A total of 55
employees left during the three-year period and therefore 34,500 options (400 – 55) × 100 vested.
The amount recognised as an expense for each of the three years is calculated as follows.
Cumulative expense
at year end Expense for year
£ £
20X1 100 options × 400 employees × 80% × £20 × 1/3 213,333 213,333
20X2 100 options × 400 employees × 75% × £20 × 2/3 400,000 186,667
20X3 34,500 × £20 × 3/3 690,000 290,000
Interactive question 2: Non-market-based vesting conditions

On 1 January 20X3 an entity grants 500 share options to each of its 400 employees. The only
condition attached to the grant is that the employees should continue to work for the entity until 31
December 20X6. 10 employees leave during the year, and it is expected that a further 10 will leave
each year.
The market price of each option was £10 at 1 January 20X3 and £12 at 31 December 20X3.
Requirement
Show how this transaction will be reflected in the financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X3.
Worked example: Non-market-based vesting conditions

On 1 January 20X4 an entity granted options over 10,000 of its shares to Sally, one of its senior
employees. One of the conditions of the share option scheme was that Sally must work for the entity
for three years. Sally continued to be employed by the entity during 20X4, 20X5 and 20X6.
A second condition for vesting is that the costs for which Sally is responsible should reduce by 10%
per annum compound over the three-year period. At the date of grant, the fair value of each share
option was estimated at £21.
At 31 December 20X4 Sally’s costs had reduced by 15% and therefore it was estimated that the
performance condition would be achieved.
Due to a particularly tough year of trading for the year ended 31 December 20X5 Sally had only
reduced costs by 3% and it was thought at that time that she would not meet the cost reduction
target by 31 December 20X6.
HB2021

At 31 December 20X6, the end of the performance period, Sally did meet the overall cost reduction
target of 10% per annum compound.
Requirement
How should the transaction be recognised?
Solution
The cost reduction target is a non market performance condition which is taken into account in
estimating whether the options will vest. The expense recognised in profit or loss in each of the three
years is:
Cumulative Charge in the year

£ £
20X4 (10,000 × £21)/3 years 70,000 70,000
20X5 Assumed performance would not be achieved 0 (70,000)
20X6 10,000 × £21 210,000 210,000
Share-based payment is a good example of where an answer can be structured and the structure
applied routinely, so is a good source of relatively easy marks. The topic is likely to appear fairly
regularly, as it is new to Advanced Level.
4.6.2 Market-based vesting conditions

• These conditions are taken into account when calculating the fair value of the equity instruments
at the grant date.
• They are not taken into account when estimating the number of shares or share options likely to
vest at each period end.
• If the shares or share options do not vest, any amount recognised in the financial statements will
remain.
4.6.3 Market and non-market-based vesting conditions

Where equity instruments are granted with both market and non-market vesting conditions,
paragraph 21 of IFRS 2 requires an entity to recognise an expense irrespective of whether market
conditions are satisfied, provided all other vesting conditions are satisfied.
In summary, where market and non-market conditions coexist, it makes no difference whether the
market conditions are achieved. The possibility that the target share price may not be achieved has
already been taken into account when estimating the fair value of the options at grant date.
Therefore, the amounts recognised as an expense in each year will be the same regardless of what
share price has been achieved. This is the case only with equity-settled share-based payment, not
cash-settled share-based payment.
Worked example: Market and non-market vesting conditions

On 1 January 20X4 an entity granted options over 10,000 of its shares to Jeremy, one of its senior
employees. One of the conditions of the share option scheme was that Jeremy must work for the
entity for three years. Jeremy continued to be employed by the entity during 20X4, 20X5 and 20X6.
A second condition for vesting is that the share price increases at 25% per annum compound over
the three-year period. At the date of grant the fair value of each share option was estimated at £18
taking into account the estimated probability that the necessary share price growth would be
achieved at 25%.
HB2021

During the year ended 31 December 20X4 the share price rose by 30% and by 26% per annum
compound over the two years to 31 December 20X5. For the three years to 31 December 20X6 the
increase was 24% per annum compound.
Requirement
How should the transaction be recognised?
Solution
Jeremy satisfied the service requirement but the share price growth condition was not met. The share
price growth is a market condition and is taken into account in estimating the fair value of the options
at grant date. No adjustment should be made if there are changes from that estimated in relation to
the market condition. There is no write-back of expenses previously charged, even though the shares
do not vest.
The expense recognised in profit or loss in each of the three years is one-third of 10,000 × £18 =
£60,000.
Interactive question 3: Market and non-market performance conditions

Company B issued 100 share options to certain employees, that will vest once revenues reach £1
billion and its share price equals £50. The employee will have to be employed with Company B at the
time the share options vest in order to receive the options. The share options had a fair value of £20
at the grant date and will expire in 10 years.
Requirement
How should the expense be recorded under each of the following different scenarios?
(1) All options vest.
(2) Revenues have reached £1 billion, all employees are still employed and the share price is £49.
(3) The share price has reached £50, all employees are still employed but revenues have not yet
reached £1 billion.
(4) Revenues have reached £1 billion, the share price has reached £50 and half the employees who
received options left the company before the vesting date.
4.7 Other issues

4.7.1 Transactions during the year
Where the grant date arises mid year, the calculation of the amount charged to profit or loss must be
pro-rated to reflect that fact.
Worked example: Options issued during the year

Yarex plc is proposing to award share options to directors and senior employees during the
accounting year ending 31 December 20X6.
The proposal is to issue 100,000 options to each of the 50 directors and senior managers on 1
November 20X6.
The exercise price of the options would be £5 per share. The scheme participants will need to have
been with the company for at least three years before being able to exercise their options.
It is estimated that 75% of the current directors and senior managers will remain with the company
for three years or more.
HB2021

1 November 20X6 Average 20X6 31 December 20X6
£ £ £
Price per share 5.00 5.50 5.80 (estimated)
Fair value of each option 2.00 2.40 3.80 (estimated)
Requirement
Show how the proposed scheme would be reflected in the financial statements on 31 December
20X6 and 31 December 20X7. Ignore taxation.
Solution
The three-year service condition specified by the options contract is a non-market vesting condition
which should be taken into account when estimating the number of options which will vest at the end
of each period. Therefore the proportion of directors expected to remain with the company is
relevant in determining the remuneration charge arising from the options.
The fair value for the options used is the fair value at the grant date ie, the fair value of £2 on 1
November 20X6.
The remuneration expense in respect of the options for the year ended 31 December 20X6 is
calculated as follows:
Fair value of options expected to vest at grant date:
(75% × 50 employees) × 100,000 options × £2 = £7,500,000
Annual charge to profit or loss therefore £7.5m/3 years = £2.5m
Charge to profit or loss for y/e 31 December 20X6 = £2.5m × 2/12 months = £416,667
The accounting entry for the year ending 31 December 20X6 is:
£ £
DEBIT Remuneration expense 416,667
CREDIT Equity 416,667
In 20X7 the remuneration charge is for the whole year. Assuming there is no change in the estimated
retention rate for employees, the accounting entry is:
£ £
DEBIT Remuneration expense 2,500,000
CREDIT Equity 2,500,000
4.7.2 Vested options not exercised

If, after the vesting date, options are not exercised or the equity instrument is forfeited, there will be
no impact on the financial statements. This is because the holder of the equity instrument has
effectively made that decision as an investor.
The services for which the equity instrument remunerated were received by the entity and the
financial statements reflect the substance of this transaction. IFRS 2 does, however, permit a transfer
to be made between reserves in such circumstances to avoid an amount remaining in a separate
equity reserve where no equity instrument will be issued.
4.7.3 Variable vesting date

Where the vesting date is variable depending on non-market-based vesting conditions, the
calculation of the amount expensed in profit or loss must be based on the best estimate of when
vesting will occur.
HB2021

Interactive question 4: Variable vesting date
At the beginning of Year 1, Kingsley grants 100 shares each to 500 employees, conditional upon the
employees remaining in the entity’s employ during the vesting period. The shares will vest at the end
of Year 1 if the entity’s earnings increase by more than 18%; at the end of Year 2 if the entity’s
earnings increase by more than an average of 13% per year over the two-year period; and at the end
of Year 3 if the entity’s earnings increase by more than an average of 10% per year over the three-
year period. The shares have a fair value of £30 per share at the start of Year 1, which equals the
share price at grant date. No dividends are expected to be paid over the year period.
By the end of Year 1, the entity’s earnings have increased by 14%, and 30 employees have left. The
entity expects that earnings will continue to increase at a similar rate in Year 2, and therefore expects
that the shares will vest at the end of Year 2. The entity expects, on the basis of a weighted average
probability, that a further 30 employees will leave during Year 2, and therefore expects that 440
employees will vest in 100 shares at the end of Year 2.
By the end of Year 2, the entity’s earnings have increased by only 10% and therefore the shares do
not vest at the end of Year 2. 28 employees have left during the year. The entity expects that a further
25 employees will leave during Year 3, and that the entity’s earnings will increase by more than 6%,
thereby achieving the average of 10% per year.
By the end of Year 3, 23 employees have left and the entity’s earnings had increased by 8%, resulting
in an average increase of 10.64% per year. Therefore 419 employees received 100 shares at the end
of Year 3.
Requirement
Show the expense and equity figures which will appear in the financial statements in each of the
three years.
4.7.4 Modifications and repricing

Equity instruments may be modified before they vest.
Eg, a downturn in the equity market may mean that the original option exercise price set is no longer
attractive. Therefore the exercise price is reduced (the option is ‘repriced’) to make it valuable again.
Such modifications will often affect the fair value of the instrument and therefore the amount
The accounting treatment of modifications and repricing is as follows:
(a) Continue to recognise the original fair value of the instrument in the normal way (even where the
modification has reduced the fair value).
(b) Recognise any increase in fair value at the modification date (or any increase in the number of
instruments granted as a result of modification) spread over the period between the
modification date and vesting date.
(c) If modification occurs after the vesting date, then the additional fair value must be recognised
immediately unless there is, for example, an additional service period, in which case the
difference is spread over this period.
Worked example: Repricing of share options

An entity granted 1,000 share options at an exercise price of £50 to each of its 30 key management
personnel on 1 January 20X4. The options only vest if the managers were still employed on 31
December 20X7. The fair value of the share options was estimated at £20 and the entity estimated
that the options would vest with 20 managers. This estimate was confirmed on 31 December 20X4.
The entity’s share price collapsed early in 20X5. On 1 July 20X5 the entity modified the share options
scheme by reducing the exercise price to £15. It estimated that the fair value of an option was £2
immediately before the price reduction and £11 immediately after. It retained its estimate that
options would vest with 20 managers.
HB2021

Requirement
How should the modification be recognised?
Solution
The total cost to the entity of the original option scheme was:
1,000 shares × 20 managers × £20 = £400,000
This was being recognised at the rate of £100,000 each year.
The cost of the modification is:
1,000 × 20 managers × (£11 – £2) = £180,000
This additional cost should be recognised over 30 months, being the remaining period up to vesting,
so £6,000 a month.
The total cost to the entity in the year ended 31 December 20X5 is:
£100,000 + (£6,000 × 6) = £136,000.
Interactive question 5: Repricing of share options

At the beginning of Year 1, an entity grants 100 share options to each of its 500 employees. Each
grant is conditional upon the employee remaining in service over the next three years. The entity
estimates that the fair value of each option is £15. On the basis of a weighted average probability,
the entity estimates that 100 employees will leave during the three-year period and therefore forfeit
their rights to the share options.
During the first year, 40 employees leave. By the end of the first year, the entity’s share price has
dropped, and the entity reprices its share options. The repriced share options vest at the end of Year
3. The entity estimates that a further 70 employees will leave during Years 2 and 3, and hence the
total expected employee departures over the three-year vesting period is 110 employees. During
Year 2 a further 35 employees leave, and the entity estimates that a further 30 employees will leave
during Year 3, to bring the total expected employee departures over the three-year vesting period to
105 employees. During Year 3, a total of 28 employees leave, and hence a total of 103 employees
ceased employment during the vesting period. For the remaining 397 employees, the share options
vested at the end of Year 3.
The entity estimates that, at the date of repricing, the fair value of each of the original share options
granted (ie, before taking into account the repricing) is £5 and that the fair value of each repriced
share option is £8.
Requirement
What are the amounts that should be recognised in the financial statements for Years 1 to 3?
4.7.5 Cancellations and settlements

An entity may settle or cancel an equity instrument during the vesting period. Where this is the case,
the correct accounting treatment is as follows:
(a) To immediately charge any remaining fair value of the instrument that has not been recognised
in profit or loss (the cancellation or settlement accelerates the charge and does not avoid it).
(b) Any amount paid to the employees by the entity on settlement should be treated as a buyback
of shares and should be recognised as a deduction from equity. If the amount of any such
payment is in excess of the fair value of the equity instrument granted, the excess should be
recognised immediately in profit or loss.
Worked example: Cancellation

An entity granted 2,000 share options at an exercise price of £18 to each of its 25 key management
personnel on 1 January 20X4. The options only vest if the managers are still employed by the entity
HB2021

on 31 December 20X6. The fair value of the options was estimated at £33 and the entity estimated
that the options would vest with 23 managers. This estimate was confirmed on 31 December 20X4.
In 20X5 the entity decided to base all incentive schemes around the achievement of performance
targets and to abolish the existing scheme for which the only vesting condition was being employed
over a particular period. The scheme was cancelled on 30 June 20X5 when the fair value of the
options was £60 and the market price of the entity’s shares was £70. Compensation was paid to the
24 managers in employment at that date, at the rate of £63 per option.
Requirement
How should the entity recognise the cancellation?
Solution
The original cost to the entity for the share option scheme was:
2,000 shares × 23 managers × £33 = £1,518,000
This was being recognised at the rate of £506,000 in each of the three years.
At 30 June 20X5 the entity should recognise a cost based on the amount of options it had vested on
that date. The total cost is:
2,000 × 24 managers × £33 = £1,584,000
After deducting the amount recognised in 20X4, the 20X5 charge to profit or loss is £1,078,000.
The compensation paid is:
2,000 × 24 × £63 = £3,024,000
Of this, the amount attributable to the fair value of the options cancelled is:
2,000 × 24 × £60 (the fair value of the option, not of the underlying share) = £2,880,000
This is deducted from equity as a share buyback. The remaining £144,000 (£3,024,000 less
£2,880,000) is charged to profit or loss.
4.7.6 Cancellation and reissuance

Where an entity has been through a capital restructuring or there has been a significant downturn in
the equity market through external factors, an alternative to repricing the share options is to cancel
them and issue new options based on revised terms. The end result is essentially the same as an
entity modifying the original options and therefore should be recognised in the same way.
4.7.7 Cancellation by parties other than the entity

As well as the entity, other parties may cancel an equity instrument, for example the counterpart (eg,
the employee) may cancel.
Cancellations by the employee must be treated in the same way as cancellations by the employer,
resulting in an accelerated charge to profit or loss of the unamortised balance of the options
granted.
4.7.8 Repurchase after vesting

Where equity instruments are repurchased by an employing entity following vesting, this is similar to
the entity providing the employee with cash remuneration in the first instance. The reporting
therefore reflects this, with the payment being recognised as a deduction from equity. The charge
recognised in profit or loss will remain, as this reflects the services for which the employee has been
remunerated. If the payment made is in excess of the fair value of the instruments granted, then this
is recognised immediately in profit or loss reflecting that this is payment for additional services
beyond what was originally agreed.
4.8 Determining the fair value of equity instruments granted

Where a transaction is measured by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted, fair
value is based on market prices where available.
If market prices are not available, the entity should estimate the fair value of the equity instruments
granted using a suitable valuation technique. These techniques are covered at Professional Level
and in your Strategic Business Management Workbook.
HB2021

4.8.1 Calculating fair value
Share options granted to employees do not generally have a readily obtainable market price
because the conditions attached to the options usually make them different from other options that
an entity may trade on the open market.
Where there is no readily obtainable market price an entity should use an option pricing model to
calculate fair value. The type of option pricing model should reflect the nature of the options.
Employee options often have long lives and are generally exercisable between the vesting date and
the end of the life of the option; the model used should allow for such circumstances.
All option pricing models take into account a number of factors as set out below.
(a) The exercise price of the option – a known amount.
(b) The life of the option – although the maximum life of the option is a known quantity, this input
requires an estimate of the expected life of the individual option. Employee options, for
example, are typically exercised soon after vesting date, as this is generally the only way that an
employee can crystallise any gain.
(c) The current price of the underlying shares – this is generally a known amount (the listed market
value of the shares).
(d) The expected volatility of the share price – volatility is typically expressed in annualised terms for
ease of comparability. The expected annualised volatility of a share is expressed in terms of the
compounded annual rate of return that is expected to arise approximately two-thirds of the time.
Volatility (also discussed in detail in your Strategic Business Management Workbook) is a
measure of the amount by which a share price is expected to fluctuate during a period. For
example, a share worth £100 with a volatility of 40% would suggest that it will be worth between
£60 and £140 approximately two-thirds of the time between the grant date and the exercise of
the options.
(e) The dividend expected on the shares – this should only be included where the employee is not
entitled to dividends on the underlying options granted.
(f) The risk-free interest rate for the life of the option – this is typically “the implied yield currently
available on zero-coupon government issues of the country in whose currency the exercise price
is expressed”.
Factors which are typically used to assess volatility include the historical volatility of the entity’s share
price and the length of time that the shares have been publicly traded.
4.8.2 Which valuation model?

The determination of an appropriate model for the valuation of share-based payment transactions is
an accounting policy choice and should be applied consistently to similar types of transactions.
In choosing an appropriate model the key question is whether the model used to estimate fair value
represents the economics of the instruments and whether the inputs represent the attributes being
measured.
The Black-Scholes model
The Black-Scholes-Merton formula (normally referred to as the Black-Scholes model) is a popular
model and one that is easy to use. However, the model is based on the assumption that options are
not exercised before the end of their lives and therefore may not be suitable for valuing employee
share options. Where such options have a relatively short life and the period after vesting is short, the
Black-Scholes model may provide a reasonable approximation of fair value.
Strengths
• The formula required to calculate fair value is relatively straightforward and can be easily used in
spreadsheets.
• Its wide use enhances comparability.
Weaknesses
The inputs and assumptions of the Black-Scholes model are designed to cover the entire period the
option is outstanding. Because of this feature the model is described as a ‘closed form solution’.
HB2021

• The model cannot therefore be adjusted to take into account anticipated changes in market
conditions or incorporate different values for variables (such as volatility) over the term of the
option as perceived at the grant date. The Black-Scholes model assumes constant volatility and
cannot therefore be adjusted to take into account the empirical observation that the implied
volatility of a share option changes as the intrinsic value of the option changes.
• The model cannot take into account the possibility of early exercise. This is less of an issue when
options have to be exercised on or shortly after vesting.
The Binomial model
The Binomial model applies the same principles as decision tree analysis to the pricing of an option.
Based on the relative probabilities of each path, an expected outcome is estimated.
In contrast to the Black-Scholes model, the Binomial model can incorporate different values for the
variables over the term of the option. Therefore it is described as an ‘open form solution’ and it can
be adjusted to take into account changes in market conditions and the input variables.
Strengths
• The Binomial model is generally accepted as a more flexible alternative to the Black-Scholes
model.
• The inputs into the model are more suitable for an option with a longer term.
Weaknesses
• In practice, the application of the model is more complex than the Black-Scholes model. Whereas
the Black-Scholes model allows the value of an option to be calculated using a relatively simple
spreadsheet, the Binomial model requires a more complex spreadsheet or program to calculate
the option value.
• The calculation of the probabilities of particular price movements is highly subjective.
Monte-Carlo simulation
Monte-Carlo simulation extends the Binomial model by undertaking thousands of simulations of
potential future outcomes for key assumptions and calculating the option value under each scenario.
Monte-Carlo models can incorporate very complex performance conditions and exercise patterns.
They are generally considered the best type of model for valuing employee share-based payments,
although they are also affected by the subjectivity of probabilities.

Section overview
• The credit entry in respect of a cash-settled share-based payment transaction is reported as a

liability.
• The fair value of the liability should be remeasured at each reporting date until settled. Changes
in the fair value are recognised in profit or loss.
5.1 Introduction
Cash-settled share-based payment transactions are transactions where the amount of cash paid for
goods and services is based on the value of an entity’s equity instruments.
Examples of this type of transaction include:
(a) share appreciation rights (SARs): the employees become entitled to a future cash payment
(rather than an equity instrument), based on the increase in the entity’s share price from a
specified level over a specified period of time; or
(b) an entity might grant to its employees a right to receive a future cash payment by granting to
them a right to shares that are redeemable.
HB2021

If goods or services are received in exchange for cash amounts linked to the value of shares, the
transaction is accounted for by:
£ £
DEBIT Expense/Asset X
CREDIT Liability X
Allocation of expense to financial years

The expense should be recognised as services are provided. For example, if share appreciation
rights do not vest until the employees have completed a specified period of service, the entity
should recognise the services received and the related liability, over that period.
Measurement
The goods or services acquired and the liability incurred are measured at the fair value of the
liability.
The entity should remeasure the fair value of the liability at each reporting date and at the date of
settlement. Any changes in fair value are recognised in profit or loss for the period.
Vesting conditions
Vesting conditions should be taken into account in a similar way as for equity-settled transactions
when determining the number of rights to payment that will vest.
Worked example: Cash-settled share-based payment transaction

On 1 January 20X1 an entity grants 100 cash SARs to each of its 500 employees, on condition that
the employees continue to work for the entity until 31 December 20X3.
During 20X1 35 employees leave. The entity estimates that a further 60 will leave during 20X2 and
20X3.
During 20X2 40 employees leave and the entity estimates that a further 25 will leave during 20X3.
During 20X3 22 employees leave.
At 31 December 20X3 150 employees exercise their SARs. Another 140 employees exercise their
SARs at 31 December 20X4 and the remaining 113 employees exercise their SARs at the end of
20X5.
The fair values of the SARs for each year in which a liability exists are shown below, together with the
intrinsic values at the dates of exercise.
Fair value Intrinsic value

£ £
20X1 14.40
20X2 15.50
20X3 18.20 15.00
20X4 21.40 20.00
20X5 25.00
Requirement
Calculate the amount to be recognised in profit or loss for each of the five years ended 31 December
20X5 and the liability to be recognised in the statement of financial position at 31 December for each
of the five years.
HB2021

Solution
For the three years to the vesting date of 31 December 20X3 the expense is based on the entity’s
estimate of the number of SARs that will actually vest (as for an equity-settled transaction). However,
the fair value of the liability is remeasured at each year end.
The intrinsic value of the SARs at the date of exercise is the amount of cash actually paid.
Liability at Expense for

year end year
£ £ £
20X1 Expected to vest (500 – 95):
405 × 100 × £14.40 × 1/3 194,400 194,400
20X2 Expected to vest (500 – 100):
400 × 100 × £15.50 × 2/3 413,333 218,933
20X3 Exercised:
150 × 100 × £15.00 225,000
Not yet exercised (500 – 97 – 150):
253 × 100 × £18.20 460,460 47,127
272,127
20X4 Exercised:
140 × 100 × £20.00 280,000
Not yet exercised (253 – 140):
113 × 100 × £21.40 241,820 (218,640)
61,360
20X5 Exercised:
113 × 100 × £25.00 282,500
Nil (241,820)
40,680
787,500
Interactive question 6: Share-based payment

J&B granted 200 options on its £1 ordinary shares to each of its 800 employees on 1 January 20X1.
Each grant is conditional upon the employee being employed by J&B until 31 December 20X3.
J&B estimated at 1 January 20X1 that:
• the fair value of each option was £4 (before adjustment for the possibility of forfeiture); and
• approximately 50 employees would leave during 20X1, 40 during 20X2 and 30 during 20X3
thereby forfeiting their rights to receive the options. The departures were expected to be evenly
spread within each year.
The exercise price of the options was £1.50 and the market value of a J&B share on 1 January 20X1
was £3.
In the event, only 40 employees left during 20X1 (and the estimate of total departures was revised
down to 95 at 31 December 20X1), 20 during 20X2 (and the estimate of total departures was revised
to 70 at 31 December 20X2) and none left during 20X3. The departures were spread evenly during
each year.
HB2021

The directors of J&B have asked you to illustrate how the scheme is accounted for under IFRS 2,
Share-based Payment.
Requirements
6.1 Show the double entries for the charge to profit or loss for employee services over the three
years and for the share issue, assuming all employees entitled to benefit from the scheme
exercised their rights and the shares were issued on 31 December 20X3.
6.2 Explain how your solution would differ had J&B offered its employees cash, based on the share
value rather than share options.
6 Share-based payment with a choice of settlement

Section overview
Accounting for share-based transactions with a choice of settlement depends on which party has the
choice.
• Where the counterparty has a choice of settlement, a liability component and an equity
component are identified.
• Where the entity has a choice of settlement, the whole transaction is treated either as cash-settled
or as equity-settled, depending on whether the entity has an obligation to settle in cash.
6.1 Counterparty has the choice

Where the counterparty or recipient, rather than the issuing entity, has the right to choose the form
settlement will take, IFRS 2 regards the transaction as a compound financial instrument to which split
accounting must be applied.
This means that the entity has issued an instrument with a debt component in so far as the recipient
may demand cash and an equity component to the extent that the recipient may demand settlement
in equity instruments.
Figure 19.3: Choice of settlement
The entity has issued

a compound financial instrument
Debt component Equity component
As for cash-settled Measured as the residual

transaction fair value at grant date
IFRS 2 requires that the value of the debt component is established first. The equity component is
then measured as the residual between that amount and the value of the instrument as a whole. In
this respect IFRS 2 applies similar principles to IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation where the
value of the debt components is established first. However, the method used to value the constituent
parts of the compound instrument in IFRS 2 differs from that of IAS 32.
HB2021

Figure 19.4: Compound instrument and IFRS 2
Fair value of goods Fair value of Equity component

or service debt component (residual)
For transactions in which the fair value of goods or services is measured directly (that is, normally
where the recipient is not an employee of the company), the fair value of the equity component is
measured as the difference between the fair value of the goods or services required and the fair
value of the debt component.
For other transactions including those with employees where the fair value of the goods or services is
measured indirectly by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted, the fair value of
the compound instrument is estimated as a whole.
The debt and equity components must then be valued separately. Normally transactions are
structured in such a way that the fair value of each alternative settlement is the same.
Worked example: Choice of settlement

On 1 January 20X4 an entity grants an employee a right under which she can, if she is still employed
on 31 December 20X6, elect to receive either 8,000 shares or cash to the value, on that date, of
7,000 shares.
The market price of the entity’s shares is £21 at the date of grant, £27 at the end of 20X4, £33 at the
end of 20X5 and £42 at the end of 20X6, at which time the employee elects to receive the shares.
The entity estimates the fair value of the share route to be £19.
Requirement
Show the accounting treatment.
Solution
This arrangement results in a compound financial instrument.
The fair value of the cash route is:
7,000 × £21 = £147,000
The fair value of the share route is:
8,000 × £19 = £152,000
The fair value of the equity component is therefore:
£5,000 (£152,000 less £147,000)
The share-based payment is recognised as follows:
Liabilities Equity Expense

£ £ £
20X4 1/3 × 7,000 × £27 63,000 63,000
£5,000 × 1/3 1,667 1,667
20X5 2/3 × 7,000 × £33 154,000 91,000

£5,000 × 1/3 1,667 1,667
20X6 7,000 × £42 294,000 140,000

£5,000 × 1/3 1,667 1,667
As the employee elects to receive shares rather than cash, £294,000 is transferred from liabilities to
equity at the end of 20X6. The balance on equity is £299,000.
HB2021

6.2 Entity has the choice
Where the entity may choose what form the settlement will take, it should recognise a liability to the
extent that it has a present obligation to deliver cash. Such circumstances arise where, for example,
the entity is prohibited from issuing shares or where it has a stated policy, or past practice, of issuing
cash rather than shares. Where a present obligation exists, the entity should record the transaction as
if it is a cash-settled share-based payment transaction. If no present obligation exists, the entity
should treat the transaction as if it was purely an equity-settled transaction. On settlement, if the
transaction was treated as an equity-settled transaction and cash was paid, the cash should be
treated as if it was a repurchase of the equity instrument by a deduction against equity.
Interactive question 7: Share-based payment

Woodley plc is one of your assurance clients, and has asked you to advise on how to apply IFRS 2 to
its new share option scheme. The company’s reporting period is to 31 December.
The scheme is open to all 450 employees and all options are granted on 1 January 20X7. The fair
value of each option is £15 on 1 January 20X7. The company estimates that this fair value will rise by
approximately £5 per year. Each employee is given 100 options.
The vesting of the share option depends on achieving two independent targets. The first target is
that the share price must have increased by a total of at least 10% in order for the options to vest.
The second target is that shares can vest when profits increase by 15% in any year, or by an average
of 12% in any two years. The scheme will be cancelled after four years.
In 20X7, profits increase by 10% and the share price has risen by 5%. The shares do not vest, but at
31 December 20X7 the forecast increase in profits for 20X8 is 14%, and the forecast increase in share
price for 20X8 is 5%. It is therefore anticipated the shares will vest in 20X8.
30 employees leave in 20X7 and it is estimated that a further 25 will leave before the options vest.
In 20X8, profits increase by 13% so the shares do not vest, although the share price target has now
been achieved. 15 employees left during the year and it is anticipated that a further 26 will leave
before the scheme is expected to vest in 20X9 (forecast profit increase for 20X9 is 12%).
In 20X9, profits increased by the forecast 12%, so the options vest. 390 employees ultimately
received their options.
Requirements
7.1 Explain the principles of how this scheme should be measured and recognised. Calculate the
IFRS 2 expense and set out the double entries required for 20X7, 20X8 and 20X9.
7.2 Describe how your answer would be different if in 20Y0, 100 employees allowed their vested
share options to lapse.
7.3 How would your answer to (a) be different if the actual increase in profits for the year to 31
December 20X9 was 10% and, at that date, it was forecast that profits for 20Y0 were to increase
by 15%, but the actual increase achieved in 20Y0 was 9%? If the targets related to share price
and not profits, describe how to account for failing to meet the targets set.
7 Group and treasury share transactions

Section overview
IFRS 2 was amended in 2009 to incorporate the requirements of IFRIC 11 (now withdrawn) on group
and treasury share transactions.
HB2021

7.1 Background
IFRS 2 gives guidance on group and treasury shares in three circumstances:
• Where an entity grants rights to its own equity instruments to employees, and then either chooses
or is required to buy those equity instruments from another party, in order to satisfy its obligations
to its employees under the share-based payment arrangement
• Where a parent company grants rights to its equity instruments to employees of its subsidiary
• Where a subsidiary grants rights to equity instruments of its parent to its employees

7.2.1 Entity chooses or is required to purchase its own shares
These transactions should always be accounted for as equity-settled share-based payment
transactions under IFRS 2.
7.2.2 Parent grants rights to its equity instruments to employees of its subsidiary
Assuming the transaction is accounted for as equity-settled in the consolidated financial statements,
the subsidiary must measure the services received using the requirements for equity-settled
transactions in IFRS 2, and must recognise a corresponding increase in equity as a contribution from
the parent.
7.2.3 Subsidiary grants rights to equity instruments of its parent to its employees
The subsidiary accounts for the transaction as a cash-settled share-based payment transaction.
Therefore, in the subsidiary’s individual financial statements, the accounting treatment of transactions
in which a subsidiary’s employees are granted rights to equity instruments of its parent would differ,
depending on whether the parent or the subsidiary granted those rights to the subsidiary’s
employees. This is because in the former situation, the subsidiary has not incurred a liability to
transfer cash or other assets of the entity to its employees, whereas it has incurred such a liability in
the latter situation (being a liability to transfer equity instruments of its parent).
8 Disclosure
Section overview
The disclosures of IFRS 2 are extensive and require the analysis of share-based payments made
during the year, their impact on earnings and the financial position of the company and the basis on
which fair values were calculated.
8.1 Nature and extent of share-based payment arrangements in the period

(a) A description of each type of share-based payment arrangement that existed at any time during
the period, including the general terms and conditions of each arrangement.
The disclosure requirements of IFRS 2 are designed to enable the user of financial statements to
understand:
– The nature and extent of share-based payment arrangements that existed during the period
– The basis upon which fair value was measured
– The impact of share-based transactions on earnings and financial position
(b) The number and weighted average exercise prices of share options for each of the following
groups of options.
– Outstanding at the beginning of the period
– Granted during the period
– Forfeited during the period
– Exercised during the period (plus the weighted average share price at the time of exercise)
HB2021

– Expired during the period
– Outstanding at the end of the period
– Exercisable at the end of the period
(c) For share options exercised during the period, the weighted average share price at the date of
exercise.
(d) For share options outstanding at the end of the period, the range of exercise prices and
weighted average remaining contractual life.
8.2 Disclosable transactions under IAS 24

Share-based payments in respect of key management personnel and related parties have to be
disclosed in accordance with IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures.
8.3 Basis of fair value measurement

IFRS 2 requires disclosure of information that enables users of the financial statements to understand
how the fair value of the goods or services received, or the fair value of the equity instruments
granted, during the period was determined.
For equity instruments the disclosure of fair value methodology applies to both:
• new instruments issued during the reporting period; and
• existing instruments modified during the reporting period.
The entity must disclose the option pricing model used and the inputs to that model. These will
include at least:
• the weighted average share price
• the exercise price
• the expected volatility of the share price
• the life of the option
• the expected dividends on the underlying share
• the risk-free interest rate over the life of the option
• the method used and the assumptions made to incorporate the effect of early exercise
8.4 Impact on earnings and financial position

Entities should also disclose information that enables users of the financial statements to understand
the effect of share-based payment transactions on the entity’s profit or loss for the period and on its
(a) The total expense recognised for the period arising from share-based payment transactions,
including separate disclosure of that portion of the total expense that arises from transactions
accounted for as equity-settled share-based payment transactions
(b) For liabilities arising from share-based payment transactions:
(1) The total carrying amount at the end of the period
(2) The total intrinsic value at the end of the period of liabilities for which the counterparty’s
right to cash or other assets had vested by the end of the period
The disclosure requirements of IFRS 2 are illustrated by an example below.
8.5 Model disclosures

(Note that comparative figures have been omitted from the disclosure.)
Share options are granted to both directors and employees, with the exercise price always set at the
market price at the date of grant. Conditions of the options typically include sales growth and cost-
reduction targets over a three-year period from the date of grant. Options which vest are exercisable
over the subsequent four years.
HB2021

For the year the number and weighted average exercise prices were as follows.
Options Average exercise price

£
At start of year 163,000 2.00
Granted 50,000 3.00
Forfeited (8,000) –
Exercised (30,000) 1.80
Expired (6,000) –
At end of year 169,000 2.40
Details of the 169,000 outstanding options are as follows:

• The range of exercise prices is £1.50 to £3.00 and the weighted average remaining life is 5.1
years.
• 72,000 are currently exercisable.
The weighted average share price at the date the 30,000 options were exercised during the year was
£2.95.
The fair value of the options granted, all of which were granted on 18 June, was £5.60, based on the
Black-Scholes model. The key inputs to that model were a weighted average share price of £3.50, an
exercise price of £3.00, expected volatility (based on historic volatility) of 28% and a risk-free interest
rate of 4% per annum.
The total expense for share options recognised in the year was £280,000.
8.6 Impact of share-based payments on earnings per share (EPS)

IAS 33, Earnings per Share requires that for calculating diluted EPS all dilutive options need to be
taken into account. Employee share options with fixed terms and non-vested ordinary shares are
treated as options outstanding on grant date even though they may not have vested on the date the
diluted EPS is calculated. All awards which do not specify performance criteria are treated as options.
Employee share options contingent on performance-related conditions are treated as contingently
issuable shares and are dealt with in detail in Chapter 11.
9 Distributable profits and purchase of own

shares
Section overview
Various rules have been created to ensure that dividends are only paid out of distributable profits.
Definition
Dividend: An amount payable to shareholders from profits or other distributable reserves.
9.1 Power to declare dividends

A company may only pay dividends out of profits available for the purpose.
The power to declare a dividend is given by the articles which often include the following rules.
HB2021

Rules related to the power to declare a dividend
The company in general meeting may declare dividends.
No dividend may exceed the amount recommended by the directors who have an implied power
in their discretion to set aside profits as reserves.
The directors may declare such interim dividends as they consider justified.
Dividends are normally declared payable on the paid-up amount of share capital. For example, a
£1 share which is fully paid will carry entitlement to twice as much dividend as a £1 share 50p paid.
A dividend may be paid otherwise than in cash.
Dividends may be paid by cheque or warrant sent through the post to the shareholder at his
registered address or in any electronic mode. If shares are held jointly, payment of dividend is
made to the first-named joint holder on the register.
Listed companies generally pay two dividends a year; an interim dividend based on interim profit
figures, and a final dividend based on the annual accounts and approved at the AGM.
A dividend becomes a debt when it is declared and due for payment. A shareholder is not entitled
to a dividend unless it is declared in accordance with the procedure prescribed by the articles and
the declared date for payment has arrived.
This is so even if the member holds preference shares carrying a priority entitlement to receive a
specified amount of dividend on a specified date in the year. The directors may decide to withhold
profits and cannot be compelled to recommend a dividend.
If the articles refer to ‘payment’ of dividends this means payment in cash. A power to pay dividends
in specie (otherwise than in cash) is not implied but may be expressly created. Scrip dividends are
dividends paid by the issue of additional shares.
Any provision of the articles for the declaration and payment of dividends is subject to the overriding
rule that no dividend may be paid except out of profits distributable by law.
9.2 Distributable profits
Tutorial note
Distributable profits may be defined as ‘accumulated realised profits ... less accumulated realised
losses’. ‘Accumulated’ means that any losses of previous years must be included in reckoning the
current distributable surplus. ‘Realised’ profits are determined in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles.
Definition
Profits available for distribution: Accumulated realised profits (which have not been distributed or
capitalised) less accumulated realised losses (which have not been previously written off in a
reduction or reorganisation of capital).
The word ‘accumulated‘ requires that any losses of previous years must be included in reckoning the
current distributable surplus.
A profit or loss is deemed to be realised if it is treated as realised in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles (GAAP). Hence, financial reporting and accounting standards in
issue, plus GAAP, should be taken into account when determining realised profits and losses.
Depreciation must be treated as a realised loss, and debited against profit, in determining the
amount of distributable profit remaining.
However, a revalued asset will have depreciation charged on its historical cost and the increase in
the value in the asset. The Companies Act allows the depreciation provision on the valuation increase
to be treated also as a realised profit.
HB2021

Effectively there is a cancelling out, and at the end only depreciation that relates to historical cost
will affect dividends.
Context example: Depreciation charge

Suppose that an asset purchased for £20,000 has a 10-year life. Provision is made for depreciation on
a straight-line basis. This means the annual depreciation charge of £2,000 must be deducted in
reckoning the company’s realised profit less realised loss.
Suppose now that after five years the asset is revalued to £50,000 and in consequence the annual
depreciation charge is raised to £10,000 (over each of the five remaining years of the asset’s life).
The effect of the Act is that £8,000 of this amount may be reclassified as a realised profit. The net
effect is that realised profits are reduced by only £2,000 in respect of depreciation, as before.
If, on a general revaluation of all fixed assets, it appears that there is a diminution in value of any one
or more assets, then any related provision(s) need not be treated as a realised loss.
The Act states that if a company shows development expenditure as an asset in its accounts it must
usually be treated as a realised loss in the year it occurs. However, it can be carried forward in special
circumstances (generally taken to mean in accordance with accounting standards).
9.3 Dividends of public companies

A public company may only make a distribution if its net assets are, at the time, not less than the
aggregate of its called-up share capital and undistributable reserves. The dividend which it may pay
is limited to such amount as will leave its net assets at not less than that aggregate amount.
Undistributable reserves are defined as follows:
(a) Share premium account
(b) Capital redemption reserve
(c) Any surplus of accumulated unrealised profits over accumulated unrealised losses (known as a
revaluation reserve). However, a deficit of accumulated unrealised profits compared with
accumulated unrealised losses must be treated as a realised loss
(d) Any reserve which the company is prohibited from distributing by statute or by its constitution or
any law
Context example: Permissible dividend

Suppose that a public company has an issued share capital (fully paid) of £800,000 and £200,000 on
share premium account (which is an undistributable reserve). If its assets less liabilities are less than
£1 million it may not pay a dividend. However, if its net assets are, say, £1,250,000 it may pay a
dividend but only of such amount as will leave net assets of £1 million or more, so its maximum
permissible dividend is £250,000.
The dividend rules apply to every form of distribution of assets except the following:
• The issue of bonus shares whether fully or partly paid
• The redemption or purchase of the company’s shares out of capital or profits
• A reduction of share capital
• A distribution of assets to members in a winding up
You must appreciate how the rules relating to public companies in this area are more stringent than
the rules for private companies.
Interactive question 8: Main rules

What are the main rules affecting a company’s ability to distribute its profits as dividends?
HB2021

9.4 Relevant accounts
Tutorial note
The profits available for distribution are generally determined from the last annual accounts to be
prepared.
Whether a company has profits from which to pay a dividend is determined by reference to its
‘relevant accounts’, which are generally the last annual accounts to be prepared.
If the auditor has qualified their report on the accounts they must also state in writing whether, in
their opinion, the subject matter of their qualification is material in determining whether the dividend
may be paid. This statement must have been circulated to the members (for a private company) or
considered at a general meeting (for a public company).
A company may produce interim accounts if the latest annual accounts do not disclose a sufficient
distributable profit to cover the proposed dividend. It may also produce initial accounts if it
proposes to pay a dividend during its first accounting reference period or before its first accounts are
laid before the company in general meeting. These accounts may be unaudited, but they must
suffice to permit a proper judgement to be made of amounts of any of the relevant items.
If a public company has to produce initial or interim accounts, which is unusual, they must be full
accounts such as the company is required to produce as final accounts at the end of the year. They
need not be audited. However, the auditors must, in the case of initial accounts, satisfy themselves
that the accounts have been ‘properly prepared’ to comply with the Act. A copy of any such accounts
of a public company (with any auditors’ statement) must be delivered to the Registrar for filing.
9.5 Infringement of dividend rules

In certain situations the directors and members may be liable to make good to the company the
amount of an unlawful dividend.
If a dividend is paid otherwise than out of distributable profits the company, the directors and the
shareholders may be involved in making good the unlawful distribution.
The directors are held responsible since they either recommend to members in general meeting that
a dividend should be declared or they declare interim dividends.
(a) The directors are liable if they declare a dividend which they know is paid out of capital.
(b) The directors are liable if, without preparing any accounts, they declare or recommend a
dividend which proves to be paid out of capital. It is their duty to satisfy themselves that profits
are available.
(c) The directors are liable if they make some mistake of law or interpretation of the constitution
which leads them to recommend or declare an unlawful dividend. However, in such cases the
directors may well be entitled to relief, as their acts were performed ‘honestly and reasonably’.
The directors may honestly rely on proper accounts which disclose an apparent distributable profit
out of which the dividend can properly be paid. They are not liable if it later appears that the
assumptions or estimates used in preparing the accounts, although reasonable at the time, were in
fact unsound.
The position of members is as follows.
(a) A member may obtain an injunction to restrain a company from paying an unlawful dividend.
(b) Members voting in general meeting cannot authorise the payment of an unlawful dividend nor
release the directors from their liability to pay it back.
(c) The company can recover from members an unlawful dividend if the members knew or had
reasonable grounds to believe that it was unlawful.
(d) If the directors have to make good to the company an unlawful dividend they may claim
indemnity from members who at the time of receipt knew of the irregularity.
(e) Members knowingly receiving an unlawful dividend may not bring an action against the
directors.
If an unlawful dividend is paid by reason of error in the accounts the company may be unable to
claim against either the directors or the members. The company might then have a claim against its
auditors if the undiscovered mistake was due to negligence on their part.
HB2021

Re London & General Bank (No 2) 1895
The facts: The auditor had drawn the attention of the directors to the fact that certain loans to
associated companies were likely to prove irrecoverable. The directors refused to make any provision
for these potential losses. They persuaded the auditor to confine his comments in his audit report to
the uninformative statement that the value of assets shown in the statement of financial position ‘is
dependent on realisation’. A dividend was paid in reliance on the apparent profits shown in the
accounts. The company went into liquidation and the liquidator claimed compensation from the
auditor for loss of capital due to his failure to report clearly to members what he well knew was
affecting the reliability of the accounts.
Decision: The auditor has a duty to report what he knows of the true financial position: otherwise his
audit is ‘an idle farce’. He had failed in this duty and was liable.
The above case, in which the auditor was found wanting, shows that communication can fail by being
too vague or incomplete, as well as by stating something misleading.
9.6 Purchase of own shares
Tutorial note
You must be able to carry out simple calculations showing the amounts to be transferred to the
capital redemption reserve on purchase or redemption of own shares and how the amount of any
premium on redemption would be treated.
Any limited company is permitted without restriction to cancel unissued shares and in that way to
reduce its authorised share capital. That change does not alter its financial position.
Three factors need to be in place to give effect to a reduction of a company’s issued share capital.
ARTICLES OF
SPECIAL RESOLUTION COURT ORDER
ASSOCIATION
+ A special resolution must + Must be confirmed by the
These must contain the
be passed. court.
necessary authority.
Articles usually contain the necessary power. If not, the company in general meeting would first pass
a special resolution to alter the articles appropriately and then proceed, as the second item on the
agenda of the meeting, to pass a special resolution to reduce the capital.
There are three basic methods of reducing share capital specified.
(a) Extinguish or reduce liability on partly paid shares. A company may have issued £1 (nominal)
shares 75p paid up. The outstanding liability of 25p per share may be eliminated altogether by
reducing each share to 75p (nominal) fully paid or some intermediate figure eg, 80p (nominal)
75p paid. Nothing is returned to the shareholders but the company gives up a claim against
them for money which it could call up whenever needed.
(b) Cancel paid-up share capital which has been lost or which is no longer represented by
available assets. Suppose that the issued shares are £1 (nominal) fully paid but the net assets
now represent a value of only 50p per share. The difference is probably matched by a debit
balance on retained earnings (or provision for fall in value of assets). The company could reduce
the nominal value of its £1 shares to 50p (or some intermediate figure) and apply the amount to
write off the debit balance or provision wholly or in part. It would then be able to resume
payment of dividends out of future profits without being obliged to make good past losses. The
resources of the company are not reduced by this procedure of part cancellation of nominal
value of shares but it avoids having to rebuild lost capital by retaining profits.
(c) Pay off part of the paid-up share capital out of surplus assets. The company might repay to
shareholders, say, 30p in cash per £1 share by reducing the nominal value of the share to 70p.
This reduces the assets of the company by 30p per share.
HB2021

9.7 Share premium account
Whenever a company obtains for its shares a consideration in excess of their nominal value, it must
transfer the excess to a share premium account. The general rule is that the share premium account
is subject to the same restriction as share capital. However, a bonus issue can be made using the
share premium account (reducing share premium in order to increase issued share capital).
Following the decision in Shearer v Bercain 1980, there is an exemption from the general rules on
setting up a share premium account, in certain circumstances where new shares are issued as
consideration for the acquisition of shares in another company.
The other permitted uses of share premium are to pay the following:
(a) Capital expenses such as preliminary expenses of forming the company
(b) Discount on the issue of shares or debentures
(c) Premium (if any) paid on redemption of debentures
Private companies (but not public companies) may also use a share premium account in purchasing
or redeeming their own shares out of capital.
9.8 Practical reasons for purchase or redemption

Companies may wish to repurchase or redeem their issued shares for a variety of reasons.
(a) The company may have surplus funds for which it cannot identify sufficient attractive business
opportunities.
(b) A reduction in the number of issued shares helps to improve earnings per share (EPS) and
return on capital employed (ROCE).
(c) Dividend payments may be reduced, allowing the cash to be used for other purposes:
– Funding operating activities
– Capital expenditure
– Repayment of debt
(d) The remaining shareholders’ holdings will proportionately increase. Hence, even if the overall
total dividends might not increase, some shareholders could receive more cash individually.
(e) Problem or dissident shareholders in private companies can be paid off and leave the company
without spreading the membership of the company beyond the existing shareholders.
(f) It provides a potential exit route for venture capitalists who intend to be involved in the business
for a limited period.
(g) It provides an escape route for entrepreneurs who have taken their companies to market to take
them back into private ownership eg, Virgin, Amstrad and Harvey Nichols.
9.9 Purchase or redemption by a company of its own shares

There is a general prohibition against any voluntary acquisition by a company of its own shares, but
that prohibition is subject to exceptions.
A company may:
(a) purchase its own shares in compliance with an order of the court;
(b) issue redeemable shares and then redeem them;
(c) purchase its own shares under certain specified procedures; or
(d) forfeit or accept the surrender of its shares.
These restrictions relate to the purchase of shares: there is no objection to accepting a gift.
The conditions for the issue and redemption of redeemable shares are set out in the Companies Act
2006.
(a) The articles must give authority for the issue of redeemable shares. Articles do usually provide
for it but, if they do not, the articles must be altered before the shares are issued.
(b) Redeemable shares may only be issued if at the time of issue the company also has issued
shares which are not redeemable: a company’s capital may not consist entirely of redeemable
shares: s 684.
(c) Redeemable shares may only be redeemed if they are fully paid.
HB2021

(d) The terms of redemption must provide for payment on redemption.
(e) The shares may be redeemed out of distributable profits, or the proceeds of a new issue of
shares, or capital (if it is a private company) in accordance with the relevant rules.
(f) Any premium payable on redemption must be provided out of distributable profits subject to an
exception described below.
The CA 2006 provides regulations which prevent companies from redeeming shares except by
transferring a sum equal to the nominal value of shares redeemed from distributable profit reserves
to a non-distributable ‘capital redemption reserve‘. This reduction in distributable reserves is an
example of the capitalisation of profits, where previously distributable profits become
undistributable.
The purpose of these regulations is to prevent companies from reducing their share capital
investment so as to put creditors of the company at risk.
Note: Following IAS 32, redeemable preference shares are no longer classified as equity; they are
classified as financial liabilities.
Context example: Capitalisation of profits

Suppose, for example, that Muffin Ltd decided to repurchase and cancel £100,000 of its ordinary
share capital. A statement of financial position of the company is currently as follows.
£
Assets
Cash 100,000
Other assets 300,000
400,000
Equity and liabilities
Ordinary shares 130,000
Retained earnings 150,000
400,000
Now if Muffin Ltd were able to repurchase the shares without making any transfer from the retained
earnings to a capital redemption reserve, the effect of the share redemption on the statement of
financial position would be as follows.
£
Net assets
Non-cash assets 300,000
Less trade payables 120,000
180,000
Equity
180,000
In this example, the company would still be able to pay dividends out of profits of up to £150,000. If
it did, the creditors of the company would be highly vulnerable, financing £120,000 out of a total of
£150,000 assets of the company.
The regulations in the Act are intended to prevent such extreme situations arising. On repurchase of
the shares, Muffin Ltd would have been required to transfer £100,000 from its retained earnings to a
HB2021

non-distributable reserve, called a capital redemption reserve. The effect of the redemption of shares
on the statement of financial position would have been:
£ £
Net assets
Non-cash assets 300,000
Less trade payables 120,000
180,000
Equity
Reserves
Distributable (retained earnings) 50,000
Non-distributable (capital redemption reserve) 100,000
150,000
180,000
The maximum distributable profits are now £50,000. If Muffin Ltd paid all these as a dividend, there
would still be £250,000 of assets left in the company, just over half of which would be financed by
non-distributable equity capital.
When a company redeems some shares, or purchases some of its own shares, they should be
redeemed:
(a) out of distributable profits; or
(b) out of the proceeds of a new issue of shares.
If there is any premium on redemption, the premium must be paid out of distributable profits,
except that if the shares were issued at a premium, then any premium payable on their redemption
may be paid out of the proceeds of a new share issue made for the purpose, up to an amount equal
to the lesser of the following:
(a) The aggregate premiums received on issue of the shares
(b) The balance on the share premium account (including premium on issue of the new shares)
Context example: Repurchase of shares

A numerical example might help to clarify this point. Suppose that Just Desserts Ltd intends to
repurchase 10,000 shares of £1 each at a premium of 5p per share. The redemption may be financed
out of:
Distributable profits (10,000 × £1.05 = £10,500).
The proceeds of a new share issue (say, by issuing 10,000 new £1 shares at par). The premium of
£500 must be paid out of distributable profits.
Combination of a new share issue and distributable profits.
Out of the proceeds of a new share issue where the shares to be repurchased were issued at a
premium. For example, if the shares had been issued at a premium of 3p per share, then (assuming
that the balance on the share premium account after the new share issue was at least £300) £300 of
the premium on redemption could be debited to the share premium account and only £200 need be
debited to distributable profits.
(1) Where a company purchases its own shares wholly out of distributable profits, it must transfer to
the capital redemption reserve an amount equal to the nominal value of the shares repurchased.
HB2021

In this example, the accounting entries would be:
£ £
DEBIT Share capital account 10,000
Retained earnings (premium on redemption) 500
CREDIT Cash 10,500
DEBIT Retained earnings 10,000
CREDIT Capital redemption reserve 10,000
(2) Where a company redeems shares or purchases its shares wholly or partly out of the proceeds of
a new share issue, it must transfer to the capital redemption reserve an amount by which the nominal
value of the shares redeemed exceeds the aggregate proceeds from the new issue (ie, nominal
value of new shares issued plus share premium).
(3) In example (3) the accounting entries would be:
£ £
DEBIT Share capital account (redeemed shares) 10,000
Retained earnings (premium) 500
CREDIT Cash (redemption of shares) 10,500
DEBIT Cash (from new issue) 10,000
CREDIT Share capital account 10,000
No credit to the capital redemption reserve is necessary because there is no decrease in the
creditors’ buffer.
(4) If the redemption in the same example were made by issuing 5,000 new £1 shares at par, and
paying £5,500 out of distributable profits:
£ £
Retained earnings (premium) 500
CREDIT Capital redemption reserve 5,000
(5) In the example (4) above (assuming a new issue of 10,000 £1 shares at a premium of 8p per
share) the accounting entries would be:
£ £
Share premium account 800
Retained earnings 200
HB2021

No capital redemption reserve is required, as in (1) above. The redemption is financed entirely by a
new issue of shares.
9.10 Commercial reasons for altering capital structure

These include the following:
• Greater security of finance
• Better image for third parties
• A ‘neater’ statement of financial position
• Borrowing repaid sooner
• Cost of borrowing reduced
Interactive question 9: Krumpet plc

Set out below is the summarised statement of financial position of Krumpet plc at 30 June 20X5.
£’000
Net assets 520
Equity
Called up share capital £1 ordinary shares 300
520
On 1 July 20X5 Krumpet plc purchased and cancelled 50,000 of its ordinary shares at £1.50 each.
The shares were originally issued at a premium of 20p. The redemption was partly financed by the
issue at par of 5,000 new shares of £1 each.
Requirement
Prepare the summarised statement of financial position of Krumpet plc at 1 July 20X5 immediately
after the above transactions have been effected.
10 Audit focus
Section overview
The auditor will need to evaluate whether the fair value of the share-based payment is appropriate.
The auditor will require evidence in respect of all the components of the estimated amounts, as well
as reperforming the calculation of the expense for the current year.
HB2021

Issue Evidence
Number of employees • Scheme details set out in contractual documentation

in scheme/number of
instruments per
employee/length of
vesting period
Number of employees • Inquire of directors

estimated to benefit • Compare to staffing numbers per forecasts and prediction
Fair value of • For equity-settled schemes confirm that fair value is estimated at the
instruments grant date
• For cash-settled schemes confirm that the fair value is recalculated at
the end of the reporting period and at the date of settlement
• Confirm that model used to estimate fair value is in line with IFRS 2
and is appropriate to the conditions. Obtain expert advice on the
valuation if appropriate
General • Obtain representations from management confirming their view that:

– the assumptions used in measuring the expense are reasonable,
and
– there are no share-based payment schemes in existence that have
not been disclosed to the auditors
Fair value is an area where management exercises judgement and makes assumptions. The auditor
needs to confirm that the assumptions are reasonable and the evidence sufficient.
Interactive question 10: Share-based payments

You are the auditor of Russell plc. The draft financial statements for the year ending 31 December
20X5 show a profit before tax of £400,000. Russell plc provided four of its directors with 3,000 share
options each on 1 January 20X5 which vest on 31 December 20X7. The fair value of the options,
determined by use of the Black-Scholes model, is as follows:
£10 At the grant date
£12 On 1 January 20X6
£15 On 1 January 20X7
£13 On 31 December 20X7
The options are dependent on continued employment. All four directors are expected to remain. No
entry has been made in the financial statements of Russell plc in respect of the options on the basis
that they do not vest until 31 December 20X7.
Requirement
Identify the audit issues you would need to consider in respect of the share options.
HB2021

Summary
Share-based payment
Cash-settled Transactions in
Equity-settled
transaction which either
transactions
party can choose
DEBIT Expense
DEBIT Expense
CREDIT Liability
CREDIT Equity
Fair value of
Not with with liability Who has
employee employee remeasured choice of
at each reporting settlement?
If fair
Measure at Measure at date
value of
fair value fair value
of goods/ goods or of equity
services services instrument
cannot be granted Entity Counterparty
reliably
measured Treat as a
Treat as
compound
equity-settled
instrument
Which settlement
Which
method has a
method was
higher fair value?
chosen?
Cash Equity Cash Equity

method method method
method
The amount of The payment The payment The balance

payment equal is deducted is applied to of the liability
to the fair value of from equity settle the is transferred
the equity liability in full to equity
instruments that
would otherwise
have been issued The excess of
is deducted the fair value of
from equity. the equity
The excess over instruments
this amount is issued over the
recognised as an amount of cash
expense that would
otherwise have
been paid is
recognised
No further as an expense
accounting is
required
HB2021

Vesting
conditions
Non market
Market based
based
Examples
• Remain in
Examples employment for a
• Achieve target specified service
– Share price period
– Shareholder return • Achieve profit targets
– Price index • Achieve earnings per
share targets
• Achieve flotation
• Complete a particular
project
Accounting Accounting
treatment treatment
Include in determining Ignore in determining

the fair value at the the fair value at
grant date, and do not the grant date and
revise vesting revise vesting
estimate each period estimates each period
HB2021

Modification to
equity instrument granted
Is the modification
beneficial?
Yes No
Increase Increase in
Decrease in Decrease in
in fair number of
equity fair value of number of
value of
instruments equity instruments
equity
granted instruments granted
instruments
Less likely
to vest
Amortise
the incremental Ignore the Treat as
fair value modification cancellation
over vesting
period
and
Revise
vesting
estimates
HB2021

1. Under IFRS 2, Share-based Payment what is an equity-settled share-based payment

transaction? (Topic 2)
2. What is the vesting period? (Topic 2)
3. Can you distinguish between market and non-market vesting conditions? (Topic 3)
4. Can you account for equity-settled and cash-settled share-based payment transactions?
(Topic 4)
5. Can you account for share-based payment transactions with a choice of settlement? (Topic
6)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Definition This question is on equity-settled share-based payment and focuses on

the explanation.
BCN This covers share appreciation rights (cash-settled share-based payment)

and focuses on the calculations.
Mayflower This is an integrated question, set in the context of audit, covering other
issues as well as share-based payment, as is likely to happen in an exam. If
you’re short of time, just skim-read the introductory paragraph for context
and go straight to the section on share options.
Mervyn (SAR para. This part of the question is a fairly straightforward test of cash-settled
only) share-based payment.
Upstart (share You have already attempted other parts of this question. This part requires
options only) calculation and explanation of the correct treatment of equity-settled
share-based payment.
Flynt (share options This is a more complex test of share-based payment with both market and
only) non-market-based vesting conditions. This is as difficult as you will get in
an exam – most questions on share-based payment are more
straightforward.
HB2021

chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 Three specific types of transactions

• Equity-settled share-based payment – IFRS 2.2(a)
• Cash-settled share-based payment – IFRS 2.2(b)
• Share-based payment transactions with a cash alternative – IFRS 2.2(c)
2 Transactions excluded from scope

• Transactions with employees in their capacity as shareholders – IFRS 2.4
• Issues of shares in a business combination – IFRS 2.5
• Contracts that may be settled net in shares or rights to shares – IFRS 2.6
3 Recognition
• Goods or services received in share-based transaction to be recognised as expenses or assets –
IFRS 2.8
• Entity shall recognise corresponding increase in equity for equity-settled transaction or a liability
for cash-settled transactions – IFRS 2.7
4 Equity-settled share-based transactions

• Goods or services received and corresponding increase in equity shall be measured as fair value
of goods or services received (direct method) – IFRS 2.10
• If fair value of goods or services cannot be measured reliably, then measure at fair value of
instruments granted – IFRS 2.10
• For transactions with third parties there is a presumption that the fair value of the goods or
services can be estimated reliably – IFRS 2.13
• Fair value shall be measured at the date entity obtains the goods or counterparty renders service –
IFRS 2.13
• If equity instruments vest immediately entity will recognise services received and corresponding
increase in equity immediately – IFRS 2.14
• If equity instruments will be received in future, services and increase in equity will be recognised
during vesting period – IFRS 2.15
• Fair value of equity instruments granted to be based on market prices if available – IFRS 2.16
• If market prices are not available a generally acceptable valuation technique should be used –
IFRS 2.17
• Non-market vesting conditions shall be taken into account by adjusting the number of equity
instruments included in the measurement of the transactions at each reporting date – IFRS 2.19
• For non-market vesting conditions the amount ultimately recognised will be the number of equity
instruments that actually vest – IFRS 2.19, 2.20
• For grants of equity instruments with market conditions the entity shall recognise the goods or
services from counterparty who satisfies all the other vesting conditions irrespective of whether
market conditions are satisfied – IFRS 2.21
• Market conditions will be part of fair value at grant date. This should not be revised at each
reporting date and where options do not vest the charge should not be reversed – IFRS 2.21
• If vested equity instruments are forfeited, entity shall make no adjustment to total equity except a
transfer from one equity component to another – IFRS 2.23

• Goods or services acquired should be measured at fair value of liability – IFRS 2.30
• Liability should be remeasured at each reporting date – IFRS 2.30
HB2021

6 Share-based payment transaction with cash alternative
• If counterparty has right to choose then entity has granted a compound financial instrument with
debt component and equity component – IFRS 2.34
• For counterparties other than employees, the equity component is measured as the difference
between the fair value of the goods or services received and the fair value of the debt component
(the counterparty’s right to demand payment in cash) – IFRS 2.35
• For transactions with employees, the entity shall measure the fair value of the debt component
and the fair value of the equity component separately and account for the debt component as a
cash-settled transaction and the equity component as an equity-settled transaction – IFRS 2.36,
2.37, 2.38
• At the date of settlement the entity shall remeasure the liability to its fair value – IFRS 2.39
• Where equity instruments are paid instead of cash, the liability shall be transferred to equity – IFRS
2.39
• Where entity pays cash on settlement rather than equity, the payment is applied to the liability.
The equity components previously recognised will remain in equity and entity can make a transfer
from one component of equity to another – IFRS 2.40
• Where entity has the choice of settlement, if present obligation exists to deliver cash, it should
recognise and treat as cash-settled share-based payment transaction – IFRS 2.41
• If no present obligation exists to pay cash, entity should treat transaction as an equity-settled
transaction. On settlement if cash was paid, cash should be treated as repurchase of equity by a
deduction against equity – IFRS 2.43
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Share-based transactions
Which are the three types of share-based transactions covered by IFRS 2?
2 Definition
Which of the following transactions are NOT within the definition of a share-based payment under
IFRS 2?
(1) Employee share ownership plans (ESOPs)
(2) Transfers of equity instruments of the parent of the reporting entity to third parties that have
supplied goods or services to the reporting entity
(3) The acquisition of property, plant and equipment as part of a business combination
(4) Share appreciation rights (SARs)
(5) The raising of funds through a rights issue to all shareholders including those who are
employees
(6) Cash bonus to employees dependent on share price performance
(7) Employee share purchase plans
(8) Remuneration in non-equity shares
3 BCN
BCN Co grants 1,000 share options to each of its 300 staff to be exercised in two years’ time at a
price of £6.10. The current fair value of the option is £1.40 and the expected fair value in two years’
time is £2.40 (adjusted for the possibility of forfeiture in both cases). Under IFRS 2, Share-based
Payment, how much expense would be recognised in profit or loss at the date of issue of the
options?
4 Condition 1
On 1 January 20X3 an entity grants 250 share options to each of its 200 employees. The only
condition attached to the grant is that the employees should continue to work for the entity until 31
December 20X6. Five employees leave during the year.
The market price of each option was £12 at 1 January 20X3 and £15 at 31 December 20X3.
Requirement
Show how this transaction will be reflected in the financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X3.
5 Annerly
On 1 July 20X4 Annerly Co granted 20 executives options to buy up to 10,000 shares each. The
options only vest if the executives are still in the service of the company on 1 July 20X6. It is
estimated that 90% of the executives will remain with the company for the duration of the vesting
period and exercise their options in full.
The following information is relevant.
• The exercise price of the option is £20 per share.
• The market value of each share was £15 on 1 July 20X4 and £18 on 30 June 20X5. It is £19 on 20
July 20X5, when the draft financial statements for the year to 30 June 20X5 are being reviewed.
HB2021

• The market value of the option is £3 on 1 July 20X4, £3.20 on 30 June 20X5, and £2.50 on 20 July
20X5.
Requirement
How should the transaction be accounted for in the financial statements for the year to 30 June
20X5?
6 Condition 2
An entity grants 100 share options on its £1 shares to each of its 500 employees on 1 January 20X5.
Each grant is conditional upon the employee working for the entity over the next three years. The fair
value of each share option as at 1 January 20X5 is £15.
On the basis of a weighted average probability, the entity estimates on 1 January 20X5 that 20% of
employees will leave during the three-year period and therefore forfeit their rights to share options.
Requirements
Show the accounting entries which will be required over the three-year period in the event of the
following:
(a) 20 employees leave during 20X5 and the estimate of total employee departures over the three-
year period is revised to 15% (75 employees).
(b) 22 employees leave during 20X6 and the estimate of total employee departures over the three-
year period is revised to 12% (60 employees).
(c) 15 employees leave during 20X7, so a total of 57 employees left and forfeited their rights to
share options. A total of 44,300 share options (443 employees × 100 options) vested at the end
of 20X7.
7 Share appreciation rights

On 1 January 20X4 an entity grants 100 cash share appreciation rights (SARs) to each of its 500
employees on condition that the employees remain in its employ for the next two years. The SARs
vest on 31 December 20X5 and may be exercised at any time up to 31 December 20X6. The fair
value of each SAR at the grant date is £7.40.
No of
employees Estimated Intrinsic
exercising Outstanding further Fair value of value* (ie,
Year ended Leavers rights SARs leavers SARs cash paid)
£ £
31 Dec 20X4 50 – 450 60 8.00
31 Dec 20X5 50 100 300 – 8.50 8.10
31 Dec 20X6 – 300 – – – 9.00
* Intrinsic value is the fair value of the shares less the exercise price
Requirement
Show the expense and liability which will appear in the financial statements in each of the three
years.
8 ZZX plc
ZZX plc has provided a share incentive scheme to a number of its employees on 1 January 20X4. This
allows for a cash payment to be made to the individuals concerned equal to the share price at the
end of a three-year period subject to the following conditions.
(1) Vesting will be after three years.
(2) The share price must exceed £2.
(3) The employee must be with the company on 31 December 20X6.
HB2021

Each scheme issued will result in payment, subject to the conditions outlined, equal to the value of
10 shares at the end of the three-year period if the conditions are satisfied. The payments, once
earned, are irrevocable.
The finance director has been issued 20 such schemes.
The share prices over the next three years were as follows.
• 31 December 20X4 = £2.20
• 31 December 20X5 = £1.80
• 31 December 20X6 = £2.40
Requirements
8.1 Prepare the journal entries for the transactions of the share incentives issued to the finance
director.
8.2 Assuming that on 1 January 20X4 nine other individuals were also granted equivalent rights to
the finance director and that on 1 January 20X5 two of those individuals left the company,
prepare the journal entries for the transactions relating to the incentive schemes.
9 Kapping
The directors of Kapping are adopting IFRS for the first time and are reviewing the impact of IFRS 2,
Share-based Payment on the financial statements for the year ended 31 May 20X7. They require you
to do the following:
Requirements
9.1 Explain why share options, although having no cost to the company, should be reflected as an
expense in profit or loss.
9.2 Discuss whether the expense arising from share options under IFRS 2 actually meets the
definition of an expense under the IASB’s Conceptual Framework.
9.3 Explain the impact of IFRS 2 on earnings per share, given that an expense is shown in profit or
loss and the impact of share options is recognised in the diluted earnings per share
calculation.
9.4 Briefly discuss whether the requirements of IFRS 2 should lead them to reconsider their
remuneration policies.
10 Mayflower plc
Your firm has been working on a new audit assignment, Mayflower plc (Mayflower), a listed,
diversified group of companies. Its main business interests include construction, publishing, food
processing and a restaurant chain.
Mayflower’s draft profit before tax for the year ended 31 March 20X8 is £17.5 million (20X7 £16.3
million) and its revenue is £234.5 million (20X7 £197.5 million).
The senior in charge of the audit for the year ended 31 March 20X8 has fallen ill towards the end of
the audit and you are now helping to complete it. There are several matters outstanding and you will
need to consider their impact on the financial statements and the audit. Your line manager has asked
to meet you to discuss the significant outstanding matters. He has asked you to prepare briefing
notes for the meeting, including your views on the impact on the financial statements and any
additional audit work that might be required, so that a way forward can be agreed.
On reviewing the previous senior’s notes you find the following outstanding areas:
Forward contract
On 1 April 20X6 Mayflower entered into a forward contract to purchase a large quantity of sugar on 1
April 20Y0. As far as we can tell, this was purely speculative based on the expectation that the price
of sugar would rise. Mayflower did not pay to enter this contract. The company has not accounted for
this contract in the years ended 31 March 20X7 or 20X8.
The finance manager of Mayflower has told us that at 31 March 20X7 the value of the contract had
risen to £800,000 and by 31 March 20X8 its fair value had risen further to £850,000.
HB2021

Share options
On 1 April 20X5 Mayflower provided three of its directors with 4,000 share options each, which vest
on 1 April 20X8, assuming the directors remain in employment.
The fair values of each option were:
1 April £
20X5 12
20X6 15
20X7 17
20X8 16
We have established that no accounting entries have been made for the above.
Debenture issue
Mayflower issued a £5 million convertible debenture at par on 1 April 20X7. The debenture has an
annual nominal rate of interest of 4.5% and is redeemable on 1 April 20Y7 at par. Alternatively, the
holder has the option to convert the debenture to four million £1 shares in Mayflower.
The debenture is presented as a non-current liability at the net proceeds and this amount has not
changed since issue.
The directors have agreed to identify a suitable comparable debenture with an observable market
rate of interest, but they have not yet done so.
Properties
The audit has verified the following facts about properties held by Mayflower:
PROPERTY DESCRIPTION
Exeter House Used as the company’s head office.
33–39 Reeves Road A warehouse held as a right-of-use asset that, up to six months ago, was
used by Mayflower but has since been rented out to a third party on a
short-term lease.
41–51 Reeves Road A warehouse facility adjacent to the existing warehouse. This was
purchased in November 20X7 at a cost of £3.8 million. Professional fees of
£60,000 were also incurred. It is currently empty and has been since
purchase, but a tenant is actively being sought.
Falcon House An office block owned by Mayflower for seven years. It is currently all
rented to a non-group company apart from a couple of small rooms in the
basement that are used by Mayflower as an external store for some of its
records.
Mayflower has classified all these properties as investment properties and has adopted the fair value
model in accordance with IAS 40.
Since 31 March 20X8 property values have dropped by 2% on average.
We need to finalise their treatment as investment properties and verify their valuation.
Requirement
Prepare the required briefing notes on the financial reporting and auditing implications of each of
the outstanding areas for discussion with your line manager.
this chapter.
HB2021


Fair value of options granted at grant date: 1,500 employees × 10 options × £20 = £300,000
This should be charged to profit or loss as employee remuneration evenly over the two-year period
from 1 July 20X5 to 30 June 20X7.
£150,000 is recognised each year. A corresponding amount will be recognised as part of equity as
the services are recognised.

The remuneration expense for the year is based on the fair value of the options granted at the grant
date (1 January 20X3):
[400 employees – (10 leavers × 4 years)] × 500 options × £10 = £1,800,000.
Therefore, the entity recognises a remuneration expense of £450,000 (£1.8m/4 years) in profit or loss
and a corresponding increase in equity of the same amount.

The total expense recorded over the expected vesting period would be as follows:
(1) All options vest: 100 options × £20 = £2,000 total expense
(2) All vesting conditions are met, except the market-based performance condition: 100 options ×
£20 = £2,000 total expense
(3) All vesting conditions are met, except the non-market-based performance condition: nil expense
(4) All vesting conditions are met, except half of the employees who received options left the
company before the vesting date: 50 options × £20 = £1,000 total expense
Paragraph 21 of IFRS 2 states that the grant date fair value of the share-based payment with market-
based performance conditions that has met all its other vesting conditions should be recognised,
irrespective of whether that market condition is achieved. The company determines the grant date
fair value of the share-based payment excluding the non-market-based performance factor, but
including the market-based performance factor.

Expense/Equity figures
Equity (per statement

Expense of financial position)
£ £
Year 1 660,000 660,000
Year 2 174,000 834,000
Year 3 423,000 1,257,000
WORKINGS
(1) Year 1
Equity: (440 employees × 100 options × £30)/2 years = £660,000
(using original estimate of two-year period)
HB2021

(2) Year 2
£
Equity c/d [(500 – 30 – 28 – 25) employees × 100 × £30 × 2/3] 834,000
(using revised estimate of three-year period)
Previously recognised (660,000)
 expense 174,000
(3) Year 3
£
Equity c/d [(500 – 30 – 28 – 23) × 100 × £30] 1,257,000
Previously recognised (834,000)
 expense 423,000

The incremental value is £3 per share option (£8 – £5). This amount is recognised over the remaining
two years of the vesting period, along with remuneration expense based on the original option value
of £15.
The amounts recognised in Years 1–3 are as follows.
Year £
1 Equity c/d [(500 – 110) × 100 × £15 × 1/3] 195,000
DEBIT Expenses £195,000

CREDIT Equity £195,000
2 Equity c/d [(500 – 105) × 100 × ((£15 × 2/3) + (£3 × 1/2))] 454,250
Less previously recognised (195,000)
259,250

3 Equity c/d [(500 – 103) × 100 × (£15 + £3)] 714,600

260,350

HB2021

6.1 Accounting entries
£ £
31.12.X1
DEBIT Staff costs expense 188,000
CREDIT Equity reserve ((800 – 95) × 200 × £4 × 1/3) 188,000
31.12.X2
DEBIT Staff costs expense (W1) 201,333
CREDIT Equity reserve 201,333
31.12.X3
DEBIT Staff costs expense (W2) 202,667
CREDIT Equity reserve 202,667
Issue of shares:
DEBIT Cash ((800 – 40 – 20) × 200 × £1.50) 222,000
DEBIT Equity reserve 592,000
CREDIT Share capital (740 × 200 × £1) 148,000
CREDIT Share premium (balancing figure) 666,000
WORKINGS
(1) Equity reserve at 31.12.X2
£
Equity c/d ((800 – 70) × 200 × £4 × 2/3) 389,333
 charge 201,333
(2) Equity reserve at 31.12.X3
£
Equity c/d ((800 – 40 – 20) × 200 × £4 × 3/3) 592,000
 charge 202,667
6.2 Cash-settled share-based payment

If J&B had offered cash payments based on the value of the shares at vesting date rather than
options, in each of the three years an accrual would be shown in the statement of financial
position representing the expected amount payable based on the following:
No of employees Cumulative
estimated at the year proportion
Number of Fair value of each
end to be entitled to × × × of vesting
rights each right at year end
rights at the vesting period
date elapsed
The movement in the accrual would be charged to profit or loss representing further
entitlements received during the year and adjustments to expectations accrued in previous
years.
HB2021

The accrual would continue to be adjusted (resulting in an expense charge) for changes in the
fair value of the rights over the period between when the rights become fully vested and are
subsequently exercised. It would then be reduced for cash payments as the rights are
exercised.

7.1 Explanation
Employee services – no reliable fair value
Use fair value of the equity instrument
Fair value measured at grant date – and not subsequently changed
Expense in P/L over vesting period
If vesting period can vary as a result of non-market conditions, use best estimate of length of
period
Best estimate of number that will vest
Credit entry to equity – separate component or retained earnings
20X7
Expense is at fair value £15 based on an expected two-year vesting period
450 employees – 30 leavers – 25 future leavers = 395 employees
Expense = 395 × 100 options × £15 × 1/2 years
= £296,250
20X8
450 employees – 30 left Year 1 – 15 left Year 2 – 26 future leavers = 379 employees
Expense is now spread over a three-year vesting period
Expense = £15 × 379 × 100 × 2/3 years £379,000

Less recognised in Year 1 £296,250
Year 2 expense £82,750
20X9
390 × 100 × £15 × 3/3 years = £585,000

Less recognised previously £379,000
Expense in Year 3 £206,000
Double entries
£ £
20X7
DEBIT Employment costs 296,250
20X8
20X9
HB2021

7.2 20Y0
If employees do not exercise their options, but allow them to lapse, the net expense recognised
does not change. As long as the options vest, an expense will appear in the accounts.
7.3 In this case, the options would never vest. In 20X9, the expense would be extended to 20Y0
(effectively a four-year option scheme) before the scheme was cancelled in 20Y0 according to
the initial details of the scheme. If the non-market condition was not achieved in 20Y0, the net
expense recognised is reversed and a credit would appear in profit or loss for 20Y0 to the value
of the previous cumulative expense recognised (in 20X9 this was £585,000). A market condition
not being achieved would never affect the expense being recognised, as the share price
movement is called ‘volatility’ which is included in the £15 fair value.

Dividends may only be paid by a company out of profits available for the purpose. There is a detailed
code of statutory rules which determines what are distributable profits. The profits which may be
distributed as dividend are accumulated realised profits, so far as not previously used by distribution
or capitalisation, less accumulated realised losses, so far as not previously written off in a reduction or
reorganisation of capital duly made.
The word ‘accumulated’ requires that any losses of previous years must be included in reckoning the
current distributable surplus.
The word ‘realised’ presents more difficulties. It may prevent the distribution of an increase in the
value of a retained asset at fair value through profit or loss. However, it does not prevent a company
from transferring to retained earnings profit earned on an uncompleted contract, if it is in accordance
with generally accepted accounting principles. In view of the authority of accounting standards, it is
unlikely that profits determined in accordance with accounting standards would be considered
unrealised. A realised capital loss will reduce realised profits.
The above rules on distributable profits apply to all companies, private or public. A public company
is subject to an additional rule which may diminish but cannot increase its distributable profit as
determined under the above rules.
A public company may only make a distribution if its net assets are, at the time, not less than the
aggregate of its called-up share capital and undistributable reserves. The dividend which it may pay
is limited to such amount as will leave its net assets at not less than that aggregate amount.

WORKINGS FOR KRUMPET PLC
£ £
Cost of redemption (50,000 × £1.50) 75,000
Premium on redemption (50,000 × 50p) 25,000

No premium arises on the new issue
Distributable profits
Retained earnings before redemption 160,000
Premium on redemption (25,000 – 5,000 charged to share premium
account) (20,000)
140,000
Remainder of redemption costs 50,000
Proceeds of new issue 5,000 × £1 (5,000)
Remainder out of distributable profits (45,000)
Balance on retained earnings 95,000
HB2021

Statement of financial position of Krumpet plc as at 1 July 20X5
£’000
Net assets (520 – 75 + 5) 450
Capital and reserves
Ordinary shares (300 – 50 + 5) 255
Share premium: 60,000 less 5,000
(10,000 allowable, being premium on original issue of 50,000 × 20p, restricted to
proceeds of new issue of 5,000) 55
Capital redemption reserve 45
355
Retained earnings (W) 95
450

Audit issues:
• Consider compliance with IFRS 2. Based on the fair value at grant date (as provided) the total
remuneration expense would be as follows:
4 × 3,000 × £10 = £120,000
The expense would then be recognised over the vesting period of three years. An amount of
£40,000 should be recognised in 20X5 as an expense in profit or loss for the year with a
corresponding credit in equity.
• The expense of £40,000 represents 10% of the profit before tax and is therefore likely to be
material to the financial statements.
• Whether the basis of valuing fair value is appropriate. Ideally fair value should be based on
market price if available. As the options have a relatively short life the valuation method used may
provide a reasonable approximation to fair value.
• Adequacy of disclosure in accordance with IFRS 2.
HB2021

1 Share-based transactions
Share-based transactions covered by IFRS 2:
(1) Equity-settled share-based payment transactions
(2) Cash-settled share-based payment transactions
(3) Transactions with a choice of settlement
2 Definition
The following transactions are not within the definition of a share-based payment under IFRS 2:
(3) The acquisition of property, plant and equipment as part of a business combination.
This is within the scope of IFRS 3, Business Combinations.
(5) The raising of funds through a rights issue to all shareholders including those who are employees.
IFRS 2 does not apply to transactions with employees in their capacity as shareholders.
(8) Remuneration in non-equity shares.
Payment in non-equity shares does not fall within the scope of IFRS 2 since it is a transaction in which
the entity receives goods and services in return for a financial liability.
3 BCN
No expense is recognised at the issue date of the options, but the expected benefit is accrued as a
cost over the life of the option:
300 employees × 1,000 options × £1.40 = £420,000
This is spread equally over the two-year period to vesting, resulting in an annual charge to profit or
loss of £210,000.
This would not be adjusted for any changes in expected benefit due to changes in expected share
price as the value is measured at grant date, but is adjusted for the numbers of employees entitled to
options at each reporting date.
4 Condition 1
The remuneration expense for the year is based on the fair value of the options granted at the grant
date (1 January 20X3). As five of the 200 employees left during the year it is reasonable to assume
that 20 employees will leave during the four-year vesting period and that therefore 45,000 options
(250 × 180) will actually vest.
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
Staff costs (45,000 × £12)/4 years £135,000
Equity £135,000 £135,000
5 Annerly
IFRS 2 requires that share-based transactions made in return for goods or services are recognised in
the financial statements. The granting of options to the senior executives is a share-based payment
under IFRS 2 and will need to be recognised as a remuneration expense. The amount to be charged
as an expense is measured at the fair value of the goods or services provided as consideration for
HB2021

the share-based payment or at the fair value of the share-based payment, whichever can be more
reliably measured.
In the case of employee share options, the market value of the options on the day these are granted
is used, as this can be measured more reliably. The market value of the share options at the day these
were granted, 1 July 20X4, was £3 each.
The exercise price for the option at £20 per share is above the market price on the date of issue on 1
July 20X4. This, however, does not mean that the option has zero market value. It has no intrinsic
value, but it has what is referred to as time value relating to expectations of a share price increase
over time.
The options vest at the end of the two-year period. The company expects that 90% of the options will
vest, as it is estimated that 90% of the executives will remain in employment for the two-year period
and thus be able to exercise their options in full.
The remuneration expense will be 10,000 × £3 × 20 × 90% = £540,000 and, as this vests over a two-
year period, the entry to income for the current year to 30 June 20X5 will relate to half that amount:
1/2 × £540,000 = £270,000.
£ £
DEBIT Share-based payment remuneration expense 270,000
CREDIT Equity share-based payment reserve 270,000
When the shares are issued a transfer will be made from that reserve together with any further
proceeds (if any) of the shares and will be credited to the share capital and share premium accounts.
6 Condition 2
(a) Accounting entries
£
20X5 Equity c/d (500 × 85% × 100 × £15 × 1/3) = 212,500

(b) Accounting entries
£
20X6 Equity c/d (500 × 88% × 100 × £15 × 2/3) = 440,000
227,500

(c) Accounting entries
£
20X7 Equity c/d (443 × 100 × £15) = 664,500
224,500

HB2021

7 Share appreciation rights
Expense and liability
£
Expense and liability ((450 – 60) × 100 × £8.00 × 1/2) 156,000
Liability c/d (300 × 100 × £8.50) 255,000
Less b/d liability (156,000)
99,000
Plus cash paid on exercise of SARs by employees
(100 × 100 × £8.10) 81,000
Expense 180,000
Liability c/d –
Less b/d liability (255,000)
(255,000)
Plus cash paid on exercise of SARs by employees
(300 × 100 × £9.00) 270,000
Expense 15,000
8 ZZX plc
8.1 Journal entries for transactions: finance director
The transactions are settled in cash and hence liabilities are created.
DEBIT Expense 147
CREDIT Liability 147
It is assumed that the current share price is the best estimate of the final share price.
(Calculation note: 20 × 10 × £2.20 × 1/3)
DEBIT Liability 147
CREDIT Expense 147
Reverses entries for 20X4 as share price is less than minimum
DEBIT Expense 480
CREDIT Liability 480
DEBIT Liability 480
CREDIT Cash 480
(20 × 10 × £2.40 × 3/3)
HB2021

8.2 Journal entries for transactions: other individuals
DEBIT Expense 1,467
(Calculation note: 20 × 10 × 10 × £2.20 × 1/3)
£ £
31 December 20X5
DEBIT Liability 1,467
CREDIT Expense 1,467
31 December 20X6
DEBIT Expense 3,840
DEBIT Liability 3,840
CREDIT Cash 3,840
(Calculation note: 20 × 10 × 8 × £2.40 × 3/3)
9 Kapping
9.1 When shares are issued for cash or in a business combination, an accounting entry is needed
to recognise the receipt of cash (or other resources) as consideration for the issue. Share
options (the right to receive shares in future) are also issued in consideration for resources:
services rendered by directors or employees. These resources are consumed by the company
and it would be inconsistent not to recognise an expense.
9.2 The Framework defines an expense as a decrease in economic benefits in the form of outflows
of assets or incurrences of liabilities. It is not immediately obvious that employee services meet
the definition of an asset and therefore it can be argued that consumption of those services
does not meet the definition of an expense. However, share options are issued for
consideration in the form of employee services so that arguably there is an asset, although it is
consumed at the same time that it is received. Therefore the recognition of an expense relating
to share-based payment is consistent with the Framework.
9.3 It can be argued that to recognise an expense in profit or loss would have the effect of
distorting diluted earnings per share as diluted earnings per share would then take the
expense into account twice. This is not a valid argument. There are two events involved: issuing
the options and consuming the resources (the directors’ service) received as consideration.
The diluted earnings per share calculation only reflects the issue of the options; there is no
adjustment to basic earnings. Recognising an expense reflects the consumption of services.
There is no ‘double counting’.
9.4 It is true that accounting for share-based payment reduces earnings. However, it improves the
information provided in the financial statements, as these now make users aware of the true
economic consequences of issuing share options as remuneration. The economic
consequences are the reason why share option schemes may be discontinued. IFRS 2 simply
enables management and shareholders to reach an informed decision on the best method of
remuneration, weighing the advantages of granting these and their potential beneficial effect
on motivation and corporate performance against the disadvantages of the impact on
earnings.
10 Mayflower plc
Note: This question includes a revision of the audit of financial instruments and investment
properties
HB2021

Forward contract
Accounting issues
• At 31 March 20X7 there was an increase in the value of the derivative asset of £800,000 and this
gain should have been included in profit or loss for the year ended 31 March 20X7.
• A prior year adjustment is needed in respect of the error of £800,000 not recognised in the
opening balance. In accordance with IAS 8 this will be adjusted directly through reserves. The
amount is likely to be material. Also the comparatives would need to be restated.
• The derivative will therefore be shown as an asset in the statement of financial position at
£800,000 and £850,000 in the two years ended 31 March 20X7 and 20X8 respectively.
Audit procedures
• Review terms of the contract to determine the appropriate treatment ie, as a derivative financial
asset
• The reason for the non-recognition of the fair value last year should be established and the
systems for identifying and measuring forward contracts with zero initial values should be
established
• General checks:
– Obtain an understanding of the factors which affect the entity’s derivative activities
– Assess level of audit risk re the forward contract (and ensure audit procedures reduce the risk
to an acceptable level)
– Understand systems for dealing with forward contracts – ensure they cover authorisations,
checking for completeness and accuracy, appropriate accounting for changes in values,
ongoing monitoring, how errors are prevented and detected
– Ensure data is secure
– Check if there have been any margin settlements made
• Check the amounts at the year ends:
– Inspect contract and confirm that Mayflower did not pay to enter the contract
– Confirm no changes in contract
– Assess the expertise and experience of the finance manager in determining the fair values and
confirm that these have been derived in accordance with IFRS 13 (ie, Level 1 or Level 2 inputs)
– Review documentation supporting information used by management including any
assumptions made
– Inquire whether management experts have been used to measure fair value and determine
disclosures
– Look for evidence of year-end fair values (quoted market price). The fair values of the forward
contract would need to be attested. As sugar is traded on an active international market there
should be sufficient publicly available information to observe the fair value of equivalent futures
trades in an open market ie, in the principal market
– Recalculate the value of the derivative asset
– Obtain written representations from management
– Review events after the year end which may provide evidence about valuation at the period
end
• Check IFRS 7 and IFRS 13 disclosure:
– Accounting policy for financial instruments and how fair value is measured (valuation technique
and inputs used)
– Appropriate gains recognised in profit or loss for the year
– Fair value ensuring the information can be compared with prior year
– Nature and extent of risks arising
HB2021

Share options
Accounting issues
• IFRS 2 deals with this area.
• The total remuneration expense, based on the fair value at the grant date, would be: 3 × 4,000 ×
£12 = £144,000. This should have been spread evenly over the vesting period of three years
assuming that there were no changes in assessment of when the directors would leave the
company (and assuming that none of them have left). If there have been any variations over time
as to the likelihood of the three directors being in post at vesting then there may be an
adjustment to the amounts below (in particular if there was any change in numbers of shares
vesting between last year and this year).
• This will necessitate a prior period adjustment of £144,000 × 2/3 = £96,000 which would be
debited to retained earnings and credited to a share option reserve (or other appropriate
reserve). As the standard only requires the credit to be posted to equity it is possible for no
double entry to be posted at all (as retained earnings may substitute for a share option reserve).
Regardless of how the accounting is reflected, the comparatives will need to be adjusted.
• The current year expense of £48,000 will be treated in the same way as above except that it will
be included in profit or loss for the current year – most appropriately as a staff cost.
Audit procedures
• View documentation to verify option terms such as exercise price and term to vesting date.
• Ensure relevant directors are still employed.
• Investigate whether there was any indication that they might leave in the past, as this could affect
the estimation basis of the prior period adjustment.
• Determine the basis on which the fair value of the options has been calculated – should be based
on appropriate valuation based on market prices wherever possible. If an option pricing model
has been used, determine which method has been adopted and whether it is appropriate and
reflects the nature of the options.
• Confirm that the fair value is calculated as at the grant date and that this is when offer and
acceptance has taken place.
• Recalculate the fair value using the same inputs and consider obtaining expert advice if
appropriate.
• Check volatility to published statistics.
• Agree share price at issue to market price on that date.
• Agree risk-free rate appropriate at time of granting options.
• Assess whether there are any terms of the share option which give the directors a choice of
exercise through cash receipt as opposed to exercising the share options.
• Recalculate the expense spread over the vesting period.
• Obtain written representations from management confirming their view that any assumptions they
have used in measuring fair value are reasonable and that there are no further share-based
payment schemes in existence that have not been disclosed.
• Check disclosure is in accordance with IFRS 2.
Debenture
Accounting issues
• The current treatment of leaving the debenture at the value of the net proceeds does not comply
with IFRS 9 and IAS 32, as there has been no accounting for the post-issue finance costs and the
fact that the instrument is a hybrid instrument which needs to be split into liability and equity
components.
• Calculate the liability element as the present value of the cash flows of the debenture, discounted
at the market rate of interest for comparable borrowings with no conversion rights. This will
require some attention on our part, to ensure that an appropriate interest rate has been selected.
• Classify as equity the remainder of the proceeds representing the fair value of the right to convert.
• The market rate of interest should then be used to unwind the discounting for the current year
which will bring the liability closer to the final redemption value and allocate an appropriate
HB2021

finance charge to profit or loss. The annual interest payment will also be recorded as a cash flow
and will reduce the liability.
Audit procedures
• Review debenture deed and agree nominal interest rates and conversion terms.
• Review calculation of the fair value of the liability at the date of issue.
• Confirm appropriate discount rate used by reference to external market while considering if
market rates are representative of the instrument issued.
• We should discuss and assess the reasons for the selection of the rate by management and the
assumptions made.
• We should review interest rates associated with companies in the industries which make up
Mayflower’s core interests and also some conglomerates (even though the mix is highly unlikely to
be anything like Mayflower’s) and compare these with the rate selected by management. We
could also perform a sensitivity analysis, if a material risk is identified, in order to quantify the
effect of changing the interest rate.
• Agree calculation of amortised cost after it has been performed by the directors.
• Agree initial proceeds and interest payments to records and bank statement.
• Review disclosures and ensure in accordance with IAS 32, IFRS 9, IFRS 7 and IFRS 13.
Properties
Accounting issues
Classification as investment property:
Exeter House This property does not fall within the definition of investment property in
accordance with IAS 40, as it is owner occupied. It should be accounted
for as property, plant and equipment under IAS 16.
33–39 Reeves Road Although this property is not legally owned, it is held as a right-of-use
asset in accordance with IFRS 16, Leases, and can be treated as an
investment property from the date of renting out to a third party.
41–51 Reeves Road Although vacant it can be classified as an investment property as it is held
for investment purposes.
Falcon House This property is owned by Mayflower and the vast majority of it is let out
to third parties. It appears unlikely that the two parts of the property (that
rented to a third party and that used by Mayflower) could be sold or
leased separately, particularly the part used by Mayflower, as it is a couple
of small rooms in the basement. It is therefore inappropriate to treat the
two parts separately as investment property and property, plant and
equipment respectively. As the part used by Mayflower appears to be an
insignificant portion of the whole, the whole property can be treated as an
Valuation
Exeter House This should be valued according to IAS 16 (at cost or revalued amount
less depreciation).
33–39 Reeves Road This should have been recognised at the inception of the lease at the
present value of the future lease payments. On being rented out it would
be valued at fair value in accordance with company policy in respect of
investment properties. The revaluation to fair value on transfer to
investment properties is accounted for under IAS 16. Thereafter changes
in fair value are recognised in profit or loss.
41–51 Reeves Road This should be initially recognised at cost, including transaction costs. As
the fair value model is being adopted the asset should be subsequently
recognised at fair value. Changes in fair value are recognised in profit or
HB2021

loss.
Falcon House Recognised at fair value, changes in fair value are recognised in profit or
loss, as above.
IAS 40 requires that the fair value of the investment properties should be measured in accordance
with IFRS 13.
Audit procedures
• Confirm that all investment properties are classified in accordance with IAS 40 definitions (see
above).
• Ensure that Exeter House is reclassified as property, plant and equipment.
• Assess useful life of Exeter House and residual value in order to recalculate and agree
depreciation charged.
• Determine the valuation policy to be used for Exeter House ie, cost or valuation and ensure that
the policy is correctly applied.
• Evaluate the process by which Mayflower establishes fair values of investment properties and the
control environment around such procedures.
• Determine basis for calculation of fair values (per IAS 40 (40) fair value must reflect rental income
from current leases and other assumptions that market participants would use when pricing
investment property under current market conditions). Look for best evidence of fair value (for
example, year-end prices in an active market for similar properties in the same location and
condition).
• If external valuers have been used agree valuation to valuer’s certificate and assess the extent that
they can be relied on in accordance with ISA 620.
• If fair values have been based on discounted cash flows, ie, future rentals, determine whether this
is the most appropriate estimate of a market-based exit value. Compare predicted cash flows with
rental agreements. Review the basis of the interest rate applied.
• Review documentation to support method used.
• Recalculate the gain or loss on change in fair value and agree to amount recognised in profit or
loss.
• If fair value cannot be measured reliably confirm use of cost model.
• Agree disclosure is in accordance with IAS 40 and IFRS 13.
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 20
Groups: types of investment

and business combination
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Summary and categorisation of investments
2 IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements
3 IFRS 3, Business Combinations
4 IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (business combination aspects)
5 IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures
6 IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements
7 Question technique and practice
8 IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities
9 Step acquisitions
10 Disposals
11 Consolidated statements of cash flows
12 Audit focus: group audits
13 Auditing global enterprises
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
20
Learning outcomes
• Appraise and evaluate cash flow measures and disclosures in single entities and groups
• Analyse and evaluate the criteria used to determine whether and how different types of
investment are recognised and measured as business combinations
• Calculate and produce, from financial and other data, the amounts to be included in an entity’s
consolidated financial statements in respect of its new, continuing and discontinued interests
(which include situations when acquisitions occur in stages and in partial disposals) in
subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 4(b), 6(a), 6(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
20

of this chapter.

1 Summary and Approach Exam questions will N/A

categorisation of This chapter is be more complex
investments revision from your than at Professional
In a working context studies at Level and you will
you will have to Professional Level. need to exercise
account for This introductory judgement more.
acquisitions, section starts with a
disposals and useful summary
business table showing which
combinations such standard to apply.
as investments in Stop and think
associates, joint
arrangements, or Can a 45%
consolidations of investment be a
subsidiaries. subsidiary?
2 IFRS 10, Approach You may well have N/A

Consolidated The key to this to determine the While there are no
Financial section is control. status of an interactive
Statements Study the definition investment by questions in this
IFRS 10 will be carefully, and make applying the section, you can test
familiar to you, but sure you understand definition of control. yourself by covering
you should still power, returns and up the solution to
approach this the link between the worked example
section as if you are power and returns. which tests some
studying it from Then read through rather complex
scratch, because it is the sections on aspects of control
so fundamental to exemption, that you won’t have
have a grasp of the exclusion and met at earlier levels.
HB2021

brought forward uniform accounting

knowledge. policies.
Stop and think
Why would uniform
accounting policies
be preferable?
3 IFRS 3, Business Approach At Advanced Level, IQ1: Calculation of

Combinations Focus on the four- the acquirer may goodwill
Again this should be stage process in not always be easy This question
revision, but bear in using the to identify. focuses on the
mind that the level acquisition method: consideration
required is A rather • Identify acquirer aspect of the
than B, as before. goodwill
• Acquisition date calculation.
• Recognise and
You should do both
measure assets
interactive
• Recognise and questions in this
measure section.
goodwill (see
worked
examples)
Stop and think
What is a control
premium?
4 IFRS 13, Fair Value Approach At Advanced Level IQ3: Goodwill on

Measurement Recap the IFRS 13 the valuation of the consolidation
(business rules on fair value, assets and liabilities This focuses on the
combination including the in a business assets and liabilities,
aspects) hierarchy. Then combination may the other main part
You have met IFRS study the worked not be of the goodwill
13 in many contexts, example carefully. straightforward. calculation.
including Stop and think
investment property
and financial How is a
instruments. This decommissioning
section focuses on liability valued in a
the business business
combination issues, combination?
relating to valuing
the assets and
liabilities for the
purposes of
calculating
goodwill.
5 IAS 28, Investments Approach As well as being N/A

in Associates and Make sure you know comfortable with While there are no
Joint Ventures how the equity equity accounting, interactive
Associates and joint method is applied you may come questions in this
ventures are both in the statement of across associates in section, you can test
accounted for using financial position, a step acquisition yourself by covering
the equity method. the statement of (associate to up the solution to
profit or loss and in subsidiary) or the worked
disposal (subsidiary
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1065
other to associate), so you example.

comprehensive need to be clear
income. about what is meant
Stop and think by significant
influence.
What is the double
entry for when an Joint ventures have
associate sells to the been tested
parent? regularly,
sometimes in an
audit context or
where the
investment has
been wrongly
treated as a joint
operation
6 IFRS 11, Joint Approach Joint ventures are IQ4: Joint

Arrangements Make sure you examined much arrangement
Business understand the more frequently This question asks
combinations are distinction between than joint why joint operations
becoming joint ventures operations. are formed.
increasingly (equity accounted)
complex. The nature and joint operations
of purchase (line by line
consideration and recognition of
the legal form of assets, liabilities,
such transactions revenue and
are often driven by expenses).
financial and tax Stop and think
features. Structures
are carefully How is a joint
modelled to ensure arrangement
that transactions different from an
optimise post- associate?
acquisition earnings
as well as meeting
corporate strategic
objectives.
7 Question technique Approach In the exam you will IQ6: Consolidation

and practice Learn the step-by- need to know all the technique 2
This is an essential step process in techniques used in You should really do
section – the Sections 7.1 and this section, but the both interactive
brought forward 7.2. Then do both consolidation will questions, but if
knowledge should interactive only be one of the you’re going to pick
be second nature. questions. complexities you one, pick this one as
will be facing. it is more substantial
Stop and think
than IQ5:
Did you get them at Consolidation
least 80% right? If technique 1.
not, practise using
the self-test
questions at the
beginning of the
Chapter.
HB2021

8 IFRS 12, Disclosure Approach IFRS 12 has not N/A

of Interests in Other Read through and been examined yet. There are no
Entities highlight. It is more likely to interactive
Users should review come up in an questions on this
Stop and think auditing context.
the disclosures short section.
included in the Extensive
financial statements disclosures allow
regarding business users of the financial
combinations. statements to
Extensive understand the
disclosures allow effect of the
users of the financial combination on the
statements to group’s operations
understand the during the period.
effect of the This improves the
combination on the predictive value of
group’s operations the financial
during the period. information.
This improves the
predictive value of
the financial
information.
9 Step acquisitions Approach Step acquisitions IQ7: Control in

This topic is new to The key question is: are regularly tested, stages – no previous
Advanced Level, has an accounting so it is important to significant influence
and happens quite boundary been get a good grasp of You don’t have to
a lot in practice. crossed? the technique in this prepare the
section. consolidated
Whenever you cross
the 50% boundary, financial statements
you revalue, and a in this question, but
gain or loss is you do have to do
reported in profit or the significant
loss for the year. If calculations relating
you do not cross the to step acquisitions
50% boundary, no that will enable you
gain or loss is to prepare them.
reported; instead
there is an
adjustment to the
parent’s equity.
Stop and think
If you go from 60%
to 80%, an
accounting
boundary is not
crossed. If you go
from 40% to 80% it
is.
10 Disposals Approach Partial disposals IQ8: All types of

While you have met As with step (subsidiary to disposal
disposals at acquisitions, the key associate or This covers 100%
Professional Level, question is, was an investments) are disposal, partial
you will not have accounting more likely to be disposal without
tested at Advanced
HB2021
come across partial boundary crossed? Level because losing control,

disposals. Stop and think complete disposals partial disposal to
were tested at associate, control
If you go from 80% Professional Level. lost and partial
to 60%, an disposal to asset at
accounting FVTOCI with control
boundary is not lost.
crossed. If you go
from 80% to 40% it
is.
11 Consolidated Approach Because single IQ10: Disposal

statements of cash You have already company This question
flows revised single statements of cash focuses on every
You may also be company flow were examined calculation related
required to prepare statements of cash at Professional to the group
consolidated flows, so focus on Level, you are more aspects, even
statements of cash the aspects specific likely to get a though you don’t
flows, which are to groups: consolidated need to prepare the
likely to include the acquisition or statement at statement itself.
effect of acquisitions disposal of an Advanced Level.
and disposals. associate or
subsidiary during
the period.
Stop and think
When taking
account of the
disposal in
calculating working
capital movements,
make sure you get
the pluses and
minuses the right
way round.
12 Audit focus: group Approach You may well get a IQ11: Component
audits Focus on Sections scenario where an auditors
This is a long 12.6 and 12.7 on overseas subsidiary This is a
chapter, but do not group audit company has been comprehensive
neglect section 12, procedures. acquired during the question on a key
which deals with year, audited by issue in the audit of
Stop and think another firm
group audits, group financial
including foreign What are overseas which statements.
subsidiaries (see component raises technical
Chapter 21). You auditors? audit issues
may wish to come regarding the audit
back to that part approach and the
once you have application of ISA
studied Chapter 21 UK) 600 (Revised
on foreign currency November 2019).
transactions.
13 Auditing global Approach Risk is always N/A

enterprises Focus on the table important in
This section focuses in Section 13.3 auditing questions.
on risk, which is
HB2021

generally greater Stop and think

when auditing a Why is transfer
foreign company. pricing so difficult?
HB2021
1 Summary and categorisation of investments
Section overview
• This chapter revises IFRS 3, Business Combinations, which was covered at Professional Level. It
also covers the following standards:
– IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (business combination aspects)
– IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements
– IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures
– IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements
– IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities
• Some of the above standards, or the topics to which they relate, were covered at Professional
Level, but a deeper knowledge is needed at Advanced Level.
A summary of the different types of investment and the required accounting for them is as follows.
Investment Criteria Required treatment in group accounts
Subsidiary Control Full consolidation (IFRS 10)
Associate Significant influence Equity accounting (IAS 28)
Joint venture Contractual arrangement Equity accounting (IAS 28), distinguish from
joint operation (IFRS 11)
Investment which is Asset held for accretion of As for single company accounts (per IFRS
none of the above wealth 9)
1.1 Investments in subsidiaries

The important point here is control. In most cases, this will involve the parent company owning a
majority of the ordinary shares in the subsidiary (to which normal voting rights are attached). There
are circumstances, however, when the parent may own only a minority of the voting power in the
subsidiary, but the parent still has control.
IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements, issued in 2011, retains control as the key concept
underlying the parent/subsidiary relationship but it has broadened the definition and clarified its
application. This will be covered in more detail in section 2 below.
IFRS 10 states that an investor controls an investee if and only if it has all of the following.
(a) Power over the investee
(b) Exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee (see section 2)
(c) The ability to use its power over the investee to affect the amount of the investor’s returns (see
section 2)
1.2 Investments in associates

The key criterion here is significant influence. This is defined as the ‘power to participate’, but not to
‘control’ (which would make the investment a subsidiary).
Significant influence is presumed to exist if an investor holds 20% or more of the voting power of
the investee, unless it can be clearly shown that this is not the case.
• However, the existence of significant influence can also be evidenced in other ways.
• Representation on the board of directors of the investee
• Participation in the policy making process
• Material transactions between investor and investee
• Interchange of management personnel
HB2021

• Provision of essential technical information
IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures requires the use of the equity method of
accounting for investments in associates. This method will be explained in section 5.
1.3 Accounting for investments in joint arrangements

IFRS 11 classes joint arrangements as either joint operations or joint ventures. The classification of a
joint arrangement as a joint operation or a joint venture depends on the rights and obligations of the
parties to the arrangement.
• The detail of how to distinguish between joint operations and joint ventures will be considered in
section 6.
1.3.1 Accounting treatment in group accounts

IFRS 11 requires that a joint operator recognises line by line the following in relation to its interest in
a joint operation:
• Its (the joint operation’s) assets, including its (the investor’s) share of any jointly held assets
• Its liabilities, including its share of any jointly incurred liabilities
• Its revenue from the sale of its share of the output arising from the joint operation
• Its share of the revenue from the sale of the output by the joint operation
• Its expenses, including its share of any expenses incurred jointly
This treatment is applicable in both the separate and consolidated financial statements of the joint
operator.
In its consolidated financial statements, IFRS 11 requires that a joint venturer recognises its interest in
a joint venture as an investment and accounts for that investment using the equity method in
accordance with IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures unless the entity is exempted
from applying the equity method (see section 5).
In its separate financial statements, a joint venturer should account for its interest in a joint venture in
accordance with IAS 27 (2011), Separate Financial Statements, namely:
• at cost;
• in accordance with IFRS 9, Financial Instruments; or
• using the equity method specified in IAS 28.
1.4 Other investments

Investments which do not meet the definitions of any of the above should be accounted for
according to IFRS 9, Financial Instruments. An example of such an investment would be a 15%
shareholding in a company with no significant influence.

Section overview
IFRS 10 covers the basic definitions and consolidation requirements and the rules on exemptions
from preparing group accounts. The standard requires a parent to present consolidated financial
statements, consolidating all subsidiaries, both foreign and domestic. The most important aspect is
control.
2.1 Introduction
When a parent issues consolidated financial statements, it should consolidate all subsidiaries, both
foreign and domestic. The first step in any consolidation is to identify the subsidiaries present in the
group.
HB2021
Definition
Consolidated financial statements: The financial statements of a group presented as those of a
single economic entity. (IFRS 10)
You should make sure that you understand the various ways in which control can arise, as this is
something that you may be asked to discuss in the context of a scenario in the exam.
2.1.1 Power
Power is defined as existing rights that give the current ability to direct the relevant activities of the
investee. There is no requirement for that power to have been exercised.
Relevant activities may include:
• selling and purchasing goods or services
• managing financial assets
• selecting, acquiring and disposing of assets
• researching and developing new products and processes
• determining a funding structure or obtaining funding
In some cases assessing power is straightforward; for example, where power is obtained directly and
solely from having the majority of voting rights or potential voting rights, and as a result the ability to
direct relevant activities.
In other cases, assessment is more complex and more than one factor must be considered. IFRS 10
gives the following examples of rights, other than voting or potential voting rights, which individually,
or alone, can give an investor power.
• Rights to appoint, reassign or remove key management personnel who can direct the relevant
activities
• Rights to appoint or remove another entity that directs the relevant activities
• Rights to direct the investee to enter into, or veto changes to, transactions for the benefit of the
investor
• Other rights, such as those specified in a management contract
Voting rights in combination with other rights may give an investor the current ability to direct the
relevant activities. For example, this is likely to be the case when an investor holds 40% of the voting
rights of an investee and holds substantive rights arising from options to acquire a further 20% of the
voting rights.
IFRS 10 suggests that the ability rather than contractual right to achieve the above may also indicate
that an investor has power over an investee.
An investor can have power over an investee even where other entities have significant influence or
other ability to participate in the direction of relevant activities.
2.1.2 Returns
An investor must have exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee
in order to establish control.
This is the case where the investor’s returns from its involvement have the potential to vary as a result
of the investee’s performance.
Returns may include the following:
• Dividends
• Remuneration for servicing an investee’s assets or liabilities
• Fees and exposure to loss from providing credit support
• Returns as a result of achieving synergies or economies of scale through an investor combining
use of their assets with use of the investee’s assets
2.1.3 Link between power and returns

In order to establish control, an investor must be able to use its power to affect its returns from its
involvement with the investee. This is the case even where the investor delegates its decision-making
powers to an agent.
HB2021

When determining whether an entity has control, it often helps to draw a group structure diagram,
which helps clarify what is going on. Such a diagram is also useful, together with a timeline, in
questions involving mid-year acquisitions or disposals.
Worked example: Control

1 Twist holds 40% of the voting rights of Oliver and 12 other investors each hold 5% of the voting
rights of Oliver. A shareholder agreement grants Twist the right to appoint, remove and set the
remuneration of management responsible for directing the relevant activities. To change the
agreement, a two-thirds majority vote of the shareholders is required. To date, Twist has not
exercised its rights with regard to the management or activities of Oliver.
Requirement
Explain whether Twist should consolidate Oliver in accordance with IFRS 10.
2 Copperfield holds 45% of the voting rights of Spenlow. Murdstone and Steerforth each hold 26%
of the voting rights of Spenlow. The remaining voting rights are held by three other shareholders,
each holding 1%. There are no other arrangements that affect decision-making.
Requirement
Explain whether Copperfield should consolidate Spenlow in accordance with IFRS 10.
3 Scrooge holds 70% of the voting rights of Cratchett. Marley has 30% of the voting rights of
Cratchett. Marley also has an option to acquire half of Scrooge’s voting rights, which is
exercisable for the next two years, but at a fixed price that is deeply out of the money (and is
expected to remain so for that two-year period).
Requirement
Explain whether either of Scrooge or Marley should consolidate Cratchett in accordance with
IFRS 10.
Solution
1 Group structure 1
Twist
12 others × 5% = 60%
Shareholder
40%
agreement
Oliver
The absolute size of Twist’s holding and the relative size of the other shareholdings alone are not
conclusive in determining whether the investor has rights sufficient to give it power. However, the
fact that Twist has a contractual right to appoint, remove and set the remuneration of
management is sufficient to conclude that it has power over Oliver. The fact that Twist has not
exercised this right is not a determining factor when assessing whether Twist has power. In
conclusion, Twist does control Oliver, and should consolidate it.
HB2021
2 Group structure 2
Copperfield Murdstone Steerforth 3 others × 1%
= 3%
45% 26% 26%
Spenlow
In this case, the size of Copperfield’s voting interest and its size relative to the other shareholdings
are sufficient to conclude that Copperfield does not have power. Only two other investors,
Murdstone and Steerforth, would need to co-operate to be able to prevent Copperfield from
directing the relevant activities of Spenlow.
3 Group structure 3
Scrooge Marley
35% + 35% ??
= 70% 30%
Option
Cratchett
Scrooge holds a majority of the current voting rights of Cratchett, so is likely to meet the power
criterion because it appears to have the current ability to direct the relevant activities. Although
Marley has currently exercisable options to purchase additional voting rights (that, if exercised,
would give it a majority of the voting rights in Cratchett), the terms and conditions associated with
those options are such that the options are not considered substantive.
Thus voting rights, even combined with potential voting rights, may not be the deciding factor.
Scrooge should consolidate Cratchett.
2.2 Exemption from preparing group accounts

A parent need not present consolidated financial statements if and only if all of the following hold:
(a) The parent is itself a wholly owned subsidiary or it is a partially owned subsidiary of another
entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote, have been informed
about, and do not object to, the parent not presenting consolidated financial statements.
(b) Its debt or equity instruments are not publicly traded.
(c) It is not in the process of issuing securities in public securities markets.
(d) The ultimate or intermediate parent publishes consolidated financial statements that comply
with International Financial Reporting Standards.
A parent that does not present consolidated financial statements must comply with the IAS 27 rules
on separate financial statements.
Although a parent may not have to prepare consolidated financial statements, it may wish to provide
qualitative information about the nature and size of ownership of un-consolidated subsidiaries as this
could be beneficial to the users of the financial statements.
HB2021

2.3 Potential voting rights
An entity may own share warrants, share call options or other similar instruments that are convertible
into ordinary shares in another entity. If these are exercised or converted they may give the entity
voting power or reduce another party’s voting power over the financial and operating policies of the
other entity (potential voting rights). The existence and effect of potential voting rights, including
potential voting rights held by another entity, should be considered when assessing whether an
entity has control over another entity (and therefore has a subsidiary). Potential voting rights are
considered only if the rights are substantive (meaning that the holder must have the practical ability
to exercise the right).
In assessing whether potential voting rights give rise to control, the investor should consider the
purpose and design of the instrument. This includes an assessment of the various terms and
conditions of the instrument as well as the investor’s apparent expectations, motives and reasons for
agreeing to those terms and conditions.
2.4 Exclusion of a subsidiary from consolidation

Where a parent controls one or more subsidiaries, IFRS 10 requires that consolidated financial
statements are prepared to include all subsidiaries, both foreign and domestic, other than:
• those held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued
Operations; and
• those held under such long-term restrictions that control cannot be operated.
The rules on exclusion of subsidiaries from consolidation are necessarily strict, because this is a
common method used by entities to manipulate their results. If a subsidiary which carries a large
amount of debt can be excluded, then the gearing of the group as a whole will be improved. In other
words, this is a way of taking debt out of the consolidated statement of financial position.
IFRS 10 is clear that a subsidiary should not be excluded from consolidation simply because it is loss
making or its business activities are dissimilar from those of the group as a whole. IFRS 10 rejects the
latter argument: exclusion on these grounds is not justified because better information can be
provided about such subsidiaries by consolidating their results and then giving additional
information about the different business activities of the subsidiary, eg, under IFRS 8, Operating
Segments.
2.5 Other matters

Different reporting dates
Where one or more subsidiaries prepare accounts to a different reporting date from the parent and
the bulk of other subsidiaries in the group:
(a) the subsidiary may prepare additional statements to the reporting date of the rest of the group,
for consolidation purposes; or
(b) if this is not possible, the subsidiary’s accounts may still be used for consolidation provided that
the gap between the reporting dates is three months or less and that adjustments are made for
the effects of significant transactions or other events that occur between that date and the
parent’s reporting date.
Uniform accounting policies
Uniform accounting policies should be used and adjustments must be made where the subsidiary’s
policies differ from those of the parent.
Date of inclusion/exclusion
The results of subsidiary undertakings are included in the consolidated financial statements from:
(a) the date of ‘acquisition’ ie, the date on which the investor obtains control; to
(b) the date of ‘disposal’ ie, the date when the investor loses control.
Once an investment is no longer a subsidiary, it should be treated as an associate under IAS 28 (if
applicable) or as an investment under IFRS 9.
HB2021
Accounting for subsidiaries and associates in the parent’s separate financial statements
A parent company will usually produce its own single company financial statements. In these
statements, governed by IAS 27, Separate Financial Statements, investments in subsidiaries and
associates included in the consolidated financial statements should be either:
• accounted for at cost;
• in accordance with IFRS 9; or
• using the equity method specified in IAS 28.
Where subsidiaries are classified as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5 they should be
accounted for in accordance with IFRS 5.
Non-controlling interest (NCI)
Within the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, profit for the year and total
comprehensive income must be split between the shareholders of the parent and the non-
controlling interest.
IFRS 10 requires an entity to attribute their share of total comprehensive income to the non-
controlling interest, even if this results in a negative (debit) NCI balance.
Acquisitions and disposals which do not result in a change of control
Acquisitions of further shares in an existing subsidiary or disposals of shares by a parent which do
not result in a loss of control are accounted for within shareholders’ equity.
No gain or loss is recognised and goodwill is not remeasured.
This is explained further within sections 9 and 10 of this chapter.
Loss of control
Where a parent loses control of a subsidiary:
• assets, liabilities and the non-controlling interest must be derecognised;
• any interest retained is recognised at fair value at the date of loss of control; and
• a gain or loss on loss of control is recognised in profit or loss.
This is explained further within section 10 of this chapter.

Section overview
• IFRS 3 refers to business combinations as ‘transactions or events in which an acquirer obtains

control of one or more businesses‘. In a straightforward business combination one entity acquires
another, resulting in a parent/subsidiary relationship.
• Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method.
3.1 The acquisition method

All business combinations should be recognised using the acquisition method which involves the
following steps.
(a) Identifying an acquirer – which obtains control of the other entity. If this cannot be established
from shareholdings and other factors listed in IFRS 10 (see section 2.1 above), IFRS 3 provides
additional indicators, such as the fact that the entity with the larger fair value is likely to be the
acquirer.
(b) Determining the acquisition date. This is generally the date on which the parent company
(acquirer) transfers consideration and acquires the net assets of the acquiree.
(c) Recognising and measuring the identifiable assets acquired, the liabilities assumed and any
non-controlling interest in the acquiree.
(d) Recognising and measuring goodwill or a gain from a bargain purchase.
HB2021

Measurement of the non-controlling interest in Step 3 along with the measurement of goodwill in
Step 4 are covered in more detail in the next section.
Measurement of the identifiable assets and liabilities in Step 3 is covered in section 3.6 of this
chapter.
3.2 Calculation of goodwill

IFRS 3 (revised) requires goodwill acquired in a business combination (or a gain on a bargain
purchase) to be measured as:
£
Consideration transferred: Fair value of assets given, liabilities assumed and equity
instruments issued, including contingent amounts X
Non-controlling interest at the acquisition date X
X
Less total fair value of net assets of acquiree (X)
Goodwill/(gain from a bargain purchase) X/(X)
This calculation includes the non-controlling interest and is therefore calculated based on the whole
net assets of the acquiree.
Sections 3.3 and 3.4 consider the first two elements of the revised calculation – consideration
transferred and the non-controlling interest – in more detail.
Worked example: Calculation of goodwill 1

On 1 January 20X7, Avon acquired 80% of the equity share capital of Tweed, for a total consideration
of £670,000. The fair value of the net assets of Tweed at this date was £700,000. The non-controlling
interest is measured at £140,000.
Requirement
What goodwill arises on the acquisition?
Solution
Goodwill is calculated as:
£
Consideration transferred 670,000
Non-controlling interest at the acquisition date 140,000
810,000
Less total fair value of net assets of acquiree (700,000)
Goodwill 110,000
In this example the non-controlling interest has been measured as the relevant percentage of
Tweed’s acquisition date net assets ie, 20% × £700,000.
Note that the non-controlling interest is not necessarily calculated as a proportion of acquisition date
net assets.
3.3 Consideration transferred

Contingent consideration – initial measurement
IFRS 3 requires the consideration to be measured at the fair value at the acquisition date. This
includes any contingent consideration payable even if, at the date of acquisition, it is not deemed
probable that it will be paid.
HB2021
Contingent consideration – subsequent measurement
IFRS 3 requires contingent consideration to be classified as follows:
• A liability where contingent consideration is cash or shares to a specific value
• Equity where contingent consideration is a specified number of ordinary shares regardless of
their value
Subsequent changes are then dealt with as follows:
(a) If the change is due to additional information obtained that affects the position at the acquisition
date, goodwill should be remeasured.
(b) If the change is due to events which took place after the acquisition date, for example, meeting
earnings targets:
(1) where consideration is recorded as a liability (including a provision), any remeasurement is
recorded in profit or loss (so an increase in the liability due to strong performance of the
subsidiary will result in an expense and a decrease in the liability due to underperformance
will result in a gain); and
(2) where consideration is recorded in equity, remeasurement is not required.
The treatment means that group profits are now reduced where good performance of the subsidiary
results in additional payments to the seller.
Acquisition-related costs
These costs do not form part of consideration within the above calculation. Instead, all finders’ fees,
legal, accounting, valuation and other professional fees must be expensed through profit or loss.
Costs incurred to issue securities will be dealt with in accordance with IFRS 9.
The treatment will therefore reduce goodwill values and profits.
3.4 Non-controlling interest

The standard allows a choice in valuing the non-controlling interest within the goodwill calculation. It
may be measured either:
• as a proportion of the identifiable net assets of the subsidiary at the acquisition date (as in the
example above); or
• at fair value of the equity shares held by the non-controlling interest on the acquisition date.
The choice is available on a transaction by transaction basis.
The proportion of net assets method is used to value the non-controlling interest (NCI) at the
reporting date. It requires identifiable assets to be recognised at the fair values of the individual
assets. Where this method is used to value the non-controlling interest under IFRS 3 (revised), the
resulting goodwill corresponds only to the share of the entity held by the parent company.
The fair value method brings measurement of the non-controlling interest into line with
measurement of consideration and the acquiree’s net assets (ie, all at fair value). The fair value of the
non-controlling interest (eg, the active market prices of the equity shares not held by the acquirer) is
likely to exceed the proportion of net assets attributable to the non-controlling interest, this being by
an amount which represents goodwill attributable to the non-controlling interest. Therefore goodwill
on acquisition calculated using this method will represent 100% of goodwill in the acquiree.
Accordingly, this method is sometimes known as the ‘full goodwill‘ method.
Worked example: Calculation of goodwill 2

The consideration transferred by National plc when it acquired 80,000 of the 100,000 equity shares
of Locale Ltd was £25 million. At the acquisition date the fair value of Locale Ltd’s net assets was £21
million and the fair value of the 20,000 equity shares in Locale Ltd not acquired was £5 million.
Requirement
Calculate the goodwill acquired in the business combination on the basis that the non-controlling
interest in Locale Ltd is measured at:
(1) Its share of identifiable net assets
(2) Fair value of the non-controlling interest’s equity shares
HB2021

Solution
Goodwill
(1) (2)
NCI at share of net
assets NCI at fair value
£’000 £’000
Consideration transferred 25,000 25,000
Non-controlling interest – 20% × £21m/fair value 4,200 5,000
29,200 30,000
Total net assets of acquiree (21,000) (21,000)
Goodwill acquired in business combination 8,200 9,000
As the non-controlling interest is £0.8 million higher when measured at fair value, it follows that
goodwill is also £0.8 million higher.
This amount is the goodwill relating to the non-controlling interest. The calculation of goodwill when
the NCI is valued at fair value could be laid out as:
Group NCI
£’000 £’000
Consideration/fair value 25,000 5,000
Share of net assets 80%/20% × £21m (16,800) (4,200)
Goodwill 8,200 800
Total (or full) goodwill is £9 million; of this, the parent’s share is £8.2 million and the non-controlling
interest’s share is £0.8 million.
Note that the goodwill is not split in the same proportion as ownership of the shares:
• National owns 80% of the shares but 91% of goodwill.
• The non-controlling interest owns 20% of shares but just 9% of goodwill.
This discrepancy is due to the ‘control premium’ paid by National.
Interactive question 1: Calculation of goodwill

On 1 January 20X5, ABC acquired 90% of DEF when the fair value of DEF’s net assets was £18
million. The consideration was structured as follows.
• Three million ABC ordinary shares to be issued on the acquisition date.
• An additional one million ABC ordinary shares to be issued on 31 December 20X6 if DEF’s
revenue increases by 10% in the interim two years. This condition is likely to be achieved.
The market price of ABC ordinary shares is £7 at the acquisition date and has increased to £9 by 31
December 20X6.
ABC incurs professional acquisition fees amounting to £50,000.
It is ABC group policy to value the non-controlling interest using the proportion of net assets
method.
Requirement
Calculate the consideration transferred and the goodwill arising on acquisition.
HB2021
3.4.1 Non-controlling interest – subsequent valuation
Where the non-controlling interest is measured using the proportion of net assets method, the NCI at
the reporting date is calculated as the non-controlling interest’s share of the subsidiary’s net assets.
Where the non-controlling interest is measured using the fair value method, a consolidation
adjustment is required to recognise the additional goodwill in the consolidated statement of
financial position. This is best achieved using the following calculation:
Non-controlling interest
£ £
Share of net assets (NCI% × net assets at reporting date (W2)) X
Share of goodwill
NCI at acquisition date at fair value (W3) X
NCI at acquisition date at share of net assets (NCI% × net assets at
acquisition (W2)) (X)
Difference, being goodwill attributable to NCI X

X
Note: The references are to standard consolidation workings:
W2 Net assets of the subsidiary
W3 Goodwill working
Interactive question 2: Non-controlling interest

Robson acquired 75% of the ordinary shares of Ives on 30 June 20X7. At this date Ives had net assets
of £250,000, and the fair value of the 25% of Ives’s equity shares not acquired by Robson was
£90,000. Ives uses the fair value (full goodwill) method to measure non-controlling interests.
The abbreviated statement of financial position of Ives at 31 December 20X9 is as follows:
£
Assets 440,000
Share capital 100,000
Liabilities 95,000
440,000
• At acquisition, the fair value of land owned by Ives was £50,000 greater than its carrying amount;
Ives has subsequently sold the land to a third party.
• During the year ended 31 December 20X9, Ives sold goods to Robson, making a profit of
£12,000. Half of these goods are included in Robson’s inventory count at the year end.
Requirement
What is the value of the non-controlling interest in the consolidated statement of financial position at
31 December 20X9?
HB2021

3.5 Step acquisitions
Under IFRS 3 and IFRS 10, acquisition accounting is only applied to business combinations when
control is achieved.
Where a parent acquires control of a subsidiary in stages (a step acquisition), this means that
goodwill is only calculated once, upon initially achieving control. It is not then recalculated in
response to further acquisitions of shares in the same subsidiary.
Accounting for step acquisitions is covered in further detail within section 9 of this chapter.
3.6 Assets and liabilities acquired

In the previous sections, we discussed the first two elements of the goodwill calculation:
consideration transferred and the non-controlling interest.
This section deals with the third element of goodwill – the net assets acquired.
3.6.1 Recognition
Assets and liabilities existing at the acquisition date, and meeting the Conceptual Framework
definition of an asset or liability, should be recognised within the goodwill calculation.
(a) Only those liabilities which exist at the date of acquisition are recognised (so not future
operating losses or reorganisation plans which will be put into effect after control is gained).
(b) Some assets not recognised by the acquiree in its individual company financial statements may
be recognised by the acquirer in the consolidated financial statements. These include
identifiable intangible assets, such as brand names. Identifiable means that these assets are
separable or arise from contractual or other legal rights.
3.6.2 Measurement
The basic requirement of IFRS 3 is that the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired are measured at
their acquisition date fair value.
To understand the importance of fair values in the acquisition of a subsidiary, consider again the
definition of goodwill.
Definition
Goodwill: Any excess of the cost of the acquisition over the acquirer’s interest in the fair value of the
identifiable assets and liabilities acquired as at the date of the exchange transaction.
The statement of financial position of a subsidiary company at the date it is acquired may not be a
guide to the fair value of its net assets. For example, the market value of a freehold building may
have risen greatly since it was acquired, but it may appear in the statement of financial position at
historical cost less accumulated depreciation.
3.6.3 What is fair value?

Fair value is defined as follows by IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement – it is an important definition.
”The price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date.” (IFRS 13, Appendix A)
We will look at the requirements of IFRS 3 and IFRS 13 regarding fair value in more detail in section 4.
First, let us look at some practical matters. The following example will remind you how to make a fair
value adjustment, using the standard consolidation workings from your Professional Level studies.
Worked example: Fair value adjustment

P Co acquired 75% of the ordinary shares of S Co on 1 September 20X5. At that date the fair value of
S Co’s non-current assets was £23,000 greater than their carrying amount, and the balance of
retained earnings was £21,000. The fair value of the non-controlling interest was £17,000. The
statements of financial position of both companies at 31 August 20X6 are given below. S Co has not
incorporated any revaluation in its financial statements.
P Co values the non-controlling interest using the fair value (full goodwill) method.
HB2021
P Co statement of financial position as at 31 August 20X6
£ £
Assets
Non-current assets
Tangible assets 63,000
Investment in S Co at cost 51,000
114,000
Current assets 82,000
Total assets 196,000
Equity
Ordinary shares of £1 each 80,000
176,000
Current liabilities 20,000
Total equity and liabilities 196,000
S Co statement of financial position as at 31 August 20X6
£ £
Assets
Tangible non-current assets 28,000
Total assets 71,000
Equity
Ordinary shares of £1 each 20,000
61,000
If S Co had revalued its non-current assets at 1 September 20X5, an addition of £3,000 would have
been made to the depreciation expense charged for 20X5/X6.
Requirement
Prepare P Co’s consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 August 20X6.
HB2021

Solution
P Co consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 August 20X6
£ £
Assets
Non-current assets
Tangible non-current assets £(63,000 + 28,000 + 23,000 – 3,000) 111,000
Intangibles – goodwill (W3) 4,000
115,000
Current assets £(82,000 + 43,000) 125,000
Total assets 240,000
Ordinary share capital 80,000
Retained earnings (W5) 108,750
Equity 188,750
Non-controlling interest (W4) 21,250
210,000
Current liabilities £(20,000 + 10,000) 30,000
WORKINGS
(1) Group structure
P Co
75%
S Co
(2) Net assets
Reporting Post-
date Acquisition acquisition
£ £ £
Share capital 20,000 20,000 –
Retained earnings
– per question 41,000 21,000 20,000
– additional depreciation (3,000) (3,000)
Fair value adjustment to PPE 23,000 23,000 ––––––
81,000 64,000 17,000
(3) Goodwill
£
HB2021
£
Non-controlling interest 17,000
68,000
Less net assets of acquiree (W2) (64,000)
4,000
(4) Non-controlling interest
£ £
S Co (25% × £81,000 (W2)) 20,250
NCI share of goodwill at acquisition
FV of NCI at acquisition 17,000
NCI share of net assets at acquisition (25% × £64,000) (16,000)
1,000
Non-controlling interest 21,250
(5) Retained earnings
£
P Co 96,000
S Co (£17,000 (W2) × 75%) 12,750
108,750
Remember also that when preparing consolidated financial statements all intra-group balances,
transactions, profits and losses need to be eliminated. Where there are provisions for unrealised
profit and the parent is the seller the adjustment is made against the parent’s retained earnings (in
the retained earnings working). Where the subsidiary is the seller its retained earnings are adjusted
(in the net assets working) thus ensuring that the non-controlling interest (ie, the minority interest)
bear their share of the provision.
3.7 Impairments and the non-controlling interest

A subsidiary is subject to impairment review as a cash generating unit. The recoverable amount of
the subsidiary is compared with its carrying amount to assess whether an impairment has occurred.
Notional grossing up of goodwill
In order to be comparable with the calculated recoverable amount, the carrying amount of the
subsidiary must include 100% of both its net assets and goodwill. Therefore:
(a) where the proportion of net assets method is used to measure the NCI, goodwill must be
notionally adjusted so that it represents both the parent and NCI share of goodwill (ie, 100% of
goodwill). This involves grossing up the parent’s goodwill according to percentage
shareholdings; and
(b) where fair value is used to measure the NCI, goodwill already represents 100% of goodwill and
no such adjustment is required.
Split of goodwill between the parent and NCI
Where goodwill requires grossing up according to ownership percentages, total goodwill is split in
proportion to these ownership percentages.
Where goodwill does not require grossing up, total goodwill is not necessarily split in proportion to
ownership percentages due to the control premium.
HB2021

Context example: Notional goodwill
A acquires 80% of B for £120,000. The net assets at the date of acquisition were £130,000 and the
fair value of the 20% non-controlling interest equity shares was £28,000.
Proportion of net Fair value

assets method method
£ £
Consideration transferred 120,000 120,000
Non-controlling interest (20% × £130,000)/fair value 26,000 28,000
146,000 148,000
Net assets of acquiree (130,000) (130,000)
Goodwill 16,000 18,000
Attributable to:
Parent 16,000 16,000
NCI [£28,000 – (20% × £130,000)] n/a 2,000
For the purposes of an impairment review, the goodwill calculated using the proportion of net assets
method is notionally adjusted as follows:
£
Parent goodwill 16,000
Notional NCI goodwill (20%/80% × £16,000) 4,000
20,000
In other words, the notional goodwill attributable to the non-controlling interest calculated here
includes an element of control premium which is not evident when calculating goodwill attributable
to the non-controlling interest using the fair value method.
Allocation of the impairment loss to parent / NCI

IFRS 3 has amended IAS 36, Impairment of Assets to require that any impairment loss is allocated ‘on
the same basis as that on which profit or loss is allocated’. This is likely to correspond to ownership
percentages.
Therefore in the illustration above, any impairment loss to goodwill is allocated 80% to the parent
and 20% to the NCI.
(a) Where the proportion of net assets method is used and goodwill is notionally calculated for the
NCI, this split corresponds exactly to the split of goodwill. Assuming an impairment of £10,000:
Parent NCI
£ £
Goodwill 16,000 4,000
Impairment (80%/20% × £10,000) (8,000) (2,000)
8,000 2,000
Impairment of goodwill 50% 50%
Thus half the total goodwill has been impaired, being half of the parent’s goodwill and half of the
NCI’s notional goodwill.
HB2021
(b) Where the fair value method is used, and there is a control premium, such that the parent and
NCI goodwill are not in proportion, then any impairment is not in proportion to the starting goodwill.
This time assuming an impairment of £9,000:
Parent NCI
£ £
Goodwill 16,000 2,000
Impairment (80%/20% × £9,000) (7,200) (1,800)
8,800 200
Impairment of goodwill 45% 90%
3.8 Restructuring and future losses

An acquirer should not recognise liabilities for future losses or other costs expected to be incurred
as a result of the business combination.
IFRS 3 explains that a plan to restructure a subsidiary following an acquisition is not a present
obligation of the acquiree at the acquisition date. Neither does it meet the definition of a contingent
liability. Therefore, an acquirer should not recognise a liability for such a restructuring plan as part of
allocating the cost of the combination unless the subsidiary was already committed to the plan
before the acquisition.
This prevents creative accounting. An acquirer cannot set up a provision for restructuring or future
losses of a subsidiary and then release this to profit or loss in subsequent periods in order to reduce
losses or smooth profits.
3.9 Intangible assets

The acquiree may have intangible assets, such as development expenditure. These can be
recognised separately from goodwill only if they are identifiable. An intangible asset is identifiable
only if it:
(a) is separable ie, capable of being separated or divided from the entity and sold, transferred or
exchanged, either individually or together with a related contract, asset or liability; or
(b) arises from contractual or other legal rights.
3.10 Contingent liabilities

Contingent liabilities of the acquirer are recognised if their fair value can be measured reliably. A
contingent liability must be recognised even if the outflow is not probable, provided there is a
present obligation.
This is a departure from the normal rules in IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent
Assets; contingent liabilities are not normally recognised, but only disclosed.
After their initial recognition, the acquirer should measure contingent liabilities that are recognised
separately at the higher of:
(a) the amount that would be recognised in accordance with IAS 37; and
(b) the amount initially recognised.
3.11 Other exceptions to the recognition or measurement principles

(a) Deferred tax: Use IAS 12 values
(b) Employee benefits: Use IAS 19 values
(c) Indemnification assets: Measurement should be consistent with the measurement of the
indemnified item, for example an employee benefit or a contingent liability
(d) Reacquired rights: Value on the basis of the remaining contractual term of the related contract
regardless of whether market participants would consider potential contractual renewals in
determining its fair value
(e) Share-based payment: Use IFRS 2 values
(f) Assets held for sale: Use IFRS 5 values
HB2021

3.12 Goodwill arising on the acquisition
Goodwill should be carried in the statement of financial position at cost less any accumulated
impairment losses. The treatment of goodwill was covered in detail in your earlier studies.
3.13 Adjustments after the initial accounting is complete

Sometimes the fair values of the acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities or contingent liabilities or the
cost of the combination can only be measured provisionally by the end of the period in which the
combination takes place. In this situation, the acquirer should account for the combination using
those provisional values. The acquirer should recognise any adjustments to those provisional values
as a result of completing the initial accounting:
(a) within 12 months of the acquisition date
(b) from the acquisition date (ie, retrospectively)
This means that:
(a) the carrying amount of an item that is recognised or adjusted as a result of completing the initial
accounting shall be calculated as if its fair value at the acquisition date had been recognised
from that date; and
(b) goodwill should be adjusted from the acquisition date by an amount equal to the adjustment to
the fair value of the item being recognised or adjusted.
Any further adjustments after the initial accounting is complete should be recognised only to correct
an error in accordance with IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors.
Any subsequent changes in estimates are dealt with in accordance with IAS 8 (ie, the effect is
recognised in the current and future periods). IAS 8 requires an entity to account for an error
correction retrospectively, and to present financial statements as if the error had never occurred by
restating the comparative information for the prior period(s) in which the error occurred.
3.14 Reverse acquisitions

IFRS 3 also addresses a certain type of acquisition, known as a reverse acquisition or reverse
takeover. This is where Company A acquires ownership of Company B through a share exchange.
(For example, a private entity may arrange to have itself ‘acquired’ by a smaller public entity as a
means of obtaining a stock exchange listing.) The number of shares issued by Company A as
consideration to the shareholders of Company B is so great that control of the combined entity after
the transaction is with the shareholders of Company B.
In legal terms Company A may be regarded as the parent or continuing entity, but IFRS 3 states that,
as it is the Company B shareholders who control the combined entity, Company B should be treated
as the acquirer. Company B should apply the acquisition method to the assets and liabilities of
Company A.
Context example: Reverse acquisition

On 1 January 20X5, ABC’s share capital was 10,000 ordinary shares, quoted on a public exchange,
and the unquoted share capital of DEF was 24,000 ordinary shares. On that date ABC’s shares were
quoted at £20. ABC issued 30,000 new shares, and then exchanged them for the entire share capital
of DEF. The fair value of DEF’s shares on 1 January 20X5 was agreed by the professional advisers to
both ABC and DEF as £62.
After the acquisition, the relative interests of the two shareholder groups in ABC were as follows.
Shares held % of total

ABC shareholders 10,000 25
DEF shareholders 30,000 75
40,000 100
As the DEF shareholder group controls the combined entities, DEF is treated as the acquirer and
ABC as the acquiree.
HB2021
If DEF had issued enough of its own shares to give ABC shareholders a 25% interest in DEF, it would
have had to issue 8,000 shares (ie, 25/75 of 24,000 shares). DEF’s share capital would then have
been 32,000 (24,000 + 8,000) and the ABC shareholders’ interest would have been 8,000 so 25%.
The consideration for the acquisition is £496,000, being 8,000 DEF shares at their agreed fair value
of £62.
4 IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (business

combination aspects)
Section overview
• The accounting requirements and disclosures of the fair value exercise are covered by IFRS 3.
IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement gives extensive guidance on how the fair value of assets and
liabilities should be established.
• Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method.
4.1 Fair value

The general rule under IFRS 3 is that the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities must be measured at fair
value except in limited, stated cases. The assets and liabilities must:
(a) meet the definitions of assets and liabilities in the IASB ConceptualFramework; and
(b) be part of what the acquiree (or its former owners) exchanged in the business combination
rather than the result of separate transactions.
IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (see Chapter 2) provides extensive guidance on how the fair value
of assets and liabilities should be established.
This standard requires that the following are considered in measuring fair value:
(a) The asset or liability being measured
(b) The principal market (ie, that where the most activity takes place) or where there is no principal
market, the most advantageous market (ie, that in which the best price could be achieved) in
which an orderly transaction would take place for the asset or liability
(c) The highest and best use of the asset or liability and whether it is used on a standalone basis or
in conjunction with other assets or liabilities
(d) Assumptions that market participants would use when pricing the asset or liability
Having considered these factors, IFRS 13 provides a hierarchy of inputs for arriving at fair value. It
requires that Level 1 inputs are used where possible:
Level 1 Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets that the entity can access at the
measurement date
Level 2 Inputs other than quoted prices that are directly or indirectly observable for the
asset
Level 3 Unobservable inputs for the asset
HB2021

Worked example: Examples of fair value and business combinations
For non-financial assets, fair value is decided based on the highest and best use of the asset as
determined by a market participant. The following examples, adapted from the illustrative examples
to IFRS 13, demonstrate what is meant by this.
1 Example: Land (Based on IFRS 13: IE7)
Anscome Co has acquired land in a business combination. The land is currently developed for
industrial use as a site for a factory. The current use of land is presumed to be its highest and best
use unless market or other factors suggest a different use. Nearby sites have recently been
developed for residential use as sites for high-rise apartment buildings. On the basis of that
development and recent zoning and other changes to facilitate that development, Anscome
determines that the land currently used as a site for a factory could be developed as a site for
residential use (ie, for high-rise apartment buildings) because market participants would take into
account the potential to develop the site for residential use when pricing the land.
Requirement
How would the highest and best use of the land be determined?
2 Example: Research and development project (Based on IFRS 13: IE9)
Searcher acquires a research and development (R&D) project following a business combination.
Searcher does not intend to complete the project. If completed, the project would compete with
one of its own projects (to provide the next generation of the entity’s commercialised
technology). Instead, the entity intends to hold (ie, lock up) the project to prevent its competitors
from obtaining access to the technology. In doing this the project is expected to provide
defensive value, principally by improving the prospects for the entity’s own competing
technology.
If it could purchase the R&D project, Developer Co would continue to develop the project and
that use would maximise the value of the group of assets or of assets and liabilities in which the
project would be used (ie, the asset would be used in combination with other assets or with other
assets and liabilities). Developer Co does not have similar technology.
Requirement
How would the fair value of the project be measured?
3 Example: Decommissioning liability (Based on IFRS 13: IE35)
Deacon assumes a decommissioning liability in a business combination. It is legally required to
dismantle a power station at the end of its useful life, which is estimated to be 20 years.
Requirement
How would the decommissioning liability be measured?
Solution
1 The highest and best use of the land would be determined by comparing both of the following:
(1) The value of the land as currently developed for industrial use (ie, the land would be used in
combination with other assets, such as the factory, or with other assets and liabilities)
(2) The value of the land as a vacant site for residential use, taking into account the costs of
demolishing the factory and other costs (including the uncertainty about whether the entity
would be able to convert the asset to the alternative use) necessary to convert the land to a
vacant site (ie, the land is to be used by market participants on a standalone basis)
The highest and best use of the land would be determined on the basis of the higher of those
values.
2 The fair value of the project would be measured on the basis of the price that would be received
in a current transaction to sell the project, assuming that the R&D would be used with its
complementary assets and the associated liabilities and that those assets and liabilities would be
available to Developer Co.
HB2021
3 Because this is a business combination, Deacon must measure the liability at fair value in
accordance with IFRS 13, rather than using the best estimate measurement required by IAS 37,
Deacon will use the expected present value technique to measure the fair value of the
decommissioning liability. If Deacon were contractually committed to transfer its
decommissioning liability to a market participant, it would conclude that a market participant
would use all of the following inputs, probability weighted as appropriate, when estimating the
price it would expect to receive.
(1) Labour costs
(2) Allocated overhead costs
(3) The compensation that a market participant would generally receive for undertaking the
activity, including profit on labour and overhead costs and the risk that the actual cash
outflows might differ from those expected
(4) The effect of inflation
(5) The time value of money (risk-free rate)
(6) Non-performance risk, including Deacon’s own credit risk
As an example of how the probability adjustment might work, Deacon values labour costs on the
basis of current marketplace wages adjusted for expected future wage increases. It determines
that there is a 20% probability that the wage bill will be £15 million, a 30% probability that it will
be £25 million and a 50% probability that it will be £20 million. Expected cash flows will then be
(20% × £15m) + (30% × £25m) + (50% × £20m) = £20.5m. The probability assessments will be
developed on the basis of Deacon’s knowledge of the market and experience of fulfilling
obligations of this type.
Interactive question 3: Goodwill on consolidation

Tyzo plc prepares its financial statements to 31 December. On 1 September 20X7 Tyzo plc acquired 6
million £1 shares in Kono Ltd at £2 per share. The purchase was financed by an additional issue of
loan stock at an interest rate of 10%. At that date Kono Ltd produced the following interim financial
information.
£m
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (Note 1) 16.0
Current assets
Inventories (Note 2) 4.0
Receivables 2.9
Cash and cash equivalents 1.2
8.1
Total assets 24.1

Equity
Share capital (£1 shares) 8.0
Reserves 4.4
12.4
HB2021

£m
Long-term loan (Note 3) 4.0
Current liabilities
Trade payables 3.2
Provision for taxation 0.6
Bank overdraft 3.9
7.7
Total equity and liabilities 24.1
Notes
1 Please see the table below for information related to the property, plant and equipment of Kono
Ltd at 1 September 20X7.
2 The inventories of Kono Ltd in hand at 1 September 20X7 consisted of raw materials at cost. They
would have cost £4.2 million to replace at 1 September 20X7.
3 The long-term loan of Kono Ltd carries a rate of interest of 10% per annum, payable on 31
August annually in arrears. The loan is redeemable at par on 31 August 20Y1. The interest cost is
representative of current market rates. The accrued interest payable by Kono Ltd at 31 December
20X7 is included in the trade payables of Kono Ltd at that date.
4 On 1 September 20X7 Tyzo plc took a decision to rationalise the group so as to integrate Kono
Ltd. The costs of the rationalisation were estimated to total £3 million and the process was due to
start on 1 March 20X8. No provision for these costs has been made in any of the financial
statements given above.
5 Kono Ltd has disclosed a contingent liability of £200,000 in its interim financial statements
relating to litigation.
6 Tyzo Group values the non-controlling interest using the proportion of net assets method.
Property, plant and equipment
£m
Gross replacement cost 28.4
Net replacement cost 16.8
Economic value 18.0
Net realisable value 8.0
Requirement
Compute the goodwill on consolidation of Kono Ltd that will be included in the consolidated
financial statements of Tyzo plc for the year ended 31 December 20X7, explaining your treatment of
the items mentioned above. You should refer to the provisions of relevant accounting standards.
HB2021
There is a considerable amount of information to assimilate before you can proceed to the goodwill
calculation. Consider doing the explanations first, then when you come to the calculation you will
know what to do.
5 IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint

Ventures
Section overview
• IAS 28 deals with accounting for associates and joint ventures using the equity method.
• An associate exists where there is ‘significant influence‘.
• The criteria for identifying a joint venture are contained in IFRS 11.
• The accounting for associates and joint ventures is identical.
IAS 28 does not apply to investments in associates or joint ventures held by venture capital
organisations, mutual funds, unit trusts and similar entities that are measured at fair value in
IAS 28 requires investments in associates to be accounted for using the equity method, unless the
investment is classified as ‘held for sale’ in accordance with IFRS 5, in which case it should be
accounted for under IFRS 5.
An investor is exempt from applying the equity method if (IAS 28.17):
(a) it is a parent exempt from preparing consolidated financial statements under IAS 27 (revised); or
(b) all of the following apply:
(1) The investor is a wholly owned subsidiary or it is a partially owned subsidiary of another
entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote, have been
informed about, and do not object to, the investor not applying the equity method.
(2) Its securities are not publicly traded.
(3) It is not in the process of issuing securities in public securities markets.
(4) The ultimate or intermediate parent publishes consolidated financial statements that
comply with International Financial Reporting Standards.
IAS 28 does not allow an investment in an associate to be excluded from equity accounting when an
investee operates under severe long-term restrictions that significantly impair its ability to transfer
funds to the investor. Significant influence must be lost before the equity method ceases to be
applicable.
The use of the equity method should be discontinued from the date that the investor ceases to have
significant influence.
From that date, the investor shall account for the investment in accordance with IFRS 9. The fair value
of the retained interest must be regarded as its fair value on initial recognition as a financial asset
under IFRS 9.
5.1 Separate financial statements of the investor

In accordance with IAS 27, Separate Financial Statements where an entity prepares separate financial
statements it must account for associates (and joint ventures) in its separate financial statements in
one of the following ways:
• Accounted for at cost
• In accordance with IFRS 9
HB2021

• Using the equity method as described in IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures
5.2 Application of the equity method: consolidated accounts

The equity method should be applied in the consolidated accounts as follows:
(a) Statement of financial position includes investment in associate at cost plus (or minus) the
group’s share of the associate’s post-acquisition profits (or losses) minus any impairments in the
investment to date.
(b) Profit or loss (statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income): group share of
associate’s profit after tax.
(c) Other comprehensive income (statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income):
group share of associate’s other comprehensive income after tax.
The investment in the associate will also include any other long-term interests in the associate, for
example preference shares or long-term receivables or loans.
IFRS 9 sets out a list of indications that a financial asset (including an associate) may have become
impaired.
Many of the procedures required to apply the equity method are the same as are required for full
consolidation. In particular, fair value adjustments are required and the group share of intra-group
unrealised profits must be excluded.
Worked example: Associate

P Co, a company with subsidiaries, acquires 25,000 of the 100,000 £1 ordinary shares in A Co for
£60,000 on 1 January 20X8. In the year to 31 December 20X8, A Co earns profits after tax of £24,000,
from which it declares and pays a dividend of £6,000.
Requirement
How will A Co’s results be accounted for in the individual and consolidated accounts of P Co for the
year ended 31 December 20X8?
Solution
In the individual accounts of P Co, the investment will be recorded on 1 January 20X8 at cost. Unless
there is an impairment in the value of the investment (see below), most companies will choose the
policy that this amount (the cost) will remain in the individual statement of financial position of P Co
permanently. The only entry in P Co’s individual statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income will be to record dividends received. For the year ended 31 December 20X8, P Co will:
DEBIT Cash (£6,000 × 25%) £1,500

CREDIT Income from shares in associated companies £1,500
In the consolidated accounts of P Co equity accounting will be used. Consolidated profit after tax will
include the group’s share of A Co’s profit after tax (25% × £24,000 = £6,000).
In the consolidated statement of financial position the non-current asset ‘Investment in associates’
will be stated at £64,500, being cost of £60,000 plus the group’s share of post-acquisition retained
profits of £4,500 ((24,000 – 6,000) × 25%).
5.3 Transactions between a group and its associate

Unlike for subsidiaries, trading transactions are not cancelled out. However, any unrealised profits on
these transactions should be eliminated, but only to the extent of the group’s share.
Where the associate sells to the parent/subsidiary the double entry is as follows, where A% is the
parent’s holding in the associate, and PURP is the provision for unrealised profit:
DEBIT Retained earnings of parent/subsidiary PURP × A%

CREDIT Group inventories/PPE PURP × A%
HB2021
Where the parent/subsidiary sells to the associate:
DEBIT Retained earnings of parent/subsidiary PURP × A%

CREDIT Investment in associate PURP × A%
5.4 Associate’s losses

When the equity method is being used and the investor’s share of losses of the associate equals or
exceeds its interest in the associate, the investor should discontinue including its share of further
losses. The investment is reported at nil value. After the investor’s interest is reduced to nil, additional
losses should only be recognised where the investor has incurred obligations or made payments on
behalf of the associate (for example, if it has guaranteed amounts owed to third parties by the
associate).
5.5 Impairment losses

Any impairment loss is recognised in accordance with IAS 36, Impairment of Assets for each
associate individually.

Section overview
• IFRS 11 classes joint arrangements as either joint operations or joint ventures.

• The classification of a joint arrangement as a joint operation or a joint venture depends on the
rights and obligations of the parties to the arrangement.
• Joint arrangements are often found when each party can contribute in different ways to the
activity. For example, one party may provide finance, another purchases or manufactures goods,
while a third offers its marketing skills.
6.1 Definitions
The IFRS begins by listing some important definitions.
Definitions
Joint arrangement: An arrangement of which two or more parties have joint control.
Joint control: The contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement, which exists only when
decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control.
Joint operation: A joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement
have rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities relating to the arrangement.
Joint venture: A joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement
have rights to the net assets of the arrangement. (IFRS 11, Appendix A)
6.2 Forms of joint arrangement

IFRS 11 classes joint arrangements as either joint operations or joint ventures. The classification of a
joint arrangement as a joint operation or a joint venture depends on the rights and obligations of the
parties to the arrangement.
A joint operation is a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control (the joint
operators) have rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, of that joint arrangement. A
joint arrangement that is not structured through a separate entity is always a joint operation.
A joint venture is a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control (the joint venturers)
of the arrangement have rights to the net assets of the arrangement.
HB2021

A joint arrangement that is structured through a separate entity may be either a joint operation or a
joint venture. In order to ascertain the classification, the parties to the arrangement should assess the
terms of the contractual arrangement together with any other facts or circumstances to assess
whether they have:
• rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, in relation to the arrangement (indicating a
joint operation); and
• rights to the net assets of the arrangement (indicating a joint venture).
Detailed guidance is provided in the appendices to IFRS 11 in order to help this assessment, giving
consideration to, for example, the wording contained within contractual arrangements.
IFRS 11 summarises the basic issues that underlie the classifications in the following diagram.
Figure 20.1: Joint Arrangements
Structure of the joint arrangement
Not structured through Structured through

a separate vehicle a separate vehicle
An entity shall consider:

(i) The legal form of the separate
vehicle
(ii) The terms of the contractual
arrangement; and
(iii) Where relevant, other facts and
circumstances
Joint operation Joint venture
(Source: IFRS 11: AG. B21)
6.2.1 Contractual arrangement

The existence of a contractual agreement distinguishes a joint arrangement from an investment in an
associate. If there is no contractual arrangement, then a joint arrangement does not exist.
Evidence of a contractual arrangement could be in one of several forms.
• Contract between the parties
• Minutes of discussion between the parties
• Incorporation in the articles or by-laws of the joint venture
The contractual arrangement is usually in writing, whatever its form, and it will deal with the following
issues surrounding the joint venture.
• Its activity, duration and reporting obligations
• The appointment of its board of directors (or equivalent) and the voting rights of the parties
• Capital contributions to it by the parties
• How its output, income, expenses or results are shared between the parties
It is the contractual arrangement which establishes joint control over the joint venture, so that no
single party can control the activity of the joint venture on its own.
The terms of the contractual arrangement are key to deciding whether the arrangement is a joint
venture or joint operation. IFRS 11 includes a table of issues to consider and explains the influence of
a range of points that could be included in the contract. The table is summarised below.
HB2021
Joint operation Joint venture
The terms of the The parties to the joint arrangement The parties to the joint arrangement
contractual have rights to the assets, and have rights to the net assets of the
arrangement obligations for the liabilities, relating arrangement (ie, it is the separate
to the arrangement. vehicle, not the parties, that has rights
to the assets, and obligations for the
liabilities).
Rights to assets The parties to the joint arrangement The assets brought into the
share all interests (eg, rights, title or arrangement or subsequently
ownership) in the assets relating to acquired by the joint arrangement are
the arrangement in a specified the arrangement’s assets. The parties
proportion (eg, in proportion to the have no interests (ie, no rights, title or
parties’ ownership interest in the ownership) in the assets of the
arrangement or in proportion to the arrangement.
activity carried out through the
arrangement that is directly attributed
to them).
Obligations for The parties share all liabilities, The joint arrangement is liable for the
liabilities obligations, costs and expenses in a debts and obligations of the
specified proportion (eg, in arrangement.
proportion to their ownership interest The parties are liable to the
in the arrangement or in proportion to arrangement only to the extent of
the activity carried out through the their respective:
arrangement that is directly attributed
to them). • investments in the arrangement; or
• obligations to contribute any
unpaid or additional capital to the
arrangement; or
• both.
The parties to the joint arrangement Creditors of the joint arrangement do

are liable for claims by third parties. not have rights of recourse against
any party.
Revenues, The contractual arrangement The contractual arrangement

expenses, profit establishes the allocation of revenues establishes each party’s share in the
or loss and expenses on the basis of the profit or loss relating to the activities
relative performance of each party to of the arrangement.
the joint arrangement. For example,
the contractual arrangement might
establish that revenues and expenses
are allocated on the basis of the
capacity that each party uses in a
plant operated jointly.
Guarantees The provision of guarantees to third parties, or the commitment by the parties
to provide them, does not, by itself, determine that the joint arrangement is a
joint operation.
6.2.2 Section summary

• There are two types of joint arrangement: joint ventures and jointly controlled operations.
• A contractual arrangement must exist which establishes joint control.
• Joint control is important: one operator must not be able to govern the financial and operating
policies of the joint venture.
HB2021

The nature of a joint arrangement may not be immediately apparent. If asked to determine whether a
joint arrangement is a joint operation or a joint venture, you should explain your reasons clearly.

The accounting treatment of joint arrangements depends on whether the arrangement is a joint
venture or joint operation.
6.3.1 Accounting for joint operations

IFRS 11 requires that a joint operator recognises line by line the following in relation to its interest in
a joint operation:
(a) Its assets, including its share of any jointly held assets
(b) Its liabilities, including its share of any jointly incurred liabilities
(c) Its revenue from the sale of its share of the output arising from the joint operation
(d) Its share of the revenue from the sale of the output by the joint operation
(e) Its expenses, including its share of any expenses incurred jointly
operator.
Interactive question 4: Joint arrangement

Can you think of examples of situations where this type of joint arrangement might take place?
6.3.2 Joint ventures

IFRS 11 and IAS 28 require joint ventures to be accounted for using the equity method.
The rules for equity accounting are included in IAS 28. These were covered in your Professional
studies and are revised above.
Application of IAS 28 to joint ventures
The consolidated statement of financial position is prepared by:
• including the interest in the joint venture at cost plus share of post-acquisition total
comprehensive income; and
• including the group share of the post-acquisition total comprehensive income in group reserves.
The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income will include:
• the group share of the joint venture’s profit or loss; and
• the group share of the joint venture’s other comprehensive income.
The use of the equity method should be discontinued from the date on which the joint venturer
ceases to have joint control over, or have significant influence on, a joint venture.
Transactions between a joint venturer and a joint venture
Downstream transactions
A joint venturer may sell or contribute assets to a joint venture so making a profit or loss. Any such
gain or loss should, however, only be recognised to the extent that it reflects the substance of the
transaction.
Therefore:
• only the gain attributable to the interest of the other joint venturers should be recognised in the
financial statements; and
HB2021
• the full amount of any loss should be recognised when the transaction shows evidence that the
net realisable value of current assets is less than cost, or that there is an impairment loss.
Upstream transactions
When a joint venturer purchases assets from a joint venture, the joint venturer should not recognise
its share of the profit made by the joint venture on the transaction in question until it resells the
assets to an independent third party ie, until the profit is realised.
Losses should be treated in the same way, except losses should be recognised immediately if they
represent a reduction in the net realisable value of current assets, or a permanent decline in the
carrying amount of non-current assets.
6.3.3 Section summary

• Joint operations are accounted for by including the investor’s share of assets, liabilities, income
and expenses as per the contractual arrangement.
• Joint ventures are accounted for using the equity method as under IAS 28.
7 Question technique and practice

Section overview
Although you have studied consolidation at Professional Level, it is vitally important that you have
retained this knowledge and can put it into practice. This section summarises the basic question
techniques and provides question practice before you move on to the more advanced topics of
changes in group structure and foreign currency transactions. A number of standard workings should
be used when answering consolidation questions.
7.1 Question technique for consolidated statement of financial position

As questions increase in complexity a formal pattern of workings is needed. Review the standard
workings below.
(1) Establish group structure
P Ltd
80%
S Ltd
(2) Set out net assets of S Ltd
At year end At acquisition Post-acquisition

£ £ £
Share capital X X X
Retained earnings X X X
X X X
(3) Calculate goodwill
£
Consideration transferred X
Plus Non-controlling interest at acquisition X
X
HB2021

£
Less net assets at acquisition (see W2) (X)
X
Impairment to date (X)
Balance c/f X
(4) Calculate non-controlling interest (NCI) at year end
£
At acquisition (NCI% × net assets (W2) or fair value) X
Share of post-acquisition profits and other reserves (NCI% × post-acquisition (W2)) X
X
(5) Calculate retained earnings
£
P Ltd (100%) X
S Ltd (share of post-acquisition retained earnings (see W2)) X
Goodwill impairment to date (see W3) (X)
Group retained earnings X
Note: You should use the proportionate basis for measuring the NCI at the acquisition date unless a
question specifies the fair value basis.
7.2 Consolidated statement of profit or loss

As with the statement of financial position, as questions increase in complexity a formal pattern of
workings is needed.
(1) Establish group structure
P Ltd
80%
S Ltd
(2) Prepare consolidation schedule
P S Adj Consol
£ £ £ £
Revenue X X (X) X
Cost of sales – Per Q (X) (X) X (X)
– PURP (seller’s books) (X) or (X)
Expenses – Per Q (X) (X) (X)
– Goodwill impairment (if any)* (X)(X) (X)
Tax – Per Q (X) (X) (X)
Profit X
May need workings for (eg)

• PURPs
HB2021
• Goodwill impairment
(3) Calculate non-controlling interest
£
S PAT × NCI% NCI% × X = X
* If the non-controlling interest is measured at fair value, then the NCI% of the impairment loss will be
debited to the NCI. This is based on the NCI shareholding. For instance, if the parent has acquired
75% of the subsidiary and the NCI is measured at fair value, then 25% of any goodwill impairment
will be debited to NCI.
However complex consolidation questions may be at Advanced Level, following the above step-by-
step structure will get you many of the marks. Practice is essential so that each step becomes routine.
Interactive question 5: Consolidation technique 1

At 1 July 20X8 Anima plc had investments in two companies: Orient Ltd and Oxendale Ltd. On 1
April 20X9 Anima plc purchased 85% of the ordinary share capital of Carnforth Ltd for £3 million.
Extracts from the draft individual financial statements of the four companies for the year ended 30
June 20X9 are shown below:
Statements of profit or loss
Anima plc Orient Ltd Carnforth Ltd Oxendale Ltd

£ £ £ £
Revenue 1,410,500 870,300 640,000 760,090
Cost of sales (850,000) (470,300) (219,500) (345,000)
Gross profit 560,500 400,000 420,500 415,090
Operating expenses (103,200) (136,000) (95,120) (124,080)
Profit before taxation 457,300 264,000 325,380 291,010
Income tax expense (137,100) (79,200) (97,540) (86,400)
Profit for the year 320,200 184,800 227,840 204,610
Statements of financial position (extracts) at year end
Anima plc Orient Ltd Carnforth Ltd Oxendale Ltd

£ £ £ £
Equity
Ordinary share capital (£1 shares) 4,000,000 3,500,000 2,000,000 3,000,000
Retained earnings 1,560,000 580,000 605,000 340,000
5,560,000 4,080,000 2,605,000 3,340,000
(1) A number of years ago Anima plc acquired 2.1 million of Orient Ltd’s ordinary shares and
900,000 of Oxendale Ltd’s ordinary shares. Balances on retained earnings at the date of
acquisition were £195,000 for Orient Ltd and £130,000 for Oxendale Ltd. The non-controlling
interest and goodwill arising on the acquisition of Orient Ltd were both calculated using the fair
value method; the fair value of the non-controlling interest at acquisition was £1,520,000.
HB2021

(2) At the date of acquisition the fair values of Carnforth Ltd’s assets and liabilities were the same as
their carrying amounts except for its head office (land and buildings) which had a fair value of
£320,000 in excess of its carrying amount. The split of the value of land to buildings is 50:50 and
the buildings had a remaining life of 40 years at 1 April 20X9. Carnforth Ltd’s profits accrued
evenly over the current year. The non-controlling interest and goodwill arising on the acquisition
of Carnforth Ltd were both calculated using the proportionate method.
(3) During the year Anima plc sold goods to Orient Ltd and Oxendale Ltd at a mark-up of 15%.
Anima plc recorded sales of £149,500 and £207,000 to Orient Ltd and Oxendale Ltd
respectively during the year. At the year-end inventory count Orient Ltd was found still to be
holding half these goods and Oxendale Ltd still held one-third.
(4) Anima plc has undertaken annual impairment reviews in respect of all its investments and at 30
June 20X9 an impairment loss of £10,000 had been identified in respect of Oxendale Ltd.
Requirement
Prepare the consolidated statement of profit or loss of Anima plc for the year ended 30 June 20X9
and an extract from the consolidated statement of financial position as at the same date showing all
figures that would appear as part of equity.
Interactive question 6: Consolidation technique 2

Preston plc has investments in two companies, Longridge Ltd and Chipping Ltd. The draft
summarised statements of financial position of the three companies at 31 March 20X4 are shown
below:
Preston plc Longridge Ltd Chipping Ltd

£ £ £
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 660,700 635,300 261,600
Intangibles 101,300 72,000 –
Investments 350,000 ––––––– –––––––
1,112,000 707,300 261,600
Current assets
Inventories 235,400 195,900 65,700
Trade and other receivables 174,900 78,800 56,600
Cash and cash equivalents 23,700 11,900 3,400
434,000 286,600 125,700
Total assets 1,546,000 993,900 387,300
Equity
Ordinary share capital (£1 shares) 100,000 500,000 200,000
Revaluation surplus 125,000 – –
Retained earnings 1,084,800 312,100 12,000
1,309,800 812,100 212,000
HB2021
Preston plc Longridge Ltd Chipping Ltd
£ £ £
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 151,200 101,800 137,400
Taxation 85,000 80,000 37,900
236,200 181,800 175,300
Total equity and liabilities 1,546,000 993,900 387,300
(1) Preston plc acquired 75% of Longridge Ltd’s ordinary shares on 1 April 20X2 for total cash
consideration of £691,000. £250,000 was payable on the acquisition date and the remaining
£441,000 two years later, on 1 April 20X4. The directors of Preston plc were unsure how to treat
the deferred consideration and have ignored it when preparing the draft financial statements
above.
On the date of acquisition Longridge Ltd’s retained earnings were £206,700. The non-controlling
interest and goodwill arising on the acquisition of Longridge Ltd were both calculated using the
proportionate method.
(2) The intangible asset in Longridge Ltd’s statement of financial position relates to goodwill which
arose on the acquisition of an unincorporated business, immediately before Preston plc
purchasing its shares in Longridge Ltd. Cumulative impairments of £18,000 in relation to this
goodwill had been recognised by Longridge Ltd as at 31 March 20X4.
The fair values of the remaining assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of Longridge Ltd at
the date of its acquisition by Preston plc were equal to their carrying amounts, with the exception
of a building purchased on 1 April 20X0, which had a fair value on the date of acquisition of
£120,000. This building is being depreciated by Longridge Ltd on a straight-line basis over 50
years and is included in the above statement of financial position at a carrying amount of
£92,000.
(3) Immediately after its acquisition by Preston plc, Longridge Ltd sold a machine to Preston plc. The
machine had been purchased by Longridge Ltd on 1 April 20X0 for £10,000 and was sold to
Preston plc for £15,000. The machine was originally assessed as having a total useful life of five
years and that estimate has never changed.
(4) Chipping Ltd is a joint venture, set up by Preston plc and a fellow venturer on 30 June 20X2.
Preston plc paid cash of £100,000 for its 40% share of Chipping Ltd.
(5) During the current year Preston plc sold goods to Longridge Ltd for £12,000 and to Chipping
Ltd for £15,000, earning a 20% gross margin on both sales. All these goods were still in the
purchasing companies’ inventories at the year end.
(6) At 31 March 20X4 Preston plc’s trade receivables included £50,000 due from Longridge Ltd.
However, Longridge Ltd’s trade payables included only £40,000 due to Preston plc. The
difference was due to cash in transit.
(7) At 31 March 20X4 impairment losses of £25,000 and £10,000 respectively in respect of goodwill
arising on the acquisition of Longridge Ltd and the carrying amount of Chipping Ltd need to be
recognised in the consolidated financial statements.
In the next financial year, Preston plc decided to invest in a third company, Sawley Ltd. On 1
December 20X4 Preston plc acquired 80% of Sawley Ltd’s ordinary shares for £385,000. On the
date of acquisition Sawley Ltd’s equity comprised share capital of £320,000 and retained
earnings of £112,300. Preston plc chose to measure the non-controlling interest at the
acquisition date at the non-controlling interest’s share of Sawley Ltd’s net assets. Goodwill arising
on the acquisition of Sawley Ltd has been correctly calculated at £39,160 and will be recognised
in the consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 March 20X5.
Requirements
6.1 Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of Preston plc as at 31 March 20X4.
HB2021

6.2 Set out the journal entries that will be required on consolidation to recognise the goodwill
arising on the acquisition of Sawley Ltd in the consolidated statement of financial position of
Preston plc as at 31 March 20X5.
Note: An appropriate discount rate is 5% p.a.
8 IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities

Section overview
IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities requires disclosure of a reporting entity’s interests in
other entities in order to help identify the profit or loss and cash flows available to the reporting
entity and determine the value of a current or future investment in the reporting entity.
8.1 Objective
IFRS 12 was published in 2011. The objective of the standard is to require entities to disclose
information that enables the user of the financial statements to evaluate the nature of, and risks
associated with, interests in other entities, and the effects of those interests on its financial position,
financial performance and cash flows.
This is particularly relevant in light of the financial crisis and recent accounting scandals. The IASB
believes that better information about interests in other entities is necessary to help users to identify
the profit or loss and cash flows available to the reporting entity and to determine the value of a
current or future investment in the reporting entity.
8.2 Scope
IFRS 12 covers disclosures for entities which have interests in the following:
• Subsidiaries
• Joint arrangements (ie, joint operations and joint ventures, see above)
• Associates
• Unconsolidated structured entities
8.3 Structured entity

IFRS 12 defines a structured entity.
Definition
Structured entity: An entity that has been designed so that voting or similar rights are not the
dominant factor in deciding who controls the entity, such as when any voting rights relate to
administrative tasks only and the relevant activities are directed by means of contractual
arrangements.
(IFRS 12, Appendix A)
8.4 Disclosure
IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities was issued in 2011. It removes all disclosure
requirements from other standards relating to group accounting and provides guidance applicable
to consolidated financial statements.
The standard requires disclosure of:
HB2021
(a) the significant judgements and assumptions made in determining the nature of an interest in
another entity or arrangement, and in determining the type of joint arrangement in which an
interest is held; and
(b) information about interests in subsidiaries, associates, joint arrangements and structured entities
that are not controlled by an investor.
8.4.1 Disclosure of subsidiaries

The following disclosures are required in respect of subsidiaries:
(a) The interest that non-controlling interests have in the group’s activities and cash flows, including
the name of relevant subsidiaries, their principal place of business, and the interest and voting
rights of the non-controlling interests
(b) Nature and extent of significant restrictions on an investor’s ability to use group assets and
liabilities
(c) Nature of the risks associated with an entity’s interests in consolidated structured entities, such as
the provision of financial support
(d) Consequences of changes in ownership interest in subsidiary (whether control is lost or not)
8.4.2 Disclosure of associates and joint arrangements

The following disclosures are required in respect of associates and joint arrangements:
(a) Nature, extent and financial effects of an entity’s interests in associates or joint arrangements,
including name of the investee, principal place of business, the investor’s interest in the investee,
method of accounting for the investee and restrictions on the investee’s ability to transfer funds
to the investor
(b) Risks associated with an interest in an associate or joint venture
(c) Summarised financial information, with more detail required for joint ventures than for associates
9 Step acquisitions
Section overview
• Subsidiaries and associates are consolidated/equity accounted for from the date
control/significant influence is gained.
• In some cases acquisitions may be achieved in stages. These are known as step acquisitions.
A step acquisition occurs when the parent entity acquires control over the subsidiary in stages,
achieved by buying blocks of shares at different times.
Acquisition accounting is only applied when control is achieved.
The date on which control is achieved is the date on which the acquirer should recognise the
acquiree’s identifiable net assets and any goodwill acquired (or bargain purchase) in the business
combination.
Until control is achieved, any pre-existing interest is accounted for in accordance with:
• IFRS 9 in the case of investments in equity instruments
• IAS 28 in the case of associates and joint ventures
9.1 Types of business combination achieved in stages

There are three possible types of business combinations achieved in stages:
(a) A previously held investment, say 10% of share capital, with no significant influence (accounted
for under IFRS 9), is increased to a controlling holding of 50% or more.
(b) A previously held equity investment, say 35% of share capital, accounted for as an associate
under IAS 28, is increased to a controlling holding of 50% or more.
(c) A controlling holding in a subsidiary is increased, say from 60% to 80%.
The first two transactions are treated in the same way, but the third is not. There is a reason for this.
HB2021

9.2 General principle: ‘crossing an accounting boundary’
Under IFRS 3 a business combination occurs only when one entity obtains control over another,
which is generally when 50% or more has been acquired. The 2008 Deloitte guide: Business
Combinations and Changes in Ownership Interests calls this ‘crossing an accounting boundary‘.
When this happens, the original investment – whether an investment in equity instruments with no
significant influence, or an associate – is treated as if it were disposed of at fair value and reacquired
at fair value. This previously held interest at fair value, together with any consideration transferred, is
the ‘cost’ of the combination used in calculating the goodwill.
If the 50% boundary is not crossed, as when a shareholding in an existing subsidiary is increased, the
event is treated as a transaction between owners.
Whenever you cross the 50% boundary, you revalue, and a gain or loss is reported in profit or loss
for the year. If you do not cross the 50% boundary, no gain or loss is reported; instead there is an
adjustment to the parent’s equity.
The following diagram, adapted from the Deloitte guide to IFRS 3, may help you visualise the
boundary:
Figure 20.2: Transactions that trigger remeasurement of an existing interest
IFRS 9 IAS 28/IFRS 11 IFRS 10
Acquisition of a
controlling interest in a
10% financial asset
Acquisition of a
40% controlling interest in
an associate or joint
venture
0% 20% 50% 100%

Passive Significant Control
influence/
joint control
As you will see from the diagram, the third situation in section 9.1, where an interest in a subsidiary is
increased from, say, 60% to 80%, does not involve crossing that all-important 50% threshold.
Likewise, purchases of stakes up to 50% do not involve crossing the boundary, and therefore do not
trigger a calculation of goodwill.
When tackling exam questions that involve a step-acquisition or a disposal, this skill (assimilating and
using information) is vital. You should be able to work out quickly whether an accounting boundary
has been crossed, and this will determine the financial reporting treatment.
9.3 Achieving control

When control is achieved:
• any previously held equity shareholding should be treated as if it had been disposed of and then
reacquired at fair value at the acquisition date; and
• any gain or loss on remeasurement to fair value should be recognised in profit or loss in the
period.
£
Fair value of consideration paid to acquire control X
HB2021
£
Non-controlling interest (valued using either fair value or the proportion of net assets
method) X
Fair value of previously held equity interest at acquisition date X
X
Fair value of net assets of acquiree (X)
Goodwill X
9.3.1 Gain or loss on derecognition

The gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss unless the equity interest previously held was an
investment in equity instruments and an irrevocable election was made to hold the investment at fair
value through other comprehensive income. In the latter case, in accordance with IFRS 9, Financial
Instruments, the gain on derecognition of the investment is taken to other comprehensive income, or,
in the SOFP, other components of equity.
As we saw in Chapter 16 on financial instruments, for an equity instrument at fair value through other
comprehensive income (FVTOCI) the asset’s carrying amount is remeasured to fair value at the date
of derecognition (IFRS 9: para. 3.2.12) immediately prior to the disposal. A step acquisition from a
financial asset to subsidiary is like a disposal of the financial asset. Any change resulting from such a
remeasurement is recognised in OCI. Assuming the disposal is at fair value then, as a consequence
of the revaluation there is nil profit/loss on disposal recorded in profit or loss. IFRS 9 interacts with
IFRS 3, which requires that, in the case of a step acquisition going from a financial asset at FVTOCI to
a subsidiary, the financial asset at FVTOCI is revalued in accordance with IFRS 3 para. 42:
”In a business combination achieved in stages, the acquirer shall remeasure its previously held
equity interest in the acquiree at its acquisition-date fair value and recognise the resulting gain
or loss, if any, in profit or loss or other comprehensive income, as appropriate.”
It is therefore clear that the gain on revaluation of a financial asset in a step acquisition from financial
asset to subsidiary would go through OCI in the case of financial assets at FVTOCI and to profit or
loss in the case of financial assets at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL).
Worked example: Control in stages – previous holding a simple investment

Bath Ltd has 1 million shares in issue. Bristol plc acquired 50,000 shares in Bath Ltd on 1 January
20X6 for £100,000. These shares were classified as a financial asset at fair value through other
comprehensive income and on 31 December 20X8 their carrying amount was £230,000 and
increases in fair value of £130,000 had been recognised in other comprehensive income and were
held in equity. On 1 June 20X9 when the fair value of Bath Ltd’s net assets was £4 million, Bristol plc
acquired another 650,000 shares in Bath Ltd for £3.9 million. On 1 June 20X9 the fair value of the
50,000 shares already held was £250,000.
Requirement
Show the journal entry required in respect of the 50,000 shareholding on 1 June 20X9 and calculate
the goodwill acquired in the business combination on that date assuming that goodwill is valued
using the proportion of net assets method.
Solution
Journal entry
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Investment in Bath Ltd (250,000 – 230,000) 20
CREDIT Other comprehensive income and equity reserve 20
To recognise the gain on the deemed disposal of the shareholding in Bath Ltd existing immediately
before control being obtained.
HB2021

Calculation of goodwill in respect of 70% (5% + 65%) holding in Bath Ltd:
£’000
Non-controlling interest (30% × £4m) 1,200
Acquisition-date fair value of previously held equity 250
5,350
Net assets acquired (4,000)
Goodwill 1,350
Interactive question 7: Control in stages – no previous significant influence

Good, whose year end is 30 June 20X9 has a subsidiary, Will, which it acquired in stages. The details
of the acquisition are as follows.
Date of acquisition Holding acquired Retained earnings at acq. Purchase consideration

% $m $m
1 July 20X7 20 270 120
1 July 20X8 60 450 480
The share capital of Will has remained unchanged since its incorporation at $300 million. The fair
values of the net assets of Will were the same as their carrying amounts at the date of the acquisition.
Good did not have significant influence over Will at any time before gaining control of Will. The
group policy is to measure non-controlling interest at its proportionate share of the fair value of the
subsidiary’s identifiable net assets.
Requirements
7.1 Calculate the goodwill on the acquisition of Will that will appear in the consolidated statement
of financial position at 30 June 20X9.
7.2 Calculate the profit on the derecognition of any previously held investment in Will to be
reported in group profit or loss for the year ended 30 June 20X9.
9.4 Acquisitions that do not result in a change of control

Where an entity increases its investment in an existing subsidiary:
• no gain or loss is recognised;
• goodwill is not remeasured; and
• the difference between the fair value of consideration paid and the change in the non-controlling
interest is recognised directly in equity attributable to owners of the parent.
Worked example: Acquisitions that do not result in a change of control

On 1 June 20X6, Santander acquired 70% of the equity of Madrid in exchange for £760,000 cash
and 100,000 Santander shares. At this date the fair value of the identifiable net assets of Madrid was
£850,000 and the market value of Santander shares was £2.50.
On 31 December 20X8, Santander acquired a further 10% of the equity of Madrid at a cost of
£105,000. On this date the identifiable net assets of Madrid were £970,000.
Santander measures the non-controlling interest using the proportion of net assets method.
HB2021
Requirements
1 What goodwill is recorded in the consolidated statement of financial position at 31 December
20X8, assuming that there is no impairment?
2 What journal adjustment is required on the acquisition of the further 10% of shares?
Solution
1 The goodwill included in the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X8 is that goodwill
calculated on the initial acquisition in June 20X6:
£’000
Consideration (£760,000 + (100,000 × £2.50)) 1,010
Non-controlling interest (30% × £850,000) 255
1,265
Net assets of acquiree (850)
Goodwill 415
2 The adjustment required is based on the change in the non-controlling interest at the acquisition
date:
£
NCI on 31 December 20X8 based on old interest (30% × £970,000) 291,000
NCI on 31 December 20X8 based on new interest (20% × £970,000) 194,000
Adjustment required 97,000
Therefore:
DEBIT Non-controlling interest 97,000

DEBIT Shareholders’ equity (bal fig) 8,000
CREDIT Cash 105,000
10 Disposals
Section overview
• Subsidiaries and associates are consolidated/equity accounted for until the date
control/significant influence is lost therefore profits need to be time apportioned.
• A gain on disposal must also be calculated, by reference to the fair value of any interest retained
in the subsidiary or associate.
An entity may sell all or some of its shareholding in another entity. Full disposals of subsidiaries and
associates were covered in FR and are revised here. Other situations which may arise are as follows:
• The sale of shares in a subsidiary such that control is retained
• The sale of shares in a subsidiary such that the subsidiary becomes an associate
• The sale of shares in a subsidiary such that the subsidiary becomes an investment
• The sale of shares in an associate such that the associate becomes an investment
HB2021

10.1 Crossing an accounting boundary revisited
Under IFRS 3 a gain on disposal occurs only when one entity loses control over another, which is
generally when its holding is decreased to less than 50%. As noted above, the Deloitte guide:
Business Combinations and Changes in Ownership Interests calls this ‘crossing an accounting
boundary’ but in this case the investment is being reduced, rather than increased as in sections 9.1
and 9.2 above.
On disposal of a controlling interest, any retained shareholding (an associate or trade investment) is
measured at fair value on the date that control is lost. This fair value is used in the calculation of the
gain or loss on disposal, and also becomes the carrying amount for subsequent accounting for the
retained shareholding.
If the 50% boundary is not crossed, as when the shareholding in a subsidiary is reduced, but control
is still retained, the event is treated as a transaction between owners and no gain or loss is
recognised.
Whenever you cross the 50% boundary, you revalue, and a gain or loss is reported in profit or loss
for the year. If you do not cross the 50% boundary, no gain or loss is reported; instead there is an
adjustment to the parent’s equity.
The following diagram, adapted from the Deloitte guide, may help you visualise the boundary:
Figure 20.3: Transactions that require remeasurement of a retained interest
IFRS 9 IAS 28/IFRS 11 IFRS 10
Loss of control but

retaining financial asset
Loss of control but
10%
retaining an associate
40% or joint venture
Loss of significant
10% influence or joint control
but retaining a financial asset
0% 20% 50% 100%
Passive Significant Control
influence/
joint control
The situation where a shareholding in a subsidiary is reduced from, say, 80% to 60% – that is, where
control is retained – does not involve crossing that all-important 50% threshold.
10.2 Disposal of a whole subsidiary or associate – revision

10.2.1 Parent company’s accounts
In the parent‘s individual financial statements the profit or loss on disposal of a subsidiary or
associate holding will be calculated as:
£
Sales proceeds X
Less carrying amount (cost in P’s own statement of financial position) (X)
Profit (loss) on disposal X/(X)
HB2021
10.2.2 Group accounts – disposal of subsidiary
Gain or loss on disposal
In the group financial statements the profit or loss on disposal will be calculated as:
£ £
Proceeds X
Less: amounts recognised before disposal:
net assets of subsidiary X
goodwill X
non-controlling interest (X)
(X)
Profit/loss X/(X)
Remember:
(a) If the disposal is mid year:
(1) a working will be required to calculate both net assets and the non-controlling interest at the
disposal date; and
(2) any dividends declared or paid in the year of disposal and before the disposal date must be
deducted from the net assets of the subsidiary if they have not already been accounted for.
(b) Goodwill recognised before disposal is original goodwill arising less any impairments to date.
Worked example: Group gain or loss on disposal

Kingdom acquired 80% of Westville on 1 January 20X5 for £280,000 when Westville had share
capital of £100,000 and retained earnings of £188,000. On this date the fair value of the non-
controlling interest was £67,000. Kingdom’s policy is to value the non-controlling interest using the
fair value (ie, full goodwill) method. Goodwill has suffered no impairment since acquisition.
On 30 June 20X8, Kingdom disposed of its investment in Westville, raising proceeds of £350,000.
The following are extracts from the accounts of Westville for the year ended 31 December 20X8:
£’000
Retained earnings b/f 215
A final dividend for 20X7 of £10,000 was paid on 14 March 20X8. This has not yet been accounted
for.
Requirement
What profit or loss on disposal of Westville is reported in the Kingdom group accounts for the year
Solution
Profit on disposal
£ £
Proceeds 350,000
Less amounts recognised before disposal
Net assets of Westville (£100,000 + £215,000 + (1/2 × £24,000) –
£10,000) 317,000
Goodwill (£280,000 + £67,000) – (£100,000 + £188,000) 59,000
HB2021

£ £
NCI at disposal
Share of net assets (20% × £317,000) (63,400)
Goodwill on acquisition (£67,000 – (20% × £288,000)) (9,400)
(303,200)
Profit on disposal 46,800
Consolidated statement of financial position

The statement of financial position does not include the subsidiary disposed of, as it is no longer
controlled at the reporting date.
Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
• The time-apportioned results of the subsidiary should be consolidated up to the date of disposal.
• The non-controlling interest must be time apportioned.
• The gain or loss on disposal forms part of the profit or loss for the year.
IFRS 5 discontinued operations
If the sale represents a discontinued operation per IFRS 5 the consolidated statement of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income will reflect, as one figure, ‘Profit for the period from discontinued
operations’, being the group profit on disposal plus the subsidiary’s profit for the year to disposal.
10.2.3 Group accounts – disposal of associate

In the consolidated financial statements the profit or loss on disposal should be calculated as:
£ £
Proceeds X
Less: cost of investment X
share of post-acquisition profits retained by associate at disposal X
impairment of investment to date (X)
(X)
Profit/(loss) X/(X)
The other effects of disposal are also similar to those of the disposal of a subsidiary:
• There is no holding in the associate at the end of the reporting period, so there is no investment
to recognise in the consolidated statement of financial position.
• The associate’s after-tax earnings should be included in consolidated profit or loss up to the date
of disposal.
10.3 Part disposal from a subsidiary holding

10.3.1 Subsidiary to subsidiary
Shares may be disposed of such that a subsidiary holding is still retained eg, a 90% holding is
reduced to a 70% holding.
In this case there is no loss of control and therefore:
• no gain or loss on disposal is calculated;
• no adjustment is made to the carrying value of goodwill; and
• the difference between the proceeds received and the change in the non-controlling interest is
accounted for in shareholders’ equity.
• Consolidate as normal with the NCI calculated by reference to the year-end shareholding.
HB2021
• Calculate goodwill as at the original acquisition date.
• Record the difference between NCI and proceeds in shareholders’ equity as above.
• Consolidate the subsidiary’s results for the whole year.
• Calculate the NCI on a pro rata basis.
Worked example: Part disposal (subsidiary to subsidiary)

Express acquired 90% of Billings in 20X2 when Billings had retained earnings of £250,000. Goodwill
was calculated as £45,000 using the proportion of net assets method to value the non-controlling
interest. Goodwill has been impaired by £5,000 since acquisition.
At 31 December 20X8 the abbreviated statements of financial position of the two entities were as
follows:
Express Billings
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets 2,300 430
Investments 360 –
Current assets 1,750 220
4,410 650
Share capital 1,000 100
Retained earnings b/f 1,190 304
Profit for the year 120 36
Liabilities 2,100 210
4,410 650
Express disposed of a 10% holding in Billings on 31 August 20X8 for £70,000; this has not yet been
recorded in Express’s individual accounts.
Requirement
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X8.
Solution
Express Group statement of financial position at 31 December 20X8
£’000
Non-current assets (£2,300,000 + £430,000) 2,730
Goodwill (£45,000 – £5,000) 40
Current assets (£1,750,000 + £220,000 + proceeds £70,000) 2,040
4,810
Share capital 1,000
Non-controlling interest 20% × (£650,000 – £210,000) 88
Liabilities (£2,100,000 + £210,000) 2,310
4,810
HB2021

WORKINGS
£’000
Retained earnings of Express (£1,190,000 + £120,000) 1,310.0
Retained earnings of Billings
Acquisition – 31 Aug 20X8 90% × (£304,000 + (8/12 × £36,000) –
£250,000) 70.2
31 Aug 20X8 – 31 Dec 20X8 (80% × 4/12 × £36,000) 9.6
Impairment of goodwill (5.0)
NCI adjustment on disposal (W2) 27.2
1,412.0
(2) NCI adjustment on disposal
£’000
NCI in Billings at disposal:
NCI at acquisition (10% × (100 + 250)) 35.0
Share of post acqn. reserves (Working 3) 7.8
42.8
Increase 10%/10% 42.8
NCI after disposal: 20% 85.6
At disposal date:
NCI based on old shareholding (10% × £428,000) 42.8
NCI based on new shareholding (20% × £428,000) 85.6
Adjustment required 42.8
DEBIT Proceeds £70,000

CREDIT NCI £42,800
CREDIT Shareholders’ equity (to Working 1) £27,200
(3) NCI share of post acqn. retained earnings
£’000
Retained earnings b/f (£304,000 – £250,000) 54.0
Profit to disposal (£36,000 × 8/12) 24.0
78.0
NCI share 10% 7.8
10.3.2 Subsidiary to associate

Shares may be disposed of such that an associate holding is still retained, eg, a 90% holding is
reduced to a 30% holding.
HB2021
In this case there is a loss of control, and so a gain or loss on disposal is calculated as:
£ £
Proceeds X
Fair value of interest retained X
X
Less net assets of subsidiary recognised before disposal:
Net assets X
Goodwill X
Non-controlling interest (X)
(X)
Profit/loss X/(X)
Worked example: Part disposal (subsidiary to associate)

Allister Group acquired a 75% holding in Brown in 20X0, which it held until 31 December 20X8 when
two-thirds of the investment were sold for £490,000.
At this date the net assets of Brown were £800,000, goodwill arising on acquisition had been fully
impaired and the fair value of a 25% interest in Brown was £220,000.
The non-controlling interest is valued using the proportion of net assets method.
Requirement
What gain or loss arises on the disposal in the Allister Group accounts in the year ended 31
December 20X8?
Solution
Disposal
£ £
Proceeds 490,000
Fair value of 25% interest retained 220,000
710,000
Less amounts recognised before disposal:
Net assets of Brown 800,000
Goodwill (fully impaired) –
NCI at disposal (25% × £800,000) (200,000)
(600,000)
Gain on disposal 110,000
Note: The disposal triggers remeasurement of the residual interest to fair value. The gain on disposal
could be analysed as:
Realised gain £ £
Proceeds on disposal 490,000
Interest disposed of (50% × £800,000) (400,000)
HB2021

Realised gain £ £
90,000
Holding gain
Retained interest at fair value 220,000
Retained interest at carrying value (25% × £800,000) (200,000)
20,000
Total gain 110,000
The retained 25% interest in Brown is included in the consolidated statement of financial position at
31 December 20X8 at the fair value of £220,000.

• Equity account by reference to the year-end holding. The carrying value of the associate is based
on the fair value of the interest as included within the gain calculation.
• Consolidate results up to the date of disposal based on the pre-disposal holding
• Equity account for results after the date of disposal based on the post-disposal holding
• Include gain or loss on disposal as calculated above
Reclassification of other comprehensive income
At the date of disposal, amounts recognised in other comprehensive income in relation to the
subsidiary should be accounted for in the same way as if the parent company had directly disposed
of the assets that they relate to, for example, if the subsidiary holds revalued assets, the revaluation
surplus previously recognised in consolidated other comprehensive income should be transferred to
group retained earnings.
10.3.3 Subsidiary to investment

Shares may be disposed of such that an investment is still retained eg, a 90% holding is reduced to a
10% holding.
The gain or loss on disposal is calculated as described in section 10.3.2. Therefore at the point of
disposal, the retained interest is measured at fair value.
• The interest retained is initially recorded at fair value (as included within the gain calculation).
• Consolidate results up to the date of disposal based on the pre-disposal holding
• Include dividend income after the date of disposal
Reclassification of other comprehensive income
Upon loss of control, other comprehensive income recorded in relation to the subsidiary should
again be accounted for in the same way as if the parent company had directly disposed of the assets
that it relates to.
10.4 Part disposal from an associate holding

10.4.1 Associate to investment
Shares may be disposed of such that an investment is still retained eg, a 40% holding is reduced to a
10% holding.
HB2021
In this case there is a loss of significant influence, and a gain or loss on disposal is calculated as:
£ £
Proceeds X
Fair value of interest retained X
X
Less: Cost of investment X
Share of post-acquisition profits retained by associate at disposal X
Impairment of investment to date (X)
(X)
Profit/(loss) X/(X)

The interest retained is initially recorded at fair value (as included within the gain calculation).
• Equity account for results up to the date of disposal based on the pre-disposal holding
• Include dividend income after the date of disposal
Interactive question 8: All types of disposal

Streatham Co bought 80% of the share capital of Balham Co for £324,000 on 1 October 20X5. At
that date Balham Co’s retained earnings balance stood at £180,000. The statements of financial
position at 30 September 20X8 and the summarised statements of profit or loss for the year to that
date are given below:
Streatham Co Balham Co
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets 360 270
Investment in Balham Co 324 –
Current assets 370 370
1,054 640
Equity
Ordinary shares 540 180
Reserves 414 360
Current liabilities 100 100
1,054 640
Tax (45) (36)
No entries have been made in the accounts for any of the following transactions.
Assume that profits accrue evenly throughout the year.
It is the group’s policy to value the non-controlling interests at its proportionate share of the fair value
of the subsidiary’s identifiable net assets.
HB2021

Ignore tax on the disposal.
Requirements
8.1 Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position and statement of profit or loss at 30
September 20X8 in each of the following circumstances. (Assume no impairment of goodwill.)
(a) Streatham Co sells its entire holding in Balham Co for £650,000 on 30 September 20X8.
(b) Streatham Co sells one-quarter of its holding in Balham Co for £160,000 on 30 September
20X8.
8.2 In the following circumstances you are required to calculate the gain on disposal, group
retained earnings and carrying value of the retained investment at 30 September 20X8.
(a) Streatham Co sells one-half of its holding in Balham Co for £340,000 on 30 June 20X8, and
the remaining holding (fair value £250,000) is to be dealt with as an associate.
(b) Streatham Co sells one-half of its holding in Balham Co for £340,000 on 30 June 20X8, and
the remaining holding (fair value £250,000) is to be dealt with as a financial asset at fair
value through other comprehensive income.

Section overview
• The consolidated statement of cash flows shows the impact of the acquisition and disposal of
subsidiaries and associates.
• Exchange differences arising on the translation of the foreign currency accounts of group
companies will also impact the consolidated statement of cash flows. This is covered in more
detail in Chapter 21.
• Both single company and consolidated statements of cash flow were covered at Professional
Level. Single company statements were revised in Chapter 14 of this Workbook. In this chapter we
summarise the main points and provide two interactive questions and two comprehensive self-
test questions. Please look back to your earlier study material if you have any major problems with
these.
11.1 Consolidated statements of cash flows – revision

You should remember from your Professional Level studies that the consolidated statement of cash
flows is put together from the consolidated financial statements themselves. Additional figures over
and above a single company statement of cash flows will be as follows:
• Dividends paid to the non-controlling interest
• Dividend received from associates and joint ventures
• Acquisitions/disposals of subsidiaries
• Acquisitions/disposals of associates and joint ventures
11.1.1 Cash flows to the non-controlling interest

The non-controlling interest represents a third party so dividends paid to the non-controlling interest
are reflected as a cash outflow. This payment should be presented separately and classified as ‘Cash
flows from financing activities‘.
HB2021
Dividends paid to the non-controlling interest may be calculated using a T-account as follows:
NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST
£ £
b/f NCI (CSFP) X
NCI (CIS) X
NCI dividend paid (balancing
figure) X
c/f NCI (CSFP) X ––
X X
11.1.2 Associates and joint ventures

There are two issues to consider with regard to the associate/joint venture. (Note that joint ventures
are treated like associates in that they are equity accounted, so the points below apply to both.)
(a) The aim of the statement of cash flows is to show the cash flows of the parent and any
subsidiaries with third parties, therefore any cash flows between the associate and third parties
are irrelevant. As a result, the group share of profit of the associate must be deducted as an
adjustment in the reconciliation of profit before tax to cash generated from operations. This is
because group profit before tax includes the results of the associate.
(b) Dividends received from the associate must be disclosed as a separate cash flow classified as
‘Cash flows from investing activities’. The cash receipt can be calculated as follows:
INVESTMENTS IN ASSOCIATES
£ £
b/f Investment in Associate
(CSFP) X
Dividend received (balancing
Share of profit of Associate (CIS) X figure) X
c/f Investment in Associate
–– (CSFP) X
X X
11.1.3 Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries

If a subsidiary is acquired or disposed of during the accounting period the net cash effect of the
purchase or sale transaction should be shown separately under ‘Cash flows from investing
activities’. The net cash effect will be the cash purchase price/cash disposal proceeds net of any cash
or cash equivalents acquired or disposed of.
As the cash effect of the acquisition/disposal of the subsidiary is dealt with in a single line item as we
saw above, care must be taken not to double count the effects of the acquisition/disposal when
looking at the movements in individual asset balances.
Each of the individual assets and liabilities of a subsidiary acquired/disposed of during the period
must be excluded when comparing group statements of financial position for cash flow calculations
as follows:
Subsidiary acquired in the period Subtract PPE, inventories, payables, receivables etc, at
the date of acquisition from the movement on these
items.
Subsidiary disposed of in the period Add PPE, inventories, payables, receivables etc, at the
date of disposal to the movements on these items.
HB2021

This would also affect the calculation of the dividend paid to the non-controlling interest. The T-
account working is modified as follows:
NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST
£ £
NCI in Subsidiary at disposal X b/f NCI (CSFP) X
NCI dividend paid (balancing
figure) X NCI in Subsidiary at acquisition X
c/f NCI (CSFP) X NCI (CIS) X
X X
11.1.4 Acquisitions and disposals of associates

If an associate is acquired or disposed of during the accounting period the payment or receipt of
cash is classified as investing activities.
Interactive question 9: Acquisition of a subsidiary

On 1 October 20X8 Pippa plc acquired 90% of S Ltd by issuing 100,000 shares at an agreed value of
£2 per share and paying £100,000 in cash.
At that time the net assets of S Ltd were as follows:
£’000
Property, plant and equipment 190
Inventories 70
Trade receivables 30
Cash and cash equivalents 10
Trade payables (40)
260
The consolidated statements of financial position of Pippa plc as at 31 December were as follows:
20X8 20X7
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets
Goodwill 66 ––––––
2,566 2,300
Current assets
Inventories 1,450 1,200
Trade receivables 1,370 1,100
Cash and cash equivalents 76 50
2,896 2,350
5,462 4,650
Ordinary share capital (£1 shares) 1,150 1,000
Share premium account 650 500
HB2021
20X8 20X7
£’000 £’000
Retained earnings 1,791 1,530
3,591 3,030
Non-controlling interest 31 ––––––
Total equity 3,622 3,030
Current liabilities
Income tax payable 150 100
1,840 1,620
5,462 4,650
The consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X8 was as follows:
£’000
Revenue 10,000
Gross profit 2,500
Administrative expenses (2,080)
Owners of Pippa plc 261
Non-controlling interest 9
270
The statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 20X8 (extract) was as follows:
Retained
earnings
£’000
Balance at 31 December 20X7 1,530
Total comprehensive income for the year 261
Balance at 31 December 20X8 1,791
You are also given the following information:

(1) All other subsidiaries are wholly owned.
(2) Depreciation charged to the consolidated statement of profit or loss amounted to £210,000.
(3) There were no disposals of property, plant and equipment during the year.
(4) Goodwill is not impaired.
(5) Non-controlling interest is valued on the proportionate basis.
HB2021

Requirement
Prepare a consolidated statement of cash flows for Pippa plc for the year ended 31 December 20X8
under the indirect method in accordance with IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows. The only notes
required are those reconciling profit before tax to cash generated from operations and a note
showing the effect of the subsidiary acquired in the period.
Interactive question 10: Disposal

Below is the consolidated statement of financial position of the Caitlin Group as at 30 June 20X8 and
the consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended on that date:
Consolidated statement of financial position as at 30 June
20X8 20X7
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets
Current assets
Inventories 736 535
Receivables 605 417
1,635 1,190
5,702 5,140
Share capital 1,000 1,000
4,637 4,118
Non-controlling interest 482 512
Total equity 5,119 4,630
Current liabilities
Income tax payable 203 102
583 510
5,702 5,140
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30 June 20X8 (summarised)
£’000
Continuing operations
Profit for the year from continuing operations 572
HB2021
£’000
Discontinued operations
Profit for the year from discontinued operations 50
Owners of Caitlin plc 519
622
You are given the following information:

(1) Caitlin plc sold its entire interest in Desdemona Ltd on 31 March 20X8 for cash of £400,000.
Caitlin plc had acquired an 80% interest in Desdemona Ltd on incorporation several years ago. The
net assets at the date of disposal were:
£’000
Inventories 50
Receivables 39
Trade payables (42)
457
(2) The profit for the period from discontinued operations figure is made up as follows:
£’000
Profit on disposal 34
50
(3) The depreciation charge for the year was £800,000.

There were no disposals of non-current assets other than on the disposal of the subsidiary.
Requirements
With regard to the consolidated statement of cash flows for the year ended 30 June 20X8:
(a) Show how the disposal will be reflected in the statement of cash flows.
(b) Calculate additions to property, plant and equipment as they will be reflected in the statement of
cash flows.
(c) Calculate dividends paid to the non-controlling interest.
(d) Prepare the note to the statement of cash flows required for the disposal of the subsidiary.
(e) Prepare the reconciliation of profit before tax to cash generated from operations.
Note: Work to the nearest £’000.
HB2021

12 Audit focus: group audits
Section overview
• The group auditor has sole responsibility for the audit opinion on the group financial statements.
• The component auditors should co-operate with the group auditors. In some cases this will be a
legal duty.
• The group auditor will need to assess the extent to which the work of the component auditors can
be relied on.
• Specific audit procedures will be performed on the consolidation process.
• Where a group includes a foreign subsidiary, compliance with relevant accounting standards will
need to be considered.
12.1 Introduction
Many of the basic principles applied in the audit of a group are much the same as the audit of a
single company. However, there are a number of significant additional considerations.
The first area to consider is the use of another auditor. Often, one or more subsidiaries in the group
will be audited by a different audit firm. Evaluating whether the component auditor’s work can be
relied on, and communicating effectively with the component auditor, therefore become important.
Another of the key issues will be the impact of the group structure on the risk assessment, including
the process by which the existing structure has been achieved eg, acquisition and MBO, and/or
changes to that structure. In many cases, the risk issues will be related to the accounting treatments
adopted.
12.2 Acceptance as group auditors

ISA (UK) 600 (Revised November 2019), Special Considerations – Audits of Group Financial
Statements (Including the Work of Component Auditors) is the relevant standard.
ISA 600.12 states that the auditor must consider whether “sufficient appropriate audit evidence can
reasonably be expected to be obtained in relation to the consolidation process and the financial
information of the components on which to base the group audit opinion”. For this purpose, the
group engagement partner must obtain an understanding of the group. This may be obtained from
the following sources.
In the case of a new engagement:
• Information provided by group management
• Communication with group management
• Where applicable, communication with the previous group engagement team, component
manager or component auditors
Other matters to consider will include the following:
• The group structure
• Components’ business activities including the industry and regulatory, economic and political
environments in which those activities take place
• The use of service organisations
• A description of group-wide controls
• The complexity of the consolidation process
• Whether component auditors that are not from the group engagement partner’s firm will perform
work on the financial information of any of the components and group management’s rationale
for appointing more than one auditor
• Whether the group engagement team will have unrestricted access to those charged with
governance of the group, group management, those charged with governance of the
component, component management, component information and the component auditors
(including relevant audit documentation sought by the group engagement team)
HB2021
• Whether the group engagement team will be able to perform necessary work on the financial
information of the components
(ISA 600.A10–.A11)
In the case of continuing engagements, the group engagement team’s ability to obtain sufficient
appropriate audit evidence may be affected by significant changes, for example changes in group
structure, changes to group-wide controls or the applicable financial reporting framework, changes
in business activities and concerns regarding the integrity and competence of group or component
management.
(ISA 600.A12)
Where components within the group are likely to be significant components the group engagement
partner evaluates the extent to which the group engagement team will be able to be involved in the
work of those component auditors.
The group engagement partner must either refuse to accept, or resign from, the engagement if he
concludes that it will not be possible to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence.
(ISA 600.12-.13)
Note: In addition to these points, the prospective group auditor should consider the general points
relating to acceptance of appointment which you have covered in your earlier studies.
12.3 Using the work of another auditor

We have identified the fact that entities within the group may be audited by different auditors as a
risk factor. Guidance on this aspect of the group audit is provided in ISA (UK) 600 (Revised).
Subsidiaries may be audited by firms other than the parent company auditor, meaning that the
parent company auditor will have to express an opinion on financial information, some of which has
been audited by another party. ISA (UK) 600 (Revised) addresses this issue in particular and is
summarised below.
12.3.1 Responsibility of group auditors
Definitions
Group audit: The audit of the group financial statements.
Group engagement partner: The partner or other person in the firm who is responsible for the group
audit engagement and its performance and for the auditor’s report on the group financial statements
that is issued on behalf of the firm.
Group engagement team: Partners, including the group engagement partner, and staff who
establish the overall group audit strategy, communicate with component auditors, perform work on
the consolidation process, and evaluate the conclusions drawn from the audit evidence as the basis
for forming an opinion on the group financial statements.
Component auditor: An auditor who, at the request of the group engagement team, performs work
on financial information related to a component for the group audit.
Component: An entity or business activity for which the group or component management prepares
financial information that should be included in the group financial statements.
Component materiality: The materiality for a component determined by the group engagement
team.
Significant component: A component identified by the group engagement team: (a) that is of
individual significance to the group, or (b) that, due to its specific nature or circumstances, is likely to
include significant risks of material misstatement of the group financial statements.
(ISA 600.9)
The duty of the group auditors is to report on the group accounts, which includes balances and
transactions of all the components of the group.
In the UK (and in most jurisdictions), the group auditors have sole responsibility for this opinion even
where the group financial statements include amounts derived from accounts which have not been
audited by them. ISA (UK) 600 (Revised) explains that even where an auditor is required by law or
regulation to refer to the component auditors in the auditor’s report on the group financial
HB2021

statements, the report must indicate that the reference does not diminish the group engagement
partner’s or the firm’s responsibility for the group audit opinion. As a result, they cannot discharge
their responsibility to report on the group financial statements by an unquestioning acceptance of
component companies’ financial statements, whether audited or not.
(ISA 600.11)
Note: In the UK for audits of group financial statements of PIEs the group engagement partner is also
responsible for the additional report to the audit committee as required by ISA (UK) 260 (Revised)
(ISA 600.49-1).
12.3.2 Rights of group auditors

The group auditors of a parent company incorporated in the UK have the following rights:
• The right to require the information and explanations they require from auditors of subsidiaries
also incorporated in the UK
• The right to require the parent company to take all reasonable steps to obtain reasonable
information and explanations from foreign subsidiaries
In the UK, these rights are contained in the Companies Act 2006, although the principle of co-
operation is also addressed in ISA (UK) 600 (Revised) by para.19-1 which states that “The group
engagement team shall request the agreement of the component auditor to the transfer of relevant
documentation during the conduct of the group audit, a condition of the use by the group
engagement team of the work of the component auditor”. We will consider the wider issue of co-
operation in the remainder of this section.
Note: The group auditors also have all the statutory rights and powers in respect of their audit of the
parent company that you should be familiar with from your earlier studies (for example, right of
access at all times to the parent company’s books, accounts and vouchers).
12.4 Planning and risk assessment as group auditor

The planning and risk assessment process will need to take into account the fact that all elements of
the group financial statements are not audited by the group auditor directly. The group auditor will
not be able to simply rely on the conclusions of the component auditor. ISA (UK) 600 (Revised)
requires the group auditor to evaluate the reliability of the component auditor and the work
performed. This will then determine the extent of further procedures.
Understanding the component auditor
This involves an assessment of the following:
(a) Whether the component auditor understands and will comply with the ethical requirements that
are relevant to the group audit and, in particular, is independent
(b) The component auditor’s professional competence
(c) Whether the group engagement team will be able to be involvedin the work of the component
auditor to the extent necessary to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence
(d) Whether the component auditor operates in a regulatory environment that actively oversees
auditors
(ISA 600.19)
The group engagement team’s understanding of the component auditor’s professional competence
may include considering whether the component auditor:
• possesses an understanding of auditing and other standards applicable to the group audit;
• in the UK, has sufficient resources to perform the work;
• possesses the special skills necessary to perform the work; and
• where relevant, possesses an understanding of the applicable financial reporting framework.
(ISA 600.A38)
The group engagement team may obtain this understanding in a number of ways. In the first year, for
example, the component auditor may be visited to discuss these issues. Alternatively, the component
auditor may be asked to confirm these matters in writing or to complete a questionnaire.
Confirmations from professional bodies may also be sought and the reputation of the firm will be
taken into account.
HB2021
Materiality
The group auditor is responsible for setting the materiality level for the group financial statements as
a whole. Materiality levels should also be set for components which are individually significant. These
should be set at a lower level than the materiality level of the group as a whole.
(ISA 600.21)
Extent of work required on components
The ISA distinguishes between significant components and other components which are not
individually significant to the group financial statements.
The group auditor should be involved in the assessment of risk in relation to significant components.
If a component is financially significant to the group financial statements then the group engagement
team or a component auditor will perform a full audit based on the component materiality level.
If the component is likely to include significant risks of material misstatement of the group financial
statements due to its nature or circumstances, the group auditors will require one of the following:
• A full audit using component materiality
• An audit of specified account balances related to identified significant risks
• Specified audit procedures relating to identified significant risks
(ISA 600.27)
Components that are not significant components will be subject to analytical review at a group level.
(ISA 600.28)
If the group engagement team does not consider that sufficient appropriate audit evidence on which
to base the group audit opinion will be obtained from the work performed on significant
components, on group-wide controls and the consolidation process and the analytical procedures
performed at group level, then some components that are not significant components will be
selected and one or more of the following will be performed (either by the group auditor or the
component auditor):
• An audit using component materiality
• An audit of one or more account balances, classes of transactions or disclosures
• A review using component materiality
• Specified procedures
(ISA 600.29)
Involvement in the work of a component auditor
The extent of involvement by the group auditor at the planning stage will depend on the:
• significance of the component;
• identified significant risks of material misstatement of the group financial statements; and
• group auditor’s understanding of the component auditor.
Based on these factors the group auditors may perform the following procedures:
(a) Meeting with the component management or the component auditors to obtain an
understanding of the component and its environment
(b) Reviewing the component auditor’s overall audit strategy and audit plan
(c) Performing risk assessment procedures to identify and assess risks of material misstatement at
the component level. These may be performed with the component auditor or by the group
auditor
Where the component is a significant component the nature, timing and extent of the group
auditor’s involvement is affected by their understanding of the component auditor but at a minimum
should include the following procedures:
(a) Discussion with the component auditor or component management regarding the component’s
business activities that are significant to the group
(b) Discussing with the component auditor the susceptibility of the component to material
misstatement of the financial information due to fraud or error
HB2021

(c) Reviewing the component auditor’s documentation of identified significant risks of material
misstatements. This may be in the form of a memorandum including the conclusions drawn by
the component auditors
(ISA 600.30)
12.4.1 Evaluating the work of the component auditor

For all companies in the group, the group auditor is required to perform a review of the work done
by the component auditor (ISA 600.42-1). This is normally achieved by reviewing a report or
questionnaire completed by the component auditor which highlights the key issues which have been
identified during the course of the audit. The effect of any uncorrected misstatements and any
instances where there has been an inability to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence should
also be evaluated. On the basis of this review the group auditor then needs to determine whether
any additional procedures are necessary. These may include the following:
• Designing and performing further audit procedures. These may be designed and performed with
the component auditors, or by the group auditor
• Participating in the closing and other key meetings between the component auditors and
component management
• Reviewing other relevant parts of the component auditors’ documentation
12.4.2 Communication
The group engagement team shall communicate its requirements to the component auditor on a
timely basis (ISA 600.40).
ISA (UK) 600 (Revised) prescribes the types of information that must be sent by the group auditor to
the component auditor and vice versa.
The group auditor must set out for the component auditor the work to be performed, the use to be
made of that work and the form and content of the component auditor’s communication with the
group engagement team. According to paras: A40 and A41 of ISA (UK) 600 (Revised) this includes
the following:
• A request that the component auditor confirms their co-operation with the group engagement
team.
• The ethical requirements that are relevant to the group audit and in particular independence
requirements.
• In the case of an audit or review of the financial information of the component, component
materiality and the threshold above which misstatements cannot be regarded as clearly trivial to
the group financial statements.
• Identified significant risks of material misstatement of the group financial statements, due to fraud
or error that are relevant to the work of the component auditor. The group engagement team
requests the component auditor to communicate any other identified significant risks of material
misstatement and the component auditor’s responses to such risks.
• A list of related parties prepared by group management and any other related parties of which
the group engagement team is aware. Component auditors are requested to communicate any
other related parties not previously identified.
In addition to the above, the group auditor must ask the component auditor to communicate matters
relevant to the group engagement team’s conclusion with regard to the group audit. These include
the following:
(a) Whether the component auditor has complied with ethical requirements that are relevant to the
group audit, including independence and professional competence
(b) Whether the component auditor has complied with the group engagement team’s requirements
(c) Identification of the financial information of the component on which the component auditor is
reporting
(d) Information on instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations that could give rise to
material misstatement of the group financial statements
(e) A list of uncorrected misstatements of the financial information of the component (the list need
not include items that are below the threshold for clearly trivial misstatements)
(f) Indicators of possible management bias
HB2021
(g) Description of any identified significant deficiencies in internal control at the component level
(h) Other significant matters that the component auditor communicated or expects to communicate
to those charged with governance of the component, including fraud or suspected fraud
involving component management, employees who have significant roles in internal control at
the component level or others where the fraud resulted in a material misstatement of the
financial information of the component
(i) Any other matters that may be relevant to the group audit or that the component auditor wishes
to draw to the attention of the group engagement team, including exceptions noted in the
written representations that the component auditor requested from component management
(j) The component auditor’s overall finding, conclusions or opinion
This communication often takes the form of a memorandum or report of work performed.
12.4.3 Communicating with group management and those charged with governance
ISA (UK) 600 (Revised) states that the group engagement team will determine which of the identified
deficiencies in internal control should be communicated to those charged with governance and
group management. In making this assessment the following matters should be considered.
• Significant deficiencies in the design or operating effectiveness of group-wide controls
• Deficiencies that the group engagement team has identified in internal controls at components
that are judged to be significant to the group
• Deficiencies that component auditors have identified in internal controls at components that are
judged to be significant to the group
• Fraud identified by the group engagement team or component auditors or information indicating
that a fraud may exist
(ISA 600.46-.47)
Where a component auditor is required to express an audit opinion on the financial statements of a
component, the group engagement team will request group management to inform component
management of any matters that they, the group engagement team, have become aware of that may
be significant to the financial statements of the component. If group management refuses to pass on
the communication, the group engagement team will discuss the matter with those charged with
governance of the group. If the matter is still unresolved the group engagement team shall consider
whether to advise the component auditor not to issue the audit report on the component financial
statements until the matter is resolved.
(ISA 600.48)
12.4.4 Communication with those charged with governance of the group

The following matters should be communicated to those charged with governance of the group:
(a) An overview of the type of work to be performed on the financial statements of the component
(b) An overview of the nature of the group engagement team’s planned involvement in the work to
be performed by the component auditors on significant components
(c) Instances where the group engagement team’s evaluation of the work of a component auditor
gave rise to a concern about the quality of that auditor’s work
(d) Any limitations on the group audit, for example, where the group engagement team’s access to
information may have been restricted
(e) Fraud or suspected fraud involving group management, component management, employees
who have significant roles in group-wide controls or others where fraud resulted in a material
misstatement of the group financial statements
(ISA 600.49)
12.4.5 Documentation
The group engagement team must include in the audit documentation the following matters:
• An analysis of components, indicating those that are significant
• The nature, timing and extent of the group engagement team’s involvement in the work
performed by the component auditors on significant components including, where applicable,
the group engagement team’s review of the component auditor’s audit documentation
HB2021

• Written communications between the group engagement team and the component auditors
about the group engagement team’s requirements
In the UK, the Companies Act 2006 requires group auditors to review the audit work conducted by
other persons and to record that review. This requirement is now also specifically addressed in the
revised ISA.
(ISA 600.50)
Interactive question 11: Component auditors

You are the main auditor of Mouldings Holdings, a listed company, which has subsidiaries in the UK
and overseas, many of which are audited by other firms. All subsidiaries are involved in the
manufacture or distribution of plastic goods and have accounting periods coterminous with that of
the parent company.
Requirements
11.1 State why you would wish to review the work of the auditors of the subsidiaries not audited by
you.
11.2 Describe the key audit procedures you would carry out in performing such a review.
12.5 Risk assessment procedures

12.5.1 General accounting issues
Consolidated financial statements give rise to additional audit risks:
• Are consolidated group accounts correctly prepared?
• Where there have been any disposals of material business segments, have the requirements of
IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations been satisfied?
• Have adequate disclosures of significant investments and financing been made?
• Where there have been acquisitions during the year, have new assets and liabilities been
correctly brought into the financial statements?
• Where there have been acquisitions during the year, has purchase consideration been correctly
accounted for and disclosed?
• Have foreign taxes (including corporate tax, income taxes for employees and capital gains tax)
been accounted for correctly?
• Have transfer pricing issues around intercompany transactions, and their VAT impact, been
considered?
12.5.2 Acquisition
Acquisitions can take many forms. The type of acquisition (eg, hostile, friendly) and future
management of the subsidiary (fully integrated, autonomous) will also impact on risk.
Risk areas Key issues
Valuation of assets and liabilities These should be valued at fair value at the date
of acquisition in accordance with IFRS 13.
Valuation of consideration This should be at fair value and will include any
contingent consideration. Any deferred
consideration should be discounted.
Goodwill This must be calculated and accounted for in

Date of control The results of any subsidiary should only be

accounted for from the date of acquisition.
HB2021
Risk areas Key issues
Level of control or influence This will determine the nature of the investment
and its subsequent treatment in the group
financial statements eg, subsidiary, associate and
should be determined in accordance with IFRS
10/IAS 28 (IFRS 10 retains control as the key
concept underlying the parent/subsidiary
relationship but has broadened the definition
and clarified the application).
Accounting policies/reporting periods Accounting policies and reporting periods must

be consistent across the group.
Consolidation adjustments The group must have systems which enable the
identification of intra-group balances and
accounts.
Adequacy of provisions in the target While the acquirer is likely to know its plans,
company other provisions may be necessary within the
acquired entity.
If such provisions are currently unrecognised and
have never been recorded (eg, in board minutes),
there is a clear risk that the acquiring entity will
overpay.
Use of provisions to manipulate post- Provisions may be recognised at the point of

acquisition profits acquisition and then released at some point in
the future in order to make post-change results
appear impressive. This may imply that change
was a correct business decision. The use of such
provisions has been reduced by IAS 37.
12.5.3 Divestment and withdrawal

The withdrawal from a market will give rise to several audit issues:
Obsolete inventory
Inventory which is no longer required will need to be written down. When carrying out the inventory
count, the auditor will need to ensure that all inventory relating to the discontinued activity is
identified. The following procedures should take place.
• Discussions with management concerning net realisable value of inventory
• Investigation of future costs relating to any modifications needed for the inventory
• Review of after-date sales to assess likelihood of sale and sale proceeds
Obsolete non-current assets
If an operation has been withdrawn from, rather than sold as, a business segment, it is likely that
some non-current assets such as plant and machinery and property will remain with the company.
The following will need to be considered.
(a) Net realisable value of non-current assets (review of post year end sales invoices/review of trade
magazines)
(b) Write-down of non-current assets to recoverable amount, surplus property to the market value
(c) Impairment reviews will need to be performed. This is likely to consider the remaining assets as
one cash generating unit; lack of future revenue from this unit is likely to result in the assets
being valued at their net realisable value (ie, fair value less costs of disposal) rather than their
value in use
HB2021

Disposal of investments
Disposal of a subsidiary, or other investment, will need to be accounted for in the group and parent
company financial statements.
The auditor will need to ascertain the date of disposal, through inspection of sale agreements, to
identify the correct period of allocation to the accounts.
(a) Parent company – The auditor will need to compare the sale proceeds (inspection of sale
agreements/bank receipts) with the carrying amount of the investment in the statement of
financial position to ensure that the correct profit or loss on disposal is accounted for.
(b) Group accounts – The auditor would need to ensure that the investment is not included in the
year-end statement of financial position (unless some shareholding remains). Amounts in the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income should be pro-rated for the number
of months held.
Chargeable gains and corporation tax
The disposal of a subsidiary or other investment is likely to have chargeable gains tax and
corporation tax implications. These include:
(a) Chargeable gains on disposal – Chargeable gains or losses will arise on the disposal of
subsidiaries or other investments. The auditor will need to discuss with management and inspect
the sale agreement, in order to understand which party will bear the tax liability arising from
chargeable gains. Where the tax liability falls on the seller, the chargeable gains tax calculations
must be reviewed, and the utilisation of losses or tax relief verified. This should be done by a tax
specialist if the matter is material.
(b) Degrouping charges – Degrouping charges will arise if any assets have previously been
transferred to the subsidiary being sold at no gain/no loss. If the amount is material, the
workings should be reviewed and recalculated.
(c) Intra-group balances – Existing loans and other outstanding balances with group companies
may be written off when subsidiaries are disposed of or liquidated. The availability of
corporation tax deductions on intercompany loan write-offs can be a complex issue and often
constitutes a material matter. The corporation tax calculations should therefore be reviewed by a
tax accounting specialist.
12.5.4 Joint arrangements

The example below illustrates some of the risk factors the auditor needs to consider in relation to
joint arrangements.
Worked example: Joint arrangements

The Royal Bank of Edinburgh (RBE) has entered into several joint arrangements:
(1) ”Ecost Personal Finance has made excellent progress since it was launched 18 months ago. To
date, it has acquired over 700,000 customers.
In a relatively short time, in partnership with Ecost, we have established a significant and
innovative new force in UK banking. We remain very optimistic about the prospects for Ecost
Personal Finance and our expectations remain that this business will move into profit in the near
future.
(2) We have also received an encouraging response to the Branson One Account through our
collaboration with Branson Direct Personal Financial Services.”
Requirement
Examine the risk factors associated with the Royal Bank of Edinburgh joint arrangements.
Solution
Costs
The set-up costs of the two ventures will need financing. Will this be done from the existing funds
within the companies, or will external finance be needed?
As RBE is a financial institution, is it providing the bulk of the finance with loan amount outstanding to
the other parties?
HB2021
How will the infrastructure be established? Who will pay for the website to be constructed and
maintained? What is the split of these costs?
What is the profit forecast for the first periods? Initial expenses are likely to exceed revenues,
therefore losses may be expected in the initial periods.
Accounting
RBE is already established in this market and is therefore likely to be providing the asset base to
support its activities. How are the assets valued in the joint venture accounts?
Is there any payment to be made to RBE for the knowledge and experience that it brings to the joint
arrangements?
What type of joint arrangement is it?
What is the agreement on profit sharing? The underlying elements will need to be audited and the
profit share recalculated. The tax liability arising from RBE’s share of the profits also needs to be
audited.
How long is the joint arrangement agreement for? This will help ascertain the correct write-off period
of assets.
If either of the joint arrangements is loss making, has consortium relief been assumed in RBE’s
accounts? Has this been correctly calculated?
Markets
The products are likely to be launched through the internet; this may expand the customer base of
the companies. E-business has its own specific set of risks; these are covered in the Business Strategy
section of Business Environment.
People
It is likely that there will be a combination of staff involved from each of the parties, plus some
additional staff new to both organisations. The cultural and operational impacts (as explained in the
main text) need to be considered.
Systems
If the arrangements described are joint ventures, a completely new set of systems will need to be
established. Risk will be increased due to the unfamiliarity of the staff with these systems.
Responsibility for control
If the entity is a limited company then the directors will be responsible for ensuring proper controls.
12.5.5 Management buy-outs

Whether it is a management buy-out (MBO), a management buy-in (MBI) or a combination of the two
(BIMBO), the most pressing risk is that one party is likely to have a comparative advantage on
detailed financial information. In this respect, the current management team of a business have a
major advantage over existing shareholders, interested investors/buyers and providers of finance.
For example, in an MBI where the outgoing management team own stakes in the entity, there is an
inherent danger of overstating the value of the organisation. In an MBO, it may work both ways, with
the MBO team looking for as low a price as possible, but also needing to convince outside providers
of finance to invest.
In a BIMBO, the situation becomes even more complicated, with the existing management team
looking to convince the additional management team that prospects are good in order to conclude
the deal, while knowing that once the deal is finalised the two groups will have to work in tandem.
In addition to the above issues, an existing management team may find its role changing from
manager to owner/manager, introducing new risks (conflict of interest, bias in preparing financial
information etc).
In any buy-out scenario, both historical and future financial information will play a key role.
Consistency must exist between accounting treatments in both past and future data to ensure
comparability.
Historical data is likely to suffer from the problem that the audit was not designed with a business
valuation in mind. Future data presents a more obvious problem for auditors and accountants, in that
there is full knowledge of the reasons for preparation and, as such, liability for error and omission is
HB2021

clearer. The level of assurance, and therefore the level of detail of the assurance work, will necessarily
be greater than for a statutory audit.
As a result of these issues, the external parties in a buy-out situation are likely to take independent
assurance advice, rather than reliance being placed on the work of the company’s usual auditors or
accountants. While any deal remains incomplete, privacy is likely to ensure that external parties have
to rely on complete and accurate information being presented. The due diligence exercise (see
Chapter 25) provides a detailed verification, normally after the deal is complete, that the information
relied upon was correct.
The greater the level of assurance that can be achieved, the easier it is likely to be to raise finance,
whatever the source. The cost of finance may also be reduced if the assurance achieved is
considered reliable. For this reason, many organisations will pay relatively high professional fees to
the largest and most renowned firms of accountants and advisers.
While the initial investment in fees is high, the returns (greater probability of finance and at a lower
cost) can easily make the decision valid.

The diagram below summarises the key points in the context of the group audit.
Figure 20.4: Audit procedures
Risk assessment
Accounting treatment Subsidiaries'

in group accounts financial statements
Potential misstatement in group accounts Factors affecting risk of material misstatement in

due to subsidiary financial statements
• Misclassification of investments • Scope of component auditors’ work (may not

(subsidiary vs associate vs financial asset) provide sufficient appropriate evidence that
• Inappropriate inclusion, or exclusion from, financial statements are free from material
consolidation or incorrect treatment of misstatement)
excluded subsidiaries • Past audit problems
• Inappropriate consolidation method • Anticipated changes
• Inappropriate translation method for • Materiality
overseas subsidiaries • Sufficiency of evidence to confirm amounts
• Incorrect consolidation adjustments eg, • Overseas subsidiaries (see section 12.8)
failure to eliminate intra-group items
properly eg, leading to potential • Non-coterminous year ends
overstatements of assets and profits • Existence of letter of comfort (see section 12.9)
• Inconsistent accounting policies for
amounts included in consolidation
• Incorrect calculation (fair values) or
treatment of goodwill
• Incorrect calculation of profit/loss on
disposal or classification of results of
subsidiaries disposed of (continuing vs
discontinued)
• Incorrect determination of date of
acquisition
• Deferred or contingent consideration;
step acquisition
HB2021
12.6.1 Acquisition
If the group audit includes a newly acquired subsidiary or a subsidiary which is disposed of,
compliance with IFRS 3 and IFRS 10 will be relevant. The auditor will need to consider the following
issues in particular:
Issue Audit consequence
Level of control The auditor will need to consider whether the appropriate accounting
treatment has been adopted depending on the level of control (per IFRS
10 an investor controls an investee if it has power over the investee,
exposure or rights to variable returns and the ability to use power to affect
returns). Procedures will be as follows:
• Identify total number of shares held to calculate % holding.
• Review contract or agreements between companies to identify key
terms which may indicate control and any restriction on control eg, right
of veto of third parties.
Date of The auditor should:

control/change in • Review purchase agreement to identify date of control.
stake
• Ensure consolidation has occurred from date control achieved.
• Review consolidation schedules to ensure amounts have been time
apportioned if appropriate.
Valuation of assets A review will need to be carried out of the fair value of assets and liabilities
and liabilities at fair at the date of acquisition, adjusted to the year end (in accordance with IFRS
value 13). Review of trade journals or specialist valuations may be required.
Where specialist valuers have been used (eg, to value brands) an
assessment will need to be made on the reliability of these valuations.
Where intangibles have been recognised on consolidation which were not
previously recognised in the individual financial statements of the company
acquired the auditor will need to give careful consideration as to the
justification of this and whether the treatment is in accordance with IFRS
3/IFRS 13.
Estimates for provisions existing at the date of acquisition will need to be
assessed for reliability.
Valuation of Contingent consideration should be included as part of the consideration

consideration transferred. It must be measured at fair value at the acquisition date. The
discount rate used to discount deferred consideration should be validated.
Goodwill The auditor will need to consider whether the initial calculation is correct in
accordance with IFRS 3. Performance of the subsidiary company will need
to be reviewed to identify whether any impairment is necessary.
Tax liabilities and The amount of corporation tax liabilities provided for will need to be
assets reviewed.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities must also be reviewed. The impairment of
assets or goodwill should be taken into account.
Prior year audit of As first year of inclusion of subsidiary, review last year’s audit report for any
subsidiary modification and consider implications for this year’s audit if necessary.
Planning issues Adjust audit plan to ensure visit to subsidiary is included. If audited by
another auditor contact secondary auditor to discuss the following:
• Audit deadline
• Type and quality of audit papers
• Review of audit
• Identification of consolidation adjustments
HB2021

12.6.2 Disposal
Where the group includes a subsidiary which has been disposed of during the year, the following
issues will be relevant:
• Identification of the date of the change in stake
• Assessment of the remaining stake to determine the appropriate accounting treatment post-
disposal
• Assessment of the fair value of the remaining stake
• Whether the profit or loss on disposal has been calculated in accordance with IFRS Standards
• Whether amounts have been appropriately time apportioned eg, income and expense items
12.6.3 Auditing an ongoing group of companies

Certain issues will be relevant to the auditor each year irrespective of whether there is any change in
the structure of the group. In particular, the auditor will need to ensure that IFRS 10 has been
complied with. The following will be relevant.
Issue Audit consequence
Accounting Identify subsidiary’s accounting policies from review of financial

policies/reporting statements, compare to parent company’s and adjust for consistency
period where necessary.
Further adjustments may be required if some group companies prepare
financial statements in accordance with IFRS Standards and others in
accordance with UK GAAP.
Ensure that subsidiary’s reporting period is consistent with the parent
company’s or that interim accounts have been prepared where necessary.
(If not possible subsidiary’s accounts may still be used for consolidation
provided that the gap between the reporting dates is three months or
less.)
Consolidation Review consolidation schedules, purchase, sales ledger and intra-group

adjustments accounts to identify any intra-group transactions or outstanding balances,
ensure these have been cancelled out in the group accounts.
Transactions involving group companies
Transactions involving group companies should be audited in the same
way as other transactions with third parties. However, systems should exist
to ensure all intra-group transactions are separately identified to ensure
they are all appropriately eliminated on consolidation.
Intra-group balances
These should be audited in the same way as balances with third parties. In
particular:
• share certificates should be examined;
• dividends should be verified;
• intra-group balances should be verified including any security
attaching thereto;
• carrying amounts should be assessed in the same way as third-party
investments; and
• the need for transfer pricing adjustments assessed.
Intercompany guarantees
Any intercompany guarantees (eg, as surety for external loans) should be
ascertained and consideration given to whether disclosure as a
contingent liability is required.
HB2021
12.6.4 Materiality
Where a subsidiary is immaterial, limited work will be performed. However, care should be taken with
respect to the following:
• Apparently immaterial subsidiaries may be materially understated.
• Several small subsidiaries may cumulatively be material.
• Subsidiaries with a small asset base may engage in transactions of significant value and which
may be relevant to understanding the group.
The ICAEW Audit and Assurance faculty document Auditing Groups: A Practical Guide (2014)
identifies the following as factors which may influence component materiality levels:
• The fact that component materiality must always be lower than group materiality
• The size of the component
• Whether the component has a statutory audit
• The characteristics or circumstances that make the component significant
• The strength of the component’s control environment
• The likely incidence of misstatements, taking account past experience
12.6.5 Understanding the group structure

The ICAEW Audit and Assurance faculty booklet Auditing in a Group Context: Practical
Considerations for Auditors (2008) emphasises the need to analyse the group structure. It states that
an understanding of the group structure allows the group auditor to:
• plan work to deal with different accounting frameworks or policies applied throughout the group;
• deal with differences in auditing standards; and
• integrate the group audit process effectively with local statutory audit requirements.
12.7 The consolidation: audit procedures

After receiving and reviewing all the subsidiaries’ (and associates’) financial statements, the group
auditors will be in a position to audit the consolidated financial statements. The ICAEW Audit and
Assurance faculty booklet Auditing in a Group Context: Practical Considerations for Auditors warns
against treating the consolidation as simply an arithmetical exercise. It indicates that there are risks
inherent in the consolidation process itself, for example:
• Consolidation adjustments are a major source of journal entries therefore procedures relating to
the detection of fraud may be relevant.
• Risks may arise from incomplete information to support adjustments between accounting
frameworks.
An important part of the work on the consolidation will be checking the consolidation adjustments.
Consolidation adjustments generally fall into two categories:
• Permanent consolidation adjustments
• Consolidation adjustments for the current year
The audit steps involved in the consolidation process may be summarised as follows.
Step 1 Compare the audited accounts of each subsidiary/associate to the consolidation schedules
to ensure figures have been transposed correctly.
Step 2 Review the adjustments made on consolidation to ensure they are appropriate and
comparable with the previous year. This will involve the following:
• Recording the dates and costs of acquisitions of subsidiaries and the assets acquired
• Calculating goodwill and pre-acquisition reserves arising on consolidation
• Preparing an overall reconciliation of movements on reserves and NCIs
• Adjusting the individual subsidiary financial statements for differences in accounting
policies compared to the parent. This may include compliance with the accounting
regulations of a different jurisdiction (eg, where the individual subsidiary is UK GAAP
compliant and the group reports under IFRS Standards)
HB2021

Step 3 For business combinations, determine the following:
• Whether combination has been appropriately treated as an acquisition
• The appropriateness of the date used as the date of combination
• The treatment of the results of investments acquired during the year
• If acquisition accounting has been used, that the fair value of acquired assets and
liabilities is in accordance with IFRS 13
• Goodwill has been calculated correctly and impairment adjustment made if necessary
Step 4 For disposals:
• agree the date used as the date for disposal to sales documentation; and
• review management accounts to ascertain whether the results of the investment have
been included up to the date of disposal, and whether figures used are reasonable.
Step 5 Consider whether previous treatment of existing subsidiaries or associates is still correct
(consider level of influence, degree of support).
Step 6 Verify the arithmetical accuracy of the consolidation workings by recalculating them.
Step 7 Review the consolidated accounts for compliance with the legislation, accounting standards
and other relevant regulations. Care will need to be taken in the following circumstances:
• Where group companies do not have coterminous accounting periods
• Where subsidiaries are not consolidated
• Where accounting policies of group members differ because foreign subsidiaries
operate under different rules, especially those located in developing countries
• Where elimination of intra-group balances, transactions and profits is required
Other important areas include the following:
• Treatment of associates
• Treatment of goodwill and intangible assets
• Foreign currency translation
• Taxation and deferred tax
• Treatment of loss-making subsidiaries
• Treatment of restrictions on distribution of profits of a subsidiary
• Share options
Step 8 Review the consolidated accounts to confirm that they give a true and fair view in the
circumstances (including subsequent event reviews from all subsidiaries updated to date of
audit report on consolidated accounts).
The Audit and Assurance faculty document Auditing Groups: A Practical Guide also
highlights the importance of considering the process used to perform the consolidation
process. Where spreadsheets are used it is not enough to check the data that has been
entered. Auditors also need to check that the consolidation spreadsheets are actually
working properly.
Interactive question 12: Intra-group balances/profits

Your firm is the auditor of Beeston Industries, a limited company, which has a number of subsidiaries
in your country (and no overseas subsidiaries), some of which are audited by other firms of
professional accountants. You have been asked to consider the work which should be carried out to
ensure that intra-group transactions and balances are correctly treated in the group accounts.
HB2021
Requirements
12.1 Describe the audit procedures you would perform to check that intra-group balances agree,
and state why intra-group balances should agree and the consequences of them not agreeing.
12.2 Describe the audit procedures you would perform to verify that intra-group profit in inventory
has been correctly accounted for in the group accounts.
12.8 Overseas subsidiaries

The inclusion of one or more foreign subsidiaries within a group introduces additional risks,
including the following:
• Non-compliance with the accounting requirements of IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates
• Potential misstatement due to the effects of high inflation
• Possible difficulty in the parent being able to exercise control, for example due to political
instability
• Currency restrictions limiting payment of profits to the parent
• There may be threats to going concern due to economic and/or political instability
• Non-compliance with local taxes or misstatement of local tax liabilities
Audit procedures should include the following:
• Confirm that the balances of the subsidiary have been appropriately translated to the group
reporting currency:
– Assets and liabilities at the closing rate at the end of the reporting period
– Income and expenditure at the rate ruling at the transaction date. An average would be a
suitable alternative provided there have been no significant fluctuations
• Confirm consistency of treatment of the translation of equity (closing rate or historical rate)
• Confirm that the consolidation process has been performed correctly eg, elimination of intra-
group balances
• Recalculate the non-controlling interest
• Confirm that goodwill has been translated at the closing rate
• Confirm the disclosure of exchange differences as a separate component of equity
• Assess whether disclosure requirements of IAS 21 have been satisfied
• If the foreign operation is operating in a hyperinflationary economy confirm that the financial
statements have been adjusted under IAS 29, Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies
before they are translated and consolidated
• Involve a specialist tax audit team to review the calculation of tax balances against submitted and
draft tax returns
12.9 Other considerations in the group context

Other considerations include the following.
12.9.1 Related parties

Remember that when auditing a consolidation, the relevant related parties are those related to the
consolidated group. Transactions with consolidated subsidiaries need not be disclosed, as they are
incorporated in the financial statements. However, related party relationships where there is control
(eg, a parent) need to be disclosed even where there are no transactions with this party.
The group auditors are often requested to carry out the consolidation work even where the accounts
of the subsidiaries have been prepared by the client. In these circumstances the auditors are, of
course, acting as accountants and auditors and care must be taken to ensure that the audit function
is carried out and evidenced.
Transfer pricing issues around transactions with related parties must also be considered. Transfer
pricing adjustments, when they are required, are often material to the financial statements.
HB2021

12.9.2 Support (comfort) letters
It is sometimes the case that a subsidiary, when considered in isolation, does not appear to be a
going concern. In the context of group accounts, the parent and the subsidiary are seen to be a
complete entity, so if the group as a whole is a going concern, that is sufficient.
When auditing the incorporation of the single company into the group accounts, however, the
auditor will need assurance that the subsidiary is a going concern.
In such a case, the auditor may request a ‘support letter’ from the directors of the parent company.
This letter states that the intention of the parent is to continue to support the subsidiary, which makes
it a going concern. A support letter may be sufficient appropriate audit evidence on this issue, but
further evidence would be bank guarantees.
12.10 Promoting best practice in group audits

The ICAEW Audit and Assurance faculty booklet Auditing in a Group Context: Practical
Considerations for Auditors provides practical guidance regarding the audit of groups.
It sets out guidance for each stage of the audit as follows.
Understand group Understand the group structure and the nature of the components of
management’s process the group
and timetable to Consider whether to accept an engagement where the group auditor
produce consolidated is only directly responsible for a minority of the total group
accounts
Understand the accounting framework applicable to each component
and any local statutory reporting requirements
Understand the component auditors – consider their qualifications,
independence and competence
For unrelated auditors or related auditors where the group auditor is
unable to rely on common policies and procedures, consider the
following:
• Visiting the component auditor
• Requesting that the component auditor completes a questionnaire
or representation
• Obtaining confirmation from a relevant regulatory body
• Discussing the component auditor with colleagues from their own
firm
For component auditors based overseas consider whether they have
enough knowledge and experience of ISAs
Design group audit Get involved early. Talk to group management while they are planning
process to match the consolidation
management’s process Draft instructions to component auditors allocating work and be clear
and timetable as to deadlines required
Focus the group audit on high risk areas
Consider risks arising from the consolidation process itself:
• Consolidation adjustments
• Incomplete information to support adjustments between
accounting frameworks eg, where a subsidiary prepares its local
accounts under US GAAP and the parent is preparing IFRS financial
statements
Discuss fraud with component auditors and consider the following:
• Business risks
• How and where the group financial statements may be susceptible
to material misstatement due to fraud or error
HB2021
• How group management and component management could
perpetrate and conceal fraudulent financial reporting and how
assets of the components could be misappropriated
• Known factors affecting the group that may provide the incentive or
pressure for group or component management or others to commit
fraud or indicate a culture or environment that enables those
people to rationalise committing fraud
• The risk that group or component management may override
controls
Understand internal control across the group:
• Request details of material weaknesses in internal controls
identified by component auditors
• Communicate material weaknesses in group-wide controls and
significant weaknesses in internal controls of components to group
management
Clearly communicate Explain the extent of the group auditors’ involvement in the work of the
expectations and component auditors:
information required • Make it clear what the component auditors are being asked to
including timetable perform eg, a full audit, a review or work on specific balances or
transactions
• Clarify the timetable and format of reporting back
Review completed questionnaires and other deliverables from
component auditors carefully
Decide whether and when to visit component auditors and when to
request access to their working papers
Get group management to obtain the consent of subsidiary
management to communicate with the group auditor to deal with
concerns about client confidentiality and sensitivity
Consider whether holding discussions with or visiting component
auditors could deal with secrecy and data-protection issues
Obtain information There is often only a short time for group auditors to resolve any issues
early where practicable arising from the report they receive from component auditors
Request some information early, such as copies of management letter
points from component auditors carrying out planning and control
testing before the year end
Keep track of whether Where component auditors indicate up front that they will not be able
reports have been to provide the information requested, consider alternatives rather than
received and respond to waiting until the sign-off deadline
any issues in a timely Put in place a system to monitor responses to instructions and follow
fashion up on non-submission
Conclude on the audit The group auditors should be in a position to form their opinion on the
and consider possible group financial statements
improvements for the The group auditors will consider the need for a group management
next year’s process letter and reporting to those charged with governance of the group
including management
letter issues Debrief the team and consider whether the process worked as well as
it could have done, along with any changes to future accounting and
auditing requirements, and whether there are any issues that should be
communicated to management and those charged with governance,
or any changes to next year’s audit strategy
HB2021

13 Auditing global enterprises
Section overview
• Global enterprises are particularly affected by the following risks:

– Financial risks
– Political risks
– Regulatory risks
• Internal control will have to have regard to a variety of local requirements.
• Compliance will be a key feature of international business strategy.
• In response to the trend towards globalisation the Forum of Firms has been founded.
13.1 Introduction
Large businesses are increasingly becoming global organisations. This has implications for the
business itself and the way in which the audit is conducted. In the remainder of this section we will
look at a number of key issues affecting global organisations.
13.2 Inherent risk

13.2.1 Financial risk
By its very nature a global organisation will have businesses in countries all over the world. At any
point in time these countries may be experiencing diverse economic circumstances. This may impact
on key aspects of financial management, including the effects of the following:
• Inflation
• Interest rates
• Exchange rates
• Currency restrictions
In some instances the impact of these can be significant. For example, Venezuela experienced
inflation in excess of 1,000,000% in 2019 (hyperinflation will be considered further in section 9 of
Chapter 21).
Overseas financial risk
The financial strategy of the company may be one of overseas financing. This could be in two
situations.
(a) The raising of finance overseas but remittance of funds back to the UK – probably to take
advantage of more reasonable terms
(b) The raising of finance overseas for the purpose of providing capital for an overseas subsidiary,
branch or significant equity investment
Identifying overseas financial risks
The business choice between the above transactions can be summarised as follows.
• The legal requirements for raising loan capital in the country of origin may be more complex than
the UK equivalent.
• The tax implications may be diverse and difficult to manage.
• The country of origin may have strict rules on remittance of proceeds back to the UK.
• The company may have a cultural image or mission statement with which overseas financing
conflicts.
• The decision to finance overseas may have been made on factors that can easily be distorted in
the short term. The factors likely to have been considered would have been:
– the prevailing rate of exchange
– the cost of financing interest or dividend payments
HB2021
Foreign exchange and interest rates are outside the control of the individual entity. Therefore, if there
is an unfavourable movement in the foreign exchange or interest rates, it could result in a significant
change in cash flow in both the short and long term.
Mitigating overseas financial risks
The business may choose to mitigate risk by adopting the following or similar procedures.
• The company should obtain legal, taxation and accounting advice before the overseas financing
commencing.
• The company should hedge any overseas transactions to reduce the risk of currency and interest
rate movements significantly affecting its assets and liabilities.
• The company at board level should consider the cultural and political implications of an
investment overseas.
Assessing overseas financial risks
The assurance adviser can approach the assignment initially by focusing on business risk and, where
necessary, with a more substantive approach.
The assurance adviser will therefore be addressing the issue of changing exchange and interest
rates, where material, in the relevant accounting period. He would discuss with management any
difficulties that had arisen over the legal requirements and whether remittance from overseas had
proved straightforward.
The advisor would also have gained assurance that the company had identified the UK reporting
requirements.
Having addressed business risk, the following steps may need to be taken:
• Examination of the loan capital terms and contractual liabilities of the company
• Checking the remittance of proceeds between the country of origin and the company by
reference to bank and cash records
• Reviewing the movement of exchange and interest rates, and discussing their possible impact
with the directors
• Obtaining details of any hedging transaction and ensuring that exchange rate movements on the
finance had been offset
• Examining the financial statements to determine accurate disclosure of accounting policy and
accounting treatment conforming to UK requirements
• Evaluating whether the directors had satisfied themselves as to the company’s conforming status
as a going concern
13.2.2 Political risk

Political issues, particularly political unrest, may have implications for both the business and the way
in which its results are reported. For example, restrictions imposed by foreign governments may call
into question the ability of a parent to control its subsidiary. This may raise questions about possible
impairment of the value of the parent’s investment in the subsidiary and may affect the way in which
the investment is recorded in the group financial statements.
13.2.3 Regulatory risk

A global organisation will need to be equipped to deal with a range of local legislation. Key areas
• Health and safety
• Environmental legislation
• Trade descriptions
• Consumer protection
• Data protection
• Employment issues
Failure to comply with these may result in financial or other penalties, having to spend money and
resources in fighting litigation and loss of reputation.
HB2021

In this area, governance codes will be particularly important examples of best practice which should
be adopted worldwide, and organisations must consider the risks of breaching provisions relating to
integrity and objectivity, and also control over the organisation as a whole.
As we have often seen, the higher the risk of an audit assignment, the more important it is for the
auditor to exercise judgement. For example, just because a firm has a code of governance does not
mean that it will be complied with.
Audit impact
The variation in local regulation may have an impact on the audit itself. For example, some
subsidiaries may be in countries which do not have accounting and auditing standards developed to
the same extent as those in the UK. As a result, the financial statements and the audit work carried
out on them by local practitioners may not conform to UK standards.
In this situation, the group auditor may need to:
• request adjustments to be made to the financial statements of the subsidiary; and
• request additional audit procedures to be performed.
The increasing acceptance of international accounting and auditing standards and ongoing
convergence between these and local regulation means that this problem should become less
significant over time.
13.3 Internal control

Many of the internal control issues stem from the inherent risks identified above. For example,
geographical, cultural and regulatory differences may result in a variety of internal control
mechanisms being adopted by the organisation. The entity will need to ensure that these
mechanisms satisfy not only local requirements but also the internal control objectives of the entity
as a whole. The following specific points should be noted.
Risk management
The management of a global enterprise will need to have regard to the corporate governance
requirements (see Chapter 4) as follows:
Control environment This sets the tone from the top of the organisation and will need to
be applicable at both a local and global level. Factors to consider
• Organisational structure of the group
• Level of involvement of the parent company in components
• Degree of autonomy of management of components
• Supervision of components’ management by parent company
• Information systems, and information received centrally on a
regular basis
Risk assessment The nature of a global organisation increases risk. Management need
to ensure that a process is in place to identify the risks at the global
level and assess their impact
Information systems Information systems will need to be designed so that accurate and
timely information is available both at the local level and on an entity
basis. Compatibility of systems and processes will be important
Control procedures While there may be local variations, minimum entity-wide standards
must be established to ensure that there are adequate controls
throughout the organisation
HB2021
Monitoring In organisations of this size audit committees and the internal audit
function will have a crucial role to play
13.3.1 Transfer pricing

Transfer pricing addresses the need to value the use of goods and services of one division by
another. A well thought-out system may allow accurate divisional performance measurement while
ensuring that divisions are not motivated to make decisions adverse for the company as a whole.
Transfer pricing systems have four primary aims:
(a) To enable the realistic measurement of divisional profit
(b) To provide producer and receiver with realistic income and cost
(c) To avoid taking too much autonomy from managers
(d) To ensure goal congruence and profit maximisation for the company as a whole
Transfer pricing is notoriously difficult to get right. One particular problem associated with transfer
prices is in valuing a company or division as an independent unit. For example, a division of a major
company is likely to find major costs (eg, rent) to be much higher without the economic support of a
parent.
Where the product or service has a readily available outside market, internal transfers are unlikely to
occur unless the transfer price is similar to the market price. The transfer price may be slightly below
the market price to recognise the reduction in risk (eg, no cash changes hands so risk of bad debts
may be reduced) and likely savings in packing and delivery.
Another method used to set transfer prices is ‘cost plus’. The transferring division should be able to
recover its variable costs and any contribution lost because it diverted resources in order to fulfil the
internal transfer. The costs involved should be standard rather than actual, otherwise inefficiencies in
the selling division will be passed on to the buying division.
The choice of the most appropriate transfer pricing method depends on the nature of the business
and the level of risks borne by the selling division.
Transfer pricing can be used to manipulate profits for tax purposes, rather than to measure
performance. Consequently, transfer pricing issues have come to the top of the agenda for tax
authorities worldwide, and become the focus of an increasing number of HM Revenue & Customs tax
inquiries (particularly where they involve transactions between divisions which are resident in
different countries).
Context example: Divisional performance

Company C is organised into two divisions, Division A and Division B. Division A can sell its product
outside the company at £20 per unit or transfer internally to Division B at £20 per unit.
Division B buys the product from Division A and develops it into a higher-margin finished product.
The division’s usual selling price for its finished product is £70.
Division A’s variable costs are £10 per unit and its fixed costs are £5 per unit. Division B’s variable
costs are £15 per unit and its fixed costs are £10 per unit.
If Division B received an offer from a customer of £30 per unit for its final product, it would not accept
the offer. This is because, taking the transfer price of £20 into account, its accounts would show a
negative contribution per unit of (30 – 20 – 15) £5.
However, assuming that Division A has surplus capacity, Company C would accept the offer. From the
point of view of the company as a whole, the contribution would be positive: (30 – 10 – 15) £5 per
unit.
If Division A is already operating at full capacity then there would be a lost external sales contribution
in A of (20 – 10) £10. Therefore, in this situation, the company as a whole should also reject the offer
because the deal would represent a loss in potential contribution of £5 per unit.
If challenged by the tax authorities, transfer pricing adjustments can have a material impact on the
selling and buying divisions’ corporation tax expense and tax liabilities. It may also change the
recognition of intercompany revenue in the individual companies’ financial statements.
HB2021

Auditing the transfer pricing status of large multinational groups often requires the involvement of
tax specialists. Issues that the auditor should consider when reviewing the company’s transfer pricing
policies include the following:
(a) Are there any unresolved tax enquiries/tax audits relating to transfer pricing?
(b) Has an Advance Transfer Pricing Agreement been signed between the group and the tax
authorities? If so, does the transfer pricing policy applied in the period conform to the
Agreement?
(c) Is the transfer pricing method adopted appropriate for the type of transaction, and the nature of
the selling division’s business?
(d) Do the transfer prices appear reasonable, compared to existing benchmarks (for example, is the
percentage of mark-up in a cost-plus policy in line with the mark-ups applied by comparable
companies in the industry)?
(e) Have there been any changes in the divisions’ business, which may require the transfer pricing
policy to be revised?
13.4 Compliance
A key feature of any international business strategy is that it is likely to involve compliance with
overseas accounting and auditing regulations of the host countries in which an entity does business.
The most important piece of recent legislation in this respect has been the Sarbanes–Oxley Act. This
is covered in detail in Chapter 4 of this Workbook.
13.5 Transnational audits

13.5.1 The Forum of Firms
In response to the trend towards globalisation an international grouping, the Forum of Firms (FoF),
was founded by the following networks: BDO, Deloitte Touche Tohmatsu, Ernst & Young, Grant
Thornton, KPMG and PricewaterhouseCoopers.
Membership is open to firms and networks that have transnational audit appointments or are
interested in accepting such appointments.
These firms have a voluntary agreement to meet certain requirements that are set out in their
constitution. These relate mainly to the following:
• Promoting the use of high-quality audit practices worldwide, including the use of ISAs
• Maintaining quality control standards in accordance with International Standards on Quality
Control issued by the IAASB, and conducting globally co-ordinated internal quality assurance
reviews
The Transnational Auditors Committee (TAC) provides guidance to the members of the FoF and
provides the official linkage between the FoF and the International Federation of Accountants (IFAC).
The TAC has issued the following definition of transnational audit.
Definition
Transnational audit: An audit of financial statements which are or may be relied upon outside the
audited entity’s home jurisdiction for purposes of significant lending, investment or regulatory
decisions; this will include audits of all financial statements of companies with listed equity or debt
and other public interest entities which attract particular public attention because of their size,
products or services provided.
Audits of entities with listed equity or debt are always transnational audits, as their financial
statements are or may be relied upon outside their home jurisdiction. Other audits that are
transnational audits include audits of those entities in either the public or the private sectors where
there is a reasonable expectation that the financial statements of the entity may be relied upon by a
user outside the entity’s home jurisdiction for purposes of significant lending, investment or
regulatory decisions, whether or not the entity has listed equity or debt or where entities attract
particular attention because of their size, products or services provided. (These would include, for
example, large charitable organisations or trusts, major monopolies or duopolies, providers of
financial or other borrowing facilities to commercial or private customers, deposit-taking
HB2021
organisations and those holding funds belonging to third parties in connection with investment or
savings activities.)
In principle, the definition of transnational audit should be applied to the whole group audit,
including the individual components comprising the consolidated entity.
Examples to illustrate the definition:
Example Explanation
Audit of a private company in the US This would qualify as a transnational audit, as it is

raising debt finance in Canada reasonable to expect that the financial statements of the
company would be used across national borders in
obtaining the debt financing.
Audit of a private savings and loans Although it could be considered a public interest entity,
business operating entirely in the US this would not qualify as a transnational audit assuming it
(ie, only US depositors and US can be demonstrated that there are no transnational
investments) users.
In applying the definition of transnational audit, there
should be a rebuttable presumption that all banks and
financial institutions are included, unless it can be clearly
demonstrated that there is no transnational element
from the perspective of a financial statement user and
that there are no operations across national borders.
Potential transnational users would include investors,
lenders, governments, customers and regulators.
Audit of an international charity taking This entity can clearly be considered a public interest
donations through various national entity and operating across borders. Further, the
branches and making grants around international structure would create a reasonable
the world expectation that the financial statements could be used
across national borders by donors in other countries if
not by others for purposes of significant lending,
investment or regulatory decisions. The audit is likely to
qualify as transnational.
13.5.2 Features of transnational audits

In the globalised business and financial environment, many audits are clearly transnational, and this
produces a number of specific problems which can limit the reliability of the audited financial
statements:
• Regulation and oversight of auditors differs from country to country
• Differences in auditing standards from country to country
• Variability in audit quality in different countries
13.5.3 Role of the international audit firm networks

The ‘Big 4’ and other international networks of firms can be seen as being ahead of governments
and institutions in terms of their global influence. They are in a position to establish consistent
practices worldwide in areas such as:
• training and education
• audit procedures
• quality control procedures
These firms may as a result be in a better position than national regulators to ensure consistent
implementation of high-quality auditing standards.
Membership of the Forum of Firms imposes commitments and responsibilities, namely to:
• perform transnational audits in accordance with ISAs;
• comply with the IESBA Code of Ethics; and
• be subject to a programme of quality assurance.
HB2021

Summary
Group accounts:
and statement of comprehensive income
Subsidiary Associate
Control Significant
influence
Direct Indirect Potential Loss of

shareholding shareholding voting rights control
Goodwill
Non-controlling Fair value

Consideration
interest of identifiable
assets and
liabilities
Deferred Contingent Fair Proportion

of net
value
assets
HB2021
Acquisitions and disposals
Acquisitions Disposals
Step acquisitions to
achieve control Disposal of whole
Part disposal
investment
Acquisition not
resulting in change
of control
Loss of No loss of
control control
IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows
Classify cash flows as Consolidated cash flows include

• Operating Direct • Dividends to NCI
• Investing Indirect • Dividends from associates
• Financing • Acquisition/disposal of subsidiaries and associates
Joint arrangements
Joint ventures Joint operations
Equity account in Line by line recognition

consolidated financial of assets, liabilities, revenues
statements and expenses
HB2021

1. Can you apply the IFRS 10 definition of control? (Topic 2)
2. How should goodwill be calculated? How should it be treated subsequent to the

acquisition? (Topic 3)
3. How should contingent consideration be measured subsequent to the acquisition? (Topic

3)
4. Can you apply IFRS 3, Fair Value Measurement to business combinations? (Topic 4)
5. Where an entity prepares separate financial statements how should it account for
associates and joint ventures in its separate financial statements? (Topic 5)
6. Can you account for disposals (Topic 10) and business combinations achieved in stages
(Topic 9)?
7. Do you understand the potential risks faced by the auditor when auditing group financial
statements? (Topic 13)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Burdett This is a straightforward calculation of goodwill, but also requires you to

know the treatment of a gain on a bargain purchase.
Gibston A further calculation of goodwill, this tests deferred and contingent

consideration and the net asset calculation is more complicated than for
Burdett.
Green and Yellow An explanation of joint arrangements under IFRS 11 is required.
Fleurie This question contains a disposal where control is retained.
Chianti In contrast, in this disposal, control is lost.
Upstart Records This requires a detailed explanation with calculations of the treatment of
requirement (1) goodwill and non-controlling interest on consolidation.
HB2021
Poe, Whitman & Co This focuses on audit and ethical issues relating to the partial disposal of a
(disposal of Scherzo subsidiary.
only)
EyeOp requirement This is a calculation of goodwill with a business combination achieved in

(1) stages (financial asset to subsidiary).
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly, or
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference

Basics
• Definitions: control, parent, subsidiary, acquisition date, goodwill – IFRS 3 (App A)
• Acquisition method: acquirer, acquisition date, recognising and measuring assets, liabilities, non-
controlling interest and goodwill – IFRS 3.5
Measurement of identifiable assets acquired
• At fair value – IFRS 3.18
• Non-controlling interest measured at fair value or as a proportionate share of the acquiree’s net
assets – IFRS 3.19
• Exceptions to measurement principles
– Contingent liabilities recognised if fair value measured reliably regardless of probable outcome
– IFRS 3.23
– Income taxes in accordance with IAS 12 – IFRS 3.24
– Employee benefits in accordance with IAS 19 – IFRS 3.26
– Assets held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5 – IFRS 3.31
Consideration transferred
• Fair value of assets transferred, liabilities incurred and equity instruments issued – IFRS 3.37
• Contingent consideration accounted for at fair value – IFRS 3.39
• Subsequent accounting for contingent consideration – IFRS 3.58
• Acquisition related costs – IFRS 3.53
Goodwill
• Calculation – IFRS 3.32
Bargain purchases
• Reassess identification and measurement of the net assets acquired, the non-controlling interest,
if any, and consideration transferred – IFRS 3.36
• Any remaining amount recognised in profit or loss in period the acquisition is made – IFRS 3.34
Business combination achieved in stages (step acquisition)
• Remeasure previously held interest to fair value at acquisition date – IFRS 3.42
Measurement period
• Adjustment to amounts only within 12 months of acquisition date – IFRS 3.45
• Subsequently: errors accounted for retrospectively, everything else prospectively – IFRS 3.50
Disclosures
• Business combinations occurring in the accounting period or after its finish but before financial
statements authorised for issue (in the latter case, by way of note) – IFRS 3.59

Basic rule
• Parent must prepare CFS to include all subsidiaries – IFRS 10.2
Exception
• No need for CFS if wholly owned or all non-controlling shareholders have been informed of and
none have objected to the plan that CFS need not be prepared – IFRS 10.4
Control – IFRS 10.7
• Power over the investee
• Exposure or rights to variable returns
HB2021
• Ability to use its power
• Power is existing rights that give the current ability to direct the relevant activities of the investee
Procedures
• Non-controlling interest shown as a separate figure:
– In the statement of financial position, within total equity but separately from the parent
shareholders’ equity – IFRS 10.22
– In the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the share of the profit after
tax and share of the total comprehensive income
• Accounting dates of group companies to be no more than three months apart – IFRS 10.B93
• Uniform accounting policies across group or adjustments to underlying values – IFRS 10.19
• Bring in share of new subsidiary’s income and expenses: – IFRS 10.20
– From date of acquisition, on acquisition
– To date of disposal, on disposal
• Changes that do not result in a loss of control accounted for as equity transactions – IFRS 10.B96
Loss of control – IFRS 10.B97–99
• Calculation of gain
• Account for amounts in other comprehensive income as if underlying assets disposed of
• Retained interest accounted for in accordance with relevant standard based on fair value
Parent’s separate financial statements
• Account for subsidiary on basis of cost and distributions declared – IAS 27.12
3 IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures

Definitions
• The investor has significant influence, but not control – IAS 28.2
• Significant influence is the power to participate in financial and operating policy decisions of the
investee, but is not control over those policies (if the investor had control, then under IFRS 10 the
investee would be its subsidiary) – IAS 28.3
• Presumptions re less than 20% and 20% or more – IAS 28.5
• Can be an associate, even if the subsidiary of another investor
Equity method
• In statement of financial position: non-current asset = cost plus share of post-acquisition change
in A’s net assets – IAS 28.10
• In statement of profit or loss: share of A’s post-tax profits less any impairment loss – IAS 28.32
• In statement of changes in equity: share of A’s changes – IAS 28.10
• Use IAS 27 to account in investor’s separate financial statements – IAS 28.44
• Also applies to joint ventures – IAS 28.10
Disclosures
These are specified in IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities.
4 Key areas of consolidations

• Control still possible if less than 50% of the voting rights owned – IAS 27.13
• Potential voting rights – IAS 27.14–15
• Loss of control – IAS 27.32–34
• Contingent consideration – IFRS 3.39–40,58

• Definitions – Appendix A
• Two forms of joint arrangement – IFRS 11.6
• Contractual arrangement – IFRS 11.5
HB2021

• Joint ventures – IFRS 11.24
– Equity method
• Joint operations – IFRS 11.20
– What a joint operation is
– Line by line recognition

• Only cash flows between the group and an associate are reported in the group statement of cash
flows with respect to associates – IAS 7.37
• Aggregate cash flows from acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries presented as investing
activities – IAS 7.39
7 Audit of groups
• Definitions:
– Group audit partner and group engagement team – ISA 600.9
– Component auditor – ISA 600.9
• Responsibility – ISA 600.11
• Acceptance considerations – ISA 600.12–.13
• Procedures to assess the extent to which the component auditor can be relied upon – ISA 600.19–
.20
• Significant components – ISA 600.26–.27
• Communication with component auditors – ISA 600.40–.41
• Communication with group management and those charged with governance – ISA 600.46–.49
HB2021
Self-test questions
1 Burdett
The Burdett Company acquired an 80% interest in The Swain Company for £1,340,000 when the fair
value of Swain’s identifiable assets and liabilities was £1,200,000.
Burdett acquired a 60% interest in The Thamin Company for £340,000 when the fair value of
Thamin’s identifiable assets and liabilities was £680,000.
Neither Swain nor Thamin had any contingent liabilities at the acquisition date and the above fair
values were the same as the carrying amounts in their financial statements. Annual impairment
reviews have not resulted in any impairment losses being recognised. The Burdett Company values
the non-controlling interest as the proportionate interest in the identifiable net assets at acquisition.
Requirement
Under IFRS 3, Business Combinations, what figures in respect of goodwill and of the excess of assets
and liabilities acquired over the cost of combination should be included in Burdett’s consolidated
statement of financial position?
2 Sheliak
The Sheliak Company acquired equipment on 1 January 20X3 at a cost of £1,000,000, depreciating it
over eight years with a nil residual value.
On 1 January 20X6 The Parotia Company acquired 100% of Sheliak and estimated the fair value of
the equipment at £575,000, with a remaining life of five years. This fair value was not incorporated
into Sheliak’s books and subsequent depreciation charges continued to be made by reference to
original cost.
Requirement
Under IFRS 3, Business Combinations and IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements, what
adjustments should be made to the depreciation charge for the year and the SFP carrying amount in
preparing the consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7?
3 Finch
On 1 January 20X6 The Finch Company acquired 85% of the ordinary share capital and 40% of the
irredeemable preference share capital of The Sequoia Company for consideration totalling £5.1
million. At the acquisition date Sequoia had the following statement of financial position.
£’000
8,100
Ordinary shares of £1 1,000
Preference shares of £1 2,500
8,100
Included in non-current assets of Sequoia at the acquisition date was a property with a carrying
amount of £600,000 that had a fair value of £900,000.
HB2021

Sequoia had been making losses, so Finch created a provision for restructuring of £800,000 under
plans announced on 2 January 20X6.
Sequoia has disclosed in its accounts a contingent liability with a reliably estimated value of £20,000.
Sequoia has not recorded this as a provision, as payment is not considered probable.
Finch values the non-controlling interest using the proportion of net assets method.
Requirement
Under IFRS 3, Business Combinations, what goodwill arises at the time of the acquisition of Sequoia?
4 Maackia
On 31 December 20X7 The Maackia Company acquires 65% of the ordinary share capital of The
Sorbus Company for £4.8 million. Sorbus is incorporated in Flatland, which has not adopted IFRS for
its financial statements. At the acquisition date the fair value of a 35% interest in Sorbus is £1.8
million and net assets of Sorbus have a carrying amount of £4.6 million before taking into account
the following.
Included in the net assets of Sorbus is a business that Maackia has put on the market for immediate
sale. This business has a carrying amount of £500,000, a fair value of £760,000 and a value in use of
£810,000. Costs to sell are estimated at £40,000.
Sorbus also has a defined benefit pension plan which has a plan asset of £1.6 million, and an
obligation with present value of £1,280,000. Sorbus has recognised the net plan asset of £320,000 in
its statement of financial position. Maackia does not anticipate any reduction in contributions as a
result of acquiring Sorbus.
Requirement
Under IFRS 3, Business Combinations, what (to the nearest £1,000) is the goodwill arising on the
acquisition of Sorbus, assuming that Maackia measures the non-controlling interest using the fair
value method?
5 Gibbston
On 1 May 20X7 The Gibbston Company acquired 70% of the ordinary share capital of The Crum
Company for consideration of £15 million cash payable immediately and £5.5 million payable on 1
May 20X8. Further consideration of £13.3 million cash is payable on 1 May 20Y0 dependent on a
range of contingent future events. The management of Gibbston believe there is a 45% probability
of paying the amount in full.
The equity of Crum had a carrying amount of £20 million at 1 January 20X7. Crum incurred losses of
£3 million evenly over the year ended 31 December 20X7. The carrying amount and fair values of the
assets of Crum are the same except that at the acquisition date the fair value relating to plant is £9
million higher than carrying amount. The weighted average remaining useful life of the plant is three
years from the acquisition date.
Requirements
Calculate the following amounts (to the nearest £0.1m) in accordance with IFRS 3, Business
Combinations and IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements that would be included in the
consolidated financial statements of Gibbston for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
(a) Goodwill
(b) Non-controlling interest in profit/loss
(c) Non-controlling interest included in equity
Note: A rate of 10% is to be used in any discount calculations. The non-controlling interest is
measured using the proportion of net assets method.
6 Supermall
This question is based on Illustrative example 2 from IFRS 11.
Two real estate companies (the parties) set up a separate vehicle (Supermall) for the purpose of
acquiring and operating a shopping centre. The contractual arrangement between the parties
HB2021
establishes joint control of the activities that are conducted in Supermall. The main feature of
Supermall’s legal form is that the entity, not the parties, has rights to the assets, and obligations for
the liabilities, relating to the arrangement. These activities include the rental of the retail units,
managing the car park, maintaining the centre and its equipment, such as lifts, and building the
reputation and customer base for the centre as a whole.
The terms of the contractual arrangement are such that:
(1) Supermall owns the shopping centre. The contractual arrangement does not specify that the
parties have rights to the shopping centre.
(2) The parties are not liable in respect of the debts, liabilities or obligations of Supermall. If
Supermall is unable to pay any of its debts or other liabilities or to discharge its obligations to
third parties, the liability of each party to any third party will be limited to the unpaid amount of
that party’s capital contribution.
(3) The parties have the right to sell or pledge their interests in Supermall.
(4) Each party receives a share of the income from operating the shopping centre (which is the
rental income net of the operating costs) in accordance with its interest in Supermall.
Requirement
Explain how Supermall should be classified in accordance with IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements
7 Green and Yellow

Green entered into an agreement with Yellow, a public limited company, on 1 December 20X8. Each
of the companies holds one-half of the equity in an entity, Orange, a public limited company, which
operates offshore oil rigs. The contractual arrangement between Green and Yellow establishes joint
control of the activities that are conducted in Orange. The main feature of Orange’s legal form is that
Orange, not Green or Yellow, has rights to the assets, and obligations for the liabilities, relating to the
arrangement.
The terms of the contractual arrangement are such that:
(1) Orange owns the oil rigs. The contractual arrangement does not specify that Green and Yellow
have rights to the oil rigs.
(2) Green and Yellow are not liable in respect of the debts, liabilities or obligations of Orange. If
Orange is unable to pay any of its debts or other liabilities or to discharge its obligations to third
parties, the liability of each party to any third party will be limited to the unpaid amount of that
party’s capital contribution.
(3) Green and Yellow have the right to sell or pledge their interests in Orange.
(4) Each party receives a share of the income from operating the oil rig in accordance with its
interest in Orange.
Green wants to account for the interest in Orange by using the equity method, and wishes for advice
on the matter.
Green also owns a 10% interest in a pipeline, which is used to transport the oil from the offshore oil
rig to a refinery on the land. Green has joint control over the pipeline and has to pay its share of the
maintenance costs. Green has the right to use 10% of the capacity of the pipeline. Green wishes to
show the pipeline as an investment in its financial statements to 30 November 20X9.
Requirement
Discuss how the above arrangements would be accounted for in Green’s financial statements.
8 Stuhr
On 1 January 20X6 The Stuhr Company acquired 30% of the ordinary share capital of the Bismuth
Company by the issue of one million shares with a fair value of £4.00 each. From that date Stuhr did
not exercise significant influence over Bismuth, and accounted for the investment at fair value with
changes in value included in profit or loss. At 1 January 20X6 the net assets of Bismuth had a
carrying amount of £6.4 million and a fair value of £7.2 million.
On 1 March 20X7, Stuhr bought a further 50% of the ordinary share capital of Bismuth by issuing a
further 2 million shares with a fair value of £5.00 each. At that date the net assets of Bismuth had a
HB2021

carrying amount of £7.8 million and a fair value of £8.4 million. The non-controlling interest had a fair
value of £2 million, and the 30% interest already held by Stuhr had a fair value of £3 million.
Stuhr values the non-controlling interest using the full goodwill method.
Requirement
What is the goodwill figure in the consolidated statement of financial position at 31 December 20X7,
in accordance with IFRS 3, Business Combinations?
9 Fleurie
Fleurie bought 85% of Merlot on 30 June 20X3, providing consideration in the form of £2 million
cash immediately and a further £1.5 million cash conditional upon earnings targets being met.
At acquisition, the net assets of Merlot were £2.2 million and the fair value of the 15% not purchased
was £350,000. Fleurie measures the non-controlling interest using the full goodwill method.
On 31 December 20X7, as part of a long-term strategy, Fleurie sold a 15% stake from its 85% holding
in Merlot, realising proceeds of £560,000. At this date the net assets of Merlot were £3.5 million.
Requirement
What impact does the disposal have on the financial statements of the Fleurie Group?
10 Chianti
Chianti purchased 95% of the 100,000 £1 ordinary share capital of Barolo on 1 January 20X2, giving
rise to goodwill of £70,000. At this date Barolo’s retained earnings were £130,000. There were no
other reserves.
On 30 September 20X2, when the net assets of Barolo were £320,000, Chianti disposed of the
majority of its holding in Barolo, retaining just 5% of share capital, with a fair value of £20,000. Chianti
received £340,000 consideration for the sale.
The following information is relevant:
• Goodwill in Barolo has been impaired by £20,000.
• In April 20X2, Barolo revalued a plot of land from £50,000 to £75,000. This land was held with the
intention of building a new head office on it.
• The non-controlling interest is valued using the proportion of net assets method.
Requirement
What is the impact of the disposal on the Chianti Group statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income?
11 Porter
The following consolidated financial statements relate to Porter, a public limited company:
Porter group: statement of financial position as at 31 May 20X6
20X6 20X5
£m £m
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 958 812
Goodwill 15 10
Investment in associate 48 39
1,021 861
Current assets
Inventories 154 168
HB2021
20X6 20X5
£m £m
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 16 0
460 328
1,481 1,189
Share capital (£1 ordinary shares) 332 300
Share premium account 212 172
Retained earnings 188 165
Revaluation surplus 101 54
833 691
Non-controlling interests 84 28
917 719
Long-term borrowings 380 320
Deferred tax liability 38 26
418 346
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 110 98
Interest payable 8 4
Current tax payable 28 22
146 124
1,481 1,189
Porter group: statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31
May 20X6
£m
Revenue 956
Cost of sales (634)
Gross profit 322
Other income 6
Distribution costs (97)
Administrative expenses (115)
Finance costs (16)
Share of profit of associate 12
HB2021

£m
Other comprehensive income (items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss):
Gains on property revaluation 58
Share of other comprehensive income of associate 8
Income tax relating to items of other comprehensive income (17)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 49
£m
Owners of the parent 68
Non-controlling interests 10
78
Total comprehensive income attributable to:
Non-controlling interests 12
127
The following information relates to the consolidated financial statements of Porter:

(1) During the period, Porter acquired 60% of a subsidiary. The purchase was effected by issuing
shares of Porter on a 1 for 2 basis, at their market value on that date of £2.25 per share, plus £26
million in cash.
A statement of financial position of the subsidiary, prepared at the acquisition date for consolidation
purposes, showed the following position:
£m
Inventories 20
136
Share capital (£1 shares) 80

Reserves 40
120
Trade payables 12
Income taxes payable 4
136
An impairment test conducted at the year end resulted in a write down of goodwill relating to
another wholly owned subsidiary. This was charged to cost of sales.
Group policy is to value non-controlling interests at the date of acquisition at the proportionate share
of the fair value of the acquiree’s identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed.
HB2021
(2) Depreciation charged to the consolidated profit or loss amounted to £44 million. There were no
disposals of property, plant and equipment during the year.
(3) Other income represents gains on financial assets at fair value through profit or loss. The financial
assets are investments in quoted shares. They were purchased shortly before the year end with
surplus cash, and were designated at fair value through profit or loss as they are expected to be sold
shortly after the year end. No dividends have yet been received.
(4) Included in ‘trade and other payables’ is the £ equivalent of an invoice for 102 million shillings for
some equipment purchased from a foreign supplier. The asset was invoiced on 5 March 20X6, but
had not been paid for at the year end, 31 May 20X6.
Exchange gains or losses on the transaction have been included in administrative expenses. Relevant
exchange rates were as follows:
Shillings to £1
5 March 20X6 = 6.8
31 May 20X6 = 6.0
(5) Movement on retained earnings was as follows:
£m
At 31 May 20X5 165
Dividends paid (45)
At 31 May 20X6 188
Requirement
Prepare a consolidated statement of cash flows for Porter for the year ended 31 May 20X6 in
accordance with IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows, using the indirect method.
Notes to the statement of cash flows are not required.
12 Tastydesserts
The following are extracts from the financial statements of Tastydesserts and one of its wholly owned
subsidiaries, Custardpowders, the shares in which were acquired on 31 October 20X2.
Statements of financial position
Tastydesserts and subsidiaries Custardpowders

31 December 31 December 31 October
20X2 20X1 20X2
£’000 £’000 £’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 4,764 3,685 694
Goodwill 42 – –
Investment in associates 2,195 2,175 ––––
7,001 5,860 694
Current assets
Inventories 1,735 1,388 306
Receivables 2,658 2,436 185
Bank balances and cash 43 77 7
4,436 3,901 498
HB2021

Tastydesserts and subsidiaries Custardpowders
31 December 31 December 31 October
20X2 20X1 20X2
£’000 £’000 £’000
11,437 9,761 1,192
Equity
Share capital 4,896 4,776 400
Share premium 216 – –
Retained earnings 2,540 2,063 644
7,652 6,839 1,044
Loans 1,348 653 –
Deferred tax 111 180 ––––
1,459 833 ––––
Current liabilities
Payables 1,915 1,546 148
Bank overdrafts 176 343 –
Current tax payable 235 200 ––––
2,326 2,089 148
11,437 9,761 1,192
Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31
December 20X2
£’000
Profit before interest and tax 546
Finance costs –
Share of profit of associates 120
Income tax expense 126
Profit/total comprehensive income for the year 540
Attributable to:
Non-controlling interests –––
540
The following information is also given:

(1) The consolidated figures at 31 December 20X2 include Custardpowders.
(2) The amount of depreciation on property, plant and equipment during the year was £78,000.
There were no disposals.
(3) The cost on 31 October 20X2 of the shares in Custardpowders was £1,086,000 comprising the
issue of £695,000 unsecured loan stock at par, 120,000 ordinary shares of £1 at a value of 280p
each and £55,000 in cash.
HB2021
(4) No write-down of goodwill was required during the period.
(5) Total dividends paid by Tastydesserts (parent) during the period amounted to £63,000.
Requirement
Prepare a consolidated statement of cash flows for Tastydesserts and subsidiaries for the year ended
31 December 20X2 using the indirect method.
Notes to the statement of cash flows are not required.
this chapter.
HB2021


Goodwill on acquisition of DEF
£’000
Consideration 3m shares issued at £7 21,000
1m additional shares at £7 7,000
Non-controlling interest 10% × £18m 1,800
29,800
Net assets acquired (18,000)

Goodwill 11,800

£99,750
Net assets of Ives
At acquisition At reporting date

£ £
FV adjustment 50,000 –
PURP in inventory ––––––– (6,000)
300,000 339,000
£ £
Share of net assets (25% × 339,000) 84,750
Share of goodwill:
NCI at acquisition date at fair value 90,000
NCI share of net assets at acquisition date (25% × £300,000) (75,000)
15,000
99,750

Goodwill on consolidation of Kono Ltd
£m £m
Consideration (£2.00 × 6m) 12.0
HB2021
£m £m
Share capital 8.0
Pre-acquisition retained earnings 4.4
Fair value adjustments
Property, plant and equipment (16.8 – 16.0) 0.8
Inventories (4.2 – 4.0) 0.2
Contingent liability (0.2)
13.2
Non-controlling interest (25%) 3.3
15.3
Net assets acquired (13.2)
Goodwill 2.1
Notes
1 It is assumed that the market value (ie, fair value) of the loan stock issued to fund the purchase of
the shares in Kono Ltd is equal to the price of £12 million. IFRS 3 requires goodwill to be
calculated by comparing the consideration transferred plus the non-controlling interest, valued
either at fair value or, in this case, as a percentage of net assets, with the fair value of the
identifiable net assets of the acquired business or company.
2 Share capital and pre-acquisition profits represent the book value of the net assets of Kono Ltd at
the date of acquisition. Adjustments are then required to this book value in order to give the fair
value of the net assets at the date of acquisition. For short-term monetary items, fair value is their
carrying value on acquisition.
3 The fair value of property, plant and equipment should be determined by market value or, if
information on a market price is not available (as is the case here), then by reference to
depreciated replacement cost, reflecting normal business practice. The net replacement cost (ie,
£16.8m) represents the gross replacement cost less depreciation based on that amount, and so
further adjustment for extra depreciation is unnecessary.
4 Raw materials are valued at their replacement cost of £4.2 million.
5 The rationalisation costs cannot be reported in pre-acquisition results under IFRS 3, as they are
not a liability of Kono Ltd at the acquisition date.
6 The fair value of the loan is the present value of the total amount payable (principal and interest).
The present value of the loan is the same as its par value.
7 The contingent liability should be included as part of the acquisition net assets of Kono even
though it is not deemed probable and therefore has not been recognised in Kono’s individual
accounts. However, the disclosed amount is not necessarily the fair value at which a third party
would assume the liability. If the probability is low, then the fair value is likely to be lower than
£200,000.

IFRS 11 gives examples in the oil, gas and mineral extraction industries. In such industries companies
may, say, jointly control and operate an oil or gas pipeline. Each company transports its own products
down the pipeline and pays an agreed proportion of the expenses of operating the pipeline
(perhaps based on volume). In this case the parties have rights to assets (such as exploration permits
and the oil or gas produced by the activities).
A further example is a property which is jointly controlled, each venturer taking a share of the rental
income and bearing a portion of the expense.
HB2021

Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30 June 20X9
£
Revenue (W2) 2,291,300
Cost of sales (W2) (1,238,125)
Gross profit 1,053,175
Operating expenses (W2) (263,980)
Profit from operations 789,195
Share of profits of associate (W6) 51,383
Income tax expense (W2) (240,685)
Profit for the year 599,893
Owners of Anima plc (Bal) 517,579
599,893
Consolidated statement of financial position (extract)
£
Equity attributable to owners of Anima plc
Ordinary share capital 4,000,000
Retained earnings (W7) 1,879,116
5,879,116
Non-controlling interest (W8) 2,112,600
Total equity 7,991,716
WORKINGS
(1) Group structure
Anima 900 / 3,000 = 30%

Oxendale
2.1 / 3.5
= 60%
85%
1 Apr X9
Orient (3/12 months)
Carnforth
HB2021
(2) Consolidation schedule
Anima Orient Carnforth Adjustments Total

3/12
Revenue 1,410,500 870,300 160,000 (149,500) 2,291,300
Cost of sales
Per question (850,000) (470,300) (54,875) 149,500 (1,238,125)
PURP (W4) (9,750)
PURP (W4) (2,700)
Operating expenses
Per question (103,200) (136,000) (23,780) (263,980)
Fair value adj (dep) (W3) (1,000)
Tax (137,100) (79,200) (24,385) (240,685)
PAT 184,800 55,960
(3) Fair value adjustment

Additional fair value £320,000
Buildings £320,000 × 50% = £160,000
Additional depreciation charge in year £160,000 / 40 years × 3/12 months = £1,000
(4) Unrealised profit
Oxendale Orient %
207,000 149,500 115
(180,000) (130,000) (100)
27,000 19,500 15
Orient – £19,500 × ½ = £9,750

Oxendale – £27,000 × 1/3 = £9,000
Anima share of Oxendale PURP – £9,000 × 30% = £2,700
(5) Non-controlling interest
Orient Ltd (40% × £184,800 (W2)) = £73,920
Carnforth Ltd (15% × £55,960 (W2)) = £8,394
Non-controlling interest = £73,920 + £8,394 = £82,314
(6) Share of profits of associate
£
Anima share × 30% 61,383
Less impairment for year (10,000)
51,383
(7) Consolidated retained earnings
£
Anima plc – c/fwd 1,560,000
Less PURP with Orient (W4) (9,750)
HB2021

£
Less PURP with Oxendale (W4) (2,700)
Orient Ltd (60% × (580 – 195)) 231,000
Carnforth Ltd (85% × 55,960) (W2) 47,566
Oxendale Ltd ((30% × (340 – 130)) – 10 (impairment)) 53,000
1,879,116
(8) Non-controlling interest – SFP
£ £
Orient Ltd
FV of NCI at acquisition date 1,520,000
Share of post-acquisition reserves ((580 – 195) × 40%) 154,000
1,674,000
Carnforth Ltd
Net assets per question 2,605,000
Fair value adjustment (increase) 320,000
Less extra depreciation on FV adj (1,000)
2,924,000
NCI – 2,924,000 × 15% 438,600
2,112,600

6.1 Consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 March 20X4
Assets £ £
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
(660,700 + 635,300 + 24,000 – 1,000 (W1) – 3,000 (W7)) 1,316,000
Intangibles (101,300 + 144,475 (W2)) 245,775
Investment in joint venture (W6) 93,600
1,655,375
Current assets
Inventories (235,400 + 195,900 – 2,400 (W5)) 428,900
Trade and other receivables (174,900 + 78,800 – 50,000) 203,700
Cash and cash equivalents (23,700 + 11,900 + 10,000) 45,600
678,200
Total assets 2,333,575
HB2021
Assets £ £
Equity attributable to owners of Preston plc
Ordinary share capital 100,000
Retained earnings (W4) 1,099,550
1,324,550
Total equity 1,514,575
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables (151,200 + 101,800 – 40,000) 213,000
Taxation (85,000 + 80,000) 165,000
Deferred consideration 441,000
819,000
Total equity and liabilities 2,333,575
WORKINGS
(1) Net assets – Longridge Ltd
Year end Acquisition Post acq

£ £ £
Retained earnings
Per Q 312,100 206,700
Less intangible (72,000 + 18,000) (72,000) (90,000)
Fair value adj re PPE (120,000 – (92,000 ×
48/46)) 24,000 24,000
Dep thereon (24,000 × 2/48) (1,000) –
PPE PURP (W7) (3,000) ––––––– ––––––
760,100 640,700 119,400
(2) Goodwill – Longridge Ltd
£
Consideration transferred (250,000 + (441,000 – 41,000 (W4))) 650,000
Non-controlling interest at acquisition (640,700 (W1) × 25%) 160,175
810,175
Net assets at acquisition (W1) (640,700)
169,475
Impairment to date (25,000)
144,475
HB2021

(3) Non-controlling interest – Longridge Ltd
£
Non-controlling interest at acquisition (W2) 160,175
Share of post-acquisition reserves (119,400 (W1) × 25%) 29,850
190,025
£
Preston plc 1,084,800
Unwinding of discount on deferred consideration:
Two years (441,000 – (441,000 / 1.052)) (41,000)
Less PURP (Longridge Ltd) (W5) (2,400)
Longridge Ltd (119,400 (W1) × 75%) 89,550
Chipping Ltd (W6) 3,600
Less impairments to date (25,000 + 10,000) (35,000)
1,099,550
(5) Inventory PURPs
Chipping Longridge
Ltd Ltd
% £ £
SP 100 15,000 12,000
Cost (80) (12,000) (9,600)
GP 20 3,000 2,400
(6) Investment in joint venture – Chipping Ltd
£ £
Cost 100,000
Add post-acquisition profits 12,000
Less PURP (W5) (3,000)
9,000
× 40% 3,600
103,600
Less impairment to date (10,000)
93,600
(7) PPE PURP – Longridge Ltd
£
Asset now in Preston plc’s books at 15,000 × 1/3 5,000
Asset would have been in Longridge Ltd’s books at 10,000 × 1/5 (2,000)
3,000
HB2021
6.2 Goodwill journal entries
£ £
DEBIT Intangibles – goodwill 39,160
DEBIT Share capital 320,000
CREDIT Investments 385,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interest (320,000 + 112,300) × 20% 86,460

7.1 Goodwill (at date control obtained)
$m $m
Consideration transferred 480
NCI (20% × 750) 150
Fair value of previously held equity interest ($480m × 20/60) 160
Fair value of identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed
Share capital 300
(750)
40
7.2 Profit on derecognition of investment
$m
Fair value at date control obtained (see part (a)) 160
Cost (120)
40

8.1 Answer as follows:
(a) Complete disposal at year end (80% to 0%)
Consolidated statement of financial position as at 30 September 20X8
Streatham Balham Adj 1 Adj 2 Disposal Consolidated

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Non-
current
assets 360 270 (270) 360
Investment 324 (324)
Goodwill 36 (36)
Current 370 +
assets 370 370 650 1,020
1,380
HB2021

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Share
capital 540 180 (180) 540
Reserves 414 360 (180) (36) 182 740
NCI 72 36 (108) –
Current
liabilities 100 100 (100) 100
1,380
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30 September 20X8

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Profit
before
tax 153 126 279
Profit on
disp’l 182 182
Tax (45) (36) (81)
108 90 380
Owners of
parent 108 90 (18) 182 362
NCI 18 18
380
Notes
1 The above consolidation schedules are prime examples of where the spreadsheet
software should be used. For full marks to be awarded, the schedule must be added
across correctly, and it is easier to do this using a spreadsheet. It is important that you
know which way round the adjustments go. You need to copy the schedule into the
word-processing area and show your workings. The examiners have made it clear that
the markers will not check formulae in the spreadsheet cells so it is vital to make it clear
where your figures have come from.
2 The above recommendation of using a spreadsheet for consolidation adjustments also
applies to questions which ask you to adjust financial statements to correct financial
reporting treatments. Adjustments and totals are shown in rows and columns. Such
questions are often a feature of Question 2 in the exam.
WORKINGS
(1) Goodwill
£’000
Consideration transferred 324
NCI: 20% × (180 + 180) 72
396
Net assets (180 + 180) (360)
36
HB2021
Consolidation adjustment journal £’000 £’000
DEBIT Goodwill 36
DEBIT Share capital 180
DEBIT Reserves 180
CREDIT Investment 324
CREDIT Non-controlling interest 72
To recognise the acquisition and related goodwill and non-controlling interest.

(2) Allocate profits between acquisition date and disposal date to NCI
£
Post-acquisition profits (360 – 180) 180,000
NCI share (20%) 36,000
Of these, £18,000 (90,000 × 20%) relate to the current year.
Consolidation adjustment journal (SOFP) £’000 £’000

DEBIT Reserves 36
CREDIT Non-controlling interest 36
To allocate the NCI share of post-acquisition profits.
In addition, 20% of the profits of Balham Co arising in the year are allocated to the NCI:
Consolidation adjustment journal (SPL) £’000 £’000

DEBIT Profits attributable to owners of parent 18
CREDIT Non-controlling interest in profit 18
To allocate the NCI share of post-acquisition profits in the current year.
(3) Profit on disposal of Balham Co
£’000 £’000
Fair value of consideration received 650
Less: net assets at disposal 540
goodwill 36
NCI (540 × 20%) (108)
(468)
182
Consolidation adjustment journal (SPL) £’000 £’000

DEBIT Cash 650
DEBIT NCI 108
DEBIT Disposal date liabilities of Balham 100
CREDIT Goodwill 36
CREDIT Disposal date current assets of Balham 370
CREDIT Disposal date non-current assets of Balham 270
CREDIT Reserves 182
HB2021

To recognise the group gain on disposal of Balham Co.
(b) Partial disposal: subsidiary to subsidiary (80% to 60%)
Consolidated statement of financial position as at 30 September 20X8
Adj 1 Adj 2
Streatham Balham (part (a)) (part (a)) Disposal Consolid’d
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Non-
current
assets 360 270 630
Investment 324 (324)
Goodwill 36 36
Current
assets 370 370 160 900
1,566
Share
capital 540 180 (180) 540
Reserves 414 360 (180) (36) 52 610
NCI 72 36 108 216
Current
liabilit’s 100 100 200
1,566
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30 September 20X8
Streatham Balham Adj 1 Adj 2 Disposal Consolid’d

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Profit
before
tax 153 126 279
Profit on
disp’l –
Tax (45) (36) (81)
108 90 198
Owners of
parent 108 90 (18) 180
NCI 18 18
198
WORKING
Disposal
Adjustment is made to equity as control is not lost.
£’000
NCI before disposal 80% (360 + 180) 432
NCI after disposal 60% (360 + 180) (324)
Required adjustment 108
HB2021
Consolidation adjustment journal (SOFP) £’000 £’000
DEBIT Current assets (cash) 160
CREDIT NCI 108
CREDIT Reserves 52
8.2 Answer as follows:

(a) Partial disposal: subsidiary to associate (80% to 40%)
Profit on disposal
£’000 £’000
Fair value of consideration received 340
Fair value of 40% investment retained 250
Less: Net assets when control lost
(540 – (90 × 3/12)) 517.5
Goodwill (part (a)) 36
NCI (517.5 × 20%) (103.5)
(450)
140
Group reserves
Balham
Streatham 40%
reserves Balham reserve
£’000 £’000 £’000
At date of disposal 414
Group profit on disposal (W1) 140
Balham: share of post-acquisition earnings
(157.5 × 80%) 126
Balham: share of post-acquisition earnings (22.5
× 40%) 9
689
At date of disposal
(360 – (90 × 3/12))/per question 414 337.5 360.0
Retained earnings at acquisition/on disposal 414 (180.0) (337.5)
157.5 22.5
HB2021

Investment in associate
£’000
Fair value at date control lost (new ‘cost’) 250
Share of post-acquisition reserves (90 × 3/12 × 40%) 9
259
(b) Partial disposal: subsidiary to financial asset (80% to 40%)

Profit on disposal – as in part (a)
Group reserves
£’000
Streatham Co’s reserves 414
Group profit on disposal (W1) 140
Balham: share of post-acquisition reserves (157.5 (see below) × 80%) 126
680
Balham
At date of disposal (360 – (90 × 3/12)) 337.5
Reserves at acquisition (180.0)
157.5
Retained investment – at £250,000 fair value

Consolidated statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December 20X8
£’000 £’000
Cash generated from operations (Note 1) 340
Income taxes paid (W4) (100)

Acquisition of subsidiary S Ltd, net of cash acquired (Note 2) (90)
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W1) (220)
Net cash used in investing activities (310)
Proceeds from issue of share capital (1,150 + 650 – 1,000 – 500 – (100 × £2)) 100
Dividend paid to non-controlling interest (W3) (4)
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of period 50
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of period 76
HB2021
Notes to the statement of cash flows
(1) Reconciliation of profit before tax to cash generated from operations
£’000
Profit before taxation 420
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 210
630
Increase in trade receivables (1,370 – 1,100 – 30) (240)
Increase in inventories (1,450 – 1,200 – 70) (180)
Increase in trade payables (1,690 – 1,520 – 40) 130
(2) Acquisition of subsidiary

During the period the group acquired subsidiary S Ltd. The fair values of assets acquired and
liabilities assumed were as follows:
£’000
Inventories 70
Receivables 30
Trade payables (40)
Non-controlling interest (26)
234
Goodwill 66
Total purchase price 300
Less cash of S Ltd (10)
Less non-cash consideration (200)
Cash flow on acquisition net of cash acquired 90
WORKINGS
(1) PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
£’000 £’000
b/f 2,300 Depreciation 210
On acquisition 190 c/f 2,500
Additions (balancing figure) 220 –––––
2,710 2,710
(2) GOODWILL
£’000 £’000
b/f –
HB2021

£’000 £’000
Impairment losses (balancing
Additions (300 – (90% × 260)) 66 figure) 0
––– c/f 66
66 66
(3) NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST
£’000 £’000
Dividend (balancing figure) 4 b/f –
c/f 31 On acquisition 26
––– CSPL 9
35 35
(4) INCOME TAX PAYABLE
£’000 £’000
b/f 100
Cash paid (balancing figure) 100 CSPL 150
c/f 150 ––––
250 250

(a) Cash flows from investing activities
£’000
Disposal of subsidiary Desdemona Ltd, net of cash disposed of (400 – 20) 380
(b) Cash flows from investing activities
£’000
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W1) (1,307)
(c) Cash flows from financing activities
£’000
Dividends paid to non-controlling interest (W2) (42)
(d) Note to the statement of cash flows

During the period the group disposed of subsidiary Desdemona Ltd. The book values of assets
and liabilities disposed of were as follows:
£’000
Inventories 50
Receivables 39
Payables (42)
HB2021
£’000
Non-controlling interest (W2) (91)
366
Profit on disposal 34
Total sale proceeds 400
Less cash of Desdemona Ltd disposed of (20)
Cash flow on disposal net of cash disposed of 380
(e) Reconciliation of profit before tax to cash generated from operations
£’000
Profit before tax (862 + 20) 882
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 800
1,682
Increase in receivables (605 – 417 + 39) (227)
Increase in inventories (736 – 535 + 50) (251)
Increase in payables (380 – 408 + 42) 14
Cash generated from operations 1,218
WORKINGS
(1) PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT – CARRYING AMOUNT
£’000 £’000
b/f 3,950 c/f 4,067
Additions (balancing figure) 1,307 Disposal of sub 390
–––––– Depreciation charge 800
5,257 5,257
(2) NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST
£’000 £’000
c/f 482 b/f 512
Disposal of sub (457 × 20%) 91 CSPL 103
Dividends to NCI
(balancing figure) 42 –––––
615 615

11.1 Reasons for reviewing the work of component auditors
The main consideration which concerns the audit of all group accounts is that the holding
company’s auditors (the ‘group’ auditors) are responsible to the members of that company for
the audit opinion on the whole of the group accounts.
HB2021

It may be stated (in the notes to the financial statements) that the financial statements of certain
subsidiaries have been audited by other firms, but this does not absolve the group auditors
from any of their responsibilities.
The auditors of a holding company have to report to its members on the truth and fairness of
the view given by the financial statements of the company and its subsidiaries dealt with in the
group accounts. The group auditors should have powers to obtain such information and
explanations as they reasonably require from the subsidiary companies and their auditors, or
from the parent company in the case of overseas subsidiaries, in order that they can discharge
their responsibilities as holding company auditors.
The auditing standard ISA (UK) 600 (Revised November 2019), Special Considerations – Audits
of Group Financial Statements (Including the Work of Component Auditors) clarifies how the
group auditors can carry out a review of the audits of subsidiaries in order to satisfy themselves
that, with the inclusion of figures not audited by themselves, the group accounts give a true and
fair view.
The scope, standard and independence of the work carried out by the auditors of subsidiary
companies (the ‘component’ auditors) are the most important matters which need to be
examined by the group auditors before relying on financial statements not audited by them.
The group auditors need to be satisfied that all material areas of the financial statements of
subsidiaries have been audited satisfactorily and in a manner compatible with that of the group
auditors themselves.
11.2 Procedures to be carried out by group auditors in reviewing the component auditors’ work
(1) Send a questionnaire to all other auditors requesting detailed information on their work,
including:
(a) An explanation of their general approach (in order to make an assessment of the
standards of their work)
(b) Details of the accounting policies of major subsidiaries (to ensure that these are
compatible within the group)
(c) The component auditors’ opinion of the subsidiaries’ overall level of internal control,
and the reliability of their accounting records
(d) Any limitations placed on the scope of the auditors’ work
(e) Any qualifications, and the reasons for them, made or likely to be made to their audit
reports
(2) Carry out a detailed review of the component auditors’ working papers on each subsidiary
whose results materially affect the view given by the group financial statements. This review
will enable the group auditors to ascertain whether (inter alia):
(a) An up to date permanent file exists with details of the nature of the subsidiary’s
business, its staff organisation, its accounting records, previous year’s financial
statements and copies of important legal documents.
(b) The systems examination has been properly completed, documented and reported on
to management after discussion.
(c) Tests of controls and substantive procedures have been properly and appropriately
carried out, and audit programmes properly completed and signed.
(d) All other working papers are comprehensive and explicit.
(e) The overall review of the financial statements has been adequately carried out, and
adequate use of analytical procedures has been undertaken throughout the audit.
(f) The financial statements agree in all respects with the accounting records and comply
with all relevant legal requirements and accounting standards.
(g) Minutes of board and general meetings have been scrutinised and important matters
noted.
(h) The audit work has been carried out in accordance with approved auditing standards.
(i) The financial statements agree in all respects with the accounting records and comply
with all relevant legal and professional requirements.
HB2021
(j) The audit work has been properly reviewed within the firm of auditors and any
laid‑down quality control procedures adhered to.
(k) Any points requiring discussion with the holding company’s management have been
noted and brought to the group auditors’ attention (including any matters which might
warrant a modification in the audit report on the subsidiary company’s financial
statements).
(l) Adequate audit evidence has been obtained to form a basis for the audit opinion on
both the subsidiaries’ financial statements and those of the group.
If the group auditors are not satisfied as a result of the above review, they should arrange for
further audit work to be carried out either by the component auditors on their behalf, or jointly
with them. The component auditors are fully responsible for their own work; any additional tests
are those required for the purpose of the audit of the group financial statements.

12.1 Intra-group balances should agree because, in the preparation of consolidated accounts, it is
necessary to cancel them out. If they do not cancel out then the group accounts will be
displaying an item which has no value outside of the group and profits may be correspondingly
under- or overstated. The audit procedures required to check that intra-group balances agree
would be as follows.
(1) Obtain and review a copy of the parent company’s instructions to all group members
relating to the procedures for reconciliation and agreement of year-end intra-group
balances. Particular attention should be paid to the treatment of ‘in transit’ items to ensure
that there is a proper cut-off.
(2) Obtain a schedule of intra-group balances from all group companies and check the details
therein to the summary prepared by the parent company. The details on these schedules
should also be independently confirmed in writing by the other auditors involved.
(3) Nil balances should also be confirmed by both the group companies concerned and their
respective auditors.
(4) The details on the schedules in (2) above should also be agreed to the details in the
financial statements of the individual group companies which are submitted to the parent
company for consolidation purposes.
12.2 Where one company in a group supplies goods to another company at cost plus a percentage,
and such goods remain in inventory at the year end, then the group inventory will contain an
element of unrealised profit. In the preparation of the group accounts, best accounting practice
requires that an allowance should be made for this unrealised profit.
In order to verify that intra-group profit in inventory has been correctly accounted for in the
group accounts, the audit procedures required would be as follows.
(1) Confirm the group’s procedures for identification of such inventory and their notification to
the parent company who will be responsible for making the required provision.
(2) Obtain and review schedules of intra-group inventory from group companies and confirm
that the same categories of inventory have been included as in previous years.
(3) Select a sample of invoices for goods purchased from group companies and check to see
that these have been included in year-end intra-group inventory as necessary and obtain
confirmation from component auditors that they have satisfactorily completed a similar
exercise.
(4) Check the calculation of the allowance for unrealised profit and confirm that this has been
arrived at on a consistent basis with that used in earlier years, after making due allowance
for any known changes in the profit margins operated by various group companies.
(5) Check the schedules of intra-group inventory against the various inventory sheets and
consider whether the level of intra-group inventory appears to be reasonable in
comparison with previous years, ensuring that satisfactory explanations are obtained for
any material differences.
HB2021

1 Burdett
Goodwill: £380,000
Excess of assets/liabilities over cost of combination: Nil
Swain Thamin
£’000 £’000
Consideration transferred 1,340 340
NCI (20% × £1.2m) / (40% × £680,000) 240 272
1,580 612
Net assets of acquiree (1,200) (680)
Goodwill / Gain on bargain purchase 380 (68)
See IFRS 3.32 and 34. The second acquisition resulted in an excess over the cost of combination
which should be recognised immediately in profit.
2 Sheliak
Depreciation charge: decrease by £10,000
Carrying amount: decrease by £30,000
Depreciation charge: Sheliak (£1m / 8 years) £125,000

Parotia (£575,000 / 5 years) £115,000
Decrease £10,000
Carrying amount: Sheliak (£1m × 3/8 years) £375,000
Parotia (£575,000 × 3/5 years) £345,000
Decrease £30,000
Fair value adjustments not reflected in the books must be adjusted for on consolidation. In this
example the depreciation is decreased by the difference between Sheliak’s depreciation charge and
Parotia’s fair value depreciation calculation. The carrying amount is decreased by the difference
between Sheliak’s carrying value at 31 December 20X7 and Parotia’s carrying value at 31 December
20X7.
3 Finch
£207,000
£’000
Net assets per SFP (£8.1m – £1.3m) 6,800
Fair value adjustment to property 300
Contingent liability (20)
Adjusted net assets 7,080
HB2021
Net assets is increased by the fair value adjustment of £300,000 and decreased by the contingent
liability, which is recognised in accordance with IFRS 3.23.
Goodwill is therefore calculated as:
£’000
Ordinary shares 15% × (£7.08m – £2.5m) 687
Preference shares 60% × £2.5m 1,500
7,287
Net assets of acquiree (7,080)
Goodwill 207
4 Maackia
£1,780,000
£’000 £’000
Non-controlling interest (fair value) 1,800
6,600
Net assets of acquiree
Draft 4,600
Business held for sale ((£760,000 – £40,000) – £500,000) 220
(4,820)
Goodwill 1,780
In allocating the cost of the business combination to the assets and liabilities acquired, the business
that is on the market for immediate sale should be valued in accordance with IFRS 5 at fair value less
costs to sell (IFRS 3.31).
The defined benefit plan net asset should be recognised in accordance with IAS 19 (IFRS 3.26).
5 Gibbston
(a) £4.9m
£’000 £’000
Consideration transferred: Cash 15,000
Deferred cash (£5.5m/1.1) 5,000
Contingent cash (£13.3m/1.13) × 45% 4,500
24,500
Non-controlling interest: Net assets at 1 Jan 20X7 20,000
Loss to acquisition (£3m × 4/12) (1,000)
Fair value adjustment 9,000
30% × 28,000 8,400
32,900
HB2021

£’000 £’000
Net assets of acquiree (28,000)
Goodwill 4,900
IFRS 3.39 requires contingent consideration capable of reliable measurement to be included at

fair value regardless of whether payment is probable.
The net assets at the acquisition date are those at the start of the year adjusted for the fair value
increase of plant (£9m) less the losses between the start of the year and the acquisition date.
(b) £1.2m share of loss
£m
Non-controlling interest share of loss:
Loss: Acquisition to 31 December (8/12 × £3m) 2
Extra depreciation (£9m/3 years × 8/12) 2
4 × 30% = £1.2m
(c) £7.2m
£m
Non-controlling interest in SFP
Share of the net assets at the date of acquisition (£28m × 30%) 8.4
Share of loss since acquisition (part (b)) (1.2)
7.2
6 Supermall
Supermall has been set up as a separate vehicle. As such, it could be either a joint operation or joint
venture, so other facts must be considered.
There are no facts that suggest that the two real estate companies have rights to substantially all the
benefits of the assets of Supermall or an obligation for its liabilities.
Each party’s liability is limited to any unpaid capital contribution.
As a result, each party has an interest in the net assets of Supermall and should account for it as a
joint venture using the equity method in accordance with IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements.
7 Green and Yellow

Orange
Green wishes to account for its arrangement with Yellow using the equity method. It can only do so if
the arrangement meets the criteria in IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements for a joint venture.
A joint arrangement is an arrangement, as here, of which two or more parties have joint control. A
joint venture is a joint arrangement whereby the parties that have control of the arrangement have
rights to the net assets of the arrangement.
Orange is a separate vehicle. As such, it could be either a joint operation or joint venture, so other
facts must be considered.
There are no facts that suggest that Green and Yellow have rights to substantially all the benefits of
the assets of Orange or an obligation for its liabilities.
Each party’s liability is limited to any unpaid capital contribution.
As a result, each party has an interest in the net assets of Orange and should account for it as a joint
venture using the equity method.
HB2021
Pipeline
Since Green has joint control over the pipeline, even though its interest is only 10%, it would not be
appropriate to show the pipeline as an investment. This is a joint arrangement under IFRS 11.
The pipeline is a jointly controlled asset, and it is not structured through a separate vehicle.
Accordingly, the arrangement is a joint operation.
IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements requires that a joint operator recognises line by line the following in
relation to its interest in a joint operation:
(1) Its assets, including its share of any jointly held assets
(2) Its liabilities, including its share of any jointly incurred liabilities
(3) Its revenue from the sale of its share of the output arising from the joint operation
(4) Its share of the revenue from the sale of the output by the joint operation, and
(5) Its expenses, including its share of any expenses incurred jointly
operator.
8 Stuhr
£6,600,000
£’000
Non-controlling interest (fair value) 2,000
Fair value of retained interest 3,000
15,000
Fair value of net assets of Bismuth (8,400)
Goodwill 6,600
9 Fleurie
There is no loss of control and therefore:
• no gain or loss arises on disposal of the 15% holding in Merlot; and
• there is no change to the carrying value of goodwill.
Instead, the transaction is accounted for in shareholders’ equity, with any difference between
proceeds and the change in the non-controlling interest being recognised in retained earnings.
The non-controlling interest before disposal is the fair value at acquisition plus the fair value of post-
acquisition reserves to the date of disposal, as represented by change in net assets:
£
Fair value at acquisition 350,000
Share of post-acquisition reserves [(£3.5m – £2.2m) × 15%)] 195,000
545,000
Increase in NCI: 15%/15% 545,000
NCI after change: 30% 1,090,000
HB2021

The non-controlling interest has therefore increased by £545,000, recorded by:
DEBIT Cash proceeds £560,000

CREDIT NCI £545,000
CREDIT Retained earnings £15,000
10 Chianti
On disposal of Barolo, the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
will include a gain on disposal of £6,000 (as calculated below).
The group share of the revaluation surplus recognised by Barolo is not reclassified into profit or loss
but is transferred from the group revaluation reserve to group retained earnings.
£ £
Proceeds 340,000
Fair value of interest retained 20,000
360,000
Net assets 320,000
Goodwill (£70,000 – £20,000) 50,000
NCI (5% × 320,000) (16,000)
(354,000)
Gain on disposal 6,000
11 Porter
Porter Group statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 May 20X6
£m £m
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 44
Impairment losses on goodwill (W2) 3
Foreign exchange loss (W8) 2
Investment income – share of profit of associate (12)
Investment income – gains on financial assets at fair value through
profit or loss (6)
Interest expense 16
159
Increase in trade receivables (132 – 112 – 16) (4)
Decrease in inventories (154 – 168 – 20) 34
Decrease in trade payables (110 – 98 – 12 – (W8) 17 PPE payable) (17)
Interest paid (W7) (12)
HB2021
£m £m
Acquisition of subsidiary, net of cash acquired (26 – 8) (18)
Purchase of financial assets (W4) (10)
Dividend received from associate (W3) 11
Proceeds from issuance of share capital (332 + 212 – 300 – 172 – (80 ×
60%/2 × £2.25)) 18
Proceeds from long-term borrowings (380 – 320) 60
Dividend paid (45)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests (W5) (4)
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 48
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 158
WORKINGS
(1) Additions to property, plant and equipment
PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
£m £m
b/d
Revaluation 58 Depreciation 44
Acquisition of subsidiary 92
Additions on credit (W8) 15
 Additions for cash 25 c/d 958
1,002 1,002
(2) Impairment losses on goodwill

GOODWILL
£m £m
b/d 10
Acq’n of subsidiary
[(80 × 60%/2 × 2.25) + 26 +
(120 × 40%) – 120 net
assets] 8  Impairment losses 3
c/d 15
18 18
HB2021

(3) Dividends received from associate
INVESTMENT IN ASSOCIATE
£m £m
b/d 39
P/L 12  Dividends received 11
OCI 8
–– c/d 48
59 59
(4) Purchase of financial assets

FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS
£m £m
b/d 0
P/L 6
 Additions 10
–– c/d 16
16 16
(5) Dividends paid to non-controlling interests

NON-CONTROLLING INTERESTS
£m £m
b/d 28
 Dividends paid 4 TCI 12
Acquisition of subsidiary (120 ×
c/d 84 40%) 48
88 88
(6) Income taxes paid

INCOME TAX PAYABLE
£m £m
b/d (deferred tax) 26
b/d (current tax) 22
P/L 34
 Income taxes paid 37 OCI 17
c/d (deferred tax) 38 Acquisition of subsidiary 4
c/d (current tax) 28 –––
103 103
HB2021
(7) Interest paid
INTEREST PAYABLE
£m £m
b/d 4
P/L 16
 Interest paid 12
c/d 8 ––
20 20
(8) Foreign currency transaction

Transactions recorded on:
£m £m
(1) 5 March
DEBIT Property, plant and equipment (102m/6.8) 15
CREDIT Payables 15
(2) 31 May Payable = 102m/6.0 = £17m
DEBIT P/L (Admin expenses) 2
CREDIT Payables (17 – 15) 2
12 Tastydesserts
Consolidated statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December 20X2
£’000 £’000
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 78
Share of profit of associates (120)
Interest expense –––––
624
Increase in receivables (2,658 – 2,436 – 185) (37)
Increase in inventories (1,735 – 1,388 – 306) (41)
Increase in payables (1,915 – 1,546 – 148) 221
Interest paid –
Acquisition of subsidiary Custardpowders net of cash acquired (55 – 7) (48)
Dividends received from associates (W3) 100
HB2021

£’000 £’000
Dividends paid (63)
Net cash used in financing activities (63)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year (266)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year (133)
WORKINGS
(1) Purchase of property, plant and equipment
PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
£’000 £’000
b/d 3,685
Acquisition of Custardpowders 694 Depreciation 78
 Cash additions 463 c/d 4,764
4,842 4,842
(2) Goodwill
GOODWILL
£’000 £’000
b/d –
Acquisition of Custardpowders 42  Impairment losses 0
(1,086 – (1,044 × 100%)) –– c/d 42
42 42
(3) Dividends received from associates

INVESTMENT IN ASSOCIATE
£’000 £’000
b/d 2,175
Share of profit 120  Dividends received 100
–––– c/d 2,195
2,295 2,295
(4) Reconciliation of share capital
£’000
Share capital plus premium b/d 4,776
Issued to acquire sub (120,000 × £2.80) 336
Share capital plus premium c/d (4,896 + 216) 5,112
 no shares have been issued for cash during the year.
HB2021
(5) Income taxes paid
INCOME TAX PAYABLE
£’000 £’000
b/d– current tax 200
– deferred tax 180
 Cash paid 160 P/L 126
c/d– current tax 235
– deferred tax 111
506 506
HB2021

Chapter 21
Foreign currency translation

and hyperinflation
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Objective and scope of IAS 21
2 The functional currency
3 Reporting foreign currency transactions
4 Foreign currency translation of financial statements
5 Foreign currency and consolidation
6 Disclosure
7 Other matters
8 Reporting foreign currency cash flows
9 Reporting in hyperinflationary economies
10 Audit focus
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
21
Learning outcomes
• Determine and calculate how exchange rate variations are recognised and measured and how
they can impact on reported performance, position and cash flows of single entities and groups
• Demonstrate, explain and appraise how foreign exchange transactions are measured and how the
financial statements of foreign operations are translated
• Appraise corporate reporting policies, estimates and measurements for single entities and groups
in the context of an audit
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 7(a), 7(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f), 18(c)
21

of this chapter.

1 Objective and Approach This section would N/A

scope of IAS 21 This short section is not be examined
The management of an introduction to directly, but you
foreign exchange the topic. would need to be
risk is an important able to apply the
You must approach.
aspect of business understand the
operations. difference between
There are two monetary and non-
aspects to IAS 21: monetary items in
• Buying and this section.
selling goods Pay particular
overseas priced attention to
in a foreign Paragraph 1.3:
currency summary of
• Translating the approach.
financial Stop and think
statements of a
The first, but not the
foreign
second of the two
subsidiary before
aspects identified,
consolidation.
will be familiar to
you from your
earlier studies.
2 The functional Approach Functional currency N/A

currency Learn and try to comes up a lot, in There are no
In a working context remember the the context of interactive
you may have to primary and buying and selling questions in this
establish the secondary goods overseas, section. However,
functional currency, indicators of group accounts and you can test yourself
HB2021

and determine the functional currency. hedging. It has also by covering up the
accounting Then carefully go come up in an audit solution to worked
treatment of through worked context and in example 2.
exchange example 1. conjunction with
differences on Stop and think deferred tax.
monetary and non-
monetary items. The functional
currency of an entity
may not be obvious.
3 Reporting foreign Approach While this topic IQ2: Rumble plc

currency You have covered comes up fairly This question on
transactions this area in your FAR regularly, in an exam buying and selling
Importing and studies, but only at you are more likely goods from a
exporting goods Level C. Read to get foreign foreign supplier
introduces foreign through Sections currency covers a similar
exchange risk and 3.1 (initial transactions in the transaction in four
results in earnings measurement), 3.2 context of a group, different scenarios.
volatility with (subsequent since this was not
reporting measurement) and covered at
implications on 3.3 (recognition of Professional Level.
earnings and cash exchange
flow. differences)
focusing on the
worked examples.
Stop and think
What is a monetary
item?
4 Foreign currency Approach You may meet a IQ4: Translation of a

translation of Focus on the situation where the foreign operation
financial statements translation rules in wrong exchange An introductory
IAS 21 contains paragraph 4.1. You rate has been used, question to practise
rules for the will need to learn and asked to give the basics before
translation of these. Then learn advice as to the going on to full
financial statements the reasons for and correct one, consolidation.
of a foreign treatment of possibly in an
operation from the exchange auditing or ethics
functional currency differences in context.
to the presentation paragraph 4.2. The
currency. worked example is
comprehensive and
needs to be studied
carefully.
Stop and think
What rate do you
use to translate
equity?
5 Foreign currency Approach You may be N/A

and consolidation Remind yourself of required to prepare Although there are
This section deals the translation rules consolidated no full interactive
with the accounting using the summary financial statements questions in this
requirements for in 5.1. involving an section, you can use
reporting of foreign overseas subsidiary, the worked
transactions, but you are also examples by
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 21: Foreign currency translation and hyperinflation 1193

consolidation of The main issue is likely to have to covering up the

foreign subsidiaries what to do with the adjust them. solution and also
and goodwill and exchange Remember that practise a full FX
fair value differences on although the foreign consolidation using
adjustments. consolidation. The currency aspect self-test question
worked example appears complex, 14.
Darius is very these consolidations
comprehensive. have much in
Stop and think common with
ordinary
Why do exchange consolidations.
differences arise?
How is goodwill
translated?
6 Disclosure Approach Disclosures have N/A

The disclosure Read through and not yet been
requirements of IAS highlight. examined.
21 are not Stop and think
particularly onerous.
What should be
disclosed where
there is a change in
the functional
currency?
7 Other matters Approach This topic could N/A

The most important Note that the come up as a
issue in this section calculation of non- discussion point, for
is the treatment of controlling interest, example, the impact
non-controlling including the of any future
interest. exchange rate, changes in
varies according to exchange rates on
whether full the consolidated
goodwill or partial financial statements.
goodwill is used.
Stop and think
How is the non-
controlling interest
in profit or loss
arrived at?
8 Reporting foreign Approach Foreign currency N/A

currency cash flows The main point is cash flows are likely Although there are
This section covers that the cash flows to be examined in no full interactive
the impact of and transactions the context of questions in this
foreign currency on should be translated hedging (see section, you can
statements of cash into the entity’s Chapter 17). practise this topic
flows. functional currency using self-test
at the transaction question 15.
date.
Stop and think
Although the
translation of
foreign currency
amounts does not
HB2021

affect the cash flow

of an entity,
translation
differences relating
to cash and cash
equivalents are part
of the changes in
cash and cash
equivalents during a
period.
9 Reporting in Approach This standard has N/A

hyperinflationary Read through not yet been
economies quickly and audit examined.
In recent years the worked
levels of general example.
inflation in G7 and Key point: the
developed financial statements
countries have been of a foreign
low, so the operation operating
management and in a
reporting of hyperinflationary
inflationary price economy must be
rises has not been a adjusted under IAS
major challenge to 29 before they are
investors and the translated into the
users of financial parent’s reporting
statements. currency and then
consolidated.
Stop and think
This topic is only
examinable at Level
D, so is not a major
priority compared
with IAS 21.
10 Audit focus Approach The integrated IQ5: Overseas

The audit of foreign Foreign subsidiaries nature of the subsidiary
subsidiaries was introduce additional Corporate This question asks
considered in risks because the Reporting exam for the risks that the
Chapter 20. This parent may have means that the audit auditor must take
section gives some less control. may give rise to a into account, both
further points and a financial reporting with the financial
Additional audit issue relating to IAS
full exam-style procedures are statements of the
integrated question. 21. Alternatively, the overseas subsidiary
therefore needed. financial reporting and the group
Stop and think of foreign currency financial statements.
transactions may
Which calculations
give rise to a
would you need to
discussion of audit
check/re-perform?
risk and procedures.
HB2021

1 Objective and scope of IAS 21
Section overview
This section provides an overview of the objective, scope and main definitions of IAS 21, The Effects
of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates.
IAS 21 deals with two situations where foreign currency impacts financial statements:
(a) An entity which buys or sells goods overseas, priced in a foreign currency
A UK company might buy materials from Canada, pay for them in Canadian dollars, then sell its
finished goods in Germany, receiving payment in euros or some other currency. If the company
owes money in a foreign currency at the end of the accounting year or holds assets bought in a
foreign currency, the assets and related liabilities must be translated into the local currency (in
this case pounds sterling), in order to be shown in the books of account.
(b) The translation of foreign currency subsidiary financial statements before consolidation
A UK company might have a subsidiary abroad (ie, a foreign entity that it owns), and the
subsidiary will trade in its own local currency. The subsidiary will keep books of account and
prepare its annual financial statements in its own currency. However, at the year end, the parent
company must ‘consolidate’ the results of the overseas subsidiary into its group accounts.
Therefore the assets and liabilities and the annual profits of the subsidiary must be translated
from the foreign currency into pounds sterling.
If foreign currency exchange rates remained constant, there would be no accounting problem in
either of these situations. However, foreign exchange rates are continually changing, sometimes
significantly, between the start and the end of the accounting year. For example, in 2010 the British
pound was strong against the euro, as a result of the problems in the Eurozone. It weakened in 2011,
strengthened again by late 2012, then weakened in early 2013. By 2015 it had strengthened again.
1.1 Objective of IAS 21

An entity may carry on foreign activities in either of the two ways outlined above.
In either case, currency fluctuations will affect the financial position of the entity, when foreign
currency transactions or items are translated into the entity’s reporting currency.
The objective of IAS 21 is to produce rules that entities should follow in the translation of foreign
currency activities.
1.2 Scope of IAS 21

IAS 21 applies in the following cases.
• In accounting for transactions and balances in foreign currencies except for those derivative
transactions and balances that are within the scope of IFRS 9, Financial Instruments
• In translating the results and financial position of foreign operations that are included in the
financial statements of the entity by consolidation or the equity method
• In translating an entity’s results and financial position into a presentation currency
Definitions
Foreign currency: A currency other than the functional currency of the entity.
Functional currency: The currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates.
Presentation currency: The currency in which the financial statements are presented.
Exchange rate: The ratio of exchange for two currencies.
Closing rate: The spot exchange rate at the reporting date.
Spot exchange rate: The exchange rate for immediate delivery.
Exchange difference: The difference resulting from translating a given number of units of one
currency into another currency at different exchange rates.
HB2021

Monetary items: Units of currency held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in a fixed or
determinable number of units of currency.
Group: A parent and all its subsidiaries.
Foreign operations: Defined as any subsidiary, associate, joint venture or branch of a reporting entity,
the activities of which are based or conducted in a country or currency other than those of the
reporting entity.
Net investment in a foreign operation: The amount of the reporting entity’s interest in the net assets
of that operation.
1.3 Summary of approach required by the standard

For the preparation of financial statements, an entity needs to determine its functional currency. This
is discussed in section 2 below. For group financial statements, there is no requirement for a group
functional currency; each entity within a group can have its own functional currency.
When an entity enters into a transaction denominated in a currency other than its own functional
currency, then it must translate the foreign currency items into its own functional currency according
to IAS 21. This is covered in section 3.
When transactions create assets and liabilities that remain outstanding at the reporting date, then
these items need to be translated into the entity’s functional currency following the provisions of IAS
21. This is discussed in section 3.
Where a reporting entity comprises a number of individual entities, some of them with their own
functional currencies, it is necessary for the constituent entities to translate their results into the
presentation currency of the parent, in order to be included in the reporting entity’s financial
statements. This is covered in sections 4 and 5.
Section 6 deals with disclosures for foreign currency transactions.
2 The functional currency

Section overview
This section defines the functional currency of an entity and discusses the criteria that need to be met
for a currency to be adopted by an entity as its functional currency.
2.1 Determining functional currency

Each entity, whether an individual company, a parent of a group, or an operation within a group (such
as a subsidiary, associate or branch), should determine its functional currency and measure its results
and financial position in that currency.
The functional currency is the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity
operates and it is normally the currency in which the entity primarily generates and expends cash.
Where an entity is registered in a particular national jurisdiction and the majority of its transactions
take place there, that jurisdiction’s currency will be the entity’s functional currency. In practice, many
entities operate internationally, with group entities or business divisions located worldwide. In such
circumstances, management will be required to make a reasoned judgement in respect of each
entity/division, based on the available facts.
Where the functional currency of an entity is not obvious, an explanation of why a particular currency
was identified as being its functional currency would aid users’ understanding of the business
operations of the entity.
HB2021

2.2 Indicators of functional currency
Under IAS 21, the management of a company needs to determine the functional currency of the
company by assessing various indicators of the economic environment in which the company
operates. IAS 21 provides primary and secondary indicators for use in the determination of an
entity’s functional currency, as summarised below.
Primary indicators
• The currency that mainly influences sales prices for goods and services (often the currency in
which prices are denominated and settled)
• The currency of the country whose competitive forces and regulations mainly determine the sales
prices of its goods and services
• The currency that mainly influences labour, material and other costs of providing goods or
services (often the currency in which prices are denominated and settled)
Secondary indicators
• The currency in which funds from financing activities (raising loans and issuing equity) are
generated
• The currency in which receipts from operating activities are usually retained
2.3 Functional currency of foreign operations

In addition to the five indicators mentioned above, four additional factors are considered in
determining the functional currency of a foreign operation and whether its functional currency is the
same as that of the reporting entity.
• Whether the foreign operation carries out its business as though it were an extension of the
reporting entity rather than with a significant degree of autonomy
• Whether transactions with the parent are a high or low proportion of the foreign operation’s
activities
• Whether cash flows from the activities of the foreign operation directly affect the cash flows of
the parent and are readily available for remittance to it
• Whether cash flows from the activities of the foreign operation are sufficient to service existing
and normally expected debt obligations without funds being made available by the reporting
entity
Worked example: Functional currency determination 1

Bogdankur, a small food processing company located in Denmark, is trading almost exclusively with
Germany where the currency is the euro. The management of the company needs to decide on the
functional currency of the company, ie, whether to use the Danish krone or the euro, and is using the
following information (amounts are denominated in krone except as indicated).
Denominated in
€ Settled in €
€m % %
Revenue
Export sales 750 100 100
Domestic sales 250 0 0
Total revenues 1,000 75 75
Materials 450 15
Energy and gas 80
Staff costs 80
Other production expenses 30
Depreciation 40
HB2021

Denominated in
€ Settled in €
€m % %
Selling, general and administrative expenses 60 16
Capital expenditure 70
Dividends 180
The main monetary assets and liabilities at 31 December 20X6 were as follows:
Held in € Expressed in €
€m % %
Cash 120 90
Total accounts receivable 140 80
Trade payables 170 – 0
Borrowings 400 10
Requirement
How might the management of the company determine the functional currency?
Solution
The management of the company has decided using the guidance provided by the IFRS to adopt
the Danish krone as its functional currency, based on the fact that while the currency that influences
sales prices is the euro, the domestic currency influences costs and financing.
Worked example: Functional currency determination 2

Entity A operates an oil refinery in Nigeria. All of the entity’s income is denominated in US dollars, as
oil trades in US dollars globally. About 20% of its operational expenses are dollar-denominated
salaries and another 25% is imports of equipment denominated in US dollars. The remaining 55% of
the operational expenses are incurred in Nigeria and are denominated in Naira. Depreciation costs
are denominated in US dollars since the initial investment was in US dollars.
Requirement
What is the appropriate functional currency for Entity A?
Solution
The currency that mainly influences sales prices is the dollar. The currency that mainly influences
costs is not clear, as 55% of the operational costs are in Naira and 45% are in US dollars. Depreciation
should not be taken into account, because it is a non-cash cost, and the economic environment is
where an entity generates and expenses cash.
Since the revenue side is influenced primarily by the US dollar and the cost side is influenced by both
the dollar and the Naira, management will be justified on the basis of IAS 21 guidance to determine
the US dollar as its functional currency.
You may be required to determine the functional currency of an entity. It is important to

communicate your arguments clearly, so that you will still get some credit even if you come to the
wrong conclusion.
HB2021

2.4 Change of functional currency
An entity’s functional currency may change when its business operations change, leading to a
different primary economic environment being identified. This is not a change in accounting policy,
but instead results from a change in circumstances, and therefore the new functional currency should
be adopted prospectively from the date of that change. The new functional currency is applied by
retranslating all items and comparative amounts into the new currency at the date of the change in
circumstances. The carrying amounts of non-monetary items translated into the new currency at the
date of change should be deemed to be their historical translated amounts.
Worked example: Change in functional currency

An entity commenced trading many years ago in Belgium, using the euro (€) as its functional
currency. After a number of years the entity started exporting its products to the UK, invoicing sales in
UK pounds. Several years later the entity set up a branch in the UK as a small manufacturing function,
incurring expenses and receiving sales proceeds in pounds sterling (£). With a fall in demand in
Belgium by the end of 20X6 its activity in the UK came to represent 75% of the entity’s activity.
Early in 20X7, the entity’s management concluded that the UK was now its primary economic
environment, with 1 January 20X8 being the date when the entity’s functional currency changed from
the euro to the pound.
The entity’s equity and net assets at 31 December 20X7 were €80,000,000 and the exchange rate
was £1: €1.59.
Requirement
How might the change be reflected in the financial statements?
Solution
The entity’s equity and net assets were £50,314,465 when the pound sterling became its functional
currency.
Where an entity’s functional currency has changed as a result of changes in its trading operations
during a period, the entity is required to disclose that the change has arisen, along with the reason
for the change.
2.5 Functional currency of a hyperinflationary economy

If the functional currency is the currency of a hyperinflationary economy, the entity’s financial
statements are restated in accordance with IAS 29, Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary
Economies (covered later in this chapter). An entity cannot avoid restatement in accordance with IAS
29 by, for example, adopting as its functional currency a currency other than the functional currency
determined in accordance with IAS 21.
3 Reporting foreign currency transactions

Section overview
This section deals with the IAS 21 rules governing the initial and subsequent recognition of items
denominated in foreign currency.
Foreign currency transactions are transactions which are denominated in foreign currencies, rather
than in the entity’s functional currency. Such transactions arise when the entity:
• buys or sells goods or services whose price is denominated in a foreign currency;
• borrows or lends funds where the amounts payable or receivable are denominated in a foreign
currency; and
• otherwise acquires or disposes of assets or incurs or settles liabilities denominated in a foreign
currency.
HB2021

Context example: Foreign currency translation
An entity trades in gold and has a US dollar functional currency, as most of its revenues and expenses
are in US dollars. The entity is located in Frankfurt and as a result it also has significant transactions in
euros. It has issued sterling-denominated share capital to its UK parent. Transactions with the parent
are denominated in £. Which of the following transactions should management treat as foreign
currency transactions?
• Euro transactions
• US dollar transactions
• Sterling transactions
The euro and sterling transactions are foreign currency transactions. The fact that the entity is located
in Frankfurt does not preclude it from designating US dollars as its functional currency. All
transactions which are not denominated in the entity’s functional currency are foreign currency
transactions.
3.1 Foreign currency transactions: initial recognition

An entity is required to recognise foreign currency transactions in its functional currency. The entity
should achieve this by translating the foreign currency amount at the spot exchange rate between
the functional currency and the foreign currency at the date on which the transaction took place.
The date of the transaction is the date on which the transaction first met the relevant recognition
criteria.
Context example: Initial recognition

Albion Ltd is a UK manufacturing company with sterling as its functional currency. The company has
ordered raw materials from a French supplier for €200,000. It recorded the transaction on 1 August
20X6, the date of the supplier’s invoice. On that date the exchange rate was £1 = €1.72 and the
amount recorded as purchase price is £116,279.
3.1.1 Average rate

Where an entity has a high volume of transactions in foreign currencies, translating each transaction
may be an onerous task, so an average rate may be used. For example, a duty-free shop at Heathrow
airport may receive a large amount of dollars and euros every day and may opt to translate each
currency into sterling using an average weekly rate.
IAS 21 provides no further guidance on how an average rate should be determined, and therefore an
entity should develop a method which is easily implemented with regard to limitations in its
accounting systems. Application of an average monthly rate, based on actual daily rates, would seem
a reasonable approach. Consistent application of the process for determining an appropriate
average rate should be adopted each period.
However, as the average rate is an approximation of the rate of the day of the transaction, an average
rate should not be adopted if exchange rates or underlying transactions fluctuate significantly (eg,
due to seasonality), because in this case an average rate is not a good approximation.
Worked example: Use of average exchange rate

An entity, which has sterling as its functional currency, acquires a Ruritanian denominated bond on 1
January 20X1 for RU£1,000. The bond has five years to maturity and carries a variable market rate of
interest which is currently 6%. Interest is accrued on a daily basis for a calendar year. Interest is paid
on 31 January in the following calendar year (that is, interest for 20X1 will be paid on 31 January
20X2).
Management intends to hold the bond to maturity. The bond is therefore carried at amortised cost.
The interest income and exchange differences are recognised in profit or loss. The exchange rate at
the date of acquisition was RU£1 = £1.50.
HB2021

At 31 December 20X1, the exchange rate was RU£1 = £2.00. The average rate for the period is RU£1
= £1.75 (based on average rates published by the Central Bank of Ruritania, which are daily
weighted average rates).
Requirement
What rate should management use for the translation of interest income that accrues on a daily basis
when there is a significant fluctuation in the exchange rate?
Solution
Management should use the daily weighted average exchange rate published by the Central Bank of
Ruritania. Interest income accrues evenly through the period and the weighted average rate will
produce the same result as a daily actual rate calculation.
The use of an unweighted average rate would not be appropriate because exchange rates fluctuate
significantly.
Recognition of interest receivable:
DEBIT Investment in debt instrument £105 (RU£60 × 1.75)

CREDIT Interest income £105
3.1.2 Multiple exchange rates

It may be the case that a country operates a two (or more) rate system, such as one for capital
transactions and another for revenue items. Where more than one exchange rate exists, the rate to
be applied is the one at which the transaction or balance would have been settled if settlement had
taken place at the measurement date. If there is a temporary lack of published exchange rates
between two currencies, the entity should apply the next available exchange rate published.
3.1.3 Suspension of rates

On certain occasions, developing countries experience economic problems that affect the
convertibility of their currency. There is no exchange rate to be used in this case to translate foreign
currency transactions. The standard requires companies to use the rate on the first subsequent date
at which exchanges could be made.
3.2 Subsequent measurement

A foreign currency transaction may give rise to assets or liabilities that are denominated in a foreign
currency. These assets and liabilities will need to be translated into the entity’s functional currency at
each reporting date. How they will be translated depends on whether the assets or liabilities are
monetary or non-monetary items.
3.2.1 Monetary items

The essential feature of a monetary item, as the definition implies, is the right to receive (or an
obligation to deliver) a fixed or determinable number of units of currency. Examples of monetary
assets include the following:
• Cash and bank balances
• Trade receivables and payables
• Loan receivables and payables
• Foreign currency bonds held as available for sale
• Foreign currency bonds held to maturity
• Pensions and other employee benefits to be paid in cash
• Provisions that are to be settled in cash
• Cash dividends that are recognised as a liability
• A contract to receive (or deliver) a variable number of the entity’s own equity instruments or a
variable amount of assets in which the fair value to be received (or delivered) equals a fixed or
determinable number of units of currency
HB2021

Foreign currency monetary items outstanding at the reporting date shall be translated using the
closing rate. The difference between this amount and the previous carrying amount in functional
currency is an exchange gain or loss (covered in more detail in section 3.3).
3.2.2 Non-monetary items

A non-monetary item does not give the right to receive or create the obligation to deliver a fixed or
determinable number of units of currency. Examples of non-monetary items include the following:
• Amounts prepaid for goods and services (eg, prepaid rent)
• Goodwill
• Intangible assets
• Inventories
• Provisions to be settled by the delivery of a non-monetary asset
• Investments in equity instruments
• Equity investments in subsidiaries, associates or joint ventures
Non-monetary items carried at historical cost are translated using the exchange rate at the date of
the transaction when the asset arose (historical rate). They are not subsequently retranslated in the
individual financial statements of the entity. The foreign currency carrying amount is determined
according to appropriate accounting standards (eg, IAS 2 for inventories, IAS 16 for property, plant
and equipment measured at cost).
Non-monetary items carried at fair value are translated using the exchange rate at the date when the
fair value was determined. The foreign currency fair value of a non-monetary asset is determined by
the relevant standards (eg, IAS 16 for property, plant and equipment and IAS 40 for investment
property).
Interactive question 1: Initial recognition

A UK company lends €10 million to its Portuguese supplier of Port wine to upgrade its production
facilities. At the time of the loan, in July 20X5, the exchange rate was £1 = €2. The loan is repayable
on 31 December 20X5. Initially the loan will be translated and recorded in the UK company’s financial
statements at £5 million. The amount that the company will ultimately receive will depend on the
exchange rate on the date when the loan is repaid.
At 31 December 20X5, the exchange rate was £1 = €2.50.
Requirement
Calculate the exchange gain or loss.
3.2.3 Issues in the measurement of non-monetary assets

(a) Subsequent depreciation should be translated on the same basis as the asset to which it relates,
so the rate at the date of acquisition for assets carried at cost and the rate at the last valuation
date for assets carried at revalued amounts. Application of the depreciation method to the
translated amount will achieve this.
(b) The carrying amount of inventories is the lower of cost and net realisable value in accordance
with IAS 2, Inventories. The carrying amount in the functional currency is determined by
comparing:
(1) the cost, translated at the exchange rate at the date when that amount was determined; and
(2) the net realisable value, translated at the exchange rate at the date when that value was
determined (eg, the closing rate at the reporting date).
HB2021

Worked example: Translation of inventory acquired in a foreign currency
Entity J’s functional currency is the pound sterling. Entity J acquired inventories for $300,000 on 1
July 20X5 when the exchange rate was $1.50: £1. At 31 December 20X5, its carrying amount is
$300,000 and its net realisable value has risen to $340,000. The exchange rate at 31 December 20X5
is $1.80: £1.
Requirement
How should management translate the inventory acquired?
Solution
Expressed in dollars, the inventory value has gone up, its net realisable amount exceeding its
carrying amount. In sterling, the carrying amount using the acquisition date rate is £200,000
($300,000/1.5) and the net realisable amount using the closing rate is £189,000 ($340,000/1.8).
Inventory is stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value in the functional currency and the
carrying amount at 31 December 20X5 is £189,000.
Impairment testing of foreign currency non-monetary assets

Similarly in accordance with IAS 36, Impairment of Assets, the carrying amount of an asset for which
there is an indication of impairment is the lower of:
• the carrying amount, translated at the exchange rate at the date when that amount was
determined; and
• the recoverable amount, translated at the exchange rate at the date when that value was
determined (eg, the closing rate at the reporting date).
The effect of this comparison may be that an impairment loss is recognised in the functional currency
but would not be recognised in the foreign currency or vice versa.
Worked example: Translation of impaired non-monetary item

An entity whose functional currency is the pound sterling acquired on 30 September 20X4 a non-
depreciable foreign currency asset costing $450,000. The exchange rate on 30 September 20X4 was
$1.50/£1 and the asset was recorded at the date of purchase at £300,000. There are indications that
the non-current asset has been impaired during the year.
At 31 December 20X5, the reporting date, the asset’s recoverable amount in foreign currency is
estimated to be $400,000 when £1 = $1.25.
Requirement
How should the transaction be recorded?
Solution
Expressed in foreign currency, the asset has a carrying value of $450,000 and a recoverable amount
of $400,000 and is therefore impaired.
However, when it is expressed in sterling, the asset is not impaired, because its recoverable amount
exceeds its carrying amount. In sterling, the carrying amount, using the acquisition date rate, is
£300,000 ($450,000/1.5) and the recoverable amount, using the closing rate, is £320,000
($400,000/1.25). The depreciation of the foreign currency relative to pounds sterling has offset the
fall in the value of the asset due to impairment, therefore no impairment charge is required.
3.2.4 Measurement of financial assets

Initial measurement
Financial assets can be monetary or non-monetary and may be carried at fair value or amortised
cost. Where a financial instrument is denominated in a foreign currency, it is initially recognised at fair
value in the foreign currency and translated into the functional currency at spot rate. The fair value of
HB2021

the financial instrument is usually the same fair value of the consideration given in the case of an
asset or received in the case of a liability.
Subsequent measurement
At each year end, the foreign currency amount of financial instruments carried at amortised cost is
translated into the functional currency using either the closing rate (if it is a monetary item) or the
historical rate (if it is a non-monetary item). Financial instruments carried at fair value are translated to
the functional currency using the closing spot rate.
Recognition of exchange differences
The entire change in the carrying amount of a non-monetary investment in equity instruments
including the effect of changes in foreign currency rates, is reported as other comprehensive income
(OCI) at the reporting date.
A change in the carrying amount of monetary financial assets on subsequent measurements is
analysed between the foreign exchange component and the fair value movement. The foreign
exchange component is recognised in profit or loss and the fair value movement is recognised as
other comprehensive income.
The entire change in the carrying amount of financial instruments measured at fair value through
profit or loss, including the effect of changes in foreign currency rates, is recognised in profit or loss.
Worked example: Translation of non-monetary asset

On 1 January 20X5 an entity whose functional currency is the pound sterling purchased a US dollar
denominated equity instrument at its fair value of $500,000. (The entity has made an irrevocable
election under IFRS 9 to record changes in the value of investments in equity instruments in other
comprehensive income.) The exchange rate at acquisition date was $1.90/£. The exchange rates and
the fair value of the instrument denominated in US dollars at different reporting dates are given
below.
Equity instrument value

$/£1 $
31 December 20X5 1.80 480,000
31 December 20X6 1.60 450,000
Requirement
What is the fair value of the asset at 1 January 20X5, 31 December 20X5 and 31 December 20X6 in
pounds sterling, and how will the changes in fair value be accounted for?
Solution
The asset is an investment in equity instruments, therefore a non-monetary financial asset. All
exchange differences are reported in OCI.
Equity Equity Recognised Cumulative

Exchange instrument instrument in the current gains or
rate $/£1 value ($) value (£) period * losses *
1 January 20X5 1.9 500,000 263,158
31 December 20X5 1.8 480,000 266,667 3,509 3,509
31 December 20X6 1.6 450,000 281,250 14,583 18,092
* Change in fair value recognised as other comprehensive income
3.3 Recognition of exchange differences

Exchange differences arise in the following circumstances:
• On retranslation of a monetary item at the year end
HB2021

• When a monetary item is settled in cash (eg, a foreign currency payable is paid)
• Where there is an impairment, revaluation or other fair value change in a non-monetary item
3.3.1 Retranslation of monetary items

Where a monetary item arising from a foreign currency transaction remains outstanding at the
reporting date, an exchange difference arises, being the difference between:
• Initially recording the item at the rate ruling at the date of the transaction (or when it was
translated at a previous reporting date)
• The subsequent retranslation of the monetary item to the rate ruling at the reporting date
Such exchange differences should be reported as part of the profit or loss for the year.
3.3.2 Settlement of monetary items

Exchange differences arising on the settlement of monetary items (receivables, payables, loans, cash
in a foreign currency) should be recognised in profit or loss in the period in which they arise.
There are two situations to consider.
(a) The transaction is settled in the same period as that in which it occurred: all the exchange
difference is recognised in that period.
(b) The transaction is settled in a subsequent accounting period: an exchange difference is
recognised in each intervening period up to the period of settlement, determined by the
change in exchange rates during that period (as per section 3.3.1). A further exchange difference
is recognised in the period of settlement.
Worked example: Recognition of exchange differences on monetary item settled in the

same period
White Cliffs Co, whose year end is 31 December, buys some goods from Rinka SA of France on 30
September. The invoice value is €40,000 and is due for settlement on 30 November. The exchange
rate moved as follows.
€/£1
30 September 1.60
30 November 1.80
Requirement
State the accounting entries in the books of White Cliffs Co.
Solution
The purchase will be recorded in the books of White Cliffs Co using the rate of exchange ruling on
30 September.
DEBIT Purchases £25,000

CREDIT Trade payables £25,000
Being the £ cost of goods purchased for €40,000 (€40,000 ÷ €1.60/£1)

On 30 November, White Cliffs must pay €40,000. This will cost €40,000 ÷ €1.80/£1 = £22,222 and
the company has therefore made an exchange gain of £25,000 – £22,222 = £2,778.
DEBIT Trade payables £25,000

CREDIT Exchange gains: profit or loss £2,778
CREDIT Cash £22,222
HB2021

Worked example: Recognition of exchange differences on monetary item settled in a
subsequent accounting period
White Cliffs Co, whose year end is 31 December, buys some goods from Rinka SA of France on 30
September. The invoice value is €40,000 and is due for settlement in equal instalments on 30
November and 31 January. The exchange rate moved as follows.
€/£1
30 September 1.60
30 November 1.80
31 December 1.90
31 January 1.85
Requirement
State the accounting entries in the books of White Cliffs Co.
Solution
The purchase will be recorded in the books of White Cliffs Co using the rate of exchange ruling on
30 September.
DEBIT Purchases £25,000

CREDIT Trade payables £25,000
Being the £ sterling cost of goods purchased for €40,000 (€40,000 ÷ €1.60/£1)
On 30 November, White Cliffs must pay €20,000 to settle half the payable (£12,500). This will cost
€20,000 ÷ €1.80/£1 = £11,111 and the company has therefore made an exchange gain of £12,500 –
£11,111 = £1,389.

On 31 December, the reporting date, the outstanding liability of £12,500 will be recalculated using
the rate applicable at that date: €20,000 ÷ €1.90/£1 = £10,526. A further exchange gain of £1,974
(£12,500 – £10,526) has been made and will be recorded as follows.

The total exchange gain of £3,363 will be included in the operating profit for the year ending 31
December.
On 31 January, White Cliffs must pay the second instalment of €20,000 to settle the remaining
liability of £10,526. This will cost the company £10,811 (€20,000 ÷ €1.85/£1).

DEBIT Exchange losses: Profit or loss £285
3.3.3 Exceptions to the general rule

As set out above, exchange differences should normally be recognised as part of profit or loss for the
period. This treatment is required in an entity’s own financial statements even in respect of
differences on certain monetary amounts receivable from, or payable to, a foreign operation. If the
HB2021

settlement of these amounts is neither ‘planned nor likely to occur’, they are in effect part of the
entity’s net investment in the foreign operation.
In the following cases the exchange differences on monetary items are not reported in profit or loss
because hedge accounting provisions under IFRS 9 (or IAS 39 if the entity still applies this) overrule
the regulations of IAS 21.
(a) A monetary item designated as a hedge of a net investment in consolidated financial statements.
In this case any exchange difference that forms part of the gain or loss on the hedging
instrument is recognised as other comprehensive income.
(b) A monetary item designated as a hedging instrument in a cash flow hedge. In this case any
exchange difference that forms part of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised
as other comprehensive income.
(c) Exchange differences arising in respect of monetary items which are part of the net investment
are recognised in profit or loss in the individual financial statements of the entity or foreign
operation as appropriate. However, in the consolidated statement of financial position the
exchange differences are recognised in equity. This exemption arises only on consolidation and
is dealt with in the section on consolidation.
3.3.4 Non-monetary items

Where a non-monetary item (eg, inventory or a non-current asset) is recognised at historical cost
(and there is no impairment) then it is translated into the functional currency at the exchange rate on
the date of the transaction. It is not then retranslated at subsequent reporting dates in the individual
financial statements of the entity, and therefore no exchange differences arise.
However, exchange differences do arise on non-monetary items when there has been a change in
their underlying value (eg, fair value changes, revaluations or impairments). These are recognised as
follows.
(a) When a gain or loss on a non-monetary item is recognised as other comprehensive income (for
example, where property denominated in a foreign currency is revalued) any related exchange
differences should also be recognised as other comprehensive income.
(b) When a gain or loss (eg, fair value change) on a non-monetary item is recognised in profit or
loss, any exchange component of that gain or loss is also recognised in profit or loss.
Several examples are given below to highlight the issues that arise in the recognition of exchange
differences on non-monetary items.
Interactive question 2: Rumble plc

Rumble plc is a retailer of fine furniture. On 19 October 20X5 Rumble purchased 100 identical
antique tables from a US supplier for a total of $3,600,000. Rumble has a year end of 31 December
20X5 and uses sterling as its functional currency.
Exchange rates are as follows.
19 October 20X5: £1 = $1.80
15 December 20X5: £1 = $1.90
20 December 20X5: £1 = $1.95
31 December 20X5: £1 = $2.00
Average rate for 20X5: £1 = $1.60
3 February 20X6: £1 = $2.40
Requirement
Determine, according to IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates, the impact of the
above transaction on the profits of Rumble for the year ended 31 December 20X5 and on the
statement of financial position at that date under each of the following alternative assumptions.
Assumption 1: All the tables were sold on 20 December 20X5 and were paid for by Rumble on 15
December 20X5.
HB2021

Assumption 2: All the tables were sold on 3 February 20X6 and were paid for by Rumble on 15
December 20X5.
Assumption 3: All the tables were sold on 15 December 20X5 and were paid for by Rumble on 3
February 20X6.
Assumption 4: 75 of the tables were sold on 15 December 20X5 with the remaining 25 tables being
sold on 3 February 20X6. All the tables were paid for by Rumble on 3 February 20X6.
Worked example: Translation of investment property

An entity whose functional currency is the pound sterling holds an investment property in Singapore.
The investment property is carried at fair value in accordance with IAS 40. The investment property
had a fair value at 31 December 20X2 of S$10,000,000 and S$12,000,000 at 31 December 20X3. The
exchange rates were as follows.
31 December 20X2: £1: S$1.65
31 December 20X3: £1: S$1.63
Requirement
How should management recognise the change in the value of this investment property?
Solution
Management should recognise the investment property at £6,060,606 and £7,361,963 at 31
December 20X2 and 31 December 20X3 respectively.
The change in value is calculated as:
31 December 20X2 (S$10,000,000/1.65) £6,060,606

31 December 20X3 (S$12,000,000/1.63) £7,361,963
Increase in fair value £1,301,357
The increase in fair value of £1,301,357 should be recognised in profit or loss as a gain on
The investment property is a non-monetary asset. The movement in value attributable to movement
in exchange rates £74,363 ($10,000,000/1.65) – ($10,000,000/1.63) should not be recognised
separately because the asset is non-monetary.
Context example: Translation of property – revaluations

A UK-based entity with a sterling functional currency has a property located in Spain which was
acquired at a cost of €6 million when the exchange rate was £1 = €1.50. At the reporting date the
property was revalued to €8 million. The exchange rate on the reporting date was £1 = €1.60.
Ignoring depreciation, the amount that would be recognised as other comprehensive income is:
€ €/£ £
Value at reporting date 8,000,000 1.6 5,000,000
Value at acquisition 6,000,000 1.5 4,000,000
Revaluation surplus recognised in equity 1,000,000
The revaluation surplus may be analysed as follows.
€ €/£ £ £
Change in fair value 2,000,000 1.6 1,250,000
HB2021

€ €/£ £ £
Exchange component of change
6,000,000 1.6 3,750,000
6,000,000 1.5 4,000,000
(250,000)
Revaluation surplus recognised as other
comprehensive income 1,000,000
When presented with a problem like this it is important to break it down into its component parts. It is
clear that the revaluation surplus is made up of two components – the change in fair value and the
exchange movement.
Interactive question 3: Translation of land – revaluations

Entity A, incorporated in Muritania (local currency Muritania lira), is the treasury department of Entity
B which has British pounds as its functional currency. The functional currency of Entity A is also the
British pound, as it is not autonomous from its parent. Entity A’s management follows the revaluation
model in IAS 16 and measures its land and buildings at revalued amounts (based on periodic
valuations as necessary but not less frequent than every three years). A piece of land was acquired on
1 June 20X4 and is not depreciated. It has been revalued on 31 December 20X5 and 31 December
20X6 respectively as follows.
Muritania lira Date Exchange rate £

Cost at acquisition 200,000 Bought on 1 June 20X4 M lira 1 = £1.30 260,000
Fair value 250,000 As at 31 December 20X5 M lira 1 = £1.00 250,000
Fair value 260,000 As at 31 December 20X6 M lira 1 = £1.20 312,000
Requirement
How should management translate the land held at fair value in accordance with IAS 16?
Worked example: Impairment in non-monetary item

A UK-based entity with a sterling functional currency has a property located in Spain which was
acquired at a cost of €6 million when the exchange rate was £1 = €1.50. The property is carried at
cost. At the reporting date the recoverable amount of the property as a result of an impairment
review amounted to €5 million. The exchange rate at the reporting date was £1 = €1.60.
Requirement
Ignoring depreciation, determine the amount of the impairment loss that would be reported in profit
or loss as a result of the impairment.
Solution
Impairment loss
€ €/£ £ £
Carrying amount at reporting date 5,000,000 1.6 3,125,000
HB2021

€ €/£ £ £
Historical cost 6,000,000 1.5 4,000,000
Impairment loss recognised in profit or loss (875,000)
The impairment loss may be analysed as follows.
€ €/£ £ £
Change in value due to impairment 1,000,000 1.6 (625,000)
Exchange component of change
6,000,000 1.6 3,750,000
6,000,000 1.5 4,000,000
(250,000)
Impairment loss recognised in profit or loss (875,000)
Worked example: Translation of financial instruments

Entity A, whose functional currency is the pound sterling, acquired on 30 September 20X4 two
classes of dollar-denominated financial instruments. (Entity A’s accounting year end is 31 December.)
(1) Investments in listed equity instruments for $10 million
(2) Investments in non-listed equity instruments for $10 million
At 31 December, management believe that the cost of the unlisted investments is still a reasonable
approximation of their fair value. The fair value of the listed investments has increased to $14.4
million. An irrevocable election had been made under IFRS 9 to record changes in the value of
investments in equity instruments in other comprehensive income.
Requirement
How should the relevant requirements of IFRS 9 and IAS 32 affect the translation of these financial
instruments into the functional currency at 31 December 20X4?
Exchange rates
30 September 20X4 $1: £1
31 December 20X4 $1.20: £1
Solution
Management should recognise the financial instruments on 31 December 20X4 as follows.
(1) Listed equity instruments of £12 million. The listed shares are measured at fair value on 31
December 20X4, of $14.4 million and translated using the spot rate at the date of valuation,
which is $1.20: £1. The gain of £2 million ($14.4m/1.2 – $10m/1.0) should be recorded as other
(2) Non-listed equity instruments of £10 million. As the shares are recorded at their cost of $10
million, the foreign currency value should be translated to pounds sterling using the spot rate at
the date of the transaction, which was $1: £1.
HB2021

Context example: Translation of a branch into the functional currency
An entity based in the UK with the pound sterling as its functional currency operates a branch in
Portugal where the functional currency is the euro. As the branch is an extension of the entity, the
functional currency of the branch is also the pound sterling, but as a matter of convenience the
branch records a number of transactions in euros. Assume that the €:£ exchange rates have been as
follows.
1 January 20X3 €2.50: £1
1 January 20X4 €2.40: £1
30 June 20X5 €2.10: £1
30 September 20X5 €2.00: £1
31 December 20X5 €2.20: £1
Details of the branch balances at 31 December 20X5 requiring translation and the basis for
calculating their sterling equivalents are as follows. The branch made all its sales on 30 September
20X5, and half of these were outstanding as trade receivables at the year end. All purchases were
made on 30 June 20X5, and half of these are unpaid at 31 December 20X5.
Item Basis Balance Rate

€ £
Plant – acquired on 1 January 20X3
Cost Historical rate 50,000 €2.50: £1 20,000
Accumulated depreciation Historical rate (30,000) €2.50: £1 (12,000)
20,000 8,000
Plant – acquired on 1 January 20X4
Cost Historical rate 30,000 €2.40: £1 12,500
Accumulated depreciation Historical rate (12,000) €2.40: £1 (5,000)
18,000 7,500
Trade receivables Closing rate 50,600 €2.20: £1 23,000
Trade payables Closing rate 25,200 €2.20: £1 11,455
Revenue Actual rate 101,200 €2.00: £1 50,600
Purchases Actual rate 50,400 €2.10: £1 24,000
Depreciation charge for year
1 January 20X3 plant Historical rate 10,000 €2.50: £1 4,000
1 January 20X4 plant Historical rate 6,000 €2.40: £1 2,500
Note that both the accumulated depreciation and the charge for the year are translated at the rate
ruling when the relevant plant was acquired. Revenue and purchases are translated at the rate ruling
when the transaction occurred, but the receivables and payables relating to them (which will have
been initially recognised at those rates) are monetary items which are retranslated at closing rate at
the end of the year.
HB2021

4 Foreign currency translation of financial
statements
Section overview
This section presents the rules for the translation of financial statements from the functional currency
to the presentation currency.
We have discussed in the previous section the requirements of IAS 21 for the translation of foreign
currency transactions. In this section we shall discuss the IAS 21 translation requirements when
foreign activities are undertaken through foreign operations whose financial statements are based on
a different functional currency than that of the parent company. More specifically in this section we
shall discuss the appropriate exchange rate that should be used for the translation of the financial
statements of the foreign operation into the reporting entity’s presentation currency.
Although an entity is required to translate foreign currency items and transactions into its functional
currency, it does not have to present its financial statements in this currency. Instead, IAS 21 permits
an entity a completely free choice over the currency in which it presents its financial statements.
Where the chosen currency, the entity’s presentation currency, is not the entity’s functional currency,
this fact should be disclosed in the financial statements, along with an explanation of why a different
presentation currency has been applied.
The financial statements of a foreign operation operating in a hyperinflationary economy must be
adjusted under IAS 29 before they are translated into the parent’s reporting currency and then
consolidated. When the economy ceases to be hyperinflationary, and the foreign operation ceases
to apply IAS 29, the amounts restated to the price level at the date the entity ceased to restate its
financial statements should be used as the historical costs for translation purposes.
4.1 Translation to the presentation currency when the functional currency is a non-
hyperinflationary currency
The approach adopted for the translation into a presentation currency is also used for the
preparation of consolidated financial statements where a parent has a foreign subsidiary. The
process is set out below.
The following procedures should be followed to translate an entity’s financial statements from its
functional currency into a presentation currency.
(a) Translate all assets and liabilities (both monetary and non-monetary) in the current statement of
financial position using the closing rate at the reporting date.
(b) Translate income and expenditure in the current statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income using the exchange rates ruling at the transaction dates. An
approximation to actual rate is normally used, being the average rate.
(c) Report the exchange differences which arise on translation as other comprehensive income; and
where a foreign subsidiary is not wholly owned, allocate the relevant portion of the exchange
differences to the non-controlling interest.
Note that the comparative figures are the presentation currency amounts as presented the previous
year.
4.1.1 Translation of equity

No guidance is provided as to how amounts in equity should be translated. Using the closing rate
would be consistent with the approach to the translation of assets and liabilities. Translation at
historical rates may seem more appropriate, given the one-off, capital nature of such items such as
share capital. As IAS 21 is not explicit in this respect, either approach may be adopted, although an
entity should follow a consistent policy between periods.
HB2021

4.2 Exchange differences
The exchange differences comprise:
(a) Differences arising from the translation of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income at exchange rates at the transaction dates or at average rates and the
translation of assets and liabilities at the closing rate.
(b) Differences arising on the opening net assets’ retranslation at a closing rate that differs from the
previous closing rate.
Resulting exchange differences are reported as other comprehensive income and classified as a
separate component of equity, because such amounts have not resulted from exchange risks to
which the entity is exposed, but purely through changing the currency in which the financial
statements are presented. To report such exchange differences in profit or loss would distort the
results from the trading operations, as shown in the functional currency financial statements, since
these differences are unrelated to the foreign operation’s trading performance or financial operation.
Worked example: Translation to presentation currency

XYZ, a UK-based company with sterling as its functional currency, has created a new subsidiary in the
US on 1 January 20X5 with a share capital of US$55,000 subscribed in cash. The amounts in its 20X5
US dollar functional currency financial statements are shown below.
US$
Revenue 500,000
Costs (200,000)
Profit 300,000
There was no other comprehensive income.
Initial share capital 55,000
Retained earnings (as above) 300,000
Equity = net assets 355,000
The entity owns no non-current assets (so there are no assets or depreciation charges to be
translated at the rate ruling when the asset was acquired) and all transactions took place on 30 June
(so that a single rate can be used for the statement of profit or loss transactions, rather than the
various rates ruling when the transactions took place).
Assume that the following exchange rates are relevant.
1 January 20X5: £1 = US$2.75
30 June 20X5: £1 = US$2.50
31 December 20X5: £1 = US$2
The entity translates share capital at the rate ruling when the capital was raised.
Requirement
Translate the financial statements of the subsidiary into the pound sterling presentation currency.
Solution
The statement of profit or loss is translated using the actual rate on the transaction date.
HB2021

US$ Rate £
Revenue 500,000 Actual 200,000
Costs (200,000) Actual (80,000)
Profit 300,000 120,000
Exchange gain on retranslation 37,500
Total comprehensive income 157,500
The net assets of the subsidiary are translated using the closing rate and the initial share capital using
the opening rate. The statement of financial position is shown below.
US$ Rate £
Initial share capital 55,000 Opening 20,000
Retained earnings (as above) 300,000 Actual 120,000
Exchange differences 37,500
Equity = net assets 355,000 Closing 177,500
The exchange gain arising on consolidation has two components:

(1) An exchange gain arising on retranslating the opening net assets from the opening rate to the
closing rate
Rate £
Opening net assets = initial share capital (US$55,000) Closing 27,500
Opening 20,000
7,500
(2) A further exchange gain arising from retranslating profits from the actual to the closing rate.
Rate £
Retained earnings (US$300,000) Closing rate 150,000
Actual rate (120,000)
30,000
Total exchange differences 37,500
The inclusion of the exchange gain or loss makes the accounting equation balance since:
Closing net assets = Opening net assets + Profit (translated at the

(translated at closing (translated at opening actual rate + exchange
rate) rate + exchange difference)
difference)
The calculation of the exchange difference is discussed in more detail in section 5.3.
HB2021

4.3 Translation when the functional currency is a hyperinflationary currency
Where an entity’s functional currency is that of a hyperinflationary economy and it uses a
presentation currency which is different from its functional currency, all the functional currency
amounts restated under IAS 29, Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies should be
translated at the closing rate at the current reporting date. The one exception is that where the
presentation currency used is that of a non-hyperinflationary economy, the comparative amounts
should be as they were presented in the previous period. There is no IAS 29 adjustment for the effect
of hyperinflation in the current period.
Interactive question 4: Translation of a foreign operation

A UK-based company, Petra Ltd, set up a foreign subsidiary, Hellenic Marble, in Greece on 30 June
20X6. Petra Ltd subscribed €24,000 for share capital when the exchange rate was €2 = £1. The
subsidiary borrowed €72,000 and bought a non-monetary asset for €96,000. Petra Ltd prepared its
accounts on 31 December 20X6 and by that time the exchange rate had moved to €3 = £1. No
activity was undertaken by the subsidiary during the period and it had no profits or losses.
Requirement
Account for the above transactions.
5 Foreign currency and consolidation

Section overview
This section deals with the issues arising from consolidating financial statements and, in particular,
the treatment of exchange differences and goodwill.
5.1 Translation of a foreign operation

A reporting entity with foreign operations needs to translate the financial statements of those
operations into its own reporting currency before consolidation or inclusion through the equity
method. The method of translation described in section 4 above should be applied to the financial
statements of a foreign operation. The treatment is summarised here.
(a) Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income: translate using actual rates. An
average for a period may be used, but not where there is significant fluctuation and the average
is therefore unreliable.
(b) Statement of financial position: translate all assets and liabilities (both monetary and non-
monetary) using closing rates.
(c) Exchange differences are reported as other comprehensive income.
5.2 Consolidation
The incorporation of the results and financial position of a foreign operation with those of the
reporting entity follows normal consolidation procedures, such as the elimination of intra-group
balances and intra-group transactions of a subsidiary. However, an intra-group monetary asset (or
liability) whether short term or long term cannot be eliminated against the corresponding intra-
group liability (or asset) without showing the results of currency fluctuations in the consolidated
financial statements. This is because a monetary item represents a commitment to convert one
currency into another and exposes the reporting entity to a gain or loss through currency
fluctuations. Accordingly, in the consolidated financial statements of the reporting entity, such an
exchange difference:
• continues to be recognised in profit or loss; or
HB2021

• is classified as equity until the disposal of the foreign operations, if it is a monetary asset forming
part of the net investment in a foreign operation.
Worked example: Consolidated financial statements

The abridged statements of financial position and profit or loss of Darius Co and its foreign
subsidiary, Xerxes Inc, appear below.
Draft statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X9
Darius Co Xerxes Inc

£ £ € €
Assets
Non-current assets
Plant at cost 600 500
Depreciation (250) (200)
350 300
Investment in Xerxes
100 shares @ £0.25 per share 25 –––
375 300
Current assets
Inventories 225 200
Receivables 150 100
375 300
750 600
Equity
Ordinary £1/€1 shares 300 100
Retained earnings 300 280
600 380
Long-term loans 50 110
Current liabilities 100 110
750 600
Statements of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X9
Darius Co Xerxes Inc

£ €
Tax (100) (80)
Profit after tax, retained 100 80
The following further information is given.

(1) Darius Co has had its interest in Xerxes Inc since the incorporation of the company.
(2) Depreciation is 8% per annum on cost.
(3) The carrying amount of equity of Xerxes at 31 December 20X8 was €300.
HB2021

(4) There have been no loan repayments or movements in non-current assets during the year. The
opening inventory of Xerxes Inc was €120. Assume that inventory turnover times are very short.
(5) Exchange rates:
(a) €4 to £1 when Xerxes Inc was incorporated
(b) €2.50 to £1 when Xerxes Inc acquired its long-term assets
(c) €2 to £1 on 31 December 20X8
(d) €1.60 to £1 average rate of exchange year ending 31 December 20X9
(e) €1 to £1 on 31 December 20X9
Requirements
1 Prepare the summarised consolidated statement of profit or loss and statement of financial
position of Darius Co using the £ as the presentation currency.
2 Calculate the exchange difference and prepare a separate consolidated statement of profit or
loss and other comprehensive income for the year.
Solution
1 Statement of profit or loss of Xerxes for the year ended 31 December 20X9 translated using the
average rate (€1.60 = £1)
£
Tax (50)
Profit after tax, retained 50
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X9
£
Profit before tax £(200 + 100) 300
Tax £(100 + 50) (150)
Profit after tax, retained £(100 + 50) 150
The statement of financial position of Xerxes Inc at 31 December 20X9, other than share capital
and reserves, should be translated at the closing rate of €1 = £1.
Summarised statement of financial position of Xerxes in £ at 31 December 20X9
£ £
Non-current assets (carrying amount) 300
Current assets
Inventories 200
Receivables 100
300
600
Non-current liabilities 110
Current liabilities 110
 Equity = 600 – 110 – 110 = 380 380

600
HB2021

Since Darius Co acquired the whole of the issued share capital on incorporation, the post-
acquisition reserves including exchange differences will be the value of shareholders’ funds
arrived at above, less the original cost to Darius Co of £25 (ie, €100 at the historical exchange rate
of £1: €4). Post-acquisition increase in equity = £380 – £25 = £355.
Summarised consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X9
£ £
Assets
Non-current assets (NBV) £(350 + 300) 650
Current assets
Inventories £(225 + 200) 425
Receivables £(150 + 100) 250
675
1,325

Equity
Ordinary £1 shares (Darius only) 300
Retained earnings £(300 + 355) 655
955
Non-current liabilities: loans £(50 + 110) 160
Current liabilities £(100 + 110) 210
1,325
Note: It is quite unnecessary to know the amount of the exchange differences when preparing
the consolidated statement of financial position.
2 Calculation of exchange differences
£
Xerxes’s equity interest at 31 December 20X9 380
Equity interest at 1 January 20X9 (€300/2) (150)
230
Less retained profit (50)
Exchange gain 180
Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31
December 20X9
£
Profit after tax 150
Exchange difference on translation of foreign operations 180
Note: The post-acquisition reserves of Xerxes Inc at the beginning of the year must have been
£150 – £25 = £125 and the post-acquisition reserves of Darius Co must have been £300 – £100 =
£200. The consolidated post-acquisition reserves must therefore have been £325.
HB2021

While the information regarding exchange rates must be assimilated and used, it is important not to
lose sight of the fact that foreign currency consolidation questions have standard group aspects that
should not be rushed or overlooked.
5.3 Analysis of exchange differences

The exchange differences in the above exercise could be reconciled by splitting them into their
component parts.
The total exchange difference arises from the following:
• Translating income/expense items using an average rate, whereas assets/liabilities are translated
at the closing rate
• Translating the opening net investment (opening net assets) in the foreign entity at a closing rate
different from the closing rate at which it was previously reported
Using the opening statement of financial position and translating at opening rate of €2 = £1 and
the closing rate of €1 = £1 will produce the exchange differences as follows.
Exchange
€2 = £1 €1 = £1 difference
£ £ £
Non-current assets at carrying amount 170 340 170
Inventories 60 120 60
Net current monetary liabilities (25) (50) (25)
205 410 205
Equity 150 300 150
Loans 55 110 55
205 410 205
Translating the statement of profit or loss using average rate €1.60 = £1 and the closing rate €1 =
£1 gives the following results.
Exchange
€1.60 = £1 €1 = £1 difference
£ £ £
Profit before tax, depreciation and increase in inventory
values 75 120 45
Increase in inventory values 50 80 30
125 200 75
Depreciation (25) (40) (15)
100 160 60
Tax (50) (80) (30)
Profit after tax, retained 50 80 30
HB2021

The overall position is then:
£
Gain on non-current assets (£170 – depreciation £15) 155
Loss on loan (55)
Gain on inventories (£60 + £30) 90
Loss on net monetary current assets/liabilities (all other differences) (£45 – £30 – £25) (10)
Net exchange gain: as above 180
This can be simplified as:
£ £
Opening net assets of €300: at opening rate (€2: £1) 150
at closing rate (€1: £1) 300
150 gain
Retained profits of €80: at average rate (€1.60: £1) 50
at closing rate (€1: £1) 80
30 gain
180 gain
This exchange difference is recorded as other comprehensive income.

(a) The group share is included within total comprehensive income attributable to the shareholders
of the parent company (and so included in the group reserves calculation).
(b) The non-controlling interest share is included within total comprehensive income attributable to
the non-controlling interest.
5.4 Goodwill and fair value adjustments

Goodwill arising under IFRS 3, Business Combinations from the acquisition of a foreign operation
should initially be calculated in the functional currency of the subsidiary and then be treated as an
asset of the foreign operation and translated at the closing rate each year. The exchange difference
arising is recorded as other comprehensive income in the consolidated accounts and accumulated in
group equity.
The carrying amount of goodwill in the presentation currency is therefore as affected by changes in
exchange rates as any other non-current asset. This may result in goodwill being allocated to an
entity for the purpose of foreign currency translation at a different level from that used for
impairment testing, which should continue to be determined based on IAS 36.
Adjustments made to the fair values of assets and liabilities of a foreign operation under IFRS 3
should be treated in the same way as goodwill. The adjustments are recognised in the carrying
amounts of the assets and liabilities of the foreign operation in its functional currency. The adjusted
carrying amounts are then translated at the closing rate.
Context example: Goodwill adjustment

On 31 December 20X4, ABC acquired 80% of DEF for £10 million when the carrying amount of
DEF’s identifiable net assets was €8 million. The carrying amounts were the same as fair value except
for land which is not subject to depreciation and had a fair value of €1 million higher than carrying
amount. The carrying amount in DEF’s financial statements was not altered.
The €/£ exchange rate was €2.40/£ at 31 December 20X4, and €2.50/£ at 31 December 20X5. The
non-controlling interest is measured using the proportion of net assets method.
HB2021

€’000
The goodwill arising on consolidation was:
Non-controlling interest 20% × (€8m + €1m) 1,800
25,800
Net assets of acquiree €8m + €1m) (9,000)
Goodwill 16,800
The goodwill arising on acquisition is therefore €16.8m/2.4 = £7m. The fair value adjustment in
sterling amounted to €1m/2.4 = £416,667.
At 31 December 20X5, the goodwill is restated to £6.72 million (€16.8m/2.5) and the fair value
adjustment in sterling terms was £400,000 (€1m/2.5).
The requirement in an entity’s own financial statements to recognise in profit or loss all exchange
differences in respect of monetary items which are part of an entity’s net investment in a foreign
operation was dealt with earlier.
On consolidation, however, the differences should be recognised as other comprehensive income
and recorded in a separate component of equity. This treatment is required because exchange
differences arising from the translation of the operations’ net assets will move in the opposite way. If
there is an exchange loss on the net investment, there will be an exchange gain on the net assets,
and vice versa. The two movements should be netted off, rather than one being recognised in profit
or loss and the other as other comprehensive income.
5.5 Net investment in foreign operation

When a monetary item is part of the net investment in a foreign operation (ie, there is an intra-group
loan outstanding) then the following rules apply on consolidation.
(a) If the monetary item is denominated in the functional currency of the parent entity, the exchange
difference will be recognised in the profit or loss of the foreign subsidiary.
(b) If the monetary item is denominated in the functional currency of the subsidiary, exchange
differences will be recognised in the profit or loss of the parent entity.
(c) When the monetary item is denominated in the functional currency of either entity, on
consolidation, the exchange difference will be removed from the consolidated profit or loss and
it will be recognised as other comprehensive income and recorded in equity in the combined
(d) If, however, the monetary item is denominated in a third currency which is different from either
entity’s functional currency, then the translation difference should be recognised as part of profit
or loss. For example, the parent may have a functional currency of US dollars, the foreign
operation a functional currency of euros, and the loan made by the foreign operation may have
been denominated in UK sterling. In this scenario, the exchange difference results in a cash flow
difference and should be recognised as part of the results of the group.
(e) A separate foreign currency reserve reported as part of equity may have a positive or negative
carrying amount at the reporting date. Negative reserves are permitted under IFRS Standards.
(f) If the foreign operation is subsequently disposed of, the cumulative exchange differences
previously reported as other comprehensive income and recognised in equity should be
reclassified and so included in the profit or loss on disposal recognised in the statement of profit
or loss.
Context example: Exchange changes

Some years ago ABC, whose functional currency is pounds sterling, made a long-term loan of
£100,000 to its wholly owned subsidiary, DEF, whose functional currency is the euro. At 31 December
20X4, the exchange rate was £1 = €3, and at 31 December 20X5 was £1 = €2.50.
HB2021

At 31 December 20X4, €300,000 (£100,000 × 3) was a payable in DEF’s financial statements. ABC
carried the receivable at £100,000, so on consolidation the two amounts cancelled out.
At 31 December 20X5, only €250,000 (£100,000 × 2.5) was a payable in DEF’s financial statements,
so in 20X5 DEF made an exchange gain of €50,000 in its own financial statements. On consolidation
DEF’s payable still cancels out against ABC’s £100,000 receivable.
However, on consolidation, the sterling equivalent of DEF’s exchange gain (€50,000/2.5 = £20,000) is
eliminated from consolidated profit or loss and shown as part of total exchange differences reported
as other comprehensive income.
5.6 Consolidation when subsidiaries have different reporting dates

Where the reporting date of entities included in the consolidated financial statements of the group
are different, and in accordance with IFRS 10 an earlier set of financial statements is used for
consolidation purposes, there is an issue as to which exchange rate should be used; the one at the
date of the earlier set of financial statements, or the one at the reporting date of the consolidated
Under IAS 21, for all subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures which are consolidated or equity
accounted, the relevant exchange rate is that ruling at the date to which the foreign operation’s
financial statements were prepared. This reflects the fact that the foreign operation’s results are
prepared to its reporting date and exchange differences should be calculated in a consistent way.
However, IAS 21 goes on to state that, where the exchange rate has significantly changed in the
period between the foreign operation’s year end and that of the group, an adjustment should be
made. This is consistent with the approach in IFRS 10 for significant events that have happened in this
intervening period. The same approach is used in applying the equity method to associates and joint
ventures in accordance with IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures.
5.7 Intra-group trading transactions

Where normal trading transactions take place between group companies located in different
countries, the transactions give rise to monetary assets or liabilities that may either have been settled
during the year or remain unsettled at the reporting date.
Context example: Intra-group trading

A UK parent company has a wholly owned subsidiary in the US. During the year ended 31 December
20X5, the US company purchased plant and raw materials to be used in its manufacturing process
from the UK parent. Details of transactions are as follows.
$/£
Purchase plant costing £500,000 on 30 April 20X5 1.48
Paid for plant on 30 September 20X5 1.54
Purchased raw materials costing £300,000 on 31 October 20X5 1.56
Balance of £300,000 outstanding at 31 December 20X5 1.52
Average rate for the year 1.55
The following exchange gains/losses will be recorded in the US subsidiary’s profit or loss for the year
$ $
Plant costing £500,000 @ 1.48 740,000
Paid £500,000 @ 1.54 770,000
Exchange loss – settled transaction (30,000)
Raw materials costing £300,000 @ 1.56 468,000
HB2021

$ $
Outstanding £300,000 @ 1.52 456,000
Exchange gains – unsettled transaction 12,000
Net exchange loss recorded in profit or loss (18,000)
5.8 Intercompany dividends

Dividends paid in a foreign currency during a period by a subsidiary to its parent may lead to
exchange differences being reported in the parent’s financial statements. This will be the case where
the dividend is recognised at the transaction date, being the date on which the parent recognises the
receivable, but receipt is not until a later date and exchange rates have moved during this period. As
with other intra-group exchange differences, these amounts should not be eliminated on
consolidation.
5.9 Disposal of a foreign operation

On the disposal of a foreign operation, the cumulative amount of exchange differences, which has
been reported as other comprehensive income and is accumulated in a separate component of
equity relating to the foreign operation, shall be recognised in profit or loss, along with gain or loss
on disposal when it is recognised.
Disposal may occur either through sale, liquidation, repayment of share capital or abandonment of
all, or part of, the entity. The payment of the dividend is part of a disposal only if it constitutes a return
of the investment; for example, when the dividend is paid out of pre-acquisition profits. In the case of
a partial disposal, only the proportionate share of the related accumulated exchange difference is
included in the gain or loss. A write-down of the carrying amount of a foreign operation does not
constitute a partial disposal. Accordingly, no part of the deferred foreign exchange gain or loss is
recognised in profit or loss at the time of a write-down.
5.10 Tax effects of exchange differences

When there are tax effects arising from gains or losses on foreign currency transactions and
exchange differences arising on the translation of the financial statements of foreign operations IAS
12, Income Taxes should be applied.
6 Disclosure
Section overview
This section presents the relevant disclosure requirements.
The disclosure requirements of IAS 21 are not particularly onerous and, assuming that an entity’s
functional currency has not changed during the period, and its financial statements are presented in
its functional currency, it is only required to disclose the following:
• The amount of exchange differences reported in profit or loss for the period. This amount should
exclude amounts arising on financial instruments measured at fair value through profit or loss
under IFRS 9.
• The net exchange differences reported in other comprehensive income. This disclosure should
include a reconciliation between the opening and closing amounts.
In addition, when the presentation currency is different from the functional currency, that fact should
be stated and the functional currency should be disclosed. The reason for using a different
presentation currency should also be disclosed.
Where there is a change in the functional currency of either the reporting entity or a significant
foreign operation, that fact and the reason for the change in functional currency should be disclosed.
HB2021

An entity may present its financial statements or other financial information in a currency that is
different from either its functional currency or its presentation currency. For example, it may convert
selected items only, or it may use a translation method that does not comply with IFRS Standards in
order to deal with hyperinflation. In this situation the entity must:
• clearly identify the information as supplementary information to distinguish it from information
that complies with IFRS Standards;
• disclose the currency in which the supplementary information is displayed; and
• disclose the entity’s functional currency and the method of translation used to determine the
supplementary information.
For publicity or other purposes, an entity may wish to display its financial statements using a currency
which is neither its functional nor its presentation currency; such information is not presented in
accordance with IFRS Standards, so IAS 21 requires that it should be clearly identified as being
supplementary.
7 Other matters
Section overview
This section discusses a number of other matters, such as non-controlling interests and taxation.
7.1 Non-controlling interests

(a) The figure for non-controlling interests in the statement of financial position will be the
appropriate proportion of the translated share capital and reserves of the subsidiary plus, where
the NCI is valued at fair value, its share of goodwill translated at the closing rate. In addition, it is
necessary to show any dividend declared but not yet paid to the NCI at the reporting date as a
liability. The dividend payable should be translated at the closing rate for this purpose.
(b) The non-controlling interest in profit or loss will be the appropriate proportion of profits
available for distribution. If the functional currency of the subsidiary is the same as that of the
parent, this profit will be arrived at after charging or crediting the exchange differences.
(c) The non-controlling interest in total comprehensive income includes the NCI proportion of the
exchange gain or loss on translation of the subsidiary financial statements. Where the non-
controlling interest is measured at fair value, exchange gains and losses arising on the
retranslation of goodwill are included in total comprehensive income.
Worked example: Consolidated financial statements

Extracts from the summarised accounts of Camrumite Inc are shown below.
Statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X3
€
Net monetary assets 5,000
15,000
Equity
Ordinary share capital and reserves 15,000
Statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X3
€
HB2021

Statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 20X3
€
Dividend payable 1,680
Retained profit for the year 1,400
60% of the issued capital of Camrumite Inc is owned by Bates Co, a company based in the UK.
There have been no movements in long-term assets during the year.
The exchange rate has moved as follows.
1 January 20X3 €5 = £1
Average for the year ended 31.12.X3 €7 = £1
31 December 20X3 €8 = £1
Requirement
You are required to calculate the figures for the non-controlling interest to be included in the
consolidated accounts of Bates Co.
The non-controlling interest is measured using the proportion of net assets method.
Solution
Translating the shareholders’ funds using the closing rate as at 31 December 20X3 gives €15,000 ÷ 8
= £1,875. The non-controlling interest in the statement of financial position will be 40% × £1,875 =
£750.
The dividend payable translated at the closing rate is €1,680 ÷ 8 = £210. The amount payable to the
non-controlling shareholders is 40% × £210 = £84.
The profit after tax translated at the average rate is €3,080 ÷ 7 = £440. The non-controlling interest in
profit is therefore 40% × £440 = £176.
The non-controlling share of the exchange difference is calculated as:
£ £
Opening net assets
€15,000 – €1,400 = €13,600
At opening rate of €5: £1 2,720
At closing rate of €8: £1 1,700 1,020
Profits of €3,080
At average rate of €7: £1 440
At closing rate of €8: £1 385 55
Loss on retranslation of Camrumite’s accounts 1,075
NCI share of loss £1,075 × 40% 430
Therefore the non-controlling interest in total comprehensive income is profit of £176 less exchange
losses of £430 = £254 loss
The non-controlling interest can be summarised as follows.
£
Balance at 1 January 20X3 (£2,720 × 40%) 1,088
Non-controlling interest in profit for the year 176
HB2021

£
Non-controlling interest in exchange losses (430)
834
Balance at 31 December 20X3 750
Dividend payable to non-controlling interest 84
834
7.2 Tax effects

The tax effects of gains and losses on foreign currency translations are addressed by IAS 12 and
covered in Chapter 22.
7.3 First time adoption

IFRS 1, First Time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards includes an exemption that
allows the cumulative translation difference on the retranslation of subsidiaries’ net assets to be set to
zero for all subsidiaries at the date of transition to IFRS.
This means that it does not have to be separately disclosed and recycled in profit or loss when the
subsidiaries are disposed of.
However, translation differences arising from the date of transition would have to be separately
disclosed as other comprehensive income, included in a separate component of equity and
reclassified to profit or loss on the investment’s disposal.
In addition, the requirement to retranslate goodwill and fair value adjustments does not have to be
applied retrospectively to business combinations before transition to IFRS.
8 Reporting foreign currency cash flows

Section overview
This section addresses the treatment of foreign currency cash flows in the statement of cash flows.
Transactions in foreign currency

(a) Where an entity enters into foreign currency transactions which result in an inflow or outflow of
cash, the entity should translate cash flows into its functional currency at the transaction date.
(b) Although transactions should be translated at the date on which they occurred, for practical
reasons IAS 21 permits the use of an average rate where it approximates to actual.
Foreign subsidiaries
A similar approach is required where an entity has a foreign subsidiary. The transactions of the
subsidiary should be translated into the reporting entity’s functional currency at the transaction date.
Reporting translation differences
Although the translation of foreign currency amounts does not affect the cash flow of an entity,
translation differences relating to cash and cash equivalents are part of the changes in cash and cash
equivalents during a period. Such amounts should therefore form part of the statement of cash flows.
IAS 7 requires the effect of foreign currency to be reported separately from operating, investing and
financing activities. No specific location for the disclosure is provided; disclosure at the base of the
statement of cash flows would seem an appropriate presentation.
Where an entity adopts the indirect method of calculating cash flows from operating activities and it
has foreign currency amounts which have been settled during the period, no further adjustment is
required at the period end. This is because any foreign exchange difference will already include the
HB2021

amount of the original foreign currency transaction and the actual settlement figure. An overseas
purchase will be recorded using the purchase date exchange rate and a payable will be recorded.
On settlement, any adjustment to the actual cash flow paid will be recognised in profit or loss as part
of the entity’s operating activities.
Unsettled foreign currency amounts in relation to operating activities, such as trade receivables and
payables, are not adjusted at the period end because such amounts are retranslated at the reporting
date and the exchange difference is reported in profit or loss already. Where an entity uses the
indirect method for calculating its operating cash flows, it starts with the profit figure which will
include the retranslation difference, and the movement in the period for receivables and payables
will also include a similar amount. Since the two amounts effectively eliminate each other, no
adjustment is required.
Further disclosures
It is important to note that the standard requires disclosure of significant cash and near-cash
balances that the entity holds but which are not available to the group as, for example, under a
situation in which exchange controls prohibit the conversion of cash transactions or balances.
Worked example: Foreign currency cash flows

On 15 November, an entity imported some plant and equipment costing $400,000 from an overseas
supplier, with $250,000 being paid on 31 December 20X5 and $150,000 being paid on 31 January
20X6.
The $/£ spot exchange rates were as follows.
$/£
15 November 20X5 2.0:1
31 December 20X5 1.9:1
31 January 20X6 1.8:1
Requirement
How should these transactions be reported within the statement of cash flows?
Solution
The purchase will initially be recorded at the rate ruling at the transaction date:
$400,000 / 2.0 = £200,000, with a trade payable of the same amount also being recognised.
At 31 December 20X5, the cash outflow will be recorded at the rate ruling at the transaction date:
$250,000 / 1.9 = £131,579
and the remaining trade payable, being a monetary liability, is translated at the same rate:
$150,000 / 1.9 = £78,947
The plant and equipment, a non-monetary asset, is carried at the historical rate of £200,000.
Only cash flows appear in the statement of cash flows, so £131,579 will be shown within investing
activities.
HB2021

9 Reporting in hyperinflationary economies
Section overview
• IAS 29 requires financial statements of entities operating within a hyperinflationary economy to

be restated in terms of measuring units current at the reporting date.
• Financial statements should be restated based on a measuring unit current at the reporting date:
– Monetary assets/liabilities do not need to be restated.
– Non-monetary assets/liabilities must be restated by applying a general prices index.
– Items of income/expense must be restated.
– Gain/loss on net monetary items must be reported in profit or loss.
In a hyperinflationary economy, money loses its purchasing power very quickly. Comparisons of
transactions at different points in time, even within the same accounting period, are misleading. It is
therefore considered inappropriate for entities to prepare financial statements without making
adjustments for the fall in the purchasing power of money over time.
IAS 29, Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies applies to the primary financial
statements of entities (including consolidated accounts and statements of cash flows) whose
functional currency is the currency of a hyperinflationary economy. In this section, we will identify the
hyperinflationary currency as $H.
The standard does not define a hyperinflationary economy in exact terms, although it indicates the
characteristics of such an economy; for example, where the cumulative inflation rate over three years
approaches or exceeds 100%.
Context example: Indicators of hyperinflation

What other factors might indicate a hyperinflationary economy?
These are examples, but the list is not exhaustive.
(a) The population prefers to retain its wealth in non-monetary assets or in a relatively stable foreign
currency. Amounts of local currency held are immediately invested to maintain purchasing
power.
(b) The population regards monetary amounts not in terms of the local currency but in terms of a
relatively stable foreign currency. Prices may be quoted in that currency.
(c) Sales/purchases on credit take place at prices that compensate for the expected loss of
purchasing power during the credit period, even if that period is short.
(d) Interest rates, wages and prices are linked to a price index.
The reported value of non-monetary assets, in terms of current measuring units, increases over time.
For example, if a non-current asset is purchased for $H1,000 when the price index is 100, and the
price index subsequently rises to 200, the value of the asset in terms of current measuring units
(ignoring accumulated depreciation) will rise to $H2,000.
In contrast, the value of monetary assets and liabilities, such as a debt for $H300, is unaffected by
changes in the prices index, because it is an actual money amount payable or receivable. If a
customer owes $H300 when the price index is 100, and the debt is still unpaid when the price index
has risen to 150, the customer still owes just $H300. However, the purchasing power of monetary
assets will decline over time as the general level of prices goes up.
HB2021

9.1 Requirement to restate financial statements in terms of measuring units current at
the reporting date
In most countries, financial statements are produced on the basis of either of the following:
• Historical cost, except to the extent that some assets (eg, property and investments) may be
revalued
• Current cost, which reflects the changes in the values of specific assets held by the entity
In a hyperinflationary economy, neither of these methods of financial reporting are meaningful unless
adjustments are made for the fall in the purchasing power of money. IAS 29 therefore requires that
the primary financial statements of entities in a hyperinflationary economy should be produced by
restating the figures prepared on either a historical cost basis or a current cost basis in terms of
measuring units current at the reporting date.
Definition
Measuring units current at the reporting date: This is a unit of local currency with a purchasing
power as at the reporting date, in terms of a general prices index.
Financial statements that are not restated (ie, that are prepared on a historical cost basis or current
cost basis without adjustments) may be presented as additional statements by the entity, but this is
discouraged. The primary financial statements are those that have been restated.
After the assets, liabilities, equity and statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of
the entity have been restated, there will be a net gain or loss on monetary assets and liabilities (the
‘net monetary position‘) and this should be recognised separately in profit or loss for the period.
9.2 Making the adjustments

IAS 29 recognises that the resulting financial statements, after restating all items in terms of
measuring units current at the reporting date, will lack precise accuracy. However, it is more
important that certain procedures and judgements should be applied consistently from year to year.
9.3 Statement of financial position: historical cost

Where the entity produces its accounts on a historical cost basis, the following procedures should be
applied.
(a) Items that are not already expressed in terms of measuring units current at the reporting date
should be restated, using a general prices index, so that they are valued in measuring units
current at the reporting date.
(b) Monetary assets and liabilities are not restated, because they are already expressed in terms of
measuring units current at the reporting date.
(c) Assets that are already stated at market value or net realisable value need not be restated,
because they too are already valued in measuring units current at the reporting date.
(d) Any assets or liabilities linked by agreement to changes in the general level of prices, such as
index-linked loans or bonds, should be adjusted in accordance with the terms of the agreement
to establish the amount outstanding as at the reporting date.
(e) All other non-monetary assets, ie, tangible long-term assets, intangible long-term assets
(including accumulated depreciation/amortisation), investments and inventories, should be
restated in terms of measuring units as at the reporting date, by applying a general prices index.
The method of restating these assets should normally be to multiply the original cost of the assets by
a factor: (prices index at reporting date/prices index at date of acquisition of the asset). For example,
if an item of machinery was purchased for $H2,000 when the prices index was 400 and the prices
index at the reporting date is 1,000, the restated value of the long-term asset (before accumulated
depreciation) would be:
$H2,000 × [1,000/400] = $H5,000
If, in the above example, the non-current asset has been held for half its useful life and has no
residual value, the accumulated depreciation would be restated as $H2,500. (The depreciation
charge for the year should be the amount of depreciation based on historical cost, multiplied by the
same factor as above: 1,000/400).
HB2021

If an asset has been revalued since it was originally purchased (eg, a property), it should be restated
in measuring units at the reporting date by applying a factor: (prices index at reporting date/prices
index at revaluation date) to the revalued amount of the asset.
If the restated amount of a non-monetary asset exceeds its recoverable amount (ie, its net realisable
value or market value), its value should be reduced accordingly.
The owners‘ equity (all components) as at the start of the accounting period should be restated
using a general prices index from the beginning of the period.
9.4 Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income: historical cost
In the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, all amounts of income and
expense should be restated in terms of measuring units current at the reporting date. All amounts
therefore need to be restated by a factor that allows for the change in the prices index since the item
of income or expense was first recorded.
9.5 Gain or loss on net monetary position

In a period of inflation, an entity that holds monetary assets (cash, receivables) will suffer a fall in the
purchasing power of these assets. By the same token, in a period of inflation, the value of monetary
liabilities, such as a bank overdraft or bank loan, declines in terms of current purchasing power.
(a) If an entity has an excess of monetary assets over monetary liabilities, it will suffer a loss over
time on its net monetary position, in a period of inflation, in terms of measuring units as at
‘today’s date’.
(b) If an entity has an excess of monetary liabilities over monetary assets, it will make a gain on its
net monetary position, in a period of inflation.
10 Audit focus
Section overview
This section provides an overview of the particular issues associated with auditing foreign
subsidiaries. The audit of group accounts in general is covered in Chapter 20.
The inclusion of one or more foreign subsidiaries within a group introduces additional risks,
including the following:
• Non-compliance with the accounting requirements of IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates
• Potential misstatement due to the effects of high inflation
• Possible difficulty in the parent being able to exercise control, for example due to political
instability
• Currency restrictions limiting payment of profits to the parent
• There may be threats to going concern due to economic and/or political instability
• Non-compliance with local taxes or misstatement of local tax liabilities
Audit procedures
These would include the following:
• Confirm that the balances of the subsidiary have been appropriately translated to the group
reporting currency:
– Assets and liabilities at the closing rate at the end of the reporting period.
– Income and expenditure at the rate ruling at the transaction date. An average would be a
suitable alternative provided there have been no significant fluctuations.
• Confirm consistency of treatment of the translation of equity (closing rate or historical rate).
• Verify that the consolidation process has been performed correctly eg, elimination of intra-group
balances.
HB2021

• Recalculate the non-controlling interest.
• Confirm that goodwill has been translated at the closing rate.
• Verify the disclosure of exchange differences as a separate component of equity.
• Assess whether disclosure requirements of IAS 21 have been satisfied.
• If the foreign operation is operating in a hyperinflationary economy confirm that the financial
statements have been adjusted under IAS 29, Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies
before they are translated and consolidated.
• Involve a specialist tax audit team to review the calculation of tax balances against submitted and
draft tax returns.
Interactive question 5: Overseas subsidiary

Saturn plc trades in the UK preparing accounts to 31 March annually. Several years ago Saturn plc
acquired 80% of the issued ordinary share capital of Venus Inc which trades in Zorgistan. This country
is experiencing hyperinflation and severe political instability as a result. The local currency is the zorg
but Venus Inc has determined that its functional currency is the US$. The presentation currency of the
group is £. Venus Inc is audited by a reputable local firm of auditors.
Requirement
Identify the issues the auditor would need to consider in respect of the audit of the Saturn group
Judgement will need to be applied in this kind of question, as in real life. This is true despite the local
audit firm being ‘reputable’ because there may be differences in local practices.
HB2021

Summary
IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates
Entity financial Group financial

statements statements
Determine functional Goodwill and fair value

currency adjustments on acquisition
• Primary indicators of foreign subsidiary are
• Secondary indicators • Expressed in functional
currency of subsidiary
• Translated at closing rate
Statement of Statement of profit or loss and Statement of

financial position other comprehensive income cash flows
Initial recognition Exchange differences on Foreign currency cash flows

• Use spot exchange rate • Monetary items in profit • Record in entity's functional
between functional and or loss unless net investment currency by applying exchange
foreign currency on date in foreign currency rate between functional and
of the transaction • Non-monetary items in foreign currency at date of
other comprehensive cash flows
Subsequent reporting income or profit according • Cash flows of foreign subsidiary
dates to where gain or loss translated at the exchange rates
• Monetary items at recognised between functional and foreign
closing rate • Net investment in foreign currency at the dates of the
• Non-monetary items entity initially in other cash flows
at historical cost at comprehensive income
rate of transaction and income statement on
• Non-monetary items disposal
at fair value at exchange
rate when fair value
determined
IAS 29, Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies
Historical cost financial Economies ceasing to Selection and use of

statements be hyperinflationary the general price index
• Statements of
financial position
• Statement of profit
or loss and other
comprehensive
income
• Gain or loss on net
monetary position
HB2021

1. Can you determine an entity’s functional currency in accordance with IAS 21? (Topic 2)
2. How should foreign currency transactions be recognised initially and subsequently? (Topic
3)
3. How are exchange differences on retranslation of monetary items reported under IAS 21?
(Topic 3)
4. Do you understand the rules for the translation of financial statements from the functional
currency to the presentation currency? (Topic 4)
5. What is the procedure for consolidating a foreign subsidiary? (Topic 5)
6. How is goodwill on consolidation translated? (Topic 7)
7. What are the issues for the auditor specific to auditing a foreign subsidiary? (Topic 10)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Zephyria This is a very short question on which exchange rate to use when
calculating goodwill on consolidation of a foreign subsidiary.
Soapstone This tests the main calculations that will be needed for consolidation of a
foreign subsidiary.
Jupiter You are now ready to try this question, which is a full consolidated
statement of financial position with a foreign subsidiary.
Winstanley This is a typical Question 3 in the exam, approaching foreign currency from
the auditors’ point of view.
Earthstor (loan to With regard to the loan, a sound understanding of both IAS 21 and IFRS 9 is
Trayner only) required. You are also required to consider audit issues, particularly relating
to risk.
Wadi This question covers various financial reporting and auditing issues relating
to an investment in a foreign subsidiary. As the question is highly integrated
you should answer all parts of the question, paying particular attention to
HB2021

audit risk and the role of the component auditor.
Elac (trade This question requires you to translate the foreign trade receivables at the
receivables only) correct rate and calculate and present the exchange loss correctly.
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates

Functional currency
• Currency that influences sales prices and costs – IAS 21.9
Initial recognition
• Foreign currency transaction to be recorded in functional currency at spot exchange rate at date
of transaction – IAS 21.21
Reporting at subsequent reporting dates – IAS 21.23
• Foreign currency monetary items using the closing rate
• Foreign currency non-monetary items measured at historical cost in foreign currency translated at
exchange rate at date of transaction
• Foreign currency non-monetary items measured at fair value in foreign currency translated at
exchange rate at date when fair value determined
Recognition of exchange differences
• Exchange differences arising on settlement or translation of monetary items at rate different from
those at which they were translated on initial recognition recognised in profit or loss in period in
which they arise (unless these arise in relation to an entity’s net investment in a foreign operation –
see IAS 21.32 below) – IAS 21.28
• When gain or loss on a non-monetary item is recognised directly in other comprehensive income
any exchange component of gain or loss should also be recognised in other comprehensive
income – IAS 21.30
• Exchange differences arising on a monetary item that forms part of a reporting entity’s net
investment in a foreign operation shall be recognised: – IAS 21.32
– In profit or loss in the separate financial statements of reporting entity or the individual financial
statements of foreign operation
– In other comprehensive income (a separate component of equity) in the consolidated financial
statements and reclassified from equity to profit or loss on disposal
Change in functional currency
• Translation procedures to be applied prospectively from date of change – IAS 21.35
Use of presentation currency other than the functional currency
• Translation into presentation currency for consolidation – IAS 21.38–39
Translation of foreign operation
• Any goodwill arising on the acquisition of a foreign operation and any fair value adjustments shall
be expressed in the functional currency of the foreign operation and translated at the closing rate
– IAS 21.44
2 IAS 7, Statements of Cash Flows

Foreign currency cash flows – IAS 7.25–26
• Non-cash transactions
– The statement of cash flows does not record non-cash transactions – IAS 7.43
• Disclosures – IAS 7.50
– Components of cash and cash equivalents – Appendix A
– Reconciliation of the amounts in the statement of cash flows with the equivalent balance in the
statement of financial position
– Information (together with a commentary) which may be relevant to the users
HB2021

3 IAS 29, Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies
• Restatement of financial statements – IAS 29.5–10
• Historical cost financial statements
– Statement of financial position – IAS 29.11–25
– Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income – IAS 29.26
– Gain or loss on net monetary position – IAS 29.27–28
• Current cost financial statements
– Statement of financial position – IAS 29.29
– Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income – IAS 29.30
– Gain or loss on net monetary position – IAS 29.31
• Taxes – IAS 29.32
• Statement of cash flows – IAS 29.33
• Corresponding figures – IAS 29.34
• Consolidated financial statements – IAS 29.35
• Selection and use of the general price index – IAS 29.37
• Economies ceasing to be hyperinflationary – IAS 29.38
• Disclosures – IAS 29.39–40
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Conversion versus translation

What is the difference between conversion and translation of foreign currency amounts?
2 Monetary items
Define ‘monetary’ items according to IAS 21.
3 Initial recognition
How should foreign currency transactions be recognised initially in an individual entity’s accounts?
4 Functional currency
What factors must management take into account when determining the functional currency of a
foreign operation?
5 Goodwill and fair value adjustments

How should goodwill and fair value adjustments be treated on consolidation of a foreign operation?
6 Change in functional currency

When can an entity’s functional currency be changed?
7 Zephyria
The Zephyria Company acquired a foreign subsidiary on 15 August 20X6. Goodwill arising on the
acquisition was N$175,000.
Consolidated financial statements are prepared at the year end of 30 September 20X6 requiring the
translation of all foreign operations’ results into the presentation currency of pounds sterling.
The following rates of exchange have been identified:
Historical rate at the date of acquisition N$1.321:£

Closing rate at the reporting date N$1.298:£
Average rate for Zephyria’s complete financial year N$1.302:£
Average rate for the period since acquisition N$1.292:£
Requirement
In complying with IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates, at what amount should
the goodwill be included in the consolidated financial statements?
8 Cacomistle
The Cacomistle Company operates in the mining industry. It acquired an overseas mining subsidiary,
The Vanbuyten Company, on 10 September 20X7. The functional currency of Vanbuyten is the N$.
An initial review of the assets of Vanbuyten immediately after the acquisition found that it was
necessary to make a downward fair value adjustment to the carrying amount of one of its mines
amounting to N$225,000, due to adverse geological conditions. The mine had been acquired by
Vanbuyten on 4 October 20X3.
HB2021

Cacomistle’s consolidated financial statements were prepared to 31 December 20X7 and required
translation into the presentation currency which was pounds sterling.
Exchange rates were as follows:
4 October 20X3 – N$1.292: £1
10 September 20X7 – N$1.321: £1
31 December 20X7 – N$1.298: £1
Average rate for 20X7 – N$1.302: £1
Requirement
At what amount should the fair value adjustment be recognised in Cacomistle’s consolidated
financial statements for the year ending 31 December 20X7 according to IAS 21, The Effects of
Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates?
9 Longspur
The Longspur Company is an aircraft manufacturer and its functional currency is pounds sterling.
Longspur ordered an item of plant from an overseas supplier at an agreed invoiced cost of
N$250,000 on 31 March 20X7.
The equipment was delivered and was available for use on 30 April 20X7. It has a 10-year life span
and no residual value.
31 March 20X7 – £1: N$2.10
30 April 20X7 – £1: N$2.07
31 December 20X7 – £1: N$1.90
Average rate for 20X7 – £1: N$2.05
Requirement
At what amount should depreciation on the equipment be recognised in Longspur’s financial
statements for the year ending 31 December 20X7 under IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates?
10 Orton
The Orton Company is a retailer of artworks and sculptures. Orton has a year end of 31 December
20X7 and uses pounds sterling as its functional currency. On 28 October 20X7, Orton purchased 10
paintings from a supplier for N$920,000 each, a total of N$9,200,000.
28 October 20X7 – £1: N$1.80
19 December 20X7 – £1: N$1.90
31 December 20X7 – £1: N$2.00
8 February 20X8 – £1: N$2.40
Orton sold seven of the paintings for cash on 19 December 20X7 with the remaining three paintings
being sold on 8 February 20X8. All 10 of the paintings were paid for by Orton on 8 February 20X8.
Requirement
What exchange gain arises from the transaction relating to the paintings in Orton’s financial
statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7 according to IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in
Foreign Exchange Rates?
11 Alder
On 1 January 20X7 The Alder Company made a loan of £9 million to one of its foreign subsidiaries,
The Culpeo Company. The loan in substance is a part of Alder’s net investment in that foreign
operation. The functional currency of Culpeo is the R$.
HB2021

Alder’s consolidated financial statements were prepared to 31 December 20X7 and the presentation
currency is pounds sterling.
1 January 20X7 – R$2.00: £1
31 December 20X7 – R$1.80: £1
Requirement
How would the exchange gain or loss on the intra-group loan be recognised in the consolidated
financial statements of Alder for the year ending 31 December 20X7 according to IAS 21, The Effects
of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates?
12 Porcupine
The Porcupine Company has a wholly owned foreign subsidiary, The Jacktree Company, with net
assets at 1 January 20X7 of N$300 million. Jacktree made a profit for the year ending 31 December
20X7 of N$150 million. The functional currency of Jacktree is the N$.
Porcupine’s consolidated financial statements were prepared to 31 December 20X7 and the
presentation currency is pounds sterling.
1 January 20X7 – N$2.00: £1
31 December 20X7 – N$3.00: £1
Average rate for 20X7 – N$2.50: £1
Requirement
How would the exchange gain or loss on the investment in Jacktree be recognised in the
consolidated financial statements of Porcupine for the year ending 31 December 20X7 according to
IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates?
13 Soapstone
On 31 December 20X6 The Soapstone Company acquired 60% of the ordinary shares in The Frew
Company for £700. Soapstone’s functional currency is pounds sterling, while Frew’s is the R$.
The summarised financial statements of Frew and the £:R$ exchange rates are as follows.
31 December 20X6 31 December 20X7

Identifiable assets less liabilities (= equity) R$500 R$730
Exchange rate £2.00: R$1 £3.00: R$1
The carrying amount of Frew’s assets and liabilities are the same as their fair values and there has
been no impairment of goodwill.
The average exchange rate during 20X7 was £2.50: R$1. There was no change in Frew’s share capital
during the year and it paid no dividends.
Requirements
Determine the following amounts that will appear in Soapstone’s consolidated financial statements
for the year ended 31 December 20X7 in accordance with IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates.
(a) The carrying amount at 31 December 20X7 of the goodwill acquired in the business
combination, assuming that the non-controlling interest is valued as a proportion of the net
assets of the entity
(b) Soapstone’s share of Frew’s profit for the period
(c) The total foreign exchange gain reported as other comprehensive income in 20X7
HB2021

14 Jupiter
Jupiter plc trades in the UK preparing accounts to 31 March annually.
On 31 December 20X6 Jupiter plc acquired 90% of the issued ordinary capital of Mars Inc which
trades in Intergalatica where the currency is the Gal. At 31 March 20X7 the following statements of
financial position were prepared.
Jupiter plc Mars Inc

£’000 Gal’000
Financial asset investments 85,000 –
Net current assets 212,800 145,500
446,300 342,900
Capital – ordinary £1/1 Gal 300,000 150,000
Retained earnings – at 31 March 20X7 53,300 132,900
353,300 282,900
Long-term loans 93,000 60,000
446,300 342,900
Relevant data is as follows.

(1) The profit of both companies accrues reasonably evenly throughout the year. Jupiter plc and
Mars Inc had retained earnings of £18.9 million and 24.9 million Gal respectively for the year ended
31 March 20X7.
(2) The parent company’s long-term loans include an amount borrowed from a Swiss bank (to build a
new factory). 50.4 million Swiss francs were borrowed on 1 July 20X5 when the exchange rate was
2.1 francs = £1. The rate at 31 March 20X7 was 2.3 francs = £1. The loan is recorded at the historical
amount received in the statement of financial position.
(3) When finalising the purchase price of Mars Inc it was agreed that non-current assets were already
at fair value but that receivables required a write-down of 50,000,000 Gals. This has not been
adjusted in the books of the subsidiary. These receivables were still outstanding at 31 March 20X7.
(4) The non-current assets of Mars were acquired as follows:
Gal’000
5 May 20X5 100,400
1 February 20X7 97,000
(5) Rates of exchange were as follows:
Gal = £1
5 May 20X5 6.0
31 December 20X6 5.4
1 February 20X7 4.7
31 March 20X7 4.2
Average for the three months to 31 March 20X7 4.8
(6) The company has determined that goodwill at the year end has been impaired by 10% of its
value in Gals. The impairment event arose on 31 March 20X7.
(7) Jupiter measures the non-controlling interest using the proportion of net assets method.
HB2021

Requirement
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of Jupiter group as at 31 March 20X7 in
accordance with IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates.
15 Cardamom
The Cardamom Company operates in the heavy engineering sector and has the pound sterling as its
functional currency.
On 30 September 20X7 Cardamom imported a crane from an overseas supplier, The Venilia
Company. The total cost of the crane was R$3,000,000. Under the terms of the contract Cardamom
was to pay Venilia R$2,000,000 on 31 October 20X7 and R$1,000,000 on 31 March 20X8. Cardamom
does not hedge its foreign currency cash flows.
The R$/£ spot exchange rates were as follows.
R$/£
30 September 20X7 3.0: 1
31 October 20X7 2.5: 1
31 December 20X7 2.2: 1
31 March 20X8 2.0: 1
Requirement
What should be the cash outflow in the statement of cash flows of Cardamom for the year ending 31
December 20X7 under Investing Activities in respect of the purchases of the crane, in accordance
with IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows?
16 Rostock
The Rostock Company operates in Sidonia and its functional currency is the N$. The Sidonian
economy has deteriorated to such an extent that it became necessary for Rostock to apply IAS 29,
Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies, with effect from 1 January 20X7. At that date
Rostock’s statement of financial position was summarised as follows.
N$ N$
Property, plant and equipment 27,600 Share capital 8,000
Trade receivables 10,800 Revaluation reserve 7,000
Cash 1,300 Retained earnings 11,300
Trade payables (13,400) ––––––
26,300 26,300
The share capital was issued on the date the company was formed, 1 January 20X5. The property,
plant and equipment was acquired on the same date and revalued on 30 September 20X5. The
trade payables were acquired on 30 September 20X6 and the trade receivables on 31 December
20X6.
The general price index of Sidonia has been as follows.
20X5 20X6 20X7

1 January 500 700 900
30 September 600 800
31 December 700 900
Average for the year 580 780
HB2021

Requirement
What amount should be recognised in the statement of financial position of Rostock at 1 January
20X7 in respect of retained earnings after the adjustments required by IAS 29?
17 Winstanley International Restaurants

Winstanley International Restaurants plc (WIR) is a listed company based in the UK which operates a
chain of restaurants. While most of its activities are in the UK, WIR has significant, and growing,
operations in the Far East, Africa, North America and Europe. WIR’s overseas activities are managed
through an autonomous subsidiary in each country where WIR has restaurants.
You are a senior in the firm that audits WIR and you will be attending, in two days’ time on 2 February
20X8, the final audit planning meeting in respect of the financial statements for the year ending 31
December 20X7.
The engagement Manager, Fiona Vood, has given you the following instructions ahead of the
meeting:
“I realise that you have not had any previous contact with this client, but the senior who carried out
the interim audit formed a personal relationship with the WIR finance director and has now left the
firm. The finance director has also resigned. There are various issues with this client that worry me. I
would like you to prepare a written summary of the most important concerns, as a basis for
discussion at the planning meeting.
One of the areas of concern raised at the interim audit was the financial reporting treatment of
foreign exchange issues. Unfortunately, a new finance director has not yet been appointed and WIR
staff have little expertise in this area. The board also has some concerns about the impact that foreign
exchange movements will have on the financial statements.
I would therefore like you to provide a written explanation for the audit planning meeting of the
financial reporting treatment of the matters connected with foreign exchange outlined in briefing
notes 1 and 2 that I have provided (see Exhibit), including relevant calculations of the impact on
WIR’s financial statements.
I am also concerned about the current position of Landran National Restaurants (LNR), which is one
of the WIR group’s largest subsidiaries. As you probably know, the country of Landra has been
undergoing significant economic turmoil and I’m afraid that this may be impacting on LNR. I’d be
grateful if you could let me have details of the possible financial reporting issues that may affect the
group’s consolidated financial statements. Further details about LNR are in briefing note 3.
I’m not satisfied with the explanations the last senior obtained from the finance director about certain
large payments. Details of these explanations are in briefing note 4; I reckon we need to do further
work on them.
As well as the tasks I’ve given you above, I would also like you, for each issue 1–4 in the briefing
notes, to set out a schedule which briefly describes the key audit risks and audit procedures.
Lastly, I’ve had an email from the Chief Executive saying that the board has decided to include a
social and environmental report in the group accounts for the first time. He’s wondering if we can
help the company prepare the report and report on it as part of our audit. I think it may be a good
idea, but I need some notes on the issues so that I can respond to the Chief Executive.”
Requirement
Respond to the instructions from the engagement manager.
Exhibit: Briefing notes

(1) WIR, the parent company, made an undated loan to one of its foreign subsidiaries, Rextex Inc, of
$4.8 million on 1 March 20X7. The loan was denominated in $ which is the functional currency of
Rextex. WIR has made it clear that the loan is part of a long-term commitment to financing the
activities of this subsidiary. The exchange rate on 1 March 20X7 was £1:$2 and the exchange rate
on 31 December 20X7 was £1:$1.6. Please cover both the treatment in the group financial
statements and in the WIR parent company financial statements.
(2) On 30 September 20X7 WIR purchased a cold storage depot in Lanvia in order to store food
purchased from the region. The transaction had been personally authorised and dealt with by
the finance director, with initial board approval. After the purchase was agreed, the finance
HB2021

director had visited Lanvia to take custody of the title documents. WIR does not have a
subsidiary in Lanvia.
The depot contract was invoiced in Lanvian Crona (LCr) for LCr15 million. Payment was to be
made in LCr in two equal instalments on 30 November 20X7 and on 31 January 20X8. As you
may know, the LCr has appreciated significantly against the £ as a result of the Lanvian
Government creating an independent Central Bank. Current and historical exchange rates are:
30 September 20X7 – LCr2.50/£1
30 November 20X7 – LCr2.10/£1
31 December 20X7 – LCr2.00/£1
31 January 20X8 (today) – LCr1.95/£1
During the interim audit the senior went to Lanvia to inspect the new depot and the purchase
documentation.
(3) Landran National Restaurants is, in terms of revenue, WIR’s second biggest subsidiary. It is a
chain of high-quality restaurants, operating in the country of Landra. Over the last few years
Landra has been affected by considerable economic uncertainty; inflation is currently running at
95% and is expected to go on rising rapidly for the next few years. Landra’s local stock market is
almost dormant; because of the impact of inflation, rich investors have preferred to invest in
property in Landra or in overseas stock markets. The uncertainty has impacted significantly on
LNR’s business; it has been forced to link staff wages to the country’s price index, and its
suppliers are insisting that either LNR pays immediately in cash or, if it takes credit, that the
payments are adjusted to take account of the price inflation between LNR purchasing supplies
and the suppliers being paid.
LNR’s financial statements have been prepared on an unmodified historical cost basis in
accordance with local accounting practice.
(4) Several large payments have been made to unidentified agents and described as commissions
in respect of obtaining large catering contracts. Most of these payments have been made in
cash, some of which were in foreign currencies; however, some payments have been made by
cheque. Inquiries relating to the payee of the cheque have revealed that they are in the name of
a nominee and the beneficiary cannot be identified. There is no supporting documentation for
any of the payments.
Before his departure the former finance director told the audit senior that such commissions are
common practice and the agent represents valuable contacts whose identity must be kept
confidential as otherwise WIR’s competitors would be able to ‘poach’ work from them.
this chapter.
HB2021


The £ value of the loan is recorded as £4 million (€10/2.5). The UK company suffered an exchange
loss of £1 million.

Assumption 1: All the tables were sold on 20 December 20X5 and were paid for on 15 December
20X5.
Purchases = $3,600,000 ÷ 1.8 = £2m
Purchases are recorded at the exchange rate on the date of the original transaction.
Exchange gain on settlement of payable = ($3,600,000 ÷ 1.8) – ($3,600,000 ÷ 1.9) = £105,263
The dollar has weakened between the date of the transaction and the date of settlement; so the cost
of settling the trade payable in terms of pounds has reduced thereby producing an exchange gain
which is recognised in profit or loss.
No balances are outstanding, as all the inventories have been sold and the trade payable is settled
before the year end.
Assumption 2: All the tables were sold on 3 February 20X6 and were paid for on 15 December
20X5.
Purchases = $3,600,000 ÷ 1.8 = £2m
Exchange gain on settlement of payable = £105,263
The impact on profit or loss is as for Assumption 1, as the trade payable was settled on the same day.
Inventories = $3,600,000 ÷ 1.8 = £2m
All the purchases were held in inventory at the year end. As a non-monetary item, inventories remain
at their original cost (ie, at the exchange rate at the date of the original purchase).
Assumption 3: All the tables were sold on 15 December 20X5 and were paid for on 3 February
20X6.
Purchases = $3,600,000 ÷ 1.8 = £2m
Exchange gain on year-end retranslation of payable = ($3,600,000 ÷ 1.8) – ($3,600,000 ÷ 2.0) =
£200,000
The exchange gain is now determined with respect to the value of the trade payable at the year end
(as a monetary item trade payables are translated at the year-end exchange rate). The dollar has
weakened between the date of the transaction and the year end, so the cost of settling the trade
payable in terms of pounds has reduced, thereby producing an exchange gain, which is recognised
in profit or loss. The remainder of any exchange gain/loss between the year end and the date of
eventual settlement is recognised in the 20X6 financial statements.
Inventories = Nil. All the inventory is sold during the year.
Trade payables = ($3,600,000 ÷ 2.0) = £1,800,000
As a monetary item, trade payables are translated at the year-end exchange rate.
HB2021

Assumption 4: 75 of the tables were sold on 15 December 20X5 with the remaining 25 tables sold
on 3 February 20X6. All the tables were paid for on 3 February 20X6.
Purchases = $3,600,000 ÷ 1.8 = £2m
Exchange gain on year-end retranslation of payable = ($3,600,000 ÷ 1.8) – ($3,600,000 ÷ 2.0) =
£200,000
The explanation of the exchange gain is as for Assumption 3.
Inventories = 25% × ($3,600,000 ÷ 1.8) = £500,000
25% of the purchases were still held in inventory at the year end. As a non-monetary item these
inventories remain at their original cost (ie, at the exchange rate at the date of the original purchase).

Management should value the land at £312,000 at 31 December 20X6.
The land is initially recognised at its original cost translated at the spot rate between Muritania lira
and the pound (ie, £260,000) on acquisition. The value remains unchanged at 31 December 20X4
because management determined there was no need for a revaluation in this period.
At 31 December 20X5, the land is valued at £250,000, which is the fair value as at 31 December
20X5 translated at the exchange rate on the same date, when the fair value was determined (IAS
21.23). Entity A recognises a loss of £10,000 profit or loss on 31 December 20X5, because a
decrease of the carrying amount as a result of a revaluation is recognised in profit or loss (IAS 16.40).
At 31 December 20X6, the land is valued at £312,000. Entity A recognises a gain of £10,000 in profit
or loss. The gain of £10,000 is the reversal of the revaluation decrease as at 31 December 20X5.
The revaluation surplus of £52,000 is recognised in equity (IAS 16.39).

Petra Ltd will record its initial investment at £12,000 which is the cost of the shares (€24,000)
translated at the rate of exchange on the acquisition date. The statement of financial position of
Hellenic Marble at 31 December 20X6 will be:
Exchange
€’000 rate £’000
Non-monetary asset 96 3 32
Share capital and retained earnings 24 8

Loan 72 3 24
32
The share capital and retained earnings is the balancing item and is reconciled as follows:
Translation of closing equity (€24,000 @ €3/£1) £8,000

Translation of opening equity (€24,000 @ €2/£1) £12,000
Loss therefore £4,000

In relation to the financial statements of Venus Inc:
• The extent to which the work of the component auditors can be relied on. The indication is that
the firm is reputable; however, differences in local practices will still need to be taken into
account. Additional audit procedures may be required as a result to satisfy UK requirements.
HB2021

• The accounting framework adopted and more specifically the accounting policies adopted by
Venus.
• Whether the component auditors have considered the effect of the high inflation on the ability of
the business to continue operating. While the functional currency of Venus is the US$, the
company may not be completely immune from the effects of exchange rates for local transactions.
In addition, extreme inflation may have resulted in falling sales if local sales have fallen
dramatically due to lack of affordability.
In relation to the group accounts:
• The nature of the investment ie, whether the political instability in Zorgistan is such that control
cannot be exercised and therefore the investment is not a subsidiary.
• Whether IAS 21 has been complied with in terms of the translation of the subsidiary’s accounts
into pounds.
• Materiality of the subsidiary to the group as a whole. This would be of particular relevance if the
subsidiary were to face going concern issues.
HB2021

1 Conversion versus translation

Conversion is the process of physically exchanging one currency for another.
Translation is the restatement of the value of one currency in another currency.
2 Monetary items
Money held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in fixed or determinable amounts of
money.
3 Initial recognition
Use the exchange rate at the date of the transaction. An average rate for a period can be used if the
exchange rates did not fluctuate significantly.
4 Functional currency
Primary factors used in the determination of the functional currency include the currency of the
country that influences sales price for goods and services, labour, material and other costs and
whose competitive forces and regulations determine these prices and costs.
Secondary indicators include the currency in which funding and receipts from operating activities
arise.
5 Goodwill and fair value adjustments

Treat as assets/liabilities of the foreign operation and translate at the closing rate.
6 Change in functional currency

Only if there is a change to the underlying transactions relevant to the entity.
7 Zephyria
£134,823
Goodwill is translated at the closing rate. Therefore N$175,000/1.298 = £134,823.
See IAS 21 IN15 and 57.
8 Cacomistle
£173,344
Because IAS 21.47 treats fair value adjustments to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities arising
on the acquisition of a foreign operation as assets and liabilities of the foreign operation, it requires
them to be translated at the closing rate.
The correct answer is thus N$225,000/1.298 = £173,344.
9 Longspur
£8,052
IAS 21.21 and 22 require that an asset should be recorded initially at the date of the transaction,
which is the date it first qualifies for recognition. For property, plant and equipment, this is when the
asset is delivered, which in this case is 30 April 20X7.
HB2021

The equipment is a non-monetary asset and thus its carrying amount stays at the original translated
value per IAS 21.23(b). Depreciation on a non-monetary asset is charged from when it becomes
available for use and is treated in the same way as the related assets, so there is no change from the
exchange rate at initial recognition. The correct answer is therefore:
(N$250,000/10 years) × 8/12 = N$16,667 translated at £1:N$2.07 = £8,052.
10 Orton
£511,111
Exchange gain = (N$9,200,000/1.8) – (N$9,200,000/2.0) = £511,111
The exchange gain is determined with respect of the value of the trade payable at the year end (as
per IAS 21.23(a) monetary items such as trade payables are translated at the year-end exchange
rate). The N$ has weakened between the date of the transaction and the year end, so the cost of
settling the trade payable in terms of £ has reduced, thereby producing an exchange gain.
There is no gain or loss in respect of the revenue for the paintings sold, which is recorded at the
transaction date rate (IAS 21.21). There is no gain or loss on the paintings held in inventory which in
the year-end statement of financial position are translated at the transaction date rate (IAS 21.23(b)).
11 Alder
The loan would initially be recorded in the financial statements of Culpeo at the rate ruling on the
transaction date (IAS 21.21), so £9m × 2.0 = R$18m. Under IAS 21.23 the amount payable at the year
end is £9m × 1.8 = R$16.2m. The difference is a gain (ie, reduction in a liability) of R$1.8 million in the
financial statements of Culpeo.
This gain will be translated at the closing rate and is equal to £1.0 million (R$1.8m/1.8). Since the
loan is part of the net investment, it is recognised as a separate component of equity as required by
IAS 21.15 and IAS 21.32–33.
12 Porcupine
£60 million loss, recognised in equity
IAS 21.39 and 41 require that exchange differences in translation to the presentation currency are
recognised directly in equity.
£m £m
Net assets at 1 January 20X7 at last year’s rate N$300 @ 2.0 150
Net assets at 1 January 20X7 at this year’s rate N$300 @ 3.0 100 50 loss
Profit at average rate N$150 @ 2.5 60
Profit at 31 December 20X7 N$150 @ 3.0 50 10 loss
60 loss
13 Soapstone
(a) The goodwill acquired is calculated as:
R$
Consideration transferred (£700/2) 350
Non-controlling interest (R$500 × 40%) 200
550
Net assets of acquiree (500)
Goodwill 50
Translated at acquisition (R$50 × 2) = £100
HB2021

R$
Retranslated at 31 December 20X7 (R$50 × 3) = £150
(b) As there has been no change in Frew’s share capital during 20X7, the (R$730 – R$500) = R$230
increase in equity represents Frew’s profit for 20X7. This is translated at the £2.50: R$1 average
rate as an approximation to the rates ruling at the date of each transaction, to give £575, of
which Soapstone’s 60% share is £345 (IAS 21.39(b)–40).
(c) The amount reported as other comprehensive income is made up of the exchange difference on
the retranslation of Frew’s accounts plus the exchange difference on the retranslation of
goodwill:
Retranslation of Frew’s accounts
£ £
Net assets at 1 January 20X6 at opening rate R$500 @ 2.0 1,000
Net assets at 1 January 20X6 at closing rate R$500 @ 3.0 1,500 500 gain
Profit at average rate R$230 @ 2.5 575
Profit at closing rate R$230 @ 3.0 690 115 gain
615 gain
Retranslation of goodwill
£150 – £100 = £50 gain (part (1))
The overall exchange gain recognised as other comprehensive income is therefore £615 + £50
= £665.
Of this:
• £615 × 40% = £246 is attributable to the non-controlling interest
• (£615 × 60%) + £50 = £419 is attributable to the shareholders of the parent
14 Jupiter
Consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 March 20X7
£’000
Tangible non-current assets (148,500 + 47,000) 195,500
Goodwill (W4) 54,641
Net current assets (212,800 + 22,738) 235,538
485,679
Share capital 300,000
Foreign exchange reserve (W6) 24,451
374,935
Long-term loans (90,913 (W3) + 14,286) 105,199
485,679
HB2021

WORKINGS
(1) Translation of the statement of financial position of Mars Inc
Gal’000 Gal’000 Rate £’000

Tangible non-current assets 197,400 4.2 CR 47,000
Net current assets 145,500
Less receivables w/d 50,000
95,500 4.2 CR 22,738
292,900 69,738
Share capital 150,000 5.4 HR 27,778
Pre-acquisition reserves (W2) 76,675 5.4 HR 14,199
Post-acquisition reserves (24,900 × 3/12) 6,225 ß 13,475
(incl exchange differences to date) 232,900 55,452
Long-term liabilities 60,000 4.2 CR 14,286
292,900 69,738
(2) Pre-acquisition reserves
Gal’000
Balance at 31 March 20X7 132,900
Less earnings post-acquisition (24,900 × 3/12) (6,225)
Reserves at 31 December 20X6 126,675
Less write-down of receivables (50,000)
Pre-acquisition reserves 76,675
(3) Jupiter plc loans (retranslated at closing rate)
£’000 £’000
Long-term liability per SFP 93,000
Revaluation of Swiss franc loan
SF50.4m / 2.1 24,000
SF50.4m / 2.3 (21,913)
Gain on remeasurement 2,087
Remeasured long-term liabilities 90,913
(4) Goodwill
Gal’000 £’000
Consideration transferred (£85m × 5.4) 459,000
(Gal 150m + Gal 76.675m) × 10% 22,668
481,668
Net assets of acquiree (150m + 76.675m) (226,675)
Goodwill 254,993 @ HR 5.4 47,221
HB2021

Gal’000 £’000
Impairment (25,499) @ CR 4.2 (6,071)
Exchange gain (β) 13,491
Carrying value 229,494 @ CR 4.2 54,641
Proof of exchange gain: £’000
Initial value of goodwill Gal 254,993,000 @ HR 5.4 47,221
@ CR 4.2 60,712
Overall exchange gain 13,491
(5) Consolidated retained earnings
£’000
Jupiter plc 53,300
Share of post-acquisition profits in Mars
(90% × Gal 24.9m × 3/12m) @ AR 4.8 1,168
Gain on Swiss franc loan (W3) 2,087
Impairment of goodwill (W4) (25,499/4.2) (6,071)
50,484
(6) Foreign exchange reserve
£’000
Exchange gain on goodwill (W4) 13,491
Group share of exchange gain on retranslation of subsidiary (W8) 10,960
24,451
(7) Non-controlling interest (from W1)
£’000
10% × (69,738 – 14,286) 5,545
(8) Exchange difference on retranslation of subsidiary
£’000 £’000
Opening net assets (acquisition) Gal 226,675,000 @ HR 5.4 41,977
@ CR 4.2 53,970 Gain 11,993
Retained profits since acquisition
Gal 24.9m × 3/12 = Gal 6.225m @ AR 4.8 1,297
@ CR 4.2 1,482 Gain 185
Gain 12,178
Group share £12,178,000 × 90% 10,960
15 Cardamom
£800,000
HB2021

IAS 7.25 requires cash flows from foreign currency transactions to be recorded by reference to the
exchange rate at the date of the cash flow.
Only the October 20X7 flow falls within the year ended 31 December 20X7, so the outflow is
R$2,000,000 at 2.5 = £800,000
16 Rostock
N$25,700
The only asset requiring adjustment is the PPE, from date of revaluation to 1 January 20X7, so it is
restated to N$41,400 (N$27,600 × 900/600) (IAS 29.18). The other assets and the trade payables are
monetary items which require no adjustment (IAS 29.12). So the restated equity is N$40,100
(N$41,400 – N$27,600 + N$26,300).
At the beginning of the first period of application of IAS 29, share capital is restated from the date of
contribution, the revaluation surplus is eliminated and retained earnings are the balancing figure (IAS
29.24). Retained earnings are N$25,700 (N$40,100 – N$8,000 × 900/500).
17 Winstanley International Restaurants

To Fiona Vood
From A Senior
Date 31 January 20X8
Subject Winstanley Audit – International transactions and balances
Parent company loan
(1) Financial reporting
Where a parent company makes a loan to a subsidiary then the amount outstanding is an intra-
group monetary item. The entity with the currency exposure needs to recognise an exchange
difference on the intra-group balance. In this case, as the loan is denominated in dollars, then the
currency risk lies with WIR rather than Rextex.
(a) Parent company financial statements
The loan is a monetary item. The normal rules of IAS 21 apply in the case of the parent
company accounts. Assuming that the £ is the functional currency of WIR (as ‘most of its
activities are in the UK’) then the exchange difference should be recognised in profit or loss.
Specifically there is a foreign exchange gain on the loan receivable of £600,000 [($4.8m/2) –
($4.8m/1.6)]
The receivable will thus be recorded in the WIR individual company statement of financial
position at £3 million.
It is possible that the loan may have been eligible to be treated as a fair value hedge of
exchange rate risk of the investment, but it does not appear that adequate documentation
was put in place at inception.
(b) Consolidated financial statements
In the consolidated financial statements the loan from a parent to a subsidiary can be
regarded as part of a net investment in a foreign operation. This is only permitted by IAS 21
where settlement is neither planned nor likely to occur in the foreseeable future.
As the WIR loan is undated, and there is no intention for repayment in the short or medium
term, it would therefore appear that the loan to Rextex qualifies as a net investment in a
foreign operation.
As a consequence, IAS 21 requires that the exchange gain of £600,000 recognised in profit
of the WIR parent company accounts must, on consolidation, be removed from consolidated
profit or loss, recognised as other comprehensive income and recorded in equity in the
combined statement of financial position.
(2) Audit risk and audit procedures
A key risk is that the loan from WIR to Rextex fails the IAS 21 test for a net investment in a foreign
operation. The consequence of this would be that the loan would be a normal monetary item
and the exchange gain taken to profit in the consolidated financial statements in the normal way.
HB2021

The key audit risks are that:
– the loan might be improperly classified and thus the exchange gain on the loan wrongly
recognised as other comprehensive income; and
– the company may wish the exchange gain to be recognised in profit or loss (rather than as
other comprehensive income) and therefore change the terms of the loan before the year end
in order to make it more temporary. It would thus not be treated as a net investment in a
foreign subsidiary.
Other audit risks and audit procedures are as follows:
Audit risks Audit procedures
Use of inappropriate exchange rates Verify exchange rates by confirming dates of the
initial loan agreement and funds transfer
Consider any impairment of loan Review going concern of Rextex (budgets,

liquidity, cash flow)
Review terms of loan for evidence of Review correspondence between WIR and
permanency or ability of WIR directors to Rextex and board minutes for evidence that the
change the terms of the loan in the near future loan may be repayable in the near future
Review the terms of the loan
Post year end changes in exchange rates Verify exchange rates after the end of the
affecting loan value reporting period. If material consider disclosure
as a non-adjusting event per IAS 10
Purchase of warehouse
(1) Financial reporting
According to IAS 21 an entity is required to translate foreign currency items and transactions into
its functional currency.
WIR initially records both the non-current asset and the liability at £6 million (LCr15m/2.5).
£m £m
DEBIT Warehouse – non-current asset 6
CREDIT Liability 6
The non-current asset needs no further translating.

By the date of the first payment there has been an appreciation in the LCr against the £. As a result
the actual amount in £s that WIR needs to settle the first instalment will increase, thereby resulting in
an exchange loss.
Amount required to settle is LCr7.5m/2.1 = £3,571,429
The exchange loss is thus £571,429 (£3,571,429 – £3m)
The remainder of the liability is still outstanding at the year-end date. As a monetary liability, it needs
retranslating at the rate of exchange ruling at the reporting date as £3.75 million (ie, LCr7.5m/2).
The resulting exchange loss of £750,000 (ie, LCr7.5m/2.5 – LCr7.5m/2) should be shown as part of
profit or loss.
The settlement date and exchange rate on that date are not relevant for the financial statements of
the year ending 31 December 20X7.
There are concerns over the role of the FD Interview other board members and finance staff to
due to the following: assess competence, integrity and degree of control
• The resignation in the year exercised by the FD
HB2021

• The personal relationship with the last Review samples of transactions authorised by the
audit senior FD
• Personal control over the acquisition of a
major asset
• The ‘commissions’ paid (discussed
further below)
Review the measures taken to compensate for the
• There is no replacement FD yet in post absence of an FD
Internal controls over the transaction – given Review board minutes for authorisation
major involvement of FD Speak to members of the board and finance staff to
assess role of the ex-FD in the contract (was there
any meaningful segregation of duties?)
Re-examine audit working papers of previous audit
senior given personal involvement. Consider
reperforming audit procedures
Timing of payments Review contract to ascertain payment terms and

dates. Verify actual payments made after they have
occurred
Business risk – impairment Given the doubts over the FD, ascertain the
business case for warehouse (ie, why it was needed
in this location) and assess its fair value on the basis
of (i) any independent valuations carried out during
purchase process (ii) utilisation of the warehouse
since purchase (eg, amount of inventories held
there).
Landra – hyperinflationary economy

(1) Financial reporting issues
Landra appears to have several of the characteristics of a hyperinflationary economy:
– Many of the richest people in Landra are accumulating wealth in property, or investing it in
stable markets overseas.
– Suppliers are adjusting the credit payments required from LNR.
– The staff in Landran restaurants are having to be paid in amounts linked to a price index.
– Based on the information available, inflation is likely to exceed 100% over three years.
If Landra is judged to be a hyperinflationary economy, then the financial statements of LNR will
have to be restated before they are translated into WIR’s currency for consolidation purposes.
The historical cost financial statements will have to be stated in terms of the measuring units
current at the reporting date.
(2) Audit risks and audit procedures
The decision on whether the accounts should be translated because the Landran economy is
hyperinflationary is not always straightforward. IAS 29 does not specify a cut-off point in terms of
an exact rate but gives examples of indications that hyperinflation exists. IAS 29 also indicates
that precise accuracy in restating amounts is not possible, but what is important is consistent
application of its principles. Thus if the accounts are restated, the expectation should be that
they will be restated for a number of years. The adjustments required will need to be verified.
In addition, the poor economic conditions in the country may cast doubt on whether the
subsidiary can continue to operate as a going concern. As an upmarket chain of restaurants, it
may be badly hit by the economic problems.
HB2021

Audit risks and audit procedures may include:
Landra may be Examine economic forecasts by bodies such as the Bank of England for
incorrectly treated as a information about future economic trends in Landra, particularly the rate
hyperinflationary of inflation
economy Obtain information about the Landra Government’s current economic
policies, in particular any plans they have to reduce inflation
Review reports and press coverage of the situation in Landra and
attempt to ascertain whether the problems LNR is facing are widespread
Adjustments may be Assess whether the price index used to make IAS 29 adjustments is a
calculated wrongly reliable indicator of inflation, and ascertain the reasons for the choice
made if index used is not Landran consumer prices index
Assess whether the classification of statement of financial position items
into monetary and non-monetary for the purposes of making
adjustments is appropriate
Ascertain whether non-monetary items in the statement of financial
position, the statement of profit or loss and relevant items in the
statement of cash flows have been adjusted into measuring units current
at the end of the reporting period
Reperform the adjustment calculations and verify the adjustments used
to the price index
Ensure that monetary items, and other assets stated at market value or
net realisable value, have not been adjusted (already expressed in terms
of the monetary unit current at the end of the reporting period)
Reperform the calculation of monetary gain or loss
Confirm that the comparative figures have been restated in line with
current measuring units
Confirm that the consolidated accounts fulfil the disclosure
requirements of IAS 29
LNR may be wrongly Obtain budget and forecast information and review for signs of cash
treated as a going shortages
concern Consider whether the assumptions take appropriate account of current
economic difficulties in Landra
Ascertain whether LNR directors’ assessment of going concern extends
to 12 months from the date of the financial statements and request
assessment be extended to this length if not
Also consider the UK-specific requirement that the directors should
disclose if their going concern assessment covered a period less than
one year from the date of the approval of the financial statements, in
which case this should be disclosed in the auditor’s report
Assess the availability of local finance if LNR is likely to require it
Obtain written representations from WIR’s directors of plans by WIR to
provide financial support for LNR
Assess the likely effectiveness of any other plans that LNR’s directors
have to deal with going concern difficulties
Assess whether uncertainties that exist about the future of LNR are
material in the context of the group financial statements
Consider the need for adjustments to the figures consolidated if the
going concern basis is not appropriate for LNR
Consider the need for modification of the audit opinion on the grounds
of material misstatement or the inclusion of a ‘Material Uncertainty
HB2021

Related to Going Concern’ section
Payments to agents
Even if the commission payments are legal, the accounting records that relate to these payments
are inadequate, and we only have the unsupported word of the ex-FD. This does not represent
sufficient evidence by itself; we should expect to see stronger evidence in the form of proper
payment records. Now that the FD has left, no one else may have any knowledge about what the
payments are for.
In addition, what the FD described as commissions for obtaining work may in fact be bribes. The
lack of documentation means that we cannot be certain that the payments are in fact
commissions. They may represent a diversion of funds to the FD or possibly money laundering.
The fact that the FD was able to make these payments without anyone checking also casts doubt
on how effective the rest of the board has been in monitoring the effectiveness of the internal
control systems. Although as auditors we do not have to give an opinion on the effectiveness of
internal controls, we do have to assess the review carried out by the directors. We also need to
consider the strength of the evidence of representations by the board, since the failure to
control the FD may indicate a lack of knowledge of key accounting areas.
The main audit risks and procedures include the following:
Risks Audit procedures
Money paid to Ascertain details about the nominee payees, through internet searches or
payees who have through international contacts
no entitlement to Having gained the client’s permission, attempt to contact the payees and ask
them for an explanation of these payments
Discuss the legal position with the current directors, pointing out that the
audit report may need to be qualified on the grounds of failure to provide
explanations
If possible, obtain written representations from other directors; however,
directors may not be able to provide those representations and even if they
can, the representations by themselves will not be sufficient audit evidence
Ask the directors to encourage other staff to disclose any knowledge they
have of these payments, pointing out that auditors have an obligation to
keep legitimate business matters confidential
Consider issuing a qualified opinion or disclaimer on grounds of uncertainty
because of an inability to obtain sufficient appropriate evidence. Also
consider reporting by exception on failure to keep proper accounting
records
Consider issuing a qualified audit opinion on the grounds of material
misstatement or an adverse opinion if the accounts do not fairly reflect what
the payments appear to be
Bribery/money Ascertain whether payments can be linked to specific bookings or specific

laundering contracts
Identify the countries to which the payments are being sent, and ascertain
whether doubtful business practices are widespread there
Examine expenditure in other categories where reasons for expenditure
appear doubtful or payees are unclear
Consider taking legal advice or reporting to the proper authority if there
appears to be suspicion of illegal activity, or it is in the public interest to do so
(clearly, tipping off should be avoided)
HB2021

Risks Audit procedures
Corporate Review board’s statement about the review of internal control effectiveness
governance (assuming one has been carried out) and consider whether it fairly reflects
insufficiently/incor what has taken place
rectly described in Review disclosures of processes dealing with internal control problems such
accounts as the payments authorised by the finance director and consider whether
disclosures fairly describe these processes
Consider whether the directors have sufficient knowledge to be able to make
representations required for audit
Social and environmental statement

(1) Ethical issues
Helping the client on the social and environmental report is likely to be recurring work. We
should therefore first assess whether this work, together with the other work we do for the client,
would earn us fees that are greater than 10% of total practice or partner fees, and would
therefore be a self-interest threat. In addition we need to consider whether the provision of the
non-audit work would breach the 70% benchmark in relation to average fees paid in the last
three consecutive years.
Secondly, we should consider carefully the work we are being asked to do. Helping
management to prepare a policy statement might constitute a threat to independence on a
number of grounds. Even if our work was limited to preparing factual statements and analysis,
we would still face a threat to independence. As auditors we would be checking the consistency
of a statement we helped prepare against the financial statements. If we had a more active role,
helping management prepare commentary and statements of opinion, we could be accused of
acting as the client’s advocate.
Our work should therefore be confined to reporting on the statement that management
prepares. However, we need to consider whether we have the knowledge and competence
necessary to issue an opinion in the terms the client wants, and to carry out the work necessary
to support that opinion.
In addition, the audit committee should have ultimate responsibility for deciding whether we can
provide non-audit services, not the board. Part of the audit committee’s remit under governance
guidance is to assess annually the independence of the external auditors, and specifically assess
for each non-audit service the competence of the audit firm to provide it and the safeguards in
place to stop it compromising its independence.
(2) Audit and assurance issues
Reporting on the statement should not be considered as part of the audit. Instead we should
treat it as an assurance engagement and issue a separate engagement letter in respect of it.
As auditors we are appointed to report on the financial statements. The social and environmental
report is not part of the financial statements; instead it will be one of the documents issued with
the financial statements. As such, our responsibility is to read it to identify any material
inconsistencies with the financial statements. We are not required to express an opinion on the
contents of this report.
Although social and environmental issues will have some impact on the audit, this is only insofar
as they affect the financial statements. Possible impacts include contingent liabilities and
provisions in respect of legal action, or expenditure on cleaning up sites. There are likely to be a
number of other aspects of the report which will not impact on the financial statements and we
therefore would not consider these.
We thus need to undertake additional work to be able to issue a full report on social and
environmental issues. The work we do and the content of the report would depend on the terms
of the engagement. The report is likely to include as a minimum:
– the objectives of the review
– opinions
– basis on which the opinions have been reached
– work performed
HB2021

Chapter 22
Income taxes
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Current tax revised
2 Deferred tax – an overview
3 Identification of temporary differences
4 Measurement of deferred tax assets and liabilities
5 Recognition of deferred tax in the financial statements
6 Common scenarios
7 Group scenarios
9 Deferred tax summary and practice
10 Audit focus
Summary
Technical reference
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
22
Learning outcomes
• Explain, determine and calculate how current and deferred tax is recognised and appraise
accounting standards that relate to current tax and deferred tax
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 8(a), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
22

of this chapter.

1 Current tax revised Approach It is important to N/A

Taxation is a major This section gives a study this section
expense for brief overview of carefully in order to
business entities the material that you get you thinking
and has a direct have covered at about the
effect on cash flow Professional Level differences between
and performance. on current tax accounting and
taxable profit, which
Stop and think you need to know
How should excess about in order to
tax paid be calculate current tax.
reported? Current tax may be
tested in its own
right, for example in
June 2020, and in
addition, this
thought process will
be helpful to you in
calculating deferred
tax.
2 Deferred tax – an Approach This overview could N/A

overview You have studied not be tested
Corporate income current tax at directly in an exam.
taxes are a means Professional Level, Please note, before
by which but deferred tax is getting into the
governments new to Advanced detail, that any tax
provide incentives Level, so you should rules will be given to
for companies to act focus on deferred you in an exam. You
in a particular way, tax. Focus on the are not required, for
for example overview of the the purposes of this
beneficial tax credits calculation in exam, to know the
to encourage paragraph 2.3. UK tax rules or those
research and of any other
development and country.
HB2021

allowances to Stop and think

encourage What are temporary
investment. differences?
Therefore, although
taxable profit is
based on
accounting profit,
there are often
important
differences.
3 Identification of Approach As you will have IQ1: Tax base

temporary Read the seen in previous A series of short
differences introduction to chapters, IAS 12 can questions covering
Accounting for identifying be examined in the a number of the
these types of temporary context of other situations you are
differences is the differences, IFRS/IAS, for likely to meet.
major emphasis of focusing on the example on
this chapter. summary table. pensions, share-
Make sure you based payment,
understand the revaluations or
definitions. leases.
Stop and think

When is the tax
base of an asset or
liability equal to its
carrying amount?
4 Measurement of Approach Deferred tax assets IQ2: Recovery 1

deferred tax assets Focus on the often come up in This question
and liabilities worked examples, the context of contrasts recovery
This section goes particularly the one pensions. through continued
into more depth on on use and recovery
the calculations. recovery/settlement. through sale.
Stop and think
What does
‘substantively
enacted’ mean?
5 Recognition of Approach Occasionally you N/A

deferred tax in the Study the worked will get a scenario
financial statements example in Section where a deferred
There will be a 5.1 and 5.2 (the tax asset has been
deferred tax liability deferred tax asset). wrongly calculated
(usually) or asset in and you are
Stop and think required to correct
the statement of
financial position When can we be this.
and a sure that sufficient
corresponding taxable profit will be
debit (usually) in available to use
profit or loss, other against a deductible
comprehensive temporary
income or goodwill. difference?
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 22: Income taxes 1261

6 Common scenarios Approach Any of these IQ5: Share option

Common scenarios The scenarios come scenarios could be scheme and
in which a deferred with explanations examined, deferred tax
tax asset or liability and in most cases particularly share- This question
might arise include with a worked based payment and revises your
but are not limited example. Work retirement benefits, knowledge of IFRS
to: through them as these areas were 2, which you studied
carefully. not tested at in Chapter 19, but
• Accelerated Professional Level.
capital Stop and think also tests the
allowances deferred tax
Why do temporary aspects.
• Interest revenue differences arise in
• Development respect of
costs retirement benefits?
• Revaluations
• Retirement
benefits
• Share-based
payment
7 Group scenarios Approach The most common IQ10: Deferred tax

Adjustments are You will be familiar group deferred tax scenarios
made on with fair value issue to be tested is As well as testing
consolidation to the adjustments on fair value deferred tax in a
carrying amounts of consolidation. adjustments on group context, this
assets and liabilities Temporary consolidation. comprehensive
which are not always differences arise on question also tests
reflected in the tax this, giving rise to other deferred tax
bases of those deferred tax, which issues, so is a
items, so temporary also affects priority, although
differences arise. goodwill. ideally you should
Stop and think do all the interactive
questions.
When will
deductible
temporary
differences arise in a
group context?
8 Presentation and Approach Disclosures could IQ12: Tax

disclosure Read and highlight. be tested. adjustment
This section gives Stop and think This question tests
the disclosures for the interaction
both current and Why might deferred between IAS 12 and
deferred tax. tax give rise to prior IAS 8.
period adjustments?
9 Deferred tax Approach The exam-standard IQ13: Exam-

summary and Read through and interactive question standard question
practice absorb the table, is indicative of how While deferred tax
This has been a long going back to the deferred tax will be is tested extensively
chapter so it is body of the chapter tested in in this question, so
useful to have a if anything is conjunction with are the scenarios
section summarising unclear. Then try the other standards. where it arises, so
what you have interactive question. the question revises
learned so far. your knowledge of
HB2021

Stop and think other standards

When would you relating to those
offset deferred tax scenarios.
assets and
liabilities?
10 Audit focus Approach You could get an N/A

As often with Read through this integrated question
auditing, the focus is short section in which deferred
on risk. carefully, paying tax was minimised
Management particular attention in order to make the
judgements are to the use of tax gearing figure more
involved, and the specialists. Focus on favourable. This
auditor needs to the case study, would give rise to
check that these are which gives this ethical issues.
reasonable. subject a practical
relevance.
Stop and think
Why are foreign
groups particularly
risky?
HB2021

1 Current tax revised
Section overview
Current tax is the amount payable to the tax authorities in relation to the trading activities of the
current period.
1.1 Background
Accounting for current tax is ordinarily straightforward. Complexities arise, however, when we
consider the future tax consequences of what is going on in the financial statements now. This is an
aspect of tax called deferred tax, which has not been covered in earlier studies and which we will
look at in the next section. IAS 12, Income Taxes covers both current and deferred tax. The parts of
this Workbook relating to current tax are fairly brief, as this has been covered at Professional Level.
1.2 Recognition of current tax liabilities and assets

Current tax is the amount payable to the tax authorities in relation to the current trading activities.
IAS 12 requires any unpaid tax in respect of the current or prior periods to be recognised as a
liability. Conversely, any excess tax paid in respect of current or prior periods over what is due
should be recognised as an asset to the extent it is probable that it will be recoverable.
The tax rate to be used in the calculation for determining a current tax asset or liability is the rate that
is expected to apply when the asset is expected to be recovered, or the liability to be paid. These
rates should be based on tax laws that have already been enacted (are already part of law) or
substantively enacted (have already passed through sufficient parts of the legal process that they are
virtually certain to be enacted) by the reporting date.
1.3 Measurement
Measurement of current tax liabilities (assets) for the current and prior periods is very simple. They
are measured at the amount expected to be paid to (recovered from) the tax authorities. The tax
rates (and tax laws) used should be those enacted (or substantively enacted) by the reporting date.
1.4 Recognition of current tax

Normally, current tax is recognised as income or expense and included in the net profit or loss for the
period. However, where tax arises from a transaction or event which is recognised as other
comprehensive income or recognised directly in equity (in the same or a different period) rather
than in profit or loss, then the related tax should also be reported within other comprehensive
income or reported directly in equity. An example of such a situation is where, under IAS 8,
Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, an adjustment is made to the
opening balance of retained earnings due to either a change in accounting policy that is applied
retrospectively, or to the correction of a material error. Any related tax is therefore also recognised
directly in equity.
1.5 Presentation
In the statement of financial position, tax assets and liabilities should be shown separately.
Current tax assets and liabilities may only be offset under the following conditions.
• The entity has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts.
• The entity intends to settle the amounts on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the
liability at the same time.
The tax expense (income) related to the profit or loss from ordinary activities should be shown on
the face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income as part of profit or loss
for the period. The disclosure requirements of IAS 12 are extensive and we will look at these later in
the chapter.
HB2021

2 Deferred tax – an overview
Section overview
• Deferred tax is an accounting measure used to match the tax effects of transactions with their
accounting impact and thereby produce less distorted results. It is not a tax levied by the
Government that needs to be paid.
• You have studied current tax at Professional Level, but deferred tax is new to Advanced Level, so
you should focus on deferred tax.
• Note that UK tax is not specifically examinable, but examples from UK tax are sometimes used in
this chapter for illustrative purposes.
• The rules to determine the tax base in the jurisdiction in the question, will be given to you in the
exam.
2.1 What is deferred tax?

When a company recognises an asset or liability, it expects to recover or settle the carrying amount
of that asset or liability. In other words, it expects to sell or use up assets, and to pay off liabilities.
What happens if that recovery or settlement is likely to make future tax payments larger (or smaller)
than they would otherwise have been if the recovery or settlement had no tax consequences? In
these circumstances, IAS 12 requires companies to recognise a deferred tax liability (or deferred tax
asset ).
Note: Deferred tax is not a tax that the entity pays. It is an accounting measure, used to match the tax
effect of transactions with their accounting effect.
2.2 Accounting profits vs taxable profits

Although accounting profits form the basis for computing taxable profits, on which the tax liability
for the year is calculated, accounting profits and taxable profits are often different for two main
reasons:
(a) Permanent differences
(b) Temporary differences
2.2.1 Permanent differences

These arise when items of revenue or expense included in the accounting profit are excluded from
the computation of taxable profits. For example:
• Client entertaining expenses are not tax allowable in the UK.
• UK companies are not taxed on dividends from other UK companies and overseas companies.
Note that IAS 12 does not refer to the term ‘permanent differences’; this is a UK GAAP term.
2.2.2 Temporary differences

These arise when items of revenue or expense are included in both accounting profits and taxable
profits, but not in the same accounting period. For example, both depreciation and capital
allowances write off the cost of a non-current asset, though not necessarily at the same rate and over
the same period.
Context example: Temporary differences 1

A company buys an item of machinery on the first day of the financial year, 1 January 20X0, at a cost
of £100,000 and applies straight-line depreciation at a rate of 10%. Capital allowances are available
at 20% reducing balance.
y/e 31 December Depreciation (10% SL) Capital allowances (20% RB)
20X0 £10,000 £20,000
HB2021

y/e 31 December Depreciation (10% SL) Capital allowances (20% RB)
20X1 £10,000 £16,000
20X2 £10,000 £12,800
20X3 £10,000 £10,240 and so on
Therefore in 20X0, accounting profits are reduced by £10,000 but taxable profits are reduced by
£20,000, so providing one reason why the tax charge is not equal to the tax rate multiplied by the
accounting profit.
At this point it could be said that the temporary difference is equal to the £10,000 difference
between depreciation and capital allowances.
In the long run, the total taxable profits and total accounting profits will be the same (except for
permanent differences). In other words, temporary differences which originate in one period will
reverse in one or more subsequent periods.
Deferred tax is an accounting adjustment to smooth out the discrepancies between accounting profit
and the tax charge caused by temporary differences.
2.3 Calculating and accounting for deferred tax

In order to calculate deferred tax, the following steps must be taken:
(a) Identify temporary differences
(b) Apply the tax rate to the temporary differences to calculate the deferred tax asset or liability
(c) Recognise the resulting deferred tax amount in the financial statements
Identification of temporary differences
Above we have considered temporary differences as being the result of income or expenditure
being recognised in accounting and taxable profit in different periods.
IAS 12, however, requires that a ‘net assets approach’ rather than an ‘income statement approach’ is
taken to calculate temporary differences.
Applying this approach to the illustration seen above, we would simply compare the carrying amount
and the tax written-down value rather than depreciation and capital allowances in order to calculate
the temporary difference:
£
Carrying amount (£100,000 – £10,000) 90,000
Tax written-down value (£100,000 – £20,000) 80,000
Temporary difference 10,000
The identification of temporary differences is covered in more detail in section 3.

Apply the tax rate to temporary differences to calculate deferred tax asset or liability
The tax rate to be used is not necessarily the current tax rate. It should be the rate which is expected
to apply to the period when the asset is realised or liability settled.
Record deferred tax in the financial statements
Depending on the circumstances, a deferred tax asset or liability may arise in the statement of
financial position. The corresponding entry is normally recorded in:
• the tax charge in profit or loss; or
• other comprehensive income.
HB2021

3 Identification of temporary differences
Section overview
Temporary differences are calculated as the difference between the carrying amount of an asset or
liability and its tax base. Temporary differences may be classified as:
• taxable
• deductible
3.1 Calculation of temporary differences

Temporary differences are calculated as the difference between:
• the carrying amount of the asset or liability in the statement of financial position; and
• the ‘tax base‘ of the asset or liability.
3.1.1 Tax base
Definition
Tax base: The amount attributed to an asset or liability for tax purposes.
Assets
The tax base of an asset is the value of the asset in the current period for tax purposes. This is either:
• the amount that will be tax deductible in the future against taxable economic benefits when the
carrying amount of the asset is recovered; or
• if those economic benefits are not taxable, the tax base is equal to the carrying amount of the
asset.
Liabilities
• The tax base of a liability is its carrying amount less any amount that will be tax deductible in the
future.
• For revenue received in advance, the tax base of the resulting liability is its carrying amount less
any amount of the revenue that will not be taxable in future periods.
IAS 12 guidance
IAS 12 states that in the following circumstances, the tax base of an asset or liability will be equal to
its carrying amount:
• Accrued expenses that have already been deducted in determining an entity’s tax liability for the
current or earlier periods
• A loan payable that is measured at the amount originally received and this amount is the same as
the amount repayable on final maturity of the loan
• Accrued income that will never be taxable
The table below gives some examples of tax rules and the resulting tax base.
Item Carrying amount in the Tax rule Tax base (amount in ‘tax
statement of financial accounts’)
position
Item of PPE Carrying amount = cost – Attracts tax relief in the Tax written down value =
accumulated depreciation form of tax depreciation cost – accumulated tax
depreciation
HB2021

Item Carrying amount in the Tax rule Tax base (amount in ‘tax
statement of financial accounts’)
position
Accrued Included in financial Chargeable for tax on a Nil

income statements on an accruals cash basis, ie when
basis ie, when receivable received
Chargeable for tax on an Same as carrying amount

accruals basis, ie, when in statement of financial
receivable position
Accrued Included in financial Attracts tax relief on a Nil

expenses statements on an accruals cash basis, ie when paid
and basis ie, when payable
provisions Attracts tax relief on an Same as carrying amount
accruals basis, ie, when in statement of financial
payable position
Income When the cash is Chargeable for tax on a Nil

received in received, it will be cash basis, ie, when (For revenue received in
advance included in the financial received advance, the tax base of
statements as deferred the resulting liability is its
income ie, a liability carrying amount, less any
amount of the revenue
that will not be taxable in
future periods)
Context example: Tax base 1

Current liabilities include accrued fines and penalties with a carrying amount of £100. These fines
and penalties are not deductible for tax purposes.
The tax base of the accrued fines and penalties is £100 (ie, equal to the carrying amount because the
amount which will be deducted for tax purposes in a future period is nil). As the tax base equals the
statement of financial position carrying amount, there is no temporary difference and no deferred tax
implications.
Context example: Tax base 2

Scenario 1 – An entity’s current assets include insurance premiums paid in advance of £20,000, for
which a tax deduction will be allowed in future periods.
The tax base of the insurance premiums is £20,000, because the whole carrying amount will be
deductible for tax purposes in future periods.
Scenario 2 – An entity has recognised a current liability of £400,000 in respect of income received in
advance, which will be taxed in future periods.
The tax base of the liability is its £400,000 carrying amount.
Scenario 3 – An entity has recognised a defined benefit liability of £500,000 in respect of a defined
benefit retirement plan, but no tax deduction is allowed until contributions are paid into the plan.
The tax base of the liability is nil, because the whole carrying amount will be deductible for tax
purposes in future periods.
Scenario 4 – Two years ago, an entity recognised a non-current asset at its £1 million cost. Tax
depreciation is allowed on the full cost at 15% per annum on a straight-line basis.
The tax base of the non-current asset is £700,000. 15% of cost has been allowed for tax purposes in
each of the two years; the tax base is therefore the 70% of cost which will be deductible for tax
purposes in future periods.
HB2021

Interactive question 1: Tax base
State the tax base of each of the following items.
1.1 Current liabilities include accrued expenses with a carrying amount of £1,000. The related
expense will be deducted for tax purposes on a cash basis.
1.2 Current liabilities include interest revenue received in advance, with a carrying amount of
£10,000. The related interest revenue was taxed on a cash basis.
1.3 Current assets include prepaid expenses with a carrying amount of £2,000. The related expense
has already been deducted for tax purposes.
1.4 A loan payable has a carrying amount of £1 million. The repayment of the loan will have no tax
consequences.
3.2 Types of temporary difference

IAS 12 makes a distinction between two types of temporary difference:
(a) Taxable temporary differences
(b) Deductible temporary differences
3.2.1 Taxable temporary differences

• Taxable temporary differences arise where the carrying amount exceeds the tax base.
• They result in a deferred tax liability.
Definitions
Taxable temporary differences: Temporary differences that will result in taxable amounts in
determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount of the asset or
liability is recovered or settled.
Deferred tax liabilities: The amounts of income taxes payable in future periods in respect of taxable
temporary differences.

Scenario 1 – An entity recognised a non-current asset at its £1 million cost two years ago. Tax
depreciation is allowed on the full cost at 15% per annum straight line, while accounting depreciation
is at 10% per annum straight line.
The tax base of the non-current asset is £700,000, but the carrying amount is £800,000. The taxable
temporary difference is therefore the difference of £100,000.
Scenario 2 – An entity has issued £400,000 of debt redeemable in five years, incurring £20,000 of
issue expenses. The issue expenses have been deducted from the liability and are being amortised
over the five-year life of the debt. To date, £5,000 has been amortised, but the whole £20,000 has
been allowed as a tax deduction.
The tax base of the liability is its £400,000 carrying amount less the £nil amount which is deductible
for tax purposes in future periods. The carrying amount is £385,000 and the taxable temporary
difference is therefore the difference of £15,000.
HB2021

3.2.2 Deductible temporary differences
• Deductible temporary differences arise where the tax base exceeds the carrying amount.
• These result in a deferred tax asset.
Definitions
Deductible temporary differences: Temporary differences that will result in amounts that are
deductible in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount of the
asset or liability is recovered or settled.
Deferred tax assets: The amounts of income taxes recoverable in future periods in respect of:
• deductible temporary differences; and
• the carry forward of unused tax losses/unused tax credits.

A factory was purchased for £4 million and has been given cumulative capital allowances of £1
million. It therefore has a tax base of £3 million.
Assumption 1 If the carrying amount of the factory in the statement of financial position is £3.5
million, then there is a taxable temporary difference of £500,000. (Note: Where
capital allowances claimed are cumulatively greater than accounting
depreciation, this is sometimes referred to as ‘accelerated’ as the tax allowances
have been awarded sooner than accounting depreciation has been recognised.)
Assumption 2 If, instead, the carrying amount of the factory in the statement of financial
position is £2 million, then there is a deductible temporary difference of £1
million.
3.2.3 Summary diagram

The following diagram may help you remember the distinction:
Figure 22.1: Temporary differences
Taxable temporary difference

Deferred tax liability
For example, the entity has Tax to pay in the future
recognised accrued income, but the
accrued income is not chargeable for
tax until the entity receives the cash
Deductible temporary difference

Deferred tax asset
For example, the entity has recorded Tax to pay in the future
a provision, but the provision does
not attract tax relief until the entity
actually spends the cash
HB2021

3.3 Temporary differences with no deferred tax impact
A deferred tax liability or asset should be recognised for all taxable and deductible temporary
differences unless they arise from:
• the initial recognition of goodwill; or
• the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction which:
– is not a business combination; and
– at the time of the transaction, affects neither accounting nor taxable profit.
Examples of initial recognition of assets or liabilities with no deferred tax effect
Examples of initial recognition of assets or liabilities in a transaction which does not affect either
accounting or taxable profit at the time of the transaction are:
(a) An intangible asset with a finite life which attracts no tax allowances. In this case, taxable profit is
never affected, and amortisation is only charged to accounting profit after the transaction.
(b) A non-taxable government grant related to an asset which is deducted in arriving at the carrying
amount of the asset. For tax purposes it is not deducted from the tax base.
Although a deductible temporary difference arises in both cases (on initial recognition in the second
case, and subsequently in the first case), this is not permitted to be recognised as a deferred tax
asset, as it would make the financial statements less transparent. The first of the two cases, an
intangible asset with a finite life which attracts no tax allowances, only gives rise to a deferred tax
asset if it has a chargeable gains cost, that is, if it was acquired separately after April 2002. If it was
acquired on consolidation, no deferred tax asset arises as the amortisation of the intangible just
decreases consolidated retained earnings.
Worked example: Initial recognition

As another example of the principles behind initial recognition, suppose Petros Co intends to use an
asset which cost £10,000 in 20X7 throughout its useful life of five years. Its residual value would then
be nil. The tax rate is 40%. Any capital gain on disposal would not be taxable (and any capital loss not
deductible). Depreciation of the asset is not deductible for tax purposes.
Requirement
State the deferred tax consequences in each of the years 20X7 and 20X8.
Solution
20X7
To recover the carrying amount of the asset, Petros will earn taxable income of £10,000 and pay tax
of £4,000. The resulting deferred tax liability of £4,000 would not be recognised because it results
from the initial recognition of the asset.
20X8
The carrying value of the asset is now £8,000. In earning taxable income of £8,000, Petros will pay tax
of £3,200. Again, the resulting deferred tax liability of £3,200 is not recognised, because it results
from the initial recognition of the asset.
HB2021

3.4 Summary
The following diagram summarises the calculation and types of temporary difference:
Figure 22.2: The calculation and types of temporary difference
Tax treatment
differs from
accounting
treatment
Temporary differences
Tax base < Tax base = Tax base >

carrying amount carrying amount carrying amount
Taxable No deferred tax Deductible

temporary implications temporary
difference difference
Deferred tax Deferred tax

liability asset
Context example: Tax base of assets

(a) A machine cost £100,000. For tax purposes, capital allowances of £30,000 have already been
deducted in the current and prior periods; and the remaining cost will be deductible in future
periods. Assume that revenue generated by using the machine is taxable, any gain on disposal
of the machine will be taxable and any loss on disposal will be deductible for tax purposes. The
carrying amount of the machine for accounting purposes is £82,000.
The tax base of the machine is £70,000 as this remains to be deducted in future periods. There is
a taxable temporary difference of £12,000 (ie, £82,000 – £70,000).
(b) Interest receivable has a carrying amount of £1,000. The related interest revenue will be taxed
on a cash basis.
The tax base of the interest receivable is nil, as the accrual is not recognised for tax purposes.
There is therefore a taxable temporary difference of £1,000.
(c) Trade receivables have a carrying amount of £10,000. Assume that the related revenue has
already been included in taxable profit.
The tax base of the trade receivables is £10,000. (Note: The difference between this case and the
previous example is that in this case the amount has been included in both the accounting profit
and the taxable profit for the period, thus there is no future taxable impact.) As the tax base
equals the carrying amount, there is no temporary difference and no deferred tax.
(d) A loan receivable has a carrying amount of £8,000. The repayment of the loan will have no tax
consequences.
The tax base of the loan is £8,000, as there are no future tax consequences. Thus, as the tax base
equals the carrying value, there is no temporary difference and no deferred tax.
HB2021

Worked example: Tax base of liabilities
In the following cases show and explain:
(1) the tax base
(2) temporary differences:
Requirements
1 Current liabilities include accrued expenses with a carrying amount of £2,000. The related
expense will be deducted for tax purposes on a cash basis.
2 Current liabilities include accrued expenses with a carrying amount of £3,000. The related
expense has already been deducted for tax purposes.
3 A loan payable has a carrying amount of £5,000. The repayment of the loan will have no tax
consequences.
4 Current liabilities include interest revenue received in advance, with a carrying amount of £7,000.
The related interest revenue was taxed on a cash basis.
Solution
1 The tax base of the accrued expenses is nil. This is because the expenses have been recognised
in accounting profit, but the tax impact is yet to take effect. There is therefore a deductible
temporary difference of £2,000.
2 The tax base of the accrued expenses is £3,000, ie, the carrying value (£3,000) less the amount
which will be deducted for tax purposes in future periods (nil, as relief has already been
obtained). There is no temporary difference, and no deferred tax arises.
3 The tax base of the loan is £5,000, as there are no future tax consequences. Thus, as the tax base
equals the carrying value, there is no temporary difference and no deferred tax.
4 The tax base of the interest received in advance is nil (ie, the carrying value (£7,000) less the
amount which will not be taxable in future periods (£7,000, as it has all been charged already). As
a result there is a deductible temporary difference of £7,000.
4 Measurement of deferred tax assets and

liabilities
Section overview
The tax rate is applied to temporary differences in order to calculate the deferred tax asset or liability.
The tax rate should be applied to temporary differences in order to calculate deferred tax:
• Taxable temporary differences × tax rate = deferred tax liability
• Deductible temporary differences × tax rate = deferred tax asset
Worked example: Calculation of deferred tax

A company purchased an asset costing £1,500. At the end of 20X8 the carrying amount is £1,000.
The cumulative capital allowances are £900 and the current tax rate is 25%.
Requirement
Calculate the deferred tax liability for the asset.
Solution
The tax base of the asset is £1,500 – £900 = £600.
HB2021

The carrying amount exceeds the tax base and therefore there is a taxable temporary difference of
£1,000 – £600 = £400. The entity must therefore recognise a deferred tax liability of £400 × 25% =
£100.
(In order to recover the carrying amount of £1,000, the entity must earn taxable income of £1,000,
but it will only be able to deduct £600 as a taxable expense. The entity must therefore pay income
tax of £400 × 25% = £100 when the carrying amount of the asset is recovered.)
4.1 Tax rate

The tax rates that should be used to calculate deferred tax are the ones that are expected to apply in
the period when the asset is realised or the liability settled. The best estimate of this tax rate is the
rate which has been enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date.
For example, in the Summer Budget of 2015, the government announced legislation setting the
Corporation Tax main rate (for all profits except ring fence profits) at 19% for the years starting on 1
April 2017, 2018 and 2019 and at 18% for the year starting 1 April 2020. Note that UK tax is not
examinable; it is mentioned for illustrative purposes only.
The Financial Reporting Council (FRC) has stated that substantive enactment occurs when any future
steps in the enactment process will not change the outcome. Specifically, in relation to the UK, the
FRC has stated that this occurs when the House of Commons passes a resolution under the
Provisional Collection of Taxes Act 1968.
Note: The tax rates used in this chapter are assumptions or hypothetical rates rather than real rates.
Worked example: Tax rate

A Muldovian company enters into a long-term contract to build a motorway in that country. During
the year ended 31 December 20X3, the entity recognises £4 million of income on this contract even
though it is not expected to receive the related cash until the year ending 31 December 20X5.
Under the tax rules of Muldovia, companies are charged tax on a cash receipts basis.
The tax rate for companies in Muldovia was 30% in the year to 31 December 20X3, but their
Government has voted in favour of a reduction to 29% in 20X4. There is currently discussion of the
rate dropping to 28% in 20X5, but as yet there is no agreement.
Requirement
What rate of tax should be used to determine the deferred tax balance?
Solution
A rate of 29% should be used. The rate is that expected to apply when the asset is realised, thus the
rate of 30% in 20X3, when the temporary difference originated, is not relevant. The 28% would be
used if it had been enacted or substantively enacted, but it is only under discussion. Thus, our best
estimate of the rate applying in 20X5, based on laws already enacted or substantively enacted, is the
rate for 20X4 (ie, the previous year) of 29%.
4.1.1 Progressive rates of tax

In some countries, different tax rates apply to different levels of taxable income. In this case, an
average rate expected to apply to the taxable profit of the entity in the period in which the
temporary difference is expected to reverse should be identified and used to calculate the
temporary difference.
4.1.2 Different rates of tax

Some countries also apply different rates of tax to different types of income eg, one rate to profits
and another to gains.
Where this is the case, the tax rate used to calculate the deferred tax amount should reflect the
manner in which the entity expects to recover the carrying amount of assets or settle the carrying
amount of liabilities.
HB2021

Worked example: Manner of recovery/settlement
Richcard Co has an asset with a carrying amount of £10,000 and a tax base of £6,000. If the asset
were sold, a tax rate of 20% would apply. A tax rate of 30% would apply to other income.
Requirements
State the deferred tax consequences making the following alternative assumptions:
(a) The entity sells the asset without further use
(b) The entity expects to retain the asset and recover its carrying amount through use
Solution
(a) A deferred tax liability is recognised of £(10,000 – 6,000) × 20% = £800.
(b) A deferred tax liability is recognised of £(10,000 – 6,000) × 30% = £1,200.
Interactive question 2: Recovery 1

Emida Co has an asset which cost £100,000. In 20X9 the carrying amount was £80,000 and the asset
was revalued to £150,000. No equivalent adjustment was made for tax purposes. Cumulative
depreciation for tax purposes is £30,000 and the tax rate is 30%. If the asset is sold for more than
cost, the cumulative tax depreciation of £30,000 will be included in taxable income but sale
proceeds in excess of cost will not be taxable.
Requirements
State the deferred tax consequences of the above, making the following alternative assumptions:
(a) The entity expects to recover the carrying amount through continued use of the asset.
(b) The entity expects to recover the carrying amount of the asset through sale.
The manner of recovery may also affect the tax base of an asset or liability. Tax base should be
measured according to the expected manner of recovery or settlement.
Interactive question 3: Recovery 2

The facts are as in Recovery 1 above except that, if the asset is sold for more than cost, the cumulative
tax depreciation will be included in taxable income (taxed at 30%) and the sale proceeds will be
taxed at 40% after deducting an inflation-adjusted cost of £110,000.
Requirements
State the deferred tax consequences of the above, making the following alternative assumptions:
(a) The entity expects to recover the carrying amount through continued use of the asset.
(b) The entity expects to recover the carrying amount of the asset through sale.
Judgement must be applied in the assumptions made about the manner of recovery or settlement.
With deferred tax assets, judgement must be exercised in determining whether an entity will earn
sufficient taxable profits in future periods to benefit from a reduction in tax payments.
HB2021

4.2 Discounting
IAS 12 states that deferred tax assets and liabilities should not be discounted because the
complexities and difficulties involved will affect reliability. Discounting would require detailed
scheduling of the timing of the reversal of each temporary difference, but this is often impracticable.
If discounting were permitted, this would affect comparability.
Note, however, that where carrying amounts of assets or liabilities are discounted (eg, a pension
obligation), the temporary difference is determined based on a discounted value.
5 Recognition of deferred tax in the financial

statements
Section overview
The deferred tax amount calculated is recorded as a deferred tax balance in the statement of
financial position with a corresponding entry to the tax charge, other comprehensive income or
goodwill.
5.1 Principles of recognition

As with current tax, deferred tax should normally be recognised as income or an expense amount
within the tax charge, and included in the net profit or loss for the period. Only the movement in the
deferred tax asset / liability on the statement of financial position is recorded:
DEBIT Tax charge X

CREDIT Deferred tax liability X
or
DEBIT Deferred tax asset X

CREDIT Tax charge X
Note that the recognition of a deferred tax asset may be restricted (see section 5.2).
Worked example: Deferred tax in the financial statements

An entity purchases a machine for £64,000 at the beginning of the year to 31 December 20X1. It has
a useful life of five years, and on 31 December 20X5 the asset is disposed of at a zero residual value.
The entity uses straight-line depreciation. The accounting year end is 31 December.
Assume that the machine qualifies for capital allowances, at a rate of 20% per annum on a reducing
balance basis.
Assume that the rate of tax is 30%.
Requirement
Show the deferred tax balance in the statement of financial position and the deferred tax charge for
each year of the asset’s life.
Solution
Deferred tax
20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5

£ £ £ £ £
Carrying amount 51,200 38,400 25,600 12,800 0
HB2021

20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5
£ £ £ £ £
Tax base 51,200 40,960 32,768 26,214 0
Taxable/(deductible) temporary
difference 0 (2,560) (7,168) (13,414) 0
Opening deferred tax liability/(asset) 0 0 (768) (2,150) (4,024)

Deferred tax expense/(credit) 0 (768) (1,382) (1,874) 4,024
Closing deferred tax liability/(asset) 0 (768) (2,150) (4,024) 0
5.1.1 Exceptions to recognition in profit or loss

(a) Deferred tax relating to items dealt with as other comprehensive income (such as a revaluation)
should be recognised as tax relating to other comprehensive income within the statement of
profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
(b) Deferred tax relating to items dealt with directly in equity (such as the correction of an error or
retrospective application of a change in accounting policy) should also be recognised directly in
equity.
(c) Deferred tax resulting from a business combination is included in the initial cost of goodwill (this
is covered in more detail later in the chapter).
Where it is not possible to determine the amount of current/deferred tax that relates to other
comprehensive income and items credited/charged to equity, such tax amounts should be based on
a reasonable pro-rata allocation of the entity’s current/deferred tax.
5.1.2 Components of deferred tax

Deferred tax charges will consist of two components:
(a) Deferred tax relating to temporary differences
(b) Adjustments relating to changes in the carrying amount of deferred tax assets/liabilities (where
there is no change in temporary differences) eg, changes in tax rates/laws, reassessment of the
recoverability of deferred tax assets, or a change in the expected recovery of an asset
5.2 Deferred tax assets

A deferred tax asset must satisfy the recognition criteria given in IAS 12. These state that a deferred
tax asset should only be recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be
available against which it can be used.
This is an application of prudence.
Worked example: Recognition of deferred tax asset

Pargatha Co recognises a liability of £10,000 for accrued product warranty costs on 31 December
20X7. Assume that these product warranty costs will not be deductible for tax purposes until the
entity pays claims. The tax rate is 25%.
Requirement
State the deferred tax implications of this situation.
Solution
The carrying amount of the liability is (£10,000).
The tax base of the liability is nil (carrying amount of £10,000 less the amount that will be deductible
for tax purposes in respect of the liability in future periods).
When the liability is settled for its carrying amount, the entity’s future taxable profit will be reduced
by £10,000 and so its future tax payments by £10,000 × 25% = £2,500.
HB2021

The carrying amount of (£10,000) is less than the tax base of nil and therefore the difference of
£10,000 is a deductible temporary difference.
The entity should therefore recognise a deferred tax asset of £10,000 × 25% = £2,500 provided that
it is probable that the entity will earn sufficient taxable profits in future periods to benefit from a
reduction in tax payments.
5.2.1 Future taxable profits

When can we be sure that sufficient taxable profit will be available, against which a deductible
temporary difference can be used?
IAS 12 states that this is assumed when:
• there are sufficient taxable temporary differences;
• the taxable and deductible temporary differences relate to the same entity and same tax
authority;
• the taxable temporary differences are expected to reverse either:
– in the same period as the deductible temporary differences; or
– in periods in which a tax loss arising from the deferred tax asset can be used.
Insufficient taxable temporary differences
Where there are insufficient taxable temporary differences, a deferred tax asset may only be
recognised to the extent that:
(a) it is probable that taxable profits will be sufficient in the same period as the reversal of the
deductible temporary difference (ignoring taxable amounts arising from future deductible
temporary differences); and
(b) tax planning opportunities exist that will allow the entity to create taxable profit in the
appropriate periods.
If an entity has a history of recent losses, then this is evidence that future taxable profit may not be
available.
5.2.2 Reassessment of unrecognised deferred tax assets

For all unrecognised deferred tax assets, at each reporting date an entity should reassess the
availability of future taxable profits and whether part or all of any unrecognised deferred tax assets
should now be recognised. This may be due to an improvement in trading conditions which is
expected to continue.
6 Common scenarios
Section overview
There are a number of common examples which result in a taxable or deductible temporary
difference. However, this list is not exhaustive.
6.1 Taxable temporary differences

6.1.1 Accelerated capital allowances
• These arise when capital allowances for tax purposes are received before deductions for
accounting depreciation are recognised in the statement of financial position (accelerated capital
allowances).
• The temporary difference is the difference between the carrying amount of the asset at the
reporting date and its tax written-down value (tax base).
• The resulting deferred tax is recognised in profit or loss.
HB2021

Interactive question 4: Initial recognition
Jonquil Co buys equipment for £50,000 at the start of 20X1 and depreciates it on a straight-line basis
over its expected useful life of five years. For tax purposes, the equipment is depreciated at 25% per
annum on a straight-line basis. Tax losses may be carried back against the taxable profit of the
previous five years. In 20X0, the entity’s taxable profit was £25,000. The tax rate is 40%.
Requirement
Assuming nil profits/losses after depreciation in years 20X1 to 20X5, show the current and deferred
tax impact in years 20X1 to 20X5 of the acquisition of the equipment.
6.1.2 Interest revenue

Please note the following key points.
• In some jurisdictions, interest revenue may be included in profit or loss on an accruals basis, but
taxed when received.
• The temporary difference is equivalent to the income accrual at the reporting date, as the tax base
of the interest receivable is nil.
6.1.3 Development costs

• Development costs may be capitalised for accounting purposes in accordance with IAS 38 while
being deducted from taxable profit in the period incurred (ie, they receive immediate tax relief).
• The temporary difference is equivalent to the amount capitalised at the reporting date, as the tax
base of the costs is nil since they have already been deducted from taxable profits.
6.1.4 Revaluations to fair value – property, plant and equipment

IFRS permits or requires some assets to be revalued to fair value, eg, property, plant and equipment
under IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment.
Temporary difference
In some jurisdictions a revaluation will affect taxable profit in the current period. In this case, no
temporary difference arises, as both carrying value and the tax base are adjusted.
In other jurisdictions, including the UK, the revaluation does not affect taxable profits in the period of
revaluation and consequently, the tax base of the asset is not adjusted. Hence a temporary difference
arises.
This should be provided for in full based on the difference between carrying amount and tax base.
An upward revaluation will therefore give rise to a deferred tax liability, even if:
• the entity does not intend to dispose of the asset; or
• tax due on any future gain can be deferred through rollover relief.
This is because the revalued amount will be recovered through use which will generate taxable
income in excess of the depreciation allowable for tax purposes in future periods.
Manner of recovery
The carrying amount of a revalued asset may be recovered:
• through sale
• through continued use
The manner of recovery may affect the tax rate applicable to the temporary difference and/or the tax
base of the asset. Interactive questions 2 and 3 within section 4.1.2 of this chapter provide
illustrations of this.
HB2021

Recording deferred tax
As the underlying revaluation is recognised as other comprehensive income, so the deferred tax
thereon is also recognised as part of tax relating to other comprehensive income. The accounting
entry is therefore:
DEBIT Tax on other comprehensive income X

Non-depreciated revalued assets

SIC 21, Income Taxes – Recovery of Revalued Non-Depreciable Assets requires that deferred tax
should be recognised even where non-current assets are not depreciated (eg, land). This is because
the carrying value will ultimately be recovered on disposal.
Worked example: Revaluation

A building in the UK was acquired on 1 January 20X2 at a cost of £500,000. It has been depreciated
at a rate of 2% straight line and has also attracted tax allowances at a rate of 4% straight line. On 31
December 20X6, the building is revalued to £650,000. The tax rate is 30%.
Requirement
What are the deferred tax implications of the revaluation?
Solution
Implications:
• The carrying amount of the building before the revaluation was £500,000 – (5 × 2% × £500,000) =
£450,000.
• The tax base of the building before the revaluation was £500,000 – (5 × 4% × £500,000) =
£400,000.
• The temporary difference of £50,000 would have resulted in a deferred tax liability of 30% ×
£50,000 = £15,000.
• As a result of the revaluation, the carrying amount of the building is increased to £650,000.
• The tax base does not change.
• The temporary difference therefore increases to £250,000 (£650,000 – £400,000), resulting in a
total deferred tax liability of 30% × £250,000 = £75,000.
• As a result of the revaluation, additional deferred tax of £60,000 must therefore be recognised.
• This could also be calculated by applying the tax rate to the difference between carrying amount
of £450,000 and valuation of £650,000.
6.1.5 Revaluations to fair value – other assets

IFRS Standards permit or require certain other assets to be revalued to fair value, for example:
• Certain financial instruments under IFRS 9, Financial Instruments
• Investment properties under IAS 40, Investment Property
Where the revaluation is recognised in profit or loss (eg, fair value through profit or loss instruments,
investment properties) and the amount is taxable/allowable for tax, then no deferred tax arises as
both the carrying value and the tax base are adjusted.
Where the revaluation is recognised as other comprehensive income (eg, many investments in
equity instruments) and does not therefore impact taxable profits, then the tax base of the asset is
not adjusted and deferred tax arises. This deferred tax is also recognised as other comprehensive
income.
6.1.6 Retirement benefit costs

In the financial statements, retirement benefit costs are deducted from accounting profit as the
service is provided by the employee. They are not deducted in determining taxable profit until the
HB2021

entity pays either retirement benefits or contributions to a fund. Thus a temporary difference may
arise.
(a) A deductible temporary difference arises between the carrying amount of the net defined
benefit liability and its tax base. The tax base is usually nil.
(b) The deductible temporary difference will normally reverse.
(c) A deferred tax asset is recognised for this temporary difference to the extent that it is
recoverable; that is, sufficient profit will be available against which the deductible temporary
difference can be used.
(d) If there is a net defined benefit asset, for example when there is a surplus in the pension plan, a
taxable temporary difference arises and a deferred tax liability is recognised.
Under IAS 12, both current and deferred tax must be recognised outside profit or loss if the tax
relates to items that are recognised outside profit or loss. This could make things complicated as it
interacts with IAS 19, Employee Benefits.
IAS 19 (revised) requires recognition of remeasurement (actuarial) gains and losses in other
comprehensive income in the period in which they occur.
It may be difficult to determine the amount of current and deferred tax that relates to items
recognised in profit or loss or in other comprehensive income. As an approximation, current and
deferred tax are allocated on an appropriate basis, often pro rata.
Context example: Defined benefit asset with a remeasurement loss
Defined benefit Current tax Deferred tax

asset relief (28%) liability (28%)
£’000 £’000 £’000
Brought forward 1,000 – (280)
[Blank
Contributions 600 (168) Underline]
Profit or loss: net pension cost (500) 140 –
OCI: actuarial loss (200) 28 28
(700) 168 28
Carried forward 900 – 252
Context example: Defined benefit liability with a remeasurement loss
Defined benefit Current tax Deferred tax

liability relief (28%) asset (28%)
£’000 £’000 £’000
Brought forward (2,000) – 560
Contributions 1,200 (336) –
Profit or loss: net pension cost (1,000) 280 –
OCI: actuarial loss (400) 56 56
(1,400) 336 56
Carried forward (2,200) – 616
HB2021

Worked example: Deferred tax and retirement benefits
Note: Look back to Chapter 18 on employee benefits to refresh your memory of how to account for
pensions. In this example we look at how employee benefits and deferred tax interact.
Operating expenses in the draft accounts for Celia include £405,000 relating to the company’s
defined benefit pension scheme. This figure represents the contributions paid into the scheme in the
year. No other entries have been made relating to this scheme. The figures included on the draft
statement of financial position represent opening balances as at 1 October 20X5:
£
Pension scheme assets 2,160,000
Pension scheme liabilities (2,530,000)
(370,000)
Deferred tax asset 111,000
(259,000)
After the year end, a report was obtained from an independent actuary. This gave valuations as at 30
September 20X6 of:
£
Pension scheme assets 2,090,200
Pension scheme liabilities (2,625,000)
Other information in the report included:
Yield on high-quality corporate bonds 10%

Current service cost £374,000
Payment out of scheme relating to employees transferring out £400,000
Reduction in liability relating to transfers £350,000
Pensions paid £220,000
All receipts and payments into and out of the scheme can be assumed to have occurred on 30
September 20X6.
Celia recognises any gains and losses on remeasurement of defined benefit pension plans directly in
other comprehensive income in accordance with IAS 19.
In the tax regime in which Celia operates, a tax deduction is allowed on payment of pension
contributions. No tax deduction is allowed for benefits paid. Assume that the rate of tax applicable to
20X5, 20X6 and announced for 20X7 is 30%.
Requirements
1 Explain how each of the above transactions should be treated in the financial statements for the
year ended 30 September 20X6.
2 Prepare an extract from the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income showing
other comprehensive income for the year ended 30 September 20X6.
Solution
1 Pensions
The contributions paid have been charged to profit or loss in contravention of IAS 19, Employee
Benefits.
Under IAS 19, the following must be done:
• Actuarial valuations of assets and liabilities revised at the year end
HB2021

• All gains and losses recognised
In profit or loss Current service cost

Transfers
Net interest on net defined benefit liability
In other comprehensive income Remeasurement gains and losses
Deferred tax must also be recognised. Tax deductions are allowed on pension contributions. IAS
12, Income Taxes requires deferred tax relating to items charged or credited to other
comprehensive income (OCI) to be recognised in other comprehensive income hence the
amount of the deferred tax movement relating to the losses on remeasurement charged directly
to OCI must be split out and credited directly to OCI.
2 Amounts recognised in other comprehensive income (extract)
£
Actuarial loss on defined benefit obligation (W1) (38,000)
Return on plan assets (excluding amounts in net interest) (W1) (70,800)
(108,800)
Deferred tax credit relating to actuarial losses on defined benefit plan (W2) 32,640
Other comprehensive income for the year (76,160)
WORKINGS
(1) Pension scheme
Pension scheme Pension scheme

assets liabilities
£ £
At 1 October 20X5 2,160,000 2,530,000
Interest cost on obligation (10% × 2,530,000) 253,000
Interest on plan assets (10% × 2,160,000) 216,000
Contributions 405,000
Transfers (400,000) (350,000)
Pensions paid (220,000) (220,000)
Loss on remeasurement recognised in OCI (70,800) 38,000
At 30 September 20X6 2,090,200 2,625,000
(2) Deferred tax on pension liability
Current tax Deferred

(P/L) OCI tax asset Note
£ £ £ £
Net pension liability at 30
September 20X6 (2,530,000 –
2,160,000) 370,000 111,000
Cr
Contribution (405,000) (121,500) (121,500) 1
Profit and loss debits service cost 411,000 Dr 123,300 123,300 2
HB2021

Current tax Deferred
(P/L) OCI tax asset Note
£ £ £ £
374,000 + interest costs 37,000
Transfers (400,000 – 350,000) 50,000 Dr 15,000 15,000 3

Loss on remeasurement to OCI 108,800 32,640 32,640
Profit or loss/OCI movement 16,800 32,640 49,440
Net pension liability/ deferred tax
asset at 30 September 20X6 534,800 160,440
Notes
1 Tax relief now given in the current tax charge, so it makes sense for this element of the
movement to be in profit or loss
2 Also makes sense that the costs results increase in the deferred tax asset so this should
go to profit or loss too
3 Because the liability increases the deferred tax asset increases
6.1.7 Dividends receivable from UK and overseas companies

Note the following.
(a) Dividends received from UK and overseas companies are not taxable on UK companies.
(b) Overseas dividends are thus a permanent difference and so there is no deferred tax payable.
(Previously dividends received by a UK company from an overseas company were taxable and
hence were a temporary difference.)
6.2 Deductible temporary differences

6.2.1 Tax losses
Where tax losses arise, for example in the UK as trading losses or non-trading loan relationship
deficits, then the manner of recognition of these in the financial statements depends on how they are
expected to be used.
(a) If losses are carried back to crystallise a refund, then a receivable is recorded in the statement of
financial position and the corresponding credit is to the current tax charge.
(b) If losses are carried forward to be used against future profits or gains, then they should be
recognised as deferred tax assets to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be
available against which the losses can be used.
Unused tax credits carried forward against taxable profits will also give rise to a deferred tax asset to
the extent that profits will exist against which they can be used.
Recognition of deferred tax asset
The existence of unused tax losses is strong evidence that future taxable profit may not be available.
The following should be considered before recognising any deferred tax asset:
• Whether an entity has sufficient taxable temporary differences against which the unused tax
losses can be offset
• Whether it is probable that the entity will have taxable profits before the unused tax losses expire
• Whether the tax losses result from identifiable causes which are unlikely to recur
• Whether tax planning opportunities are available to create taxable profit
HB2021

Group tax relief
Where the acquisition of a subsidiary means that tax losses which previously could not be used can
now be used against the profits of the subsidiary, a deferred tax asset may be recognised in the
financial statements of the parent company. This amount is not taken into account in calculating
goodwill arising on acquisition.
6.2.2 Provisions
• A provision is recognised for accounting purposes when there is a present obligation, but it is not
deductible for tax purposes until the expenditure is incurred.
• In this case, the temporary difference is equal to the amount of the provision, since the tax base is
nil.
• Deferred tax is recognised in profit or loss.
6.2.3 Share-based payments

Share-based transactions may be tax deductible in some jurisdictions. However, the amount
deductible for tax purposes does not always correspond to the amount that is charged to profit or
loss under IFRS 2.
In most cases it is not just the amount but also the timing of the expense allowable for tax purposes
that will differ from that required by IFRS 2.
For example, an entity recognises an expense for share options granted under IFRS 2, but does not
receive a tax deduction until the options are exercised. The tax deduction will be based on the share
price on the exercise date and will be measured on the basis of the options’ intrinsic value ie, the
difference between market price and exercise price at the exercise date. In the case of share-based
employee benefits under IFRS 2, the cost of the services as reflected in the financial statements is
expensed and therefore the carrying amount is nil.
The difference between the carrying amount of nil and the tax base of share-based payment expense
received to date is a deferred tax asset, provided the entity has sufficient future taxable profits to use
this deferred tax asset.
The deferred tax asset temporary difference is measured as:
£
Carrying amount of share-based payment expense 0
Less tax base of share-based payment expense (X)
(estimated amount tax authorities will permit as a deduction in future periods, based
on year-end information)
Temporary difference (X)
Deferred tax asset at X% X
If the amount of the tax deduction (or estimated future tax deduction) exceeds the amount of the
related cumulative remuneration expense, this indicates that the tax deduction also relates to an
equity item.
The excess is therefore recognised directly in equity. The diagrams below show the accounting for
equity-settled and cash-settled transactions.
HB2021

Figure 22.3: Accounting for equity-settled and cash-settled transactions
Equity-settled transaction
Estimated
future
tax
Greater deduction Smaller
than than
Cumulative Cumulative
remuneration remuneration
expense expense
The tax benefit The excess over The tax

is recorded in the cumulative benefit is
profit or loss expense recorded
up to the amount is recorded in profit
of the cumulative in equity or loss
expense
Cash-settled transaction
Estimated All
Recorded in
future tax
profit or loss
deduction
Worked example: Deferred tax

On 1 January 20X2, an entity granted 5,000 share options to an employee vesting two years later on
31 December 20X3. The fair value of each option measured at the grant date was £3.
Tax law in the jurisdiction in which the entity operates allows a tax deduction of the intrinsic value of
the options on exercise. The intrinsic value of the share options was £1.20 at 31 December 20X2 and
£3.40 at 31 December 20X3, on which date the options were exercised.
Assume a tax rate of 30%.
Requirement
Show the deferred tax accounting treatment of the above transaction at 31 December 20X2, 31
December 20X3 (before exercise), and on exercise.
Solution
Deferred tax
31 Dec 20X3 before

31 Dec 20X2 exercise
£ £
Carrying amount of share-based payment expense 0 0
Less tax base of share-based payment expense (3,000) (17,000)
HB2021

31 Dec 20X3 before
31 Dec 20X2 exercise
£ £
(5,000 × £1.2 ÷ 2)/(5,000 × £3.40)
Temporary difference (3,000) (17,000)
Deferred tax asset @ 30% 900 5,100
Deferred tax (Cr profit) (5,100 – 900 – (Working) 600) 900 3,600
Deferred tax (Cr Equity) (Working) 0 600
On exercise, the deferred tax asset is replaced by a current tax asset.
The double entry is: £

DEBIT deferred tax (profit) 4,500 reversal
DEBIT deferred tax (equity) 600 reversal
CREDIT deferred tax asset 5,100 reversal
DEBIT current tax asset 5,100
CREDIT current tax (profit) 4,500
CREDIT current tax (equity) 600
WORKING
£ £
Accounting expense recognised (5,000 × £3 ÷ 2)/(5,000 × £3) 7,500 15,000
Tax deduction (3,000) (17,000)
Excess temporary difference 0 (2,000)
Excess deferred tax asset to equity @ 30% 0 600
Interactive question 5: Share option scheme and deferred tax

Frost plc has the following share option scheme at 31 May 20X7:
Fair value of
Director’s Options options at
name Grant date granted grant date Exercise price Vesting date
£
Edmund
Houston 1 June 20X5 40,000 3.00 4.00 6/20X7
Kieran Bullen 1 June 20X6 120,000 2.50 5.00 6/20X9
The price of the company’s shares at 31 May 20X7 is £8 per share and at 31 May 20X6 was £8.50 per
share.
The directors must be working for Frost on the vesting date in order for the options to vest.
No directors have left the company since the issue of the share options and none are expected to
leave before June 20X9. The shares can be exercised on the first day of the month in which they vest.
In accordance with IFRS 2 an expense of £60,000 has been charged to profits in the year ended 31
May 20X6 in respect of the share option scheme. The cumulative expense for the two years ended 31
May 20X7 is £220,000.
HB2021

Tax allowances arise when the options are exercised and the tax allowance is based on the option’s
intrinsic value at the exercise date.
Requirement
What are the deferred tax implications of the share option scheme?
6.2.4 Recognition of deferred tax assets for unrealised losses

This amendment was issued in January 2016 in order to clarify when a deferred tax asset should be
recognised for unrealised losses. For example, an entity holds a debt instrument that is falling in
value, without a corresponding tax deduction, but the entity knows that it will receive the full nominal
amount on the due date, and there will be no tax consequences of that repayment. The question
arises of whether to recognise a deferred tax asset on this unrealised loss.
The IASB clarified that unrealised losses on debt instruments measured at fair value and measured
at cost for tax purposes give rise to a deductible temporary difference regardless of whether the
debt instrument’s holder expects to recover the carrying amount of the debt instrument by sale or by
use.
This may seem to contradict the key requirement that an entity recognises deferred tax assets only if
it is probable that it will have future taxable profits. However, the amendment also addresses the
issue of what constitutes future taxable profits, and clarifies the following:
(a) The carrying amount of an asset does not limit the estimation of probable future taxable profits.
(b) Estimates for future taxable profits exclude tax deductions resulting from the reversal of
deductible temporary differences.
(c) An entity assesses a deferred tax asset in combination with other deferred tax assets. Where tax
law restricts the utilisation of tax losses, an entity would assess a deferred tax asset in
combination with other deferred tax assets of the same type.
The amendment is effective from January 2017.
Worked example: Deferred tax asset and unrealised losses

(Adapted from IAS 12, Illustrative Example 7)
Humbert owns a debt instrument with a nominal value of £2,000,000. The fair value of the financial
instrument at the company’s year end of 30 June 20X4 is £1,800,000. Humbert has determined that
there is a deductible temporary difference of £200,000. Humbert intends to hold the instrument until
maturity on 30 June 20X5, and expects that the £2,000,000 will be paid in full. This means that the
deductible temporary difference will reverse in full.
Humbert has, in addition, £60,000 of taxable temporary differences that will also reverse in full in
20X5. The company expects the bottom line of its tax return to show a tax loss of £40,000.
Requirement
Discuss, with calculations, whether Humbert can recognise a deferred tax asset under IAS 12, Income
Taxes.
Solution
The first stage is to use the reversal of the taxable temporary difference to arrive at the amount to be
tested for recognition.
Under IAS 12 Humbert will consider whether it has a tax liability from a taxable temporary difference
that will support the recognition of the tax asset:
£’000
Deductible temporary difference 200
HB2021

£’000
Reversing taxable temporary difference (60)
Remaining amount (recognition to be determined) 140
At least £60,000 may be recognised as a deferred tax asset.

The next stage is to calculate the future taxable profit. Following the amendment, this is done using a
formula, the aim of which is to derive the amount of tax profit or loss before the reversal of any
temporary difference:
£’000
Expected tax loss (per bottom line of tax return) (40)
Less reversing taxable temporary difference (60)
Add reversing deductible temporary difference 200
Taxable profit for recognition test 100
Finally, the results of the above two steps should be added, and the tax calculated:
Humbert would recognise a deferred tax asset of (£60,000 + £100,000) × 20% = £32,000. This
deferred tax asset would be recognised even though the company has an expected loss on its tax
return.
7 Group scenarios
Section overview
• In relation to business combinations and consolidations, IAS 12 gives examples of circumstances

that give rise to taxable temporary differences and to deductible temporary differences in an
appendix.
• As already mentioned, however, the initial recognition of goodwill has no deferred tax impact.
7.1 General principles

There are some temporary differences which only arise in a business combination. This is because,
on consolidation, adjustments are made to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities that are not
always reflected in the tax base of those assets and liabilities.
The tax bases of assets and liabilities in the consolidated financial statements are determined by
reference to the applicable tax rules. Usually tax authorities calculate tax on the profits of the
individual entities, so the relevant tax bases to use will be those of the individual entities. (IAS 12.11)
Deferred tax calculation
$
Carrying amount of asset/liability
(consolidated statement of financial Carrying amount in consolidated statement
position) X/(X) of financial position
Tax base depends on tax rules. Usually tax is
charged on individual entity profits, not
Tax base (usually subsidiary’s tax base) (X)/X group profits.
Temporary difference X/(X)
Deferred tax (liability)/asset (X)/X
HB2021

7.2 Taxable temporary differences
7.2.1 Fair value adjustments on consolidation
IFRS 3, Business Combinations requires assets acquired on acquisition of a subsidiary to be
recognised at their fair value rather than their carrying amount in the individual financial statements
of the subsidiary. The fair value adjustment does not, however, have any impact on taxable profits or
the tax base of the asset. This is much like a revaluation in an individual company’s accounts.
Therefore an upwards fair value adjustment made to an asset will result in the carrying value of the
asset exceeding the tax base and so a taxable temporary difference will arise.
The resulting deferred tax liability is recorded in the consolidated accounts by:
DEBIT Goodwill (group share) X

Worked example: Fair value adjustments

On 1 September 20X8, Hunt acquired 80% of the ordinary share capital of Harrison for consideration
totalling £150,000. At the date of acquisition, Harrison’s statement of financial position showed net
assets of £180,000, although the fair value of inventory was assessed to be £10,000 above its
carrying amount.
Requirement
Explain the deferred tax implications, assuming a tax rate of 30%.
Solution
Implications:
• The carrying amount of the inventory in the group accounts is £10,000 more than its tax base
(being carrying amount in Harrison’s own accounts).
• Deferred tax on this temporary difference is 30% × £10,000 = £3,000.
• A deferred tax liability of £3,000 is recognised in the group statement of financial position.
• Goodwill is increased by (£3,000 × 80%) = £2,400.
7.2.2 Undistributed profits of subsidiaries, branches, associates and joint ventures

(a) The carrying amount of, for example, a subsidiary in consolidated financial statements is equal to
the group share of the net assets of the subsidiary plus purchased goodwill.
(b) The tax base is usually equal to the cost of the investment.
(c) The difference between these two amounts is a temporary difference. It can be calculated as the
parent’s share of the subsidiary’s post-acquisition profits which have not been distributed.
Worked example: Temporary difference in subsidiary holding

Askwith purchased 80% of the ordinary share capital of Embsay for £110,000 when the net assets of
Embsay were £100,000, giving rise to goodwill of £30,000. At 31 December 20X6 the following is
relevant:
(1) Goodwill has not been impaired.
(2) The net assets of Embsay amount to £120,000.
Requirement
What temporary difference arises on this investment at 31 December 20X6?
Solution
Temporary difference:
• The tax base of the investment in Embsay is the cost of £110,000. The carrying value is the share
of net assets (80% × £120,000) + goodwill of £30,000 = £126,000.
HB2021

• The temporary difference is therefore £126,000 – £110,000 = £16,000.
• This is equal to the group share of post-acquisition profits: 80% × £20,000 change in net assets
since acquisition.
Recognition of deferred tax

A deferred tax liability should be recognised on the temporary difference unless:
• the parent/investor/venturer is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary
difference; and
• it is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse (ie, the profits will not be paid out) in
the foreseeable future.
This can be applied to different levels of investment as follows:
(a) Subsidiary
As a parent company can control the dividend policy of a subsidiary, deferred tax will not arise in
relation to undistributed profits.
(b) Associate
An investor in an associate does not control that entity and so cannot determine its dividend
policy. Without an agreement requiring that the profits of the associate should not be distributed
in the foreseeable future, therefore, an investor should recognise a deferred tax liability arising
from taxable temporary differences associated with its investment in the associate. Where an
investor cannot determine the exact amount of tax, but only a minimum amount, then the
deferred tax liability should be that amount.
(c) Joint venture
In a joint venture, the agreement between the parties usually deals with profit sharing. When a
venturer can control the sharing of profits and it is probable that the profits will not be
distributed in the foreseeable future, a deferred liability is not recognised.
7.2.3 Changes in foreign exchange rates

Where a foreign operation’s taxable profit or tax loss (and therefore the tax base of its non-monetary
assets and liabilities) is determined in a foreign currency, changes in the exchange rate give rise to
taxable or deductible temporary differences.
These relate to the foreign entity’s own assets and liabilities, rather than to the reporting entity’s
investment in that foreign operation, and so the reporting entity should recognise the resulting
deferred tax liability or asset. The resulting deferred tax is charged or credited to profit or loss.
However, a deferred tax asset should only be recognised to the extent that both these are probable:
(a) That the temporary difference will reverse in the foreseeable future
(b) That taxable profit will be available against which the temporary difference can be used
7.3 Deductible temporary differences

7.3.1 Unrealised profits on intra-group trading
(a) From a tax perspective, one group company selling goods to another group company is taxed
on the resulting profit in the period that the sale is made.
(b) From an accounting perspective no profit is realised until the recipient group company sells the
goods to a third party outside the group. This may occur in a different accounting period from
that in which the initial group sale is made.
(c) A temporary difference therefore arises equal to the amount of unrealised intra-group profit. This
is the difference between the following:
(1) Tax base, being cost to the recipient company (ie, cost to selling company plus unrealised
intra-group profit on sale to the recipient company)
(2) Carrying value to the group, being the original cost to the selling company, since the intra-
group profit is eliminated on consolidation
(d) Deferred tax is provided at the receiving company’s tax rate.
HB2021

7.3.2 Fair value adjustments
IFRS 3 requires assets and liabilities acquired on acquisition of a subsidiary to be brought in at their
fair value rather than the carrying amount. The fair value adjustment does not, however, have any
impact on taxable profits or the tax base of the asset.
Therefore a fair value adjustment which increases a recognised liability or creates a new liability will
result in the tax base of the liability exceeding the carrying value and so a deductible temporary
difference will arise.
A deductible temporary difference also arises where an asset’s carrying amount is reduced to a fair
value less than its tax base.
The resulting deferred tax asset is recorded in the consolidated accounts by:
DEBIT Deferred tax asset X

CREDIT Goodwill X
7.4 Deferred tax assets of an acquired subsidiary

Deferred tax assets of a subsidiary may not satisfy the criteria for recognition when a business
combination is initially accounted for but may be realised subsequently.
These should be recognised as follows:
(a) If recognised within 12 months of the acquisition date and resulting from new information about
circumstances existing at the acquisition date, the credit entry should be made to goodwill. If the
carrying amount of goodwill is reduced to zero, any further amounts should be recognised in
profit or loss.
(b) If recognised outside the 12-month ‘measurement period’ or not resulting from new information
about circumstances existing at the acquisition date, the credit entry should be made to profit or
loss.
Interactive question 6: Recognition

In 20X2 Jacko Co acquired a subsidiary, Jilly Co, which had deductible temporary differences of £3
million. The tax rate at the date of acquisition was 30%. The resulting deferred tax asset of £0.9
million was not recognised as an identifiable asset in determining the goodwill of £5 million resulting
from the business combination. Two years after the acquisition, Jacko Co decided that future taxable
profit would probably be sufficient for the entity to recover the benefit of all the deductible
temporary differences.
Requirement
State the accounting treatment of the recognition of the deferred tax asset in 20X4.
Interactive question 7: Fair value adjustment

Oscar acquired 80% of the ordinary shares in Dorian Limited (Dorian) on 1 July 2005.
At acquisition, a property owned and occupied by Dorian had a fair value £30 million in excess of its
carrying value. This property had a remaining useful life at that time of 20 years.
Oscar is preparing its financial statements as at 30 June 2015.
The tax rate in the jurisdiction in which Oscar operates is 16%.
Requirements
7.1 How should this fair value difference be recorded in the consolidated financial statements at 30
June 2015?
7.2 What is the deferred tax implication of the fair value adjustment?
HB2021

Worked example: Deferred tax and groups 1
In recent years, Morpeth Ltd has made the following acquisitions of other companies:
• On 1 January 20X6, it acquired 90% of the share capital of Skipton, resulting in goodwill of £1.4
million.
• On 1 July 20X6 it acquired the whole of the share capital of Bingley for £6 million. At this date the
fair value of the net assets of Bingley was £4.5 million and their tax base was £4 million.
The following information is relevant to Morpeth Group’s year ended 31 December 20X6:
Skipton
(1) Skipton has made a provision amounting to £1.8 million in its accounts in respect of litigation.
This is tax allowable only when the cost is actually incurred. The case is expected to be settled
within 12 months.
(2) Skipton has a number of investments classified as at fair value through profit or loss in
accordance with IFRS 9, Financial Instruments. The remeasurement gains and losses recognised
in profit or loss for accounting purposes are not taxable/tax allowable until such date as the
investments are sold. To date the cumulative unrealised gain is £2.5 million.
(3) Skipton has sold goods to Morpeth in the year making a profit of £1 million. A quarter of these
goods remain in Morpeth’s inventory at the year end.
Bingley
(1) At its acquisition date, Bingley had unrelieved brought-forward tax losses of £0.4 million. It was
initially believed that Bingley would have sufficient taxable profits to use these losses and a
deferred tax asset was recognised in Bingley’s financial statements at acquisition. Subsequent
events have proven that the future taxable profits will not be sufficient to use the full brought-
forward loss.
(2) At acquisition Bingley’s retained earnings amounted to £3.5 million. The directors of Morpeth
Group have decided that in each of the next four years to the intended listing date of the group,
they will realise earnings through dividend payments from the subsidiary amounting to
£600,000 per annum. Bingley has not declared a dividend for the current year. Tax is payable on
remittance of dividends.
(3) £300,000 of the purchase price of Bingley has been allocated to intangible assets. The
recognition and measurement criteria of IFRS 3 and IAS 38 do not appear to have been met;
however, the directors believe that the amount is allowable for tax and have calculated the tax
charge accordingly. It is believed that this may be challenged by the tax authorities.
Requirement
What are the deferred tax implications of the above issues for the Morpeth Group?
Solution
Acquisitions
Any fair value adjustments made for consolidation purposes will affect the group deferred tax charge
for the year.
A taxable temporary difference will arise where the fair value of an asset exceeds its carrying value,
and the resulting deferred tax liability should be recorded against goodwill.
A deductible temporary difference will arise where the fair value of a liability exceeds its carrying
value, or an asset is revalued downwards. Again the resulting deferred tax amount (an asset) should
be recognised in goodwill.
In addition, it may be possible to recognised deferred tax assets in a group which could not be
recognised by an individual company. This is the case where tax losses brought forward, but not
considered to be an asset, due to lack of available taxable profits to set them against, can now be
used by another group company.
HB2021

Goodwill
Goodwill arose on both acquisitions. According to IAS 12, however, no provision should be made for
the temporary difference arising on this.
Skipton
(1) A deductible temporary difference arises when the provision is first recognised. This results in a
deferred tax asset calculated as £540,000 (30% × £1.8m). The asset may, however, only be
recognised where it is probable that there will be future taxable profits against which the future
tax-allowable expense may be set. There is no indication that this is not the case for Skipton.
(2) A taxable temporary difference arises where investments are revalued upwards for accounting
purposes but the uplift is not taxable until disposal. In this case the carrying value of the
investments has increased by £2.5 million, and this has been recognised in profit or loss. The tax
base has not, however changed. Therefore, a deferred tax liability should be recognised on the
£2.5 million, and, in line with the recognition of the underlying revaluation, this should be
(3) This intra-group transaction results in unrealised profits of £250,000 which will be eliminated on
consolidation. The tax on this £250,000 will, however, be included within the group tax charge
(which is comprised of the sum of the individual group companies’ tax charges). From the
perspective of the group there is a temporary difference. Deferred tax should be provided on
this difference using the tax rate of Morpeth (the recipient company).
Bingley
(1) Unrelieved tax losses give rise to a deferred tax asset only where the losses are regarded as
recoverable. They should be regarded as recoverable only where it is probable that there will be
future taxable profits against which they may be used. It is indicated that the future profits of
Bingley will not be sufficient to realise all of the brought-forward loss, and therefore the deferred
tax asset is calculated only on that amount expected to be recovered.
(2) Deferred tax is recognised on the unremitted earnings of investments, except where:
(a) The parent is able to control the payment of dividends
(b) It is unlikely that the earnings will be paid out in the foreseeable future
Morpeth controls Bingley and is therefore able to control its dividend payments; however, it
is indicated that £2.4 million will be paid as dividends in the next four years. Therefore a
deferred tax liability related to this amount should be recognised.
(3) The directors have assumed that the £300,000 relating to intangible assets will be tax allowable,
and the tax provision has been calculated based on this assumption. However, this is not certain,
and extra tax may have to be paid if this amount is not allowable. Therefore a liability for the
additional tax amount should be recognised.
Interactive question 8: Intangible

Jenner Holdings (Jenner) operates in the recruitment industry. On 1 February 20X0, Jenner acquired
60% of Rannon. It is now 31 March 20X4, and the consolidated financial statements of Jenner are
being prepared.
On the date of acquisition, £40,800,000 of the purchase consideration was allocated to the domain
name ‘www.alphabettajob.com’ which Rannon had registered some years earlier. Alphabettajob.com
is a popular job search website well known in the recruitment industry and as a result Jenner was
able to establish a fair value using an income-based valuation method. The domain name is not
recognised in Rannon’s individual financial statements and has a tax base of nil.
The Jenner Group amortises acquired domain names over 10 years. The tax rate applicable to the
profits of both companies is 17%.
Requirement
Prepare journals and explanations to show how this domain name should be treated in the
consolidated financial statements of the Jenner Group as at 31 March 20X4.
HB2021

Interactive question 9: Deferred tax and groups
Menston, a limited company, has two wholly owned subsidiaries, Burley, another UK company and
Rhydding, which is located in Estomania. The following information is relevant to the year ended 31
August 20X8:
(1) Rhydding has made a tax-adjusted loss equivalent to £6.5 million. This loss can only be relieved
through carry forward against future profits of Rhydding.
(2) During the year Burley has sold goods to Menston for £12 million, based on a 20% mark-up. Half
of these goods are still in Menston’s stock room at the year end.
Assume that the tax rate applicable to the group companies based in the UK is 30%; the Estomanian
tax rate is 20%.
Requirement
What are the deferred tax implications of these issues?
Interactive question 10: Deferred tax scenarios

Angelo, a public limited company, has three 100% owned subsidiaries, Claudio, Lucio and Escalus
SA, a foreign subsidiary.
(1) The following details relate to Claudio:
(a) Angelo acquired its interest in Claudio on 1 January 20X3. The fair values of the assets and
liabilities acquired were considered to be equal to their carrying amounts, with the
exception of freehold property which was considered to have a fair value of £1 million in
excess of its book value. The directors have no intention of selling the property.
(b) Claudio has sold goods at a price of £6 million to Angelo since acquisition and made a
profit of £2 million on the transaction. The inventories of these goods recorded in Angelo’s
statement of financial position at the year end, 30 September 20X3, were £3.6 million.
(2) Lucio undertakes various projects from debt factoring to investing in property and commodities.
The following details relate to Lucio for the year ended 30 September 20X3:
(a) Lucio has a portfolio of readily marketable government securities which are held as current
assets for financial trading purposes. These investments are stated at market value in the
statement of financial position with any gain or loss taken to profit or loss. These gains and
losses are taxed when the investments are sold. Currently the accumulated unrealised gains
are £8 million.
(b) Lucio has calculated it requires an allowance for credit losses of £2 million against its total
loan portfolio. Tax relief is available when a specific loan is written off.
(c) Escalus SA has unremitted earnings of €20 million which would give rise to additional tax
payable of £2 million if remitted to Angelo’s tax regime. Angelo intends to leave the
earnings within Escalus for reinvestment.
(d) Angelo has unrelieved trading losses as at 30 September 20X3 of £10 million.
Current tax is calculated based on the individual company’s financial statements (adjusted for tax
purposes) in the tax regime in which Angelo operates. Assume an income tax rate of 30% for Angelo
and 25% for its subsidiaries.
Requirement
Explain the deferred tax implications of the above information for the Angelo group of companies
for the year ended 30 September 20X3.
HB2021

Interactive question 11: Foreign branch
Investa has a foreign branch which has the same functional currency as Investa (the pound sterling).
The branch’s taxable profits are determined in dinars. On 1 May 20X3, the branch acquired a
property for 6 million dinars. The property had an expected useful life of 12 years with a zero residual
value. The asset is written off for tax purposes over eight years. The tax rate in Investa’s jurisdiction is
30% and in the branch’s jurisdiction is 20%. The foreign branch uses the cost model for valuing its
property and measures the tax base at the exchange rate at the reporting date.
Investa would like an explanation (including a calculation) as to why a deferred tax charge relating to
the asset arises in the group financial statements for the year ended 30 April 20X4 and the impact on
the financial statements if the tax base had been translated at the historical rate.
The exchange rate was 5 dinars: £1 on 1 May 20X3 and 6 dinars: £1 on 30 April 20X4.
Requirement
Provide the explanation and calculation requested.

Section overview
The detailed presentation and disclosure requirements for current and deferred tax are given below.
8.1 Disclosure requirements

The tax expense (income) related to profit (or loss) from ordinary activities should be presented on
the face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
The following are the main items that should be disclosed separately:
(a) Current tax expense (income)
(b) Any adjustments recognised in the period for current tax of prior periods
(c) The amount of deferred tax expense (income) relating to temporary differences
(d) The amount of deferred tax expense (income) relating to changes in tax rates or the imposition
of new taxes
(e) Prior period deferred tax or current tax adjustments
(f) The aggregate current and deferred tax relating to items that are charged or credited to equity
(g) An explanation of the relationship between tax expense (income) and accounting profit which
can be done in either (or both) of the following ways:
(1) A numerical reconciliation between tax expense and the product of accounting profit
multiplied by the applicable tax rate(s), disclosing also the basis on which the applicable tax
rate (s) is (are) computed
(2) A numerical reconciliation between the average effective tax rate and the applicable tax
rate, disclosing also the basis on which the applicable tax rate is computed
(h) An explanation of changes in the applicable tax rate(s) compared to the previous accounting
period
(i) The amount of deductible temporary differences, unused tax losses and unused tax credits for
which no deferred tax asset is recognised in the statement of financial position
HB2021

8.2 The statement of financial position
Tax assets and tax liabilities should be presented separately from other assets and liabilities in the
statement of financial position. Deferred tax assets and liabilities should be distinguished from
current tax assets and liabilities.
Deferred tax assets (liabilities) should not be classified as current assets (liabilities). This is the case
even if the deferred tax assets/liabilities are expected to be realised within 12 months.
There is no requirement in IAS 12 to disclose the tax base of assets and liabilities on which deferred
tax has been calculated.
8.2.1 Offsetting
Where appropriate deferred tax assets and liabilities should be offset in the statement of financial
position.
An entity should offset deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities if, and only if:
• the entity has a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities;
and
• the deferred tax assets and the deferred tax liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same
taxation authority.
There is no requirement in IAS 12 to provide an explanation of assets and liabilities that have been
offset.
8.2.2 Other disclosures

An entity should disclose any tax-related contingent liabilities, and contingent assets, in accordance
with IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets. Contingent liabilities and
contingent assets may arise, for example, from unresolved disputes with the taxation authorities.
Similarly, where changes in tax rates or tax laws are enacted or announced after the reporting date,
an entity should disclose any significant effect of those changes on its current and deferred tax assets
and liabilities (see IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period).
Interactive question 12: Tax adjustment

In the notes to the financial statements of Tacks for the year ended 30 November 20X2, the tax
expense included an amount in respect of ‘Adjustments to current tax in respect of prior years’ and
this expense has been treated as a prior year adjustment. These items related to adjustments arising
from tax audits by the authorities in relation to previous reporting periods.
The issues that resulted in the tax audit adjustment were not a breach of tax law but related
predominantly to transfer pricing issues, for which there was a range of possible outcomes that were
negotiated during 20X2 with the taxation authorities. Further at 30 November 20X1, Tacks had
accounted for all known issues arising from the audits to that date and the tax adjustment could not
have been foreseen as at 30 November 20X1, as the audit authorities changed the scope of the
audit. No penalties were expected to be applied by the taxation authorities.
Requirement
What is the correct treatment of the above issue in the financial statements for the year ended 30
November 20X2?
HB2021

9 Deferred tax summary and practice
Section overview
• The calculation and recording of deferred tax can be set out in an eight-step process.
• Deferred tax at Advanced Level will be much more demanding than at Professional Level.
9.1 Summary
The following is a summary of the steps required to calculate and record deferred tax in the financial
statements.
Procedure Comment
Step 1 Determine the carrying amount of each This is merely the carrying value
asset and liability in the statement of determined by other standards.
Step 2 Determine the tax base of each asset and This is the amount attributed to each asset
liability. or liability for tax purposes.
Step 3 Determine any temporary differences These will be either:

(these are based on the difference • Taxable temporary differences; or
between the figures in Step 1 and Step 2).
• Deductible temporary differences.
Step 4 Determine the deferred tax balance by The tax rate to be used is that expected to
multiplying the tax rate by any temporary apply when the asset is realised or the
differences. liability settled, based on laws already
enacted or substantively enacted by the
statement of financial position date.
Step 5 Recognise deferred tax assets/liabilities in Apply recognition criteria in IAS 12.
the statement of financial position.
Step 6 Recognise deferred tax, normally in profit This will be the difference between the
or loss (but possibly as other opening and closing deferred tax
comprehensive income or in equity or balances in the statement of financial
goodwill). position.
Step 7 Offset deferred tax assets and liabilities in Offset criteria in IAS 12 must be satisfied.
the statement of financial position where
appropriate.
Step 8 Comply with relevant presentation and See relevant presentation and disclosure
disclosure requirements for deferred tax requirements sections above.
in IAS 12.
The method described is referred to as the liability method, or full provision method.
(a) The advantage of this method is that it recognises that each temporary difference at the
reporting date has an effect on future tax payments, and these are provided for in full.
(b) The disadvantage of this method is that, under certain types of tax system, it gives rise to large
liabilities that may fall due only far in the future.
The step-by-step approach in the above table can be used to structure most problems relating to
deferred tax.
HB2021

9.2 Exam-standard question practice
While UK tax is not specifically examinable at Advanced Level, deferred tax is still an important topic.
The interactive question below is exam-standard and, in addition to testing deferred tax in depth,
also tests foreign currency translation of a non-monetary asset and impairment of a previously
revalued asset, a financial instrument and a provision. Finally it asks for a re-draft of a statement of
financial position following adjustments, which is a typical feature of Question 2 of the Corporate
Reporting exam.
The exam-standard question below requires assimilation of a great deal of information, not all of
which relates to tax. Before launching into the question, it might be helpful to highlight the
information that has deferred tax implications while the content of this chapter is fresh in your mind.
Interactive question 13: Exam-standard question

You are Richard Carpenter, a newly-qualified ICAEW Chartered Accountant, working in the finance
department at Chippy plc, a sportswear company with a number of subsidiaries in the UK and
overseas. On 1 October 20X2, Chippy acquired 100% of the ordinary shares of Marusa Inc, a
sportswear company based in Ruritania. The national currency of Ruritania is the krown (Kr).
You receive the following email from Ying Cha, the finance director of Chippy:
To: Richard Carpenter

From: Ying Cha
Subject: Marusa financial statements for the year ended 30 September 20X3 and advice on
parent company transactions
Richard,
Marusa’s finance director, Sian Parsons, has provided a draft statement of financial position which
has been prepared using Ruritanian GAAP (Exhibit 1). This needs to be restated using IFRS before
we consolidate Marusa’s results. Marusa achieved break-even for the year and the company has
no current tax liability.
Sian has also prepared some notes (Exhibit 2) that detail key transactions for the year ended 30
September 20X3.
There is no deferred tax under Ruritanian GAAP, but I am particularly concerned about the
deferred tax implications of some of the key transactions under IFRS.
I would also like your advice regarding the deferred tax treatment of a UK subsidiary in the
financial statements of Chippy, the parent company. I have prepared a note on the relevant issue (
Exhibit 3).
I would like you to do the following:
• For each of the key transactions (Exhibit 2):
– Explain any adjustments which need to be made to ensure that Marusa’s financial statements
comply with IFRS
– Prepare the journal entries needed to adjust Marusa’s financial statements to IFRS
• Prepare a revised statement of financial position for Marusa at 30 September 20X3 in
accordance with IFRS, showing all workings clearly.
• Explain the deferred tax treatment relating to the subsidiary in the financial statements of
Chippy.
Please prepare your figures to the nearest Kr’000.
HB2021

Requirement
Respond to Ying Cha’s instructions.
Exhibit 1: Marusa – Draft statement of financial position at 30 September 20X3
Kr’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant & equipment 61,600
Intangible assets 8,500
Financial investments 7,700
77,800
101,500
Equity
Share capital Kr1 shares 10,000
69,400
Loans 10,000
Provisions 15,000
101,500
Exhibit 2: Notes prepared by Sian Parsons: Key transactions in the year ended 30 September 20X3
(1) Purchase of machinery
On 1 January 20X3 Marusa bought some specialist machinery from the USA for $30 million. Payment
for the machinery was made on 31 March 20X3.
In accordance with local Ruritanian GAAP, I recognised the cost of the machinery on 1 January 20X3
at Kr10 million, using the opening rate of exchange at 1 October 20X2.
I have charged a full year’s depreciation of Kr1.0 million in cost of sales, as Marusa depreciates the
machinery over a 10-year life and it has no residual value. I have therefore included the machinery in
the statement of financial position at Kr9 million.
An amount of Kr2.5 million has been debited to retained earnings. This is in respect of the difference
between the sum paid to the supplier of Kr12.5 million on 31 March 20X3 and the cost recorded in
non-current assets of Kr10 million.
The Kr/US$ exchange rates on relevant dates were:
1 Kr =
1 October 20X2 $3.00
1 January 20X3 $2.50
31 March 20X3 $2.40
30 September 20X3 $2.00
HB2021

In Ruritania the tax treatment of property, plant and equipment and exchange differences is the same
as the IFRS treatment.
(2) Impairment
Marusa bought a warehouse on 1 October 20W3 for Kr36 million. The warehouse is being
depreciated over 20 years with no residual value. On 1 October 20X2, due to a rise in property
prices, the warehouse was revalued to Kr42 million and a revaluation surplus of Kr16.8 million was
recognised. No transfers are made between the revaluation surplus and retained earnings under
Ruritanian GAAP in respect of depreciation.
There has been a slump in the local property market recently, so an impairment review was
undertaken at 30 September 20X3, and the warehouse was assessed as being worth Kr12 million. I
have therefore charged Kr18 million to profit or loss to reflect the difference between the carrying
amount of the warehouse of Kr30 million before 30 September 20X3 and the new value of Kr12
million.
(3) Investment
On 1 April 20X3, Marusa bought one million shares in a local listed company for Kr7.70 per share.
This represents a 3% shareholding. The intention is to hold the shares until 31 December 20X3, and
then sell them at a profit. I have recognised the shares at cost in the statement of financial position in
accordance with Ruritanian GAAP. The market value of the shares at 30 September 20X3 was Kr12.50
per share.
Under Ruritanian tax rules, income tax is charged at 20% on the accounting profit recognised on the
sale of the investment.
(4) Provision
On 1 October 20X2, Marusa signed an agreement with the Ruritanian government for exclusive
rights for the next 20 years to the organic cotton grown on government-owned land. The cost of
buying these rights was Kr8.5 million, which has been recognised in intangible assets in Marusa’s
statement of financial position. Under the terms of the rights agreement, Marusa has to repair any
environmental damage at the end of the 20-year period.
There is a 40% probability of the eventual cost of environmental repairs being Kr15 million and a
60% probability of the cost being Kr10 million. To be prudent I have created a provision for Kr15
million, and debited this to operating costs. Marusa has a pre-tax discount rate of 8%. The
environmental costs will be allowed for tax purposes when paid. The income tax rate is expected to
remain at 20%.
Exhibit 3: Note prepared by Ying Cha: Key transactions in the year ended 30 September 20X3
Gemex, a limited liability company, is a wholly owned UK subsidiary of Chippy, and is a cash
generating unit in its own right. The value of the property, plant and equipment of Gemex at 30
September 20X3 was £6 million and purchased goodwill was £1 million before any impairment loss.
The company had no other assets or liabilities. An impairment loss of £1.8 million had occurred at 30
September 20X3. The tax base of the property, plant and equipment of Gemex was £4 million as at
30 September 20X3.
I would like to know how the impairment loss will affect the deferred tax liability for the year in the
financial statements of Chippy. Impairment losses are not an allowable expense for taxation
purposes under UK tax. The UK corporation tax rate is 20%.
HB2021

10 Audit focus
Section overview
• The provision for and related statement of profit or loss entries for deferred taxation are based on
assumptions that rely on management judgements.
• Procedures should be adopted to ensure any assumptions are reasonable and the requirements
of IAS 12 have been met.
10.1 Auditing tax

10.1.1 Audit risks
Until recently, tax accounting has been of secondary concern in the corporate group reporting
process. The tax figures in the financial statements are, however, often material by their nature, and
the increased public interest around tax avoidance now places greater pressure on companies and
groups to get tax reporting right.
The following factors increase the audit risk in respect of current and deferred tax, particularly in a
group reporting context:
• Lack of tax accounting knowledge: even in larger groups with in-house tax specialist resource, the
board is often more interested in the cash cost of tax than in tax accounting, although getting the
tax rate in line with analysts’ expectations does still promote investor confidence.
• Lack of foreign tax knowledge: the tax figures of foreign operations are particularly at risk of
misstatement, and auditing them may require specialist knowledge.
• Complex or unusual transactions: the tax implications of such transactions may be overlooked by
management, but they can be complex and material.
• Lack of appropriate tax reporting processes: the basic processes (such as Excel spreadsheets)
used by many entities are unable to respond to complex tax reporting requirements. The use of
manual input increases the risk of errors, and may render workings difficult to audit.
Where there is risk, the application of judgement is needed; for example, whether to use a tax
specialist or whether there is sufficient knowledge within the audit team.
10.1.2 Use of tax specialists

On the audit of larger or more complex entities, tax audit specialists are likely to be actively involved
from the start of the audit as members of the audit team, using their tax accounting expertise to carry
out the review of tax figures in the statement of financial position and statement of profit or loss. In
such cases, the tax audit team will report their findings, including any identified misstatements and
any areas of significant uncertainty, to the audit team. The tax team’s workings papers must be
included within the audit working papers file.
Note: In accordance with the revised Ethical Standard the provision of tax services by an audit firm
for PIEs is prohibited.
The language of financial reporting differs from that of tax. It is important that the tax team
communicates its findings clearly to the audit team, since it is in essence providing a service to the
audit team which the audit team will rely on.
HB2021

10.1.3 Current tax: audit procedures
Auditors (or the tax specialists involved in the audit) should carry out audit procedures including the
following:
• Obtain copies of the prior period tax computation.
• Inquire whether any tax enquiries have been raised by the tax authorities in the period.
• Inquire into the status of any unresolved tax enquiries, and obtain supporting correspondence
with the tax authorities.
• Obtain copies of the current period tax computation, and evaluate whether:
– the opening balances agree to the closing balances in the prior period tax computation;
– the figures in the tax computation agree to figures in the financial statements;
– estimates contained within the tax computation are based on reasonable assumptions; and
– all tax rates and allowances are based on applicable tax legislation.
• Review details of tax payments made/refunds received in the period, and agree payments to the
cash and bank account.
10.1.4 Deferred tax: audit procedures

The following procedures will be relevant:
• Assess whether it is appropriate for the company to recognise deferred tax (eg, is the company
expected to make future taxable profits against which the deferred tax would unwind?).
• Obtain a copy of the deferred tax workings.
• Determine the arithmetical accuracy of the deferred tax working.
• Agree the figures used to calculate temporary differences to those on the tax computation and
• Review the assumptions made in the light of the auditor’s knowledge of the business and any
other evidence gathered during the course of the audit to ensure reasonableness.
• Agree the opening position on the deferred tax account to the prior year financial statements.
• Review the basis of the provision to ensure:
– it is in line with accounting practice under IAS 12, Income Taxes; and
– any changes in accounting policy have been disclosed.
• Verify that the rate of corporation tax at which the deferred tax asset/liability unwinds is
appropriate and in line with current tax legislation.
• To test for completeness (understatement) the auditor should review the draft financial statements
to identify items that would normally be expected to give a temporary difference and ensure they
have been included.
10.1.5 Transfer pricing

Besides auditing current and deferred tax, transfer pricing is an important area over which sufficient
appropriate audit evidence must be sought. When the entity’s transfer pricing policies are
challenged by the tax authorities, the effect on the company’s current tax position over several years
is likely to be material.
Please refer to Chapter 20 for a more detailed discussion of transfer pricing.
Context example: Petrofac plc

Petrofac plc is a global oil and gas services company, listed on FTSE 250. In the group financial
statements for the year ended 31 December 2014, tax accounting was identified as an area of
particular audit risk by the group auditor, Ernst & Young. The following excerpts from the auditor’s
report for the period describe the risk, and the audit team’s responses to the risk.
Accounting for taxation assets, liabilities, income and expenses
Area of risk
The wide geographical spread of the Group’s operations, the complexity of application of local tax
rules in many different jurisdictions and transfer pricing risks affecting the allocation of income and
costs charged between jurisdictions and businesses increase the risk of misstatement of tax
HB2021

balances. The assessment of tax exposures by Management requires judgement given the structure
of individual contracts and the increasing activity of tax authorities in the jurisdictions in which
Petrofac operates. Furthermore, the recognition of deferred tax assets and liabilities needs to be
reviewed regularly to ensure that any changes in local tax laws and profitability of associated
contracts are appropriately considered. Refer to note 7 of the financial statements for disclosures in
respect of taxation for the year.
Audit approach
We used tax specialists in our London team in the planning stages to determine which jurisdictions
should be in scope, as well as in the audit of tax balances. We also involved local tax specialists in the
relevant jurisdictions where we deemed it necessary. We considered and challenged the tax
exposures estimated by management and the risk analysis associated with these exposures along
with claims or assessments made by tax authorities to date. We also audited the calculation and
disclosure of current and deferred tax (refer to Note 7) to ensure compliance with local tax rules and
the Group’s accounting policies including the impact of complex items such as share based
payments and the review of management’s assessment of the likelihood of the realisation of
deferred tax balances.
HB2021

Summary
IAS 12,
Income Taxes
Current Deferred
tax tax
Taxable temporary Deductible

Asset Liability
differences temporary differences
WHERE
Excess Deferred tax Deferred tax
paid liability recognised asset
OR
Tax loss Recognised only
c/back Exceptions Deferred tax liabilities where probable
recovers tax • Initial recognition of relating to business that taxable
of previous goodwill combinations shall be profit will be
period • Initial recognition of recognised unless available
an asset or liability • Parent, investor or
in a transaction venturer is able to
which control reversal of
– Is not a business temporary
combination difference
– At the time of • Probable that
the transaction temporary
affects neither difference will not
accounting reverse in the
profit nor foreseeable future
taxable profit or
loss
Exceptions Deferred tax asset

Transactions that arise relating to business
from initial recognition combinations shall be
of a transaction that recognised if probable
• Is not a business that
combination and • Temporary
• At the time of the differences will
transaction affects reverse in the
neither accounting foreseeable future
profit nor taxable • Taxable profit will
profit or loss be available to be
utilised
HB2021

1. Do you understand what IAS 12 means by ‘temporary differences’? (Topic 2)
2. Can you identify the tax base resulting from various tax rules? (Topic 3)
3. Can you calculate taxable and deductible temporary differences? (Topic 3)
4. Can you measure the deferred tax liability or asset? (Topic 4)
5. On what basis is deferred tax recognised in the financial statements? (Topic 5)
6. How is deferred tax recognised in the context of retirement benefits and share-based
payment? (Topic 6)
7. What factors increase the audit risk in respect of current and deferred tax? (Topic 10)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Question Name Learning benefit from attempting this question
Situations A straightforward warm-up question, this tests that you have grasped the
basic concept behind deferred tax.
Parea Focusing on property, this question deals with a number of calculations

with both taxable and deductible temporary differences.
XYZ This is a comprehensive deferred tax question requiring calculations and

explanations in a group context.
Billinge This is a full deferred tax question, covering fair value adjustment, share
options, intragroup trading, profit from foreign subsidiary, capital
allowances and a lease.
Longwood Another full deferred tax question, this one covers research and
development, PPE, tax losses, deferred tax and pensions and deferred tax
treatment of goodwill. A thorough understanding of the non-tax issues is
required as well as deferred tax.
Telo (note 4 only) This part of the question relates to gains on investment property being
taxed at a different time from gains on PPE. Skim through the answer to
note 3, which gives you the information you need about the property to
HB2021

answer the deferred tax part.
chapter.
HB2021

Technical reference
1 IAS 12, Income Taxes
2 Tax base of an asset/liability – IAS 12.7, IAS 12.8
3 Current tax
• Unpaid current tax recognised as a liability – IAS 12.12
• Benefit relating to tax losses that can be carried back to recover previous period current tax
recognised as asset – IAS 12.13
4 Taxable temporary differences

• Deferred tax liability shall be recognised on all taxable temporary differences except those arising
from: – IAS 12.15
– Initial recognition of goodwill
– Initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction which:
◦ Is not a business combination, and
◦ At the time of the transaction affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit (tax loss)
5 Deductible temporary differences

• Deferred tax asset shall be recognised for all deductible temporary differences to the extent that
taxable profit will be available to be used, unless asset arises from initial recognition of asset or
liability in a transaction that: – IAS 12.24
– Is not a business combination, and
– At the time of the transaction affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit or loss
6 Unused tax losses and unused tax credits

• Deferred tax asset may be recognised in respect of unused tax losses and unused tax credits to
the extent that future taxable profits will be available – IAS 12.34
7 Deferred tax assets and liabilities arising from investments in subsidiaries, branches and
associates and investments in joint ventures – IAS 12.39, IAS 12.44
8 Tax rates and manner of recovery

• Measurement of deferred tax at tax rates expected to apply when asset realised or liability settled
to reflect tax consequences of manner of recovery – IAS 12.47, 12.51
9 Discounting
• Deferred tax assets and liabilities shall not be discounted – IAS 12.53
10 Annual review
• Carrying amount of deferred tax asset to be reviewed at each reporting date – IAS 12.56
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Torcularis
The Torcularis Company has interest receivable which has a carrying amount of £75,000 in its
statement of financial position at 31 December 20X6. The related interest revenue will be taxed on a
cash basis in 20X7.
Torcularis has trade receivables that have a carrying amount of £80,000 in its statement of financial
position at 31 December 20X6. The related revenue has been included in its statement of profit or
loss and other comprehensive income for the year to 31 December 20X6.
Requirement
According to IAS 12, Income Taxes, what is the total tax base of interest receivable and trade
receivables for Torcularis at 31 December 20X6?
2 Situations
What will the following situations give rise to as regards deferred tax, according to IAS 12, Income
Taxes?
(a) Development costs have been capitalised and will be amortised through profit or loss, but were
deducted in determining taxable profit in the period in which they were incurred.
(b) Accumulated depreciation for a machine in the financial statements is greater than the
cumulative capital allowances up to the reporting date for tax purposes.
(c) A penalty payable is in the statement of financial position. Penalties are not allowable for tax
purposes.
3 Budapest
On 31 December 20X6, The Budapest Company acquired a 60% stake in The Lisbon Company.
Among Lisbon’s identifiable assets at that date was inventory with a carrying amount of £8,000 and a
fair value of £12,000. The tax base of the inventory was the same as the carrying amount.
The consideration given by Budapest resulted in the recognition of goodwill acquired in the
business combination.
Income tax is payable by Budapest at 25% and by Lisbon at 20%.
Requirement
Indicate whether the following statements are true or false, in respect of Budapest’s consolidated
statement of financial position at 31 December 20X6, in accordance with IAS 12, Income Taxes.
(1) No deferred tax liability is recognised in respect of the goodwill.
(2) A deferred tax liability of £800 is recognised in respect of the inventory.
4 Dipyrone
The Dipyrone Company owns 100% of the Reidfurd Company. During the year ended 31 December
20X7:
(1) Dipyrone sold goods to Reidfurd for £600,000, earning a profit margin of 25%. Reidfurd held
30% of these goods in inventory at the year end.
(2) Reidfurd sold goods to Dipyrone for £800,000, earning a profit margin of 20%. Dipyrone held
25% of these goods in inventory at the year end.
The tax base of the inventory in each company is the same as its carrying amount. The tax rate
applicable to Dipyrone is 26% and that applicable to Reidfurd is 33%.
HB2021

Requirement
What is the deferred tax asset at 31 December 20X7 in Dipyrone’s consolidated statement of
financial position under IAS 12, Income Taxes and IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements?
5 Rhenium
The Rhenium Company issued £6 million of 8% loan stock at par on 1 April 20X7. Interest is payable
in two instalments on 30 September and 31 March each year.
The company pays income tax at 20% in the year ended 31 December 20X7, but expects to pay at
25% for 20X8 as it will be earning sufficient profits to pay tax at the higher rate.
For tax purposes interest paid and received is dealt with on a cash basis.
Requirement
What is the deferred tax balance at 31 December 20X7, according to IAS 12, Income Taxes?
6 Cacholate
The Cacholate Company acquired a property on 1 January 20X6 for £1.5 million. The useful life of
the property is 20 years, which is also the period over which tax depreciation is charged.
On 31 December 20X7, the property was revalued to £2.16 million. The tax base remained
unaltered.
Income tax is payable at 20%.
Requirement
What is the deferred tax charge for the year ended 31 December 20X7, and where is it charged,
under IAS 12, Income Taxes?
7 Spruce
Spruce Company made a taxable loss of £4.7 million in the year ended 31 December 20X7. This was
due to a one-off reorganisation charge in 20X7; before that, Spruce made substantial taxable profits
each year.
Assume that tax legislation allows companies to carry back tax losses for one financial year, and then
carry them forward indefinitely.
Spruce’s taxable profits are as follows.
Year ended £’000

31 December 20X6 500
31 December 20X8 (estimate) 1,000
31 December 20X9 (estimate) 1,200
31 December 20Y0 and onwards Uncertain
Spruce pays income tax at 25%.

Requirement
What is the deferred tax balance in respect of tax losses in Spruce’s statement of financial position at
31 December 20X7, according to IAS 12, Income Taxes?
8 Bananaquit
At 31 December 20X6, The Bananaquit Company has a taxable temporary difference of £1.5 million
in relation to certain non-current assets.
At 31 December 20X7, the carrying amount of those non-current assets is £2.4 million and the tax
base of the assets is £1.0 million.
Tax is payable at 30%.
HB2021

Requirement
Indicate whether the following statements are true or false, in accordance with IAS 12, Income Taxes.
(1) The deferred tax charge through profit or loss for the year is £30,000.
(2) The statement of financial position deferred tax asset at 31 December 20X7 is £420,000.
9 Antpitta
The Antpitta Company owns 70% of The Chiffchaff Company. During 20X7 Chiffchaff sold goods to
Antpitta at a mark-up above cost. Half of these goods are held in Antpitta’s inventories at the year
end. The rate of income tax is 30%.
Requirement
Indicate whether the following statements are true or false according to IAS 12, Income Taxes and
IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements, when preparing Antpitta’s consolidated and Chiffchaff’s
individual financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
(1) A deferred tax asset arises in the individual statement of financial position of Chiffchaff in relation
to intra-group transactions.
(2) A deferred tax asset arises in Antpitta’s consolidated statement of financial position due to the
intra-group transactions.
10 Parea
In order to maximise its net assets per share, The Parea Company wishes to recognise the minimum
deferred tax liability allowed by IFRS. Parea only pays tax to the Government of Gredonia, at the rate
of 22%.
On 1 January 20X6 Parea acquired some plant and equipment for £30,000. In the financial
statements it is being written off over its useful life of four years on a straight-line basis, even though
tax depreciation is calculated at 27% on a reducing-balance basis.
On 1 January 20X3 Parea acquired a property for £40,000. Both in the financial statements and under
tax legislation it is being written off over 25 years on a straight-line basis. On 31 December 20X7 the
property was revalued to £50,000 with no change to its useful life, but this revaluation had no effect
on the tax base or on tax depreciation.
Requirement
Determine the following amounts for the deferred tax liability of Parea in its consolidated financial
statements according to IAS 12, Income Taxes.
(1) The deferred tax liability at 31 December 20X6
(2) The deferred tax liability at 31 December 20X7
(3) The charge or credit for deferred tax in profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X7
11 XYZ
XYZ, a public limited company, has decided to adopt the provisions of IFRS Standards for the first
time in its financial statements for the year ending 30 November 20X1. The amounts of deferred tax
provided as set out in the notes of the group financial statements for the year ending 30 November
20X0 were as follows:
£m
Tax depreciation in excess of accounting depreciation 38
Other temporary differences 11
Liabilities for healthcare benefits (12)
Losses available for offset against future taxable profits (34)
3
HB2021

The following notes are relevant to the calculation of the deferred tax liability as at 30 November
20X1:
(1) XYZ acquired a 100% holding in a foreign company on 30 November 20X1. The subsidiary does
not plan to pay any dividends for the financial year to 30 November 20X1 or in the foreseeable
future. The carrying amount in XYZ’s consolidated financial statements of its investment in the
subsidiary at 30 November 20X1 is made up as follows:
£m
Carrying amount of net assets acquired excluding deferred tax 76
Goodwill (before deferred tax and impairment losses) 14
Carrying amount/cost of investment 90
The tax base of the net assets of the subsidiary at acquisition was £60 million. No deduction is
available in the subsidiary’s tax jurisdiction for the cost of the goodwill.
Immediately after acquisition on 30 November 20X1, XYZ had supplied the subsidiary with
inventories amounting to £30 million at a profit of 20% on selling price. The inventories had not been
sold by the year end and the tax rate applied to the subsidiary’s profit is 25%. There was no
significant difference between the fair values and carrying amounts on the acquisition of the
subsidiary.
(2) The carrying amount of the property, plant and equipment (excluding that of the subsidiary) is
£2,600 million and their tax base is £1,920 million. Tax arising on the revaluation of properties of
£140 million, if disposed of at their revalued amounts, is the same at 30 November 20X1 as at the
beginning of the year. The revaluation of the properties is included in the carrying amount above.
Other taxable temporary differences (excluding the subsidiary) amount to £90 million as at 30
November 20X1.
(3) The liability for healthcare benefits in the statement of financial position had risen to £100 million
as at 30 November 20X1 and the tax base is zero. Healthcare benefits are deductible for tax
purposes when payments are made to retirees. No payments were made during the year to 30
November 20X1.
(4) XYZ Group incurred £300 million of tax losses in 20X0. Under the tax law of the country, tax
losses can be carried forward for three years only. The taxable profits for the years ending 30
November were anticipated to be as follows:
20X1 20X2 20X3

£m £m £m
110 100 130
The auditors are unsure about the availability of taxable profits in 20X3, as the amount is based on
the projected acquisition of a profitable company. It is anticipated that there will be no future
reversals of existing taxable temporary differences until after 30 November 20X3.
(5) Income tax of £165 million on a property disposed of in 20X0 becomes payable on 30 November
20X4 under the deferral relief provisions of the tax laws of the country. There had been no sales or
revaluations of property during the year to 30 November 20X1.
(6) Income tax is assumed to be 30% for the foreseeable future in XYZ’s jurisdiction and the company
wishes to discount any deferred tax liabilities at a rate of 4% if allowed by IAS 12.
(7) There are no other temporary differences other than those set out above. The directors of XYZ
have calculated the opening balance of deferred tax using IAS 12 to be £280 million.
Requirement
Calculate the liability for deferred tax required by the XYZ Group at 30 November 20X1 and the
deferred tax expense in profit or loss for the year ending 30 November 20X1 using IAS 12,
commenting on the effect that the application of IAS 12 will have on the financial statements of the
XYZ Group.
HB2021

this chapter.
HB2021


1.1 The tax base of the accrued expenses is nil.
1.2 The tax base of the interest received in advance is nil.
1.3 The tax base of the prepaid expenses is nil.
1.4 The tax base of the loan is £1 million.

(a) The tax base of the asset is £70,000 (£100,000 – £30,000).
Recovery through continued use
Temporary difference of £150,000 – £70,000 = £80,000 is all taxed at 30% resulting in a deferred
tax liability of £24,000.
(If the entity expects to recover the carrying amount by using the asset it must generate taxable
income of £150,000, but will only be able to deduct depreciation of £70,000.)
(b) Recovery through sale
If the entity expects to recover the carrying amount by selling the asset immediately for
proceeds of £150,000, the temporary difference is still £80,000. Of this, only the £50,000 excess
of proceeds over cost is not taxable. Therefore the deferred tax liability will be computed as
follows.
Taxable temporary Deferred tax

difference liability
£ Tax rate £
Cumulative tax depreciation 30,000 30% 9,000
Proceeds in excess of cost 50,000 Nil –––––
Total temporary difference 80,000 9,000

(a) Recovery through continued use
If the entity expects to recover the carrying amount by using the asset, the situation is as in
Recovery 1 above in the same circumstances.
(b) Recovery through sale
If the entity expects to recover the carrying amount by selling the asset immediately for
proceeds of £150,000, the entity will be able to deduct the indexed cost of £110,000. The net
profit of £40,000 will be taxed at 40%. In addition, the cumulative tax depreciation of £30,000
will be included in taxable income and taxed at 30%. On this basis, the tax base is £80,000
(£110,000 – £30,000), there is a taxable temporary difference of £70,000 and there is a deferred
tax liability of £25,000 (£40,000 × 40% plus £30,000 × 30%).

Jonquil Co will recover the carrying amount of the equipment by using it to manufacture goods for
resale.
HB2021

Therefore, the entity’s current tax computation is as follows.
20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5

£ £ £ £ £
Taxable income* 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Depreciation for tax purposes 12,500 12,500 12,500 12,500 0
Taxable profit (tax loss) (2,500) (2,500) (2,500) (2,500) 10,000
Current tax expense (income) at
40% (1,000) (1,000) (1,000) (1,000) 4,000
* ie, nil profit plus (£50,000 ÷ 5) depreciation add-back.

The entity recognises a current tax asset at the end of years 20X1 to 20X4 because it recovers the
benefit of the tax loss against the taxable profit of year 20X0.
The temporary differences associated with the equipment and the resulting deferred tax asset and
liability and deferred tax expense and income are as follows.
20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5

£ £ £
Carrying amount 40,000 30,000 20,000 10,000 0
Tax base 37,500 25,000 12,500 0 0
Taxable temporary difference 2,500 5,000 7,500 10,000 0
Opening deferred tax liability 0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000
Deferred tax expense (income):
bal fig 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 (4,000)
Closing deferred tax liability @

40% 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 0
The entity recognises the deferred tax liability in years 20X1 to 20X4 because the reversal of the
taxable temporary difference will create taxable income in subsequent years. The entity’s income
statement is as follows.
20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5

£ £ £ £ £
Income 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Depreciation (10,000) (10,000) (10,000) (10,000) (10,000)
Profit before tax 0 0 0 0 0
Current tax expense (income) (1,000) (1,000) (1,000) (1,000) 4,000
Deferred tax expense (income) 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 (4,000)
Total tax expense (income) 0 0 0 0 0
Net profit for the period 0 0 0 0 0

The company will recognise an expense for the consumption of employee services given in
consideration for share options granted, but will not receive a tax deduction until the share options
are actually exercised. Therefore a temporary difference arises and IAS 12, Income Taxes requires the
recognition of deferred tax.
A deferred tax asset (a deductible temporary difference) results from the difference between the tax
base of the services received (a tax deduction in future periods) and the carrying value of zero. IAS
HB2021

12 requires the measurement of the deductible temporary difference to be based on the intrinsic
value of the options at the year end. This is the difference between the fair value of the share and the
exercise price of the option.
If the amount of the estimated future tax deduction exceeds the amount of the related cumulative
remuneration expense, the tax deduction relates not only to the remuneration expense, but also to
equity. If this is the case, the excess should be recognised directly in equity.
Year to 31 May 20X6
Deferred tax asset:
£
Fair value (40,000 × £8.50 × 1/2) 170,000
Exercise price of option (40,000 × £4.00 × 1/2) (80,000)
Intrinsic value (estimated tax deduction) 90,000
Tax at 30% 27,000
The cumulative remuneration expense is £60,000, which is less than the estimated tax deduction of
£90,000. Therefore:
• a deferred tax asset of £27,000 is recognised in the statement of financial position;
• there is deferred tax income of £18,000 (60,000 × 30%); and
• the excess of £9,000 (30,000 × 30%) goes to equity.
Year to 31 May 20X7
Deferred tax asset:
£
Fair value
(40,000 × £8) 320,000
(120,000 × £8 × 1/3) 320,000
640,000
Exercise price of options
(40,000 × £4) (160,000)
(120,000 × £5 × 1/3) (200,000)
Intrinsic value (estimated tax deduction) 280,000
Tax at 30% 84,000
7,000
The cumulative remuneration expense is £220,000, which is less than the estimated tax deduction of
£280,000. Therefore:
• a deferred tax asset of £84,000 is recognised in the statement of financial position at 31 May
20X7;
• there is potential deferred tax income of £57,000 for the year ended 31 May 20X7;
• of this, £9,000 (60,000 × 30%) – (9,000) goes directly to equity; and
• the remainder (£48,000) is recognised in profit or loss for the year.
HB2021

The entity recognises a deferred tax asset of £0.9 million (£3m × 30%) and, in profit or loss, deferred
tax income of £0.9 million. Goodwill is not adjusted, as the recognition does not arise within the
measurement period (ie, within the 12 months following the acquisition).

7.1 The fair value adjustment to the property reduces goodwill by £24 million (being 80% of the
£30m FV adjustment).
As a result of the fair value uplift, the non-controlling interest must be adjusted up by £6 million
(20% × £30m).
The journal to record the adjustments to property, goodwill and the NCI at the date of
acquisition is:
DEBIT Property £30m

CREDIT Goodwill £24m
CREDIT NCI £6m
The fair value uplift is subsequently depreciated such that by the reporting date its carrying
value is £15 million (10/20 yrs × £30m). The journal to record the consolidation adjustment for
extra depreciation is:
DEBIT Group retained earnings (80% × £15m) £12m

DEBIT NCI (20% × 15,000) £3m
CREDIT Property – accumulated depreciation £15m
7.2 At acquisition, property held within Dorian’s accounts is uplifted by £30 million as a
consolidation adjustment.
This results in a taxable temporary difference of £30 million, and so a deferred tax liability of
£4.8 million (16% × £30m) at acquisition.
This is recognised by:
DEBIT Goodwill £3.84m

DEBIT Non-controlling interest (20% × £4.8m) £0.96m
CREDIT Deferred tax liability £4.8m
By the reporting date, £15 million of this temporary difference has reversed and therefore a
further journal is required to reduce the deferred tax liability by £2.4 million (16% × £15m):
DEBIT Deferred tax liability £2.4m

CREDIT Retained earnings (80% × £2.4m) £1.92m
CREDIT NCI (20% × £2.4m) £0.48m

An intangible asset acquired in a business combination is recognised where it meets the definition of
an asset and is identifiable ie, it is either separable or arises from contractual or legal rights. This is
the case regardless of whether the acquiree recognises the asset on its individual statement of
The Jenner Group amortises domain names over a 10-year (120 month) period. Rannon was
acquired 50 months before the reporting date, therefore the carrying amount of the domain name as
at 31 March 20X4 is 70/120 × £40,800,000 = £23,800,000.
A deferred tax liability arises in respect of the fair value adjustment since this results in the carrying
amount of the domain name exceeding its tax base of nil. The deferred tax liability is 17% ×
£23,800,000 = £4,046,000.
HB2021

Amortisation since acquisition of 50/120 × £40,800,000 = £17,000,000 on the domain name and the
£2,890,000 (£17,000,000 × 17%) movement in the associated deferred tax liability must also be
accounted for and allocated between group retained earnings and the non-controlling interest:
(1)
DEBIT Intangible assets £40,800,000

CREDIT Goodwill £40,800,000
To recognise fair value adjustment on acquisition.
DEBIT Retained earnings (60% × 17% × £40,800,000) £4,161,600

Non-controlling interest (40% × 17% ×
DEBIT £40,800,000) £2,774,400
CREDIT Deferred tax liability £6,936,000
To recognise deferred tax liability on fair value adjustment at acquisition.
(2)
DEBIT Retained earnings (60% × £17,000,000) £10,200,000

DEBIT Non-controlling interest (40% × £17,000,000) £6,800,000
CREDIT Intangible assets £17,000,000
To recognise amortisation on the domain name since acquisition.
(3)
DEBIT Deferred tax liability £2,890,000

CREDIT Retained earnings (60% × £2,890,000) £1,734,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interest (40% × £2,890,000) £1,156,000
To recognise the movement in deferred tax on the fair value adjustment since acquisition.

Implications:
(1) An unrelieved tax loss gives rise to a deferred tax asset; however, only where there are expected
to be sufficient future taxable profits to use the loss.
There is no indication of Rhydding’s future profitability, although the extent of the current year
losses suggests that future profits may not be available. If this is the case then no deferred tax
asset should be recognised.
If, however, the current year loss is due to a one-off factor, or there are other reasons why a
return to profitability is expected, then the deferred tax asset may be recognised at 20% × £6.5m
= £1.3 million.
(2) The intra-group sale gives rise to an unrealised year-end profit of £12m × 20/120 × ½ = £1m.
Consolidated profit and inventory are adjusted for this amount.
This profit has, however, already been taxed in the accounts of Burley. A deductible temporary
difference therefore arises which will reverse when the goods are sold outside the group and the
profit is realised. The resulting deferred tax asset is £1m × 30% = £300,000.
This may be recognised to the extent that it is recoverable.
HB2021

Implications:
(1)
(a) Fair value adjustments are treated in a similar way to temporary differences on revaluations
in the entity’s own accounts. A deferred tax liability is recognised under IAS 12 even though
the directors have no intention of selling the property, as it will generate taxable income in
excess of depreciation allowed for tax purposes. The deferred tax of £1m × 25% = £0.25m is
debited to goodwill, reducing the fair value adjustments (and net assets at acquisition) and
increasing goodwill.
(b) Provisions for unrealised profits are temporary differences which create deferred tax assets
and the deferred tax is provided at the receiving company’s rate of tax. A deferred tax asset
would arise of (3.6 × 2/6) @30% = £360,000.
(2)
(a) The unrealised gains are temporary differences which will reverse when the investments are
sold therefore a deferred tax liability needs to be created of (£8m × 25%) = £2m.
(b) The allowance is a temporary difference which will reverse when the currently unidentified
loans go bad and the entity will then be entitled to tax relief. A deferred tax asset of (£2m at
25%) = £500,000 should be created.
(3) No deferred tax liability is required for the additional tax payable of £2 million, as Angelo
controls the dividend policy of Escalus and does not intend to remit the earnings to its own tax
regime in the foreseeable future.
(4) Angelo’s unrelieved trading losses can only be recognised as a deferred tax asset to the extent
they are considered to be recoverable. In assessing the recoverability there needs to be
evidence that there will be suitable taxable profits from which the losses can be deducted in the
future. To the extent Angelo itself has a deferred tax liability for future taxable trading profits (eg,
accelerated tax depreciation) then an asset could be recognised.

Investments in foreign branches (or subsidiaries, associates or joint arrangements) are affected by
changes in foreign exchange rates. In this case, the branch’s taxable profits are determined in dinars,
and changes in the dinar/pound exchange rate may give rise to temporary differences. These
differences can arise where the carrying amounts of the non-monetary assets are translated at
historical rates and the tax base of those assets are translated at the closing rate. The closing rate
may be used to translate the tax base because the resulting figure is an accurate measure of the
amount that will be deductible in future periods. The deferred tax is charged or credited to profit or
loss.
The deferred tax arising will be calculated using the tax rate in the foreign branch‘s jurisdiction, that
is 20%.
Property Dinars (‘000) Exchange rate Pounds £’000

Carrying amount:
Cost 6,000 1,200
Depreciation for the year (500) (100)
Carrying amount 5,500 5 1,100
Tax base:
Cost 6,000
Tax depreciation (750)
Carrying amount 5,250 6 875
Temporary difference 225
HB2021

Property Dinars (‘000) Exchange rate Pounds £’000
Deferred tax at 20% 45
The deferred tax charge in profit or loss will therefore increase by £45,000.
If the tax base had been translated at the historical rate, the tax base would have been £(5.25m ÷ 5)
= £1.05 million. This gives a temporary difference of £1.1m – £1.05m = £50,000, and therefore a
deferred tax liability of £50,000 × 20% = £10,000. This is considerably lower than when the closing
rate is used.

According to IAS 12, Income Taxes the tax expense in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income includes the tax charge for the year, any under or overprovision of income
tax from the previous year and any increase or decrease in the deferred tax provision:
£
Current tax expense X
Under/overprovisions relating to prior periods X/(X)
Increases/decreases in the deferred tax balance X/(X)
X
While the correction of an over or under provision relates to a prior period, this is not a prior period
adjustment as defined in IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors and
as assumed by Tacks. Rather, it is a change in accounting estimate.
Changes in accounting estimates result from new information or new developments and,
accordingly, are not corrections of errors. A prior period error, which would require a prior period
adjustment is an omission or misstatement arising from failure to use reliable information that was
available or could have been obtained at the time of the authorisation of the financial statements.
This is not the case here. Tacks had accounted for all known issues at the previous year end (30
November 20X1), and could not have foreseen that the tax adjustment would be required. No
penalties were applied by the taxation authorities, indicating that there were no fundamental errors
in the information provided to them. Correction of an over- or under-provision for taxation is routine,
since taxation liabilities are difficult to estimate.
The effect of a change in accounting estimate must be applied by the company prospectively by
including it in profit or loss in the period of change, with separate disclosure of the adjustment in the

Journal entries and explanations:
Machinery purchase
The plant is categorised as a non-monetary asset per IAS 21. As such it should be measured at the
rate of exchange at the acquisition date of 1 January 20X3. Therefore the plant should originally have
been included at cost of Kr12 million (US$30m/2.5) and a liability for that sum recognised too.
Depreciation should be charged over the useful life of the asset, which commences on 1 January,
and so only nine months depreciation is required to 30 September 20X3. This gives a depreciation
charge of Kr900,000 and a carrying amount of Kr11.1 million.
An exchange difference arises between 1 January and 31 March, when payment is made. This should
be charged to the income statement instead of directly to equity.
The correct exchange difference is therefore a loss of Kr500,000 (Kr12.5m – Kr12m).
HB2021

The relevant correcting journals are:
Dr Cr
Kr million Kr million
DEBIT PPE
Cost Kr12m – Kr10m 2
CREDIT Creditor 2
Being correct recording of cost of the machinery
DEBIT Creditor 2.5

CREDIT Retained earnings 2.5
Being journal to reverse original exchange difference (Kr12.5m – Kr10m)
DEBIT Profit or loss 0.5

CREDIT Creditor 0.5
Being correct exchange loss taken to profit or loss
DEBIT PPE 0.1

CREDIT Profit or loss 0.1
Being correction to depreciation charge (Kr1m – Kr0.9m)
There are no deferred tax implications as the tax base and the carrying amount are the same.
Impairment
Per IAS 36 the impairment of Kr18 million should initially be offset against the revaluation surplus of
Kr16.8 million, and the excess of Kr1.2 million charged in the income statement.
The journal is:
CREDIT Profit or loss Kr16.8m

DEBIT Revaluation surplus Kr16.8m
Again there should be no deferred tax implications as the tax base and the carrying amount are the
same.
Investment
The investment is classified as held for trading per IFRS because there is an intention to sell the
shares at the end of the year. Therefore they should be measured at fair value and the gain/loss taken
to the income statement.
At 30 September the increase in fair value is Kr4.8 million, and this is credited to the income
statement.
DEBIT Investments Kr4.8m

CREDIT Profit or loss Kr4.8m
A deferred tax liability of Kr 960,000 (20% × Kr 4.8m) should be created because the recognition of
the increase in fair value represents a taxable temporary difference.
DEBIT Profit or loss deferred tax Kr960,000

CREDIT Deferred tax provision Kr960,000
HB2021

Provision
The provision should initially be based on a figure of Kr10 million per IAS 37, as this is the most likely
outcome for the clean-up costs.
However the provision should then be discounted using the pre-tax discount rate of 8% over the 20-
year period from 1 October 20X2. The initial provision should therefore be Kr2.145 million.
As the provision relates to the rights, the cost should be added to intangible assets.
The intangible asset should then be amortised in the income statement over the 20 years to when
the rights expire.
The provision should be unwound over the period to when the clean-up costs are due.
Dr Cr
DEBIT Intangible asset 2.145
DEBIT Provision 12.855
CREDIT Profit or loss 15
DEBIT Profit or loss (Kr10.645m/20) 0.532

CREDIT Intangible asset 0.532
DEBIT Profit or loss (finance costs) (Kr2.145m × 8%) 0.172

CREDIT Provision 0.172
Because the clean-up costs are tax deductible, a deferred tax asset should be created for the
provision at 30 September 20X3.
The provision is Kr2.317 million (Kr2.145m + 0.172m) and so the deferred tax asset is Kr0.463
million.
Dr Cr
DEBIT Deferred tax asset 0.463
CREDIT Profit or loss 0.463
Adjusted statement of financial position
Statement of financial position at 30 September 20X3
Draft Plant Impair Invest Prov’n Total

Kr’000 Kr’000 Kr’000 Kr’000 Kr’000 Kr’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant & equipment 61,600 2,100 63,700
Intangible assets 8,500 1,613 10,113
Financial investments 7,700 4,800 12,500
Deferred tax 0 463 463
77,800 86,776
Current assets 23,700 23,700
Total assets 101,500 110,476
HB2021

Draft Plant Impair Invest Prov’n Total
Kr’000 Kr’000 Kr’000 Kr’000 Kr’000 Kr’000
Issued Kr 1 shares 10,000 10,000
Retained earnings 42,600 2,100 16,800 3,840 14,759 80,099
Revaluation surplus 16,800 (16,800) 0
69,400 90,099
Loans 10,000 10,000
Provisions 15,000 (12,683) 2,317
Deferred tax 0 960 960
Current liabilities 7,100 7,100
Total equity & liabilities 101,500 110,476
Note: The deferred tax asset can be offset against the deferred tax liability if both are due to the
same tax authority.
Impairment loss: Gemex
The impairment loss in the financial statements of Gemex reduces the carrying value of property,
plant and equipment, but is not allowable for tax. Therefore the tax base of the property, plant and
equipment is different from its carrying value and there is a temporary difference.
Under IAS 36, Impairment of Assets the impairment loss is allocated first to goodwill and then to
other assets:
Property, plant
Goodwill and equipment Total
£m £m £m
Carrying value at 30 September 20X3 1 6.0 7.0
Impairment loss (1) (0.8) (1.8)
– 5.2 5.2
IAS 12 states that no deferred tax should be recognised on goodwill and therefore only the
impairment loss relating to the property, plant and equipment affects the deferred tax position.
The effect of the impairment loss is as follows:
Before After
impairment impairment Difference
£m £m £m
Carrying value 6 5.2
Tax base (4) (4.0)
Temporary difference 2 1.2 0.8
Tax liability (20%) 0.4 0.24 0.16
Therefore the impairment loss reduces the deferred tax liability by £160,000.
HB2021

1 Torcularis
£nil and £80,000
IAS 12.7 Examples 2 and 3 show that:
• For interest receivables the tax base is nil.
• The tax base for trade receivables is equal to their carrying amount.
2 Situations
(a) Deferred tax liability
‘Development costs’ lead to a deferred tax liability.
(b) Deferred tax asset
(c) No deferred tax implications
‘A penalty payable’ has no deferred tax implications.
3 Budapest
Statements:
(1) True
(2) True
Under IAS 12.19 the excess of an asset’s fair value over its tax base at the time of a business
combination results in a deferred tax liability. As it arises in Lisbon, the tax rate used is 20% and the
liability is £800 ((£12,000 – £8,000) × 20%).
The recognition of a deferred tax liability in relation to the initial recognition of goodwill is specifically
prohibited by IAS 12.15(a).
4 Dipyrone
£25,250
Under IFRS 10, intra-group profits recognised in inventory are eliminated in full and IAS 12 applied to
any temporary differences that result. This profit elimination results in the tax base being higher than
the carrying amount, so deductible temporary differences arise. Deferred tax assets are measured by
reference to the tax rate applying to the entity who currently owns the inventory.
So the deferred tax asset in respect of Dipyrone’s eliminated profit is £14,850 (£600,000 × 25% ×
30% × 33% tax rate) and in respect of Reidfurd’s eliminated profit is £10,400 (£800,000 × 20% × 25%
× 26% tax rate), giving a total of £25,250.
5 Rhenium
£30,000 asset
The year-end accrual is £120,000 (£6m × 8% × 3/12). Because the £120,000 year-end carrying
amount of the accrued interest exceeds its nil tax base, under IAS 12.5 there is a deductible
temporary difference, of £120,000. Under IAS 12.24 a deferred tax asset must be recognised.
The deferred tax asset is the deductible temporary difference multiplied by the tax rate expected to
exist when the tax asset is realised (IAS 12.47). This gives a deferred tax asset of (£120,000 × 25%) =
£30,000.
HB2021

6 Cacholate
£162,000
Because the £2.16 million year-end carrying amount of the asset exceeds its £1.35 million
(£1,500,000 × 18/20) tax base, under IAS 12.5 there is a taxable temporary difference, of £810,000.
Under IAS 12.15 a deferred tax liability must be recognised, of £162,000 (£810,000 × 20%). As there
was no such liability last year (the carrying amount and the tax base were the same), the charge in the
current year is for the amount of the liability.
Because the revaluation surplus is recognised as other comprehensive income and accumulated in
equity (IAS 12.62), the deferred tax charge is recognised as tax on other comprehensive income and
also accumulated in equity, under IAS 12.61.
7 Spruce
£550,000
A deferred tax asset shall be recognised for the carry forward of unused tax losses to the extent that
future taxable profits will be available for offset (IAS 12.34). The loss incurred in the current year is a
one-off, and the company has a history of making profits and expects to do so over the next two
years. So it is likely that there will be future profits to offset.
£500,000 of the loss will be relieved by carry back, leaving £4,200,000 for carry forward. But the carry
forward is limited to the likely future profits, so £2.2 million.
At the 25% tax rate, the deferred tax asset is £550,000.
8 Bananaquit
Statements:
(1) False
(2) False
The deferred tax figure in profit or loss is the difference between the opening and closing deferred
tax liabilities. At the start of the year the liability was £450,000 (£1.5m × 30%). The amount of the
change is £30,000, but it is a deferred tax credit, not charge to profit or loss.
At the end of the year the £2.4 million carrying amount of the assets exceeds their £1.0 million tax
base, so under IAS 12.5 there is a taxable temporary difference, of £1.4 million. Under IAS 12.15 a
deferred tax liability (not asset) of £420,000 (£1.4m × 30%) must be recognised.
9 Antpitta
Statements:
(1) False
(2) True
There is an unrealised profit relating to inventories still held within the group, which must be
eliminated on consolidation (IFRS 10). But the tax base of the inventories is unchanged, so it is higher
than the carrying amount in the consolidated statement of financial position and there is a
deductible temporary difference (IAS 12.5).
10 Parea
Deferred tax liability:
(1) £132
(2) £3,743
(3) £349 credit
At 31 December 20X6 the carrying amount of the plant is £30,000 × (1 – 25%) = £22,500, while the
tax base is £30,000 × (1 – 27%) = £21,900. The taxable temporary difference is £600 and the deferred
tax liability is 22% thereof, £132.
HB2021

At 31 December 20X7 the carrying amount of the plant is £30,000 × (1 – (25% × 2)) = £15,000, while
the tax base is £30,000 × (1 – 27%)2 = £15,987, leading to a deductible temporary difference of £987.
A deferred tax asset should be recognised in relation to this.
Before its revaluation, the property’s carrying amount is £40,000 – (5 years at 4%) = £32,000 and the
tax base is the same. The revaluation to £50,000 creates a taxable temporary difference of £18,000.
As Parea pays all its tax to a single authority, it must offset deferred tax assets and liabilities (IAS
12.74). At 31 December 20X7 there is a deferred tax liability of £(–987 + 18,000) = £17,013 × 22% =
£3,743.
The change in deferred tax liability over the year is £3,743 – £132 = £3,611. Of this, £18,000 × 22% =
£3,960 relates to the property revaluation and is recognised in other comprehensive income. This
leaves £3,611 – £3,960 = £(349) to be credited to profit or loss (IAS 12.58).
11 XYZ
Liability for deferred tax required by the XYZ Group at 30 November 20X1
Carrying Temporary XYZA/(XY

amount Tax base differences Rate ZA)
£m % £m
Goodwill (Note 1) 14 – –
Subsidiary (Note 1) 76 60 16 25 4
Inventories (Note 2) 24 30 (6) 25 (1.5)
Property, plant and equipment (Note 3) 2,600 1,920 680 30 204
Other temporary differences 90 30 27
Liability for healthcare benefits (100) 0 (100) 30 (30)
Unrelieved tax losses (Note 4) (100) 30 (30)
Property sold – tax due 30.11.20X4
(165/30%) 550 30 165
1,130 *338.5
Deferred tax liability b/d (given) 280
Deferred tax attributable to subsidiary to goodwill (from above) 4
 Deferred tax expense for the year charged to P/L (balance) 54.5
Deferred tax liability c/d (from above) *338.5
*Deferred tax asset (1.5 + 30 + 30) (61.5)

Deferred tax liability (balance) 400
338.5
Notes
1 As no deduction is available for the cost of goodwill in the subsidiary’s tax jurisdiction, then the
tax base of goodwill is zero. Paragraph 15(a) of IAS 12 states that XYZ Group should not
recognise a deferred tax liability of the temporary difference associated with the goodwill.
Goodwill will be increased by the amount of the deferred tax liability of the subsidiary ie, £4
million.
2 Unrealised group profit eliminated on consolidation is provided for at the receiving company’s
rate of tax (ie, at 25%).
HB2021

3 The tax that would arise if the properties were disposed of at their revalued amounts which was
provided at the beginning of the year will be included in the temporary difference arising on the
property, plant and equipment at 30 November 20X1.
4 XYZ Group has unrelieved tax losses of £300 million. This will be available for offset against
current year’s profits (£110m) and against profits for the year ending 30 November 20X2
(£100m). Because of the uncertainty about the availability of taxable profits in 20X3, no deferred
tax asset can be recognised for any losses which may be offset against this amount. Therefore, a
deferred tax asset may be recognised for the losses to be offset against taxable profits in 20X2.
That is £100 million × 30% ie, £30 million.
Comment
The deferred tax liability of XYZ Group will rise in total by £335.5 million (£338.5m – £3m), thus
reducing net assets, distributable profits and post-tax earnings. The profit for the year will be
reduced by £54.5 million which would probably be substantially more under IAS 12 than the old
method of accounting for deferred tax. A prior period adjustment will occur of £280m – £3m as IAS
are being applied for the first time (IFRS 1) ie, £277 million. The borrowing position of the company
may be affected and the directors may decide to cut dividend payments. However, the amount of
any unprovided deferred tax may have been disclosed under the previous GAAP standard used. IAS
12 brings this liability into the statement of financial position but if the bulk of the liability had already
been disclosed the impact on the share price should be minimal.
HB2021

HB2021

Chapter 23
Financial statement analysis 1
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Learning topics
1 Users and user focus
2 Accounting ratios and relationships
3 Statements of cash flows and their interpretation
4 Economic events
5 Business issues
6 Accounting choices
7 Ethical issues
8 Industry analysis
9 Non-financial performance measures
10 Limitations of ratios and financial statement analysis
Summary
Self-test questions
HB2021

Introduction
23
Learning outcomes
• Analyse and evaluate the performance, position, liquidity, efficiency and solvency of an entity
through the use of ratios and similar forms of analysis including using quantitative and qualitative
data
• Compare the performance and position of different entities allowing for inconsistencies in the
recognition and measurement criteria in the financial statement information provided
• Evaluate the performance of an entity using accounting information extracted to an audit data
analytics platform using appropriate data analysis tools to interpret and present conclusions
• Construct adjustments to reported earnings in order to determine underlying earnings and
compare the performance of an entity over time
• Compare and appraise the significance of accruals basis and cash flow reporting
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 9(d), 9(g), 9(h), 9(i), 9(l)
23

of this chapter.

1 Users and user Approach The analysis and N/A

focus So far your financial interpretation of
The annual financial reporting studies financial statements is
statements provide have been focused a significant portion
users with a on preparation of of the Corporate
comprehensive financial statements. Reporting
source of financial The focus of the examination and
information about next two chapters could account for
an entity. The changes to that of approximately 10% of
financial statements users. the total marks in an
are prepared in a exam if the single-silo
Stop and think FR question is on
conventionalised
way. They provide From the Corporate financial analysis.
substantial amounts Reporting You would not be
of narrative and standpoint, the most asked to list the users
numerical important users are in this section, but an
information. investors and credit understanding of
analysts. their needs,
particularly the needs
of investors and
credit analysists,
should inform your
financial analysis.
2 Accounting ratios Approach Questions will not IQ1 to 5

and relationships Make sure you give you a list of You should answer
A key skill is to be understand the ratios to calculate. all these
able to analyse the purpose of and can You may, as part of a interactive
information the calculate ratios longer scenario questions. They
financial statements relating to: question, be required are very short, and
provide so that past to analyse the cover the main
• Performance performance of a
HB2021

performance can be • Short-term potential acquisition accounting ratios.

analysed and future liquidity target.
performance • Long-term You will probably be
predicted. solvency required to make
In this section we • Efficiency (asset adjustments to the
look at the main and working figures, correcting the
accounting ratios capital) accounting treatment,
and relationships before going on to
• Investors’ (or
that are important to do the analysis.
stock market)
users.
ratios
Stop and think
Why should caution
be exercised when
using the current
and quick ratios?
3 Statements of cash Approach The context where IQ10: Calculation

flows and their Pay particular you might meet cash of cash flow ratios
interpretation attention to cash flow ratios could be a The title is self-
While most ratios from operating report to a bank as explanatory – you
follow accruals- activities. If this is part of an application are given a
based accounting, significantly lower for a loan, as was statement of cash
cash flow ratios are than profit, this may required in a recent flows and required
important too. This indicate liquidity exam question. to calculate six
is because many problems. cash flow ratios.
businesses fail Read through the
through lack of cash paragraphs on the
rather than lack of other cash flows,
profits. paying attention to
which cash flows are
discretionary and
which are not.
Stop and think
Equity dividends
paid are
discretionary in
theory, but in
practice there may
be considerable
pressure to pay
them.
4 Economic events Approach A financial analysis N/A

It is important in This is a short question might
interpretation section about the involve using IFRS 8,
scenarios to take wider economic Operating Segments,
account of both environment. which you met in an
economic factors earlier chapter.
Stop and think
affecting all
businesses and the When considering
specific industry the the current state of
business is the economy, the
operating in. impact of the Covid-
19 pandemic will be
considerable.
HB2021
ICAEW 2022 23: Financial statement analysis 1 1331

5 Business issues Approach An exam question IQ11: The effect of

You may need to The key point of this might ask you to business issues on
calculate a range of section is to analyse the impact of financial reporting
ratios and to compare like with an acquisition on key Though shorter
provide some like. If a business performance targets than an exam
explanation for their diversifies or for the current and question, this is a
movements from acquires or disposes future year, as useful exercise to
previous periods or of a subsidiary, then happened a few get you thinking as
their comparability year-on-year years ago. you have to pick
to industry comparisons will be the IFRS/IAS
averages. less meaningful. yourself. Your
Stop and think answer may differ
from the one in the
Sometimes the chapter, but you
figures need to be would still get
adjusted for the credit in an exam if
effect of a change to you backed up
make them your choice.
comparable.
6 Accounting choices Approach You may get an IQ12: Asset

Management may There is not as much ethical dilemma, revaluation
be influenced in choice as there where an audit client This question
their choice of once was; choice is wishes to change illustrates the
accounting policies limited to three accounting policy in impact on
and the judgement different areas: order to make the reported results
they make in figures look better and net assets of a
• Asset revaluation rather than because it
determining choice to revalue.
accounting
• Cost or fair value provides more
estimates by the model for relevant and reliable
way the information investment information.
may affect a user’s properties
view of the • Classification of
business. financial assets
Stop and think
How might different
accounting policies
affect the
interpretation of
financial
statements?
7 Ethical issues Approach Ethical dilemmas may IQ13: Changing

Ethical issues are an Look carefully at the arise in an auditing payment dates
important part of reasons why context, where a Ethical issues are
the Corporate management might client is motivated by generally tested by
Reporting syllabus, try to improve the a bonus to overstate narrative
as seen in the appearance of the profits. questions, but this
previous section. financial one is numerical,
information, and and shows how
how they might try the figures can be
to do it. manipulated.
Stop and think IQ14: Ethical
What is meant by pressures
professional This is a more
scepticism? typical question
HB2021

presenting several
ethical dilemmas.
8 Industry analysis Approach Exam questions are N/A

Analytical skills are This section is set in a wide variety
essential in a wide concerned with of industries. While
range of work areas practical examples specialised
from audit planning of specific knowledge of any
to desk-top analysis industries. particular industry is
of competitors and not required, it does
Stop and think no harm to read the
acquisition targets.
Can you think of financial press and
others? think about how they
vary and why key
performance
indicators for one
industry might not
work for another.
9 Non-financial Approach Non-financial N/A

performance Read through all of performance
measures this section. measures are not
Non-financial tested as frequently
Stop and think as financial
performance
measures, for Increasingly performance
example, sales companies provide measures. However,
volume, market information about they were examined
share or target environmental or in Question 1 in
delivery times, are diversity targets. November 2015 and
important and 2019.
ultimately feed into
financial
performance.
10 Limitations of ratios Approach You are more likely to N/A

and financial Read through this be asked to explain
statement analysis list and reflect on the limitations of a
It is important that how the various specific financial
you understand the issues covered in analysis than in
limitations of ratio this chapter will general terms.
analysis. impact upon how
you interpret
financial
information.
Stop and think
Despite increasingly
specific IFRS, there
is still scope for
interpretation and
‘creative
accounting’, which
we look at in the
next Chapter.
HB2021

1 Users and user focus
Section overview
• Different groups of users of financial statements will have different information needs.
• The focus of an investigation of a business will be different for each user group.
1.1 Information needs

You have covered external users and their information needs in your Professional Level studies and
they were touched on again in Chapters 1 and 2 of this Workbook. The following table summarises
the main groups of users of financial statements and the information they need.
Users Need information to:
Present and potential Make investment decisions, therefore need information on the
investors following:
• Risk and return on investment
• Ability of entity to pay dividends
Employees • Assess their employer’s stability and profitability

• Assess their employer’s ability to provide remuneration, employment
opportunities and retirement and other benefits
Lenders Assess whether loans will be repaid, and related interest will be paid,
when due
Suppliers and other Assess the likelihood of being paid when due
trade creditors
Customers • Assess whether the entity will continue in existence – important

where customers have a long-term involvement with, or are
dependent on, the entity, for example where there are product
warranties or where specialist parts may be needed
• Assess whether business practices are ethical
Governments and their • Assess allocation of resources and, therefore, activities of entities
agencies • Help with regulating activities
• Assess taxation
• Provide a basis for national statistics
The public Assess trends and recent developments in the entity’s prosperity and its
activities – important where the entity makes a substantial contribution
to a local economy, for example by providing employment and using
local suppliers
An entity’s management also needs to understand and interpret financial information, both as a basis
for making management decisions and also to help in understanding how external users might react
to the information in the financial statements.
1.2 User focus

The primary focus of users of the financial statements differs according to their interests.
HB2021

Examples are as follows:
(a) Customers and suppliers are most interested in current liquidity, but also focus on overall pre-tax
profitability and net worth of the business in their evaluation of likely future liquidity.
(b) Lenders focus on liquidity, longer-term solvency and ability to service and repay debts.
(c) Shareholders’ main concern is with risk and return. They therefore focus mainly on gearing and
dividend cover to measure the risk, and on post-tax returns and the overall net worth of the
business to measure return. However, they are also interested in solvency, as they will be the first
to lose out in the event that the company runs into financial difficulties. Finally, shareholders are
interested in liquidity, as this affects the security of their dividends.
1.3 User focus: Corporate Reporting

We will consider all types of users in our studies of financial analysis. However, in the context of
Corporate Reporting, the main standpoints are those of:
• investor (or potential investor)
• credit analyst
1.3.1 Investor
An investor uses financial analysis to determine whether an entity is stable, solvent, liquid, or
profitable enough to be invested in. When looking at a specific company, the financial analyst will
often focus on the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the statement of
financial position and the statement of cash flows.
In addition, certain accounting ratios are more relevant to investors than to other users. These are
discussed in section 2.7.
One key area of financial analysis involves extrapolating the company’s past performance into an
estimate of the company’s future performance.
1.3.2 Credit analyst

A credit analyst may have a similar perspective to a lender, although he/she may be advising a lender
rather than doing the lending. As the name suggests, credit analysts are experts in evaluating the
creditworthiness of individuals and businesses. They determine the likelihood that a borrower will be
able to meet financial obligations and pay back a loan, often by reviewing the borrower’s financial
history and determining whether market conditions will be conducive to repayment.
Credit analysts are likely to use ratios, including cash flow ratios (see section 3.2) when reviewing the
financial history of a potential borrower. They focus on determining whether the borrower will have
sufficient cash flows by comparing ratios to industry standards, other borrowers and historical trends.
Information needs to be tailored to the user. If information is provided that is not relevant to the
user’s needs, it can obscure the information that is relevant.
1.4 Financial position and performance

Different users usually require different information. However, there is overlap, as all potential users
are interested in the financial performance and financial position of the company as a whole.
The next section examines how accounting ratios can be used to help assess financial performance
and position. The additional perspective provided by analysis of the statement of cash flows is
covered later in this chapter.
HB2021

2 Accounting ratios and relationships
Section overview
• Ratios are commonly classified into different groups according to the focus of the investigation.
• Ratios can help in assessing performance, short-term liquidity, long-term solvency, efficiency and
investor returns.
2.1 Introduction to ratios

Accounting ratios help to summarise and present financial information in a more understandable
form. They help with assessing the performance of a business by identifying significant relationships
between different figures. The term ‘accounting ratios’ is used loosely, to cover the outcome of
different types of calculation; some ratios measure one amount as a ratio of another (such as 2:1)
whereas others measure it as a percentage of the other (such as 200%).
Ratios are of no use in isolation. To be useful, a basis for comparison is needed, such as the following:
• Previous years
• Other companies
• Industry averages
• Budgeted or forecast vs actual
Ratios do not provide answers but help to focus attention on important areas, therefore minimising
the chance of failing to identify a significant trend or weakness.
Ratios divide into the following main areas:
• Performance
• Short-term liquidity
• Long-term solvency
• Efficiency (asset and working capital)
• Investors’ (or stock market) ratios
2.1.1 Which figures to use?

Many accounting ratios are calculated using one figure from the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income (which covers a period of time, usually a year) and one from the statement of
financial position (which is a snapshot at a point in time, usually the year end). The result may be
distorted if the statement of financial position (snapshot) amounts are not typical of the amounts
throughout the period covered by the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
Consider a toy retailer with a 31 December year end: over half its annual sales may well be made in
the three months leading up to Christmas, while its inventory levels at 31 December will probably be
at their lowest point throughout the year, and certainly much lower than at their highest point which
might be some time in October in the run up to Christmas. To calculate a relationship between cost
of sales for 12 months and the 31 December level of inventories and then use it as a measure of
management’s efficiency in managing inventory levels (as does the inventory turnover ratio in section
2.5.2 below) runs the risk of a major distortion. The calculation should really be done using the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income amount and the average inventory
holding throughout the year, calculating the average every month or more frequently.
But monthly statement of financial position amounts are not made available to financial statement
users. Sometimes half-yearly (or quarterly) statements of financial position are published, in which
case they may well result in useful averages. But averaging the amounts at the current year end and
the previous year end may well be no better than just using current year-end amounts, since the
result may only be to average two unrepresentative amounts.
HB2021

In approaching financial analysis questions, and interpretation of financial statements in real life, you
will be faced with a great deal of information. It is particularly important to sift out the key information
– for example, a company that is expanding may benefit from analysis of ratios relating to cash flow.
2.2 Performance
2.2.1 Significance
Performance ratios measure the rate of return earned on capital employed, and analyse this into
profit margins and use of assets. These ratios are frequently used as the basis for assessing
management effectiveness in utilising the resources under their control.
2.2.2 Key ratios

Return on capital employed (ROCE)
This measures the overall efficiency of a company in employing the resources available to it; that is,
its capital employed.
(Return ÷ Capital employed) × 100
(Source: SPLOCI ÷ Source: SFP)
where: Return = profit before interest and tax (PBIT) + associates’ post-tax earnings
Capital employed = equity + net debt, where net debt = interest-bearing debt (non-current and
current) minus cash and cash equivalents
Remember:
• Equity includes irredeemable preference shares and the non-controlling interests.
• Net debt includes redeemable preference shares.
Many different versions of this ratio are used but all are based on the same idea: identify the long-
term resources available to a company’s management and then measure the financial return earned
on those resources.
In the version used in this Workbook, the total resources available to a company are the amounts
owed to shareholders who receive dividends, plus the amounts owed to those who provide finance
only on the condition that they receive interest in return. So interest-bearing debt, both long term
and short term (for example bank overdrafts), are included but trade payables (which are an interest-
free source of finance) are not. But to cope with companies which move from one month to another
between positive and overdrawn bank balances, holdings of cash and cash equivalents (but not any
other ‘cash’ current assets which management does not describe as cash equivalents) are netted off,
to arrive at ‘net debt’.
The return is the amount earned before deducting any payments to those who provide the capital
employed. So it is the profits before both dividends and interest payable. Because interest is tax-
deductible, the profit figure is also before taxation. The PBIT (profit before interest and tax) tag is well
established within the UK, so this term is used in ratio calculations although in the statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income layout used in this Workbook the description given to this
figure is ‘profit/(loss) from operations’.
To allow valid comparisons to be made with other companies, the return must also include the
earnings from investments in associates, because some groups carry out large parts of their activities
through associates, rather than the parent or subsidiaries.
Strictly speaking, it is the associates’ pre-tax earnings which should be included, but under IAS 28
only the post-tax amount is shown. In practice, some users adjust this figure using an estimated tax
rate for the associates to establish a pre-tax return.
Like profit, capital employed is affected by the accounting policies chosen by a company. For
example, a company that revalues its PPE will have higher capital employed than one which does
not. The depreciation expense will be higher and profits will be reduced as a result of the policy. The
accounting adjustments will reduce ROCE.
HB2021

Return on shareholders’ funds (ROSF)
This measures how effectively a company is employing funds that parent company shareholders
have provided.
Profit attributable to owners of a parent ÷ Equity minus non-controlling interest
It is the return on the funds provided by the parent company’s shareholders that is being analysed
here, so it is their equity which goes on the bottom of the fraction. This is the equity used in the ROCE
calculation minus the non-controlling interest.
The return is the profit for the year attributable to those shareholders.
Analysis usually focuses on ROCE, as opposed to ROSF, because the issue is management’s ability to
generate return from overall resources rather than how those resources are financed.
Worked example: Calculating ROCE and ROSF

Consider two companies without subsidiaries in the same industry with different capital structures:
Company 1 Company 2
£m £m
Equity (A) 80 20
Loans at 10% 20 80
Capital employed (B) 100 100
PBIT (C) 20 20
Loan interest at 10% (2) (8)
Tax at 30% (5) (4)
Profit after tax (for owners) (D) 13 8
Solution
ROCE/ROSF
Company 1 Company 2
% %
ROCE (C) as % of (B) 20 20
ROSF (D) as % of (A) 16 40
ROCE is the same, so the companies are equally good in generating profits. But with different capital
structures, ROSF is very different.
If it wished, Company 1 could achieve the same capital structure (and therefore the same ROSF) by
borrowing £60 million and using it to repay shareholders.
It is often easier to change capital structures than to change a company’s ability to generate profits.
Hence the focus on ROCE.
Note that Company 2 has much higher gearing and lower interest cover (these ratios are covered
later in this chapter).
HB2021

Interactive question 1: ROCE and ROSF
Name five considerations that you should consider when drawing conclusions from ROCE and ROSF
calculations.
ROCE and ROSF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Gross profit percentage/margin

This measures the margin earned by a company on revenue, before taking account of overhead
costs.
(Gross profits ÷ revenue) × 100
(Source: SPLOCI ÷ Source: SPLOCI)
Interactive question 2: Gross profit percentage

List four possible reasons for changes in the year on year gross profit percentage.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Operating cost percentage

This measures the relationship of overheads (fixed and variable, which usually comprise distribution
costs and administrative expenses) to revenue.
(Operating costs/overheads ÷ Revenue) × 100
Ideally this should be broken into variable overheads (expected to change with revenue) and fixed
overheads. However, such information is not usually published in financial statements.
Interactive question 3: Operating cost percentage

List two considerations that could account for changes in the operating cost percentage.
(1)
HB2021

(2)
Operating profit margin/net margin

This shows the profit margin after all operating expenses.
(PBIT ÷ Revenue) × 100 or (Profit from operations ÷ Revenue) × 100
2.2.3 Commentary
ROCE measures the return achieved by management from assets that they control, before payments
to providers of financing for those assets (lenders and shareholders).
For companies without associates, ROCE can be further subdivided into net profit margin and asset
turnover (use of assets).
(Net profit margin × Net asset turnover) = ROCE
(PBIT ÷ Revenue) × (Revenue ÷ Capital employed) = (PBIT ÷ Capital employed)
(Source: SPLOCI ÷ Source: SPLOCI), (Source: SPLOCI ÷ Source: SFP), (Source: SPLOCI ÷ Source: SFP)
This subdivision is useful when comparing a company’s performance from one period to another.
While ROCE might be identical for the two periods, there might be compensating changes in the two
components; that is, an improvement in margin might be offset by a deterioration in asset utilisation.
The subdivision might be equally useful when comparing the performance of two companies in the
same period.
Although associates’ earnings are omitted, it will probably be worth making this subdivision even for
groups with earnings from associates, unless those earnings are very substantial indeed.
Net profit margin is often seen as a measure of quality of profits. A high profit margin indicates a high
profit on each unit sold. This ratio can be used as a measure of the risk in the business, since a high
margin business may remain profitable after a fall in margin while a low margin business may not.
Context example: Net profit margin

Two companies with a revenue of £200 have net profit margins of 30% and 4%. If each company
discounts their sale prices by 5%, compute revised net profit margins.
Base 5% price discount Revised

Company 1 £ £ £
Revenue 200 (10) 190
Costs (140) (140)
Profit 60 (10) 50
Net profit margin 30% 26%
Base 5% price discount Revised

Company 2 £ £ £
Revenue 200 (10) 190
Costs (192) (192)
Profit 8 (10) (2)
Net profit margin 4% –1%
HB2021

By contrast, net asset turnover (considered further under efficiency ratios in section 2.5.2 below) is
often seen as a quantitative measure, indicating how intensively the management is using the assets.
A trade-off often exists between margin and net asset turnover. Low margin businesses, for example
food retailers, usually have high asset turnover. Conversely, capital-intensive manufacturing
industries usually have relatively low asset turnover but higher margins, for example electrical
equipment manufacturers.
Gross profit is useful for comparing the profitability of different companies in the same sector but
less useful across different types of business, as the split of costs between cost of sales and other
expense headings varies widely according to the nature of the business. Even within companies
competing within the same industry distortions can be caused if companies allocate individual costs
to different cost headings.
Particular care must be taken when calculating, and then considering the implications of, these ratios
if the company concerned is presenting both continuing and discontinued operations. In the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income layout used in this Workbook, the
amounts for revenue, gross profit, operating costs and profit from operations all relate to continuing
operations only. Although amounts relating to the discontinued operations’ revenue, total costs and
profit from operations are made available in the notes, it is probably not worth adding them back
into the continuing operations’ amounts, for the simple reason that the results of continuing
operations form the most appropriate base on which to project future performance.
2.3 Short-term liquidity

2.3.1 Significance
Short-term liquidity ratios are used to assess a company’s ability to meet payments when due. In
practice, information contained in the statement of cash flows is often more useful when analysing
liquidity.
2.3.2 Key ratios

Current ratio
This measures the adequacy of current assets to cover current liabilities.
(Current assets ÷ Current liabilities) (usually expressed as X:1)
(Source: SFP ÷ Source: SFP)
Quick (acid test or liquidity) ratio
Inventories, often rather slow moving, are eliminated from current assets, giving a better measure of
short-term liquidity. This is appropriate for those types of business that take significant time to
convert inventories into cash, such as an aircraft manufacturer.
((Current assets – inventories) ÷ Current liabilities) (usually expressed as X:1)
Interactive question 4: Current and quick ratios

Suggest a conclusion that may be drawn from high and low current and quick ratios.
What factors should be considered when investigating changes in short-term liquidity ratios?
2.3.3 Commentary
The current ratio is of limited use as some current assets, for example inventories, may not be readily
convertible into cash, other than at a large discount. Hence, this ratio may not indicate whether or not
the company can pay its debts as they fall due.
As the quick ratio omits inventories, this is a better indicator of liquidity but is subject to distortions.
For example, retailers have few trade receivables and use cash from sales quickly, but finance their
inventories from trade payables. Hence, their quick ratios are usually low, but this is in itself no cause
for concern.
HB2021

A high current or quick ratio may be due to a company having excessive amounts of cash or short-
term investments. Though these resources are highly liquid, the trade-off for this liquidity is usually a
low return. Hence, companies with excessive cash balances may benefit from using them to repay
longer-term debt or invest in non-current assets to improve their overall returns.
Therefore, both the current and quick ratios should be treated with caution and should be read in
conjunction with other information, such as efficiency ratios and cash flow information.
In the statement of financial position layout used in this Workbook, any non-current assets held for
sale will be presented immediately below the subtotal for current assets. In classifying them as held
for sale, the company is intending to realise them for cash, so it will usually be appropriate to
combine this amount with current assets when calculating both the current and quick ratios.
2.4 Long-term solvency

2.4.1 Significance
Gearing ratios examine the financing structure of a business. They indicate to shareholders and
lenders the degree of risk attached to the company and the sensitivity of earnings and dividends to
changes in profitability level.
2.4.2 Key ratios

Gearing ratio
Gearing measures the relationship between a company’s borrowings and its risk capital.
(Net debt (per ROCE) ÷ Equity (per ROCE)) × 100
Alternatively, the ratio may be computed as follows:
(Net debt ÷ (Net debt + Equity)) × 100
Context example: Gearing

The following are the summarised statements of financial position for two companies. Calculate the
gearing ratios and comment on each.
Company 1 Company 2
£m £m
Non-current assets 7 18
Inventory 3 3
Cash 1 2
15 26
Equity 10 10
Trade payables 3 4
Borrowings 2 12
15 26
Gearing = Net debt ÷ Equity 10% ((2 – 1) ÷ 10) 100% ((12 – 2) ÷ 10)
Both companies have the same equity amount. Company 1 is lower risk, as its borrowings are lower
relative to equity. This is because interest on borrowings and capital repayments of debt must be
paid, with potentially serious repercussions if they are not. Dividend payments on equity instruments
are an optional cash outflow for a business.
Company 2 has a high level of financial risk. If the borrowings were secured on the non-current
assets, then the assets available to shareholders in the event of a winding up are limited.
HB2021

Interactive question 5: Gearing
When drawing conclusions from gearing ratios suggest two matters that should be considered.
Gearing
(1)
(2)
Interest cover
Profit before interest payable (ie, PBIT + investment income) ÷ Interest payable
In calculating this ratio, it is standard practice to add back into interest any interest capitalised during
the period.
2.4.3 Commentary
Many different measures of gearing are used in practice, so it is especially important that the ratios
used are defined.
Note that under IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation redeemable preference shares should be
included in liabilities (non-current or current, depending on when they fall due for redemption), while
the dividends on these shares should be included in the finance cost/interest payable.
It is also the case that IAS 32 requires compound financial instruments, such as convertible loans, to
be split into their components for accounting purposes. This process allocates some of such loans to
equity.
Notes
1 Interest on debt capital generally must be paid irrespective of whether profits are earned – this
may cause a liquidity crisis if a company is unable to meet its debt capital obligations.
2 Loan capital is usually secured on assets, most commonly non-current assets – these should be
suitable for the purpose (not fast-depreciating or subject to rapid changes in demand and price).
High gearing usually indicates increased risk for shareholders as, if profits fall, debts will still need to
be financed, leaving much smaller profits available to shareholders. Highly geared businesses are
therefore more exposed to insolvency in an economic downturn. However, returns to shareholders
will grow proportionately more in highly geared businesses where profits are growing.
The gearing ratio is significantly affected by accounting policies adopted, particularly the revaluation
of PPE. An upward revaluation will increase equity and capital employed. Consequently it will reduce
gearing.
Context example: Impact of gearing on earnings

A company has an annual profit before interest of £200. Its interest on non-current debt is fixed at
£100 per annum.
Consider the effects on net profits if the profits before interest were to decrease or increase by £100
per annum.
(1) (2) (3)

£ £ £
Profit before interest 200 100 300
Interest on non-current debt (100) (100) (100)
Profit available to shareholders (earnings) 100 – 200
Compared to situation (1):
HB2021

(1) (2) (3)
£ £ £
Change in profits before interest –50% +50%
Change in earnings –100% +100%
Note: The above example could benefit from using a spreadsheet, particularly if more figures were
involved which did not change.
Low gearing provides scope to increase borrowings when potentially profitable projects are
available. Low-geared companies will usually be able to borrow more easily and cheaply than
already highly geared companies.
However, gearing can be too low. Equity finance is often more expensive in the long run than debt
finance, because equity is usually seen as being more risky. Therefore an ungeared company may
benefit from adjusting its financing to include some (usually cheaper) debt, thus reducing its overall
cost of capital.
Gearing is also significant to lenders, as they are likely to charge higher interest, and be less willing to
lend, to companies which are already highly geared, due to the increased default risk.
Interest payments are allowable for tax purposes, whereas dividends are not. This is another
attraction of debt.
Interest cover indicates the ability of a company to pay interest out of profits generated. Relatively
low interest cover indicates that a company may have difficulty financing the running costs of its
debts if its profits fall, and also indicates to shareholders that their dividends are at risk, as interest
must be paid first, even if profits fall.
2.5 Efficiency
2.5.1 Significance
Asset turnover and the working capital ratios are important indicators of management’s effectiveness
in running the business efficiently, as for a given level of activity it is most profitable to minimise the
level of overall capital employed and the working capital employed in the business.
2.5.2 Key ratios

Net asset turnover
This measures the efficiency of revenue generation in relation to the overall resources of the
business. As the amount of net assets equals the amount of capital employed and as capital
employed is used in the ROCE calculation, it is easiest to calculate net asset turnover as:
Revenue ÷ Capital employed
Note that net asset turnover can be further subdivided by separating out the non-current asset
element to give non-current asset turnover:
Revenue ÷ Non-current assets
This relates the revenue to the non-current assets employed in producing that revenue.
Asset turnover is sometimes known as ‘sweating the assets’. It is a reference to management’s ability
to maximise the output from each £ of capital that the company uses within the business.
Inventory turnover
The inventory turnover ratio measures the efficiency of managing inventory levels relative to
demand. A business needs inventory to meet the needs of customers, but inventories are not
generating revenues until they are physically sold, and tie up capital during this period. Like all
management decisions, a delicate path has to be followed between keeping too much and too little
inventory.
HB2021

Cost of sales ÷ Inventories
(= number of times inventories are turned over each year – usually the higher the better)
or
(Inventories ÷ Cost of sales) × 365
(= number of days on average that an item is in inventories before it is sold – usually the lower the
better)
Ideally the three components of inventories should be considered separately:
• Raw material to volume of purchases
• WIP to cost of production
• Finished goods to cost of sales
Interactive question 6: Inventory turnover

State two implications of high and low inventory turnover rates.
Inventory turnover
(1)
(2)
Judgement is needed in deciding which ratios to calculate and also to understand their implications.
As well as the industry in which the business operates, there are other factors such as the state of the
economy which may make comparisons difficult.
Trade receivables collection period

This measures in days the period of credit taken by the company’s customers.
(Trade receivables ÷ Revenue) × 365
(Source: SFP ÷ Source: SPLOCI)
To obtain a full picture of receivables collection, it is best to exclude from the revenue figure any cash
sales, since they do not generate receivables. This may be difficult, because published financial
statements do not distinguish between cash and credit sales. Strictly speaking, VAT should be
removed from receivables (revenue excludes VAT), but such adjustments are rarely made in practice.
Interactive question 7: Trade receivables collection period

Suggest three matters that a change in the ratio could indicate.
(1)
(2)
(3)
HB2021

Trade payables payment period
This measures the number of days’ credit taken by the company from suppliers.
(Trade payables ÷ Credit purchases) × 365
(Source: SFP ÷ Source: SPLOCI)
This should be broadly similar to the trade receivables collection period, where a business makes
most sales and most purchases on credit. If no figures are available for credit purchases, use cost of
sales.
Interactive question 8: Trade payables payment period

Suggest two matters that a high and increasing trade payables payment period may indicate.
(1)
(2)
Working capital cycle/cash operating cycle

These last three ratios are often brought together in the working capital cycle (alternatively the cash
operating cycle), calculated as inventory days plus trade receivables collection period minus trade
payables payment period.
Any increase in the total working capital cycle may indicate inefficient management of the
components of working capital.
2.5.3 Commentary
Net asset turnover enables useful comparisons to be made between businesses in terms of the
extent to which they work their assets hard in the generation of revenue.
Inventory turnover, trade receivables collection period and trade payables payment period give an
indication of whether a business is able to generate cash as fast as it uses it. They also provide useful
comparisons between businesses, for example on effectiveness in collecting debts and controlling
inventory levels.
Efficiency ratios are often an indicator of looming liquidity problems or loss of management control.
For example, an increase in the trade receivables collection period may indicate loss of credit
control. Declining inventory turnover may suggest poor buying decisions or misjudgement of the
market. An increasing trade payables payment period suggests that the company may be having
difficulty paying its suppliers; if they withdraw credit, a collapse may be precipitated by the lack of
new supplies.
If an expanding business has a positive working capital cycle, it will need to fund this extra capital
requirement, from retained earnings, an equity issue or increased borrowings. If a business has a
negative working capital cycle, its suppliers are effectively providing funding on an interest-free
basis.
As with all ratios, care is needed in interpreting efficiency ratios. For example, an increasing trade
payables payment period may indicate that the company is making better use of its available credit
facilities by taking trade credit where available. Therefore, efficiency ratios should be considered
together with solvency and cash flow information.
2.6 Non-current asset analysis

Analysts of financial statements use the information provided to understand future performance. For
capital-intensive companies it is essential that they understand the capital expenditure policies and
efficiency of non-current assets.
2.6.1 Capital expenditure to depreciation

Capital expenditure (additions) ÷ Depreciation
HB2021

This ratio highlights whether a company is expanding its non-current assets. A ratio below one would
indicate that it is not even maintaining its operating capacity. A ratio in excess of one would indicate
that the company is expanding operating capacity. But PPE price changes should be taken into
account: if they are rising, a ratio of more than one may still indicate a reduction in capacity, unless
significant operating efficiencies are being generated from the new assets.
This ratio should include all additions, including those acquired under leases.
It is often helpful to review this ratio over a number of years to identify trends. In the short-term,
capital expenditure can be discretionary.
2.6.2 Ageing of non-current assets

Accumulated depreciation ÷ Gross carrying amount of non-current assets
This ratio identifies the proportion of the useful life of PPE that has expired. It should be calculated
for each class of PPE. It helps identify:
• assets that are nearing the end of their useful life that may be operating less efficiently or may
require significant maintenance; and
• the need to invest in new PPE in the near term.
Obviously both of these ratios are influenced by the depreciation policies adopted by management.
Worked example: Capital expenditure

The following is an extract from the financial statements of Raport Ltd for the year ended 31
December 20X4.
Note 1 Plant and equipment

£’000
Cost
At 1 January 20X4 2,757
Additions 137
Disposals (94)
At 31 December 20X4 2,800
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 20X4 1,922
Depreciation 302
Disposals (60)
At 31 December 20X4 2,164
Carrying amount 1 January 20X4 835
Carrying amount 31 December 20X4 636
Note 2 20X4 20X3

£’000 £’000
Profit from operations is stated after charging
Depreciation 302 289
Loss on disposal of plant and equipment 25 32
Requirement
Provide an analysis of the plant and equipment of Raport Ltd.
HB2021

Solution
Analysis as follows:
• Capital expenditure represents 45% ((137 ÷ 302) × 100%) of the depreciation expense for the
year. This suggests that management is not maintaining capacity.
• Accumulated depreciation represents 77% ((2,164 ÷ 2,800) × 100%) of the cost of the assets.
This has increased from 70% ((1,922 ÷ 2,757) × 100%) in the previous year.
This confirms that plant and equipment is ageing without replacement. On average the plant and
equipment is entering the last quarter of its useful life. This could indicate that the plant is becoming
less efficient.
• The accounting policies should be reviewed, because the losses on disposal could indicate that
depreciation rates are too low and that useful lives have been overestimated. This would confirm
that the plant and equipment is aged and raise further concerns about its renewal and efficiency.
2.7 Investors’ ratios

2.7.1 Significance
Different investors’ ratios (also known as stock market ratios) help different investors:
• Price/earnings ratio will be important to those investors looking for capital growth.
• Dividend yield, dividend cover and dividends per share will be important to those investors
seeking income.
Because all economic decisions relate to the future, not the past, investors should ideally use forecast
information. In practice only historical figures are usually available from financial statements, but
investment analysts devote substantial amounts of time to making estimates of future earnings and
dividends which they publish to their clients.
Investors’ ratios are only meaningful for quoted companies as they usually relate, directly or
indirectly, to the share price.
2.7.2 Key ratios

Dividend yield
(Dividend per share ÷ Current market price per share) × 100
The market price per share is a forward-looking value, since a buyer of a share buys into the future,
not past, performance of the company. So the most up to date amount for the dividend per share
needs to be used; using information in financial statements, the total dividend will be the interim for
the year recognised in the statement of changes in equity plus the final for the year disclosed in the
notes to the accounts.
Dividend yield may be more influenced by dividend policy than by financial performance. A high
yield based on recent dividends and the current share price may come about because the share
price has fallen in anticipation of a future dividend cut. Rapidly growing companies may exhibit low
yields based on historical dividends, especially if the current share price reflects anticipated future
growth, because such companies often retain cash in the business, through low dividends, to finance
that growth.
Dividend cover
Earnings per share ÷ Dividend per share
A quoted company is required by IAS 33, Earnings per Share to disclose an amount for its earnings
per share (EPS). You have met this in Chapter 11.
The dividend cover ratio shows the extent to which a current dividend is covered by current earnings.
It is an indication of how secure dividends are, because a dividend cover of less than one indicates
that the company is relying to some extent on its retained profits, a policy that is not sustainable in
the long term.
Price/earnings (P/E) ratio
Current market price per share ÷ Earnings per share
HB2021

The P/E ratio is used to indicate whether shares appear expensive or cheap in terms of how many
years of current earnings investors are prepared to pay for. The P/E ratio is often used to compare
companies within a sector, and is published widely in the financial press for this purpose.
A high P/E ratio calculated on historical earnings usually indicates that investors expect significant
future earnings growth and hence are prepared to pay a large multiple of historical earnings.
(Remember that the share price takes into account market expectations of future profits, whereas EPS
is based on past levels of profit.) Low P/E ratios often indicate that investors consider growth
prospects to be poor.
Net asset value
Net assets (equity attributable to owners of parent company) ÷ Number of ordinary shares in issue
This calculation results in an approximation to the amount shareholders would receive if the
company were put into liquidation and all the assets were realised for, and all the liabilities were paid
off at, their statement of financial position amounts. In theory it is the amount below which the share
price should never fall because, if it did, someone would acquire all the shares, liquidate the
company and take a profit through distributions totalling the net asset value.
But the statement of financial position does not measure non-current assets at realisable value (many
would sell for less than their carrying amount but some, such as freehold and leasehold properties,
might realise more) and additional liabilities, such as staff redundancy payments and liquidation fees,
would need to be recognised. But there might be cash inflows on liquidation relating to items such
as intangible assets, which can be sold but were not recognised in the statement of financial position
because they did not meet the recognition requirements.
So net asset value is only an approximation to true liquidation values, but it is still widely regarded as
a solid underpinning to the share price.
2.8 Other indicators

Ratios are a key tool of analysis but other sources of information and comparisons are also available.
2.8.1 Absolute comparisons

Absolute comparisons can provide information without computing ratios, for example comparing
statement of financial position or statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
amounts between this year and last and identifying changes.
Such comparisons may help to explain changes in ratios; if, for example, the statement of financial
position shows that new shares have been issued to repay borrowings or finance new investment,
this may explain a change in gearing and ROCE.
2.8.2 Background information

Background information supplied about the nature of the business may help to explain changes or
trends, for example you may be told that the business has made an acquisition, disposal or entered a
new market. The type of business itself has a major impact on the information presented in the
2.8.3 Cash flow information

The statement of cash flows provides information as to how a business has generated and used cash
so that users can obtain a fuller picture of liquidity and changes in financial position. Interpretation of
cash flow information is covered in the next section.
Interactive question 9: Calculations

Now try this comprehensive example to practise the calculation of various ratios that could be
required in the examination.
Ltd Group
Summarised consolidated statement of financial position at 31 December 20X1
£ £
HB2021

£ £
Current assets
Inventories 600
Investments 40
1,600
4,200
Equity
Ordinary share capital (£1) 1,000
Attributable to owners of Ltd 1,650
Equity 1,800
Borrowings 1,400
Redeemable preference shares 200
1,600
Current liabilities
Trade payables 750
Bank overdraft 50
800
4,200
Summarised consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year
ended 31 December 20X1
£ £
Revenue 6,000
Gross profit 2,000
Operating expenses (1,660)
Profit from operations 340
Interest on borrowings (74)
Preference share dividend (10)
(84)
Income from investments 5
Tax (106)
Profit after tax 155
HB2021

£ £
Attributable to:
Owners of Ltd 140
155
Requirement
Calculate the ratios applicable to Ltd.
Calculations
(1) Return on capital employed (ROCE)
(2) Return on shareholders’ funds (ROSF)
(3) Gross profit %
(4) Net profit margin
(5) Net asset turnover
(6) Proof of ROCE
ROCE = Net profit margin × Net asset turnover
= ×
(7) Non-current asset turnover
(8) Current ratio
(9) Quick ratio
(10) Inventory turnover
(11) Inventory days
HB2021

=
(12) Trade receivables collection period
(13) Trade payables payment period
(14) Gearing
(15) Interest cover
Note: In an exam it is unlikely you will only be calculating ratios and more likely that you will be
putting through adjustments which then alter a significant ratio; for example, gearing when applying
for a bank loan. Spreadsheets can be useful here – you need only set the calculation up once and can
then copy the formula (relatively) for a comparative year or company. You can also set up the ratio
formulae to copy from your adjusted figures.
3 Statements of cash flows and their

interpretation
Section overview
• The analysis of the statement of cash flows is essential to an understanding of business

performance and liquidity of individual companies and groups.
• Cash flow ratios provide crucial information as a part of financial statement analysis.
The ratios examined so far relate to information presented in the statement of financial position and
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. The statement of cash flows provides
valuable additional information, which facilitates more in-depth analysis of the financial statements.
The importance of the statement of cash flows lies in the fact that businesses fail through lack of cash,
not lack of profits:
(a) A profitable but expanding business is likely to find that its inventories and trade receivables rise
more quickly than its trade payables (which provide interest-free finance). Without adequate
financing for its working capital, such a business may find itself unable to pay its debts as they
fall due.
(b) An unprofitable but contracting business may still generate cash. If, for example, a statement of
profit or loss and other comprehensive income is weighed down with depreciation charges on
non-current assets but the business is not investing in any new non-current assets, capital
expenditure will be less than book depreciation.
IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows therefore requires the provision of information about changes in the
cash and cash equivalents of an entity, as a basis for the assessment of the entity’s ability to generate
HB2021

cash inflows in the future and its needs to use such cash flows. Cash flow information, when taken
with the rest of the financial statements, helps the assessment of:
• changes in net assets
• financial structure
• ability to affect timing and amount of cash flows
Cash flow information also facilitates comparisons between entities, because it is unaffected by
different accounting policies – to this extent it is often regarded as more objective than accrual-based
information.
3.1 Types of cash flow

3.1.1 Operating activities
Operating cash flows may be compared with profit from operations. The extent to which profits are
matched by strong cash flows is an indication of the quality of profit from operations in that, while
profit from operations represents the earnings surplus available for dividend distribution, operating
cash flows represents the cash surplus generated from trading, which the company can then use for
other purposes.
However, caution is required where there are significant non-current assets, because depreciation is
included in operating profit, but not operating cash flow. Depreciation could therefore be excluded
from operating profit for comparison with cash flows, as the cash flows for non-current asset
replacement are presented under investing, not operating, activities.
If operating cash flows are significantly lower than profit from operations, this may indicate that the
company is in danger of running out of cash and encountering liquidity problems. In such cases,
particular attention needs to be paid to the liquidity and efficiency ratios.
Significant operating cash outflows are unsustainable in the long run. If operating cash flow is
negative, this needs to be investigated. Possible reasons include the following:
(a) Building up inventory levels due to expansion of the business, which tends to increase cash paid
to suppliers but does not produce profit from operations because costs are included in
inventories
(b) Declining revenue or reduced margins
Rapid expansion of a business is often associated with operating cash outflows. In the short term, this
need not be a problem provided that sufficient finance is available.
Payments to service debt finance are non-discretionary, in that the terms of loan agreements usually
require finance to be serviced, even if the business is not profitable.
If operating cash flows are insufficient to cover the interest cash flows, the company is likely to be in
serious financial trouble, unless there is an identifiable non-recurring cause for the shortfall or new
equity finance is forthcoming, for example to reduce interest-bearing debts.
Taxation cash flows are also non-discretionary. They tend to lag behind tax charges recognised in the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. In growing businesses, tax cash
outflows will often be smaller than tax charges.
Note: Cash payments to manufacture or acquire, and cash receipts on the sale of, assets held for
rental to others are cash flows from operating (not investing) activities.
3.1.2 Investing activities

This heading in the statement of cash flows includes cash flows relating to property, plant and
equipment. In the short term, these cash flows are discretionary, in that the business will normally
survive even if property, plant and equipment expenditure is delayed for some months, or even
years.
Significant cash outflows indicate property, plant and equipment additions, which should lead to the
maintenance or enhancement of operating cash flows in the long term. However, such investment
must be financed, either from operating cash flows or from new financing.
Net outflows on property, plant and equipment replacement can also be compared with the
depreciation expense in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. A
significant shortfall of capital spend compared to depreciation may indicate that the company is not
HB2021

replacing its property, plant and equipment as they wear out, or might suggest that depreciation
rates are wrongly estimated.
3.1.3 Financing activities

Financing cash flows show how the company is raising finance (by debt or shares) and what finance it
is repaying.
The reasons underlying financing cash flows need to be analysed. For example, inflows may be to
finance additions to property, plant and equipment to expand the business or renew assets. New
share finance may be used to repay debt, thus reducing future interest costs. Alternatively, new
financing may be necessary to keep the company afloat if it is suffering significant operating and
interest cash outflows. This last situation is unsustainable in the long term, as the company will
eventually become insolvent.
3.1.4 Equity dividends paid

Equity dividends paid are, in theory, a discretionary cash flow. However, companies are often under
significant investor pressure to maintain dividends even where their profits and cash flows are falling.
Equity dividends paid should be compared to the cash flows available to pay them. If a company is
paying out a significant amount of the available cash as dividends, it may not be retaining sufficient
funds to finance future investment or the repayment of debt.
It is common policy among private equity companies, which own a number of well-known
companies, both in the UK and overseas, to not pay dividends and focus instead on debt
minimisation.
3.2 Cash flow ratios

Traditional ratios are based on information in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income and statement of financial position. Some of these can be adapted to
produce equivalent ratios based on cash flow.
3.2.1 Cash return on capital employed

(Cash return (see below) ÷ Capital employed) × 100
(Source: SCF ÷ Source: SFP)
Cash return is computed as:
Cash generated from operations X

Interest received (from investing activities) X
Dividends received (from investing activities) X
X
Capital employed is the same as that used in ROCE.

The cash return is an approximate cash flow equivalent to profit before interest payable. As capital
expenditure is excluded from the cash return, care is needed in comparing cash ROCE to traditional
ROCE which takes account of depreciation of non-current assets.
3.2.2 Cash from operations/profit from operations

(Cash generated from operations ÷ Profit from operations) × 100
(Source: SCF ÷ Source: SPLOCI)
This measures the quality of the profit from operations. Many profitable companies have to allocate a
large proportion of the cash they generate from operations to finance the investment in additional
working capital. To that extent, the profit from operations can be regarded as of poor quality, since it
is not realised in a form which can be used either to finance the acquisition of non-current assets or
to pay back borrowings and/or pay dividends.
So the higher the resulting percentage, the higher the quality of the profits from operations.
3.2.3 Cash interest cover

(Cash return (as above) ÷ Interest paid) × 100
HB2021

(Source: SCF ÷ Source: SPLOCI)
This is the equivalent of interest cover calculated based on the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income. Capital expenditure is normally excluded on the basis that management has
some discretion over its timing and amount. Caution is therefore needed in comparing cash interest
cover with traditional interest cover, as profit from operations is reduced by depreciation. Cash
interest cover will therefore tend to be slightly higher.
3.2.4 Investors’ ratios

Cash flow per share
(Cash flow for ordinary shareholders (= cash return as above) – Interest paid – Tax paid) ÷ Number of
ordinary shares
(Source: SCF ÷ Source: SFP)
This is the cash flow equivalent of earnings per share. It is common practice to exclude capital
expenditure from this measure, because of the discretion over the timing of such expenditure.
Therefore caution needs to be exercised in comparing cash flow per share with traditional EPS, as
earnings do take account of depreciation.
Cash dividend cover
Cash flow for ordinary shareholders (as above) ÷ Equity dividends paid
This is the cash flow equivalent of dividend cover based on earnings. Similar comments apply
regarding exclusion of capital expenditure as are noted under cash flow per share.
Interactive question 10: Calculation of cash flow ratios

The following is a statement of cash flows for a company.
Year ended 31 March 20X6

£’000 £’000
Cash generated from operations (Note) 12,970
Interest paid (360)
Tax paid (4,510)
Net cash from operating activities 8,100
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (80)
Dividends received 20
Proceeds on sale of property, plant and equipment 810
Net cash from investing activities 750
Dividends paid (4,500)
Borrowings (1,000)
Net cash used in financing activities (5,500)
Change in cash and cash equivalents 3,350
Cash and cash equivalents brought forward 2,300
Cash and cash equivalents carried forward 5,650
HB2021

Note
Reconciliation of profit before tax to cash generated from operations
£’000
Finance cost 340
Amortisation 560
Depreciation 2,640
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 160
Decrease in inventories 570
Decrease in receivables 340
(Decrease) in trade payables (50)
The profit from operations for 20X6 is £8,750,000 and the capital employed at 31 March 20X6 was
£28,900,000. There were 15 million ordinary shares in issue throughout the year.
Requirement
Calculate the cash flow ratios listed below for 20X6.
Calculation of cash flow ratios
(1) Cash return
Cash generated from operations =

Interest received
Dividends received =
(2) Cash return on capital employed
(Cash return (from above) ÷ Capital employed) × =

100
(3) Cash from operations/profit from operations
(Cash generated from operations ÷ Profit from =

operations) × 100
(4) Cash interest cover
Cash return ÷ Interest paid =
(5) Cash flow per share
Cash flow for ordinary shareholders ÷ Number of =

ordinary shares
(6) Cash dividend cover
Cash flow for ordinary shareholders ÷ Equity =

dividends paid
HB2021

4 Economic events
Section overview
Economic factors can have a pervasive effect on company performance and should be considered
when analysing financial statements.
The economic environment that an entity operates in will have a direct effect on its financial
performance and financial position. The economic environment can influence management’s
strategy but in any event will influence the business performance.
Examples of economic factors that should be considered when analysing financial statements could
include:
(a) State of the economy
If the economy that a company operates in is depressed then it will have an adverse effect on the
ratios of a business. When considering economic events it is important to consider the different
geographical markets that a company operates in. These may provide different rates of growth,
operating margins, future prospects and risks. An obvious current example is the contrast in the
economies of Greece and Germany. Other examples could include emerging markets versus
those in recession. Some businesses are more closely linked to economic activity than others,
especially if they involve discretionary spending, such as holidays, eating out in restaurants and
so on.
(b) Interest rates and foreign exchange rates
Increases in interest rates may have adverse effects on consumer demand particularly if the
company is involved in supplying products that are discretionary purchases or in industries, such
as home improvements, that are sensitive to such movements. Highly geared companies are
most at risk if interest rates increase or if there is an economic downturn; their debt still needs to
be serviced, whereas ungeared companies are less exposed. Changes in foreign exchange rates
will have a direct effect on import and export prices with direct effects on competitiveness.
(c) Government policies
Fiscal policy can have a direct effect on performance. For example, the use of trade quotas and
import taxes can affect the markets in which a company operates. The availability of government
export assistance or a change in levels of public spending can affect the outlook for a company.
(d) Rates of inflation
Inflation can have an effect on the comparability of financial statements year on year. It can be
difficult to isolate changes due to inflationary aspects from genuine changes in performance.
In analysing the effect of these matters on financial statements, the disclosures required by IFRS 8,
Operating Segments are widely regarded as necessary to meet the needs of users.
5 Business issues
Section overview
The nature of the industry in which the company operates and management’s actions have a direct
relationship with business performance, position and cash flow.
The information in financial statements is shaped to a large extent by the nature of the business and
management’s actions in running it. These factors influence trends in the business and cause ratios to
change over time or differ between companies.
HB2021

Examples of business factors influencing ratios are set out below.
(a) Type of business
This affects the nature of the assets employed and the returns earned. For example, a retailer
may have higher asset turnover but lower margins than a manufacturer and a services business
may have very little property, plant and equipment (so low capital employed and high ROCE)
while a manufacturer may have lots of property, plant and equipment (so high capital employed
and low ROCE).
(b) Quality of management
Better managed businesses are likely to be more profitable (and have improved working capital
management) than businesses where management is weak. Where management is seen as high
quality then this can have a favourable effect.
(c) Market conditions
If a market sector is depressed, this is likely to affect companies adversely and make most or all
of their ratios appear worse. Diverse conglomerates may operate in a number of different
business sectors, each of which is affected by different market risks and opportunities.
(d) Management actions
These will be reflected in changes in ratios. For example, price discounting to increase market
share is likely to reduce margins but increase asset turnover; withdrawing from unprofitable
market sectors is likely to reduce revenue but increase profit margins.
(e) Changes in the business
If the business diversifies into wholly new areas, this is likely to change the resource structure and
thus impact on key ratios. An acquisition near the year end will mean that capital employed will
include all the assets acquired but profits from the acquisition will only be included in the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for a small part of the year, thus
tending to depress ROCE. But this can be adjusted for, because IFRS 3, Business Combinations
requires acquirers to disclose by way of note, total revenue and profit as if all business
combinations had taken place on the first day of the accounting period.
Context example: Acquisition during year

A group’s revenue for the current period was £10 million (previous year £8 million) and its period
end trade receivables were £1.6 million (previous year £900,000). During the year a new subsidiary
was acquired which carried trade receivables of £300,000 at the acquisition date.
At first sight there appears to be a very disproportionate increase in trade receivables, up by almost
78% ((1,600/900) – 1) when revenue is up by 25%. But if the previous year receivables are increased
by the acquired receivables of £300,000, the increase in receivables is 33% ((1,600/1,200) – 1), more
comparable with the revenue increase.
Notes
1 The acquisition renders the period-end trade receivables collection period non-comparable with
that for the previous period.
2 The consolidated statement of cash flows will present the trade receivables component in the
working capital adjustments as the amount after the acquired receivables have been added on
to the group’s opening balance.
3 IFRS 3 requires disclosure in respect of each acquisition of the amounts recognised at the
acquisition date for each class of assets and liabilities and the acquiree’s revenue and profit or
loss recognised in consolidated profit or loss for the year. In addition, there should be disclosure
of the consolidated revenue and profit or loss as if the acquisition date for all acquisitions had
been the first day of the accounting period. This allows users to understand the impact of the
acquired entity on the financial performance and financial position as evidenced in the
HB2021

In approaching a question like this, it is best to adjust the financial statements of the entity that has
undertaken the acquisition (or disposal) to make the two accounting periods comparable, so that a
meaningful analysis can be carried out.
Context example: Impact of type of business

Set out below are example ratios for two quoted companies:
Heavy Advertising
manufacturing and media
Return on capital employed PBIT ÷ Capital employed 13.9% 36.6%
Net margin PBIT ÷ Revenue 13.2% 3.1%
Net asset turnover Revenue ÷ Capital employed 1.05 times 11.8 times
Current ratio Current assets ÷ Current 1.35:1 0.84:1

liabilities
Quick ratio (Current assets – Inventories) ÷ 0.96:1 0.78:1

Current liabilities
Gearing Net debt ÷ Equity 38.4% 104.1%
Interest cover (PBIT + Investment income) ÷ 4.1 times 5.9 times

Interest payable
Inventory turnover Cost of sales ÷ Inventories 4.5 times 58.8 times
Trade receivables collection (Trade receivables ÷ Revenue) 63 days 30 days

period × 365
This illustration shows that very different types of business can have markedly different ratios. A heavy
manufacturing company has substantial property, plant and equipment and work in progress and
earns a relatively high margin. An advertising and media company generates a very high ROCE,
mainly because its asset base, as reflected in the financial statements, is small. Most of the ‘assets’ of
such a business are represented by its staff, the value of whom is not recognised in the statement of
In analysing the effect of business matters on financial statements, the segment disclosures required
by IFRS 8, Operating Segments provide important information that allows the user to make informed
judgements about the entity’s products and services.
One of the complications in analysing financial statements arises from the way IFRS Standards are
structured:
• IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements sets down the requirements for the format of financial
statements, containing provisions as to their presentation, structure and content; but
• the recognition, measurement and disclosure of specific transactions and events are all dealt with
in other IFRS Standards.
So preparers of financial statements must consider the possible application of several different IFRS
Standards when deciding how to present certain business transactions and business events and
users must be aware that details about particular transactions or events may appear in several
different parts of the financial statements.
HB2021

Interactive question 11: The effect of business issues on financial reporting
A listed company operating in the electronics manufacturing sector has decided that due to cost
pressures it will downsize its UK-based operations. A number of manufacturing facilities will close
and the activities will be outsourced to South-East Asian countries.
Requirement
Identify six IASs/IFRS Standards that may need to be considered and briefly give examples of why.
IASs/IFRS Standards
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
6 Accounting choices
Section overview
• IFRS Standards include scope for choices in accounting treatment.

• Management make estimates on judgemental matters such as inventory obsolescence that can
have a significant effect on the view given.
6.1 Accounting policy choices

The scope for making choices in accounting treatment has been narrowed significantly in recent
years due to the development of more prescriptive accounting standards.
Nevertheless, significant choices still exist in a number of areas, for example:
(a) Asset revaluation
Revaluation of property, plant and equipment is particularly significant because it affects the
total amounts recognised as depreciation expense in profit or loss over the life of an asset.
Revaluation also has a significant impact on gearing and ROCE. If assets are revalued upwards,
this increases equity and total net assets but does not alter debt. Therefore, the gearing ratio will
fall. Asset revaluations also increase capital employed without a pound (£) for pound (£) effect
on profits, so the ROCE will fall. Because depreciation is based on the revalued amount, it will
rise, further depressing ROCE.
(b) Cost or fair value model for measurement of investment property
Where the cost model is used, the asset should be depreciated over its useful life. This produces
a systematic expense in profit or loss. The use of the fair value model potentially introduces
volatility into profit or loss and capital employed. Key ratios such as ROCE will be more difficult
to predict if the fair value model is adopted.
HB2021

(c) Classification of financial assets
Financial assets can be classified in up to four different ways. The classification affects their
measurement in the statement of financial performance and the presentation of the gains or
losses. This will have a direct effect on profit and capital employed.
The disclosure of accounting policies within the financial statements allows users to understand
those policies and adjust financial statements to a different basis, if desired.
Interactive question 12: Asset revaluation

On 1 January 20X1, Tiger Ltd bought for £120,000 an item of plant with an estimated useful life of 20
years and no residual value. Tiger Ltd depreciates its property, plant and equipment on a straight-line
basis. Tiger Ltd’s year end is 31 December.
On 31 December 20X3, the asset was carried in the statement of financial position as follows:
£’000
Non-current asset at cost 120
Accumulated depreciation (3 × (120,000 ÷ 20)) (18)
102
Situation A
The asset continues to be depreciated as previously at £6,000 per annum, down to a carrying
amount at 31 December 20X6 of £84,000.
On 1 January 20X7, the asset is sold for £127,000, resulting in a profit of £43,000.
Situation B
On 1 January 20X4, the asset is revalued to £136,000, resulting in a gain of £34,000. The total useful
life remains unchanged. Depreciation will therefore be £8,000 per annum; that is, £136,000 divided
by the remaining life of 17 years.
On 1 January 20X7, the asset is sold for £127,000, resulting in a reported profit on disposal of
£15,000.
Requirement
Ignoring the provisions of IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations,
summarise the impact on reported results and net assets of each of the above situations for the years
20X4 to 20X7 inclusive.
6.2 Judgements and estimates

Even though accounting standards set out detailed requirements in many areas of accounting,
management still needs to exercise judgement and make significant estimates in preparing the
Examples of judgements and estimates required of management include:
Financial statement area Judgement or estimation required
Property, plant and equipment • Depreciation methods

• Residual values
• Useful lives
• Revaluations/impairments
Intangible assets • Allocation of consideration in a business combination

• Future cash flows for impairment tests
HB2021

Financial statement area Judgement or estimation required
• Amortisation periods
Inventories • Inclusion of overheads and the normal level of activity

• Inventory valuation methods
Lease transactions • Whether the arrangement constitutes a lease under IFRS 16
Provisions • Probability of outflow of economic benefits

• Measurement of liabilities
Contracts in which • Estimates of future costs

performance obligations are • Estimation of stage of completion
satisfied over time
• Whether performance obligation(s) are satisfied
Trade receivables • Collectability and impairment
Segment analysis • Allocation of common costs to segments

• Setting of transfer prices between segments
The increasing use of cash flow analysis by users of financial statements is often attributed to the
issues surrounding the inappropriate exercise of judgement in the application of accounting policies.
In certain areas business analysts adjust financial statements to aid comparability to facilitate better
comparison. These adjustments are often termed ‘coping mechanisms’.
7 Ethical issues
Section overview
Ethical issues can arise in the preparation of financial statements. Management may be motivated to
improve the presentation of financial information.
The preparation of financial statements requires a great deal of judgement, honesty and integrity.
Therefore, Chartered Accountants should employ a degree of professional scepticism when
reviewing financial statements and any analysis provided by management.
The financial statements and the associated ratio analysis could be affected by pressure on the
preparers of those financial statements to improve the financial performance, financial position or
both. Managers of organisations may try to improve the appearance of the financial information to:
• increase their level of bonus pay or other reward benefits;
• deliver specific targets such as EPS growth to meet investors’ expectations;
• reduce the risk of corporate insolvency, such as by avoiding a breach of loan covenants;
• avoid regulatory interference, for example where high profit margins are obtained;
• improve the appearance of all or part of the business before an initial public offering or disposal,
so that an enhanced valuation is obtained; and
• understate revenues and overstate expenses to reduce tax liabilities.
Users of financial statements must be wary of the use of devices which improve short-term financial
position and financial performance. Such inappropriate practices can be broadly summarised into
three areas:
(a) Window dressing of the year-end financial position
Examples may include the following:
(1) Agreeing with customers that receivables are paid on shorter terms around year end, so that
the trade receivables collection period is reduced and operating cash flows are enhanced
HB2021

(2) Modifying the supplier payment cycle by delaying payments normally made in the last
month of the current year until the first month of the following year; this will improve the
cash position
(3) Offering incentives to distributors to buy just before year end rather than just after
(b) Exercise of judgement in applying accounting standards
(1) Unreasonable cash flow estimates used in justifying the carrying amount of assets subject to
impairment tests
(2) Reducing the percentage of outstanding receivables for which full provision is made
(3) Reducing the obsolescence provisions in respect of slow-moving inventories
(4) Extending useful lives of property, plant and equipment to reduce the depreciation charge
(c) Inappropriate transaction recording
(1) Additional revenue can be pushed through in the last weeks of the accounting period, only
for returns to be accepted and credit notes issued in the next accounting period
(2) Intentionally failing to correct a number of accounting errors which individually are
immaterial but are material when taken together
(3) Deferring revenue expenses, such as repairs and maintenance, into future periods
Actions such as these will not make any difference to financial performance over time, because all
they do is to shift profit to an earlier period at the expense of the immediately following period.
Financial position can be improved by measures such as these only in the short term. But there may
well be short-term benefits to management if these improvements keep the business within its
banking covenants or if performance bonuses are to be paid to management if certain profit levels
are achieved.
Interactive question 13: Changing payment dates

A company prepares a budget for the months of December 20X5 and January 20X6 and the position
at 31 December 20X5 which includes the following:
£’000
Supplier payments in each of December 20X5 and January 20X6 300
Current assets at 31 December 20X5
Cash 400
1,100
Inventories 500
1,600
Current liabilities at 31 December 20X5 1,000
Requirement
Calculate the current and quick ratios under the following options:
Option 1: Per the budget
Option 2: Per the budget, except that the supplier payments budgeted for December 20X5 are
made in January 20X6
Option 3: Per the budget, except that the supplier payments budgeted for January 20X6 are made in
December 20X5
HB2021

Changing payment dates
Current Quick
ratio ratio
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Finance managers who are part of the team preparing the financial statements for publication must
be careful to withstand any pressures from their non-finance colleagues to indulge in reporting
practices which dress up short-term performance and position. Financial managers must be
conscious of their obligations under the ethical guidelines of the professional bodies of which they
are members and in extreme cases may find it useful to seek confidential guidance from district
society ethical counsellors and the ICAEW ethics helpline which is maintained for members. For
members of ICAEW, guidance can be found in the Code of Ethics.
Interactive question 14: Ethical pressures

You are the financial controller of Haddock plc. A new Managing Director (MD) with a strong
domineering character has recently been appointed by Haddock plc. She has decided to launch an
aggressive acquisition strategy and a target company has been identified. You have drafted a report
for Haddock plc’s management team that identifies several material fair value adjustments which
would increase the carrying amount of the acquired assets if the acquisition occurs. The MD has
demanded that you revise your report on the fair value adjustments so that the carrying amounts of
the acquired assets are materially reduced rather than increased.
Requirement
Identify the motivations of the MD and discuss the actions that you should consider.
Ethical pressures
Motivations
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Actions to consider
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
HB2021

8 Industry analysis
Section overview
Industry-specific performance measures can be extremely useful when analysing financial

statements.
8.1 Introduction
Some industries are assessed using specific performance measures that take into consideration their
specific natures. This is often the case with industries that are relatively young and growing rapidly,
for which the traditional finance-based performance criteria do not show the full operational
performance.
Many professional analysts use non-financial performance measures when valuing companies for
merger and acquisition (M&A) purposes. The M&A industry uses sophisticated tools that combine a
variety of figures, both financial and non-financial in nature, when advising clients on the appropriate
price to pay for a company.
8.2 Specific industries

Mobile phone operators often quote their growth in subscriber numbers and the average spend per
customer per year. This is because such companies have high fixed costs, such as the cost of the
communications licence and the maintenance of the mobile mast network; this high operational
gearing magnifies the profit effect of increases in customers.
Satellite television companies similarly are keen to quote increases in their customer base.
Context example: BSkyB

BSkyB added more than 70,000 TV customers in the three months to the end of March 2014 – its
highest rate in five years. BSkyB said that a focus on marketing its TV products, which include cheaper
internet service Now TV, had paid off, with 74,000 new subscribers in the period taking the total TV
base to 10.6 million.
BSkyB often quotes the ‘churn’ rate, which is the percentage of customers who cancel their
subscriptions. It is closely monitored by industry analysts, to see whether the growth in subscribers is
being offset by existing customers leaving.
Service companies with a finite number of places to offer, such as airlines and hotels, will quote their
seat/bed occupancy rates. This is viewed by industry analysts as a measure of the individual success
of the company and is compared to both industry averages and competitors.
Retailers are often assessed on sales per square metre of floor space. Such information can be used
by external users to compare the performance of retailers operating within the same industry, and
also internally by management to identify poorly performing stores operated by the organisation.
Retailers will also quote ‘like for like’ sales. This is the growth in sales revenues, after stripping out the
impact of new stores that have opened during the year. The reason for this is that they can
demonstrate to users that they are increasing revenues both organically from existing outlets as well
as by expanding their operations. Analysts may also look at like for like sales to arrive at a less
optimistic picture, as in the example below.
(Source: Sweney, M. (1 May 2014) BSkyB’s TV customers rise by 74,000, but broadband growth slows.
The Guardian. [Online]. Available from: www.theguardian.com/media/2014/may/01/bskyb-tv-
broadband-now-tv [Accessed 12 October 2021])
Context example: J Sainsbury plc

From The Motley Fool website:
March 2014 saw Sainsbury’s underlying sales rise by 2.8%, although like for like sales only gained
0.2%.
HB2021

(Source: Oscroft, A. (22 September 2014) The best reason to buy J Sainsbury plc. The Motley Fool.
[Online]. Available from: www.fool.co.uk/investing/2014/09/22/the-best-reason-to-buy-j-sainsbury-
plc/ [Accessed 12 October 2021])
Context example: Professional service companies

Some of the specific performance measures used in professional service companies include the
following:
• Fees per partner (or director)
• Chargeability percentage of staff – this could be calculated as the total hours billed to clients
divided by the total number of available hours
• Employee turnover – this could be calculated as the number of voluntary resignations and
terminations, divided by the total number of employees at the beginning of the period
• Average fee recovery per hour – this could be calculated as the total fee income divided by the
number of hours incurred
• Days of unbilled inventory
9 Non-financial performance measures

Section overview
Non-financial performance measures can often be as important as financial performance measures in

analysing financial statements.
9.1 Profit-seeking entities

Company performance can be measured in terms of volume growth as well as financial growth.
Some companies will therefore present non-financial information in the form of growth in the level of
sales in terms of units. An oil company might quote barrels of oil produced, a games console
company the units sold at launch. This is especially important if the price for the product is erratic,
such as oil or raw materials.
Market share is also an important benchmark of success within an industry. This can be used as a
benchmark of the success of an individual product line, or used as the basis to increase other types
of revenues.
Context example: Market shares

A web traffic analysis firm reported that in April 2012 Microsoft had a 50% share of the web browser
market (April 2011: 55%). In the same month Mozilla Firefox had a 19% share (down in the year from
22%), followed by Google’s Chrome at 17% (up from 12%) and Apple’s Safari at 9% (up from 7%).
(Source: Yung-Hui, L. (6 April 2012) Internet Explorer Fightback: Q&A with IE Lead of Microsoft Asia
Jonathan Wong. Forbes. [Online]. Available from:
www.forbes.com/sites/limyunghui/2012/04/06/internet-explorer-fightback-qa-with-ie-lead-of-
microsoft-asia-jonathan-wong/#71a778187263 [Accessed 1 October 2021])
Other interested parties can also make use of the financial statements. For example, there may be
information relating to the number of employees working at an entity. Such information can be used
to assess employment prospects, as a company that is increasing its number of staff probably has
greater appeal to prospective employees. Staff efficiency can also be calculated by calculating the
average revenue per employee.
HB2021

However, as with all performance measures, care must be taken to make sure the information means
what it says. For example, a company might outsource a significant number of its functions, such as
HR, IT, payroll after-sales service and so on. Thus it would appear to have a relatively low employee
base compared to a competitor who operated such functions in-house. Comparability would be
distorted.
9.2 Not for profit entities

Not all entities are profit-seeking. Schools, hospitals, charities and so on may all have objectives that
are not financially based. However, they may be assessed by interested parties and present
information alongside their financial statements.
Institution Performance measure
Hospital Speed at attending to patients, success rates for certain types of operation,
length of waiting lists
School Exam pass rates, attendance records of pupils, average class sizes
Charity Percentage of income spent on administrative expenses, speed of distribution

of income
10 Limitations of ratios and financial statement

analysis
Section overview
Below is a summary of the limitations of ratios and financial statement analysis.
Financial statement analysis is based on the information in financial statements so ratio analysis is
subject to the same limitations as the financial statements themselves.
(a) Ratios are not definitive measures. They provide clues to the financial statement analysis but
qualitative information is invariably required to prepare an informed analysis.
(b) Ratios calculated on the basis of published, and therefore incomplete, data are of limited use.
This limitation is particularly acute for those ratios which link statement of financial position and
income statement figures. A period-end statement of financial position may well not be at all
representative of the average financial position of the business throughout the period covered
by the income statement.
(c) Ratios use historical data, which may not be predictive, as it ignores future actions by
management and changes in the business environment.
(d) Ratios may be distorted by differences in accounting policies between entities and over time.
(e) Ratios are based on figures from the financial statements. If there is financial information that is
not captured within the financial statements (such as changes to the company reputation), then
this will be ignored.
(f) Comparisons between different types of business are difficult because of differing resource
structures and market characteristics. However, it may be possible to make indirect comparisons
between businesses in different sectors, by comparing each to its own sector averages.
(g) Window dressing and creative practices can have an adverse effect on the conclusions drawn
from the interpretation of financial information.
(h) Price changes can have a significant effect on time-based analysis across a number of years.
HB2021

Summary
Accounting ratios
Performance Liquidity Investor Solvency Cash flow Efficiency
Current Dividend Cash return

ROCE Gearing Net asset
ratio yield on capital
turnover
employed
Quick Dividend Interest
ROSF Cash from
ratio cover cover Inventory
ops/profit
turnover
from ops
GP% P/E ratio
Cash Receivables
interest collection
Operating cover period
NAV
cost %
Payables
Cash flow
payment
Operating per share
period
margin
Cash Non-current
dividend asset
cover analysis
Financial Statement Analysis
Non-financial
Economic Business Accounting Ethical Industry
performance
issues issues issues issues issues
measures
HB2021

1. How would an investor or potential investor use financial analysis? (Topic 1)
2. How is ROCE calculated and used? (Topic 2)
3. What are the drawbacks of the current ratio? (Topic 2)
4. What are the drawbacks of the gearing ratio? (Topic 2)
5. Can you analyse a statement of cash flows? (Topic 3)
2 Question practice
the next chapter.
Wild Swan Individual ratio calculation practice was provided within the chapter, so
the first self-test question has a full set of financial statements for you to
interpret. Comments are as important as calculations.
Brass Another comprehensive question, this time with notes to the financial
statements and prior year ratios calculated
Trendsetters This question requires calculations of cash flow ratios and interpretation of
a statement of cash flows.
attempt.
HB2021

Self-test questions
1 Wild Swan
The following extracts have been taken from the financial statements of Wild Swan Ltd, a
manufacturing company.
Statements of financial position as at 31 December
20X3 20X2
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Assets
Non-current assets
Current assets
Trade and other receivables 2,261 1,657
3,819 2,662
Ordinary share capital 522 354
Preference share capital (irredeemable –
8%) 150 150
Revaluation surplus 1,857 –
Equity 4,613 2,598
Borrowings 105 –
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 1,941 1,638
Taxation 183 62
Bank overdraft 1,442 1,183
3,566 2,883
HB2021

Statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for year ended 31 December
20X3 20X2
£’000 £’000
Revenue 24,267 21,958
Cost of sales (20,935) (19,262)
Net operating expenses (2,604) (2,027)
Profit from operations 728 669
Net finance cost payable (67) (56)
Taxation (203) (163)
Other comprehensive income for the year
Revaluation of property, plant and equipment 1,857 ––––––
Total comprehensive income for the year 2,315 450
Statements of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December (total columns)
20X3 20X2
£’000 £’000
Balance brought forward 2,598 2,400
Total comprehensive income for the year 2,315 450
Issue of ordinary shares 168 –
Final dividends on ordinary shares (300) (180)
Interim dividends on ordinary shares (156) (60)
Dividends on irredeemable preference shares (12) (12)
Balance carried forward 4,613 2,598
Statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December 20X3
£’000 £’000
Interest paid (67)
Tax paid (82)
Net cash from operating activities 1,059
Purchases of non-current assets (1,410)
Proceeds on sale of property, plant and equipment 670
Dividends paid (468)
HB2021

£’000 £’000
Proceeds from borrowings 105
Issue of shares 168
Net cash used in financing activities (195)
Net change in cash and cash equivalents 124
Cash and cash equivalents brought forward (3 – 1,183) (1,180)
Cash and cash equivalents carried forward (386 – 1,442) (1,056)
£’000
Depreciation charge 965
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment (14)
Finance cost 67
Increase in inventories (170)
Increase in trade and other receivables (604)
Increase in trade and other payables 303
Key ratios
20X3 20X2
Gross profit percentage 13.7% 12.3%
Net margin 3.0% 3.0%
Net asset turnover 4.2 times 5.8 times
Trade receivables collection period 34 days 28 days
Interest cover 10.9 11.9
Current ratio 1.1 0.9
Quick ratio 0.7 0.6
Cash flow ratios (20X3 only)
Cash return on capital 22.1%

Cash interest cover 18 times
Requirements
1.1 Calculate return on capital employed and gearing (net debt/equity) for both years.
1.2 Comment on the financial performance and position and on the statement of cash flows of
Wild Swan Ltd in the light of the above information.
HB2021

2 Reapson
Statement of changes in equity extract for the year ended 31 December 20X4
Revaluation Retained
surplus earnings
Attributable to the owners of Reapson plc £m £m
Balance brought forward – 800.00
Total comprehensive income for the year 350.00 222.90
Transfer between reserves (17.50) 17.50
Dividends on ordinary shares –––––– (81.75)
Balance carried forward 332.50 958.65
As well as revaluing property, plant and equipment during the year (incurring significant additional
depreciation charges) Reapson plc incurred £40 million of costs relating to the closure of a division.
Reapson plc has £272.5 million of 50p ordinary shares in issue. The market price per share is 586p.
Requirement
(1) Dividend per share = 15p
(2) Earnings per share = Profit before ordinary dividends ÷ No. of = 222.9 ÷ = 40.9p
ordinary shares in issue 545
(3) Dividend cover = EPS ÷ Dividend per share = 40.9 ÷ 15 = 2.7
(4) Dividend yield = Dividend per share ÷ Current market price = 15 ÷ 586 = 2.6%
per share
(5) Price/earnings ratio = Current market price per share ÷ EPS = 586 ÷ 40.9 = 14.3
Explain the above statistics from a financial journal referring to Reapson plc and relate them to the
above information.
3 Verona
Verona plc is a parent company. The Verona plc group includes two manufacturers of kitchen
appliances. One of these companies, Nice Ltd, serves the North of England and Scotland. The other
company, Sienna Ltd, serves the Midlands, Wales and Southern England. Each of the two companies
manufactures an identical range of products.
Verona plc has a quarterly reporting system. Each group member is required to submit an
abbreviated set of financial statements to head office. This must be accompanied by a set of ratios
specified by the board of Verona plc. All manufacturing companies, including Nice Ltd and Sienna
Ltd, are required to calculate the following ratios for each quarter:
• Return on capital employed
• Trade receivables collection period
• Trade payables payment period
• Inventory turnover (based on average inventories)
The financial statements for the three months (that is, 89 days) ended 30 April 20X3, submitted to the
parent company, were as shown below.
Statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the quarter ended
Nice Ltd Sienna Ltd

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Revenue 3,000 4,400
HB2021

Nice Ltd Sienna Ltd
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Opening inventories 455 684
Purchases 1,500 2,100
1,955 2,784
Closing inventories (539) (849)
Cost of materials 1,416 1,935

Wages and salaries 700 960
Depreciation 128 83
Cost of sales (2,244) (2,978)
Gross profit 756 1,422
Marketing 450 570
Administration 147 238
Loan interest 10 –
Overdraft interest ––––– 5
(607) (813)
Profit for the period 149 609
Statements of financial position at 30 April 20X3
Nice Ltd Sienna Ltd

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property 2,000 1,300
Plant and equipment 1,700 1,100
3,700 2,400
Current assets
Inventories 539 849
Cash and cash equivalents 71 –––––
2,032 2,580
Equity
Ordinary share capital 1,745 479
Revaluation surplus 700 –
Equity 4,494 3,788
HB2021

Nice Ltd Sienna Ltd
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Borrowings 800 –––––
5,294 3,788
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 438 1,062
Overdraft ––––– 130
438 1,192
The managing director of Nice Ltd feels that it is unfair to compare the two companies on the basis
of the figures shown above, even though they have been calculated in accordance with the group’s
standardised accounting policies. The reasons he puts forward are as follows.
• Verona plc is in the process of revaluing all land and buildings belonging to group members.
Nice Ltd’s properties were revalued up by £700,000 on 1 February 20X3 and this revaluation was
incorporated into the company’s financial statements. The valuers have not yet visited Sienna Ltd
and that company’s property is carried at cost less depreciation.
The Verona group depreciates property on a quarterly basis, calculated at a rate of 4% per
annum.
• Nice Ltd’s new production line costing £600,000 became available for use during the final week
of the period under review. The cost of purchase was borrowed from a bank and is included in the
figures for non-current borrowings.
The managing director of Nice Ltd believes the effect of the purchase of this machine should be
removed, as it happened so close to the period end.
The Verona group depreciates machinery at a rate of 25% of cost per annum.
• Nice Ltd supplied the Verona group’s hotel division with goods to the value of £300,000 in
October 20X2. This amount is still outstanding and has been included in Nice Ltd’s trade
receivables figure. Nice Ltd has been told that this balance will not be paid until the hotel division
has sufficient liquid funds.
• Nice Ltd purchased £400,000 of its materials, at normal trade prices, from a fellow member of the
Verona group. This supplier had liquidity problems and the group’s corporate treasurer ordered
Nice Ltd to pay for the goods as soon as they were delivered.
Requirements
3.1 Calculate the ratios required by the Verona group for both Nice Ltd and Sienna Ltd for the
quarter, using the figures in the financial statements submitted to the holding company.
3.2 Explain briefly which company’s ratio appears the stronger in each case.
3.3 Explain how the information in the notes above has affected Nice Ltd’s return on capital
employed, trade receivables collection period and trade payables payment period.
3.4 Explain how the calculation of the ratios should be adjusted to provide a fairer basis for
comparing Nice Ltd with Sienna Ltd.
4 Brass Ltd
You are the financial accountant of Brass Ltd, a company which operates a brewery and also owns
and operates a chain of hotels and public houses. Your managing director has obtained a copy of the
latest financial statements of Alliance Breweries Ltd, a competitor, and has gained the impression
that, although the two companies are of a similar overall size, Alliance’s performance is rather better
than that of Brass Ltd.
HB2021

He is also concerned about his company’s ability to repay a £20 million loan. The statements of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income and statements of financial position of the two companies
for the year to 31 December 20X2 and extracts from the notes are set out below.
Statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
Brass Ltd Alliance Breweries Ltd
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000

Revenue 157,930 143,100
Cost of sales (57,400) (56,500)
Gross profit 100,530 86,600
Distribution costs 27,565 21,502
Administrative expenses (Note 2) 53,720 29,975
(81,285) (51,477)
Profit from operations 19,245 35,123
Finance cost (2,000) –––––––
Profit before tax 17,245 35,123
Tax (5,690) (11,590)
Statements of financial position

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (Note 3) 71,253 69,570
Intangibles (Note 2) –––––– 3,930
71,253 73,500
Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents 5,102 ––––––
40,255 26,840
Total assets 111,508 100,340
Equity
Ordinary share capital 30,000 50,000
Revaluation surplus 15,253 –
62,028 82,080
Non-current liabilities (10% loan) 20,000 –
HB2021

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Current liabilities (Note 4) 29,480 18,260
Notes
1 Intangible assets – Alliance Breweries Ltd. Intangible assets include brand names and trademarks
purchased from Odlingtons Breweries Ltd in 20X0, which are being amortised over their useful
lives.
2 Administrative expenses including the following:

£’000 £’000
Directors’ remuneration 2,753 1,204
Advertising and promotion 10,361 2,662
3 The company’s freehold land and buildings were revalued during 20X0 by the directors (see
tables below).
4 Current liabilities
Alliance Breweries
Brass Ltd Ltd
£’000 £’000
Taxation 5,561 10,235
Bank overdraft –––––– 150
29,480 18,260
5 Non-current liabilities: The 10% loan is redeemable in June 20X4.

6 Both companies have similar accounting policies apart from depreciation where the policies are
as the tables below.
Land and building revaluation
Brass Ltd – Property, plant and equipment
Freehold
land and Motor Plant and
buildings vehicles machinery Total
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Cost or valuation 1 January 20X2 113,712 655 3,397 117,764
Additions 3,150 125 523 3,798
Cost or valuation 31 December 20X2 116,862 780 3,920 121,562
Provision for depreciation 1 January 20X2 (43,239) (272) (2,548) (46,059)
Charge for year (3,506) (156) (588) (4,250)
Provision for depreciation 31 December
20X2 (46,745) (428) (3,136) (50,309)
Carrying amount 31 December 20X2 70,117 352 784 71,253
HB2021

Alliance Breweries Ltd – Property, plant and equipment
Freehold
hotels and
Freehold public Motor Plant and
brewery houses vehicles machinery Total
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Cost 1 January 20X2 5,278 80,251 874 5,612 92,015
Additions –––––– 8,920 79 489 9,488
Cost 31 December 20X2 5,278 89,171 953 6,101 101,503
Provision for depreciation
1 January 20X2 (2,771) (23,291) (477) (3,838) (30,377)
Charge for year (96) (490) (238) (732) (1,556)
Provision for depreciation
31 December 20X2 (2,867) (23,781) (715) (4,570) (31,933)
Carrying amount
31 December 20X2 2,411 65,390 238 1,531 69,570
Accounting policies
Brass Ltd – Depreciation
Depreciation is provided by the company to recognise in profit or loss the cost of property, plant and
equipment on a straight-line basis over the anticipated life of the assets as follows.
%
Freehold buildings 4
Motor vehicles 20
Plant and equipment 10-33
Freehold land is not depreciated.

Leasehold property is amortised over the term of the lease.
Alliance Breweries Ltd – Depreciation
Property, plant and equipment are depreciated over their useful lives as follows.
%
Motor vehicles 25
Plant and equipment 10-25
Freehold land Nil
Freehold buildings 1
HB2021

The following ratios have been calculated for Brass Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X2.
(1) ROCE = Profit before interest and tax ÷ Capital employed = 19,245 ÷ (62,028 + 20,000 – 5,102)
= 25%
(2) Asset turnover = Revenue ÷ Capital employed = 157,930 ÷ (62,028 + 20,000 – 5,102) = 2.05
(3) Net profit margin = Profit before interest and tax ÷ Revenue = 19,245 ÷ 157,930 = 12.2%
(4) Gross profit percentage = Gross profit ÷ Revenue = 100,530 ÷ 157,930 = 63.7%
(5) Current ratio = Current assets ÷ Current liabilities = 40,255 ÷ 29,480 = 1.37
(6) Quick ratio = (Current assets – Inventories) ÷ Current liabilities = 33,135 ÷ 29,480 = 1.12
(7) Trade receivables collection period = Trade receivables ÷ Revenue = (28,033 ÷ 157,930) × 365 =
65 days
(8) Inventory turnover = Cost of sales ÷ Inventory = 57,400 ÷ 7,120 = 8.1
Requirements
4.1 Prepare a report to the managing director comparing the profitability and liquidity of Brass Ltd
with Alliance Breweries Ltd, using the ratios given for Brass Ltd and appropriate accounting
ratios for Alliance Breweries Ltd and suggest possible reasons for the differences between the
results of the two companies.
4.2 State briefly what adjustments would be necessary to the financial statements of the
companies for a more relevant comparison of their relative performance.
5 Caithness plc
Caithness plc, a parent company, requires sets of management information, including key ratios,
from all its subsidiaries. The most recent sets of information for two of its subsidiaries, Sutherland Ltd
and Argyll Ltd, two manufacturing companies, show the following.
Sutherland
Ltd Argyll Ltd
Return on capital employed (ROCE) 5% 13%
Gross profit percentage 30% 35%
Net margin 13% 10%
Current ratio 2.5:1 3:1
Quick ratio 1.8:1 2.7:1
Trade receivables collection period 60 days 45 days
Trade payables payment period 40 days 50 days
Inventory turnover 60 days 20 days
Gearing (debt/equity) 55% 100%
Interest cover 4 times 2 times
Cash return on capital employed (cash ROCE) 7% 8%
(1) Each company is treated as a mainly autonomous unit, although they share an accounting
function and Caithness plc does determine the dividend policy of the two subsidiaries.
Companies in the group must use the same accounting policies.
(2) It is group policy to record all assets at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment
losses. However, Sutherland Ltd has revalued its freehold property and included the results in
the recent management information above.
(3) Argyll Ltd has recently leased a specialised item of plant and machinery. In the management
information above the lease rentals have been recognised as an expense in profit or loss, but the
managing director has been told by the financial controller that this is not permitted under IFRS
HB2021

16, Leases, and the group directors are aware that the year-end published financial statements
will need to reflect the correct treatment.
(4) Sutherland Ltd and Argyll Ltd trade with other companies in the group. At the instigation of
Argyll Ltd, Sutherland Ltd has supplied one of the other companies in the group with goods with
a selling price of £200,000. These are no longer in group inventories but Sutherland Ltd has
been told that the goods will not be paid for until the liquidity problems of the other company
are resolved.
Requirements
5.1 Comment on the relative financial performance and position of Sutherland Ltd and Argyll Ltd
from the above information.
5.2 Identify what further information you would find useful to help with your commentary in (5.1),
providing reasons.
5.3 It transpires that the managing director of Argyll Ltd, who was previously head of the
accounting function for both companies, was aware, at the time of preparing the above
information, that Caithness plc is considering selling its stake in one of these companies and
that Caithness plc intends to use the information to help it in making its decision.
Comment on the information above in the light of this and set out any additional information
which would help you to form a view on the situation.
6 Trendsetters Ltd
Trendsetters Ltd is a long-established chain of provincial fashion boutiques, offering mid‑price
clothing to a target customer base of late teens/early twenties. However, over the past eighteen
months, the company appears to have lost its knack of spotting which trends from the catwalk shows
will succeed on the high street. As a result, the company has had to close a number of its stores just
before its year end of 31 December 20X2.
You have been provided with the following information for the years ended 31 December 20X1 and
20X2.
Statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December
20X2 20X1
£’000 £’000
Cash generated from operations 869 882
Interest paid (165) (102)
Tax paid (13) (49)
Net cash from operating activities 691 731
Dividends received – 55
Proceeds from sales of investments 32 –
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 1,609 12
Net cash from investing activities 1,641 67
Dividends paid – (110)
Borrowings taken out 500 100
Net cash from/(used in) financing activities 500 (10)
Net change in cash and cash equivalents 2,832 788
HB2021

20X2 20X1
£’000 £’000
Cash and cash equivalents brought forward 910 122
Cash and cash equivalents carried forward 3,742 910
20X2 20X1
£’000 £’000
Profit before tax 2,293 162
Investment income – (55)
Finance cost 165 102
Depreciation charge 262 369
Loss on disposal of investments 101 –
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment (1,502) (2)
Increase in inventories (709) (201)
Increase/decrease in trade and other receivables (468) 256
Increase in trade and other payables 727 251
Cash generated from operations 869 882
Extracts from the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and statement of
financial position for the same period were as follows.
20X2 20X1
£’000 £’000
Revenue 2,201 3,102
Equity
Ordinary share capital 100 100
7,152 4,872
Long-term liabilities
Borrowings 1,500 1,000
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 1,056 329
9,708 6,201
Requirements
6.1 Comment on the above information, calculating three cash flow ratios to help you in your
analysis.
6.2 You have now learnt that the financial controller of Trendsetters Ltd has been put under severe
pressure by his operational directors to improve the figures for the current year.
HB2021

Discuss how this pressure might have influenced both the above information and other areas
of the financial statements, and suggest what actions the financial controller should consider in
responding to these pressures.
this chapter.
HB2021


ROCE and ROSF
(1) Target return on capital (company or shareholder)
(2) Real interest rates
(3) Age of plant
(4) Leased/owned assets
(5) Upward revaluations of non-current assets, which increase capital employed, increase
depreciation charges and reduce ROCE/ROSF

(1) Change in sales prices
(2) Change in sales mix
(3) Change in purchase/production costs
(4) Inventory obsolescence

(1) Change in the amount of sales – investigate whether due to price or volume changes
(2) Non-recurring costs

Current and quick ratios
Low and high ratios could suggest the following:
• Liquidity problems (low ratio)
• Poor use of shareholder/company funds (high ratio)
Two possible factors to investigate would be as follows:
• Constituent components of ratio: inventory obsolescence (in case of current ratio), recoverability
of receivables (in case of both ratios)
• Manipulation – if company has positive cash balances and a ratio greater than 1:1, payment of
current liabilities such as trade payables just before the year end will improve ratio

Gearing
(1) Upward revaluations of non-current assets increase shareholders’ funds and decrease
gearing.
(2) Whether carrying amounts of non-current assets are likely to be volatile.
HB2021

Inventory turnover
(1) High inventory turnover rate – may be efficient but the risk of running out of inventory is
increased
(2) Low inventory turnover rate – inefficient use of resources and potential obsolescence
problems
Remember: the inventory turnover rate can be affected by seasonality. The year-end inventory
position may not reflect the average level of inventory.

(1) Bad debt/collection problems
(2) Change in nature of customer base (new customer is big but is a slow payer)
(3) Change in settlement terms
Remember: the year-end receivables may not be representative of the average over the year.

(1) High figure may indicate liquidity problems
(2) Potential appointment of receiver by aggrieved suppliers
Remember: the year-end payables may not be representative of the average over the year.

Calculations
(1) Return on capital employed (ROCE)
(Profit before interest and tax ÷ Capital employed) × = (340 ÷ (1,800 + 1,600 + 50 – 60)) × 100 =
100 10%
(2) Return on shareholders’ funds (ROSF)
Profit attributable to owners of a parent company ÷ = (140 ÷ (1,800 – 150)) × 100 = 8.5%
(Equity – non-controlling interest)
(3) Gross profit %
(GP ÷ Revenue) × 100 = (2,000 ÷ 6,000) × 100 = 33.33%
(4) Net profit margin
(Profit before interest and tax ÷ Revenue) × 100 = (340 ÷ 6,000) × 100 = 5.7%
(5) Net asset turnover
Revenue ÷ Capital employed = (6,000 ÷ (1,800 + 1,600 + 50 – 60)) = 1.8

times
(6) Proof of ROCE
ROCE = Net profit margin × Net asset turnover
HB2021

10% = 5.7% × 1.8 times
(7) Non-current asset turnover
Revenue ÷ Non-current assets = (6,000 ÷ 2,600) = 2.3 times
(8) Current ratio
Current assets ÷ Current liabilities = (1,600 ÷ 800) = 2 times
(9) Quick ratio
Current assets less inventories ÷ Current liabilities = ((1,600 – 600) ÷ 800) = 1.25 times
(10) Inventory turnover
Cost of sales ÷ Inventories = (4,000 ÷ 600) = 6.66 times
(11) Inventory days
(Inventories ÷ Cost of sales) × 365 = (600 ÷ 4,000) × 365 = 55 days
(12) Trade receivables collection period
(Trade receivables ÷ Revenue) × 365 = (900 ÷ 6,000) × 365 = 55 days
(13) Trade payables payment period
(Trade payables ÷ Cost of sales) × 365 = (750 ÷ 4,000) × 365 = 68 days
(14) Gearing
(Net debt ÷ Equity) × 100 = ((1,600 + 50 – 60) ÷ 1,800) × 100 =

88.3%
(15) Interest cover
(PBIT + Investment income) ÷ Interest payable = (340 + 5) ÷ 84 = 4.1 times

Calculation of cash flow ratios
(1) Cash return
Cash generated from operations = 12,970

Interest received =–
Dividends received = 20
12,990
(2) Cash return on capital employed
(Cash return (from above) ÷ Capital employed) × = (12,990 ÷ 28,900) × 100 = 44.9%
100
(3) Cash from operations/profit from operations
(Cash generated from operations ÷ Profit from = (12,970 ÷ 8,750) × 100 = 148%
operations) × 100
(4) Cash interest cover
Cash return ÷ Interest paid = 12,990 ÷ 360 = 36 times
(5) Cash flow per share
HB2021

Cash flow for ordinary shareholders ÷ Number of = (12,990 – 360 – 4,510) ÷ 15,000 = 54p
ordinary shares per share
(6) Cash dividend cover
Cash flow for ordinary shareholders ÷ Equity = (12,990 – 360 – 4,510) ÷ 4,500 = 1.8
dividends paid times

IASs/IFRS Standards
(1) IAS 7’s requirements as to disclosure within investing activities of the cash flows resulting
from disposals
(2) IAS 10’s requirements as to events occurring after the end of the reporting period,
whether they are adjusting events (that is, confirmation of the carrying amounts of
assets/liabilities) or non-adjusting events (for example, the disclosure of a decision to
restructure)
(3) IFRS 8’s requirements as to segment reporting – a disposal could well affect the segments
which are reportable
(4) IFRS 5’s requirements – a decision to restructure a major part of the business is likely to
lead to disclosures of both discontinued operations in the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income and non-current assets held for sale in the statement of
financial position
(5) IAS 36’s requirements as to impairment of assets – impairment will almost certainly result
from a restructuring decision
(6) IAS 37’s requirements as to provisions – liabilities which previously were only contingent
may well now require recognition and provisions for restructuring costs may need to be
recognised
The effect of business issues on financial reporting

Decisions to dispose of a group company or to close down a business activity within the group result
in restructurings. The decision to restructure a major part of the business will require consideration of
the above IASs/IFRS Standards.
Other standards such as IAS 2, Inventories may also be relevant. Any surplus or excess inventory may
require disposal at below cost. In addition, the presentation of these events may need the
consideration of IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements.

Asset revaluation
Situation A – Asset is not revalued
20X4 20X5 20X6 20X7

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Profit from operations
Includes depreciation of (6) (6) (6) –
Profit on disposal of property, plant and
equipment – – – 43
Total impact on reported profit for 20X4 to 20X7 = £25,000 = proceeds of £127,000 less carrying
amount of £102,000 at 1 January 20X4
HB2021

20X4 20X5 20X6 20X7

£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Carrying amount of asset at year end 96 90 84 –
(included in capital employed)
Situation B – Asset is revalued


CR Workbook

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

CR Workbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CR Workbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales

These materials are provided by BPP

These materials are provided by BPP

Glossary of terms 1597

ICAEW 2022 Contents iii

iv Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

ICAEW 2022 Introduction v

1 Corporate Reporting – Compliance

3 Audit and assurance 30 - 40

vi Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

Professional Level exams Permitted text

Audit and Assurance 

Financial Accounting and Reporting 

Business Strategy and Technology 

Business Planning No restrictions

Advanced Level exams Permitted text

Corporate Reporting No restrictions

Strategic Business Management No restrictions

Case Study No restrictions

The exams which have no restrictions include the following:

ICAEW 2022 Introduction vii

Syllabus, skills development and technical knowledge grids

Past exams and mark plans

Student support team

viii Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

ICAEW Business and Finance Professional (BFP)

ICAEW 2022 Introduction ix

Skill area Overall objective

Assimilating and using Understand a business or accounting situation, prioritise by

Concluding, Apply technical knowledge, skills and experience to support

x Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

ICAEW 2022 Introduction xi

xii Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

Data Analytics Software used in Corporate

ICAEW 2022 Introduction xiii

xiv Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

These materials are provided by BPP

Chapter study guidance

Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive

1 Using this Approach While the majority N/A

Your Corporate have just studied. This gives guidance

2 The importance of Approach This is unlikely to be IQ1: Management

2 Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

reporting and this Stop and think interaction of

3 The role and Approach There may be a N/A

4 Legal Approach Be prepared to N/A

5 International Approach Due to the N/A

ICAEW 2022 1: Introduction 3

6 Audit quality Approach Exam questions IQ2: Addystone

7 Laws and Approach Exam questions N/A

4 Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2022

1.1 The importance of integration

Professional skills focus: Structuring problems and solutions

1.2 Data analytics software

1.3 How this Workbook is structured

1.3.2 Ethics and governance

ICAEW 2022 1: Introduction 5

1.3.4 Financial reporting chapters